Skip to main content

Full text of "The Channel pilot. Pt. 1. 2nd- ed. [With] Suppl. [and] Admiralty notices to mariners. Pt.2. 4th ..."

See other formats 


Google 


This  is  a  digital  copy  of  a  book  that  was  preserved  for  generations  on  library  shelves  before  it  was  carefully  scanned  by  Google  as  part  of  a  project 

to  make  the  world's  books  discoverable  online. 

It  has  survived  long  enough  for  the  copyright  to  expire  and  the  book  to  enter  the  public  domain.  A  public  domain  book  is  one  that  was  never  subject 

to  copyright  or  whose  legal  copyright  term  has  expired.  Whether  a  book  is  in  the  public  domain  may  vary  country  to  country.  Public  domain  books 

are  our  gateways  to  the  past,  representing  a  wealth  of  history,  culture  and  knowledge  that's  often  difficult  to  discover. 

Marks,  notations  and  other  maiginalia  present  in  the  original  volume  will  appear  in  this  file  -  a  reminder  of  this  book's  long  journey  from  the 

publisher  to  a  library  and  finally  to  you. 

Usage  guidelines 

Google  is  proud  to  partner  with  libraries  to  digitize  public  domain  materials  and  make  them  widely  accessible.  Public  domain  books  belong  to  the 
public  and  we  are  merely  their  custodians.  Nevertheless,  this  work  is  expensive,  so  in  order  to  keep  providing  tliis  resource,  we  liave  taken  steps  to 
prevent  abuse  by  commercial  parties,  including  placing  technical  restrictions  on  automated  querying. 
We  also  ask  that  you: 

+  Make  non-commercial  use  of  the  files  We  designed  Google  Book  Search  for  use  by  individuals,  and  we  request  that  you  use  these  files  for 
personal,  non-commercial  purposes. 

+  Refrain  fivm  automated  querying  Do  not  send  automated  queries  of  any  sort  to  Google's  system:  If  you  are  conducting  research  on  machine 
translation,  optical  character  recognition  or  other  areas  where  access  to  a  large  amount  of  text  is  helpful,  please  contact  us.  We  encourage  the 
use  of  public  domain  materials  for  these  purposes  and  may  be  able  to  help. 

+  Maintain  attributionTht  GoogXt  "watermark"  you  see  on  each  file  is  essential  for  in  forming  people  about  this  project  and  helping  them  find 
additional  materials  through  Google  Book  Search.  Please  do  not  remove  it. 

+  Keep  it  legal  Whatever  your  use,  remember  that  you  are  responsible  for  ensuring  that  what  you  are  doing  is  legal.  Do  not  assume  that  just 
because  we  believe  a  book  is  in  the  public  domain  for  users  in  the  United  States,  that  the  work  is  also  in  the  public  domain  for  users  in  other 
countries.  Whether  a  book  is  still  in  copyright  varies  from  country  to  country,  and  we  can't  offer  guidance  on  whether  any  specific  use  of 
any  specific  book  is  allowed.  Please  do  not  assume  that  a  book's  appearance  in  Google  Book  Search  means  it  can  be  used  in  any  manner 
anywhere  in  the  world.  Copyright  infringement  liabili^  can  be  quite  severe. 

About  Google  Book  Search 

Google's  mission  is  to  organize  the  world's  information  and  to  make  it  universally  accessible  and  useful.   Google  Book  Search  helps  readers 
discover  the  world's  books  while  helping  authors  and  publishers  reach  new  audiences.  You  can  search  through  the  full  text  of  this  book  on  the  web 

at|http: //books  .google  .com/I 


% 


I 

I 


Un 


'bflMtial  Copy. 


CHANNEL  PILOT, 


COAST  OF  FRANCE, 
AND  THE   CHANNEL  ISLANDS. 


OniQINALLY   COMPILED  BY 

STAFF  CX>MHANDER  JOHN  W.  KING,  RN. 


FOURTH  EDITION. 


|S| 


rVBLIBnED   D 


LONDON: 

PBINTED  FOE  THE  UTDROGUAPniC  OFFICE,  ADHIEALTV, 

J.  D.  POTTER,  Agent  fob  the  sale  of  Admiralty  CnikRTS, 
81,  POULTRY,  AXD  11,  KING  STREET,  TOWER  lULL. 


Price  Five  Skillintjs. 


ADVERTISEMENT 


THE  FOURTH  EDITION. 


The  Channel  Pilot,  Part  2,  contains  Sailing  Directiona  for  the 
northern  coast  of  France,  and  the  Channel  Islands, 

The  directions  for  the  French  coast  are  compiled  from  the  Pilots 
Franjais,  edited  by  M.  Qivry  from  the  valuable  surveys  made  by 
M.  Beautemps-Beauprfi,  between  the  years  1 836  -43 ;  and  also  from 
t!ie  surveys  of  Captain  Martin  White,  R.N,,  in  the  years  1812-29. 

The  directions  for  the  Channel  Islands  were  prepared  by  Staff- 
Commander  John  Richards,  during  the  Admiralty  survey  of  those 
islands  in  the  years  1859-70. 

The  first  edition  of  this  work  was  compiled  by 

StafF-Commander  J.  W.  King,  in  1851). 

The  second  edition  was  revised  and  corrected  by  the  late  Staff- 
Commander  G.  F.  McDougall,  in  1870,  who  embodied  the  Sailing 
Directions  for  the  Channel  Islands  above  alluded  to. 

The  present  edition  has  been  i-eYised  and  corrected  by  Statf- 
Oommander  Hitchfield,  from  various  sources,  including  the  most 
recent  charts  and  other  works  published  by  the  French  Govern- 
ment. 

Seamen  are  invited  to  tiunsmit  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Admiralty 
notices  of  any  errors  or  omissions  they  may  detect  in  this  work, 
in  order  that  the  information  may  be  applied  for  the  benefit  of 
navigation. 

F.  J.  E. 


q  7049.      Wt.  SS58. 


G108SARI  OT  ffORDS  PECULIAR  TO  GUERNSEY. 


Amfroques  ....  (Amphea  roques),   colled  by  pilots    and    ftBbermen  the 

HumphH, 

Amont   Up  the  stream ;  Vent  d' Amont,  northorly,  of  eaeterly  wind. 

Aval Down  the  stream;  Vent  d'Aval,  southerly,  or  westerly 

wind. 
Bee .A  beak  ;   a  narrow  point  of  precipitous  laud  jutting  out 

into  the  sea,  as  Bee  du  Nez  at  Serk. 

Becqnet    A  diminutive  of  Bee. 

Boue A  smiken  rock  causing  an  overfall  or  breaker. 

Col A  neck  ;  a  ridge  connecting  a  rock  with  the  mainland  or 

one  rock  with  another,  as  Col  du  Homptol. 
Corbierc Headlands  bearing  this  name  occur  in  the  Channel  islands 

and  on  the  French  coast. 

Demies Rocks  that  uncover  at  half  tide. 

Fourquie Meaniug  forked  (a  rock  with  two  heads),  as  Fourquie  du 

Becquet. 

Gr^ve A  beach,  as  BeUe  Gr&ve. 

Gmne A  name  frequently  applied  to  rocks  which  are  rather  flat 

on  top,  as  Ijas  Gnmes  off  Jerbourg  point,  and  La  Grune 

off  north  point  of  Serk. 
Houmet,  or  This  word  is  used  to  describe  low  islets  lying  near  the 

Hommet.  shore,  and  eminences  on  the  hind  rising  in  the  midst  of 

marshes,   as  Houmet  Faradis,  Houmet  fort,  Houmet 

null. 
Koines Denotes  long  reef  of  rocks  linked  as  it  weie  together,  as 

Les  Boues  des  Kaines,  Les  Kaines  d' Amont. 

L'Etac A  name  applied  to  high  isolated  rocks,  as  L'Etac  do  Serk. 

Mouli&re A  rock  where  mussels  oro  found. 

Move,  or  A  steep  rocky  promontory ;  occasionally  a  detached  islet, 

Moie.  aa   Pointe  La  Moye  on  south  coast  of  Guernsey,  and 

Grande  and  Petite  Moie  nt  Serk. 
Piece A  name  applied  to  rocks  too  small  or  insignificant  to  have 

acquired  a  distinguishing  name. 
Plat (in  the  feminine  platte)  signifies  flat.     Thus  Platte  roque 

means  flat  rock. 

Pleinmout in  Jersey  Pigment — a  blufiT  headland. 

Tas  de  Foie. . .  .from  a  supposed  resemblance  of  rocks  so  named  to  a  stack 

of  peas. 


CONTENTS. 


•  HAPTEK  I. 


CAPE   lit   LA    HAGUE   T'J   CAPE    BAP.FLErR. 

C'aj^o 'icr  la  Ila^e ;  'Lii-.y-r-?    :*-  -  -  -  -  . 

Gour\*  Larlx>ar.     F- —•:♦;•.■  1:*  II  »L'"2--      -  -  -  -  . 

St.  Martin  lift v;  riaj.L'-rr-  >."!".     E  ".  iv  al::.»' •Lo      .1-:     • 

Oiii'jnville  liarbour ;  fi:i-:-c: ::■:-.- ;  ::  lo-  -  -  -  -  - 

Coa-:t  bet'.vef;!i  Omoiivi'.l*,-  ar.d  (JLvr^.-jr::  :  .i:.-  L  r..„v  :  :i  K?  - 
Cheroour:: road :  br<rak".rLk*or;  I:j:.:-.     >:.  A:.:  •.  '  ^v.    (.'L-.r'    ur«-  '  av. 

diroctioiis  for  Chc-rujurir  r  jU'i :  ::  Iv-  .  .  -  . 

Coa-ri  botwoeii  Chf-r)rj'i::i  a:ii  ca^'^o  Lot:.     Ij-.v  .ac:-  Liir'viur  - 
iJii\ti:  J-evi  li^ht;  nice     .--.--- 
Oj:i.-t  Ixrtwecii  cajjc  Levi  aiid  capo  Eurrlear.     M  'U  Ir^-e  bav.     Rou'.»arii 

cove.     OaiigCTH  ofr  tho  coa-jt  ------ 

Directions  for  coanting  between  capK*  Levi  an*!  cape  Barileur ;  lidcs  - 
Oiji^i  liarflenr;  light;  race        ------ 

'I'idal  htrearaH  bctwc-en  the  Ca.rquetH  and  capo  Barfleur 


1-5 

7-S 

11-12 
1-2-13 


33 

33-35 

3d 


CHAPTER  II. 
liAIK  DE  LA   skim:.— CAPE    IJARFLEUU    TO    CAPE    D'a>"TIFER. 


i Jay  of  1  he  Seine  --.--. 

liiuiUsuv  Uar]}*mr :  lii^htH;  directions;  tide^     -  .  - 

Moulard  and  Saire  point.'*  .  -  .  -  - 

St.  VaaHt  and  La  Jfougue  harlxjur.-;  ;  lightH  ;  directions  ;  tides 
St.  jVIurcoiif  ihlcB  ;  light.     St.  Marcouf  and  Ciirdonnet  banks  - 
Channel  Ijctween  St,  Marcouf  iHlen  and  coast ;  dircciiona;  tides 
Grand  Vay.     iHigny  and  Caren tan  harbours     -  -  - 

(JoaHt  from  the  entrance  to  the  Grand  Vay  to  Conrdeullc::} 
Grand  Camp.     I'ercee  point.     J'ort-cn-Bessin  ;  lights ;  tides - 
Arronianr'heH.     (Jalvados  flat  and  rock.    Directions     - 
Vcr  point  lighthouHo.     OmrHeullcs  harbour ;  light.     Directions 
liiver  Oriie.     Oyeslrohani  harbour;  lights;  directions  ;  tides 
Mouth  rif  tho  river  l)iv(;s  ;  directions;  tides     -  -  - 

Moutli  rif  tlio  river  Seine.     Jjeft  bank  of  the  river,     lliver  Touques 
I  lonMeur  harbour.  High t  bank  of  the  Mouth  of  the  Seine.   Harfleur 
harbour.     J jc  Havre.     Petite  and  Grande  liadcs ;  directions;  tides 
and  ti(hil  Higimls  -....-. 

(!apii  (111  la  Ileve;  lighlH  ...... 

Tidiil  HtrisuniH  in  the  bay  of  the  Seine    -  .  .  .  - 

J)inM'.tionH  and  ratoH  of  Iho  tidal  streams  between  capos  Barfleur  and 

Antifiw  ........ 


37 
37-39 

40 
40-46 
46-47 
47-48 
48-oI 

52 
53-54 
54-56 
56-58 
58-62 
62-64 


64-89 
90-91 
91-92 

93 


CHAPTER  III. 
CAPE  d'ANTIFEE  to   CAPE   GEIS-NEZ. 

Coafit  between  cspoa  Antifer  and  Gris-Nez  .... 
Cape  Antifer.  Etretat.  Iport .--.-. 
r&amp  harbour ;  lights ;  diroctiooH  ;  tides  .... 
Aspect  of  coaat  between  Fecamp  and  St.  Vnlory.en.caus 
St.  Talery-en-canx  harbour  ;  lights;  directions;  tides 
Sotteville  point.  St.  Michel  race.  Ailly  light;  rocks;  tidea.  Rideu 
de.  Dieppe  .-..-... 
Dieppe  harbour  ;  baains ;  lights  ;  directions ;  tides,  and  tidal  signals 
Coast  between  Dieppe  and  TriSport  ..... 
Heaume,  Mnron,  Hanmes,  and  Granges  rocke.  Bidens  and  ancho- 
rage off  the  coast  between  Dieppe  and  Trdport  ... 
Tr^port  harbour :  light ;  dji-ections ;  tidea  .... 
Coast  between  Trfiportand  Cayoni,     Cai-cus;  lights  -  .  . 

Mouth  of  river  Somme,     Honrdel  harbour.     St.  VaJety-snr-Somme 
harbour.     Somme  canal.    Abbeville.    Le  Crotoy    -  -  . 

Somme  banks ;  channel  between  BasistiTe  de  Baas  bank  and  coast,  and 

between  Basanre  de  Baas  and  Tergoyer  banks 
Mouth  of  the  riyer  Authie  i  Haut-Banc  point  light ;  directions 
Mouth  of  the  river  Canche ;  lights  ;   directions  ;   tides 
Caution  to  be  naed  between  Cayeux  and  month  of  the  Canche 
Coaab  between  the  mouth  of  the  Canche  and  Boulogne 
Cape  Alprech  ;  light,    Portei    .  .  -  - 

Boulogne  harbour  and  road.    Directions  ;  anchorage.    Tidea  and  tidal 

Coast  from  Boulogne  to  cape  Gria-Ifez-  .  -  .  . 

Vimerenx  and  Ambletense  harbonra.    Ambleteuse  road ;  tides 
Cape  Gris-ITez  ;  light.    Faa  de  Calaia;  directions       ... 
Tidal  atreams  between  capes  Antifer  and  Gris.^ez ;  caution  • 
Direction  and  I'ate  of  the  tidal  streams  from  cope  Antifer  to  cape 
Gris-Kez  ........ 

CHAPTER  IV. 
CAPE   GRIS-NEZ  TO  DUNKBRQUE. 

Aspect  of  the  coast  in  the  vicinity  of  cape  Gris-Nez 

Dragera  between  cape  Gris.ITez  and  Calais 

Calais  road  and  harbour ;  lights  ;  directions ;  tides 

Banks  off  north  coast  of  France.    Dnnkerqae  banks  - 

Banks  noithof  Dnnkerque  banks 

Aspect  of  coast  between  Calais  and  Gravelincs.    Waldo  light 

GravelincB  harbour;  lights;  directional  tides 

Aspect  of  coast  between  Gravelines  and  Dnnkerque 

Channels  into  Dunkerqne  road ;  directions 

Dnnkerque  road ;  tides  .... 

Dunkerque  harbonr ;  lighta ;  directions  ;  tides 

Aspect  of  coast  between  Dunkerquc  and  the  frontier  of  Belgium 

Fecnli&rity  of  tides  on  the  north  coast  of  Franco  ;  cantion     - 

Tidal  streams  in  the  southern  part  of  the  North  Sea    - 


97-100 
100-101 
102-104 


104-lOC 
105-109 
109-110 

110-111 
111-115 

115-116 


123-125 

125-126 
127-129 


131 

132-137 
137-138 

138-140 
140-141 

141-142 

143 


-  14H45 

-  146-146 

-  146-151 

-  151-159 

-  159-162 


-  163-164 
■  164-166 

-  166-167 


%nn  coyTZNTs. 


r-HAPTER  V. 

General  rem 'irk.-:  en  ::.e  li'.wl-  r,:  '}  .-:t:.-at  i- 1  ZsTt-sj  :  rrfr-::::-  -  i?--ls5 

Prevailing -w::.']":  a:. d  TT«i::,e.- :  ?.-:.:  :.^v  :  :.  1. r.     -.:.:.     -  -  1>4-Is5 

Gnerr.roy  i-;ar.'i :  ::'..  i'^:':7  y.n-.  .._•:.>.   :-:.._or»j-.  ,   :  .1  -.ir-:  -  l??-l>i: 

Ti'ial  stroam.- ;  'iai-^-rr- ;  Grei:'.4L.-;  -  .  .  -  1  >>-lv«^ 

Directions  for  ar^roath::.;:  .S:.  I'e:- :;  .::  -  -  .  I->-l"V' 

St.  .Simp?:  jn  and  B'^rd-raiiLj:  .:::.-=.  LA:.  .7.-->    ^y  i:.  i  .^ri-  :•: 

Havre       -.---.--  C>*-2!1 

Rocks  be:wc-er-  Or.»rid  Ilivr-r  &:.  1  G:  ir.  1    R .  .-■:  t.  . !-:  :  ir.  ..  .:.ije  :!  rl 

Cob'j,  Vikzon.  lie.--!:"-"-.-.  K  .?  .  :  lYv.  I. .-.  i:.!  :'-.:::    -r:  ".-;•-  -  •_.2-:2.'.- 

Herm  and  Jethoi.  ir!ir:dt ;  :L^;  Arn:r>j-:-:=.  i;.  -  -  •  l.'^-.7 

Haye-:  chani.f:'.  ar.d  I'u---:  d^j  1'4  P::j-r»:-        -  -  -  -  1.7-1. \* 

Little  Rns-jel  channel ;  dii'ic-.io:.-  .  ,  .  .  -  1  •''-111 

Groat  Russel  chanr.el ;  direotior.-  .  .  .  -  .  l:1j--214 

Serk  inland;  islets  and  rocks  r  ■:•.  1  Ser'-:.     B"  *:.!.  i-  1  r:  1<    -  -  i:l4>-2i'3 

Baleiiic  bav ;  Gr^.-vc  L'l  V. '.'.'::  .'i:.  .'-■:  .:;;■:  .  :  2^'  K.  -:  l-.  .:  >:rk    -  i:17-i!10 

Banquette  bav;  La  Grar.de  G:*'-ve  -  -  -  -  •  -l.r*--22'} 

Tidal  stream  round  Serk  ---...  :2i:l--2-23 

CHAPTER  VL 

Caequets  islets  and  rocks ;  anchorage;  ligli: ;  cauiio:-  -  -  --4-226 

Ortac  channel ;  Ortac  rock        -----  226-229 

Casquet  banks ;  anchorage  on  in  fine  weather  ...  -  229-230 

Tidal  stream  round  the  Casquets  ...  -  -  231 

Bnrhou  island  and  outlying  rocks  -----  232-234 

The  Swinge  channel,  dangers  in  ;  tides     -  .  -  -  234-236 

Aldemey  ieland  ;  Braye  harbour  ;  dangers  ;  lights ;  old  Braye  and 

Craby  harbours  --.-..-  236-240 

Rocks  and  dangers  round  Aldemey  -  -  -  .  24«>-246 

Directions  for  approaching  Aldemey,  by  day  and  night ;  caution  247-250 
Tidal  stream  round  Aldemey  -----  250-253 

Race  of  Aldemey,  dangers  in ;  caution      -  -  .  -  253-254 

Bearings  and  distances       ------  254 

Banc  de  la  Scholo ;  directions ;  oyster  ground      -  -  -  255-256 

CHAPTER  VII. 

Jersey ;  pilots ;  outlying  dangers  on  approaching  from  the  northward  257-260 
Appearance  of  Jersey  from  the  westward  -  -  -  -  260-261 

St.  Oucn  bay ;  anchorage.    Frouquie  pass  -  -  -  261-263 

Corbi5ro  rock,  and  dangers  off       -  -  -  -  -  264-265 

St.  Brolado  bay ;  dangers  in  and  near  it    -  -  -  -  265-266 

Directions  for  rounding  the  Corbidre,  and  approaching  St.  Bre- 

ladc  bay ;  anchorage  in  and  off  it.  Portelot  bay  and  ledge  -  267-268 
St.  Aubin  bay.  St.  Holier  and  St.  Aubin  harbours ;  lights  -  268-270 
Dangers  off  and  in  St.  Auinn  bay,  and  at  the  entrance  of  Little 

rood,  St.  Holier  .  - 270-275 


CONTENTS. 


JX 


Jersey : 

Anoliorage  in  the  Little  road  and  in  St.  Anbln  bay  •  -  275-276 

Fassa^  into  St.  Anbin  bay  ... 

St.  Helier  Littio  road,  passages  into  and  directions  for    -  -  • 

General  directions.     Coast  eastward  of  St,  Helior,  Tiolet  bank. 

Dangers  off  the  coast  E.  of  St.  Holier     - 
Icho  bank,  Violet  and  Anquette  channels ;  dangers  and  directions  2 
Grouvillo  bay.     Gorey  harbour  ;  dangers  off  Banc  dn  Chateau ; 

anchorage  and  directions  .  .  -  -  .  291-299 

Anneport  and  St.  Catherine's  bays ;  anchorage  ;  directions        -  299-302 
Conpe  point.     Fliquet  iMiy  ;  telegraphic  cable.     Bound  bay  and 

harbour 302-3M 

Bouley  bay.    Belle  Hougue  point  .....  304-305 
Giffard  and  Bonne  Nnit  bays.     Shamrockbank.     St.  John  bay    -  305 

Grfive  de  tecq  bay ;   ancliornge  in  and  dangers  off.      Grive  an 

Lacon,  anchorage :  caution  .  .  -  .  .  306-307 

Borehoa  rocks.    Banc  de  L'Ecrcvierc ;  anchorage  south  of  Maitre  ile  307-309 

Dronillearocks  and  dangers.    Lo  Rn an  channel.     Passe  L'Btoc         -310-312 

Jersey,  bearings  and  distances  -..---  313 

General  directions  for  approaching  Jersey  by  night.      Light  on 

Eoohea  Donvres    ..--..-  313-316 
Tidal  stream  round  Jersey -  318-318 

CHAPTER  VIII. 

CAPE  DB  LA  HAGUE  TO  GBiNVILLE,  INCLUDING  ILES  CHAUSET 
AND  PLATEAU  DES  MINQUIEES. 

Coast  near  cape  de  la  Hagno  and  Nez-de-Jobourg.    Hnquets  do  Jobonrg  319-320 
Anchorage  along  the  coast.    VauviUebay  ;  directions 
Dinette  harbour  I  lights;  direotions;  tideg     ... 
Capo  Flamanville.     Sciotot  bay.    Cape  Carteret ;  light 
Surtainville  banks.     Trois-Gmnes  ledge  -  -  - 

Taillepied  and  File's  banks         .  -  -  .  . 

Aspect  of  coast  between  cape  PlamanTille  and  Granville 
Carteret  harbour.    Port  Bail ;  directions  ... 

Snrville,  St.  Germain-snr-ay,  and  Geffoase  harbonrs     - 
Chans^e-dos-Bcoufs ;  Jourdau  rock  and  Bceuf  patch ;  directions 
Hari£  ledge         ...--.. 
ItlinquieTB  rocks.  Sauvage  roclcs.  Sonard  groap.   Caux.des-Hinquicrs 
Directions  when  approaching  the  Uinquiers.    Ardentes  banks 
Chaueey  islets;  light  j  dangers 
Chaueey  sound ;  directions 
Fort  Ifarie ;  direotions  -  .  - 

Anchorages  tunongst  the  Chausey  group ;  tides 
St.  Germain  bay.  Senequet  and  Nattes  rocks 
BlainTille  harbonr.  Agon  and  Ronquet  rocks  - 
JUguerille  harbour ;  light  ... 

Oatheue  banks  and  reef.    Shamrock  knoll.    Admiralty  bank 
Q  7049. 


332-334 

d3i-3S5 
336-340 
340-342 
342-347 
347-349 
350 
350-854 
354-355 
355-356 
856-357 


X  COXTEXTS. 

Dangers  off  Granville     .------  358-:360 

Granville  harlwur ;  lights  --..--  3tK)-361 

Diroctiuns  from  cape  dc  la  Hague  to  Granville  through  Cotentin 

passage  ---.-,-.  361-364 

Directions  for  entering  and  leaving  Granville  harlK)nr  -  -  o6«>-3G6 

Directions  from  Granville  to  cape  de  la  Hague  through  Cotentin 

passage  --------  367-36S 

CHAPTER  IX. 


369 
369-372 
373-375 
375-376 
376-378 

378 
37S-380 
381-383 
384-385 
386-396 


-  397-399 


GRANVILLE   TO   CAPE    FREHEL. 

Champeaux  point.     Mont.  St.  Michel.     Tombelaine  islet 
Mont  St.  Michel  bay.     Light.     Banc  dc  Chatry.     Le  Herpin 
Cancaleroad;  anchorages;  directions-  -  -  - 

Aspect  of  coast  between  Grouin  point  and  cape  Frehcl 
Dangers  off  Grouin  point  -  -  -  .  . 

Roteneuf  harbour  ------ 

Outlying  dangers  between  Grouin  point  and  cape  Frehel 

St.  Malo  harbour ;  lights  and  road       -  .  -  - 

Dinard  bay  and  anchorage.     Solidor  bay  and  road 

Channels  leading  into  the  river  Ranee ;  directions 

Directions  from  Cape  de  la  Hague  to  St.  Malo  through  Deroute,  Grande 

Ruet,  and  Cotentin  passages ;  and  from  the  westward 
Directions  from  St.  Malo  through  Cotentin  and  Deroute  passages ; 

and  to  the  westward.    Tides  at  Port  St.  Malo  -  -  -  399-400 

Ehbiens  isle.    St.  Briac  harbour  -----  401-402 

Larguenon  river.     St.  Cast  bay  -----  402-403 

Frenay  bay.    Sevign^s  bay        ------  403-404 

CHAPTER  X. 

CAPE   FREHEL  TO   LES   HEUX  LIGHTHOUSE. 

Cape  Frehel  light.    Amas-du-Cap        -----  405 

St.  Brieuc  bay     --------  405-406 

Roches-Douvres,  Bamouic,  and  Horaine  ledges  -  -  -406-408 

6chaud^B,  Men-Marc'h,  and  Ringue-Bras  ledges         -  -  -  408-409 

Directions  for  passing  between  the  Bamouic  and  Horaine  ledges ;  tides  409 

St.  Quay  rocks ;  light.    Dangers  in  St.  Brieue  bay     -  -  -  409-413 

Bouche  d'Erqui.    Erqui  road ;  channels  ;  tides  -  -  -  414-417 

Port  Dahouet ;  directions ;  tides  -----  417-419 

Yfl5niac  bay ;  Port  du  Legu^ ;  directions         -  -  -  -  419 

Roselier  point ;  Binic  harbour  ;  light ;  directions ;  tides        -  -  420-422 

Port  Portrieux.    Portrieux  road ;  tides  -  -  -  -  423-425 

Paimpol  bay ;  anchorages ;  directions ;  tides  -  -  -  -  426-428 

Brdhat  isle ;  pilots  ;  Br^hat  road  -----  428-429 

Directions  for  approaching  Br^hat  road ;  tides  -  -  -  430-434 

Pontrieux  river ;  directions  ;  tideg        -----  435-438 

Les  Hdaux  lighthouse    -  -  -  -  -  -  -         438 


CHAPTER  XL 

LBS  HEAUX  LIGHTHOUSE  TO  l'ILE  d'OTTESSANT. 

Sept  islea  ;  light.    Triagoa  lodge;  light  ....  «9-«0 

Tr^gnier riyer ;  passages;  lights;  anchoTage;  directionBi  tides       -  440-442 
Port  Blanc.    Perros  bay ;  directions.    Plateau  de  Meloine    -  -  442-4W 

Moriaix  river ;  lights;  directiouH;  tides.    Baa  isle;  light     -  -  444-447 

Channel  between  Bus  isle  and  the  coast ;  directions    .  -  -  447-448 

Rosooff  harboor ;  directions  :  tides.     lie  do  Siee  ...  448-449 

Grfeve  de  Gonlveii  bay.    Port  Ponstusval ;  directions;  tides  -  -  449-450 

Viergeisle;  light.    Corr^jou  bay  ;  directions-  ...  450—431 

Abervrao'h  river ;  lights  ;  directions  ;  tides    ....  452-453 
Porsal  and  Fonr  rocks ;  caution  .....  453-454 

Ouessant  or  TJshant  isle ;  light ;  tides  -  ...  -  455-45? 

Channels  botireen  Ouessant  and  the  coast ;  directions  -  -  457-45C 


•O  TO  A 


Bxamxz  OP 


jkMmmgmn  to  bb  xqvax  to  loo 


TBJfc  O] 


a  TO  JX&SZT, 

PIS  TKS  sovvDnros 
TO  i.o'vr  VTATBjfc  sqvnr 


OCTXAXi   SPSZVCMI 


t 


THE   CHANNEL  PILOT. 

PART  11. 


COAST  OF  FRANCE,  AND  THE  CHANNEL 
ISLANDS. 


CHAPTER  I. 
CAPE  DE  LA  HAGUE  TO  CAPE  BAUFLEUR. 


VARIATION  IN  1882. 
Cape  de  la  Hague        -        -        -     19°    0'  W. 
Cape  Burfleur      -         -         -         -     18"  30'  W. 


GENERAL  OBSERVATIONS.— Haiing  in  the  Chaunel 
Pilot,  Fart  I.,  described  the  southern  coast  of  Englnnd,  from  the  Lands 
End  to  the  Xorth  Foreland,  it  is  proposed  in  Part  II.,  to  give  a  descrip- 
tion of  the  northern  coast  of  France,  beginning  at  cape  de  la  Hague  (the 
prominent  headland  where  the  channel  nniTows),  an<l  going  thence  east- 
irard  to  Dunkerque ;  then  to  describe  the  Channel  islands  ;  and  returning 
to  cape  de  la  H^^e,  to  proceed  thence  westward  to  the  isle  of  Oues^ant  or 
tTshant.  Aa  in  this  navigation,  which  requires  great  care,  it  is  important 
that  the  mariner  bo  acquainted  witli  the  gi^neral  »:ystem  of  winds  in  the 
channel,  a  brief  notice  of  them  is  prefixed,  with  the  caution  that  the  wind 
has  considerable  effect  upon  the  strength  and  direction  of  tho  tidal  streams, 
as  well  aa  upon  the  range  of  the  tides.  A  notice  of  the  signals  estabhshed 
for  indicating  the  depth  of  water  at  the  entrance  of  the  French  ports,  and 
of  the  system,  adopted  for  the  colours  of  Imojs  and  beacons,  is  also  prc- 
lixed. 

WINDS. — The  prevailing  winds  in  tho  Channel  are  those  from  the 
vestem  quarter,  which  generally  blow  during  two-thirds  of  the  year. 
Gales  from  the  westward  ore  felt  in  all  seasons,  but  from  November  to 
March  inclusive  they  are  most  frequent,  and  generally  last  three  or  four 
days.  Of  these  a  S.W,  gale  is  considered  the  moat  dangerous  in  the 
QTOM.  i 


coAvr  :r  f?. vycE.  v^ir.  i. 


Ul    -  'i  *.--  •       —-if-       *•    ]     A.-  — -•    —»-»     .      '  *     -    T     •'-  «-  "•.^*     •"«  .^-r*^*-  ■••     to  N^   W 

Lc':r-.  n  \'ATv  *-\  w  :.  r'.e  Fr- r.  -.  *'  -.-:  f  ::.-  -■  -thwarl  or'  car^  Gris- 
N«-z.  I :*  • :.-  -^i :.  i  r- ::-i.* -.  T ■« - :  i -.  - ! : :.- r  ■- f  tlv  !a: i* r  j •: : n r «,  an- i  :: j  focw- 
rii'-l-r:!:-:-.  t}.-  -^-atr.-r  ■  --■':-•.-*  r.-  :  ^■::  -:.:  .1  i  i:  '«■:£  rurd  t.^  t:.«»  xW. 
thf:  I***!  ^eair.'-r  :-  -i-.s  lo  r-:!-rr..  I:  hi*  I—  r.  j-r.^rallv  resiArke-i  :iisx 
tho*'-  ral'^'^'fci'H  ''■.•'r:r  d'lrr.z  ^:"*''2  v":->*  ar»»  more  v:o!rnt  aziii  last  io:ij!^r 
th;»n  ih'-«  "t^hi'-h  tfik-r  T-Ii*-*:  ::::ij  :>*•:  r.onr^.ar.'l  tbit  it :«  .M  tiw  begrin^-p.g 
of  the  firxA  itreara  thai  thrv  a4:'ju;r'?  iheir  ::tv<i:*esi  sireii'nb. 

Gal*-«  from  Xorth  to  X.E.  are  also  v;...Ieat.  >ut  th-v  u^ oaUt  last  oalv  from 

«  «  ■ 

24  to  30  hour:-.  ftn<l  thc:  wii:<i  <!•>>  no:  *h:ft  &«  it  *hj^  with  tho«e  from  the 
westwanl.  Th^:^;  wind*  caaa*  a  h»-aTy  =ea  on  the  j!'^!  stream,  and  dming 
their  continuance  th-  Frtnch  '^oa?:  i*  covf-rf-d  with  a  white  foe.  which  has 
the  npfjKirance  of  gmoke.  Thi^  U  aI*o  th*.-  ca?«?  witli  all  easterly  winds, 
which  are  eometimes  of  Ion?  rln ration,  aa«l  blow  with  great  force. 

WiniLs  from  S.E.,  accoini*anie«l  by  rain,  are  often  violent,  and  abnost 
alway.s  turn  into  ;^:ilc'ir,  during  which  the  wind  in  the  squalls  flies  qnicklj 
round  to  N.E.,  and  ftomcrtime.-?  to  North  and  X.W.,  making  it  dangeroos 
to  be  upon  the  Fi-cnch  coast  when  these  unexpected  changes  take  place. 
If  it  remain  fixed  in  either  of  the  latter  point.?,  and  moilerates  in  force, 
the  weather  is  soon  rc-establi<5hed,  but  should  it  return  to  the  S.E.  or 
South,  the  bad  weatlier  will  continue. 

Moderate  winds  from  N.W.  to  N.E.  are  those  which  bring  fine  weather. 
In  the  summer  the  N.p].  wind  blows  more  particularly  in  the  afternoon. 
In  the  morning  there  is  a  light  breeze  from  the  S.E.,  but  towards  noon  it 
changes  to  N.E.,  ami  freshens;  towards  the  evening  it  decreases,  and 
at  ni^ht  it  is  calm,  and  the  cool  air  condenses  the  vapours.  When  this 
condensation  does  not  take  place,  it  is  a  sign  of  a  change  of  wind. 

Cnlms  arc  of  rare  occun*ence,  and  do  not  last  long,  except  in  summer. 
When  they  occur  during  winter,  it  is  regarded  as  the  precursor  of  bad 
weatlier.  The  most  certain  indications  of  bad  weather  are,  swell  in  the 
ofHng  during  a  calm,  and  surf  on  the  coast. 

The  greatest  quantity  of  hail  falls  during  the  months  of  March  and 
April.  ThcHo  hail  showers  have  the  inconvenience  of  causing  sudden 
chnngos  in  the  direction  of  the  wind,  and  are  consequently  dangerous  to 
tchscIh  navigating  near  the  shore. 

FOGS  ftn^  frequent  in  all  parts  of  the  Channel.  They  form,  both  on  the 
Knglinli  iind  French  coasts,  in  the  valleys  and  on  the  low  marshy  lands, 
ivh(Mic()  the  winds  drive  them  out  to  sea.  In  summer,  the  beat  and 
tho  Bli^htoHt  Imn^xo  is  Hufllcicnt  to  dissipate  them,  and  it  is  only  in  the 
morning  that  thoy  hide  tho  laud ;  but  tho  moist  haze  driven  in  by  westerly 


WINDS. — FOGS,— WBATHEB  8IGNAXS. 


winds  from  the  sea,  is  more  teDactous,  and  only  yields  to  strong  wiuds. 
This  haze  is  always  accompanied  hy  a  short  sea,  and  it  frequently  turns  to 
rain  and  bringa  bad  weather. 

In  the  eastern  part  of  the  Ctiannel,  it  is  rare  for  the  land  to  be  com- 
pletely  free  from  vapoui-s,  unlasa  previous  to  strong  N.E.  winds,  when 
it  may  be  distinctly  seen  from  a  great  distance.  The  winds  from  the 
western  quarter,  as  has  been  remarked,  bi-ing  thick  clouds,  vhich  fre- 
quently hide  the  land  ;  and  when  it  blows  strong  from  the  eastward,  the 
vapours  which  cover  the  Imid  are  dense  in  proportion  as  the  wind  is  strong 
and  lasting. 

BliragO  is  frequent  during  the  season  of  fine  weathei*  on  the  French 
coast,  from  the  river  Somme  to  cape  Alprech,  It  is  considered  as  an 
indication  of  fine  weather,  when  it  only  (ends  to  enlarge  the  apparent  size 
of  objects ;  but  at  all  seasons  when  it  distorts  them,  so  aa  to  render  them 
difficult  of  recognition,  it  is  considered  a  sign  of  rain  or  of  strong  easterly 

WE  &.THER.  SIGNALS.— The  foUovring  local  weather  signals 
have  been  adopted  at  the  principal  ports  and  shipping  places  on  the  coasts 
of  France,  in  addition  to  the  established  storm  warnings  :— 
1.  A.  flag,  of  any  colour,  indicates — Weather  doubtful,  barometer  inclined 
to  fall, 
et)  „        Appearance    of    bad  weather,  heavy 
sea,  barometer  Mling, 
„         Appearance  of  better  weather,  baro- 
meter rising. 
„         The  entrnnce  of  the  port  has  become 

dangerous,  be  careful. 
„         The  lifeboat  is  coming  out. 


2.  A  short  pendant  (Con 

3.  A  pendant 

4.  A  ball  above  Comet 

5.  A  ball  below  Comet 


TIDAL  SIGNALS. — The  following  system  of  tidal  signals  was 
issued  in  August  1855  by  the  French  minister  of  commerce  and  public 
works,  and  is  now  used  at  most  of  the  ports  on  the  coast  of  France,  The 
signals  are  made  by  balls  and  flags  hoisted  on  a  mast,  on  which  a  yard  is 
crossed.    The  balls  are  black. 

A  ball  hoisted  at  the  intersection  of  the  mast  and  yard  will  denote  a 
depth  of  10  feet  English,  in  the  channel  between  the  jetties. 

Each  ball  hoisted  on  the  mast  beneath  the  first  will  denote  an  additional 
depth  of  3i  feet. 

Each  ball  hoisted  above  the  first  will  denote  an  additional  depth  of  6^ 


Each  ball  hoisted  at ,  the  left  yard-arm  (looking  from  seaward)  will 
deuoteim  additional  10  inches. 

a2 


r  _" 


4         CAPE  DE  LA  UAGUE  TO  CAPE  BARFLEUR.   T^njLV.  i. 

Each   Imll  hoistc-tl   at    ilio    liL'ht  vAr«l-ann   will  denote    an  additional 
1  foot  8  inchest. 

To  indicato  the  state  of  the  ti<lt*  a  whiti*  flag  with  a  black  croits  is  used  ; 
ab»o  a  bhu'k  pondant.  The-^*  arc  hoi«:to  1  at  the  mast  head  immediately 
there  are  0.\  fc'ct  in  the  chnnncl,  nml  lowere^l  when  tho  water  ha<  receded 
to  the  Nunc  \vvo\.  During  the  llood  the  pemlant  will  he  nitovethe  flag;  at 
high  watiT  and  during  th^  top  of  th<»  tidi*  the  pendant  will  be  loweretl ; 
and  during  th«*  ebh  the  jienilant  will  bi*  U^low  thi*  flag.  When  the  state  of 
the  5«ca  is  siifh  as  to  prt.*vent  ve>."'cl3  from  entering  the  port,  the  above 
signals  willbi*  replace  I  by  a  reil  Aug  hoi-t«*l  nt  the  mai^t  head. 


•> 


Table  of  Tii»jll  Signals. 


smoiN. 


lorr-fiM. 


tarr.t  in. 


eSFT.OlM. 


C3FT10IN. 


£4rT.tlN. 


ffftFT.CM.. 


RISING    TIDE.  HIGH  WATER.  FALLINQ  IIQl^ 

Danger  SignElS. — The  following  danger  signnls  have  been  estab- 
liblied  on  the  ccnsts  in  the  event  of  the  entrraico  of  a  harbour  being  ob- 
structcd^by  a  stranded  vessel  or  by  any  other  accident,  viz.  : — 

By  day,  a  red  flag  will  be  hoisted  on  one  of  the  jetties. 

By  night,  a  red  light  will  be  exhibited,  and  in  these  harbours  where  a 
light  is  c«tablished  a  second  light  will  be  exhibited,  and  both  will  show  a 
red  light. 

BUOYS  and  BEACONS.— A  uniform  system  of  colouring  all 
buoys  and  beacons  is  observed  on  the  French  coast.     In  entering  a  port 


CHA'-i]  CAPE  DB  L\  HAGUE.  5 

buojsand  beacons  painted  red  must  be  left  to  Btorboord,  and  those  painted 
black  to  port.  The  beacoas  below  the  le\el  of  high  water,  and  all  warping 
biioja  are  pninted  white.  The  small  rocky  heads  in  the  frequented  channels 
are  painted  in  the  same  manner  as  the  beacons,  when  they  have  a  coo- 
spicuoua  surface. 

Every  buoy  or  beacon  bears  in  fall  length,  or  abbreviated  characters, 
the  name  of  the  shoal  or  rock  which  it  is  meant  to  distinguish,  and  also  its 
number,  showing  its  numerical  order  in  the  same  channel.  These  Dum< 
bers  commeneo  from  seaward ;  the  even  numbers  on  the  red  buoys  and 
the  odd  numbers  on  the  black  buoys. 

The  letters  and  numbers  are  painted  white  on  the  most  conspicnoua 
parts  of  tho  buoys,  and  from  ten  to  twelve  inches  in  length.  The  masts  of 
the  beacons  which  do  not  present  sufficient  surface  are  surmounted  for  this 
purpose  by  a  amaU  board.  All  the  jetty  heads  and  turrets  are  painted 
above  the  half  tide  level,  and  on  the  former  a  scale  of  metres  is  marked 
commencing  from  the  same  level, 

CAPE  de  la  HAGUE,  tho  north-western  extreme  of  Nor- 
mandy, is  low  and  sandy,  but  the  coast  at  the  distance  of  3  miles  to  the 
S.S.W,  suddenly  rises,  about  320  feet  above  the  levet  of  the  sea,  into  a 
high  bluff  promontory  called  Nei-de-Jobourg,  nhich  may  be  seen  in  clear 
weather  from  the  distance  of  24  miles.  On  tho  top  of  the  promontory  is 
a  small  hummock,  the  slopes  of  which  extend  to  the  almost  perpendicular 
cliffs  on  its  western  side.* 

The  most  conspicuous  objects  in  the  vicinity  of  cape  de  la  Hague  are, 
the  lighthouse  on  the  summit  of  the  Gros  du  Raz  rock,  bearing  W.  }  S. 
half  a  mile  from  tlie  cape  ;  the  tower  of  Jobourg  church,  standing  at  the 
distance  of  1|  miles  East  from  the  Nez;  the  village  of  Auderville,  the 
church  of  which  has  a  small  tower,  not  very  visible ;  and  the  church  of 
St.  Germain  de  Vaux,  with  its  square  tower  surmounted  by  a  spire. 

LIGHT. — The  lighthouse  on  Gros  du  Raz,  the  largest  rock  in  the 
vicinity  of  cape  de  la  Hague,  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  154  feet  above 
high  water  a  fixed  white  light,  which  possesses  the  advantage  of  being 
rarely  obscured  by  the  fogs  from  the  land,  and  as  seldom  by  the  mists 
from  the  sea.  The  light  is  of  the  first  order,  and  visible  in  clear 
weather  from  a  distance  of  18  miles. 

DANGERS  off  CAPE  de  la  HAGUE.— The  coast  around 
cape  de  la  Hague,  fi-om  1^  miles  southward  of  the  Gros  du  Kaz  rock  to  the 
Houffet  rocks,  is  skirted  by  many  dangers,  which  are  rendered  formidable 
by  the  gi-eat  violence  of  the  tides  in  their  vicinity.      The  local  pilot,  under 

•  Set  Ailminilty  Charts: — British  islands  to  MeditertaoMn  Se«,  Ko.  1;  scale, 
n -I  O'OS  of  an  inch;  English  chaanel.  No.  1,598  j  »cale,  n  —  0 '  I  of  au  inch  ;  Chaunel 
iElanils,  aorlbem  portion,  aod  adjacent  coaat  of  France,  Ko.  1,669a;  acile,  waO'S  of 
•nincb. 


6  CJlPE  I>E  LA  HAOrE  TO  CAPE  BAEFLXTTE.       Iieap.i. 


favourblik;  C!rcam->taz)^^.  "w:ll  Krai^riri*-*  tat»-  Ti**^!?  airier  15  f««t 
draaght,  alon^r  the  rfiore  wiih:::  tL*  rxk*  «-LIc?i  a---r  det*:b«d  from  tb* 
beach,  for  dojiDg  tine  weather  the  ::i^  ar«  V^s  rxpid  acd  the  sea 
less  Jirfturbc-d  thc-iT:  than  in  th-s-  w.'iir-  cJ-ar;!:?!  cf  :Le  AHomer  Race. 
No  vc-sstl,  however,  i'hoTiId  ati*-nip  this  j  a-<iZ^  w::!:-:::  a::  exy^erienceil 
pilot. 

The  princifial  danger?  in  the  vi-.-initT  of  iL^-  oa:-r  arc.  the  Greniqcet, 
Diotret,  Foraine,  Xoire^.  Grun«.  Beochae.  Ronde.  ^cJ  :Le  Hc»affei  rocks. 

Le  QreniQliet,  the  tumniit  of  wLIcL  :=  S  f-rr:  a>-:'ve  high -water 
springs,  h'es  3  cables  from  the  shore,  abrea?:  C-I^-r.fH-r.  and  S.S.W.  a 
mile  from  the  lighthouae  on  the  Gros  tlu  Raz 

Le  Diotret  li€:ar3  N.y.E.  3J  caMes  from  tL-  Grt-niquet.  ami  its 
summit,  which  is  26 i  feet  above  low  water,  is  covered  at  high  i^quinc^ctial 
tides. 

La  ForEine,  the  westernmost  rock  in  the  vicinity  of  the  cape,  situated 
nearly  a  mile  from  the  .shore,  and  W.  ^  S.  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from 
the  lighthouse  on  the  Gros  du  Raz,  is  of  a  conical  form,  uncovers 
14  fec;t  at  the  lowesft  tides,  and  is  considered  a  half-tide  rock,  and  a 
valuable  mark,  Ixrcause  as  soon  as  it  is  covered  the  stream  of  flood  begins 
to  be  felt  in  the  Race  of  Aldemey,  and  the  stream  of  ebb  directly  it  un- 
covers ;  this  rock  is,  however,  extremely  dangerous  to  vessels  passing  in 
its  vicinity,  on  account  of  the  streams  setting  directly  over  it.  The 
8teci)le  of  Les  Pieux  church,  standing  on  the  high  land  to  the  eastward 
of  capo  Flamanville,  in  one  w^ith  the  large  rock  forming  the  extremity 
of  the  Nez-(le-Jobourg,  leads  3  cables  westward  of  the  Foraine;  but 
this  church  will  not  be  visible  except  in  very  clear  weather. 

Buoy. — An  automatic  whistle  buoy,  painted  red,  is  moored  with 
Foraine  rock  bearing  S.  1°  E.  distant  about  3  cables,  and  cape  de  la 
Baguo  lighthouse  S.  81^  £.  distant  about  8  cables. 

Les  Noires. — The  space  to  the  noilh-east  of  the  Foraine,  between 
it  and  tlui  Oros  du  Rnz,  is  filled  uj)  with  shoals  and  the  rocks  called  the 
Noircfl,  i1m»  liighost  of  whicli  lies  midway  ])etween  the  lighthouse  and  the 
ForniiH',  and  inicovers  21  Teot.  A  nnnken  rock  named  the  Gnlet,  with 
only  <>iH»  fool,  water,  lies  N.N.E.  }  E.  half  a  mile  from  the  lighthouse. 

Let  Grande  Gruno,  «>•  dangerous  rocky  reef,  on  the  shoalest  part 
of  whi(^h  ihero  ani  only  2  feet  water,  lies  N.E.  J  N.  about  three-quarters 
of  a  milti  IVoni  the  lighthouse,  and  half  a  mile  from  the  shore.  The 
H^hlhous(«  in  linewith  t  lie  pitch  of  lli(»  cliff  of  the  Nez-dc-Jobourg  leads 
a  (|uarU>r  of  u  milu  Wi'Htward  of  the  reef. 

La  Petite  Orune. — '!'!»«  t'«ef,  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  length 
N.K.  and  8.W.  ium  uu  it4  middle  two  rocky  heads  which  uncover  about  a 


CKir.i.]        DANGEH8  OFF   CAPE   DE   LA   HAGUE. QOUEY.        7 

foot.  It  liea  E.S.E.  SJ  cables  from  the  Grande  Grane,  anfl  about  half  a 
mile  from  the  ahore,  and  the  sea  breaks  with  great  furj  during  a  weolber 
tide,  both  upon  it  and  the  Grande  Grune.  The  north-eaetern  extreme  of 
the  Hoiilfet  ixxsks  in  one  with  tlie  Esqiiina  rock  (ttiis  rock  lies  near  the 
eastern  shore  of  St  Martin  bay,  and  is  the  largest  and  highest  rock  of 
all  those  which  lie  near  the  coast  between  cape  de  la  Hague  and  Omon- 
ville)  bearing  S.E.  ^  E.  will  lead  a  cable  to  the  northward  of  the  northern 
head. 

La  BeCChUd,  a  large  rock,  lying  about  4  cables  from  the  shore  and 
E.  ^  N.  1^  miles.from  the  lighthouse,  is  the  northernmost  o£  all  the  rocks 
which  do  not  cover  between  the  lighthouse  and  St.  Martin  bay,  and  its 
summit  rises  4  feet  above  high-water  springs.  At  low  water  a  number  of 
rocky  heads  appear  in  a  circuit  of  a  quarter  of  a  mile  arouud  the  Becchue; 
the  westernmost  of  these  heads,  which  uncovers  4  feet  and  is  named  the 
Porchet,  lies  about  midway  between  the  Becchue  and  Petit  Grune. 

La  ROQde,  lyiug  N.E.  |  K.  2  cables  from  the  Becchue,  uncovers 
5  ieet  at  the  lowest  tides,  and  is  in  the  shape  of  an  oven.  At  4  cables 
S.E.  by  E.  of  the  Becchue  lo  the  outer  extreme  of  the  Houfiet  rooks,  upon 
which  there  are  several  heads  that  are  uncovered  3  or  4  feet  above  high- 
water  springs. 

GOXTBY.— This  grounding  place,  on  a  beach  of  pebbles  and  gravel 
at  the  head  of  a  small  elbow  iu  the  shore,  lies  about  half  a  mile  to  the 
southward  of  the  lighthouse  on  the  Gros  du  Eaa,  and  is  shellered  frora  the 
land  winds  from  N.N.W.,  round  North  and  East,  to  S.S.W.  It  was  also 
protected  from  the  great  sw^ll  which  sometimes  rolls  in  from  the  west- 
ward by  a  short  stone  jetty  and  the  rocks  upon  which  it  was  built ;  but 
it  is  now  abandoned  in  consequence  of  a  greater  part  of  the  jetty  having 
been  thrown  down,  and  there  being  at  times  a  heavy  surf  behind  what 
remains  standing. 

The  entrance  to  this  harbour  bears  E.  ^  N.  8  cables  from  Diotret  rock, 
and  is  formed  between  two  large  rocks  joining  the  shore ;  the  rock  on  the 
south  side,  named  Jet  d'Araont,  is  awash  at  high-water  neaps,  and  tlint  on 
the  north  side.  Jet  d'Aval,  is  about  2  feet  above  that  level.  The  har- 
bour dries  11  or  12  feet  above  the  lowest  tides,  and  there  are  10  to  15 
feet  water  in  it  at  high-water  springs,  and  6  to  7  feet  at  neaps,  but  it  is 
inaccessible  during  strong  N.W.  or  S.W.  winds,  on  account  of  the  heavy 
sea ;  and  in  every  case,  since  it  can  only  bo  entered  at  the  time  of  high 
water  on  the  shore,  that  is  when  the  sti-eam  is  at  its  greatest  speed  in  the 
Race  of  Alderney,  the  approach  to  it  must  always  bo  difficult  and  often 
dangerous,  and  do  vessel  should  attempt  it  without  a  local  pilot. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  aud  change,  in  Goury  harbour,  at 
'7h.  6m. ;  springs  rise  22  feet,  neaps  17^  feet. 


S  CAPE  DE  L\  HAGUE  TO  CAPE  BARFLEUR.  [chap.  i. 

A  Life  BO&t  ^a  station  cd  at  Guar  v. 

Directions. — Wl^'n  Approaching;  caiw*  de  la  Ila^^ue  from  iho  west- 
^k:  :.\i  -houl'l  U-  Ijoriif:  in  niiiul  that  tlie  north-east frn  stream  of  tide, 
;>:■  c  ■*•:.  ih*r  \$(zr\(A  of  half  ihiod  and  half  t-hb  on  the  shore,  s<»ts  very 
•-.;.■;.:?.;/  round  tho  ca|ie.  Fhinmnvillc  church  towiT,  however,  seen 
^.z^:f:\\y  biif  way  in  thci  interval  whieh  so  pa  rales  the  Nez-dc-»7ohourg  and 
'>*fi';  Flar/ianv ille,  S.  ^  K.,  will  leaii  a  suiHeient  distance  to  thi*  westward 
'A  *}.'•  ^aj/C;  -o  as  to  have  nothing  to  fear  from  being  dmwn  by  the  stream, 
v.h'?L';r  f^fffA  or  ebb,  anionf^st  th<»  r<M:ks  in  its  vicinity. 

V«:--oU  cofnin;^  from  the  eastward,  and  coasting  a  litth;  too  near  the 
-:.',:';  f/:tw-f:ii  Cherbourg  an<l  cajM?  de  la  Hague,  are  liable  to  be  drawn  into 
i\.f:  Ustf-f'.  of  Aldftrney  if  they  do  not  keep  7  or  8  miles  from  the  coast  when 
u,  the  we-.t'.vard  of  Cherlxjurg.  The  Race  may  also  l)e  avoided  by  keeping 
o.'i';  or  2  mii'is  north  of  the  two  windmills  on  Alderney  swn  in  line, 
V:c:&iiV;  it  i-i  nearly  in  that  direction  that  the  separation  of  the  streams 
of  r;bb,  that  which  runs  towards  the  Race,  and  that  which  iwsses  north  of 
A  Memory,  takes  place.  In  ch*ar  weather,  these  windmills  may  be  seen 
frorn  the  ma^theivl  from  abreast  of  St.  Martin  bay.  If  overtaken  by  a  calm 
tli*;y  •tliould  anchor  if  within  7  or  8  miles  of  the  land.  The  pilots 
recommend  a  pcisition  in  about  20  fathoms  water,  a  little  to  the  northward 
or  north-eastward  of  the  Mermistin  rock,  which  lies  about  a  mile  from  the 
shore,  l>etween  Omonvillo  and  Querquevillc  point. 

FOSSE  de  la  HAGUE. — The  socmdings  around  cape  de  la 
Hague  arc  very  irregular,  from  whence  proceed  the  violent  eddies  in  its 
vicinity,  which  are  caused  by  the  great  mass  of  water  flowing  towards 
the  cape  during  the  north-eastern  stream.  At  3  miles  W.  by  N.  \  N. 
from  the  lighthouse  on  the  Gros  du  Raz,  commences  the  southern  part 
of  the  Deep,  named  the  Fosse  de  la  Hague,  which  from  thence  trends 
to  the  north-eastward,  and  terminates  at  3^  miles  from  the  coast  on  the 
meridian  of  the  eastern  part  of  St.  Martin  bay.  The  soundings  throughout 
the  whole  extent  of  the  deep  are  from  36  to  58  fathoms,  and  there  are 
30  fathoms  around  it. 

ANSE  de  St.  MARTIN.— This  bay  lies  2  miles  to  the  eastward 
of  cape  (Je  la  Hague,  and  is  bounded  on  the  eastern  side  by  the  high 
rocks  of  Martiauroc  and  Esquina,  and  on  the  western  by  the  Herbeuses. 
It  is  open  to  winds  from  N.W.  to  N.E.,  which  throw  in  a  heavy  sea 
when  they  blow  with  any  strength,  but  it  is  well  sheltered  from  all 
other  winds,  especially  those  from  the  opposite  quarter. 

The  western  point  of  the  bay  is  the  termination  of  a  projecting  range  of 
liills,  on  the  top  of  which  stands  the  church  of  St.  Germain  de  Vaux,  and 
may  be  easily  known  by  the  Herbeuses  rocks,  which  form  a  sort  of  pro- 


CHAp.i.J        FOSSE   DE   LA    HAGUE. — ANSE  DE  ST.  MARTIN.        9 

longation  of  it,  as  well  as  by  a  fort  commanding  the  approach  to  a  tolerably 
good  aachorage  to  the  E.S.E.  and  S.Ci.  of  the  point)  where  small  craft  End 
shelter  from  winds  between  W.N.  W.,  louod  westerly,  and  S.S.E..  but  where 
they  mould  be  greatly  exposed  if  it  should  blow  strong  from  the  novth- 
eoBtward.  The  Herbeuses  are  large  rocks  rising  from  30  to  40  feet  above 
high-water  springs,  and  are  joined  to  the  western  point  of  Ihe  bay  by  rocks 
which  uncover,  and  which  extend  N.N.E.  3  cables  in  a  direct  line  from  that 
point.  The  ground  is  foul  around  the  Hcrbouses,  and  shoal  patches  with 
only  one  to  3  feet  water  on  them,  lie  N"^.,  E.S.E.,  and  S.S.E.  1 J  cables 
from  their  northern  extremity.  A  red  buoy  is  moored  on  the  N.E.  extreme 
of  these  patches. 

The  western  shore  of  the  bay  is  precipitous,  and  bordered  by  rocks  which 
uncover  at  low  water ;  but  in  its  soulh-west  angle,  at  the  entrance  of  the 
valley  of  St.  Germain  de  Vaux,  there  is  a  small  beach  of  pebbles  and  gravel 
which  covers  at  the  first  half-hour*s  flood.  A  similar  beach  forms  the  head 
of  the  bay,  and  halfway  up  the  hill,  behind  the  beach,  stands  the  church 
and  village  of  St.  Martin.  The  eastern  shore  of  the  bay  is  low,  but  the 
adjoining  land  rises  gently  to  the  top  of  a  spur  of  hilb  i-unning  out  towards 
Jardeheu  point,  and  separating  the  rivulet  which  passes  St.  Martin,  from 
that  which  empties  itself  into  Omonville  harbour. 

From  the  middle  of  the  beach  at  the  head  of  St.  Martin  bay  to  Jardeheu 
point  the  shore  is  bordered  by  rocks  which  dry  at  low  water  ;  oiitside  these 
rocks  are  others  lying  in  separate  groups,  the  most  remarkable  of  which 
are  the  Martiauroc  and  the  Esquina ;  the  former  is  covered  only  at  great 
springs,  hut  the  latter  is  one  6f  the  largest  rocks  in  the  bay,  and  has  two 
heads  very  near  each  other,  one  of  which  rises  30  feet  above  the  highest 
tides.  Several  ledgea,  some  of  which  uncover,  extend  half  a  mile  to  the 
north-weat  of  the  Martiauroc,  and  form  a  sort  of  causeway  termiDated  by  a 
rock  with  only  3  feet  water  on  it,  called  the  PannentiferQ,  which  is  marked 
by  &  block  buoy  on  its  western  edge.  The  opening  into  the  bay  is  about 
three-quartersof  a  mile  wide  between  the  Herbeuses  and  the  Jlartiauroc, 
but  the  only  channel  by  which  vessels  can  enter,  and  get  up  to  the  anchorage 
under  the  fort  without  a  pilot,  is  barely  a  quarter  of  a  mile  wide,  and  is 
formed  between  the  above  3-feet  rock  and  the  ledges  lying  to  the  eastward 
of  the  Herbeuses. 

Basse  du  Houffet  and  Le  Miart.— From  the  Houffft  rocks 

to  the  western  point  of  St.  Martin  bay  the  coast  is  bordered  by  irregular 
rocks  which  uncover  at  low  water,  and  off"  it  there  are  many  shallow  patches. 
The  Basse  da  Houffet,  the  farthest  out,  is  dangerous  only  on  account  of 
the  high  sea  on  it  occasioned  by  the  eddies  ;  it  lies  E,  by  S.  ^  S.  6  cables 
from  the  Houffet  rocks,  and  has  5^  fathoms  water  on  it.  The  Fliart,  lying 
H.N.W.  2  cables  from  the  Herbeuses,  is  the  principal  rock  of  those  which 


10       CAPE  DE  LA  HAGUE  TO  CAPE  BARFLEUB.    [<?^'-  '• 

uncover  along  this  part  of  the  coast ;  its  summit  dr}'nig  1 1  feet  above  the 
level  of  tlie  lowest  tides.  Shoal  {mtches  extend  £.  by  N.  3  cables  from 
the  Fliart,  and  upon  their  outer  extremity  there  are  only  6  feet  water.  A 
red  bnov  is  moore<l  on  the  outer  extivme. 

POINTE  JARDEHEU  is  a  small  round  hill  covered  with  her- 
bage, and  separateil  from  the  hills  inland  by  a  narrow  isthmus  which  covers 
at  high  tides  ;  upon  its  summit  there  is  a  mass  of  large  rocks,  and  it  may 
be  easily  recognised  when  bearing  S.E.  or  N.W.  The  iwint  is  surrounded 
by  rocks  and  shoals,  which  extend  G  cables  to  tho  northward.  The  largest 
and  most  remarkable  of  theae  rocks,  named  the  C<mjuc,  lies  East  3  cables 
from  the  poiut,  and  rises  3  feet  al>ove  the  highest  tides.  A  rocky  le<lge 
called  the  Ilures  de  la  Coque,  extends  N.N.E.  3  cables  from  the  Co<]ue> 
where  the  depth  is  only  b\  fathoms,  and  causes  violent  eddies,  which  small 
vessels  must  be  careful  to  avoid.  It  may  be  im[)ortant  to  know  that  when 
one  of  the  rocks  on  this  ledge  covers  (it  lies  N.N.E.  ^  E.  a  cable  from  the 
Coque,  and  uncovers  10  feet  at  the  lowest  tides)  which  is  near  the  time  of 
half  flood  on  the  shorci  the  flood  stream  is  running  as  far  out  as  2^  or  3 
miles  from  the  shore  between  Omouville  and  Cherbourg. 

Basse  Brefort,  on  which  there  is  only  a  depth  of  2\  feet,  lies  N.  by 
E.  i  E.  half  a  mile  from  Jardeheu  point,  and  the  same  distance  N.N.W.  | 
W.  from  the  Coque.  The  marks  for  this  shoal,  which  is  dangerous  to 
coasters,  are,  the  summit  of  Esquiua  rock,  in  line  with  a  village  situated 
half-way  up  the  hill  to  the  westward  of  Jobourg  church  tower,  and  the 
Coque  entirely  concealing  a  large  rock  named  the  Foireuse,  which  lies 
S.S.E.  J  E.  from  it. 

TIDAL  STREAMS.— The  sudden  change  in  the  direction  of  the 
flood  or  north-east  stream  after  doubling  cape  de  la  Hague  occasions  to  the 
north-east  and  east  of  that  cape  a  great  eddy,  which  extends  even  beyond 
Omonville,  and  runs  along  the  coast,  following  a  direction  opposed  to 
the  stream  in  the  offing,  for  nearly  9  hours,  that  is,  from  2J  hours  before, 
until  6^  hours  after  the  time  of  high  water  on  the  shore. 

This  eddy  begins  to  form  at  the  oi^ening  of  St.  jNIartin  bay  about  half 
an  hour  after  the  flood  stream  has  commenced  in  Aldemey  Race,  and  its 
speed  increases  with  that  stream ;  but  as  it  nms  to  the  N.W.,  and  when 
near  the  Becchue  rock,  it  comes  in  almost  direct  opposition  to  the  tide 
flowing  East  and  E.S.E.  out  of  the  Race,  causing  a  cross  sea,  which  is 
violent  in  proportion  to  the  rate  of  the  flowing  tide.  Towards  the  time  of 
high  water  in  St.  Mai'tiji  bay,  that  is,  a  quarter  of  an  hour  after  that  at 
Goury,  or  a  quarter  of  an  hour  before  that  at  Omonnlle,  when  the  stream 
is  at  its  greatest  strength,  this  confused  sea  extends  nearly  2J  miles  from 
tho  shore,  to  the  line  on  which  Jobourg  cliurch-tower  is  seen  in  one  with 


CHAP.  I.]  POINTB    JARDEHBU. — POET  D'OMONTILLE,  11 

the  Herbetises  rocks.  The  Tiolence  of  the  sea  decreasee  in  proportion  to 
the  speed  of  the  flood  stream,  and  totally  ends  about  a  quarter  of  an  hour 
before  the  ebb  stream  b^ns  in  the  Race. 

A  similar  cross  sea  takes  place  around  Jardeheu  point  from  the  meeting 
of  the  eddy  which  runs  to  the  north-west  along,  the  shore  at  Omonville, 
with  the  stream  of  flood  which  comes  &om  the  W.N.W.  between  the 
Esquina  rock  and  the  Br^fort  shoal.  This  confused  sea  is  aiso  violent,  and 
extends  into  the  ofBng  as  far  as  the  line  on  which  Jalletin  guard-house  is 
seen  in  one  with  the  lighthoase  on  the  Gros  du  Baz.  It  commences  at  the 
same  time  as  that  which  takes  place  near  the  Becchue,  but  it  ends  15  or 
20  minates  before  high  water  at  Omonville ;  as  soon  as  it  ceases  the 
counter  stream  or  eddy  runs  round  Jardeheu  point,  and  extends  without 
interruption  from  OmouTille  to  the  Houfiet  rocks. 

La  FOIBEUSEf  a  rock  lying  midway  between  the  Coque  rock  and 
Omonville  harbour,  is  close  to  the  outer  edge  of  a  rocky  flat  which  runs 

2  cables  off  the  intermediate  low  shore,  and  its  rounded  summit  is  2  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  highest  tides.  A  rocky  ledge  extends  half  a  mile  to 
the  eastward  of  the  Foireuse,  and  its  eastern  extremity,  on  which  there  are 
only  4  fathoms  water,  rises  suddenly  from  soundings  of  from  17  to  23 
fathoms,  and  lies  in  the  direction  of  the  church-tower  at  Digulleville  seen 
a  quarter  of  a  point  open  to  the  southward  of  the  church-tower  at  Omon- 
ville, bearing  W.  by  S.  f  S.  The  highest  rocks  on  this  ledge  uncover  8  feet 
at  low  water. 

POHT  D'OMONVILLEJ— This  small  harbour  lies  in  a  slight  in- 
dentation of  the  coast  one  mile  to  the  south-eastward  of  Jardeheu  point, 
and  is  well  sheltered  from  N.N.W.,  round  westerly,  to  S.E. ;  but  with 
strong  winds  between  North  and  East  it  is  only  completely  sheltered  whilst 
the  rocky  ledge  which  joins  the  land  on  its  northern  side  remains  un- 
covered. At  neap  tides  the  highest  rocks  of  this  ledge  break  the  waves, 
and  the  swell  only  enters  the  harbour ;  but  during  high  springs,  when  all 
the  rocks  are  covered,  there  is  much  sea  in  it.  The  position  of  the 
harbour  may  be  easily  recognised  from  a  distance  by  the  village  of 
Omonville,  which  is  situated  at  the  bottom  of  a  valley,  the  slopes  of  which 
are  covered  with  cultivation  ;  by  a  large  fort  erect-ed  on  the  eastern  point  of 
the  indentation  j  by  an  old  semaphore  called  the  Vigte,  on  the  top  of  the 
hiil,  at  the  foot  of  which  stands  the  ibrt  ;  and  by  n  large  mass  of  i-ock  on 
the  summit  of  the  hill  boundjog  the  valley  to  the  north. 

The  harbour  la  only  2  cables  long  from  east  to  west,  and  barely  a  cable 
wide  in  the  space  where  vessels  may  anchor  between  the  rocks.  The  depths 
increase  gradually  from  the  beach  on  its  western  shore  to  7  fathoms  at 
the  entrance.     In  the  deepest  part  of  the  harbour  the  soundings  vary  from 


12  CAPE  DE  LA  HAGUE  TO  CAPE  BARFLEUR.  [chap.  i. 

5  to  7  fathoms  over  a  rocky  bottom,  in  tlie  cavities  of  which  are  deposits 
of  stiff  yellow  mud,  where  anchors  hold  firmly ;  but  as  these  deposits  are 
of  small  extent,  it  is  probable  that  the  anchors  take  hold  in  the  fissures  of 
the  rocks. 

A  Life  Boat  is  stationed  at  tliis  poi-t. 

Directions. — Some  precaution  is  necessary  when  standing  for  Omon- 
ville  harbour  with  light  winds  from  S.W.  or  S.E.,  or  <luring  calms  aAer  half- 
flood,  so  as  not  to  miss  the  entrance.  Under  these  circumstances  a  vessel 
should  be  in  a  position  to  the  S.E.  or  S.S.E.  of  the  entrance,  so  as  to  have 
the  eddy,  which  runs  2^  knots  at  springs,  (noticed  at  page  10,)  favour- 
able for  entering.  With  all  other  winds,  when  they  are  suificiuntly  strong 
to  ensure  stemming  the  stream,  a  vessel  may  run  directly  for  the  en- 
trance, taking  care,  when  rounding  the  rocky  ledge,  which  extends 
half  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  Foireuse  rock,  to  have  DiguUeville 
church-tower  half  a  point  open  to  the  southward  of  the  church-tower  at 
Omonville.  The  pilots  affirm  that  it  is  pos>sible  to  enter  the  harbour,  what- 
ever may  be  the  state  of  the  sea,  if  a  vessel  can  carry  suOicieut  sail  to 
ensui'e  good  steering.  There  is  no  difficulty  in  leaving  except  with  a 
strong  easterly  wind. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Omonville  harbour  at 
7h.  29m. ;  springs  rise  15J  feet ;  neaps  12 J  feet. 

The  COAST  from  Omonville  trends  to  the  south-east  for  6  miles  to 
Querqueville  point.  From  half  a  mile  from  Omonville  to  widiin  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  of  Urville  church  it  is  high  and  precipitous,  intersected 
by  deep  valleys,  and  terminates  in  perpendicular  cliffs  of  grey  rock,  with 
no  remarkable  object  on  it  except  a  peak  of  rock  resembling  a  wall  in 
ruins,  and  named  Castel  Vendon.  At  half  a  mile  S.S.E.  from  Omonville 
fort  a  rocky  ledge  runs  out  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and 
with  this  exception  the  coast  from  Omonville  to  the  east  end  of  the  cliffs 
is  bold-to  at  any  time  of  tide,  as  the  rocks  bordering  it  do  not  extend  more 
than  half  a  cable  from  the  shore. 

POINTE  de  QUERQUEVILLE.— At  three-quarters  of  a 
mile  to  the  westward  of  Urville  church,  the  hills  take  a  south-east 
direction  and  leave  between  their  last  slopes  and  the  shore  a  low  narrow 
plain,  which  terminates  to  the  eastward  at  Querqueville  point,  distin- 
guished by  a  fort  pierced  for  76  guns,  and  a  light  tower. 

The  shore  along  this  low  part  of  the  coast  is  bordered  by  a  beach  of 
sand,  gravel,  and  rocks,  which  uncovers  at  low  water,  and  in  several 
places  extends  as  far  out  as  3  or  4  cables  from  the  land.  Outside  the 
beach  there  is  a  rocky  bank,  with  irregular  depths  on  it,  extending  nearly 
a  mile  outside  high-water  mark. 


onAp.i.]        POINTE  J)E  QUEEQUEVILLB. — LE  MKaillSTIN.         13 

The  north-west  part  of  this  bank,  Raz  de  Banncs,  liea  between  the 
bearings  of  North  and  N.E.  fiom  Urville  church  towitr,  and  numj  of  ttio 
rocks  on  it  uncover ;  the  highest  rock  diies  4|  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  and 
N.W.,  half  a  mile  from  it,  and  at  the  north-west  eslremit^  of  the  bank  lies 
a  small  shoal  patch,  on  which  there  are  onlj  5  feet  water. 

A  beacon  tower  has  been  erected  on  Roz  de  Ba&nes,  situated  about  5^ 
miles  westward  of  Cherboarg. 

The  tower  has  an  elevation  of  10  feet  above  high  water  springs,  is 
painted  red  with  a  white  top,  and  surmounted  bj  a  mast  with  an  iron 
baU. 

This  beacon  formsa  valuable  landmark  for  vessels  approacbingCheriwurg 
from  the  westward  in  thick  weather. 

The  north-east  part,  named  the  Plateau  de  Nacqueville,  the  eastero 
extremity  of  which  is  in  line  with  the  western  part  oftheRodoutedes  Cou- 
plets (the  redoubt  stands  on  the  summit  of  a  bill  south  of  St.  Anne  bay)  and 
the  outer  wall  of  the  circular  battery  of  QuerqaeviUc  fort ;  large  vessels 
should  avoid  crossing  the  plateau  at  low  water,  as  the  tide  canses  much 
rippling  on  it,  and  a  small  9  feet  patch  lies  3J  cables  from  the  shore. 

A  Life  Boat  is  stationed  at  Querqueville  point, 

Le  Mermistin,  a  rocky  flat  lying  E.S.E.  2  miles  from  Omonville, 
and  8  mile  from  the  cliffs  of  Castel  Vendon,  is  about  3^  cables  long,  east 
and  west,  and  2^  cables  broad,  with  6  to  7  fathoms  water,  and  10  to  16 
fotUoms  close  around ;  from  its  eastern  end  Urville  and  Kacquevillo 
church-towers  are  iu  line  bearing  S.  by  E. 

Anota.Crag6.  —  a  vessel,  waiting  a  favourable  time  to  enter 
Cherbourg  road,  can  anchor  between  the  Plateau  de  Nacqueville  and  Quer- 
queville poiiit  in  7^  fathoms  water,  over  good  holding  ground  of  muddy 
sand.  The  best  position  is  with  the  light-tower  in  fort  Imperial  on  Pelee 
island,  in  line  with  tbe  ligbt-tower  in  fort  Central  on  Cherbourg  break- 
water, beariug  S.E.  by  E.  ^  £.  easterly,  and  the  guard-bouse  at  Roule  fort 
seen  a  little  within  the  circular  battery  at  Querqueville  fort,  S.S.E.  ^  E. 

Tides. — One  cable  to  the  northward  of  the  Mermistin  flat  the  stream 
of  flood  begins  3h.  45m.  before  the  time  of  high  water  at  Cherbourg,  and 
seta  to  the  southward  at  the  rate  of  a  knot  an  hour ;  from  2  to  3  hours 
before  high  water  at  that  place  it  runs  S.E.,  wilh  a  velocity  of  fiom  3^  to  4 
knots,  when  its  direction  changes  again  to  the  southward.  One  hour 
after  high  water  it  runs  S.S.W.,  but  its  rate  does  not  exceed  a  knot,  and 
as  it  strength  decreases,  the  direction  of  the  stream  assumes  a  more 
westerly  direction,  and  it  finally  ends  about  2  hours  after  high  water  at 
Cherbourg. 

The  direction  of  the  ebb-stream  varies  only  from  West  to  N.W.  from 
the  time  of  its  commencement  until  4  J  hours  after  high  watei-  at  Cherbourg, 


11  CAPE  I>£  hX  UAGU£  TO  CAPE  BARFLEUR.  [chap.i. 

but  a**  it'4  ^i^t^  (kc-rek*^.  it  tura*  «a<xes^y*'\j  to  all  the  points  bcimwii 
N.W.  Ainl  \Ve*t,  wh»-n-  it  end-  3h.  45ni.  >>efore  higb  water.  Its  gremteat 
vf'Iocitjr,  afiout  3 J  knots  f-^fur*  frrim  4  to  5  honnt  afWr  high  water  at 
Chcrboar^.  The  M^-nux-tixi  lie-^  at  the  eastern  limit  of  the  great  eddy 
noticM  ill  fAge  10. 

At  3  or  4  miles  to  thcr  ncrthM-ard  of  the  Mcnnictin  and  of  Qaerqneville 
point  the  florxl  strffam  }jf'jpii^  3  h<'*ur8  l^-fure  the  time  of  high  water  at 
Cherlxfiirg,  and  ends  a)Kiut  3  hour^  after  high  water  at  that  place. 
General!  V  i^peaking,  at  that  di>tauce  from  the  coa»t,  eastward  of  the  Mer* 
mi-tin,  and  also  in  the  midflle  of  the  English  Channel,  the  changes  of  the 
tide-Mn-ams  take  place  at  tlie  times  of  half-flood  and  half -ebb  at  Cher- 
b'jurg. 

PORT  de  CHERBOURG.*  — Cherl>ourg  is  a  sea-port  town, 
naval  .station,  extr'n.<*ive  arsenal,  and  fortress  of  the  first-class.  The  town 
stands  at  the  mouth  of  the  river  Divette,  and  has  some  trade.  Steamers 
run  twice  a  week  to  Le  Havre,  and  a  railro«id  was  opened  in  August,  18o8, 
which  brings  Paris  within  9  hours  distance.  It  is  in  communication  by 
electric  telegraph  with  Paris,  ha  ITavre,  St.  Malo,  Brest,  Toulon,  and  the 
chiff  towns  in  France. 

RADE  de  CHERBOURG  is  compriee<l  in  the  space  formed 
between  Querqueville  point  and  Pel^e  island,  which  lie  E.S.E.  and 
W.N.W.  of  each  other,  distant  3  J  miles.  The  road  is  sheltered  on  its 
northern  side  by  a  breakwater,  and  its  southern  limits  are  the  shores  of  St. 
Anne  and  Cherbourg  bays.  The  area  of  the  sheltered  portion  of  the 
roadstead,  of  3  fathoms  depth  and  upwards,  is  about  1,050  acres ;  of  4 
fathoms  and  upwards,  1 ,350  acres ;  of  5  fathoms  and  upwards,  900  acres. 
Hie  quieting  effect  of  the  breakwater  upon  the  roadstead  is  very  sensible, 
and  vessels  now  ride  in  safety,  and  remain  during  the  winter  where 
formerly  they  dared  not  anchor. 

La  DIGUE  or  BREAKWATER  is  a  magnificent  artificial 
structure  which  riscH  from  a  dej>th  of  from  0  to  7  fathoms  at  low  water,  and 
shelters  the  roa<lstead  from  N.W.,  round  northerly,  to  N.E.  It  is  formed 
by  a  mound  of  rubblcstonc  deposited  k  picrre  perdue  up  to  the  level  of  low 
water  of  equinoctial  spring  tides.  It  is  4,060  yards  in  length,  and  its  base 
about  100  yards  wide,  having  a  long  foreshore  to  seaward  ;  on  the  harbour 
side  it  stands  at  on  angle  of  45^  Upon  this  foundation  is  built  a  wall  of 
masonry,  nearly  vortical,  33  feet  wide  at  the  base,  diminishing  to  27  feet  at 
the  top,  which,  with  the  parapet,  rises  23  feet  above  the  level  of  high- 
water  springs. 


*  See  Admiralty  plan  of  port  de  Cherbourg,  No.  2,602 ;  scale,  m  >=  6  inches. 


CHAP.  I.]      CHEEBOUKG, — LIGHTS. — ANSB  3>E  ST.  ANNE.  15 

The  breakwater  does  not  extend  in  a  etraighl  line,  but  has  two  anus 
of  unequal  length,  divei'giug  5°  each  towards  the  harbour.  The  westera 
arm  is  about  one-third  longer  than  the  eaatern.  The  work  was  begun  in 
the  year  1783,  but  was  eeveral  timea  interrupted,  and  was  brought  to  a 
close  in  1853.  The  chief  engineers  employed  ou  it  wtire  DeCeB9art,De 
Lamblardie,  Cachiu,  Fauques-Duparc,  Virla,  Bonnin,  aud  Reibell,  and  they 
have  constructed  a  work  of  which  France  may  be  justly  proud.  It  is  de- 
feuded  by  a  fort  iu  the  centre,  one  at  each  end,  aud  by  an  intermediate 
battery  on  the  weeteru  lurm.  A  large  white  buoy  marks  the  western 
extreme  of  the  foundation  of  the  breakwater,  and  a  red  buoy  the  eastern 


A  Life  Boat  is  stationed  at  the  west  end  of  the  breakwater. 

LIGHTS. — ^The  approaches  to  Cherbourg  are  fiicilitated  at  night  by 
three  lights,  dioptric  and  of  the  4th  order.  The  first  is  9,Jixed  white  light 
pla£ed  in  a  white  tower  in  Querquevitle  fort  at  59  feet  above  high  '^vater. 
The  second  is  affixed  white  light,  with  a  flash  etiery  three  minutes,  exhi- 
bited at  66  feet  above  high  water,  from  a  small  stone  tower,  painted  white, 
which  staoda  in  fort  Central  on  the  breakwater,  and  which  bears  from  the 
former  light  E.  by  S.  \  S.  southerly  2\  miles.  The  third  is  a  Jixed  white 
light  placed  on  the  north-east  bastion  of  fort  Imperial  on  Pelee 
island,  at  85  feet  above  high  water ;  it  bears  from  the  flashing  light  on 
fort  Centr^  S.B,  by  E.  \  E.  easterly  \\  miles.  All  three  lighls  may  be 
seen  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  9  to  10  miles. 

k.  jixed  red  light  62  feet  high,  marks  the  western  head  of  the  break- 
water, and  is  visible  7  miles ;  and  a  flxed  green  light  the  eastern  head, 
visible  4  miles. 

A  flxed  red  light  is  shown  at  33  feet  above  high  water,  Irom  a  stone 
tower,  paJDted  white,  standing  at  the  end  of  the  east  jetty  of  the  port  du 
Commerce,  visible  about  6  miles  ;  and  ttflxed  green  light  elevated  15  feet 
above  the  level  of  high  water,  is  exhibited  from  the  head  of  the  west 
jetty  visible  2  miles. 

ANSE  de  St.  ANNE  or  St.  Anne  bay,  is  2  miles  wide  from  Quer- 
queville  point  to  Ilomet  fort,  and   its    shore,  on  which  stands  a  battery 


!  Cessftrt,  engineer,  lo  form  a  breakwater  bj 
unking  fraatra  of  cones  filled  with  stone  was  adopted,  and  the  first  cone  was  sunliin  1784. 
After  IS  such  cones  had  been  sunk  this  plan  wsBabandoned  in  17S8,  and  that  of  depositing 
Itone  A  pitrre  perdue  iras  adopted  and  followed  up,  with  occasional  internals,  ontil  the 
breakwater  reached  aboTe  high  water,  but  as  in  that  form  it  could  not  withstand  the  force 
of  tbeeea,  M.  Fouqnes-Dupare  proposed,  in  1829,  a  vertical  wall  of  maaonry  based  upon 
Qie  rubble  foundation  lising  from  the  level  of  low  watec  of  ei^uinoGtial  spring  tides.  Such 
awall  was  began  in  1833  and  carried  on  to  completion  at  the  close  of  1853.  Since  (hen 
the  forts  have  been  in  progress.  The  whole  cost  of  the  breakwater  has  been  2,674,4911., 
or  at  the  rate  of  S20l.  a  lineal  foot,  measured  from  end  to  end  of  the  foot  of  the  emlunk- 
ment— foiutin,  Sur  P  Achivemenl  de  la  Digue  de  Cherbourg,    Parit,  18ST. 


16  CAPE  DE  LA  UAGUE  TO  CAPE  BARFLEUU.        [chaf.  i. 

mounting  \6  ^nns,  id  low  and  alinoHt  entirely  lH)nlorc(l  by  rocks  which 
uncover  at  low  water.  Tho  fartlie^t  out  of  these  is  a  large  rock  named  the 
Rochefort,  lying  at  the  head  of  the  hay  al>out  2  cables  from  high- water 
mark  and  a  mile  to  the  sonth-ea>tward  of  (juerquevilie  fort,  and  its  summit 
rises  2  feet  above  tho  level  of  the  highest  tides. 

The  water   is  not  deep  in  this  bay,  and  in  some  parts  there  are  only 
4^  fathoms  at  low  water  at  half  a  mile  from  the  shore.       Not  more  than 

17  feet  will  be  found  at  the  extremity  of  a  rocky  projection  which  extends 
.'i^  cables  to  the  eastward  from  the  outer  wall  of  the  circular  battery  on 
Querqucville  point,  and  only  12  feet  at  the  distance  cf  4  cables  to  the 
south-east  from  the  same  part  of  the  fort. 

A  rocky  head,  upon  which  there  are  12  feet  water,  lies  E.X.E.  half  a  mile 
from  the  Rochefort  rock,  with  the  summit  of  that  rock  nearly  in  one  with 
Henneville  church-tower,  and  N.W.  west«'rly  9  cables  from  Homet  fort. 
This  12-feet  rock  is  much  in  tho  way  of  large  vessels  beating  in  or  out  of 
Cherbourg  road,  and  should  be  avoided  at  the  springs  from  a  third-ebb  to 
two-thirds  flood,  and  at  all  times  of  tide  during  neaps.  A  heavy  swell  is 
thrown  on  the  beach  of  the  bay  when  the  wind  is  strong  froniN.W.  or  N.E., 
and  it  would  be  dangerous  then  to  anchor  in  it,  as  the  bottom  is  uneven  and 
covered  with  rocks. 

Basse  ChavagnaC,  a  small  rocky  patch  with  a  fort  on  it  lying  at 
the  entrance  of  St.  Anne  bay,  midway  between  the  circular  battery  of 
Querqueville  fort  and  the  west  end  of  the  breakwater,  is  about  three- 
quarters  of  a  cable  long  and  from  50  to  GO  yards  broad.  Tiie  patch  breaks 
with  strong  gales  between  N.W.  and  N.E.  and  during  a  weather  tide  the 
sea  is  much  agitated  on  it  ;  it  is  dangerous  to  approach  in  calm  weather, 
as  the  ebb  sets  directly  over  it. 

BAIE  de  CHERBOURG  is  bounded  on  its  western  side  by 
the  rocks  off  Homet  fort,  and  on  its  eastern  side  by  the  Flamands  rocks  and 
Pelee  island.  The  town  of  Cherbourg  and  the  port  du  Commerce  occu])y 
the  bead  of  the  bn.y,  and  the  establishments  of  the  port  Militaire  the  west- 
ern side,  between  the  town  and  Homet  fort.  The  shore  is  low  from  the 
front  of  the  town  to  the  Flamands,  and  bordered  by  a  sandy  beach  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  broad  at  low  water. 

The  low  land  adjoining  the  shore  of  this  bay  extends  but  little  into  the 
interior,  and  is  bounded  by  the  high  hills,  between  which  are  the  valleys  of 
Roule  and  Tourlaville.  The  entrance  to  Roule  valley  is  south  of  the 
floating  basin  of  the  port  du  Commerce,  and  between  two  hills  of  unequal 
height.  The  eastern  hill,  Mont  Roule,  is  steep  and  crowned  by  Roule  fort, 
which  commands  all  the  neighbourhood.  A.  telegraph  is  placed  on  the  top 
of  tho  westem  hill.  Tourlaville  valley  is  situated  to  the  eastward  of  Roule 
valley,  and  is  only  separated  from  the  former  by  a  range  of  hills,  of  which 


CHAP.  1.]  CaEE-BOtTRG. — VORT  DV  COMUERCE.  17 

Mont   Eoule  forrae  the  north-western  extremity.      The  entranco  to  this 
valley  is  wide,  but  it  rapidly  narrows  further  inland. 


Roches  des  FlamandS  He  close  to  the  eastern  shore  of  Cherbourg 
bay,  and  their  highest  parts  uncover  at  low  water.  A  stroDg  fort  is  erected 
on  these  rocks  nionnting  70  guns  in  two  tiers,  and  is  approached  from  llio 
shore  by  a  causeway  and  drawbridge.  The  Basse  des  Flomands,  upon 
which  there  are  only  7  to  12  feet  water,  lies  to  the  northward  of  the  rocks, 
at  half  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  is  separated  from  tliem  by  a  sandy 
bottom.  The  mark  for  this  jshoat,  as  well  as  for  the  north-west  point  of 
the  Flamands  rocks,  where  there  are  only  15  feet  water,  is  tlie  house  on 
the  small  redoubt  of  Octeville  seen  between  the  two  towers  of  Chorbonrg 
church,  bearing  W.S.W.  Vessels  must  avoid  the  rocky  patches  (noticed 
in  page  21)  in  the  bay  when  intending  to  anchor. 

Port  d'Echouage. — At  the  eastern  side  of  Flamands  fort  there  is 
a  small  harbour  used  by  vessels,  of  not  more  than  300  tons  burthen,  which 
convey  timber  for  the  use  of  the  dockyard.  A  canal  has  been  constructed 
from  this  harbour  eastward  to  the  Marc  de  Tourlaville,  50  acres  iu  extent, 
where  a  very  large  supply  of  building  timber  is  preserved. 

La  Tenarde  is  a  rocky  ledge  with  thrfe  dangerous  heads  upon  it, 
lying  N.E.  2  cables  from  Homct  fort,  and  occupies  a  space  one  cable  long 
fi'om  east  to  west,  and  half  a  cable  broad  ;  at  low  water  there  aie  14  feet 
on  the  western  bead,  G  feet  on  the  middle  bead,  and  9  feet  on  the  eastern 
bead.  The  eastern  head  lies  at  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  shoal,  N.E,  by 
£.,  nearly  2  cables  from  the  flagstaff  on  Hornet  fort,  with  Nacqueville 
church-tower  in  line  with  the  smallest  tower  of  Qnerqueville  church, 
bearing  N,W.  by  W,  |  W.,  and  the  top  of  the  group  of  trees  surrounding 
Fief  farm,  which  stands  half  a  mile  to  the  south-east  of  Eoule  fort,  in  line 
with  the  end  of  the  western  jetty  of  the  port  du  Commerce,  S.  J  E.  The 
small  church  tower  at  Qucrqueville  kept  exactly  between  the  tall  spire  of 
that  church  and  the  tower  of  Nacqueville  church  leads  a  quarter  of  a  cable 
to  the  northward  of  the  dangerous  parts  of  the  Tenarde.  The  eastern  end 
of  the  shoal  is  marked  by  a  buoy,  moored  N.E.  by  E.  |  E.  half  a  cable 
fi'om  the  eastern  bead.  There  are  fnm  19  to  21  feet  water  over  rocky 
bottom  between  the  Tenarde  and  t^e  shore,  with  the  exception  of  a  13-fect 
patch  lying  E.  ^  S.  2  cables  from  the  flagstaff  of  the  fort. 

Port  du  Commerce  or  Mercantile  harbour  consists  of  an  Avant- 
port  or  outer  harbour  with  the  channel  leading  to  it,  and  a  Bassia  de  Plot  or 
floating  basin,  occupying  the  jiloce  of  the  former  mouth  of  the  little  river 
Divette,  which  waters  Eoule  valley.  The  cbanncl,  the  bottom  of  which  is 
composed  of  a  mixture  of  sand,  miid,  grai  el,  and  sbingJe,  and  dries  at  low- 
water  equinoctial  springs,  lies  between  two  stone  jetties  running  parallel 
Q  7tM9,  B 


,iM' cnaii!-' 1  at  l(»\v  wat«r.      It-«  »'a^t«ni  >i«le, 

•n:il  .-l«»<il,  i-   i\«l;i-:\.  ly   :ij»i'n'|»ri:i»«'«l    ttj   (iovcrni 
tli'-.ii  :m<l  wi  ^t.  ni   'jMay-,  >\lii«-!i  rM.iiil   oJH)  yanU 
nlijiiit  v«--<U.     TIic  li«»tt«»iii  i'l' iIk.' haibniir  i>  lianl, 
tin*  rcimirin;^  slip,  andaliout  Ijalt-way  along  tlje  wC'^t* 
«  rock  is  exposed,  it  coii**ihts  of  a  niixturoof«in»l,gra\ 
rh«  1>ottom  at  the  foot  of  the  cpmys  is  level,  nml  ilrie: 
level  of  the  lowest  tideis  nnd  vessels  would  lie  here  i 
exposed  to  the  heavy  swell  and  surf  which  sets  in  tl 
m  the  wind  blows  between  West  and  Xorth.    To  rem 
been  built  in  a  line  perpendicular  to  the  western  qu 
southward  of  the  new  re|)airing  slip,  and  the  swell  wi 
ids  breaks  in  a  great  measure  on  the  slip  and  in  the  sj 
rand  the  western  jetty;  but,  under  all  circumstanceB,  \ 
t  longer  in  the  onter  harbour  than  is  necessary  for  su 
T  the  floating  basin.    Warping  buoys  are  placed  in  tli 
)Onr  for  the  convenience  of  vessels  going  into  the  basin, 
over  which  they  have  to  pass  is  about  1^  feet  above 
lit  tides. 

le  Baasin  de  Flot  is  440  yards  long  and  137  yards  i 

of  12  acreSi  or  space  for  about  240  small  vessels  i 

9  weather  may  oblige  them  to  seek  refuge  in  Cherl 

«te8  with  the  cater  harbour  by  gates  42  feet  wid< 

ibove  their  sill  (which  is  15  inches  above  the  lev* 

10  to  21  feet  at  great  springs,  17  to  18^  feet  at  o 

out  18  feet  at  neaps.     The  gates  remain  open  abov 

it  they  are  dosed  with  a  falling  tide.      There  a 

ig  dipt  at  the  head  of  the  basin 


CMAP.  rj  CnEEBOURG. — ILB   PELEE.  19 

naval  dockyard ;  it  is  sniTOunded  on  both  the  land  and  the  north  siiiea  by 
a  fortified  enclosure  ;  Hornet  fort  being  ita  principal  defence  towards  the  bob. 

The  Port,  properly  so  called,  consists  of  three  extensive  flootiug  basins, 
The  outer  basin  or  Avant-port,  of  16  acres,  communicates  with  the  road- 
stead by  a  short  channel  opening  to  the  eastward,  in  which  there  are  from 
13  to  16  feet  at  low  water  ;  and  with  the  Bassin  de  Flot,  or  northern  basin, 
(15  acres)  by  gates  59  feet  wide,  having  their  sill  13^  feet  below  the 
level  of  the  lowest  tides.  Both  basins  have  been  formed  in  the  solid  rock 
to  a  depth  of  about  32  feet  below  the  same  level. 

Before  the  eastern  arm  of  the  digue  or  breakwater  was  raised  above  the 
level  of  high-water  springs,  the  southern  basin  was  untenable  with  strong 
winds  fi-om  E.N.E.  to  E.S.E.,  hut  now  the  surf  is  much  less  violent.  An 
inner  floating  basin  named  Bossiu  Napoleon  III.,  of  20  acres  in  extent, 
was  opened  in  August  1858.  It  has  7  first-class  building  slips,  and  ouo 
dry  dock  on  its  west  side,  4  docks  on  the  north,  and  2  double  docks  on  the 
south  side.  -  There  arc  also  4  building  slips  on  the  south  side  of  the  Avant- 
port,  making  II  in  ail  and  7  docks.  The  quays  and  docks  are  faced  mth 
fine  granite  from  Dielelte,  FlamanviUe,  and  Chausey.  On  the  north  side, 
surrounding  the  docks,  are  the  steam  factory  and  workshops  for  repairing 
vessels. 

Time  signal. — The  signal  is  made  by  a  disc  on  a  mast  at  the  Marine 
Obsei-vatory,  Vigie  des  Onglet,  Quay  Napoleon  ;  the  disc  is  placed  verti- 
cally a  short  time  before  signal,  and  falls  into  an  horizontal  position  at  noon, 
Paris  mean  time.    When  not  in  use,  disc  is  inclined  at  an  angle  of  45°. 

ILE  PEIj£E  is  the  remainder  of  a  long  point  which  extended 
nearly  1^  miles  to  the  northward  from  the  coast,  but  which  has  been 
separated  from  it  by  the  action  of  the  waves,  leaving  a  channel  nearly 
half  a  mile  wide.  This  island  is  a  flat  of  bare  rock,  nearly  covered  by  the 
waves  at  high  water;  but  at  low-water  springs  it  is  about  three-quarters 
of  a  mile  long  from  north  to  south,  and  half  a  mile  brond,  presenting  the 
form  of  a  horseshoe,  with  its  opening  [facing  east;  its  highest  point  is  a 
heap  of  stones  awash  at  high-water  great  springs.  Fort  Imperial  stands  on 
the  western  point  of  the  island,  and  defends  the  eastern  entrance  to  Cher- 
bourg road.  The  south-western  bastion  of  the  fort  has  a  flagstaff  on  it, 
and  &Jixed  white  light  is  exhibited  from  the  north-eastern  bastion ;  both 
bastions  being  sufficiently  high  to  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  10  or  12  miles 
from  seaward.  The  north-west  and  north-east  extremes  of  the  island  are 
marked  by  beacon  towers. 

DANGERS  on  ILE  PELfiE  PLAT.  —  The  principal 
dangers  which  do  not  uncover  upon  the  rocky  flat  forming  the  base  of 
Pelfie  island  are,  the  Basse  du  Chenal,  the  Basse  de  Happetout,  the  North- 
west point  of  the  flat,  and  the  Truite  rock, 

B  2 


^j?te^^":r,  -  it:; 


aur.1.^  CHERBOURG. — GRANDE   RAJ>E.  21 

vicinity  of  the  Truite  than  tvt  the  north-weBt  point  of  tlie  flat,  y<rt  both 
buoys  are  likely  to  drift  from  their  position,  and  more  dependence  should 
be  placed  on  the  above  landmarks  than  upon  the  buoys. 

BANC  de  L'lle  PEL^E.— This  snodbunk  extends  to  the  west- 
ward from  Pelfe  island  into  the  (nost  sheltered  part  of  ihc  Grando-Rade. 
There  are  Efom  20  to  25  feet  at  the  lowest  tides  on  its  western  extremity, 
which  lies  S.  by  W.,  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  fort  Central,  It  limiti  the  road- 
stead on  its  north  and  north-eastern  sides,  but  there  is  excellent  shelter  for 
vessels  of  moderate  draught  between  it  and  the  eastern  arm  of  the  break- 
water. 

ANCHORAGES   in  HADE  de  CHERBOURG-The 

principal  anchorages  for  ships  of  war  and  large  vessels  ai'e,  the  Grande- 
Bade,  and  the  Mouillage  de  I'Ouest  or  'Westem  anchorage  ;  and  for  smaller 
vessels,  those  called  the  Petite-Eade,  and  the  anchorage  between  Pelee 
island  bank  and  theeastern  arm  of  the  breakwater.  St.  Anne  buy  does  not 
afford  good  anchorage,  as  the  soundings  in  it  are  irregulnr,  the  holding 
ground  bad,  and  vessels  would  he  exposed  to  great  danger  if  caught  there 
with  northerly  winds,  which  throw  in  a  heary  sea. 

La  Grande-Rade  is  bounded  on  its  north  and  north-east  sides  by 
the  Uanc  do  I'ile  Felfe,  on  its  east  and  south  sides  by  the  sandy  bottom 
adjoining  the  shore,  and  its  western  limit  is  on  the  meridian  of  Cherbourg 
church.  The  bottom  in  the  northern  part  of  the  road  is  for  the  most  part 
composed  of  schistose  rock  in  a  state  of  decomposition,  and  the  holding 
ground  is  good  ;  immediately  to  the  southward  of  this  rock  the  bottom 
is  of  fine  muddy  sand,  which  is  not  sufRcicntly  stiff  to  hold  well,  but 
it  improves  on  ncaring  the  shore,  and  holds  well  in  the  southern  ]>art  of 
the  road,  particularly  south  of  the  line  on  which  Nacqueville  church-tower 
is  in  one  with  the  spire  of  Querquevillc  churcH.  A  short  distance,  how- 
ever, to  the  southward  of  this  line  there  is  not  sufficient  depth  for  large 
vessels  to  anchor  at  low  water,  and  it  would  be  too  near  the  shore. 

I'he  pilots  moor  vessels  S.E,  and  NAV,,  and  veer  cable  to  meet  the 
alternate  streams  of  flood  and  ebb;  but  as  the  streams  are  generally 
weak,  it  would,  perhaps,  be  advisable  to  moor  with  open  hawse  to  the 
N.W.  to  withstand  the  winds  from  that  quarter,  which  are  frequent.  Fresh 
winds  from  N.W,  to  North  throw  a  heavy  sea  into  some  parts  of  the  road, 
but  it  is  sheltered  from  strong  U.N.E.  winds;  those  from  E.N.E.  to  E.S.E. 
raise  a  heavy  swell  only  from  the  time  of  half  flood  to  half  ebb  on  the 
shore. 

Mouillag©  do  I'Ouest  or  western  anchoj-age  lies  about  2  cables 
southward  of  the  western  arm  of  tho  breakwater,  and  has  a  bottom  of  fine 
sand  and  broken  shells  extending  8  cables  east  and  west  wiih  deptha  of  7 


• 


•  •        •  ••      •      •  •«■ 


...  _ 

■  -•  ....    *       'C«.A    i^k^  >^  7v 

''    -V.  •   ■»'      •  •  •"''■'ii'' 


•     T      .    V 


I.-  •:•  .    ,  '.■.'  ' !'.  'I    t;. 

yii  .•»  I  ■  'I.    I  iir  i,«  »|, 
I  If    ,iiif  Ii'.i  .1'"    III  1 


I  ■ 


.    I'.d  lav  out 

.    :    *..     X.li.     S::-..:.l:  i:alc>  li-om 

.."■i  :.  J  .  ;.:.!  vv-.-d-  are  li;i1»le  :o 

:.•.••.'•.::!»   -ucli  v.iiiil>.  the   sea  ii 


'•'■11  iJ.'ir/:  /I"  IJI"  1'<-Ii'«j  ;i:i-!  tin.-  m.^tiTn  arm  of  the 
Im'.iI  .■;.'•  f  I  II-4'!  I.v  iii'i' lijir.J  '.'■■  'K  \vJj"ii  .-'•••];  in  i; -lichiT  in  C'horl'ourg 
I'.i'I  ii'iiii  H\«i«-  •M:iiliir  Iroiii  N.N.W.  ro'iml  ijnrihcrly.  to  K.N.E.  It;? 
Iiii)i(  ■  jii»'  Irniii  III'  iii'-ri'linii  oCI'iit  ( Viiti:il,  v/h'-rc  ii  'i<  2],  cables  broad 
(••  mIhiiii  I'.  »}iIiI'  .  In  till'  wisi  w.'inl  (if  th(M'.'i-t<'rii  c.vfiviiutv  of  the  break- 
\.iii«r,  wliiM  ii  i".  iiiily  I  1.  r;il)I./.  \tr(nu\.  'I'he  bottom  at  tlii.s  anchorage  is 
•Mini.  nil.  Ill  III  Moiiii.  pljH.,..;  with  :i.  llMlo  luud,  and  the  depth,  which 
ili.i.n.i.  inwiinl.-.  Ilir  blink,  vniiis  from  lid  to  .'32  k'ni  ;  vessels  shouhl  not 
Mtiilinr  Ihi.'  wilh  Nlnm;:  winds  from  W.N.VV.,  round  southerly,  to  S.S.E.,  as 
till'  lioldiiij'.  'Moiind  is  not  ;^ood  with  tlio.-;r  winds. 

(MIANNKliS  into  RADE  do  CHERBOURG.— Ships  of 

win- mid  \.'..iOm  «•!'  lar-'v  drau-'hl  niter  dierbour^r  road  by  the  channels 
l>in;\ni  Dip  two  rslnMuitii's  nl'  iht'  bivakwater.  The  prineiiml  channel, 
u.nnrd  Pm-.mimIo  Tt  bhvst.  is  tlial  t.>  t  lie  westward  J  H't  ween  the  west  end  of 
the  bieakwnter  »ud  (he  Uasso  rhavanrnue,  and  is  about  half  a  mile  wide. 


ciup.i.]  CHANNELS  INTO  CIIEEBOUBG.  23 

Passe  de  I'Ouest. — There  is  no  difficulty  in  euteriug  this  channel 
with  a  leading  wind,  but  vessels  of  large  drauglil  turning  in  with  the  flood 
stream  must  be  careful  to  avoid  the  Chavagnoc,  also  the  rocky  head  of 
14  feet  lyiug  £.  by  K,  ^  N.  half  a  mile  from  Rochefort  rock,  and  the 
Tcnarde  shoal ;  it  would  be  imprudent  to  turn  tlirougU  at  night  except 
during  very  fine  rooonlight.  The  leading  mark  tlu'ougb  at  night  when 
the  moon  is  near  the  horizon,  and  its  light  Gufficieutly  strong  to  dlHtmguiiili 
Hoinet  fori,  is  the  red  light  on  the  eastern  jetty  of  the  port  du  Com- 
merce kept  a  little  open  westward  of  the  upper  battery  on  that  fort ;  but 
in  a  dark  night  io  a  sailing  vessel  it  would  not  ^be  safe  to  ti'ust  to  it, 
especially  on  the  flood. 

The  Chanuel  between  fort  de  Querqueville  and  the  Basse  Chavagnoc  is 
not  so  wide  as  the  western  channel,  and  it  should  only  be  osed  by  large 
ships  in  cases  of  absolute  necessity,  and  then  only  between  half  flood  and 
half  ebb.  Ko  sailing  vessel  should  attempt  it  during  calm  weather,  as  there 
would  be  great  risk  of  being  drifted  upon  the  rocks  at  the  head  of  St.  Anne 
hay  by  the  eddy  on  the  flood  caused  by  Querqueville  point ;  neither  would 
there  be  any  advantage  in  hugging  the  shore  of  this  bay  with  land 
winds,  as  they  frequently  come  in  gusts  from  the  openings  of  the  volleys, 
particularly  when  it  blows  hard  from  the  aouth-west. 

Passe  de  VEst  or  eastern  channel  into  Cherbourg  road  lies  between 
the  eastern  extremity  of  the  breakwater  and  the  black  buoys  which 
mark  the  two  most  dangerous  spots  on  the  western  edge  of  Felee  island 
flat,  viz.,  the  north-west  point  of  the  flat  and  the  Truite  rock.  The  nar- 
rowest part  of  the  channel  is  2^  cables  wide  between  the  breakwater  and 
the  Truite  buoys,  and  has  from  28  to  32  feet  in  it  at  low  wat«r,  but  besides 
being  narrow,  this  channel  has  the  disad\'antage  of  being  crossed  obliquely 
by  the  tidal  streams,  rendering  it  dangerous  for  sailing  vessels  with  light 
winds,  and  impracticable  during  calms ;  there  is,  however,  no  difficulty  or 
danger  in  a  steamer  or  with  a  commanding  breeze. 

Vessels  coming  fi-om  the  eastward,  and  intending  to  run  through  this 
channel  on  the  flood,  should  be  careful  to  give  a  good  berth  to  the  north- 
west point  of  Fel^e  island  flat,  as  that  stream  sets  strongly  towards  it,  and 
not  to  get  into  the  exact  line  of  the  channel  until  the  point  ia  passed.  It 
would  be  advisable  for  ships  intending  to  take  this  channel  to  approach 
with  Octeville  church  just  open  of  fort  Musoir  Est,  S.W.  J  W.,  which 
would  lead  in  clear  of  the  north-west  flat  of  lie  Pelee  should  the  buoy  be 
gone  ;  and  on  closing  the  fort,  alter  course  so  as  to  pass  between  the  buoy  of 
La  Truite  and  the  red  buoy  at  the  east  end  of  the  breakwater.  This  channel 
is  available  for  ships  of  the  largest  draught  between  half  flood  and  half  ebb. 

The  Channel  to  the  southward  of  Pelee  island  trends  in  a  W.  by  N.  and 
E.  by  S.  direction,  5^  cables  long  and  a  cable  broad,  and  carries  a  depth  of 


.^«vi,  111  line  with  the  sm 

jhurch,  ami  as  long  as  it  is  covered  vessels  drawin 
nay  enter  this  channel  when  in  charge  of  a  pilot. 

DIRECTIONS— Approaching   Che 

Westward. — The  western  entrance  to  Cherbou 
34  miles  from  the  Start  point,  S.  by  E.  59  miles  fr 
md  S.S.W.  60  miles  from  the  Needles.     When  bo 
he  westward,  tho  best  land&ll  to  make  is  the  co 
the  Lizard  and  the  Start,  and  having  ascertained 
soarse  should  be  shaped  for  the  Casquets,  and  not  fc 
f^oold  be  the  proper  track  if  bound  for  Le  Havre.* 

These  diiection.%  however,  apparently  so  simple,  r 
saution  should  be  used  in  reference  to  the  direction 
idal  streamSi  as  well  as  to  the  state  of  the  atmc 
ertain  ciivnmstanoes,  may  render  the  approach  to  t 
ifflcult  but  dangerous.    On  nearing  these  islets  grea 
ot  to  get  to  the  southward  of  them,  particularly  whil: 
1  their  shores,  for  should  this  precaution  be  negh 
•eat  risk  of  being  drawn  into  the  channel  which 
oems^,  and  eventUjEdly  to  be  obliged  to  cross  Alder 
oe  the  sea  is  most  agitated  there. 
Having  arrived  at  a  position  about  9  miles  N.W. 
t  courses  to  steer  will  be  as  follows : — Fu*st,  ii^.  ^  i 
eastward  of  the  meridian  of  the  western  point  oi 
ig  the  Casquets  to  bear  aW.  by  W.  ^  W.,  and  tl 
a  Hague  S.£.  f  S. ;  then  EJS.E.  II  miles,  which  \ 
tre  Hie  Nea-de-Jobourgand  the  Calenfrier  are  in  lit 


Ihe-most  pfaetiMl  tXu^  ««* 


/^i- 


raw.  I.]  CUERBornG.— MKECTIOXS.  25 

8t  the  cnpc  bears  S.S.W.  i  W.  j  and,  lastly,  S.S.E.  i  E.  M^  miles,  wliiili 
will  lead  to  the  entrance  of  the  western  channel  Juto  Cliei'ljourg  loaii. 

The  above  are  the  best  courses  tliot  can  be  steered  bj  Inr;^!  vcnim.-Is  nilti 
winds  between  N.N.E.,  round  nortliorly  ond  W.S.W.,  for  they  will  lend  a 
safe  distance  outside  (he  dnugers,  and  also  outside  tlie  strong  sti'e:itps  of 
tide  raoning  through  the  OrtAch  mid  the  Swinge  chanm-lH  mid  Alderney 
Race,  whiah  must  be  guarded  against  during  springs,  in  order  not  to  1* 
<lrifted  too  far  to  the  norlhwai-d  j  for,  if  with  south-west  winds  nr.d 
during  the  flood,  the  ineiidiati  of  cnjie  dc  la  ITnguc  Should  be  crowed  at 
6  or  7  miles  from  the  shore,  a  aiiliug  vessel  may  possibly  miss  the  entrance 
lo  Cherbourg  road.  With  the  wind  between  W.S.W.  tind  S.S.\\'.  an 
E.S.E.  course  may  be  shat>c<l  fixtm  the  above  position,  (X.W. !)  mile^  from 
the  Casquets),  which  will  lead  about  2^  miles  from  the  ^hor«  on  the 
meridian  of  Ifaa  cape,  and  the  road  cnn  be  gained  without  ditEcnlly.  The 
above  courses  may  also  be  followed  during  the  ebb  stream  ;  but  when  the 
wind  blows  fresh  a  heavy  sco  will  be  found  oiF  the  entrance  of  llm  lefore- 
mentioned  channels. 

At  Ni^Ilt. — Approaching  the  western  channel  into  Cherbourg  road  at 
night,  when  to  the  eastwardof  enpi^  dc  la  Hnguo,  keep  tlic  light  on  that 
cape  in  s^ght  over  the  land,  until  \hejixcd  nhile  light  iu  QucniuevilK-  furt 
bears  S.S.W.,  then  stand  lo  the  southwurii  until  the  light  in  fort  Iinpi-rial 
is  to  the  southward  of  foil  Central  tight,  when  the  seaman  must  be  gui<lcd 
by  the  r^i^  light  on  the  west  end  of  the  breal;iratcr. 

The  most  unfavourable  winds  for  a  sailing  vessel  to  approach  Clicrtiourg 
from  the  Casquota  are  those  from  tiie  eastwani,  and  csiKCially  a  S.IC  wind. 
With  moderate  winds,  however,  from  these  ([uarters,  wtii-n  the  si.'a  is 
generally  smooth,  and  during  the  lb)oiI,  the  passage  is  not  difficult :  but  on 
the  ebb  it  is  absolutely  imiwssiblc,  anil  she  shoidd  then  nwke  a  long  l-oard 
to  the  northward  and  endeavour  to  hold  her  own  until  the  slreoui  shicks  : 
the  shore  should  then  again  be  nppiTiaclHMl,  to  take  advantage  of  the  iirst 
of  the  flood,  and  long  boards  nnidc  to  endeavour  to  reach  the  road,  or  a 
position  to  the  eastward  of  its  meridiiin,  so  as  to  bo  able  to  enter  with  the 
latter  part  of  the  flood  or  the  Ijeginuing  of  the  ebb.  Calms  and  fugs  ore 
mostly  to  be  feared  when  making  this  passage,  on  account  of  the  great 
strength  of  the  streams,  and  under  eitlicr  of  these  circumstances  cveiy 
effort  should  be  made  to  get  into  the  middle  of  the  Channel,  where  the 
streams  ai-e  much  weaker  than  near  the  French  coast. 

Prom  the  EASTWARD.— The  course  and  distance  from  Deacby 
head  to  cape  Barflcur  is  -S.  W.  by  W.  j  W.,  85  miles.  Vessels  coming  from 
the  North  Sea  or  from  the  northern  part  of  the  English  clianucl  and  bound  for 
Cherbourg,  with  tlio  wind  between  Xoith  and  East,  generally,  after  cloar- 


.* 


•     a      ■>     * 


I 


«  •  •  -      • 


I,   r        « 

'  .     « -  -  .    i 


•.  --   ..'     I*.  ■ 


V."      -  -         T^ 


P||  ^*l  •  .•■•-  -  ■•  Vl~ 

Leaving  Cherbourg.— *^«------'  v-  — .:-  • . .:.  i  :•:■::.-  v.-v-:\v:.ra  fivm 

oany  tli'iii  rl'rur  ofth^:  K:.''Ii-L  Cl.'i:-:.-.-!.  Tl.-.v  I'-.i..  r.-.liv  :.  .  .  .it  throuirh 
tlj«-  \\'(.-\'-vu  i-\i'.t.u\J:\  at  ti;c  oornra^.'icoinfri.t  uf  th-.-  l-i-  .  l-.::  ui'.r  roiiiulin^ 
MhiiK-X  fort  lli'v  boMOV,'  toward-:  tli.,-  brt.akwiilt.r  t-.«  .tv«..:.l  ::.  lii:ht  winds 
i\v\\'\\u<'  on  tiK;  Chfiva'Miac  rock,  iIk.-  ebb  niakinir  tlircvtiv  over  it.  When 
on  IJic  niericlian  of  caprMie  la  Hague,  an<l  G  or  7  mikf  fruin  it.  they  steer 
W.X.W.  until  the  Ca.squcjts  bear  S.S.E.  when  a  W.  by  S.  course  will  take 
th(?in  out  of  the  clmnnel. 

'J'hese  courses  will  lead  out  of  the  influence  of  the  streams  runniutT 
through  the  Ctisquet  and  the  Swinge  channels  and  Alderncy  liiice,  and  in 
the  direction  of  the  streams  in  the  ofling,  and  also  sufficiently  near  the  island 
of  Oucssant  to  admit  of  taking  a  departure  from  it.     If  obli""cd  to  cross  the 


♦  See  Admirulty  churt,  north  coast  of  France,  Sheet  XL,  liarfleur  to  cape  Antifer, 
No.  2,013,  scale  in  ^  u*5  inch. 


CHAi'.  1.]  CHEEBOURG. — DIRECTIONS  ;    TIDES.  27 

Bace,  vessels  should  endeaTOur  to  leave  Cherbourg  road  at  Euch  k  time  as 
will  enable  them  to  be  at  the  entrance  of  the  Bace  towards  half  ebb  on  the 
shore,  that  is,  at  the  entrance  of  the  flood  stream  in  that  channel,  aud  they 
should  then  steer  >;o  as  to  pass  through  the  centre  of  it. 

When  bound  to  the  eastward  from  Rade  de  Cherbourg  with  a  ivesterly 
wind,  weigh  towards  half  flood,  or  if  in  the  floating  basiu  of  the  port  du 
Commerce,  quit  it  as  soon  as  the  gates  are  open,  and  run  out  of  the  eastern 
channel  noticed  in  page  23.  When  well  cleui:  of  this  channel  a  vessel  will 
have  the  beginning  of  the  flood  stream,  and  if  favoured  with  a  fresh  breeze, 
nho  wOl  carry  that  stream  for  8  or  9  houi's  to  the  eastward. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  the  port  du  Commerce,  at 
7h.  49m.,  and  the  water  rises  above  the  sill  of  the  floating  basin  (which  is 
15  inches  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides),  extraordinary  springs  rise 
from  19  to  21  feet,  ordinary  springs  17  to  18J  feet,  and  neaps  13  feet. 
Strong  winds  from  the  westward  cause  the  tides  in  the  Avant  port  to  rise 
one  or  2  feet  above  that  during  calm  weather,  aud  easterly  winds  have  con- 
trary effect.  With  violent  westerly  winds  at  the  springs,  the  sea  frequently 
flows  over  the  quays  of  the  outer  harbour.  The  mean  duration  of  the  flood 
is  5h.  45m.  and  of  the  ebb  tih.  35m. 

The  flood  stream  begins  to  be  felt  in  the  Grande-Kade  half  an  hour  after 
the  time  of  low  water  on  the  shore,  and  ceases  three-quarters  of  an  hour 
after  high  water  ;  its  direction  is  S.E.,  and  its  rate  about  2  knots.  The 
greatest  speed  of  the  ebb  stream,  which  runs  to  the  N.W.,  hardly  ever 
exceeds  1^  knots,  unless  the  ynni  is  strong  from  N.E.  or  East. 

In  the  Mouillage  dc  I'Ouest  the  flood  stream  commences  about  an  hom' 
after  low  water  on  the  shore,  and  ends  an  hour  after  high  water.  The 
streams  are  feeble  throughout  the  whole  extent  of  this  anchorage,  and  also 
in  the  eastern  part  of  it. 

The  Petite- Rade  lies  in  the  eddy  of  the  flood  stream  occasioned  by  the 
projection  of  Homet  point.  This  eddy  extends  as  far  as  the  northern  limit 
of  the  road,  and  forma  a  counter  stream  which  sweeps  along  the  shore  to 
the  W.N.W.  from  about  3  or  4  cables  to  the  eastward  of  the  entrance  to 
the  port  du  Commerce  to  the  head  of  the  bay,  then  north  along  the 
boundary  wall  of  the  dockyard.  It  begins  obout  half  flood  on  the  shore 
and  continues  until  high  water ;  its  greatest  velocity  is  about  1 J  knots  at 
springs,  decreasing  towards  high  water.  The  ebb  stream  follows  in  the 
same  direction,  and  at  half  ebb,  when  it  is  at  its  greatest  strength,  its  rate 
is  about  2  knots. 

About  half  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  western  channel  into  Cherbourg 
road  the  flood  stream,  which  runs  towards  the  S.S.E.  and  S.E.,  commences 
about  1^  hours  after  low  water  on  the  shoi-e,  and  ends  Ih.  20m.  after  high 
water,  its  greatest  speed  being  3  knots.      The  ebb  runs  N.W.  by  N.  at 


*  1 


±   .-•- 


N    . 


•  m 


M  .. 


\.. 


•    >     1     •        «     ■•      •-  -     ^    .'■       »••      •. 

\\'w\t"  -■  •  ....  • 

*'  ••^.»*  .  '    .    .        - - "     .  ...        .  .      ..-      v..  *.      .       

*'P  \'l  w  :..     '."'■.•••.'•      -i'- -  .      ■    *•    '•. 'I     ■■  ■ :  ^ 

rliiii'i'h  •.'  ■•»■■••  V  ..'   "»  ..■'■'    '         . ..     .  "     -•    T* .■ "       ■    ... ." .  ... 

I'ul  laiuliiMik  t'v'r  i'-.-.>  part  o:"  :*..<■  o  :.<:. 

rOllT  deBECQUET.;.:  ;■•.•.-.-.;;..•.:.•.*.:..  :..;..  :.-:..  v.„:.v,:.i 
i>r  llou  |i.>iiil.  U  sis  u:uoa  ill  lVo:.t  o:' :i  ci\  ••.!:>>:  i  .■-*  • --:•  ," -^  -,.  -•.,> 
slioiv.  l!  iH  noihin-  bm  a  o:rouiuiini:  i^aoo,  >;:rro:;:akJ  by  .^-v>  rf  .:rv 
stono  work  about  a  oablo  lonir  :uul  half  a  onblo  xv-.b,  ;n  whi'h  ::.,  :v  :;re 
ouU  iVoiu  ['J  lo  i;^  tVvt  at  hi^h-wa:or  springs  niul  i?  o<:yo::;I:v  i:::-..:.-  1  foi 
tlio  boaiM  time  can-y  away  iho  ^^tOIlo  obtaiujvl  from  ilio  I^o^iiiJ:  ciuiiiTieJ^ 

A  Lifo  Boat  is  stalionoil  hero. 


ctiiP.i.]  CAPE  LEVI. — RAZ   DU  CAP  LEVI.  29 

LIGHTS. — There  are  two  lights  at  port  Becquet,  76  yards  apart 
N.  40°  E.  and  S.  40°  W. ;  these  lights,  the  inner  red,  elevated  28  feet  aboro 
high  water,  and  the  outer  white,  clcvattid  24  feet,  ahoQld  be  seen  in  clear 
weather  re  spec  tiveJy,  9  and  7  miles,  and  when  in  lino  lead  into  the  port. 

Les  Grunes  de  Bretteville  is  the  name  given  to  the  rocky 
bottom,  throe- quarters  of  a  mile  wide,  extending  off  perpendicularly  from 
the  shore  between  Hue  and  Briqne  points,  to  where  Nacqueville  church- 
tower  is  seen  in  line  with  the  ITappetout  rock,  -which  forms  the  north-east 
point  of  Pelee  island.  The  depths  over  this  l>ottom  are  tolerably  irregular, 
from  13  feet  near  the  shore,  to  10  fathoms  about  a  mile  off.  The  only 
dangerous  spot  is  a  head  of  rock,  with  only  12  feet  water,  lying  Z\  cables 
'  from  the  sliore,  with  Le  Castcl,  near  Brique  point,  bearing  S.E.  by  E.  \  £., 
and  Bretteville  church  tower  S.W.  \  W. 

ANSS  du  CAP  LEVI  lies  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  south- 
west of  that  cape,  and  its  shore  is  not  accessible,  even  at  high- water,  except 
in  a  small  cove,  sheltered  by  a  Jetty  of  stone  work,  which  is  almost  entirely 
destroyed  by  the  sea.  At  3  or  4  cables  to  the  West  and  W.N.W.  of  the 
jetty  there  is  good  holding  groumi  in  9  fathoms,  over  muddy  bottom,  where 
vessels  bound  to  the  eastward  with  adverse  winds  may  wait  in  safety 
during  the  ebb.  This  anchorage  is  protected  by  fort  Levi,  which  is  built 
on  the  northern  point  of  the  bay. 

CAFE  LEVI  is  a  low  point,  being  the  northern  termination  of  some 
sli^tly  elevated  hiUs  detached  from  the  higli  lauds  of  the  interior.  On  the 
highest  parte  of  these  hills  stand  two  houses,  very  close  to  each  other, 
which  may  be  seen  afar  off;  the  northernmost  is  an  old  semaphore  and 
the  other  a  guai'd-honse.  Several  rocky  patches  which  uncover  extend  as 
far  as  4  cables  to  tho  north-east  from  the  cape.  The  outermost  patch  is 
terminaled  by  a  remarkable  rock,  called  the  Bieroc,  which  has  a  rounded 
head  rising  5  or  6  feet  above  high  water. 

LIGHT. — On  the  extremity  of  eape  Levi  stands  a  square  lighthouse, 
from  which  at  an  elevation  of  115  feet  above  high  water,  is  exhibited  a 
fixtd  white  light,  varied  by  a  red  fiash  every  three  mimttes,  and  should  be 
Tisible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  11  miles. 

BAZ  du  CAP  LEVI  is  the  name  given  to  the  strong  eddies 
occasioned  by  the  uneven  rocky  ground,  which  extends  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  3 
miles  from  the  extremity  of  the  cape.  This  rocky  ground  in  Eome  places 
is  half  a  mile  wide,  and  considerably  elevated  above  the  general  level  of 
the  bottom,  and,  as  it  lies  across  the  direction  of  the  tidal  streams,  the 
eddies  it  mates  cause  a  heavy  sea,  particularly  during  a  weather  tide.  It 
is  stated  by  the  local  pUots  that  this  race  at  springs,  with  strong  easterly 


\\i)  (  vrr.    1)1.    LA    IIAOrK   to   CAPK   BABFLtrn.  [chap.l 

wiiiil<«  nil   iltr  tliNNl,   i<i  iH  (liinpTtiiiH   nnil  a«»  much  a^itateil  as  Alderney 

Soii.i-  |»aliln  <•  vWiii'^  iVom  ilii-*  nnky  iMitiom  nro  dangorouF,  even  for 
Niiiiill  \i--i  1-,  at  :iil  liiiH  •*  i'l*  liili- :  lli'V  :iro  iiaiin»*l  the  Bieroc,  the  ILxsmiId 
rap  L'\i,  ill*'  rUirr  Noin-.  aii*l  xUr  lVi.-  S.|»linlri«»imlc  or  Northern  Hetd 
ol  llie  I'lU'i'. 

LO  BiorOC  is  ^  ^•'""ll  n»iky  j.:itt'li  ofuiilv  3  feet  nt  low  water.  King 

1^   riiMr*.  t..  tlii'  n».rlliw:ir.l  ..fth.-   r.i.roo  rork,  fri»in  which  it   derives  its 

llillilc. 

Basso  flu  Cap  Levi  "■•  j^  r"*ky  K-<liri-  :i])nnt  2  eaMt^  long  in  ft 
N.N.W.  :tii>l  S.SK.  .lIiv.ti.Mi.  mikI  \\  .-.'iM.-^  l.r.>uil;  on  it.-*  soiith-OhSt  point 
iIhto  i-^  M  .iMU'/rrou-;  l.'MV.t  piitili.  'mul'  N.N.W.  ^J  W.  Imlf  n  mile  from 
till'  IlicriM*  riM'k. 

La  PierrO  NoirO  ••»•  lilj»'  k  i...  k,  lylni:  X.  -;  K.  one  mile  from  the 
huiiiiuit  uf  ihr  liiiToc,  In  ouv  of  ill.'  nio-t  «laii;:rroii»i  rocks  in  llie  mco,  having 
only  7  1\-.  I  nil  it  at  th.-  lowrM  liili-.  -\  Mark  ln-ll  buoy  is  moored  outside 
tin-  luiitliiTii  .  \tniiir  i»l'  ilii-  »laii;:.  r.  Thl-*  l»uoy  occasionally  breaks 
nilril'l. 

T6tO  SoptOIltriOIialO  n**  J»t  iho  north-west  extremity  of  the  rocky 
botliun,  N,  \  W.  l/„  mill's  iVoni  tlio  r>ieroo  ri»ck ;  K.  J  N.  (JVu  miles  from 
tort  Central,  on  Cherbuurj:  bnakwaior:  and  N.AV.  by  AV.  westerly 
H^l  mill's  Irom  rap.'  P>arlb'ur  H-lithmiM'.  There  aro  ,'33  feet  on  this  rocky 
head  at  low  wator,  hut  as  it  ri>0'<  proripitously  from  soundings  of  from 
15)  to  2o  fathoms,  it  causes  great  cddii's,  ami  the  sea  breaks  upon  it  in  bad 
weather. 

Ves8(*lM  of  moderate  draught,  under  charge  of  pilots,  may,  if  the  weather 
permit,  cross  the  vixve  in  the  channel  betwi'cn  the  Basse  du  cap  Levi  and 
the  Pierre  Noire  at  low  water ;  but  large  vessels  should  always  pass  to  the 
northward  of  the  race. 

The  COAST  between  capo  Levi  and  cajxi  Barlleur,  which  are  distant 
8  miles  from  I'aeb  other  and  lie  on  the  same  parallel  of  latitude,  is  generally 
low  and  sandy,  but  the  adjacant  lands  rise  at  a  short  distance  from  the 
shore,  and  arc  joined  by  slight  undulations  to  the  hills  in  the  interior,  the 
highest  of  which  are  Cameville  heath,  the  woody  mound  at  St.  Pierre,  the 
hills  bounding  Sairo  valley,  and  La  Pernelle  hill. 

ANSE  de  la  M0NDB£E  situate  immediately  to  the  eastward 
of  cape  Levi,  between  the  Bieroc  and  Blanche  rocks,  is  about  1 J  miles 
wide  and  three-quarters  of  a  mile  deep ;  good  anchorage  will  be  found  on 
its  western  side,  in  7^  fathoms  over  mudddy  bottom,  where  vessels  turning 
to  windward  against  westerly  winds  may  wait  during  the  flood ;  but  it 


CHAP.  1.3    ANSB  DE   LA  MONDKl^B. — BASSES   DU   SEN.  31 

muEt  not  be  used  except  in  the  fineat  weather,  for  should  they  be  surprised 
iu  it  by  strong  winds  from  N.W.  to  N.E,  and  it  become  neceBsary  to  weigh 
duriug  the  flood,  they  would  be  drifted  amoa^Bt  the  numerous  dangers 
lying  off  the  coaat  to  the  eastward.  The  best  anchorage  is  with  the  Bieroc 
bearing  N.W.  by  N.  distance  3J  cables  and  the  semaphore  on  cape  Leri 
W.S.W. 

ANSE  de  BOtTBARIL.— No  landing  can  be  effected  on  the 
coast  between  cape  Levi  and  cape  Barfleur,  not  even  in  Mondree  bay, 
during  fresh  northerly  winds,  except  in  a  small  cove  named  Houbaril, 
which  lies  half  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  latter  cape,  and  in  which 
coasters,  under  the  care  of  good  pilots,  may  take  refuge  in  time  of  need. 
The  local  fishermen  state  that,  in  case  of  necessity,  a  vessel  could  be  saved 
by  running  into  it  at  high  water,  if  nnder  12  feet  draught.  The  cove  is 
about  half  a  cable  wide  and  a  cable  deep,  and  the  rocks  bordering  its  sides 
are  always  uncovered.     The  water  flows  into  it  at  about  half  flood. 

DANGERS  off  the  COAST.— The  coast  between  Mondree  bay 
and  cape  Barfleur  is  studded  with  dangers,  some  of  which  extend  to  a 
distance  of  2^  miles  info  the  offing  j  between  them  and  the  shore  are  some 
winding  channels,  through  which  coasting  vessels  having  good  pilots,  may 
pass  even  at  low  water. 

Le  Sen  is  a  small  isolated  rock  just  awash  at  the  lowest  tides,  lying 
8  cables  from  the  shore,  in  a  N.E.  by  N.  direction  from  Coqueville  church. 

Basses  du  Sen. — ^These  shoals  are  numerous,  and  form  separate 
patches,  extending  to  the  west,  north,  and  east  of  the  Sen  rock.  The  shoal 
lying  to  the  northward  of  the  rock  is  8  cables  long  and  3  J  cables  broad,  and 
has  two  dangerous  rocky  heads  on  it,  on  one  of  which  there  are  only  4^ 
feet  water  ;  on  the  other  head,  which  from  its  position  is  called  the  Tete  du 
Milieu,  or  Middle  head,  there  are  6^  feet. 

To  the  north-west  of  this  shoal  lie  four  isolated  rocky  heads,  with  from 
SI  to  31  feet  water  over  them ;  the  outer  of  these  heads,  named  Tete  du 
Nord-Oaest,  or  North-west  head,  lies  with  Gatteville  church  tower  in  one 
with  a  rock,  which  is  awash  at  the  highest  neaps,  at  Neville  point  bearing 
S.E.  f  S.,  and  Saint  Pierre-Egiise  tower  S.  by  W.  J  W.  and  in  line  with  a 
house  at  Coqueville,  which  on  that  bearing  appears  to  stand  a  little  to  the 
right  of  the  church  tower  of  that  village, 

A  fifth  rocky  head,  with  9  fathoms  on  it,  lies  N.  by  E.  J  E,  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  Middle  head,  with  the  flashing  light  on 
Cherbourg  breakwater  bearing  W.  ^  S.  9^  miles,  and  the  revolving  light 
at  capo  Barfleui'  S.E.  ^  S.,  but  it  is  only  dangerous  on  account  of  the  heavy 
sea  occasioned  by  the  eddies. 


34  CAPE  DE  LA  HAGUE  TO  GAPE  BAKFLEUB.         [gbaf.  i. 

12  miles  the  eelipsea  arc  total  between  the  bright  faces^  but  within  12 
miles  there  is  a  faint  continuous  light.* 

When  the  sun  shines  on  these  towers,  the  southern  of  the  two  may  be 
seen  at  the  distance  of  15  or  16  miles,  and  the  old  or  northern  tower  at  11 
or  12  miles.  They  are  difficult  to  distinguish  when  at  some  distance  to  the 
North  or  N.E.  of  them  on  account  of  the  high  land  at  their  back,  this 
land,  however,  having  a  remai-kable  break  in  its  formation,  will  asast  to 
mark  their  position, — it  is  the  valley  of  the  little  river  Saire,  called  Coup^ 
du  Vaast,  which  lies  S.W.  by  W.  ^  W.  5^  miles  from  the  lighthouse.  La 
Pernelle  hill  is  also  a  remarkable  object,  and  attracts  particular  notice  by 
the  church  on  its  summit ;  it  rises  about  S.W.  §  S.  5  miles  from  the  light- 
house,  and  when  seen  from  the  S.S.E.,  the  N.N.E.,  or  the  N.N.W.,  it  has 
the  appearance  of  a  promontory  sloping  gradually  towards  the  sea. 

RAZ  de  BABFLEITR. — This  race  is  occasioned  by  the  violence 
with  which  the  flood  and  ebb  streams  precipitate  themselves  over  the  rocks 
forming  a  submarine  extension  from  cape  Barfleur.  These  rocks  are  based 
on  the  flat  joining  the  land  and  extending  about  a  mile,  from  East  to  S.£)* 
from  the  lighthouse,  as  far  as  the  line  on  which  the  church  towers  of  La 
Pernelle  and  Monf arville  are  seen  in  one.  They  form  three  separate  reefs  ; 
the  flrst,  with  irom  7  to  25  feet  water  on  it,  extends  E.  by  N.  half  a  mile 
from  the  lighthouse ;  the  second  reef,  separated  from  the  flrst  by  a  deep 
called  the  BrSche-du-Eaz,  has  a  rock  with  only  17  feet  over  it,  lying  E.  \  S. 
about  6^  cables  from  the  lighthouse ;  the  third  reef,  named  the  Biden  de 
Quenanville  lies  to  the  southward  of  the  others,  and  is  separated  from 
them  by  another  deep  about  4  cables  wide. 

This  latter  reef,  2  cables  broad,  extends  half  a  mile  in  an  E.S.E.  and 
W.N.W.  direction,  and  its  shoalest  spot  of  7  feet  lies  with  E^ville  church- 
spire  in  line  with  the  western  side  of  a  cluster  of  houses  at  the  ch&teau  of 
Mon£Eirville,t  and  the  guard-house  on  the  summit  of  the  eastern  point  of 
Boubaril  cove  touching  the  southern  part  of  the  highest  of  the  houses  (light 
keepers),  dwellings  which  stand  about  1^  cables  south-west  of  the  lighthouse. 

Barfleur  race  is  dangerous  at  the  springs  when  the  streams  run  through 
at  the  rate  of  8  or  9  knots,  and  with  a  fresh  wind  the  sea  breaks  violently 
upon  its  whole  extent.  The  broken  water  in  the  race  depends  generaUj 
upon  the  velocity  and  the  hour  of  the  tide,  it  sometimes  extends  to  a  great 
distance  in  an  East  direction  from  the  lighthouse.  The  sea  is  necessarily 
much  more  agitated  during  springs,  especially  with  north-east  gales ;  but 

at  neaps,  the  streams  are  not  so  strong,  and  the  race  is  quieter. 

.  -  ■ 

*  The  northern  or  old  tower  was  the  first  built,  and  served  as  a  lighthouse  until  the 
year  1836,  when  the  southern  tower  was  erected  for  that  purpose. 

t  This  ch&teau  stands  S.  |  W.  one  mile  from  Barfleur  church,  and  being  of  a  brown 
colour  it  contrasts  much  with  the  trees  surrounding  it. 


OHAP,  I.] 


■  CAPE   BAEFLEVB,   LIGHT  AND  BAZ. 


36 


At  slack  water,  and  with  a  moderate  breeze,  the  exteaeion  of  the  race  in 
only  a  strong  rippling,  and  the  moat  agitated  part  of  it  is  not  more  than 
2  or  3  cables  wide.  The  fishermen,  under  these  circumatances,  croa^  it, 
passing  throagh  the  Br^he  du  Boz.  The  Barfleur  pilots  also  take  amall 
vessels  through  it  at  this  time  ;  and  to  do  this  they  only  carry  the  necessary 
sail  to  steer  well,  so  as  to  avoid  the  broken  water  and  to  keep  the  vessel's 
head  to  the  sea. 


KAZ   DE  BAUXECE. — TID±L  CTlltAlfS. 


Tabu  shewing  tl»  dirwiioo  »cd  imi*  of  tht  Ti<kl  Straims,  daii^ 
OrdirukiT  Sprinp,  betw«ii  the  Caaqneu  «*  <»pe  BMfcor. 


Tiw  villi 

FonooM. 

r>WStnui. 

■'jS?' 

"— 

Btf» 

Dm- 

h.  B. 

bob. 

■. 

W.bjS.tX,limik«(nKi 
C-qnet.. 

Bcfimmvotkod 
rbb 

4    sbfin 
Athirti^Mi 

^^  : 

•'1 
•-• 

ii 

E 

«    M      . 

SrVir.   : 

to 

z 

!   Mtefcx 

•^.^•£1 

!■• 

" 

-■'ir&JA'"-"- 

Oood 

S    M     . 

SAW  - 

=, 

1  StntT 

HAI.  - 

ri 

WAW. 

l-T 

In  the  middle  of  AldenM7 

flood 

3     10      . 

hW.,...- 

»■« 

3    Wiftcrlo) 
t   4abeft«  ] 

*i*;#'-} 

7*« 

'  Li.'H.e«. 

flood 

S   ISbtfttn 
Athi«li-M(r 
t    WiAct 

E.bi8^         - 

Ii 

a   43    . 

Wat     - 

•■7 

S.B.  by  E.  1  E.  «  mfle. 

fromap«del>H*ene. 

flood 

3      Obdcm 

1    aoafter 

EutABJJ.- 

'5 

W.brS.         • 

*-a 

S.!f.ff,    ona    mile    ft™ 

4    90      . 

y.v.  . 

»■» 

N^.  li  mil.  from  Quei^ 

flood 

2    4Cbctoca 

Si.      • 

t'9 

*  a 

qiuyllletoit. 

>-.N.E..  ImlleirMm  Cher- 

Bceinnina of  flood 

3    10     . 

bourg  breatlnnteT. 

1    ^kftor 

»*_"•  : 

o-« 

Z 

,           ebb 

1    M     - 

a  30  r. 

W.S.V. 

ri 

ir.B.bTB.t  K,  SMmilei 

flood 

1    « before 

•  1 

— 

ftODOvadeUBiBiw. 

AthlghmtCT 

iIb 

1   4G>ft«r 

„           ebb 

0-0 

*  x  z 

T.N.W 

«•! 

s   Mbe^ne 

W.byN.*N.- 

*'! 

■    0 

1-1 

H.N.9.,  t  nltoi  tram  cme 

flood 

3    U     . 

.■Z 

Bsrfleur.                  ^^ 

a.B.     - 

fO 

1  • 

ebb 

1     iil&r 

-rwar- 

fl 

iii 

lf.NJ..T  maw  fMm  rapt 

flood 

3     Obefbn 

BarileuT. 

i  Manir 

S.B.  brB.iE. 

•■« 

E    so     , 

s.v.   • 

lU 

Eut,  n  nllN  train  cq« 

flood 

1   SObeBmi 

H.W.    . 

ft 

BirOwaT. 

0  mtitw 

IS:!":     : 

3-B 

a  e 

,          abb 

I  ".<.!.« 

0-a 

N.W.iTT.       . 

I'm 

37 


CHAPTER  II. 

BAIE  DE  LA  SEINE— CAPE  BAHFLEUB  TO  CAPE  D'AMTIFBR. 


VARIATION  m  1888. 
Cape  Barfleur        -  -  -        18°  20'  W. 

CapeD'Antifer      -  -  -        18°  (WW. 


BAIE  do  la  SEINE  is  comprised  between  cape  Barfleur  and  capft 
D'Antifer,  which  bear  E.  by  S.  |  S.  and  W.  bj  N.  |  N.  of  each  other, 
distant  56  miles.  Ite  circuit,  without  taking  into  account  the  ehorea  of  the 
mouth  o£  the  river  Seine  and  of  the  Grand  Vay,  is  about  96  miles,  and  it 
is  about  24  miles  deep  towards  the  mouth  of  the  river  Ome.* 

This  ha,y  is  open  to  all  winds  between  N.W.,  round  northerly,  and  N.£.,- 
and  a  heavy  sea  is  thrown  into  it  when  they  blow  with  any  strength. 
At  the  springs  the  streams,  noticed  at  page  91,  run  at  the  rate  of  3  or  4 
knots,  and  all  the  harbours  within  its  circuit  become  completely  dry 
even  before  low  water ;  during  the  neaps  there  is  little  water  in  any  of 
them,  and  they  are,  consequently,  not  then  accessible  to  vessels  of  lai^e 
dranght,  From  these  causes  a  vessel  would  be  in  a  dangerous  position 
if  embayed  here  during  strong  northerly  winds.  All  the  indentatioDS 
of  the  shores  of  the  bay,  which  lie  out  of  the  fair  line  of  the  tidal  streams, 
are  blocked  np  with  sand,  and  the  nocumulations  brought  in  to  them 
by  the  rivers.  The  principal  headlands  and  harbours  are  well  lighted, 
and  thus  distinctly  marked  during  the  night;  but,  unfortupately,  these 
useful  guides,  as  well  as  the  characteristics  of  the  coast  by  day,  are 
frequently  obscured  by  the  haze  and  fogs,  which  at  times  are  very 
embarrassing. 

FOBT  B  ABFLEITR  ia  situated  S.  by  W.  1^  miles  from  cape  Bar- 
fleuF  lighthouse,  and  its  position  is  clearly  pointed  out  by  the  church  built 
upon  the  northern  point  of  the  entrance.  The  port,  which  is  only  3  cables 
long  and  2  cables  broad  and  dries  at  low-water  springs,  is  sheltered  by  the 

*  Ste  Adniialt;  chart: — North  Coott  of  France,  sheet  XI.,  Barfleur  to  cape  d'Antifer,. 
Ko.  afilS,  acale, »  ••  0-5  inch. 


38  CAPE  BAEPLEUB  TO  CAPE  d'ANTIPEE,  [chap.  ii. 

land  from  South,  round  westerly,  to  N.N.E.,  and  is  protected  from  the  sea 
during  strong  easterly  winds  by  the  Antiquaires  rocks,  lying  in  front  of  the 
entrance.* 

A  small  jetty  of  stonework  extends  160  feet  in  a  S.S.W.  direction  from 
the  northern  point  of  the  entrance ;  there  is  also  a  breakwater  200  yards 
long,  extending  in  a  N^.E.  direction  from  the  southern  entrance  point. 

The  bottom  in  the  port  is  generally  good  for  vessels  taking  the  ground, 
being  composed  of  mud  mixed  with  broken  shells,  sand,  and  gravel,  but 
there  are  some  rocky  patches  upon  which  it  would  be  dangerous  to  place 
them.  The  best  and  most  commodious  berths  are  near  the  entrance, 
where  the  bottom  is  soft  and  the  tide  rises  higher  than  elsewhere,  but 
vessels  using  them  must  moor  securely  to  the  large  iron  rings  fixed  in 
the  rocks,  as  they  will  be  exposed  to  easterly  winds,  and  sea,  at  springs, 
when  the  Antiquaires  are  covered.  Vessels  loading  or  unloading  lie 
alongside  the  north  quay  where  the  bottom  is  4  feet  above  the  lowest  tides : 
the  bottom  over  the  rest  of  the  port  is  from  4  to  10  feet  above  the  same 
level.  Alongside  the  north  quay  there  are  16  to  17  feet  at  high-water 
ordinary  springs,  18  to  20  feet  at  equinoctial  springs,  and  9  to  10  feet  at 
neaps ;  thus  vessels  of  less  than  9  feet  draught  can  enter  the  harbour  at 
high  water  with  any  tide.  The  little  traffic  carried  on  is  in  flax,  hemp, 
butter,  oysters,  and  fi^h. 

The  outer  danger  in  approaching  port  Barfleur  is  a  rocky  shoal,  named 
Riden  des  Dents,  upon  which  there  is  a  dangerous  patch  with  only  9  feet 
water,  lyiDg  about  a  mile  from  the  shore  in  an  E.S.E.  direction  from 
Gatteville  church-tower.  The  Anglais  rocks  lie  about  N.E.  by  E.  3  cables 
from  the  jetty,  and  the  highest  head,  named  Vinberge  rock,  uncovers 
7  feet  at  low  water.  A  red  buoy  is  moored  near  the  southern  edge  of 
Vinberge  rock.  The  Hintar  rock,  lying  E.  J  S.  nearly  a  quarter  of  a  mile 
from  Vinberge  rock,  uncovers  5J  feet,  and  a  large  iron  ring  is  fixed  on  it 
for  the  convenience  of  vessels  that  may  warp  into  the  harbour  or  anchor 
near  it  in  the  road.  A  black  buoy  is  moored  near  the  western  edge  of 
Hiutar  rock. 

A  Life  Boat  is  stationed  at  port  Barfleur. 

LIGHTS. — Two  fixed  white  lights,  dioptric  and  of  the  fourth  order, 
are  exhibited,  one,  23  feet  above  high  water  on  the  southern  side  of  the 
entrance  to  port  Barfleur,  at  230  yards  W.S.W.  from  the  rocky  point 
abreast  the  north  jetty,  and  the  other  43  feet  above  high  water,  S. W.  bv 
W.  J  W.,  309  yards  from  the  former ;  both  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather 
from  a  distance  of  9  miles,  and  when  in  line  they  lead  to  the  entrance. 

*  See  Admiralty  plan  :--Fort  Barfleur  on  Sheet  XT.,  Ko.  2613. 


CB4».  n.]         POET  BABPLEUB.— SISBOTIONS. — TIDES.  89 

Dtreotio&8.'~VeeBelB  rouDding  cape  Barfleor  from  the  westwud 
and  bound  to  port  Barfleur  should,  after  passing  the  swell  at  the  out«r 
end  of  Baiidenr  race,  take  care  not'  to  go  to  the  westward  of  La  Femelle 
and  JUonfiuTJUe  churdi-tovers  in  liae,  bearing  S.W.,  unless  thej  are 
of  light  draught,  or  the  tide  has  rieen  considerably.  The  two  barbonr 
lights  in  line  bearing  8.W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  will  lead  through  the  channel  to  the 
port,  between  the  western  rocka  of  the  Antiquaires  reef  and  the  dangers 
bordering  the  shore  between  cape  Barfleur  and  the  northern  point  of  the 
port. 

The  channel  narrows  considerably  between  the  Hintar  and  the  Anglais 
rocks,  and  thence  to  the  entrance  of  the  port  it  is  only  60  fathoms  wide. 
The  eastern  side  of  the  channel  is  marked  by  two  beacons.  The  entrance 
to  the  port  is  only  300  feet  wide  between  the  extremities  of  the  jetty  and 
the  breakwater, 

Ancborage. — ^Vessels  arriving  before  high  water  with  off  shore 
winds  may  anchor  in  Barfleur  road,  which  is  a  small  deep  formed  between 
the  Plateau  des  Antiqnaires  and  the  Gaillarde  and  Anglais  rocks.  The 
best  anchorage  is  in  aboat  5  fathoms  over  good  holding  ground,  with 
La  Pernelle  and  MonffffviUe  church-towers  in  hne  bearing  S.W.,  and 
Crabet  windmill  jnst  open  to  the  northward  of  the  small  hillock  on  La 
Masse  point,  W.N.W.  This  anchorage  should  only  be  used  during  land 
winds  and  fine  weather ;  should  vessels,  however,  be  surprised  in  it  by 
northerly  or  easterly  winds  they  must  moor  with  open  hawse  to  the  north- 
ward, the  heaviest  anchor  being  to  the  enstward.  The  scope  of  cable 
should  be  short,  in  consequence  of  the  small  extent  of  the  anchorage,  and 
during  springs  it  will  be  necessary  to  shorten  in  as  tLe  water  falls  to  pre- 
vent tailing  on  the  rocks. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  port  Barfleur  at  8h. 
£9m. ;  at  the  foot  of  the  north  quay  equinoctial  springs  rise  1 8  to  20  feet ; 
ordinary  springs  17  feet ;  and  ordinary  neaps  13J  feet.  The  tides  are 
very  irrt^lar,  for  with  prevailing  south-westerly  winds  the  water  rises 
higher,  and  with  wind  in  the  opposite  direction  it  remains  lower  than  the 
general  level ;  and  this  peculiarity  takes  place  in  all  the  harbours  along  the 
coast  of  the  bay  of  the  Seine.  The  mean  duration  of  the  flood  is  5h.  60m., 
uid  of  the  ebb  6h.  35m.,  but  the  duration  of  the  flood  between  a  neap  and 
the  following  spring  tide  exceeds  6  hours,  and  sometimes  reaches  Q\  hours, 
whilst  between  a  spring  and  the  following  neap  it  is  below  the  mean. 

The  flood  stream  follows  the  direction  of  the  shore  from  cape  Barfleur, 
and  crosses  the  road  and  the  channel.  Its  rate  when  greatest  does  not 
exceed  3  knots,  and  decreases  suddenly  at  about  half  flood,  when  an 
eddy  seta  in  an  opposite   direction,  but   with   rathei*  less  speed.     This 


40  CAPE  BAEFLEUB  TO  CAPE  d'AXTIPEE.        [ohap.  ii. 

eddj  is  weak  about  high  water,  but  its  rate  increases  as  soou  as  the  ebb 
commences. 

Pointe  du  Moulard  bears  S.  by  E.  J  E.  l  J  miles  from  Barfleur 
church,  and  is  but  little  elevated.  Rocks  which  uncover  at  low  water  lie 
off  the  pointi  and  rockj  ground  with  shoal  patches  on  it  extends  about  a 
mile  from  the  shore.  The  outer  or  eastern  patch,  named  Basse  Orientale 
du  Moulard,  with  26  feet  lies  E.  ^  N.  9  cables  from  the  Moulard  rock  ;. 
when  upon  it  Crabet  windmill  is  in  line  with  the  northern  extremity  of 
rilet  at  Barfleur.  Vessels  should  keep  a  mile  from  the  coast  between 
Barfleur  and  this  point  whilst  the  Moulard  rock  is  uncovei*ed. 

Le  Moulard  is  a  granite  rock,  lying  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  1 J  cables  from 
pointe  du  Moulard  ;  this  rock  uncovers  23  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  and  is 
a  useful  and  necessary  mark  to  all  who  navigate  along  this  part  of  the 
coast ;  for  when  it  is  covered  and  the  sea  smooth,  thei*e  is  water  for  large 
vessels  over  all  the  hidden  dangers  between  cape  Barfleur  and  La 
Hougue.* 

FointO  do  Sairo  is  the  first  prominent  projection  to  the  southward 
of  cape  Barfleur,  the  intervening  coast  being  low,  and  appearing,  when 
seen  from  any  distance,  to  be  covered  with  wood,  above  which  church 
steeples  are  occasionally  visible.  La  Pernelle  hill  rises  N.W.  by  W.  3  miles 
from  the  point,  and  having  a  church  on  its  summit  forms  the  most  remark- 
able object  upon  this  part  of  the  coast. 

Reville  battery  is  situated  at  the  extremity  of  Saire  point,  and  one  of 
the  lights  for  affording  facility  for  entering  La  Hougue  road  at  night  is 
shown  from  its  south-western  face.f 

Ridons  dOS  EcraOUlottes  ^1*0  banks  composed  of  sand,  lying  about 
a  mile  from  the  shore  a  little  to  the  northward  of  the  line  on  which  the 
church  towers  of  La  Pernelle  and  Reville  are  in  line  with  not  less  than  28 
feet  upon  their  shoalest  parts ;  Gatteville  church-tower  and  the  Moulard 
rock  in  line,  N.N.W.  J  W.,  or  La  Hougue  fort  tower  in  line  with  the 
highest  house  of  the  lazaretto  on  Tatihou  island,  lead  to  the  eastward. 

RochOS  DrangUOt. — ^About  half  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  the 
Ecraoulettes  are  some  rocky  patches,  named  the  Dranguet  rocks,  which 
extend  a  mile  from  the  shore.  They  are  dangerous  even  for  small  vessels, 
and  there  is  a  high  sea  upon  them  during  a  weather  tide.  Barfleur  church- 
tower  in  line  with  the  Moulard  rock  leads  to  the  eastward  of  the  outer 
shoal,  which  has  25  feet  water  on  it. 

Le  Pont  de  Sairo,  or  Saire  bridge,  is  a  sort  of  rocky  causeway 
extending  a  mile  to  the  south-east  from  Saire  point  as  far  as  where  La 

'*'  The  granite  rock  along  this  shore  and  near  Barfleur  is  worked  in  large  quantities 
for  building  purposes, 
j  See  Admiralty  chart,  Bade  de  la  Hougue,  No.  2,748  ;  scale,  m  =^2  inches. 


CKAP.n.]  POINTB  HV  MOULAKD. — ST.  VAA8T.  41 

Hongae  fort  tower  is  seen  touchiag  the  north-weat  angle  of  the  fort  de 
I'Det,  W,  ^  S^  which  lies  close  to  the  southward  of  T&tihou  island.  With 
the  wind  npon  the  shore  the  sea  runs  very  high  upon  this  bridge  as  long  as 
the  tide  makes  to  the  north-east,  or  from  the  time  of  half  flood  to  low 
water. 

Basses  de  Bdville  and  de  la  Femelle.— Several  rocky 

patches  lie  outnde  Saire  point,  but  they  are  only  dangerous  in  bad  weather. 
Those  farthest  out  are  named  the  Biville  with  27  feet,  and  the  Femelle 
with  36  feet  water  on  them  at  the  lowest  tides.  They  both  lie  with  Barflenr 
lighthouse  in  line  with  the  summit  of  the  Moalard  rock  bearing  N.  J  W., 
the  former  about  IJ  miles,  and  the  Femelle  1}  miles  from  S&ire  point ;  the 
western  mark  for  the  Femelle  is,  Morsaline  lighthouse  jnst  showing  to  the 
Boutliward  of  the  fort  de  I'llet,  W.  )  N. 

From  Saire  point  the  direction  of  the  coast  changes,  and  trends  to  the 
sonth-west,  St  Yaast  point,  on  which  Htands  the  church  of  the  small  town 
whence  the  point  takes  its  name,  bears  S.W.  by  W.  J  W.  IJ  miles  from 
Saire  pointy  and  the  intermediate  coast  forms  n  deep  bight,  at  the  bottom  of 
which  the  waters  of  the  little  river  Saire,  after  winding  round  the  north 
side  of  La  Femelle  hill,  lose  theniBelves  upon  a  low  sandy  beach.  The 
fortifledislandofTatihon,  the  small  fort  de  I'llct,  built  on  the  rocks  close 
to  the  southward  of  that  island,  and  the  rocks  which  surround  them,  partly 
close  np  the  entrance  to  this  bight,  and  at  low  water  tbey  join  the  main 
land  by  a  beach  of  gravel,  sand,  and  rock. 

ST.  YAAST. — Tliis  small  tidal  harbour  is  formed  on  the  east  side 
of  the  town  of  St.  Vaast,  to  the  northward  of  a  jetty  of  masonry,  and  is 
sheltered  by  the  land  and  the  jetty,  from  South  to  North,  round  by  the 
west,  and  by  Tatihou  island  from  the  high  sea  and  the  strong  winds  from 
the  eastward.  There  is  a  fine  hospital  and  building  yards,  and  a  trade  in 
deals,  masts,  dried  fruits,  copper,  &c. 

The  bottom  in  this  harbour  is  composed  of  a  mixture  of  sand,  gravel,  and 
a  little  mud,  and  small  vessels  are  supported  on  it  by  their  legs,  and  vessels 
of  greater  burthen  by  heaps  of  faggots  tied  together  and  placed  in  their 
run  on  each  side  of  the  keel.  The  bottom  on  the  western  side  of  the 
harbour  dries  6  feet,  and  on  the  eastern  aide  4  feet,  above  the  level  of  the 
lowest  tides,  end  above  the  latter  ordinary  springs  rise  13  to  14  feet, 
equinoctial  springs  18  to  19  feet,  neaps  9  to  10  feet ;  hence  it  will  be  seen 
that  this  harbour  is  only  generally  accessible  to  vessels  under  9  feet  draught. 

The  southern  passage  to  the  harbour  is  between  the  rocky  ridge  extend- 
ing from  the  jetty  to  the  south  point  of  La  Hongue  fort,  and  Tatihou 
island  and  the  rocky  ledge  which  extends  half  a  mile  to  the  south-eastward 
of  the  fort  de  ITlet,  and  terminates  in  two  rocky  groups,  named  the  Dent 
and  the  Gavendest;  the  highest  head  of  the  former  uncovers  7  feet,  and 


42  CAPE  BABFLEXJK  TO  GAPE  D'ANTIFEE.         [c94F.a. 

the  Gavondest  6  feet  at  low  water.  The  Plateau  du  Ouest-Drix  spreads 
out  to  the  southward  ot  these  rocky  groups,  and  a  shoal  spot  of  16  feet  lies 
on  it,  at  3  cables  to  the  southward  of  the  Dent. 

A.  Life  Boat  i»  stationed  at  St.  Vaast. 

LIGHTS. — Three^a^rf  white  lights,  of  the  fourth  order,  have  been 
established  to  give  facility  at  night  for  entering  St.  Yaast  and  La  Hougue 
harbours,  and  La  Hougue  road.  The  northernmost  light  is  placed  on  the 
south-west  face  of  B6ville  battery,  at  the  extremity  of  Sure  point,  at 
36  feet  above  high  water,  and  when  in  one  with  cape  Barfleur  light, 
N.  i  E.,  marks  the  eastern  extent  of  the  dangers  near  Tatihou  island ;  the 
second  light  is  placed  on  the  south  extremity  of  La  Hougue  fort,  at  36  feet 
above  high  water ;  and  the  third  upon  the  heights  at  Morsalinc  at  282  feet 
above  high  water,  a  mast  26  feet  high  surmounted  by  a  ball  is  placed 
behind  the  lantern  of  this  light.  All  three  lights  may  be  seen  in  clear 
weather  at  the  distance  of  9  miles.  A  smell  Jixed  red  light,  visible  5  miles' 
is  shewn  from  the  end  of  St.  Vaast  jetty.  A  small  fixed  green  light  is  also 
shewn  from  the  extreme  north  end  of  the  dike  at  Saint  Yaast  harbour,  and 
is  visible  2  miles. 

Fog  signal. — ^A  bell  is  sounded  in  foggy  weather  from  the  extreme 
of  Saint  Vaast  jetty. 

DirOCtions. — When  bound  into  St.  Vaast  harbour  the  lighthouse 
upon  the  heights  at  Morsaline  kept  about  a  quarter  of  a  point  open  to  the 
southward  of  La  Hougue  lighthouse,  W.N.W.,  will  lead  to  the  southward 
of  the  shoal  patch  of  15  feet  on  the  Ouest-Dnx  flat,  and  when  the  spire 
of  Reville  church  appears  to  the  westward  of  the  fort  de  I'net,  steer  for 
the  end  of  the  jetty.  Morsaline  lighthouse  kept  exactly  in  the  centre  of 
the  interval  between  La  Hougue  lighthouse  and  the  large  tower  in  the 
middle  of  La  Hougue  fort  will  lead  between  the  Ouest-Drix  patch  and  the 
Gavendest;  but  this  passage  should  not  be  attempted  when  the  sea  is  heavy, 
neither  should  it  be  used  by  a  stranger  at  night. 

It  is  difficult  to  leave  St.  Vaast  harbour  with  the  wind  between  S. W.  and 
S.E.,  as  both  flood  and  ebb  run  to  the  northward ;  but  small  vessels  at  that 
time,  guided  by  pilots,  can  leave  the  harbour  at  the  moment  of  high*  water 
springs,  passing  to  the  northward  of  Tatihou  island,  and  keeping  about  a 
cable  from  its  northern  shore. 

Tides. — During  the  whole  of  the  flood  the  stream  runs  to  the  north- 
ward between  the  end  of  the  jetty  of  St.  Vaast  harbour  and  Tatihou  island, 
and  the  ebb  follows  the  same  direction  until  the  highest  part  of  the  beach 
joining  that  island  to  the  land  is  uncovered,  which  is  the  case  at  about 
half  ebb.  When  both  streams  are  at  their  greatest  strength  a  strong  eddy 
forms  at  the  end  of  the  jetty,  and  extends  over  the  whole  of  the  harbour, 
and  with  a  fresh  wind  from  North  to  N.E.  the  sea  within  is  much  confused; 


0UP.1I.J  PORT  DE   LA  HOUGUE.  43 

under  these  circumstances  reasels  which  are  placed  too  far  from   the 
jetty  strike  heavily  before  they  float,  and  also  before  they  ground  on  the 


PORT  de  la  HOUQXTE  is  the  name  given  to  a  good  grounding 
place,  4  cables  long  and  one  cable  wide,  lying  to  the  westward  of  and 
under  the  ramparts  of  La  Hougue  fort,  which  completely  shelters  it  from 
winds  and  high  sea  from  the  eastward ;  the  water,  however,  is  generally 
smooth  in  it,  except  during  northerly  gales,  or  when  it  blows  fresh  fVom 
S.S.W.  toS.E.  The  port  will  admit  vessels  of  about  Hfeetdranghtat  high 
water  springs  and  9  feet  at  neaps,  and  it  is  the  only  place  on  the  western 
side  of  the  bay  of  the  Seine,  which,  at  the  springs,  can  afford  shelter  in  bad 
weather  to  vessels  of  moderate  draught. 

The  best  grounding  places  in  this  port  are  comprised  between  the  parallel 
of  the  large  tower  which  stands  in  the  middle  of  the  fort,  and  the  wooden 
storehouse  at  the  foot  of  the  glacis,  north  of  the  fort ;  and  they  are  bounded, 
to  the  westward  by  a  shallow  channel  which  receives  all  the  water  flowing 
from  the  land.  The  bottom  abreast  the  tower  dries  7^  feet,  and  abreast  the 
wooden  storehouse  9|  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides;  it  gradually 
rises  towards  the  northern  part  of  the  harbour. 

Vessels  should  moor  with  4  hawsers,  their  heads  to  the  westward  and 
stems  to  the  fort,  and  as  close  as  possible  to  the  rocks  lying  at  the  foot  of 
the  ramparts.  The  bottom  is  hard,  being  a  mixture  of  muddy  sand  and 
gravel,  and  yields  but  little  under  vessels  when  aground  upon  it  Sharp 
vessels  will  be  much  strained  unless  care  be  taken  to  use  their  legs,  or 
bundles  of  faggots  fastened  in  their  run  on  each  side  of  the  kecL 

DANGrERS> — The  following  dangers  must  be  avoided  when  ap- 
proaching Port  de  la  Hougue,  especially  if  there  be  a  high  sea  on  : — 

Le  Msnquet,  a  small  isolated  ruck  which  uncovers  6  feet,  lying 
E.S.E.  a  shoii  half  mile  from  La  Hougue  lighthouse,  and  from  its  advanced 
position  is  much  in  the  way  of  vessels  navigating  between  La  Hougue  and 
St.  Vaast.  A  black  buoy  is  moored  near  the  eastern  edge  of  this 
rock. 

Roche  Joly,  the  top  of  which  uncovers  3  ieet,  lies  W.S.W.  6^  cables 
from  La  Hougue  lighthouse,  and  the  sea  breaks  on  it  in  bad  weather. 

Jean  de  laiDune  is  a  small  group  composed  of  four  rooky  heads, 
which  only  uncover  at  the  springs;  the  highest  head  is  awash  at  the 
lowest  tides,  and  lies  S.W.  by  S.  7  cables  from  La  Hougue  lighthouse. 
The  summits  of  the  Jean  de  la  Dune,  the  Joly,  and  another  rock  lying 
to  the  southward  of  it,  are  the  highest  heads  of  a  rocky  bottom,  named 
the  Verdieres  reef,  which  extends  in  a  north  and  south   line  along  the 


44  CAPE  BAEFLEUB  TO  CAPE  D'ANTIFEH.         [chaf.  n. 

shore,  and  upon  which  there  is  a  high  sea  when  the  wind  blows  upon  the 
coast. 

RADE  de  la  HOUGUE. — This  road  lies  to  the  south-eastward  o£ 
port  de  la  Hougue,  and  although  the  sand-banks  in  its  vicinity  are  well 
known  to  be  changeable,  yet  it  affords  good  anchorage  for  vessels  of 
large  draught  It  extends  to  the  westward  as  far  as  the  line  on  which  the 
spires  of  R^ville  and  St.  Yaast  churches  are  seen  in  one,  N.N.E.  |  E., 
and  to  the  eastward  as  far  as  the  Ouest-Driz  flat  and  the  northern  part 
of  the  Banc  de  la  Rade  ;  its  northern  limit  is  on  the  parallel  of  the  Dent 
and  the  Gavendest  rocks,  both  of  which  have  red  buoys  on  them,  and  its 
southern  boundary  the  small  sand-bank  named  Haut-fond  de  la  Grande 
Rade. 

The  holding  is  good  in  almost  every  part  of  this  road,  and  vessels  are  well 
sheltered  in  it  by  the  land  from  winds  between  S.S.W.  and  N.W.,  which 
are  frequent  and  dangerous  in  winter ;  but  the  anchorage  is  open  to  winds 
from  N.N.E.  to  S.S.E.,  which  when  moderate  only  send  in  a  troublesome 
swell,  but  when  blowing  with  any  strength  they  raise  a  heavy  sea.  Vessels 
suspected  of  having  contagious  diseases  on  board  are  sent  from  all  the 
northern  parts  of  France  to  ride  out  their  quarantine  in  this  road,  and  at 
times  there  are  several  at  anchor  in  if.  The  lazaretto  is  on  the  western  side 
of  Tatihou  island. 

In  the  southern  pait  of  La  Hougue  road  thci-e  is  a  small  deep,  named  the 
Grande  Rade,  about  6  cables  long,  in  a  N.E.  and  S.W.  direction,  and  2  cables 
broad,  where  large  vessels  may  anchor  on  excellent  holding  ground. 
The  best  position  is  in  the  centre  of  the  deep  in  7  to  8  fathoms,  with  the 
church  towers  of  La  Pernelle  and  St.  Yaast  in  one,  N.  by  W.  J  W.,  and  the 
Bois  de  la  Ville  midway  between  Quineville  church  tower  and  a  guard 
house  on  the  shore. 

La  Petite  Rade  is  the  space  included  between  the  Grande  Rade  and  the 
rocks  off  La  Hougue  fort,  but  the  good  holding  ground  in  it  does  not  extend, 
much  to  the  eastward  of  the  line  on  which  Reville  light  is  seen  touching 
the  south-east  angle  of  the  fort  de  I'llet.  Between  this  limit  and  the  Grande 
Rade  the  holding  ground  is  indifferent,  being  composed  of  sand  and  broken 
shells,  and  fresh  easterly  winds  throw  in  a  heavy  sea. 

The  pilots  anchor  vessels  in  about  4  fSathoms  over  good  holding  ground  in 
that  space,  which  has  the  following  limits : — Quetehou  church  tower  in  line 
with  the  south  point  of  La  Hougue  point ;  Morsaline  and  La  Hougue  light- 
houses in  one,  and  Reville  lighthouse  seen  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  the  fort 
de  rilet.  From  this  anchorage  vessels  of  moderate  draught  may  run  for 
refuge  into  port  de  la  Hougue  should  they  suffer  much  from  the  high  sea 
caused  by  easterly  winds.  If  drawing  too  much  water  to  enter  the  port 
during  the  neaps,  they  can  anchor  in  the  northern  part  of  La  Hougue  road 


OTiP.n.]  BADE  DE   LA  HOUGUE. — ^DIBECTIONS.  45 

as  the  boldiDg  ground  there  ia  good,  and  ahtrald  the  wind  blow  hard  from 
ibe  N'.E.  they  will  in  some  degree  be  sheltered  A^m  the  sea  bj  Tatihou 
island  and  the  rocks  to  the  southward. 

Directions' — The  entrance  to  La  Hougue  road  is  between  the  shoal 
spot  of  IS  feet  water  on  the  Ouest-Drix  flat,  and  the  norUiem  part  of  the 
Banc  de  la  Bade  (named  the  Vee  shoal)  which  lie  N.  J  'W.  and  S. }  E.  from 
each  other,  distant  9  cables.  There  are  from  11  to  15feet  upon  the  ehoal 
spots  ot  the  Banc  de  la  Bade,  and  the  northern  point  of  that  bank,  upon 
which  there  are  19  feet,  lies  one  cable  eastward  of  the  line  on  which 
Rerille  church  spire  is  seen  a  little  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  tower  on 
Tstihou  island,  and  La  Hougue  lighthouse  beariug  N.W.  ^  W.  From  this 
point  a  bank,  named  Haut-Foad  du  Banc  de  la  Rade,  with  5  to  6  fathoms 
on  it,  extends  in  a  north-east  direction  as  far  as  where  cape  Barflcur  and 
R^ille  lighthouses  are  in  one,  and  La  Hougno  liglithouse  bears  N.W.  hy 
W.  i  W. 

Approaching  La  Hougue  ix>ad  from  the  noiihward  the  mariner  should 
take  care  that  his  vessel  ia  not  drifted  to  the  southward  of  it  b^  the  dood 
Stream,  which,  from  the  extremity  of  the  race  off  cape  Barfleur  to  about  ^ 
miles  off  Saire  point  runs  to  the  southward,  following  the  direction  of  the 
coast,  at  the  rate  of  S  knots  during  springs ;  close  to  Saii-e  point  it  changes 
its  direction  Buddenly  to  the  sonth-wesi.  Vessels  of  large  draught  should 
keep  outside  the  several  shoal  patches  lying  off  the  coast,  which  they  may 
do  by  attending  to  the  marks  aU'eady  given  in  page  39  for  leading  to  the 
eastward  of  tfaem.  When  to  the  southward  of  the  shoal  water  off  Saire 
point,  cape  Barfleur  lighthouse  must  not  be  brought  to  the  westward  of 
Bailie  lighthouse  in  order  to  avoid  the  dangers  to  the  eastward  of  Tatibou 
island,  and  having  arrived  at  the  position  where  the  line  of  cape  Barfleur 
and  B^ville  lighthouses  in  one,  is  crossed  by  the  line  of  Morsaline  and  La 
Hoi^e  lighthouses  in  one,  steer  W,S.W.  for  the  Grande  Bade.  In  run- 
ning this  course,  should  it  be  towards  low  water,  cape  Barfleur  light  will 
be  hid  a  few  moments  by  the  tower  on  Tatihou,  but  anchor  directly  it 
reappears,  bearing  N.  by  £.  \  E. 

If  bound  for  the  anchorage  in  the  norlbcm  part  of  La  Hougue  road,  run 
in  with  Morsaline  lighthouse  just  open  to  the  southward  of  La  Hougue 
lighthouse,  which  will  lead  about  a  cable  to  the  southward  of  the  shoal 
patch  on  the  Ouest-Drix,  and  anchor  as  soon  as  B^ville  light  is  hidden  by 
the  fort  de  I'llet,  or  by  the  tower  on  Tatihou  should  the  light  he  above  the 
fort,  which  may  he  the  case  towards  high  water. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  port  de  la  Hougue,  at 
8b.  42m.,  springs  rise  18^  feet  j  neaps  14^  feet,  and  the  tide  rises  abreast 
the  large  tower  in  the  middle  of  the  fort,  14  to  15  feet  at  ordinary  springs, 


46  CAPE  BARFLEUR  TO  CAPE  D*AKT1TER.         [chaf.ix. 

and  16  to  17  feet  at  equinoctial  nprings.  The  ri!«e  is  from  7^  to  S\  feet  at  the 
lowe«t  neaps  ^ut  in  tlic  sonthem  part  of  the  har1>our  it  is  2  or  8  fieet 
hij^her,  and  vcsscIh  of  alKiut  9  feet  draught  maybe  placed  there  at  that  time. 
With  frcMh  winds  from  S.W.  to  \VeJ«t,  the  tide  risos  a  foot  or  two  higher 
than  in  calm  weather,  and  strong  winds  from  N.E.  to  North  produce  a 
contrary  c;Scct. 

The  stream  of  floo<l,  at  springs,  in  the  middle  of  La  Ilougue  road,  begins 
about  4}  hours  bofoi*e  the  timo  of  high  water  in  the  port,  and  runs  towards 
the  W.S.W.  Its  greatest  rate  is  2J  knot**,  which  is  at  about  2}  hours 
before  high  ^vatcr  in  the  hnrbour,  and  its  mean  duration  is  5h.  20m.  The 
ebb  stream  commences  al)out  25  minutes  after  high  water  in  the  port, 
and  its  mean  duration  is  7h.  10m.  Its  direction  is  towards  the  N.E.  and 
E.N.E.,  and  its  greatest  rate,  2\  knots,  occurs  about  4h.  20m.  after  high 
water, 

ILES  ST.  MARCOUP.— These  two  islands,  the  rocks  around 
them  which  uncover  at  low  water,  and  the  Bastin  rock,  lie  nearly  midway 
between  port  de  la  Hougue  and  tlie  entrance  to  the  Grand  Vay,  at  about 
8^  miles  from  the  coast,  and  occupy  a  space  of  about  four-fifths  of  a  mile 
long,  in  an  E.N.E.  and  W.S.W.  direction,  and  a  quarter  of  a  mile  broad.  The 
islands  are  but  little  elevated  above  the  level  of  high  water,  but  during  the 
day  the  fort  and  especially  the  large  bomb-proof  tower  upon  the  highest 
point  of  the  eastern  island  may  be  seen  from  a  distance  of  9  to  12 
miles. 

These  islands  are  separated  by  a  narrow  channel,  in  which  it  would  be 
dangerous  to  anchor  in  bad  weather,  as  the  tidal  streams  run  through  it 
with  great  rapidity  ;  but  coasting  vessels  having  missed  la  Hougue  road, 
with  a  strong  N.W.  wind  and  a  flood  tide,  may  anchor  during  the  remainder 
of  the  flood  in  a  small  bight,  named  Mannette,  on  the  southern  shore  of  the 
western  island,  provided  they  are  moored  securely  and  steadied  by  a 
hawser  to  the  shore,  for  the  eddies  formed  by  the  points  of  that  island 
occasion  a  heavy  sea. 

LIGHT. — A  jftxed  white  light  of  the  fourth  order,  is  exhibited  from 
the  tower  upon  the  eastern  St.  Marcouf  island,  at  56  feet  above  high-water, 
and  in  dear  weather  is  visible  from  a  distance  of  8  miles. 

BANC  de  ST.  MARCOUF  extends  3  miles  in  a  N.N.W.  direc- 
tion from  the  eastern  St.  Marcouf  island,  and  the  soundings  vary  from  26 
to  34  feet  between  it  and  the  southern  part  of  the  Banc  de  la  Bade, 
which  lies  three-quarters  of  a  mile  nearer  the  land.    These  two  banks 

■ 

appear  to  be  formed  of  large  masses  of  sand  and  broken  shells  having-  7  to 
12  feet  upon  the  shoalest  parts  of  the  St  Marcouf,  and  11  to  15  upon  the 
shoal  spots  of  the  Banc  de  la  Bade,    The  tides  cross  them  obliquely  and 


cHA».iiO     ISLES   ST.   MAEOOTJF. — BANC  DTJ   CARDONNET.        47 

occasion  strong  eddies  even  id  calm  weather,  and  with  easterly  winds  or 
aortherly  gales  the  sea  breaks  violendy  upon  both  bonks  from  half-ebb  to 
half-flood.  St.  Marcouf  bank  is  bounded  at  its  northern  extremity'  by  a 
narrow  ridge  of  sand,  running  about  If  miles  in  an  easterly  direction 
nearly  at  right  angles  with  the  Banc  de  laRade,  and  as  it  lies  nearly  across 
the  tidal  streams,  the  eddies  produced  by  it,  at  spiings,  cause  a  high  sea 
when  it  blows  hard. 

BANC  du  CABDONNET  extends  in  a  S.E.  \  S.  direction  6^ 
miles  from  the  western  St.  Marcouf  island  (o  about  N.  j  E,  3^  miles  from 
the  eastern  mill  at  Criqueville,  and  forms,  at  about  4  miles  from  the  coast, 
a  barrier  in  front  of  the  Grand  Vay ;  from  its  south-eastern  extreme,  in  6 
fathoms,  l,Colleville  church-tower  is  in  one  with  Perc4e  point  bearing 
S.S.E.  ^  E,,  and  the  western  windmill  at  Criqueville  is  in  line  with  the 
buildings  at  Branche  farm  S.S.W.  ^  W.  The  bank  is  composed  of  sand 
and  broken  shells,  and  slopes  gradually  towards  the  south,  but  its  northern 
side  is  steep-t«,  which  causes  the  sea  to  break  with  great  violence  upon  it 
when  the  wind  is  fresh  from  N.W.  to  N.E.,  or  when  there  is  much  swell 
on,  and  especially  dnring  the  ebb  tide.  The  ehoalest  spots  on  the  bank,  from 
4  to  10  feet,  extend  from  West  to  S.S.E.  about  a  mile  from  the  island,  and 
tJie  sea  breaks  upon  them  with  great  fury  with  easterly  gales  on  the  ebb. 
Farther  to  the  eastward,  and  towards  the  meridian  of  Uaisy  church,  the 
depths  TAiy  from  14  to  17  feet  on  the  bank,  and  gradually  deepen  towards 
its  south-eastern  extremity. 

CHANNEL  between  ILES  ST.  KARCOUF  and  the 

COAST.~~This  channel,  which  b^^s  to  the  south-east  on  the  meridian 
of  the  Criqueville  windmills  and  terminates  to  the  north-west  at  La  Hougue 
road,  is  deep,  having  1 1  fathoms  at  its  south-eastern  entrance,  gradually  shoal- 
ing to  the  north-west.  It  affords  good  anchorage,  except  to  the  W.S.W.  of 
the  St.  Marcouf  islands,  where  a  rocky  bottom  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
wide  almost  crosses  the  channel  from  the  shore,  and  also  to  the  E.S.E. 
and  S.E.  of  Quineville,  where  the  rocky  shoab  of  St.  Floxel  extend  l|milelf 
from  the  land. 

The  dangers  to  be  avoided  at  tow  water  are,  the  north-west  part  of  the 
Cardonnet,  which  forms  a  small  bank  with  10  to  14  feet  water  on  it  lying 
in  a  S.S.E.  and  NJf^.W.  direction,  at  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  western  St.  Marcouf  island ;  the  rocky  shoals  of  St,  Floxel, 
which  lie  to  tbe  sontii-east  of  Quineville  church,  uid  extend  from  the  land 
os&r  08  where  La  Femelle  church  is  seen  2°  to  the  eastward  of  La  Hougue 
towfir ;  ud  the  Baveqni^  rocks,  which  micover  at  low  water  and  bordar 
tbe  beach  frtan  the  parallel  of  St.  Maicouf  chnroh,  as  iar  aa  a  liae  E.N^. 
from  Quineville  church. 


48  CAPE  BABFLEUR  TO  CAPE  D'AKTIFEB.  [ohaf.  n. 

The  local  authorities  say  that  a  vessel  well  found  might  ride  out  a  heavy 
gale  from  the  north-eastward  in  this  channel,  when  under  shelter  of  the 
high  parts  of  the  Cardonnet,  the  St.  Marcouf,  and  the  Rade  banksi  which 
break  the  violence  of  the  sea ;  but  this  is  but  a  precarious  shelter,  and 
should  only  be  resorted  to  as  a  last  resource,  when  a  vessel  is  embayed  and 
all  means  of  getting  out  have  failed  of  success,  for  the  sea  at  that  time  is 
said  to  be  very  heavy  in  the  channel  between  the  banks  during  the  flood, 
and  a  breaking  sea  is  caused  by  the  weather  tide  on  the  ebb.  If  a  vessel 
is  obliged  to  bring  up  in  this  channel,  such  an  anchorage  should  bo  sought 
for,  that  in  case  she  is  unable  to  withstand  the  high  sea  and  must  run 
ashore,  it  may  be  on  that  part  of  the  coast,  which  offers  a  chance  of  safety 
for  the  crew.  The  Magdeleine  bank  at  the  entrance  of  the  Grand  Vay 
should,  however,  be  carefully  avoided,  as  it  is  composed  of  hard  sand,  and 
a  vessel  running  upon  it  would  go  to  pieces  in  a  few  hours. 

Directions. — The  cliannel  between  the  St.  Marcouf  and  Cardonnet 
banks  and  the  coast  may  be  taken,  even  at  low  water,  provided  the  weather 
be  moderate,  and  strict  attention  paid  to  the  lead.  With  a  fair  wind 
Fercee  point  and  Huppian  wood  in  line  N.W,  \  N.  will  lead  in  the  deepest 
water  between  the  meridian  of  Maisy  church  and  the  western  St.  Marcouf 
island.  From  thence  steer  to  the  north-west  until  La  Pemelle  church  tower 
appears  3  or  4  degrees  open  to  the  eastward  of  La  Hougue  tower ;  keep 
this  mark  on  until  Quineville  church  bears  W.S. W.,  then  haul  to  the  north- 
ward for  Bade  de  la  Hougue. 

Tides. — III  the  channel  between  the  St.  Marcouf  islands  and  the  shore, 
the  rate  of  the  streams  at  springs  is  about  3  knots,  and  their  maximum 
speed  takes  place  at  about  the  time  of  half  flood  and  half  ebb  in  port  de  la 
Hougue.  The  direction  of  the  flood  in  La  Hougue  road  is  W.S.W. ;  at  the 
north  end  of  St.  Marcouf  bank  S. W.  by  W. ;  around  the  islands  S.S.W. 
upon  the  middle  of  the  Cardonnet  bank  South  ;  und  at  about  a  mile  to  the 
eastward  of  the  extremity  of  that  bank  S.E.  In  the  middle  of  the  channel, 
however,  the  flood  runs  nearly  parallel  with  the  shore  from  the  road  as  far 
as  the  meridian  of  the  St.  Marcouf  islands,  it  then  turns  to  the  S.S.W. 
towards  the  entrance  of  the  Grand  Vay,  beyond  which  it  again  follows  its 
original  course  parallel  to  the  shore.  The  ebb  is  rather  less  rapid  than  the 
flood,  and  runs  nearly  in  an  opposite  direction.  At  neaps  both  streams 
are  feeble,  except  at  the  entrance  of  the  Grand  Yay. 

GRAND  VAY. — The  shore  is  flat  and  composed  for  the  most  part 
of  sand  hills  from  port  de  la  Hougue  to  the  entrance  of  the  Grand  Vay, 
which  is  an  indentation  of  the  coast,  formed  in  the  south-west  angle  of  the 
bay  of  the  Seine,  about  4  miles  wide,  and  6  miles  deep,  at  the  bottom  of 
which  are  the  small  tidal  harbours  of  Carentan  and  Isigny.    The  entrance 


ciiAV.  u.]     BANC   DE   LA  MAGDELEIKE. — UAISY  POINT.  49 

to  this  deep  bight,  l^ing  5  miles  to  the  Bouthward  <£  the  St.  Marcouf 
islands,  is  almost  entirely  filled  up  with  sand,  and  would  probably  cease  to 
be  navigable  were  it  not  for  the  annual  freghets  from  the  small  rivers,  the 
Taute  and  tlie  Douve  on  its  western  shore,  and  the  Vire  and  the  Aure  on 
its  eastern  shore,  which  form  channels  with  just  sufficient  depth  to  admit 
vessels  of  moderate  draught  going  up  at  high  tides  to  Isign  j,  nnd  even  to 
Carentan.  Formerly  the  tide  flowed  far  into  the  interior,  and  the  salt 
water  spread  itself  over  the  mea<lows  hordering  the  rivers ;  but  to  remedy 
this,  dykes  have  been  thrown  up  at  the  mouth  of  eiich  nver,  with  flood 
gate?,  which  close  with  the  rising  tide.  In  1857  there  were  24  feet  at  high 
wafer  in  the  Vire  and  the  Aure  at  the  equinoxes,  and  13  feet  at  ordinary 
Bpriugs. 

Banc  de  la  Magdeleine. — The  entrance  to  tlie  Grand  Vey  is  more 
than  half  closed  up  bj  the  Magdeleine  bank,  which  uncovers  at  low  water 
upwards  of  2^  miles  from  the  western  shore,  and  which  la  the  continuation 
of  the  sandy  beach,  half  a  mile  wide,  bordering  the  coast  from  port  de  la 
Hougue.  The  highest  parts  of  this  hank  are  scarcely  covered  at  high-water 
neaps,  and  it  is  considered  the  most  dangerous  of  the  Grand  Vay  banks,  for 
the  streams  cross  it  with  great  rapidity,  and  raise  a  heavy  sea  on  a  weather 
tide.  The  sand  also  which  composes  it  is  so  hard  that  a  vessel  grounding 
iipon  it  in  bad  weather  would  go  to  pieces  in  a  few  hours.  A  buoy  with 
stafi  and  ball  is  moored  off  its  noithern  e:Ige,  and  lies  N.E.  by  N,  three 
quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  red  buoy  at  the  entrance  of  the  channel  leading 
to  Carentan. 

Banc  de  la  Ravine  forma  a  projection  of  Coquebourg  ix)int,  and 
divides  the  lower  courses  of  (he  rivers  Taute  and  the  Vire.  It  extends  to 
the  northward  us  far  as  the  parallel  of  Maisy  point,  its  summit  is  barely 
covered  at  spring  tides,  and  the  greater  part  of  its  surface  remains  dry 
during  the  neaps.  The  whole  space  between  Maisy  point  and  this  bank  is 
occupied  by  fhifting  sands;  that  named  the  Feraiilon  is  the  only  one  that 
does  not  change  its  surface,  being  covered  with  gravel,  below  which  there 
is  said  to  be  solid  rock. 

■  There  is  little  danger  in  grounding  upon  the  sands  within  the  Grand 
Vay  with  smooth  water  during  the  dry  season  in  summer,  for  the  tides 
then  have  but  little  strength  ;  but  during  abundant  rains  or  equinoctial 
tides  the  ebb  slreaui  is  very  strong,  and  heaps  up  the  sand  under  the 
vessels  which  lie  aground,  causing  them  (o  list  over  and  upset. 

MAISY    POINT,  the  eastern  point  of  ihe  Grand   Vay,  is   very 

low,  but  is  dsfended  against  Ihe  lieavy  sea,  which  sometimes  rolls  in  upon 

the  coast,  by  a  ledge,  named  Roche'*  de  Grand  Camp,  extending  1^  miles 

to  the  westward  and  :J|  miles  to  the  eastwaid  of  the  point.      This  ledge  is 

Q  7049.  D 


60  CAPE   BABFLEUB  TO  CAPE  d'aXTIFER.         [cb*p.  ii. 

markctl  by  four  btiiclc  buors  Ijing  from  a  qiuu-ter  to  half  &  mile  outside  its 
outor  dig^,  Tlie  fine  church  spire  at  Maisy,  niul  the  Tillage  and  church  at 
Grand  Camp,  serve  to  point  out  the  uatronce  of  the  Grand  Vaj. 

LIGHT. — From  n  mast  situated  b7o  jards  to  the  westward  of  Grand 
Camp  cliurt'h,  a  ^xfil  white  light  is  exhibited  at  an  elevation  of  26  feet 
above  high  water,  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  ilistDnce  of  6  miles. 

Anchorage. — There  is  gooil  anchorage  off  the  catronce  of  the 
Grand  Vay,  iu  Capt'lie  i-oad,  where,  during  southerly  winds,  vessels  may 
remain  until  the  tide  has  risen  suffieiimtlj-  to  allow  ibem  to  enter  the 
narron.".  This  antrhoring  ground,  nboiil  a  mile  in  extent,  is  bounded  to- 
wards the  west  by  a  line  on  which  Careotim  church  tower  is  in  one  with 
the  eai^tcrn  houws  of  Grand  Vny  liamlet :  towards  the  east  by  the  rocky 
bottom  which  terminates  in  llic  direction  of  the  small  foit  in  line  with 
Maisy  clmrch  spire  bearing  S.  by  W. ;  and  towards  the  north  by  the  high 
laud  of  Menil,  which  rises  to  the  eastward  of  port-en-Bessin,  in  line  with 
Perct^  point ;  the  latter  mark  will  also  lead  outside  the  rocky  ledge  and 
dangers  off  Grand  Camp. 

The  best  position  for  anchoring  is,  with  the  end  of  Menil  cliffi  in  line 
with  Pcrcee  point,  or  a  little  open  to  the  northward  of  it,  and  the  small  fort 
about  A  quarter  of  a  point  open  to  the  eastward  of  Maisy  spire.  The 
flofKl  runs  at  this  anchorage  S.S.AV.  and  S.W.  by  S.,  and  the  stream 
changes  about  half  on  hour  before  high  water.  The  most  favourable  time 
for  entering  the  narrows  is  about  IJ  hours  before  high  water,  but  with 
a  head  wind  it  will  be  prudent  to  weigh  so  as  to  arrive  at  Grouin  point 
on  the  eastern  shore  of  the  Grand  Vay,  before  the  commencement  of  the 
ebb. 

ISIGNT,  situated  6  miles  from  the  entrance  of  the  Grand  Vay  up  the 
river  Aure,  which  falls  into  the  river  Vire,  has  a  small  tidal  harbour,  a 
stone  quay  256  feet  in  length,  and  two  small  unloading  slips.  The  staple 
of  the  town  is  salt  butter,  of  which  100,000  pots,  yielding  60,000/.,  are 
exported  annually  ;  besides  the  butter,  the  exports  are  grain,  colza  oil,  and 
stone,  its  population  being  about  2,500. 

This  harbour  fills  with  mud  during  the  summer  when  there  is  but  little 
water  in  the  Aure,  but  the  freshets,  which  are  occasioned  by  heavy  raina, 
clear  it  out  perioilically,  driving  the  mud  into  the  channels.  The  water 
rises  9i  feet  at  springs  at  the  foot  of  the  quay,  and  there  are  2  or  3  feet 
more  when  the  harbour  is  washed  out.  Vessels  are  lightened  during  the 
neaps  on  the  sliore  at  Grouin  or  Beuzevilie  before  they  can  proceed  up  to 
the  harbour. 

The  Passe  d'Isigny,  lying  between  the  westera  end  of  the  Eoches  de 
Grand  Camp  and  the  Banc  Feraillon,  is  the  name  of  the  channel  leading 


CTiP-  n.]  ISIGNT.— OAEENTAN.  51 

up  to  Isigny,  The  channel  h  trell  marked  by  buoyB  and  beacons  bs  far 
as  Grrouin  point,  from  whence  it  is  embanked  up  io  Isigny  ;  it  lies  in  a 
N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.  direction  from  the  point  to  the  junction  of  the 
rivers  Aure  and  Yire,  bat  notwithstanding  all  these  aids,  it  is  nccesaary  for 
a  stranger  to  have  a  pilot. 

LIGHTS. — There  are  at  Isigny  i<no  fixed  white  harbour  lights,  bear- 
ing N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.  from  each  other,  654  yards  apart.  These 
leading  lights,  which  are  dioptric  and  of  the  fourth  order,  are  elevated 
respectively  23  and  46  feet  above  high  water  and  may  be  seen  in  clear 
weather  fi-om  a  distance  of  12  miles. 

CARENTAN,  situated  up  the  river  Taute  at  about  9  miles  from  the 
entrance  of  the  Grand  Vay,  at  the  position  where  the  Yire  and  Taute  canal 
terminates,  has  also  a  small  tidal  harbour.  The  Carentan  channel  receives 
the  waters  of  this  canal  as  well  as  of  the  rivers  Taute  and  Douve,  and  its 
depth  is  maintfuned  by  these  united  streams,  but,  as  the  rise  of  water  is  so 
small,  very  few  vessels  arrive  up  to  the  harbour,  but  take  in  and  discharge 
their  cargoes  upou  the  dykes  at  Br^rand,  There  is  a  castle  and  fortifica- 
tions, and  the  town  contains  a  handsome  church  surmounted  by  a  spire. 
The  manufactures  are  lace  and  cotton  goods,  and  the  trade  is  in  cattle, 
horses,  hemp,  flax,  cider,  butter,  and  honey. 

The  frequent  changes  which  take  place  in  the  channel  leading  to 
Carentan  render  it  dangerous  to  attempt  without  a  pilot,  for  to  ground 
upon  any  of  the  banks  at  the  entrance  of  the  Grand  Vay  with  a  strong 
north-easterly  wind,  or  upon  the  borders  of  the  channel  within  the 
entrance  during  the  rainy  season,  when  the  ebb  tide  is  rapid,  would  causa 
the  loss  of  the  vessel. 

This  channel  is  long  and  winding  and  only  practicable  during  springs 
for  vessels  of  7  or  8  feet  draught ;  it  is  buoyed  as  &r  as  abreast  of  the 
village  of  Grand  Vay,  from  whence  it  is  embanked  up  to  the  town  of 
Carentan.  There  is  a  good  grounding  place  on  an  excellent  bottom  of 
mud  3  cables  to  the  southward  of  the  Grand  Vay  hamlet, 

LIGHTS. — Two  fixed  lights  are  now  exhibited  as  a  guide  through 
the  channel  of  Carentan  j  viz,,  a  red  light  on  the  sea  bank  16  feet,  and  a 
white  light  at  Br^vand  49  feet  above  high  water ;  the  upper  light  is 
distant  940  yards  S.W.  J  W.  from  the  lower,  and  both  are  visible  in  clear 
weather  7  miles. 

Tides. — The  flood  stream  at  springs  loses  its  strength'  when  the 
Grand  Vay  banks  are  covered.  It  crosses  the  Magdeleine  bank  with  some 
rapidity  until  3J  or  4  hours  flood,  and  inclines  towards  the  inner  banks, 
which  renders  the  entrance  to  the  channel  difficult  with  a  head  wind  ;  but 
under  all  circumstances  there  is  nothing  to  prevent  a  vessel  getting  up  as 


52  CAPE   BAUFLEUR   TO  CAPE   D'aKTIFEE.  [chap.  ii. 

far  as  Tan*l.    The  b.*(;Iuning  of  the  ebb  is  weak,  but  as  soon  as  the  banks 
begin  to  uncover  its  rate  nipidly  increases. 

TllO  COAST. — From  Maisy  ]K>int  the  eastern  point  of  entrance  to 
the  Gnudd  Vay,  to  Percee  point,  the  distance  is  about  G  miles,  and  the 
coast  between  trends  to  the  E.S.E.  to  within  a  mile  eastward  of  Grand 
Camp  church ;  it  then  suddenly  rises,  and  a  periiendicuUir  chalk  cliff 
commences,  about  4(K)  feet  high,  which  may  be  seen  12  or  15  miles  off. 
The  laud  above  the  cliff  is  apparently  level,  without  any  remarkable 
object  on  it,  except  the  church  tuwer  of  St.  Pierre  du  Mont,  which  stands 
in  the  midst  of  a  clump  of  tall  tree?*. 

From  Percee  jwint,  cape  Manvieux  Ixjars  S.E.  by  E.,  distant  11^  miles, 
and  nearly  ns  fur  as  St.  Ci^me-de-Fresne  chaix^l,  at  1^  miles  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  cai>e,  the  land  when  seen  from  the  offing  api>ears  nearly  a 
level  plain,  upwards  of  400  feet  above  the  sea,  overtopped  only  by  the  church 
towers  and  the  trees  which  surround  the  vilLiges.  When  nearer  the 
coast  presents  a  variety  of  aspects ;  the  chalky  cliffs  continue  to  about 
a  mile  south-oast  of  Percee  point,  and  thence  as  fai*  as  the  guard-house  at 
St.  Honorine,  the  shore  is  low  and  sandy  and  bounded  by  low  sand  hills, 
in  front  of  which  is  a  beach  of  muddy  sund  and  shingle  about  2  or  3  cables 
wide  at  low  water.  Between  the  guard-house  and  the  chapel  of  St.  C6me, 
the  shore  is  precipitous  and  composed  of  high  cliffs  of  rock  and  brown  clay, 
intersected  by  narrow  valleys.  Vessels  of  large  draught  may  approach  to 
within  a  mile  of  the  coast  between  Percee  point  and  cape  Man^^eux  without 
danger. 

To  the  eastward  of  the  chapel  of  St.  C6me-de-Fresne  the  appearance  of 
the  coast  changes  from  the  before-mentioned  brown  clay  cliffs  to  gracefully 
undulating  hills,  covered  with  rich  cultivation,  and  rising  with  a  gentle 
slope  behind  the  shore  as  far  as  the  left  bank  of  the  river  Orne.  From 
St.  Come  de  Fresn6  to  St.  Aubin  point,  a  distance  of  8  miles,  the  coast 
trends  to  the  E.S.E.,  and  from  the  latter  point  it  trends  S.E.  ^  S.  5^  miles 
to  the  mouth  of  the  Orne.  Im  the  vicinity  of  CourseuUes  the  shore  is  low, 
and  composed  of  sand  hills,  except  in  front  of  the  village  of  St.  Aubin, 
where  it  changes  its  direction  to  the  south-eastward. 

The  highest  parts  of  the  Calvados  flat  are  joined  to  this  part  of  the  coast, 
and  render  the  approach  to  it  dangerous.  The  coast  may  be  easily  recog- 
nized from  seaward  by  the  clumps  of  trees  surrounding  the  villages,  and 
by  the  church  towers  which  surmount  them.  Tailleville  hill,  rising  to  the 
south-eastward  of  CourseuUes,  is  remarkable,  as  is  also  the  hill  at  Amfre- 
ville,  which  is  upon  the  eastern  bank  of  the  Orne,  and  not  far  from  the 
mouth  of  that  river.  In  front  of  most  of  the  villages  along  the  coast  there 
exist,  between  the  low  water  rocks,  small  deposits  of  muddy  sand  and 
gravel,  called  Nans  or  Anneaux,  which  afford  no  shelter  with  northerly 


OHAP.  II.]  i-HE   COAST. — POET-EN-BESSIN.  53 

winds,  but  where  the  iuhabilauts  of  the  villages  fit  ODt  large  fishing  boats 
at  tlie  commenceiuent  of  the  fine  season  of  8  to  10  feet  draaght  wliea " 
laden.  During  the  winter  these  boata  remain  either  at  Conrsenlles  or  in 
the  Orne.  Between  St.  Aubin  point  and  Lyon  the  shore  is  rather  high, 
and  ihe  othei'  purts  of  it  are  composed  of  sand  hills. 

Or&nd  C&mp  is  a  eniall  village  built  on  the  shore  and  backed  by  a 
small  hill.  The  inhabitants  are  either  fishermen  or  sailors,  and  the  former 
fit  out  about  forty  boats  of  from  12  to  25  tons  burthen,  and  of  from  5  to  10 
feet  draught ;  these  boats  are  moored  to  buoys  on  a  smalt  sandy  beach,  and 
are  protected  from  the  high  sea,  when  the  wind  blows  upon  the  shore,  by 
the  Grand  Camp  rocks.  Two  of  the  pilots  for  the  Gond  Vay  reside  in  the 
Tillage,  and  eight  at  Isigny.  The  small  fixed  white  light  (noticed  in 
page  SO)  exhibited  on  the  shore  in  front  of  the  houses  is  kept  up  at  the 
espense  of  the  fishermen. 

A  Life  Boat  is  stationed  here. 

Pointe  de  la  FerC^e  forma  the  most  northern  promontory  of  the 
chalky  cliffs,  400  feet  high,  which  border  the  shore  for  about  a  mile  to 
the  eastward  of  Grand  Camp  to  a  mile  south-east  of  the  point.  The  point 
projects  but  little  to  the  northward,  and  is  only  remarkable  by  the  change 
in  the  direction  of  the  coast. 

A  flut  of  sand  and  gravel,  divided  into  several  parallel  banks,  extends 
about  E.N.E,  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  point,  and  the  eddies 
occasioned  by  these  banks,  which  lie  directly  across  the  tidal  streams, 
cause  a  sort  of  race  on  a  weather  tide ;  but  the  race  ia  not  dangerous  to 
decked  vessels. 

Port-eil-Be8Sill---The  coast  for  74  miles  to  the  eastward  of  St. 
Honorine  is  composed  of  high  cliBs  of  rock  and  brown  clay,  and  inter- 
sected by  narrow  valleys,  some  of  which  descend  down  the  cliffs  to  high- 
water  mark  at  springs,  although  the  greater  port  do  not  reach  lower  than 
half-way  down.  The  most  considerable  of  the  valleys  which  do  not  reach 
the  sea  is  that  of  port-en -Bes sin,  lying  S.E.  i  E.  7J  miles  from  PercSo 
point,  and  the  opening  to  it  is  about  130  yards  wide  between  two  cliffs,  of 
Oxfoi-d  ciay,  from  3CX)  to  400  feet  high.  The  valley  suddenly  widens 
within  the  opening  and  forms  a  kind  of  circus,  more  than  a  mile  in  diameter, 
the  bottom  being  a  level  plain  from  IS  to  20  feet  above  high  water,  and 
almost  entirely  surrounded  by  gently  sloping  hills. 

The  shore  in  front  of  the  valley  is  composed  of  a  steep  be:ich  of  small 
pebbles  and  shingle,  and  affords,  when  the  sea  is  smooth,  a  gocd  grounding 
place  for  fishing  boats,  which  ar£  hove  up  out  of  the  reach  of  the  high 
sea  by  capstans.  The  approach  to  this  beach  is  between  a  break  in  the 
rocks  which  border  the  shore,  and  which  form  a  sort  of  creek  140  yards 


1.jl21    Z      » "    F 


»-   r 


*i      •-.-•^      --  «         •«^M  •  ,  «  ■    ^^ 


-^       -Ir 


'"Ultr^IZ 


r:»  J. 


,^     3 


iSit  ^     -.— r  l:  -..-  -;i.n-  -• 


A  Uis 


a.l  .-f » 


'    -        ■"  .^^ 


^i:. 


*iid:Cfr«  1^ 


:i:r"- 


i...    t"^-    "^^i-::--    -'T-:i     i^-.ri^ii-i:   nf'i  ▼itii  liiSTi 


Tides.— I:  :^  '^'- 


am  m^^  m  _ 


%h. 


ABROMAHCHES,  ^^ ;  --•:  -^--  ^^^  ^-^^^  ^^^  ** *  intenag- 

plh/:^:  hy  tLf:  liLabltaii^.-r  if  Baje::!,  ^tAzi*  upc-  ii.<  sea-^hcre  aX  the 
♦^.trafiC^  of  a  widf:  vall*:y  ihr'e'r-j-ian'rrr  c:  i  nil-e  :o  :2ie  eastvna^  of  caf^e 
SI  txft% ':*:*!  X,  Sal  A  as  ;t  m^v  r^  r^-z.  froii  &  srrt^:  iiisianc^  Sca^rajd  it  scires 
t//  j/^/irit  out  ih^;  j/OsItioa  of  iLe  cape,  which  otherwise  L&s  little  to  distin- 
g»ji-.h  it  but  Jt>,  hfeigbty  and  the  steep  cUr  in  which  it  terminates.  The 
ifjha(/itafit«)  of  the  viilacf:  fit  out  £mall  half-decked  vessel?  which  thev  shdter 
ff'O/n  th';  high  M:a  by  hauling  them,  bj  means  of  capstans,  upon  a  shingle 
J/<';i/;h  iiiijfth  rf;fcf;inbliijg  that  at  poit-et-Besein.  A  rockT  shore,  which  un- 
vjiSt'Tii  ut'jir\y  half  a  mile  out  at  low  water  and  forms  a  point  adrancing  in 
an  t-tiHUif'ly  dUfAduiit  from  ca[>e  Manvieux,  arrests  the  sea  during  northerly 
windM,  and  dimjniHhf^  the  violence  of  the  surf  on  the  beach,  which  is 
itihi'i'w\mi  ifiuch  tiX\Hm'A, 

PLATEAU  do  CALVADOS.— This  rocky  flat  commences  a  short 
iUniMU'M  Ut  (  Im)  t'lMlwiml  of  At  romanches,  and  extends  14  miles  to  the  eastward 
filoiif/  Mki  <;o»Hi,  fm  fur  im  Lyon.  The  parts  of  the  flat  which  uncover  at  low 
wiU<i<r  iii'i',  tlin  (!filvfuloM  rock,  from  which  the  name  of  the  flat  is  derived, 
Uiii  IIim'Imik  <ln  VvVf  tho  lOnmirU  do  I^ngrune,  and  the  Roches  de  Lyon.  A 
trmlllliiii  In  iiiiiliitnliHwl  In  i\u^  country  that  a  forest  of  chestnut  trees,  called 
th<«  i'unmi  ut  llmiirrouillo,  origiiially  covered  the  rocks  which  dry  at  low 


CKAP.  11.]        PLATEAU  DE   CAiTADOS. — CALVADOS  ROCK.  55 

i\'at«r,  between  Berni^res  aad  L7011,  and  that  its  sudden  destruction  took 
place  about  300  years  since.  It  is  also  said  that  roots  of  chestnut  trees  are 
found  in  the  fissures  of  these  rocks,  and  that  they  are  bo  difficult  to  exti'act, 
and  the  wood  so  hard  that  it  blunts  the  best  tools. 

The  notth-west  end  of  the  flat  lies  N.E.  bj  E.  ^  £.  one  mile  from  the 
western  edge  of  the  Calvados  rock,  aad  is  marked  by  a  black  buoy  moored 
half  a  mile  N.N .W.  of  it,  the  outer  edge,  which  is  steep  to,  preserves  a 
distance  of  from  1^  to  2^  miles  from  the  shore  as  far  as  Essarts  point, 
(the  north-east  extreme  of  the  flat,)  which  lies  '6  cables  to  the  westward  of 
the  line,  on  which  the  spires  of  Langrune  and  Douvres  churches  are  seen 
in  line  bearing  S-W.  by  S. ;  Ver  hghthouse  W.  J  N. ;  and  the  tower  at 
Oyestreham,  at  the  entrance  of  the  river  Ome,  S.S.E.  From  Essarts 
point,  which  is  2J  miles  from  the  shorcj  the  edge  of  the  flat  turns  sharply 
to  the  southward,  and  approaching  the  coast  within  a  mile,  continues  at 
that  distance  until  it  is  lost  beneath  the  sands  which  dry  to  the  westward  of 
the  mouth  of  the  river  Orne.  Essarts  point  is  the  most  dangerous  part 
of  the  fiat,  as  it  has  only  4  feet  water  upon  it,  and  ri^ng  suddenly  from  the 
depth  of  20  feet,  it  occasions  a  change  in  the  direction  of  the  streams,  and 
forms  a  race  during  the  springs  on  a  weather  tide.  There  is  but  little 
water  on  the  other  parts  of  the  flat,  and  the  surface  of  the  rocks  being  un- 
even, a  high  sea  breaks  upon  them  when  the  wind  blows  hard  &om  the 
northward. 

Buoys. — A  black  buoy  is  moored  in  7  fathoms  N.E.  by  E.  J  E,  one 
mile  from  Essarts  point,  and  lies  with  Langrune  and  Oouvres  church  spires 
in  line,  and  the  outer  black  buoy  at  the  entrance  of  the  Oyestreham 
channel  S.S.E.  J  E.  6  miles.  Both  the  buoys  marking  this  flat  are  liable 
to  drift,  therefore  their  position  cannot  always  be  depended  npon. 

Calvados  Rock  lies  l^  miles  from  the  shore,  in  a  N.E.  by  N. 
direction  from  St.  Cdme-de-Fresni  chapel.  It  is  about  half  a  mile  long,  in 
an  east  and  west  direction,  and  3  cables  broad,  and  its  western  part, 
which  is  the  highest,  uncovers  3  feet  above  the  lowest  tides.  The  above 
chapel  in  one  with  the  spire  of  Bazanville  church,  which  stands  on  the  top 
of  the  hills  2  miles  inland,  bearing  S.  ^  W.,  leads  3  cables  to  the  westward. 

Anchorage. — A  small  anchorage  with  good  holduig  ground,  named 
Fosse  d'Espagne,  lies  midway  between  Arromanchea  and  the  Calvados  rock, 
in  a  small  elbow  formed  by  the  steep  western  side  of  the  Calvados  flat. 
The  best  position  to  anchor  is  in  about  20  feet  water,  with  Cr^pon  church 
tower  seen  between  those  of  M4vaisnes  and  Asnelles  ;  and  the  tall  spu^ 
of  BerniSres  in  line  with  the  houses  of  Ver  hamlet  which  stand  nearest 
Ver  hghthouse.  The  soundings  deepen  rather  suddenly  outside  the 
Cakados  flat ;  but  there  is  no  good  anchorage  ground  at  a  less  distftnc* 


5G  CAPE  BARFLEUR  TO   CAPE   D'ANTIFER.  [chap.  ii. 

than  a  mile  from  its  deep  weatern  edge,  or  than  2  miles  from  its  eastern 
edge. 

Directions* — Vessels  of  lai'ge  draught  may  approach  to  about  a 
mile  of  the  shore  even  at  low  water,  between  Perc6e  point  and  cape  Man- 
vieux,  but  it  would  be  imprudent  to  stand  in  so  near  with  northerly  winds. 
Coasters  keeping  close  in,  with  off-shore  winds,  should  be  aware  of  the 
gusts  which  proceed  from  the  valleys.  Good  holding  ground  will  be  found 
at  2  or  3  miles  off  the  coast,  where  yessels  sometimes  anchor  to  stop  tide. 
The  tides  follow  nearly  the  direction  of  the  shore,  and  their  greatest 
strength,  at  springs,  does  not  exceed  3^  knots. 

In  approaching  the  Essarts  point  of  the  Calvados  flat  from  the  eastward 
keep  to  the  northward  of  the  line  on  which  Ver  church  tower  is  in  line 
with  the  clump  of  trees  at  Epine,*  bearing  West  until  Langrune  and 
Douvres  church  spires  are  in  line  S.W.  by  S.  In  rounding  the  point  from 
the  eastward,  keep  Lyoii  church  tower  open  to  the  westward  of  the  western 
house  of  St.  Aubin-d'Arquenay  village,  bearing  about  South  until  the  line 
of  Langrune  and  Douvres  church  spires  in  one  is  crossed. 

LIGHT* — Pointe  de  Ver  lighthouse  stands  800  yards  inland 
upon  the  slope  of  a  small  hill  4}  miles  to  the  eastward  of  cape  Manvieux, 
and  exhibits  a  fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  bright  flcLsh  every  four 
minutes.  The  light,  which  is  of  the  third  order  and  elevated  138  feet 
above  high  water,  is  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  14  miles. 
The  flash  is  preceded  and  followed  by  a  short  eclipse,  but  the  light  does  not 
quite  disappear  within  the  distance  of  6  miles.  The  lighthouse  may  be 
easily  recognized  in  approaching  it  from  East  or  West ;  but  between  the 
bearings  of  S.E.,  round  southerly,  and  S.W.,  it  is  difficult  to  distinguish^ 
being  backed  by  the  land. 

Ver  light  was  established  for  the  purpose  of  giving  warning  of  approach 
to  the  Calvados  flat,  and  to  afford  means  of  avoiding  that  danger ;  but 
vessels  with  southerly  winds,  after  passing  cape  Barfleur  and  bound  to  Le 
Havi*e,  try  and  sight  this  light  at  9  or  12  miles  distant ;  thence  they  steer 
for  the  lights  on  cape  de  la  Heve,  which  will  soon  appear  to  the  eastward. 
By  this  means  they  avoid  making  the  land  too  far  to  the  northward  of  Le 
Havre,  which  might  delay  their  entrance  into  that  port. 

PORTde  COURSEULLES,— This  smaU  tidal  harbour,  situated 
nearly  2\  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Ver  lighthouse,  is,  properly  speaking, 


•  This  clamp  of  trees,  formed  of  four  or  five  large  elms,  is  very  conspicnoas,  and 
being  used  as  a  landmark  the  local  anthorities  are  carefol  to  preserve  it.  It  stands  at  the 
foot  of  the  hills  between  Ver  ligUthonse  and  the  Chllteaa  de  Vaux,  at  nearly  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  from  the  shore  in  a  N.E.  bj  X.  direction  from  Ver  church. 


CHAP.  II.]  POET  DE   COURSEULLES.  57 

only  a  narrow  channel  through  which  the  waters  of  the  Senile  are  conducted 
by  intercepting  the  ancient  course  of  this  little  rivfr  by  means  of  a  dam. 
The  channel  is  about  2  cables  long  and  terminates  in  a  lock,  nhicli 
comrounicates  with  a  floating  basin,  intended  to  sluice  the  harbour.  The 
entrance  to  the  harbour  is  14K  feet  wide,  and  is  formed  by  two  jetties  of 
unequal  length  running  parallel  with  each  other ;  the  western  jetty  is  the 
longest.  Yesaelx,  both  foreign  and  native,  are  constantly  arriving,  and 
large  boats  of  80  tone  are  employed  in  the  herring  fishery. 

The  bottom  of  the  channel  between  the  jetty  heads  is  2  feet  higher  than 
the  sill  of  the  lock,  and  12^  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides,  oud 
the  sand  at  the  foot  of  the  jetty  heads  is  2  feet  higher  than  the  bottom  of 
the  channel ;  thus,  in  oiylinary  weather,  at  high-water  eprings,  the  harbour 
will  only  admit  vessels  of  about  9  feet  draught.  In  1857  works  for  the 
improvement  of  the  harbour  were  progressing,  and  in  addition  to  a  coa- 
tinuation  of  the  jetty,  a  large  basin  was  in  course  of  construction.  At  that 
date  a  vessel  of  150  tons  burthen  entered  the  borbour. 

The  waters  of  the  Senile  are  neither  sufficiently  rapid  oi'  abundant  to 
form  or  maintain  a  deep  straight  channel  in  the  sandy  beach  which  extends 
out  half  a  mile  in  front  of  the  entrance,  and  which  terminates  to  seaward 
at  the  Ver  rocks,  the  Germain  rock,  and  the  Easarts  de  Beini^res.  The 
channel  is  distinctly  marked  as  far  as  2  cables  outside  the  jetties ;  beyond 
that  distance  the  water  spreads  out  and  follows  a  voi'iety  of  directions. 
Near  the  harbour  the  borders  of  the  channel  are  marked  by  three  black 
buoys,  one  on  either  side,  and  the  third,  which  is  the  largest,  is  placed 
outside,  where  the  channel  ceases  to  be  well  defined;  these  buoys  are 
moored  securely  in  order  that  vessels  approaching  the  harbour  with  a  head 
wind  may  use  them  for  warping.  To  do  this,  they  should  contrive  to  get 
up  to  the  outer  buoy  a  full  hour  before  high  water,  that  they  may  have 
time  to  warp  into  the  harbour  during  the  remainder  of  the  flood.  The  sea 
is  smooth  at  the  entrance  with  southerly  winds  j  and  if  the  ebb  prevents 
their  entering,  they  may  remain  aground  without  danger. 

The  saud  accumulates  upon  the  beach  to  the  westward  of  the  entrance, 
and  forms  banks  oflen  sufBciently  high  to  prevent  any  access  to  the 
western  jetty  head,  except  by  the  channel  itself.  This  disposition  of  the 
sand  i-enders  it  extremely  difficult,  and  even  dangerous,  to  enter  the 
harbour  with  stormy  winds  between  West  and  N.N.W.,  for  vessels  will 
then  have  the  wind,  the  heavy  sea,  and  the  flood  tide  on  their  broadsides. 
Winds  between  N.N.E.  and  E Jf.E.  cause  much  sea  at  the  entrance,  but  at 
that  time  they  may  always  get  in  at  high  tide,  if  they  are  of  a  suitable 
draught. 

LIGHT. — -A-  Jixed  white  light  of  the  fourth  order  is  exhibited  all 
night  at  30  feet  above  high  water,  from  the  extremity  of  the  west  jetty  at 


58  CAPE   BARFLEUR  TO  CAPE  d'AXTIFER.  [cbap.  ii. 

Courseulles,  and  is  visible  in  clear  weather  6  miles ;  but  the  fogs  and  mist 
are  mud  frequentlj  to  conceal  it. 

K  fixed  green  light  is  exhibited  at  2o  feet  al)Ove  high  water  from  the 
east  pier  at  Courseulles,  and  should  be  visible  in  dear  weather  from  a 
distance  of  4  miles.  This  light  is  only  exhibited  when  there  are  6^  feet  of 
water  in  the  channeL 

Tid6  Sign&lS* — The  depth  of  water  in  the  channel  will  also  be 
signalled  from  a  mast  and  yard  erected  on  the  east  pier,  commencing  at 
6^  feet. 

Directions. — The  mound  and  the  trees  at  Tailleville,  the  fine  spire 
at  Bemi^res,  and  Yer  lighthouse,  are  all  excellent  objects  by  which  the 
position  of  Courseulles  may  be  determined  from  a  distance.  With  northerly 
winds  a  vessel  should  run  for  the  harbour  either  between  the  Grermain  rock, 
which  uncovers  4  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  and  the  Essarts  de  Benderes, 
or  between  the  Ver  rocks  and  the  Germain,  which  are  separated  frt>m 
each  other  by  channels,  through  which,  with  the  wind  on  the  shore, 
it  is  advisable  to  pass,  to  avoid  the  high  sea  which  sometimes  breaks  upon 
these  rocks. 

Banville  church  tower  in  one  with  Courseulles  light,  bearing  S.  W.by  W.JW., 
will  lead  to  the  entrance  of  the  harbour  between  the  Germain  and  the 
Essarts  de  Bemi^res.  B^ny  church  spire  in  line  with  the  small  church 
tower  at  Courseulles,  S.  \  E.,  will  lead  between  the  Ver  rocks  and  the 
Germain,  and  a  small  distance  to  the  westward  of  the  Yalette  rock,  upon 
which  the  sea  breaks  ;  but  iu  running  for  the  harbour  from  this  side 
Beny  spire  had  better  be  brought  in  one  with  a  little  mound,  upon  which 
there  is  a  small  battery,  bearing  south,  and  it  will  lead  a  cable  to  the 
eastward  of  the  Valette,  and  the  same  distance  to  the  westward  of  the 
Marguerite  rock,  (which  is  awash  at  low  water  and  lies  at  the  south- 
western extremity  of  the  shelf  of  rock  separating  the  Courseulles  deep 
from  the  Anneau  de  la  Marguerite)  and  direct  to  the  outer  buoy  ;  the 
mound  stand*  upon  the  shore  a  cable  to  the  eastward  of  the  east  jetty. 
The  Marguerite  rock  is  marked  by  a  black  buoy  with  staff  and  ball,  placed 
a  little  to  the  southward  of  it. 

Vessels  may  anchor  in  safety  during  several  hours  in  ordinary  weather 
either  in  the  Anneau  de  la  Marguerite  or  in  the  Fosse  de  Courseulles,  and 
wait  until  there  is  sufficient  depth  for  them  to  enter  Com-seuUes  harbour. 
The  layer  of  mud  covering  the  rock  at  these  entrances  is  both  deep  and 
stiff. 

Tides* — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Courseulles  at  9h.  7m.  ; 
ordinary  springs  rise  20  feet,  neaps  15^^  feet. 


CTAp.n.]     E3IB0UCHCRE  DB  L'OEKB. — POET  DE  CAEN.  50 

EUBOUCHURE  de  rORNE.— The  river  Orne  has  ita  source 
near  S^i  and  thence  it  trends  in  a  north-west  direction  till  it  enters  the 
department  of  Calvodoa,  where  it  turns  to  the  N.  by  E.,  passing  Caen  ; 
here  it  becomes  navigable  and,  at  9  miles  below  the  town,  finds  its  way  into 
the  sea  between  the  sand  hilU  of  Si^ge  and  Mervilie  points,  at  about  10 
miles  to  the  eastward  of  CourseuUes  and  a^mile  to  the  eastwaid  of  Oyestre- 
ham  church.  At  low  tide  the  waters  of  the  liver  thread  tlicir  way  through 
a  winding  channel  upon  an  immense  collection  of  sand,  which  has  formed 
itself  at  the  entrance,  and  dries  2  miles  out  fi-om  the  shore.  At  ordinary 
springs  vessels  of  12  feet  draught  can  get  up  to  the  grounding  places  at  the 
entrance.  The  lower  course  of  the  river,  ita  entrance,  and  the  adjacent 
parts  of  the  channel,  are  incumbered  by  banks,  which  change  their  height, 
shape,  and  position  almost  every  tide  ;  and  amongst  which  it  would  be  very 
imprudent  to  venture  without  a  pilot,  for  to  ground  on  them  would  almost 
always  involve  the  loss  of  the  vesseL 

The  parta  of  the  passage  channel  which  change  the  least  are  those^lying 
towards  the  outer  border  of  low-water  mark  ;  they  are  covered  during 
the  neaps,  and  are  only  uncovered  a  short  time  at  the  springs.  The  banks 
formed  on  this  part  of  the  shore  are  named  by  the  pilots  battures,  and 
with  strong  northerly  winds  there  is  a  high  sea  upon  them  on  the  flood,  and 
breakers  on  the  ebb.  The  high  banks  named  the  Oiseaux,  on  the  western 
side  of  the  entrance,  are  extending  to  the  eastward,  and  slowly  forcing  the 
channel  and  its  entrance  in  that  direction  ;  and  it  was  stated,  in  1841,  that 
within  thirty  years  it  had  advanced  nearly  half  k  mile. 

FORT  de  CAEN  is  situated  9  miles  from  the  sea,  at  the  confluence 
of  the  rivers  Ome  and  Odon,  and  its  quays  extend  1,057  yards  along  the 
banks  of  both  rivers.  The  port  fills  with  mud  during  the  summer,  but  in 
the  rainy  seaaon  it  is  cleared  out  by  the  freshets.  Since  the  opening  of  the 
canal  between  this  port  and  Oyestreham,  commerce  has  been  on  the  increase, 
and  in  the  year  1870,894  vessels,  amounting  to  134,894  tons,  arrived  at 
Caen,  of  which  276  vessels  and  52,640  tons  were  French,  and  510  vessels 
and  55;790  tons  were  British,  The  cargoes  of  the  latter  are  generally  coal, 
with  a  few  exceptions  of  cement,  railway  material,  manure,  and  even  wheat. 
The  exports  consist  of  Caen  stone,  flour,  barley,  colza  oil,  &c.  In  1866 
the  population  was  41,564. 

Sailing  vessels  of  l\\  feet  draught  maynow  proceed  up  to  Caen  through 
the  Oyeetreham  canal.  Those  drawing  8  feet  and  steam  vessels,  can  still  use 
the  route  up  the  river  Ome  to  the  quays  at  Caen  during  ordinary  springs, 
and  those  of  9  feet  at  the  equinoxes.  If  deeply  laden,  and  unable  to  reach 
the  quays  (which,  however,  rarely  happens  now,  as  sailing  vessels  go  up 


60  CAPE  BARFLEUR  TO  CAPE   D'aNTIFER.  [chap.  u. 

the  canal),  thcj  are  lightened  at  the  grounding-places  at  the  mouth 
of  the  river  ;  and  when  it  blows  hard  from  the  southward  they  can  be 
towed  up  by  horses,  procured  a  mile  within  the  entrance,  at  La  Roque 
point.  The  principal  grounding-places  are  those  at  Mer^'ille  and  Siege 
points  ;  the  latter  is  the  best  sheltered,  but  it  is  often  invaded  bj  sand. 
That  at  Merville  point  is  not  subject  to  this  inconvenience,  but  it  has 
only  the  Oiseaux  bank  to  shelter  it  from  northerly  winds  ;  vessels  are 
much  disturbed  here  with  a  N.W.  wind  when  the  tide  is  high,  and  strong 
winds  between  North  and  East  cause  the  anchors,  which  are  buried  in  the 
sand,  to  drag. 

OYESTBEHAM  HARBOUR.— To  remedy  the  numerous 
difficulties  presented  to  navigation  at  the  entrance  of  the  river  Orne,  and 
its  circuitous  course  below  Caen,  a  fine  tidal  basin,  with  stone  quays  on 
either  side,  is  built  upon  the  shore  at  1^  cables  to  the  eastward  of  Oyestre- 
bam  /battery,  and  communicates  directly,  by  means  of  a  canal,  with  that 
part  of  the  port  of  Caen  which  is  upon  the  river  Odon.  The  canal  is 
especially  designed  for  sailing  vessels,  and  those  of  11^  feet  draught  can 
proceed  through  it  up  to  Caen.  A  tug  can  be  obtained  at  Oyestreham  to 
tow  vessels  up.  The  basin  is  320  yards  long  and  100  yards  broad,  and 
forms  a  small  harbour  in  the  midst  of  sand  hills,  having  for  its  entrance 
a  channel  400  yards  long  iind40  yards  wide,  enclosed  between  two  jetties 
of  unequal  length  opening  into  the  outer  part  of  the  channel  into  the  Orne. 
These  jetties  are  built  up  to  high-water  mark  at  neaps,  and  the  western 
jetty  is  the  longer.  This  basin  will  admit  vessels  drawing  17  feet  water. 
A  communication  is  made  between  the  basin  and  the  canal  by  means  of  a 
lock,  through  which  vessels  may  enter  at  high  water. 

Buoys. — Two  red  buoys  mark  the  western  side  of  the  channel  leading 
to  the  entrance  of  Oyestreham  harbour  and  the  mouth  of  the  Orne,  and 
four  black  buoys  the  eastern  side. 

The  outer  red  buoy  lies  about  half  a  mile  from  the  extremity  of  the 
north  jetty  ;  the  inner  red  buoy  is  moored  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  the 
extremity  of  the  same  jetty. 

The  outer  black  buoy  bears  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  nearly  1^  miles  from  the 
extremity  of  the  north  jetty,  and  may  be  passed  close  to  on  its  west  side. 
The  second  black  buoy  is  moored  nearly  half  a  mile  from  the  same  jetty, 
and  the  channel  lies  between  it  and  the  outer  red  buoy.  The  third  black 
buoy  lies  about  IJ  cables  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  of  the  north  jetty  head.  The 
fourth  black  buoy,  which  is  only  useful  to  vessels  entering  the  channel 
leading  to  Si^ge  point,  lies  about  half  a  cable  east  of  the  south  jetty  head. 


CHIP,  u.]  OYESTKEHAJI   UARBOUE. — DIEECTIOXS.  01 

Pilots. — There  are  several  pilots  at  Oyestreham,  and  within  iho  river 
at  Sallenelles,  and  it  is  eaid  lliat  they  will  raeet  a  vessel,  evtn  during 
northerly  gales,  at  a  quarter  of  a  mile  out  from  the  harbour's  mouth. 

CftUtion.^The  channel  leading  to  tlie  entrance  of  Oyestreham  harbour 
is  liable  to  change ;  the  depth  however  may  be  calculated  a|) proximately 
by  deducting  8  feet  from  the  height  of  tide  at  Havre. 

A  Life  Soat  is  stationed  at  OyeBtreham. 

LIGHTS. — T^o  Jixed  white  lights  are  exhibited  on  the  western  side 
of  the  entrance  to  the  river  Ome,  beariag  N.E.  ^  N.  and  S.W,  ^  S.  1,203 
yards  from  each  other.  The  southern  or  upper  light  is  shown  from  a 
window  on  the  northern  face  of  the  church  tower  at  Oyestreham,  at  92  feet 
above  high  water,  and  may  be  seen  at  the  distance  of  10  miles.  The 
northern  or  lower  light  is  hoisted  every  eveniog  on  a  mast  erected  ou  the 
sand  hills  near  the  shore  at  a  short  distance  to  the  westward  of  Oyestreham 
battery  ;  it  is  elevated  39  feet  above  high  water,  and  visible  6  miles. 

A  small  red  tidal  hght  of  4  miles  range  is  also  exhibited  at  6C>  feel  from 
the  extremity  of  the  north  end  of  the  western  jetty  now  extending  at 
Oyestreham  harbour ;  it  is  lighted  at  3  hours  before  and  extinguished  at 
3  hours  alter  high  water.  A  prceit  light  is  shown  irom  the  end  of  the  east 
jetty.  There  is  also  a  green  tidal  light  shown  from  the  eastern  side  of 
Oyestreham  channel,  from  3  hours  before  to  3  hours  after  high  water.  The 
channel  leading  to  Si^ge  point  passes  near  the  end  of  the  cross  boom,  and 
the  ffreen  light  is  intended  to  point  out  that  danger.  A  bell  is  sounded  in 
foggy  weather  from  the  west  jetty. 

Directions. — The  most  favourable  winds  for  entering  Oyestreham 
harbour  and  the  river  Orne  are  those  between  N.W,  round  northerly,  and 
East.  When  they  are  moderate  the  sea  is  not  heavy  upon  the  shelves,  and 
by  crossing  them  at  half  or  three-quarters  of  an  hour  before  high  water,  a 
vessel  will  have  time  to  arrive  at  the  grounding  places,  if  intending  to  enter 
the  river,  before  the  ebb  begins  j  but  with  strong  winds  from  those  quarters 
the  pilots  cross  the  shelves  at  high  water.  Winds  from  West  to  S.W.  are 
also  favourable  for  entering  the  river.  With  the  wind  from  the  latter 
quarter  it  will  be  necessary  to  work  up,  and  there  will  be  sufficient  room 
for  a  good  reach  in  the  channel,  but  the  shelves  should  be  crossed  a  full 
hour  before  high  water.  A  vessel  should  not  attempt  to  enter  with  winds 
between  8.S.W.,  round  southerly,  and  East,  if  they  blow  strong,  but  if 
moderate,  short  tacks  may  be  made  in  the  channel,  but  if  surprised  by  the 
ebb,  she  must  run  out  immediately  for  fear  of  grounding,  which  is  always 
dangerous. 

At  night  the  entrance  ought  not  to  be  attempted  by  strangers  without  a 


62  CAPE   BABPLEUB   TO   CAPE  D'ANTIFER.        [chap.  ii. 

pilot,  as  the  banks  are  so  continually  changing  that  the  two  lights  are  but 
of  little  use,  excepting  to  point  out  the  position  of  the  port. 

Tides. — ^It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Ojestreham  harbour,  at 
9h.  38m.  springs,  rise  21  feet,  neaps  16  feet.  The  bottom  of  the  channel, 
abreast  the  certain  beacon,  is  8  feet  above  the  level  of  low-water  equinoctial 
springs,  and  the  tide  rises  there  16  or  17  feet  at  ordinary  springs,  18  or  19 
feet  at  the  equinoxes,  and  7  or  8  feet  at  neaps.  With  strong  westerly 
winds  for  several  successive  days,  the  water  falls  but  little,  and  rises  above 
the  highest  point  just  mentioned  ;  and  the  contrary  eflPects  are  produced  by 
easterly  winds.  The  bottom  of  the  channels  between  the  shifting  banks, 
as  far  as  the  grounding-places  at  Merville  and  Siege  points,  is  nearly  on 
a  level  with  that  of  the  channel  abreast  the  beacon,  and  vessels  of  12  feet 
draught  may  arrive  up  to  them  during  ordinary  springs,  and  of  13  and  14 
feet  draught  at  the  great  spring  tides  in  the  rainy  season. 

ILADE  de  CAEN  lies  about  3  miles  N.N.W.  of  the  entrance  to  the 
river  Ome,  and  affords  good  anchorage  with  winds  between  S.S.E.  round 
southerly,  and  N.N.W.  for  vessels  waiting  a  suitable  time  of  tide  to  enter 
the  river  ;  but  it  would  be  dangerous  to  be  caught  there  with  winds  from 
the  opposite  direction. 

The  eastern  limit  of  the  road  is  on  the  meridian  of  Oyestreham  battery 
and  it  extends  northward  as  far  as  the  line  on  which  Bernieres  church 
spire  is  in  line  with  the  houses  standing  on  St.  Aubin  point,  and  its 
southern  limit  is  the  same  church  spire  on  with  the  small  church  tower 
at  St.  Aubin.  The  pilots  usually  place  large  vessels  between  these  limits 
in  about  6  fathoms  water,  with  Luc  church  tower  open  half  a  point 
southward  of  the  church  spire  at  Beny  where  they  can  weigh  and 
stand  off-shore  if  the  wind  should  veer  round  and  blow  strong  from  the 
northward. 

EMBOnCHUIlE  de  la  DIVES.— The  entrance  to  this  river 
lies  about  E.  by  S.  5  miles  from  the  mouth  of  the  Ome,  the  intermediate 
coast  being  composed  of  sand  hills,  several  of  which  are  sufficiently  high 
to  be  recognised  at  the  distance  of  5  or  6  miles.  A  sandy  beach,  about 
half  a  mile  wide  at  low  water,  borders  the  coast.  This  river  can  only  be 
entered  during  the  day,  and  with  no  swell  will  admit  vessels  of  11  or  12 
feet  draught  at  springs,  and  7  feet  at  neaps ;  but  with  much  fresh  water 
in  the  river,  and  when  channel  and  berths  are  washed  out,  or  durino* 
equinoctial  tides,  vessels  of  15  feet  draught  may  enter  with  a  smooth 
sea. 

At  all  tides  vessels  lie  upon  the  grounding-places  at  the  entrance  of  the 
river,  and  are  well  sheltered  by  Cabourg  point.     They  are  safe,  although 


OHi.p.u.]  EMBOUCHUEB  DE   LA  DtVES.  63 

JD  ftD  uncomfortable  position,  for  the  bottom  being  stiff  thcj  cannot  stand 
upright.  Those  that  onl^  remain  one  tide  are  placed  on  the  left  bank  of 
the  river,  and  those  that  take  in  or  dischargo  cargo  alongside  a  small  quay, 
or  near  the  steep  bank  of  the  Mauvaia-Pas,  at  the  foot  of  a  hillock,  named 
Baliae  de  Dives,  at  the  entrance. 

The  waters  of  the  Dives  run  out  upon  a  sandy  beach,  which  dries  a  mile 
from  the  entrance.  They  form  two  channels,  the  deeper  of  which  trends 
N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  half  a  mile  from  the  entrance ;  it  then  inclines  more  to  the 
north-east,  and  continues  in  that  direction  as  far  as  the  outer  edge  of  the 
beach,  which  is  abrupt,  and  causes  a  heavy  sea  at  the  entrance  of  the 
channel  with  strong  winds  between  North  and  West  on  the  fiood,  and 
breakers  as  soon  as  the  ebb  stream  be^ns  to  gain  strength.  It  is  through 
this  channel  that  the  pUots  conduct  coasting  vessels,  and  a  red  buoy  marks 
the  podtion  where  it  changes  its  direction. 

Two  wooden  beacons  mark  the  channel  near  the  entrance  of  the  river  j 
that  to  the  southward  is  placed  upon  its  western  edge  ot  the  foot  of 
Cabourg  point,  and  the  other  stands  about  a  cable  furlher  to  the 
northward  on  its  eastern  edge. 

The  beacons  are  seldom  moved,  but  the  buoy  is  shifted  whenever  the 
course  of  the  channel  has  undergone  any  decided  alteration. 

LIGHTS. — Two  _fixed  red  lights  are  establhhed  on  the  east  side  o£ 
the  mouth  of  the  river  Dives,  and  when  in  line  mark  the  fairway  into  the 
channel  so  long  as  thei-e  is  a  depth  of  6  feet.  They  are  &ituate<l  N,  J  E. 
and  S.  i  W.  195  yards  apart,  and  elevated  respecti\ely  148  and  10  feet 
above  high  water,  (the  lower  being  shown  from  a  moveable  wood  work) 
and  vbible  in  clear  weather  from  distances  of  0  and  7  milea. 

DtreOtiOIia.~The  most  fevourable  winds  for  entering  the  river 
Dives  are  those  from  the  northward,  but  it  is  necessary  to  await  the 
moment  of  high  water  whatever  the  vessel's  draught.  During  springs, 
however,  with  a  smooth  sea,  small  vessels  may  venture  in  at  one  hour 
after  high  water,  if  there  be  wind  enough  for  them  to  run  over  the  tide. 
With  off-shore  winds  the  entrance  should  only  be  attempted  by  small 
vessels,  and  in  turning  to  windward  provision  must  be  made  for  the  heavy 
gusts  which  come  down  from  the  high  land  through  the  ojienings  of  the 
valleys. 

The  pilots  have  no  boats  sufficiently  large  or  safe  to  board  vessels  outside 
the  entrance  in  bad  weather.  If  a  vessel,  therefore,  of  suitable  draught 
should  be  compelled  to  enter  the  river  with  a  strong  northerly  wind,  she 
must  contrivo  to  arrive  at  the  hour  of  high  water  at  a  position  about 
1^  miles  from  the  shore  on  the  meridian  of  the  Baliso  de  Dives.  From 
thence  a  S.S.W.  course  will  lead  about  half  a  cable  to  the  eastward  of 
the  red  buoy,  and  when  abreast  it  steer  for  the  space  which  separates 


Gi  CAPE   BARFLEUR  TO   CAPE   d'ANTIFER.         [i iiap.  ii. 

the  two  beacons,  where  a  pilot  will  be  met  with  to  conduct  to  the  grounding 
place. 

AncllorargB. — Good  anchorage  will  be  found  off  the  entrance  to  the 
Dives,  at  1^  or  2  miles  from  the  shore,  where  a  vessel  may  remain  until 
there  is  sufficient  water  in  the  channel.  With  a  turning  wind  into  the  river, 
it  will  be  necessary  to  anchor  in  order  to  retain  a  favourable  position  ;  for 
the  flood  stream  is  here  considerably  increased  by  the  proximity  to  the  river 
Seine,  and  a  vessel  remaining  under  sail  might  be  drifted  to  leeward. 
However  good  the  holding  ground  may  be  along  this  coast,  no  vessel  should 
remain  at  anchor  longer  than  the  weather  continues  fine,  and  the  wind 
blows  off  shore :  should  it  come  from  seaward,  and  there  should  be  no 
certainty  of  entering  the  river  at  high  water,  it  will  be  necessary  to  weigh 
without  delay  and  seek  refuge  either  at  Le  Havre  or  Honfleur. 

TidOS. — It  is  high  woter,  full  and  cliange,  at  the  entrance  of  the  river 
Dives  at  9  h.  39  m.,  springs  rise  21  feet,  neaps  16  feet,  but  in  the  shoalest 
part  of  the  channel  abreast  the  eastern  beacon,  (where  the  bottom  is  8  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides,)  the  water  rises  about  the  same  as  in  the 
river  Ome,  viz.,  16  to  17  feet  at  ordinary  springs,  18  to  19  feet  at  the 
equinoxes,  and  7  to  8  feet  at  neaps. 

EMBOnCHUIlE  de  la  SEINE.— The  low  coast  from  the  river 
Ome,  composed  of  sand  hills,  terminates  upon  the  left  bank  of  the  river 
Dives,  and  the  land  suddenly  rises  upon  its  opposite  bank.  Beuzeval  hill, 
which  commands  the  entrance  to  the  Dives  and  cape  de  la  Heve,  which  bears 
N.E.  distant  13|  miles  from  the  hill,  form  the  most  western  of  the  high  lands 
between  which  the  estuary  of  the  Seine  is  comprised ;  and  an  imaginary  line 
drawn  through  Beuzeval  point  and  cape  de  la  Heve  may  be  considered  the 
boundary  between  the  sea  and  river  navigation.  In  fact  this  line  is  nearly 
the  extreme  western  limit  o£  the  accumulation  of  sand  and  mud  brought 
down  by  the  waters  of  the  Seine,  which  has  formed  dangerous  shoais 
across  the  mouth  of  that  river,  and  no  vessel  of  large  draught  should  pass 
to  the  eastward  of  this  limit,  nor  should  smaller  vessels,  except  during 
high  tides,  and  when  bound  to  Le  Havre,  Honfleur,  or  Rouen.  It  is  also 
at  this  limit  that  the  flood  stream,  which  runs  into  the  river,  begins  to 
acquire  its  strength.* 

The  Amfard  and  Hatier  banks  divide  the  mouth  of  the  Seine  into  three 
channels  of  about  equal  breadth,  which  at  low  water  have  no  issue  towards 
the  east,  and  abut  on  the  uncovered  and  shifting  sands  within  the  river. 
In  these  channels  the  stream  runs  7  and  8  knots  at  the  springs,  and  4  and  5 

*  See  Admiralty  charts: — Trouville  to  Dieppe,  No.  2,612;  scale,  m  =  0*5  of  an 
inch;  Barfleur  to  cape  d'Autifer,  No,  2,613;  scale,  m  =»  0*5  of  an  inch;  and  entrance 
of  the  Seine,  No.  2,680 ;  scale,  m  =  2  inches. 


CHAP.n.]  EMBOUCHTJBE  DE  LA  SEINE.  65 

knots  at  the  neaps,  and  vessels  of  large  dranght  sbould  avoid  approaching 
them  during  the  flood,  for  they  would  be  rapidly  carried  amongst  the  sandti, 
and  of  a  certainty  lost  if  they  should  have  the  misfortune  to  ground  on  them. 
Ifeither  can  they  be  brought  up  by  anchorage,  for  the  ancliore  will  not  hold 
in  the  shilling  sand,  and  it  will  be  impossible  to  resist  the  violence  of  the 
stream,  which  increases  its  velocity  in  advancing  to  the  eastward. 

The  inner  part  of  the  estuary  is  encumbered  with  an  immense  inasa 
of  shifting  sand,  which  dries  when  the  sea  retires,  and  through  which 
the  tidal  streams  and  the  waters  of  the  river  have  forced  a  channel,  the 
position  of  which  is  so  changeable  that  the  interval  of  a  fe^  days  only 
is  BuflScient  to  transport  it  from  one  banfe  of  the  river  to  the  other. 
Vessels  will  be  esposed  to  great  danger  it  they  attempt  this  channel 
without  the  assistance  of  the  pilots  from  Quillebceuf  who  are  especially 
appointed  to  conduct  both  sailing  and  steam  vessels  above  Le  Havre  and 
Honfleur,  It  is  the  duty  of  these  jA\ots  to  -watch  the  changes  that  may 
take  place  in  the  position  of  the  banks,  and  to  mark  the  actual  direc- 
tion of  the  channel  by  beacons.  Their  principal  stations  are  at  Le  Havre 
and  at  FonSeur,  and  they  are  always  in  sufficient  nuraher  at  these  places 
to  satisfy  ihe  wants  of  vessels  requiring  them.  Vessels  also  destined  for 
the  interior  of  the  Seine  can  procure  at  either  of  these  places  steam-tuga 
to  take  them  speedily  past  the  dangerous  puts  of  the  lower  Seine,  and 
they  will  then  avoid  all  the  incMiveniences  which  may  result  from  a  change 
of  wind. 

The  bed  of  the  river  being  inclined,  it  checks  the  flood  stream  for  some 
time  at  the  commencement  of  the  rising  tide,  but  as  soon  as  the  accumu- 
lation of  water  permits  this  stream  to  overcome  the  obstacles  opposed  to 
its  course,  it  precipitates  itself  into  the  channels  between  the  banks,  and 
loses  little  (£  its  rapidity  nntil  these  banks  are  entirely  covered ;  it  is  then 
that  the  river  becomes  navigable.  The  ebb  stream  in  summer  has  rather 
less  speed  than  the  flood,  but  it  runs  longer  ;  during  the  rainy  teastm 
and  at  the  melting  of  the  snow  it  has  in  general  more  strength  than  the 
flood. 

The  channel  of  the  Srine  undergoes  such  frequent  and  extraordinary 
changes  that  a  description  of  it  would  be  entirely  useless  to  mariners.  We 
will  therefore  only  give  some  general  extracts  which  are  copied  from  the 
"Remarks  oq  the  Navigation  of  the  Seine,"  by  Mons.  Bailly,  Marine 
Surveyor: — "  The  Seine  is  subject  to  the  phenomenon  of  the  Mascaret,  or 
Bore,  which  by  the  mariners  of  the  place  is  named  the  flot.  It  takes  place 
aa  soon  as  the  tide  b^ns  to  rise,  and  may  be  known  by  a  sort  of  roller, 
which  extends  from  one  hank  of  the  river  to  the  other,  and  advances  with 
grcAter  or  less  rapidity  according  to  the  range  of  the  tide.  It  is  always 
accompanied  by  a  loud  noise,  which  announces  its  approach,  and  is  followed 
Q  7049.  E 


66  CAPE  BARFLETJE  TO  CAPE  d'ANTIFEE.         [chap.  n. 

bj  the  undulations  occasioned  by  the  reflux  of  the  waters  of  the  river.  At 
Qnilleboeuf  it  attains  its  greatest  strength,  but  it  extends  far  beyond,  and  is 
sometimes  to  be  found  above  Rouen. 

^  The  greater  number  of  accidents  that  happen  to  vessels  navigating  the 
Seine  may  be  attributed  to  this  Bore ;  for  should  a  vessel  from  any  cause 
take  the  ground,  it  frequently  happens,  especially  during  the  springs,  that 
when  the  flood  reaches  her  she  is  thrown  on  her  broadside  and  buried  in 
the  sand  set  in  motion  by  the  strength  of  the  stream,  and  as  it  is  then 
impossible  to  send  any  assistance  she  becomes,  in  almost  every  case,  a  lost 
vessel.  The  number  of  masts  sticking  up  in  various  parts  of  the  river 
testify  that  these  misfortunes  are  not  unfrequent,  and  the  greatest  attention 
should  therefore  be  paid  by  commanders  of  vessels  ascending  the  river 
until  they  arrive  at  Quilleboeuf,  where  they  can  be  secured  to  the  quay 
before  their  vessels  are  exposed  to  the  danger  of  grounding  in  the  channel. 
If  they  cannot  arrive  at  this  position  before  the  end  of  the  flood  they  must 
hasten  to  take  shelter  either  at  Honfleur  or  Le  Havre,  whilst  there  is  yet 
sufficient  water  in  the  narrow  channels.  Generally  speaking,  they  should 
not  attempt  to  ascend  or  descend  the  river  without  leading  winds  or  in  tow 
of  a  steam  vessel. 

"  Sailing  vessels  at  Le  Havre  or  Honfleur  intending  to  ascend  the  Seine 
should  leave  those  ports  directly  they  float,  and  with  a  leading  wind  they 
may  expect  to  reach  Quilleboeuf  before  the  ebb  begins  to  be  felt.  This 
navigation,  however,  can  only  be  undertaken  with  safety  during  the 
springs,  for  at  the  neaps  the  depth  of  water  is  not  sufficient  for  vessels 
of  much  draught  to  navigate  the  lower  part  of  the  river.  Most  vessels 
waiting  at  Le  Havre  for  the  springs  to  ascend  the  river,  quit  the  harbour 
on  the  ebb  preceding  the  flood  which  is  to  take  them  up  to  Quilleboeuf,  and 
anchor  in  the  Petite  Bade ;  by  doing  so  they  avoid]  the  loss  of  time  which 
the  getting  out  of  the  harbour  would  occasion  with  westerly  winds,  and  do 
not  run  the  risk  of  losing  a  favourable  tide." 

Tides.-^Under  exceptional  circumstances  of  tide,  a  vessel  drawing 
23  feet  water  can  get  up  to  Rouen,  yet  under  ordinary  circumstances  it  is 
not  safe  to  count  on  more  than  17  or  18  feet  water,  between  Havre  and 
Rouen,  at  springs,  and  14  feet  at  neaps.* 

Cautioil. — To  show  the  danger  attending  the  Bore;  on  the  8th 
February  1871,  H.M.  gunboat  Pheasant^  while  at  anchor  off"  Quilleboeuf 
lost  a  bower  anchor  and  30  fathoms  of  chain.  The  vessel  at  the  time  was 
riding  to  the  ebb,  which  was  running  at  the  rate  of  4  or  5  knots  an  hour, 
when  the  Bore,  without  any  waming,^came  up  the  river  in  two  waves  of 
from  6  to  8  feet  in  height,  and  travelling  at  the  rate  of  6  to  7  knots ;  this 


*  Chef  du  Pilotage,  river  Seine,  1879. 


CHAP.ii.]        BANC  DB  SEINB.-^BANC  DB  TEOTTVIIiLB.  67 

cansed  the  cable  to  part,  bat  steam  being  ready,  the  vessel  was  soon  tinder 
control,  and  no  further  damage  was  done. 

In  the  Seine,  there' is  no  interval  at  all  of  alack  water  between  the  ebb 
and  flood  tides,  and  the  moment  the  Bore  bad  passed,  the  flood  was 
making  up  at  the  rate  of  6  or  7  knots.  After  the  flood  tide,  there  is 
always  some  interval  of  slack  water.  The  Bore  appears  principally  at  the 
time  of  springs,  but  does  not  take  place  with  any  regularity,  so  it  is  im- 
possible to  know  beforehand  if  thei'e  will  be  one  or  not,  and  they  vary 
greatly  in  size.* 

Banc  do  Soind. — 'I'he  deposits  of  sand  and  mud  washed  down  by  the 
river  Seine  extend  beyond  the  shoab  at  the  river's  moath,  and  form  an 
extensive  submarine  slope,  agreeing  in  shape  with  the  bank  bordering  the 
shore  from  port-en-Bessin  to  the  meridian  of  the  Dives.  This  slope,  upon 
which  the  soundings  increase  slowly  and  regularly  towards  the  offing  in  a 
direction  perpendicular  to  the  coast,  occupies  the  whole  breadth  of  the 
mouth  of  the  river,  and  terminates  to  the  northward  on  the  parallel  of 
cape  de  la  H&ve ;  but  on  the  parallel  of  Le  Havre,  and  projecting  15^ 
miles  to  the  westward  of  that  town,  liea  a  narrow  shoal  named  Banc  de  ' 
Seine,  which  is  steep-to  on  its  southern  side,  and  slopes  gradually  to  the 
northward.  This  bank  is  not  dangerous,  having  7  to  9  fathoms  on  it,  but 
the  streams  cross  it  obliquely  and  cause  eddies  upon  its  steep  edge,  where 
the  sea  is  high  during  northerly  gales  on  a  weather  tide. 

The  Seine  bank  and  the  deep  to  the  southward  of  it,  called  by  the  pilots 
the  Farfond,  may  be  nseftil  in  establishing  the  position  of  a  vessel  during 
fogs  or  falls  of  snow,  when  the  navigation  can  only  he  carried  on  by  means 
of  the  lead.  From  the  western  extremity  of  the  bank,  in  9  fathoms,  cape 
de  la  H&ve  lighthouses  bear  E,  by  S.  H  S.  distant  14  miles,  and  Ver  light- 
house S.W.  by  W.  i  W.  13  miles. 

The  principal  banks  obstmcting  the  mouth  of  the  Seine  are,  the 
TrouviUe,  the  Batier,  the  Amfard,  the  Haats  de  la  Bade,  and  the  Sclat, 
the  higher  parts  of  which  uncover  at  low  water  ;  but  as  tho  two  latter 
lie  near  the  nortlkem  shore,  and  out  of  the  ti-ack  vessels  should  follow  when 
bound  for  ports  in  the  Seine,  the  description  of  them  will  be  reserved 
until  the  right  bank  of  the  mouth  of  the  river  is  described,  briefly  noticing 
that  in  1855  it  was  found  that  the  Hants  de  la  Bade  and  the  iGclat  had 
not  undergone  any  sensible  alteration  since  1834,  but  the  banks  to  the 
sonthward  and  eastward  of  them  had  altered  considerably. 

BaJlC  ds  TroUVille. — This  bank  of  muddy  sand,  the  south-west- 
ernmost of  the  shifting  banks  at  the  mouth  of  the  Seine,  is  about  2^  miles 

*  Lieutenant  H.  W.  Bochfort,  H.M.S.  PAeatiatt,  1871. 


68  CAPB  BAETLETJR  TO  CAPE  D'ANTIFEK,  [chap,  n 

long  in  an  E.  by  N.  and  TV.  bj  S.  direction,  and  from  a  half  to  one  milo 
broad,  with  general  depths  of  3  to  6  feet  water.  A  portion  of  its  surface 
about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  long  and  one  cable  broad,  extending  in  a 
N.E.  and  S.W.  direction,  and  lying  4  cables  from  the  shore  abreast  of 
Hennequeville,  dries  fit)m  one  to  4  feet  at  low  water  springs.  The  sea  is 
exceedingly  heavy  upon  this  bank,  with  winds  between  W.S.W.,  round 
westerly,  and  N.N.E. 

The  Trouville  is  separated  from  the  shore  by  a  narrow  channel,  the 
entrance  to  which  is  on  the  parallel  of  Trouville  church.  It  is  possible 
to  enter  the  Seine  by  this  channel,  which  in  1878  had  depths  of  14  to  20 
feet,  clayey  mud;  vessels  can  anchor  in  14  feet  abreast  the  mouth  of  the 
Touqes,  during  an  unfavourable  tide.  The  streams  follow  the  direction 
of  the  channel,  and  during  calm  weather,  the  flood  at  the  springs  runs 
about  5^  hours,  and  ends  15  or  20  minutes  after  high  water  at  Le  Havre  ; 
its  greatest  speed  is  about  4  knots  towards  half  flood.  The  ebb  is  rather 
weaker,  and  follows  in  an  opposite  direction. 

Banc  dU  Ratier,  lying  abreast  VillerviUe  at  1^  miles  from  the 
shore,  is  united  at  its  western  side  to  the  Katelets,  and  they  foi*m  one  of 
the  most  dangerous  shoals  at  the  mouth  of  the  Seine.  The  bank  is  of  an 
irregular  shape,  and  its  surface,  which  dries  from  one  to  12  feet  above  the 
lowest  tides,  is  covered  with  a  large  quantity  of  stones  and  rolled  shingle, 
but  its  base  is  a  mass  of  compact  brown  clay,  and  consequently  not  subject 
to  change.  That  part  of  the  surface  which  uncovers  is  %  little  more  than 
2  miles  long  in  an  east  and  west  direction,  and  forms  a  shelter  from  the 
flood  to  the  banks  of  shifting  sand  lying  to  the  eastward  of  it.  From  its 
western  extremity,  which  terminates  in  a  point,  cape  de  la  Heve  lighthouses 
bear  N.  |  E.  5^  miles. 

This  bank  covers  towards  half  flood  and  the  sea  runs  high  upon  it  with 
strong  winds  between  West  and  North,  but  with  the  latter  wind  it  shelters 
in  some  degree  the  channel  to  the  southward  of  it.* 

The  eastern  limit  of  the  red  light  at  DeauviUe  (page  70)  passes  about 
two-thirds  of  a  mile  westward  of  the  Batelets  bank. 

Banc  d'Amfard  lies  about  2  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  Ratier, 
,  and  like  the  latter  bank  its  base  is  formed  of  a  mass  of  brown  clay,  its 
surface  is  covered  with  large  shingle,  and  it  shelters  the  banks  of  shifting 
sand  lying  to  the  eastward.  This  bank  uncovers  about  8  feet  at  low-water 
springs,  but  its  surface  is  subject  to  great  changes,  for  in  1855  it  was 
found  that  the  stones  or  pebbles  which  constituted  its  inferior  part  in  1834 
were  then  buried  under  shingle  6  feet  thick,  proving  that  the  shingle  on 

*  The  relatiye  positions  of  the  >aoys  marking  the  Trouville,  Batelets,  and  Batier 
tanks  will  be  better  understood  by  referring  to  the  Admiralty  chart,  than  by  any 
written  description. 


CBAP.n.]  EMBOUCHURE  DE  LA.  SEIKE.  69 

it  is  not  so  Btationary  as  it  seems  to  be  on  the  Batier.  Small  vessels  may 
pass  to  the  westward  of  this  bank  at  luw- water,  by  keeping  tlie  church 
spire  at  Harfleur  open  a  quarter  of  a  point  to  the  westward  of  the  guard- 
honse  on  beiges  point.  The  passage  between  the  Amfard  and  the  shore 
to  the  eastward  of  Le  Havre,  is  one  of  the  entrances  to  the  great  channel 
of  the  Seine. 

LEFT  BANE  of  the  EUBOnCHUBE  de  la  SEINE. 

— From  the  entrance  of  the  river  Dives,  to  the  hill  of  Notrs-Dame-de- 
Gr&ce,  which  commands  the  town  and  harbour  of  Honfleur,  the  left  bank 
of  the  estuary  of  the  Seine  trends  about  15  miles  £.  by  N.,  and  the  coast 
is  bordered  by  high  hills,  terminating  abruptly  towards  the  sea  in  cliffs  of 
brown  clay  and  etone,  and  by  large  land  slips,  except  in  &ont  of  three 
vaUeys  where  the  shore  is  low  and  sandy.  The  widest  and  most  reroarkable 
of  these  valleys  is  that  through  which  the  little  river  I'ouques  finds  its  way 
into  the  sea.  This  valley  is  2  miles  wide  at  the  sea  shore,  but  narrows 
suddenly  at  the  dislance  of  400  yards  inland ;  it  may  be  recognised  from  a 
great  distance  off  by  the  village  of  Trouville,  which  is  built  at  the  foot  of  a 
high  steep  hill  at  the  entrance  of  the  river. 

Vessels  of  more  than  9  feet  draught  should  be  cautious  when  approach- 
ing the  cosfit  at  2^  miles  to  the  westward  nf  the  Tonqucs,  as  a  dat, 
with  only  from  3  to  10  feet  water  on  it,  extends  1^  miles  from  the  shore. 
To  the  eastward  of  the  Touques  the  coast  is  bordered  by  uneven  rocks 
which  dry  at  low  water,  and  terminate  at  3  miles  E.N.E,  from  Trouville 
in  VillerviOe  point.  This  point  extends  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  a 
N.W.  by  N.  direction  from  Villerville  village,  and  is  dangerous  to  vessels 
proceeding  through  the  channel  (noticed  in  page  68),  between  the  TronvUle 
bank  and  the  shore,  but  it  will  be  avoided  when  passing  to  the  northward 
of  it,  by  keeping  La  Roque  point  bearing  E.  by  S.,  and  seen  opening  and 
shotting  in  with  Fonds  cliff.  Ia  Boque  point  is  fcvmed  of  a  high  white 
cliff,  perpendicular  towards  the  river  side,  and  may  bo  easily  recognized, 
being  the  first  point  on  the  left  bank  of  the  Seine,  which  is  seen  to  open 
out  from  Fonds  cliff  when  coming  from  the  sonth-west, 

EHBOUCHURE  de  la  TOUQUES.— The  entrance  to  this 
river  lies  E.  by  N.  8  miles  from  that  of  the  Dives,  and  is  formed  in  a  small 
indentation,  made  by  the  low  point  of  Cahote,  at  the  north-western 
extremity  of  TronviUe  village.  A  sand  bank  extends  from  this  point  and 
the  highest  part^  of  it,  which  are  scarcely  covered  during  the  neaps,  tena 
to  divert  the  waters  of  the  river,  end  caused  them  in  1838  to  turn  abruptly 
to  the  south-west  in  their  outward  course ;  but  in  1855  the  bank  had 
idtered  its  position,  and  the  waters  flowed  out  to  the  north-west  from 
Cahote  point,  through  a  narrow  channel  about  4J  cables  long.  In  dry 
weather  the  wind  drives  a  great  quantity  of  sand  into  the  channel,  and  into 


70  CAPE  BAKIXETB  TO  CAPE  D'aKTUER*        [chaf.h. 

Uie  rivc^r;  but  the  freMbets,  which  are  abuudant  during  the  rainy  aeason, 
WMli  Chir  NUid  outwards,  and  improve  the  entrance, 

7'he  di'piL  iu  the  river  is  about  19  feet  at  high-water  springn  between 
thi'  j«ftti*?^,  and  14  feet  at  the  qnav,  where  vessels  load  and  unload. 
|>uriii]^  tL<;  ijeap«<,  those  of  from  11  to  12  feet  draught  can  enter  the  riTer, 
Mi'J  thoM:  of  8  feet  can  reach  the  quay.  The  breadth  of  the  passage 
beiw(;(;ij  th^  two  jetties  is  828  yards.  Vessels  of  from  100  to  200  tons 
burtlii;ij  arrive  almost  daily,  laden  with  coal  from  England.  Steam- vesseb 
<j^h  ('iiti;r  (h^  rivi'r ;  but  those  of  any  lengtli,  although  drawing  little 
wit.U'j,  hhould  not  attempt  it,  as  the  channel  is  very  narrow^  and  the 
Wiit'iity^  hluujj  at  Cahote  poinL 

'J'loiivjJIf'y  wiiljjij  th(^  mouth  of  the  river,  i»  especially  a  fishing  port,  but 
i4  if  M:(;uMloriull  V  fn?rj ueuted  by  coasting  vessels,  which  find  good  shelter  in 
it  kfiiJ  Im  uflf/ttt  abn^a^t  the  village.  The  smalltown  of  Touques  is  situated 
u|/  ijic;  |-jv«;i  about  2  miles  above  Trouville,  and  in  1857  vessels  of  8|  feet 
4$uHyUi  <;<;iji(J  i!,t'X  up  to  the  town  at  the  Springs.  The  river  is  navigable 
<te-  liifrlj  ij|i  lu;  (^iifti-aij-Coc|,  a  small  port  5^  miles  in  the  interior,  where 
it:ifc  li-  Mii\U'ii'n\  wuU-r  for  nmall  vetssels  to  remain  afioat. 

A   lAU)  JiOttt  ^^  Htatiori«*d  at  Trouville. 

1^1  ^i II TM«  ^^  J>(ruuville,  went  side  of  entrance  to  Touques  river, 
.-.UKtAti  u  fc'|iiiiM'  \iy\iiU<mmi,  t)[)  feet  high  (painted  in  alternate  red  and 
vo.iu  l/Mi'lry,  If  «mi  wlilrh  lit  fin  elevation  of  62  feet,  is  exhibiteda  fixed  red 
i.}/!.!,  v)i^f)/U  III  'Ifur  wi'tttbcr  from  a  distance  of  10  miles,  between  the 
!*•  orfiii/.-  *fi  .*••.  hy  W,  hikI  K.  b^  S.  \  S. 

A  ix^AA  ifnnt  \\^\A  Ih  itAliibitiMi  from  the  east  pier  (near  the  end)  at  547 
^M'l.-  M.  i#/  W.  ;|  Wr  from  J><sauville  light,  and  should  be  visible  from  a 

(ii»)i/UiUA- «/}  y  JlJIU■^. 

^'•ua  tlic  oja^I  of  (lie)  wcwt  pii'r,  at  86  yards  W.N.W.  from  the  east  pi^r 
J/|^U,  li  iviiiU'  iMid  r/'//  iigbi  \%  exliibitud,  visible  8  miles.  This  light  is 
nJii/yvii  //iil|  wbcn  iijuui'u  ari»  at  i^MHt  6^  feet  water  in  thechanneL  This 
Jj^Jii  h.'  ftti  t4itoi  wiiid  of  a  N,W.  by  S.  I>«;aring. 

i^^M  M^IMI*  '  A  '^^'  ^'^  itouiulod  during  fogs,  from  the  north  end. of 

|>U*4)aitQ|)l|,  •--  'i'lM  moMt  favourable  winds,  fcnr  entering  tiie^ 
tthoaiiui  Us4Miiii|{  iuto  iJi«<  riv(*r  Toiii|ueii  are  those  from  the  westward;  but 
yoMtieU  nJuiiiLd  ja4>i  oiiiur  uiiiil  half  au  hour  before  high  water.  With  a 
luuliiig  wiiid,  iU^^y  may  Diiiwtf  within  half  an  hour  after  high^water^  as- 
\JiiAi  ul;b  itf  uiMily  MU^miuad,  AL  th4»  entrance  of  the  channel>  in  all  weadier», 
Mmi'o  in  ahnoMt  h  CDrUUuty  of  procuring  pilots.  A  heavy  sea  'runs 
)ji  ih«  i^uim'  pi^t  of  tii#  cUauuoI  when  it  blows  hard  from  the  west* 
ward. 


OHAP.u.]  POET  DB  HONPLETJR.  71 

Sm&tl  vessels  may  anchor  with  off-sbore  vmds,  in  about  10  feet  at  low 
water,  about  1^  miles  from  tbe  beach,  abreast  the  plain  of  Tillers,  which 
is  situated  8  miles  to  the  south-west  of  tbe  Tiver,  and  remain  there  nntil 
tbe  tide  has  risen  sufficientlj  high  for  them  to  enter ;  but  with  tbe  wind 
from  the  N.W,  the;  should  anchor  in  the  channel  between  the  Tronville 
bank  and  the  coast  (noticed  in  page  68),  with  the  ruins  of  the  chlt«an  de 
Laes4  in  line  with  the  houses  standing  on  Cahote  pcnnt  bearing 
S.  bf  W,  ^  W.  i  if  tbe  wind  should  then  freshen  and  change  to  tbe  West 
or  S.W.,  they  will  be  able  to  run  throuf^  the  channel  and  take  refuge  at 
Honfleur. 

The  tide  signals  ara  now  mode  dnrJng  the  day  from  the  earth-works  of 
La  Cahote  ;  they  will  show  tbe  least  depth  of  water  found  in  tbe  whole 
extent  c^  tbe  channel,  commencing  at  6  feet,  and  indicate  the  change 
every  quarter  of  a  metre  (about  tbree-quarters  of  a  foot),  according  to 
the  system  of  tide  signals  adopted  for  the  coast  of  France. 

PORT  de  HONFLEUR.— From  the  mouth  of  the  Touques, 
the  steep  coast  trends  3  miles  to  the  £  Jf.E.  as  far  as  a  small  village  at 
some  elevation,  named  Tillerville  ,-  it  then  bends  more  to  the  eastward  for 
4  miles  to  the  hill  of  Notre-Dame-de -Grace,  which  is  one  of  the  highest 
and  the  most  conspicuons  hill  in  the  estuary  of  the  Seine.  The  only  part 
of  this  coast  where  the  shore  is  low  and  accessible  at  high  water  is  between 
Villerville  and  Vasoui. 

This  port  occupies  the  entrance  of  a  beantifnl  valley,  open  to  tbe  north- 
east, situated  immediately  to  the  eastward  of  the  hill  of  Ifotre-Dame-de- 
Grfioe.  It  is  ebeUered  by  the  Und  on  all  sides,  and  tbe  wind  never  raises 
a  sea  sufficiently  heavy  to  render  It  dangerous  to  enter.  It  possesses  faci- 
lities for  heaving  vessels  down,  spacious  building  3rards  in  the  proximity  o^ 
forests  which  furnish  sufficient  timber  annually  for  the  conslruction  of 
25  to  30  vessels  of  the  aggregate  tonnage  oP  from  6  to  8,000  tons,  not 
including  those  «f  smaller  burthen.  The  population  in  1871  amounted  to 
9,946. 

Hie  port  consists' of  a  large  outer  tidal  harbour ;  three  floating  basins, 
named  the  old,  the  new,  and  a  third  basin  with  a  reservoir  of  water  for 
scouring  them  out ;  also  a  small  tidal  harbour  on  tbe  western  side,  which 
serves  chiefly  for  steam-boats  and  sailing  vessels  employed  in  the  daily 
transport  of  passengers  and  the  productions  of  the  country  to  Le  Havre. 
Tbe  depth  in  the  old  basin  is  18^  feet  at  high-water  great  springs,  lj|feet 
at  ordinary  springs,  and  nearly  10  feet  at  nec^ ;  in  tbe  new  basin,  22J  f Mt 
at  great  isprings,  19^  feet  at  ordhiary  springs,  and  13}  feet  at  neaps ;  and 
in  the  third  basin  23|  feet  at  great  springs,  21}  feet  at  ordinary  ^Ings, 
and  i6\  at  neaps.    Most  venels  requiring  to  stop  a  tide  previous  to  going 


72  CAPE  BARFLEUR  TO  CAPE  d'ANTIFER.         [chap,  iu 

np  the  Seine,  enter  the  port,  where  they  are  supplied  with  pilots  or  steam- 
tngs. 

The  entrance  of  the  port  is  formed  between  two  stone  jetties,  230  feet 
apart,  and  is  open  to  N.  by  E.  The  water  running  out  of  the  port  has  cut 
a  narrow  and  winding  channel  through  a  bank  of  shifting  sand,  which 
uncovers  at  low-water  springs  as  far  out  as  2  cables  from  the  end  of  the 
jetties.  The  direction  of  this  channel  being  subject  to  change,  is  marked 
within  3  cables  of  the  jetties,  by  three  red  and  three  black  buoys,  the 
positions  of  which  are  shifted  whenever  it  has  undergone  any  marked 
alteration.  The  red  buoys  are  placed  on  the  west  side  of  the  channel,  and 
must  be  left  to  starboard,  and  the  hloLck  buoys  on  the  east  side,  and  must  be 
left  to  port  in  entering. 

The  channel  outside  the  buoys  takes  a  sharp  turn  to  the  eastward,  which 
is  caused  by  the  violence  of  the  flood  stream  driving  the  western  extremity 
of  the  western  edge  of  the  beach  in  that  direction.  Vessels,  however,  at 
high-water  springs,  may  almost  always  pass  over  the  small  banks  which 
form  a  bar  to  the  buoyed  channel ;  but  it  would  be  dangerous  to  enter 
without  a  pilot,  for  the  sand  is  so  moveable  and  the  streams,  which  set 
obliquely  across  the  channel,  so  i*apid,  that  a  laden  vessel  grounding  during 
a  high  tide  would  run  the  risk  of  being  totally  lost. 

The  banks  at  the  bar  are  subject  to  change,  and  are  almost  always  a  foot 
or  two  above  the  level  of  the  entrance  channel.  They  vary  according  to 
the  state  of  the  banks  outside,  but  of  late  years  they  have  not  undergone 
any  sensible  alteration.  A  new  channel  has  been  formed  about  40  to  50 
yards  in  the  direction  of  the  wooden  mole  which  was  erected  in  the  year 

1875. 

The  depths  in  the  channel  are  23  feet,  at  high-water  equinoctial  springs; 
21  feet  at  ordinary  springs ;  17^  at  neaps. 

A  Lifo  BOEt  is  stationed  at  this  port, 

IiKJHTS. — ^A  fixed  red  light  is  exhibited  from  a  white  iron  tower, 
39  feet  within  the  extremity  of  the  west  pier  j  this  light  is  elevated 
33  feet  above  high-water,  and  should  be  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a 
distance  of  about  6  miles. 

The  tidal  light,  ^ fixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  series  of  coloured  flashes 
indicating  the  depth  of  water  in  the  channel,  is  exhibited  from  a  brick 
tower  at  the  end  of  the  east  pier.  This  light  is  elevated  39  feet  above 
high  water,  and  should  be  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of 
9  miles.  The  fixed  white  light  will  only  be  exhibited  when  there  are  at 
least  6^  feet  water  in  the  channel ;  each  red  flash  will  indicate  3  additional 
feet,  and  each  green  flash  three-quarters  of  a  foot  more.  Thus  the  white 
light  varied  by  two  red  flashes,  followed  by  one  green  flash,  signifies  that 


cttiP.ii.1     POET  DE   HONPLBUE. — LIGHIS. — DIKBCTIONS.        73 

the  depth  in  the  channel  is  13^  Feet.  Should  the  white  light  be  varied  by 
ons  red  flash  followed  hj  three  green  flashes,  the  depth  in  the  channel  will 
be  11|  feet. 

FrcHU  a  wooden  beacon  erected  on  the  extremity  of  the  breakwater  is 
exhibited  a  fixed  green  light,  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of 

3  milee. 

From  a  ctrcnlar  tower  erected  on  the  hospital  jetty  at  the  north-west 
extremity  of  the  towa  ta  exhibited  at  an  elevation  of  82  feet  above  high- 
water  a  ^ed  white  light  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of 
14  miles. 

FatOUVille  LighthOUSO  stands  on  the  high  lands  of  Fatonville, 
8|  miles  S.E.  by  E.  of  Honfleur,  and  exhibits  at  an  elevation  of  420  feet 
above  high  water  a  white  light,  varied  every  three  mintites  by  a  redjiash 
preceded  and  followed  by  a  short  eclipse ;  the  light  is  visible  in  clear 
weather  from  a  distance  of  20  miles. 

Fog  Signal.—Diring  (a^gj  weather  and  snow  storms,  a  bell  is 
sounded  from  the  end  of  the  hospital  jetty. 

DirOCtionS. — Port  Honfleur  is  accessible  to  vessels  of  large  draught 
during  springs;  shonid  they,  however,  arrive  at  the  mouth  of  the  Seine 
before  these  tides,  it  will  be  necessary  to  wait  under  sail  (with  the  wind 
between  W.S.W.,  round  westerly,  and  N.I^'.E.)  for  water  to  enter  the  pas- 
sages leading  to  Honfleur,  or  anchor  in  the  Grande  Rade  off  Lo  Havre  if 
the  wind  be  oflT  the  land ;  if  remaining  only  a  day  or  two  for  sufficient 
water,  they  may  anchor  in  5  or  6  fathoms,  mud  and  sand,  with  the  two 
lighthouses  on  cape  de  la  H^ve  in  line,  bearing  N.E.  ^  N.,  and  Fatonville 
lighthouse  seen  half  a  point  to  the  northward  of  the  western  lighthouse  at 
Honfleur. 

At  this  anchorage,  named  the  Bade  de  la  Carosse,  the  stream  runs 
towards  the  Seine  until  4  hours  flood,  and  its  greatest  strength,  which 
takes  place  at  3  hours  before  high  water  at  Le  Havre,  does  not  exceed 

4  knots.  Vessels  that  have  only  a  few  hours  to  wait  for  tide,  should  keep 
under  sail  to  the  westward  of  the  line  of  the  two  lighthouses  on  cape  de 
la  Hgve,  and  a  little  to  the  northward  of  the  line  of  the  western  lighthouse 
at  Honfleur,  in  line  with  the  lighthouse  at  Fatonville,  bearing  S.E.  by 
E.  ^  £.;  but  ehould  the  strength  of  the  tide  drift  them  towards  the  river, 
they  must  anchor  before  passing  these  limits. 

Passes  de  Honfleur. — ^Two  narrow  possagea  lead  to  port  Honfleur. 
The  northern  passage  lies  between  the  Amford  and  the  Katier  banks,  and 
is  considered  the  general  channel  into  the  Seine,  It  is  used  by  the  pilota 
when  the  wind  is  between  W.N.W.,  round  north,  and  N.N.E.  j  but  with 
contrary  winds,  although  there  is  room  lo  work,  targe  vessels  are  towed  b; 


74  CAPE  BARFLETJB  TO  CAPE  D'aNTIFER.        [chap.  n. 

steam-tugs.  The  western  lighthouse  at  Honfleur  in  line  with  Fatouviile 
lighihou«e  bearing  S.£.  by  £.  ^  E.,  will  lead  through  the  passage  and  up 
to  a  position  where  a  sight  of  the  beacons  at  the  entrance  of  the  port  may 
be  obtained;  but  as  a  vessel  must  cross  the  banks  of  shifting  sand,  which 
dry  at  low  water,  and  whose  height  is  very  variable,  it  would  be  extremely 
imprudent  and  dangerous  to  take  her  through  if  she  is  of  great  draught 
without  apiloty  unless  at  nearly  high  water  and  with  a  smooth  sea.  Small 
coasting  vessels  may  proceed  through  it  at  S^  or  4  hours  flood  during  the 
springs,  and  half  an  hour  before  high  water  at  the  neaps. 

The  southern  passage  to  Honfleur  lies  between  the  Ratier  and  the  Trou- 
ville  banks,  and  its  direction  is  pointed  out  by  the  north  extreme  of  Foods 
cliff  in  one  with  La  Roque  point  (remarkable  by  its  grey  tint  and  by  the 
perpendicular  stee  p  shore  at  its  termination),  bearing  £.  by  S.  In  running 
through,  these  marks  must  be  kept  on  until  abreast  Vasoui ;  from  thence  to 
Honfleur  keep  between  2  and  3  cables  from  the  shore.  At  night  you  may 
be  assured  that  you  are  in  this  channel,  when  the  light  on  point  de  la  Roque 
is  seen  just  clear  of  the  Falaise  des  Fonils. 

This  passage  is  generally  taken  with  the  wind  between  S.S.E.,  round 
southerly,  and  W.N.W.,  and  coasting  vessels  may  run  through  it  at  2^ 
hours,  and  large  vessels  at  3^  hours  flood;  but  i^ith  a  leading  wind  during 
the  springs,  it  should  not  be  entered  by  vessels  of  large  draught  until  4 
hours  flood,  as  that  stream  runs  with  great  rapidity  in  the  direction  of  the 
passage  between  Villerville  and  Honfleur.  The  flood  at  the  springs  com- 
mences 5  hours  before  high  water  at  Le  Havre,  and  runs  5\  hours;  its 
greatest  velocity,  which  is  towards  half  flooil,  is  sometimes  7  knots  between 
Vasoui  and  Honfleur.  Should  a  vessel  arrive  abreast  Vasoui  long  before 
high  water,  she  should  sheer  a  little  towards  the  shore,  where  the  tide  has 
less  strength  and  anchor  until  neariy  high  water.  With  strong  southerly 
winds,  precaution  should  be  taken  against  the  heavy  gusts  which  rush  down 
the  narrow  valleys  between  Fenne  de  Fie  and  Honfleur,  for  vessels  are 
sometimes  dismasted  by  their  violence. 

Small  vessels  when  bound  to  Honfleur  from  the  south-west  may  use  the 
narrow  channel,  noticed  in  page  68,  between  the  Trouville  bank  and  the 
coast ;  but  in  doing  so  they  must  proceed  with  caution  by  the  lead,  and 
give  a: good  berth  to  the  rocky  ledge  off  Villerville,  which  has  a  red  buoy 
moored  off  its  outer  extreme. 

Entering  Fort  de  Honfleur.— The  most  favouraUe  winds  fur 

entering  this  port  are  those  between  W.S.W.,  round  westerly,  and  E.NJB. 
The  extreme  channel  is  crossed  obliquely  by  the  flood  and  ebb  streams, 
and' their  velocity  at  full  and  change  is  from  5  to  6  knots.  The  flood 
contiiiues  6\  hours  and  enJs  at  the  moment  of  high  water,  and  it  is  at  this 


interval  of  15  or  20  minutes  slack  tide  that'  a  pilot  will  take  a  vessel  of 
large  draught  in  for  tbere  is  then  Httle  difficult  in  following  the  coarse  of 
the  channel. 

As  much  sail  as  possible  should  be  carried,  except  with  a  &esh  &ir  wind, 
in  passing  throng  the  outer  part  of  the  channel,  and  in  aQ  cases  die 
anchor  must  be  readj  to  let  go  should  a  sadden  shift  of  wind  or  the  heave 
of  the  Beft  force  her  out  of  the  ciiaimel.  In  the  event  of  such  an  accident 
a  signal  ^ould  inunediatelj'  be  made  for  the  assistance  of  a  steam-tug  by 
hanging  the  coIdutb  under  the  bowsprit.  If  the  entrance  is  missed,  anchor 
immediately  and  await  the  commencement  of  the  ebb  to  quit  the  river  as 
speedily  as  possible. 

When  arriving  off  the  port  with  a  fresh  southerly  wind  it  will  be  necea> 
aary  to  guard  against  the  sudden  gusts  which  are  felt  under  the  hill  of 
Notre-Dame-de-GrUce,  and  those  which  come  down  tlte  valley  at  Honfleur. 
With  a  head-wind,  or  a  calm,  the  assistance  of  a  steam-tug  should  be 
obtained,  as  all  the  danger  a  vessel  might  incur  in  the  river  or  at  the 
entrance  of  the  port  will  then  be  avoided.  When  nearing  the  entrance 
channel  the  tow-rope  must  be  well  short^ed  in,  and  great  attention  paid  to 
follow  directly  in  the  wake  of  the  tow-boat,  for  the  smallest  deviation  in 
the  steerage  is  sufficient  to  cause  the  vessel  to  ground  upon  the  steep  sides 
of  the  cliannel. 

Tides  and  Tidal  Signals. — ^It  is  high  water,  fail  and  change,  in 
port  Honfleur,  at  9h.  29m.,  springs  rise  23  feet;  neaps  18  feet.  The 
bottom  of  the  entrance  channel  and  the  deepest  parts  of  the  port  are  nearly 
on  a  level  with  the  lower  Bill  of  tlie  flood-gates  of  the  basin,  that  is  to  say, 
6  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides.  When  uninfluenced  by  the 
wind  the  tide  rises  above  the  lower  nil,  19  feet  at  ordinary  springs,  21 
feet  at  the  equinoxes,  and  13  feet  at  the  neaps.  Westerly  winds  of  any 
dnration  serve  to  raise  the  water,  and  easterly  winds  have  a  contrary 
efiect. 

During  rainy  weather  and  at  the  melting  of  the  snow  the  freshets  oE-  the 
Seine  are  abundant^  and  when  a  strong  westerly  wind  obstructs  their  eotme 
they  conbibnte  greatly  to  raise  the  water  in  the  port.  At  lii^-watflr  the 
tide  remams  slack  only  15  or  20  minutes,  but  the  change  in  the  height 
beiI^;  not  more  thim  three  or  four  inchesjfromhatf  an-  hoar  ImCks  to  half 
an  boar  after  high  watw,' the  gates  of  the  basin  can  remain  open  at  that 
period.widuHitincoDvwiaiee. '  •  ■■■■,..    ■.:.-.-    v  .<    -.     -•   - 

.mte  lyst^iii  of  rignals,  notioed  is  pages,  is  adapted  attkis^port.'    '     -' 

BiaHTSA^S  Of  tbe  EMBOUCHUBE  d«  U  SEINE: 
—The  extensive  chiUfcy  level  liwmliig  thfe  plain  of  Caux,  rfie  ifaean  h^jJfcS 
ofTrtiicihis  aboutSTfi  feet' sbove  tii«  loTel  of  high  watw/ bdnufls  ffie 


76  CAPE  BAEPLEU&  TO  CAPE  d'aNTIPER,        [chap.  n. 

northeiii  shore  of  the  estuary  of  the  Seine.  Between  the  meridian  of 
QuilleboBuf  and  the  valley  of  Harfleur  the  right  bank  of  the  river  is  steep 
and  presents,  for  a  large  portion  of  its  extent,  high  perpendicular  cliffs  of 
chalk  intersected  by  deep  valleys,  and  at  the  entrance  of  the  widest  of  them 
is  port  Harfleur. 

PORT  de  HARFLEUR  dries  out  every  tide,  and  small  vessels 
ground  in  it  upon  the  slopes  of  mud  forming  the  steep  banks  of  the  little  river 
Lizarde.  This  river  empties  itself  into  the  Seine  at  rather  more  than  a 
mile  below  Harfleur,  at  the  head  of  a  bay,  2^  miles  wide,  between  Hoe 
point  and  the  hill  at  Orcher.  The  lower  course  of  the  river  was  cleared 
out  in  1838,  and  its  waters  formed  a  channel  through  the  sands  as  far  oat 
as  Hoc  point ;  but  in  1869  this  channel  was  completely  choked  up. 

Point 6  du  Hoc. — This  low  point,  composed  of  a  mass  of  rolled 
shingle,  lies  about  1^  miles  S.W.  by  S.  of  Harfleur,  and  3^  miles  to  tho 
eastward  of  Le  Havre.  It  may  be  recognized  during  the  day  by  two 
large  houses  which  were  built  to  serve  as  a  lazaretto,  the  lighthouse,  and 
by  a  guard-house  standing  about  200  yards  from  the  lighthouse.  The 
point  forms  a  considerable  projection  from  the  shore,  and  occasions  a  strong 
eddy  during  the  flood.  This  eddy  stirs  up  the  sand  and  hollows  out  a  deep 
the  extent  and  depth  of  which  are  variable,  but  small  vessels  bound  for 
Harfleur,  or  intending  to  ascend  the  Seine,  lie  aground  without  danger, 
and  sheltered  by  the  point  await  the  spring  tides.  The  bottom  in  this  deep 
is  sand  and  shingle,  and  vessels  are  moored  securely  as  near  as  possible  to 
either  of  its  sides.  The  eddy  on  the  flood  is  troublesome,  and  the  ebb 
stream  very  rapid. 

Anchorage. — ^Anchorage  to  wait  the  tide  will  beTound  at  a  cable  from 
the  shore  to  the  south-west  of  Hoc  point,  with  Harfleur  church  steeple 
seen  between  the  two  warehouses  of  the  lazaretto  ;  but  it  is  not  safe  for 
vessels  to  go  there  before  3  hours  flood,  nor  after  3  hours  ebb. 

LIQHT. — h.  fixed  white  light,  dioptric  and  of  the  fourth  order,  is 
exhibited  at  39  feet  above  high  water  from  the  lighthouse  on  Hoc  point, 
and  is  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  10  miles. 

Anse  do  I'HourO. — Between  Hoc  point  and  Le  Havre  the  shore 
and  adjacent  land  are  low,  but  they  are  defended  against  the  invasion  of 
the  sea  by  a  high  natural  bank  of  shingle  extending  to  the  westward  as 
far  as  the  middle  of  Heure  bay,  and  to  which  an  artificial  embankment  has 
been  joined,  abutting  the  wall  which  encloses  the  southern  part  of  Le 
Havre.  This  bay  seems  to  have  been  hollowed  out  by  the  violent  eddy 
caused  by  the  north  jetty  at  Le  Havre  during  the  flood,  and  is  now  entirely 
filled  up  with  shingle  cemented  together  with  mud,  which  uncovers  from 


<iH*P.n.]  PORT  DE   HABFLETTB. — LE  EAVBB.  77 

9  to  13  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  In  bad  weather,  whatever  may  be  the 
direction  of  the  wind,  the  waves  break  right  on  to  the  shore  during  the 
flood,  and  any  vessel  at  that  time  missing  the  entrance  of  Le  Havre,  and 
driven  into  the  bay,  would  be  totally  lost. 

IiE  HAVRE.-— The  town,  tidal  harbour,  and  floating  basins  of  this 
port  occupy  the  south-west  part  of  a  low  plmn,  which  is  an  alluvial  deposit 
formed  at  the  foot  of  the  mountain  ridge  bounding  the  communes  or 
parishes  of  Ingonville  and  Graville  on  the  north,  and  extending  east  and 
west  from  the  valley  near  Harfleur  to  St.  Andresse. 

In  1869  the  foreign  and  coasring  trade  employed  £,713  vessels  mea- 
suring 1,323,286  tons,  and  71,162  seamen;  of  this  number  4,217  were 
French  vessels,  including  2,938  employed  in  the  coasting  and  river 
trade. 

The  imports  consist  of  cotton,  sugar,  coff'ee,  rice,  spices,  hides,  iron, 
copper,  timber,  tin,  tea,  lead,  indigo,  dyewoods,  tobacco,  Ac,  &c.  The 
principal  exports  are  silks,  broadcloths,  cotton  goods,  lace,  gloves,  shoes, 
millinery,  wiAes,  brandy,  perfumery,  glass,  furniture,  books,  clocks, 
watches,  &c.,  &c.  The  duties  received  at  the  custom-house  in  1869 
amounted  to  fourteen  millions  of  francs.  The  population  of  the  town  in 
1876  was  92,068. 

The  entrance  to  the  tidal  harbour,  or  Avant^port,  lies  S.S.K,  2^  miles 
firom  cape  de  la  Heve,  and  is  open  to  the  heavy  sea  which  rolls  in 
with  strong  westerly  winds.  The  entrance  channel  is  formed  between 
two  jetties,  the  longest  of  which,  that  on  the  north  side,  shelters  the 
entrance  from  W.N.W.  winds,  the  south  jetty  is  short,  and  joins  the  wall 
which  encloses  La  Florida  basin.  The  harbour  is  accessible  at  high  water 
to  vessels  drawbg  from  22  to  24  feet  during  five  or  six  days  at  the  springs; 
that  is  to  say,  a  day  or  two  before  full  and  change,  and  three  or  four  days 
^ter. 

The  harbour  does  not  dry  out  at  low-woter  springs,  there  being  always 
at  least  3  feet  in  the  channel.  The  bank  outside  the  south  jetty  is  a 
continuation  of  the  bank  in  Heure  bay,  and  like  it,  is  composed  of  shingle 
cemented  together  by  mud,  and  forms  a  hard  bottom,  in  which  the 
anchors  take  hold  with  great  difficulty.  The  bottom  of  tJie  entrance 
channel  is  of  the  same  description;  but  in  the  harbour  the  shingle  is 
covered  with  a  layer  of  mnd,  which  forms  excellent  beds  for  vesseb  to 
ground  upon. 

Floating^  Basins.— The  port  of  Le  Havre,  besides  the  tidal  har- 
bour, consists  of  ten  floating  basins  or  docks,  which  communicate  with  each 
other  by  gates.  The  basins  are  capable  of  receiving  large  merchant  vessels, 
and  are  named  Bassin  de  Boi,  Ifoesin  de  la  Barr^  Bassin  Yauban,  Bassin 


78  CAPE  BAKPLTirS  TO  CAPE  D'APTirEB.         Ichap.  n. 


tU:  la  Floride,  Baarin  de  TEnre,  BasBUi  Lamblardie,  Bas^n  D'Angouleme, 
liaiitin  Kaint-Jean,  BaMixi  de  la  Citaddle,  and  dock  EntrepM ;  steam  vessels 
of  heftvy  tonnage  go  into  the  Floride  and  the  Eure  basins.  The  locks 
OfKrning  from  the  harbour  into  the  Floride  and  Saint  Jean  baans  are  6S  feet 
10  inches  wide,  and  those  leading  direct  from  the  harbour  into  the  Eore 
banin  are  100  feet  wide.  The  depth  of  water  on  the  sill  of  the  Eure  dock 
is  20  feet  at  springa^  and  24  feet  at  neaps.  The  other  locks  are  from 
62^  feet  to  37^  feet  wide,  which  last  is  the  lock  leading  into  the  Vauban 
banin,  where  British  colliers  lie. 

The  basins  arc  surrounded  by  wide  and  commodious  quays.  The  lower 
sills  of  the  gates  of  the  Roi  and  the  Barre  basins  are  3^  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  lowest  springs ;  the  sill  of  the  gate  of  the  Floride  basin  is  only 
Hix  inches  a1x>vc  that  level.  The  gates  of  the  Roi  and  the  Barre  basins 
can  remain  open  without  inconvenience  until  the  water  lias  fallen  2  feet 
below  high  water,  which  both  at  spring  and  neap  tides,  takes  place  about 
I  ^  hours  after  tlie  slack  of  high  water;  and  as  these  gates  are  opened  by  the 
pressure  of  tlic  rising  tide,  about  as  long  before  the  commencement  of  slack 
water,  it  follows  that  the  basins  can  communicate  with  the  harbour  during 
8)  or  4  hours  of  each  tide. 

The  harbour  is  bordered  by  quays  on  all  sides.  The  north  quay  is  used  by 
steam  vessels  that  convey  passengers  on  the  Seine  and  to  the  neighbouring 
ports.  The  steam-tugs  lie  alongside  the  Floride  quay ;  and  all  the  rest  of 
the  harbour  is  used  by  vessels  waiting  for  spring-tides  to  go  up  the  Seine, 
and  by  coasting  crafl.  In  the  commerce  basin  there  are  two  repairing 
slips  and  a  mastuig  sheers.  There  is  also  a  quay  for  vessels  to  heave  down 
to  at  the  upper  part  of  the  harbour,  close  to  the  gate  of  the  Barre  basin, 
and  in  1873  considerable  works  were  in  progress  for  widening  the  entrance 
to  the  port,  and  increasing  the  dock  and  quay  accommodation. 

Life  Boats.— Four  life  boats  are  stationed  at  Le  Havre  on  in  its  im- 
mediate vicinity. 

Pilots. — The  pilots  of  Le  Havre  are  numerous  and  skilful,  and  their 
remuneration  is  proportioned  to  the  distance  they  accompany  the  vessel. 
According  to  regulations  the  greatest  distance  is  cape  Barfleur,  and  the 
shortest  distance  is  outside  the  banks  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour ;  but 
as  thoro  is  great  competition  among  them,  they  ore  provided  with  excellent 
boatts  in  which  they  go  to  meet  vessels  as  far  as  the  Casquets.  When 
thoy  pilot  vessels  out  of  the  harbour,  they  are  bound  to  conduct  them  clear 
of  tho  outlying  banks,  and  if  they  consent  to  take  them  farther^  they  ore 
paid  IS  francBy  or  by  special  agreement.  Steam-tugs  are  in  readiness  to  go 
o\it  of  tho  harbour  every  tide ;  and  when  their  services  are  required,  they 
aro  dcnuuidcd  by  hanging  an  ensign  under  the  bowsprit. 


OHip.nl  LE  SA.TBE. — ^LIGHTS,  DANQEBS,  &C.  79 

LIGHTS.*— From  a  Bmall  tower  standing  on  Oie  noith'-wMt  jetty  of 
Le  Havre,  at  about  36  feet  from  ita  termination,  is  exhibited  infixed  white 
liglit,  39  feet  above  high  water,  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of 
}0  miles, 

A  emaH^fixedf  orange  coloured  light  is  also  shown  at  20  feet  above  high 
water  from  the  end  of  the  soutii'east  pier  visible  about  6  miles.  To 
complete  the  lighting  of  the  entrance,  a  glass  coloured  red  has  been  fixed 
to  a  lantern  on  the  quay  of  the  harbour,  and  this  lantern  is  so  placed  that 
by  keeping  the  rtd  light  given  by  it  opening  and  shutting  with  the  eastern 
edge  of  the  Tour  de  Francois  Premier,  the  course  of  the  channel  may  be 
followed  from  its  entrance  nearly  up  to  that  tower. 

Fog  Signal,— A  steam  fog  trumpet  near  the  lighthouse  oa  the  north- 
west jetty  is  sounded  in  thick  or  foggy  weather, 

DANGERS  off  LE  HAVRE. — The  approaches  to  Le  Havre 
are  obstructed  by  banks  of  stones  and  shiugic  which  form  a  belt  of  dangers 
fronting  the  shore  between  Neiges  point  and  cape  de  la  Hfeve.  The 
highest  parts  of  this  belt  are  the  banks  named  Banc  de  I'Eclat,  Hants  de 
la  Rade,  and  Haut  de  la  Petite  Rade ;  and  in  the  survey  of  1855  it  was 
found  that  they  had  not  experienced  any  sensible  alteration  since  1834 ; 
the  summit  of  the  Eclat  ia,  however,  a  little  raised.* 

Banc  de  I'Eclat  ia  divided  into  two  high  ridges  lying  a  quailer  of 
a  mile  apart  The  depth  is  6  feet  on  the  northern  ridge,  but  the  anmmit 
of  the  southern  ridge  is  awash  at  low  water,  and  is  one  of  the  moat  dan- 
gerous spots  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Le  Havre.  This  shoal  patch,  which 
lies  with  the  lighlhonaes  on  cape  de  la  Heve,  bearing  iN'.E.  f  E.  I^  miles; 
and  the  lighthouse  on  the  north  jetty  8.E.  \  E.  2^  miles,  is  stationary,  and 
its  surface  is  covered  with  masses  of  flint  and  shingle. 

Id  the  cut  or  depression  of  the  Eclat  bank  there  are  only  9  or  10  feet 
at  low  water.  There  is  a  passage  at  the  south-west  end  of  the  hank  vrith 
&om  9  to  IS  feet  in  it,  but  it  is  too  dangerous  to  be  taken  without  a  pilot, 

HftUtB  de  la  Rade  commence  'at  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the 
S.  by  £.  of  the  Eclat,  and  extend  as  for  as  Neiges  point.  They  are  com- 
posed of  three  ridges  separated  irom  each  other  by  narrow  ohannela 
with  from  10  to  12  feet  water  in  them.  The  north.weat  ridge  is  about 
6  cables  long  and  a  cable  broad,  and  has  only  3  feet  water  on  its  highest 
part,  which  lies  S.  by  E.  ^  E,  7  cables  irom  the  highest  part  of  the  Eclat. 

The  western  ridge  lies  half  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  this  dangerous 
spot,  and  has  only  5  feet  on  ita  western  end ;  it  is  the  outermost  danger 
on  the  parallel  of  the  entrance  to  Le  Havre,  and  is  marked  by  No.  €  buoy, 

*  5w  Adn^ialty  chivt :— Eutnuiee  of  the  SeiiM^  No.  9,S80 )  soale,  m~9  bohes.    ; 


■^,^^^tj*>a    AtA      bXAV   ^  \3 


uy  vv .  ^  W.  half  a  mile  from  the  north  jetty,  with 
is  marked  by  a  buoy. 

Buoys.* — A  whistle  buoy,  painted  black  and  re 
in  7  fathoms  water,  W.  ^  N.  3^  miles  from  the  southe 
Heve.     The  whistle  should  be  heard  under  favoun 
and  sea  from  a  distance  of  5  miles.    It  will  be  seen  I 
of  the  entrance  of  the  Seine,  that  the  western  side 
and  Les  Hants  de  la  Bade  are  marked  by  buoys  numbe 
1  (Bell  buoy)  to  5^  the  latter  being  moored  in  4|  i 
Ughthoases  on  cape  de  la  Hhve  in  line.    Each  buoy 
sized  by  its  distinguishing  ball,  triangle,  &c.,  but  ui 
ahould  a  stnuiger  pass  within  the  line  of  these  bi 
whose  serrioes  are  aknost  always  obtainable. 

PETITE  BADE  du  HAVRE  Hes  in  th 
iha  banks  just  described,  and  the  coast  between  Le  ] 
H^Te.  It  is  well  sheltered  bom  N.E.,  round  Easterly 
to  an  other  winds ;  and  those  between  North  and  W.S 
sea  when  blowing  strong.  The  holding  ground  is  g< 
take  finch  firm  hold  of  the  clay  that  there  is  somei 
in  wdg^bing,  especially  when  vessels  lying  here  ha 
strong  westerly  winds.  It  should,  however,  only 
temporary  anehorage,  to  which  vessels  may  resort  t 
to  wait  for  snfflcient  water  to  enter  the  harbour^  I 
to  remain  there  in  unsettled  weather,  or  when  it  bk 
westward. 

Yesads  of  moderate  dranglit  anchor  in  the  middle  < 
16  to  85  feetwai»r   ♦!.« 


CKiP.D.]        PETITE   AND   GEA.SDE   BADE   DU   HAVKt.  81 

and  the  depth  too  little  in  to  rUk  large  ve.iseU  stopping  tlicro  tuiy  Icugth 
of  time. 

Small  vessels  are  placed  nearer  the  shore  on  the  line  of  Fatoiiville  light- 
house open  a  little  to  the  northword  of  the  light-tower  on  the  jettv,  but 
no  nearer  the  shore  than  to  have  the  southevn  lighthouse  on  the  cape  bear- 
ing North.  The  holding  ground  is  so  good  here  that  a  small  vessel  well 
moored,  and  with  a  sufficient  scope  of  cable  out,  would  be  in  no  danger 
during  a  westi^rly  gale,  without  she  parted. 

Directions. — The  only  practicable  entrance  channel  into  the  Petite 
rode  du  Havre,  that  can  be  made  use  of  by  vessels  of  moderate  draught 
at  low  water,  is  between  the  cliffs  of  cape  de  la  H^ve  and  the  northern 
ridge  of  the  Eclat,  but  a  stranger  should  not  use  it  without  a  pilot.  The 
least  depth  in  it  is  from  12  to  IS  feet  at  low  water,  midway  between  the 
northern  ridge  and  the  shoi-e. 

To  enter  this  channel  steer  for  the  southern  lighthonse  on  the  cape  on 
a  S.E.  \  K.  bearing,  and  it  will  lead  nearly  8  cables  north  of  Ko.  1  buoy 
placed  near  the  northern  ridge  of  the  Eclat ;  when  about  3  cables  from 
the  cliffs  the  vessel  will  he  in  mid-chaonel,  and  must  then  hear  away  to  the 
southward  for  the  red  buoy  No.  8  moored  between  the  northern  ridge  and 
the  shore,  taking  care  not  to  approach  so  near  the  land  as  to  entirely  lose 
sight  of  the  lantern  of  the  northern  lighthouse.  Small  vessels,  locally 
acquainted,  may  run  for  the  anchorage  in  Petite  rade  at  low  water,  pass- 
ing through  the  channel,  either  northward  or  southward  of  the  southern 
ridge  of  the  Eclat;  but  the  lead  and  chart  mtist  be  theh-  guide. 

GRAND  BADE  du  HAVRE  lies  about  N.W.  by  W.  5  miles 
from  cape  de  la  H^ve,  and  is  simply  an  anchorage  in  the  open  sea,  exposed 
to  the  violence  of  both  winds  and  waves  fromN.E.,  round  northerly,  to 
W.S.W.  Vessels  of  large  draught,  having  to  wait  for  the  springs  to  enter 
Le  Havre,  may  sometimes  anchor  in  it  when  the  wind  is  between  E.N.E., 
round  easterly,  and  S.S.W.,  but  they  should  be  prapared  to  weigh  instantly, 
upon  any  change  in  the  weather.  The  holding  ground  is  excellent,  and  a 
vessel  at  anchor  in  the  centre  of  the  road,  in  9  fathoms  water,  will  have 
cape  de  la  H^ve  bearing  S.E.  by  E.,  and  Fatouville  lighthouse  in  line  with 
the  light-tower  on  the  north  jetty  at  Le  Havre,  S.E. 

When  bound  into  the  harbour  of  Le  Havre  from  the  Grande  Rade^ 
weigh,  if  the  wind  be  between  E.N.E,  round  easterly,  and  S.W.,  as  soon 
as  the  flood  has  acquired  strength,  so  as  to  be  near  the  Hauta  de  la  Rade 
before  the  stream  changes  its  direction  to  the  N,E.  When  near  these 
banks,  the  directions  must  be  attended  to  for  entering  the  harbour  given  In 
psgo  86.  With  n  fair  wind,  weigh  so  as  to  be  at  the  harbour's  mouth  at 
the  proper  time  for  entering. 

Q  7019.  t 


82  CAPE   BARFLEUR  TO  CAPE   d'aNTIFER.         [chap.  u. 

Tides* — The  flood  stream  be^ns  in  the  Petite  Bade  at  about  1^  boui-s 
af^er  the  tide  has  begun  to  rise  in  tlic  harbour,  or  at  a1>out  4  hours  before 
high  water  there.  Its  first  direction  is  S.  by  E.  for  2  hours,  with  a 
velocity  of  2^  to  3  knots ;  it  then  turns  to  the  E.S.E.  and  the  stream  is 
im|)erceptiblc  until  high  water  in  the  harbour,  when  it  again  acquires  its 
strength  and  runs  to  the  N.N.W.  and  ends  in  that  direction  Ij  hours 
after.  The  ebb  commences  immediately  and  runs  N.N.W.  for  3  hours 
or  until  4^  hours  after  high  water  in  the  harbour ;  it  then  turns  to  the 
W.S.W.  and  ends  in  a  S.W.  direction  a  few  minutes  before  the  flood 
commences. 

At  the  northern  entrance  into  the  road  the  stream  follow  the  same 
course,  but  the  flood  does  not  end  until  2  hours  aft^r  high  water.  The  ebb 
runs  to  the  N.N.W.  during  2 J  or  3  hours,  and  then  turns  W.S.W,  and 
S.S.W.  When  the  tide  is  out  in  the  harbour  the  ebb  runs  S.S.W.  at  the 
rate  of  1  ^  to  2  knots,  and  it  ends  in  this  direction  a  little  before  the  flood 
stream  commences  at  this  spot,  or  about  4  hours  before  high  water 
in  the  harbour.  Vessels  running  into  this  road  at  low  water  should  be 
aware  of  this  stream  of  tide  when  passing  the  shoal  patches. 

The  flood  stream  begins  to  be  felt  in  the  Grande  Bade  at  about  4  hours 
before  the  time  of  high  water  at  Le  Havre.  An  hour  after,  it  runs  to  the 
S.  by  W.  at  the  rate  of  about  3  knots,  and  continues  to  run  towards  the 
Seine  until  2 J  hours  before  high  water ;  its  direction  is  then  E.S.E.,  losing 
little  of  its  strength,  and  then  E.N.E.  In  the  latter  direction  its  rate 
increases  to  2^  or  3  knots  at  the  time  it  is  high  water  in  the  harbour ;  it 
then  decreases  in  strength,  and  the  stream  ends  about  2  hours  after, 
running  to  the  N.E.  by  N. 

The  ebb  commences  almost  as  soon  as  the  flood  ends,  the  slack  water 
lasting  only  about  a  quarter  of  an  hour  at  the  springs.  This  stream  turns 
round  by  the  west,  and  about  3  hours  after  high  water  its  direction  is 
N.W.,  but  it  does  not  attain  its  greatest  strength,  which  is  2J  knots,  until 
it  runs  W.S.W.,  or  about  5  hours  after  high  water;  it  then  slackens 
gradually  as  it  turns  to  the  southward,  where  it  ends. 

Directions  from  the  Westward.— Generally  speaking  it  is 

the  direction  of  the  wind  which  is  met  with  at  the  entrance  of  the  Channel 
that  should  determine  the  choice  of  the  mariner,  as  to  the  landfill  he 
should  make  in  order  to  take  a  fresh  departure  for  the  remainder  of  the 
voyage  to  Le  Havre.  With  the  wind  between  E.N.E.,  round  northerly, 
and  W.S.W.,  the  English  coast  should  be  made  between  the  Lizard  and 
Portland  Bill,  but  not  to  the  eastward  of  the  Bill,  for,  should  it  veer  to  the 
S.W.  it  would  then  be  impossible  for  a  sailing  vessel  to  reach  Le  Havre  if 
the  flood  stream  were  running.    As  soon  as  the  position  of  the  vessel  is 


CHAP.  11.]       GRANDE   HADE  DU    HAVRE. — DIRBCTIOKS.  83 

well  aEcertained  a  direct  coarse  should  be  shaped  to  sight  the  lightUoiiso 
on  cape  Barfleur. 

With  the  wind  between  W.S.W.,  round  southerly,  and  S.S.B.,  the 
pointa  of  the  French  coast  which  should  be  sought  for  in  succession  are, 
the  isle  of  Ouessant ;  the  high  land  between  that  island  and  Baa  isle  ;  the 
island  of  Guernsey,  the  sight  of  which  will  assist  in  making  the  Casquets  ; 
and  lastly,  the  island  of  Alderney,  and  the  high  land  crowning  cape  de  la 
Hague.  Great  attention,  however,  must  be  paid  to  the  tidal  streams  when 
running  between  Bas  isle  and  Guernsey,  the  directions  of  which  must  be 
crossed  nearly  at  right  angles.  During  the  ebb  there  is  no  danger,  as  it 
runs  towards  the  N.N.W.,  but  on  the  flood  it  will  be  necessary  to  allow  for 
the  effect  of  that  stream,  which  is  rapid  at  the  springs.  At  10  miles  from 
&&  coast,  between  Ouessant  and  Bas  isle,  the  flood  stream  ends  at  about 
2^  hours  after  high  water  on  the  shore. 

In  the  channel  between  Guernsey  and  the  Casqiicts  the  rate  of  the  flood 
is  from  4  to  5  knots  at  springs  ;  its  influence  must  therefore  be  avoided, 
and  a  vessel  should  at  all  times  manage  to  pass  to  the  westward  of  the 
Casqnets,  and,  if  possible,  only  just  within  sight  of  them.  In  the  channel 
between  Aldemey  and  cape  de  la  Hague,  as  well  as  5  miles  to  the  north- 
'  ward  of  that  cape,  the  flood  stream  ends  at  4  hours  after  high  water  on  the 
shore,  and  its  greatest  speed,  which  is  from  6  to  7  knots,  takes  place  at  the 
time  of  high  water. 

The  ebb  stream  ends  3^  hours  flood  on  the  shore,  and  its  greatest  rate 
which  takes  place  at  low  water,  is  about  equal  to  that  of  the  flood.  As 
the  direction  of  this  latter  stream  is  towards  the  W.S.W.,  and  tends  to 
draw  vessels  into  the  Bace  of  Aldemey,  as  well  as  between  Alderney  and 
the  Casquets,  it  will  be  necessary  to  be  extremely  attentiTc  to  its  effects 
according  to  the  hour  of  the  tide  and  the  distance  the  vessel  may  be  from 
the  shore.  From  the  meridian  of  cape  do  la  Hague  the  course  will  be 
about  E.S.E.  to  make  the  lighthouse  on  cape  Barfleur  faking  care  to  keep 
from  3  to  6  miles  from  the  coast  in  order  to  avoid  the  numerous  dangers 
which  border  it. 

When  the  lighthouse  at  cape  Barfleur  or  the  high  land  at  La  FemeUe 
are  made  out,  a  course  should  be  shaped,  if  the  wind  is  between  North 
and  West,  to  make  the  land  between  cape  de  la  Heve  and  cape  Antifer,  or 
if  it  is  between  West  and  South,  for  the  former  cape.  After  passing  cape 
Barfleur,  and  having  entered  the  bay  of  the  Seine,  the  flrst  land  that  will 
be  seen  when  steering  for  lie  Havre,  is  that  which  bounds  the  estuary  of 
the  Seine  on  either  side.  The  high  land  of  the  plain  of  Caux  will  be 
ahead  and  to  the  northward,  terminating  towards  the  coast  in  chalky 
clifla  of  dazzling  whiteness,  which,  when  lighted  up  by  the  sun,  permit 
their  outline  to  be  distinguished  from  18  to  20  miles  off;  and  the  land  to 

r  2 


8t  CAPE   BARFLEUR   TO   CAPE   DANTIFER.         [.hap.  ii. 

tho  southward  will  Ije  iho  bills  bordering  tbe  left  bank  of  the  Stine  from 
Uoiifleiir  to  tbe  river  Dives,  and  their  rounded  shape,  and  especially  their 
dark  colour,  will  serve  to  distinguish  them  from  those  to  the  northward. 

When  the  meridian  of  cape  Barfleur  is  crossed  towards  the  commence- 
ment of  tbe  flood,  that  is,  about  5^  or  6  hours  before  high  water  at  Le  Havre 
(see  table,  page  36),  a  vessel  with  a  leading  wind  may  arrive  off  Le  Havre 
in  time  to  get  into  the  harbour  should  the  tide  serve.  On  quitting  the 
meridian  of  Barfleur  at  tbe  commencement  of  the  ebb,  or  about  one  hour 
after  high  water  at  Le  Havre,  a  courbc  should  be  shaped  for  cape  Antifer, 
and  only  sufiicient  sail  carried  to  stem  the  tide  which  will  be  found  running, 
in  the  mid<lle  of  the  bay,  3^  or  4  knots  at  springs,  at  about  4}  hours 
after  high  water  at  Le  Ha\Te.  Should  the  position  of  Le  Havre  be  made 
out  l>efore  the  commencement  of  the  flood,  it  may  be  taken  advantage  of 
a?  soon  as  its  influence  is  felt  ;  but  the  sail  must  be  regulated  so  as  not 
to  arrive  off  the  harbour's  mouth  until  there  is  sufficient  water  to  run  in 
with. 

At  nigllt}  with  the  wind  between  North  and  West,  a  course  should  be 
shaped  from  cape  Barfleur  to  make  the  land  between  cape  de  la  Heve  and 
cape  Antifer.  The  lights  on  cape  de  la  H^ve  and  the  light  at  F^amp 
will  be  good  guides  to  point  out  the  vessers  position,  and  to  prevent  her 
approaching  too  near  the  land,  if  it  is  borne  in  mind  that  Fecamp  light  is 
concealed  by  the  high  land  at  Etretat  on  an  E.  |  N.  bearing  and  the  lights 
on  cape  de  la  H^ve  by  the  Hillocks  at  Bleville  when  they  are  in  a  S.W.  by 
S.  direction ;  so  that  if  Fecamp  light  is  concealed  before  those  on  the  cape, 
the  land  will  be  made  to  the  southward  of  cape  Antifer,  and  if  the  lights 
on  the  cape  are  hidden  before  the  light  at  Fecamp,  it  will  be  necessary  to 
haul  quickly  to  the  southward. 

The  light  at  F^amp  will  not  be  lost  sight  of  at  the  distance  of  6  or  7 
cables  off  cape  Antifer,  nor  the  lights  on  the  cape  when  at  the  same  dis- 
tance off  the  coast  between  cape  Antifer  and  Cauville.  Thus,  should  it 
be  desirous  of  maintaining  a  position  during  the  night  by  turning  to  wind- 
ward between  cape  Antifer  and  Cauville,  go  about,  when  standing  in  for 
the  land,  as  soon  as  the  lights  on  the  cape  disappear,  and  in  standing  off 
shore  during  the  flood,  tack  when  Fecamp  light  reappears  ;  but  during  the 
ebb  the  board  may  be  continued  farther  without  inconvenience. 

With  a  moderate  breeze  and  a  smooth  sea  a  vessel  may  anchor  on  the 
line  of  direction  where  Fecamp  light  is  eclipsed  by  the  land,  provided  she 
is  some  miles  to  the  southward  of  the  parallel  of  cape  Antifer.  The 
holding  ground  is  excellent  as  far  as  5  miles  off  shore  between  that  cape 
and  the  Grande  rade,  but  near  the  coast  between  the  guard-house  of 
Bleville  and  Cauville  the  bottom  is  covered  with  heaps  of  large  stones  to 


cuiP.  II.]        GRANDE  RADB  DTJ   HAVEE. — DIRECTIONS.  85 

ihe  distance  of  1^  miles  from  the  sliore.  It  may  be  proper  here  to  remark , 
that  between  uapea  la  H^ve  and  Antifer  the  flood  stream  runs  to  the 
N.E.,  at  4  or  5  mlleD  from  the  shore,  for  4  hours;  that  is,  from  2  hours 
before  to  2  hours  after  high  water  at  Le  Uiivre,  at  the  rate  of  2  or  3  knots 
at  springs,  and  when  it  slackens  it  turns  to  the  northward,  so  that  a  vessel 
caught  hy  a  contrary  wind  when  south  of  cape  Antifer,  would  be  unable 
during  thiit  period  to  reach  Le  Havre  bj  turning  to  windward  close  in  shore, 
but  she  may  reach  the  Grande  rade  by  keeping  at  least  4  miles  from  the 
coast.  During  the  frcahes  of  the  Seine  it  is  neceijBary  to  avoid  getting  to 
tlienorthwardof  the  parallel  of  cape  de  la  H&ve  when  intending  to  enter 
Le  Havre. 

When  rounding  cape  Barfleur  with  a  southerly  wind,  from  a  position 
about  6  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  cape,  steer  S.E.  by  S.  or  S.E.  to 
sight  Ver  lighthouse,  and  when  on  the  meridian  of  the  lighthouse  keep 
away  two  or  three  points  to  sight  the  lighthouses  on  cape  de  la  H^ve. 
Le  Havre  should  then  be  steered  for  if  the  tides  serve,  but  the  s^l  must  be 
regulated  so  as  not  to  arrive  off  the  harbour's  mouth  until  there  is  sufficient 
water  to  enter ;  it  not,  steer  for  the  anchorage  in  the  Graude  rade.  VVitli 
a  head  wind,  long  boai'ds  ehould  be  made  across  the  bay  of  the  Seine  by 
day  as  well  as  by  night,  recollecting  that  the  flood  stream  ends  in  the  bay 
nearly  2^  hours  before  high  water  at  Le  Havre. 

Prom  the  Eastward,  with  the  wind  between  North  and  East,  the 
channel  between  the  Ridge  bank  or  Le  Colbart  and  the  French  coast  should 
be  taken,  and  tbence  a  S.W.  by  W.  course  will  lead  between  the  Bassurelle 
and  Vergoyer  banks,  direct  for  cape  Antifer;  F^mp  light  will  be  seen 
in  following  this  conrst^  and  will  be  a  good  guide  at  night.  This  chanoel 
is  also  used  in  fine  weather  when  the  wind  is  between  South  and  East 
keeping  4  or  5  miles  from  cape  iidz-Nez,  and  passing  outside  the  Bassnre 
de  Sbss  bank.  When  to  the  southward  of  the  river  Somme,  and  to  the 
westward  of  the  meridian  of  Dieppe,  the  coast  may  be  neared  if  necessary . 
but  should  the  wind  veer  to  the  south-west  a,  vessel  should  quit  it  im- 
mediately, and  if  it  increases  to  a  gale,  a  sheltered  anchorage  will  be  found 
to  tho  eastward  orDungeness. 

With  tho  wind  between  NK.W.,  round  westerly,  and  W.S.W.,  the 
ch&nne'  should  be  used  between  the  Varne  bonk  and  the  English  coast. 
From  Beachy  head  to  cape  de  la  Hhve  the  course  is  S.S.W.  ^  W.  and  tho 
distance  74  miles.  As  the  passage  across  with  westerley  winds  is  mad« 
TOOK  advantageously  on  the  ebb  than  on  the  flood,  vessels  therefore  usually 
wut  in  sight  of  Beachy  head  lighthouse  for  the  end  of  the  flood,  so  as  to 
arrive  abreast  of  cape  Antifer  at  the  beginning  of  the  following  flood,  in 
time  to  enter  the  harbour  of  Le  Havre  if  the  tides  serve,     Fecamp  light  is 


I  . 


8C  CAPE   BAEFLEUIl  TO   CAPE   D'AXTIFER.         [chap.  n. 

an  excellent  guide  for  the  landfall  on  the  coast  of  France,  and  will  be  seen 
in  clear  weather  soon  after  tliat  at  Beachy  head  is  lost  sight  of. 

Directions  for  entering  Le  Havre.— Vessels  arriving  off  this 

port  some  hours  before  the  tide  serves  to  enter,  should  remain  outside  the 
banks  oS  the  entrance,  until  the  tide  has  risen  sufficiently  to  pass  over 
them,  but  a  stranger  should  not  attempt  to  enter  without  a  pilot.  The 
stream  runs  into  the  Seine  from  the  commencement  of  the  flood  until 
2  hours  before  high  water ;  but  there  is  no  fear  of  their  being  drawn  into 
the  river  if  they  keep  to  the  westward  of  the  line  of  the  two  lighthouses  on 
cape  de  la  Heve,  bearing  N.E.  ^  N.,  or  if  cape  Antifer  is  kept  open 
a  f(*w  dcgrc^es  to  th(;  westward  of  cape  de  la  Hevc,  taking  care  at  the  same 
time  not  to  go  to  the  south^vard  of  the  line  on  which  the  chateau  d'Orcer, 
which  stands  near  the  shore  at  about  2  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Harfleur 
is  seen  in  one  with  the  projecting  angle  of  the  wall  enclosing  La  Floride, 
bearing  E.  |  S. 

With  a  fresh  breeze  between  W.N.W.,  round  northerly,  and  E.S.E.y 
there  will  be  no  difficulty  in  turning  to  windward  and  keeping  a  position  ; 
but  with  all  other  winds  keep  as  near  the  line  given  by  the  chateau  and 
the  wall  at  La  Floride  in  one,  because  at  about  2  hours  before  high  water 
in  the  harbour,  when  the  Seine  is  nearly  filled,  the  flood  stream  turns  to 
the  E.S.E.,  losing  part  of  its  strength,  and  then  to  the  N.E.  In  the  latter 
direction  it  runs  with  the  same  velocity  as  when  it  ran  up  the  Seine,  and 
retains  it  until  nearly  2^  hours  after  high  water,  and  should  a  sailing  vessel 
at  that  time  be  near  the  parallel  of  cape  de  la  H^ve,  it  would  be  almost 
impossible  for  her  to  reach  the  harbour  in  proper  time  to  get  in. 

With  strong  winds  between  N.N.W.,  round  westerly,  and  W.S.W.,  it 
will  be  necessary  to  keep  under  sail  6  or  8  miles  to  windward  of  the  harbour 
until  there  is  sufficient  tide  to  enter ;  but  with  moderate  winds  between 
S.W.,  round  southerly,  and  E.N.E.,  or  during  calm  weather,  or  at  the 
times  of  the  freshes  of  the  Seine,  it  will  be  better  to  anchor  in  Carosse  road 
(page  73),  or  between  that  road  and  the  line  upon  which  the  ch&teau 
d'Orcher,  is  seen  in  one  with  the  projecting  angle  of  the  wall  enclosing  La 
Floride,  E.  f  S. 

Vessels  can  always  get  into  the  harbour  from  the  anchorage  in  the  Petite 
rade,  even  during  calms  or  head  winds.  Those  of  large  draught  which 
have  failed  in  entering,  and  when  the  direction  of  the  wind  and  the  late 
hour  of  the  tide  do  not  permit  of  a  second  attempt,  should  hasten  to  run 
out  of  the  Siene ;  but  small  vessels  may  take  shelter  under  Hoc  point 
(page  76),  whilst  the  tide  is  high. 

The  direction  of  the  entrance  channel  into  the  harbour  of  Le  Havre 
being  at  right  angles  to  the  direction  of  the  flood  stream  entering  the 
Seine,  it  consequently  crosses  the  mouth  of  the  harbour,  and  renders  its 


o=«-  n.]  LB   HAVRE. — DIBECTIONS.  S7 

access  difficult  under  certain  circnmstances,  which  are  necessary  co  be 
kncnvn. 

The  north  jetty  prcgecta  into  the  strength  of  the  flood  atream,  and 
occasions  an  eddy,  the  strecgtii  and  extent  of  which  depend  upon  the 
Telocity  of  that  Btream  and  upon  the  range  of  the  tide.  At  abont  3  hours 
before  high  water,  when  the  stream  begins  to  acquire  its  greatest  strength, 
which  is  4  or  5  knots  at  the  springs,  the  eddy  extends  as  far  as  Heure  bay, 
and  forma  along  the  shores  of  that  bay,  and  also  along  the  walb  enclosing 
La  Floride,  a  rapid  counter  stream,  a  part  of  which  turns  round  the  end 
of  the  south  jetty  to  enter  the  harbour,  whilst  the  other  part  runs  shwply 
against  the  north  jetty,  along  which  it  forms  a  disturbed  eddy. 

This  motion  of  the  water  continues  till  abont  1^  hours  before  high  tide 
in  the  harbour;  but  at  this  period  the  Seine,  being  nearly  full,  can  no 
longer  receive  all  the  water  which  runs  towards  it  from  all  points  of  the 
estuary,  the  stream  therefore  slackens,  except  towards  the  left  bank  of  the 
river,  where  the  flood,  following  nearly  the  same  direction  that  it  would  do 
supposing  the  Seine  did  not  exist  or  was  entirely  barred  off,  not  finding 
any  issue  upwards,  crosses  the  Seine  obliquely,  and  runs  to  the  north-east ; 
this  direction,  however,  soon  changes  and  becomes  more  northerly  as  the 
river  fills. 

As  soon  as  this  cross  stream  has  gone  through  these  changes  and  reached 
Hoc  point,  a  portion  of  it  runs  along  the  shore  to  the  westward  and  pro- 
duces the  stream  named  the  Yerhaule,  which  at  the  entrance  of  Le  Havre 
follows  the  same  direction  as  the  eddy  on  the  flood,  just  noticed,  and 
immediately  follows  it,  but  always  with  this  difierence,  that  the  Yerhaule 
passes  round  the  jetty  and  runs  to  the  north-west.  It  is  easy  therefore  to 
imagine  that  the  confusion  caused  by  these  different  effects  of  the  flood 
stream,  must  raise  a  high  and  violent  sea  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour 
when  it  blows  strong  from  the  westward. 

The  Verhaule,  a  part  of  which  enters  the  harbour  and  tends  to  fill  it,  is 
evidently  the  last  portion  of  the  flood;  but  as  it  runs  in  an  opposite 
direction  to  that  which  the  flood  follows  during  the  first  hours  of  rising 
tide,  it  keeps  vessels  in  the  entrance  channel,  and  facilitates  their  entrance 
with  westerly  winds.  Its  greatest  strength  is  about  three-quarters  of  an 
hour  before  high  water,  and  continues  until  the  harbour  is  filled,  when  it 
decreases  gradually,  and  is  hardly  perceptible  at  the  end  of  slack  water. 
The  ebb  then  commences,  and  is  feeble  at  first,  but  at  the  expiration  of 
an  hour  it  gains  strength  and  runs  towards  the  North  and  N.N.W.  in  the 
same  direction  as  the  Yerhaule  when  near  its  end. 

The  deviation  of  the  flood  stream,  occasioned  by  each  of  the  projecting 
angles  of  the  quays  bordering  the  entrance,  is  another  difficulty  in  entering 
Le  Havre  with  a  scant  wind,  especially  if  a  vessel  has  entered  before  the 
basins  and  the  harbour  are  filled. 


88  CAPE  BAKFLEUE  10  CAPE  d'aNTIFEK.  [chap,  n. 

From  what  lias  preceded,  it  will  be  seea  that  the  best  time  to  enter  the 
port  of  Le  Havre,  for  those  vessels  that  purpose  remaining  in  the  outer 
harbour,  is  at  high- water  shick,  but  this  is  rather  too  late  for  those 
iittending  to  enter  the  basins.  These,  on  the  contrary,  should  enter  as  soon 
as  the  tides  serves,  to  have  time  to  be  well  secured  before  the  beginning  of 
the  ebb.  The  anchors  should  be  ready  for  letting  go  before  entering,  and 
one  place  conveniently  for  anchoring  by  the  stern ;  the  warps  also  and 
the  hawsers  must  be  coiled  clear  on  deck,  ready  to  be  carried  out  in  case 
the  vessel  is  obliged  to  anchor  in  the  entrance  channel. 

The  time  of  tide,  however,  to  be  chosen  by  a  sailing  vessel  for  entering- 
must  greatly  depend  upon  the  direction  of  the  wind.  With  a  fresh 
westerly  wind  she  may  run  in  even  whilst  the  counter  stream  which  runs 
along  the  walls  of  La  Floride  is  at  its  greatest  strength,  but  care  must  be 
taken  to  keep  in  mid-channel,  so  as  not  to  drift  on  the  noith  jetty. 

With  fresh  winds  between  W.S.W.,  round  westerly,  and  N.N.W,,  the 
Verhaule  causes  a  violent  sea,  and  it  will  be  better  then  to  wait  till  the  end 
of  slack  water  to  enter,  for  the  sea  is  then  rather  less  confused,  and  the 
tide  is  slack  in  the  entrance  channel.  This  precaution  is  especially  neces- 
sary when  the  vessel  does  not  answer  her  helm  quickly. 

With  the  wind  sufficient  strong  between  S.S.W.,  round  southerly,  and 
E.S.E.,  to  stem  the  tide,  she  may  enter  before  the  Verhaule  commences 
and  steer  on  the  starboard  tack  for  the  north  jetty,  to  get  hold  of  the 
hawser  which  the  hauling  crew  will  throw  out  to  her,  and  she  will  then  be 
tracked  into  the  harbour.  Should  the  wind,  however,  be  between  E.S.E., 
round  easterly,  and  N.E.,  it  will  be  advisable  to  wait  until  the  Verhaule 
slacks,  in  order  to  steer  for  the  north  jetty  on  the  port  tack,  when  by  luff- 
ing up  she  will  reach  the  hawsen  The  sails  should  then  be  furled,  and  the 
vessel  will  be  tracked  in.  Pilots  with  their  boats  are  always  ready 
at  the  entrance  to  carry  the  hawser  on  board,  and  to  run  out  warps 
when  necessary,  except  when  the  sea  is  too  high  and  violent  to  prevent 
them«  Steam-tugs  are  also  in  readiness  during  calms  and  variable 
winds. 

Tides  and  Tidal  Signals.— it  is  high  water,  full  and  change, 
in  Le  Havre  harbour  at  9h.  18m.  The  water  let  out  of  the  basins 
and  that  which  escapes  from  the  sluices  at  the  locks  serve  to  keep  a  channel 
through  the  mud  of  the  outer  harbour,  which  never  has  less  than  a  depth 
of  3  feet  at  low  water  springs.  The  rise  of  tide  in  this  channel  is  22  feet 
at  ordinary  springs,  24  to  25  feet  at  the  equinoxes,  and  18  feet  at 
neaps. 

When  the  tides  are  forced  up  by  high  vnnds  from  the  westward  the 
water  rises  upon  the  quays,  but  this  seldom  occurs.  The  direction 
of  the  wind,  and  more  especially  its  force  and  duration,  exercise  a  great 


LA  HAVEE. — TIDES,  &C. 


69 


influence  on  the  height  of  the  tide.  The  fresliea  of  the  Seine,  which  occur 
during  the  raiuy  season,  uad  the  meliiug  of  the  snow,  ol^io  contribute 
greatly  to  raise  the  water  in  the  barboui-,  and  it  has  been  lemarked 
that  the  highest  tide  have  almost  always  occurred  duriitg  the  strongest 
freshes. 

This  harbour  has  this  advantage  over  almost  all  the  other  harbours  of 
the  cbaanel,  tliat  the  tide  at  high  water  remains  slack  in  it  during  the 
mean  interval  of  57  minutes.  The  maximum  duration  baa  been  observed 
to  be  Ih.  I5m.,  and  the  minimum  from  ao  to  25  minutes.  This  long  period 
of  nearly  slack  water  is  very  valuable  to  the  traffic  of  the  port,  and  allows 
several  vesseb  to  enter  or  leave  the  docks  on  the  same  tide.  In  general, 
during  the  months,  of  May,  June,  and  July,  the  duration  of  the  slack 
water  is,  with  some  exceptions,  below  the  mean,  and  the  rest  of  the  year  it 
continues  almost  always  an  hour  or  more.  At  the  springs  the  duration 
of  the  flood  is  Sh.  lOm.,  and  of  the  ebb  7h.  15m. 

The  system  of  tidal  signals  (noticed  in  page  3)  is  used  at  Le  Havre. 
The  d^ths  of  water  in  the  entrance  channel  are  made  from  the  Tour 
de  Frsn9ois  Premier  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  and  thence  repeated 
&om  the  telegraph  station  on  capo  de  la  H^ve. 

To  prevent  accidents  to  vessels  entering  the  harbour,  the  follovring 
additional  signals  are  made  at  the  flag  staff  on  the  north  jetty : — 


A   bine  flag  on  top   of  mast  < 


The  bauns 
open. 


A    ball    above    the    yard  1    ^         ,        ,       ,, 
pointing  towards  the  road./    *^°°<"    ''"^^   ^'«  P°rt- 


A  blue  flag  on  top  of  mast  TNo  vessels  allowed  to  go 
and  two  balls  under  the  )  out,  and  all  movements 
yard  pointing  towards]  forbidden  in  the  avant- 
the  porU  L     port. 


90 


CAPE  BABFLEUB  TO  CAPE   D'ANTIFER. 


[CHA.P.  II. 


r 


A    ball  above    the    yard  T  ^  j     „  ^ 

pomtincr     towards     the  .        ,  ^,|  ^ 

r^d      and      two     balls    I      ^^  ^^  ^"^  ^^  ^  "*®^^' 
roaa,     ana     two     ^iis   v  forbidden    in   the 

under  the  yard  pointing  .        . 

towards  the  port.  J       »vant-port. 


f 


Two  balls  under  the  yard' 
pointing  towards  the  port, 
and  one  ball  above  the 
yard  pointing  towards 
the  road.  A  blue  flag 
at  top  of  mast. 


All  movements  stopped  in 
the  port  to  facilitate  the 
y    entrance  of  large  vessels 
of  war  and  the. Transat- 
lantic steamers. 


'7f///y//A 


f 


Two  balls  under  the  yard' 
pointing  towards  the  port, 
and  one  ball  above  the 
yard  pointing  towards 
the  road.  A  green  flag 
at  top  of  mast. 


All  movements  stopped  in 
the  port,  to  facilitate  the 
•departure  of  large  vessels 
of  war  and  the  Transat- 
lantic steamers. 


At  night  the  blue  flag  is  replaced  by  a  white  light,  the  green  flag  by  a 
green  light,  and  the  balls  by  red  lights. 

CAPE  DE  LA  HfiVE,  formerly  known  by  the  name  of  Chef 
de  Caux,  lies  about  2  miles  to  the  N.N. W.  of  Le  Havre,  and  forms  the 
south-western  point  of  the  chalky  cliffs  which  terminate  the  plain  of  Caux. 
The  cape  is  perpendicular  about  halfway  down  from  its  summit,  the  foot 
of  the  cliff  being  covered  with  the  debris  of  frequent  slips  and  fallen 
masses. 

From  cape  de  la  Hfeve  the  coast  trends  N.E.  ^  N.,  nearly  in  a  straight 
line  for  rather  more  than  11  miles  to  cape  Antifer,  and  is  composed  of 
cliffs  of  chalk  and  flint,  the  height  of  which  is  from  320  to  370  feet,  and 
with  on  shore  winds  offers  no  accessible  spot.  Between  cape  de  la  H^ve 
and  the  little  valley  of  St*  Jouin  the  crown  only  of  the  cliffs  are  per- 
pendicular, the  lower  parts  being  banked  up  by  enormous  masses  of  flint 
which  have  mouldered  down.  It  is  said  that  the  percussion  of  the  large 
waves  raised  by  the  frequent  winds  between  North  and  West  forces  these 
masses  continually  along  the  shore,  and  that  they  have  formed  the  banks 
which  obstruct  the  approach  to  Le  Havre  and  the  Seine.  Beyond  the 
valley  the  cliffs  are  quite  perpendicular,  the  sea  washing  their  bases,  and 
in  the  afternoon,  when  they  are  lighted  up  by  the  sun,  their  brightness 
is  so  dazzling  that  they  may  be  seen  21  miles  distant. 


CH41-.  u.]       CAPE  DB  lii  HirVE. — LIGHTS  ;  TIDAL  STREAMS.      91 

LIGHTS. — On  the  Bumuiit  of  cape  de  ia  Hfeve  Btand  tiro  lighthouBes, 
each  66  feet  high,  from  which  are  exhibited  two  fixed  white  electric  lights 
of  the  first  order,  elevated  397  feet  above  the  water,  and  visible  in  clear 
weather  from  a  distance  of  27  miles. 

The  lighthouses  are  equare,  white  buildings  bearing  N.E.  ^  N,  and 
S.W.  J  S.  distant  106  yards  from  each  other  ;  the  southern  lighthouse 
stands  100  yards  from  the  edge  of  the  |cliff.  The  intensity  of  the  lights 
will  be  doubled  ia  thick  foge.  The  lead  should  be  frequently  used 
when  approaching  these  lights  from  the  westward,  especially  if  Ver 
light  has  not  been  sighted. 

Tidal  Streams  in   the  Bay  of  the  Seine.— The  tidal 

wave  of  flood  after  having  traversed  the  western  portion  of  the 
Channel,  is  much  contracted  as  it  advances  to  the  eastward,  between 
Cherbourg  and  the  Isle  of  Wight,  and  in  consequence  of  this  compression 
its  velocity  is  greatly  increased,  partictdarly  towards  the  French  coast.  As 
soon  as  it  has  passed  the  meridian  of  cape  Barfieur,  its  southern  portion 
turns  rapidly  in  every  direction  between  South  and  East,  to  fill  up  the 
empty  space  occupied  by  the  bay  of  the  Seine  ;  whilst  the  eastern  portion, 
or  that  part  to  the  northward  of  a  line  drawn  from  cape  Barfleur  to  cape 
Antifer,  follows  its  original  direction  almost  as  far  as  the  meridian  of  the 
river  Orne,  where  it  begins  to  curve  to  the  £aet,  and  E.  by  N. 

A  considerable  portion  of  the  water  which  enters  the  bay,  after  rounding 
cape  Barfleur  with  great  rapidity,  forms  a  stream  which  takes  a  S^.  hj  S. 
direction  towards  the  mouth  of  the  Seine.  The  Bouthera  part  of  this 
stream  runs  along  the  shore  of  the  bay,  and  follows  ita  sinuosities  from 
Percee  point  to  the  mouth  of  the  Orne,  and  then  turns  towfurds  the  Seine ; 
the  northern  part  turns  obliquely  towards  the  coast  between  Le  Havre  and 
cape  Antifer,  and  then  bends  back  to  the  S.S.W.  and  S.S.E.  towards  the 
Seine.  Thus  the  mouth  of  the  Seine  being  the  point  towards  which  all 
these  streams  are  directed,  the  river  becomes  Full  at  two-thirds  flood,  and 
the  water  within  having  attained  the  level  of  that  without,  the  streams  lose 
their  strength  and  are  forced  to  the  eastward,  and  run  towards  the  E.N.E. 
and  N.E.  in  the  direction  they  would  have  naturally  followed  from  the 
commencement  of  the  tide,  if  the  Seine  had  not  existed,  or  had  been 
completely  barred  up. 

The  ebb  stream,  in  general,  when  at  its  greatest  strength,  follows  in  the 
interior  of  the  bay  an  opposite  course  to  that  of  the  flood ;  but  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  line  drawn  from  cape  Barfleur  to  cape  Antifer  its  direction  is 
W.  by  N.,  whilst  that  <rf  the  flood  is  E.  by  N.  and  E.N.E.  The  windings 
of  the  coast  modify  the  direction  of  both  streams  near  the  shore,  and  behind 
each  of  the  projecting  points  there  is  an  eddy  which  depends  on  the  strength 
of  the  tide  for  its  extent. 


r 


TABLE  OP   TIDAL   STREAMS. 


Table  showing  the  Direction  and  Rate  of  the  Tidal  Streams,  d 
Ordinary  Springs,  from  Cape  Barfleur  to  Cape  Antifer. 


liKli  Water 
Lp  Unvre 


B.  1jy  S.  t  S,.lll  miles  from  Cape 


E.S.E.,  f 


u  St.  Msrcouf 


N.  by  W,  8  miles  from  7or  light- 

K.B.  hj-  E.,  7  mi!c?a   from  Vet 
lightbouH. 

V.N.B.  1  E.,  11  mitei  IWim  the 
ontnuce  of  the  river  Ome. 


In  tha  southeni  ohaniiol  In  Hon- 


n  TbsouI  utd  the 


Ji.  hj  E.,  0  miles  from  Cnpc  de  la 


K.N.n',,  IS  mil«i  from  Onpo  Ai 


iSI 

flood - 
flhh  '. 

ill 

iiood- 
ebh  ■ 

Flood 

nood' 

Undo 

ebb  - 

Biido 

Hood". 
I'bb  '■ 

1? 

flood", 
e'bli  '. 

Flood 
Kndo 

flood- 
ebb  '■ 

Flood 

Endo 
Endo 

flODd- 

o'bb  - 

IX 

flood - 
obb  I 

Flood 
Bhh" 

flood - 

Endol 

ebb  - 

i? 

flood^ 
Dbb  ■ 

Bwin 

ingotfl 

Endo 

fl'ood- 

ebb  '. 

fiiidol 

IS, 

flood' 

i   lU  before 
.    BO  bclora 


8.E.  liyfi.  - 
N.W,  hj  N. 

e.  b;  8. )  a 

T,  b J  H. 


8.E.  i  a. 

N.W.  bj  ■ 


i   Ubefon 
1    30    " 


B.  bj  a. 


N.E.  by  N, 
N.N.W. 

w.a.w. 


91 


CHAPTER  III. 

CAPE  D'ANTIFER  TO  CAPE  GRIS-NEZ. 


VARIATION  IN  1882. 
Fecamp-        -         -         -     17^  50' W. 
Entrance  of  River  Sorame     17^  40'  W. 


ASPECT  of  COAST.— Cape  Gris-Nez  bears  X.E.  by  E.  from 
cape  Antifer,  distant  89  miles,  the  coast  between  forming  a  considerable 
bight  to  the  south-east,  106  miles  in  circuit,  and  24  miles  deep.  The  high 
cliffs  of  chalk  and  flint  extend  from  cape  de  la  Heve  to  about  4  miles  to  the 
north-east  of  Tr^port,  near  the  town  of  Ault,  and  beyond  them  commences 
a  low  coast  fronted  by  a  sandy  beach  upon  which  three  wide  valleys  open 
out  and  give  issue  to  the  waters  of  the  rivers  Somme,  Authie,  and  Canche. 
This  low  coast  extends  to  within  about  4  miles  of  Boulogne ;  the  land  then 
rises  abruptly,  and  the  shore  continues  steep,  with  a  few  exceptions,  as  far 
as  cape  Gris-Nez.  All  the  harbours  between  capes  Antifer  and  Giis-Nez 
dry  at  spring  tides,  and  are  inaccessible  to  vessels  of  large  draught  during 
neaps.* 

The  cliffs  between  cape  Antifer  and  Ault  are  precipitous,  their  foot 
resting  upon  a  narrow  shelf  of  rock  covered  at  all  times  of  tide.  The 
ports  of  Fecamp,  St.  Valery-en-Caux,  Dieppe,  and  Treport,  lying  at  about 
equal  distances  from  each  other,  are  situated  at  the  entrances  of  wide 
valleys,  which  form  breaks  in  the  line  of  cliffs.  The  land  crowning  the 
cliffs  is  for  the  most  part  level  in  its  whole  extent,  but  the  monotonous 
aspect  of  the  coast  is  varied  by  the  towns  and  villages  near  the  sea, 
and  by  the  verdure  covering  the  sides  and  the  bottom  of  the  valleys,  which 
contrasts  with  the  uniform  white  colour  of  the  cliffs.  As  the  openings  of 
all  the  valleys  are  dissimilar  in  some  points,  it  will  be  easy  to  recognise 
them  from  each  other,  even  from  a  considerable  distance  in  the  offing. 

The  cliffs  remarkable  for  their  elevation  are,  that  of  Fagnet  point,  the 
north  point  of  entrance  to  the  valley  of  Feciamp,  upon  which  stands  a 
chapel  dedicated  to  Notre-Dame-du-Salut  and  Fecamp  lighthouse ;  the  cliff 
of  Catellier,  with  a  small  mound  on  its  summit,  which  forms  the  western 

♦  See  Admiralty  charts : —  North  coast  of  France,  sheet  XII.,  Trouville  to  Dieppe 
No.  2,612  $  scale  m  »  0*5  of  an  inch;  and  Dieppe  to  Boulogne,  No.  2,611 ;  scale  m  =» 
0*5  of  an  inch. 


n.] 


ASPECT  OP  COAST.  95 


side  of  a  wide  vallej',  named  Fallnd,  watered  hj  the  Durdent  river  ;  the 
cliff  of  St.  L^ger,  at  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  St.  Valleiy- 
eii-Gaux,  marked  hy  n  church  tower,  the  only  renuuning  part  of  the  church  ; 
the  cliff  of  Sott«ville,  rendered  remarkable  by  a  large  guard-house  and  a 
heavy-looking  cbnrcb  tower,  overtopping  &  row  of  trees ;  and  the  cUff  at 
Criel,  at  3  J  miles  to  the  south-west  of  Trfiport,  which  ia  the  highest  of  them 
all,  and  is  surmounted  by  a  large  hillock  covered  with  heath,  called  Mont 
Joli-Bois,  When  sailing  close  to  the  coast  with  off-shore  winds,  precaution 
must  he  taken  against  the  aqualla  which  rush  down  the  vulleya ;  the  most 
violent  are  felt  abreast  the  openings  that  do  not  reach  to  the  beach. 

The  entrances  of  the  rivers  Somme,  Authie,  and  Canche  are  formed  in 
the  low  land  which  extends  over  a  space  of  35  miles,  from  half  a  mile  to 
the  north-east  of  Ault  to  the  foot  of  the  hills,  the  most  western  parts  of 
which  form  cape  Alprech,  bnt  they  are  now  all  obatnicted  by  banks  of 
shifting  sand,  which  project  far  outeide  their  openings  and  dry  at  low 
water  springs.  The  small  harbours  of  Viraereux  and  of  Ambletense  have 
been  abandoned  and  can  no  longer  admit  any  vessel. 

Tlie  coaat  between  ci^e  Antifer  and  Ailly  point,  about  S  miles  to  the 
westward  of  Dieppe,  is  without  danger,  and  large  vessels  may  coast  it  at 
the  distance  of  1^  miles ;  but  to  the  eastward  of  this  point  the  approach  to 
the  shore  is  dangerous  for  vessels  of  large  draught,  for  from  the  meridian 
of  Ailly  point  to  that  of  Tr^port  are  banks  of  sand  and  shells,  usually  called 
Ridens,  extending  11  miles  from  the  shore  ;  and  to  the  enstward  of  these 
is  the  shoal  bottom  which  forms  the  basis  of  the  banks  of  shifting  sand 
obstructing  the  mouth  of  the  Somme,  and  which  extends  even  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  river  Canche. 

Outside  these  dangers,  and  towards  the  middle  of  the  Channel,  are  several 
long  submarine  banks  of  sand,  seeming  to  converge  in  a  direction  towards 
cape  Gris-Nez.  These  hanks  lie  generally  E.N.E,  and  W.S.W.,  nearly  in 
the  direction  of  the  tidal  streams;  but  the  Ridens  or  ridges,  point  to  the 
N.N.W.  and  S.S.E.,  in  a  direction  perpendicular  to  the  banks,  and  con- 
sequently across  the  streams. 

There  are  spots  with  only  2  and  3  fathoms  over  them  on  several  of  these 
banks,  they  are  therefore  very  dangerous  for  large  vessels  at  all  times  of 
tide,  while  some  are  only  so  at  low  water  :  but  at  full  and  change  the  tidal 
streams  form  strong  eddies  at  their  steep  edges,  and  in  bad  weather,  or  when 
the  winds  blow  strong  on  a  weather  tide,  small  vessels  crossing  these  eddies 
will  subject  themselves  to  a  heavy  sea.  The  greater  part  of  the  ridges  are 
only  to  be  avoided  from  the  eddies  they  occasion,  bnt  shoal  spots  have  been 
foond  on  some  of  them,  which  at  low  water  in  bad  weather,  might  be  dan- 
gerons  to  vessels  of  large  draught. 


96  CAPE    d'aXTIFER  to  cape  GRIS-XEZ.  [chap.  in. 

CAUTION.— Dtiring  strong  winds  between  W.S.W.,  round  westeriv, 
and  N.N.W.  the  coast  to  th**  eastwanl  of  Aillv  point  is  dangerous  to  be  on, 
and  shipwrecks  are  of  freijuent  occurrence;  vesseb  therefore  of  every  de- 
scription at  that  period  should  keep  a  good  offing,  and  when  obliged  to 
approach  ii  must  do  so  with  great  caution  ;  for  although  the  general  mass 
of  the  above  bank  appears  to  be  stationary,  vet  great  attention  must  be 
paid  to  the  lead  and  observing  the  confuseil  state  of  the  sea  in  the  various 
eddies,  so  as  to  guanl  against  suddenly  meeting  with  dangers  which  may 
be  of  recent  formation.  The  lights  for  the  purpose  of  pointing  out  the 
position  of  the  headlands  and  dangers  between  capes  Antifer  and  Gris-Nez 
at  night,  are  so  disposed  that  in  clear  weather  two  can  always  be  seen  at  a 
time,  and  the  greater  number  of  the  harbours  have  one  or  more  tide  lights 
shown  during  the  time  the  harbour  can  l>c  enteretl. 

It  is  important  to  notice  that  along  the  coast  between  cape  de  la  H^ve 
and  the  town  of  Ault  (a  space  of  67  miles)  the  wind,  when  it  blows  in  a 
direction  perpendicular  or  nearly  so  to  the  direction  of  the  coast^  is  reflected 
by  the  high  cliffs,  neutralising  in  great  measure  its  original  action  to  a 
certain  extent  in  the  offing,  depending  upon  the  strength  of  the  wind.  It 
follows  from  this  that  a  zone  is  formed  off  the  coast  and  parallel  to  it, 
except  in  front  of  the  wide  valleys  where  the  direct  wind  meets  with  no 
obstacle,  where  the  wind  is  light,  the  sea  much  agitated,  and  the  waves  run 
towards  the  shore.  On  the  contrary,  when  the  wind  forms  an  acute  angle 
with  the  coast,  the  reflected  wind  contributes  to  increase  the  direct  wind 
near  the  shore. 

CAFE  D'ANTIPER  differs  little  from  the  adjacent  land,  and  is 
only  remarkable  for  the  change  in  the  direction  of  the  coast.  The  cape  is 
rounded^  and  terminates  in  a  perpendicular  chalk  cliff,  320  feet  high,  the 
foot  of  which  is  washed  by  the  sea,  and  in  clear  weather  it  may  be  seen 
18  or  20  miles  distant.  Vessels  of  any  draught  may  approach  it  to  2  or  3 
cables  without  danger  even  at  low  water ;  and  hence  the  coast  trends 
about  E.  I  N.  9  miles  to  Fecamp,  and  the  shore  may  be  approached  to 
4  cables. 

£TRETAT,  a  large  fishing  village  and  fashionable  watering  place, 
stands  upon  the  shore  at  the  entrance  of  a  wide  valley  open  to  the  north- 
west, and  the  houses  are  built  upon  low  land  defended  from  the  incursions 
of  the  sea  by  a  natural  dyke  of  shingle,  upon  which  the  fishermen  heave 
their  boats  out  of  the  roach  of  the  surf  with  capstans ;  an  embankment  44 
yards  long  serves  to  strengthen  this  dyke  and  to  protect  it  in  bad  weather 
iVom  the  force  of  the  waves. 

The  cliffs  both  to  the  eastward  and  westward  of  £tretat  are  very  remark « 
aUo.   They  form  sharp  projecting  |H>iuts  with  openings  in  them  resembling 


cnAr.  Ill]  CAPE   d'aNTIFER. — FECAMP.  97 

arches  fiud  doorways.  At  half  a  cable  south-west  of  tlie  point,  to  the 
westward  of  the  village,  is  a  high  rock,  or  rather  the  remains  of  the  falleo 
cliff,  to  wliich,  from  its  pyramidal  form,  the  name  of  Aiguille  d'fitretat,  or 
£tretat  needle,  is  given.  The  eastern  part  of  the  bcacU  at  £ltrotat  Is 
borderoil  by  rocks,  which  uncover  at  low  water. 

Abrca-st  Stretat  the  shoal  bottom,  with  less  than  8  fathoms  on  it 
projects  a  mile  to  the  N.N.W.  from  the  shore,  ond  when  the  flood  stream 
is  at  its  greatest  strength  it  ocunsions  a  great  eddy,  named  hy  the  mariners 
of  the  coast  the  Hardiers,  which  esteuds  to  the  eastward  as  far  as  the 
Vaudieii  rock,  and  makes  tho  sea  hollow  and  heavy  when  the  wind  is  fresh 
from  the  eastward. 

IPOBT,  a  fishing  village  situated  W.  by  S.  i  S.  2J  miles  from  the 
entrance  to  Fecamp,  is  built,  like  Etretat,  at  the  entrance  of  a  valley  upon 
low  land  near  the  sea,  and  sheltered  by  a  natural  dyke  of  shingle,  which 
is  sterenghened  by  a  small  stone  jetty.  The  beach  in  front  of  the  village 
ia  encumbered  with  rocks,  which  uncover  at  low  water,  and  is  only  accessible 
to  fishiog  boats.  The  bluff  point  of  Chicart,  and  tho  rocks  at  the  foot  of 
that  point,  afford  a  little  shelter  to  the  beacb  against  westerly  winds,  but 
it  is  quite  open  to  the  northward,  and  when  the  sea  is  high  the  boats  are 
hauled  upon  the  dyke. 

Between  Etretat  and  Iport,  at  1^  miles  from  Ctretat  point  (called 
abo  porte  Orientale  or  the  Eastern  gate,  and  less  than  a  cable  from 
the  cliffs),  is  the  Guillemot  rock,  which  resembles  a  ruined  column,  and 
rises  160  feet  above  the  rocks  that  uncover  .along  the  shore.  Halfway  be- 
tween this  rock  and  porte  Orientale,  but  a  little  nearer  the  cliffs  tlian 
the  Guillemot,  is  the  great  Vaudieu  rock,  about  53  feet  high.  These  two 
rocks,  like  the  Etretat  needle,  seem  to  be  the  remains  of  ancient  cliffs.  The 
base  of  the  Guillemot  is  so  worn  by  the  sea  that  it  is  probable  that  it  may 
fall  ere  long. 

F£CA.9[F)  a  commercial,  fishing  and  refitting  port,  ia  situated  at  the 
entrance  of  a  fine  valley  watered  by  the  rivers  Valmont  and  GanzeviUe.  It 
consists  of  a  small  bar  tidal  harbour,  and  at  the  bottom  of  the  harbour  is  a 
basin  which  will  admit  vessels  of  12  or  13  feet  draught  at  high  water 
ordinary  springs,  in  which  they  may  at  all  times  lie  afloal.* 

The  entrance  channel  to  the  harbour  is  open  to  the  N.W.  by  W.,  and 
runs  between  two  stone  jetties,  181  feet  apart,  at  the  foot  of  tho  high  clifi 
forming  Fagnet  point.  When  there  is  no  shingle  at  the  entrance,  the  bottom 
of  the  channel,  which  is  of  hard  white  porous  stone,  dries  3  feet  above  the 
lowest  tides.  The  south  jetty  is  only  172  feet  long,  and  was  built  at  the 
end  of  the  uatural  dyke,  which  shelters  the  harbour,  to  arrest  the  pro- 
gress of  the  shingle  along  the  coast  from  the  south-west,  and  to  oblige 
*  5ce  eolarged  plan  of  Fficamp,  od  Admirslt}-  vbart,  Xo.  3,613. 
Q  70i9.  G 


*S  ' 


r  .  ■        .      ',       '  A  *-,  I- 

/         '/       .         /.',•■  -...'.■ 


■ ,  i"   - » ^  ■ 


-  ^  . 


/-  .  ■ 


t- 


.     .■« 


'ill  «  *  •■-*«■  •*■ 

«  /I  /i**«  //)  *\tu,ir ^  //.,';,  ;<.''-'';  J;;.'i  j^  iai?;:': ''i;«ai.tltv  of  r-rliLzl^.  The 
!/'/'»'/</.  '////.;/.•.'''  '/<'  ';'**/•■•  '^-  i''''i.^J' /*:/it,  &im1  ih';  oxily  adva-ta:;e  to  be 
ffhth**i  I//  \*li*^  th*/  u-  /'*•«/■  J  i}i«:i<:  ;«,  that  fc|j<;  i/iay  i^maia  uprigLt;  in  the 
ittuit.ih  \titii  hi  Mii  \tut\t*/*n  \»i.\u^  h'yft  v<;j<t/;lh  h^scl  over  ver}'  iDach  azid 
ttthi'uni'  inn»/uhi\  lfi<ii:  'lunnpr  Uj<i  ii<r;i|iit.  The  bottom  at  the  foot  of 
i\t*'  itntlUi  ih  i^ttu.^  )::  'i  hi'  ti  ii'iX  fil///v<'  \Ui'.  I<;v<;l  of  the  lowest  tides;  and  at 
Mf«.  |i«»/i  hi  Mm  I. m til r III  «|<iii/|  ufi'l  lit  i.Uti  Vii'M\A:rii  bei-th^  at  the  foot  of  the 


c"AP.m.]  ri'CAMP. DIRECTIONS.  9D 

The  Basin,  which  occupies  a  surface  of  about  21,891  square  ^anla,  in 
constructed  iu  the  south-west  angle  of  the  reservoir  for  scouring  out  the 
harbour,  and  where  all  the  running  streama  of  the  valley  have  been  united. 
Two  of  its  sides  are  formed  by  embankmenta  of  earth,  but  that  towai-ds 
the  south  is  bordered  by  a  quay  of  754  feet  in  length.  The  basin  commu- 
nicates with  the  outer  harbour  by  means  of  a  lock  33  feet  wide,  the  sill 
of  which  is  8J  feet  above  the  level  of,  the  lowest  tides,  and  it  will  admit 
vessels  of  12  or  13  feet  draught  at  ordinary  springs. 

LIGHTS. — Fecamp  lighthouse,  56  feet  high,  stands  on  the^summit  of 
Fi^net  point,  at  about  93  yards  from  the  edge  of  the  cliff,  and  exhibils 
at  426  feet  above  high  water,  a  Jixed  white  light,  dioptric  and  of  the  first 
order,  visible  18  miles;  but  the  position  it  occupies,  upon  the  crest  of  an 
abrupt  hill  at  the  edge  of  a  deep  valley  covered  with  meadows  and  watered 
by  abundant  streams,  causes  it  to  be  frequently  obscured  by  the  mists,  or 
completely  hidden  by  ft^s. 

Fecamp  harbour  is  pointed  out  at  night  by  a  Jixed  red  light  on  south 
jetty,  visible  5  miles,  whilst  a  Jixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  bright  flask 
evert/  three  minutes,  is  showu,  whilst  there  are  more  than  10  feet  water  in 
the  entrance  channel,  from  a  small  stone  tower  standing  58  yards  from  the 
extremity  of  the  north  jetty  ;  the  light  is  dioptric  and  of  the  fourth  order, 
elevated  39  feet  abovehigh  water,  and  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distonco 
of  10  miles.  A  vessel  approaching  the  harbour  from  the  eastward  will  not 
open  this  light  till  it  bears  to  southward  of  S.W.  by  W,,  as  it  is  masked  by 
the  projecting  pait  of  Fagnet  cliffwhen  to  the  westward  of  that  bearing. 
The  time  during  which  the  harbour  is  accessible  by  day  is  made  known  by 
a  large  national  flag  hoisted  at  the  head  of  a  staff  on  the  north  jetty,  and  it 
is  kept  up  as  long  as  there  ore  more  than  10  feet  in  the  entrance. 

DirOCtions. — Fecamp  harbour  is  difficult  to  enter  at  all  times, 
and  dangerous  to  attempt  when  it  blows  strong  from  the  westward, 
on  account  of  the  heavy  sea  at  the  entrance  ;  for  should  a  vessel  at  that 
time  miss  the  harbour  and  ground  upon  the  rocks  off  Fagnet  point,  she 
would  be  totally  lost.  When  it  is  impracticable,  the  flag  or  the  light  is  not 
shown  from  the  north  jetly.  Every  assistance  is  given  to  warp  or  track 
veasds  when  entering  or  leaving  the  port,  and  when  the  weather  permits 
boats  manned  by  the  coasting  pilots  are  ready  at  the  entrance. 

Vessels  arriving  off  the  harbour  towards  low  water,  with  the  wind  between 
W.S.W.  and  W.N.W.  should  steer  for  the  land  about  Etretat,  and  keep  a 
position  to  windward  of  the  harbour  till  the  tide  serves  to  run  in.  With  the 
wind  between  N.N.W.,round  northerly  and  B.N.E.,  the  land  should  be  made 
about  Vattettot  and  Iport  j  wid  if  the  wind  should  come  off  shore,  and  there 
is  apprehension  of  losing  the  tide,  anchorage  will  be  found  about  1}  mile« 
from  the  coast,  oear  the  meridian  of  Iport,  in  LO  fathoms  water,  tolerably 

G  2 


fc-  •  ■,  ;.  .'.:.z  z"  '■■-: —  *.'-  £.'-^^'-  :^~.j^  '—  ocu  -mi'^  pcrx  <>rie=.^*ir.  ^i 
'.'U'  •  -  ''.''•it  '.i  -^  ASbaj-  \\  T~:a^j  i:  U:^  Tia  lij*  JkX  f^c>;i«  oe  t^ 
t-llt  V  -U:.,  -A*  W/;-^»i.-':  ;:' :-^  ■-:--=^  .ftbt  Mir=.  Oaur-lTl:^  :cJt 
".-ci.  ■'.  ■.-..'**  L<cr*  V^vc^  L>i-«*;^r.»»*»^:=:rirt»=.-i:-ric-*erli  t^hr, 
\.-.:  \  •_•  •'•'.-■.■^  s..'.-^\  \.*vji  -it -^l--^- w  :i4j  si.^  =it  ;«  »-ii  r^  i-A^ 

Or.r  ',:  'Xri  4;3«^"'-^  w':.*^  *-r.i^r-!-^  Fr^Amp  butosr  is  ilw  ttrf*a  rf 
!!'>•:.  v.:.;-.-,  ^i«;t;::-sr^  V>  be  frl:  ii  :Lr  ;rT:T  hrwii  for  «b«it  half  »9  bcwr 
niter  l-L-l.  »-i:*r  in  ;Le  bu-V..-r.  .iii;  i-j:^  ere:;  »:  ;l.»i  tia#  \\  knM^  ai  s 

on  iL^  rTMl/xtr-i  uok  ia  getera;;;  .L-ivrn  lo  I-erarJ  oi"  tL*  nortlt  ;«^, 
ar.-l  !„L-wi  ti-e  pon,  "iVitL  a  fair  »I;^i,cr  wtt-n  cl^«*  l>acl«il,  suSoeai 
•*:i  -L/,ji'l  I*  €am*>i  to  «rt  qa'tkiv  ;:;:o  ifce  Larlioar,  and  it  must  I*  so 
1«:%[.'';^1  tbat  llie  helm  mar  be  ui<irere-i  with  the  greatest  pnMD[it:tnde. 
Witii  liiH  wind  from  ibe  EorthwarJ  Tio'.eat  gasls  come  down  frcHm  the  high 
tail'!  to  the  aonhward  of  the  enlr&nce. 

TL«  Di>:ibod  gencrall;  ailopled  wheit  enUriog  the  harboor  with  a  &ir  wiod 
it  to  itan'l  for  the  footb  Jetty  ht^l,  and  then  drift  towards  the  middle  << 
the  north  jett j ;  tho  uils  maj  then  be  clewed  np,  and  the  restel  will  be 
tracked  in.  If  intending  to  enter  the  baan,  the  harboor  shoold  be  entered 
at  teut  three-qoartera  of  an  hotir  before  high  water ;  bat  if  the  Tessel  is 
10  remain  in  the  harboar,  it  may  be  entered  later. 

CaUtiOU. — Care  mnst  be  taken  on  quitting  Fecamp  harbour  with 
westerly  wind,  to  avoid  being  drifted  by  the  flood  on  the  Cbarpenliers 
shoaU,  which  join  the  rocks  at  Fagnet  point,  and  extend  to  the  westward  as 
far  as  the  tine  on  which  St.  Leonard  church  spire  is  in  one  with  the  north 
jetty  heml,  S.S.W.  To  paaa  well  outside  the  swell  caused  by  these  sboals, 
keep  Orinral  valley  open,  so  that  the  new  guard-bouse  may  appear  abore 
the  middle  of  the  cleft  by  which  Ihe  descent  b  made  to  the  beach. 

Tides. — I'  '*  tlifi  ^^R^  water,  iull  and  change,  in  Fecamp  harbour  at 
lOh.  '14m. ;  springs  rise  23^  feet  ;  oeaps  13  feet.  Above  the  bottom  of  the 
entratico  channel,  abreaat  the  middle  of  the  north  jetty,  ordinary  springs 
rim  22  to  2.3  feet,  equinoctial  springs  about  25  feet;  but  these  heights  are 
given  with  the  supposition  that  the  entrance  chanoel  is  cleared  of  all  the 
■hingle  that  is  occasionally  deposited  there.  When  the  wind  blows  strong 
from  the  westward  for  seTcral  Buccessive  days,  the  tide  rises  one  or  2  feet 
{liglicr  in  the  harbour  ;  but  there  is  then  a  heavy  sea  at  the  entrance  ;  the 
eontmry  is  the  case  with  the  wind  from  the  eastward.  The  mean  duration 
of  slack  water  is  15  or  20  minatcs  at  the  utmost. 

The  COAST  from  F6canip  trends  E.  by  N.  lOmilestoCatellierpoint 
tnd  then  E.  4  S.  6  miles  to  St.  Valery-en-caur,  and  is  formed  of  high 


CHAP.  III.]  ST.    VALEKY-EN-CATJX.  101 

perpeniliculw  cliffs  of  cbalk  and  fliiil,  iatersectetl  by  nmneroiis  vnlluys, 
the  greater  part  of  which  do  not  reach  down  to  the  beach,  A  shelf  of 
irregular  rocks,  which  uncover  at  low  water,  borders  the  shore,  but  thoso 
parts  of  it  which  project  Farthest  out  do  not  extend  more  than  nbout  3 
cables  from  the  cliffs,  bo  that  large  vessds  may  approach  the  shore  to  about 
half  a  mile  at  any  time  of  tide. 

The  appearance  of  this  part  of  the  coast  is  dull  and  uniform,  and  the 
land  seen  above  the  cliffs  is  apparently  level  and  only  oTcrtopped  by  the 
clumps  of  trees  surrounding  the  farms  and  villages.  Above  these  trees  there 
occasionally  appear  some  church  towers,  the  moat  conspicuous  being  those 
of  Senneville,  Sassetot,  St.  Marti n-aux-Bunaux,  Con t«ville,  mid  St.  Lcger ; 
the  last  named,  which  staads  near  the  edge  of  the  cliff  three-quarters  of  a 
mile  to  the  westward  of  St.  Valery,  is  a  tall  isolated  spire,  and  may  be  seen 
from  a  great  distance  in  the  ofGng. 

ST.  VALERY-EN-CAUX,  a  small  bar  harbour  used  for  shelter 
and  refitting,  is  situated  at  the  entrance  of  a  narrow  valley  enclosed  between 
high  hills,  and  will  admit  vessels  of  about  14  feet  draught  at  high  water 
ordinary  springs  when  the  bar  is  not  too  high  ;  but  only  fishing  and  smal 
coasting  craft  can  frequent  it  during  the  neaps.  The  mackerel,  herring, 
and  cod  fisheries  are  carried  on  at  this  port,  and  Baltic  and  Norway  timber, 
wine,  brandy,  &c.,  are  imported. 

The  port  consists  of  a  channel,  formed  between  two  jetties  of  unequal 
length,  leading  into  a  small  tidal  harbour,  and  of  a  reservoir  for  backwater, 
the  Burfance  of  which  is  about  67,000  square  yards,  used  for  scouring  out 
the  harbour  and  the  entrance.  A  floating  basin  in  (he  foi-m  of  a  parallelo- 
gram, 328  feet  long  and  164  feet  wide,  is  constructed  in  the  south-west 
part  of  the  reservoir,  and  communicates  with  the  harbour  by  means  of  a 
small  lock  with  sluice  gates.  The  lock  is  29^  feet  wide,  and  the  sleepers 
SJ  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides. 

The  valley  of  St.  Valery,  of  which  the  towa  and  harbour  occupy  the 
entrance,  is  about  2  cables  wide,  and  situated  at  the  bottom  of  a  small 
elbow  formed  by  the  falling  back  of  the  coast.  The  rocky  ledge  which 
uncovers  at  Iho  foot  of  the  cliff  along  the  coast  has  an  opening  in  it  in  front 
of  the  valley,  and  the  space  between  is  made  up  with  a  beach  of  chalky 
mud  and  cemented  shingle  2J  cables  wide,  upon  which  the  shingle  driven 
from  the  westward  by  the  surf  during  high  winds  from  that  quarter  is 
deposited.  The  channel  leading  to  the  harbour  runs  across  this  beach, 
and  the  jetties  between  which  it  passes  lakes  a  S.E.  by  S.  direction ;  the 
length  of  the  western  jetty  is  377  yards,  including  open  pile  work  of  129 
yards,  and  the  eastern  jetty  169  yards. 

Bar. — The  beach  uncovers  during  springs  one  cable  ontuidc  the  western 
jetty,   and   the   shingle   borne    from    the   westward    forms   on    it   a   bar 


if 


i-.i 


.• 


ii-t^-s.*'-:  -^.•■;>::^-,  ^  •::  ::  r« :;;  if  •  -i  '.'.•!•  time  C'bftmci**!  az>d  drfficiux 
♦  i?  jif  •-.  \V*.i  r;  -T'  •  ^»  *-:.-r.  'Iv  vi:. '-  * '  ir  ^cjj  anv  lerjrih  of  tiice.  tbe 
wjjf  'iri-. '-■  ••■•:.•-:;:.  f  r  : .  !*  ■  »:  rr  •  c«-.  !"t:'  riii::  :V#  liar  as  J  diriding 
it  irjto  M  v'tjj  jf^irt*,  w}ji -}i  if  :*';;■:.  ilvrii.tir-:-  of  bv  fconrin^  ant,  the 
i\i}iXin*r\  i-  *-«>!;,«'•  irjif—  cor/*]!'  t'lj  f  1.  :ir»  U  :.:. !  k-nd*  in  a  straight  dir««t30ii 
a*;  i^s  tm  tlj*f  w<rrt/rn4  fcd;:e  of  tl.«r  V--:.'h,  j  a— in:^  clo^  to  the  irestem  jctij 
hearJ. 

Harbour. — I'J"-  'u-\*-t'j-t  *  f  ih-  l.nrVo'ir  f.f  S:.  Yalerr  is  sorronndedbj 
ofjhv".  aij'i  'iVi-ll  r}:<-!t«-r»-'l.  i-.x'*"  t  ;  ::.:in*t  Lonherlv  iiinds  which  send  a 
•jwrll  into  it.  Wli*  n  tl;'--e  wii:*!-  Mov,-  *tr<^.::j:,  th"  Mirf  is  sometimes  so  great 
that  vrr»-*rN  fir'.'  in  <liiijr«'r  of  bif-Jiliini^  from  tb*-ir  moorings^  and  it  is  to 
i}\}\\iiXf:  this  inr-on\eiiienc''  thnt  tl;*-  floating  ba-in  ha<  been  made.  The 
Ujttom  is  a  mixture  of  mud.  gravel,  nnd  san«l,  and  a?  the  mud  is  in  great 
quantity  thr?  ;rioundin;:  iK-rths  are  jroo'l.  Vessels  should  be  placed  parallel 
to  the  qiiay,  and  the  mfXiringH  mn-t  Ix;  watched  as  the  back  ivsiter  is  let 
down,  for  tlie  harbour  luffing  vf^ry  nan'ow,  the  scouring  water  spreds  itself 
over  ilH  Kurfac^f,  and  its  rapidity  is  such  that  it  will  undermine  tbe  bottom 
under  thos^f  which  have  grounded  either  across  or  oblique  to  its  direc- 
tion. 1'here  is  a  small  repairing  slip  at  the  entrance  of  the  barboar,  and 
a  crane  on  the  western  quay  for  masting  small  craft. 

LIGHTS. — At  the  extremity  of  the  west  jetty  at  St.  Valery-en-caux 
from  an  iron  itoata^xed  white  light  is  exhibited  whilst  there  are  more 
than  H{  f<H?t  water  in  the  entrance  channel ;  the  light  is  elevated  27  feet 
aUive  high  water,  and  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of 
7  niiUrK.  A  /ixed  red  light  is  also  shown  from  the  end  of  the  east  jetty. 
During  the  day  a  large  national  flag  is  kept  flying  on  a  flagstaff  erected  in 
front  of  the  light  tr)wer  while  the  above  depth  is  in  the  entrance  channel. 
When  ytmch  of  different  Bizes  are  off  the  harbour  waiting  to  go  in,  the 
flag  iH  lioiHted  half  mast  as  soon  as  there  is  water  in  the  entrance  for  those 
of  the  Htnalhi*  draught,  and  hoisted  quite  up  when  there  is  sufficient  water 
for  the  others. 

DirOOtionSt — ^Vessels  unable  to  enter  St.  Valery-en-caux  harbour 
(luring  the  neaps  must  keep  at  sea  until  the  springs,  except  with  off-shore 


CHiP.  Ill]  ST.   VALERT-EN-CAtnS. — DIEECTIONS.  103 

winds  in  fine  weatlier,  when  they  may  anchor  at  from  half  to  Ihree-quartera 
of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  between  the  guanl-house  at  Cinq  TrouB  and  St. 
L^ger,  in5to  10  fathoms  water,  over  tolerably  good  holding  ground.  If  they 
arrive  off  the  entrance  at  the  springs,  and  have  only  a  few  hours  to  wait  fot 
sufficient  water  to  enl«r,  they  should,  with  westerly  winds,  make  short  boards 
between  Catellier  point  and  St,  Linger,  or  if  the  wind  is  from  the  eastward 
they  can  keep  a  position  off  the  harbour.  In  standing  in  shore  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  entrance,  care  must  be  taken  to  keep  Catellier  point  well  open 
to  the  northward  of  the  point  formed  by  the  cliffs  near  Sussette  valley, 
bearing  about  West,  to  avoid  a  dangerous  bank  of  sand  and  gravel  named 
the  Hidens,  lying  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  tlu'ce-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  west 
jetty  head,  upon  which  are  only  2  feet  at  low  water,  and  a  high  sea  during 
a  weather  tide. 

There  is  no  difficulty  in  entering  the  harbour,  whatever  maybe  the  direc- 
tion of  the  wind,  provided  the  entrance  channel  rune  at  the  foot  of  the 
western  jetty  head,  and  when  the  wind  does  not  admit  of  sailing  between 
the  jetties  a  vessel  will  bo  tmcked  in  by  a  crew  always  in  attendance]  but 
it  is  difficult  of  access  when  the  bar  joins  the  foot  cf  the  jetty  head  and  the 
channel  opens  to  the  northward,  and  it  would  then  be  imprudent  to  attempt 
it,  with  the  wind  between  South  and  West,  without  a  pilot.  When  the 
state  of  the  sea  prevents  the  pilots  going  out,  they  attend  on  the  jettJes  to 
point  out  by  signals  the  course  to  be  followed  to  round  the  bar  and  enter 
the  channel. 

The  moat  favourable  moment  to  enter  with  westerly  winds  is  when 
the  Seiade  or  eddy  is  at  its  greatest  strength,  that  is,  from  half  an  hour 
before  to  half  an  hour  after  high  water,  but  the  anchors  must  be  clear  and 
sufficient  sail  carried  for  the  vessel  to  answer  her  helm  quickly.  With 
winds  between  North  and  East,  it  is  advisable  to  enter  before  the  Seiade 
has  acquired  its  full  strength,  for  fear  of  being  drifted  upon  the  west  jetty. 
With  northerly  winds  there  is  a  high  sea  upon  the  bar,  and  sail  should  be 
carried  in  crossing  it,  as  the  wind  reflected  by  the  cliffs  decreases  the  force 
of  the  true  wind,  and  if  the  surf  is  not  crossed  rapidly  a  heavy  sea  may  be 
shipped. 

There  is  not  much  difficulty  in  quitting  the  harbour,  as  it  can  only  be 
attempted  in  moderate  weather,  but  care  must  be  taken  to  choose  a 
favourable  time  of  tide;  thus  with  easterly  winds  vesaela  should  leave  the 
jetty  before  high  water,  whilst  the  flood  stream  has  still  ranch  strength, 
and  with  westerly  winds  they  should  not  leave  until  the  ebb  stream  is 
well  established, 

TidOS. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  St.  Valery-en-caux  at 
lOh.  46m,  springs  rise  27  feet ;  neaps  21^  feet.  The  bottom  of  the  entrance 
channel,  from  the  foot  of  the  west  jetty  head  to  the  eastern  edi^  of  the  bar 


';*  ^":tsu. 


""'■'      tt...   . ,,, 


'■■'*  i>'..- 


'"»'  »iiii  „ir. 


ciup.  id]       BAZ   DE  ST.  MICHEL. — POINTE   D'AILLY.  105 

shore  wiuds  ;  but  Cotellier  cliff  kept  well  open  of  the  point  formed  hj 
the  cliffs  near  Sussette  valley  bearing  aboiit  West  leads  outside  it. 

POINTE  D'AILLT  is  of  a  roundea  form,  aud  aUhough  Ies» 
elevated  ilian  mn,ny  other  points  of  the  coait,  may  bo  ensily  recognised,  as 
the  perpendicular  chalk  cliff  forms  only  half  its  height.  A  tiiick  bed  of 
clay  und  vegetable  mould,  lying  ou  tlie  top  of  the  chalk,  slopes  duwn  to 
the  edge  of  the  cliff. 

LIG-HT. — A  Utile  within  pointe  d'Ailly  stands  a  tower,  66  feet  high, 
which  exhibits  at  305  feet  above  high  water,  a  revolving  while  light,  the 
eclipses  of  which  take  place  every  minute,  but  are  not  total  within  the 
distance  of  12  luilos.  The  light  is  dioptiic  and  of  the  ilrst  order,  and  in 
clear  weather  should  be  seen  from  a  distance  of  27  miles. 

B0Cll68  d'Ailly. — The  shore  eastward  and  westward  of  Ailly  point, 
from  the  valley  of  Pourrille  to  that  of  Quiberville,  is  bordered  by  a  bank 
composed  of  blocks  of  freestone,  named  the  Roches  d'Ailly,  which  uncover 
at  low  water,  and  terminate  in  a  point  half  a  mile  to  the  K.N.E.  of  the 
lighthoDse.  A  rock  called  the  Galore,  higher  and  larger  than  the  othere, 
rises  from  the  middle  of  the  bank,  and  when  its  summit  ia  covered  there 
are  about  20  or  21  feet  water  in  the  entrance  to  Dieppe.  The  square 
churuh  tower  of  St.  Jacques,  at  Dieppe,  kept  on  an  E.  by  S.  J  S.  bearing, 
leads  half  a  cable  to  the  northward  of  the  bank ;  the  tower  on  this  bearing 
will  appear  2°  or  3"  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  cliff,  upon  which  the 
ramparts  of  the  castle  are  built. 

Grands  and  Fetits  Ecamias  and  Kiden  de  Dieppe.— It 

is  on  the  meridian  of  Ailly  point  that  the  western  part  of  those  heaps  of 
sand  and  broken  shells  is  found,  named  Bidens  or  Eidges,  (noticed  in 
page  95,)  which  extend  11  miles  in  the  offing,  and  to  the  eastward  as  far 
aa  the  meridian  of  Tr^port.  Those  lying  to  the  northward  of  Ailly  point 
are  divided  into  two  groups,  and  as  they  have  not  less  than  7  fathoms  water 
over  them,  and  from  12  to  15  fathoms  around  them,  they  can  only  be 
dangerous  in  bad  weather;  the  northern  gi-oup,  named  Pctits  Ecamias, 
lies  7  miles,  and  the  Houlhem  group,  Grands  Ecamias,  4  miles  from  the  shore, 
The  Ridens  generally  are  not  dangerous,  but  the  sea  runs  high  in  the 
eddies  formed  by  them  on  a  weather  tide.  The  Riden  de  Dieppe,  iiowever, 
(known  to  the  mariners  of  Trdp^rt  as  the  Frilandais,)  which  lies 
N.N.E.  4  E.  10  miles  from  Dieppe,  is  an  exception  to  this  rule,  for 
tessela  of  large  draught  might  strike  upon  it  nt  low-water  springs ;  and 
small  vessels  ore  liable  to  ship  heavy  seas  when  crossing  it  in  bud  weather. 
When  this  part  of  the  coast  was  surveyed  in  1835  it  was  2  miles  in 
length,  in  a  N.N.W,  and  S.S.E.  direction,  the  highest  part  being  half  a 
mile  long,  with  from  23  to  27  feet  water  on  it  at  the  lowest  tides. 


Hh;  (  vVK    UANTIFrU   TO   CAPE   GRIS-XEZ.  [chap. in. 

A*  it  !-  j.r.'KiMo  thnt  th*-^  Ri.^•n^  Iving  composed  of  sobsUmces  eialy 
«*i  111  mi':!-'ii,  :irr  l::Oilo  t*>  rh;iii;;e  iliiir  |>08ilion»  the  mariner  willKt 
pni'U'iitiv  \\\\  n  in  t!i.  ir  \ioiiiit>,  l-v  k< -opine;  at  a  distanco  from  any  great 
fil.liis  iln-  'tn'iii;th  »»r  which  i-*  ii;  pn»p<»rtion  to  the  ahallowness  of  the 
%\at«'r  tluit  i'<  i>:;<«i(iiis  (lu'ni. 

Tides.— nil- tl«!al  >tr.'.ji>  l..ll.nv  th.*<linH-tionof  the  coast  between 
St.  V:iliTv-vno:iux  :\vA  Oiri'iM',  :i!i<l  th«irnito  nt  hpriugs  id  about  3J  knots; 
I'lii  h.  :ir  s  'ti.  \\l\'  iwA  Aillv  j-'ini-  iln-y  run  1  knots. 

PORT  do  DIEPPE. —  Tlii-*  ror.uurrciol  and  fishing  port  lies  E.  by  S. 
.'»  unli-«  iVoni  Ailiy  point,  i\u*[  with  the  town  and  suburb  of  Le  PoUet  occn- 
pii>  iht*  vuiiri'  riitiunro  ol'  h  vulK'V,  luiirly  a  mile  wide,  which  is  watered 
by  tho  riMMs  Anpio-s  Holhum*,  niul  Anne.  The  (copulation  of  Le  Pollet 
Mihnrh,  \vhiv*h  is  sitnattil  ti>  the  ca*«t\vard  of  the  town  and  joined  to  it  by  a 
tlyinf;  britliT'S  :in»  all  enirapred  in  t lie  herring,  oyster,  and  cod  fisberies.  There 
are  su;jur  n'tineries,  n>|H»-\vulks,  pa)M^r-milh!i,  and  ship-building  yards  in 
tlie  ttnvn.  Hie  ei>a>!injr  trade  is  aetive.  Steamers  ply  daily  to  Newhaven 
(»n  the  eimst  »»f  SnsM'x.     The  iH^pulatiou  in  1861  amounted  to  20,187. 

Tho  p«»rt  eon^iNts  of  a  tidal  harbour,  or  Avant-port,  which  is  2J  cables 
h»n«r,  and  three-quarters  of  a  eahh*  \vi<lo,  two  floating  basins,  and  a  capa- 
cious n»servoir  of  scouring  water.  The  harl>our  is  sheltered  from  all 
winds,  and  will  admit  ves.^'els  of  about  22  fivt  dmught  at  high  water  ordi- 
nary Hprings  when  tliere  is  no  swell  on  the  bar,  and  of  about  15  feet  at 
neaps,  WIhmi  the  state  of  the  sea  is  such  as  to  prevent  the  pilots  from 
hoarding  vessels  in  the  oiling,  they  remain  on  the  jetty  heads  and  direct 
them  by  waving  their  hatt«.  Those  drawing  less  than  10  feet  can  enter 
the  channel  2  hours  before  high  wati'r  in  the  harbour,  and  with  a  fi*esh 
leading  wind  they  may  run  in  2  hours  after  higb  water;  vessels  of  large 
draught  are  taken  in  by  the  pilots  during  the  last  hour  of  the  flood.  The 
berths  alongside  the  quays  of  the  town  are  composed  of  a  mixture  of  mud 
and  shingle,  and  their  elevation  is  about  15  feet  above  the  level  of  tbe 
lowest  tides.  The  berths  alongside  Le  Pollet  suburb  are  about  the  same 
height,  but  they  are  exposed  to  the  surf  when  the  sea  is  high  at  the 
entrance. 

A  Lifeboat  is  stationed  at  this  port. 

The  Entrance  Channel  lies  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  valley 
nearly  2  cables  from  the  high  cliffs  of  Femme-Grosse  point,  and  is  open  to 
the  N.N.W.  It  is  enclosed  between  the  northern  part  of  the  quays  of  the 
town  and  Le  Pollet  suburb,  and  forms  a  curve  3^  cables  long  from  the 
harbour.  The  outer  part  of  the  channel  is  liable  to  be  obstructed  at  times 
by  the  shingle  which  is  driven  along  the  shore  during  westerly  winds 
and  accumulates  in  front  of  the  entrance,  where  it  sometimes  forms  a  high 


CHifni]  POET  DE   DIEPPE.  107 

bar.  The  sbiogle  also  geta  JDto  the  cbanncl  at  the  neaps,  when  blowing 
hard  from  the  noi-thwanl. 

The  bottom  of  the  channel  is  of  the  same  nature  as  the  cliffa  along  the 
coast,  and  ia  generally  covered  with  a  layer  of  shingle,  but  when  it  is  clear 
it  is  about  a  foot  above  the  level  of  low-water  great  springs  across  by  the 
east  jetty  head,  and  5  or  6  feet  above  the  same  level  at  the  entrance  to  the 
harbour  ;  the  bar  has  been  sometimes  6  feet  above  the  some  level,  and  has 
joined  tlie  west  jetty  head.  A  high  sea  runs  on  the  bar  with  winds  from 
W.8.W.,  round  westerly  t«  N.E.,  and  those  from  the  westward  cause  a 
heavy  confused  sea  at  the  entrance. 

Floating  Basins. — The  outer  floating  basin  called  Basain  Duquesce  is 
2  cables  long  and  two-thirds  of  a  cable  wide,  and  is  separated  from  the 
Avant-port  by  a  dam  with  flood  gates,  which  are  54  feet  wide,  their  lower 
sill  being  6  feet  2  inches  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides;  quaj-a  border 
it  on  all  sides,  and  it  communicates  with  the  other  floating  basin  by  gates 
46  feet  wide,  the  lower  sleepers  of  which  are  7  feet  3  inches  above  the 
same  level.  The  surface  of  the  reservoir  of  scouring  water  is  about 
500,000  square  yards,  and  it  is  estimated  that  durmg  the  first  hour  of  the 
aluices  being  open  it  will  discharge  560,000  cubic  yards.  The  waters  of 
the  rivers  which  fertilize  the  valley  run  partly  into  the  reservoir,  and 
partly  into  a  canal  joining  the  upper  part  of  the  outer  basin  with  which 
it  communicates  by  a  valve  gate. 

LIGHTS. — The  following  lights  have  been  established  on  the  jetties 
at  Dieppe,  to  point  out  at  night  the  time  that  the  entrance  channel  is 
practicable , — 

AJixed  white  light,  dioptric  and  of  the  fourth  order,  ia  shown,  at  43  feet 
above  high  water,  from  a  stone  tower  standing  38  yards  from  the  head 
of  the  west  mole,  and  should  be  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of 
10  miles.  This  light  is  shown  as  soon  as  there  are  10^  feet  water  in  the 
entrance  channel,  and  extinguished  as  soon  as  the  ebb  stream  commences, 
which  occurs  about  a  quarter  of  au  hour  after  high  water. 

Three  ^xed  white  lights  are  attached  to  a  mast  standing  11  yards  from 
the  east  mole  head. 

The  first  ia  a  permanent  light,  ahown  throughout  the  night  at  23  feet 
above  high  water,  and  visible  6  miles  off. 

The  second  is  a  tidal  light,  placed  8  feet  above  the  permanent  light,  and 
shown  from  2J  hours  before  till  2  hours  after  high  water. 

The  third  ia  also  a  tidal  light,  placed  between  the  former  two  ;  it  is 
lighted  2  hours  before  high  water,  and  extinguished  at  high  water. 

The  two  latter  are  only  lighted  when  the  state  of  the  aea  is  Eavooi'ahle 
for  acceafl  to  the  harbour.  The  mast  which  carries  the  lights  is  kept  in  a 
vertical  position  while  the  vessel  preserves  her  proper  course ;  bnt  should 


«       £U 


-^  V 


^  ••  **  ■'  ■  ■  —  ••* 


\r;r  i-^ir---.      rV  ±tx 


ii  ■-— -^ 


^       •»  ■     w^ 


IT   !•:   -     l-:ri 


-  -*'^*. 


•.»",  v— i.-r-*f*_  i-iii  'Jure  Li  -i.->^  u  :■:  sLfii-.t  i  r  uitf  n-OiiTf.     '•>:i 

Direct iOILS. — ^^*  ^-^  jrC'-nri: r  "i:^  -t*1^*  :c  F:irrrfl:*  iajir>rfcc* 


■  m  -  -  •  —  •  »  •     —  - 

m 

t/>  ♦ijft  f^Si/i;  ;  :l  1*  iri:^r*d  Ij  :li  li:-^  ri-cr  S«,  -^lirh.  £::  L?  a  lassBse 

Uf  tiUU:r  hi  tUt  iiytl'^;*^,.  Whei*  ^-r^iiiiag  for  the  land  i5r::Ii  wes:e:lj  winds 
U/wnr*i4  iUc  Uonr  of  low  vrsLieT^  &  position  should  be  niaintained,  by 
umkluf^  tohort  Uickh  between  Aillr  point  and  St.  Nicolas  cluipel.  till  there 
{»  w;!it<;r  Uf  run  for  tL<r  wc«t  jettv  head;  with  easterly  winds  a  vessel 
hht/tiUi  kiptip  on  the  lijeridian  of  the  chapel.  With  o^-shore  winds  in 
fiiii',  wi'/tiihi'Tf  or  ill  a  calm^  ehc  maj  anchor  for  a  few  hours  in  3^  fathoms 
wuU'Tf  about  half  a  mile  from  the  shore  to  the  North  or  N.X.W.  of 
Hi.  t^UufUui  ('ha|K;b  The  name  of  Diejipe  road  has  been  given  to  this 
mM'iforii;(<',  but  nn  it  affords  no  shelter  with  northerly  winds,  it  should  be 
M\  wilh  all  n\iMii\f  and  a  grx>d  ofliiig  gained  as  soon  as  there  is  an  appear- 
lilif'H  of  a  t'Uiiimiu 

III  MlaiMliii;^  for  1,Imj  harbour,  the  west  jetty  head  should  be  steered  for, 
whiUuviT  may  htt  tlio  direction  of  the  wind,  because  the  flood  stream 
im  far  an  half  a  vnhUi  oiitniibj  tlie  jetty  heads,  continues  to  be  felt  40 
MihiiittiM  aflcr  hl^h  water  iu  the  harbour,  and  runs  to  the  eastward  at  the 
I'iiIm  iif  1^  kiioU  (hirhig  the  whole  time  vessels  of  large  draught  might 
wiiUr.     If  ihU  |U'iumuii(iu  bu  not  taken  with  a  light  wind,  the  vessel  will 


cuAr.m,]  POUT  DE  DIEPPE.— DIRECTIONS.  109 

be  drifted  to  tbe  eastward  of  tlie  channel.  The  west  jetty  licnd  shouUl  be 
appi'oached  with  caution,  and  when  there  is  no  pilot  on  boni-d  Euflicicnt 
Bail  should  be  can'ied  to  execute  quickly  any  change  of  course  the  pilots  on 
the  jetty  may  direct  by  waving  their  hata. 

Moderate  winds  between  N.N.W.,  round  northerly,  and  E.N.E.  are  the 
most  favourable  for  entering  Dieppe ;  with  all  other  winda  it  will  be  neces- 
sary, after  the  bar  la  crossed,  for  a  vessel  to  steer  for  the  windward 
jetty  to  he  tracked  in.  The  direction  of  the  valley  of  Dieppe  has  a 
great  influence  upon  ofT-shore  winds ;  thua  if  tbe  wind  ia  E.S.£.  in  the 
offing  it  will  be  found  S.S.E.  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  and  if  West 
outside,  it  will  be  S.W.  in  the  harbonr  and  entrance  channel,  A  W.S.W. 
wind  is  reflected  hy  the  high  cliff  between  Le  Pollet  suburb  and  Femme- 
Grosse  point,  and  ita  force  is  much  weakened ;  a  vesael  therefore,  running 
for  tho  harbour  with  the  wind  between  W.S.W.  and  W.N.W.  should  carry 
considerable  sail  to  cross  the  bar  and  broken  water  which  ia  caused  by 
these  winds  at  the  entrance. 

Tides  and  Tidal  Signals.* — It  ia  high  water,  full  and  change,  at 
Dieppe  at  1  Ih.  6m. ;  springs  rise  27  feet,  neaps  20^  feet.  When  the 
bottom  of  the  entrance  channel,  across  by  the  east  jetty  head,  is  clear  of 
ahingle  occasionally  deposited  there,  the  tide  rises  upon  it  about  23^  feet 
at  ordinary  springa;  31  feet  at  equinoctial  springs;  and  22  at  neaps. 
Three  feet  must  be  deducted  from  the  above  quantities  for  the  rise  above 
the  bar  when  in  ita  medium  state  ;  3  feet  for  the  entrance  of  the  harbour ; 
6  feet  for  the  bertha  at  the  Dieppe  quays;  9  feet  for  the  sill  of  the  flood- 
gates of  the  outer  floating  basin  ;  and  11  feet  for  the  Bill  of  the  inner  basin. 
Fresh  westerly  winds  cause  the  tide  to  rise  a  foot  or  18  luchea  higher 
'  than  in  calm  weather,  and  easterly  winds  have  a  contrary  effect.  The 
greatest  tide  takes  place  about  53  hours  after  the  conjunction;  and  the 
smallest  tide  occurs  about  63  hours  after  the  quadrature.  The  mean 
dm:ation  of  the  flood  on  the  beach  at  Dieppe  ia  5h.  40m.,  and  that  of  the 
«hb  is  6h.  45m. 

Tbe  tidal  signals  for  indicating  the  depth  of  water  in  this  port  are  the 
same  as  those  noticed  in  page  3. 

The  COAST  from  Dieppe  trends  about  E.  by  N.  J  N".  13j  milea  to 
Tr^port,  and  like  that  which  precedes  it  to  the  westward,  consists  of  a 
high  perpendicular  cliff  of  chalk  and  flint,  intersected  by  numerous  valleys. 
Tbe  land  adjacent  to  the  cliff  is  slightly  undulated,  the  highest  parts 
being  in  the  vicinity  of  Fenly  village  and  on  the  western  point  of  the 
mtrance  of  Criel  valley,  whore  the  cliff  is  surmounted  by  a  remarkable 
conical  mound  covered  with  heath,  named  Mout  Joli  Bois,  the  base  of 
which  is  half  a  mile  widcf 

*  For  day  Higoats,  lee  page  3,  nod  for  night  signala,  Ms  pago  107. 
t  S»  Admiral^]'  chart: — North  coast  of  Fraace,  sheet  XIII.,  Dieppe  to  Boulojnie, 
No.  Mil  1  scale,  »  -  0-S  inch. 


4 


11«»  '    Wl.    Ii'vNTIFEK    Tu   CAPE    GUIS-NEZ.  ."  n^?  in 


TI>*   -.  ili- ;.  •  !:.a:   r.j*\  In-   r^f-jr.':/- ■!   T-ai  the  oiEii^  mre    Pu:t*,  Bcllc- 
\:V.\    pM -;..••.  ...    r.  ;.;\.    N-  i\ i".. ::.-,    I  rlf I,    mud    Mes'nil.     Pail*   Tilky 
!• -'    ::!•  !-.  !L.-  -i.  :  ••   .T   a  n.:*.-   •  .  !'...-  r  xMwsrd  of  Dieppe,  and  at  tW 
!••;»  'I    it-*   •  A-*i :::    •: ..  j.   i-l.-.     ..-i-    th«*   rt'tnain*  of    an    ancient   Roman 
» ::  -iTiii'i:;-  :.■,  li.iii.    1  ^  •.:,,;.  :■  (  ^.  ,■ .     TI.k-  \:J!€V3  of  Ik-nioval  ami  Penlv. 
r!..'  tiiir  i  ;i:..!  1.  ■:•'.!.   •■.   •].,-   » .i -:.-.. i.-.l  rf  I):ij>jii*,  arc  s<*p:iratetl  bv  per- 
l"':iii!i-iil;ir  iiijh   :.:.:.  :.  tM:-!  <  :  a  !::  '.■•   :■;   lr!i;;tby  nnd   coni:nunica:e  ^itb 
!):••  U-:iili   },\  ri\::.-   w!.:-!i  :!.■   t1.  ■   :«  i  f   rain  ha\c  holK»w«ti   out-     Criel 
\;i'.l»v,  -::u:4V.l  .r    !:.  ■  !t...:   i-:    >!•>:.:  .li-li  Iioi*.  i?»  linlf  a  mih*  wide  at  it* 
i?.tr:ii;.i'.  ..i..\   i*  \\:i*.  :,  {  y  \  ti.f   l!i:If  rivi-r  Ycrvs  which   r^acbed  the  «€• 
hv  l^rii:ii:j:^'  a  {.i--:..'-  i'i.i  i:-t.;r  ilir<jU;:li  \L*'  )>ank  uf  shiu|rl<^  ut  the  entrance 
I'f  tin-   \aili y.     The  vaKiv    i.i"    Mt-riil  lies  2  miles  to    the   westward  ot 
Trcporl,  and  the  U-tt-jni  of  it  .•ilmi*>t  natrhrs  the  beach. 

Roches  du  Hoaume. — TIk-  wh-U  of  the  aliove  coo«t  is  liordered  bj 
a  rucky  Ifdprt*,  whivli  unc*i»vti>  at  luw  water,  and  a  Lirge  quiuilitj  of 
shingle  la  Leapc-d  up  at  the  fuot  tf  tht*  clitl's.  The  ledjre,  throughout 
thf  grositiT  jMirt  of  il.-*  cxt*.-!!!,  i>  n«'i  More  than  2  caV»lcs  wide  ;  but  in 
tliree  phices  it  pnijiTt-*  furtlur  uiit,  a:, J  i>  dangerous  to  small  vessels 
huj:;rin;5  the  coa^t  with  ot^-^hti^^•  wiinU. 

The  WL'::trrn  i»n)j«'Cii».»ii  of  thi<  K'.I.'e  runs  out  half  a  mile  from  the  tsborCy 
iu  frunt  of  liernevul  and  iVuly  \alK*}>;  the  rucks  are  uneven,  and  the 
highest  hea<ls,  named  Roches  du  lleaumc.  lie  at  the  outer  eilgc  of  the  ledge, 
and  uncover  5  or  ii  feet  iit  low  water. 

Roches  du  Muron. — The  rjccond  projection  of  tlie  above  ledge  fronts 
the  valley  of  Mc^nil ;  it  extends  4  ealjles  from  the  shore,  and  upon  it 
are  u  rocky  group  named  lioches  du  Muron,  which  bear  >»'.\V.  3  cables 
from  the  guard-house  at  Mesnil,  and  uuc*over  8  feet. 

Les  HAUMES  and  Les  GRANGES.— The  eastern  projection 
of  the  above  ledge  lies  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  entrance 
to  Treport  and  3^  cables  from  the  clilFs.  and  consists  of  small  ridges  of 
rock  rising  from  the  sand  of  the  beach ;  the  western  ridge,  named  the 
Ilaumes,  has  several  heads,  the  highest  of  which  uncovers  8^  feet  at 
low- water  springs;  the  eastern  ridge,  called  tlie  Granges,  lies  nearly 
4  cables  from  the  west  jetty  at  Treport,  and  its  highest  part,  forming 
the  south-east  point  of  the  ridge,  uncovers  6  feet,  and  its  northern  part, 
lying  N.W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  nearly  4  cables  from  the  jetty  head,  uncovers 
only  a  foot.  Between  the  Granges  and  the  Haumes  there  is  an  isolated 
rock  which  uncovers  14|  feet.  A  beach  of  muddy  sand  and  gravel  dries  at 
low  water  in  front  of  the  rocks  bordering  the  shore,  from  abreast  of  Belle- 
ville valley  to  the  rocks  at  the  foot  of  Mers  diff,  east  of  Treport  valley. 

Between  the  meridians  of  Dieppe  and  Treport,  the  bottom  is  uneven,  and 
the  dox)ths  irregular  as  far  out  as  4  or  5  miles  from  the  shore.  The  prin- 
cipal inequalities   met  with  are  those  heaps  of    sand  and  broken  shells 


CHAF.  Ill]  ROCHES  Dtt   HEAUME. — TafepOET.  Ill 

named  the  Ridens  de  Belleville,  de  Neuvillette,  de  TnJport,  and  Ic  bone 
Franc-Marqu6. 

RidenS  de  Belleville  lying  about  3  miles  from  the  Rhore  in  a 
N.N.W.  direction  from  Berne^'al  valley,  are  narrow  ridges  running  parallel 
with  each  other  in  a  N.N.W.  and  S.S  Jl.  direction,  the  least  water  on  them 
being  about  25  feet.  The  tidal  streams  occasion  strong  eddies  amongst 
these  ridges,  and  small  vessels  would  subject  themselves  to  a  heavy  sea  in 
crossing  them  in  bad  weather  during  a  weather  tide. 

Rideas  de  NeuvUlette  are  small  narrow  Bftud-hanks,  upon  which 
there  are  from  4  to  5  fathoms  at  the  lowest  tides.  They  commence  about 
■  6  cables  from  the  shore  abreast  Neuvillette  valley,  and  extend  nearly  2  miles 
into  the  offing.  The  eddies  upon  them  are  in  general  less  dangerous  tc 
small  vessels  than  those  on  the  Ridens  de  Belleville. 

Ridens  de  Tr^port  are  four  narrow  ridges  running  parallel  with 
each  other  in  a  NJJ.W,  and  S.S.E.  direction,  at  from  2^  to  3^  miles  from 
the  coast,  and  occupying  the  space  of  a  mile  from  east  to  west.  The 
westernmost  ridge,  lying  N.W.  3f  miles  from  the  enti-ance  of  Trcport,  has 
only  22  feet  water  on  it ;  the  Others  have  23  and  25  feet  on  their  highest 
parts. 

Banc  PranC-MarqU^,  lying  with  its  west  extreme  N,  J  E,  1 J  miles 
from  the  entrance  of  Treporf,  is  Xj  miles  long  in  an  E.N.E,  and  W.S.W. 
direction,  and  half  a  mile  broatl,  carrying  a  depth  of  from  13  fo  17  feet. 
It  appears  to  he  a  continuation  of  a  hank,  equally  shoal,  which  joins  the 
shore  and  trends  to  the  W.S.W. 

Anchorage. — The  holding  ground  is  in  general  good  along  the  coast 
between  Dieppe  and  Tr^port,  and  vessels  may  anchor  there  with  off-shore 
winds  during  an  adverse  tide,  but  a  position  must  be  taken  so  as  to  be 
able  to  gain  an  offlng  should  the  wind  change  and  blow  upon  the  land. 
From  Mont  Joli  Bois  to  Treport  there  ai-e  many  patches  of  a  black  substance 
met  with,  which  appear  to  be  peat,  and  the  anchors  penetrate  them  so 
deeply  that  they  are  difficult  to  weigh.  A  bottom,  upou  which  the  sound- 
ings  are  less  than  5  fathoms,  extends  a  mile  from  the  shore  in  front  of  Criel 
valley  and  Treport,  and  its  outer  edge  runs  paraJIel  with  the  coast  as  far 
as  the  meridian  of  Mers  ;  it  then  turns  hack  to  the  westward  round  the 
Franc-Marque  bank,  leaving  a  small  deep,  with  5  fathoms  water  in  it 
between  the  bank  and  the  shore,  with  excellent  holding  ground. 

TBr^FOBT  IB  a  commercial  and  fishing  port,  situated  at  the  entrance 
of  Bresle  valley,  the  laat  valley  but  one  to  the  eastward  of  all  those  which 
break  the  outline  of  the  uniform  cliffs  between  cape  Antifer  and  the  river 
Somme.  The  entrance  is  half  a  mile  wide,  between  abrupt  hills  rising 
295  feet  above  high  water,  and  at  the  foot  of  the  cliff,  in  the  southern  part 
of  the  valley,  stands  the  town  of  Treport,  the  bouees  of  which  are  over- 


112  CAPE   u'ASnFER  TO  CAPE  GttlS-NEZ.  [tnAP.  m. 

topp^J  l)j  n  toiTftce  nnil  n  liirfjo  church  built  Imlf-wny  ii|i  tlic  hill.  The 
villoge  of  Mors  is  Imilt  upon  tlii*  slop.'  of  the  Iiill;',  in  the  □ohhcrn  angle  of 
the  Trtllcy,  nnd  a  little  to  the  Pastwnrd  of  it,  on  h  plnin  HmroiinJeil  by  hills 
covered  svilh  wood,  risM  the  Koyal  n-sidence  of  the  towu  of  En. 

The  port  consists  of  nn  cntrnnco  channel,  formml  between  two  wootlea 
jetties,  11  tidnl  harbour,  n  flouting  bnsin,  and  an  immense  reservoir  of 
Hcouring  water,  inimediately  behind  the  harbour,  with  n  surface  of  200,000 
square  jards,  communicating  with  the  river  Bresle  by  means  of  the 
PenthiOvre  canal.  As  the  entrance  channel  is  sometimes  obstructed  by  a 
bar,  ri.siiig  3  nnd  4  Feet  above  the  bottom  of  the  channel,  the  harbour  wiU 
at  that  time  only  admit  voftsels  of  about  12  feet  dranght  at  high-water 
ordinary  springs  ;  but,  as  it  lies  almost  at  the  bottom  of  the  elbow  which 
the  coast  forms  between  capes  Antifer  and  Gris-Nez,  it  oflera  a  refuge  at 
the  springs  to  small  craft  that  may  bo  drifteil  in  upon  the  land  between 
Dieppe  and  tlie  month  of  the  river  Somme,  either  by  tlic  flood  stream  or 
strong  winds  from  the  westward.  Pilots  can  always  be  obtained  in 
moderate  weather,.and  it  will  be  prudent  to  take  one  when  the  state  of  the 
bar  is  not  known. 

Bar. — The  beach,which  uncovers  in  ftont  of  the  entrance  as  far  u  one 
quarter  of  a  mile  outside  the  jetty-heads,  is  bounded  to  the  westward  by 
the  Haumes  and  the  Granges  rocks,  and  to  the  eastward  by  the  rocks 
that  dry  at  low  water  at  the  foot  of  the  high  cliSs  at  Mers  point.  It  is 
composed  of  a  mixture  of  sand,  gravel,  and  shingle  cemented  together 
with  chalky  mud,  and  forms  a  hard  ground,  upon  which  a  high  sea  runs 
when  the  wind  blows  upon_the  shore.  With  hard  N.W.  winds  the  shingle 
brought  ft'om  the  westward  with  up-channel  winds,  accumulates  before  the 
entrance  channel  and  forms  a  bar  which  joins  the  west  jetty-head,  and 
extends  thence  to  the  N.'N.E.  and  N.E.  Should  a  continuation  of  westerly 
gales  bring  a  large  quantity  of  shingle  upon  the  beach,  the  bar  then  forms 
a  high  round  ildge  which  is  difllcult  tor  the  scouring  water  to  break  through, 
and  during  the  time  this  ridge  exists  the  channel  turns  to  the  N.N.E.  and 
N.E.  and  gives  some  trouble  to  enter  it  with  southerly  winds. 

The  Entrance  Channel  is  about  a  cable  long,  in  a  N,  by  W. 
direction,  and  its  eastern  side  is  enclosed  by  a  wooden  jetty,  abutting  against 
the  western  extremity  of  the  natural  bank  of  shingle  which  protects  Bresle 
valley  from  the  invasion  of  the  sea,  and  shelters  the  harbour  from  the 
northward ;  its  western  side  is  bounded  by  the  wall,  which  supports  the 
terhice  joining  the  quays  of  the  harbour,  and  by  an  open  pile-work,  the 
top  of  which  serves  as  a  road  for  the  tracking  crew  and  a  comrannication, 
between  the  terrace  and  the  west  jetty-head.  The  weet  jetty  is  only 
109  yards  long,  and  join  the  terrace  near  the  commencement  of  the  open 
pile-work. 

The  Harbour  ia  only  l^  cables  long  and  half  a  cable  wide.     The 


oaip.  m.]  TBipOET. — ^DIKBCTIONS.  113 

freestone  bottom  is  viaible  almoet  throughont  its  whole  extent,  bat  at  the 
foot  oE  the  qua^B  it  ie  covered  with  mnd  sufflcieatly  soft  to  gronnd  on. 
Yeaseis  lie  alongnde  the  qnaj  on  the  southern  side  of  the  harboar,  but  the 
moat  level  berths  &Qd  the  most  wat«T  are  alongside  the  quay  on  the 
western  side  where  those  of  10  feet  draught  lie  aground  for  three  day 
only  at  the  neaps,  and  are  well  sheltered  from  the  swell,  whicb  ruus  into 
the  harbour  from  2  hours  before  to  2  hours  afcer  high  water  when  the 
wind  blows  stroug  on  the  shore. 

The  harbour  has  been  much  improved  by  turning  a  part  of  the  course  of 
the  river  Bresle  into  a  floating  basin,  and  forming  that  river  into  s  canal 
from  Tr^port  to  Eu,  and  constructiDg  a  small  wet  dock  in  the  north-weiit 
part  of  that  town.  The  lock  basin  is  26  feet  wide  at  the  bottom,  and  147^ 
feet  long,  commimicatiag  with  the  harbour  and  the  lower  part  of  the 
Bresle  by  means  of  floodgates,  and  retains  at  all  times  a  depth  of  13  feet 
tollable  vessels  that  can  enter  Tr^port  to  remain  afloat. 

LIGHTS. — ^Ared  brick  towers  stands  25  yarda  IVom  the  west  jetty 
head  at  Tr^port,  and  9.  fixed  white  light  is  shown  from  it  as  soon  as  there 
are  6^  feet  wider  in  the  entrance  channel,  and  extinguished  three-quarters 
of  an  hour  after  the  moment  of  high  water ;  but  if  from  any  cause  the 
entrance  becomes  impracticable  during  these  times  of  tide,  a  red  light  is 
shown  instead  of  the  white  one.  The  light,  which  is  dioptric  and  of  the 
fonrth  order,  is  elevated  36  feet  above  high  water,  and  visible  in  clear 
weather  at  10  miles.  A  fi^d  red  light,  visible  5  miles,  is  shown  from  the 
extremity  of  the  east  jetty. 

During  the  day  a  large  national  flag  is  huisted  on  a  mast  on  the  end  of 
the  east  pier  when  there  are  8^  feet  in  the  channel,  and  is  kept  up  until 
high  water  ;  but  as  soon  as  the  ebb  commences  it  is  lowered  to  half-mast, 
in  which  position  it  r^nains  while  there  ia  sufficient  water  for  the  fishing 
boats. 

When  the  tide  does  not  rise  suflSciently  high  at  the  neaps  to  admit 
vessels  of  more  than  6^  feet  draught,  the  light  is  only  shown  at  night  at 
the  moment  of  high  water,  and  extinguished  5  or  6  minutes  after.  In  the 
same  manner  the  flag  is  hoisted  during  the  day  and  hauled  down  4  or  5 
minutes  after. 

Fog  signal*  — A  bell  is  sounded  in  foggy  weather  from  the  west  jetty. 
Directions. — If  a  vessel's  drau^t  will  admit  of  her  entering  Treport 
harbour,  she  will  have  nothing  to  fear  in  ordinary  weather  from  the  banks 
and  Bidens  in  its  vicinity,  but  they  must  be  avoided  when  there  is  much 
wind)  as  she  might  then  ship  some  heavy  seas.  In  running,  for  the  harbour 
from  tie  westward,  or  northward,  with  westerly  winds,  the  land  should  be 
made  about  Criel  valley,  under  Mont  Joli-Bois,  so  that  if  she  arrives  long 
before  high  water  a  position  may  be  retained  to  windward  of  the  harbour 
Q7M9.  H 


114  CAPE  d'ANTIFER  to  CAPE   GMS-NEZ.  [caAF.m. 

uatil  there  b  sufficient  depth  to  enter.  At  night  the  lights  of  Ailly  and 
Cayeus  are  excellent  guides  for  Tr4port. 

There  ia  anchorage  with  off-shore  winds  and  smooth  water,  to  stop-tide, 
in  7  fathoms,  over  broken  shelb  and  sand,  at  2  miles  to  the  westward  of 
Tr^port  and  I^  miles  lirom  the  shore  abreast  Mesnil-Va],  but  veEsels  mast 
be  prepared  to  weigh  should  the  wind  come  in  from  the  offing.  This 
anchorage  is  named  the  Petite  ritde  hy  the  mariners  of  Treport;  that 
which  they  call  the  Grande  rode  is  half  a  mile  farther  from  the  coast,  and 
vessels  having  to  remain  some  time  for  water  to  enter  the  harbour  may 
anchor  in  it,  over  a  muddy  bottom  and  excellent  holding  ground,  with 
off-ahore  winds  as  long  as  the  weather  is  fine,  but  they  should  weigh 
immediately  and  quit  the  coast  on  the  appearance  of  a  change. 

"When  running  for  Tr^port  with  a  strong  S.  W.  wind,  the  weatem  of  the 
three  windmilla  at  Ault  must  be  kept  a  point  open  to  the  northward  of  Siez 
clit^  E.  I  N.,  to  avoid  passing  too  close  to  the  Haumes  and  Granges  rocks, 
on  which  the  aea  breaks  even  at  high  water.  Vessels  of  large  draught 
Bhonld  endeavour  to  enter  between  the  periods  of  half  an  hour  before 
and  half  an  hour  after  high-water  springs ;  and  as  the  flood  stream 
runs  at  the  rate  of  from  1^  to  2  knots  at  3  or  4  cables  outside  the 
jetties,  and  continues  to  be  felt  with  less  velocity  until  1 J  hours  after  high 
water,  they  must  take  care  they  are  not  drifted  to  leeward  of  the  entrance, 
which  howevei'  is  rarely  missed  in  moderate  weather,  but  it  sometimes 
happens  with  strong  S.W,  winda^when  the  entrance  channel  turns  to  the 
north-eastward. 

The  pilots  cannot  go  out  to  meet  vessels  when  the  sea  is  high  upon  the 
beach  and  the  bar;  in  muning  for  the  harbour,  therefore,  with  strong 
winds  from  the  offing,  the  anchors  should  be  clear  for  letting  go,  the 
hawsers  coiled  on  deck,  an  anchor  ready  to  moor  by  the  stern,  and 
sufficient  sail  carried  to  perform  any  necessary  manceuvre.  These 
arrangements  being  made,  steer  so  as  to  pass  close  to  the  west  jetty-head 
where  the  pilota  will  be  found,  who  will  point  out  by  signs  the  various 
changes  to  be  made  in  the  course  to  cross  the  bar  and  to  enter  the 
channeL 

If  with  a  strong  westerly  wind  a  vessel  be  driven  to  leeward  of  the 
entrance,  she  ought  to  anchor,  should  the  state  of  the  weather  permit, 
and  wait  until  the  ebb  stream  commences,  to  gtun  an  offing;  but  if  the 
sea  is  too  high  near  the  shore,  where  indeed  the  holding  is  not  good, 
she  should  seek  for  anchorage  in  the  email  deep  under  tito  lee  of  the 
Franc  Marqnd  bank  (page  111),  where  she  will  be  in  some  degree 
sheltered,  and  with  two  anchors  down  and  a  long  scope  of  cable  out  she 
might  ride  out  the  flood  and  gun  an  offing  on  the  ebb.  If  the  wind  ia  too 
lax  to  the  northward  to  reach  this  deep  or  to  claw  off  the  coast,  the  only 


<^^'-  ax.]  TEiSpORT. — TIDES.  115 

Teaource  will  be  to  run  stem  on  the  sliingle  beacli  whli  all  sail  wt,  a.>: 
near  as  possible  to  the  east  jetty ;  the  shingle  yields  reaJilj-  under  a  vessel, 
and  if  she  takes  the  ground  near  the  fop  of  high  water  tlic  crew  will  be 
saved. 

With  off-shore  winds  the  harbour  should  be  entered  before  high  water. 
With  a  moderate  wind  and  a  smooth  sea  to  the  beach,  n  TCMfl  mt\y  easily 
get  in  close  to  the  wost  jetty  head,  where  a  crew  is  always  at  hand  to 
track  in.  With  strong  off-shore  wiuds  violent  squalls  come  down  from 
the  cliffs  and  out  of  the  valleys,  and  it  often  happens  that  when  standing 
for  the  jetty  on  the  starboard  tack,  a  vessel  is  taken  aback  in  the  micUt 
of  the  rollers  on  the  bar. 

When  leaving  the  harbour,  and  bound  to  the  northward,  do  not  go  to 
the  eastward  of  the  line  on  which  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  trees 
smrounding  Grange  farm,  1874,  situated  above  TrSport,  is  seen  n  quarter 
of  a  point  open  to  the  westward  of  the  summit  of  the  cliff  at  Mers  point 
hearing  about  S.W.  by  S.,  as  the  flood  stream  runs  to  the  eastward,  in 
proportion  as  the  distance  from  tlie  shore  b  increased,  for  some  time  after 
high  water  in  the  harbour,  and  the  banks  which  nncover  at  the  mouth  of 
the  Somme  river  extend  as  far  out  as  N.E.  from  the  entrance  to  Tr^port. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Tr^port,  at  llh.  9m., 
springs  rise  27  feet,  neaps  21  feet.  Above  the  bottom  of  the  entrance 
channel  (which  is  13}  feet  above  the  level  o[  the  lowest  tides)  great  springs 
rise  about  21  feet,  ordinary  springs  16  feet,  neaps  12  feet.  The  banks  of 
diingle  which  form  the  bar  generally  rise  3  and  4  feet  above  the  bottom  of 
the  entrance  channel,  and  sontetimes  much  higher.  Slock  water  continues 
about  10  or  IS  minutes  at  the  springs,  but  with  N.E.  wiuds  its  duration  is 
half  an  hour. 

ASPECT  of  COAST.— The  white  cliffs  bordoriog  the  coast  from 
cape  de  la  Il^ve  termioate  at  the  eastern  part  of  the  town  of  Ault,  which 
lies  E.  by  N.  |  N.  4  miles  trova  Tr4port,  and  occupies  the  entrance  and 
the  north-east  Bh>pe  of  a  deep  narrow  valley  situated  at  the  bottom  of  the 
bight  formed  between  capes  Antlfer  and  Gris-Mez.  Nine  valleys  break 
the  uniformity  of  the  aspect  of  the  coast  between  Treport  and  Ault,  and 
the  shore  is  bordered  by  a  rocky  shelf  which  in  some  places  uncovers  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  cliffs  at  low  water,  the  sea  leaviug  a  narrow 
beach  of  hard  sand  in  front  of  the  shelf. 

The  hilla  trend  in  an  E.  by  N,  direction  from  Ault  to  the  left  bank  of 
the  river  Somme,  and  join  by  easy  slopes  the  alluvial  plain  which  extends 
to  the  sea.  This  plain  is  low,  marshy,  and  apparently  level,  and  is 
defended  from  the  incursions  of  the  sea  by  a  natural  dyke  of  shingle, 
brought  hither  by  the  wasting  of  the  cliffs  between  Ault  and  cape 
Antifer,    Behind  the  dyke,  which  is  2  cables  broad,  are  meadows  and 


116  CAPE  d'aNTIFER  to  cape  GBIS-KEZ.  [cHAT.nL 

cultivated  lands,  and  in  front  of  a  beach  of  hard  sand  which  nncoven 
half  a  mile  out. 

The  coast  between  Treport  and  Cajeuz  is  inaccessible  when  the  wind 
blows  upon  the  shorci  and  a  heavy  sea  runs  in  upon  it  daring  westerly 
gales.  The  beach  between  Ault  and  the  first  guard*hoase  to  the  north- 
ward is  exposed  to  all  the  violence  of  winds  between  W.&W.  And  N.W., 
and  the  high  sea  occasioned  by  these  winds  drives  the  shingle  collected  at 
the  foot  of  the  cliffs  between  Treport  and  Ault  rapidly  towards  the  giiard- 
houBo,  and  beyond  it.  It  frequently  occurs,  after  westerly  gales^  that 
there  is  little  or  no  shingle  upon  this  beach,  which  has  occasioned  mach 
remark.  Were  it  not  for  a  small  artificial  dyke  constructed  here^  the  sea 
would  make  an  inroad  upon  the  plain. 

CAITESUX. — The  low  coast  which  commences  at  Ault  trends  in  a 
straight  line  to  the  north-east  to  the  town  of  Cayeuz,  which  is  built  on  the 
shore  in  the  midst  of  sand-hills.  The  town  is  partly  inhabited  by  fishermeni 
and  as  the  coast  affords  no  shelter  for  their  boats,  they  haul  them  up  aboYe 
high-water  mark  in  the  summer,  and  in  the  winter  place  them  for  shelter 
in  the  little  harbour  of  Hourdel,  within  the  mouth  of  the  Somme. 

The  only  remarkable  objects  on  this  part  of  the  coast  are  the  houses 
of  Cayeux,  its  church,  particularly  the  bell  tower,  and  five  windmills 
situated  in  and  around  the  town.  In  westerly  gales  the  sea  heaps 
up  upon  the  shore  in  front  of  the  northern  part  c^  the  town  a  great 
quantity  of  sand,  which  is  carried  away  by  the  high  winds  into  the 
interior. 

Within  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  Cayeux  church  is  a  sheet  of  water 
named  the  Hable  d'Ault,  where  the  greater  part  of  the  fresh  water  of  the 
plain  is  collected.  Until  the  year  1767  this  Hable  (a  corruption  of  the 
word  havre  or  haven)  communicated  with  the  sea  by  a  channel  into  which 
the  fishing-boats  of  Ault  and  Cayeux,  as  well  as  small  coasters,  could  run 
for  shelter ;  but  the  successive  invasion  of  shingle  filled  it  up. 

Vessels  of  large  draught  should  not  approach  the  coast  between  Mont 
Joli  Bois  and  Cayeux,  neither  should  small  vessels,  unless  bound  to  Treport 
or  the  river  Somme.  The  depth  is  only  5  fathoms  at  2^  miles  from  the 
shore  between  Treport  and  Cayeux  ;  outside  of  this  the  soundings  increase 
slowly  to  8  and  9  fathoms  at  6  miles  in  the  offing.  The  sand-banks  which 
uncover  at  the  mouth  of  the  Somme  extend  to  the  south-west  as  far  as 
N.W.  by  W.  of  Cayeux  church;  on  this  bearing  they  dry  out  nearly 
1|  miles  from  the  shore  at  spring  tides. 

LIGHTS. — ^A  round  brick  tower,  which  at  a  distance  resembles  a 
Doric  column,  stands  near  the  shore,  1|  miles  to  the  north-east  of  Cayeux, 
and  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  92  feet  above  high  water,  a  ^xed  white 
light,  varied  every  four  minutes  by  a  bright  flash  of  8  or  10  seconds 


CH4P.m.]     CATETJI. — BMBOTTCHUBB  DE  LA  SOHMB.  117 

dnratioD ;  the  flash  is  preceded  aod  followed  bj  a  abort  eclipse.  The 
light  is  dioptric  and  of  the  third  order,  and  viaible  in  clear  weather  at 
14  miles;  hat  the  ibg,  which  rises  from  the  low  damp  gronnd  covered 
with  wood  in  the  rear  of  the  lighthouse,  sometimes  obscures  it. 

Affixed  white  tidal  light  is  shewn  at  3,827  yards  to  the  S.W.  of  Cayeux 
light,  to  point  oat  the  south  channel  into  the  Somme.  It  is  lighted  at 
3^  hours  after  the  beginning  of  the  flood,  at  the  entrance  of  the  channel, 
and  extinguished  I^  hours  after  the  beginning  of  the  ebb. 

ESEBOnCHUBE  de  la  SOUME.—Tliis  estuary  lies  between 
the  town  of  Cayenx  and  St.  Qiientin  point,  which  bear  N.E.  ^  N.  and 
S.W.  ^  S.  from  each  other,  distant  6  miles.  It  is  bounded  on  the  south  hj 
the  plain  of  which  Cayeux  occupies  the  north-west  angle,  and  on  the  north 
and  north-east  by  the  low  lands  of  MarquenteLTe  and  the  Favi^res  marshes. 
The  little  harbours  of  Hourdet,  St.  Valery-aur- Somme,  and  Le  Crotoy 
are  situated  within  the  estuary,  the  two  first  on  the  left  and  the  latter  on 
the  right  bank.  Vessels  of  about  IS  to  18  feet  draught  cau  get  up  to 
Hourdel  harbour  at  the  springs,  aai  of  6  feet  draught  at  the  neaps.  Le 
Crotoy  channel,  when  not  obstructed  by  sandbanks,  which  it  sometimes  is, 
allows  vessels  of  12  or  13  feet  draught  to  get  Dp  at  ordinary  springs.  The 
channel  leading  up  to  St.  Valeryhas  been  so  improved  that  vessels  drawing 
13  and  14  feet  can  easily  get  up  to  that  town,  which  is  the  outport  to 
Abbeville,  with  which  it  communicates  by  a  canal  7^  miles  long. 

Some  of  the  pilots  for  the  river  Somme  live  at  Cayeux,  and  the 
remainder  at  Le  Crotoy  and  St.  Valery. 

Left  Bank  of  the  Somme. — From  Cayeux  the  left  bank  of  the 
river  takes  a  north-east  direction  for  3}  miles  to  Hourdel  point,  and  is 
skirted  by  an  immense  quantity  of  shingle,  of  an  averse  breadth  of  3  cables, 
which,  as  far  as  2  miles  from  Cayeux,  is  covered  by  sand-hills  of  mode- 
rate height  i  but  from  Cayeux  lighthouse  to  Hourdel  point  the  shingle 
is  uncovered,  and  a  series  of  undulations,  parallel  to  each  other,  may  be 
remarked  on  the  surface  of  the  soil.  Hourdel  point  in  many  respects 
resembles  Hoc  point,  noticed  in  page  76  j  both  increase  by  successive 
deposits  of  shingle  brought  by  the  tide  and  surf,  and  the  eddy  on  the 
flood  has  given  them  nearly  the  same  shape. 

Between  Hourdel  point  and  St.  Valery-sor-Somme  the  shore  is  low  and 
forms  an  elbow  half  a  mile  deep,  the  land  being  defended  from  the  incur- 
sion of  the  sea  by  an  embankment,  in  front  of  which  is  some  marshy 
land  and  a  wide  beach',  parts  of  which  are  hardly  covered  at  high-water 
springs.  The  town  of  St.  Valery  and  the  suburb  of  La  Fert4,  which 
forms  a  part  of  it,  occupy  a  space  of  14  miles  along  the  shore,  and  are 
built  on  the  north  slope  of  a  group  of  hills  foiming  the  northern  point  o£ 


118  CAFE  d'AKTIFEB  TO  GAPE  OBIS-KEZ.  [OHxr.m. 

the  high  land  between  the  riven  Somme  and  Bresle  ;  the  north-west  hill 
the  best  seen  from  the  offing,  has  npon  its  summit  a  damp  of  tall  tiees  and 
a  windmill. 

The  harbonr  of  St  Yalerj  is  at  the  eastern  part  of  the  town,  and  ends 
the  sea  navigation  of  the  month  of  the  Somme.  Since  the  weten  of  this 
river  and  the  streams  flowing  into  it  above  Abbeville  ran  ont  by  the 
canal,  the  sand,  which  the  floo<l  stream  drives  into  the  river,  has  in  a 
great  measure  filled  up  its  former  bed,  and  the  lighters  or  discharging 
vessels  (when  laden  thej  draw  about  3  feet  water)  can  hardly  get  up 
as  far  as  the  village  of  Grand  Port,  on  the  right  bank,  5  miles  above 
St.  Valery. 

Right  Bank  of  the  Somme.— The  n<^hem  shore  of  this 
estuary  trends  in  a  N.N.W.  and  S.S.E.  direction,  and  the  most  conspicuous 
object  on  it  is  the  little  town  of  Le  Crotoy,  built  on  a  projecting  point  at 
2^  miles  E.  by  S. }  a  of  Hourdel  point  and  1^  miles  N.N.E.  of  St.  Yalery ; 
the  ruins  of  the  fortifications,  four  windmills,  showing  above  the  ruins, 
the  church  tower,  and  the  roofs  of  some  of  the  houses  serve  to  mark  its 
position  from  a  difitaace. 

The  coast  for  4  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Le  Crotoy  is  low,  and  an 
embankment  follows 'all  its  sinuosities  and  shelters  the  adjacent  land  from 
invasion  by  the  sea.  The  south  part  of  St.  Quentin  point,  seen  from 
Le  Crotoy,  is  about  4  miles  to  the  N.N.W.  of  that  town,  and  in  the 
intermediate  space  the  coast  recedes  a  mile  and  forms  an  elbow,  at  the 
bottom  of  which  the  little  river  Mai^  (which  receives  a  large  portion  of 
the  waters  of  the  Marquenterre)  loses  itself  upon  an  elevated  beach. 
The  only  objects  that  can  be  seen  on  this  low  part  of  the  coast  are  the 
windmill  at  St.  Pierre,  and  the  church  tower  of  the  village  of  St.  Firmin 
situate  respectively  North,  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  and  N.N.E.  3  miles  of 
Le  Crotoy. 

St.  Quentin  point  is  rounded,  and  forms  a  slight  projection  on  the  shore, 
at  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  point  that  is  visible  from  Le  Crotoy, 
and  where  the  coast  undergoes  a  sudden  change  in  its  direction.  The 
only  object  which  serves  to  point  out  its  position  frcte  seaward  is  a  guard- 
house built  among  the  sand-hills  on  the  point.  These  hills  are  higher  here 
than  upon  the  coast  to  the  S.S.E.,  and  those  on  the  point  may  be  seen  in 
clear  weather  at  8  or  10  miles. 

Passes  de  rEmbouchure  de  la  Somme.-^Tha  whole 

space  included  between  the  shores  of  the  cstuaty  just  described  -is  nearly 

entirely  filled  with  an  immense  mass  of  sand  which  the  sea  leaves  dry,  and 

whidi  extends  into  the  offing  as  far  as  1^  miles  outside  a  line  dnwn  from 

•  Cayeux  point  to  St.  Quentin  point.    The  surface  of  this  sand  is  subject  to 


CHAP,iiL]  EMBOUCHUKE  D£  LA  SOMME.  119 

the  sport  of  the  winds  and  the  tides>  every  daj  furrowed  afresh  by  the 
streams,  and  the  sand  being  shifting  is  formed  into  banks,  the  shape  and 
height  of  which  are  extremely  variable.  The  banks  at  the  entrance, 
taken  as  a  whole^  from  the  parallel  of  Cayeux  to  that  of  St.  Quentin  point 
form  a  slope^  the  inclination  of  which  is  gradual  seaward,  but  steep  towards 
the  land  ;  their  highest  parts  extend  from  N.W.  of  Cayeux  lighthouse  to 
North  of  Hourdel  point,  and  are  not  covered  at  the  lowest  neaps. 

None  but  fishing-boats  or  small  coasters  piloted  by  the  mariners  of  the 
place,  can  enter  the  Somme  by  the  narrow  winding  channel  under  St. 
Quentin  point. 

The  principal  entrance  into  the  Somme  lies  amongst  the  southern  part 
of  the  banks,  abreast  of  Cayeux  and  the  lighthouse.  It  consists  of  two 
narrow  channels,  each  2  miles  long,  separated  from  each  other  by  a  bank, 
some  parts  of  which  uncover  11  or  12  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  The 
northern  channel  runs  in  a  N.W.  and  the  southern  channel  in  a  S.W. 
direction  from  Cayeux  lighthouse.  They  do  not  dry  throughout,  but  the 
entrance  of  each  is  barred  by  a  bank,  which  uncovers  3  feet,  and  on  which 
ordinary  springs  rise  about  28  feet,  great  springs  31  feet,  and  neaps 
18  or  19  feet. 

Buoys* — Black  and  red  buoys  mark  both  of  the  above  channels,  and 
to  facilitate  finding  them  a  large  vertical  striped  white  and  red  bell  buoy  is 
moored  outside  the  banks,  within  the  depth  of  5  fathoms,  with  Cayeux 
lighthouse  bearing  E.  by  S.,  Cayeux  church  tower,  S.E.  ^  E.,  the  middle 
of  the  valley  of  the  town  of  Ault  S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  the  buoy  at  the  entrance 
of  the  north-west  channel  E.  by  N.  \  N.  nearly  2  miles,  and  that  at  the 
entrance  of  the  south-west  channel,  E.S.E.  1^  miles. 

The  red  and  white  bell  buoy  may  be  seen  from  a  great  distance,  and 
should  always  be  sighted  when  approaching  the  banks  ;  when  near  it 
Lemot  windmill  will  be  open  about  a  degree  to  the  southward  of  Cayeux 
church,  and  the  eastern  end  of  the  Grange  wood,  1874,  above  Tr^port, 
will  be  about  the  same  distance  open  to  the  westward  of  Mors  cliff,  S.W.  J  S. 
The  buoys  which  mark  the  direction  of  the  channels  are  liable  to  drive, 
but  the  greatest  care  is  taken  to  keep  them  in  fixed  positions. 

Chenal  de  la  Somme. — The  two  narrow  channels  just  described, 
when  north  of  the  lighthouse,  unite  and  form  one  channel,  2  cables  wide, 
which  follows  the  direction  of  the  shore  as  far  as  Napoleon  guard-house, 
three-quarters  of  a  mile  westward  of  Hourdel  point,  and  is  called,  in  con* 
sequence  of  its  unchanging  nature,  the  Somme  or  entrance  channel.  This 
channel  dries  in  some  places  at  low  water,  and  iu  other  parts  the  soundings 
are  very  irregular. 

At  3  hours  flood  the  stream  in  the  Somme  channel  runs  6  or  7  knots 


120  CAPE  d'ANTIFEB  to  cape  GRIS-NEZ.  [GHJiP.  xn. 

at  springs ;  but  beyond  the  guard-house  the  channel  widens,  and  the  stream 
in  some  degree  loses  its  strength. 

InilOr  CliaiUlOlS. — ^The  approaches  to  Hourdel  point  are  encum- 
bered by  banks  of  shifting  sand,  the  greater  part  of  which  do  not  cover  till 
2^  hours  flood.  From  this  cause  the  rapid  stream  that  enters  the  Sommo 
channel  till  this  hour  of  tide,  continues  to  run  to  the  north-east  between 
these  banks  and  the  eastern  edge  of  the  high  bank  barring  the  mouth  of 
the  Somme,  and  does  not  run  to  the  eastward  until  it  is  forced  in  that  direc- 
tion by  the  stream  which  enters  from  the  north-west,  and  by  the  beach  on 
the  northern  shore  of  the  estuary.  The  stream  then  follows  the  course  of 
this  beach  until  abreast  Le  Crotoy,  when  the  banks  turn  it  to  the  south- 
east, towards  St.  Valery. 

When  the  banks  around  Hourdel  point  are  covered,  the  floods  find  a 
passage  along  the  southern  shore  of  the  estuary,  and  its  speed  slackens 
considerably.  The  channel  formed  by  the  tide  along  this  shore  is  sinuous, 
uneven,  extremely  variable,  and  less  deep  than  that  leading  to  Le  Crotoy, 
which  it  is  separated  from  by  shifting  sands.  Both  these  channels  are  well 
marked  with  beacons  and  buoys,  but  they  should  never  be  attempted  with- 
out a  pilot. 

DirOCtions. — Vessels  arriving  off  the  mouth  of  the  Somme  with 
westerly  winds,  before  there  is  sufficient  water  for  them  to  pass  through 
either  of  the  outer  channels,  should  keep  a  position  on  the  meridian  of 
Mers  cliff,  and  to  the  S.W.  of  Cayeux  Church  tower ;  or,  if  the  weather 
will  permit,  they  may  anchor  in  about  7^  fathoms,  good  holding  ground,  on 
the  meridian  of  the  diff,  and  W.  by  N.  of  Cayeux  ;  with  off-shore  winds 
they  can  anchor  to  the  westward  of  the  large  red  and  white  bell  buoy, 
moored  outside  the  banks.  When  the  narrows  are  practicable,  a  red  flag 
is  hoisted  on  a  stafl^  close  to  the  north-west  of  the  lighthouse,  at  4  hours 
flood.  With  off-shore  winds  the  flag  is  hauled  down  as  soon  as  the  ebb 
commences,  but  with  westerly  winds  it  is  kept  flying  three-quarters  of  an 
hour  after  high- water. 

The  banks  bounding  the  outer  channels  are  liable  to  such  change  that 
vessels  which,  in  consequence  of  their  tonnage,  are  subject  to  pilot  dues, 
should  never  attempt  to  enter  without  pilots.  But  it  sometimes  hap2)ens 
that  the  state  of  the  sea  will  not  admit  of  pilots  going  out  to  vessels 
requiring  them,  or  to  the  assistance  of  those  that  may  be  embayed  off  the 
mouth  of  the  Somme  and  are  obliged  to  run  in,  which  is  always  practicable 
towards  high-water  springs  when  the  red  flag  has  been  seen,  and  the 
position  of  the  buoys  at  the  entrance  of  the  channels  well  ascertained. 
To  supply  as  far  as  possible  the  want  of  a  pilot  on  board,  a  tall  flagstaff 
has  been  erected  N.E.,  half  a  mile  from  Cayeux  lighthouse,  upon  the 


aoAT.  m.]  EMBOTTOHiraB  SB  LA.  80UUB. — ^POST  ST.  TAXEBY.  121 

mast  of  which  &  red  flag  u  htnrted,  utd  made  to  ioctine  ri^t  and  left  to 
direct  a  resaet  in  the  choDiiels ;  it  ehe  baa  entered  and  i>  iteericg  a  proper 
course,  the  flagstaff  is  kept  in  s  vertical  position,  if  not,  it  is  drooped  on 
the  dde  towards  which  she  should  steer.  These  signals  are  made  to  Tessels 
of  all  BizeB  when  they  have  demanded  a  pilot. 

POBT  dU  HO XTRDEL.— Since  the  Hable  d'Ault  (noticed  in  page 
116)  has  been  closed  up,  the  elbow  the  shore  makes  within  Hourdel  point 
served  as  a  place  of  refuge  for  the  Cayenz  fishing  boats,  but  the  constant 
increase  of  the  sands  threatening  to  £11  it  up,  a  small  harbour  was  made  to 
shelter  coasting  craft.  In  1841  the  harbour  consisted  of  a  small  dr^  basin, 
from  270  to  325  yards  long  and  76  wide.  It  has  been  much  improved 
since,  and  now  will  contain  about  30  vessels  well  secured.  As  ihe  direc- 
tion of  the  entrance  is  athwart  the  tidal  streams,  it  would  be  imprudent  to 
attempt  to  enter  without  n  pilot,  who  can  at  all  times  board  a  vessel  after 
she  has  passed  through  the  outer  channels. 

LIG-HT. — A  Jhxd  white  tjdal  light,  of  the  fourth  order  and  visible 
6  miles,  is  erected  on  Point  du  Honrdel,  the  south  side  of  entrance.  It  is 
lighted  till  2^  hours  before  low  water. 

Fog  Signal. — A.  bell  is  sounded  in  foggy  weather. 

Tid,68. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  on  the  beach  at  Cayeux,  at 
llh,  5m.;  springs  rise  27J  feet,  neaps  21  feet.  Above  the  bottom  of 
Honrdel  harbour  (which  is  II  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides) 
eqoinoctial  springs  rise  22  to  23  feet ;  ordinary  springs,  20  to  21  feet ; 
neaps,  about  10  feet.  Strong  winds  from  the  westward  cause  the  tide  to 
rise  a  foot  or  two  higher,  and  easterly  winds  have  a  contrary  effect. 

PORT  de  ST.  VALERT-SUR-SOMME  is,  properly 
speiddng,  the  contianation  of  the  Somme  canal  outside  the  lock.  An 
earthen  embankment,  1,100  yards  long,  which  begins  at  the  lock  and  ter- 
minates in  an  open  stockade  70  yards  long,  shelters  it  from  north  to  east, 
and  it  is  bounded  on  the  west  and  south  by  the  shore  of  La  Fertl  suburb, 
a  part  of  which,  438  yards  long,  has  been  converted  into  a  quay.  The 
population  of  St.  Valery  in  1871  was  3,700.  The  exports  are  chalk,  vege- 
tables, Band,  and  ballast ;  and  the  imports,  wood,  coal,  pig  iron,  wheat, 
cheese,  flas,  sulphur,  wool,  and  linseed. 

This  harbour  is  quite  sheltered  from  both  winds  and  sea,  and  will  con- 
tain from  30  to  35  vessels  lying  against  the  quays,  or  60  or  70  when  placed 
in  a  double  tier,  and  they  ground  every  tide  upon  a  bottom  of  chalky  mud 
mixed  with  sand,  and  some  shingle.  A  regular  depth  is  maintained 
in  the  harbour  now  that  the  water  collected  in  the  canal  is  used  for 
■couring. 


122  CAPE  D'ANTITEB  to  cape  GBIS-NEZ.  [GHAP.m. 

LIGHTS.— A ^€4  red  light  of  the  fourth  order  26  feet  high  and 
visible  3  miles,  is  exhibited  from  the  extremity  of  the  towing  bank  in  front 
of  St.  Harold's  tower,  St.  Valery. 

K  fixed  green  light,  elevated  25  feet  above  high  water  is  exhibited  from 
the  Mole  head  of  the  harbour  of  St.  Valerj,  and  should  be  visible  in  clear 
weather  from  a  distance  of  4  miles. 

Tid6S.*-It  is  high  water,  fall  and  change,  in  St.  Valery  harbour,  at 
lOh.  46m. ;  springs  rise  27  feet ;  neaps  21^  feet.  Above  the  level  of  the 
berths  in  the  harbour  (which  dry  13^  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest 
tides,)  equinoctial  springs  rise  20  to  21  feet ;  ordinary  springs  17  to  18 
feet ;  and  neaps  about  8  feet.  Westerly  winds  raise  the  tide  a  foot  or  two 
higher,  and  easterly  winds  have  a  contrary  effect.  The  tide  begins  to 
rise  in  the  harbour  about  3  hours  after  the  commencement  of  the  flood 
on  Cayeux  beach,  and  it  fills  in  about  2^  hours ;  at  4  hours  ebb  it  is  quite 
dry. 

CANAL  de  la  SOMME,  formed  on  the  left  bank  of  the  river, 
commences  at  the  village  of  Sur-Somme,  2  miles  below  Abbeville,  and  is 
terminated  at  the  bottom  of  St.  Valery  harbour  by  a  lock,  ^6^  feet  long 
and  98  feet  wide,  in  which  vessels,  ascending  to  or  descending  from  Abbe- 
ville, are  kept  afloat.  The  mean  depth  of  water  maintained  in  the  canal  is 
7  ft.  4  in.  above  the  sills  of  the  lock,  which  are  16  feet  above  the  level  of 
the  lowest  tides,  and  3  ft.  3  in.  above  the  level  of  the  grounding  berths  at 
the  foot  of  the  quay  in  the  harbour.  The  water  is  allowed  to  accumulate 
in  the  canal  for  three  days,  counting  firom  the  day  after  full  and  change, 
in  order  to  permit  vessels  of  11  feet  draught  to  pass  through  it. 

PORT  d' ABBEVILLE,  formed  in  the  western  part  of  the  town 
of  Abbeville,  extends  600  yards  along  the  right  bank  of  the  Somme,  from 
the  ramparts  to  the  bridge  which  unites  the  Hocquet  and  the  Marcadet 
quarters  of  the  town.  A  quay  extends  the  whole  length  of  the  port, 
and  it  is  said  that  the  river  is  sufficiently  deep  along  the  quay  to  admit 
of  vessels  drawing  12  feet  to  remain  afloat. 

PORT  du  CROTOT.— The  embankment  which  shelters  the  low 
shore  of  the  mouth  of  the  Somme,  to  the  eastward  of  Le  Crotoy,  from  the 
invasion  of  the  sea^  forms  an  elbow  under  the  eastern  part  of  that  town, 
at  the  bottom  of  which  a  channel  conducts  the  waters  from  the  pond 
at  Bue  and  the  Favi^res  marshes  into  the  Somme.  The  current  from 
this  channel  has  formed  a  creek  in  the  mud,  in  which  fishing  boats  take 
shelter. 

Le  Crotoy  occupies  an  advantageous  position  as  faV  as  relates  to  the 
circuitous  course  the  flood  stream  makes  in  the  mouth  of  the  Somme 
during  the  time  it  has  most  strength.    This  stream  clears  out  the  channel 


CBAP.mO        POBT  D'ABBE^LLE. — BANCS  D£  SOMME.  123 

in  front  of  Le  Crotoj  and  renders  U  almost  alwajs  deeper  than  the 

others. 

LIGHT. — ^A  fixed  white  light,  of  the  fourth  order,  and  visible  6  milesy 
points  out  at  night  the  position  of  port  Crotoj.  It  is  lighted  on  a  rising 
tide. as  soon  as  there  are  3  feet  water  at  the  entrancei  and  extinguished 
2  hours  after  high  water. 

Tides. — The  bed  of  the  creek  at  the  inner  part  of  port  Crotbj,  when 
free  from  the  mud  or  sand  sometimes  deposited  there,  is  17^  feet  above 
the  level  of  the  lowest  tides ;  and  the  tide  rises  on  it  17  feet  at  equinoctial 
springs  ;  15  feet  at  ordinary  springs ;  and  about  4  feet  at  neaps ;  there  is 
about  a  foot  more  water  at  the  entrance  of  the  port. 

BANCS  de  SOMME.— The  banks  generallj  designated  the 
Somme  banks  are,  the  Bassurelle  de  la  Somme,  the  Qu^mer,  the  Battur, 
and  the  south-west  part  of  the  Bassure  de  Baas.  Those  dangerous  banks 
lying  in  Dover  strait,  viz.,  the  Yarne,  the  Colbart,  the  Bassurelle,  the 
Ridens,  and  the  Yergojer,  have  been  described  in  Channel  Pilot,  Part  I. 

There  is  alwajs  sufficient  water  upon  the  Somme  banks  to  admit  of 
vessels  crossing  them,  when  bound  for  the  mouth  of  the  Somme.  From 
the  south-west  end  of  the  Bassure  de  Baas,  the  land  can  only  be  seen  in 
fine  weather,  the  eddies  on  these  banks  occasion  a  heavy  sea  when  it  blows 
hard  ;  the  soundings  on  them^  however,  differ  sufficiently  from  those  in  the 
channels  between  them  to  enable  the  mariner  to  know  his  position  with 
reference  to  the  banks  and  the  land.  The  Qu^mer  and  the  Bassurelle  de 
la  Somme  appear  to  be  the  lengthening  out  of  that  immense  mass  of  sand 
and  broken  shells  which  forms  the  submarine  slope  along  the  shore  from 
St.  Yalcry-en-Gaux  to  the  mouth  of  the  river  Canche. 

The  Somme  banks  are  marked  by  two  red  bell  buoys ;  the  north  buoy  lies 
N.  ^  W.  3^  miles  from  the  church  tower  of  Cayeiix;  and  the  south  buoy 
N.  W.  by  W.  J  W.  2  miles  from  the  same  tower. 

La  Bassurelle  de  la  Somme  and  Le  Qu^mer  spread 

towards  the  south-west,  across  the  mouth  of  the  Somme,  and  the  latter  bank 
ends  about  11  miles  N.W.  by  W.,  and  the  Bassurelle  de  la  Somme  10  miles 
W.  byN.  ^N.  of  Cayeux  lighthouse;  the  channel  separating  them  has 
no  opening  to  the  north-east,  but  terminates  in  the  depth  of  7  fathoms 
about  5  miles  W.N.W.  of  St.  Quentin  point.  Neither  of  these  banks 
are  dangerous,  but  they  are  joined  to  the  shore  by  a  shoal  bottom  on 
which  the  depth  is  less  than  5  fathoms  at  low  water,  and  which  extends 
nearly  5  miles  into  the  offing.  This  shoal  bottom  terminates  in  two 
points  projecting  in  the  direction  of  each  of  the  banks,  the  first  as 
far  as  6  miles  W.  \  S.  from  St.  Quentin  point,  and  the  other  SJ  miles 


124  CAPE  d'aXTIPER  to  cape  GRIS-XEZ.  [«AF.m. 

W.  hj  S.  from  Boothiaoville  point ;  the  kiter  is  the  most  duigeroiis,  as 
there  are  onlj  18  feet  water  on  it^  5  miles  from  the  point  on  the  same 
hearing. 

La  Battor  Ucs  in  the  channel  separating  the  Qn^mer  from  the 
Bassnre  de  Baas,  and  carries  a  depth  from  6  to  8  fathoms.  It  is  not 
dangerous  to  Tessels  of  anj  draught,  hot  the  eddies  on  it  cause  a  heavy 
sea  when  it  hlows  hard.  From  its  south  extreme  Cajeux  lighthouse 
hears  about  S.E.  \  S.  13  miles,  and  from  its  north  end  the  lighthouse  on 
Haut-Banc  point,  8.E.  by  E.  6^  miles. 

La  BaSSUre  de  Baas  is  a  narrow  bank  of  sand  and  shells,  35 
miles  long,  beginniog  at  3|  miles  to  the  south-west  of  cape  Gris-Xes,  and 
1^  miles  from  the  shore  abreast  Ambleteuse,  and  after  following  the  direc- 
tion of  the  coast  as  fisu^  as  the  month  of  the  river  Canche,  it  takes  a  south- 
west direction,  and  terminates  about  18  miles  from  the  shore  a  little  to  the 
southward  of  the  parallel  of  the  mouth  of  the  river  Authie,  and  19  miles 
N.W.  ^  N.  of  Cayeux  lighthouse.  From  its  north  end,  as  far  as  4  miles 
to  the  southward  of  the  Canche,  it  is  daugerous  at  low  water  to  vessels  of 
largo  draught ;  its  highest  parts  may  indeed  be  touched  upon  by  vessels  of 
every  description  when  there  is  any  sea  on  at  that  time  of  tide. 

The  shoalest  and  the  most  dangerous  spot  on  this  bank  is  a  small  flat, 
half  a  mile  long  in  a  north  and  south  direction,  with  only  12  feet  on  it. 
It  lies  nearly  in  the  direction  of  the  Colonne  de  la  Grande- Arm^  (known 
as  Buonaparte  column,  which  stands  three  quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  north- 
ward of  Boulogne),  in  line  with  Heurt  fort,  bearing  E.N.E.,  and  from  it 
that  fort  bears  N.E.  by  E.  |  by  E.,  cape  Alprech  lighthouse  E.  by  N.  J  N., 
Gravois  windmill  E.  by  S.  and  the  summit  of  Mont  St.  Frieux  S.  by  E.  j 
E. ;  the  sea  breaks  with  great  violence  on  the  whole  of  the  flat  during 
strong  westerly  winds. 

For  14  miles  to  the  southward  of  this  flat,  as  far  as  West  8  miles  from 
Touquet  point,  the  shoalest  parts  of  the  Bassure  de  Baas  form  a  succession 
of  long  narrow  flats,  upon  which  the  depths  vary  from  20  to  26  feet,  and 
the  sea  breaks  heavily  upon  them  when  it  blows  hard  from  the  westward. 
There  are  no  dangers  in  the  channel  between  the  bank  and  the  shore, 
but  a  high  sea  runs,  when  it  blows  strong  on  a  weather  tide,  on  some 
shoal  spots,  carrying  from  6  to  8  fathoms,  and  lying  nearly  in  the  middle 
of  the  channel.  During  bad  weather,  with  winds  between  West  and 
N.N.W.9  the  sea  is  less  disturbed  in  this  channel  than  outside  the  Bassure 
de  Baas,  particularly  from  the  mouth  of  the  Canche  to  cape  Alprech. 

Direotions. — ^As  the  eastern  side  of  the  Bassure  de  Baas  is  steep  to, 
the  lead  will  be  an  uncertain  guide  to  avoid  the  12-feet  patch,  on  its 
northern  part,  when  running  in  the  channel  between  the  bank  and  the 


ctUF.  m.]  EICBOUCHUKE  DB  X.'A'UTHIE.  125 

sliore  i  bat  «  Teasel  will  keep  in  mid-channel,  when  between  the  ptnlleb 
of  GraroiE  windmill  and  the  gnard-hoow  which  itand*  npon  the  bills  a 
qnarterofamile  north  of  Brdne  rimlet,  b^  sieering  with  Creche  point 
Opening  and  sbntting  with  Benrt  fort. 

Great  att^tion  shontd  be  paid  to  the  lead  wbea  appimtching  the 
Ghannel  between  the  Bassare  de  Baas  and  the  Yergoyer  from  the  north> 
ward,  for  the  northern  part  of  the  latter  thoal  presents  a  steep  projecting 
point  at  the  outer  edge  of  the  20-fathom  line  <^  soundings  approaching 
the  French  coast.  A  reesel  running  from  the  sonthward  through  this 
channel,  which  is  5  miles  wide  and  carries  a  depth  of  from  14  to  23 
fathoms,  will  avoid  the  Tergojer  b^  keeping  in  IS  to  16  fathoms  at 
low  water  thronghont  the  whole  length  of  the  channel,  allowing  for  the 
rise  and  fall  of  the  tide. 

Caution. — From  Si.  Quentin  point  the  coast  which  is  low  and 
bordered  by  ranges  of  sand  hills,  trends  N.E.  by  N.  5  miles  to  Ronlhiau- 
Yille  point,  the  sontbern  point  of  the  month  of  the  river  Autbie,  and  the 
only  objects  rising  above  the  sand  lulls  and  visible  in  clear  weather,  are 
the  toll  spire  of  St.  Quontio  chnrch  and  the  windmill  at  Soyons.  The 
intermediate  shore  ia  fronted  by  a  beach  which  dries  1^  miles  in  a  S.W, 
direction  from  St.  Qaentin,  and  W.S.W.,  one  mile  from  Boathiauville 
points,  between  which  the  beach  is  only  half  a  mile  wide.  Great  cantion 
is  necessary  not  to  be  cangbt  on  this  part  of  the  coast  with  strong  westeriy 
winds,  for  they  cause  a  high  sea  npon  the  shosl  bottom  extending  5  miles 
from  the  shore,  and  increase  the  speed  of  the  flood,  which  in  calm  weather 
runs  3  knots.  The  same  winds  also  decrease  the  rate  of  the  ebb,  and 
no  dependence  can  be  reckoned  upon  the  strength  of  Ibis  stream  to  assist 
in  clawing  off  the  coast. 

EMBOnCHUBE!  de  1*AUTHIE  is  comprised  between 
Boiithiaavill6>and  Hant-Banc  points,  which  bear  Tf.  by  E.  ^  E.  and  S.  by 
W.  ^  W.  from  each  other,  distant  2^  miles.  The  entrance  is  filled  with 
an  eoormons  accnmolation  of  sand  and  broken  shells,  which  dries  at  half 
tide,  and  at  low-water  springs  uncovers  1^  miles  westward  of  the  moridinn 
of  the  latter  point.  Bonthianville  point  is  covered  with  sand  hills,  and  tlie 
only  remarkable  object  near  it  is  a  guard-house  standing  amongst  the 
highest  hilts  at  about  2  cables  to  the  southward  of  the  point.  A  sand  bank, 
barely  covered  at  high-wafer  neaps,  joins  this  point  and  extends  in  a 
circnit  of  more  than  a  mile  between  the  bearings  of  N.N.W.  and  N.E. 
from  the  gnai-d-house.  A  similar  bank  surrounds  Haul- Banc  point;  and 
projects  n  mile  between  the  bearings  of  W.S.W.  and  S-S.E.  from  the  point, 
where  it  jcnns'  the  shore. 

The  channel  into  the  Authie  is  principally  kept  up  by  the  flood  stream 


126  CAPE  d'aKTUEB  to  cape  GRU-XIZ.  [csap.  m. 


wliich  wt*  in  vith  gre«t  rapiditj  until  the  banks  are  oorered.  Tbe 
I'Dtraac:  to  this  chaDZiei  lies  fjetwe^n  the  banks  ja«t  deccribed,  and  runs  in 
an  cafiterlj  direction  from  the  outer  edge  of  the  laods  as  far  as  the  northern 
Lank  of  llie  river,  at  one  mile  to  the  S.S.E.  of  Hant-Banc  point ;  it 
then,  after  roanding  the  north-ea^t  extreme  of  the  said  sand- bank  joining 
Itouthiauvilk'  poiut,  sabdividi-s  into  several  branches,  the  principal  of 
wliich  tura^  to  the  southward,  and  terminates  near  the  sonth  bank  of  the 
river  alxiut  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  gnard-hoase  on  RonthiaaTille 
fKiiut.  The  tide  rises  in  this  latter  part  of  the  channel  about  15  feet  at 
f«pring!<y  and  the  fi&hfrmen  say  that  in  case  of  emergencj  a  vessel  of  about 
9  or  10  fe(:t  draught  couhl  lie  placed  there  in  safety  ;  it  is  the  only  spot 
where  the  utrtL  is  tolerably  smooth  with  westerly  winds,  for  the  waves  are 
broken  by  the  high  bank  to  the  westward  of  it,  and  the  swell  only  reaches 
it  during  a  short  time  before  and  after  high  water. 

LIGHT* — Uaut-Banc  point  may  be  easily  recognised  by  day  by  its 
circular  white  lighthouse  and  guard-house  standing  near  it  on  the  sand- 
hi  11m,  which  are  sufficiently  high  to  be  seen  in  clear  weather  7  or  8  mUes 
distant.  Tlie  lighthouse  exhibits,  at  115  feet  above  high  vntet  &  Jijred 
white  light  varied  by  a  Jiash  every  six  seconds^  and  visible  firom  a  distance 
of  14  mili;s ;  it  is  not  visible  in  the  direction  of  N.  \  E.,  and  in  an  angle 
of  10^  8(K  towards  the  clock  of  the  Hospital,  and  also  disappears  on  ap- 
proaching  all  dangers  on  the  coast.  The  light  is  erected  principally  for  the 
j)uri>ose  of  pointing  out  at  night  to  the  fishermen  of  Berck  the  position  of 
the  beach  where  they  usually  haul  up  their  boats. 

A  Life  Boat  is  stationed  near  the  lighthouse. 

DireotionS. — The  mouth  of  the  river  Authie  is  dangerous  to  ap- 
proach, especially  with  westerly  winds,  on  account  of  the  flood  stream 
which  runs  into  it  with  great  rapidity,  and  might  draw  a  vessel  upon  the 
banks  where  she  would  become  a  total  wreck.  The  channel  is  marked  by 
Ikmicoub  for  the  use  of  small  fishing  vessels  of  about  5  feet  draught  belong- 
ing to  the  inhabitants  of  Groffliers,  but  they  are  not  sufficient  guides  for  a 
vessel  socking  to  cuter,  however  small  her  draught.  None  should,  indeed, 
attempt  the  entrance,  unless  under  charge  of  one  of  the  fishermen  of  Berck 
or  of  Groffliers,  who  alone  are  in  a  position  to  ascertain  the  changes  which 
may  take  place  in  the  channeL 

The  COAST  from  Haut-Banc  point  trends  N.N.E.  ^  E.  8  miles  to 
Touquot  point  at  the  entrance  of  the  river  Canche.  The  shore  is  low  and 
sandy,  and  bordered  by  a  range  of  sand-hills  of  moderate  height.  A  sandy 
boach,  half  a  mile  wide^  uncovers  at  the  foot  of  the  sand-hills,  and  joins 
the  accumulation  of  sand  which  obstructs  the  entrance  of  the  rivers 
Authie  and  Canche.    The  low  plain  adjoining  the  shore  extends  to  the 


cHAP.ni.]       EMBOUOHUBE  DE  LA  CANCHE.         127 

foot  of  the  hills^  3  or  4  miles  inland,  and  is  divided  in  its  length  into 
nearly  two  equal  parts  by  a  chain  of  sand-hills  much  higher  than  those 
bordering  the  beach,  and  which  may  be  seen  8  or  9  miles  distant  This 
chain  of  hills  may  be  confounded  with  those  bordering  the  beach,  although 
they  are  distant  1^  or  2  miles  to  the  eastward,  and  it  is  important  that 
this  mistake  should  not  occur  when  turning  to  windward  along  the  coast 
in  thick  weather  ;  for  in  standing  in-shore  a  vessel  might  ground  upon 
the  beach,  when  the  consequences  may  be  serious  should  the  sea  be  running 
high. 

The  objects  which  serve  to  recognise  this  part  of  the  coast  are  the 
windmills  of  Yerton  and  St.  Jossee,  standing  upon  the  hills  in  the  interior ; 
the  chain  of  sand-hills  just  described ;  the  light  tower  on  Haut-Banc  point, 
and  on  Touquet  point ;  the  five  guard-houses  standing  at  equal  distances 
on  the  sand-hills  along  the  coast,  and  the  church  tower  and  windmills  at 
Berck-sur-mer.  This  latter  tower  is  built  on  the  plain  E.  by  N.  1^  miles 
from  Haut-Banc  point,  and  is  an  excellent  landmark  ;  at  a  distance  it 
resembles  a  large  sloop  under  sail. 

The  inhabitants  of  Berck,  Cuque,  and  Merlimont,  fit  out  about  fiAy 
fishing  boats  of  2  to  9  tons  burden,  which  they  ground  without  fear  at  high 
water,  upon  that  part  of  the  beach  lying  close  to  the  northward  of  Haut- 
Banc  point. 

EMBOUCHURE  de  la  CANCHE,  caUed  by  the  local 
mariners  the  bay  of  Staples,  is  2  miles  wide  between  Touquet  and  Lomel 
points,  the  north  and  south  limits  of  the  entrance)  and  runs  3  miles  inland 
to  the  S.S.E.  Like  the  estuaries  of  the  Somme  and  the  Authie,  it  is  filled 
up  with  a  mass  of  sand  and  broken  shells,  which  is  left  dry  at  half  ebb,  and 
uncovers  at  low  water  as  far  as  1^  miles  outside  the  entrance.  The 
entrance  points  and  the  shores  of  the  river  are  formed  of  sand-hills  of 
moderate  height,  the  shapes  of  which  are  frequently  changed  by  westerly 
gales. 

From  Touquet  point,  the  south  shore  of  the  estuary  trends  in  a  S.E  by  S. 
direction  as  far  as  abreast  of  the  small  fishing  and  commercial  harbour  of 
Staples^  which  can  only  admit  vessels  of  small  draught,  and  consists  of 
grounding  berths  on  muddy  sand,  lying  between  the  passage  channel  and 
the  shore  on  the  north-west  side  of  the  town,  and  where  piles  have  been 
driven  for  mooring  vessels.  None  but  those  drawing  at  the  utmost  9  feet 
water  can  get  up  to  this  harbour  at  the  springs,  and  then  they  must  be 
conducted  by  pilots,  for  if  they  ground  upon  the  sides  of  the  channel  they 
run  the  risk  of  either  breaking  their  backs  or  upsetting.  The  north  shore 
is  low  and  winding,  between  Staples  and  Lomel  point  its  general  trend  is 
N.N.W. ;  the  two  shores  converge  towards  each  other,  and  the  river  abreast 
the  town  is  only  one  quarter  of  a  mile  wide. 


128  CAPE   D*ANTIFER  TO  CAPE  0BI8-KEZ.  [chjlp.iu. 

Hie  Mirf  and  westerly  winds  cmrrj  towards  the  month  of  the  Caodie 
the  sund  of  the  beach  south  of  Touquet  point,  and  heap  it  up  around  that 
point  where  it  forms  a  Iwnk,  the  top  <if  which  is  barelj  covered  at 
neaps,  and  which  extends  in  the  circuit  of  nearlj  a  mile  between  the 
bearings  of  N.N.W.  and  N.N.E.  from  the  point.  A  similar  bank  is 
formed  in  front  of  Lornel  point,  extending  a  mQe  in  a  WJS.W.  direction 
from  it,  and  it  is  between  these  banks  that  the  entrance  channel  is 
found  which  leads  into  the  river.  This  channel  is  maintained  by  the 
alternate  streams  of  floo<l  and  ebb,  which  are  very  rapid  during  the  whole 
time  the  banks  remains  uncovered,  but  the  rate  does  not  exceed  3  knots 
the  lost  hour  of  the  flood  and  the  first  hour  of  the  ebb.  During  westerly 
gales  the  sea  is  high  at  the  entrance,  and  the  waves  caused  by  a  strong 
S.W.  wind  cross  it  obliquely. 

The  entrance  channel,  from  the  outer  edge  of  the  banks,  runs  in  an 
easterly  direction  as  far  as  the  northern  point  of  the  bank  joining 
Touquet  point,  at  about  3  cables  from  the  north  shore  of  the  river  ;  and 
thence  it  subdivides  into  several  branches,  the  principal  of  which,  forming 
the  inner  channel,  runs  to  the  southward  along  the  eastern  edge  of  the 
Imnk  ;  then  after  following  the  south  shore  for  6  cables,  it  crosses  over 
and  follows  the  north  shore  as  far  as  Staples,  where  it  unites  with  the 
course  of  the  Canche,  which,  by  means  of  two  strong  breakwaters,  pro- 
jecting from  the  southern  shore,  has  been  made  to  pass  in  front  of  the 
houses  of  that  town. 

Buoys. — The  entrance  of  the  channel  into  the  Canche,.  from  the  outer 
part  of  the  banks,  is  pointed  out  by  a  red  bell  buoy  moored  off  it,  and 
from  thence  the  channel  up  to  !^taples  is  well  marked  by  red  and  block 
buoys  and  poles.  The  positions  of  the  buoys  are  changed  as  oflen  as  the 
channel  undergoes  any  variation,  which  frequently  occurs. 

LIGHTS. — ^Two  lighthouses,  273  yards  apart,  bearing  N.  by  E,  |  E. 
und  S.  by  W.  f  W.  of  each  other,  are  erected  on  Touquet  point,  to  mark 
the  position  of  the  dangerous  coast  on  which  they  stand  ;  they  each  exhibit 
a  fixed  white  light,  dioptric  and  of  the  first  order,  at  174  feet  above  high 
water  and  are  visible  in  clear  weather  20  miles.  Two  lights  are  also 
shown  from  lighthouses  erected  on  the  sand-hills  of  Camiers.  The  upper 
lighthouse  is  built  of  iron  and  painted  white,  and  exhibits  from  an  elevation 
of  121  feet  above  high  water  a  fixed  white  light,  which  is  visible  10  miles 
in  clear  weather.  The  lower  light  is  shown  from  a  white  square  stone 
tower,  and  exhibits  from  an  elevation  of  54  feet  above  high  water  a  fixed 
red  light.  It  bears  West,  southerly,  distant  800  yards  from  the  upper 
iight,  and  is  only  visible  within  an  arc  of  15  degrees  on  either  side  of  the 


CHU.III.]  XKBOUCHUAB  DE  LA  CAITCHB.  129 

line  of  dtrectioD;  it  is  onlf  liglited  when  tian  ia  ft  depth  of  kt  leut  6^ 
feet  water  in  the  channel.    It  is  visible  9  miles  in  dear  WMther. 

Directions' — -^t  night  the  heavy  sea  and  the  sand-hanks  at  the- 
month  of  the  river  Conche  wiU  be  avoided  by  keeping  ci^  Gris-Xes  light 
will  open  to  the  westward  of  cape  Alprech  light.  By  day  the  extremity 
of  cape  Gris-Nez  should  be  kept  about  half  a  point  open  to  the  weetw&nl 
of  cape  Alprech. 

Vessels  <^  more  than  10  foet  draught  shonld  never  attempt  to  ent«r  the 
mouth  of  the  Canche  without  a  pilot,  or  some  person  of  local  experience, 
unless  they  are  driven  into  it  by  bad  weather,  or  find  themselves  embayeil 
amongst  the|sand-bauk9.  The  pilots  reside  at  Staples,  and  as  it  is  impossible 
for  them  to  boai-d  vessels  outside  when  it  blows  hard  from  the  westward 
they  meet  them  under  shelter  of  the  bank  joining  Touquet  point. 

Small  vessels  without  pilots,  seeking  shelter,  should  endeavour  as  soon 
as  possible  to  get  sight  of  the  enter  red  bell  buoy,  and  it  is  important  not  to 
pass  to  the  northward  of  the  parallel  of  Touquet  point  before  it  is  sighte<I, 
for  if  they  are  set  to  the  northward  by  the  flood  stream,  which  continue!' 
at  its  greatest  strength  outside  the  bonks  at  the  time  of  high  water  at 
Etaples,  it  would  be  impossible  to  regain  the  entrance. 

The  most  favourable  moment  for  entering  the  Canuho  is  abont  one  hour 
before  high  water,  for  the  stream  then  runs  into  the  channel  with  sufficient 
strength  to  assist  a  vessel  in  threading  the  channel,  and  the  water  will 
rise  enough  to  float  her  should  she  take  the  ground  after  passing  the  red 
buoy.  Pass  between  the  black  and  red  buoys,  leaving  the  first  to  port  and 
the  latter  to  starboard.  The  pilots  place  vessels,  drawing  from  10  to  11 
feet  water,  at  the  springs  in  the  elbow  which  the  channel  forms  between 
the  three  first  poles  from  E.N.E.  to  E.S.E.  of  Touquet  point,  and  they  lie 
here  in  safety,  eveu  during  westerly  gales,  protected  by  the  liir;h  bank 
which  joins  Touquet  point,  and  which  dries  from  21  to  28  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  lowest  tides. 

Tides.— It;  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  the  month  of  the  CiuicIk' 
at  lib.  20m.,  and  the  tide  rises  in  the  channel  abreast  the  first  polo  (which 
stands  N.E.  4  cables  from  Touquet  point,  and  where  the  bottom  drie» 
12  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides),  from  17  to  18  feet  at  ordinary 
springs,  19  to  20  feet  at  equinoctial  springs,  and  abont  10  feet  at  neaps. 
At  Staples,  springs  rise  from  9  to  14^  feet  above  the  surface  of  the 
grounding  bertha,  which  dry  16  or  17  feet  above  ilie  game  level.  The 
flood  stream  does  not  check  the  cnrrent  of  the  Canche  until  about  3  hours 
after  the  tide  has  begun  to  rise  upon  the  outer  edge  of  the  sand  banks  at 


Q7049. 


130  CATE  D'xynnm  to  caps  cut-soz.       :<>»-■  m. 

Caution. — TIm  I:U>  cVfrnioa  of  tte  bad,  H  veil  w  tbe  I'lii^ui 
l/'.rl^-'?  tb«  tLcm,  nxJitr  tb«  langtfioa  e(  tL«  «aaM  fioraa  extent  of 
S-j  R.' W  from  Csreax  to  tfa«  inoMk  of  tke  Cache.  c^uumJt  d>a««niBs 
:-.  f'KCZj  ir  mtawj  wcstber,  or  inring  fcro^  vcKcrlr  nks  ftnoBpanied 
i/T  ra^D,  wVn  the  wmlKr  is  pmenOj  Umt^  ibe  bad  flonred  vhfa  mm, 
and  tLe  fluiflt  brillisst  Uffals  difiesk  to  diHiaguiih.  To  ihu  msT  be  added, 
[hat  with  lb«e  g«lM  a  few  boon  oiilr  rafice  lo  tsiw  a  hesTj  mk  in  ibe 
(-V'l«n]  part  of  tb«  Cbaoad,  and  efpeciaUr  npoa  ibe  v6^  of  the  ^reai 
•'ji.niariiie  elope  which  ^xteod*  from  the  shore  from  St.  y»lanr-4n-CMix 
to  ibe  riTer  Cancbe,  so  that  the  infloeiKe  of  the  nTei  abac  if  sufficient 
t'j  caoM  a  considerable  drift.  Betide  thij,  when  it  is  bonie  in  mind  that 
wetter  gftlea  tend  to  drire  the  water  towards  the  bottom  of  the  tnght 
formed  between  capea  Antifer  and  Giis-Nez,  and  greadv  inttnence  the 
direction  of  the  tidal  Btreama  f  noticed  in  p^e  141),  it  will  be  wen  how 
important  i(  ii,  that  a  ve^sd  should  not  mn  into  the  cnBtem  part  t^tbe 
Channd,  antil  ber  position  is  well  ascerlaioed  bj  bearings  of  cape  Barfleor 
light,  or  of  St.  Catberine  light  oa  the  sonth  point  of  the  Ide  of  1V)^  and 
of  using  ever;  precaution  after  these  lights  are  lost  sight  of. 

The  odIj  safe^inard  that  can  be  recoaunended  under  these  rirmmntanrTTT 
ii  the  frequent  use  of  the  lead,  and  to  keep  in  at  least  20  hthoms  water 
whatever  be  the  time  of  tide ;  this  will  not  00I7  armd  ttie  dangen  near 
the  shore,  but  also  the  banks  Ijing  betweeD  the  month  (tf  the  riTer  8omnie 
and  Dover  ChanneL 

The  COAST  from  Lomel  Point  trends  N.  bj  E.  }  E.  8|  miles  to 
cape  Alprech,  and  thence  N.E.  by  £,  2  j  miles  to  Boulogne.  The  shore, 
which  is  low  and  bordered  hj  sand  hills  of  moderate  height,  mns  in  a 
straight  line  from  the  month  of  the  Canche  to  the  Bnhne  rivnleL  Tliis 
rivulet  finds  its  way  into  the  sea  at  2  miles  to  the  soathward  of  the  capc^  and 
is  the  nortbem  limit  of  the  low  sandy  ^ore  forming  the  coast  during  an 
extent  of  34  miles  from  the  town  of  Ault  At  a  mile  to  the  nwlhwsrd  of 
the  rivulet  the  coast  has  but  little  elevation,  and  several  houses  of  the 
village  of  Equihen  may  be  seen  on  the  slopes  of  the  hills  ranning  down  to 
the  shore  ;  hut  beyond  this  the  couet  b  steep  and  formed  of  clay  and 
schistose  rocks  of  a  du-k  grey  colour. 

The  high  land  separating  the  courses  of  the  rivers  Canche  and  Liane 
«rtends  to  the  westward  to  within  \\  miles  of  the  coast,  and  terminates 
near  the  meridian  of  Staples  in  a  chain  of  hills,  many  of  which  are  of 
sufficient  elevation  to  be  seen  in  dear  weather  25  miles  distant.  These 
hills  are  excellent  landmarks  for  the  pilots  on  this  coast,  who  have  given 
them  the  name  of  terres  de  Tourmont,  or  Tourmont  land,  and  upon  the 
highest  am  the  windmill  of  Faux  and  of  Houlette,  which  are  visible  at  a 


oHiP.iii]  POETEL. — POET  DE  BOULOGKE.  131 

great  distance ;  the  former  atands  2\  miles  to  the  north-east,  and  the  latter 
4  milea  to  the  northward  of  £taplea. 

At  1^  miles  from  the  coast  and  2^  miles  to  the  northward  of  Hoalctte 
windmill,  in  front  of  the  Touimont  land,  is  Mont  St.  Frieox,  one  of  the 
most  remarkable  objects  between  the  river  Canche  and  Boulogne.  It 
is  composed  of  four  mounds  or  hillocks,  verj  near  each  other,  rising  ham 
tiie  same  base  and  occupying  a  space  of  1^  miles  north  and  south,  and 
from  its  isolated  position,  as  well  as  from  the  height  of  the  hillocks,  it  majr 
be  seea  in  clear  weather  at  the  same  distance  as  the  Tourmont  land. 

Upon  the  highest  of  the  hills  north  of  Brdne  rivulet  is  the  church  of 
St.  £lienne-aa-Mont  and  the  windmills  of  Gravois,  Alprecb,  Porte],  and 
Ontreau,  all  of  which  may  be  seen  a  considerable  distance  at  sea.  The 
sandf  beach,  which  extends  the  whole  length  of  this  part  of  the  coast  to 
near  cape  Alprech,  nncovera  at  low  water  half  a  mile  ont  &om  the  foot  of 
the  sand  hills,  but  north  of  Br&ne  rivnlet  the  shore  is  bordered  hj  a 
shelf  of  irregular  shaped  rocks  which  dry  a  cable  ontside  high-water 
mark. 

CAFE  d'ALFRECH  is  a  perpendicular  rocky  di^  of  a  brownish 
red  colour,  elevated  13S  feet  above  the  level  of  high  water  ;  the  foot  of 
the  cliff  is  skirted  by  a  shelf  of  rock  covered  with  booldera  which  dries  a 
cable  out  at  low  tide.  From  the  cape  the  coast  turns  sharply  to  the 
north-east,  and  is  high  and  steep-to  within  fiour  cables  of  the  jetties  at 
Boulogne.* 

LIGHT. — A  square  lighthouse  stands  on  the  summit  of  cape  Alprech, 
about  87  yards  from  the  edge  of  the  cliff,  near  the  tower  of  the  old 
eeroaphore, .  and  S.W.  2^  miles  trcta  the  entrance  to  Boulogne.  It 
aliibitB,  at  an  elevation  (^  161  feet  above  high  water,  a  ^xed  white  light, 
varied  every  two  mintitet  by  a  redJUuh,^  which  is  preceded  and  followed 
by  a  short  eclipse.  The  light  is  dioptric  and  of  the  third  order,  and  should 
be  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  10  miles. 

FORTEL. — The  coast  between  cape  Alprech  and  Boulogne  is  inter- 
sected by  valleys,  and  at  the  entrance  of  the  largest  is  the  village  of  Fortel. 
This  valley,  situated  6  cables  N.E,  by  E.  of  the  cape,  is  enclosed  by  high 
land,  and  on  the  summit  of  the  hill  on  its  north  side  stands  the  fortress  of 
Mont  Couple,  which,  in  1857,  was  in  a  State  of  dilapidation. 

The  rocks  which  uncover  at  low  water  extend  1  cables  into  the  offing 
from  Portel,  and  upon  their  summit  N.  by  E.  J  E.  about  half  a  mile  from 

■  Stt  Adminlt;  chart:— Nonh  coast  of  France,  sheet  XIV., Boulogne  to  Duokcrine, 
Ne.  a,S10;  scale  n=zO-S  of  an  inch. 

t  Attention  to  thii  rtdjia»h  vill  prevent  the  light  at  cape  Alprecb  for  being  mittalteo 
for  that  at  Beach;  Head. 


132  CAPE  D'a^TITEK  to  cafe  0RI8-XSZ.  [otkr.  m. 


cape  Alprech,  U  the  smM  fort  of  Heart,  Sunken  rocks,  iMuned  the 
Linear,  project  N.N.W.  2  cables  from  the  fort,  and  a  hearj  eea  rnns  opoa 
them  with  a  fresh  S.W.  wind ;  to  pass  to  the  westward  or  oataide  these 
rocks,  do  not  bring  the  light-tower  on  the  soath-west  jetty  at  Boakgne  to 
the  northward  of  £.  hj  N.  }  N. 

The  village  of  Portel  is  inhabited  bj  fi.«hermen,  who  ground  their  beats, 
aboat  40  in  number,  during  the  fine  season  on  the  south-west  side  of  a 
Hmall  beach  joining  the  sliore  in  front  of  the  village,  where  they  are  shel- 
tered during  the  greater  part  of  the  tide  bj  the  surrounding  rocks.  When 
the  weather  is  threateuing,  they  are  hauled  above  high- water  mark,  and 
placed  in  the  bed  of  a  small  rivulet  which  runs  in  the  valley ;  in  winter 
they  take  shelter  in  Boulogne  harbour. 

PORT  do  BOULOGNE,  occupying  the  entrance  of  the  valley 
of  the  Liane,  a  small  river  the  waters  of  which  are  abundant  during  the 
rainy  season  or  at  the  melting  of  the  snow,  will  admit  vessels  drawing 
17  or  18  feet  at  ordinary  springs,  when  the  sea  is  smooth,  19  to  20  feet 
at  equinoctial  springs  and  about  13  feet  at  ordinary  neaps.  It  consists 
of  an  entrance  channel  formed  between  two  jetties,  leading  to  a  tidal 
harbour  3^  cables  long  and  a  cable  wide,  which  is  partly  bordered  by 
stone  quays  and  communicates  on  its  west  side  with  a  semicircular  basin 
about  a  cable  wide.  There  is  also  a  floating  dock  (which  was  opened  in 
August  1868)  containing  a  superficial  area  of  17  acres,  with  a  quay  1,160 
yards  in  length.  The  dock  communicates  with  the  hai'bour  by  a  sluice 
69  feet  wide,  having  two  pairs  of  gates,  with  a  lock  between  them ;  the  lock 
is  109  yards  long,  and  its  depth  of  water  29  feet  at  springs,  and  23  feet  at 
neaps.  Sailing  vessels  should  not  attempt  to  enter  during  heavy  westerly 
gales,  and  steamers  run  great  risk,  on  account  of  the  heavy  sea  then  on  the 
bar ;  and  it  should  be  remembered  that  dui-ing  springs,  when  Boologne 
is  impracticable  Calais  can  be  entered,  and  the  contrary.  At  the  head  of 
the  harbour,  and  in  the  bed  of  the  river,  there  is  a  reservoir  of  water  for 
scouring  the  harbour  and  the  entrance  channel. 

The  general  trade  of  the  port  is  extensive.  In  1 868  the  number  of 
vessels  entered  inwards  from  foreign  ports  was  1,942,  of  323,343  tons ; 
and  1,967,  of  325,386  tons,  cleared  outwards.  The  principal  imports  are 
coaly  cast  iron,  steel,  wool,  machinery,  flax  and  tow,  cotton,  &c, ;  and  the 
exports,  clocks,  wine,  grain,  fruit  and  vegetables,  Parisian  articles,  &c.  Ac 
The  herring  and  mackerel  flsheries  employ  a  considerable  capital,  and 
several  vessels  are  fitted  out  for  the  Iceland  cod  fishery.  The  coasting 
trade  is  active,  and  there  is  constant  communication  by  steamers  Ivith 
London,  Hull,  Dover,  and  Folkstone.  The  population  of  the  town  in  1869 
was  40,251,  of  whom  about  one-fiflh  were  English. 


OHA^rUL]  PO&TSL. — ^POBT  DE  BOULOOyE.  133 

The  town  stands  on  the  east  side  of  the  harbour,  ami  is  hoik  in  tbo 
form  of  an  amphitheatre  al  the  bottom  and  on  the  ndet  o£  a  hmU 
valley  enclosed  between  high  hills.  The  buUdinga,  which  maj  be  recog- 
nised at  sea,  are  the  bell-tower  and  the  cupola  of  the  new  cathedral  in  the 
upper  town,  the  church  spire  in  the  lower  town,  the  marine  baths,  the 
windmill  half-way  up  the  hill  to  the  south-east  of  the  baths,  and  the  new 
church  of  St.  Pierre  des  Manns,  on  the  top  o£  the  cliff. 

Entrance  ChanneL — ^The  two  jetties  enclosing  the  channel  lea^ng 
to  the  harbour  are  of  unequal  length,  and  run  out  on  a  sandy  beach  which 
the  action  of  the  sea  hns  formed  in  front  of  the  valley,  and  which  nncovers 
half  a  mile  out  from  the  shore  at  the  lowest  tides.  The  channel  is  4  cables 
long  in  a  1^,W,  by  N.  and  S.E.  by  S.  direction,  and  200  feet  wide.  The 
sand  from  the  beach  outside  the  jetties  sometimes  spreads  itself  across  the 
entrance,  and  forms  a  sort  of  bar,  rising  2  feet  above  the  bottom  of  the 
channel  (which  with  the  beach  is  about  2  or  3  feet  alK>YC  the  level  of  the 
lowest  tides),  but  the  bar  is  soon  dispersed  by  the  scouring  water  or  by  a 
sudden  fresh  of  the  river. 

The  south-west  jetty  is  7 So  yards  long,  and  consists  of  a  stone  founda- 
tion, upon  which  is  a  wooden  framework  filled  in  and  planked  up  to  high- 
water  mark,  which  shelters  the  channel  from  the  high  sea  during  S.W. 
gales.  The  north-east  jetty,  547  yards  long,  runs  parallel  with  tlie  south- 
west jetty,  and  like  it  consists  of  a  stone  foundation  surmounted  by  an 
open  framework.  In  order  that  the  scouring  water  may  follow  the  course 
of  the  channel  beyond  the  south-west  jetty  head,  the  north-east  jetty  has 
been  extended  by  the  addition  of  a  low  breakwater,  600  yards  long,  com- 
posed of  rough  stonework  for  150  yards  firom  the  jetty  head,  and  continual 
in  strong  stake  work  the  remainder  of  its  length.  The  position  of  this 
breakwater,  the  top  of  which  is  from  3  to  9  feet  above  the  level  of  low 
water,  is  marked  by  two  black  buoys,  one  placed  near  its  outer  extremity 
at  1^  cables  from  the  outer  end  of  the  south-west  jetty,  and  the  otiier  about 
half  a  cable  farther  in. 

A  red  buoy  with  bell  and  reflector  is  moored  in  16  feet  water,  one  mile 
southward  of  Boulogne. 

Harbour. — ^The  north-east  jetty  is  joined  to  the  quays  of  Boulogne 
by  a  quay  along  which  are  placed  the  steam  vessels  that  perform  the  daily 
service  between  France  and  England.  The  bottom  at  the  foot  of  this  quay 
rises  6J  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides,  or  4  feet  above  that  of  the 
entrance  channel  between  the  jetty  heads ;  but  it  is  hard  and  not  fit  for 
sharp  laden  vessels  to  ground  upon  for  more  that  a  few  days.  At  high- 
water  ordinary  neaps,  those  drawing  from  12  to  13  feet  can  be  brought 
alongside  the  quay ;  vessels  of  larger  draught  lie  aground  there  for  four 


134  CAPE  D'aXTIFEE  to  cape  6RI8-KSZ.  [cttAP.ra; 

or  five  days.    There  is  a  slip-way  in  the  harbour  for  building  or  repairing 
small  vestelMy  and  a  careening  place  along  the  qoay,  joining  the  slip.* 

LIGHTS. — The  time  during  which  the  entrance  channel  is  practicable 
is  made  known  at  night  by  two  vertical  fixed  white  lights,  of  the  foarth 
order,  placed  outside  the  tower  (with  a  fog  bell  and  cross  jackyaid  on  its 
summit),  built  upon  the  south-west  jetty  head  ;  the  upper  ligiht  is  43  feet, 
and  the  lower  light  33  feet  above  the  level  of  high-water  springs,  and  both 
lights  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  9  miles.  A  rtd  light,  dioptric  and  of 
the  fourth  ortler,  is  exhibited  from  a  white  tower  situated  33  yards  from  the 
north-east  jetty  head  ;  it  is  46  feet  above  the  same  level,  and  visible  7  miles. 

The  upper  light  on  the  south-west  jetty  is  exhibited  as  soon  as  there  are 
9^  feet  water  in  the  entrance  channel,  and  the  lower  light  at  the  time  of 
high  water ;  both  lights  are  extinguished  when  the  water  falls  to  9^  feet. 

A  fixed  green  light  is  exhibited  at  an  elevation  of  33  feet,  from  a  mast 
on  the  extremity  of  the  north-east  jetty.  During  the  day  a  ball  is 
exhibited. 

The  green  and  red  lights  in  line  show  the  direction  of  stone  foundation, 
close  to  the  north-east  jetty. 

Pilots  are  unable  to  go  out  at  Boulogne  when  the  wind  blows  upon 
the  coast  and  the  sea  is  high  at  the  entrance  ;  but  either  a  pilot  or  the 
lighthouse  keeper  directs,  from  the  top  of  the  lighthouse  on  the  south- 
west jetty,  the  course  to  be  steered  by  waiving  his  hat.  Should  there 
be  several  vessels  running  for  the  harbour,  the  signal  is  for  the  vessel 
nearest  the  entrance.  If  the  sea  be  too  heavy  to  enter  the  channel,  they 
should  bear  up  for  Calais,  for,  as  before  stated,  when  Boulogne  harbour  is 
impracticable  on  account  of  the  high  sea,  that  of  Calais  can  be  entered, 
and  the  contrary. 

Lifo  BOAts. — There  are  thi*ee  life  boats  stationed  near  the  marine 
baths  at  Boulogne,  furnished  with  every  requisite  for  assisting  vessels  in 
danger,  and  several  watchmen  are  constantly  on  duty. 

RADE  de  BOULOGNE. — Good  anchorage  will  be  found  in  about 
4 1  fathoms  at  low  water,  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  outside  the  pier 
heads  at  Boulogne,  on  a  narrow  strip  of  hard  clay  about  7  cables  long,  in 
a  north  and  south  direction,  and  a  cable  broad.  This  bottom  is  bounded 
on  its  west  side  by  the  rocky  bottom  called  Vhuitritre  or  oyster  bed,  which 
begins  at  cape  Alprech  and  extends  without  interruption  to  the  northward 
as  far  as  the  parallel  of  Ambleteuse. 

The  best  anchorage,  over  good  holdiiig  ground,  is  between  the  lines 
on  which  the  colonnade  of  he  new  cathedral  is  seen  in  one  with  the 
guard-house  of  Ch^tillon  battery,  which  stands  on  the  sand-hills  a  little 


*  New  harbour  ir  course  of  construction,  18S1. 


CHAP,  in.]  BADE  SE  B0UL06NE.  135 

to  the  Boatbward  of  the  gontb-weet  jetty ;  the  fort  on  Mont  Lambert  in  line 
witb  the  belfry  tower  in  the  upper  town ;  and  S.W.  |t  S.  from  the  amall 
fort  at  Ambleteuse.  VeBsels  of  moderate  diBugbt  waiting  tide  for  eevenil 
days  to  enter  Boulogne  may  remain  at  this  anchorage  during  moderate 
winds,  and  even  if  caught  there  by  a  strong  westerly  wind,  if  they  ride 
with  a  long  scope  uf  cable  ont  f  those  of  large  draught  would  be  in  danger 
of  striking  the  bottom  at  low  water. 

Vessels  ftrrivlng  oft  the  harbour  some  time  before  high  water  can 
anchor  in  the  southern  part  of  the  road,  with  the  column  of  the  Grande- 
Aim4e  in  line  with  the  light- tower  on  the  soutb-weet  jetty,  and  Heurt  fort 
open  about  a  degree  to  the  Westward  of  the  slope  of  the  cliff  at  cape 
Alprech. 

Directions. — The  principal  objects  recognised  when  approaching 
Boulogne  are,  Mont  St.  Frieux  (noticed  in  page  131),  Mont  Lambert, 
1^  miles  to  the  eastward,  and  the  column  of  the  Grande*Ann£e  a 
mile  to  the  northward  of  the  town.  The  entrance  to  the  harbour  bears 
N.W.  J  W.  fh>m  the  summit  of  Mont  Lambert,  and  W.  ^  S.  from  the 
column ;  the  former  is  1,903  feet,  and  the  head  of  the  statue  on  the  column 
1,469  feet  above  the  level  of  low  water. 

From  the  Westward. — Vessels  approaching  Boulogne  fi-om  the 
westward,  witb  the  wind  between  South  and  West,  should  take  the  channel 
between  the  Bassure  de  Baas  and  the  Vergoyer  banks,  and  if  they  arrive  at 
the  time  of  low  water  on  the  parallel  of  Mont  St.  Frieuz,  short  tacks  shoulii 
be  made  in  the  channel  between  that  parallel  and  the  line  on  which  the 
column  of  the  Graade-Arm^e  is  in  line  with  the  light-tower  on  the  aonth- 
west  jetty.  If  the  wind  is  between  South  and  East,  the  channel  between. 
the  Bassure  de  Baas  and  the  shore  should  be  taken,  and  short  boards  made 
to  the  southward  of  the  line  of  tbe  column  and  the  light-tower  in  line, 
until  the  tide  baa  risen ;  or  if  the  weather  will  permit  they  can  anchor  in 
Boulogne  road. 

Vessels  of  the  largest  draught  may  at  all  times  cross  over  that  part  of 
the  Bassure  de  Baaa  fronting  Boulogne.  One  of  the  deepest  spots  lies 
with  the  column  of  the  Grande-Arm^e  in  line  with  the  light-tower  on  Ihe 
Bonth-west  jetty  bearing  E.  }  N. 

From  the  Northward. — With  the  wind  between  North  and  West 
Teisele  bonnd  to  Boulogne  from  the  northward  should  pass  to  the 
westward  of  the  Bassure  de  Baas,  and  if  the  wind  is  fresh  they  can  wait 
outside  this  bank  until  the  time  is  favourable  for  entering  ;  but  with  a  light 
wind  the  bank  should  be  crossed  on  the  parallel  of  Cr^he  fort,  and  a 
position  maintained  a  short  distance  to  the  windward  cf  the  entrance. 
If  the  wind  is  between  Uorih  and  East,  it  will  be  better  to  take  the  channel 
between  the  Bassure  de  Baas  and  the  land,  and  anchor,  if  the  weather 


1S6  C.VPE  D  A>'nFEn  TO  CAPS  ORIS-NEZ.  [au».iit 

|tcnnit,  in  m  poshioo  no  ki  to  hftTe  th*  wind  m  potatvr  two  ft«e  &r  mwiBg 
in(o  ibi>  cotnnoe.  Tlie  high  land  in  the  vidoitj  of  Boologne  nodifiM 
tlio  direction  of  the  wind  in  the  harboar,  wod  loiiMtinm  wiirai  it  is  S.8.W. 
auti*id«  it  ta  South  or  S.S.E.  within,  Stnmg  wisda  froni  the  N.E.  come  o£ 
in  violoDt  8()iiaI18  from  the  hind  to  the  northwud  of  the  harbonr, 

A  resae)  8hould  endea^'our  to  enter  the  hubour  during  the  lut  hoor  of 
the  flood,  which  will  ai^iiat  her  being  trndicd  in.  With  »  fresh  leading 
wind,  fhe  ma;  tie  nbtc  to  stem  the  flrBt  hour  of  the  ebb,  end  even  the 
IresheB  of  the  riv<>r  Lianc,  and  got  up  to  the  berths  at  the  stockade  if  she 
iino  n  pufllcient  numhor  of  haulers  to  track  her  in.  But  wfaatever  may 
l>c  the  Htivug^h  lUiJ  ilirtclioii  of  tbo  wind,  all  pouible  sail  ehoald  be 
I'lii'i'icd  nil  i-tiiering  the  olmimil,  to  Ktcm  the  eddj  which  ruus  between 
till'  ji-tty  hvaila  (is  soon  as  the  flood  stream  outside  has  attained  its 
gri'HteHt  Mtrenglh,  whieli  is  near  the  time  of  high  water  in  the 
lijirbuur.  This  eddy,  after  doubling;  the  north-east  jetty  liead,  dividee 
into  two  ]Nii1s,  Olio  iwrt  entering  the  channel,  and  the  other  crossing  it 
rapidly  towiirdi  ilie  south-west  jetty  liead ;  it  must  be  guarded  against  when 
the  wind  is  light,  and  when  it  blows  out  of  the  harbour  a  boat  should 
Ikj  Huiii  for  tin'  trucking  rope.  Generally  ppeaking,  when  the  wind 
in  Ixtween  Wt'st,  round  southerly,  and  N.E.,  steer  close  to  the  south-west 
jelly  head;  with  a  frcxh  wind  from  the  opposite  quarter,  keep  in  mid- 
eluimiel;  and  in  light  winds  steer  for  the  south-west  jetty  to  take  in  the 
trneking  roi>e. 

Should  the  TCMsel  with  a  strong  West  wind  miss  the  entrance,  and  there 
be  no  hojM!  of  elnwing  off  the  land,  endeavonr  to  pass  close  round  the  norA 
Hide  of  the  north-eant  jetty,  so  as  to  run  her  osliore  close  to  the  jet^.  If  this 
occurs  at  half  or  three -quarters  of  an  hour  after  high-water,  there  will  be 
some  chance  of  getting  lier  afloat  again,  but  at  all  events  the  crew  will  be 
savcil. 

Anchorage. — Vessels  arriving  off  Boulogne  during  the  neaps 
and  unable  from  their  draught  to  go  in,  may,  if  the  weather  be  floe,  anohor 
in  about  10  fathoms  over  good  holding  ground,  at  the  eastern  edge  of  the 
Baasure  do  Baas,  abreattt  Vimoreaux.  Should  they  be  surprised  hare  faj 
strong  ff.E.  winds,  tbey  can  make  for  Ambleteuse  road,  or  if  a  S.W.  gale 
should  oblige  them  to  seek  for  refuge,  they  can  either  run  for  the  Downs 
or  take  shelter  to  leeward  of  the  coast  in  the  neighbourhood  of  Calaia. 

Tides  and  Tidal  Signals.*— it  is  high  wat«r,    fnU  and 

change,  in  port  Boulogne  at  llh.  26.,  springs  rise  25  feet;  neaps  Ift^  &ek 
and  the  tide  rises  above  the  berths  at  the  foot  of  the  sieam-veRsel  nweji, 
(whidi  are  4  feet  above  the  bottom  of  the  entrfuioe  channel  hetwe^i.tfaf 
jetty  heads,  or  6^  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides,)  21  foet  at 
•  For  d«7  tidal  aignals,  tte  page  3,  and  for  night  tidal  signilc,  we  page  134, 


ORAF.  m.]BAI>B  BE  BOUIiOQlTB. — TrOES  AND  TIDAIi  8IGKALS.  13? 

ordinaiy  aptingi^  88  feet  at  great  springfl,  and  13|  foot  tt  the  lowest  nMpa ; 
■t  ordisAry  neaps  vesBCla  of  about  18  feat  dranglit  can  ba  brought  to  tbe 
berths. 

Strong  -westerlj  mnia  tuew  the  tide  a  foot  or  two  higher,  and  those 
from  the  watwRid  hare  a  contrary  effect,  bat  no  greater  rise  than  that 
given  above  should  be  allowed,  as  sometimes  it  will  be  neeessary  to  cross 
a  boT  at  the  entrance.  An  allowance  mast  also  be  made  for  tbe  scend  uf 
tbe  eeo,  which  runs  high  at  the  entrance  when  it  blows  fresh  &om  the 
westward.  The  tide  is  slack  at  high-water  springs  for  about  20  minutes 
with  westerly,  aad  15  minates  with  easterly  winds,  and  vessels  can  be 
moved  in  the  barbonr  daring  one  hour  oud  a  half;  at  ne^is  the  alaoic 
conlinnes  about  40  minutes. 

At  Z  miles  to  the  westward  of  Boulogne,  ontside  the  Baesure  de  Baas, 
the  flood  stream  begins  to  acquire  its  greatest  strength  at  the  time  of 
high  water  in  the  harbour,  maint^ns  it  foe  about  2  hoars,  and  ceases 
at  3j  hours  after  high  water.  At  a  short  distance  outside  the  jetty  heads 
its  greatest  strength  is  at  the  time  of  high  water  in  the  harbour,  and  it 
ceases  at  2J  hours  after  that  period.  The  eddies  occasioned  on  the  flood 
by  the  great  projection  of  the  south-west  jetty  from  the  shore,  are  very 
strong  as  soon  as  the  beach  to  the  soulhvrard  of  the  entrance  is  covered. 
These  eddies  extend  into  the  bay  to  the  northward  of  the  north-east  jetty, 
and  about  the  time  of  high  water  in  the  harbour  they  form  a  counter- 
stream  along  the  face  of  that  jetty ;  this  stream  runs  to  the  S.W.  and 
after  rounding  the  jet^  head  divides  into  two  parts,  one  of  which  enters 
&e  channel,  whilst  the.othercn»WB  it  rapidly  towards  the  south-weet  jetty 
head. 

The  system  of  tidal  signals,  noticed  Jn  page  S,  is  used  at  Ihts  port 

ASFECTof  COAST.— Ci^be  point,  bearmgN.M.l!:.^E.limUe3 
from  the  south-west  jetty  head  at  Boulogne,  is,  as  well  as  the  intermediate 
coast,  high  and  steep,  and  forms  the  west  extreme  of  arange  of  hills  separating 
the  valley  of  Ae  Liane  fh>m  that  watered  by  tbe  rJver  Wimille,  and  on 
one  of  Aeir  highest  points  stands  the  column  of  the  Crronde-Arm^.  A 
cable  N.W.  of  the  steep  cM  is  the  small  fort  of  Creche,  built  on  the 
nx^s  at  tbe  foot  of  the  poinL 

•  ^nie  coast  continues  steep  for  nearly  a  mile  ihim  Cr^he  point,  but 
thence  to  Vimerenx,  it  is  bordered  by  high  sand-hills.  At  three-quarters 
of  amile  to  tiie  N.E.  of  Ofiche  fort,  and  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the 
shore,  is  «  small  semi  circular  fort  named  Cro'i  tower,  with  two  tiers  of 
gnae,  bnUt  upon  the  rocks  at  50  feet  above  the  level  of  the  beach. 

From  Vimerenx  to  Oies  pdnt,  which  bears  NJE,  by  N.  2  miles  from 
CvAofae  point,  -  the  coast  is  steep,  but  thence  to  Audrecelles  village, 
2  miles  fiirther  to  the  northward,  it  is  bordered  by  sand-hills  of  middling 


CHAP,  m]     POET  DE  VIMBBETIX.— POET  d'aUBLETEUSE.      189 

PORT  d'Alff BLETETJSE,  the  entnuice  to  which   ia  a  inil«  to 

the  DortbwaFd  of  Oies  point,  is,  like  that  of  Vimennx,  in  s  complete 
sute  of  ruin,  and  conld  with  difficulty  otkr  a  redige  to  amall  coacters 
which  have  missed  Boolc^e  and  find  it  impossiblo  to  weather  cape 
Grris-Nes  through  a  sudden  chango  oi  wind  to  the  northward.  The  har- 
bour, to  which  great  improvementa  were  made  at  the  begioning  of  the 
present  contuiy,  was  formed  at  the  mouth  of  the  little  river  Selack.  The 
rnios  of  a  stone  jetty  head,  and  some  piles  in  the  north-weat  part  of  ihe 
harboar,  still  mark  the  outline  of  a  liaein  in  which  the  vessels  of  the  flotilla 
were  placed,  hot  it  is  now  filled  with  sand  and  mud,  ami  there  are  onlj 
4  feet  water  in  at  springs. 

RA.DE  d*A]ff  BLETEUSE  is  comprisei)  in  the  space  between  the 
BasGure  de  Baas  and  the  coast,  and  extends  from  the  parallel  of  Vimereux 
to  that  of  Andrecelles.  Yessels  of  large  draught  bound  to  the  northern 
ports  in  the  Channel,  or  to  those  of  Calais  or  Dunkerque,  await  the 
spring  tides  in  this  road,  if  they  arrive  during  the  neape  with  Dortherl}' 
winds,  and  it  affords  shelter  in  gales  between  K.E.  round  easterly,  and 
South ;  the  sea  is,  however,  very  heavy  here  when  it  blows  strong  oa  a 
weather  tide. 

AncllOragB. — ihe  best  anchoring  ground  is  from  the  parallel  of 
Vimereux  to  the  line  on  which  the  church  towers  of  Ambleteuse  and 
Bazinghen  are  in  one,  bearing  E.  ^  N.,  and  a  little  in-shore  of  the  rocky 
ground  limiting  the  anchorage  ofl^Boulogne  to  the  westward,  and  continues 
to  the  northward  as  far  as  the  parallel  of  Ambleteuse,  large  vessels,  by 
not  anchoring  to  the  eastward  of  the  line  of  the  small  tower  of  La  S«nard, 
(which  stands  a  mile  to  the  south-east  of  Fortel),  in  one  with  the  light- 
tower  on  the  south-west  jetty  at  Boulogne,  S.  ]  W.,  will  be  in  a  good 
position  to  weigh  should  it  blow  strong  from  the  westward. 

A  good  berth  for  a  vessel  rf  large  draught  is  to  the  N.W.  by  W.  of 
Vimerenx,  with  Ije  Renord  tower  open  abont  a  quarter  of  a  point  to  the 
westward  of  the  Ught-tower  on  the  south-west  jetty,  in  about  H  fathom:^  over 
hard  muddy  clay;  or  tn  9  fathoms  over  good  holding  ground  of  muddy 
BUid,  with  the  light-tower  and  Le  Renard  tower  in  line,  and  Bazinghen 
chnrch  tower  open  a  little  to  the  northward  of  the  Ambleteuse  fort,  K.  ^  N. 
Large  merchant  vessels  can  anchor  in  7  fathoms  over  hard  sand  and  broken 
shells  on  the  latter  bearing,  and  the  column  of  the  Grande-Arm^  in  line 
with  Croi  fort. 

The  space  between  the  eastern  edge  of  the  Bassure  de  Booa  and  the 
rocky  bottom  which  bounds  the  anchon^e  in  Ambleteuse  road  is  named 
the  Farfondiogue  by  the  Boulogne  pilots,  who  state  that  should  ships  of 
the  largest  draught  require  to  remain  several  days  in  the  road,  they 
would  place  them  in  that  part  of  the  Parfondingue  between  the  line  on 


1  M>  CAPB  D*ASTIFEB  TO  CAPK  ORIS-KEZ.  [«"•.  ni. 

w&^rh  ibf  ovlumn  of  the  Grande-Ann^  is  in  one  with  the  soutbem  slope 
ff  tVvbe  poioi,  anil  the  line  on  which  Buiagen  tower  is  in  one 
with  Ambleteuje  fort,  uid  that  here  they  would  hare  sufficient  room 
to  weigh  sod  xonnd  cape  Gris-Kn  if  it  came  on  to  blow  strong  from  Hie 
$.%V.;  or,  if  it  shifted  to  the  West  or  N.W.  the  crest  of  the  bank  would 
shelter  them  from  the  hcft^ysea.  To  ride  oat  a  gale  thej  should  be  moored 
with  open  hawse  to  the  westward,  and  their  nnchora  laid  oat  with  a  long 
■cope  of  cable  to  the  N.E.  anil  S.W.  in  the  direction  of  tho  flood  and  ebb 


Tid08< — At  equinoctial  springs  the  rate  of  the  flood  stream  is  from  3^ 
to  4  kDots  abreast  Ambletfiuse,  and  in  ordinary  weather  this  rate  continnee 
nearly  2)  hours  ;  the  stream  follows  nearly  the  direction  of  the  channel, 
and  ends  about  3|  hours  after  the  time  of  high  water  at  Boulogne.  The 
ebb  is  less  rapid,  continues  longer,  and  ends  2^  hours  before  high  water. 
The  winds  have  great  influence  on  both  streams, 

CAFE  GBIS-NEZ  Uese^  miles  to  the  northward  of  Bonlogne,and 
from  it  cape  Alprech  bears  S.S.W.  |W.  lO^  miles ;  Dnngenms  N.W.b.W.  J  W. 
23imiles[  South  Foreland  N.  ^  W.  17}  miles;  and  Beachy  Head  W. }  N. 
50  miles.  This  cape,  167  feet  high,  is  one  of  the  most  remarkable 
headlands  on  the  northern  coast  of  France,  and  is  visible  in  clear  weather 
at  14  or  15  miles;  from  it  the  coast  changes  its  direction  abmptly  to  the 
eastward,  and  the  precipitons  rocky  cti^  in  which  it  terminates,  as  well 
as  the  clifls  to  the  southward  and  to  the  eastward,  are  of  a  dark  grey 
colour  and  take  a  purple  tint  when  lighted  up  by  the  sun.  A  lighthouse 
is  built  on  the  south-west  extreme  of  a  small  spot  of  level  land  crowning 
the  cape,  and  some  works  of  defence  may  be  seen  rising  above  the  same 
level  land,  imd  a  guard-honse  at  ita  extremity  near  the  crest  of  the  cliff, 
Lai^e  masses  of  rock  lie  at  the  foot  of  the  cape,  sod  a  rocky  shelf  partij 
covered  with  sand,  dries  at  low  water  a  quarter  of  a  mile  out  from  the 
cliffs ;  the  ciipe  should  therefore  be  given  a  berth  of  at  least  3  caUes  when 
rounding  it  at  that  time  of  tide. 

An  antomatic  (self-acting  whistle)  bnoy,  punted  red  and  black  in  htn^- 
zontsl  stripei^  is  moored  about  2^  miles  S.W.  }  S.  of  the  cape. 

IflOHT. — The  ligbthouee  on  cape  Gris-NeK  is  erected  a  quarter  ot  a 
mile  to  the  southward  of  the  aqte,  about  100  yards  from  the  edge  of  the 
e^S,  and  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  226  feet  above  high  water,  a  white 
revolving  light,  the  eclipses  of  which  succeed  each  other  every  AalfrKittuti. 
The  light  is  electric,  of  the  first  order,  and  visible  in  clear  weather 
22  miles;  the  ^ipses  are  not  t<^  in  ordinary  weather  within  the  distutce 
of  12  miles.    In  shore  k  fainter  light  will  be  visible. 

Note. — ^This  light  cannot  be  mistaken  for  the  light  at  Calais,  which  is 
Taried  every  four  mitmtei  by  a  /SemA,  preceded  and  followed  by  short 


i 


OBAr.nLj  PAS  JJfE  0AXAI8. — TIDES.  HI 

eclipses ;  nor  tor  that  at  oape  Alprech,  vhicb  Is  varied  evay  two  McmifM 
by  a  redjlath, 

FAS  de  CALAIS.~The  narrowest  part  of  this  cluumel  is  0  miles 
wide  between  the  Ridge  or  Colbart  shoal  and  cape  Gris-Xez;  thence 
it  runs  parallel  to  the  coaat  as  far  as  Boulogne,  and  then  in  a  W^W. 
direction  between  the  ^Baeeurelle  and  the  Vergoyer.  With  easterlj' 
windd,  it  is  to  be  preferred  to  Dover  channel,  between  the  Vame 
and  the  English  shore ;  it  is  also  wider  and  deeper,  and  forms  what  is 
called  the  continuation  of  the  deep  sounding  channel  in  the  North  Sea, 
where  the  depth  at  low  water  is  above  20  fathoms.  It  is  easily  navigated 
by  the  lead,  either  with  a  leading  or  beating  wind,  even  during  fog  or 
snow,  the  only  danger  being  the  uorlhem  end  of  the  Ridge,  which  rises 
abruptly  from  the  depth  of  20  fathoms. 

A  vessel  turning  to  windward  in  the  Pas  de  Calais,  either  by  day 
or  night,  when  north  of  the  parallel  of  cape  Gria-Nez,  should,  when 
standing  to  the  westward,  not  bring  the  South  Foreland  lighthouses 
to  the  eaatwMd  of  N.  by  E.  J  E.  to  avoid  the  north  end  of  the  Ridge  ; 
and  when  south  of  that  parallel,  not  go  into  less  than  20  fathoms  at  low 
water. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  on  the  beach  a  little  to  the 
eastward  of  cape  Gris-Nez  at  llh.  27m.,  ordinary  springs  rise  21^  feet, 
great  springs  27  feet,  neaps  16|  feet.  Within  a  circuit  of  2  miles  around 
the  cape  the  streams  run  stronger  than  at  a  greater  distance  from  the 
shore;  the  flood  beginning  2  hours  before,  an4  ending  3|  hours  after  the 
time  of  high  water  at  Boulogne,  and  running  when  at  its  greatest  strength, 
4  knots  at  ordinary  springs.  Between  the  lUdge  and  the  shore  the  flood 
stream  runs  with  much  greater  strength  than  the  ebb. 

The  tidal  streams  in  the  northern  part  of  the  English  Channel  are  of 
the  same  duration  as  in  the  bay  of  the  Seine,  the  flood  running  about 
5h.  40m.,  and  the  ebb  6h.  50m.  Towards  the  middle  of  the  Channel 
the  streams  run  straight  through  its  length,  until  they  have  attained  their 
greatest  strength,  when  they  follow  the  bends  of  the  coast  to  a  distance  of 
7  miles  in  the  offing.  Within  these  limits,  as  soon  as  the  flood  stream 
begins  to  be  felt,  it  turns  towards  the  shore,  but  as  its  strength  increases, 
it  tends  more  to  its  principal  direction,  which  is  that  which  it  follows 
when  at  its  greatest  strength,  and  which  it  retains  for  the  greatest  length 
of  time ;  when  its  rate  begins  to  decrease,  it  turns  off-shore  and  takes 
different  directions  till  the  end  of  the  tide.  The  ebb  stream  runs  with 
less  velocity  and  undergoes  the  same  change,  but  with  this  difference,  that 
it  directs  itself  towards  every  point  of  the  compass.  The  rate  of  both 
streams  increases  in  proportion  to  the  narrowing  of  the  Channel,  and  in 


142 


CAPE  D*AXTIPER  TO  CAPE   GBI8-NEZ.  [chap.  in. 


the  chanueli  between  the  banks  thk  rale  U  increwed  from  half  ebb  to 
half  flood. 

Caution. — ^The  deep  elbow  formed  on  the  coast  of  Franoe,  between 
capes  Antifer  and  Gris-Nez,  constrains  the  flood  stream  in  fine  weather  to 
change  its  course  about  the  meridian  of  Aillj  point  and  to  tarn  to 
E.  by  N.  in  an  oblique  direction  to  the  coast  between  the  rirer  Somme 
and  the  Utter  cape ;  but  with  strong  westerlj  winds  it  runs  much  farther 
to  the  eastward  and  turns  suddenly  a  short  distance  from  the  shore, 
causing  a  high  sea.  Vessels  bound  from  the  westward  to  the  ports  in  the 
northern  part  of  the  Channel  cannot  be  too  attentive  to  the  effects  of  this 
stream  when  they  are  running  with  a  strong  westerly  wind,  and  as  soon 
as  they  have  made  out  either  cape  Barflenr  light  or  that  on  St.  Catherine 
point,  they  should  proceed  with  great  caution,  to  avoid  being  set  over 
on  the  French  coast,  and  sound  frequently  after  passing  the  meridian 
of  cape  Antifer,  for,  if  they  take  the  ground  npon  any  of  the  banks  off 
the  Somme  or  upon  the  shore  of  the  low  coast  in  its  vicinity,  it  may 
involve  the  loss  of  the  vessel  and  crew. 


Table  showing  the  DirectioD  and  B«t«  o£  the  Tidal  Streams,  during 
ordinary  Springs,  from  Cape  Antifer  to  Cape  Gris-Nei. 

Time  with 
menaea  to 
EiftbWkterBt 

DlepP' 


K-N-T.  T  milei  Irom  C»pe  AntilW. 


EJT.B. 
W.bjK.    . 


V.R  tw  B.  i  B.  IS  milea  Irom  CbIM 


ir,B.byB 
Anttfer. 


K.W,  1^  V.  H  mllei  from  Meppe 


K.H.T.  1)  mllBi  trom  Trtport 


V.  br  H.  lA  nilM  from  Haut  Bmk; 
— ^  on  the  g."   -- ■  -'  "-- 


Bud  of  ebb  • 
Tlood    • 


Haut  Banc  pofnt. 


On  tbe  Baunrelle  Bank 


Bmlofgbb  - 
Flood    ■ 


End  or  ebb  • 

Flood    ■ 


i   EObeiore 


I  Mbeiare 

1  to  before 

1  Maftet 

■i  M      , 

I  t»be/ore 


B.  br  B.  t  s. 

West  - 

B-bra. 
■ff.byN. 

B.)8. 
■W.  bj  N. 

B-byB. 
B.  Uj  S, 
N.H.  by  N. 
North 
IT.bjW 
l-W.  IB. 


)    SDan«r 

1    SO      . 

i  «)    ~ 


..S.bjV.. 
B.byN. 


N.W.  b;  v.  H  mllca  Irom  flia  en- 


D  the  nutli  end  (^  flie  Bidgs 


On  the  top  of  Vame  ihoal 


End  or  ebb  • 

Flood   • 

Ebb      • 
End  of  ebb 

Flood    - 

Ed3  of  flood 
Bhb  •  - 
End  el  ebb  - 

Flood   • 
En3  or  flood' 


B.  by  N.. 
8.W,  by  8.  - 


A"- 


_  • ' 


,« 


144 


CHAPTER  IV. 

CAPE  GRIS-NEZ  TO  DUNKBBQUB. 


VARIATION  IX  1882. 

CapeGns-Nez      -  -  -  -     17M0' W. 

Dunkerque  -  -  -  -     17°    C  W. 


The  COAST  fi"om  cape  Gris-Nez  trends  E.  by  N.  ^  N.  6  mUea  to  cape 
Blanc-Nez,  the  intermediate  laud  is  high  and  may  be  seen  iu  cleai* 
weather  from  15  to  20  miles  off ;  but  beyond  the  latter  cape  the  shore 
bends  more  to  the  eastward,  the  high  laud  turns  in  a  south-east  direction 
towards  the  interior,  and  a  level  plain  extends  from  its  foot  to  the  coast 
where  it  terminates  in  a  low  sandy  shore  bordered  by  ranges  of  sand-hills, 
the  liighest  of  which  are  visible  only  7  to  10  miles  off.  Between  the 
capes  the  shore  forms  a  slight  elbow,  at  the  bottom  of  which  is  the  village 
of  Wissant,  inhabited  by  fishermen.  From  about  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of 
ca{>o  Gris-Nez,  where  the  cliffs  of  that  cape  terminate,  to  1^^  miles  to  the 
north-cast  of  Wissant,  where  the  steep  cliffs  recommence,  the  coast  is  low 
and  l)ordered  by  sand-hills.* 

Cape  Blanc-Nez  owes  its  name  to  the  high  chalk  cliff  in  which  it  termi- 
nates. It  forms  no  marked  projection,  but  its  position  may  be  recognized 
A*om  a  good  distance  at  sea  by  the  guard-house  built  on  the  summit  of  the 
steep  mound  which  crowns  it,  and  which  is  the  northern  extremity  of  a 
range  of  hills  joining  Mont  Couple.  The  last  slopes  of  the  high  land 
forming  the  cape,  as  well  as  the  steep  coast  in  which  they  terminate 
extend  1^  miles  to  the  eastward,  nearly  as  far  as  the  village  of  Sangatte^ 
and  at  this  village  commences  the  low  sandy  shore,  which  forms  the 
remaining  part  of  the  Fi^ench  coast.  The  sand-hills  are  low  to  within 
1  i  miles  of  Sangatte,  but  they  gradually  rise  in  elevation  as  they  approach 
Calais,  spreading  into  several  parallel  ranges  which  approach  within  2  or 
3  cables  of  the  shore. 

The  principal  objects  on  this  part  of  the  coast  are  the  windmills  of 
Coquelles,  which  stand  about  2  miles  inland  upon  the  last  slopes  of  the 


♦  See  Admiralty  charts  : — ^Dover  strait,  No.  1,895 ;  scale  m=0'68  of  an  inch  :  North 
sea,  sheet  1,  No.  1,046 ;  scale,  m  »  0*3  of  an  inch  :  and  north  coast  of  France,  sheet  xiy.> 
Boulogne  to  Dunkerque,  No.  2,610 ;  scale,  m  =>  0*5  of  an  inch. 


«ip.  IV.  THE  COAST. — BANC  1  LA  LIGNE.  145 

range  of  hills  extending  to  tLe  easlward  of  c&pe  JJlanc-Nez ;  the  wind- 
mill at  Baa  or  Nieulaj,  to  the  northward  of  these  ;  the  rod  buildings  at 
Trouio  or  ihe  Salines,  sitnated  about  halO-way  between  Snagatle  and 
Calais,  N.N.E.  J  E,  from  Coquclles  windmills,  and  are  usofiil  marks  to  the 
pilots,  who  call  tiiem  les  inaisona  rouges  or  ihe  red  hous*>s  ;  and  the 
mmparts  and  citadel  of  Calais,  which  rise  above  tbe  sond-hills,  and  may 
be  seen  a  considerable  distance  at  sea. 

The  beacli  in  front  of  Eiangatte  is  only  a  quarter  of  a  mile  wide  at  low 
water,  but  near  the  west  jetty  at  Calais  it  drives  out  hal^  a  mile,  \yitbin 
a  quarter  of  a  mile  of  the  beach  there  are  several  shoal  patches  of  7  and 
7  feet,  and  no  vessel  should  get  amongst  them  at  low  tide. 

Banc  h  la  Ligne. — The  great  prominence  of  cape  Grls-Nez,  and  the 
sudden  change  there  in  the  direction  of  the  coast  occasions  an  extensive 
eddy  to  the  north-east  of  it  during  the  flood.  This  eddy  has  no  doubt 
caused  the  formation  of  this  bank  of  sand  and  broken  shells,  which  extends 
E.N.E.  4  miles  from  the  cape,  and  nearly  2  miles  from  the  shore  abreast 
Wissant.  Its  shoalest  part  uncovers  at  low-water  springs,  and  towards  its 
north  east  extreme  several  heaps  of  sand,  named  La  Barri^re,  have  been 
formed,  upon  the  highest  of  which  are  only  4  to  9  feet  water;  the  sea 
runs  high  upon  them  when  it  blows  fresh  on  a  weather  tide.  The  Eouth- 
west  end  of  the  bank  appears  to  be  gradually  joining  itself  to  the  cape, 
there  being  only  a  depth  of  4  feet  in  the  channel  at  low  water.  The 
Barriere  has  a  buoy  moored  one  quarter  of  a  mile  north  of  the  4-feet  patch. 

Les  Gardes. — ^^^  shore  between  cape  Grls-I^eE  and  BIanc>Xez  ia 
bordered  by  a  sandy  beach,  uncovering  in  some  places  4  cables  out  at  low 
water.  In  front  of  all  the  steep  parts  of  the  coaat  there  are  rocks  rising 
from  the  sand,  and  amongst  them  and  farthest  from  tbe  shore  are  those 
named  the  Gardes,  which  uncover  7  feet  at  the  lowest  tides  ;  from  their 
outer  extreme  Wissant  church  tower  bears  S.W.  by  S.  2  miles  and  the 
gnard'house  on  cape  Blanc-Nez  E.  by  N.  nearly  1^  miles. 

Les  Quenoos  and  Le  Rouge  Rlden.  —  A  rocky  bottom, 

joining  the  shore  and  partly  covered  with  sand,  extends  from  the  Gardes  to 
Sangatte  village  and  2  miles  into  the  offing  between  the  bearings  of  N.N.W. 
and  E.N.E.  of  capo  Blanc-Nez,  and  its  shoalest  part  forms  two  distinct 
dangerous  flats  of  irregular  rock  a. 

The  western  flat,  named  the  Quenoca,  ia  about  half  a  mile  in  diameter, 
and  from  its  sho.ilcst  head  of  7  feet  the  guard-houae  on  cape  Blanc-Kez 
bears  S.  by  E.  J  E.  about  IJ  miles,  and  Sangatte  church  tower  E.  by 
S.  j  S.  2\  miles.  A  buoy  is  moored  one-third  of  a  mile  to  the  northward 
of  the  7-feet  patch. 

Tbe  second  flat,  named  Rouge  Riden,  is  nearer  the  shore,  and  nearly  a 
mile  in  extent  fi-om  W.S.VT.  to  E.N.E.;  from  its  shoalest  head  of  7  feet  the 
above  guard-houao  bears  South  one  mile,  A  shonl  head  of  !>  feet  also  lies 
Q  7049.  K 


lAG  CAPE   GRIS-NEZ  TO  DUNKERQUE.  [chap.  it. 

on  tho  oastom  edge  of  this  riat,  witli  tho  ^uard-house  bearing  S.S.W.  J  W. 
l^  milcjt,  and  tho  church  tower  E.S.K.  1 4  miles.  The  sea  runs  high  on 
both  flats  when  blowing  fresh  on  a  weather  tide.  Sangatte  church  tower 
seen  l)otween  the  two  windmills  at  Coquelles,  bearing  S.E.  J  S.,  leads  half 
a  mile  to  tho  noithwnrd  of  the  Rouge  Hiden. 

Le  Hiden  de  Calais. — This  bank,  4  miles  long  in  a  N.E.  by  E.  and 
8.W.  by  W.  direction,  commences  N.  by  E.  1 J  miles  from  Sangatte,  and 
ends  N.  ^  E.  about  2^  miles  from  the  entrance  to  Calais.  The  general 
depth  on  it  varies  from  5  to  8  fathoms,  with  three  heaps  of  sand  towards 
its  centre,  upon  tho  shoalest  parts  of  which  there  are  only  18  to  22  feet 
water ;  from  the  southern  shoal  head  with  18  feet  on  it,  the  entrance  to 
Calais  l)ears  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.  «3  miles.  The  Riden  is  dangerous  at  low  water 
for  vessels  of  hirge  draught ;  it  also  occasions  strong  eddies,  and  during  fresh 
northerly  winds  there  is  a  heavy  sea  on  it,  and  breakers  in  N.E.  gales. 

Two  buoys  mark  this  danger,  viz.,  the  S.W.  buoy,  black,  with  staff  and 
diagonal  cross,  and  marked  No.  1,  lies  in  10  fathoms,  with  Calais  lighthouse 
E.S.E.,  Sangatte  church  S.  by  E.  ^  E.  1^  miles  distant,  and  the  southern 
patch  of  18  feet  on  the  Riden  E.  by  N.  1^  miles  ;  and  the  N.E.  buoy,  red 
and  marked  No.  6,  with  staff  and  ball  in  10  fathoms,  with  Walde  lighthouse 
S.E.  i  E.,  and  Calais  lighthouse  S.  ^  W. 

LeS  BIDENS  de  la  BADE,  also  named  the  Tetes,  lie  N.N.W. 
one  mile  from  Calais  pier-heads,  and  when  this  coast  was  surveyed  in  1836, 
they  consisted  of  several  heaps  of  sand,  upon  the  highest  of  which  were 
4  fathoms  at  low  water.  Since  that  period  they  have  been  sensibly  on 
the  increase,  and  in  1857  there  were  only  2  fathoms  over  the  highest 
head.  Another  head,  with  only  1^  fathoms  on  it,  and  on  which  the  fishing 
boats  sometimes  ground,  lies  about  half  a  mile  to  the  N.E.  of  the  extremity 
of  the  east  jetty,  A  heavy  sea  runs  upon  them  when  the  wind  blows  upon 
the  shore.* 

BADE  de  CALAIS,  comprised  between  the  Riden  de  Calais  and 
the  beach  to  the  westward  of  Cabiis  harbour,  affords  anchorage  with  off- 
shore winds  to  vessels  arriving  off  the  harbour  a  few  hours  before  the  tide 
will  permit  them  to  enter.  A  convenient  position,  in  about  9  fathoms  water 
at  one  mile  from  the  shore,  with  Sangatte  church  tower  in  line  with  the 
guard-house  on  cape  Blanc-Nez,  bearing  W.S.AV.,  and  Calais  lighthouse  S.E. 
^  E.  At  night,  keep  cape  Gris-Nez  light  opening  and  shutting  with  the 
cliffs  at  cape  Blanc-Nez,  and  anchor  when  Calais  light  bears  S.E.  ^  E. 
The  road  carries  a  depth  of  from  10  to  14  fathoms  towards  the  Riden  de 
Calais,  and  7  to  9  fathoms  at  half  a  mile  from  the  steep  edge  of  the  beach, 
over  a  sandy  bottom  mixed  with  broken  shells ;  but  the  pilots  say  that  the 


*  On  the  Admiralty  plan  of  Calais,  No.  2,556,  published  in  1882,  on  the  authority  of 
the  most  recent  French  Government  survey,  Les  Bidens  de  la  Bade  do  not  appear. 


CHAP.  IV.]       LE   EIDBN  DE  CALAIS. — PORT  DE   CALAIS.  117 

anchors  penetrate  into  a  good  holdinf;  groaod  beoeaih  the  sand,  and  that 
ahipB  of  the  largest  draught  have  rode  out  a  N.W.  gale  without  dririog 
under  the  southern  part  of  the  Riden.  The  holding  ground  is  not  so  good 
near  the  shore. 

The  road  is  sheltered  by  the  land  from  W.S.W.  round  stiuthcrly,  to  S.E^ 
but  it  is  quite  open  to  all  other  points  of  the  compass.  The  Ridon  cannot 
be  considered  as  a  shelter,  although  the  wares  break  with  great  riolencc 
during  a  northerly  gale  on  its  whole  extent ;  the  sea,  however,  is  much 
quieter  here'  than  in  the  ofiiog,  and  a  vessel  with  good  ground  tackling 
might  ride  out  a  gale  in  the  northern  part  of  the  road. 

PORT  de  CALAIS.— This  port,  the  entrance  to  which  is  between 
two  wooden  jetties,  consists  of  a  tidal  harbour  and  a  small  basin  named 
Faradis,  which  dries  at  low  water  ;  a  floating  basin  onder  the  ramparts  of 
the  citadel,  in  which  the  largest  vessels  that  can  enter  the  harbour  lie  afloat ; 
and  a  reservoir  containing  the  scouring  water.  The  entrance  lies 
11^  miles  to  the  eastward  of  cape  Gris-Nez  ;  S.E.  21^  miles  from  Dover, 
and  S.E.  ^  S.  20  miles  from  the  South  Foreland.  Vessels  of  aboat  20  feet 
draught  can  enter  the  harbour  at  high-water  ordinary  springs,  in  fine  weather 
when  the  sea  is  smooth,  and  of  IS  feet  at  ordinary  neaps ;  but  those  seeking 
to  enter  during  northerly  winds,  when  the  sea  ia  not  too  high  at  the 
entrance,  should  not  attempt  it  if  they  are  above  17  feet  at  springs  or  above 
12^  feet  at  neaps.  The  average  depth  on  the  bar  at  the  lowest  tides  is 
about  5  feet,  and  7  to  8  feet  at  the  neaps,  but  it  varies  with  the  wind,* 

With  W.S.W.  gales,  which  render  the  navigation  of  the  English  Channel 
so  dangerous,  the  tide  will  rise  a  foot  or  two  higher;  and  it  should  be 
remembered  that  during  springs,  when  it  blows  strong  between  West  and 
South,  and  Boulc^e  is  impracticable,  Caltus  can  be  entered ;  on  the  con- 
trary, when  it  blows  bard  between  North  and  E.N.E.,  and  it  ia  impoaeiblc 
to  enter  Calais,  Boulogne  can  be  entered. 

Calais  has  some  foreign,  and  a  brisk  coasting  trade,  and  the  vessels 
belonging  to  the  port  are  chiefly  employed  in  the  herring  and  mnckrrol 
fisheries.  In  1869  the  population  was  12,727.  The  imports  arc  salt,oohn 
oil,  fish,  coal,  cordage,  rails,  cast  iron,  wood,  woollens,  cottons,  ninchiticiy, 
&C,  8ec.  i  the  exports,  wines,  silks,  Parisian  goods,  perfumery,  Ac,  Ac. 
The  English  and  French  mails  cross  the  channel  between  Dover  and 
Ci^s,  the  distance  being  accomplished,  under  ordinary  circumstances,  in 
1}  hours. 

The  entrance  channel  is  about  263  feet  wide,  and  runs  6  cables  in  a 

S.S.E.  i  E.  direction  from  the  entrance,  between  jetties  lenglhonod  ont 

807  feet  by  open  pilework,  which  is  crossed,  as  well  as  that  part  of  the 

channel  it  encloses,  by  the  flood  and  ebb  streams.     This  arrnngemont  pro- 

•  See  Admiraltj  plan  of  Calais,  No.  2,556 1  acalo  m  -  5  iacliei. 

K   2 


lis  CAPE   GRIS-XEZ   TO   DUKKEEQrX.  [chxp.iv 

%cntH  the  sand  from  aocuiiiulnting  in  front  of  the  entmnce,  but  it  is  i 
SiTiouR  inronvenicnce  to  vcss<*ls  entorin<j  or  leaving  at  high  water,  as  the 
stream  out^i^le  is  then  ninnin;?  at  its  greatest  strength. 

The  harbour  Ix'gins  where  the  east  jetty  joins  the  wall  of  the  quay  at 
the  (a.^teru  [wirt  of  the  town.  This  wall  eontinucs  along  the  whole  length 
of  tin'  harbour,  except  whero  it  is  intorrnpted  by  the  entrance  to  the 
Paradis  basin,  and  by  the  sluico  of  the  citadel  ditch.  The  quays  are 
H|)aei()u<«,  their  surface  )>cing  27  feet  above  low  water.  That  part  between 
the  Paradis  basin  and  the  oast  jetty,  named  the  Courgain  of  Colonne  quay, 
is  where  vessels  that  arrive  after  high  water,  or  those  preparing  to  quit  the 
haibour,  are  placed,  and  about  one  half  of  the  quay  between  the  entitince 
to  this  basin  and  the  citadel  sluice  is  reservwl  for  the  mail  and  passage 
steamers;  the  other  half  is  given  up  to  merchant  vessels.  There  is  a 
careening  slip  in  the  harbour,  and  a  large  crane,  which  may  be  used  for 
masting. 

The  Floating  basin  has  a  surface  of  20,000  square  yards,  with  590  yards 
extent  of  quays.  The  entrance  between  the  gates  is  54  feet  wide,  and 
their  sill  is  3  feet  2  inches  above  the  lowest  tides.  Both  the  harbour  and 
floating  basin  are  well  sheltered  from  wind  and  sea ;  a  swell,  however, 
runs  into  the  entrance  channel,  the  harbour,  and  the  Paradis  basin  from 
half  flood  to  half  ebb  when  it  blows  strong  from  the  northward,  and 
vessels  that  are  then  alongside  Colonne  quay  strike  heavily  upon  a  hard 
shingle  bottom. 

New  docks  are  in  progress  ;  also  a  large  reservoir  on  the  sands  east  of 
Calais  pier,  which  will  be  filled  each  tide  and  discharged  at  low  water 
through  a  sluice  situated  near  the  pier  head,  in  such  a  volume  as  it  is 
calculated  will  wash  away  the  bar  outside  and  maintain  a  deep  channel. 
(1878.) 

Life  BO&tS. — There  is  a  life-preserving  apparatus  at  Calais,  and  two 
life  boats  ;  one  stationed  on  the  east,  the  other  on  the  west  side  of  the 
harbour. 

LIGHTS.— Calais  Lighthouse,  octagonal  and  167  feet  high, 
stands  in  one  of  the  angles  of  the  fortifications  at  the  north-east  side 
of  the  town,  and  exhibits,  at  190  feet  above  high  water,  a  fixed  white 
light  vaiied  every  four  minutes  by  a  \iv\^t  flashy  preceded  and  followed  by 
short  eclipses,  which  are  not  tx>tal  in  ordinary  weather  within  12  miles. 
The  light  is  dioptric  and  of  the  first  order,  and  visible  in  clear  weather  20 
miles. 

East  Jetty.— A  fixed  white  light  39  feet  high  and  visible  9 
miles  is  exhibited  from  a  turret  at  the  extremity  of  the  east  jetty.  This 
light  is  accompanied  by  two  small  fixed  red  lights  to  indicate  the  depth  of 
water  in  the  channel. 


CHAP.  IV.]  POET  DE   CALAIS. — LIGHTS.  149 

Tidal  Signals. — The  white  light  alone  indicates  a  depth  of  10 
feet  water  throughout  the  whole  length  of  the  chancel;  a  red  light 
be\ow  the  white  indicates  n  depth  of  13  feet;  a  red  light  above  the 
white  indicates  a  depth  of  16|  feet,  and  the  three  lights  together  a  depth 
of  19i  feet. 

West  Jetty. — -i  ^xed  red  light,  elevated  23  feet,  is  shown  at 
the  extremity  of  the  west  jetty,  and  is  Tiaible  4  milea  distant ;  but  it  is 
essential  (o  observe  that  during  severe  weather  all  access  to  this  jetty  head 
is  Eometimes  cut  off. 

Fog  Signal. — A  bell  is  sounded  in  foggy  weather  from  the  tnrret 
on  the  East  Jetty. 

Directions. — As  a  gdnend  rule,  cape  Blanc-Nez  shonld  be 
siglited  when  bound  either  to  Ca'ais,  Gravelines,  or  Dunkerque.  The 
most  favourable  winds  for  entering  Calais  harbour  are  those  from  W.S.W., 
rouud  northerly,  to  East.  When  those  that  blow  upon  the  coast  are 
moderate,  they  only  cause  a  heavy  swell  on  the  beach,  but  strong  winds 
send  in  a  heavy  sea,  and  it  is  then  dangerous  to  enter.  Under  these 
circums lances,  which  a-e  frequent  in  winter,  vessels  bound  for  the  northern 
ports  of  France  shonld  immrdiately  run  for  Boulogne, 

'Vessels  rnnning  for  Calais  from  the  south-west  should  when  on  the 
parallel  of  and  about  a  mile  from  cape  Gris-Nez,  steer  about  N.E.  by  E.  J  E., 
taking  care  not  to  bring  the  extremity  of  the  cape  to  the  westward  of 
S.W.  by  W.  in  oi-der  to  keep  outside  the  Ban'iere  and  the  Quenocs  rocks; 
when  Sangatte  chnrch-lower  is  in  line  with  the  Coquelles  windmills, 
hearing  S.E.  ^  S.  steer  E.S.E.  for  the  centre  of  Calais,  until  Audinghen 
church-tower  is  hid  behind  the  cliff  at  cape  BlaQC-Nee,  when,  if  there  is 
water  sufficient  to  enter  the  harbour,  a  course  should  be  shaped  for  the 
entrance  ;  if  not,  an  anchoi-age  should  be  sought  for  in  the  southern  part 
of  Calais  road. 

The  largest  vessels  that  the  harbour  will  admit  may  pass  at  all  times 
of  tide  between  the  Quenocs  and  the  Barrifere,  by  keeping  Sangatte 
church-tower  in  line  with  either  of  the  three  towers  of  Calais ;  they 
may  also  pass  between  the  Rouge  Riden  and  the  shore,  from  half  flood 
to  half  ebb. 

At  Night  cape  Gris-Kez  light  should  not  be  brought  to  the  westward 
of  S.W.  by  W.  to  avoid  the  Barriere  and  the  Quenocs,  and  when  Calais 
light  bears  E.S.E.,  steer  E.  by  S. ;  then,  if  the  ebb  is'  running,  anchor  as 
soon  as  cape  Gris-Kez  light  is  about  to  bo  hid  behind  the  cliff  at  cape 
Blanc- Nez. 

From  tlie  Northward. — Vessels  coming  from  the  northward  with 
a  fresh  fiur  wind,  may,  between  a  third  flood  and  two-thirds  ebb  in  Calais 
harbour,  run  either  by  day  or  night  directly  for  the  entrance  over  the 


*  i* 


150  CAPE   GRIS-NEZ  TO  BUKKEBQUE.  [chaf.it 

Riden  de  Calain,  as  there  in  eulBcieot  depth  on  that  ahoal  at  the  time  of 
tide.  If  late  on  the  ehb,  i*uu  on  the  meridian  of  cape  Blanc-Nez  until 
Sangatte  church-tower  is  in  a  line  with  the  Coquelles  windmiUa,  SJ£.  \  S., 
then  steer,  if  the  weather  be  favourable,  for  the  anchorage  in  the  southern 
part  of  Calais  road. 

At  Night  ^teer  for  Calais  light  on  an  E.S.E.  bearing,  until  Cape  Gris- 
No2  light  bears  W.S.W.,  then  steer  E.  \  S.  until  Cape  Gria-Nez  light  is 
ju?t  hid  behind  cape  Blanc-Nez,  when  anchor,  if  the  ebb  be  running,  or  if 
the  fioo<l,  Bteer  for  the  harbour. 

Entering  the  Harbour. — The  most  favourable  time  for  entering 
Calais  liarl)our,  when  the  wind  blows  upon  the  coast,  is  at  the  moment  of 
high  water;  but  with  the  wind  abeam  or  ahead,  at  half  or  three-quarters 
of  an  hour  before  that  period,  so  as  to  have  time  to  be  tracked  up  to 
the  quays,  or  into  the  floating  basin.  It  should,  however,  be  borne  in 
mind  that  during  calm  weather,  at  half  a  mile  outside  the  entrance, 
the  flood  stream  continues  to  be  felt  2^  or  3  hours,  and  with  strong 
westerly  winds  4^  and  5  hours  after  high  water  in  the  harbour,  and  it 
is  at  its  greatest  strength  at  the  time  of  high  water  there.  For  this 
reason,  whatever  the  direction  of  the  wind,  the  end  of  the  west  jetty 
should  be  steered  for,  to  avoid  being  set  to  the  eastward  of  the  entrance, 
and  this  precaution  is  particularly  necessary  when  standing  for  the 
harbour  on  the  starboard  tack;  the  bower  anchor  and  a  stem  anchor 
should  then  be  ready  for  letting  go,  and  hawsers  to  run  out  in  the 
event  of  being  drifted  on  the  east  jetty.  All  sail  should  be  carried,  espe- 
cially with  the  wind  right  aft,  to  stem  the  flood  and  to  pass  quickly  through 
the  swell  at  the  entrance.  Should  a  vessel  with  a  strong  westerly  vrind 
and  without  a  pilot  miss  the  entrance,  she  must  anchor  immediately,  as 
near  as  possible  to  the  end  of  the  east  jetty,  and  take  in  a  pilot,  whose 
assistance  will  then  be  indispensable. 

Vessels  may  get  out  of  the  harbour  and  gain  an  offing  with  a  head  wind, 
by  making  sail  from  the  end  of  the  west  jetty  on  a  weather  tide. 

Tides  and  Tidal  Signals.*— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change, 
in  Calais  harbour  at  lib.  49m.;  springs  rise  19^  feet;  neaps  15^  feet 
above  the  water  in  the  entrance  channel,  ordinary  springs  rise  20  feet, 
equinoctial  springs  22  feet,  and  ordinary  neaps  16  feet.  The  tides  rise 
higher  with  strong  winds  from  N.W.  to  W.S.W.  than  they  do  with  those 
from  East  to  S.S.E. 

The  depth  of  water  at  the  quai  de  Maree  alongside  the  east  jetty  is  at 
high-water  springs,  31  feet  2  inches ;  at  low  water,  10  feet  5  inches.     At 


*  For  day  tidal  signals,  Bee  page  3,  and  for  night  tidal  signals  see  pp.  148  and  149. 


CHAP.  lY.]    POET  DE  CALAIS. — TIDES  AND  TIDAL  SIGNALS.     151 

quHi  Commwce,  at  bigh-water  springs,  22  feet  5  iDChes ;  at  low  water, 
1  foot  7  incheB. 

The  mean  duration  of  the  flood  stream  at  springs  in  front  of  the 
eotrance  is  5^  houi?,  and  of  the  ebb  7^  hours.  At  half  a  mile  outside  the 
piera  the  flood  runs  2^  or  3  hours  after  high  water  la  the  harbour,  and 
with  strong  westerly  winds,  4J  or  5  hours ;  with  easterly  winds  it  con- 
tinuea  only  IJ  or  2  hours.  The  rate  of  the  flood  at  great  epringa  is 
4^  knots.  The  slack  at  high-water  springs  continues  about  20  minutes, 
and  large  Tes,^eiB  can  be  mored  ia  the  harbour  during  the  space  of  IJ 
hours ;  at  neeps  the  time  of  slack  often  amounts  to  three-quarters  of  an 

The  tidal  signals  are  the  same  as  those  noticed  in  page  3,  with  this 
exception,  that  the  flags  are  hoisted  when  there  are  8  feet  water  at  the 
jetty  heads,  instead  of  6^  feet,  and  lowered  as  soon  as  the  water  has  fallen 
to  that  level. 

BANES  off  the  NORTH  COAST  of  FRANCE.-The 
approach  to  this  low,  dangerous  coast  is  obstructed  by  numerous  banks, 
composed  of  gray  and  black  sand,  which  extend  as  far  as  15  miles  from 
the  shore  on  the  meridian  of  Calais,  and  42  miles  in  a  N.E.  direction  &om 
Dunkerquc.  Their  shoalest  spots  may  be  touched  upon  by  vessels  of 
almost  any  draught,  and  the  eddies  they  occaaion  cause  a  hollow  sea,  and 
the  waves  break  upon  them  when  it  blows  strong.  Those  farthest  from 
the  land  lie  on  the  eastern  limit  of  the  20-fatbom  line  of  soundings,  which 
fbrm  in  the  southern  part  of  the  North  Sea,  the  deep,  known  as  the  deep- 
soundings  channel,  which  begins  at  Dover  strait,  and  ends  at  about  lat. 
53°20'N. 

The  bonks  are  all  steep  to  on  their  inshoro  edge,  and  spread  in  a  gentle 
slope  towards  the  offing,  and  as  they  rise  from  the  submarine  bank,  com- 
posed of  sand,  gravel,  and  broken  shells,  joining  the  shore,  and  upon  which 
there  are  less  Uian  20  fathoms  at  low  water,  a  simple  method  is  aSbrded 
to  avoid  getting  amongst  them  by  not  going  into  less  than  that  depth  at 
that  time  of  tide.  The  lights  at  cape  Gris-Nez  and  Calais  are  in  a  good 
position  to  point  out  at  night  their  western  limit;  and  the  revolving  light 
at  Dunkerque,  seen  in  clear  weather  25  mile^,  will  give  notice  of  approach 
to  the  greater  part  of  them.  The  dangers  in  the  navigation  along  the 
shore  can  only  be  avoided  by  placing  the  vessel  under  charge  of  a  good 
pilot ;  but  generally  speaking,  none  of  the  banks  should  be  approached 
except  a  vessel  is  bound  for  one  of  the  harbours  on  the  coast. 

These  banks  are  divided  into  two  groups ;  those  nearest  the  shore  being 
named  the  Dunkerque  banks,  whilst  others  lying  some  distance  from  the 
coast  were  not  well  known  until  the  late  Captain  W.  Hewett,  B.N.,  sur- 
veyed them  in  H3I,S.  Fairy  between  1831-1840. 


I 


152  CAPE   GRIS-NEZ  TO  DUNKERQUE.  [chap,  iv, 

DUNKEBQUE  BANKS,  eleven  in  number,  extend  15  milea 
from  the  coa»t  between  the  meridians  of  Calais  and  the  frontier  of  Belgium. 
Th(.Mr  names  arc,  the  Sandettie  ;  the  Out  Ruytingen  ;  the  In  Ruytingen  ; 
the  Bergues ;  the  i)yck,  the  north-east  part  of  which  is  called  the  Cliff- 
d'lshmdc  or  East  CHf;  the  In  Ratel ;  the  Out  Ratel;  the  Ilaut-fond  de 
Gravel ines ;  the  Breed t ;  the  Smal  ;  and  the  bank  which  bounds  Don- 
kerque  road  to  the  northward,  and  which  is  composed  of  several  parts 
united  together,  named,  Snouw,  Braeck,  Hils,  and  Traepegeer.  The  other 
banks,  six  in  numl)er,  lying  to  the  northward  of  the  Dunkerque  banks,  are, 
the  Fairy  ;  the  North  Hinder ;  the  West  Hinder ;  the  East  Hinder ;  the 
Bligh,  and  the  Thornton  Ridge. 

SAND£TTl£  (in  Flemish  the  Zand-detie,  called  also  the  Ourting 
by  the  mariners  on  this  coast),  the  most  western  of  the  Dunkerque 
banks,  is  about  12  miles  long,  in  an  E.  by  N.  and  W.  by  S.  direction,  its 
breadth  varying  from  4  to  9  cables.  Its  -south  and  south-east  edges 
are  steep-to,  having  19  to  20  fathoms  water  at  less  than  half  a  cable 
from  the  southern  edge,  but  its  slope  is  more  gradual  towards  the  north- 
west, and  this  side  may  easily  be  avoided  by  the  lead. 

There  are  two  shallow  flats  on  this  bank,  over  which  it  would  be  dan- 
gerous to  pass  in  bad  weather.  The  northern  flat,  with  only  21  feet 
water  on  it,  lies  N.N.W.  |  W.  18  miles  from  Dunkerque  lighthouse,  and 
N.E.  f  N.  from  that  at  Calais ;  and  the  southern  flat,  on  which  there  are 
only  20  feet,  lies  W.  by  S.  3 J  miles  from  the  northern  flat;  N.W.  ^  N. 
from  Dunkerque  lighthouse,  and  N.N.E.  J  E.  from  that  at  Calais. 
Besides  these  flats,  there  are  other  heaps  of  sand,  with  21  to  25  feet 
on  them,  spreading  1^  miles  in  a  W.  by  S.  direction  from  the  southern 
flat ;  but  the  depths  vary  from  31  to  46  feet  upon  the  other  parts  of  the 
bank. 

The  Sandetti6,  rising  suddenly  from  the  bottom,  causes  strong  ripplings, 
and  when  it  blows  fresh  the  sea  ia  heavy  around  it,  and  breaks  upon  the 
shoal  flats.  From  the  south-west  end  of  the  bank,  which  is  steep-to,  in 
8  fathoms  at  low  water,  the  following  lights  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  : 
—Cape  Gris-Nez,  S.W.  21  miles ;  Calais,  S.  by  W.  J  W.  13  miles ;  Grave- 
lines,  S.S.E.  J  E.  15  miles;  Dunkerque,  S.E.  ^  E.,  just  visible;  and 
South  Foreland  lights,  W.  by  N.  ^  N.  17  miles.  In  the  daytime,  if  the 
weather  be  clear,  the  summit  of  Mont  Couple  may  be  recognised,  S.  W.  by  S. 
distant  19  miles;  also  the  South  Foreland,  and  the  white  clifl*s  near 
Dover,  bearing  W.  by  N.  The  north-east  end  of  the  Sandettie,  upon 
which  there  are  8^  fathoms  at  low  water,  lies  N.  by  W.  §  W.  18  miles 
from  Dunkerque  light ;  but  Gravelines  light  is  too  far  distant  to  be  seen  in 
ordinary  weather. 


CHAV.iv.}        BTJNKEEQUE  BANKS. — OUT  EUYTINGEN.  153 

OUT  RTTYTINGEN,  lying  midway  between  fbo  coast  of  France 
and  the  Santletti^,  is  separated  from  the  Ittttcr  by  a  channel  6  miles  wide, 
with  soundiDgs  of  from  14  io  21  fathoms  in  it.  Its  western  end  begins 
about  7  miles  from  the  shore  on  the  meridian  of  Calais  lighthouse,  and 
thence  it  extends  7  miles  to  the  eastward,  and  then  curves  9  miles  to  the 
E.N.B.,  terminating  at  12  miles  N.  ^  W.  from  Dunkcrqiie  lighthouse.  The 
bank  rises  almost  perpendicularly  from  the  bottom  on  its  south-eastern 
side,  and  then  falls  in  a  gentle  slupu  to  the  north-west.  Those  parts  npon 
which  there  are  less  than  5  fathoms  water,  form  two  flats,  2^  miles  apart, 
with  from  5  to  8  fathoms  between  them;  the  latter  depth  lies  N.N.W. 
from  Gravelines  lighthouse  and  N.E.  from  that  at  Calais,  and  \'esBeIs  bound 
to  either  of  these  ports  can  pass  between  the  flnts  in  this  direction  at  any 
time  of  tide. 

The  western  flat  of  the  Out  Kuytingen  is  3  miles  long  from  West  to 
East,  and  half  a  mile  broad,  and  it^  shoalest  spot,  upon  which  there  are 
only  10  feet  water,  lies  with  the  church-tower  of  St  Pierre-les-CaUis 
in  lino  with  Fienne  windmill  S.W,  by  S.  southerly;  Calais  liglitliouse, 
S.W.  I  S. ;  Gravehnes  lighthouse  S.S.E.  J  E.,  and  Dunkerque  lighthouse 
S.E.  byE.  iE. 

The  eastern  flat  is  9  miles  long,  and  half  a  mile  wide,  and  on  its  northern 
part  are  patches  of  sand,  upon  the  shoolest  of  which  are  only  12  feet  water  ; 
on  the  other  parls  of  the  flat  the  depths  vary  from  18  to  23  feet. 

The  Out  Ruytingen  occasions  strong  eddies,  and  the  sea  which  breaks 
opon  its  ahoalest  parts  when  It  blows  fresh  u  also  heavy  upon  its  edges. 
There  are  some  irregularities  of  the  bottom,  with  €  to  9  fathoms  on  them, 
to  the  westward  of  this  hack,  as  far  as  N.  by  W.  from  Calais,  and  small 
vessels  should  avoid  crossing  them  in  bad  weather. 

LIGHT-VESSEL.— About  one  mile  from  the  east  end  of  Ont 
Ruytingen  in  8  to  10  fothoms  is  moored  a  light-vessel  exhibiting  ot  an 
elevation  of  33  feet  above  the  sea,  a  revolving  red  light,  which  attains  its 
greatest  brilliancy  every  half  minute,  nnd  is  visible  io  clear  weather  from  a 
distance  cf  1 1  miles.  The  vessel  with  most  and  ball  is  painted  red,  with 
Ruytingen  in  white  letters,  on  each  side,  and  lies  about  llj  miles 
N.  by  W.  J  W.  from  Dunkerque  lighthouse.  A  bell  is  sounded  in  foggy 
weather. 

Buoys- — Three  buoys  mark  the  north-west  side  of  Ont  Ruytingen 
great  bank,  viz.,  North-East  buoy,  Ko.  3,  black  with  staff  and  diamond, 
^out  \\  miles  West  of  the  light-vessel,  in  10  fathoms  water  N.N.W.  from 
Dunkerqne  lighthouse. 

The  Middle  buoy,  No.  5,  black  with  a  cylinder  in  9  fathoms  N.W.  \  N. 
from  Dunkerque  lighthouse,  and  N.E.  by  E.  ^  E.  from  Calais  lighthonse  ; 
and  the  South-west  buoy,  No.  7,  black  with  staff  and  cone  in  3  fathoms 
N.E.  1  E.  from  Calais  lighthouse. 


151  CAPE  GIUS-NEZ   TO  DUNK  EBQUE.  [chapi^. 

There  aro  also  three  buoys  marking  Out  Ruytingen  Little  banky  viz^ 
North  buoy,  No.  2,  nnl  witli  }«tatl  and  cone,  iwiut  downwarda,  in  6^  fathcmu 
X.N.W.  from  Grnvelines  lij^litliouM* ;  South  buoy.  No.  4,  red  with  two 
coneK  joini'il  at  their  ])<)iiit8,  in  11  fathoms  N.N.W.  |  W.  from  Gravelines 
liglithouse,  and  N.K.  f^  N.  from  Calais  lighthouse;  and  West  buoj,  No.  9, 
chiM)uere«l  bluek  and  white  nitlt  cone  surmounted  by  a  ball,  in  6^  fathoms 
N.W.  }  X.  from  ( iravelincs  lighthouse,  and  N.  by  £.  }  £.  from  Calais 
light]  lour^e. 

IN  RUYTINGEN  licti  2^  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the  Out  Buy- 
tingt'U,  and  including  all  the  shoal  soundings  of  less  tlian  8|  fathoms,  it  is 
s  miles  )on;r,  W.S.W.  to  E.N.E.,  and  3  miles  broad,  S.S.E.  to  N.N.W. 
From  its  ivestern  extreme  Dunkcniue  lighthouse  bears  S.  by  E.  }  £.  9| 
miles,  and  S.  by  W.  j;-  W.  1'2^  miles  from  its  north-eastern  extreme. 

The  In  Ruytingen  la  of  a  triangular  form,  and  the  irregularity  of  the 
depths  on  it  causes  an  uneasy  sea.  Those  parts  on  which  there  are  less 
than  26  feet  water  form  two  flats,  sepai-atcd  from  each  other  by  soundings  of 
from  5  to  6  fathoms.  The  western  flat,  which  occupies  the  centre  of  the 
bank,  is  2  miles  long  from  north  to  south,  and  1|  miles  wide,  with  as  little 
as  9  feet  on  it,  which  depth  lies  with  Dunkerque  lighthouse  seen  midway 
between  Cussel  and  the  spires  at  Bergucs  bearing  S.  ^  E.  The  eastern 
flat  lies  on  the  north-east  |>art  of  the  bank,  and  is  1^  miles  long,  and  its 
shoalest  s(>ot  has  14  feet  on  it.  The  channel  separating  the  In  Ruytingen 
from  the  Out  Ruytingen  is  5  niile-»  long,  and  carries  a  depth  of  from  ]'5  to 
18  fathoms  ;  vessels  can  pass  through  it  by  keeping  Gravelines  lighthouse 
bearing  S.AV.  J  S. 

BEROTTES. — This  bank  lies  one  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  north- 
east flat  on  the  In  Ruytingen,  and  the  least  depth  on  it  is  23  feet,  which 
lies  N.  I  E.  13^  miles  from  Dunkerque  lighthouse.  The  eastern  end  of  the 
bank  is  on  the  meridian,  and  15  miles  distant  from  Dunkerque,  and  thence 
it  extends  3^  miles  to  the  W.S.W.  Some  ridges  or  ridens,  with  6  to  8 
fathoms  on  them,  lie  2  miles  to  the  East  and  E.N.E.  of  this  bank,  and  when 
the  wind  blows  fresh  on  a  weather  tide  a  heavy  sea  runs  in  the  eddies 
formed  on  their  edges,  as  well  as  on  the  edges  of  the  Bergues. 

Buoy. — No.  1,  a  black  buoy  with  staff  and  ball,  lies  on  the  north  side 
of  Bergues,  in  11  fathoms,  N.  |  E.  from  Dunkerque  lighthouse. 

WEST  DYCK,  MIDDLE  DYCK,  and  EAST  DYCK 

form  one  continued  narrow  shoal,  the  several  banks  on  which  are  separated 
by  soundings  of  less  than  6  fathoms  at  low  water.  The  south-west  end 
of  this  shoal  commences  N.E.  ^  N.  6  miles  from  Calais  lighthouse^  and 
thence  runs  to  the  eastward  parallel  to  the  coast  for  18  miles,  or  as  far  as 
the  meridian  of  Dunkerque,  and  then  trends  E.N.E.  13  miles.      That 


CHAP.rv.]  IN  KrTTINGBK. — DTCK  BANKS.  155 

part  which  lies  betTreen  its  western  extreme  and  the  meridian  of 
Gravelines  is  named  the  West  Dyck  or  Orteil ;  the  centre  part,  between 
Grravelines  and  Gnmde  Synthe,  the  Middle  or  real  Dyck ;  and  the  eastern 
part  ia  generally  known  as  the  East  Dyck,  or  Clif-dlslande. 

West  Dyck  ie  9  miles  in  length,  and  its  greatest  breadth  is  about 
half  a  mile.  From  the  least  depth,  of  16  feet,  Gravelines  lighthouse  bears 
S.  I  W.  5J  miles.  To  the  distance  of  2^  miles  east  and  west  of  this  shoal 
spot  the  depths  are  from  19  to  27  feet,  and  towards  the  western  extremity 
of  the  bank,  N.E.  ^  E.  from  Calais  lighthouse,  a  small  patch  has  been 
found  with  27  feet  on  it.  Small  vessels  should  avoid  paesing  near  some 
patches  of  7  and  8  fathoms,  which  lengthen  out  this  bank  to  the  westward 
nearly  as  far  as  the  meridian  of  Calais,  as  there  is  a  confused  sea  on  their 
edges  when  it  blows  tresh  on  a  weather  tide. 

middle  Dyck  is  one  continued  flat,  6  miles  long  in  an  £.  by  N.  and 
W.  by  S.  direction,  and  from  5  to  8  cables  broad,  and  carries  from 
one  to  5  fathoms  on  it  at  low  water.  It  commences  N.N.E.  |  E.  6  miles 
from  Gravelines  lighthouse,  and  ends  N.  ^  W.  7  miles  from  that  at 
Dnnkerque. 

The  shoalest  part  of  this  flat  is  4^  miles  long,  upon  which  the  depths 
vary  from  5  to  9  feet.  From  the  centre  to  the  east  extreme  it  is  extremely 
dangerous,  being  steep-to  on  nil  sides,  but  especially  towards  the  north-east, 
where  at  2  cables  distance  there  are  from  14  to  15  fathoms  water. 

£ast  Dyck  or  Clif-d'Islande  is  separated  from  the  Middle  Dyck  by 
a  channel  about  a  mile  wide,  in  which  the  depth  is  about  6  fathoms. 
The  south-west  end  of  this  bank  lies  N,  J  E,  7  miles  from  Dunkerqne 
lighthouse,  and  thence  trends  N.E.  by  £.  14  miles.  It  is  very  dan- 
gerous throughout  its  whole  extent,  as  it  rises  abruptly  like  a  wall 
from  soundings  of  from  11  to  17  fathoms.  Its  shoalest  part,  which  is 
a  flat  2  miles  long,  and  npon  which  there  are  only  from  6  to  9  feet  water, 
commences  on  the  south-west  end  of  the  bank,  and  extends  to  the  north- 
east as  far  as  the  meridian  of  the  lighthouse.  On  the  flats  that  are 
formed  on  the  rest  of  the  bank  the  depths  are  irregular,  and  vary  from 
12  to  17  feet. 

The  north-east  end  of  this  bank,  where  the  depths  are  only  from  3  to 
4  fathoms,  and  around  which  the  sea  is  always  disturbed,  is  a  formidable 
danger,  as  it  rises  abruptly  from  soundings  of  15  and  17  fathoms,  and 
therefore  difficult  to  be  avoided  by  tiie  lead,  however  quickly  it  may  be 
hove.  The  shoal  spot  of  3  fathoms  lies  N.E.  ^  N.  19  miles  from  Dun- 
kerque  lighthouse;  but  as  this  end  of  the  bank  is  eo  far  from  the  land,  the 
most  remarkable  objects  cannot  be  recognised,  even  from  the  mast-head, 
unless  the  weather  is  very  clear  j  Dnnkerque  light  may,  however,  be  seen 


15G  CAPL    GRIS-NEZ   TO   DUNKERQUE.  [chap.  iv. 

o  or  6  iniK'.*  fartht-r  off  in  clear  weather.     A  roil  apd  black  buoj  with  staff 
and  ball  is  moored  on  the  northern  edge  of  this  &hoal  ^>ot. 

D  YCK  LIGHT-VESSEL,  moonnl  in  1 1  fathoms,  lies  neirlj  3  miles 
N.  by  W.  J  \V.  from  Gravelines  pier  lighthouse,  and  shows  from  elevations 
of  34  and  23  feet  above  the  sea,  two  fixtd  white  lights,  which  should  be 
visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  11  miles.  The  vessel  is  painted 
red  with  Dyck  in  white  letters  on  each  side,  and  will  be  distinguished  by 
a  ball  at  each  mast-head. 

The  Dyck  light- vessel  kept  just  open  eastward  of  Gravelines  light  will 
lead  through  the  passage  between  the  Great  and  Little  banks  of  Oat 
Ruytingen. 

IN-RATEL. — This  bank  is,  properly  speaking,  only  a  branch  of  the 
Middle  Dyck,  to  the  south-west  end  of  which  it  is  joined  by  a  narrow 
sandy  ridge,  which  has  gradually  risen  since  1802.  The  bank  is  high 
and  steep-to  on  all  its  sides,  and  from  its  south-west  end  in  22  feet,  which 
lies  N.  by  £.5^  miles  from  Mardick  church  tower,  it  trends  E.  \  N. 
7  miles,  where  on  its  eastern  end  depths  of  18  to  19  feet  rise  suddenly 
from  soundings  of  7  to  8  fathoms  at  6^  miles  N.N.E.  \  E.  from  Diin- 
kerque  lighthouse.  Its  extreme  breadth,  of  about  a  mile,  is  towards  the 
middle  of  the  bank,  where  there  is  a  shoal  flat  2  miles  long,  with  only 
from  one  to  6  feet  on  it  at  low  water.  From  this  dangerous  spot  of  one 
foot  Dunkerque  lighthouse  bears  S.  J  E.  o\  miles.  The  channel  separating 
the  In-Ratel  from  the  Breedt  is  barred  between  the  western  flats  on  these 
banks  by  a  heap  of  sand,  upon  which  there  is  only  28  feet  water.  There 
are  8  and  10  fathoms  in  this  channel  at  a  short  distance  east  and  west  of 
the  bar. 

OUT-RATEL  is  an  isolated  bank,  about  a  mile  wide,  lying  to  the 
south-east  and  parallel  to  the  East  Dyck,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  a 
deep  channel  2\  miles  wide.  Its  name,  meaning  rattle,  is  perhaps  derived 
from  the  noise  of  the  heavy  sea  which  runs  upon  it  in  bad  weather.  Near 
its  south-west  end,  lying  about  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  east  end  of 
the  Breedt,  is  a  dangerous  fltt,  with  only  8  feet  water  on  it.  This  shoal 
spot  lies  N.E.  \  N.  10  miles  from  Dunkerque  lighthouse,  and  thence  the 
bank  extends  N.E.  by  E.  \  E.  8^  miles,  including  the  shoal  patches,  pro- 
jecting a  mile  from  its  north-east  extreme. 

The  Out-Rat  el,  having  many  dangerous  flats  on  it  with  only  9  to  15  feet 
water,  ought  not  to  be  crossed,  even  by  small  vessels,  without  using  great 
prudence.  It  is  separated  from  the  East  Dyck,  as  well  as  from  the  eastern 
end  of  the  Breedt,  by  soundings  of  from  8  to  12  fathoms.  A  small  bank, 
with  only  25  feet  on  it,  lies  N.N.W.  \  W.  1^  miles  from  its  north-east  end. 


CHAP.  IV.]  RATEL  AND  BREEDT  BANKS.  157 

and  is  separntcd  from  it  bj  soundings  of  10  to  13  fathoms.  By  not  bring- 
ing Ostende  lighthouse  to  the  eastward  of  S.E.  ^  S.,  a  vessel  will  keep  to 
the  northward  of  the  banks,  lying  between  the  East  Dyek  and  Middelkerckc 
bank,  which  latter  is  the  most  western  of  the  Ostende  banks. 

HAUT-POND  de  GBAVELINES,  a  small  flat  of  sand  nearly 
a  mile  in  extent,  and  upon  which  there  is  only  18  feet  water,  lies  2  miles 
to  the  westward  of  the  west  end  of  the  Breedt  bank,  upon  the  centre 
of  an  elevation  from  the  bottom,  extending  as  far  as  N.N.W.  of  Gravelines 
lighthouse.  From  the  shoalest  spot  on  the  flat,  Gravelines  lighthouse 
bears  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  3|  miles,  and  Dunkerque  lighthouse  S.E.  by  E.  J  E. 
9^  miles. 

BREEDT,  the  broadest  of  the  Dunkerque  banks,  joins  the  In-Ratel 
by  a  bar  of  sand  with  28  feet  water  on  it.  Its  western  extreme,  where  the 
most  dangerous  parts  commence,  lies  N.  ^  W.  3  miles  from  the  high  sand- 
bills  on  Gravelines  point,  N.E.  J  N.  4|  miles  from  Gravelines  lighthouse? 
and  N.W.  by  W.  ^  W.  8  miles  from  that  at  Dunkerque.  From  thence  it 
trends  E.  J  S.,  6 J  miles,  and  then  E.  by  N.  f  N.  8  miles  to  its  eastern 
extreme  in  24  feet  water,  which  lies  N.E.  ^  E.  9J  miles  from  Dunkerque 
lighthouse,  and  N.N.W.  ^  W.  9^  miles  from  Furnes. 

There  are  three  dangerous  flats  upon  the  Breedt.  The  western  flat, 
with  only  3  feet  water  on  it,  lies  3^  miles  from  the  shore,  and  from  its 
centre  Mardick  church  tower  bears  S.  ^  W.  The  middle  flat,  the  highest 
part  of  which  uncovers  5  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  is  of  an  oval  shape, 
2\  miles  long  and  2  broad  ;  fix)m  the  part  that  uncovers  Dunkerque  light- 
house bears  South  3^  miles.  The  third  flat,  3^  miles  long  and  3  cables 
broad,  commences  N.E.  by  N.  4  miles  from  Dunkerque  lighthouse,  and 
ends  about  W.S.W.  2  miles  from  the  eastern  end  of  the  bank  :  there  is  a 
depth  of  only  6  feet  on  its  western  part,  and  the  remainder  of  the  flat 
carries  from  8  to  9  feet ;  the  western  end  is  separated  from  the  eastern 
edge  of  the  middle  flat  by  an  inteixal  of  1^  miles,  with  2  to  3  fathoms 
in  it. 

EAST  BHEEDT  is  fiom  4  to  5  cables  wide,  and  carries  from  13 
to  18  feet  on  it.  A  narrow  channel,  5  miles  long  in  an  E.N.E.  and  W.S.W. 
direction,  and  in  which  the  depths  are  from  4 J  to  8  fathoms,  separates  the 
north-east  end  of  the  Breedt  bank  from  the  south-west  extreme  of  the 
East  Breedt ;  this  extreme  lies  N.E.  by  E.  14  J  miles  from  Dunkerque  light- 
house, and  thence  the  bank  extends  N.E.  by  E.  5  miles,  and  terminates  in 
some  shoal  patches  of  25  feet,  the  most  eastern  of  which  lies  a  little  to 
the  eastward  of  the  meridian  of  Fumes,  and  N.  ^  E.  from  Nieuport.  From 
this  position  at  night,  Dunkerque  light  bears  S.W.  by  W.  19  miles,  and 
Ostende  light  S.E.  ^  E.  10  miles. 


158  CAPE   GRIS-NEZ   TO  DUNKERQUE.  [chap.  iv. 

SMAL. — The  western  end  of  this  bank  lies  2\  miles  from  Dunkerque 
lighthouse,  with  the  lig'hthousc  in  line  with  Dunkerque  tower,  fend  is  con- 
nccte<l  with  the  middle  flat  on  the  Breed t  bank  by  soundings  of  15  to 
22  feet  water.  From  its  western  end  it  trends  E.  J  N.  6  miles,  and  then 
N.E.  by  E.  }  E.  8^  miles,  to  its  north-east  end,  which  lies  about  N.  |  E. 
9i  miles  from  Furnes,  and  N.  by  W.  J  W.  from  Nieuport.  The  southern 
part  of  this  bank  bounds  Nieuport  roa<l  to  the  north,  and  is  extremely 
steep-to  N.N.E.  of  Sables  tower. 

A  dangerous  flat,  alx)ut  7 J  miles  long  and  carrying  only  from  2  to  7  feet 
water,  rises  from  the  Snial  bank,  commencing  N.E.  ^  N.  3  miles  from 
Dunkerque  lighthouse,  and  extending  without  interruption  as  far  as 
N.  by  W.  J  W.  from  Fumes.  It  is  joined  to  the  flat  on  Hils  bank  by  shoal 
water,  of  3  to  16  feet,  the  centre  of  which  lies  with  Dunkerque  tower 
seen  just  open  to  the  eastward  of  Leuguenaerd  tower.  Between  the  east 
end  of  the  flat  and  the  north-east  extreme  of  the  bank  are  several  isolated 
patches,  upon  which  there  are  only  10  to  16  feet  water. 

The  Smal  bank  is  joined  to  Nieuport  bank  by  a  narrow  bar,  with  18  feet 
water  on  it,  lying  with  the  towers  at  Furnes  in  one  with  the  eastern  part 
of  a  high  sand-hill,  named  Broers-DujTi  bearing  S.  ^  W. 

SNOUW. — The  successive  parts  of  the  bank  which  bounds  Dun- 
kerque road  to  the  northward  are  named  the  Snouw,  the  Braeck,  the  Hils, 
and  the  Traepegeer.  The  western  portion  of  Snouw  bank  is  4  mQes  long 
in  an  E.  by  S.  and  W.  by  N.  direction,  and  its  highest  parts  form  a 
narrow  flat  2 J  miles  long,  with  as  little  as  2  feet  water  on  it.  The  western 
end  of  the  Snouw  is  2  miles  from  the  shore,  N.E.  f  E.  4  miles  from 
Gravelines  lighthouse,  and  N.W.  by  W.  J  W.  7^  miles  from  Dunkerque 
lighthouse. 

A  red  and  black  bell  buoy  with  reflector  is  moored  on  the  west  extreme 
of  the  Snouw,  in  about  5^  fathoms  water,  it  lies  1^  miles  N.W.  by  W.  f  W. 
from  the  Snouw  light-vessel. 

LIGHT- VESSEL. — The  Snouw  or  Mardyck  light-vessel,  red  with 
mast  and  ball,  with  Mardyck  painted  in  white  letters  on  her  sides,  lies  in 
1 1  fathoms  near  the  west  end  of  the  Snouw,  and  shows  a  ^xed  red  light, 
visible  in  clear  weather  7  miles.  This  vessel  lies  5f  miles  E.  by  S.  J  S. 
from  the  Dyck  light-vessel,  and  when  in  line  with  the  latter  leads  into 
Dunkerque  road. 

BRAECK. — This  bank  is  a  continuation  of  the  Snouw,  and  is  joined 
to  it  by  soundings  of  from  7  to  8  feet.  It  is  6  miles  long  in  an  E.  by  S.  ^  S. 
and  W.  by  N.  ^  N.  direction,  beginning  about  2  miles  from  the  shore 
on  the  meridian  of  Mardick,  and  ending  on  the  meridian  of  the  Pilot's 
mast  erected  on  the  shore  about  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Dunkerque. 


CHAP.  IV.]  BANKS  NORTH  OP  DTJNKBItQUB  BANKS.  lo9 

Upon  its  highest  parts  which  form  u  flat  from  one  to  3  cables  wide  are  only 
one  to  2  feet  water,  and  there  are  even  eome  dry  patches  on  it  at 
the  lowest  tides.  The  Bi-aeck  is  steep-to,  its  aides  rising  from  the  bottom 
like  a  wall,  and,  with  northerly  winds  the  sea  breaks  upon  it  with  great 
fury.  Its  south-west  end  has  increased  considerably  since  its  highest 
parts  have  united  with  those  of  the  Snouw,  nnd  this  end  is  now  connected 
with  the  shallow  flats  joining  the  shore,  by  a  sandy  shoal  running  to  the 
W.S.W.,  and  forming  a  sort  of  bar  across  the  WeKt  Pass  to  Dankerque 
road, upon  whicli  there  are  from  29  to  33  feet  at  low  water. 

HILSi  a  continuation  of  the  Brneck,  takes  an  ea-sterly  direction  for 
3}  miles  from  the  meridian  of  the  coast  guard  house,  standing  on  the  shore 
to  the  eastward  of  Dunkerque,  and  terminates  suddenly  in  soundings  of  from 
17  to  22  feet,  at  2  miles  from  the  shore,  and  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  of  Zuydcoote 
tower,  colled  also  Sables  or  Sands  tower.  The  highest  parts  of  this  bank 
form  a  flat  2  to  6  cables  broad,  upon  which  there  are  irregular  depths  of 
from  2  to  6  feet  at  low  water,  and  there  are  also  patches  lying  about  N.E.  by 
E.  from  Dunkerque  lighthouse,  which  dry  6  feet  at  the  same  time  of  tide. 
The  south  side  rises  precipitously  from  a  depth  of  from  45  to  50  feet,  and 
the  east  side  &om  17  to  22  feet,  rendering  it  exceedingly  dangerous  to 
vessels  turning  to  windward  in  the  eastern  part  of  Dunkerque  road. 

TRAEFEQEEB  bounds  Dunkerque  road  to  the  eastward,  and  is 
connected  with  Hils  bank  by  soundings  of  from  17  to  22  feet,  which  form 
what  is  called  the  East  or  Zuydcoote  Pass.  The  Traepegeer  joins  the 
shore  towards  a  high  sand'hill  named  the  Broers  Duyn,  end  extends  thence 
along  the  coast  to  the  entrance  to  Nieuport.  Its  western  extreme,  upon 
which  there  are  from  9  to  16  feet  at  low  water,  is  only  2  cables  from  the 
south-east  end  of  the  shoal  flat  of  Hils  bank,  and  bears  N.  by  E.  ^  E. 
from  Sables  tower. 

BANES  NORTH  of  DUNEERaUE  BANES.~The 
position,  extent,  and  depth  of  water  on  the  following  banks  (noticed  in 
page  151),  north  of  the  Dunkerque  banks,  are  the  result  of  the  labours  of 
the  late  Capt.  W.  Hewettt,  E.N.,  in  H.M.S.  Fairv,  from  1831  to  1840. 

FAIRY  BANE,  a  high  sandy  ridge,  with  4  to  9  fathoms  on  it,- 
rises  from  the  eastern  edge  of  the  deep-soundings  channel.  Its  southeiTi 
end  in  8  fathoms  lies  N.  by  E.  18  miles  from  Dunkerque  lighthouse,  and 
thence  the  bank  extends  K.E.  |  E.  10  miles,  its  greatest  bi'eadth  not 
exceeding  8  cables. 

There  are  two  flats  on  this  bank  ;  the  one  near  its  middle  is  2}^  miles 
long,  and  its  shoalest  spot  of  4  fathoms  lies  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  21  miles  from 
Dnnkcrque  lighthouse,  and  S.  by  E.  i  E.  25^  miles  from  the  Galloper 
light-vessel.  The  lighthouse  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  from  the  south 
end  of  the  bank,  and  also  from  the  West  Hinder. 


IGO  CAPE   GUIS-NEZ   TO   DLXKERQrE.  [cbap.it. 

A  shoal,  with  ()  to  9  fftthoms  on  it,  lies  2  miles  to  the  westward  and 
{mrullel  to  the  Fairy. 

NORTH  HINDER,  «  dangerous  sand  bank,  situated  like  the 
Fain'  on  the  eastern  edge  of  the*  deep-soundings  channel,  is  7  miles  long 
in  a  N.E.  by  N.  and  S.W.  by  S.  direction,  and  5  or  6  cables  broad,  the 
general  depth  on  it  being  from  G  to  9  fathoms  ;  but  a  narrow  flat,  with  4 
and  5  fathoms  on  it,  rises  on  its  .southern  part,  and  extends  2  miles  to  the 
southward  from  alK)ut  the  middle  of  the  bank,  and  is  steep-to  on  its  eastern 
side.  The  north  end  of  the  bank  lies  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.  24^  miles  from  the 
Galloper  light  vessel,  and  the  south  end  N.E.  by  E.  8J  miles  from  the 
Fairy. 

The  North  Hinder  may  be  considered  as  an  extension  of  the  Fairy,  and 
between  tliese  banks  are  three  flats,  two  of  which,  with  8  to  10  fathoms  on 
them,  occupy  a  r, pace  3  miles  in  length  midway  between  the  banks;  and 
the  third,  with  9  fathoms  on  it,  lies  2  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the  north 
end  of  the  Fairy.  The  line  joining  tlie  fairy  to  the  North  Hinder  may  be 
considered  as  a  boundary,  to  the  eastward  of  which  vessels  ought  not  to  go 
under  any  circumstances. 

NORTH  HINDER  LIGHT  VESSEL,  moored  m  20 
fathoms  water,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  North  Hinder  bank,  exhibits 
from  her  mainmast  head  at  an  elevation  of  40  feet  above  the  sea,  b,  flashing 
white  light,  at  intervals  of  eight  or  ten  seconds^  visible  in  dear  weather 
fi*om  a  distance  of  11  miles.  The  vessel  has  two  masts  and  is  coloured  red, 
with  the  words  Noord-Hinder  painted  in  large  white  letters  on  her  sides. 
During  the  day  a  red  ball  is  hoisted  at  her  mainmast  head,  and  in  thick 
foggy  weather  a  bell  is  struck  every  quarter  of  an  hour,  preceded  and 
followed  by  strokes  of  a  gong. 

Whenever  the  apparatus  of  the  light  is  out  of  repair,  9. fixed  white  light 
will  be  exhibited  in  lieu  of  the  flashing  light,  and  a  flare  light  will  be 
shown  every  ten  minutes '^wsX  above  the  bulwarks. 

A  red  buoy  is  also  placed  in  6  fathoms  water  N.  J  E.  2  miles  from  the 
light- vessel,  with  the  word  Hinder  marked  on  it  in  white  letters  ;  and  it 
will  be  prudent  for  vessels  of  large  draught  to  keep  to  the  northward  of  the 
buoy  to  avoid  the  shoal  patches  on  the  Hinder.* 

WEST  HINDER,  a  sand  bank  15  miles  long  and  about  7  cables 
broad,  lying  to  the  eastward  of  the  Fairy,  and  to  the  southward  of  the 
North  Hinder.  From  its  south  end  in  9  fathoms,  which  lies  N.N.E.  \  E. 
18J  miles  from  Dunkerque,  N.W.  by  W.  \  W.  A\  miles  from  the  north- 
east of  the  East  Dyck,  and  E.  |  S.  5  miles  from  the  south  end  of  the 
Fairy,  the  bank  trends  N.E.  f  E.  8J  miles,  and  then  N.E.  |  N.6^  miles  to 


*  The  position  of  this  baoy  is  not  to  be  depended  on. 


pHAp.iv.]  HINDER  BANKS.  161  :J 

its  noi1:hern  eniJ,  which  is  1^  uiilea  S.S.E.  of  the  south  exti-eme  of  the  ''.t 
North  Hinder.    A  flat  occupies  neailj  the  whole  length  of  the  bank,  and 

forms  a  sort  of  continuoos  crest,  upoD  which  the  depths  are  from  3  to  5  ^ 

fathoms.  -^ 

The  only  passage  practicable  for  large  vessels  bound  to  Flushing  and  i 

Antwerp,  aad  intending  to  enter  the   Schelde  by   the    Wieling    Got,  ia  -^ 

between  the  Out  Ruytingen,  the  Bergues,  and  the  East  Dyck  on  one  side ;  ■ 

and  the  Fairy  and  the  Weat  Hinder  on  theother.  -J 

WEST   HINDER  LIGHT-VESSEL.-Near  the  S.W.  end  .* 

West  Hinder  bank,  in  17  fathoms,  in  lat.  51°  22'  3"  N.,  long.  2°26'  26"  E.,  ; 

IB  moored  a  light-vesset,  which  exhibits  from  an  elevation  of  40  feet  above  'i 

the  sea  a  revolving  light,  showing  two  bright,  and  one  red  light,  at  half 
minute  intervals,  and  vidble  in  clear  weather  fi'om  a  distance  of  12  miles.  '; 

The  vessel  is  black  with  red  streaks,  with  the  words  West  Hinder  painted  '^ 

on  each  side;  and  a  skeleton  framework  at  mast  head.  -  « 

Buoy. — A  black  buoy  ia  also  placed  in  about  9  fathoms,  bearing  N.  ^  W.  ^ 

a  little  more  than  half  a  mile  from  the  light-vessel,  and  nearly  midway 
between  it  and  the  south-western  extreme  of  the  shoal  part  of  the  bank, 
Upon  which  there  are  but  3  fathoms  water ;  it  would  be  advisable  not  to 
go  to  the  northward  of  this  buoy. 

EAST  HINDER,  a  sand-bank  1 1 J  miles  long  in  a  N.E.  by  N.  and  ;. 

S.W.  by  S.  direction  and  6  or  7  cables  broad,  lies  to  the  eastward  of  the  i 

West  and  the  North  Hinder ;  it  has  three  flats  on  it,  which  occupy  nearly 
its  whole  extent,  and  carry  from  4  to  5  fathoms  water.  The  bank  is  steep- 
to  on  both  sides,  and  is  separated  from  the  North  Hinder  by  a  channel 
4  miles  wide,  with  15  to  19  fathoms  in  it.  The  north  end  of  the  bank, 
in  9  fathoms,  lies  S.E.  |  S.  4  miles  from  the  north  extreme  of  the  North 
Hinder;  and  the  south  end,  N.E.  |N.  9  miles  from  the  north  extreme  of 
the  East  Dyck. 

About  midway  between  the  south  end  of  the  East  Hinder  and  the  East 
Dyck  there  is  a  naiTow  shoal  4^  miles  bng,  with  from  5  to  8  fathoms  on 
it;  it  lies  1|  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the  West  Hinder,  and  ltd  south 
extreme  is  2  miles  to  the  northwai-d  of  the  northern  termination  of  the 
East  Dyck. 

BIiIGH  BANE,  composed  of  sand,  is  10  miles  long,  from  half  to  a 
mile  broad,  and  lies  3  miles  to  the  eastward  and  nearly  parallel  to  the 
East  Hinder.  Its  northern  end,  upon  which  there  are  8  fathoms,  is  in  lat. 
51°  41V  N.,  long.  2°  48'  9"  W.,  and  lies  N.W.  J  W.  26  miles  from  the  light  at 
West  Kapelle,  and  S.E,  by  E.  f  E,  33  miles  from  the  Gal lopei- light-vessel ; 
its  southern  end,  in  5  fathoms,  lies  E.  ^  N.  4^  miles  from  the  south  extreme 
Q  7049.  L 


162  CAPE   GRIS-KEZ   TO  DUXKEBQUE.  [chat.  it. 

of  tlio  East  Hinder,  and  X.K.  ^  E.  13  miles  from  the  north  end  of  the  East 
Dyck. 

'riiiif  f)ank  is  steep-to,  and  hnn  iiregular  depths  of  from  6  to  9  fathomB 
on  it.  A  flat,  1  \  inileH  lou^,  rises  perpcndicularlj  from  soundings  ci  from 
14  to  18  fathomfi  at  about  3  niiles  from  its  soothern  end.  There  are  5 
fathoms  on  the  flat,  and  there  in  also  a  (Mitch,  with  the  same  depdi  on  it, 
near  the  north  end  of  the  bank. 

Another  patch,  with  9  fathoms  on  it,  lies  1 1  miles  to  the  northward  of 
Bligh  bank,  and  the  soundings  for  the  distance  of  25  miles  to  the  N  J^JB. 
and  N.£.  by  N.  are  very  irregular,  in  some  places  only  IS  and  14  fathcmis ; 
whence  it  follows,  that  the  lead  will  be  an  nncertain  goide  when  i4>proach- 
ing  the  North  Hinder,  the  East  Hinder,  or  the  Bligh  bank,  from  the  north- 
eastwanL 

THORNTON  RIDGE.— This  sand-bank  is  13  miles  long  east 
and  west,  with  a  mean  breadth  of  1^  miles,  and  rises  from  soundings  of 
from  12  to  17  fathoms  at  15  mil&s  from  the  coast  of  Belgium,  and  out  of 
sight  of  Dunkerque,  Ostende,  and  West  Kapelle  lights.  A  flat,  2^  miles 
long  and  half  a  mile  wide,  with  2  to  3  fathoms  on  it,  lies  towards  the 
eastern  end  of  the  ridge;  tlie  shoalest  spot  of  2  fathoms  lying  N.N.E. 
easterly,  abjut  19  miles  from  Ostende  lighthouse.  The  general  depth  on 
the  other  parts  of  the  ridge  is  from  6  to  9  fathoms. 

The  west  end  of  the  ridge  lies  S.S.E.  3  miles  from  the  south  extreme  <^ 
Bligh  bank,  and  the  interval  separating  them  is  the  least  dangerous  channel 
that  large  vessels  can  take,  if  they  intend  passing  amongst  the  banks,  when 
bound  to  the  northward  with  S.W.  winds  from  Dunkerque. 

Nearly  midway  between  Bligh  bank  and  Thornton  ridge  are  three  narrow 
shoals,  occupying  a  space  of  9  miles  in  an  E.N.E.  and  W.S.W.  direction, 
and  carrying  from  8  to  9  fathoms  water.  The  western  shoal  lies  E.  \  S.3f 
miles  from  the  flat  on  Bligh  bank,  and  N.W.  f  N.  5{  miles  from  the 
shoalest  spot  on  Thornton  ridge. 

A  succession  of  shoals,  with  6  to  9  fathoms  on  them,  also  lie  between 
Thornton  ridge  and  the  Out-Ratel,  within  sight  of  Ostende  light.  They 
occupy  a  space  10  miles  long  in  an  east  and  west  direction,  and  the  shoalest 
spot  on  them,  5  J  fathoms,  lies  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  11  miles  from  Ostende  light- 
house ;  but  none  of  them  are  dangerous,  and  they  have  only  been  described 
here,  as  they  may  be  crossed  by  vessels  coming  out  of  the  Zuydcoote  Pass, 
and  they  will  then  serve  as  a  guide  to  assure  them  that  they  are  in  a  good 
tract. 

ASPECT  of  COAST. — ^The  sand-hills  composing  the  coast  between 
Calais  and  Gravelines  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  at  8  or  9  miles,  but 
some  of  them  are  so  low  and  unstable  that  embankments  are  thrown  up  to 


CHAP.  IT.]        WALDE   LIGHT. — POET  DE  GEAVELIKBS.  163 

protect  the  land  from  the  invasion  of  the  sea.  The  onlj  objects  that  caa 
be  recognised  on  the  level  land  adjoining  the  shore  are,  the  two  windmills 
at  Walde,  Oye  chnrch  spire,  and  two  windmiUa  standing  near  Oya  village.* 

At  low  water  the  sandy  beach  extends  more  than  a  mile  from  the  shore 
between  Calais  and  the  meridian  of  the  Walde  windmills,  as  well  as  off 
the  entrance  to  Gravelines  i  but  along  the  intermediate  coast  its  breadth 
varies  from  half  to  three-quarters  of  a  mile.  The  depths  a4]oining  the 
beB4^,  that  aie  less  than  4  &t1ioma,  extend  2  miles  from  the  shore  N.N.E, 
of  Calais  church,  and  abreast  Gravelines,  and  about  a  mile  from  the  shore 
between  Walde  and  Oye  windmills ;  between  the  outer  edge  of  these 
soundings  and  higb-water  mark  the  elope  of  the  bottom  is  rapid  and 
irregular,  which  tends  to  cause  a  heavy  sea  when  the  wind  blows  upon  the 
shore. 

WALDE  LIGHT. — ^Near  the  edge  of  the  sandy  beach  nearly  a 
fi-om  the  shore  abreast  Walde  Mill,  and  3|  miles  E.  by  K.  ^  N.  from 
Calais  lighthouse  is  an  iron  beacon,  from  which  at  on  elevation  of  34  feet 
is  exhibited  ajiashing  white  and  red  light  alternately  at  intervals  of  twenty 
seconds,  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  10  miles. 

PORT  de  GRAVELINES. — The  entrance  to  this  small  tidal 
harbour  for  fishing  and  coasting  craft,  lies  10  miles  to  the  eastward  of 
Calais,  and  its  position  may  be  easily  recognised  by  the  houses  of  the 
village  of  Fort  Phillippe,  built  close  to  the  sea  on  each  side  the  entrance 
channel,  by  a  windmill  standing  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward 
of  the  village,  and  by  the  fine  tower  of  the  lighthouse.  The  principal 
articles  of  trade  are  wiue,  brandy,  gin,  salt,  timber,  salt-fish,  refined  sttgar, 
beer,  Ac.  Vessels  are  fitted  out  for  the  herring,  cod,  and  mackerel 
fisheries. 

lliis  harbour  is  only  accessible  to  vessels  of  14  feet  draught  at  the 
utmost  at  high-water  springs.  At  weak  springs  those  of  ll-l-  feet  can 
enter  it  during  5  or  6  days,  that  is,  2  or  3  days  before  full  and  change,  and 
3  days  after.  Jt  affords  good  shelter  at  the  springs  to  vessels  of  about 
12  feet  draught  during  westerly  gales,  and  especially  those  between  W.S.W. 
abd  W.N.W.,  when  the  sea  is  not  heavy  at  the  entrance;  but  the  bar 
should  be  crossed  at  the  time  of  high  water.     In  a  gale  from  E.N.E.  to 

*  The  telegraph  cable  between  France  and  Denmark  (from  CttUis  to  Frdo 
island),  is  immeraed  near  tbe  Entt«s  d'Oye,  io  latitude  50°  59'  40"  N.,  longitude 
S'l'SyE.,  and  lies  in  the  direction  of  N.  6°E,  as  faraBlatitude51°r'10"N.,aDdloDgi- 
tode  1°  S9'  39"  E.,  at  which  point  it  takee  the  direction  of  N.  38°  E. 

Thefirst  of  these  two  directions  is  indicated  bj  two  beacoDti,  each  tunnounted  with  a 
hexagonal  prism,  partlj  while  and  partly  red. 

TeeaeU  should  not  anchor  in  the  direction  indicated  above. 


A. 

I 


16^!  CAPE   GRIS-NEZ  TO  DXJNKERQUE.  [chap.  iv. 

East  thej  should  run  in  with  the  flood,  for  after  high  water  there  will  be 
some  difficulty  in  stemming  the  ebb.  The  tide  rises  much  higher  with 
strong  northerly  winds,  but  as  the  sea  is  then  very  high  at  the  entrance 
no  vessel  drawing  more  than  12  feet  should  attempt  to  enter,  unless  she 
is  embayed,  and  there  is  an  impossibility  of  reaching  the  anchorage  in 
Dunkerque  road,  which  is  the  only  place  on  this  coast  where,  with  those 
winds,  a  vessel  could  find  a  little  shelter. 

Pilots  cannot  get  out  to  vessels  when  the  sea  is  high  on  the  bar,  but 
they  wave  a  flag  in  the  direction  they  should  steer. 

A  red  flag  is  hoisted  on  a  staff  erected  on  the  shore  at  the  conmience- 
ment  of  the  west  jetty  during  the  time  the  entrance  is  practicable,  and  kept 
up  as  long  as  there  is  sufficient  water  for  the  fishing  vessels. 

The  Channel,  leading  into  this  harbour,  runs  S.  by  E.  ^  E.  2  miles 
in  a  direct  line  from  the  entrance,  and  consists  of  two  distinct  parts,  one 
bounded  by  the  beach,  and  the  other  by  the  land  between  the  village  of 
Fort  Phillippe  and  Gravelines. 

The  outer  part  of  the  channel,  8  cables  long  and  306  feet  wide  at  the 
entrance,  is  enclosed  between  two  low  stone  jetties,  which,  for  half  their 
length  from  the  shore,  are  not  covered  during  the  neaps.  The  end  of  the 
west  jetty  is  18  feet  above  the  lowest  tides,  and  is  marked  by  a  red  beacon 
surmounted  by  a  structure  of  open  framework  ;  the  extremity  of  the  east 
jetty,  15  feet  above  the  lowest  tides,  is  marked  by  a  large  wooden  beacon 
surmounted  by  a  wooden  lantern  and  weathercock.  Both  jetties  have 
beacons  on  their  whole  length  secured  by  strong  woodwork,  by  means  of 
which  vessels  warp  in.  Abreast  the  extremity  of  the  east  jetty,  the  level 
of  the  fresh  water  wliieh  runs  out  of  the  harbour  when .  the  tide  is  out,  is 
3  feet  above  the  level  of  low- water  great  springs. 

The  inner  part  of  the  channel  between  the  village  of  Fort  Phillippe  and 
the  harbour  is  a  little  better  than  a  mile  long,  and  half  a  cable  broad,  and 
is  enclosed  between  two  embankments,  which  serve  for  towing-paths. 
The  mud  deposited  in  the  channel  forms  a  steep  slope  on  either  side. 

The  Harbour  is  situated  on  the  north-west  side  of  the  town,  at  the 
mouth  of  the  river  Aa,  the  abundant  freshes  of  which  during  rain  and  the 
melting  of  the  snow  clear  both  it  and  the  entrance  channel  of  the  mud 
and  sand  which  accumulate  there  in  dry  weather.  It  is  about  1^  cables 
long,  and  occupies  about  half  the  breadth  of  the  channel  by  which  the 
course  of  the  Aa  has  been  straightened  between  the  ditches  of  the  western 
part  of  the  fortifications  and  the  entrance  channel.  The  berths  of  muddy 
sand,  upon  which  vessels  are  placed  alongside  the  stone  quay  bordering 
the  whole  length  of  the  harbour  on  the  town  side,  are  4|  feet  above  the 
level  of  low-water  great  springs.  The  swell  from  outside  never  reaches 
the  harbour. 


CHAP.  IV.]  PORT  DE   GRAVELINES.  165 

A  line  of  piles,  commencing  at  bridge  No.  1  near  little  Fort  Phillippe 
and  extending  towards  the  north-west,  uncoyers  about  3^  feet  above  the 
level  of  low  water ;  the  extreme  is  marked  by  a  perch  buoy  with  a  red 
and  white  flag,  and  when  entering  should  be  left  to  port.  This  line  of 
piles  serves  to  guide  vessels  to  the  south-east  of  a  bank  of  ooze  formed  off 
Great  Fort  Phillippe. 

Bar. — The  entrance  to  the  channel  leading  to  the  harbour  is  frequently 
obstructed  by  a  bar  formed  of  the  sand  driven  by  westerly  winds  and  the 
sea  from  the  beach  to  the  westward.  The  height  and  extent  of  this  bar 
depend  upon  the  duration  of  these  winds,  as  well  as  upon  the  body  of  fresh 
water  out  of  the  harbour.  At  its  medium  state  it  is  from  2  to  3  feet  above 
the  level  of  the  fresh  water  running  through  the  channel  when  the  tide  is 
out,  or  5  or  6  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides.  It  sometimes  dis- 
appears for  several  days  during  the  great  freshes  of  the  river  Aa,  when 
there  is  a  strong  N.E.  wind. 

LIGHTS. — Gravelines  lighthouse,  of  alight  red  colour  and  resembling 
a  Doric  column,  stands  at  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance,  in  the  west  part 
of  the  village  of  Little  Fort  Phillippe,  at  175  yards  from  the  shore,  and 
65  yards  from  the  ea^stern  bank  of  the  entrance  channel.  It  exhibits,  at 
95  feet  above  high  water,  a  fixed  white  light,  dioptric  and  of  the  third 
order,  visible  at  14  miles. 

Two  fixed  white  tide  lights,  65  yards  apart,  and  each  20  feet  above  high 
water,  are  shown  on  the  shore  at  the  village  of  Great  Fort  Phillippe,  at 
the  commencement  of  the  west  jetty,  from  2  hours  before  till  2  hours  after 
high  water,  and  when  in  one  they  point  out  the  direction  of  the  entrance. 
Both  lights  are  catoptric  and  of  the  fourth  order,  and  may  be  seen  from  a 
distance  of  6  miles. 

X  fixed  green  light  is  exhibited  from  the  extremity  of  the  north-east  pier 
of  Gravejiines  harbour,  during  the  time  there  is  sufficient  depth  of  water 
for  vessels  to  enter  the  harbour.  This  light  will  continue  to  be  shown 
until  the  completion  of  the  north-west  pier.* 

A  LifO  Boa»t  is  stationed  at  Gravelines. 

Directions. — Vessels  arriving  off  Gravelines  harbour  sometime 
before  the  tide  serves  to  enter,  may  anchor  north  of  Oye  church  spire,  at 
1^  or  2  miles  from  the  shore,  in  5  to  8  fathoms,  over  excellent  holding 
ground.  This  anchorage,  however,  is  only  safe  for  a  few  hours  during  fine 
weather,  for  the  sea  is  heavy  when  the  wind  blows  upon  the  shore. 

The  most  favourable  winds  for  entering  the  harbour  are  those  from 
N.N.W.  round  northerly,  to  N.E.,  but  when  they  blow  fresh,  cause  a  high 
sea  at  the  entrance,  and  it  will  then  be  necessary  to  be  quite  certain  there 
is  sufficient  water  over  the  bar  without  danger  of  striking.     With  fresh 

♦  AnnoDce  Hydrographique,  No.  54  of  1881. 


16C  CAPE   GRIS-XEZ   TO  DUXKERQTJE.  [chap.  iv. 

winds  from  W.S.W.  to  W.N.W.  the  sea  is  smooth  on  the  bar,  but  there  is 
then  a  difficaltj  in  getting  through  the  entrance  channel  when  the  low 
jetties  are  covered,  for  the  flood  stream,  and  the  sea  crossing  it^  may  drift 
a  vessel  upon  the  east  jetty.  The  entrance  is  easy  with  N.E.  winds,  when 
they  are  sufficiently  strong  to  stem  the  flood,  which  is  at  its  greatest 
strength  when  it  Ls  high  wator  in  the  harbour.  With  a  head  wind  a  vessel 
is  tracked  in  and  placed  on  the  ground  in  the  inner  part  of  the  channel. 

The  best  time  for  entering  the  harbour  is  about  an  hour  before  high 
water;  but  us  the  stream  at  tliat  time  runs  strong  across  the  entrance, 
there  will  be  some  difficulty  in  keeping  in  the  deepest  parts  of  the  channel ; 
if  the  vessel,  however,  takes  the  ground  she  may  float  again  before  the 
tide  has  done  rising.  The  bowers  and  a  stem  anchor  must  be  ready  to 
let  go,  and  hawsers  to  run  out  should  she  be  drifted  upon  the  east  jetty. 
Sufficient  sail  should  also  be  carried  to  ensure  good  steerage,  especially 
during  the  autumn  and  winter  months,  when  it  may  blow  fresh  in  the 
ofling  whilst  the  breeze  is  light  near  the  shore,  which  circumstance  would 
place  a  vessel  in  considerable  danger  in  the  great  swell  on  the  bar.  In 
entering  the  channel  with  westerly  winds,  whatever  may  be  their  strength, 
and  also  with  light  easterly  winds,  pass  close  to  the  noilhward  of  the  outer 
West  beacon  ;  with  fresh  easterly  winds  pass  either  close  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  outer  east  beacon,  or  nin  directly  for  the  middle  of  the  entrance. 

Tides  and  Tidal  Signals.* — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in 
Gravelines  harbour  at  noon,  springs  rise  19  feet,  neaps  15  feet.  And 
(above  the  level  of  the  fresh  water  which  runs  out  of  the  harbour  when  the 
tide  is  out,  and  which  is  about  3  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides,) 
ordinary  springs  rise  18  feet ;  equinoctial  springs  19|  to  20^  feet ;  ordinary 
neaps  11|  to  ISJ  feet.  By  deducting  2  feet  from  these  heights,  the  rise  of 
water  on  the  bar,  supposing  it  to  be  in  its  medium  state,  will  be  found. 
Strong  winds  from  N.  W.  to  N.N.W.  cause  the  tide  to  rise  higher,  and  those 
from  S.E.  have  a  contrary  effijct. 

The  tide  rises  slowly  for  the  first  three  hours,  but  its  rise  is  rapid  from 
the  third  to  the  fourth  hour ;  it  then  slacks  gradually  till  high  water.  At 
springs  the  high-water  slack  in  the  harbour  continues  about  15  minutes  in 
calm  weather,  20  to  25  minutes  with  westerly  winds,  and  10  minutes  at  the 
utmost  with  off-shore  winds  ;  but  as  there  is  little  rise  or  fall  for  the  last 
half  hour  flood  and  the  first  half  hour  ebb,  there  is  a  period  of  nearly  1 J 
hours  for  moving  vessels  in  and  out  without  danger  of  grounding. 

The  new  system  of  tidal  signals,  noticed  in  page  3,  is  used  at  tiiis  port. 

ASPECT  of  COAST.— The  low  plain  behind  the  shore  between 
Gravelines  and  Dunkerque  presents  no  remarkable  objects  visible  at  sea  ; 


♦  For  day  tidal  signals,  see  page  3,  and  for  night  tidal  signals,  see  page  165. 


CHAP.  IV.]      PORT  DE  GEAVELIKES. — PASSE  DB  l'OUEST.         167 

the  only  high  land  that  can  be  seen  in  clear  weather  are  two  isolated  hills, 
named  Great  and  Little  Cassel,  rising  S.  ^  W.  from  Dunkerque.  The 
town  of  Cassel  stands  on  the  summit  of  the  larger,  and  the  other  hill  is  in 
the  form  of  a  cone.  The  buildings  that  may  be  recognised  on  the  coast  are 
the  tower  and  lighthouse  at  Dunkerque,  and  the  church  towers  of  Grande 
and  Petite  Synthe  and  Mardick.  Gravelines  point,  bearing  E.  ^  N.  3^ 
miles  from  Gravelines  lighthouse,  is  of  a  rounded  form  and  the  sandhills 
composing  it  lie  in  several  parallel  ridges  and  are  visible  in  clear  weather 
9  or  10  miles.  A  chain  of  sand-hills  covered  with  verdure  extends  2  miles 
in  a  W.S.W.  direction  from  the  point. 

The  sand-hills  bordering  the  shore  for  about  2  miles  to  the  eastward  of 
Gravelines  point  are  about  the  same  height  as  those  at  the  point,  but 
beyond  this,  and  to  within  a  short  distance  of  Dunkerque,  they  are  covered 
with  bent  grass,  and  lie  in  parallel  ridges  at  half  a  mile  in  the  rear  of  an 
embankment,  fronted  by  low  land,  which  is  covered  at  spring  tides. 

Between  tlie  entrance  of  Gravelines  and  Gravelines  point  the  beach 
dries  out  half  a  mile  at  the  springs  ;  abreast  the  point  it  dries  3  cables,  the 
extreme  edge  being  marked  by  a  beacon;  and  between  the  point  and 
Dunkerque  it  dries  6  or  7  cables.  The  sand  which  is  carried  to  the  east- 
ward by  strong  westerly  winds  is  arrested  by  the  jetties  at  Dunkerque, 
and  accumulates  on  the  beach  between  Mardick  and  Dunkerque,  where  it 
forms  an  immense  heap,  the  highest  parts  of  which  are  barely  covered  at 
the  springs.  Of  all  the  obstacles  which  oppose  themselves  to  the  improve- 
ment of  Dunkerque  this  high  beach  is  the  most  difficult  to  overcome,  for 
the  sand  from  it  is  forced  over  the  west  jetty,  and  forms  a  bank  several 
feet  high  at  the  end  of  the  jetty  and  across  the  entrance. 

The  soundings  off  this  part  of  the  coast,  within  a  depth  of  5  fathoms, 
are  very  irregular,  and  the  sea  is  heavy  when  the  winds  blow  on  the  shore. 
Between  the  entrance  to  Gravelines  and  Gravelines  point  these  soundings 
extend  2  miles  from  the  shore^  and  amongst  them  lies  a  deep,  named  Fosse 
de  Mardick,  which,  although  carrying  from  26  to  29  feet  water,  should 
always  be  avoided.  This  deep  is  separated  from  the  West  Pass  leading  to 
Dunkerque  road  by  the  pastern  end  of  a  shoal,  with  11  to  19  feet  over  it, 
which  extends  to  the  westward  as  far  as  the  meridian  of  Gravelines 
lighthouse.  Another  shoal,  the  edge  of  which  is  steep-to,  joins  the  beach 
between  Mardick  and  Dunkerque,  and  extending  1^  miles  from  the  shore 
forms  the  southern  boundary  of  the  West  Pass;  its  western  end  lies 
N.  by  W.  J  W.  of  Mardick  church  tower. 

PASSE  de  rOUEST,  or  West  Pass  into  Dunkerque  road,  is 
about  4  miles  long,  and  lies  between  the  shoal  flats  joining  the  shore  and 
the  Snouw  bank.     The  entrance  to  it,  as  well  as  the  direction  it  follows 
is  marked  by  the  following  buoys : — 


168  CAPE   GRIS-NEZ  TO  DUNKEEQUE.  [chap.  it. 

A  striped  red  and  black  buoy,  with  bell  and  reflector,  is  moored  at  the 
wei»tem  extremitj  of  the  -Snouw  at  the  entrance  of  the  Pass,  and  most  be 
left  on  the  port  hand  in  entering. 

The  northern  edge  of  the  Pass,  as  well  as  the  most  dangerous  parts  of 
the  steep  edge  of  the  Braeck  bank,  are  marked  bj  the  following  five  black 
buoys  each  marked  with  a  staff,  which  must  also  be  left  on  the  port  hand 
in  entering : — 

Black  buoy  No.  1  is  moored  midway  between  the  buoy  with  bell  and 
reflector  and  the  Snouw  light-vessel. 

Black  buoy  No.  3  is  moored  on  the  southern  edge  of  the  Snouw,  nearly 
l\  miles  E.  \  N.  from  the  Snouw  light- vessel. 

Black  buoy  No.  5.  is  moored  1^  miles  farther  to  the  eastward  near  the 
western  edge  of  the  Braeck  bank ;  but  a  narrow  part  of  this  bank,  with 
17  to  19  feet  on  it,  extends  nearly  1 J  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  buoy, 
and  is  dangerous  to  vessels  of  large  draught  running  into  Dunkerque  road 
with  a  strong  westerly  wind  at  low  water. 

Black  buoy  No.  7  is  moored  in  20  feet  water  upon  the  southern  edge 
of  the  Braeck  bank,  about  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Black  buoy  No.  5. 

Black  buoy  No.  9  is  moored  on  the  southern  edge  of  the  Braeck  bank, 
about  1 J  miles  eastward  of  No.  7. 

The  southern  edge  of  the  West  Pass,  as  well  as  the  southern  limit  of 
the  western  part  of  Dunkerque  road,  are  marked  by  seven  red  buoys 
moored  upon  the  outer  edge  of  the  dangerous  flats  joining  the  shore  as 
follows :  — 

Red  buoy  No.  2  marks  the  N.  W.  edge  of  the  bank,  and  lies  2f  miles 
W.  ^  N.  of  Snouw  light-vessel.  It  is  necessary  to  see  this  buoy  either 
when  entering  or  leaving  the  pass.  A  pilot  vessel  generally  lies  at  anchor 
near  it. 

Red  buoy  No.  4  lies  on  the  edge  of  the  18  feet  soundings  joining  the 
beach  about  1^  miles  E.  by  S.  from  red  buoy,  No.  2,  and  S.  by  W.  J  W, 
three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  buoy,  with  bell  and  reflector. 

Red  buoy  No.  6  lies  upon  the  edge  of  the  same  soundings,  about  one 
mile  eastward  of  red  buoy  No.  4,  and  South  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from 
black  buoy  No.  1. 

Red  buoy  No.  8  lies  on  the  south  side  of  the  western  part  of  Dunkerque 
road,  1  f  miles  east  of  No.  6  buoy. 

Red  buoy  No.  10  lies  about  one  mile  east  of  No.  8  buoy. 

Red  buoy  No.  12  lies  1^  miles  east  of  No.  10  buoy. 

Red  buoy  No.  14  lies  1^  miles  east  of  No.  12  buoy. 

The  northern  limit  of  the  eastern  part  of  Dunkerque  road  is  marked  by 
two  red  buoys,  the  eastern  one  having  a  staff  and  ball.  The  western 
red  buoy  No.  8,  is  moored  on  the   southern  edge  of  the  Braeck  bank. 


CHAP.  IV.]   PASSE  DB  L^OUEST. — ^PASSE  DB  ZUYDOOOTE.         169 

N.  by  E.  \  E.  from  the  entrance  to  Dunkerque ;  and  the  eastern  red  bnoy. 
No.  6,  lies  upon  the  southern  edge  of  Hils  bank,  E.  ^  S.  1|  miles  from 
red  buoy  No.  8. 

PASSE  de  ZUTDCOOTE,  or  Eaat  Pass  into  Dunkerque  road, 
runs  in  a  N.E.  ^  E.  and  S.W.  J  W.  direction  between  Hils  and  Twiepegeer 
banks,  and  carries  17  to  22  feet  at  low  -water ;  its  limits  are  marked  by 
one  black  and  two  red  buoys.  The  southern  red  buoy  with  staff  and 
ball,  No.  4,  marks  the  south-east  edge  of  Hils  bank ;  the  northern  red 
buoy,  with  staff  and  ball.  No.  2,  the  north-east  edge  ;  and  the  black  buoy 
No.  1,  the  north-west  edge  of  the  Traepegeer.  It  is  necessary  to  observe 
that  the  red  buoys  upon  the  eastern  slope  of  Hils  bank,  which  is  very 
steep,  sometimes  drift  and  cross  the  Zuydcoote  Pass  to  the  western  slope 
of  the  Traepegeer ;  this  frequently  happens  to  red  buoy,  No.  4. 

DirOCtions.  —  When  the  flood  stream  begins  to  be  felt  in  Dun- 
kerque road,  which  is  about  the  time  of  half  flood  in  the  harbour,  the  tide 
has  risen  9  feet  in  the  Zuydcoote  Pass,  and  the  largest  vessels  that  can 
enter  Dunkerque  may  at  that  time  pass  over  the  south-west  end  of  the 
Traepegeer  by  keeping  the  spires  of  Bergues  church  open  about  a  degree 
to  the  westward  of  Leffrinckoucke  church  tower  bearing  about  S.W.  by  S. 

If  a  vessel's  draught  will  permit  her  to  turn  through  the  Zuydcoote  Pass 
between  half  flood  and  half  ebb,  the  lead  must  be  hove  quickly  to  avoid 
coming  suddenly  upon  Hils  bank ;  and  in  standing  to  the  eastward  she 
should  not  open  the  spires  of  Bergues  more  than  two  degrees  to  the  east- 
ward of  Leffrinckoucke  church  tower.  In  thick  weather,  should  the  spires 
not  be  visible,  she  may  run  through  this  Pass,  if  Sables  tower  be  seen,  by 
steering  for  it  on  a  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  bearing. 

RADE  de  DUNKERQUE  being  narrow,  and  only  sheltered  by 
banks  always  covered,  must  only  be  considered  as  a  temporary  anchorage 
for  vessels  whose  draught  will  permit  them  to  enter  the  harbour ;  it  might, 
however,  in  case  of  necessity,  afford  shelter  to  ships  of  the  largest  draught. 
Sharp  vessels  deeply  laden  will  be  in  some  danger  from  the  heavy  sea,  but 
with  this  exception  the  pilots  consider  that  with  good  ground-tackling  a 
vessel  might  ride  out  a  gale  from  the  offing. 

The  road  is  comprised  between  the  outer  edge  of  the  5-fathom  line  of 
soundings  joining  the  shore,  and  the  Braeck,  the  Hils,  and  the  Traepegeer 
banks.  It  extends  from  the  western  end  of  the  shallow  flat  on  the  Braeck, 
N.E.  of  Mardick  tower,  to  the  entrance  of  the  Zuydcoote  Pass,  and  is 
separated  into  two  deeps  by  a  sandy  bottom  3  cables  wide,  the  centre  of 
which  lies  N.N.W.  ^  W.  from  Dunkerque  lighthouse.  There  are  5  to  8 
fathoms  on  this   sandy  bottom ;    but  the  holding  ground  is  bad   in  the 


170  CAPE   GRIS-NEZ  TO  DUNKEBQUE.  [chap.iv. 

(lcei>est  water.    A  pilot  vessel  generally  lies  at  the  entrance  of  the  West 
Pass,  not  far  from  red  buoy  No.  2, 

The  western  of  these  deeps,  in  which  the  soundings  are  from  8  to  9 
fathoms,  good  holding  ground,  commences  N.E.  of  Mardick  tower,  and 
extends  to  the  sandy  bottom  just  mentioned,  and  is  in  some  degree  sheltered 
from  the  high  sea  during  northerly  gales  by  the  high  flat  on  the  Braeck 
bank.  It  is  in  this  part  of  the  road  that  vessels  of  large  draught  anchor 
with  westerly  winds  and  a  heavy  sea,  when  they  have  to  wait  for  high 
water  to  enter  Dunkerque.  Small  vessels  under  similar  circumstances 
can  anchor  N.W.  about  a  mile  from  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  in  the 
southern  part  of  the  sandy  bottom,  as  the  holding  ground  there  is  good 
and  the  depths  from  5  to  7  fathoms  ;  this  is  also  a  good  position  for  all 
vessels  with  off-shore  winds. 

The  eastern  deep  commences  with  Heuguenar  tower  in  line  with  Dun- 
kerque lighthouse,  and  extends  to  the  Zuydcoote  Pass ;  the  depths  in  it 
vary  from  8  to  11  fathoms,  and  the  holding  ground  is  good,  particularly 
N.N.E.  of  Dunkerque.  Large  vessels  requiring  to  remain  some  time  in 
Dunkerque  road  should  anchor  in  this  deep  between  the  lines  on  which 
Ileugueuar  towei'  is  seen  touching  the  eastern  side  of  the  lighthouse,  and 
tlioKiuno  tower  in  one  with  Dunkerque  tower,  where  they  will  be  better 
HluUtcriHl  tluui  in  the  western  deep  against  the  heavy  sea  daring  gales 
from  N.N.W.y  round  northerly  to  E.N.E.  by  the  high  flats  on  Braeck  and 
IlilH  bunk  ;  and  in  the  o^ont  of  their  parting  it  will  be  much  less  dangerous 
to  run  nshoiv  to  the  oantwanl  than  to  the  westward  of  Dunkerque.  A 
v(«HHt^I  tit  anchor  in  any  part  of  the  road  should  have  a  spare  anchor 
ready  to  let  go  as  soon  as  the  wind  veers  and  threatens  to  blow  from  the 
northward. 

Tides. — The  first  of  the  flood  stretim  in  Dunkerque  road  comes  firom 
the  N.N. W. ;  as  it  gains  strength  its  direction  is  more  to  the  eastward,  and 
at  its  greatest  speed,  which  lasts  about  two  hours,  it  runs  straight  through 
the  road.  It  then  decreases  rapidly,  and  after  a  few  minutes  slack  water 
the  ebb  stream  commences,  which  runs  first  to  the  NJ^.W.,  and  as  its  rate 
increases  it  turns  to  the  westward ;  when  at  its  greatest  strength  it  runs 
parallel  with  the  coast,  and  towards  the  end  of  the  tide  its  direction  is 
W.S.W.  and  S.S.W. 

FORT  de  DUNKERQUE,  situated  lO  miles  to  the  eastward  of 
Gravelines,  is  both  a  naval  and  commercial  port,  and  the  principal  French 
port  in  the  North  Sea.  The  town  stands  at  the  junction  of  the  Bei^ues, 
Bourbourg,  and  Furnes  canals,  and  the  public  buildings  are  spacious, 
handsome,  and  regular;  as  this  port  serves  as  an  outlet  for  the  great 
manufacturing  departement  du  Nord,  the  trade  by  sea  is  considerable,  and 


CHAP.  IV.]  ,  PORT  DE  DUNKERQUE.  171 

the  cod  and  herring  fisheries  are  carried  on  with  great  activity.  The 
population  in  1867  amounted  to  38,000. 

The  port  consists  of  an  entrance  channel  leading  to  an  outer  tidal  har- 
bour, at  the  end  of  which  is  an  inner  tidal  harbour  and  a  floating  basin. 
The  inner  harbour,  together  with  the  floating  basin  and  the  buildings 
around  it,  belong  to  the  Government,  and  form  what  is  called  the  Naval 
Arsenal. 

Vessels  drawing  19  feet  can  enter  the  port  at  high  water  during  three 
or  four  days  after  full  and  change,  and  advance  as  far  as  the  eastern  jetty, 
where  they  can  be  lightened ;  if  drawing  18  feet,  they  can  proceed  as  far 
as  the  first  stone  quays,  where  the  cargo  can  be  discharged  ;  and  if  of 
17  feet  draught,  they  can  enter  the  floating  basin.  During  three  or  four 
days  after  each  quarter  about  4  feet  must  be  deducted  from  the  above 
depths.  When  the' extensive  works  now  in  progress  (1879)  are  finished, 
there  will  be  an  augmentation  of  3  feet  to  all  the  depths  above  mentioned. 
At  low  water  there  are  only  3  feet  at  springs  and  6  feet  at  neaps  in  the 
entrance  channel. 

Considered  as  a  place  of  shelter,  the  port  will  admit  vessels  of  about  16 
or  17  feet  draught  at  high-water  ordinary  springs,  during  strong  winds 
between  N.W.,  round  westerly,  and  W.S.W. ;  18  feet  at  equinoctial  springs  ; 
and  12  feet  at  neaps.  Northerly  gales  cause  such  a  high  sea  outside  the 
jetties  that  those  of  above  14  feet  draught  should  not  attempt  to  run  in  nt 
that  time  without  the  pilots  judge  the  entrance  practicable  ;  small  vessels 
may  enter  at  the  top  of  high  water  by  carrying  all  possible  sail  to  get 
through  the  high  sea,  but  the  entrance  is  inaccessible  during  these  gales 
at  the  neaps  to  all  except  coasters. 

The  Entrance  Channel)  which  is  about  one  mile  long  in  a  N.N.W. 
and  S.S.E.  direction,  and  230  feet  wide,  is  enclosed  partly  by  the  citadel  quay 
and  the  extension  of  the  town  quay  as  far  as  the  Cunette  sluice,  and  partly 
between  wooden  jetties.  The  sand  forces  itself  into  the  channel  by  the 
openings  between  the  pilework  and  through  the  entrance,  particularly 
during  dry  weather  and  at  the  neaps.  A  portion  of  water  from  the  canals 
in  the  interior,  as  well  as  that  from  the  ditches  of  the  town,  is  used  to 
scour  out  the  harbour  and  the  entrance  channel,  but  although  the  stream 
is  rapid,  it  has  such  a  distance  to  run  that  its  efiect  does  not  extend  far 
beyond  the  jetty  heads.  During  the  rainy  season,  and  at  the  melting  of 
the  snow,  when  the  water  in  the  interior  is  abundant,  the  stream  runs 
strong  out  of  the  channel  all  the  time  the  flood  is  weak,  and  is  checked 
only  when  the  tide  rises  rapidly ;  but  it  recovers  its  course  as  soon  as 
the  tide  slacks,  which  is  about  half  an  hour  before  high  water,  and  as  soon 
as  the  ebb  makes  it  acquires  great  speed.  This  stream  is  but  little  incon- 
venience to  vessels  of  large  draught  entering  before  high  water,  but  as 


172  CAPE  GKIS-NEZ  TO  DUNKERQUE.  [chap.iv. 

soon  as  the  tido  begins  to  fall  they  munt  have  a  strong  fair  wind  to  get 
through. 

The  entrance  channel  dries  onlj  within  2  cables  of  the  outer  harbour  ; 
outside  of  this  the  depths  in  the  channel  vary  from  one  to  8  feet  in  the 
furrows  formed  by  the  scouring  water.  From  the  Cunette  sluice  to  the 
harbour,  both  sides  of  the  channel  are  bordered  by  slopes  of  soft  mud, 
upon  which  are  placed  vessels  unable  to  find  room  in  the  harbour,  or  those 
which  come,  to  refit  and  can  bear  to  lie  aground.  Qual  Neuf  between  the 
sluice  and  the  Belveder  rampart,  is  especially  allotted  to  steam-vessels,  and 
the  berths  of  mud  upon  which  they  lie  are  2  or  3  feet  above  the  level  of 
low-water  great  springs.  The  berths  along  the  stockade  opposite  the  quay 
are  about  the  same  height,  and  are  also  of  soft  mud.  Vessels  lying  in  this 
channel  should  be  securely  moored,  for  a  strong  northerly  wind  sends  a 
swell  in.  With  westerly  winds  those  of  about  15  feet  draught  lie  aground 
on  these  berths  for  5  or  6  days,  but  with  those  from  the  eastward  they  only 
remain  a  day  or  two  at  the  utmost. 

The  Outer  Harbour  occupies  the  space  between  the  town  and  the 
citadel,  and  is  about  3  cables  long,  from  400  to  500  feet  wide,  and  entirely 
surrounded  with  quays.  It  dries  out  at  the  springs,  and  the  bottom  for 
the  most  part  is  a  mixture  of  sand,  shingle,  and  mud ;  towards  the  middle 
of  the  harbour  it  is  covered  with  stinking  black  mud,  broken  tiles  and 
bricks.  Vessels  lying  alongside  the  quays  ground  upon  a  hard  bottom, 
whirh  at  the  foot  of  the  citadel  quay,  on  the  north-west  side  of  the 
lmrbo\ir,  \h  l\  to  1  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides ;  at  the  foot  of 
tlio  Dutch  and  Holland  quays  it  is  obstructed  by  the  ruins  of  old  walls 
and  piloM  cM)vercd  with  mud.  When  it  blows  strong  from  the  northward 
the  swell  enters  the  harbour  for  about  2  or  3  hours  each  tide,  but  it  does 
not  inconvenience  a  vessel  if  she  be  well  secured.  There  are  careening 
and  building  8lii)s  at  the  upper  end  of  the  harbour,  and  strong  cranes  for 
masting. 

The  Inner  Harbour,  which  communicates  directly  with  the  outer 
harbour,  and  dries  out  every  tide,  is  nearly  bordered  thoroughout  by  an 
earth  embankment.  On  its  south  side  are  three  large  building  docks,  and 
on  its  north  side  is  the  right  wing  of  the  storehouses  surrounding  the 
floating  basin. 

The  Floating  Basin,  called  also  the  Naval  basin,  occupies  a  space 
of  d2)H20  square  yards,  and  communicates  with  the  outer  harbour  by  a  wide 
flo(Hl  gate,  the  sleepers  of  which  are  on  a  level  with  low-water  great 
MprlnKK.  All  vcHsels  that  can  enter  the  harbour  can  enter  the  basin,  but 
lh««<<  of  lioavy  draught  arc  obliged  to  wait  for  nearly  the  top  of  high  water 
|o  ^o  ovof  a  ridge  of  hard  clay  in  front  of  the  gate,  4  or  5  feet  higher  than 
thii  Ml(«(ftH4rHt 


CHAP.  IV.]      PORT  DE  DUNKERQUE. — ^LIGHTS;   PILOTS.  173 

LIGHTS. — ^A  handsome  yellow  brick  tower,  177  feet  high,  in  tiie 
form  of  a  tnll  column,  is  erected  on  the  shore  between  the  west  jettj  and 
the  ruins  of  Risban  fort.  It  stands  S.  by  £.  ^  £.  875  yards  from  the 
extremity  of  the  west  jetty,  and  exhibits,  at  193  feet  above  high  water,  a 
revolving  white  light,  of  the  first  order,  the  eclipses  of  which  succeed  each 
other  evert/  minute^  and  the  bright  intervals  are  visible  in  clear  weather 
at  the  distance  of  25  miles ;  in  ordinary  weather  the  eclipses  are  not  total 
within  the  distance  of  12  miles,  a  faint  light  being  seen  between  the  bright 
intervals. 

A  fixed  white  light,  of  the  fourth  order,  and  elevated  85  feet  above  high 
water,  is  exhibited  from  the  Heuguenar  tower  S.  by  £.  f  E.  2,406  yards 
from  the  entrance.  This  light,  specially  intended  for  the  channel  between 
the  tour  de  Heuguenar  and  the  entrance  of  the  jetties,  shows  its  brightest 
light  in  that  direction  N.  by  W.  ^  W.  and  is  visible  10  miles.  To  the  right  and 
to  the  left  of  this  direction  the  light  will  only  be  seen  in  ordinary  weather, 
from  a  distance  of  5  or  6  miles,  within  an  angular  space  of  10°  or  12°. 

K  fixed  green  light  is  also  shown  from  the  extremity  of  the  east  pier  at 
an  elevation  of  26  feet  and  is  visible  3  miles. 

From  a  white  tower  standing  40  feet  within  the  West-moie  head,  at  an 
elevation  of  33  feet,  is  exhibited  a  tidal  light,  varying  in  colour  and 
showing  flashes  to  indicate  the  state  of  the  tide.  This  light  also  indicates 
the  height  of  the  tide  above  low -water  ordinary  springs,  and  denotes  every 
10  inches  of  rise,  when  such  height  is  6^  feet  and  upwards.  When  the 
tide  is  less  than  6^  feet  above  low-water  and  rising,  the  light  will  show 
red;  when  less  than  6^  feet  and  falling  the  light  will  show  green.  With 
the  height  of  the  tide  6^  feet  and  upwards  the  light  will  show  white^  and  be 
varied  by  a  group  of  coloured  flashes  at  intervals  of  eighty  seconds^  com- 
mencing when  the  rise  is  7  feet  4  inches.  The  flashes  in  each  of  these 
groups  will  be  shown  at  intervals  of  five  seconds  ;  each  red  flash  adding 
3  feet  4  inches  to  the  initial  height  of  6^  feet ;  and  each  green  flash 
10  inches.  While  the  water  is  rising  the  light  (whatever  colour  may  be 
shown)  will  be  eclipsed  for  a  short  period  everg  eighty  seconds  ;  but  when 
the  water  is  at  a  standstill  the  light  will  not  be  eclipsed.  When  the  light 
shows  fixed  white  varied  by  groups  of  coloured  flashes,  the  eclipses  will 
take  place  about  the  middle  of  the  interval  separating  the  groups. 

This  light  is  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  9  miles. 

Fog  Signal. — ^  bell  is  sounded  in  foggy  weather. 

iPilotS.— ^The  Dunkerque  pilots  are  unable  to  get  out  of  the  harbour 
when  there  is  a  heavy  sea  at  the  entrance,  which  is  frequently  the  case; 
but  nine  of  them  in  their  turn  remain  out  during  ten  days  in  a  large 
decked  vessel,  sloop-rigged.  This  vessel  is  generally  at  anchor  in  the 
West  Pass  near  red  buoy  No.  2 ;   she  is  not  permitted  to  run  into  port 


17^!  CAPE   GBIS-KEZ   TO  DUNKEEQUE.  [chap.it. 

except  during  gales,  and  is  provided  with   anchors   and  cables  to  assist 
vessels  in  distress. 

A  lifo  boat  is  stationed  at  Dunkerque. 

Directions. — When  bound  to  Dunkerque  from  the  westward  with 
the  wind  between  N.N.W^  round  westerly,  and  S.S.W.  endeavour  to  make 
the  land  about  cape  Gris-Nez,  and  taking  a  departure  from  about  2  miles  to 
the  westward  of  that  cape,  steer  N.E.  bj  £.  }  E.  12  miles,  or  until  the 
western  windmiU  at  Coquelles  bears  S.  \  W.  or  Mont  Couple  S.W.  by  S. 
From  thence,  the  course  to  the  Snouw  light-vessel,  moored  at  the  entrance 
of  the  West  Pass  into  Dunkerque  road  is  E.  by  S.,  and  the  distance  16| 
miles,  this  passes  about  one  third  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  Dyck 
light-vessel. 

In  entering  the  West  Pass,  keep  to  the  southward  of  the  striped  red  and 
black  bell  buoy,  and  Snouw  light-vessel,  and  then  between  the  three  black 
buoys  which  mark  the  northern,  and  the  red  buoys  which  mark  the 
southern  limit  of  the  pass.  Vessels  of  heavy  draught  running  in  with  a 
strong  westerly  wind  at  low  water  should,  in  order  to  avoid  the  narrow 
spit  with  17  to  19  feet  on  it,  which  extends  nearly  1^  miles  to  the  westward 
of  black  buoy  No.  5,  keep  about  three  cables  to  the  northward  of  the  red 
buoy  No.  10  on  the  southern  limit  of  the  narrow.  Large  vessels,  having  to 
wait  for  high  water  to  enter  Dunkerque,  anchor  between  the  meridian  of 
black  buoy  No.  7  and  that  of  Petit  Synthe  church.  The  pilots  always  go 
out  of  the  pass  to  meet  large  vessels  ;  small  vessels  requiring  one  should 
make  a  signal  as  soon  as  they  arrive  in  sight  of  the  pilot  vessel  at  anchor 
near  red  buoy  No.  2. 

At  Night,  if  the  wind  be  in  the  same  direction,  after  running  iJie 
above  course  N.E.  by  E.  |  E.  12  miles  from  cape  Gris-Nez,  or  until  Calais 
light  bears  S.S.E.  J  E.  and  cape  Gris-Nez  light  S.W.  by  W.,  steer  E.  f  S. 
11^  miles  up  to  the  Dyck  light-vessel,  then  bring  the  Snouw  light-vessel 
to  bear  E.  by  S.  ^  S.  and  steer  for  her,  and  after  passing  close  to  the  south- 
ward of  her  keep  on  the  same  course  with  the  two  light-vesseb  in  line 
through  Dunkerque  road,  and  anchor  in  about  8  fathoms  with  Heuguenar 
tower  light  between  the  two  jetty  lights  S.S.E. 

With  the  wind  between  N.N.E.  and  E.N.E.  long  boards  should  be  made 
in  the  Pas  de  Calais,  until  the  town  of  Calais  bears  S.S.E.  ^  E.,  when  a 
vessel  may  stand  in  for  the  land,  keeping  the  lead  quickly  going  to  avoid 
crossing  the  Riden  de  Calais.  Boards  of  about  3  miles  long  can  be  made 
between  the  West  Dyck  and  the  edge  of  the  5-fathom  soundings,  which 
borders  the  shore,  but  from  the  meridian  of  Gravelines  lighthouse  up  to  the 
entrance  of  the  West  Pass,  short  tacks  should  be  made  near  the  edge  of 
these  soundings,  bearings  of  the  Dyck  and  Snouw  light- vessels  enabling  it 
to  be  done  with  great  confidence. 


'm*  ^* 


CHAP.  IV.]  POKT  DB  DTJKKEEQUE.      DIEECTIOKS.  175 

From  the  Northward. — When  bound  from  the  North  Sea  to 
Dunkerque,  or  to  the  other  French  ports  on  this  coast,  endeavour  to  make 
the  land  about  cape  Blanc-Nez,  whatever  may  be  the  direction  of  the  wind 
or  the  time  of  tide.  The  land  to  the  south-west  of  this  cape,  as  far  as  cape 
Gris-NeZy  may  be  seen  in  ordinary  weather  about  18  miles,  and  Mont 
Couple  and  the  hills  around  it  22  or  23  miles.  The  course  with  easterly 
winds,  from  a  position  about  3  or  4  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Gralloper  light-vessel  is  S.S.W.  }  W. ;  this  will  lead  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Four-mile  knolls,  or  North  Falls  Head,  and  when  the  North  Foreland 
lighthouse  bears  W.  by  N.  f  N.  steer  S.W.  J  S.  to  pass  midway  between 
the  North  Falls  Tail  and  the  south-west  end  of  the  Sandetti^  bank.  In 
clear  weather  there  is  no  difficulty  in  turning  to  windward  over  this 
ground ;  when  thick  or  foggy,  the  lead  must  be  kept  quickly  going,  so  as 
not  to  stand  into  a  less  depth  than  20  fathoms. 

At  Night  the  lights  at  the  South  Foreland,  cape  Gris-Nez,  Calais, 
and  even  Dunkerque,  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  when  a  vessel  is  mid- 
way between  the  North  Falls  Tail  and  the  south-west  end  of  the  Sandettie, 
and  from  this  position,  if  the  wind  is  from  the  eastward,  Calais  light  may 
be  steered  for,  or,  if  from  the  westward,  the  land  between  Calais  and  cape 
Gris-Nez  ;  but  to  keep  a  safe  distance  from  the  coast,  it  will  be  necessary 
in  the  former  case  not  to  bring  cape  Gris-Nez  light  to  the  westward  of  S.W. 
by  W.  J  W.,  or  Gravelines  light  to  the  eastward  of  S.E.  by  E.  \  E.,  unless 
bound  to  Calais ;  and  in  the  latter  case  not  to  bring  cape  Gris-Nez  light  to 
the  westward  of  S.W,  |  W.,  or  Calais  light  to  the  eastward  of  S.E.  by  S. 
With  strong  northerly  winds,  it  would  not  be  prudent  to  approach  within 
5  miles  of  the  coast,  not  bringing  Gravelines  light  to  the  eastward  of  S.E. 
byE. 

With  strong  westerly  winds  vessels  sometimes  keep  to  the  westward  of 
the  Galloper  and  the  Falls,  to  get  smoother  water.  They  pass  either  to 
the  northward  of  the  Galloper  bank,  or  between  that  bank  and  the  Four- 
mile  knolls.  The  course  from  a  position  2  miles  to  the  westward  of  the 
Galloper  is  S.W.  |  S.,  and  after  running  about  35  miles  in  that  direction 
the  vessel  will  be  5  or  6  miles  to  the  southward  of  the  North  Falls  Tail, 
and  cape  Gris-Nez  light,  if  the  weather  be  cleai*,  will  be  in  sight. 

From  a  well  defined  position  ships  may  pass  between  the  Groat  and 
Little  banks  of  Out  Ruytingen  by  steering  for  Gravelines  ou  a  S.  by  E.  ^ 
E.  bearing ;  the  Dyck  light- vessel  will  then  be  just  open  eastward  of  this 
line,  and  the  least  water  in  this  route  will  be  3^  fathoms  on  crossing  West 
Dyck  bank.  On  reaching  Dyck  light-vessel  steer  for  Snouw  light-vessel 
as  before  directed,  and  proceed  for  Dunkerque  roads.  The  same  routes 
may  be  safely  taken  at  night  with  the  lights  well  defined. 


176  CAPE    QBIB-NEZ  TO  DUKKERQUE.  [crap.  nr. 

Entering  Dunkerque  h^ve  good  hawsers  ready  to  moor  head  and 
stern,  the  anchors  clear,  and  with  a  fair  wind  a  heavy  anchor  to  bring  np 
by  the  stern.  All  possible  sail  should  be  carried  to  pass  qnickly  through 
the  breakers  on  the  e<lge  of  the  beach.  Fresh  northerly  winds  raise  a  heavy 
sea  at  the  entrance,  and  the  best  time  then  for  running  in  is  at  high  water. 
When  within  the  entrance  channel  there  is  no  difficulty  in  reaching  the 
harbour. 

Strong  winds  between  N.W.,  round  westerly,  and  S.S.W.,  cause  a  heavy 
swell  at  the  entrance.  At  this  time  keep  close  to  the  west  jetty  head  and 
the  western  side  of  the  channel  until  sheltered  by  that  part  of  the  jetty 
which  is  boarded  up,  as  the  flood  stream  crosses  the  open  pilework,  and 
runs  with  great  rapidity  upon  the  east  jetty.  This  stream  is  at  its  greatest 
strength  about  half  an  hour  before  high  water  in  the  harbour.  The  most 
favourable  time  to  enter,  with  moderate  westerly  winds,  if  a  vessel's  draught 
will  permit,  is  when  the  stream  slackens,  or  about  half  or  three-quarters  of 
an  hour  after  high  water  in  the  harbour. 

Strong  easterly  winds  also  raise  a  high  sea  at  the  entrance  on  a  weather 
tide ;  with  these  winds  steer  for  the  east  jetty  head,  and  then  run  along  the 
eastern  side  of  the  channel.  The  entrance  is  not  accessible  to  sailing 
vessels  when  it  blows  strong  between  S.S.W.  and  S.S.E.,  but  the  sea  is  then 
smooth  in  the  road,  and  they  can  remain  there  without  danger.  During 
calms  or  light  winds  every  effort  should  be  made  to  close  with  the  west 
jetty  head  to  avoid  being  drifted  to  the  eastward  of  the  entrance  by  the 
flood  stream,  which  runs  at  its  greatest  strength  outside  the  jetties  the 
whole  time  that  large  vessels  can  enter.  The  best  time  for  those  of  light 
draught  to  run  in  is,  directly  the  signal  is  made  that  there  is  sufiicient 
water,  before  the  flood  has  attained  its  greatest  strength. 

Leavillg  Dunk6rq.Ue. — Sailing  vessels  bound  to  the  westward  or 
the  ports  in  the  northern  part  of  the  North  Sea  generally  wait  for  favour- 
able winds  and  spring  tides  to  quit  the  harbour.  The  gates  of  the  floating 
basin  are  opened  one  hour  before  and  closed  about  half  an  hour  after  high 
water.  Winds  with  southing  in  them  are  the  most  favourable  for  leaving, 
but  those  that  blow  upon  the  coast,  when  they  are  strong,  forbid  any 
egress. 

If  bound  to  the  westward,  the  harbour  should  be  left  directly  they  floaty 
if  the  wind  is  sufficiently  strong  to  stem  the  flood  stream  ;  but  with  a  light 
wind  they  should  not  start  until  near  the  top  of  high  water,  and  then 
anchor  in  the  road  for  the  stream  to  slacken.  On  quitting  the  West  Pass 
steer  for  Dyck  light-vessel,  and  thence  a  W.  by  N.  course  will  lead  north- 
ward  of  the  Biden  de  Calais,  and  when  Calais  lighthouse  bears  S.E.  |  S.,  or 
cape  Gris-Nez  lighthouse  S.W.  f  W.,  a  S.W.  by  W.  |  W.  course  will  lead 
a  safe  distance  to  the  westward  of  that  cape. 


ohaf.it.]    port  DB  DTTHKEBQUB. — DUECTI0N8 ;   TIDES.      177 

If  bonnd  to  the  northward,  and  tbe  vessel's  dranght  will  permit  lier  to 
cross  the  banks  northward  of  Duokerque,  the  eDtrnnce  channel  should  be 
left  as  earlj  as  possible  before  high  water ;  but  this  passagu  should  never 
be  attempted  without  a  freab  fair  wind  to  enable  ber  to  run  quick  over 
the  banks.  When  clear  of  the  jetties,  steer  N.  J  W.  to  get  the  spire  at 
Fetitfl  Synthc  in  line  with  the  guard-bouse  wliich  staoda  about  a  mile  to 
the  westward  of  Dunkerque  lighthouse,  bearing  S.W.  J  S. ;  then  steer 
N.£.  I  N.,  with  the  spire  in  one  with  the  guard-house,  crossing  in  succes- 
sion the  Braeck,  the  Smals,  and  the  East  Breedt  banks,  until  the  lead 
shows  that  the  vessel  is  near  the  eastern  edge  of  the  East  Dyck  bank,  when 
a  N.£.  hy  £.  course  for  35  miles  will  lead  between  Thornton  ridge  and 
Bligh  bank.  The  soundings  on  this  latter  course  will  be  from  14  to  19 
fathoms.  A  cost  of  9  or  10  fathoms  may  be  had  on  the  two  narrow  shoals 
lying  between  Thornton  ridge  and  Bligh  bank. 

I£  the  vessel's  draught  will  not  permit  her  to  cross  these  banks,  leave 
the  harbour  as  soon  as  she  floats,  to  benefit  by  the  flood  btream,  which  runs 
in  the  ofGag  3  hours  after  high  water  at  Dunkerqne,  aud  when  outside 
the  jetties  steer  to  enter  Nieaport  road  by  the  Zuydcootc  pass.  When 
dear  of  the  Pass,  steer  E.  by  N.  j  N.  through  the  road  until  Fumes  is  in 
one  with  a  high  sand  hill,  flattened  at  the  summit  and  free  from  verdure, 
named  Broers  Duyn  (page  178),  bearing  S.  J  W.  wben  tbo  vessel  will  be 
on  the  narrow  shoal  joining  the  Smals  bank  to  the  Nieuport  banks.  From 
this  position  a  N.E.  ^  N.  course  for  S5  miles  will  lead  through  the  North 
channel,  and  clear  of  all  the  banks.  The  only  inconvenience  ia  following 
this  course  is  crossing  the  stream  in  au  oblique  direction  which  must  be 
allowed  for.  Ostende  light  may  be  seen  in  ordinary  weatlier  until  within 
2  miles  of  the  southern  part  of  Thornton  ridge. 

Tides  and  Tidal  Signals,* — it  is  high  water,  full  and  change, 
at  Dunkerque  at  12b.  8m.;  springs  rise  16J  feet,  neaps  13J  feet. 
Strong  northerly  winds  raise  the  tide  2  or  3  feet  higher,  but  the  sea  is  then 
heavy  at  the  entrance.  The  springs,  when  easterly  winds  prevail,  do  not 
rise  much  higher  than  the  neaps  with  fresh  westerly  winds.  In  calm 
weather  the  tide  remains  slack  in  the  harbour  at  high  water  about  15 
minutes  ;  20  or  25  minutes  with  westerly  winds ;  and  10  minutes  with 
off-ehoro  winds.  A  short  distance  outside  the  jetties  the  fiood  »ti-eam  runs 
2j  or  3  hours  after  high  water  in  the  harbour. 

The  tidal  signals  used  at  this  port  are  the  same  as  those  noticed  in  page  3. 
They  are  made  fi-om  the  f  agstafF  erected  upon  the  terrace  of  an  elegant 
little  bailding,  standing  S.S.E.  109  yards  from  the  lighthouse,  Iwtween  the 
west  jetty  and  Risban  fort. 

ASPECT  OP  COAST.— The  coast  between  Dunkerque  and  the 
frontier  of  Belgium,  and  even  beyond  the  fVontitr  as  far  as  Blankenberg,  an 

■  for  day  tidal  eigusU,  $ee  page  S,  and  for  night  tidal  aigoals,  ate  page  ITS. 
Q  7049.  H 


178  CAPE  GRIS-N£Z   TO  DTJNKEKQUE.  [guapiv. 

extent  of  83  luileg,  treuUs  neai'ly  in  a  straight  lino  to  the  eastward.  The 
f  horo  lieing  low  and  Haudy,  and  l>ordered  bj  eand-hilks  has  a  doll  uniform 
appearance,  and  the  only  objects  that  can  be  recognized  on  the  level  plain 
hi  the  interior,  arc  the  clumps  of  trees  surrounding  the  yiUageSy  the 
i*hurch*loworti|  autl  the  windmills.  Between  Dunkerqne  and  the  frontier, 
whh*li  in  7  miles  to  the  eastward,  some  i*e venue  guard-houses,  and  a  large 
ln^iioon  natui«d  the  Pilot's  mast,  may  be  seen  on  the  sand.hills  near  the 
nhiMts  and  an  cdd  ruintnl  tower  amongst  the  saad-hills  near  Zuydcoote ; 
and  WyoiHl  tlio  fixMititT,  the  towers  of  Fumes,  the  ramparts  and  church 
lowor  of  NitMi|h)rt,  and  a  high  sand-hill  N.  ^  E.  from  Fumes,  named  the 
llrtHU^M  Duvii,  whioh  is  flatttminl  at  the  summit  and  may  be  easily  recog-* 
uIiuhI  at  Hivi  by  it?*  being  tottdly  free  from  verdure,  whilst  those  near  it  are 
c»f  a  brown  colour,  being  covcrcil  with  l)ent  gi*ass. 

The  windy  bcuch  bordering  the  coast  dries  out  a  quarter  of  a  mile  at 
low  water,  and  the  depths  outside  it  increase  gradually  to  4^  fathoms  a 
mile  from  the  shore.  To  ground  in  bad  weather  upon  this  part  of  the 
coast  on  a  falling  tide,  would  l)e  less  fatal  than  upon  the  beach  between 
Dunkerqne  and  Mardick,  fdr  whatever  may  be  the  violence  of  the  wind 
and  surf,  if  a  vessel  runs  stem  on  to  the  beach  she  will  make  a  bed  in  the 
sand,  and  the  tide  will  soon  leave  her,  especially  if  she  takes  the  ground 
about  half  an  hour  after  high  water  at  the  springs.  Assistance  can  then 
be  afforded  to  the  crew,  and  they  may  be  saved  if  they  remain  on  board 
until  the  tide  has  left  her ;  whereas  a  vessel  to  ground  upon  the  high  beach 
westward  of  Dunkerque  would  become  a  total  wreck,  often  with  the  loss 
of  the  crew,  at  whatever  time  of  tide  she  runs  ashore. 

TidOS. — Upon  the  north  coast  of  France,  as  well  as  upon  the  English 
shore  from  Ddver  to  the  North  Foreland,  tho  tide  takes  5\  hours  to  rise  at 
sfffings  firom  the  level  of  low  water  to  that  of  high  water,  and  7^  hours  to 
descend  from  that  level  to  low  water  ;  but  these  durations  vary  according 
to  the  moon's  age ;  that  of  the  flood  increases  progressively  frcm  full  and 
change  to  the  following  quarter,  whilst  that  of  the  ebb  decreases,  so  that 
two  or  three  days  after  the  quarter  the  duration  of  the  ebb  is  as  long  as 
the  flood ;  it  then  increases  gradually  until  the  following  full  and  change, 
and  that  of  the  flood  decreases.  In  calm  weather  both  streams  in  the  offing 
have  respectively  about  the  same  duration  as  the  rising  and  falling  tide  on 
the  shore,  and  their  rate  is  in  proportion  to  the  range  of  the  tide.  The 
flood  stream  is  generally  less  rapid  than  the  ebb,  but  the  rate  and  duration 
of  both  are  influenced  by  the  winds. 

It  has  not  yet  been  ascertained  by  any  decisive  experiments  whether  the 
range  of  the  tides  between  the  north  coast  of  France  and  the  estuary 
of  the  Thames  is  equal  to  that  observed  on  the  surrounding  shores.  All 
that  is  positively  known  on  the  subject  is,  that  as  far  as  15  or  16  miles 


CHAP.  IT.]  POar  DUNEEBQUE.— IIDS8.  179 

from  the  French  coftst  die  veitical  motioas  of  the  tide  seem  to  follow  very 
nearly  the  game  law  as  upon  the  shore,  they  take  place  M  the  Bftine  tioiesi 
and  they  appear  to  rise  in  an  eqnol  degree ;  but  iE  they  rise  of  water  at 
springs  on  thia  doast,  at  Cnlais  for  example,  ia  compared  with  that 
obBerVed  at  the  same  tidett  on  the  coasts  of  Holland  and  Belgiom,  ■■  well 
as  at  several  positions  in  the  cstoary  of  the  Thames,  and  espedally  at 
Orfordness,  it  would  appear  that  beyond  tho  diatanws  of  15  or  16  mUes 
from  the  French  coast,  In  a  N.N.E.  and  E.N.E.  direction,  the  range  of 
tide  decreases  in  the  same  manner  as  upon  the  shores.  It  b  even  probable 
that  this  decrease  is  very  rapid,  for  in  the  middle  of  the  North  sea,  between 
Holland  and  England,  there  are'  not  more  than  2  feet  difference  between 
high  and  low  water;  the  mariner,  therefore,  in  determining  hia  position 
by  the  depths  marked  on  the  chart,  will  have  to  diminish  the  allowance 
requii-ed  for  the  rise  of  tide,  according  to  his  distance  from  the  nearest 

The  tides  upon  the  coasts  of  France,  Belgium,  and  Holland,  as  well  as 
upon  the  coast  of  England  from  Dover  to  the  North  Foreland,  are  pro- 
duced by  the  tidal  wave,  which  having  traversed  in  about  8  hours  the 
whole  extent  of  the  English  channel,  runs  through  Dover  strait  and 
spreads  into  the  North  sea.  The  flood  stream,  when  at  its  greatest 
strength,  takes  an  E.N.E.  course,  and  its  direction  is  only  changed  near 
the  shore  by  the  bends  of  the  coast. 

The  tides  upon  the  English  coast  to  tho  northward  of  the  North  Fore- 
land are  produced  by  a  similar  tidal  wave,  which  after  having  doubled  the 
British  islands  to  the  north,  extends  to  tho  southward  along  the  eastern 
coasts  of  Scotland  and  ^England,  and  runs  directly  tovrords  the  estuary  of 
the  Thames.  The  flood  stream,  when  at  its  greatest  strength,  runs  parallel 
with  the  English  coast,  but  when  it  has  reached  the  partdlel  of  Orfordness, 
and  the  Thames  opens  out,  it  turns  to  the  W.S.W.  in  an  opposite  direction 
to  that  which  the  flood  stieam  follows  near  the  coast  of  France.  But  as 
the  changes  in  the  tides  in  the  offing  occur  later  than  the  times  of  high  and 
low  water  on  the  shore  in  proportion  as  the  positions  where  they  take  place 
are  distant  from  the  land,  the  stream  of  flood  on  the  Freucu  coast  is  evi- 
dently mixed,  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  Gabbard  and  Galloper  bunks 
with  the  ebb  stream  which  runs  out  of  the  mouth  of  the  Thames. 

CAUTION. — Mariners  should  bear  in  miud  that  the  streams  in  tho 
offing  in  the  North- sea  as  well  as  in  the  Channel,  are  not  signs  to  indicate 
the  rise  and  fall  of  the  tide  as  they  are  upon  the  shore  ;  for  a  vessel  would 
be  exposed  to  the  greatest  danger  if  she  ran  with  the  strcatn  of  flood 
towards  a  shoal  lying  far  from  the  land,  under  the  idea  that  in  consequence 
of  the  direction  of  the  sti-eam  the  water  was  still  rising  upon  tlie  shoal,  and 


180 


CAPE  GBIS-NEZ  TO  DUXKERQUE. 


[CHJLP.  IV 


that  she  mi^^ht  venture  to  cro»s  it«  The  flood  stream  onlj  ceases  to  be  felt 
in  the  vicinitj  of  some  of  those  banks  which  lie  the  fiuthest  out  from  the 
coasts  of  France  and  Belgium,  when  it  is  nearly  low  water  on  the  shore. 
When  desirous  of  crossing  a  bank  lying  within  15  or  16  miles  of  the  French 
coast,  an  approximate  calculation  should  always  be  made  of  the  number  of 
feet  the  tide  has  risen  above  the  soundings  marked  on  the  chart. 


181 


Table  giviog  the  Directitm  and  Rate  of  the  Tidal  atreams 
Ordinary  springB  in  the  southern  part  of  the  Nwth  h 


during 


Fodtiotu. 

Tidal  Stnun. 

Timewtth 

Dlicctloa 

BUo. 

i 

N.N.E..  U  mil«>  trom  Cpe  Oris- 

Flood     -       -       - 
Biidafebb   - 

h-m. 

0  Matter 

»    K    ~. 

1  lob^ron 

N.B.toN.- 

KnolL 

1 

l"* 

B.by  SnH  mlleatram  BonUi  ?ore- 

fAi.:   : 

KndotBbb-       - 

1    o'befoTe 

B.y.B.     • 

WM.W.       . 

E 

E 

N^^jjU   milei    trom   Cpe 

Bbb      -      -       • 

4  SQberbte 

:s-  ■ 

*i 

1   « 

"^.i^to'a"""*'^'" 

Flood    -      -       . 

End  01  flood'       ■ 

E^ofJbb  I       " 

1    SObelore 

But    -       ■ 

'1 

to 

3    0 

N.B.  i  B,  S  mUea  tiom  CUaI« 

Flood    ■       ■       • 

0  tauter 

G    M    . 

B.b,_l..     . 

al 

333 

M.E..  141  milM  from  Calau  light, 
houtt. 

Flood    -      -      . 

Ei-goffloca:   ; 

Bud  or  Ebb-      - 

t    Mkfter 

I    Wb^foio 

1    20    . 

K.N.B.        - 

r* 
1^ 

ilo 

N.E.  1  N.  30  milM  tMm  IMn- 

End  of  Bbb   •       - 

1    Mtner 

E.byN.     - 
W.by^B.     - 

»■» 

^ 

IT:   :   : 

Bgdolflood-       . 
E^  or  ebb  ■'      : 

3    10    . 
3     Ota!r«n 

LVj-   : 

1-3 
33 

1~0 
1  30 

Flood    -       -      - 

£^  01  flood-      '. 
Bbb       -       . 
End  ol  ebb   -       . 

S   3alMfore 

But    -       - 

■w.n!w.    . 

1-0 
3-0 

to 
ilo 

IntheZuydoooteftu.    - 

FlMd     -       .       . 

x^or^b  ■     '. 

B!N.B."ft  e" 
EMt    -        - 

W.bjN.    - 
West  -       - 

3-6 

*-o 

30 

ilo 

K.bvE.lE..2emn«alrom(UHa 

llBithOUM. 

Bndofebb  -      . 

sssr 

3    SO  before 
0    43    „ 

B,N.E.        - 
W.S.W.       - 

li 

- 

N.N^.^  W  mllM  bom  CU>li 

Bbb      -      -      - 
Ejjdofebb.       - 

End  of  flood-      ■ 

2    SOKlter 

!  i'fr 

B.N,B.        - 

W,8,-W.       - 

1-T 

E 

ortli-«utern  itra&ni  li  the  obh,  and  tlie  wuCb- 


GENERAL  REMARKS —Though  a 

taken  from  south  to  north,  Avould  tleclino  nearly  in 
highest  part  of  which  would  be  the  southern  shore, 
would  decline  in  a  contrary  direction,  or  from  nc 
distinguishing  features  do  not  so  immediately  man 
sighting  these  islands  from  the  westward.    Seen  fro 
at  any  considerable  distance,  both  Guernsey  and  J( 
low  land  of  Braye  du  Yalle  in  the  former  island,  an 
in  the  latter,  being  yet  in  the  horizon.    The  outline  • 
is  somewhat  more  irregular  than  that  of  Jersey ;  the 
former  is  also  clothed  with  more  verdure  than  that  of 
of  a  deeper  shade.    St.  Ouen  bay,  in  Jersey,  has  suife 
the  encroachments  of  the  sea-sand ;  so  much  so,  tl 
western  land  between  La  Corbi^re  point  and  L'Etac  p 
with  it.* 

ASPECT  of  GUERNSEY.— The  most  reu 
first  present  themselves  when  running  for  the  south-w* 
are  the  light-tower  on  the  Hanois  rocks,  the  white  cas 
Grey  in  the  centre  of  the  sandy  bay  of  Rocquain 
boose^  Toriieval  church  spire^  and  the  tower  of  L'l 
at  the  northern  part  of  the  above  bay,  near  Lihoi 
goard-hoose  is  on  the  heights  to  the  southward  o 
apex  of  the  bluff.  Torteval  church,  with  its  roun 
by  a  hig^  steeple^  stands  at  a  little  distance  inland ; 
in  this  quarter  of  thA  iai«*»^  _  .-^^    - 


CHAP.  T.]  CHANNEL  ISLANDS.  — REFRACTION.  183 

gradually  to  rise  from  the  horizon  ;  presenting  a  surface  diversified  with 
bouses,  churches,  windmills,  and  groups  of  trees ;  and  which  are  still 
more  conspicuous  if  seen  from  a  north-westerly  position. 

All  the  western  shore  of  Guernsey  is  studded  with  precipitous  rocks, 
many  of  which  are  wholly  detached  from  the  land.  On  the  high  land 
above  St.  Martin  point,  at  the  south-east  end  of  the  island,  a  stone  column, 
96  feet  high,  having  its  apex  424  feet  above  the  level  of  low  water, 
ordinary  springs,  has  been  erected,  in  honour  of  Lieut.*Greneral  Sir  John 
Doyle.  Another  remarkable,  as  well  as  beautiful  object,  is  the  Victoria 
tower  (100  feet  high,  and  322  feet  above  low  water),  erected  on  the 
heights  above  the  town  of  St.  Peter  port;  to  commemorate  the  visit  of 
Her  Majesty  the  Queen  in  1846.  It  is  a  square  tower,  slightly  tapering 
from  its  base,  surmounted  by  a  battlemented  gallery,  with  square  turrets  at 
its  angles. 

ASPECT  of  JERSEY,— The  approach  to  Jersey  from  the  west- 
ward is  mai'ked  nearly  in  a  similar  manner  to  that  of  Guernsey.  The  first 
objects  seen  are  the  churches  of  St.  Peter  and  St.  Ouen ;  St.  Ouen  wind- 
mill with  an  extensive  range  of  buildings  on  the  sandy  heights,  called  St. 
Ouen  barracks;  and  now  and  then  the  turret  of  St.  Mary  church  together 
with  that  of  Princes  tower  or  Hougue  Bie,  will  appear  horn  among  the 
trees  in  the  interior  of  the  island.  St.  Peter  and  St.  Ouen  churches  stand 
high :  the  steeple  of  the  former  is  lofty,  that  of  the  latter  merely  a  turret. 
On  a  nearer  view  the  six  martello  towers  on  the  sandy  beach  in  St.  Ouen 
bay  will  present  themselves,  and  also  the  Corbi^re  rock,  with  the  declining 
land  to  the  south-eastward ;  the  surface  of  which  latter  is  covered  with 
wood,  and  its  base  with  sand  and  rock. 

Such  are  the  features  which  characterize  Guernsey  and  Jersey,  nor  can 
they  be  mistaken  even  by  a  stranger.  In  clear  weather  these  islands  may 
be  seen  from  a  distance  of  25  miles. 

REFRACTION. — To  show  the  strange  effects  of  refraction,  it  may 
be  noticed,  that  from  a  station  near  Verclut  guard-house  in  Jersey,  the  top 
of  the  south-eastern  battlement  of  Seymour  tower  exactly  coincides  with 
the  line  of  the  visible  horizon  at  low  water  equinoctial  spring  tides  ;  some- 
times, however,  when  viev^ed  from  the  same  position,  it  has  appeared  con- 
siderably below  that  line,  and  in  several  instances  above  it.  In  this  case 
the  line  of  sight  passes  partially  over  the  surface  of  the  rocky  ledge  called 
the  Violet  bank,  and  over  the  sandy  strand  in  its  vicinity,  as  well  as  over 
the  sea,  and  is  at  a  mean  height  of  64  feet  above  it.  Similar  variations  in 
the  refraction  have  been  observed  on  the  French  coast,  between  the  steeple 
of  Coutances  and  the  summit  of  the  trees  in  that  neighbourhood,  and  also 
in  the  vicinity  of  Cancale. 


184  CilANNEL  ISLANDS.  [chap.  t. 

As  there  i«  much  low  laml  about  thin  part  of  the  coast^  and  extensive 
outlying  reefs  which  dry  at  low  water,  these  occasional  changes  ia  the 
appearance  of  objects  must  lie  com^idered  and  allowed  for. 

WINDS  and  WEATHER.— The  prevailing  winds  among  the 
Channel  blands  in  the  winter  are  those  between  SJS.E.,  rounded  by  the 
south  and  W.N.W.  ;  the  latter,  however,  is  most  predominant :  and  it  is 
fortunate  that  against  the  occasional  furious  effects  of  this  wind  Guernsey 
and  Jersey  should  offer  such  good  security  for  shipping.  During  the 
summer  months,  vernal  and  autumnal  equinoxes,  the  winds  appear  variable 
and  uncertain. 

There  is  an  opinion  that  easterly  winds  last  longer  when  they  set  in^ 
and  Hct  in  with  more  uniformity  in  this  neighbourhood  than  has  been 
olitorvcul  t*liu*whero  during  the  winter  season.  Southerly  and  south- 
wo«(orly  wiiidM  thiring  that  i>criod  are  almost  universally  accompanied 
with  or  follow  «id  by  st4»rmy  weather,  which  seldom  or  ever  clears  up  until 
lh«t  wind  oliangtw  to  tho  north-west,  as  it  almost  invariably  does. 

U'U«>  »tat0  of  the  wi^thor,  as  well  as  the  direction  and  force  of  the  wind, 
ill  tho  vicinity  id  Aldoruov,  docs  not  always  correspond  with  that  at 
(^iiiTiuHty  and  Jonun'  i  Iteiiig  frequently  local  or  peculiar  to  itself  ;  owing 
povhaiM  to  tho  i»lund  being  in  the  immediate  vortex  of  the  tides,  which 
are  in  a  constant  state  of  rotation :  and  this  more  particularly  during  the 
new  9isxd  full  moon.  At  those  periods,  a  difference  of  four  points  has 
been  experienceil ;  viz.,  the  wind  from  £.  by  N.  at  Guernsey  and  Serk, 
and  from  N.E.  by  N.  at  Alderney,  both  blowing  at  the  same  time  on 
a  South-western  tide,  L'ghtly  or  moderately  in  the  neighbourhood 
of  the  former,  while  vessels  near  the  latter  were  under  double-reefed 
sails. 

Upon  a  north-eastern  stream  the  wind  has  often  been  found  S.W.  by  W. 
at  Alderney,  while  at  Henn  it  blew  West,  with  similar  variety  in  strength ; 
and  this  without  any  perceptible  cause  (the  attraction  of  the  tides  ex- 
cepted) or  any  difierenoe  in  the  barometer  at  the  two  places.  The 
southerly,  south-easterly,  northerly,  and  north-easterly  winds,  also  inva- 
riably blow  from  Alderney  in  strong  irr^ular  gusts ;  more  particularly  the 
first  and  last. 

Gales  of  wind  from  S.W.  and  N.W.  send  in  the  heaviest  sea  amongst 
the  Islands,  to  which  the  strength  of  the  tides  greatly  contribute;  the 
worst  period  is  from  half  flood  to  half  ebb,  after  which  the  westerly  stream 
keeps  much  of  the  sea  out  in  the  offing. 

THE  APPROACHES  to  the  Channel  islands  present  peculiar 
difficulties  to  the  stranger.  The  outlying  rocks  fronting  their  coasts;  the 
strength  and  ever  varying  direction  of  the  tidal  stream,  and  the  rough  sea 
occasioned  by  it  in  bad  weather  are  all  elements  of  danger ;  nevertheless 


cuAP.v.]  WINDS  AND  W£ATHBB ;   SOUNDINGS.  186 

most  of  these  difficulties  maj  be  o?eroomc  bj  the  skilful  beaman,  a{»iited 
hy  a  careftil  study  of  the  charts  and  sailing  directions. 

SOUNDINGS. — ^Near  the  coasts  of  the  Channel  islands  and  between 
them  there  is  nothing  remarkable  in  the  soundings,  either  in  de|)th  or 
quality  of  the  ground,  to  assist  the  mariner  uncertain  of  his  position. 
But  to  vessels  approaching  from  the  westward  in  thick  weather  it  may  be 
useful  to  note  the  following  facts ;  namely, — ^That  nothing  less  than  35 
fathoms  (at.  low  water)  will  be  obtained  in  the  offing  outsido  (or  westward 
of)  the  Roches  Douvres,  and  Guernsey ;  nor  less  than  33  fathoms  between 
Guernsey  and  the  Casquets ;  excepting  on  some  of  the  very  smaJl  gravel 
knolls  near  Hurd  Deep^  where  as  little  as  20  fathoms  may  perhaps  be 
found  ;  such  knolls,  however,  may  be  easily  distinguished  from  the  large 
banks  near  and  amongst  the  islands,  by  their  very  inferior  sice,  as  well  as 
the  greater  depths  by  which  they  are  surrounded. 

An  increase  of  depth  from  40  to  50  and  60  fatlioms  would  indicate  a 
position  N.W.  of  Guernsey,  somewhere  near  the  west  end  of  Hurd  Deep, 
and  if  between  70  and  100  fathoms  such  depth  could  only  be  obtained 
north  of  the  Casquets  and  Aldemey,  near  the  east  end  of  the  Deep.  The 
bottom  of  Hurd  Deep  is  remarkable  for  large  patches  of  black  mod, 
although  there  is  also  much  rocky  ground  there,  and  other  substances. 
Between  the  Deep  and  the  islands,  as  well  as  amongst  them,  the  ground 
is  all  much  of  the  same  character;  consisting  of  rock,  gravel,  granitic 
sand,  and  coarse  ground ;  excepting  near  the  banks,  round  the  bases  of 
which  it  is  all  fine  sand. 

Within  the  Channel  islands,  from  Aldemey ,down  to  Jersey,  the  sound- 
ings are  a  safe  guide,  in  approaching  the  French  coast  to  within  a  reasonable 
distance.  A  line  drawn  from  the  east  end  of  one  to  the  other  of  those 
islands  would  be  nearly  parallel  to  the  French  coast,  and  distant  from  it 
about  9  miles ;  at  the  north  part  of  this  line  near  A.lderney  there  is  25 
fathoms  over  clean  ground,  and  to  the  southward  near  Jersey  20  fathoms 
vnth  coarse  rotten  ground,  and  occasionally  oyster  beds.  Within  this  line 
the  water  shoals  very  gradually  towards  the  coast.  Southwanl  of  Jersey 
the  numerous  reefs  render  all  approach  to  the  coast  by  a  stranger  very 
hazardous. 

Heavy  gales  of  wind  are  found  to  cause  very  considerable  alterations 
in  the  appearance  of  outlying  sand-banks,  as  well  as  of  the  exposed  beaches 
of  the  islands;  south-westerly  gales  sending  in  and  heaping  up  large 
quantities  of  sand  and  shingle,  and  those  from  north-east  washing  them 
away.  It  is  well  known  that  the  Chateau  and  Ecreviere  banks  (eastward 
of  Jersey)  vary  as  much  as  6  feet  in  height  from  this  cause  ;  and  it  is 
probable,  therefore,  that  the  Banc  la  Scheie,  the  Casquets,  and  other 
banks,  also  vary  from  similar  causes. 


18C  CflANNEL  ISLANDS.  [chaf.t. 

All  the^e  ▼ariablo  banks,  howe^-er,  consist  of  fine  flftnd  and  grmTel, 
having  sharp  ridgy  apexos,  and  are  not,  tbereforey  verj  dangerom  to 
shipping,  only  for  the  confused  sea  occasioned  by  the  tide  rippling  over 
them  in  bad  weather. 

Tides. — Near  Guernsey,  and  northward  of  that  isUmd,  the  true  Chan- 
nel stream  prevails  ;  the  great  body  of  the  flood  running  about  E.  by  N* 
whilst  the  tide  is  rising  at  Dover,  and  the  ebb  W.S.W.  when  it  is  falling 
at  that  place ;  but  near  the  Roches  Douvres,  and  to  the  eastward^  the  flood 
stream  sets  S.E.  into  the  gulf  of  St.  Malo,  and  the  ebb  N.W.  out  of  it ; 
the  change  in  the  latter  section  of  the  stream  taking  place  an  hour  after 
high  and  low  water  by  the  shore  respectively,  and  near  the  time  of  haU 
flood  and  half  ebb  at  Dover. 

Thus  what  is  called  tide  and  half  tide  prevails  at  Guernsey  and 
amongst  the  islands  to  the  N.E.,  whilst  at  Jersej,  and  along  the  southern 
shore  of  the  gulf,  as  well  as  out  to  the  westward  near  the  Roches  Douvres, 
the  stream  is  more  regular ;  the  former  resulting  from  the  direct  action 
of  the  channel  stream,  the  latter  from  an  interruption  of  the  southern 
portion  of  tliut  sti-cam  by  the  coast  of  France,  and  its  diversion  into  the 
gulf  of  St.  Malo. 

The  centre  of  the  Deroutc  channel,  between  the  Roches  Douvres  and 
Guernsey,  may  be  considered  to  mark  the  separating  boundary  of  these 
two  streams,  for  along  this  line  and  to  the  eastward  they  successively  run 
side  by  side  together,  blend,  and  separate,  in  alternating  'direction  and 
force,  depending  on  the  state  of  tide.  It  should  here  be  noted  that 
the  tidal  stream  around  and  between  the  Channel  islands  has  a  rotary 
motion  (caused  by  the  differences  in  the  action  of  the  stream  above  de- 
scribed, and  the  peculiar  form  of  the  shores  of  the  gulf,)  from  right  to 
left  ;  going  right  round  the  compass  in  little  more  than  12  hours,  an  ebb 
and  a  flood.  It  is  also  worthy  of  remai'k  that^  in  consequence  of  these 
differences,  the  action  of  the  streams  near  the  northern  part  of  the  gulf, 
north  of  cape  La  Hague  and  Alderney,  and  along  itsj  southern  shore,  out 
to  the  Roches  Douvres,  are  nearly  the  revei'se  of  each  other  ;  there  being 
slack  tide  at  one  of  these  places  when  the  sti'eam  is  running  at  its 
maximum  rate  at  the  other,  and  vice  versa. 

About  the  time  of  half  ebb  at  Dover  and  first  quarter  flood  by  the 
shore  at  Guernsey,  the  stream  sets  sharply  into  the  gulf  on  both  sides 
and  continues  to  run  in,  south-eastward,  until  half-flood  by  the  shore  and 
slack  and  change  of  stream  in  the  offing,  both  of  which  occur  nearly 
simultaneously  with  low  water  at  Dover.  A  division  of  the  Deroute 
stream  now  takes  place  ;  the  northern  part  sweeping  to  the  E.N.E. 
through  the  Russel,  Swinge,  and  Race  channels,  and  then  uniting  with 
the  east  going  Channel  stream,  northward  of  Alderney ;  the  southern  part 


fiHiRV.]  TIDAL  BTEBAMS;    CATTTION.  187 

near  the  Roches  DonrreB  setting  into  the  dripth  of  the  gulf  b)  the  S.E. 
pf»t  Jersey  and  the  Miaqniers,  until  near  high  water  bj  the  shore ;  after 
whidi,  although  the  main  body  of  the  itream  to  the  southward  etacks,  its 
northern  border  tums  oS  past  Jeraey  to  the  north-eastward  and  into  the 
Deroute  stream. 

.' The  ebb  stream  begins  to  mn  out  to  the  westward  close  in  along  tJie 
sontbem  shore  of  the  gulf  soon  after  high  water  ;  oat  in  the  Channel 
within  the  Boches  Douvres  an  hour  later ;  at  a  position  8  miles  N.W,  of 
the  Roches  Douvree  the  stream  changes  at  2  hours  ebb ;  and  farther  to  the 
Dfsihward  near  GruemBey,  aa  already  noticed,  the  slack  and  change  <rf 
stream  takes  place  soon  after  half  ebb  hy  the  shore,  at  which  period  the 
Westerly  stream  also  makes  down  through  the  Bace,  Swinge,  and  Bnssel 
channels. 

.  It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  St.  Heller,  Jersey,  at  6b.  29m. 
mean  spring  range  31^  feet;  at  Guemseyi  6h.  37m.  mean  spring  range 
26  feet ;  and  at  Alderney,  6h.  46m.,  mean  spring  range  17^  feet.*  Out  in 
the  offing  westward  of  Guernsey  the  stream  seldom  exceeds  3  knots,  until 
the  island  is  approached,  near  which  it  sometimes  attains  the  rate  o£ 
4^  knots.  In  the  Bussel  channels  it  exceeds  5  knots,  and  it  runs  about 
the  same  rate  between  .Tersey  and  the  Minquiers,  and  nearly  4  knots  in 
the  centre  of  the  Deroiite  channel  between  Jersey  and  Serk.  The  Race 
and  Swiuge  streams  sometimes  attain  the  rate  or  more  than  7  knots. 
.  The  rapidity  with  which  the  tides  rise  and  fall,  and  their  velocity, 
are . greatly  inflnenced  by  strong  north-eastern  and  south-western  gales  of 
wind :  the  former  i-etardisg  and  the  latter  accelerating  their  progress  in  a 
V«r7  remarkable  degree  ;  the  latter  will  also  cause  the  Race  stream  to  run 
three-quarters  of  an  hour  longer  to  the  north-eastward  than  it  otherwise 
would  do,  though  the  former  has  not  a  similar  effect  upon  the  stream 
when  ruilning  to  the  south-westward. 

The  tides  put  in  and  take  off  in  all  this  neighbourhood  Very  suddenly, 
and  the  general  run  of  the  springs  takes  place  about  half  an  hour  (earlier 
than  the  neaps. 

Caution. — A  constant  and  careful  allowance  should  always  be  made 
for  the  set  of  the  stream.  If  approaching  from  the  westward,  and  to  the 
southward  of  Alderney  a  sontb-easterly  set  may  certainly  be  expected, 
which  will  increase  in  intensity  on  nearing  Guernsey ;  and  between  that 
island  and  the  Roches  Donvres  a  considerable  indraught  is  always  found, 
especially  in  N.W.  gales. 

If  a  vessel  should  happen  to  be  near  the  islands  during  a  long  winter's 
night,  but  to  the  westward  -withal,  the  following  observations  may  be 

*  Ihe  avtrjige  daiation  of  tbe  flood  stream  U  S|  hours,  and  of  the  ebb  6  J  honra. 


1S8  CHAKNEL  ISLANDS.  [chat.t. 

wurtli  €*oiiiit(l«*nition.  With  northerly^  north-westorlj,  and  westerly  winds, 
ic  woiiltl  III  it  U.*  prudent  to  lay  her  head  to  the  north-eastward,  between 
the  iftvriodi  of  low  wati-r  and  half-flood,  unlets  the  depth  of  water  exceeds 
31  fachoiiH,  iNxtuiHo  during  that  interval  the  wind  and  tide  unite  in 
driving  the  ship  to  tlir  Fouth-4'ai«tward.  It  is  equal! j  imprudent  with 
southerly,  soutli-wcHti'rly,  and  westerly  winds,  to  lay  a  Tessera  head  to 
the  south-eastwanl  lietween  half-flood  and  high  water  for  the  same  reasoiii 
th(*  wind  and  tide  contributing  to  drive  her  to  the  north-eastward. 

With  all  eat^terly  windu  the  islamls  become  a  weath^  shore,  and  may 
conMH|uently  Ik*  maile  fm*  with  as  discretion  may  point  out.  Further: 
a  |K)!(ition  ordiffMirturc  taken  before  dark  may,  by  attention  to  the  set  of 
the  streaniH,  be  presi*rv<*d  within  3  or  4  miles,  provided  a  vessel  can  carry 
elose-ntefed  top-stiiU  and  fore-sail,  as  what  may  be  lofit  on  one  tide  will  be 
nearly  n»guined  on  the  next,  if  tlie  wind  will  enable  her  to  lie  across  either. 
This  eulculation  muy  Im)  mmle  with  a  degree  of  certainty  off  St.  Malo, 
Granville,  and  cape  Flamanville 

When  making  the  Ca^quets  or  any  of  the  rocks  or  islands  in  thkk 
fo^f^y  weather,  never  run  close  home  with  the  stream,  but  wait  until  the 
turning  of  the  }(tream  would  set  you  off  shore  in  the  event  of  getting  into 
diinpT  suddenly. 

In  west^Tly  piles  always  avoid  {msHlng  close  to  windward  of  any  of  the 
banks  on  a  weather  tide  ;  and  it  will  be  as  well  to  remember,  that  on  such 
ocea<tion8,  whilst  the  western  stream  is  running  in  the  offing,  there  is  a 
very  heavy  sea  to  the  westward  of  the  islands  and  comparatively  smooth 
water  within  them,  ami  along  the  coast  of  France;  so  that  a  small  vessel 
leaving  Alderney  at  2  hours  ebb,  and  pushing  through  the  Bace  before 
the  W.S.W.  stream  makes  down,  could  rim  a  considerable  distance  towards 
Jersey  in  smooth  water. 

On  entering  or  leaving  any  of  the  narrow  channels  between  the  islands 
be  careful  to  make  early  allowance  for  the  different  sets  of  tide,  sure  to  be 
met  with  at  such  places. 

GUERNSEY.— The  island  of  Guernsey  is  nearly  in  the  form  of  a 
right-angled  triangle,  the  north-west  side  forming  the  hypothenuse,  the 
length  of  which  is  about  8  miles.  The  land  on  the  south  side  is  comparatively 
high  and  steep,  its  general  elevation  being  about  300  feet,  (the  highest  part 
of  the  island  is  Hautnez,  over  Icart  bay,  which  is  363  feet  above  the  level 
of  low  water,")  but  it  gradually  lowers  towards  the  north,  where  in  some 
places  it  is  little  above  the  sea.  The  island  is  encompassed  with  many 
dangerous  rocks,  the  principal  of  which  are  the  Hanois,  Sambule,  and 
G  runes,  on  the  west  and  north-west  sides  ;  the  Braye  rocks  with  several 
others  on  the  north  side  ;  and    on  the  north-east  and  east  sides  lie  the 


CHAP,  v.]  GUERNSEY.— ST.  PST^B  POET.  189 

Amfroque  rocks,  together  with  tlie  islands  of  Herm  and  Jethoai  which 
are  also  surrounded  by  numerous  rocks  and  ledges. 

Guernsey  contains  16,000  acres  of  land,  which  is  fertile  and  highly 
cultivated,  but  having  a  population  (in  1871)  of  30,667,  it  does  not  grow 
grain  enough,  nor  raise  sufficient  number  of  cattle  to  supply  its  inhabitants. 

ST.  PETER  FORT,  the  capital  of  the  island,  stands  on  the  eastern 
shore  and  in  1870  its  population  nnmbered  about  16,000.  From  the  sea 
it  has  rather  an  imposing  appearance,  but  is  irregularly  built.  It  is  the 
seat  of  government  of  the  northern  division  of  the  Channel  islands,  or 
Bailiwick  as  it  is  termed ;  which  includes  Alderney,  Serk,  Herm,  and 
Jethou.  Its  small  tidal  harbour,  carrying  a  depth  of  20  feet  alongside 
quays  at  high-water  springs,  and  10  feet  at  neaps,  is  now  enclosed  by  a 
new  harbour  formed  between  two  breakwaters,  with  an  average  depth  in 
it  of  10  feet  at  low  water  of  mean  springs. 

The  principal  articles  of  export  are  cider,  apples,  potatoes,  wines,  and 
building  stone,  and  granite  in  a  broken  state  for  the  repair  of  roads.  The 
imports  are  British  manufactures,  wiue,  sugar,  coffee,  grain,  and  cattle ; 
the  two  latter  are  chiefly  from  France.  In  the  year  1862  the  number  of 
vessels  belonging  to  the  port  was  128,  their  total  registered  tonnage  19,679 
tons,  and  they  were  manned  by  1,053  seamen.  At  the  same  period  2,261 
vessels,  of  256^90  tonnage,  entered  inwards,  and  2,185  of  254,288  tonnage, 
cleared  outwards. 

Supplies. — Though  Guernsey  abounds  with  springs,  the  only  accessible 
watering  place  for  vessels  has  hitherto  been  on  its  eastern  side,  at  Fermain 
bay,  about  a  mile  northwar4  of  St.  Martin  point ;  where,  with  the  wind 
from  N.N.E.,  round  westerly  to  S.W.,  boats  provided  with  long  hoses  may 
fill  at  pleasure  almost  any  quantity.  Pipes  are  now  laid  down  from  the 
large  reservoir  at  Havelet  to  the  harbours  ;  where  water  is  applied  at  a 
shilling  the  ton.  St.  Peter  Port  market  furnishes  fresh  meat,  fish,  vege- 
tables, and  firuit  in  abundance  at  a  cheap  rate. 

ST.  PETER  PORT  HARBOURS.— The  smaU  tidal  harbour 
of  St.  Peter  Port,  4 J  acres  in  area,  is  enclosed  by  piers  of  masonry  35  feet 
high,  with  an  entrance  80  feet  wide,  facing  the  east.  The  depth  at  high 
water  springs  between  the  pier  heads  is  24|  feet,  and  14 1  feet  at  neaps  ;  the 
average  depth  along  the  quays  on  the  same  tides  being  respectively  20  and 
10  feet.  To  the  south-eastward  of  the  harbour  stands  caatle  Cornet,  which 
is  now  connected  with  the  mainland  by  a  massive  granite  causeway. 

The  new  harbour  works  comprise  two  esplanades,  one  on  each  side  of 
the  old  harbour,  running  parallel  with  the  sea  front  of  the  town,  and 
averaging  together  2,500  feet  in  length  and  150  in  breadth.  From  these 
esplanades  extend  two  breakwaters,  one  on  either  side,  and  equi-distant 


190  CHANNEL  ISLANDS. GUEKN8£Y.  [ceut.  v. 

from  the  old  hurbour  ;  Iteiiig  2,500  feet  apart  at  the  base,  and  (irojecting  to 
the  eastward,  so  as  to  enclose  the  natural  saudy  hay  in  front  of  the  town. 

The  south  ot  Castle  breakwater  ia  carried  acrose  the  rocky  isthmus,  hy 
which,  at  low  water  springe,  castle  Cornet  is  connected  with  the  main, 
and  terminalea  at  the  north-west  bastion  of  the  castle,  being  1,900  feet  in 
length.  The  southern  &ce  of  this  breakwater  consists  of  an  upright  wall 
and  parapet,  constructed  of  rough  masoury,  and  carried  to  a  leigbt  ot 
15  feet  abore  the  highest  tides.  Along  this  is  constructed  a  level  road- 
way and  ibotpat|i  40  feet  wide.  On  the  north  side  and  under  the  lee  of 
this  arm  it  is  proposed  to  construct  a  floating  dock.  Farther,  on  this  side, 
a  rough  stone  breakwater  projects  600  feet  eastward  from  the  north-east 
salient  angle  of  castle  Comet ;  its  end  marked  hy  a  handsome  stone 
building,  from  which  is  exhibited  a  powerful  white  light.  These  works 
eftectually  screen  the  entrance  of  the  harbour  from  the  most  exposed 
quai'ter,  the  southward,  and  add  greatly  to  the  security  of  the  anchorage 
in  the  road. 

The  north,  or  St.  JuHen's  breakwater  and  landing  pier,  begins  on  the 
north  side  of  the  old  harbour,  at  the  extremity  of  the  new  esplanade,  and 
extends  in  an  easterly  direction  about  IjiOO  feet,  or  as  far  as  the  head 
of  the  Blanche  rock  ;  whence  it  changes  to  a  southerly  direction,  or 
a  little  outside  the  line  of  castle  Cornet,  for  nearly  900  feet,  leaving  ah 
entrance  between  the  pier  end  and  the  rocks  o£r  castle  Comet  of  only 
370  feet  in  width,  and  completely  sheltering  the  poll  within.  Within  and 
alongside  the  outer  part  of  this  pier  are  three  capital  landing  stages  for 
steamers,  having  9,  8,  and  3  feet  respectively  at  the  lowest  spring  tides, 
at  which  period  there  is  10  feet  at  the  entrance,  neai-  the  end  of  the  pier, 
and  6  feet  near  the  middle  of  Ihe  pool  within.  From  the  middle  of  the 
pool  the  water  shoals  gradually  and  regularly  towards  the  shore.  The 
bottom  of  the  harbour  is  nearly  altogether  line  sand.* 

The  whole  space  enclosed  by  the  works  aboTe  described,  excluwve  of 
the  areas  of  floating  dock,  old  harbour,  careenage,  &c.,  amounts  to  about 
57  acres,  of  which,  however,  only  about  23  acres  are  covered  with  water  at 
the  lowest  tides. 

ST.  PETER  PORT  ROAD  is  in  front  of  the  town,  aud  to  the 
north-eastward  of  castle  Comet.  The  ground  is  excellent  for  holding,  and 
the  road  affords  good  shelter  t^ainst  all  winds,  except  those  from  between 
S.S.W.  and  S.E.,  which  send  in  much  swell  and  sea,  especially  on  the  ebb 
tide.  Under  such  circumstances  it  is  highly  probable  that  smoother 
water  will  be  found  under  the  lee  of  the  Great  bank,  where  a  vessel  wilt 

^  The  depths  SB  well  as  heights,  &c.,  appearing  in  Ibis  Chapter,  and  (he  Admiialtj 
cbart  of  Guernsey  generaUy,  are  reckoned  from  a  zero  near  mean  springs.  The  lowest 
tide  n^steied  at  Gaemse;  from  1868  to  1868  fell  3  feet  9  inches  below  that  xeto. 


CKU.T.]  ST.   P£T£R  FOBT  BOAJ).  — LiaUTS.  191 

be  much  safer  thau  in  tite  roatl,  as  in  the  event  of  parting  from  licr  anckow 
Bhe  might  easily  run  through  the  Little  Itussel  and  anchnr  off  fort  DoyW, 
or  in  L'AnGregse  bay. 

A  vesael  should  moor  in  St.  Peter  Port  road,  with  open  liawee,  to  the 
S.  by  £.,  and  within  the  following  limits: — southern  limit,  St.  Peter 
Port;  church  in  line  with  the  end  of  the  breakwater  off  cnstlc  Comet ; 
northern  limit,  the  beacon  on  the  Sardrette  rook  and  Victoria  tower  in 
line ;  weatei'n  limit,  tlie  outer  angle  of  caatle  Comet  in  one  with  the 
white  beacon  on  Fermaiu  point;  and  eastern  limit,  the  Anfr^  beacon 
in  line  with  left  extreme  of  buildings  on  high  land  over  St.  Martin 
point.  Here  there  are  irom  S  to  II  ^thcms  water,  fine  sand ;  but  farther 
southward  the  bol.tom  is  coarse,  and  the  depth  increasen  to  20  fathoms. 
There  is  a  government  mooring  2^  inch  chain  laid  down  in  5rnthomB,Ktthe 
distance  of  about  a  cable  north.eaatward  of  castle  Comet  breakwater 
lighthouse. 

LIGHTS.— Hanois  light.— The  light  tower  on  the  south-western 
rock  of  the  Hanois  group,  one  mile  oS  the  west  end  of  Guernsey,  exhibits, 
at  100  feet  above  the  level  of  high  water,  a  revolving  red  light  of  the  first 
order,  which  attains  its  greatest  brillancy  every  fvrty-five  seconds,  and 
should  be  seen  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  12  miles.  Tlic  light  is 
visible  all  round  the  western  horizon,  and  obscured  only  to  the  eastward  by 
the  island  of  Guernsey,  between  the  bearings  of  W.  by  S.  (through  west) 
to  ja.W. ;  the  line  of  eclipse  in  this  latter  direction  pasecs  3^  miles  south- 
westward  of  L'Etac  de  Serk,  and  over  the  Pierres  de  Leoq  rocka.  The  light 
tower  is  of  gray  granite,  and  Il7  feet  high  from  base  to  vane;  theCasquets 
bear  from  it  N.E.  by  E.  distant  21^  miles;  the  Corbiere  rock,  Jersey, 
S.S.E.  i  E.,  23^  miles ;  and  the  Boches  Douvres,  S.W.  ^  S.,  20  miles. 

Fog  signal. — A  bell  is  sounded  in  thick  or  foggy  weatlier,  every 
Jljieen  seconds  from  Hanois  lighthouse. 

St.  Peter  Port  lights. — On  the  outer  or  eastern  exti'eme  of  castle 
Cornet  breakwater,  at  the  south  side  of  entrance  to  tbc  outer  harbour  of 
St.  Peter  Port,  is  a  ^xed  white  light  at  an  elevation  of  46  feet  iihove  high 
water,  and  visible  from  a  distance  of  9  miles.  It  shows  as  a  liriffhl  light 
from  north  round  by  east  to  south,  and  as  a  dim  light  lnnd\\'ard,  from  south 
round  by  west  to  north.  Fi'om  the  lighthouse  the  Longue  Pierre  rock  off 
St.  Martin  point  bears  S.S.W.  distant  2  miles  nearly ;  Lower  Heads  rocks 
bnoy  SJE.  by  S.  2J  miles ;  Rousse  rock  E.  by  N.  J  N.  SJ  miles  ;  Plutte 
i-ock  N.E.  by  E.  northerly  2^  miles  j  and  the  Eoustel  rock  N.E.  by  E.  ^  E. 
2^  miles. 

A  Jixeil  red  light  is  exhibited  from  a  wooden  building,  painted  white, 
on  the  south  pier-head  of  the  old  hm-liour  of  St.  Peter  port,  for  the  con- 
venience of  vessels  approaching  the  roadstead  or  harbour.     The  light  is 


192  CHASXEL  ISULKDS. GVEKNSET.  [ch*f.t. 

etevKtfd  34  feet  above  high  viter,  and  may  be  seen  wheo  coining  through 
the  LdttleRouel  from  the  northward,  the  Great  Buwel  [rom  the  eastward, 
and  alito  from  the  soathwanl  when  St.  Martin  point  ia  rounded. 

Frero  the  extreraitj  of  the  oortheru  jetty,  a  Jixed  yreen  light  ia  ex- 
hibited. 

Caation. — Vessels  bound  tn  Guernsey  from  the  westward  should 
not  qtproach'the  island  in  thick  weather  within  the  depth  of  40  or  38  fathoms, 
unless  their  position  has  been  previotuly  well  ascertained.  Careful 
aUowance  should  shto  be  made  for  the  flood  etreMu  setting  in  fix'  the 
island. 

The  wftter  i»  deep  at  a  quarter  of  a  mile  westward  of  the  Hanois 
lighthouse,  but  dangerous  rocks  extend  to  the  S.S.W.  for  a  third  of  a 
mile  ;  to  the  N.N.W.  three-quarters  of  a  noiie,  uid  to  the  northvrard  one 
mile  from  the  lighthouse.  The  Grune  de  TOuest,  or  du  Nord-Onai,  a 
rock  that  dries  10  feet  at  low  water  springs  and  which  has  hitherto 
been  considered  the  northernmost  danger  ofi  Guernsey,  bears  N.E.  |  E., 
Dearly  5  miles  from  the  lighthouse;  bnt  as  several  dangerous  sunken 
rocks  have  been  discovered  outside  it,  the  western  of  which,  the  Bone 
Blondel.hss  only  5  fathoms  on  it,  and  bears  from  the  lighthouse  N.N.E. 
3|  miles,  it  is  recommended  that,  to  clear  all  these  dangers,  vesseb  from 
the  south  and  west  passing  westward  of  Guernsey  at  night,  should  not 
bring  the  Haoois  light  westward  of  South  until  the  Casquets  light  bears 
EJf.E. 

Anoborage.  —  There  are  several  anchorages  on  the  south  side 
of  Guernsey,  where,  with  the  wind  off  the  Inud,  a  vessel  may  stop  a  tide; 
but  as  they  would  not  be  safe  for  a  stranger  to  approach,  a  vessel  not 
having  a  pilot  should  not  close  the  coast  so  as  to  shut  in  the  north  point 
of  Serk  with  Jerbourg  bluff, 

St.  Peter  Port  road,  as  already  noticed,  affords  good  shelter,  except  with 
the  wind  between  S.S.W.  and  S.E.,  and  the  anchorage  is  excellenL 

Tbere  is  good  anchorage  at  the  north  end  of  the  Great  bank,  on  the 
east  side  of  the  island,  as  well  as  in  Petit  Fort,  on  the  south  coast ;  also 
on  the  north  cosst  off  Fort  Doyle,  and  L'Ancresse,  Grand  Havre,  Cobo 
and  Vszon  bays ;  but  at  most  of  these  places  it  would  4>e  necessary  to 
employ  a  pilot.  Rocquaine  and  Perelle  bays  are  very  dangerous,  and, 
together  with  the  intermediate  coast,  quite  nnlit  for  any  bnt  the  smallest 
vessels  to  approach. 

Pilotage.  —  By  ordinance  of  the  Hoyal  Court  of  Guernsey  it  Is 
enacted,  that  every  pilot  boat  shall  carry  a  flag,  half  red  and  half  white, 
the  white  part  being  placed  uppermost;  the  letter  P  shall  be  marked  in 
black  on  the  white  part,  and  the  pilots  number  in  white  on  the  red  parts 
near  the  centre  of  the  flag: — the  whole  under  the  penalty  of  a  fine,  at  tbt 


OT1F.T.]       ST.   FBTBU  TOBX. — ^AHCHORAaE. — ^PILOTAGE.       193 

diBonjtiwt  or  the  ooort.  And  that  everjr  ship  or  veisel  of  above  60  tonn 
burthen,  new  admeasarement,  shall  be  bound  to  take  a  pilot,  both  on  her 
arrival  in  tbu  isluid  and  on  her  departure,  on  pain  of  paying  the  HHaal 
pilotage  to  the  pilot  who  shall  first  have  presented  himself  for  the  purpose 
of  ondertaldng  the  conduct  or  pUoUge  thereof. 

St«am  vesselB  and  yachts  are  excepted,  also  ships  or  vessels  putting  into 
the  roads  in  consequence  of  stress  of  weather  or  contrary  winds,  and 
putting  to  sea  again;  provided  they  do  not  load  or  unload  either  mer- 
chandise or  ballast.  In  case  of  a  pilot  being  prevented  by  tempestuous 
weather  from  getting  on  board  a  ship  or  vessel  at  sea,  such  ship  or  vessel 
and  tile  pilot  boat  shall  so  manage  aa  to  enable  the  pilot  boat  to  take  the 
lead  and  serve  as  a  guide ;  and  such  ship  or  vessel  shall  pay  the  same 
inlotage  as  if  the  pilot  had  actually  gone  on  board. 

Ratet  of  Pilotage. 


— 

Ve»Bds8bo*e 

50  tons 
bnrthen  and 
uDderSOtoiia 

VeMdsof 
BOtODoaDdup 
to  100  toot. 

VeSMieof 
100  tons  and 
aptoSSOtoni 

VesMlsot 

S50  touB 

BDdupwardc. 

Tothepyot  who  6h»llh»ve 
brou^t  ■  TCBiel  from  sea 
into  the  roads. 

To  the  pilot  of  the  hnTbonr  of 

boar. 

0  10    6 
0    7     0 

e  ..  d. 

1     0     0 
0  10     0 

£   ..    d. 

1     S    0 

0  IS     0 

£  ».  a. 

1  10    0 
I     0    0 

0  n   s 

1   10    0 

a   0   0 

2  10    0 

Tidal  Streams. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  St.  Peter 
Fort  harbour  at  6h.  37m. ;  equinoctial  springs  rise  33  feet,  ordinary  springs 
26  feet,  neaps  18|  feet,  and  neeps  range  11^  ft.  The  general  level  of  the 
sea  is  liable  to  be  depressed  or  elevated,  between  2  and  3  feet,  by  strong 
easterly  or  westerly  winds, 

The  eastern  stream  or  flood  makes  close  in  shore,  along  the  south  and 
north-western  coast  of  Guernsey,  soon  after  low  water  ;  vhilst  the  south- 
western stream  is  still  running  at  ita  strength  in  the  offing  4  miles  west- 
ward of  the  island ;  between  these  positions  the  streams  vary  in  strengtli 
and  direction  as  one  or  the  other  is  approached. 

The  flood  stream  between  Guernsey  and  the  rocks  projecting  from  the 

south-west  end  of  Jethon  island,  takes  two  different  directions  ;  one  part 

runs  directly  through  the  Great  road  and  thence  into  the  Little  Rosael; 

another  branches  oS  near^  at  right  angles  from  the  former  and  runs  to 

Q  704».  X 


10^  CHAHSTEL  ISLANDS. — OUEBNSEr.  [chap.  r. 

the  eastward,  towards  Jethou,  and  tfarough  the  before-mentioned  rotiks 
into  tlie  Great  Riusel.  The  ebb  etreom  runs  directly  the  reverae}  the 
stream  from  the  Great  Russel  uniting  with  that  in  the  road,  after  it  baa 
passed  the  rocks  at  Jethou,  whence  the;  both  set  to  the  Bouth-weetwuid. 
By  bringing  the  Grande  Brsye  rock  a  boat's  length  open  westward  of 
BrehoD  tower,  a  vessel  will  keep  ia  the  former  draught,  or  road-tide,  and 
the  said  rock,  if  brought  in  one  with  Brehon  tower,  will  place  her  in 
the  latter,  or  indraught  of  the  Great  RusseL  A  reesel  working  into 
Guernsey  road  from  the  southward  will  derive  great  advantage  by  paying 
attention  to  this  division  of  the  stream. 

It  is  high  water  in  the  Great  and  Little  Bussel  channels  at  the  same 
time  as  at  St.  Peter  Port,  and  the  streams  run  nearly  6^  hours  on  each 
tide,  allowing  better  than  half  an  hour  for  high  and  bw  water  slack.  In 
the  Great  Russel  the  strength  of  the  flood  stream  runs  E.NJ].,  and  the 
ebb  W.S.W.,  and  in  the  Little  Russel  the  strength  of  the  flood  runs 
N.E.  ^  E.,  and  the  ebb  S.W.  J  W.,  nearly.  At  the  north-eastern  entrance, 
however,  of  the  Little  Russel,  between  the  Braye  and  the  Amfroque  rocks, 
the  stream  lakes  the  direction  of  that  in  the  offing,  viz.,  the  lirst  two  hoiurs 
of  the  flood  sets  directly  for  the  north  end  of  Herm  island,  gradually  join- 
ing the  south-western  stream  in  the  Russel,  and  the  kst  hour  of  the  flood 
as  well  as  the  first  of  the  ebb. 

To  understand  the  various  sets  of  the  tides  in  the  Russel  channels,  as 
well  Bs  all  round  the  outer  shores  of  this  group  of  islands,  it  is  necessary 
to  refer  to  their  governing  cause,  namely,  the  rotary  motion  of  the  offing 
stream,  which  in  ouo  tide  runs  in  regular  succession  from  every  point  of 
the  compass. 

At  high  water,  by  the  shore,  the  flood  stream  sets  E.N.E.  furly  through 
the  Russel  channels,  and  is  then  at  its  greatest  sti-ength,  coinciding  nearly 
with  the  general  direction  of  the  offing  stream,  which  at  this  time,  to  the 
westward  of  Guernsey,  is  running  £.  by  N.,  and  to  the  eastwiu^  of  Serk 
N.N.E.  The  direction  of  the  offing  sti-eam  in  its  progressive  change 
irom  North  to  West,  &C.,  sets  about  N.W.  by  K.,  3  hours  after  high 
water,  or  at  half  ebb,  which  a  glance  at  the  chart  will  show  to  be  right 
across  the  Russel  channels ;  producing,  as  might  be  expected,  a  slack  tide 
in  the  Great  Russel,  under  the  lee  of  Serk,  and  especially  in  the  Little 
Bussel,  protected  as  it  is  by  Herm  and  Jethou  and  the  numerous  rocks  to 
the  northward  and  southward  of  those  islands.  At  low  water,  the  offing 
stream  has  got  round  to  W.S.W.,  and  as  this  is  about  the  direction  of  the 
Russel  channels,  the  ebb  stream,  at  this  time,  attains  its  greatest  strength. 

After  low  water  the  island  of  Guernsey  begins  to  obstruct  the  free 
course  of  the  stream  into  the  channels  eastward  of  it ;  and  at  half  flood, 
the  pressure  of  the  stream,  setting  in  a  south-westerly  direction,  is  so 


,0H^.'.]  TIDAL  STBEAMS.  195 

divided  by  tbo  island,  that  although  there  is  a  strong  easterly  tide  along 
its  north  and  south  shores,  there  is  slack  water  throughout  the  wliolo  ext«ut 
oi'  the  Hussel  cliannel.  Tlie  offiog  stream,  still  revolving,  gi'adually 
forces  the  flood  to  tho  north-eastward  through  these  channels ;  attaining 
its  greatest  strength,  as  before  staled,  near  high  water. 

A  proper  consideration  of  the  foregoing  general  remarks  is  necessary 
to  understand  the  cause  of  the  innumerable  sets  of  tide  and  eddies  about 
these  islands.  It  must  also  he  remembered,  that  a  body  of  water  once 
Bet  in  motion  will  conUnue  to  move  onward  for  some  time  after  the  force 
which  originated  it  has  been  removed ;  thus  the  Bussel  streams  continue 
to  run  to  the  southward  (after  low  water)  for  some  time  after  the  source 
of  their  supply  has  lieen  cut  off  by  the  shutting  in  of  the  offing  streuu 
behind  Guernsey  ;  and  these  southerly  streams  being  met  off  St.  Martin 
point  by  the  first  of  tho  eastern  stream,  they  blend  together  and  make  a 
south-east  tide,  which  at  springs  runs  with  considerable  strength,  from 
the  north  end  of  the  Great  bank  to  the  S.E.  for  some  distance  outside  the 
Tctcs  d'Avol,  but  is  not  felt  inside  the  Great  bank,  or  near  St.  Martin  2>oint. 

An  illustfntion  of  ihe  value  of  a  knowledge  of  the  tides  will  be  seen  by 
following  the  track  of  tlie  Guernsey  boatman,  on  a  trip  to  the  east  side  of 
Serk  and  back.  He  will  take  a  fair  tido  the  whole  distance.  Leaving 
Guernsey  road  a  Kttle  after  low  water,  lie  proceeds  with  a  fair  tide  to 
the  S.E..  outside  the  T^tes  d'Aval,  until  he  meets  the  eastern  stream,  with 
which  he  sails  to  the  southward  of  Serk.  Near  L'Etac  de  Serk  he  meets 
a  northerly  tide,  which  accompanies  him  along  tho  east  side  of  the  island 
as  far  as  the  Creaux.  Ou  his  return  to  Guernsey,  be  will  be  able  to  round 
the  north  point  of  Serk  about  an  hour  after  high  water,  at  which  time 
the  turning  of  the  ofiing  stream  towards  the  north  removes  tho  pressure 
of  the  Great  Busscl  stream  from  tho  Bee  du  Nez,  and  causes  an  eddy 
from  it  to  the  Givande  rock,  off  Brecqhou,  and  carry  an  eddy  or  counter 
stream  as  far  as  the  Givaude  rock,  outside  of  which  ho  will  meet  the  true 
stream  setting  to  the  N.W.,  at  2  hours  after  high  water.  Going  with 
this  stream,  he  will  pass  through  the  Basse  de  la  Ferc^e,  and  crossing  the 
Little  EuBsel  arrive  nt  St.  Peter  Port  before  the  south-western  stream  has 
fairly  made. 

It  appears  that  tho  general  drift  of  the  tidal  stream  corrresponds  with 
its  rotary  motion  from  right  to  left,  close  to  the  coasts  of  the  Channel 
islands  as  well  as  in  the  offing  outside  them ;  for  it  has  frequently 
happened  that  floating  objects  near  the  shore  have  been  seen  successively 
on  their  northern,  western,  southern,  and  eastern  coasts.  Moreover  part 
of  a  wrecked  vessel,  having  been  drifted  from  a  rock  near  the  Casquets 
during  calm  weather,  was  known  to  take  a  south-westerly  course,  and  to 
drift,  with  a  rotary  motion  through  a  succession  of  parabolic  tidal  curves 

H  2 


196  CHAmfEL  ISLANDS. — GVERKSEY.  [chaf.t. 

at  the  ntt«  of  about  4  miles  per  day,  round  the  weGteiii  and  Boutbera  coasts 
of  Guerusey,  several  miles  distant  from  the  island,  and  up  the  Deroute 
and  Bace  streams ;  whilBt  other  paits  of  the  same  wreck,  haviog  probably 
drifted  off  the  Bock  at  tbe  commencement  of  the  western  stream  and 
thereby  set  farther  out  to  the  westward,  were  met  with  about  the  same 
time  sereral  miles  within  and  to  the  eastward  of  Roches  Douvres. 

These  last  examples  prove  the  existence  of  a  current  whose  drift 
ctHUcides  with  tho  shiiUng  movement  of  the  tidal  stream,  south-westerly 
from  tbe  Caaquets,  southerly  past  Guernsey,  and  easterly  and  southerly 
between  GuorDsey  and  the  Boucbes  Duuvres.  Tbe  easteriy  or  main  branch 
of  this  current,  as  already  noticed,  passes  up  tbe  Deroute  and  Race 
channels,  and  it  seema  highly  probable  that  after  clearing  tbe  Race  of 
Aldemey  it  turns  off  to  Uie  westward  past  that  island,  to  reauilo  with  its 
own  stream  agdn  off  tbe  Casquets,  and  repeat  the  same  round  as  before  in 
endless  succession.  This  current,  hitherto  known  under  the  name  of 
"  indraught  of  the  gulf  of  St.  Male  "  is  generally  believed  to  exist  only 
during  fresh  westerly  breezes,  and  doubtless  its  strength  is  greatly  increased 
at  such  times,  but  there  is  no  doubt  it  runs  continuously  between  the 
Casquets  and  the  Roches  Dourres,  and  with  a  rate  proportioned  to  the 
strength  of  tbe  tidal  stream. 

A  little  consideration  of  the  facts  stated  above  will  Eerve  to  show,  that 
vessels  going  round  the  islands,  as  well  as  those  navigating  the  channels, 
between  tbem,  may  occasionally  shorten  their  passages  materially  by 
following  the  curves  of  tbe  tidal  streams  instead  of  taking  direct  courses. 

Caution. — Although  the  flood  stream  begins  to  set  through  the  little 
Bussel  at  tbe  same  time  that  it  does  in  the  Great  Ruasel,  viz.,  at  half  tide, 
yet  there  is  no  narQiern  inclination  round  St.  Martin  point,  until  4  hours 
flood  i  care  must  therefore  be  taken  that  tbe  first  of  the  eastern  stream 
does  not  draw  the  vessel  into  the  Great  Bussel,  or  among  the  rocks  in  tbe 
vicinity  of  the  Totes  d'Aval. 

DANGERS  oflf  N.W.  COAST.— The  north-west  side  of 
Guernsey  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  3^  miles,  there  being  several 
dangei'ous  rocky  ledges  lying  off  it ;  those  most  to  be  feared  are  the  Grunes 
de  rOueat,  or  du  Nord-Ouu,  Sambule,  Soufleuresae,  Boin,  and  Grande 
Etacie.  The  Grunes  de  I'Duest  dry  10  feet  at  low-water  springtides; 
the  Sambule  16  feet;  tbe  Soufleuresse  10  feet;  the  Boin  3  feet;  and  the 
Grande  Etacre  19  feet.  The  positions  of  the  outer  rocks  of  the  Banc  du 
Hanois,  Banc  Bis£,  and  other  dangers  off  them  have  been  briefly  described 
ID  page  168. 

From  the  outer  head  of  the  Grune  de  I'Ouest,  on  which  it  is  proposed  (o 
«rect  a  beacon,  C&tel  church  spire  appears  just  open  eastward  of  Guet  du 


-  ■  I 


CHAP,  v.]  DANGERS;  N.W.  AND  S.  COASTS.  197 

Catel,  S.S.E.^  southerly  and  Hanols  lighthouse  is  in  line  with  the  rock  off 
the  west  end  of  Lihou  island,  next  within  Comer  rock,  S.W.  |  W. 

From  the  Sambule,  Catel  church  is  in  line  with  Vazon  tower,  S.E. ; 
St.  Saviour  church  is  in  line  with  the  Conch^  rock;  and  the  Hanois  light- 
house is  just  open  westward  of  Corner  rock,  S.W,  ^  W. 

TI16  Grand  Etacre  li^  with  the  church  of  St  Pierre  du  Boia, 
without  a  spire,  over  the  west  part  of  Lihou  island,  S.S.E.  ^  E. ;  Vazon 
tower  touching  the  south  side  of  Gros  Pont,  E.  by  S.  f  S. ;  and  Hanois 
lighthouse  just  open  eastward  of  the  Pendante,  S.W.,  southerly. 

There  are  also  several  dangerous  sunken  rocks,  on  which  the  sea  breaks 
heavily  in  bad  weather,  considerably  outside  these  dangers ;  as  the  Boue 
Blonde],  of  5^  fathoms  water,  lying  with  Torteval  church  spire  over  the 
west  part  of  Lihou  island,  S.  |  E.,  distant  2^  miles  from  the  latter;  the 
inner  head  of  the  Roches  de  I'Ouest  of  5|  fathoms,  lying  with  Catel  church, 
the  Guet  du  Catel,  and  the  outer  and  highest  head  of  the  Grunes  in  line 
S.S.E.  three-quarters  of  a  mile  outside  the  latter ;  and  the  outer  head  of  the 
Frettes  of  5^  fathoms,  lying  with  Catel  church  just  open  eastward  of  Grand 
Boque  tower,  S.  ^  W.  2J  miles  from  the  tower. 

The  Hanois  lighthouse  kept  just  open  westward  of  the  Pendante,  the 
outer  rock  of  the  Trois  P^res  group,  S.W.  J  S.  until  Vale  church  comes 
in  line  with  the  Grand  Saut  Roquier,  S.E.  by  E.,  will  lead  inside  the  above 
sunken  rocks  and  outside  the  Etacre,  the  Sambule,  the  Boin,  and   the. 
Orunes  de  TOuest. 

Caution. — Unless  a  vessel  is  quite  under  command,  and  in  charge^ 
of  a  pilot,  she  should  not  approach  these  rocks  nearer  than  2  miles ;  also 
if  proceeding  round  the  south  side  of  the  island  to  St.  Peter  Port ; 
Corbiere  point,  and  Moye  point,  two  remarkable  headlands  on  the  south 
coast  between  Pleinmont  and  Icart  points,  and  the  land  to  the  eastward, 
should  always  be  kept  open  of  Pleinmont  point. 

DANGERS  off  SOUTH  COAST.— Pleinmont  ledge  has  9  feet 
water  on  the  shoalest  part,  which  lies  S.W.  J  W.  nearly  two-thirds  of  ar 
mile  from  Pleinmont  Guef,  but  only  one-third  of  a  mile  outside  the  Herpin 
rock. 

The  Boue  Baker  of  16  feet  water,  lies  with  the  Round  rock  just 
shut  in  with  Pleinmont  point,  N.  by  W.  ^  W. ;  and  Torteval  church-spire- 
on  with  the  north  part  of  a  remarkable  projecting  bluff  marked  by  a  white 
spot  in  the  bay  under,  N.E.  ^  E. 

The  Boues  des  Kaines,  of  29  feet  water,  lie  with  the  extreme  of 
the  Moye  point  in  line  with  the  inner  guard-house  on  Icart  point,  E.  ^  S. ; 
Torteval  church-spire  just  in  sight  above  the  cliff,  and  a  point  open  west- 
ward of  Guet  du  Tielle,  N.  |  E. ;  and  the  Grand  Hanois  within  the  Tas 
de  Pois,  and  in  line  with  Pleinmont  point,  N.W.  by  N. 


198  CHAXNEL   ISLANDS. — GUERNSEY.  [chap.t. 

Within  these  rocks  there  are  many  others,  some  of  which  nncorer  at  or 
near  low  water;  as  the  Kaines  d'Amont,  lying  S.W.  from  the  Gnet  du 
Tielle,  and  nearly  half  a  mile  from  the  land;  tlie  Lieuses,  lying  S.W. 
from  Corhiere  point,  and  nearly  half  a  mile  from  the  land,  dry  8  feet  at 
low  water ;  and  Les  Sept  Bones,  nearly  a  quarter  of  a  mile  within  it,  dry 
10  feet. 

DANGERS  Oflf  EAST  COAST.— The  dangers  to  be  avoided 
in  roonding  St.  Martin  point,  the  south-east  extreme  of  Guernsey,  are  the 
Grunes  de  Jerbourg,  described  at  page  199,  the  Longne  Pierre  and 
Gkkbrielle  rocks,  as  well  as  the  shoal  part  of  the  Great  bank.  The  Longae 
Pierre  dries  19  feet  at  low-water  springs,  and  is  marked  by  a  black  sisft 
and  ball  beacon.  The  Gabrielle  dries  4  feet  at  low-water,  at  which  period 
there  are  23  feet  on  the  south  end,  19  feet  on  the  middle,  and  17  feet  on 
the  north  part  of  the  Great  bank. 

'  A  vessel,  to  pass  eastward  of  these  rocks  and  westward  of  the  shoal  put 
of  the  bank,  should  keep  Saumarez  monument  in  line  with,  or  a  little  open 
o^  the  end  of  the  breakwater  off  castle  Cornet,  bearing  N.  by  £.  ^  E. ;  this 
mark  will  also  lead  outside  the  Anfre  rock  marked  by  a  pole  beacon ;  and 
between  the  Ferico  and  Oyster  rocks,  to  the  Tremies.  From  the  Grabrielle 
rock,  Saumarez  monument  is  just  shut  in  with  north-east  angle  of  castle 
CorneU 

THE  GREAT  BANK,  within  the  5  fathoms  line  at  low-water 
springs,  is  1^  miles  long  and  2  cables  broad.  From  its  southern  limit, 
St.  Peter  Port  church  is  in  line  with  the  Anfr6  beacon;  and  from  its 
northern  limit  the  north  angle  of  the  castle  Comet,  the  old  harbour  light- 
house, and  Elizabeth  college  tower  are  in  one.  The  shoalest  part,  17  feet, 
lies  2  cables  southward  of  this  latter  line  of  direction,  and  from  it  the  above 
church  is  just  open  of  south  angle  of  castle  Cornet ;  the  Anfre  beacon, 
and  the  white  stone  beacon  on  the  top  of  Fermain  point  in  line,  leads 
northward  of  it,  and  crosses  the  north  end  of  the  bank  in  20  feet  at  low 

water. 

Several  dangerous  rocks  lying  in  the  vicinity  of  castle  Coraet  must 
be  carefully  avoided  when  running  for  St.  Peter  Port  road,  viz.: — the 
Tremies  to  the  north-east  of  the  castle  and  south  neaiiy  half  a  cable  from 
the  breakwater  lighthouse,  the  Ferico  to  the  east,  the  Oyster  rock  to  the 
south-east,  and  the  Moulinet  to  the  south-west,  which  latter  is  marked  by 
a  pole  and  bird  beacon. 

PoriCO  is  a  dangerous  rock  with  only  9  feet  on  it  at  low-water,  lying 
1^  cables  eastward  of  the  castle,  and  in  the  fairway  of  vessels  bound  to 
St.  Peter  Port  from  the  southward.  To  pass  eastward  of  it,  keep  St.  Martin 
barracks  open  south-east  of  the  Anfre  bacon  until  Salerie  point  opens  of 
the  end  of  castle  Comet  breakwater,  or  bring  castle  Cornet  breakwater 


<M*».T.]     DANGERS  OFF  SOUTH  COAST. — DICTIONS.  199 

light  to  bear  N^NW;  The  Fordn  rock,  of  38  feet  water,  lies  a  little  out- 
side the  Ferico,  and  will  be  cleared  on  the  eaat  side  b^  the  same  marks. 
The  Oj'ster  rock  dries  12  feet  at  low  water. 

DireotionS.— A.  vessel  bound  irom  the  westward  to  the  anchorage 
off  the  eastern  side  of  Gnemeej,  and  intending  to  pass  eouthward  of  the 
island,  should,  as  before  stated,  make  a  careful  allowance  for  the  flood 
stream,  if  it  be  raoniDg,  as  it  sets  in  towards  the  land.  lUtunding  Plein- 
mont  point,  ^ve  the  lighthouse  on  the  Hanois  i<ocks  a  berth  of  at  least 
1^  miles,  to  avoid  the  Hanois  and  Bise  banks ;  and  to  dear  ihe  Hanois 
rocks,  keep  Cobi^re  point,  or  Moje  point,  open  of  Pleinmont  point 
bearing  S.E.  by  E.  \  E. 

To  clear  Pleinmont  ledge  and  the  other  dangers  between  it  and  Moye 
point,  do  not  shut  in  Lihou  island  with  Fleinmont  p<Mnt  until  Serk  church 
which  stands  northward  of  the  mill,  comes  open  of  Jerbourg  point.  When 
abreast  La  Moye  point,  open  the  north  point  of  Serk  with  Jerbourg  pdnt, 
or  keep  Pleimont  bluff  open  of  Cobi&ro  point,  to  avoid  the  Balliene 
rock,  which  lies  W.S.W  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  Icart  point,  and  is 
awash  at  low  water.  After  passing  this  point,  keep  Sommeilleuae  guard- 
house,  a  ruin  standing  on  the  edge  of  a  remarkable  high  cliffa  short 
distance  eastward  of  Moye  point,  a  little  open  southward  of  Icart  low 
point  until  Brebon  tower  opens  eastward  of  the  Longue  Pierre,  or  until 
the  ruin  of  Herm  mill  touches  the  north  side  of  the  high  land  of  Jcthou. 
These  marks  will  lead  outside  the  Grunes  de  Jerbourg,  which  are  a 
dangerous  cluster  of  rocks  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  in 
a  south-west  direction  from  St.  Martin  point ;  they  are  covered  at  one 
quarter  flood,  and  have  26  fathoms  close  to  their  south  side. 

Rounding  St.  Martin  point,  when  Saumarez  monument  is  in  line  with 
the  end  of  castle  Comet  breakwater,  proceed  with  this  mark  on,  between 
the  Anfre  rock  aud  Great  bank,  keeping  St.  Martin  barracks  open  south- 
ward of  the  Anfre  beacon  until  Salerie  battery  opens  of  castle  Cornet 
breakwater,  or  the  breakwater  lighthouse  bears  H.N.W.  When  the  town 
church  comes  open  of  the  breakwater,  anchor  in  the  road  as  convenient, 
or  run  into  the  harbour. 

To  pass  eastward  of  the  Great  bank,  keep  Vale  mill  about  midway 
between  Mont  Crevelt  tower  and  Tale  castle,  and  touching  the  east 
end  of  the  breakwater  off  St.  Sampson  harbour,  K.  ^  E. ;  and  when 
the  town  church  is  shut  in  behind  castle  Comet  haul  in  for  the  anchorage. 
At  night,  when  running  for  this  anchorage  from  the  northward  and 
eastward,  through  the  Great  Ruasel,  steer  to  the  south' westward  till  the  red 
light  on  the  south  pier  head  of  St.  Peter  Port  old  harbour  bears 
N.W.  by  N.,  or  opens  southward  of  caatle  Comet,  which  mark  leads  south- 
ward of  the  Tgtes  d'Aval,  and  over  the  north  end  of  the  Great  bank,  in 


200  CHANNEL  ISLANDS.— eUEBySBY.  [ohaf.t, 

22  feet  at  low  water.  On  ncaring  the  castle  and  ranning  for  the  harlKwr, 
bring  the  light  to  bear  W.bjr  N.  \  N.  which  is  also  the  best  line  to  anchor 
on  in  the  roa<l.  The  light  open  and  shut  of  the  south  part  ai  castle  Comet 
leads  only  150  feet  southward  of  the  Tetes  d'Aral,  and  across  the  Great 
bank  in  21  feet  at  low  water. 

Steering  for  the  Little  Russel  from  the  northward,  keep  the  Caaqaet 
light  on  a  N.E.  |  N.  bearing  until  castle  Comet  breakwater  light  bean 
S.W.  by  W.  i  W.,  this  being  the  line  of  bearing  for  the  central  track. 
This  passage,  however,  should  never  be  attempted  at  night  by  a  stranger, 
nor  even  by  a  person  acquainted  with  the  phice,  unless  in  a  steam  vessel 
of  light  draught,  at  or  near  high  water. 

From  the  westward  and  southward,  after  passing  St.  Martin  point,  steer 
to  the  eastward  until  the  old  harbour  red  light  is  seen  clear  of  Terres 
point,  bearing  N.  ^  E. ;  keep  it  in  sight  on  this  line,  and  it  will  lead  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  eastward  of  the  Longue  Pierre.  When  St.  Martin  point 
bears  S.W.  ^  W.  steer  N.E.  by  N.,  to  pass  between  the  Anfr6  *rock  and 
the  Great  Bank,  and  when  castle  Comet  breakwater  light  bears  NJ^.W. 
steer  N.  by.  E.  until  the  red  light  bears  W.  by  N.  ^  N.  after  which  proceed 
as  before  directed. 

ST.  SAMPSON  HABBOUB  is  on  the  eastem  side  of  Guernsey 
between  Yale  Castle  and  Mont  Crevelt,  but  vessels  lie  aground  in  it  at  low 
water.  The  site  now  occupied  by  this  harbour  was  originaily  the 
eastem  entrance  creek  to  an  arm  of  the  sea  which  severed  the  northern 
portion  of  Guernsey  from  the  main  island.  About  sixty  years  since  this 
strait  was  embanked  at  each  end,  and  since  that  period  the  interv^ng 
laud  has  been  reclaimed. 

The  harbour  |may  be  termed  rectangular  in  form ;  its  extreme  length 
being  about  1,900  feet  N.W.  and  S.E.  with  an  average  width  of  600  feet, 
and  containing  a  water  area  of  22  acres  at  high  water  springs.  At  low 
water  springs  this  space  is  dry,  and  the  tide  ebbs  for  a  considerable  dis- 
tance outside  the  pier  heads.  The  entrance  between  the  pier  heads  is 
120  feet  wide,  and  the  depth  there  15  feet  at  high  water  ordinary  neaps. 
At  this  time  there  are  12  feet  along  the  south  pier,  and  11  feet  for  a 
length  of  150  feet  along  the  south  quay,  the  remainder  of  which  gradually 
shoals  to  its  western  end. 

A  rocky  patch,  with  10  feet  water,  lies  near  the  centre  of  the  channel 
leading  to  St.  Sampson  harbour ;  from  this  patch  the  Gmnette  beacon  is 
apparently  just  touching  the  south  side  of  Mont  Crevelt  battery,  and  the 
town  church  St.  Peter  Port  is  just  seen  open  east  of  Vivian  beacon. 

Direotions.  —  The  approach  to  this  harbour  is  difficult,  being 
athwart  the  tidal  streams ;  and  on  account  of  the  Crabi^re,  Gmnette,  and 


CHAP.T.]       ST.  SAHT80H   HAKBOtTR. — QBAKS  HAVRE.  201 

Grande  DemieTockj>,vIuch  lie  c^  the  entrance.  The  most  dangerous  of  these 
IB  the  Crabi^re,  in  the  fairway  of  the  entrance,  and  distant  aboat  200  yards 
from  the  head  of  Mont  Crevelt  breakwater  ;  it  haf,  however,  been  rednced 
in  height,  having  now  9  feet  on  it  at  half  tide. 

The  best  entrance  into  the  harbour  is  between  the  Crabi^re  and  the 
Grunett^  the  latter  being  marked  by  a  beacon  (the  figure  of  a  man),  this 
paseage,  however,  is  not  above  half  a  cable  wide,  and  the  leading  mark  la 
the  beacon  on  the  Grunette  in  line  with  the  south  tangent  of  the  break- 
water, until  close  np  to  the  beacon,  when  pass  50  yards  north  of  it  and  steer 
in  between  the  pier  heads.  The  bottom  is  blue  clay  covered  with  a  layer 
of  sand. 

A  life  boat  is  stationed  at  St.  Sampson  harbour. 

BORDEAUX  HARBOUR,  to  the  northward  of  St.  Sampson, 
is  nsed  only  by  fisherman.  Here  vessels  must  lie  aground  the  same  aa  at 
St.  Sampson  ;  and  as  the  entrance  to  the  barbonr  will  not  admit  of  lat^r 
vessels  than  those  of  10  tons  burthen,  a  further  description  is  needless. 

L'ANCBESSE  BAT,  on  the  north  side  of  Guernsey,  to  the  west- 
ward of  fort  Le  Marchant,  affords  good  shelter  for  smell  craft  against  south- 
easterly, southerly,  and  westerly  winds,  in  6  to  2  fathoms  water.  The 
bottom  is  muddy  sand,  and  excellent  for  holding. 

GRAND  HAVRE,  to  the  westward  of  Ancresse  bay  and  north- 
westward of  Vale  church,  baa  its  entrance  between  the  inartello  tower 
on  Mont  Gnet  to  the  North,  and  the  martetlo  tower  on  Rouase  point 
to  the  south.  It  affords  excellent  anchorage  for  small  vessels,  in 
14  to  9  feet  water,  with  good  shelter  against  southerly  and  all  easterly 
winds,  over  a  bottom  of  sand  and  grass ;  north-westerly  winds,  however, 
send  in  a  heavy  swell  ajid  sea,  between  half  flood  and  half  ebb; 
though  there  is  little  danger  to  be  apprehended  if  the  ground  tackling 
be  good.  For  vessels  capable  of  taking  the  ground,  there  is  a  safe  place 
for  that  purpose  on  Uie  south-eastern  side  of  Rousse  point.  A  dangerous 
rock  lies  in  the  fairway  of  the  entrance,  called  the  Rousse  de  Mer, 
which  appears  at  a  quarter  ebb ;  and  on  each  side  of  it  there  are  several 
other  rocks.  The  marks  for  this  rock  are  Saumarez  monument  just  shut 
in  with  the  south-western  angle  of  Vale  church,  S.  by  £.,  and  the  house 
on  the  highest  part  of  Lihon  island  in  line  with  the  highest  part  of  the 
Grand  Saut  Roquier,  W.  by  S.  J  S. 

DireCtionB. — R-om  the  num^ons  dangers  that  lie  off  the  entrance 
to  Grand  Havre  there  is  only  one  channel  by  which  it  can  ba  safely 
approached  by  a  stranger.  This  channel  lies  between  the  Rousse  de  Mer 
and  Main  rocks ;  the  fonner  rock  dries  20  feet,  and  the  latter  6  feet,  at 
low-water  springs. 


rs' 


• 


202  CHAyXEL  ISLANDS. — GUERNSEY.  [chap.t. 

Bring  Victoria  tower  in  line  with  the  roekj  point  jast  esBtward  of  the 
tower  on  Roossc  point,  bearing  S.  by  W.,  and  ran  in  on  this  line  until 
Sanmarez  monument  opens  south-west  of  Yale  church ;  then  steer  for 
the  high  rockj  bhiff  near  the  middle  of  the  bay,  and  anchor  when  about 
midway  between  the  towers  on  entrance  points,  in  10  feet  at  low  water. 
A  vessel  of  only  6  feet  draught  may  anchor  with  Noirmont  house  in  line 
with  ^the  tower  on  Bousse  point,  and  Victoria  tower  about  midwaj 
between  Bousse  point  and  the  rocky  bluff  near  the  middle  of  the  bay  to 
the  eastward  of  it. 

Roque   Noire,  Boue   Comeille,    L'Etac,    and  Saut 

Roquier  Rooks,  extending  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  a  W.  by  S. 
direction,  from  the  coast  between  Grand  Havre  and  Grand  Roque  point,  at 
the  distance  of  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  land.  They  are  always 
above  water  and  serve  to  distinguish  this  part  of  the  coast  at  |  high 
water,  when  the  dangerous  rocks  around  them  are  covered.  Grand 
Roque  pcnnt  has  on  it  a  rocky  hummock,  from  which  it  takes  its  name, 
surmounted  by  a  small  fort  and  watchtower. 

The  HoffetS  &i^  dangerous  rocks,  most  of  which  uncover  only  at  low 
tide.  The  outer  head  awash  at  low  water,  bears  N.  by  E.  ^  E,  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  Roque  Noire.  Victoria  tower  in  line  with  the 
tower  on  Rousse  point,  S.  J  W.  westerly  leads  nearly  half  a  mile  eastward 
of  them  ;  the  Petite  Braye  open  northward  of  Roque  au  Nord  clears  them 
to  the  northward ;  and  Torteval  church  in  line  with  Houmet  fort 
S.W.  \  W.,  clears  tliem  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  westward. 

There  are  some  dangerous  rocks,  awash  at  low  water,  extending 
W.N.W.  an  eight  of  a  mile  from  the  Grand  Saut  Roquier ;  and  others  a 
little  outside  of  them  to  the  northward  always  covered,  the  outer  of 
which,  called  the  Moulrette  has,  27  feet  on  it,  and  lies  N.N.W.  J  W.  nearly 
half  a  mile  from  the  Grand  Saut  Roquier.  There  is  a  good  channel 
inside  all  these  rocks ;  the  middle  of  which  lies  with  the  lower  house  on 
Lihou  island,  touching  the  outer  comer  of  the  Mouilliere  rock  W.  by  S.  ^  S  ; 
there  is  also  a  channel  between  the  inner  head  of  the  Hoffets  and  the  Boue 
Comeille,  but  neither  should  be  attempted  without  a  pilot. 

Plaquiers  Rocks,  with  8  feet  water  over  them,  lie  half  a  mile  west- 
ward of  the  Grand  Saut  Roquier,  with  Victoria  tower  just  open  south-west 
of  Grand  Roque  tower.  They  will  be  cleared  by  opening  Victoria  tower 
one  side  or  the  other  of  Grand  Roque  tower. 

Anchorage,  secure  from  easterly  winds,  will  be  found  inside  the  Grand 
Saut  Roquier. 

CQBO  and  VAZQN  BAYS  bave  also  good  anchorage  in  easterly 
winds,  but  with  westerly  winds  there  is  generally  a  rolling  swell  along  this 


OHip.T.]  THE  HOFTETS.  308 

part  of  the  cwet  on  the  flood  tide ;  aod  thin,  together  with  the  nameroiu 
outlying  I'ockH,  render  these  bays  daugerons  for  itrangers  to  approach. 

The  priacipal  dangers  off  these  bays  inside  the  Grnnea  de  TOneet 
described  in  page  196,  are  the  Snaanne,  which  dries  7  feet  at  low  water 
S^.  by  £,  m  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  Gnmes ;  the  Gninette  driea 
3  feet,  S.  by  E.  ^  E.,  half  a  mile  from  the  Qrunea  ;  the  Boae  Auber  driae 
8  feet,  £.  by  S.  }  S.  nearly  half  a  mile  from  the  Sambnle  t  and  the  Flabet 
dries  one  foot)  about  midway  between  the  Grand  Etacre  and  Sambnle. 

Also  the  Ccdombelle  dries  2  feet,  N.W.,  nearly  half  a  mile  outside  the 
Conchee ;  the  Messellettes,  awash  at  low  water,  lies  NJS.E.,  half  a  mile 
from  the  Conch^e  ;  the  Boue  Vazon  dries  7  feet,  and  lies  with  St.  George 
tower  (white)  in  line  with  sontb-weat  angle  of  Houmet  fort,  and  the 
upper  house  on  Ltbou  island,  just  open  inside  the  Conch4e.  The  Fourquies^ 
awash  at  tow  water,  lies  S.W.  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  Boue  Tanon  i 
the  Fedt  Etat  dries  20  feet  N.N.W.,  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  Houmet 
fori^  and  the  Grose  Etat,  34  feet  high,  lies  an  eighth  of  a  mile  within  it, 
fit  the  outer  extremity  of  the  rocks  of  Houmet  fort. 

The  MouiUiere,  lying  N.  by  E.  fire-eightha  of  a  mile  from  Houmet  fort, 
is  4  feet  above  high-water  springs.  It  is  surrounded  by  rocks,  many  of 
which  uncover  at  low  water,  extending  rather  more  than  a  cable  to  the 
westward,  but  not  moi'e  than  three-quarters  of  a  cable  to  the  northward. 
The  large  lower  house  on  Lihou  island  in  lioe  with  the  Conch4e, 
W.  by  S.  I  S.,  will  lead  clear  northward  of  these  rocks. 

DirSOtions. — To  appi-oach  Vazon  bay  from  the  north-eastward, 
bring  Torteval  church  open  westward  of  Houmet  fort,  and  run  in ;  being 
careful  to  have  Torteval  church  in  line  with  Richmont  fort,  S.W.  by  S., 
before  passing  the  Grand  Saut  Boquier,  which  mark  will  lead  midway 
between  the  Grunettes  and  Mouillierc,  and  nearly  a  cable  eastward 
of  the  Boue  Tazon ;  within  which  anchor  as  convenient,  in  6  to  8  fathoms, 
sand. 

To  run  out  of  the  bay  between  the  Grunettes  and  Boue  Auber,  bring 
St.  George  turret  in  line  with  east  side  of  Houmet  fort.  The  large 
lower  house  on  Lihou  island  in  line  with  the  Concha,  leads  nearly  a 
cable  northward  of  the  Boue  Vazon  j  and  St.  Matthew  church  on  with 
south-west  eud  of  Houmet  fort  leads  out  between  the  Sambule  and 
Coiombelte. 

FEBELLE  BAT  affords  good  shelter  to  fishing  boats  at  low  water, 
but  is  only  safe  for  such  as  con  take  the  boacb,  in  the  event  of  a  westerly 
gale  setting  in. 

To  clear  the  sunken  rocks  extending  from  the  Grand  Etacre  towards 
Lihoo  island,  when  passing  between  it  and  Lihou,  keep  the  Hauois  light- 


201  CHANKEL  ISLAKDS.— 617£HN8£T.  [chap.t. 

bonM»  open  n  littlo  oaistwanl  of  the  Trois  Tint,  or  ptsa  throagh  abont 
niM-chAnnel. 

ROCQUAINE  BAY  is  fronted  bjnameroiugroaptorrockB  as  well 
M  iJK^lateil  oni\4,  uumr  of  which  are  always  abore  water ;  a  &r  greater 
numbor  uncoror  with  the  falling  tide,  whilst  thoee  that  are  always  hidden 
l»e1ow  low  water  are  9till  more  nameroas. 

The  anchorage  in  thiii  bay  15  well  sheltered  from  nortiieriyy  easterly, 
and  mutherly  windsi ;  bat  westerly  winds  send  in  such  a  heayy  sea, 
o«|Mvially  K*tween  half-floixl  and  half-ebb,  that  a  suling  vessel  caught  in 
the  Imr  iintler  nuch  circumslancec  could  not  possibly  get  out*  The  holding 
grtnin«I,  cimstiitin^  generally  of  fine  gravel  and  sand  covered  with  graas 
and  m'a-wihnI,  is  not  goiHl.  It  i»  only  frequented  by  fishermen  resident  in 
the  neiglilK>nrh(XHl,  or  oivasionally  by  vessels  calculated  to  take  the  beach; 
neverthelt^M,  at  the  anchorage  in  the  routh-west  part  of  the  bay  off  Peserie 
point,  a  ves5t«l  of  not  more  than  12  or  13  feet  draughty  well  moored,  would 
ride  securely  all  the  year  round,  and  under  any  circumstanoes  of  wind  and 
weather. 

The  most  remarkable  rocks,  l>ounding  Rocquaine  bay  to  the  westward 
and  Miuthwanl,  that  never  cover  with  the  tide  are,  the  Mauve,  48  feet  high 
above  low  water:  tlie  Bisi^  on  which  the  Hanois  lighthouse  stands;  Grand 
Hanois,  70  ftH't  high;  Petit  Hanois;  Hayes  rock,  80  feet  high;  PercSe, 
32  ftvt  high  :  Uouml  ro<*k,  />1  fi^^t  high  ;  Grosse  rock,  69  feet  high. 

Banc  des  Trois  Pdres. — The  largest  and  most  conspicuous  rocky 
group  in  the  northern  {mrt  of  KixH|unin  Imy  is  called  the  Banc  des  Trois 
Penvs  the  outer  iix'k  of  which,  named  the  Pendante,  is  50  feet  above  low 
>\*ntor,  and  lies  West  one  mile  fn>m  Lihou  upper  house.  The  Trois  P&res 
rocks  are  about  the  same  height,  but  nearly  a  cable  within  the  Pendante. 
There  are  also  other  rocks  nearly  the  same  height  fronting  this  reef  to  the 
castwanl. 

Thero  is  a  passage  l>etweon  the  Trois  Peres  bank  and  Lihou  island,  with 
a  depth  through  of  not  less  than  16  feet  at  low  water,  the  marks  for 
which  are  given  at  page  205  ;  but  neither  this  nor  any  other  passage  into 
Rocqnaino  bay  should  be  attempted  without  a  pilot,  unless  under  most 
urgent  circumstances. 

Banc  des  Hanois  lies  three-quarters  of  a  mile  westward  of  the 
Pendante  rock.  It  extends  N.N.W.  and  S.S.E.  about  half  a  mile  and  the 
highest  rock,  called  the  Haut  Fourquie,  is  on  its  inner  part,  and  dries  10  feet 
at  low  water ;  there  are  also  two  rocks  which  dry  5  feet  near  its  outer 
extremity.  The  outer  sunken  rock  of  the  bank  has  6  feet  on  it  at  low 
water ;  the  marks  for  it  are,  Tas  de  Pois  d'Aval  on  with  the  inner  part 
of  the  Perc^e  rock  S.S.E.  i  E.  and  the  Guet  du  CAtel  just  to  the 
southward  of  the  lower  house  on  Lihou  island,  and  on  the  same  side 


CHAP,  v.]  BOCQTJAINE  BAY. — ^DIEECTIOKS.  206 

of  the  rock  next  within  the  Qrand  Battue,  E.  ^  S. ;  Gnet  da  C&tel  in  line 
with  Lihou  upper  house,  E.  ^  S.,  leads  I^  cables  northward  of  the  bank. 

Banc  Bis6,  the  westernmost  danger  off  Ooernsej,  lies  rather  more 
than  a  third  of  a  mile  outside  the  MauYCi  which  rock  is  10  feet  above 
high-water  springs.  This  bank  is  connected  with  the  Mauve  bj  a  chain  of 
sunken  rocks,  as  the  Mauve  is  with  the  Bis^,  the  rock  on  which  the 
Hanois  lighthouse  is  built.  The  outer  sunken  rock  of  the  bank  is  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  NJS^.W.  from  the  lighthouse,  and  has  15  feet  on  it  at 
low  water ;  it  lies  with  the  lighthouse  just  open  westward  of  the  head  of 
the  Mauve  S.S.E. ;  and  lihou  upper  house  over  the  middle  of  the  Trois 
P^res  E.  I  N. 

DirOCtions*-— To  enter  Bocquaine  baj  from  the  southward,  inside 
the  Hajes  rock,  bring  the  outer  high- water  rock  called  Corner  rock,  off 
lihou  island  in  line  with  Nipple  rock,  which  dries  26  feet  at  low  water, 
bearing  N.N.E.  |  E.  and  run  in  until  abreast  the  Fero6e  rock  ;  within 
which,  Black  rock  will  soon  come  in  line  with  a  remarkable  rock  on  Lihou 
saddle;  this  mark  will  lead  into  a  good  anchorage  a  little  beyond  the 
Nipple  rock  in  4  fathcuns  at  low  water. 

Should  it  be  desired  to  go  into  the  anchorage  off  the  Torquetil  rock  in 
2^  fathoms  at  low  water,  Cacquerau  house  on  with  the  north  side  of  the 
Torquetil  £.  ^  N.  wiU  be  the  leading  mark,  until  Fort  Grej  comes  in  line 
with  the  Braje  rock;  when  Cacquerau  house  must  be  opened  a  little 
northward  of  the  Torquetil,  to  clear  a  rock  with  only  4  feet  on  it  at  low 
water ;  after  passing  which,  anchor  as  convenient.  Marks  are  given  on 
the  Admiralty  chart  for  entering  the  inner  anchorage  off  Pezerie  pointy 
but  being  useless  to  strangers  on  account  of  the  narrowness  of  the  channel, 
they  are  not  repeated  here. 

The  passage  into  Rocquaine  bay,  between  lihuu  island  and  the  Trois 
P^res  bank,  may  be  entered  by  bringing  Torteval  church  in  line  with 
the  north-east  corner  of  Fort  Grey  S.  by  E.  |  £. ;  this  mark  will  lead 
safely  as  far  as  the  Fourquie,  a  rock  which  dries  17  feet  at  low  water,  and 
which  must  be  passed  rather  close,  to  the  westward,  within  which  as  direc- 
tions to  the  stranger  would  be  useless,  we  must  refer  him  to  the  chart. 

By  bringing  Torteval  church  in  line  with  the  south-west  side  of  Bound 
rock  S.E.  ^  E.,  a  vessel  could  pass  safely  between  the  Banc  des  Hanois 
and  the  Aiguillons ;  and  by  opening  Torteval  church  a  little  to  the 
south-west  of  Bound  rock,  after  passing  the  Aiguillons,  she  could  enter 
Bocquaine  bay  to  the  south-east  of  the  Bound  rock. 

There  is  no  channel  for  ships  into  Bocquaine  bay  between  the  Trois 
P^res  and  the  Banc  des  Hanois. 

ICABT  and  PETIT  PORT  BAYS,  on  the  south  side  of 
Ouemsey,  afford  good  anchorage  and  shelter  in  easterly  and  northerly  winds. 


vT* 


206  CHANNEL  ISLANDS.  fciLu-.v. 

Petit  port  being  larger  and  easier  of  access^  is  bj  far  the  better  bay  of  the 
two  ;  the  ground  being  clean,  fine  white  sand,  and  any  depth  of  water  may 
be  chosen  from  5  to  9  fathoms,  but  a  sailing  vessel  at  anchor  here  should  be 
in  readiness  to  put  to  sea  immediately  a  shifl  of  wind  renders  it  necessaiy. 

The  only  danger  in  entering  Petit  Port  bay  is  the  Banc  du  Petit  Port, 
with  12  feet  on  it  at  low  water.  It  lies  W.  ^  S.  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from 
Jerbourg  point,  and  to  clear  it  in  entering,  do  not  shut  in  the  Goubiuiere 
rock  with  St.  Martin  point  until  Doyle  column  opens  westward  of  a 
remarkably  high  rocky  bluff  on  the  east  side  of  the  sandy  bay  under  it. 
The  column  on  with  peak  of  rocky  bluff,  N.E.  by  E.  ^  E.  is  the  leading 
mark  in.  A  dangerous  rock  named  Mouliere,  with  only  4  feet  over  it  at 
high-water  spring  lies  nearly  in  the  centre  of  the  bay,  with  Doyle  column 
just  inside  the  inner  end  of  the  difis  on  the  east  side  of  the  sandy  beach 
under  it  bearing  E.  by  N.,  and  Jerbourg  point  SJS.E.  \  E.  one-third  of  a  mile. 

HEBM  and  JETHOU  ISLANDS,  together  with  Amfroque 
rocks  on  the  north,  and  Ferri^re  rocks  on  the  south,  extend  rather  more 
than  5  miles  in  a  N.E.  ^  N.  and  S.W.  ^  S.  direction,  and  divide  the  Great 
and  Little  Eussel  channels  from  each  other.  Herm  is  1^  miles  long, 
half  a  mile  wide,  elevated  232  feet  above  the  level  of  low  water,  and 
its  centre  bears  E.  by  S.  J  S.  3^  miles  from  St.  Peter  Port  The  little 
island  of  Jethou  lies  S.W.  half  a  mile  from  Heim,  and  is  16  feet  higher 
than  it.  The  rocky  islets,  Crevichon  and  Fanconniere,  are  connected 
with  Jethou  at  low  water,  the  former  to  its  north  side  and  the  latter  to 
its  south ;  they  are  each  marked  on  their  conical  sununits  by  white  stone 
beacons. 

The  Ferri^res  are  most  conspicuous  rocks  to  the  southward  of 
Jethou,  that  never  cover  with  the  tide.  The  north  head  of  the  outer  or 
western  rock,  called  the  Barb^es^  situated  S.W.  nearly  three-quarters  of  a 
mile  from  Jethou,  is  marked  by  a  beacon,  consisting  of  a  staff  and  barrel. 
The  Demie  Ferri^re  has  a  beacon  with  the  letter  M  on  it,  10  feet  above 
high  water.  There  are  good  ship  channels  between  these  rocks,  and 
especially  between  the  Ferriferes  rocks  and  the  Tetes  d'Aval,  but  they 
should  not  be  attempted  without  a  pilot. 

Amfroque  Rooks  extend  from  Herm  to  the  north-eastward  for 
rather  more  than  2  miles.  The  outermost  rock,  showing  above  high  water, 
is  called  the  Grande  Amfroque,  it  has  two  peaks,  and  is  nearly  three-quarters 
of  a  cable  in  diameter  and  78  feet  above  low  water.  It  is  surrounded 
by  dangerous  rocks,  of  which  the  easternmost  is  the  Bonne  Grune,  with 
14  feet  over  it  at  low  water,  bearing  from  the  Grand  Amfroque  E.  f .  S. 
1^  miles.  The  Selle  d'Amfroque,  bearing  N.E.  by  E.,  half  a  mile  from  the 
Grande  Amfroque,  has  17  feet  over  it ;  and  within  it  to  the  westward  lie 
the  Demies  du  Nord,  and  the  Petite  Amfroque,  which  uncover  with  the  tide. 


CHAP,  v.]  HERM  AND  JETHOU  ISLANDS,— PLATTE  BOUE  ROCK.  207 

Beacons. — There  are  two  conical  stone  beacons  on  Grande  Amfrocjue 
105  feet  apart,  bearing  S.  }  £.  and  N.  f  W.  from  each  other ;  the  higher 
beacon  is  surmounted  by  a  cross,  and  the  lower  one  bj  a  round  cage ;  the 
eastern  is  35  feet  above  the  rock^  and  painted  black  and  white  in  horizontal 
bands,  the  western  is  20  feet  high,  and  painted  white. 

Cul  do  I'Autel  and  Longue  Pierre  rocks.— At  rather 

more  than  a  half  mile  West  from  the  Grand  Amfroque,  lies  a  table  rock 
elevated  58  feet,  called  Cul  de  I'Autel ;  and  between  the  Cul  de  I'Autel 
and  the  north  point  of  Herm,  at  nearly  equal  distances,  and  about 
the  same  height  (70  feet),  lie  the  Longue  Pierre  and  TraiSe  rocks,  also 
Godin  islet ;  which,  as  well  as  the  Longue  Pierre,  is  covered  with  a  light 
soil,  on  which  grow  a  variety  of  wild  flowers ;  the  Traiffe  lies  near  the 
south-east  side  of  the  Longue  Pierre  and  resembles  a  ship  under  sail. 
Besides  these  there  are  others  of  minor  importance  that  the  tide  never 
covers,  as  well  as  numerous  rocks  and  ledges  that  are  alternately  covei*ed 
and  uncovered,  and  many  which  never  appear  at  all. 

Platte  Bou6  rock*,  lying  three-quarters  of  a  mile  northward  of  the 
Gmnde  Amfroque,  is  the  northernmost  danger  off  Herm,  at  the  eastern  side 
of  the  entrance  to  the  Little  Russel,  and  consists  of  three  heads  ;  the 
westernmost  head  has  one  foot,  and  the  southernmost  3  feet  on  it  at  low 
water  springs.  It  is  about  20  feet  in  diameter,  dries  3  feet  at  low  water, 
and  is  steep-to  all  round  except  to  the  E.N.E.,  in  which  direction,  at  the 
distance  of  500  feet,  there  is  a  rock  with  15  feet  over  it  at  low  water. 

The  marks  for  the  Platte  Bou6  are  C&tel  church-spire  in  line  with  the 
Canteen  house  at  the  gate  of  Yale  castle  (showing  on  its  south-east  angle), 
bearing  W.  by  S.,  the  Grand  Moie,  the  highest  detached  rock  on  the  east 
side  of  Serk,  just  open  eastward  of  the  Grande  Amfroque  S.  by  E.  and  the 
two  beacons  of  Grande  Amfroque  in  line  bearing  S.  f  E. 

Clearing  marks. — ^Tautenay  beacon  in  lino  with  Doyles  column, 
Guernsey,  will  lead  1^  cables  north-westward  of  Platte  Boue  rock  ;  Brehon 
tower  in  line  with  Tautenay  l>eacon  is  a  good  mark  for  leading  northward 
of  it. 

HAYES  CHANNEL  and  PASSE  de  la  PERCYS.— The 

channels  between  the  above  rocks  and  islets  are  extremely  intricate,  and 
rendered  even  more  dangerous  by  the  rapidity  and  variety  of  the  tides ;  two 
of  them,  however,  viz.,  Hayes  channel,  between  Godin  islet  and  the  Longue 
Pierre  rocks,  and  Passe  de  la  Percee,  between  Herm  and  Jeihou,  are 
nevertheless  sometimes  used  for  ships  by  the  Guernsey  pilots. 

Hayes  channel  has  a  rock,  awash  at  low  water,  at  its  eastern  entrance 
on  the  line  of  the  Longue  Pierre  and  6,odin.     To  sail  southward  of  it, 

♦  Recent  information  on  Platte  Bou6  rock  by  Commander  Anson,  H.M.S.  Dasher,  1881 . 


208  CHA^XEL  ISLA5BS.  [ 


T. 


keep  Vftle  mill  in  r.Ai  to  tLe  «*:athw«rl  of  ck*  Pierre  de  la  Moue,  until 
past  that  lln«.  Paf «  a  cahUt  zxrdivvd  c£  the  Pisre  de  la  Moae,  and  thm 
gndaaDj  haal  to  the  scaiLvard  s=xil  tiie  high  land  of  Serk  at  Banquette 
point  comes  orer  Godln.  When  the  Grande  Amfroqae  is  in  one  with 
the  Longne  Pierre,  keep  it  hk  imtil  the  peak  of  Godin  is  nearly  in  line 
with  the  north  extreme  of  G:ileii,  SX- ;  which  mark  will  lead  into  the 
little  Hnssely  between  the  Tantenaj  ledge  and  the  rock j  hank  extending 
from  the  north  point  of  Herm. 

Anchorage,  oot  of  the  strength  of  the  tide,  and  widi  good  hnMing 
groimd,  win  be  foond  Sooth  of  Taotenaj  kdge,  br  brii^ing  the  peak  of 
Godin  between  the  two  sharp-peaked  rocks  of  Galeo,  SJS.  ^  £.  and  Brdion 
tower  in  line  with  the  Ronsse  rock  S.W.  br  W.  \  W. 

There  is  good  anchorage  also  S.W.  of  thia^  inade  the  Cavale  rock,  in 
6  fiithomSy  sand ;  with  the  merre  anx  Bat^  a  small  stone  obelisk  on  Herin, 
in  line  with  the  Monisonniere  rock,  bearing  Sw£.  ^  Si^  and  Brehon  tower 
between  the  Boosse  rock  and  the  Blanche. 

Between  Herm  and  Jethoa,  off  the  Moaette  rock  is  the  Bosiere  anchor- 
age,  where  small  vessels  will  find  good  shelter  from  all  winda^  excq>ting 
those  from  S.W^  round  bj  the  sooth,  to  S.E.  The  best  entrance  into  it  ia 
from  the  Great  Bassel  channeL 

There  is  (me  great  conrenience  attending  this  latter  anchcMage,  ¥iz^  that 
the  tide  mns  9  hours  to  the  soothward  and  onlj  3  to  the  northward ;  the 
former  stream  commeocing  when  it  is  low  water  bj  the  diore,  and  setting 
directly  into  the  Great  Rossel  daring  the  whole  of  the  flood,  until  half 
ebb,  when  the  latter  stream  begins  and  runs  fisdntlj  to  the  northward 
until  low  water.  A  vessel,  therefore,  caught  here  bj  a  southerly  wind, 
may  always,  at  halt  ebb,  run  northward  through  the  Passe  de  la  Percde 
into  the  Little  Bussel  channel,  and  thence  to  the  anchorage  inside  the 
Cavale  rock  or  into  the  Great  road. 

Directions* — The  dangers  to  be  avoided  in  running  for  the  Passe 
de  la  Percee  from  the  eastward  are,  the  Fourquies ;  a  patch  of  rocks  that 
uncover  near  low  water,  lying  right  in  the  fairway  and  north-eastward 
of  the  Goubiniere  rock,  in  the  Great  Bussel ;  and  farther  in,  the  Meulettes 
rock  on  the  starboard^  and  the  Tinker  rocks  on  the  port  hand.  Yale 
castle  touching  the  south-west  end  of  Herm,  beai-ing  N.W.  ^  N.,  will  lead 
eastward  of  the  Fourquies  ;  and  Vale  mill,  the  north-easternmost  on 
Guernsey,  touching  the  north-eastern  side  of  Jethou,  N.N.W.  ^  W.,  will 
lead  considerably  to  the  westward. 

Meulettes  Bock  Ues  about  half  a  cable  from  the  south  point  of  Herm, 
and  the  Tinker  about  twice  that  distauce  to  the  eastward  of  Jethou.  The 
Vermerette  rock  beacon  in  line  with  Percee  rock  leads  westward  of  the 
Meulettes ;  and  the  west  side  of  the  little  green  plat  on  the  Hermetier  half 


OH*y-  v.]    METTLBTTES  BOOK. — ^LITTLE  BT78BEL  CHANNEL.     209 

a  point  open  eaBtward  oF  the  highest  part  of  the  Mouette,  leada  eastward 
of  the  Tinker. 

To  mn  through  the  Passe  de  la  Perc^  into  the  Little  Russel,  after 
clearing  the  Fonrqnies,  bring  Vale  mill  a  tittle  open  veatward  of  the 
Perc^e  rod,  and  also  a  little  open  on  the  same  eide  of  the  Corbette 
rock,  marked  b;  a  beacon  N.W.  by  N. ;  this  latter  mark  will  clear  the 
outer  point  of  the  Perc^e  rock,  when  it  ia  covered,  at  half  tide,  at  the 
distance  of  60  j'ards,  and  lead  through  the  middle  of  the  channel,  the 
narrowest  part  of  which,  and  least  depth  (14  feet),  will  be  found  on  a  line 
between  the  north  extreme  of  the  rockj  bank  extending  from  Jethou  and 
the  Tennerette  rock,  which  is  marked  hj  a  staff  and  while  beacon.  When 
Saumarez  monument  comes  open  northward  of  Brehoii  tower,  about  thv 
apparent  breadth  of  the  tower,  t^e  it  as  a  leading  mark  to  clear  the 
Etacre  rock :  when  abreast  the  Etocre,  on  this  line,  the  Victoria  tower 
will  be  seen  in  one  with  the  Creux  rock  beacon  (staff  and  truck),  with 
which  mark  proceed  np  to  the  Creux  rock,  and  round  it  to  the  southward 
at  the  distance  of  half  a  cable  to  get  into  the  Little  Bussel. 

LITTLE  RUSSEL  CHANNEL  lies  on  the  north-west  side  cf 
Herm  between  it  and  Gaeinssy,  and  is  much  contracted  bj  numerous  rocks 
projecting  from  both  islands  as  far  out  as  the  Roustet  and  Roussc 
rocks,  which  are  a  little  more  than  8  cables  apart.  The  wind  north- 
ward of  N.N.W.,  or  eastward  of  S.E,  will  always  prove  a  lending  wind 
through  this  channel  from  the  northward,  without  the  certainty  of  which 
no  square-rigged  vessel  of  large  draught  should  attempt  its  navigation. 

The  entrance  to  the  Little  Bussel  from  the  northward  is  between  the 
Braye  rocks  on  the  western  side,  and  the  Amfroque  rocks  on  the  eastern. 
The  approach  to  both  these  groups  is  exceedingly  dangeroua,  as  well  ou 
account  of  the  tides  as  from  the  numerous  hidden  and  other  rocks  by 
which  they  are  encompassed;  the  principal  of  which,  and  the  most 
dangerous,  are  the  Platte  Boue  and  the  BouAresse,  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
the  Amfroqne,  and  the  Eoques  de  Braye  or  Platte  Foug^re  in  the  vicinity 
of  the  Braye. 

BraT6  RockB*~~'^^  Grande  and  Pedte  Braye  rocks  lie  about  a  mile 
off  tho  north-eost  point  of  Guernsey  j  they  are  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  of 
each  other,  and  both  are  encompassed  with  outlying  dangerous  rooks.  The 
Grande  Braye,  elevated  10  feet  above  high-water  springs,  has  on  it  a 
tiJpod  beacon  surmounted  by  a  cross  ;  the  Petite  Braye  is  3  or  3  feet  lower. 

The  Roques  de  Braye  or  Platte  Foug^re,  appear  about  half  tide;  the 
ground  ia  clean  at  the  distance  of  a  cable  eastward  of  them.  An  iron 
frame  beacon  etands  on  the  outermost  or  north-eaatem  rock  of  the  group 
surmounted  by  a  red  cone  12  feet  above  the  highest  tides,  to  guide  vessels 
into  the  Little  Russel. 

Q  7049.  o 


flff  r-xsmi.  ^X^iSJA. 


f_  -.1  -a*  afjt  --W  L^^  3.i»eL 

«7^  r~A',v*  tui  a^   ift.-.^f-n  ^wcwX  sal  *oaEfi.w^I  c^ 

■It  yA3Z  'J  Bern,  ^eartae  a.  aj  K. :  I&=S  nufc 

Platt«  Boqne,  l*^?  ^■'*''  *7  ^-  "^'  »  »3e  frma  she  Corbvcu^  h 

r.-,«r.cr!  '^  ■trv/i^.  r.-.»«  K*is:M  vhh  buck  ■&>!  aajwiite  baads.  JJtoai  s 
'»'.>  hA.K.  '.f'jta  tM  t^Mitu,  'a  *  ro^  swaeh  U  low  wvur;  uad  from 
♦tii«  rv;«  t//w»Hi  iK*  Oif+>*«*-,  '»a  »  lis*  enoTfti  towwds  tlw  Basri,  tfaae 
tit-.  '^.t-.TMl  '!an^«r'A<t  rr>:k.4  wLicb  Atno^en  sboold  chHsOt  sroid  when 
jutting. 

Bone  AKOnor,  ^itb  'miIt  ^  f"^  <■'■  it  •*  l<nr  Wats',  B  the  ao^Ii- 
wHibTn  Mild  innKrmort  4i«r^  oa  thii  nde  the  Lhde  BoskI,  of  «iuA  it  is 
nf:'*—*ry  I'l  '^utiffO  •rtrangtr^  It  lita  with  the  Coal  hole,  onder  Tale 
r-fMir*!,  in  liDT  wirh  t)i«  ^nd  tit  Suniimn  breakwater  N.  bj'  E.  )  E.  ;  and 
tt"v»--  'I'-M  ''j>i«nKr«  jnit  open  norlb-c^t  of  the  rain  of  Ivy  castle 
N.H',  J  W,  'rh'sraare  tworockR,  oneof9feet  water,  Ijii^nBBiljacable 
S.W.  I,;  W.  }  W,  r.r  the  Ag«iu>r ;  Miotber  of  12  feet  at  nearij  dte  nme 
iliHtanno  H.W,  i  H.  i  Mi'l  a  third,  the  Trras  Gninen,  of  13  feet  water,  lying 
2  r-nlih-K  S.K.  hy  K.  ^  K.  of  it. 

ROUSBO  Rook.— llift  following  rocks  are  on  the  east  aide  of  the 
i,ittl<i  KiiwH'l :— Tli(!  I'lattA  Itoiio  (ilcscribed  in  page  207)  ;  the  Boobeflee 
(lri(!H  H  fiM-t  at  low  wntfr  ;  tin;  Tautcnay  is  just  awash  at  high  water,  and 
liiiM  im  iIki  riorili-coHt  i>nd  of  it  a  beacon  tower  22  feet  high  painted  in 
lilnnk  and  wliito  vertical  atripoa,  and  Hurmountod  by  a  staff ;  the  Cavale 
which  ilricit  one  fool  at  low  water.  The  Rous§e  rock  ia  8  feet  above  high- 
wnUT  H|iriiifCH,  and  in  innrlccd  with  an  iron  beacon,  consUting  of  a  crosa  with 
nn  iinclior  fluke  at  each  point.  A  dangerous  string  of  rocks,  awash  at  low 
wator,  iirojuct  in  a  W.  hy  N.  ditcction  60  /aiila  from  the  Ronase. 

To  {HkHM  norlhwanl  and  wcHtword  of  nil  thcsn  locks,  keep  Cfttel  ehnrch 
*]iiri>  a  (|iinrt<'r  of  a  point  op'n  iioilhwanl  of  Valo  caatle,  W.  by  S.  ^  S.; 
anil  wt)«»  \\w  uorth-oaslcm  end  of  St'rk  comes  on  with  the  middle  of  the 
(Inmdo  Anifr«M)ue.  a  ^-elUH<l  will  bo  abreast  tho  Platte  Boue.  The  abore 
uutrk,  CAlvt  cluirch  o|>c-n  nortliward  of  Vale  castle,  will  also  lead  into  the 
lairway  of  lh«  LitUo  Riiwol. 

lhtvh<  column  it)  lino  with  Brohnn  tower  is  a  good  clearing  marie  for 
tht^  i-wkn  on  Ilu>  (<iv<t  sido  of  (ho  Litilo  Ki)sm;11,  as  far  as  the  CaTale,  to 
olwr  whtrh,  tlw  w>lumi>  nmst  W  o|H>tii>d  onoMdoor  the  other  of  BrehoD 
t\'wet.    TU*"  brwwt  mark  fiir  the  Osv-slo  is  the  ISorre  aux  Bats  obdiak  in 


eHAP.T.]  LITTLB  SITSSEL  OHAKVEL.  211 

fioe  vitb  the  Mouissoni&re  rock,  S.E.  ^  S.  Do^le  column  in  line  with 
Brehon  tctrer  will  also  clear  the  rocks  extending  from  the  Bourse  and 
lead  inside  the  Bones  Gienneti. 

The  BoUStel  i^  the  most  dangerous  rock  in  the  Little  Ruseel,  as  it 
lies  exactly  in  mid-channel,  and  does  not  appear  until  4  bonrs  ebb.  The 
beacon  on  the  Bousse  bears  from  it  S.S.E.  ^  E.  3^  cables  ;  a  sunken 
rock,  connected  with  the  Boustel,  E.N.E.,  half  a  cable ;  the  beacon  on  the 
Corbett«  rock,  N.  by  W.  ^  W.  rather  more  than  half  a  mile ;  the  beaccn 
on  the  Platte  Boque,  W.  \  N^  half  a  mile ;  and  the  Gruue  an  Rouge  rock, 
S.W.  by  W.  J  W,  nearly  one  mile. 

A  black  buoy  is  moored  abont  20  yards  S.W.  of  the  Bonstel ;  and  a  red 
buoy,  50  yards  X.N.E.  from  the  Gmne  an  Bcnge,  which  latter  has  only 
3  feet  on  it  at  low  water. 

DireCtionB, — The  best  leading  mark  to  the  entrance  and  through  the 
fairway  of  the  Little  Bussel  channel,  when  approaching  it  from  the  north- 
ward, is  St.  Martin  point  just  open  westward  of  the  tower  on  Brehon 
rock,  bearing  S.W.  ^  W. ;  there  is  do  other  mark  whatever  bo  conspi- 
cuous, or  which  shows  the  alteration  of  the  vessel's  position  so  quickly. 
This  mark  wilt  lead  in  through  the  fairway,  and  between  the  Boustel  and 
Bousse  rocks;  and  when  either  the  high  land  at  the  north-east  end  of 
Serk  begins  to  shut  in  with  the  northernmost  bluff  laud  o&  Herm,  or  when 
Sanmarez  monument  appears  within  its  breadth  of  Mont  Crevelt  tower, 
W.  j  N.,  a  vessel  will  be  abreast  the  former  rock  as  well  as  tbe  latter. 
Near  this  position,  Belvidere  house,  a  large  building  on  the  bluff  to  the 
eastward  of  fort  Geoi^e,  wilt  be  seen  in  line  with  a  white  patch  jnst 
within  the  east  extreme  of  castle  Comet;  which  mark  will  lead  more  than 
half  a  cable  eastward  of  the  Grune  an  Bouge,  about  a  cable  eastward  of 
'Uie  Agenor,  and  all  other  dangers,  and  up  to  the  anchoi'age  in  the  road. 
This  latter  mark  will  lead  right  up  through  the  Little  Bussel,  clear  all  tbe 
.  dangers  in  it,  and,  being  the  only  line  that  is  possible  to  answer  this 
desirable  purpose,  is  given  here  ;  but  as  it  neceasaiily  passes  rather  near 
some  of  the  rocks,  the  Grune  au  Bouge,  for  instance,  care  must  be  taken 
at  these  parts  to  keep  olf  a  little  one  side  or  the  other  as  necessary. 

If  intending  to  pass  north-westward  of  the  Boustel  and  Grune  au 
Rouge,  bring  the  near  angle  of  castle  Cornet,  marked  with  a  vertical 
white  stripe,  in  lino  with  fort  George  signal  post,  and  it  will  lead  three- 
ijuartera  of  a  cable  westward  of  the  Boustel,  and  one  cable  westward  of  the 
Grune  au  Bogue.  When  Brehon  and  Herm  towers  come  in  line,  open  the 
leading  marks  a  little  either  way,  as  desirable,  to  clear  the  Trois  Grunes 
and  the  Agenor,  and  proceed  on  until  the  town  church  opens  southward  of 
tbe  old  harbour  lighthouse,  then  hanl  in  for  the  anchorage. 

o  2 


212  CHANNEL  ISLANDS.  [cbat.  ▼• 

If  a  vessel  be  compelled  to  beat  throngb  the  Little  Bttssel,  it  may  be 
usef  al  to  note,  that  St.  Martin  point  kept  open  eastward  of  the  BrehoHiiet 
rock  will  clear  the  Roustel;  and  the  same  point  open  one  side  or  the 
other  of  the  Brehon  rock  will  clear  the  Bones  Gennet^. 

If  intending  to  mn  through  Doyle  pass  into  the  Little  Rnssel,  keep  the 
windmill  on  the  island  of  Great  Serk,  just  open  northward  of  the 
northernmost  high  land  of  Herm,  and  in  one  also  with  the  Mouisonniere, 
a  remarkable  pointed  rock  on  the  sandy  beach,  bearing  S.S.E.  ^  E.  which 
mark  will  lead  through  the  pass,  between  the  Boqae  au  Nord  and  the 
Grande  Braye,  inside  the  Grune  Pierre,  and  between  the  Grune  la  FoBse 
and  the  Yraic,  into  the  fairway  of  the  Little  Eussel;  but  the  greatest 
caution  must  be  used,  when  near  ow  water,  to  preserve  the  leading  mark. 
The  narrowest  part  of  the  channel  is  between  the  Grune  Pierre  and  the 
rocks  off  Homptol ;  its  width  here  being  only  650  feet.  The  Pierre  aux 
Rats  obelisk  on  the  north  end  of  Herm,  will  appear  a  little  to  the  left  of 
the  Mouisonniere. 

OBEAT  BXTSSEL  CHANNEL  lies  between  the  islands  of 
Herm  and  Jethou,  and  the  clusters  of  rock,  called  the  Amfroques,  the 
LoDgue  Pierre,  the  Godin,  &c.,  to  the  north-west ;  and  the  islands  of  Serk 
and  Brecqhou  and  the  rocks  in  their  vicinity  to  the  south-east.  This  channel 
which  is  the  eastern  passage  to  Guernsey,  is  above  two  miles  wide,  and 
easy  of  access,  even  to  strangers.  The  following  are  the  principal 
dangers  in  it : 

Bonne  Grune  Bock,  with  only  14  feet  water  on  it,  is  the  outer 
danger  at  the  northern  entrance  of  the  Great  Russel.  It  lies  E.  by  N.  iN. 
3  miles  from  the  north  end  of  Herm,  and  E.  ^  S.  rather  more  than  a  mile 
from  the  Grande  Amfroque  ;  and  is  cleared  to  the  eastward  by  opening 
the  west  extreme  of  Little  Serk  of  the  east  extreme  of  Brecqhou. 

Noir  Pute  Bock,  lying  on  the  western  side  of  the  Great  Russel, 
about  a  mile  south-eastward  from  the  mill  on  Herm,  is  never  wholly  covered, 
though  at  equinoctial  tides  it  is  sometimes  nearly  awash.  A  string  of 
rocks  awash  at  low  water,  extend  from  it  to  the  north-eastward  for  nearly 
1^  cables.  From  the  Noire  Pute,  the  Doyle  column  appears  a  quarter  of 
a  point  open  southward  of  the  Fauconniere. 

Fourqnies  Bocks,  which  dry  7  feet  at  low  water,  lie  about  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  eastward  of  Jethou  island,  and  from  their  centre 
St  Martin  point  is  in  one  with  the  Goubini^re  rock,  W.  by  S.,  and  Vale 
castle  in  line  with  the  sandy  beach  on  the  north-eastern  side  of  Crevichon 
island  N.W,  by  N. 

Grands  Bouillons  rocks,  having  only  9  feet  over  them  at  low 
waler,  lie  between  the  Noir  Pute  and  the  Fourquies.    The  thwart  mark  for 


,•  - 


^»^T.]  GREAT  BT7S3EL  OHAKKEL.  218 

them*  is  the  Caqnorobet;  a  large  rock  in  the  form  of  a  hay-stack,  projecting 
from  the  eaBtem  side  of  Hemii  in  line  with  the  north-eastern  low  sandy 
point  of  that  island  bearing  North. 

Goubinidre  rock,  elevated  lO  feet  above  high-water  springs,  lies 
South,  half  a  mile  from  Jethou. 

Banc  dCS  AnoilSf  with  18  feet  over  them  at  low  water,  lie  abont 
S.W.  by  W.,  a  third  of  a  mile  from  the  Gonbinifere ;  with  Mont  Crevelt 
tower  in  line  with  the  eastern  side  of  the  Grosse  Ferri^re,  bearing 
N.N.W. 

TfiTESd'AVAL  BOCES  He  about  S.W.  nearly  1^  miles  from 
Jethou  island,  and  dry  at  low  water  great  springs.  The  marks  for  them  are, 
Herm  mill  (without  vanes)  in  one  with  a  remarkable  red-headed  rock  on  the 
beach  between  the  Grande  Fauconniere  and  Jethou,  called  the  Petite  Faucon- 
ni^re,  bearing  N.E.  ^  £. ;  Yale  mill  its  apparent  breadth  open  westward  of 
Vale  castle,  North ;  and  the  lighthouse  on  south  pier  head  of  St.  Peter  Port 
old  harbour,  shut  in  with  castle  Cornet,  N.W.  J  N. 

Buoy. — A  conical  buoy,  with  black  and  white  horizontal  stripes,  lies 
about  120  yards  south-west  of  the  middle  head  of  the  T^tes  d'Aval. 
Vessels  should  pass  westward  of  the  buoy. 

Sardrii^re  rock,  with  8  feet  water  on  it,  lies  south-eastward  of  the 
T^tes  d'Aval ;  with  St.  Martin  church  spire  on  with  the  north  side  of 
Fermain  beacon,  N.W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  and  the  Selle  Boque  twice  its 
apparent  breadth  open  westward  of  the  Goubini^re,  N.E.  }  E. 

Givaude  rock,  about  70  feet  high,  forms  the  eastern  boundary  of  the 
Great  Kussel  channel.  It  lies  off  the  west  end  of  Brecqhou,  and  a  reef 
extends  from  its  north-west  point  to  the  distance  of  nearly  half  a  cable. 
The  Nest^,  a  pointed  rock  that  dries  20  feet  at  low  water,  lies  N.E.  by  N. 
one  cable  from  the  Givaude,  on  the  outer  edge  of  a  reef  extending  from 
Brecqhou. 

Tll6  GrUIIC  is  a  sunken  rock,  over  which,  however,  there  are  never 
less  than  48  feet  water,  lying  about  1 J  miles  westward  of  Brecqhou.  The 
marks  for  it  are,  the  Grande  Amfroque  in  one  with  the  Noire  Pnte 
N.N.E.  ^  E.,  and  Victoria  tower  half  the  breadth  of  castle  Comet  open 
northward  of  it  N.W.  J  W. 

Directions. — ^The  course  to  the  northern  entrance  of  the  Great 
Rnssel  channel,  from  the  middle  of  Alderney  Race,  is  about  W.S.W.,  and 
the  distance  21  miles.  In  proceeding,  however,  towards  this  channel  from 
the  north-eastward,  great  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid  the  Banc  de  la 
Sch61e  (described  at  page  255),  lying  nearly  in  the  direct  line  between 
Alderney  Bace  and  the  entrance. 

Having  entered  the  channel,  with  the  western  extreme  of  Little  Serk 
open  eastward  of  the  eastern  extreme   of  Brecqhou,  in  order  to  avoid 


214  CHANNEL  ISLANDS.  [chaf.v 

the  Bonne  Gruue,  the  north-eastern  danger  on  the  western  side  of  the 
channel,  bring  St.  Martin  point  a  quarter  of  a  point  open  southward  of 
the  Goubiniere  rock,  bearing  W.  ^  S. ;  this  will  lead  southward  of  the 
Noire  Pate,  the  Grands  Bouillons,  and  the  Fourquies.  Continue  to  ran 
with  this  mark  on  until  the  Grande  Amfroque  appears  within  its  own 
apparent  breadth  of  the  Selle  Roque,  a  rock  near  the  south-east  point  of 
Herm  bearing  N.£.  This  latter  mark  must  now  be  preserved  until  the 
lighthouse  on  the  south  pier  head  of  St.  Peter  Port  old  harbour  comes 
open  southward  of  castle  Comet,  or  until  St.  Martin  church  steeple,  seen 
over  the  trees,  is  in  line  with  the  Martello  tower  in  Fermain  baj ;  either 
of  these  two  marks  will  lead  southward  of  the  Sardri^re  and  the  T^tes 
d'Aval ;  after  having  rounded  which,  steer  boldly  for  the  Great  road. 

There  is  a  good  channel  between  the  T^tes  d'Aval  and  the  Ferri^re 
rocks,  the  middle  of  which  lies  with  Victoria  tower  half-way  between 
castle  Comet  flagstaff  and  the  north  angle  of  the  castle  wall  bearing  N.W» 
This  channel,  however,  should  not  be  attempted  by  a  stranger  unless  in 
cases  of  emergency,  the  difficulty  of  the  tides  rendering  its  navigation 
liaziirdoufl. 

When  turning  through  the  Great  Russel,  in  standing  to  the  south- 
eastward, the  island  of  Serk  may  be  approached  to  about  half  a  mile 
without  fear,  as  between  the  Bee  du  Nez  and  Brecqhou  island  there  are 
no  rocks  farther  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore ;  but  take  care 
when  standing  towards  the  west  point  of  Brecqhou^  and  to  the  southward 
of  it,  to  keep  the  Grande  Amfroque  its  own  apparent  length  open  west- 
ward of  the  Givaude  rock,  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  to  clear  the  Dents  and  Hautes 
Boues. 

When  standing  northward  towards  Herm  and  Jethou,  do  not  shut  in 
St.  Martin  point  with  the  Goubiniere  when  ^to  the  eastward  of  the  latter 
rock,  but  keep  it  a  quaiter  of  a  point  open  southward  of  it,  to  avoid  the 
Fourquies  and  the  Bouillons ;  and  then  proceed  as  before  directed. 

The  north-eastern  stream  of  tide  slacks  half  an  hour  sooner  on  the 
south-eastern  side  of  the  Great  Russel,  that  is  under  Serk,  than  on  its 
north-western  side. 

Serk. — ^This  island  lie  3  J  miles  S.E.  by  S.  from  Herm,  and  divides 
the  Great  Russel  from  the  Deroute  channel.  The  island  is  1^  miles 
broad,  and  nearly  2|  miles  long,  including  Little  Serk,  with  which  it 
communicates  by  an  isthmus  or  very  narrow  causeway,  called  La  Coupee. 
It  is  lofty  and  precipitous  in  all  its  extent,  and  its  highest  part,  at  the  base 
of  the  windmill  near  the  centre  of  the  island,  is  375  feet  above  the  level 
of  low  water.  The  small  island  of  Brecqhou  lies  on  its  western  side, 
being  separated  from  it  by  a  narrow  channel  only  70  yards  wide,  named  by 
the  islanders  Guoliot  pass,  through  which  the  tides  ran  with  great  velocity. 


CHAP,  v.]  BEBK. — ^ISLETS  AND  BOCKS.  215 

There  is  no  town  in  Serk;  there  is  however  a  hamlet  or  gi'onp  of 
cottages,  called  La  Villei  on  the  north-east  side  of  the  island.  The  island 
constitutes  one  Bojal  Fief  or  Manor  held  direct  from  the  Crown.  There 
are  forty  original  copyhold  farms,  averaging  15  acres  each,  the  title  to 
which  descends  in  succession  to  the  eldest  sons,  or  if  no  sons,  to  the  eldest 
daughters  of  their  occupants ;  the  junior  members  of  the  different  families 
are  therefore  frequently  compelled  to  emigrate. 

The  island  is  fertile,  highly  cultivated,  and  besides  supplying  all  the 
wants  of  its  inhabitants  it  exports  largely  in  cereals  and  vegetables  to 
Guernsey.  Its  rocky  coasts  abound  with  fish,  particularly  with  crabs  and 
lobsters.  All  able-bodied  men  belonging  to  the  island  are  organised  as 
militia,  of  which  there  are  140  of  all  arms.  In  1871  the  population  was 
registered  at  551.  There  is  a  church  where  the  Anglican  service  is 
regularly  conducted  in  Freuch.    There  are  also  two  endowed  schools. 

The  approach  to  Serk  on  the  north-eastern,  eastern,  south-eastern,  and 
south-western  sides,  is  difficult  by  reason  of  the  numerous  rocks  which 
encompass  it,  as  well  as  by  the  rapidity  and  irregularities  of  the  tide  in 
its  immediate  vicinity.  These  difficulties,  however,  may  bo  easily  over- 
come, if  common  attention  be  paid  to  the  leading  marks  and  run  of  the 
stream ;  and  the  island  will  afford  good  security  against  almost  all  windsy. 
as  will  be  shown  in  the  description  of  the  different  bays. 

There  are  several  small  inlets  in  various  parts  of  the  rocky  coasts  of 
the  island,  where  the  inhabitants  haul  up  and  secure  their  boats  in  stormy 
weather ;  the  most  noted  and  frequented  of  which  is  Le  Creux,  so  called 
from  a  subterraneous  passage  in  its  neighbourhood.  It  lies  on  the  eastern 
side  of  the  island,  and  is  the  general  rendezvous  for  landing  and  shipping' 
when  the  weather  will  permit,  as  well  as  the  principal  resort  of  the  fishing 
and  other  island  boats.  The  small  harbour  here  situated  has  lately  been 
enlarged,  and  now  affords  perfect  security  to  small  ci-aft ;  its  entrance  is,. 
however,  only  60  feet  wide,  and  dries  at  low  water  of  spring  tides. 

"WAtor. — There  is  a  tolerable  run  of  water  on  the  north  side  of  Baleine- 
bay,  to  the  westward  of  Ch&teau  point,  on  the  south-west  side  of  Serk : 
the  stream  from  it  during  the  winter  season  is  very  copious,  and  may  be 
procured  with  off'-shore  winds  without  difficulty.  It  is  the  only  accessible 
watering  place  round  the  island,  with  the  exception  of  an  inconsiderable 
drain  in  port  du  Moulin,  on  its  north-west  side,  and  another  of  similar 
character  at  Creux  harbour. 

ISLETS  and  ROCKS  around  SERK.— The  following  islets 

and  rocks  above  high  water  lie  off  the  coasts  of  Serk. 

The  Noire  Pierre,  lying  off  Banquette  point,  on  the  north-east 
coast,  is  a  small  square  rock,  1 1  feet  high  and  steep-to  all  round. 


216  CHAXKEL  I8IJLKD8. — aSBX.  [map.  lu 

The  Petite  Moie,  ^7  feet  highy  is  a  rocky  elump^eleep^to  exMpt  at; 
its  north  point,  off  which,  at  the  distance  of  GO  feet^  there  is  a  sunken  rodu 

The  Grand  Moie,  b^i°g  off  Robert  point,  is  a  large  rocky  damp, 
91  feet  high,  dangerous  to  approach,  especially  on  its  eastern  side. 

The  Burons,  are  a  cluster  of  cragged  rocks  66  feet  high,  in  the  form 
of  a  half  moon,  rising  nearly  perpendicular  from  the  sea,  8teep*to  on  their 
south-eastern  f*ide,  but  dsngerous  to  approach  from  any  other  quarter. 
\  hey  lie  about  E.S.E.,  one  quarter  of  a  mile  from  Le  Creux  and  between 
f  hem  and  Serk  is  the  Goulct  pass,  which  dries  half-way  across  at  low  water 
springs ;  the  deepest  water,  4  feet,  being  towards  Le  Creuz.  Through 
this  pass  the  tides  run  with  gi*eat  strength,  both  ways,  but  especially  about 
half  flood ;  setting  right  for  and  over  the  Foumier  and  Grune  de  Nord 
rocks,  on  the  north  side,  and  the  Pierre  Carrie  rock  on  the  south  side  ; 
tliis  pass  therefore  should  not  be  attempted  in  a  sailing  vessd,  but  on  the 
greatest  emergency. 

The  Conch^e,  lyiQg  about  half  a  mile  southward  of  the  Barons,  is  a 
sqimre  rock,  1 1  feet  high,  whitened  at  the  top,  having  sunken  rocks  close 
to  all  around. 

The  Baleine  rock,  in  Baleine  bay,  is  20  feet  high,  and  has  a  rocky 
reef  extending  70  feet  from  its  north-east  side. 

Pierre  du  Cours  is  a  small  rock  awash  at  high  water,  and  very 
steep-to  on  its  south-east  side.  It  is  useful  as  a  guide,  as  its  name  implies, 
to  vessels  passing  inside  L'Etac  de  Serk. 

L'Etac  de  Serk  is  a  rocky  islet  about  200  feet  high,  lying  off  the 
south  end  of  Little  Serk.  In  form  it  resembles  a  hay-stac^,  and  is -very 
conspicuous,  both  from  its  appearance  and  position. 

On  the  south-west  side  of  Little  Serk  are  numerous  rocks,  the  most  coii- 
spicuoiis  of  which  are  the  Moi  du  Fort  Goury,  a  square-toi^[>edrock, 
G2  feet  high  ;  the  Moie  de  la  Bretagne,  a  peaked  rock,  57  feet  h^  ;  and 
the  Moie  de  la  Fontaine,  57  feet  high. 

The  Givaude  rock  is  described  in  page  213. 

The  Moie  Batard,  ^  square  rock  of  a  whitish  colour  about  20  feet 
high,  lies  off  the  north-west  coast  of  Brecqhou. 

BLANCH ARD  BOCK,  lying  nearly  I|  nules  eastward  of  Serk, 
has  only  5  feet  over  it  at  the  lowest  equinoctial  spring  tides.  The  marks 
tor  it  are,  the  Conch^e  rock  in  one  with  a  remarkable  cavity,  or  chasm, 
called  the  Convache,  to  the  northward  of  La  Coupee,  bearing  W.  by  N.  |  N., 
and  the  Corbee  duNez  just  open  southward  of  the  Gk)rge,  a  rock  at  the 
south-west  end  of  the  Fetite  Moie,  N.W.  }  N. 

Ch&teau  point  open  southward  of  the  Concha,  N.W.  by  W.J  W. 
leads  southward  of  the  Blanchard  ;  the  Corbir^e  rock,  off  the  sooth-'West 
point  of  Jersey,  touching  the  land  about  cape  Grosnez,  S.  by  W,  |  W., 


CHAp;.v.l  BLAKOHABB-  BOCK, — ^BALEIKB  BAY.  217 

Jeadfer  half  «  mile  easlrvrard ;  and  the  northeni  blaff  laad  on  Herm  4n 
sight  to  the  north-eastward  of  the*  Bee  da  NeS|  N.W.|  leads  to  the 
northward. 

Many  rocks  lie  within  the  Blanchard  and  to  the  eastward  of  the  Borons, 
and  between  them  are  several  navigable  channels,  of  10  to  26  fathoms 
water  ;  they  are,  however,  seldom  freqaented  but  by  the  island  boats  on 
account  of  the  impetuous  whirl  of  the  tides. 

BALEINE  BA7}  on  the  south-eastern  side  of  Serk,  between  the 
Baleine  and  the  Conchdd  rocks  may  be  resorted  to  with  great  advantage  in 
winter  as  well  as  in  summer  as  it  affords  excellent  anchorage  in  3  to 
7  fathoms,  over  sand,  fine  gravel,  and  broken  shells ;  and  shelter  from  all 
winds  from  N.N.E.,  round  by  the  North  to  West. 

Notwithstanding  the  numerous  oulfalls  and  various  discolourations  of 
the  water,  which  appear  on  all  sides  on  approaching  this  bay,  the  only 
dangers  are,  the  T^tes  de  la  Conch^e,  the  Gripe,  the  Yingt  Clos^  the  Balmfe, 
and  the  Demie  Balm^e. 

The  Tdtes  de  la  Conch^e  hftve  never  less  than  6  fathcms  water 
over  them. 

The  Gripe,  lying  directly  in  the  fairway  of  the  entrance  to  the  bay, 
has  only  6  feet  on  it  at  low-water  springs,  from  which  the  Concha  is  in 
line  with  the  Goulet  rock,  N.E.  by  N.,  and  the  Balm^e  is  in  line  with  the 
Pignon,  W.  i  N. 

The  Balm^ei  which  appears  at  a  quarter  ebb  lies  within  and  to  the 
westward  of  the  Gripe,  with  the  Baleine  in  line  with  La  Conp^,  N.  ^  W., 
and  the  western  side  of  the  Burons  touching  the  outer  or  north-eastern 
part  of  Terrible  point,  N.E.  by  E.  On  this  latter  line  of  bearing  at  the 
distance  of  three>q«artera  of  a  cable  from  the  Balm^  there  is  also  a  small 
rock  called  Demie  de  Balm6e,  which  dries  9  feet  at  low  water. 

Ving^  CIOS  Bank,  lies  4  cables  southward  of  the  Balm^,  between 
it  and  L'Etac  de  Serk,  and  consists  of  sand  and  shingle  interspersed  with 
rocks ;  one  of  these,  at  the  north  end  of  the  bank,  dries  3  feet  at  low  water 
springs,  at  which  time  two  others  to  the  southward  have  only  3  feet  water 
over  them.  The  south  end  of  La  Coup^  in  line  with  the  Baleme 
N.  by  W.  \  W.,  leads  nearly  2  cables  north-eastward  of  the  bank ;  and  the 
Doyle  column,  on  Guernsey,  in  sight  to  the  southward  of  L'Etac  de  Serk, 
N.W.  by  W^  leads  southward.  The  sand  and  shingle  of  this  bank  is  con 
tinually  shifting ;  its  inclination  being  entirely  governed  by  the  tide  and 
wind. 

Directions.— Chftteail  point  kept  open  southward  of  the  G)nohde 
will  lead  into  the  anchorage  of  Baleine  bay,  to  the  northward  of  the  Gripe ; 
and  Serk  mill  just  open  West  of  Ch&teau  point  N.  i  W.,  will  lead  into 


218  CHANXEL  ISLANDS. — SEBK.  [chap.  v. 

the  stoutkward  of  it :  in  both  cases  anchor  when  the  west  extreme  of  the 
BuroDH  comes  on  with  Terrible  point. 

LA  QR£ VE  de  la  VILLE,  on  the  north-eastern  side  of  Serk, 
gives  its  name  to  an  anchorage  affording  good  shelter  for  small  vessels  firom 
wcslorly  and  southerly  winds,  in  from  6  to  9  fathoms  water;  but  the  ground 
being  sand  and  rock  the  anchor  is  likely  to  come  home,  unless  riding  with 
a  long  ^scope  of  cable.  It  has  also  this  inconvenience  attending  it,  that 
should  the  wind  sud<lenly  shift  to  the  northward  or  north-eastward  at 
low  wutor,  the  tide  running  for  3  hours  to  the  southward  after  that  period, 
a  sailing  vessel  could  not  jiossibly  weather  the  strong  indraught  of  the 
Goulet  pass,  the  cifects  of  which  are  sensibly  felt  half  a  mile  north- 
eastward of  it,  and  must  therefore  ride  until  the  offing  tide  slacks,  or  at 
least  if  lianl  pressed,  until  there  is  water  enough  over  the  neck  of  the 
Goulet. 

Dangers  of  La  Qr6ve  de  la  Ville.— The  Sardri&re  rock,  with 
29  feet  over  it  at  low  water,  lies  East  one  quarter  of  a  mile  from  Bee  du 
Nez.  The  Jolicot  rock,  which  dries  5  feet  at  low  water,  lies  S.W.  three- 
quarters  of  a  cable  from  the  Sardricre ;  and  the  Moulinet  rock,  which  dries 
8  feet,  lies  just  eastward  of  Bee  du  Nez,  and  only  150  feet  off  shore.  The 
Jollcot  and  the  Moulinet  lie  East  and  West  of  eacli  other,  rather  more  than 
an  eighth  of  a  mile  apart ;  thei*e  is  a  safe  channel  of  6  fathoms  water 
between  them,  in  entering  which  from  the  westward  be  careful  to  have  the 
l>eak  of  the  Grande  Moio  well  in  sight  eastward  of  Banquette  point 
before  hauling  in.  The  peak  of  the  Grande  Moie  in  line  with  Banquette 
point  clears  the  Moulinet;  and  the  same  peak  over  the  middle  of  the 
Pecheresse  rock  leads  over  Jolicot. 

The  Pdcheresse,  lying  about  East,  nearly  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from 
the  rifle  target,  1874,  on  the  summit  of  La  Grune,  covers  at  high  waten 
but  only  to  the  depth  of  2  feet ;  its  inshore  point  is  long  and  straggling, 
narrowing  the  channel  between  it  and  the  island  to  a  cable. 

There  is  a  rock  with  7  feet  on  it  lying  E.  ^  N.  nearly  a  cable  from  the 
Pecheresse;  and  another,  which  diies  3  feet,  called  the  Grand  Boue, 
lying  E.  by  S.  ^  S.  rather  more  than  a  cable  from  it. 

The  Favlaison  rock,  just  awash  at  low  water,  lies  N.E.  nearly  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  Noirre  Pierre. 

Directions. — There  are  two  entrances  into  La  Greve  de  la  "Vllle ; 
one  from  the  northward,  between  the  island  and  the  Noire  Pierre,  and  one 
from  the  southward,  which  is  very  narrow,  between  the  island  and  the 
Grande  Moie.  The  marks  to  lead  in  from  the  northward  are,  the 
Noire  Pierre  in  one  with  a  remarkable  hollowed  rock  on  the  shore,  the 
upper  part  of  which  has  been  whitewashed,  called  La  Chapelle,  bearing 


CHAP,  v.]      LA  GRiVE  BE  LA  VILLB. — ^BANQUETTE  BAY,     219 

S.S.W.  \  W.|  or  La  Chapelle  half  a  point  open  eastward  of  Banqnette 
pointy  S.  ^  W. ;  between  these  limits  a  vessel  maj  also  work  in.  The 
Noire  Pierre  is  steep-to  on  all  sides  but  the  south. 

No  particular  marks  can  be  given  to  lead  into  this  anchorage  from  the 
southward,  that  is,  between  the  Grande  Moie  and  the  island.  There  is 
never  less  than  3  fathoms  in  this  channel,  but  as  a  rock,  awash  at  low 
water,  lies  within  the  Grande  Moie,  and  connected  with  it  under  watei* 
at  a  distance  of  150  feet,  care  must  be  taken  to  pass  through  nearer  to 
Robert  point,  which  is  steep-to,  rather  than  in  mid -channel.  There  is  also 
at  the  distance  of  a  cable  northward  of  Robert  point,  a  dangerous  rockj 
reef  extending  half  a  cable  fi*om  the  shore  ;  and  a  half-tide  rock  at  half  a 
cable  S.W.  from  the  Petite  Moie. 

AnchoragO. — The  east  extreme  of  the  Burons  just  open  of  Robert 
point,  and  midway  between  Petite  Moie  and  the  island,  S.  bj  E.  :^  E. ; 
outside,  or  eastward  of  this  mark,  the  stream  runs  strong ;  within  or  to  the 
westward  it  is  scarcely  perceptible.  There  is  good  anchorage  on  the 
north-eastern  side  of  Serk,  outside  all  the  rocks,  in  14  to  19  fathoms 
water,  fine  clean  sand,  with  St.  Martin  point,  Guernsey,  in  line  with  the 
Corbde  du  Nez,  bearing  W.  by  N.,  and  the  Chapelle  rock  midway  between 
the  Noire  rock  and  Banquette  point,  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  This  anchorage, 
however,  unless  in  fine  weather,  is  only  tenable  with  the  wind  between 
West  and  S.S.W. 

BANQUETTE  BAY,  on  the  north-western  side  of  Serk,  affords 
good  shelter  against  easterly  south-easterly  and  southerly  winds,  in  5  to 
10  fathoms  water^  over  coarse  sand  interspersed  with  small  black  stones 
and  pieces  of  sea-weed.  Should  the  wind  chop  round  to  the  westward, 
a  vessel  at  anchor  here,  would  even  then  be  able  to  weather  the  Bee 
du  Nez ;  and  may  from  thence  push  to  sea,  or  haul  under  the  lee  of  the 
island. 

Dangors  in  this  bay  are  the  Epissures  rock,  with  13  feet  on  it  at  low 
water  springs,  lying  N.W.  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  Autelets  rocks. 
Between  the  Epissures  and  port  du  Moulin  there  are  several  dangerous 
rocks. 

The  Guillaumez  rook,  which  covers  6  feet  at  high  water,  lies 
E.  by  N.,  rather  more  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  Epissures,  and 
about  half  a  cable  off  shore. 

The  Grune  do  Gouliot,  with  6  feet  over  it  at  low  water,  lies 
north  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  east  end  of  Brecqhou. 

1!h,e  Petite  Banquette  is  a  narrow  bank  of  fine  sand  with  a 
sharp  ridgy  apex.  It  is  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  extent,  north  and 
south,  and  has  16  feet  on  the  shoalest  part  near  the  middle,  from  which  the 
Platte  Boque,  off  port  du  Moulin  bears  E.  ^  S.  distant  2  cables.    In  heavy 


220  CHASTKEL  ISLANDS. — SEEK.  [«:bjlp^t. 

gales  fVom  the  north -eastward  or  westward,  this  bank  has  been  reported  to 
shifl  a  cable  or  more  in  one  tide,  which  here  runs  to  the  south  eastward 
from  low  water  till  half  flood,  and  to  the  south-westward  from  half*ebb  till 
low  water. 

Anchorage. — ^The  best  deep  water  berth  in  Banquette  bay  is  in 
9  fisithoms,  with  Gi\tinde  rock  in  line  with  Moie  Batard,  S.W.  by  W.  }  W> ; 
Little  Serk  mill  (without  vanes)  in  line  with  west  side  of  Gouliot  island, 
S.  {  W. ;  and  Manor  tower  and  north  cliff  of  port  dn  Moulin  in  line, 
S.E.  i  E. 

LA  GRANDE  ORfi VE  is  the  name  applied  to  the  anchorage  an. 
the  south-western  side  of  Serk,  between  Brecqhou  and  Little  Serk.  It 
takes  its  name  from  the  great  beach  of  fine  white  sand  under  La  Couple 
uniting  Great  with  Little  Serk.  The  approach  to  it  is  much  encumbered  with 
rocks,  but  there  is  plenty  of  room  notwithstanding,  and  good  shelter  from 
S.S.E.,  East  and  N.E.  winds,  in  7  to  11  fathoms  water,  fine  sandy  bottom 
with  pieces  of  shells.  It  would  not,  however,  be  prudent  for  a  sailing 
Tessel  to  remain  at  anchor  here  should  the  wind  shift  either  to  the  north- 
ward or  southward  of  the  points  above  specified  ;  for  the  W.S.W.  wind, 
from  the  long  fetch  it  commands,  brings  in  a  heavy  swell;  and  the 
obstruction  caused  by  the  weather  tide  coming  through  the  Grouliot  pass, 
raises  it  to  such  a  height,  as  to  preclude  the  possibility  of  a  vessel  riding 
out  even  a  moderate  gale. 

Should  a  vessel,  therefore,  be  unavoidably  caught  by  a  westerly  wind  at 
t^is  anchorage,  she  should  immediately  endeavour  to  get  ont  either  to  Hke 
westward,  or  through  <the  Gouliot  pas8,^hich  latter  may  widi  ccOkMeiiee 
be  attempted  at  half  flood. 

Dangers  off  La  Grande  Ordve :— The  Hautes  Boues  are  a  group 

of  rocks  lying  off  the  north-west  side  of  Little  Serk.  The  outer, '  nofth-we&t 
rock  of  the  group  dries  4  feet  at  low  water,  and  lies  N.W.  by  W.*,  thr^ 
eighths  of  a  mile  from  the  Moie  de  la  Fontaine :  there  is  deep  water  close 
to  this  rock  to  the  northward  and  westward,  but  a  string  of  dangerous 
rocks  extend  from  it  in  a  S.S.W.  direction,  to  the  distance  of  nearly  half 
a  mile ;  there  are  also  numerous  rocks  within  this  line  to  the  eastward,  five 
of  which  dry  at  low  water. 
There  is  no  safe  channel  for  large  vessels  inside  the  Hautes  Boues« '   ' 

The  Dents,  a  rocky  clump  off  the  south-west  end  off  Brecqhou,  iare 
awash  at  high-water  ordinary  spring  tides.  They  are  steep-to  iahd  safe 
of  approach  from  the  southward. 

The  BaveUSe  is  a  large  rocky  clump  lying  N.  by  E.  rather  more 
than  a  cable  from  the  Moie  de  la  Fontaine.  It  covers  4  feet  at  high 
water. 


caAr.y.2  LA.  GBANDB  GBiVE. — TIDES.  221 

f>om  the  JBaveiLse  in  the  direction  of  the  Gooliot  possi  there  are  several 
dangerous  rocksy  the  chief  of  which,  the  Boue  de  Bate,  has  only  3  feet  on 
it  at  low  water,,  from  which  the  Baveuse  bears  S.S.W.  ^  W.  distant 
1^  cables ;  the  Chapelle,  a  large  rock  to  [the  northward  of  Le  Jeu  pointy 
is  in  a  line  with  that  point ;  and  the  Pierre  au  Norman  appears  in  the 
middle  of  the  chasm  between  the  Mole  du  Gouliot  and  the  islet  called 
La  Tour. 

Directions. — The  mark  to  lead  to  the  inner  anchorage  in  La  Grande 
Gr^ve,  northward  of  the  Haut  Boues  and  southward  of  Boue  de  la  Bale, 
is  the  south  end  of  La  Couple  in  line  with  Le  Jeu  point  Serk  mill  in  line 
with  the  gap  in  the  outer  part  of  Longue  point  bearing  East,  will  lead 
southward  of  the  Dents  and  northward  of  all  the  dangers  in  Grande  Gr^ve, 
until  the  Pierre  au  Norman  comes  in  line  with  the  east  end  of  Brecqhou, 
which  mark  will  lead  to  the  southward  into  the  anchorage.  The  best 
mark  for  anchoring  is  with  the  Pierre  au  Norman  in  line  with  the  east 
point  of  Brecqhou ;  and  about  two-thirds  |of  La  Coup^  roadway  open 
southward  of  the  south-east  point  of  Great  Serk.  Should  it  be  desired 
to  anchor  farther  out,  a  good  position  will  be  obtained  bj  bringing  Serk 
mill  in  line  with  Longue  point  bearing  East,  and  the  Glvaude  between 
Brecqhou  and  the  Dents. 

It  should  however  be  observed  that  as  Serk  mill  will  be  hid  behind  the 
intervening  high  laud  of  Longue  point  before  a  vessel  arrives  abreast  of 
the  Dents,  it  will  be  necessary  to  look  out  in  time  for  another  object  on 
the  same  line  of  direction. 

Tides  around  Serk. — it  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at 
Serk,  at  the  same  time  as  at  St.  Peter  Port,  viz.,  at  6h.  d7m.,  and  there  is 
about  the  same  rise  and  fall,  page  193.  The  streams  in  the  immediate  vicinity 
of  the  island  are  subject  to  a  great  variety  of  courses  during  the  twelve 
hours  ;  their  direction  being  governed  by  the  peculiar  configuration  of  the 
land.  On  its  noi*th-eastern  side  there  is  a  tract  of  water  in  which  a  per- 
petual eddy  or  slack  tide  exists,  during  the  six  hours  that  the  stream  occupies 
in  running  to  the  north-eastward  in  the  Great  Eussel  and  the  D^route 
channels,  extending  nearly  3  miles  from  the  land,  and  gradually  con- 
tracting  in  breadth  as  it  increases  its  distance  from  the  shore.  The  marks 
for  its  north-western  and  south-eastern  limits  are,  the  west  end  of 
Brecqhou  [island  in  one  with  the  ^Corb^  du  Nez ;  and  TEtac^  de^  Serk 
just  appearing  to  the  eastward  of  the  land  at  Le  Creux.  Outside  of  the 
intersection  of  these  marks  even  at  the  distance  of  a  cable^  run  the  true 
Bussel  and  D^route  streams. 

The  streams  in  Balein  bay,  in  Terrible  bay,  and  in  the  neighbourhood 
of  the  Conch^e,  Baleine,  and  Balm^e  rocks,  runs  7^  hours  to  the  eastwards, 


222  CHANNEL  ISLANDS. — SERK.  [chap.  v. 

and  only  4i  hours  to  the  south-west wrrd.  The  former  stream  begins  an 
hour  af\er  low  water  bj  the  shore  and  runs  until  2^  hours  ebb,  when  the 
south-weatem  stream  commences  and  runs  faintly  for  the  remaining 
4^  hours  or  until  an  hour  after  low  water  again. 

The  streams  on  the  north-eastern  side  of  Serk,  in  La  Gr^ve  de  la  Yille 
and  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  Grande  and  Petite  Moie  rocks,  &c.^ 
run  8^  hours  to  the  S.  by  E.  and  only  3^  hours  to  the  N.  by  W.  The 
southern  stream  commences  at  4  hours  flood  and  runs  until  half  an  hour 
afler  low  water,  when  the  northern  stream  commences  and  runs  faintly 
for  the  remaining  3^  hours,  or  until  4  hours  flood  again. 

The  southern  stream  above  mentioned,  on  the  north-eastern  side  of  Serk, 
and  the  northern  one  on  the  south-eastern  side,  branch  off  circuitously  to 
the  eastward  of  the  Burons,  where  they  meet  and  unite  with  the  D6route 
stream,  which  sets  directly  both  ways,  and  runs  for  equal  spaces  of  time. 
A  curved  line  drawn  from  the  Grune  Noire  towards  I'Etac  de  Serk  to 
the  southward,  and  to  the  point  of  intersection*  before  mentioned,  on  the 
north-eastern  side  of  the  island^  will  divide  the  irregular  streams  in-shore 
from  that  of  the  Deroute ;  and  this  line  continued  from  the  above  point  of 
intersection  close  round  the  Bee  du  Nez  towards  the  Givaude  rock,  and 
thence  to  within  4  cables  of  I'Etac  again,  will  divide  the  regular  Russel 
stream  from  the  irr^ular  (me  within  it. 

The  stream  on  the  north-western  side  of  Serk  begins  to  run  to  the 
i^outhward  at  the  Bee  du  Nez,  and  thence  along  the  land  towards  Brecqhou 
island  at  three-quarters  flood  near  which  it  meets  with  the  stream  from 
the  GouHot  pass;  which  latter  prevailing  over  the  former,  carries  it 
circuitously  into  the  Great  Eussel  to  the  north-westward,  where  it  unites 
with  the  regular  stream.  The  stream  begins  to  run  to  the  north-eastward, 
along  the  shore  of  the  Moie  du  Gouliot  towards  the  Bee  du  Nez,  at  three- 
quarters  ebb,  and  so  continues  until  three-quaiters  flood  again. 

The  stream  on  the  south-western  side  of  Serk  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
the  rocks  called  the  Hautes  Boues,  Bretagne,  Sercul,  &c.,  runs  4^  hours 
to  the  northward,  and  only  1^  hours  to  the  southward ;  the  former  stream 
commences  at  half-flood  and  runs  for  one  hour ;  it  then  suddenly  turns 
and  runs  to  the  south-eastward  for  1^  hours,  or  until  half  an  hour  before 
high  water  by  the  shore,  at  which  time  it  again  as  suddenly  veers  to  the 
northward,  and  sets  in  that  direction  for  the  remaining  3^  hours,  or  until 
half  ebb. 


*  These  two  marks  do  not  exactly  intersect  each  other  until  considerably  heyond  the 
eddy  here  alladed  to.  Yale  mill,  however,  in  line  with  the  Sardinias  rock— on  the  east 
side  of  Herm — ^terminates  its  boundary. 


CBAP.  T.] 


TIDES. 


223 


The  stream  in  the  Gouliot  pass  runs  for  equal  spaces  of  time,  similar  ^o 
that  in  the  Great  Bussed  and  does  not  partake  of  the  apparent  irregularity 
which  governs  the  tides  in  its  vicinity.  On  the  contrarj',  the  force  and 
shape  of  the  flood  stream,  acquired  by  the  contracted  and  peculiar  form  of 
the  channel  between  Serk  and.  Brecqhou,  is  continued  until  it  falls  into 
the  Russe!  channel ;  the  same  is  the  case  with  the  ebb  until  it  unites  with 
the  stream  to  the  south-westward  of  the  Hautes  Boues. 


a. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

THE  CASQDET8  ISLETS;  BUBHOU  ISLAND j  ALDERNBY  ISLAND  ASD 
RACE;  AND  BANC  DB  LA  SCHULE. 


VARIATION  IN  1882,  19°  West. 


Thg  ialaude  and  rocks  which  occupy  a  large  portiou  o£  the  space 
between  Brehat  island  and  cape  de  la  Hague,  extend  to  the  northward  as 
far  as  the  parallel  of  that  cape,  where  the;  form  a  sort  of  chain  9  miles 
long  from  west  to  east,  and  3  miles  wide  from  north  to  south.  This 
ebain  forms  three  dietmct  groups,  namely,  the  Caequets  iBlets  and  rockx 
lying  at  its  western  extremity,  the  island  of  Aldemey  at  the  eastern,  and 
Burhou  island  occupying  the  centre  position.  They  are  separated  from 
the  coast  of  France  by  a  channel  8  miles  wide,  called  the  Bace  of  Alderuey, 
and  in  a  similar  mauner  from  the  island  of  Guernsey  and  its  islets  by  a 
space  of  about  12  miles. 

CASQUETS  ISLETS  and  BOCES,*  eo  named,  probably, 
from  their  remarkable  helmet  or  cap-like  appearance,  lie  N.W.  by  W,  ^  W., 
6  miles  from  Aldemey  old  telegraph  tower,  and  form  an  isolated  group 
half  a  mile  in  length  W.N.W.  and  E.S.E,  by  one  to  2  cables  in  breadth. 
The  largest  and  highest  of  the  rocks  foim  a  clump  near  the  centre  of  the 
group  on  which  the  lighthouse  and  towers  are  built ;  they  are  elevated 
90  feet  above  high  water,  and  at  low  water  are  all  connected  together, 
extending  3  cables  W.N.W.  and  E.S.E.  by  IJ  cables  across  their  widest 
part,  which  lies  N.N.E.  and  S.S.W.  from  the  lighthouse.  From  this 
central  mass  to  the  eastward  for  IJ  cables  lie  dx  high  rocks  detached  from 
each  other  at  low  water  by  narrow  gulhes,  through  which  the  tide  rushes 
with  great  Telodty  ;  the  easternmost  rock  b  named  Colotte,  it  is  eIeTat«d 
33  feet  above  high  water,  b  very  steep-to,  and  safe  of  approach. 

The  entire  group  above  described  is  as  steep  as  a  wall  to  the  southward, 
and  also  to  the  eastward,  but  on  the  north  side,  between  point  Colotte 
and  the  lighthouse,  are  two  small  detached  heads  tEiat  uncover  at  low 
water,  Ibey  are,  howevw,  only  a  quarter  of  a  cable  lUatont  from  the  main 
clump. 

•  5m  Admlnltr  idaa  »— Aldetiw7  and  CasqoMi,  No.  60 ;  KaIe,Mai4hicliei. 


<WAP.  VI.]  CASQUETS  ISLETS  AND   ROCKS.  225 

Landing. — The  littleXasquet  rock,  sitaated  three-quarters  of  a  cable 
to  the  southward  of  the  lighthouse,  and  elevated  53  feet  above  high 
ivater,  shelters  a  landing-place  for  boats  on  the  main  rock,  at  an  inlet  named 
Petit  Havre  ;  there  is  also  a  landing-place  on  the  east  side  of  the  little 
Casquet  rock,  and  another  in  a  rocky  bight  on  the  north  side  of  the  main 
group. 

The  possibility  of  safe  landing  at  either  of  these  places  is  communicated 
to  a  vessel  approaching,  by  the  hoisting  of  a  flag  on  the  platform  staff 
between  the  towers.  When  landing  can  be  effected  at  Petit  Havre, 
or  S.W.  cove,  a  blue  flag  is  hoisted  ;  when  at  south  cove,  St.  George's 
Ensign;  and  a  red  flag  for  the  N.E.  landing-place  in  north-east  cove. 
When  no  flag  is  shown  the  landing  is  not  considered  to  be  safe. 

L'Auqni^re  Bock,  lying  three-quarters  of  a  cable  W.N.W.  from 
{he  west  end  of  the  main  group,  is  one-third  of  a  cable  in  diameter,  and 
elevated  44  feet  above  high  water.  Sunken  rocks  extend  to  the  distance 
of  a  third  of  a  cable  to  the  north  of  L'Auqui^re,  as  well  as  to  the  westward 
and  southward  of  it.  There  is  a  boat  channel  between  it  and  the  Casquets, 
but  it  is  very  narrow,  owing  to  a  ledge  of  sunken  rocks  extending  nearly 
half-way  across  from  west  point  of  Casquet  group,  and  rendered  further 
dangerous  by  other  rocks  to  the  southward,  which  dry  at  low  water;  it 
should  never  be  used,  therefore,  except  in  cases  of  urgent  necessity. 

Noire  BoQUC^  or  Black  Rock,  lies  West  3^  cables  from  the  Casquet 
towers,  and  W.  by  S.  |  S.,  nearly  2  cables  from  L'Auqui&re ;  it  is  a 
quarter  of  a  cable  in  diameter,  and  elevated  12  feet  only  above  high  water  ; 
it  is  craggy  and  unapproachable. 

Noire  Boque  Ledge,  having  only  8  feet  over  it  at  low  water,  lies 
N.W.  ^  W.,  1^  cables  from  Noire  Roque.  Its  position  is  generally  pointed 
out  by  a  strong  ripple,  and  with  any  swell  the  sea  breaks  furiously 
over  it. 

There  is  a  sunken  rock  with  only  4  feet  over  it,  midway  between  Noire 
Roque  and  L'Auqui^re;  no  vessel  ought,  therefore,  to  attempt  to  pass 
between  them. 

Excepting  the  dangers  just  noticed  and  above,  the  Casquets  are  veiy 
steep-to  on  all  sides. 

Anchorage  can  only  be  safely  attempted  on  the  south-east  side  of 
the  Casquets  by  a  steam  vessel ;  and  in  her  only  while  the  south-western 
stream  is  running.  The  best  spot  is  in  15  fathoms,  fine  eand ;  the  north- 
east tower  bearing  N.  by  W. ;  and  fort  Albert  in  line  with  Ortac,  and 
between  L'Equ^t  and  Fourquie  rocks. 

This  position,  although  only  1 J  cables  from  the  rocks,  is  quite  safe  in 
fine  weather  when  carefully  taken  up ;  it  is  sheltered  from  the  tide  by 
Q  7049.  p 


226  CHANNEL  I8LAKDS.  [chap.  tx. 

the  Casqaet  rocks.    At  the  distance  of  100  yards  within  it  the  depth  is 
8  fathoms,  and  at  the  same  distance  outside  23  fathoms. 

LIGHT, — ^Near  the  centre  of  the  Casquets,  on  the  highest  rock* 
stands  a  stone  lighthouse,  75  feet  high,  coloured  white,  which  exhibits 
at  an  elevation  of  120  feet  above  high-water  Vk  flashing  light  {triple 
half  minute) y  the  light  shows  three  successive  flashes  of  about  two 
seconds  duration  each,  divided  by  intervals  of  about  three  seconds  of  dark- 
ness, the  third  flash  being  followed  by  an  eclipse  of  about  eighteen  seconds. 
The  light  should  be  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  19  miles. 

Fog  SignaL — ^During  thick  or  foggy  weather  a  powerful  siren 
trumpet  will  give  three  blasts  of  two  seconds  duration  each,  in  quick  suc- 
cession everif  five  mimUes.  Between  the  first  and  second  blasts,  and 
between  the  second  and  third,  intervals  of  three  seconds  occur. 

CAUTION. — The  great  strength  of  the  tidal  stream  near  these  rocks 
renders  an  incautious  approach  to  them  during  foggy  weather  extremely 
hazardous ;  it  is  therefore  recommended  at  such  times  never  to  run  for 
them  with  the  tide,  but  either  to  wait  for  slack  water,  or  until  the  stream 
in  its  usual  rotary  course  turns  from  the  desired  direction,  or  by  altering 
the  position  of  the  vessel,  a  stream  of  the  rocks  to  leeward,  so  as  to  approach 
them  against  the  tide.  Should  a  shoal  cast  be  obtained  when  running  for 
the  Casquets  in  thick  weather,  the  vessel's  head  should  be  immediately 
turned  against  the  tide ;  after  which,  haul  out  cautiously  into  deep  water. 

Eight  Fathoms  Ledge. — ^N.W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  nearly  three-quarters 
of  a  mile  from  L'Auqui^re,  is  a  bank  of  sunken  rocks,  on  which  the  least 
water  obtained  was  13  fathoms,  but  there  is  said  to  be  as  little  as  8  fathoms. 
The  bank  is  from  40  to  50  yards  in  extent,  and  rises  suddenly  from 
soundings  of  26  and  27  fathoms  water,  and  although  it  cannot  be  touched 
upon  by  vessels  of  large  draught,  yet  it  is  dangerous,  for  at  all  times  it 
causes  violent  eddies,  and  during  fresh  tdnds  the  sea  breaks  upon  it. 

OBTAC  CHANNEL  is  bounded  on  its  eastern  side  by  Ortac 
ledge,  and  the  rocks  extending  from  Benonquet  and  Yerte-tete,  with  Speedy 
rock  on  the  same  side  ns  its  northern  boundary ;  and  on  its  western  side 
by  the  eastern  Pommier  bank.  Danger  rocks,  and  L'Equ^t  r^f.  There  is  a 
rock  neai'  the  middle  of  this  channel,  called  Dasher  rock,  with  6}  fathoms 
over  it ;  vessels  may  pass  on  either  side  of  this  roek,  but  that  to  the 
eastward  is  preferable.      The  northern  entrance  of  the  Ortac  channel, 

*  Freviotus  to  the  jear  1877  three  lights  were  exhibited  from  three  separate  towers 
built  on  this  rock.  These  lights  occupied  a  triangular  position  with  respect  to  each 
other,  the  vertex  of  the  triangle  being  to  the  south.  The  present  light  is  exhibited  from 
the  north-west  tower,  which  has  been  raised ;  the  east  tower,  reduced  in  height,  is  now 
a  fog-horn  house,  and  the  south  tower,  also  reduced  in  height,  is  a  store  house. 


CHAP.Ti.]  OETAC  CHANNEL. — ^DIEECTIONS.  227 

between  the  eastern  Pommier  bank  and  Speedy  rock,  is  rather  more  than 
a  mile  wide  ;  its  narrowest  part,  to  the  eastward  of  Dasher  rock,  is  nearly 
three-quarters  of  a  mile ;  at  this  part  the  Great  ^^annel  appears  a  little 
open  on  the  north  side  of  the  high  head  of  Renonquet,  bearing  E.  by  S., 
this  mark  will  lead  over  the  Dasher  rock ;  on  the  top  of  which  the 
outer  high  rock  Les  Etacs  is  seen  touching  the  north-east  side  of  Ortac. 

The  general  depth  in  this  channel  is  about  15  fathoms,  with  tolerably 
regular  soundings,  but  the  bottom  is  rocky  and  foul  throughout ;  anchor- 
agCi  therefore,  except  in  cases  of  most  urgent  necessity,  is  not  to  be 
thought  of. 

The  tides  here  run  with  great  strength,  especially  when  near  high  or 
low  water ;  at  springs  they  attain  a  velocity  of  more  than  7  knots';  in  the 
course  of  their  rotary  motion  they  set  across  the  channel,  and  although 
when  running  in  this  direction  their  strength  decreases,  an  incautious 
pilot  might  soon  be  taken  amongst  dangerous  recks.  From  these  and 
previous  remarks  it  will  be  seen  that  these  channels  are  at  all  times  very 
dangerous  for  sailing  vessels,  and  even  for  steamers,  without  the  persons 
navigating  them  possess  considerable  local  knowledge. 

Directions. — ^To  pass  through  the  Ortac  channel  from  the  north- 
ward, bring  Ortac  to  bear  S.  ^  E.,  and  steer  direct  for  it  on  this  lino 
of  bearing  ;  and  when  Great  Nannel  comes  in  line  with  Verte-teto 
E.  by  S.  J  S.,  steer  S.S.W.  ^  W. ;  which  course  will  lead  through  tlie 
channel  about  a  third  of  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  outer  part  of  Ortac 
ledge.  As  stated  before,  when  Great  Nannel  comes  nearly  on  with  the 
north  part  of  the  highest  head  of  Benonquet  E.  by  S.,  a  vessel  will 
be  abreast  Dasher  rock,  to  the  southward  of  which  the  deep  water  channel 
is  nearly  two  miles  wide.  When  bordering  on  Ortac,  the  ledge  oflf  it  will 
be  cleared  by  not  bringing  Great  Nannel  nearer  to  Burhou  reef  than  the 
middle  of  the  water  gap,  or  cliannel  between  it  and  Renonquet,  until 
fort  Albert  opens  southward  of  Ortac.  When  Noire  Houmet  is  seen  to 
the  southward  of  Ortac,  a  vessel  will  be  clear  of  L'Equ^t  and  all  danger 
to  the  southward. 

Pourquie  and  L'Equdt  Books.— A  bank  of  pebbles,  sand,  and 
broken  shells,  with  6  to  10  fothoms  water  over  it,  extends  to  the 
distance  of  nearly  a  mile  E.S.E.  from  Colette  point ;  Fourquie  is  near  the 
western  end  of  this  bank,  and  L'Equ^t  near  its  eastern  end.  L'Equ^t  is 
rather  a  long  stra^ling  and  dangerous  rock  ;  its  northern  head  is  the 
highest  part  and  dries  7  feet  at  low  water  ;  this  head  bears  from  the  north- 
east Casquet  tower  S.E.  by  E.  f  E.,  l^^oi^iles.  There  is  a  detached  rocky 
bank  at  the  distance  of  a  third  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  L'Equ6t. 
Fourquie  rock  dries  13  feet  at  low  water,  and  is  steep-to,  excepting  to  the 
eastward,  where   there    is    a   detached    sunken    rock.    Fourquie    bears 

p  2 


228  CHANNEL  ISLANDS. — OBTAC  CHANNEL.         [chxp.ti. 

S.E.  by  £.  ^  £.  more  than  half  a  mile  from  the  north-east  tower,  and  S.E* 
one  quarter  of  a  mile  from  Colotte  point. 

There  is  no  safe  channel  between  Fourquie  and  L'Equ^t  rooks,  nor  is 
it  safe  to  approach  the  east  side  of  the  latter  nearer  than  half  a  mile. 
"Whirling  eddies,  thrown  up  by  the  tide  rushing  over  the  rugged  bottom 
at  these  parts,  render  a  vessel  involved  in  them  quite  unmanageable. 
The  tide  sets  fairly  through  the  channel  between  Fourquie  and  Colotte 
point,  and  there  is  10  fathoms  water  over  a  tolerably  even  bottom  in  it ; 
therefore  a  steamer  can  safely  pass  through  in  fine  weather ;  but  near 
spring  tides^  with  any  swell  on,  prudence  would  suggest  not  attempting  it 
except  in  cases  of  urgent  necessity. 

POMMIEB  BANKS  consist  of  two  extensive  and  very  dangerous 
groups  of  sunken  rocks,  divided  by  a  narrow  channel,  having  12  fathoms 
in  it.  The  highest  head  is  situated  near  the  west  end  of  the  westernmost 
group  ;  it  has  only  13  feet  on  it  at  low  water,  and  lies  E.  by  N.  ^  N., 
1^  miles  from  the  Casquets:  on  it  Ortac  appears  midway  between 
Alderney  telegraph  tower  and  the  south-western  brick  kilns  S.E.  ^  E., 
and  the  north-eastern  and  south-western  Casquet  towers  are  nearly  in  line, 
bearing  W.  by  S.  J  S.  From  this  13-feet  rock,  the  east  end  of  the  eastern 
^ank  bears  E.  ^  S.  one  mile.  The  least  water  found  on  this  bank  was 
5  fathoms,  but  there  may  be  2  or  3  feet  less. 

To  clear  the  Fommier  banks — ^The  noilh-eastem  and  south-eastern 
Casquet  towers  in  line  bearing  S.W.  ^  W.,  lead  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
outside  or  to  the  northward.  The  Noires  Putes  midway  between  Ortac 
and  Renonquet  S.S.E.,  lea<1s  nearly  half  a  mile  to  the  eastward;  and 
St.  Anne's  church-steeple,  in  line  with  Ortac  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  clears 
them  half  a  mile  to  the  south-westward.  This  latter  mark  is  also  the  best 
line  to  enter  the  Ortac  channel  with,  between  Fommier  and  L'Equet  rocks. 

Danger  Bocks,  having  21  feet  over  them,  lie  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
within  the  Fommier  bank,  and  E.  f  S.  2  miles  from  the  Casquets.  These 
rocks  are  very  little  more  than  half  a  cable  in  extent  in  an  east  and  west 
direction,  but  there  may  be  a  few  feet  less  water  over  them  than  that 
given  above ;  they  must  therefore  be  approached  with  caution. 

The  channel  between  Danger  rocks  and  L'Equ6t  bank  has  15  fathoms 
in  it,  and  is  nearly  three-quarters  of  a  mile  wide ;  it  is  therefore  quite 
safe  to  take  in  a  vessel  under  perfect  command,  during  fine  weather  ;  but 
in  bad  weather,  more  especially  if  it  happen  near  a  spring  tide,  no  vessel 
should  attempt  it;  indeed  at  such  times,  neither  this  nor  any  of  the 
channels  between  the  Casquets  and  Ortac  should  be  used,  for  then  the 
/entire  space  is  covered  with  tremendous  overfalls,  in  which  the  largest 
vessels  if  involved  would  be  quite  unmanageable;  even  duriiig  fine 
weather  there  are  overfalls,  but  they  are  then  confined  to  the  shoalest 


DUf.n.]  POUICIES  BA1IK8. — ORTA.C   BOCK,  229 

parts  over  tbe  bigh  rook^  beads,  and  thus  marking  their  poeltionB  are 
easily  avoided,  at  this  time  therefore,  they  contribute  to  the  safety  of  tlie 
navigatHRi. 

ORTAC  ROCK.— At  SJ  miles  E.  bj  S.  }  S.  from  the  Casquei 
light,  lies  a  remarkable  huge  nearly  inaccessible  rock,  named  Ortac,  which 
rises  79  feet  above  high  wat«r,  and  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  9  or 
10  miles.  Its  southern  side  is  steep-to,  having  8  fathoms  withia  half  a 
cable  of  tbe  rock,  but  a  sunken  ledge  with  but  11  feet  on  it  at  its  ouler 
extreme  extends  to  tbe  distance  of  IJ  cables  N.W.  by  W.  of  the  rock, 
and  ties  with  Clonque  fort  jnst  in  sight  to  the  southward  of  Ortac.  The 
highest  part  of  this  ledge  to  the  south-westward  with  14  feet  on  it,  lies 
with  fort  Albert  flagstaff  just  in  sight  to  the  eonthn-ard  of  Ortac  £.  by  S., 
^ree-qiiart«rs  of  a  cable  from  the  Iatt«r.  To  pass  to  the  westward  of  the 
ledge,  keep  fort  Albert  flagstaff  open  south  of  Ortac  until  Verte-t^te  bears 
EJ«.E. 

Between  Ortac,  Verte-t^te,  and  Burhou  island,  are  scattered  many 
dangerous  annk^  rocks  and  ledges,  near  and  amongst  which  the  streams 
run  with  great  velocity. 

Speedy  Rock,  lying  nearly  half  a  mile  due  North  of  Verte-t^te,, 
marks  tbe  northern  boundary  of  the  Ortac  channel  to  the  eastward;  tfae- 
shoalest  spot  found  is  in  33  feet  at  low  water;  at  this  position  the  outer 
high  rock  of  Lea  Etac  is  in  liue  with  the  high  central  rock  of  Renonquet 
S.  by  E.  ^  E.,  and  the  whole  of  fort  Albert,  its  apparent  breadth  open  to 
the  southward  of  Great  Nannel  S.E.  by  E. 

CASQTTET  S.W.  BANE  lies  S.W.  4  miles  from  the  Casquets 
lighthouse,  and  consists  of  a  bank  of  flue  gravel,  sand  and  shells,  3  j  miles 
long  ia  a  N.N.E.  and  S.^.W.  direction  and  nearly  a  mile  wide. 

The  most  elevated  part  of  the  bank  lies  close  to  its  western  side,  nenr 
the  middle ;  the  10-fathom  contour  line  here  includes  a  space  just  2  miles 
long,  and  barely  a  quarter  of  a  mile  wide  ;  the  shoalest  port  with  4  fathoms- 
lies  half  a  mile  within,  or  to  the  north-eastward  of  its  south-west  eud.  At 
this  position  the  north-east  Casquets  tower  bears  N.E.  ^  E.,  4|  miles,. 
Atdemey  telegraph  tower  East,  Doyle  column  in  line  with  the  north-east 
extreme  of  Guernsey,  S.W.  j  S. 

Doyle  column  in  line  with  Vale  mill,  S.W.  by  S.,  leads  rather  more 
than  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  S.W.  bank.  The  channel  between  S.W. 
and  S.S.W.  banks  is  2  miles  wide,  and  has  22  to  29  fathoms  in  it. 

CASQTTET  S.S.W.  and'  S.S.K.  BANES,  are  steep  ridgy 
banks  of  fine  sand,  lying  within  and  to  the  eastward  of  S.W.  bank  and 
newly  across  the  Ortac  channel  to  tho  south-west ;  all  these  banks  are 
apparently  formed  by  a  deposit  caused  by  tlie  turning  of  the  stream 
between  low  water  and  half  flood;  for  at  this  period  near  them  the  last 


230  CHANKEL  ISLAIIBS. — OETAC  CHANNEL.  [cbjlp.tl 

of  the  westerly  channel  stream,  aft«r  passing  between  Ortac  and  the 
Cadquots,  meets  the  south-easterly  tide,  then  prevailing  to  the  south- 
westward  of  the  Cai*qoets.  The  north  point  of  the  S.S.W.  bank,  with 
18  fathoms,  bears  S.W.  \  S.  1^  miles  from  the  Casqoet  light,  and  from 
this  it  extends  due  south  rather  more  than  1^  miles ;  after  which  the 
water  deepens,  and  the  tail  of  the  bank  turns  off  to  the  eastward.  This 
bank  is  a  quarter  of  a  mile  broad,  taking  the  20-fathom  line ;  it  has  a 
short  ridgy  apex,  fine  white  sand,  having  a  depth  of  12  to  13  fathoms  over 
it,  with  11  fathoms  on  the  shoalest  part  near  the  middle. 

Taking  the  20-fathom  line  as  a  contour,  the  Casquet  S.S.E.  bank  is 
rather  more  than  3  miles  long  in  a  N.E.  by  E.  and  S.W.  by  W.  direction, 
and  three-quarters  of  a  mile  wide ;  its  south-west  end  after  the  water 
deepens  to  18  fathoms,  turns  off  to  the  N.W.,  and  unites  with  the  S.S.W. 
bank.  A  narrow  ridge  of  shoal  water  runs  along  the  middle  of  the  S.S.E. 
bank,  a  mile  in  extent;  having  4^  £athoms  at  its  east  end,  and  only 
4  fathoms  at  its  west  end ;  with  irr^ular  soundings  of  o  to  8  between. 
The  Clonque  and  Tourgis  forts  beacons  in  line  E.  by  N.,  the  same  mark  as 
for  Pierre  au  Yraie,  passes  over  the  top  of  the  bank  midway  between  the 
shoal  spots  at  its  extremes.  At  the  north-east  extreme  of  the  10-fathom  con- 
tour the  Casquets  lighthouse  bears  N.N.W.  J  W.  2|  miles,  and  at  the  south- 
west end  of  the  10-fathom  contour,  the  Casquets  bear  N.  ^  W.  3^  miles. 

The  shoal  spots  on  the  bank  are  difficult  to  pick  up,  they  being  generally 
the  summits  of  sharp  ridges  of  sand,  and  very  steep  ;  these  ridges  appear 
to  run  rather  across  the  bank,  or  in  an  E.S.E.  and  W.N.W.  direction,  but 
they  shift  in  all  probability  with  the  turning  of  the  tide. 

AncllOragO  should  not  be  attempted  on  the  S.S.W.  bank,  unless  in 
case  of  necessity,  there  being  at  all  times  a  strong  ripple  over  it ;  but  the 
S.S.E.  bank  may  in  fine  weather  be  used  with  great  advantage  by  vessels 
cruising  in  the  vicinity.  The  north-east  shoal  spot  on  this  bank  with 
28  feet,  lies  with  Tourgis  beacon  over  the  middle  of  Clonque  fort  E.  |  N. 
The  best  anchorage  will  be  found  in  from  6  to  10  fathoms,  with  Ortac 
midway  between  Benonquet  and  Verte-tfite  N.E.  ^  E.,  and  Casquets 
N.  by  W.  I  W. 

To  clear  the  S.S.E.  Casquet  bank  outside  the  io-&iliom 

line,  and  to  the  southward,  keep  L'Etac  de  la  Quoire  open  half  a  point 
to  the  southward  of  the  Orbou6e  rock  E.  i  N.  To  the  northward,  the 
iuner  top  of  the  Great  Coque  Lihou  touching  the  north  side  of  the  Coiqid 
E.  by  S.  f  S.,  will  lead  clear  in  10  fathoms,  at  the  distance  of  more  tiian 
half  a  mile  from  the  northern  shallow  spot  on  the  bank. 

Vorte-tete,  behind  the  Ortac  N.E.  ^  N.  leads  clear  to  the  eastward ;  and 
the  east  side  of  Renonquet  in  line  with  the  east  side  of  the  Ortac  NJE.  by  E. 
will  clear  to  the  westward. 


cBi^.vi.]  CASQUET  BAKES. — TIDSfi.  231 

CASQUET  MIDDLE  BANK  Hes  about  midway  between  tba 
narthem  parts  of  the  S.S.W.  aad  S.S.E.  banks  ;  it  is  about  one-third  of 
a  mile  in  diameter,  and  has  15  to  20  fathoms  on  it,  with  gravel  and  brdcen 
shells^ 

The  general  depth  of  water  round  all  the  Casquet  banks  is  from  22  to 
25  fathoms. 

Tides. — ^It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  the  Casquets  and  at  the 
Ortae  rock  at  6h.  45m. ;  equinoctial  springs  rise  24  feet,  ordinary  springs 
15^  feet,  and  neaps  10  feet. 

Although  the  tidal  stream  in  the  immediate  neighbourhood  o!  the 
Casquets  preserves  its  rotary  propensity,  it  varies  much  in  strength  and 
direction  accordiug  to  position.  On  their  north  side  and  to  the  eastward 
for  instance,  outside  the  influence  of  the  Ortac  channel,  the  slack  and 
change  of  stream  takes  place  as  in  the  offing ;  the  great  body  of  the  flood, 
setting  E.  by  N.  and  the  ebb  W.  by  S. ;  but  westward  of  the  Casquets  the 
strength  of  the  stream  is  principally  felt  in  three  different  directions, 
namely,  at  2^  hours  flood  South  3*7  knots,  1  hour  ebb  E.N.E.  3*0  knots, 
and  an  hour  before  low  water  W.  by  N.  3  *  1  knots ;  between  these  points 
a  continuous  stream  of  tide  sets  to  the  westward,  southward,  and  eastward, 
the  only  slack  occurring  between  3  and  4  hours  ebb. 

On  the  south-western  side  of  the  Casquets,  between  the  periods  of  half- 
ebb  and  low  water,  there  is  an  eddy  of  nearly  2  miles  in  breadth  and  of 
considerable  strength.  Between  low  water  and  2  hours  flood  this  eddy 
revolves  more  to  the  eastward,  as  well  as  increases  in  breadth ;  the  natural 
consequence  of  the  obstruction  which  the  Casquets  present  to  the  stream 
being  in  the  latter  case  increased,  because  acted  upon  more  directly  than 
in  the  former;  and  this  eddy  continues  until  gradually  weakened  and 
destroyed  by  the  current  at  half-flood.  Similar  eddies  exist  also  on  the 
north-eastern  side  of  the  Casquets,  the  eflects  of  which  are  exactly  the 
reverse  of  the  preceding. 

The  stream  in  the  Casquet  channel,  that  is  in  its  immediate  draft, 
begins  to  set  to  the  south-westward  at  half-ebb  exactly  on  the  shore,  and 
runs  in  that  direction  for  6  hours,  or  until  half -flood,  and  the  contrary  with 
respect  to  the  north-eastern  stream,  for  there  is  neither  high  nor  low  water 
slack  here.  The  stream  which  begins  to  run  to  the  north-eastward  at 
half-flood,  after  passing  the  Ortac,  gradually  veers  to  the  northward  and 
sets  N.N.E*  until  it  again  unites  with  the  stream  flowing  round  the  northern 
side  of  the  Casquets.  The  south-western  stream  of  this  channel,  which 
commences  at  half-ebb,  sets  right  over  the  L'Equet  and  the  Fourquies,  to 
avoid  which  the  utmost  care  must  be  taken. 

On  the  south-western  side  of  the  Ortac  rock  there  is  an  eddy  of  nearly 
1^  miles  in  extent,  between  half-ebb  and  one  hour's  flood ;  after  which 


232     CHANNEL  ISLANDS.— ORTAC  CHANNEL.     [chap.vi. 

period  the  stream  on  the  south  side  of  Ortae  graduallj  inclines  to  the 
westward,  setting,  at  2  hours  flood,  directly  for  the  Casquets,  until  its 
progress  is  arrested  by  the  last  of  the  south-western  stream  in  the  Casquet 
channel.  There  is  no  eddy  of  consequence  on  the  north-eastern  side  of 
Ortac. 

BUBHOTJ  ISLAND  lies  E.  ^  6.  1^  miles  from  Ortac  ;  it  is  rather 
level  within,  although  huge  rocks^crop  out  near  the  extremes,  and  it  is  fringed 
with  reef.  The  western  part  of  Burhou  is  cut  off  from  the  main  island 
by  the  tide  at  high  water ;  the  portion  thus  detached  is  called  Little 
Burhou.  The  two  islands  together  are  rather  more  than  half  a  mile  long 
in  an  east  and  west  direction,  and  nearly  2  cables  broad,  their  rocky  peak? 
being  about  the  same  height,  83  feet  above  high  water.  The  islands  are 
covered  with  a  light  soil,  on  which  grow  coarse  grasses  and  a  variety  of 
wild  flowers,  the  soil  is  burrowed  in  every  direction  by  rabbits,  which 
animals,  being  now  nearly  extirpated  by  the  fishermen  of  Aldemey,  their 
holes  are  frequently  occupied  by  sea  birds  engaged  in  rearing  their  young  ; 
among  others  it  is  the  resort  of  the  stormy  petrel  during  the  breeding  season. 

There  is  a  house  of  refuge  for  fishermen  and  shipwrecked  mariners,  on 
the  low  saddle  near  the  middle  of  the  island,  but  it  is  now  fast  falling  to 
ruin  (1870).  The  landing  places  are  in  two  small  coves  near  the  house,  one 
on  either  side  of  the  island.  There  is  no  fresh  water  on  the  island  other 
than  may  be  deposited  by  the  rain  in  the  interstices  of  the  rocks. 

The  eastern  side  of  Burhou  is  clear  of  danger  to  within  half  a  cable  from 
the  shore,  but  a  reef  stretches  out  to  the  westward  of  Little  Burhou  for 
half  a  mile,  and  the  whole  of  it,  with  the  exception  of  a  few  elevated  rocky 
heads,  covers  at  high  water.  There  are  also  numerous  detached  rocks 
sJong  the  border  of  this  reef  to  the  southward,  and  also  to  the  westward. 

There  is  a  5-fathom  channel  between  Burhou  reef  and  the  rocks  stretch- 
ing out  3  cables  to  the  westward  of  Ortac ;  there  is  also  a  very  narrow 
channel  to  the  northward  of  Burhou  reef  leading  into  the  little  Swinge, 
but  only  the  most  expert  pilots  amongst  the  Aldemey  fishermen  could 
navigate  either  of  them  with  safety. 

VERTE  T£TE  beef,  lying  to  the  north-eastward  of  Ortac,  marks 
the  north  extreme  of  the  dangerous  rocks,  stretching  in  a  north-westerly 
direction  to  the  distance  of  a  mile  from  the  west  end  of  Little  Burhou. 
There  are  three  high  rocks  on  this  reef,  of  which  the  most  remarkable, 
called  Cone  rock,  lies  to  the  westward ;  bearing  N.E.  f  N.,  five-sixths  of 
a  mile  from  Ortac  rock,  and  E.  |  S.,  rather  more  than  3^  miles  from  the 
Casquets.  It  is  of  sugar-loaf  form  and  elevated  about  20  feet  above  high 
water ;  is  detached  from  the  main  reef  at  all  times  of  tide ;  very  steep  to 
the  northward,  but  to  the  westward,  at  a  distance  of  three  quarters  of 
a  cable,  there  is  a  small  pointed  rock  that  uncovers  6  feet  at  low  water. 


OBAP.TL]  BXJBHOU  ISU^H). — ^RENONQUET  BEEF.  233 

The  main  rock  of  the  Verte-tSte  group  is  13  feet  higher  and  much 
larger  than  Cone  rock  ;  it  has,  moreover,  two  heads;  the  inner  and  higher 
is  very  flat  on  the  top  ;  the  outer  situated  a  quarter  of  a  cable  to  the  north- 
eastward being  lower,  smaller,  and  peaked.  A  reef,  dry  at  low  water, 
extends  nearly  a  cable  to  the  eastward  of  the  high  head  of  Yerte-t£te ; 
there  is  also  a  sunken  rock,  bearing  E.N.E.  about  a  cable  from  it ;  but 
with  the  exception  of  these  dangers  and  the  rock  above  described,  situated 
to  the  westward  of  Cone  rock,  the  Verte-t^te  rocks,  that  are  always  above 
high  water,  are  very  steep-to  on  the  outside. 

BenonQUet  reof^  lyii^g  in  &n  east  and  west  direction,  at  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  within  the  Yerte-t^te,  is  nearly  three-quarters  of  a  mile  long ; 
its  western  end  is  low  and  covers  with  the  tide  for  the  third  of  a  mile, 
but  near  the  eastern  end  there  is  a  group  of  high  rocks,  about  1^  cables  in 
diameter,  that  never  cover*  The  highest  rock  of  this  group  is  elevated 
40  feet  above  high  water,  and  lies  nearly  a  third  of  a  mile  within  the 
high  head  of  Verte-t&te,  on  a  line  between  it  and  the  peak  of  Little 
Burhou. 

White  rock  if^  about  2  cables  to  the  eastward  of  Renonquet ;  it  is 
small  and  elevated  20  feet  above  high  water ;  steep-to  and  safe  of  approach 
to  the  northward.  There  is  only  another  rock  situated  to  the  eastward 
of  this,  near  the  Renonquet  group,  visible  at  high  water,  and  this  is  a  small 
head  nearly  awash  lying  S.E.  by  E.,  1^  cables  from  White  rock  ;  therefore, 
the  White  rock  on  the  east,  Yerte-t^te  to  the  westward,  with  the  Renon- 
quet rock  in  the  middle,  together  form  a  remarkable  group  to  guide  the 
mariner  set  in  here  during  foggy  weather. 

LeS  MaqtUereaUX  Rocks. — -^  sunken  reef,  2  cables  in  extent 
north  and  south  and  a  cable  broad,  lies  half  a  mile  East  from  White  rock ; 
there  are  three  heads  near  the  middle  of  the  reef  with  only  4  feet  over 
them  at  low  water,  and  no  proper  channel  for  vessels  between  these  rocks 
and  Yerte-t^te.  Outer  L'Etac,  in  line  with  the  saddle  rock  of  Burhou  just 
to  the  westward  of  the  house,  bearing  S.  ^  W.  leads  clear  of  Les  Maque* 
reaux  rocks  to  the  east,  and  the  Casquet  towers  their  apparent  breadth  open 
northward  of  Yerte-t^te  W.  ^  N.  leads  one  cable  to  the  northward  of  them. 
The  eastern  clearing  mark  for  these  rocks  is  also  the  best  line  to  run  in 
for  the  anchorage  on  the  north  side  of  Bourhou,  should  necessity  compel 
a  vessel  to  use  it ;  in  such  a  case,  anchor  in  7  fathoms  sand,  with  Outer 
L'Etao  between  the  above  leading  line  and  the  high  western  apex  of 
Burhou ;  and  Ortac  in  line  or  just  within  the  northernmost  high-water 
head  of  Burhou  reef. 

The  NamielS,  said  to  be  an  English  con-uption  of  Les  Nianaise,  is  a 
reef  about  one- third  of  a  mile  long  east  and  west,  and  one  quarter  of  a  mile 
wide  i  it  may  be  said  to  form  the  eastern  part  of  Burhou  group,   and 


234  CHANNEL  ISLANDS.  [csap.ti. 

consists  of  enormous  rocks,  curiously  shaped,  some  which  are  always 
above  water  and  others  that  cover  and  uncover  with  the  tide.  The 
highest,  called  the  Great  Nannel,  rises  58  feet  above  high-water,  and 
is  situated  near  the  middle  of  the  south-western  part  of  the  reef.  The  next 
in  magnitude,  called  the  Little  Nannel,  is  elevated  only  12  feet  above  high 
water,  and  lies  at  the  north  western  end  of  the  reef,  rather  more  than  one 
cable  distant  from  the  Great  Nannel. 

Other  rocks  above  high  water,  but  of  lesser  magnitude,  lie  in  an  easterly 
direction  from  the  Great  Nannel  for  the  distance  of  2  cables  ;  the  extreme 
point  of  the  group  is  called  Pierre  de  But ;  this  part  of  the  rock  covers 
with  the  tide  near  high  water.  There  are  also  two  sunken  rocks,  having 
9  feet  over  them,  lying  one-third  of  a  cable  to  the  eastward  of  Pierre 
deB&t. 

Le  Cordonnier,  a  small  rock  drying  3  feet  at  low  water,  lies  at  the 
distance  of  1^  cables  south  of  the  Great  Nannel. 

The  breadth  of  the  channel  between  Burhou  and  the  Nannels  is  ^exactly 
2  cables,  and  is  divided  into  two  parts  by  a  rock  near  the  middle  called 
L'Equet,  which  dnes  6  feet  at  low  water.  The  tide  rushes  through  this 
channel  into  the  Little  Swinge  with  great  velocity. 

L'EmpPOne  Reef  Hes  N.N.E.  a  third  of  a  mile  from  the  Great 
Nannel ;  it  is  nearly  1^  cables  long  east  and  west  by  three-quarters  of  a  cable 
wide :  there  are  4  rocks  which  dry  at  low  water  ;  the  highest  2  feet,  and 
others  awash.  The  sea  breaks  furiously  on  this  reef,  especially  with  fresh 
north-westerly  winds. 

Round.  Bock  dries  9  feet  at  low  water,  and  lies  midway  between  the 
Nannels  and  L'£mprone. 

To  clear  L'Emprone  and  the  Nannels,  to  the  northward  and  eastward, 
keep  the  Casquet  towers  open  to  the  northward  of  Verte-tete,  W.  ^  N., 
until  Aldemey  mill  opens  to  the  eastward  of  the  Grosse  rock,  S.  f  E. 

The  SWINOE  CHANNEL  divides  Burhouislandand  its  rocks 
from  Aldemey;  its  narrowest  part  is  included  in  the  space,  bounded  by  the 
rocks  fringing  the  south  shore  of  Burhou  island  on  one  side,  and  the 
Barsier  and  Corbet  rocks  to  the  southward.  It  is  here  three-quarters  of  a 
mile  wide,  but  on  either  side  of  these  points  it  soon  widens.  The  bottom 
is  rooky  throughout,  and  very  uneven  ;  the  average  depth  at  its  narrowest 
part  cannot  be  taken  at  more  than  8  fathoms.  There  are  several  very 
dangerous  rocks  in  the  Swinge,  some  lately  discovered,  which  will  be 
noticed  hereafter.  This,  like  the  Casquet  channel,  abounds  with  broken 
water,  even  daring  the  calmest  weather,  caused  by  the  rapidity  of  the 
stream  and  the  rugged  bottom.  There  are  also  two  over&Us  in  it,  caused 
solely  by  the  tide,  the  dangers  of  which  are  of  course  much  increased  in 
bad  weather.    During  easterly  winds,  on  the  north-east  stream,  over&Us 


CBAr.TZ.]  KAKKELS. — SWINaS  CHANNEL.  286 

extend  nearly  across  1^  Swinge,  from  Burhoa  island  to  the  outer  end  of 
Aldernej  breakwater.  With  westerly  winds  on  the  south-west  stream, 
they  extend  from  Ortac  to  Les  Etacs.  Both  oyerfalls  may  be  avoided  by 
following  the  directions  given  hereafter. 

DANOEBS  in  the  SWINGE.— Les  Boues  des  Eaines, 

the  outer  head,  is  awash  at  low  water,  and  lies  S.W.  by  S.,  distant  3  cables 
from  the  high  water  rocky  clump  at  the  south-west  end  of  Burhou  reef ; 
on  it  fort  Albert  £[agsta£f  is  seen  just  inside  the  outer  end  of  Grosnez  fort, 
E.  by  S.  ^  S.,  and  Long  rock  a  little  open  westward  of  the  south-west 
rocky  clump  of  Burhoa  reef,  N^.E.  ^  E. 

The  channel  inside  these  rocks  is  barely  1^  cables  wide. 

North  Bock,  H  feet,  lies  1^  cables  to  the  S.E.  of  Noire  Houmet,  off 
Burhou  island ;  on  it  the  Great  Nannel  is  seen  in  the  gap  just  within  the 
easternmost,  high,  semi-detached  rock  of  Burhou,  bearing  NJN^.E.  ^  £., 
and  Ortac  just  open  southward  of  the  half-tide  reef,  south-west  of  Noire 
Houmet  W.  by  N.  {  N. 

South  Bock,  5  fathoms,  lies  with  the  west  end  of  Great  Noire  Fute 
touching  the  east  side  of  inner  Les  Etacs,  S.  §  E.,  and  the  outer  or 
northern  upper  extreme  of  fort  Albert  a  little  open  to  the  southward  of 
the  inner  part  of  Grosnez  fort,  E.  |  S.  There  is  another  head  with 
5^  fathoms  over  it,  situated  at  the  west  end  of  this  same  rocky  bank ;  it 
bears  from  South  rock  S.W.  by  W.  |  W.,  2^  cables^ 

Both  of  these  heads  may  have  less  water  than  is  here  given ;  in  ap- 
proaching them  from  the  westward,  it  will  be  useful  to  remember  that 
you  cannot  touch  the  western  head  so  long  as  the  Great  Noire  Fute  is 
in  sight,  westward  of  Les  Etacs ;  and  proceeding  to  the  eastward,  you 
are  dear  of  the  eastern  head  as  soon  as  the  whole  of  the  Great  Noire  Fute 
is  seen  clear  of  the  inner  of  ties  Etacs. 

Les  Etacs  Bank  lies  nearly  half  a  mile  W.N.W.  from  the  Etacs ; 
the  least  water  found  26  feet,  lies  near  the  south  end  of  it.  This  bank  will 
be  cleared  outside  by  keeping  the  Great  Noire  Fute  open  to  the  westward  of 
Coup6  rock  until  Tourgis  beacon  comes  near  the  north  end  of  Clonquefort. 

Pierre  au  VraiC. — This  dangerous  rock,  which  dries  5  feet  at  low 
water,  lies  immediately  in  the  stream  of  the  Swinge  channel,  4  miles 
S.E.  i  S.  from  the  Casquets,  S.  by  W.  nearly  1|  miles  from  Ortac,  and 
West,  exactly  If  miles  from  Les  Etacs,  near  the  west  end  of  Aldemey.  In 
form  and  size  this  rock  is  like  a  small  boat  bottom  up  ;  it  is  surrounded  by 
very  deep  water  ;  at  the  distance  of  1^  cables  to  the  southward  and  west- 
ward there  are  26  fathoms,  and  within  it  14  to  16  fathoms. 

The  marks  for  this  rock  are  the  inner  peak  of  Great  Coque  Lihou,  in 
line  with  the  Ck)up£  rock,  £.  by  S.  i  S.,  and  the  conical  beacon  on  the 
slope  of  the  high  land  just  within  fort  Tourgis,  in  line  with  the  beacon  in 


236  CHANNEL  ISLANDS.  [chap.  vi. 

Clonque  fort,  E.  by  N.  These  marks  are  used  to  clear  the  rock  on  either 
side  as  necessary.  Tourgis  beacon,  in  line  with  north  end  of  Clonque 
fort,  leads  2  cables  to  the  northward  of  Pierre  an  Vraic  Cape  La  Hague 
light,  open  and  shut  of  the  south  end  of  Aldemey,  leads  close  to  the 
northward  of  it  also. 

BichardS  and  Ellis  Rocks  are  on  a  rocky  bank  lying  rather 
more  than  half  a  mile  to  the  south-east  of  the  Pierre  au  Vraic,  at  the  dis- 
tance of  one  quarter  of  a  mile  from  each  other.  Richards  rock  has  5^ 
fathoms  over  it,  and  there  is  23  fathoms  within  a  cable  to  the  southward  ; 
on  the  rock,  the  outer  Coque  Lihou  appears  a  little  open  northwards  of  the 
inner  Noire  Pute,  E.  f  S.,  and  the  Great  Nannel  seen  just  within  the  outer 
eastern  high  rock  on  Burhou,  N.E.  by  N.  Ellis  rock  lies  nearly  3  cables 
north  from  Richards  rock.  The  Great  Nannel  on  with  the  east  end  of 
Burhou,  will  lead  a  third  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  these  rocks.  No  large 
ship  should  pass  between  Richards  rock  and  the  Pierre  au  Vraic. 

Tid6S. — ^The  strength  of  the  stream  in  the  Swinge,  that  is,  between 
Burhou  island  and  the  Corbet  rock,  sets  straight  through  both  ways  at 
high  and  lower  water  ;  and,  like  the  stream  in  the  Casquet  channel,  begins 
to  set  to  the  south-westward  at  half -ebb  exactly,  and  runs  in  that  direction 
for  6  hours,  or  until  half-flood  ;  and  the  contrary  with  respect  to  the 
north-eastern  stream.  One  branch  of  the  flood,  to  the  westward  of  the 
Narrows,  sets  through  between  Burhou  island  and  the  Ortac,  particularly 
after  high  water  on  the  shore ;  and,  to  the  eastward  of  the  Narrows,  it 
veers  and  sets  circuitously  round  the  L'Emprone  to  the  north-westward, 
and  both  uniting  with  the  Casquets  channel  tides,  and  ultimately  with 
that  of  the  English  Channel,  again  sets  to  the  eastward.  The  last  2  hours 
of  the  south-western  stream  in  the  Swinge  gradually  veers  towards  the 
South,  as  it  recedes  from  the  draft  of  the  former  passage.  The  velocity 
of  the  north-eastern  stream,  during  the  springs,  is  7^  miles  ;  that  of  the 
south-western  stream  6j^  miles  per  hour. 

ALDERNEY  or  AUBIGNY  ISLAND,  is  3^  miles  long, 

east  and  west,  and  1^  miles  wide  where  broadest,  which  is  near  the  west 
end ;  the  highest  part  is  at  the  base  of  the  windmill ;  it  is  here  295  feet 
above  the  mean  tide  level ;  at  the  telegraph,  the  island  is  about  9  feet 
lower.  Alderney  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  at  the  distance  of  22  miles ; 
its  eastern  extremity  bears  W.N.W.  neai*ly  eight  miles  from  Cape  la  Hague 
lighthouse,  and  E.  by  S.  |  S.  8^  miles  from  the  Casquets.  The  appear- 
ance of  the  island  fi'om  a  distance  is  wild  and  gloomy,  nor  does  its  character 
improve  on  a  nearer  view.  The  southern  and  western  coasts  are  high 
precipitous  cliffs,  intersected  by  narrow  valleys,  and  fronted  by  outlying 
rocks,  the  most  conspicuous  among  which  are  the  Coque  Lihou  and  Noire 


CHAP,  vi.]  ALDEBNBY.  237 

Pates  groups  to  the  southward,  and  Les  Etacs  and  Clonques  to  the 
westward ;  the  latter  are  now  crowned  with  a  hatterj  which  commands 
the  Swinge  channeL 

The  northern  and  eastern  sides  are  much  less  elevated,  and  the  coast 
there  is  formed  by  a  series  of  bays  of  sand  and  gravel,  separated  from  each 
other  by  steep  projecting  points,  but  with  the  exception  of  the  small  bays, 
of  Braye  now  enclosed  as  a  harbour  of  refuge,  Plat  Saline,  and  Gorblets 
the  intervals  of  beach  are  inaccessible,  on  account  of  the  outlying  rocks, 
which  forbid  all  approach.  The  heights  along  the  south  and  western  coasts 
are  covered  with  heath  and  furze,  but  the  land  within  is  generally  cultivated 
and  fertile.  There  are  but  very  few  trees  on  the  island,  and  they  are  only  to 
be  met  with  in  the  valleys  near  the  town,  where  the  neighbouring  hills  afford 
some  shelter  from  the  wind. 

St.  Anne,  the  town  of  Aldemey,  is  situate  near  the  middle  of  the  island  ; 
it  is  large,  well  built,  paved,  and  lighted  with  gas ;  it  has  a  large  and  hand- 
some church  (St.  Anne's),  besides  which  there  are  several  chapels.  In 
addition  to  the  town  of  St.  Anne,  villages  have  sprung  up  at  Craby, 
Braye  new  town,  and  at  Mannez,  owing  to  their  vicinity  to  the  public  works 
and  quarries. 

The  island  abounds  with  springs  of  excellent  water.  Wood  and  fuel  are 
imported  from  England,  and  cattle,  for  fresh  meat,  from  Cherbourg  ;  these 
necessaries  are  nevertheless  to  be  obtained  almost  at  the  same  prices  as  at 
Guernsey,  owing  to  the  regular  steam  communication  now  existing 
between  Aldemey,  Cherbourg,  and  Guernsey. 

Until  of  late  years  Aldemey  possessed  but  two  small  insecure  harbours, 
one  called  Longy  bay,  originally  named  Bale  de  Catel,  on  the  south-east 
side  of  the  island ;  and  the  other,  the  old  artificial  harbour  of  Braye  on 
the  north  side ;  both  of  which  dry  at  low  water  neaps. 

Aldemey  forms  part  of  the  Bailiwick  of  Guernsey,  and  is  included  in  the 
military  command  of  the  Lieutenant-Governor  of  that  island  ;  it  forms  one 
parish,  under  the  patronage  of  the  Crown,  named  St.  Anne,  the  area  of 
which  is  1,962  imperial  acres  at  high  water  of  spring  tides.  The  land  was 
originally  divided  into  small  parcels  amongst  the  inhabitants,  but  the 
Grovernment  have  purchased  about  a  third  of  it  for  their  works. 

The  civil  govemment  or  States  consist  of  a  Judge,  appointed  by  the 
Crown,  six  jurats ;  and  twelve  douzeniers,  who  are  elected  by  the  inhabitants. 
In  1871  the  population  of  Alderney  was  about  2,738. 

The  ordinary  garrison  of  the  island  consists  of  a  battery  royal  artillery, 
besides  the  island  militia,  who  are  organized  as  artillery,  and  reported  to  be 
very  efficient.  The  forts  situated  along  the  northern,  eastern,  and  south- 
eastern shores  of  Alderney,  now  form  quite  a  feature  in  the  appearance  of 


238  CHANNEL  ISLANDS.  [chap.  vi. 

the  island  on  those  sides ;  of  them  fort  Albert  is  the  most  conspicnousy 
being  situate  on  the  crown  of  a  remarkable  conical  hill,  which  rises  from  the 
comparatiyelj  low  land  at  the  north-east  part  of  the  island. 

The  APPROACHES  to  Aldemey  on  every  side  bnt  N.E.  are 
difficult  and  dangerous  from  the  numerous  outlying  rocks  ;  and  the  dangers 
of  the  consequent  intricate  navigation  are  of  course  intensified  by  the  great 
strength  of  the  tidal  stream ;  therefore,  a  stranger  should  not  attempt  to 
close  with  the  island  on  any  side  but  the  N.E. ;  from  which  direction,  how- 
ever, a  careful  seaman  may  approach  and  enter  the  harbour  of  refuge  by 
attending  to  the  directions  given  hereafter  at  page  247. 

ALDEBNEY  H ABBOUB,  on  the  north  shore  of  Aldemey, 
encloses  the  old  harbour  of  Braye  as  well  as  the  anchorage  in  the  road 
fronting  it,  also  the  harbour  of  Craby ;  the  latter  built  chiefly  to  shelter 
the  vessels  employed  in  laying  the  foundation  for  the  West  breakwater,  and 
otherwise  about  the  Government  works.  The  rocks  at  one  time  encumbering 
the  harbour  of  refuge  have  been  removed,  and  the  anchorage  is  now  clear, 
but  on  account  of  the  rocky  nature  of  the  bottom,  vessels  using  their  own 
anchors  should  in  strong  winds  ride  with  a  good  scope  of  cable.  The 
harbour  is  sheltered  from  all  but  easterly  winds,  which  send  in  much  sea.*' 

The  West  breakwater  of  this  harbour,  which  was  commenced  in  1847  and 
completed  in  1870,  extended  from  Grosnez  point  straight  for  1,000  yards 
N.  74  E.,  when  it  curved  northwards  for  1 73  yards  in  a  radius  of  500  yards, 
thence  straight  to  the  end,  N.  54  E.,  for  the  distance  of  436  yards.  The 
breakwater  is  built  on  an  artificial  bank  of  rubble  stone  or  pierres  perdues ; 
the  main  part  is  40  feet  wide  and  6  feet  above  high  water  at  ordinary  spring 

tides.t 

At  the  upper  end  of  the  breakwater  there  is  a  slipway  for  boats  and 
small  vessels,  with  steps  at  the  end  descending  to  low  water  spring  tides ; 
there  is  also  a  flight  of  landing  steps  on  the  breakwater  pier  (within), 
at  the  distance  of  930  yards  from  the  shore.  The  inner  part  of  the  break- 
water pier  is  now  clear  along  itB  entire  .length,  and  the  rubble  bank  on 
which  it  is  built  so  steep  that  large  ships  may  securely  lay  alongside  at 
the  distance  of  50  feet.    Mooring  chains  and  bollards  have  been  provided, 

*  See  Admiralty  plan  : — Aldemey  harbour,  No.  S,845  ;  scale  m^lS  inches. 

f  On  the  xiight  of  the  8th  January  1879,  during  a  violent  gale  irom  the  eastward,  the 
seaward  end  of  the  breakwater  was  washed  away,  being  scarcely  visible  at  half  tide, 
and  was  breached  for  a  dbtance  of  400  feet  from  the  extremity.  (Notice  to  Mariners 
No.  11  of  1879). 

In  August  1880,  from  the  action  of  heavy  seas,  the  breakwater  had  been  broken 
away  400  feet  from  the  extreme  rad ;  Ae  damaged  portion  was  nearly  awash,  with 
jagged  heads  and  broken  pieces  of  masonry  protruding  at  low  water.  (Notice  to 
Mariners  No.  151  of  1880). 


CB^.  TT.]  ALBEBKEY  HABBOUE.  239 

and  there  are  also  iron  ladders  from  low  water  to  the  quay  levels  at  short 
intervals  along  its  entire  length. 

The  breakwater  is  now  (November  1881)  partially  destroyed,  800  feet 
from  the  extreme  end,  from  which  position  a  portion  600  feet  long  un- 
covers 5  feet  at  low  water  spring  tides ;  thence  is  'an  isolated  portion 
about  120  feet  long,  which  dries  7  feet,  with  a  gap  on  each  side  about  120 
feet  wide  ;  these  gaps  are  subject  to  constant  change.  From  the  inner 
gap,  the  breakwater  is  undermined  for  some  distance  nearer  to  the  shore. 

Carlltion. — Care  must  be  taken  when  abreast  the  gaps,  with  the 
westerly  tide  running,  to  guard  against  the  suction  or  indraught.  (See 
page  247).* 

Moorings. — There  is  one  set  of  moorings  (1st  class)  laid  down  near 
the  inner  part  of  the  curve  in  the  breakwater. 

Dangers  inside  the  Breakwater  have  for  the  most  part  been 

removed  by  blasting ;  these  the  T^tes  Champignons,  lying  N. W.  by  W., 
three-foiuths  of  a  cable  from  Boselle  point,  have  been  reduced  to  16  feet. 
Another  group  of  rocks,  lying  W.  by  S.  2  cables  from  Roselle  point  have 
now  12  feet  over  them  ;  and  at  the  position  of  the  late  half  tide  rock  there 
is  22  feet  at  low  water. 

The  Aiguillons  rocks  may  at  present  be  considered  to  be  the  eastern 
boundary  of  the  harbour  of  refuge ;  they  consist  of  a  group  of  eight  heads 
which  dry  at  low  tide,  the  easternmost  rock,  named  the  Great  Aiguillon, 
lies  N.N.E.  ^  £.,  1^  cables  from  Bibette  head. '  A  beacon  is  placed  on 
the  small  Aiguillon,  which  rock  is  the  outer  or  northernmost  of  the  group 
and  lies  due  West,  nearly  half  a  cable  from  the  Great  Aiguillon.  The 
beacon  consists  of  a  rqund  tower  of  masonry,  19  feet  high,  and  9  feet  in 
diameter  at  the  base  and  6  feet  at  the  top,  its  summit  being  elevated  10  feet 
above  high- water  spring  tides;  the  beacon  is  painted  red  and  white  in 
horizontal  rings,  and  may  be  seen  under  ordinary  circumstances  from  at  a 
distance  of  2  miles. 

A  dangerous  reef  of  sunken  rocks  with  10  to  6.  feet  over  them,  lies 
three-quarters  of  a  cable  from  a  beacon,  between  the  bearings  of  N.  by  E. 
and  N.E.  by  E. ;  they  will  be  cleared  on  the  west  side  by  keeping  the 
flagstaff  in  fort  Albert  open  westward  of  the  beacon  bearing  S.  by  W., 
and  the  beacon  in  line  with  the  outer  Grois  rock  E.  by  N.  will  lead  clear 
of  the  16  feet  rock  in  the  harbour  off  Bibette  head. 

LIGHTS. — Two  ^xed  red  lights  are  exhibited  at  the  head  of  the 
harbour  of  refuge  to  mark  the  fairway  channel  by  night ;  the  lower  light  ig 
exhibited  through  a  long  tube  which  screens  it  in  every  direction  excepting 
on  a  line  through  the  middle  of  the  fairway ;  this  light  is  fixed  on  the 
parapet  of  the  old  pier  at  Braye  and  elevated  25  feet  above  high  water  at 
spring  tides  ;  it  may  be  seen  5  miles  in  clear  weather.    The  upper  light  is 

♦  Commander  C.  V.  Anson,  H.M.S.  D(wAcr,  November  ISSl, 


240  CHANNEL  ISLANDS.— ALDEENEY.  [chap.  n. 

fixed  on  the  site  of  the  north-east  corner  of  Braye  reading  room  S.W.  by  W., 
370  yards  from  the  lower  light ;  it  is  elevated  65  feet  above  high  water,  and 
may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  8  or  9  miles. 

Braye  Old  Harbour  is  formed  by  only  one  sheltering  pier,  built 
out  in  an  easterly  direction  from  the  west  side  of  Braye  bay ;  it  dries  at  low 
water  neaps,  and  was  very  insecure  before  the  Admiralty  breakwater  was 
built ;  even  now  it  is  very  inferior  to  the  harbour  of  Craby. 

The  best  time  to  enter  Braye  harbour  is  on  a  rising  tide  between  half- 
ilood  and  high  water ;  at  low  water  there  is  a  depth  of  8  feet  between  the 
iron  beacons  which  are  placed  one  on  either  side  of  the  entrance  on  the  two 
rocky  clumps  just  without  the  pier  head.  The  west  beacon  has  a  circular 
eye  on  its  top,  and  the  eastern  one  a  cross.  No  leading  mark  is  required, 
but  the  pier  head  should  be  rounded  as  close  as  possible. 

Craby  Harbour  was  constructed  by  the  Government  in  1850,  in 
the  creek  formerly  called  little  Craby  bay,  between  the  old  habour  of  Braye 
and  Grosnez  point.  In  addition  to  the  shelter  of  the  breakwater,  this 
harbour  is  protected  by  two  small  piers  having  an  entrance  between  the 
pier  heads,  40  feet  wide,  open  to  the  north-east.  This  enclosed  harbour  is 
100  yards  long  from  west  to  east,  and  90  yards  wide,  and  affords  230  yards 
of  quay  room  on  its  northern,  western,  and  southern  sides,  or  space  sufficient 
to  berth  four  colliers  of  about  150  tons  burthen.  The  harbour  dries  out  to 
the  pier  heads  at  low  water  of  ordinary  springs,  and  8  feet  at  ordinary 
neaps ;  at  half-tide  there  is  9  feet  between  the  pier  heads.  No  special 
directions  are  necessary. 

DANGERS  N.W.  and  NORTH  of  ALDEBNEY.— 

Les  Etacs,  the  most  remarkable  of  all  the  rocks  near  the  west  end  of 
the  island,  form  the  southern  boundary  of  the  Swinge  channel.  They 
consist  of  a  group  of  four ;  the  highest  is  elevated  128  feet  above  high 
water ;  the  centre  of  the  group  lies  off  the  W.N.W.  point  of  Aldemey  at 
the  distance  of  2  cables  from  the  shore. 

Les  Boues  des  EtaCS  lies  W.N.W.  if  cables  from  the  outer  Etac  ; 
the  north-western  head  has  only  one  foot  on  it  at  low  water.  The  east  end 
of  the  outer  Noire  Fute  in  line  with  the  west  end  of  the  Coup6  leads  half  a 
cable  to  the  westward  of  them,  and  the  north  or  lowei  part  of  Tourgis  fort 
in  line  with  south  part  of  Clonque  fort  leads  the  same  distance  to  the 
northward  of  them. 

The  Clonques  »re  three  high  rocks  attached  to  the  western  shore  of 
Alderney  by  a  rocky  ridge,  uncovered  at  low  water,  on  which  there  has 
been  built  an  elevated  roadway  to  communicate  with  the  Clonque  fort. 
The  Clonque  fort  has  been  built  on  the  summits  of  the  two  rocks  nearest 
the  laud.  A  wooden  beacon  stands  in  the  rear  of  the  fort^  on  the  south- 
eastern head  of  the  Clonque. 


CHAP.  VI.]    DANGERS  N.W.   AND   NORTH   OF  ALDERNEY.         241 

Plat  Boue,  Founiais  and  Ozard  Rock^  lie  off  the  cioncjucs 

on  a  line  bearing  about  W.  ^  S.  from  the  fort ;  the  first  dose  to  the  main 
reef ;  the  Founiais,  which  dries  6  feet  nearly  2  cables  from  the  fort,  and 
Ozard  rock  on  which  there  is  4  feet  at  low  water  nearly  3  cables  from  it. 
Ozard  rock  is  very  small ;  on  the  top  of  it  the  great  Noire  Pute  (the  inner 
one)  is  seen  just  open  eastward  and  clear  of  the  inner  rock  of  Les  Etacs 
S.  J  E.,  and  Tourgis  beacon  is  in  line  with  north  tangent  of  Clonqae  fort 
E.  ^  N.     To  clear  the  rocks  use  these  marks  as  necessary. 

Querouelles  and  Barsier  Reefs  are  two  dangerous  rocky 

groups,  situate  northward  of  the  Clonques.  The  middle  of  the  former  lies 
N.N.W.  2  cables  from  the  foit,  and  the  latter  N.  by  W.,  4  cables  from  it. 
Tne  Querouelles  dries  8  feet,  the  eastern  heads  of  the  Barsier  5  feet,  and 
the  western  head  is  just  awash  at  low  water  spring  tides.  The  eastern  head 
of  the  highest  Barsier  bears  S.W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  2  cables  from  Corbet  rock  ; 
the  western  head  of  the  reef  lies  on  the  same  line  of  bearing  three- 
quarters  of  a  cable  from  its  eastern  head.  The  eastern  head  of  outer 
Noir  Pute  in  line  with  the  west  end  of  Alderney  S.  J  W.,  clears  the  west 
side  of  Barsier  by  half  a  cable,  and  fort  Albert  flagstaff  in  line  with  the 
inner  part  of  Grosnez  fort  E,  by  S.,  leads  clear  of  its  north  side  about  the 
same  distance. 

Caution* — ^There  is  no  safe  passage  inside  Querouelles  and  Barsier, 
even  for  boats,  and  the  first  of  the  flood  sets  right  on  them  ;  at  this  time, 
therefore,  a  wide  berth  should  be  given  them  in  passing. 

Corbet  Rock  lies  half  a  mile  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  of  Clonque  fort,  and 
N.W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  half  a  mile  from  Tourgis  point,  and  is  never  wholly 
covered,  though  at  very  high  springs  it  is  awash.  There  is  a  small  detached 
rocks  outside  of  Corbet  that  dries  at  low  water  ;  it  lies  40  yards  on  the  line 
of  Corbet  and  Tourgis  fort.  Corbet  is  attached  at  low  water  to  Alderney 
by  a  dangerous  ledge  of  rocks,  and  the  ebb  as  well  as  the  flood  stream  runs 
over  this  ledge  with  great  rapidity.  A  large  fort  is  erected  on  Tourgis 
point. 

The  long  western  mark  for  the  Corbet  is  the  north-eastern  tower  on 
Casquets  a  little  open  to  the  southward  of  the  Ortac,  W.  by  N.  |  N. 
westerly;  and  the  southern  extremity  of  the  Casquets  just  shut  in  with 
the  south  end  of  the  Ortac  will  lead  to  the  northward  of  the  Corbet  end 
through  the  narrows  of  the  Swinge.  Between  the  Corbet  and  east  end  of 
Burhou  the  streams  rush  with  great  velocity,  and  during  a  weather  tide  the 
sea  breaks  nearly  across  the  Swinge ;  the  smooth  water  then  is  mostly 
found  near  the  Corbet. 

The    GrOSSe,   a  large  prominent  rock   14  feet   above   high-water 
springs,  is  steep-to  and  may  be  approached  within  half  a  cable.     It  lies 
E.  J  S.  4  cables  from  the  Corbet,  and  North  2  cables  from  Tourgis  point, 
q  7049.  Q 


242  CHANNEL   ISLANDS. — ALDERNEY.  [chap.  ti. 

The  JumelleS  are  two  small  ridges  of  rock,  which  uncover  at  half- 
tide,  lying  about  E.  ^  S.  8  cables  from  the  Corbet,  and  3  cables  to  the 
northward  of  Platte  Saline  bay.  The  end  of  the  breakwater  kept  on  a 
bearing  of  E.  ^  S.  will  lead  to  the  northward  of  all  dangers  on  the  south 
side  of  the  Swinge,  from  the  Barsier  and  Corbet  upwards. 

Braye  Rocks  are  a  group  of  four  heads,  the  outermost  of  which 
seldom  covers,  though  awash  at  high-water  springs;  the  three  others, 
named  the  Follets,  show  at  half-tide.  The  outer  Braye  lies  N.E.  f  E., 
2}  cables  from  the  tower  of  the  new  fort  on  Grosnez  point,  and  a  cable 
from  the  breakwater.  A  rock,  with  only  3J  feet  on  it  lies  E.N.E.  a  third 
of  a  cable  from  the  outer  Braye. 

DANGERS  N.E.  of  ALDERNEY.— The  dangers  most  to 
be  feared  on  the  north-eastern  side  of  Alderney  are  the  sunken  rocks  N.E. 
of  the  Aiguillons,  the  Grois,  the  Platte,  the  Ledge,  and  the  Sauquet.  The 
sunken  rocks  N.E.  of  Aiguillon  are  described  at  page  239. 

G-roiS  Ii6dS6  is  an  extensive  dangerous  reef,  lying  off  L'Etoc  point ; 
it  extends  2J  cables  between  the  bearings  of  N,  by  E.  and  N.E.  from  the 
tower  of  the  fort  on  that  point,  which  should  not  be  approached  on  these 
bearings  within  half  a  mile.  The  peaked  rock,  named  the  outer  Grois, 
the  highest  of  ;the  reef,  is  awash  at  high  water  ordinary  springs,  and  bears 
N.  by  E.,  distant  If  cables  from  the  tower  of  the  fort.  Several  of  the 
heads  show  at  half  tide,  and  many  more  at  low  water.  The  stream 
rushes  over  this  reef  with  great  velocity.  The  depth  is  13J  feet  at  a 
cable  W.N.W.  of  the  outer  Grois.  Ortac  and  Noire  Houmet  in  line  and 
open  of  the  end  of  the  breakwater  W.  J  N.  leads  half  a  cable  outside  the 
ledge. 

Platte  Rock  lies  S.S.E.  2|  cables  from  the  outer  Grois,  and  uncovers 
4  feet  at  low-water  springs.  From  the  rock,  the  Ortac  is  just  open  north 
of  L'Etoc  point,  W.  by  N.,  and  the  high  rock,  named  Bon  Ami,  on  the 
east  side  of  Corblets  harbour  in  line  with  old  Corblets  barracks,"  S.W. 
The  ground  between  the  Platte  and  the  outer  extremity  of  the  Grois  reef 
is  foul,  and  should  not  be  approached  by  any  vessel. 

The  Ledge,  or  Fosse  de  la  Band,  is  a  reef  of  considerable  extent, 
with  13  feet  water.  It  lies  E.  by  S.  two-thirds  of  a  mile  from  the  outer 
Grois  rock,  with  the  latter  rock  in  line  with  the  Ortac  W.  by  N.,  and  the 
high  conical  shore  rock  named  Honore,  at  the  west  end  of  the  Mannez 
quarries,  in  line  with  the  small  round  tower  of  the  new  barracks  on  Essex 
hill,  S.W.  I  W. 

The  long  western  mark  to  clear  the  dangers  on  the  north-east  shore  of 
Alderney  is,  the  Casquet  towers  open  northward  of  Burhou  island 
W.  by  N.  i  N. 


CHAP.  VI.]      DANGERS  N.E.   AND  EAST   OF    ALDEENEY.  243 

Sauquet  Bock  lies  2  cables  to  the  southward  of  the  Ledge,  and 
1^  cables  to  the  north-east  of  Homeaux  Florains  reef,  on  which  a  small 
fort  has  been  constructed.  The  Sauquet  uncovers  3  feet  at  low-water 
springs,  and  the  western  mark  for  it  is,  the  tower  of  L'Etoc  fort  in  line 
with  the  Ortac,  W.  by  N.  j;  N.  Great  p^annel  in  line  with  Grois  rock. 
W.N.W.  just  clears  it  outside.  The  ebb  stream  running  down  for  the 
Race  of  Aldernej  and  for  the  Swinge,  sepai'ates  or  forks  off  at  the 
Sauquet,  and  its  tendency  is  to  throw  vessels  that  are  near  this  rock  right 
on  it.  A  berth  should  therefore  be  given  it  of  3  or  4  cables.  The  outer 
Grois  and  noith-east  point  of  Burhou  island  in  line  leads  between  the 
Ledge  and  the  Sauquet. 

DANGERS  on  EAST   SIDE  of  ALDERNEY.  —  The 

principal  dangers  lying  ofE  the  eastern  side  of  the  island  are  the  rocky 
patches  named  the  Brinchetaie,  the  Boufresses,  and  the  Blanchard,  with 
the  rocky  patches  to  the  south-eastward  of  poi*t  Longy. 

The  BriUClietaie  ore  a  dangerous  group  of  semi-detached  rocks 
forming  a  ledge  off  the  eastern  point  of  Aldemey.  The  outer  rock  lies 
3  cables  from  the  shore  and  uncovers  11  feet;  the  inner  rock  uncovers 
16  feet.  Baz  island  flagstaff  in  line  with  south  extreme  of  Essex  castle 
or  the  high  Noire  Fute,  inner  Coque  Lihou  and  south  side  of  L'Etoc 
de  la  Quoire,  in  line  bearing  W.  |  S.,  leads  southward  of  the  Brinchetaie ; 
and  the  outer  part  of  Quenard  fort  in  line  with  the  inner  part  of  Florains 
fort  leads  to  the  eastward.  Several  shoals,  awash  at  low-water  equinoctial 
springs,  extend  to  the  south-east  of  these  dangers,  as  far  out  as  one-third  of 
a  mile  from  the  coast. 

Boufresses  Reef  lies  nearly  4  cables  westward  of  the  Brinchetaie, 
its  outer  end  being  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  new  fort  on 
Raz  island  or  Houmet  de  Longy.  The  reef  uncovei*s  to  a  considerable 
extent  at  low  water.  Raz  island  flagstaff  in  line  with  middle  of  Essex 
castle  leads  to  the  southward. 

Blanchard  Bank  is  composed  of  rock,  gravel,  granite  stones,  and 
shells.  At  its  western  extremity,  which  lies  6  cables  from  the  eastern  end 
of  Aldemey,  there  is  a  mass  of  rock  with  only  2|  fathoms  water ;  thence 
the  bank  extends  E.  by  S.  ^  S.  for  3  cables,  where  there  is  another  rock 
with  only  12  feet  on  it  (Blanchard  rock)  which  lies  three-quarters  of  a 
mile  from  Houmet  Herbe  on  the  outer  or  eastern  edge  of  the  bank ;  between 
its  western  end  and  the  dangers  off  the  east  end  of  the  island  there  are  9  to 
12  fathoms  water.  The  Blanchard  is  very  dangerous,  and  particularly  its 
eastern  extremity,  which  rises  precipitously  from  soundings  of  20  and  25 
fathomS)  causing,  during  springs,  eddies  and  a  heavy  sea  on  a  weather 
tide. 

Q2 


244  CHANNEL  ISLANDS. — ^ALDEBNEY.  [cbaf.  vi. 

DirOCtions. — To  clear  the  Briochetaic,  I^ufresses,  and  Blanchard^ 
lying  oi!  tlio  eastern  end  of  Aldemey,  the  Coque  Lihou  rocks  should  be 
openo\l  out  their  own  ap|)arent  breadth  to  the  southward  of  L*£tac  de  la 
Quoire,  bearing  W.  ^  N^  but  no  more,  as  three  unconnected  rocky  patches 
He  to  the  south-eastward  of  Longy,  stretching  off  as  it  were  from  the 
tails  of  the  Brinchetaie  and  Blancliard  at  the  several  distances  of  half  a 
mile,  three-quarters  of  a  mile,  and  1^  miles  from  the  latter.  Upon  the 
two  outennost  of  them  there  are  only  17  and  18  feet  water,  and  4^  fathoms 
upon  the  ])atch  nearest  the  Blancluinl.  From  the  outermost  rock,  named 
the  Raz  or  Race,  the  telegraph  tower  is  three  times  its  own  length  open 
southward  of  the  L'Etac  de  la  Quoire,  and  Doyle  column,  Guernsej, 
18  nearly  in  line  with  the  Grande  Amfroque.  From  the  centre  patch 
St.  Anno  mill  ap|)ear8  twice  Us  own  length  open  to  the  southward  of  the 
Rousset  ;  and  from  the  northern  patch  St.  Anne  mill  is  in  line  with  the 
si>uthcrn  angle  of  Essex  fort.  Doyle  column  just  open  to  the  northward 
of  the  nortliemmost  bluff  land  on  llerm  W.  by  S.  J  S.,  leads  well  to  the 
south wanl  of  them  all ;  and  for  tho  same  purpose,  do  not  bring  the  light- 
house on  ci\\^  de  la  Ilague  more  southerly  than  £.  ^  S.,  or  keep  the 
Casquot  towei*s  in  sight  to  the  southward  of  Aldemey. 

SOUTH  COAST  OP  ALDEBNET  —  Longy  Bay  or 

BftiO  du  C&tol)  Hes  on  the  south-east  side  of  Alderney,  and  dries  at  low 
water  neaps ;  it  affoixls  but  little  shelter,  excepting  to  small  coasting  vessels 
capable  of  ttiking  the  ground ;  and  since  the  construction  of  Aldemey 
harbour  is  but  seldom  used.  The  entrance  to  the  bay  lies  between  Raz 
island,  formerly  called  Houmet  du  C^tel,  on  which  there  is  a  fort,  and  the 
Queslingue  rock.  The  distance  between  these  points  is  less  than  2  cables, 
and  this  small  space  is  divided  into  two  channels  of  equal  width  by  a  rock 
in  the  centre,  which  dries  2  feet  at  low  water  springs ;  moreover  both  the 
ebb  and  flood  tide  set  violently  across  the  entrance  of  the  bay.  It  will 
therefore  be  apparent  that  a  stranger  should  never  attempt  to  enter  it 
except  in  a  case  of  absolute  necessity.  In  the  event  of  such  occurring, 
attention  is  called  to  the  following : 

Directions* — The  best  time  to  enter  Longy  bay  is  with  tho  wind 
between  N.W.  and  S.W.,  and  between  2  and  5  hours  ebb ;  a  vessel  may 
then  run  aground,  and  on  the  succeeding  tide  she  may  be  hauled  up  under 
Essex  nunnery,  on  the  sandy  beach  at  the  western  side  of  the  bay.  The 
leading  mark  in  with  the  above  winds  is  the  Nunnery  just  shut  in  to  the 
westward  of  Queslingue  rock,  N.  by  E.,  easterly,  and  by  borrowing  within 
half  a  cable  of  the  latter  rocky  point,  the  fairway  sunken  rock  at  the  entrance 
will  be  avoided. 

Anchorage, — ^Longy  road  affords  good  shelter  from  northerly  and 
uorth-westerly  winds  in  from   10  to  14  fathoms  water,  sand,  gravely  and 


CHAP.  VI.]  SOUTH  COAST   OF   ALDERNEY.  245 

shells.  Anchor  with  the  whole  of  fort  Albert  just  shut  in  vith,  uud  seen 
over  the  west  point  of  Longy  bay,  N.  by  W.  ^  W.  and  the  Grande  Folie 
rocky  peak,  just  open  eastward  of  Raz  island  fort,  N.E.  ^  N.  This  berth 
is  in  9  fathoms,  1^  cables  from  the  shore.  A  better  berth  than  this  and 
more  out  of  the  tide  may  be  had  off  the  middle  of  La  Tchue  bay,  just  to 
the  westward  of  Rousset  rock  ;  anchor  here,  at  a  distance  of  IJ  cables 
to  the  westward  of  Rousset  rock,  on  the  line  of  the  west  side  of  Raz  fort 
touching  east  side  of  Queslingue  rock. 

La  RoquO  FendantB  <3  a  remarkable  overhanging  rock,  on  the 
apex"  of  the  bhiff,  within  Rousset  rock,  and  to  the  S.W.  of  fort  Essex; 
it  may  be  seen  from  a  distance  of  9  or  10  miles  on  an  easterly  or  westerly 
bearing,  but  on  altering  tlie  bearing  on  either  side  it  soon  shuts  ia  with  the 
island,  and  is  then  invisible  unless  from  a  very  short  distance. 

Queslingue  and  Rousset  rocks  are  high  and  peaked,  and  lie 
within  2  cables  east  and  west  of  each  other. 

L'EtaC  de  la  Quoire  lies  about  the  middle  of  the  south  coast  of 
the  island,  at  the  distance  of  half  a  cable  from  the  shore,  with  which  it  is 
connected  at  low  water.  It  is  a  conical  rock,  about  60  yards  in  diameter, 
and  10  feet  lower  than  the  Great  Coque  Lihou. 

Bonit  Rock  lies  nearly  half  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  Etac  de 
la  Quoire.  This  dangerous  rock  is  of  small  extent,  and  appears  only  at 
low-water  springs,  and  has  from  10  to  14  fathoms  close  to.  The  marks 
for  it  are  the  Grande  Folie  to  the  eastward  of  Longy,  between  the  Rousset 
and  the  Queslingue  rm^ks ;  and  L'Etac  de  la  Quoire  rock  in  one  with  a 
beacon  on  the  adjoining  shore,  bearing  N.  by  E.  |  E.  The  Bonit  may  be 
avoided  by  not  approaching  Aldemey  nearer  than  a  mile,  or  by  keeping 
the  Casquets  in  sight  to  the  southward  of  the  island. 

Alderney  South  Bank  extends  from  Bonit  rock  to  the  south- 
ward and  S.W.  to  the  distance  of  more  than  1^  miles ;  the  general  depth 
on  the  main  bank  is  15  fathoms,  gravel,  from  which  as  u  base  there  rises 
7  small  banks  of  sand,  some  of  them  having  as  little  as  6  fathoms  on  them. 
These  small  banks  lie  in  an  E.N.E.  and  W.S.W.  direction,  and  have  sharp 
ridgy  apexes.  The  largest  bank  is  less  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile  long. 
The  shallow  spots  commence  at  a  distance  of  rather  more  than  half  a  mile 
S.W.  ^  S.  from  Bonit.  A  vessel  may  pass  inside  of  them  to  the  eastward, 
by  keeping  Coup6  rock  open  southward  of  outer  Coque  Lihou,  until  Grand 
Polie  comes  open  eastward  of  Queslingue  rock  ;  and  outside  by  keeping 
Verte-t^te  open  westward  of  outer  Noire  Pute  N.  by  W.  ^  W.,  until  Grande 
Foli€  appears  in  line  with  Raz  island  fort,  N.E.  ^  N. 

By  night  the  Casquet  light  N.W.  J  N.  will  lead  one  mile  to  the  south- 
west of  Aldemey  bank,  and  half  a  mile  on  the  same  side  of  the  Pierre  an 


210  CHANNEL   ISLANDS. — ALDERNEY.  [chap.  ti. 

Vmic.     Cape  la  Ila^iie  light  kt-pt  on  anj  bearing  northward  of  £.  ^  S. 
will  lead  to  the  southward  of  Aldemej  south  bank. 

Sonic  of  the  lieiiviest  ovcrfalhi  in  the  Race  are  caused  bj  these  banks, 
thej  must  therefore  be  avoided  in  bod  weather. 

Coque  LihOU  Rocks  lie  nearly  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  L'Etac 
de  la  Quoire^  and  about  a  (juarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore.  Thej  consist 
of  a  group  of  three.  Great  Coque  Lihou,  the  middle  or  eastern  one  bein^ 
much  larger  and  higher  than  either  of  the  others,  is  116  feet  above  high 
watiT,  and  lies  S.S.E.  ^  £.,  rather  more  than  half  a  mile  from  Aldemey 
tcl(*gra[ih  tower.  A  bank  of  ^$and  extending  from  Great  Coque  Lihou 
to  the  eastwiml,  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  has  on  it  as  little  as  1^  fathoms. 
It  makes  a  convenient  anchorage  for  fishing  boats  and  small  craft  in  fine 
weather. 

Tlierc  is  a  5-fathom  channel  inside  the  Coque  Lihous,  dose  to  the 
Aldemey  shore,  but  it  is  only  a  cable  wide,  and  therefore  not  to  be 
attempted  by  a  stranger.  Rocks  awash  at  low  water  extend  from  the 
Co<pie  Lihous  more  than  half  way  across  to  Aldemey,  and  a  continuous 
sunken  chain  unite  them  to  the  Joyeaux  rocks,  a  scattered  group  lying 
alK)ut  half  a  mile  to  the  westward. 

The  Noires  PuteS  are  a  group  of  rocks,  four  in  number ;  three  of 
which  are  always  uncovered ;  the  two  outer  rocks  are  much  larger  and 
higher  than  the  other ;  these  lie  east  and  west,  rather  more  than  a  cable 
apart ;  the  westernmost  of  these  rocks  is  flat-topped,  and  elevated  55  feet 
above  high  water.  The  eastern  one  has  a  peak  elevated  76  feet ;  this 
is  sometimes  named  the  Great  Noire  Pute,  it  lies  S.W.  by  S.,  nearly  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  from  Aldemey  telegraph  tower.  The  group  is  quite 
steep-to  outside. 

AiguiUon,  Coup^^  and  OrbOU^e,  three  rocks  elevated  respec- 
tively 20,  24,  and  8  feet  above  high  water,  lie  between  Noires  Futes  and 
Les  Etacs,  in  a  W.S.W.  direction,  half  a  mile  from  the  south-west  extreme 
of  Aldemey,  and  forming  the  southern  boundary  of  the  anchorage  called 
Fo8s6  Mali^res,  or  west  bay.  The  Coupe,  the  middle  of  the  three,  is 
sometimes  called  the  Cocked  hat,  which  it  somewhat  resembles  in  appear- 
ance J  it  is  one  of  the  marks  for  the  Pierre  au  Vraic.  Orbouee  rock,  the 
outer  of  the  group,  is  awash  at  high  springs ;  it  is  connected  with  the 
Coup6  under  water  ;  is  steep  to  the  southward  and  to  the  west,  but  there 
is  a  rock  with  only  2  fathoms  water,  lying  a  cable  from  it  N.W.  by  N. 

ORBOn£E  BANK  extending  S.  by  W.  rather  more  than  half  a 
mile  from  Orbou6e  rock,  consists  of  a  bank  of  gravel,  sand,  and  broken  shells ; 
the  general  depths  on  it  are  8  and  9  fathoms,  but  near  its  outer  end  there 
is  as  little  as  3f  fathoms  ;  this  part  rises  in  a  narrow  ridge  of  fine  sand 
from  the  main  bank,  and  is  very  difficult  to  pick  up ;  it  is  thrown  up. 


CHAP.  VI.]  DIRECTIONS.— CAUTION.  247 

appnrently,  by  the  turning  of  the  stream.  On  the  shoalest  spot  the  great 
Nannel  is  seen  a  little  open  westward  of  outer  of  Les  Etacs,  and  L'Etac 
de  la  Quoire  in  line  with  the  north  part  of  outer  Noire  Pute.  The  bank 
will  be  cleared  by  keeping  the  Pierres  de  BAt  open  westward  of  Les  Etacs 
N.N.E.,  until  L'Etac  de  la  Quoire  comes  open  to  the  eastward  of  Noires 
Putes,  E.  by  N. 

Ancliorage. — ^The  best  anchorage  at  the  west  end  of  Alderney  is  at 
the  Fossee  Mali^res,  or  West  bay ;  anchor  here  in  10  fathoms  gravel,  with 
the  Great  Nannel  touching  the  outer  end  of  Western  Etac,  N.  by  E.  ^  E« 
and  Great  Coque  Lihou  seen  clear  inside  Aiguillons  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E. 
Here  a  vessel  will  lie  out  of  the  tide.  There  is  anchorage  also  outside  of 
Orbouee  rock  in  7  fathoms  on  a  S.S.W^  bearing  from  it  at  the  distance 
of  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  but  it  is  exposed  to  the  full  force  of  the  flood  stream, 
and  therefore  not  safe. 

Directions  for  Alderney,  and  the  Harbour  of  Befage. 

— From  the  north-eastward,  in  hazy  weather,  it  will  be  prudent  to  obtain  a 
bearing  of  cape  de  la  Hague,  when  a  vessel  may  stand  boldly  for  the  north- 
east end  of  the  island  ;  but  should  the  weather  be  so  thick  that  it  cannot 
be  discerned  at  the  distance  of  2  miles,  neither  the  cape  nor  the  island 
should  be  approached  within  that  distance ;  to  avoid  the  outlying  rocks. 

When  nearing  the  cape  or  the  island  the  tides  must  be  carefully  con- 
sidered :  and  it  may  be  useful  to  note  that  oji]  nearing  the  east  end  of 
Alderney,  the  Great  Coque  Lihou  rock  open  eastward  of  the  island  will 
keep  a  vessel  in  the  stream  of  the  Hace,  and  the  Casquet  light  open  north 
of  Burhou  island  will  keep  her  in  the  Swinge  or  Channel  stream. 

In  clear  weather  a  vessel  may  stand  direct  for  the  island.  The  leading 
mark  into  the  anchorage  within  the  breakwater  is  the  tower  of  St.  Anne 
church  in  line  with  the  pier  head  of  the  old  harbour  of  Braye,  S. W.  ^  W. ; 
and  in  fine  weather  it  can  be  seen  5  or  6  miles  off. 

Caution.* — From  the  strength  of  the  west-going  tide,  especially  at 
springs,  which  sets  directly  on  to  the  submerged  end  of  the  breakwater  for 
about  9  hours  out  of  12 — it  is  recommended  on  entering  the  harbour,  so  as 
to  pass  well  clear  of  the  dangerous  portion  {see  page  239),  to  keep  the 
beacon  on  King's  battery  well  open  of  the  beacon  on  Homet  des  Pies,  or 
Fort  Albert  flagstaff  in  line  with  the  stone  beacon  on  the  small  Aiguillon 
rock,  until  St.  Anne  church  spire  comes  in  line  with  the  Old  pier  head, 
when  this  mark  leading  into  the  harbour  should  be  kept  on. 

When  the  tide  is  running  to  the  eastward,  the  shoal  end  of  the  break- 
water may  be  safely  passed  by  keeping  on  the  line  of  the  beacons  erected  for 
passing  clear  of  this  danger  (the  beacon  on  King's  battery  in  line  with  the 
beacon  on  Homet  des  Pies). 

*  Commander  C.  V.  Anson,  H.M.S.  Da$her,  1880. 


CHAP.  VI.]  TIDAL   STREAM.  261 

the  Race,  Swinge,  and  Or  toe  channels,  is  turned  in  an  easterly  direction 
by  the  force  of  the  channel  stream ;  also  on  the  ebb  tide,  the  channel 
stream  running  in  a  westerly  direction,  past  cape  La  Hague,  Aldemey^ 
and  the  Casquets,  is  forced  through  the  channels  between  these  places  in 
a  southerly  direction ;  but  this  description  of  the  stream  only  applies  to 
the  periods  of  high  and  low  water;  in  its  transition  from  one  to  the 
other,  peculiarities  occur  requiring  a  particular  description. 

The  flood  or  north-eastern  stream  begins  to  make  through  the  Race  and 
Swinge  channels  when  the  tide  has  risen  3  hours  by  the  shore,  and  it 
attains  its  great  strength,  7  to  8  knots,  about  high  water.  An  hour 
after  high  water  by  the  shore,  the  sti*eam  in  its  revolving  course  is  setting 
about  N.E.  by  E.  and  begins  to  abate  in  strength  ;  still  veering  in  direction 
and  slacking  in  strength,  it  sets  faintly  to  the  N.W.  at  3  hours  after  high 
water,  causing  a  short  slack  in  the  Swinge,  and  also  on  the  north-west  side 
of  Burhou ;  after  which  the  ebb  tide  comes  down  atid  rushes  through  these 
channels  with  a  velocity  nearly  as  great  as  the  flood.  After  low  water 
the  tide  begins  to  veer  to  the  southward  and  abates  in  strength  ;  an  hour 
and  a  half  after  low  water  the  stream  is  setting  from  the  northward  on 
Aldemey  and  Burhou,  causing  extensive  slacks  or  eddies  to  the  southward 
of  these  islands,  and  at  half  flood  the  ofling  stream,  now  very  weak,  sets 
to  the  S.E.,  causing  a  dead  slack  for  a  short  period  in  all  the  channels 
between  Aldemey  and  the  Casquets. 

Having  thus  described  the  general  course  of  the  main  tidal  stream  round 
Aldemey,  it  is  necessary  to  describe  some  of  the  most  important  eddies 
caused  by  the  peculiar  turning  of  the  tide  and  the  obstructions  of  the 
islands  and  rocks. 

Aldemey,  the  Casquets,  and  intermediate  rocks,  all  narrow  in  proportion 
to  their  length,  and  each  lying  on  a  line  of  direction  nearly  east  and  west, 
are  in  the  line  of  tide  when  the  stream  i»  at  its  strength,  on  both  ebb  and 
flood ;  therefore  at  these  times  the  resistance  they  offer  to  the  free  course 
of  the  stream  is  small  and  the  eddies  under  them  insignificant ;  but  as  the 
stream  in  its  rotary  course  moves  out  of  this  line  of  direction,  extensive 
eddies  are  formed  under  the  lee  of  AJderney,  altemately  on  its  northern  and 
southern  shores  ;  these  eddies  are  called  the  inshore  streams. 

On  the  northern  shore  of  the  island  the  inshore  stream  commences  at 
Sauquet  rock  and  extends  to  the  westward  as  far  as  Corbet  rock,  and 
within  it  to  the  southward  of  the  vortex  of  the  Swinge,  running  9  hours 
to  the  westward  and  only  3  to  the  eastward ;  the  former  commencing  an 
hour  before  high  water  and  the  latter  at  2  hours  flood.  Along  the 
southern  side  of  the  island,  between  Orbouee  rock  and  Raz  island,  there 
are  9  hours  of  eastern  and  but  3  hours  of  western  stream ;  the  former 
stream  commences  one  hour  before  low  water  and  runs  along  the  land 


^^^^^^^^■^^^^^^■■^v 


t'llVUI  'I 

l.:i,U 

y.l 

ring   tlit- 

wl-A 

firm 

tl.-  n-i- 

1^.11 

1.'.' 

1  'if  I^.ii;; 

,  HI- 

tin;: 

rl.-  I(.'.'- 

■.   il 

j-'i' 

l--!.ly  v.<- 

4  nn 

t  111. 

IIK-t.'l- I.I   2\ 

nii.l  .-bb 

H'tM  t 

war.) 

r.  l,.,i.rH 

.1.1,, 

nt 

vhicli  tim 

;   it 

'liiM 

Suirigp. 

'II..-- 

two 

jjrf 

t    Cl.li.-)! 

or  ii 

-li'in; 

cnrJi   >,tl 

cr; 

Ij'ti 

;r.;iici-nl 

c.)iiri< 

'N    HI 

\<y  ri-T'-n 

ii<-.< 

<i  n 

Cliai-t   r,f 

AM. 

riii.y 

iMtmrV. 

tiill 

nsl 

L.,ii..rlli.T 

n.-I. 

V  S';ts 

CilANXKI,   rSLAXDS.— AI-DKRNEY.  jr-ixr-  "■ 

iinil  until  2  Lom*  <^ih  again.  In 
lii!)  tlie  :">iiil.-wr-Tt.^m  stream  from 
•a  wit),  it;  th<>  bttir  strcum  com- 
t)ie  OrWut-L-  for  3  hours  or  until 
lie  sriuth-wir.itcni   strf-am  from  the 

Hlr^amn  are  exactly  tlie  reverse  of 
1  M.'tioii  will  1h>  easily  unilcrstood 
ii.y  atid  a  careful  iwrusal  of  the  above 
w  the  entrance  of  Brayc  harbour 
ul' r.-fii;;.-  Ill  tim.'M  with  fjrwit  velocity  aii.i  then  eonslitutes  the  principal 
.luni;.:i-  ihi'i'.-,  II  [mnittulnr  <!t!Hi:riiition  rrfils  iictiun  will  follow. 

I'll.-  illr.-'t.i.'ii  lit  the  floo.l  Klniun,  half  an  hour  l^oforc  high  water  about 
wliii^Ii  tinii-  it  ntUtiiiH  itH  KrealCHt  Mrength,  is  about  East ;  this  being  the 
line  ofilJi^'ctioti  of  Ahlcm.-y  it  runs  full  on  the  west  point  of  the  island 
by  whirh  the  stream  is  now  fairly  divided,  oue  part  rushing  through  the 
KaiMi  aimtg  the  south  si.lc  of  the  island  with  a  velocity  of  betvreen  7  ajid 
S  kiKitH,  till*  (itlier  through  the  S^ringo  at  about  the  same  rate,  leaving  a 
small  c.l'ly  jtnivioutly  noticei),  under  the  east  end  of  the  island,  near  the 
Haiiqni>t  rock. 

At  high  water  by  the  shore  the  turning  of  the  offing  stream  from  an 
0aBt«rly  to  a  northerly  direction  relieves  the  pressure  of  the  Swinge  stream 
from  the  end  of  tlio  breakwater ;  and  at  thta  time  during  a  spring  tide 
thii  Switi^o  stream  is  running  to  the  eastward  with  a  velocity  of  3  knots 
at  the  ilisttuico  of  120  yards  from  the  end  of  tlie  breakwater ;  the  inters 
tncdiatu  sinicn  liriug  filled  up  by  the  stream  setting  round  the  breakwater 
to  the  westwanl  at  the  rate  of  3  knots.  This  latter  is  the  inshore  eddy 
or  ebb  stmiin :  it  commcncoa  in  the  eddy  near  Sauquet  rock  and  b^na 
to  sot  to  the  westward,  as  stated  abovo,  an  honr  before  high  water;  at 
thirt  ]H-ri(id  tlie  western  stream  sets  round  the  end  of  the  breakwater  in 
voluuie  n  men)  thread,  but  it  gradually  increases  in  magnitnde  as  the  turn- 
ing (if  till?  (iHiiig  Btrenm  removes  the  pressure  of  the  Swinge  stream  from 
the  end  tit  ilio  breakwater. 

'['lie  most  dniigi.'ruus  jicriod  of  this  tide  and  eddy  is  about  high  water,  at 
which  limo  they  net  past  each  other,  separated  only  a  few  feet,  with  the 
vcliH'ity  Mtattil  above ;  great  caution  must  therefore  be  used  should  it  ba 
in>ccss«i-y  for  a  long  screw  vessel  to  enter  the  harbour  dnring  this  period. 
The  great  kniEtth  of  the  krealiwutcr  obstructing  ibe  conrse  of  the  western 
8lri'aiii  being  the  cause  of  llie  danger,  the  current  is  of  course  Hlrongest 
near  the  oiilcr  end  of  that  structure,  and  therefore  at  such  times  it  will  be 
adviNililo  to  enter  the  harbour  a  little  to  the  southward  of  the  mid-channal 


*' . ' 


CHAP.  VI.]  EACE    OF   ALDERNEY.  253 

course  rather  than  risk  a  near  approtich  to  the  end  of  the  breakwater. 
An  hour  after  high  water  the  inner  edge  of  the  east-going  Swinge  stream 
is  removed  to  the  distance  of  2  cables  from  the  breakwater  end,  and  both 
streams  beginning  to  abate  in  strength,  the  danger  gradually  ceases. 

At  2  hours  ebb  the  Swinge  stream,  now  slacking  fast  and  veering  to  the 
westward,  sets  on  the  Nannels,  the  western  stream  running  past  the  end  of 
the  breakwater  at  the  rate  of  3  knots,  meeting  the  eastern  stream  in  the 
Swinge  a  little  outside  Corbet  rock,  uniting  with  it  and  both  setting 
towards  the  Nannels ;  within  Corbet  rock  the  western  stream  sets  down 
to  the  west  end  of  the  island. 

At  half  ebb  by  the  shore  the  offing  tide  is  setting  faintly  to  the  N.W., 
and  there  is-  slack  water  in  the  Swinge,  but  only  for  a  few  minutes,  after 
which  the  westerly  Swinge  stream  makes  there,  and  immediately  com* 
mences  to  run  past  the  breakwater  end  with  renewed  strength  until  low 
water  by  the  shore ;  gradually  slacking  as  the  ofling  stream  veers  from 
W.  \  S.  to  the  southward.  Whilst  the  tide  is  veering  through  the  latter 
section  of  its  course  thei*e  is  slack  water  at  the  entrance  of  Braye  harbour ; 
after  an  interval  of  which,  the  stream  sets  across  the  end  of  the  breakwater 
in  an  E.S.E.  direction,  2  hours  after  low  water. 

The  RACE  of  ALDERNEY  is  the  name  applied  to  the  strait 
between  that  island  and  cape  La  Hague.  Here,  as  in  the  Swinge  and  Ortac 
channels,  the  streams  sets  to  the  south-westward  at  half  ebb  by  the  shore, 
and  runs  in  that  direction,  with  the  variations  given  as  under  for  six  hours, 
or  tmtil  half-flood,  and  the  contrary  with  respect  to  the  north-eastern  stream ; 
for  there  is  but  little  slack  water  there. 

The  greatest  strength  of  the  south-western  stream  (abput  2\  hours)  begins 
5  hours  after  high  water  at  Aiderney,  and  ends  4^  hours  before  the  following 
high  water.  The  greatest  strength  of  the  north-eastern  stream  continues 
about  2  hours ;  that  is,  from  one  hour  before  high  water  at  Aiderney, 
until  one  hour  after.  During  equinoctial  springs,  the  velocity  of  the  south- 
western stream  or  ebb  is  nearly  7  knots,  and  of  the  north-eastern  stream 
nearly  8  knots,  neaps  b\  knots.  The  first  2|  hours  of  the  south- western 
stream  in  the  Race,  that  is,  from  half -ebb  till  low  water,  sets  W.S.W. ; 
and  the  last  two  hours,  that  is  from  low  water  till  half-flood  sets  S.AV.  ; 
and  the  contrary  for  the  first  and  last  3^  hours  of  the  north-eastern  stream, 
which  between  half-flood  and  high  water,  sets  very  strongly  round  cape 
La  Hague.  There  is  therefore  5^  hours  south-western,  and  6^  hours  north- 
eastern stream,  that  is  half  an  hour's  difierence  between  the  Race  tide  an4 
that  in  the  Ortac  and  Swinge  channels. 

In  boisterous  weather,  if  the  wind  and  stream  are  ever  so  obliquely 
opposed,  the  sea  breaks  in  all  parts  of  the  Bace,  as  if  it  were  over  small 


254 


CHANNEL   ISLANDS. — ALDERNEY. 


[chap.  VI. 


knolls  or  patches,  which  makes  it  difficult  and  often  dangerous  for  small 
vessels  to  pass  through  ;  at  such  times  there  are  heavy  overfalls  over  all 
the  sunken  rocks  and  bank,  virhich  must  of  course  be  carefully  avoided. 

DANGERS  in  the  RACE« — ^Both  the  outer  and  inner  Bacerock 
have  been  repeatedly  examined  and  well  sounded  over  without  finding  less 
water  tha^  18  feet,  reduced  to  low-water  spring  tides,  and  this  is  believed 
to  be  the  true  depth  over  each  of  them  at  that  period ;  and  there  is  then  12 
feet  on  the  Blanchard  rock.  There  is  a  rocky  bank  lying  W.  ^  N.  3^  miles 
from  cape  La  Hague  light,  which,  although  probably  not  dangerous,  throws 
up  a  strong  overfall,  and  should  be  avoided.  The  fairway  of  the  Eace  lies 
between  this  bank  and  the  Race  rock  ;  the  distance  between  these  points  is 
3^  miles  ;  the  soundings  in  this,  the  narrowest  part  of  the  Race,  are 
regular,  between  22  and  24  fathoms,  but  the  bottom  entirely  rocky  through- 
out. 

Middle  Rock,  an  isolated  head  with  7  fathoms  water,  lies  S.S.E.  4^ 
miles  from  Aldemey  telegraph  tower  ;  from  it  the  Casquets  bear  N.W. 
9f  miles,  and  cape  La  Hague  E.  |  N.  8^  miles.  When  the  tide  is  running 
strong,  the  position  of  this  rock  is  marked  by  a  breaker  or  over&Jl,  and 
there  is  at  all  times  a  ripple  over  it ;  it  may  be  avoided  by  day  or  night 
by  attending  to  the  directions  given  at  page  248  for  passing  through  the 
Bace. 

CAUTION. — ^When  running  through  the  Bace  of  Aldemey,  it  is  at  all 
times  best  to  take  the  fairway  of  the  channel  described  above  ;  beaiing  in 
mind  that  the  north-eastern  stream  between  half-flood  and  high-water 
on  the  shore,  sets  very  strongly  round  cape  La  Hague,  off  which  there 
project  several  sunken  rocks. 

The  direct  course  from  the  Bace  to  the  Little  Bussel  channel  is 
W.  by  S.  i  S.,  and  from  the  Casquets  to  that  channel  nearly  S.W.  ^  S. 
If  bound  therefore  from  the  Bace  or  Casquets  to  the  Little  Bussel, 
between  the  periods  of  low  water  and  half-flood,  and  of  high  vrater  and 
half-ebb,  allowance  must  be  made  for  the  stream,  which  obliquely  crosses 
the  courses  during  these  periods,  and  great  care  must  be  taken  to  avoid 
the  Middle  rock  and  the  Banc  de  Schdle. 

Bearings  and  Distances, 
Casquets  to  Grunes  de  TOuest 

Hanois  Lighthouse     - 
Boustel  Bock 
„  Blanchard  Bock 

Pierre  au  Vraic  to  Boustel  Bock  - 
Bace  Bock  to  Platte  Boue 
Boustel  Bock 


99 


» 


» 


S.W.  by  W. 

16^  miles. 

S.W.  by  W. 

2H     „ 

S.W.  f  s. 

14|     » 

S.  by  W.  (southerly) 

18       „ 

S.W.  i  W. 

"f     „ 

S.W.  by  W.  i  W. 

15|     „ 

W.S,W.  (southerly) 

19       „ 

CHAP.  VI.]    DANGERS  IN  THE  BACE. — BANC  DE   SCHOLE.      255 

Race  Rock  to  Blanchard  Rock       -    S.W.  ^  S.  18J  miles 

„  E.  side  Paternosters-     S.S.W.  25       „ 

„  BeUe  Hougue  Point  -    S.  by  W.  i  W.  211-     „ 

BANC  DE  SCHOLE,  lies  nearly  in  the  direct  line  between  tbe 
Great  Rnssel  channel  and  the  Race  of  Alderney ;  like  most  other  banks 
between  the  Channel  islands,  it  consists  of  a  mixture  of  fine  gravel,  sand, 
and  shell ;  it  is  very  steep  to  the  southward  and  westward,  but  shoals 
gradually  on  the  N.E.  side." 

Taking  the  5-fathom  line  as  the  first  contour  of  the  bank,  it  is  1^  miles 
long,  N.  by  E.  and  S.  by  W.,  and  one  quarter  of  a  mile  wide  near  the 
middle,  tapering  off  to  a  mere  ridge  at  the  extremes.  The  10-fathom 
contour  of  the  bank  includes  a  space  2 J  miles  long  N.N.E.  and  S.S.W., 
and  three-fourths  of  a  mile  wide,  whilst  the  20-fathom  contour  will  include 
a  length  of  5  miles  by  1^  miles.  The  top  of  the  bank  is  very  narrow 
and  consists  of  small  semi-circular  ridges  of  sand,  convex  to  the  S.W., 
the  general  depth  over  which  is  3  fathoms  of  the  lowest  spring  tides  ;  near 
the  middle  of  the  bank,  however,  as  little  as  two  fathoms  was  found,  having 
some  spots  near  with  2^  fathoms. 

The  soundings  taken  on  this  bank  at  different  periods  tend  to  prove  that 
its  apex  is  continually  varying  in  altitude,  and  it  is  probable^  therefore, 
that  it  also  shifts  its  position,  within  a  particular  and  limited  space, 
according  to  tide,  weather,  &c.  The  position .  of  the  shoalest  spot  on  the 
bank  did  not  alter  perceptibly,  however,  from  1861  to  1869  ;  the  marks 
for  it  are  Alderney  telegraph  tower  N.  by  E.  f  E.  easterly,  7J  miles, 
Casquet  light  N.  by  W.  i  W.  10^  miles,  and  Serk  Windmill  S.W.  f  W. 
10  miles. 

Directions. — ^Between  low  water  and  half-flood  it  will  be  advisable 
to  pass  to  the  eastward  of  the  Banc  de  Scheie,  but  between  half-ebb 
and  low  water  to  the  westward,  because  in  both  these  cases  the  tide  will 
favour  the  attempt.  Doyle  column,  Guernsey,  in  line  with  the  Faucon- 
ni^re  rock,  W.  by  S.,  or  the  Etac  de  Serk  open  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Burons,  or  the  lighthouse  at  cape  de  la  Hage,  N.E.  by  E.  |  E.  leads  to 
the  south-eastward  and  southward  of  the  bank.  Doyle  column  just  open 
to  the  northward  of  the  northernmost  bluff  land  on  Herm,  W.  by  S.  |  S. 
or  the  Gouilot  pass  kept  open  to  the  westward  of  the  Bee  du  Nez,  Serk, 
or  the  lighthouse  at  cape  de  la  Hague,  E.  f  N.,  leads  to  the  north-west- 
ward and  northward ;  St.  Martin  point,  appearing  midway  between  the 
Fauconni^re  and  the  south-western  end  of  Herm  island,  points  to  its 
shoalest  part ;  and  the  whole  of  Burhou  shut  in  behind  the  Etacs  and 
Noires  Putes,  N.  ^  W.,  will  lead  along  the  east  side  of  the  bank  at  the 
distance  of  more  than  a  mile.    In  bad  weather,  if  the  wind  and  tide  are 


256  CnASXEL  islands.  [c!lip.  yi. 

ever  so  obliquely  opposed  to  each  other,  the  aen  breaks  very  dangerously  on 
all  parts  of  the  bonk. 

OTSTEK-GROUND.— About  11  miles  in  a  north-easterly  direc- 
lioD  from  La  Coupe  point,  the  north-eastern  extreme  of  Jersey,  and  nearly 
14  miles  in  a  aouth-eastern  direction  from  the  middle  of  Serk,  lies  an 
eztonsivc  oyster  ground,  tho  marks  for  which  are.  us  follows,  viz.,  the 
island  of  Jethou  in  one  with  Bee  du  Kez,  Scrk  ;  Bozol  mill  in  line  with 
the  Burons  de  DrouUles,  and  the  two  high  heads  of  the  Pierrea  de  Lecq 
in  one  with  point  Grosnez.  There  is^  however,  little  or  no  difference  to  be 
observed  with  respect  to  the  various  depths  of  water  in  ita  neighbourhood. 


257 


CHAPTER  VII. 

THE  ISLAND  OF  JERSEY,  WITH  ITS  APPROACHES  AND  ADJACENT 

•  DANGERS. 


VARIATION  IN  1882, 18°  40'  West. 


JSRSSIT. — The  form  of  this  island  is  that  of  a  parallelogram,  its  greatest 
length  E.S.E.  and  W.N.W.  being  9^  miles,  and  its  breadth  5|  miles. 
The  middle  of  the  island,  in  an  E.S.E.  and  W.N.W  direction  presents  an 
uniform  level  surface,  elevated  about  280  feet  above  mean  tide  ;  its 
northern  shore  being  from  100  to  150  feet  higher.  By  a  singular  contrast 
with  the  island  of  Guernsey,  the  declivity  of  which  lies  towards  the  north- 
west, Jersey  declines  towards  the  south-east;  and  to  this  circumstance 
may  probably  be  attributed  the  pre-eminence  which  the  latter  enjoys  in 
the  richness  of  its  productions,  the  luxuriant  appearance  of  its  surface,  and 
the  peculiar  mildness  of  its  climate.  Granite  and  syenitic  rocks  are  the 
principal  formations.* 

The  interior  of  the  island  is  well  wooded,  fertile,  and  intersected  by  deep 
beautiful  valleys,  running  from  south  to  north,  through  which  numerous 
streams  find  their  way  to  the  low  land  on  the  south  coast ;  several  occa- 
sionally uniting  before  discharging  themselves  into  the  sea. 

Jersey  possesses  several  good  bays  or  roadsteads  besides  its  artificial 
harbours.  The  best  among  the  former  are  Gorey  roads,  at  Grouville  bay, 
on  the  east  side  of  the  island,  and  St.  Aubin  bay  on  its  south  coast ;  in 
either  of  which  a  good  and  well  found  ship  may  ride  out  the  heaviest 
gales  from  any  quarter  in  safety.  The  principal  artificial  harbour  is  at 
the  seaport  of  St.  Helier,  which  is  the  chief  town  of  the  island,  and  is 
situated  at  the  east  side  of  St.  Aubin  bay.  There  are  also  harbours  of 
inferior  magnitude  at  St.  Aubin,  on  the  north  side  of  the  bay,  at  Gorey 
and  Rozel,  but  they  all  dry  at  low- water  spring  tides. 

Jersey  has  its  own  legislature,  the  States,  consisting  of  the  Lieut.- 
Governor  and  the  Bailiff  of  the  Royal  Court,  appointed  by  the  Crown ; 
twelve  Jurats  (Judges)  of  the  Royal  Court,  elected  for  life  by  the  rate- 

*  iSee  Admirfdty  chart,  Jersey  island,  8  sheets,  Nos.  62  a,  6,  and  c;  scale  ma 4*0 
inohes. 

Note. — The  soundiDgs  given  in  this  Chapter  have  been  reduced  to  a  zero  corresponding 

to  a  range  of  37  feet  tide;  and  the  lowest  tide  registered  in  Jersey  between  1864  and 

1869  fell  22  inches  below  that  level. 

Q  7049.  B 


25S  CIIANXEL  ISLANDS. — ^JEBSEY.  [chap.  th. 

(»avers ;  the  Rectors  of  the  twelve  Parishes  into  which  the  island  is  dividedy 
aiul  the  Constables  uf  the  same  ;  also  a  Deputy  for  each  parish  (St.  Helier 
having  three  Deputies),  elected  in  the  same  manner  for  three  jears. 
Appeab  lie  to  the  Queen  in  Council.    . 

This  island,  like  Guernsey  and  Aldernej,  is  in  the  diocese  of  Winchester. 
Each  parish  has  its  own  church,  the  spires  of  which  serxe  as  the  principal 
landmarks. 

The  old  Norman  French  is  spoken  by  the  natives,  but  the  English 
language  is  rapidly  coming  into  use. 

The  population  of  the  island,  according  to  the  census  of  1871,  amounted 
to  56,627. 

A  considerable  portion  of  the  island  is  laid  out  in  orchards  ;  cider  and 
apples  being  among  its  chief  exports.  Early  potatoes  are  also  raised  in 
great  quantity  for  the  London  market.  The  chief  imports  are  grain,  flour, 
cattle,  and  timber  for  ship-building  ;  the  latter  principally  from  Sweden, 
Norway,  and  North  America ;  the  former  firom  France. 

Ship-baikling  was  formerly  carried  on  with  great  success  and  some  yery 
tine  and  fast  vessels  have  been  built  here  of  500  to  1,200  tons  burthen,  bat 
the  trade  is  now  in  a  state  of  decay^  1870. 

In  1S70  there  were  446  vessels  belonging  to  the  island,  and  one  steam 
tug,  measuring  48,812  tons  in  the  aggregate,  and  employing  4,014  seamen  ; 
sixty  of  these  vessels  manned  by  about  600  seamen,  are  employed  in,  or 
connected  with  the  XewfoumJland  cod  fishery. 

St.  Ilelier,  the  chief,  and,  correctly  speaking,  only  town  of  the  island>  is 
built  ou  low  huid  open  to  the  south,  but  overlooked  and  sheltered  on  the 
uorth  by  a  semicii'cular  elevated  plateau  completely  commanding  it.  The 
town  is  well  built,  and  so  extensive  that  in  it  are  located  about  half  the 
population  of  the  entire  island,  nearly  30,000  souls.  It  has  a  college  and 
several  churches ;  the  spires  of  which  latter,  together  with  the  noble  for- 
tress of  fort  Regent  on  the  east  side  of  the  town,  are  the  most  remarkable 
objects  from  the  sea. 

Supplies. — St.  Helier  has  a  well  supplied  market,  where  fresh  meat 
and  poultry  may  be  piirehaseil  at  about  the  same  prices  as  in  London.  Fish 
are  scarce,  vegetables  and  fruit  abundantly  cheap. 

PILOTS. — The  following  is  extracted  from  the  Law  on  Pilotage 
issued  by  the  States  of  the  island  of  Jersey  in  January  lSo7 : — 

"  The  master  of  every  vessel  bound  to  this  island,  and  arrived  one  mile 
West  of  the  Corbiere  rock,  shall  lay  his  vessel  to,  as  soon  as  a  pilot  is 
in  sWhU  &n<i  take  a  pilot  on  board  as  soon  as  one  presents  himself,  on  pain 
of  paying  such  pilot  the  highest  rate  of  pilotage. 

^  Fishing  boats  and  vessels  admeasuring  forty  tons  and  less  shall  not  be 
liable  to  take  a  pilot,  but  all  other  vessels  employed  in  the  coasting  trade 


CHAP.ni.]  PILOTS. — ^BANK  DESORMES.  259 

shall  be  liable  so  to  do^  paying  hftlf  the  pilotage  dues,  when  it  has  been 
ascertained,  that  they  are  employed  in  the  coasting  trade  only,  unless  it  be 
otherwise  provided  by  the  tariff. 

"  When  the  weather  is  so  stormy  as  to  prevent  a  pilot  from  boarding  a 
vessel,  at  sea,  the  master  of  such  vessel  and  the  pilot  shall  so  steer  that  the 
pilot  boat  may  take  the  lead  and  serve  as  a  guide,  and  such  vessel  shall  be 
liable  to  the  same  pilotage  dues  as  if  the  pilot  had  boarded  her. 

*'  Any  pilot  passing  a  vessel  coming  to  the  island  shaU  be  liable  to  a 
penalty  of  five  pounds  sterling,  unless  such  vessel  have  already  a  pilot 
on  board,  or  the  weather  is  so  stormy  as  to  prevent  the  pilot  fix)m 
boarding  her. 

"  Every  pilot  shall  have  a  flag  striped  horizontally  red  and  white,  6  feet 
long  and  4  wide,  which  on  boarding  a  vessel  and  taking  charge,  he  shall 
direct  the  master  thereof  to  hoist  at  the  peak  as  a  signal  that  a  pilot  is  on 
board,  under  the  penalty  of  five  pounds  sterling  against  the  master  refusing 
to  do  so. 

**  Any  pilot  undertaking  to  pilot  a  vessel  shall,  when  required  so  to  do, 
exhibit  to  the  master  or  mate  of  such  vessel  his  warrant,  together  with 
this  law  and  tariff  annexed  thereto,  under  the  penalty  of  thirty 
shillings." 

APPROACH  TO  JERSEY  FROM  THE  NORTHWARD,  WITH  OUTLYING 

ROCKS  AND  DANGERS. 

Like  Guernsey  and  Aldemey,  Jersey  is  completely  encompassed  with 
dangers  of  every  description,  which  are  rendered  doubly  formidable  by 
the  great  rise  and  fall,  as  well  as  rapidity  of  the  tides.  The  most 
remarkable  are,  thePierres  de  Lecq,  orPater-Nosters,  the  Drouilles,  and  the 
Ecr^hos,  on  the  northern  and  north-eastern  sides ;  the  Violet  bank 
surrounding  the  south-eastern  angle ;  and  the  Minquiers  ledge,  with  many 
other  rocks,  to  the  southward. 

BANC  DESORMES,  lies  3^  miles  to  the  nortliward  of  Grosnez 
point,  and  a  like  distance  from  the  highest  of  the  Pierres  de  Lecq  rocks. 
It  is  a  bank  of  rocky  ground,  a  mile  long  N.N.W.  and  S.S.E.,  and  a  third 
of  a  mile  broad ;  the  depths  on  which  are  generally  12  to  15  fathoms, 
excepting  near  its  extremes,  where  two  large  conical  masses  rise  &om  the 
bottom  ;  the  northern  one  to  within  23  feet  of  the  surface,  and  the  southern 
to  7^  fathoms  at  low  water.  The  latter  bears  from  the  former  S.S.E., 
distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile. 

On  the  23-feet  rock,  which  is  small  and  pointed,  with  depths  of  9  to 
12  fathoms  close  around.  La  Moye  signal  post  is  only  just  shut  in  behind 
the  outer  part  of  Pinnacle  S.  i  W.  5  and  the  south-western  high  rock  of 

R  2 


260  CHjUTSZL  islands. — jersey.  Cckaf.th. 

eke  Patrm  ^  L«cq  ^ffemn  sKot  in  with  Belle  Hoagae  point  neari j  na  fiir 
m  Ike  fMier  pert  </ its  li^  blnfF  S.E.  ^  S. 

Claaiing  markfl.~La  Moje  lignal  pott  in  line  with  La  Rocco 
tow  henrxBg  &  ^  E.  Icftdj  wcstwird  ;  Toor  de  Booel  jnst  shot  in  with 
BeOe  HoBgwe  poiot  SJS.  k«is  aoothwmrd  ;  and  La  Corbiere  rock  jpst  in 
Mght  ostnda  tfe  Piuacle,  S.  bj   W.  }  W.  lends  eastward  of  Banc 


PIERBSS  DB  LECQ»  ^  •  rockj  group,  the  western  end   of 
which  Bet  XJS.  bj  N.,  nearlj  2f  nulea  from  Grosnei  point,  the  north-west 
extreme  of  Jmtj,  aiftd  nearlj  abreast  Grere  de  Leoq  bay ;  from  which  the 
middle  or  highest  rock  bears  N.N.E«  distant  2^  miles.     There  are  four  lai^ 
rocks,  ele^nated  from  20  to  30  feet  above  high  water,  lying  near  the  middle 
of  the  S.E.  side  of  the  reef;  from  the  highest  of  these  the  reef  dries  to 
the  N.W.  &r  nearly  a  mile  at  low  water:  and  within  it  to  the  S.E.,  for 
about  the  mme  distance  there  are  banks  of  sunken  rodis,  the  outermost  of 
which  have  oofy  20  feet  over  them  at  low  water.    The  most  dangerous 
rock  inside  the  main  groap  is  called  Grone  de  Lecq,  which  dries  2  feet  at 
low  water,  and  lies  S.  by  E.  \  E.,  nearly  half  a  mile  from  the  aforesaid 
great  central  rock  of  the  group. 

Directiona.— The  Pierres  de  Lecq  may  be  cleared  on  their  west  side 
by  keeping  the  Corbiere  rock  in  line  with  Pinnacle  point  S.  by  W.  f  W. 
A  nearer  mark  may  be  had  with  St.  Peters  mill  in  line  with  Greve  de 
Lecq  flagstaff  S.  by  E.  ^  E.     To  pass  inside  of  them,  keep  the  Tour  de 
Rozel  shut  in  behind  Belle  Hougue  point  S.E.,  until  the  white  tower  in 
Grt've  de  Lecq,  a  white  sandy  bay,  comes  in  line  with  the  eastern  point  of 
the  l>ay  S.W.  ^  W.,  with  which  mark  run  to  the  north-eastward  until  Rozel 
mill  appears  over  Belle  Hougue  point  S.S.E.  J  E.,  which  leads  to  the  north- 
eastward. 

When  the  marks  are  not  visible,  or  at  night,  pass  through  the  middle  of  the 
channel  between  Jersey  and  the  Pierres  de  Lecq,  Drouilles,  Ecr^hos,  &c. 

DROUILLES  CHANNEL,  between  the  dangerous  rocky  group 
of  that  name  and  the  Pierres  de  Lecq,  is  about  5  miles  wide ;  is  safe  for 
vesMols  of  any  size,  and  free  of  any  outlying  danger;  having  regular 
noundings  in  18  fathoms  throughout. 

For  a  description  of  Drouilles  and  Ecr^hos  rocks,  see  pages  307  and  310. 

Appearance  of  Jersey  from  the  Westward.— Vessels 

Hf>proaching  Jersey  from  the  westward  will  make  the  land  about  St.  Ouen 
bay ;  of  which  the  high  precipitous  bluff  of  Grosnez,  situate  at  its  north 
extreme,  will  appear  to  be  the  most  remarkable.  Special  attention  is  called 
to  this  particular  feature  of  Jersey,  as  in  making  the  coast  of  Guernsey 
from  the  westward  the  bluff  land  at  Pleicmont  would  there  appeal*  as  the 
•oath  extreme  of  land,  the  northern  part  declining  gradually  to  the 


CHAP.  VII.]  PIERRES  DE  LECQ. — ST  OTJEN  BAT.  261 

level.  To  the  southward  of  Grosnez  the  high  land  runs  nearly  level.  On 
the  edge  of  the  plateau  overlooking  St.  Ouen  bay  stands  St,  Ouen  mill, 
and  a  church  with  steeple  a  little  beyond  it.  Still  farther  in  the 
background  will  be  seen  St.  Peter's  chtirch,  with  its  lofty  spire ;  and 
occasionally,  glimpses  will  be  had  of  the  other  churches  and  mills  of  the 
island  still  more  distant. 

An  extensive  range  of  buildings  known  as  St.  Peter's  barracks,  is  the 
most  conspicuous  object  on  the  heights  near  the  south  paVt  of  St.  Ouen 
bay,  the  signal  post  of  La  Moye  appearing  to  the  southward  of  it,  near 
the  extreme  of  the  land  in  that  directi(m.  Between  these  latter  objects 
there  is  an  extensive  district  covei*ed  with  sand,  called  the  Quenvais, 
part  of  which  forms  a  very  remarkable  feature  in  the  appearance  of  this 
pai-t  of  the  coast.  On  the  extreme  south  of  St.  Ouen  bay,  tho  huge  rock 
called  the  Corbiere  with  its  lighthouse  will  be  seen,  if  not  shut  in  with  the 
high  land  of  La  Moye  point ;  and  to  the  northward  of  it,  along  the  sandy 
shore  of  St.  Ouen  bay,  will  appear  La  Rocco  fort  and  tower,  and  four  other 
towers,  besides  the  one  at  L'Etac  point,  near  the  north  extreme  of  the 
bay.  Between  L'Etac  and  Grosnez  points  there  is  a  very  I'emarkable  rock 
named  Binnacle. 

ST.  OUEN  BAIT,  the  appearance  of  which  from  the  sea  is  described 
above,  forms  the  western  coast  of  Jersey  between  Grosnez  point  and  the 
Corbiere.  It  affords  good  shelter  in  easterly  winds,  but  the  greater  part 
of  the  bay  being  rocky  and  foul,  the  anchorage  is  thereby  limited  to  a 
space  of  ground  about  half  a  mile  square,  near  the  south  part  of  the  bay 
off  La  Rocco  tower.  This  part  is,  however,  very  easy  of  access,  and  may 
be  safely  used  by  large  vessels  without  pilots.  Of  course  no  vessel  should 
anchor  in  St.  Ouen  bay  during  westerly  winds. 

An  extensive  reef,  dry  at  lower  water,  stretches  off  to  the  westward  of 
La  Rocco  tower  for  about  half  a  mile,  and  then  extends  along  the  shore  to 
the  southward  in  the  direction  of  the  Corbiere,  which  it  unites  with 
Corbiere  point.  The  whole  of  this  reef  is  covered  before  high  water, 
except  a  small  rocky  clump  near  the  middle  of  it.  Between  La  Rocco 
tower  and  L'Etac  there  is  a  fine  beach  of  white  sand,  but  at  low  water  it 
is  fringed  with  rocks  throughout.  Off  L'Etac  point  to  the  westward  this 
reef  dries  out  to  the  distance  of  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  shore  at 
low  water ;  the  greater  part  covers  before  half  flood,  and  no  part  of  it  is 
visible  at  high  water. 

Rigdon  Bank  lies  at  the  outer  edge  of  the  sunken  part  of  the  L'Etac 
reef,  nearly  2  miles  to  the  westward  of  L'Etac  point.  It  consists  of  ridges 
of  rocks,  the  interstices  of  which  are  filled  up  with  sand  and  gravel.  It  lies 
about  E.N.E.  and  W.S.W.,  a  mile  long  and  a  quarter  of  a  mile  wide.  The 
general  depth  on  the  bank  is  3  to  5  fathoms,  but  there  are  two  rocks  with 


•fj-' 


.  .  * 


a      *• 


r  ■; 


e  It 


*->-<■ 


.---_,■      T   _" 


>     -        ,    >. 


4       ■  *  ' 


1.  p  tr 


■."I. 


■  •  •     -  •■ 


.  —  -.   .-:     L.: 


:,    1  -■:.—  -; 


,:»:»-4r>  i 


tfff^f    f>»/A    fV'   ;»,  v/   '//,    J   7#',  h^.f   ft  i:ille  from  ib*  Bci 

^,;/-     rr>>l^,  \»^i\u*i   ttyf„nt    *fnt,'\\u^%  i.-i  it  from  S  to  9 
•>•     '/'*^^    $h\.\   *f\^:u    r/rtfUirMfl  f/f  So,   2  lOTrer  abi>!2t  a   third 
fhp*i*ftf*    )/^ft*'f»  \y  hfA  ihf',  wi4ll  >'jaare  fort  en  the  beach  in  St 
fft^/  >^f**'thif  y,  )q  N'.,  >/ri/ih^'.  th/?  f'.xirt^mfi  fciid  of  the  l^nk  lo  the 
//*¥^      it'tttf*ftt    fv)f,   fc    'ftU\U^vrtm)h(A    ro^;k   frsuttward  of    the 


thuhaJf  a 


of  the 


OHAP.vii.]  ST.   OUEN  BAT. — ANCHORAGE.  263 

open  and  shut  of  the  inside  part  of  Corbi^re  rock,  S.E.  J  S.,  leads 
to  the  westward ;  and  Jument  rock  in  line  with  the  high  water  rock, 
situate  about,  midway  between  Corbiere  point  and  Corbifere  rock,  S.S.E., 
clear  its  inner  extreme.  St.  Ouen  mill  a  little  open  northward  of  Square 
forty  bearing  E.  by  N.  f  N.,  leads  through  the  middle  of  the  passage 
between  the  north  and  south  ridges. 

Ancliorage. — ^The  only  good  anchorage  in  St.  Ouen  bay,  where  a. 
vessel  may  be  sheltered  from  the  tide,  is  in  7  fathoms  sand,  between  the 
Great  bank  and  La  Bocco  tower,  with  St.  Ouen  mill  a  little  open  north- 
ward of  the  small  square  fort  on  the  beach,  between  Nos.  2  and  3 
towers,  bearing  E.  by  N.  J  N.,  and  Corbiere  rock  S.S.W. 

La  PrOU<luie  Pass  lies  between  La  Frouquie  and  La  Boue  rocks. 
The  former  stands  at  the  outer  edge  of  the  reef  extending  from  La  Bocco 
tower  ,to  the  Corbiere  rock,  bearing  North  half  a  mile  from  the  latter.  La 
Boue  is  situate  neai*  the  inner  part  of  the  sunken  reef  within  Les 
Boiteaux,  N.W.  f  N.  a  third  of  a  mile  from  Corbiere  rock  ;  it  is  elevated  a 
foot  above  half  tide.  La  Frouquie  covers  6  feet  at  high-water  springs. 
The  clearing  marks  given  above  for  the  outer  and  inner  parts  of  the  Great 
bank  are  the  best  to  enter  this  pass  to  the  northward,  for  should  La  Boue 
and  La  Frouquie  both  be  covered,  a  vessel  cannot  go  too  near  the  former 
so  long  as  Jument  rock  is  in  sight  inside  the  Corbiere  rock,  nor  can 
La  Frouquie  be  touched  without  opening  Jument  rock  to  the  eastward  of 
the  high  rock  between  Corbiere  point  and  La  Corbiere  rock.  There  is  a 
small  rock  off  La  Frouquie  with  only  a  foot  on  it  at  low-water  springs, 
which  lies  on  the  line  of  Jument  rock  and  a  beacon  pole  on  the  west  side 
of  the  high  rock  between  Corbiere  point  and  Corbiere  rock.  With  this 
exception  there  is  a  clear  passage  of  more  than  a  cable  wide,  having 
2^  fathoms  at  low  water. 

From  this  description  it  will  be  seen  that  no  vessel  ought  to  attempt  to 
run  through  when  the  tide  is  low ;  at  half  tide  and  above,  that  is  when 
La  Boue  rock  is  nearly  awash,  it  is  quite  safe  for  vessels  under  15  feet 
draught. 

At  or  about  this  period,  therefore,  enter  the  pass,  about  midway  between 
La  Frouquie  and  La  Boue,  with  Jument  rock  midway  between  the  Cor- 
biere rock  and  the  large  rock  situate  midway  between  it  and  Corbiere 
point ;  and  when  St.  Ouen  church-spire  comes  on  with  the  high  rocky 
clump  outside,  or  to  the  south-westward  of  La  Bocco  tower,  bearing 
N.E.  by  E.,  steer  for  the  Corbiere  rock  ;  which  must  be  approached  to 
the  distance  of  three-quarters  of  a  cable ;  circling  round  the  Corbiere 
rock  at  this  distance  from  it,  and  running  out  to  the  southward 
when  Pinnacle  rock  comes  nearly  in  line  with  the  outer  part  of  the 
Corbifere. 


2M  C  HANSEL   ISLAXBS JEBSET.  [oir.m 


Corbiere  Point,  »t  the  touth-wnC  nd  ctJmwmj^  is  avMUkvU 
with  a  flm^otaff  fni  tlie  summit,  and  two  ivmII  taaaes  at  its  ndtL  Jhl 
within  thi-  finint  thf  Un«l  ri^oi  lU  a  rtwp  riopc,  and  aiMn  ■■lifcfcf  inAlk 
high  tahlf  Luifl  nf  Ij»  Moje. 

C0RBI£RB  rock,  funding  one  <|WMw  of  a  aife  vcilnitf 

the  point,  and  conn«*cCed  with  it  br  •  nef  of  roeka  which  dry  after  hi 
«|aarter  fbh,  i.**  70  fret  mltove  high  water,  and  ia  rerjr  re^Mrkablo.  Ititab 
pmmineiitly  (mu  from  the  coa.*«t  line  of  the  iaiand,  and  Ibraaa  Aa  iHiaup* 
lanilmark  for  ve^<wN  ap|H\Miching  from  the  weatiaaid ;  it  i 

clear  Wfatht-r  at  t\w  distance  of  10  or  12  nilea. 

LIOHT.—A  li;;hthou^  is  built  on  the  Corfaitee  loek;  and  ezUfeteit 
an  ck'vaiiun  of  1 19  fit-t  above  high  water  apringa  a  Jinxt  white  Sgktuki 
•leen  from  •leawanl  between  the  bearings  of  S.  by  £.  thrtMish  EMl^to 
N.  bj  W.  lofrhore  of  the  eastern  liraita  of  the  white  Ijghty  two  aaetonrf 
retl  light  are  shown,  one  to  the  north-eastward  for  marking  the  ahoalgttmBi 
of  the  Rjgdon  bank  and  thence  to  the  land ;  the  other  to  the  aonth-eastvad 
for  marking  Lets  Vrachen^s,  and  the  adjacent  dangera  between  it  and  da 
fihore.  Tlic  light  is  dioptric  of  the  ecoond  order,  and  In  dear  weather  the 
white  light  should  )>e  seen  from  a  distance  of  17  milea. 

Fog  signal.— Inuring  fogs  a  bell  is  sonnded  three  timea  in  quid  mk- 
cession  at  intervals  of  thirty  seconds. 

Caution. — MariDcni  must  be  very  careful  when  nav^ating  within  the 
limits  of  the  reil  light. 

•  The  principal  dangers  off  the    Corbiere  are  the   Green    Sock,  Let 
Boiteaux,  and  Noirmontaise. 

Green  Rook,  the  outermost  danger,  has  1 1  feet  on  it  at  low  water. 
It  lies  N.W.  by  W.  \  W.  nearly  three-quarters  of  a  mile  fhnn  the  CkxtAe^ 
and  2  cables  from  the  Boiteanx,  on  the  same  line  of  bearing.  Tiie  maris 
for  it  are  St.  Ouen  mill  just  within  or  to  the  eastward  of  No.  S  martello 
tower  in  St.  Ouen  bay,  counting  from  the  northward,  bearing  KE.  hy 
£.  ^  E.,  and  the  whitewashed  rock  within  the  Corbiere  caUed  JTammt^  in 
line  with  La  Moye  Point,  S.E.  }  E. 

Another  rock  with  only  8  feet  on  it  lies  E.N.E.  one  cable  fiont  the  Ghraen 
rock.  Both  rocks  will  be  cleared  on  the  north-west  sitie  hj  keepiiig 
St.  Ouen  windmill  open  northward  of  the  aforesaid  martello  tower;  and 
on  the  south  side  by  keeping  La  Moye  signal-post  open  southward  of  Jament 
rock.  La  Moye  signal-post  in  a  line  with  Jument  rock  leads  8  oaUesaouth 
of  the  Green  rock,  and  half  a  cable  clear  on  the  same  side  of  the  Noirmon- 
aise  reef. 

Les  BoiteauX  are  two  rocks  only  60  yards  apart,  lying  within  the 
Green  rock  ;   they  dry  9  feet  at  low  water  and  bear  abont  N.W»  by 


OHAP.vn.]         CORBliatE   ROCK. — ^ST.  BRELADB  BAY.  265 

W.  i  W.  nearly  half  a  mile  from  the  Corbiere.  From  the  southern 
Boiteauxy  St.  Ouen  church  is  seen  open  south  of  the  4th  martdlo 
tower  N.E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  and  La  Moye  signal-post  is  in  line  with  the  north 
side  of  the  peak  of  the  Corbiere  rock  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E. 

NoirmoiltaisO  Beef  dries  4  feet  at  low  water,  and  lies  one  quarter 
et  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  Corbiere. 

There  is  another  reef  lying  one  cable  westward  of  the  Corbierci  having 
4  feet  over  its  shoalest  part  at  low  water ;  also  a  large  rock  bearing  S.  by  E., 
distant  one  cable  from  the  Corbi&re,  and  whic^  uncovers  after  first  quarter 
ebb. 

There  is  a  narrow  deep  water  channel  between  the  Green  rock  and  Les 
Boiteaux:  also  the  narrow  channel  within  the  Noirmontaise  and  La 
Boue  rocks,  close  to  the  Corbiere  leading  to  La  Frouquie  pass ;  but  the 
space  included  between  Les  Boiteaux  and  La  Boue,  and  from  the  latter 
rock  to  within  one  cable  of  the  Corbiere,  is  so  thickly  studded  w\^ 
sunken  rocks,  as  to  be  very  dangerous,  even  for  boats  at  low  water, 
and  should  be  avoided. 

Junxent  Bock,  remarkable  from  having  a  large  white  patch  painted 
on  it,  lies  about  a  third  of  a  mile  within  the  Corbiere  to  the  south-eastward, 
and  au  eighth  of  a  mile  fi'om  the  high  bluff  next  to  the  eastward  of 
Corbiere  point,  with  which  bluff  it  is  connected  by  a  reef  dry  at  low  water. 
There  is  a  dangerous  rock  which  dries  only  at  last  quarter  ebb,  half 
a  cable  outside  the  Jupent ;  it  should  not  be  approached  therefore  nearer 
than  a  quarter  of  a  mile. 

LA  MOYE  POINT,  a  high  cliffy  bluff,  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of 
the  Corbiere,  is  safe  of  approach  from  the  westward,  at  a  reasonable  distance 
from  the  shore;  but  1^  cables  off  it,  there  is  a  sunken  rock,  having  only 
6  feet  over  it,  and  dose  to  the  eastward  of  this  rock  and  probably 
connected  with  it,  lie  the  dangerous  rocky  group  called  the  Kaines,  the 
highest  of  which  only  covers  at  last  quarter  flood.  The  outer  sunken 
rock  of  the  Kaines  lies  2  cables  from  the  shore. 

All  these  dangers  will  be  cleared  by  keeping  the  Corbiere  open  a 
little  to  the  westward  of  Jument,  until  Tabor  chapel,  a  remarkable 
white  building  standing  on  the  high  land  near  the  middle  of  and  over- 
looking St.  Brelade  bay,  opens  out  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  Grosse 
Tete. 

ST.  BBELADE  BAY,  near  the  south-west  end  of  the  island, 
between  La  Moye  and  Le  Fret  points,  is  much  contracted  by  an  extensive 
reef  that  fringes  its  eastern  shore,  and  the  anchorage  in  it  is  further  cut  up 
by  the  Fournier  and  Fourch6  rocks.  It  is  therefore  very  inferior  to 
St.  Aubin  bay,  and  more  exposed  to  the  sea  in  southerly  gales ;  neverthe- 


2fi6  CHAXyfX  ISULXB^. — JESSET.  [chaf.tii. 

Itaty  small  Te9.«b  and  eren  hrge  open  boau  mnchored  off  port  Bovfllj, 
bsTO  been  known  to  ride  oat  £re9h  pdes  in  Mifetj  froa  this^  tke  aMMt 
exposed  qnarter. 

Under  all  circnmstaoces  of  wind  and  weather  there  u  much  leas  sea  oq 
the  western  than  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  bar,  and  it  seems  to  be  quite 
certain  that  if  a  breakwater  were  to  be  boilt  out  firom  Grofise  Tete  to  tlie 
Foamier  rock,  the  anchorage  off  Bcaa  port  and  Boaillj  woold  be  safe  at 
all  times. 

On  approaching  St.  Brelade  baj  from  the  westward  the  most  remailDaUe 
objects  seen  are  Grosse  Tete,  the  high  square  rock  onder  the  high  difff 
land  of  La  Move  on  the  west  side  of  the  baj;  and  Noirmont  tower 
standing  prominently  oat  at  the  end  of  the  low  point  of  that  name  to  tlie 
eastward.  On  opening  out  the  eastern  side  of  the  bay  dear  g£  Grosse 
Tete.  the  white  sandj  beach  appears^  and  the  two  martello  towers  built 
to  ^dfend  it ;  bejond  are  villa  residences  and  scattered  gronps  of  hooaes ; 
whilst  overtopping  all,  on  the  high  land  near  the  middle  of  the  baj  stands 
Tabor  chapel,  a  plain  white  building  with  slate  roof,  forming  the  principal 
landmark  in  it. 

Near  the  middle  of  the  baj  are  the  Foamier  and  Foarche  rocks^  \p^g 
about  W.N.W.  and  E.S.E.  of  each  other,  distant  one  quarter  of  a  mile.  The 
best  anchorage  is  round  the  Foumier,  distant  from  it  rather  more  than  a 
cable  ;  the  ground  is  quite  clean  up  to  the  base  of  this  rock,  which  is  of 
very  small  extent.  The  Fournier  dries  9  feet  and  the  Fourch^  10  feet  at 
low  water.  The  other  but  less  important  rocks  of  the  bay  are  the  Fournier 
du  Havre,  which  dries  17  feet,  at  nearly  a  third  of  a  mile  within  the 
Fournier,  the  Platte  Houmet,  drying  12  feet  in  the  bight  of  the  bay  near 
the  shore,  and  the  Bousse  rock,  60  feet  high,  on  the  east  side  of  the 
bay. 

Banc  do  St.  Brelade  is  a  reef  of  sunken  rocks  commencing  half  a 
mile  South  of  La  Moye  point,  and  extending  eastward  for  nearly  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  ;  the  least  water  found,  29  feet,  is  near  the  middle  of  the 
bank. 

Banc  Le  Fret,  lying  immediately  off  the  point  of  that  name,  distant 
from  it  rather  less  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile,  is  rather  more  than  one  quaiter 
of  a  mile  in  length  N.W.  and  S.E.,  and  of  an  oval  form.  There  are  several 
rocks  on  its  eastern  side  with  22  and  24  feet  on  them,  and  one  on  the  west 
side  with  only  14  feet ;  the  marks  for  the  latter  are  Nicolle  and  Noirmont 
towers  in  line  E.  by  S.  J  S.,  and  the  western  martello  tower  in  St  Brelade 
bay  in  line  with  the  Rousse  Frouquie  N.N.E.  J  E. 

At  2  cables  eastward  of  Banc  Le  Fret,  in  the  direction  of  Noirmont 
tower,  there  is  another  rocky  bank  on  which  the  least  water  is  20  feet. 
Both  this  bank  and  Le  Fret,  as  well  as  Banc  de  St.  Brelade,  may  be 


cHAP.vn.]  POETBLBT  BAY.  267 

cleared  on  their  north-east  side,  bj  bringing  the  Corbi6re  nearly  on  with  La 
Moye  point ;  and  the  two  first-named  will  be  cleared  on  their  south  side 
by  opening  the  peak  of  Corbi&re  rock  a  little  to  the  southward  of  Jument. 

Directions.  —  Vessels  from  the  north-westward  bound  lo  St. 
Brelade  or  St.  Aubin  bay,  on  nearing  the  shoi-e  of  Jersey  should  keep 
Pigment  point  open  of  Grosnez  point  E.  |  S.,  until  the  Corbifere  rock  bears 
S.  by  E.  or  St.  Ouen  church  and  mill  are  in  line  S.E.  |  E.,  to  clear  the 
Rigdon  shoal.  With  these  marks  they  will  be  abreast  the  shoal,  and  thence 
should  steer  so  as  to  round  the]  Corbi^ro  at  the  distance  of  about  a  mile ; 
or  keep  St.  Ouen  windmill  open  northward  of  No.  3  martello  tower  in 
St.  Ouen  bay  E.N.E.,  until  La  Moye  signal-post  is  seen  over  the  top  of 
the  Corbifere,  to  avoid  the  Green  rock.  When  La  Moye  signal-post  opens 
southward  of  Jnment  rock  (white)  bearing  E.  by  S.  ^  S.,  or  the  outer  part 
of  the  high  table-land  within  Noirmont  point  is  seen  a  little  open  of 
Le  Fret  point,  a  vessel  will  be  clear  of  the  Noirmontaise  reef  and  all  other 
dangers  south-westward  of  the  Corbi^re,  and  may  run  for  La  Moye  point 
until  La  Motte  islet  is  just  shut  in  behind  Noirmont  point,  and  Noirmont 
tower  bears  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  which  is  the  leading  mark  for  the  fairway 
between  the  Kaines,  off  La  Moye  point,  and  Banc  de  St.  Brelade.  When 
Tabor  chapel  comes  in  line  with,  or  a"  little  open  of.  Battery  point 
N.E.  I  E.,  take  it  as  a  leading  mark  through  the  western  pass  into  the 
inner  anchorage  off  St.  Brelade.  If  desirous  of  approaching  the  inner 
anchorage  through  the  eastern  pass,  open  Tabor  chapel  a  little  to  the  east- 
ward of  a  small  dark-coloured  house  on  the  beach  in  St.  Brelade  bay 
N.E.  ^  N.,  and  run  in  on  that  line. 

Anchor  within  the  Foumier  rock,  on  the  above  given  leading  lines  and 
between  them,  when  La  Moye  bluff  comes  nearly  in  line  with,  or  a  little 
open  of  the  outer  part  of  Grosse  TSte,  about  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  in  5  fathoms, 
fine  sand.  Large  vessels  not  wishing  to  anchor  within  the  Fournier,  may 
lie  in  8^  fathoms  gravel  with  the  western  pass  leading  mark  on,  and  the 
Jnment  rock  just  shut  in  with  La  Moye  point.  The  ground  in  this  bay  is 
remarkable  for  holding. 

FOBTELET  BAY,  between  Le  Fret  and  Noirmont  points,  is 
small,  and  further  contracted  by  rocks  extending  to  the  westward  of  the 
latter  point  as  well  as  from  the  centre  of  the  bay  westward  of  Janvrin 
tower,  which,  together  with  the  rapidity  of  the  tidal  stream  across  the 
entrance  of  the  bay,  render  it  dangerous  of  approach  to  vessels  even  of 
the  smallest  size. 

The  dangers  are  further  increased  by  Portelet  ledge,  an  isolated  mass  of 
rock  lying  S.W.  by  S.,  one  quarter  of  a  mile  from  Janvrin  tower.  The 
shoalest.  spot  on  this  ledge  is  in  2  feet  at  low  water ;  from  which  La  Moye 


^  w^,w« 


^      ^s 


.Sl  IMjriV,  ciMr  pueiffti  kwb  m.  to* 

4ftiUA^  fhoM  «Mii  caIm-  beijij^  abiMt  2^  flkiksw    Bctk 

•l/iKM;  fw^  futrtovrty  wfer^sD  Tcsttli  iSir  agrmiaJ  aft  iov 

mf$44y  mud ;  ib^  tiile.  *t  krv-waa^r  spring  reeednig  Inlf  a  i 

iiL  AmUrn  hubtmr^  mod  htM  a  caUe  c«i»le  the  cntnoKe  of  tke 

b'wr  «f  He  IMmt*    Tbere  »  «1m>  ft  itn«^  mole  or 

frvMi   tb«  oortlieni  iide  oC  Sc  Anbin  outle,  dielteria^ 

wliwyKj?  rtumiM  tnq^euOjttiii  uaA  tmioad,  gnmndnig^hoiieT 

KiizMhtA  eMCle  if  tmilt  on  ft  cnj^cd  rode  oo  the  eartem  side  of  the  bvf 
tftmi\n%  the  hMih&an  of  St.  HeUer,  and  about  three-qoartcfs  of  a  nde  to 
ib^  «'>atb'ire»iward  of  the  town ;  the  top  of  its  high  oentnl  tower  or 
ki^^  rm  wbidi  the  cfAonrn  are  dupUijed,  being  144  feet  abore  the  low- 
wat#!i'  lifrel  of  the  i«a.  On  the  site  of  this  cftstle  was  once  an  Angastme 
mfrt$i»M0!ry,  built  in  hr/noar  of  St.  Helier,  a  reclose,  whose  hmnitage,  boiU 
im  IUh  nummii  of  a  high  rock,  situate  nearlj  a  third  of  a  mile  to  the 
«^;ttihward  of  the  castle^  is  still  extant 

VA\z$ihdh  and  HL  Anbin  castles  are  insulated  every  tide,  and  from  their 
ipftmiumt  |>OMiiions  afford  shelter  respectivelj  to  the  two  harboors,  by 
\frmk\nfi  tho  fwell  which  rolls  into  St.  Anbin  bay  during  south-westerly 


cflAP.rn.]  ST.  ATJBIN  BAY  AND  HABBOXTB.  269 

ST.  HELIER  HARBOURS*  are  on  the  Dorth-east  side  of 
St.  Aubin  bay.  The  old  harbour  has  been  completelj  enclosed  bj  a  new 
one,  constructed  from  the  designs  of  Mr.  J.  Walker,  C.E.,  between  the  years 
1840-50^  at  a  cost  of  170,000/.  Both  harbours  are  alike  in  form,  the  new 
one  being  in  &ct  a  mere  repetition  of  the  old,  on  an  extended  scale ;  ex« 
cepting  that  from  the  inferior  plan  of  the  entrance  to  the  new  harbour,  the 
south-westerly  swell  ranges  freely  into  it  in  'heavy  gales,  to  the  great 
injury  of  vessels  compelled  to  remain  there  at  such  times.  These  harbours 
are  nearly  rectangular,  narrow  in  proportion  to  their  length,  and  have 
their  entrances  near  their  south-western  comers. 

The  inner  or  old  harbour  is  about  1,900  feet  long  by  800  feet  broad, 
having  a  depth  of  8  feet  at  its  entrance  at  half  tide,  and  5  feet  within  it. 
The  outer  harbour  is  2,600  feet  long  by  500  feet  broad ;  it  has  16  feet  at 
its  entrance  at  half  tide,  the  ground  rising  gradually  within  the  pier  heads 
for  a  distance  of  about  300  feet,  where  there  are  13  feet  at  that  period ;  the 
bottom  is  fine  sand  and  mud  throughout. 

There  is  a  floating  dock  capable  of  accommodating  vessels  of  500  tons ; 
there  is  also  a  steam  tug  always  in  attendance  on  the  shipping. 

A  Lifo  Boftt  is  stiitioned  at  St.  Holier. 

ST.  AUBIN  HARBOUR.— Several  rocks  lie  scattered  to  the 
southward  and  westward  of  St.  Aubin  castle,  but  most  of  them  appear  at 
low  water.  The  two  largest  and  most  conspicuous  rocks  are  the  Grosse 
and  the  Platte,  which  lie  very  close  together,  about  one  quarter  of  a  mile 
from  the  castle,  the  former  being  the  most  elevated  and  showing  about  first 
quarter  ebb.  Both  rocks  are  marked  vdth  beacon  poles.  There  is  also  a 
group  of  rocks  lying  one  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  Grosse, 
the  north  easternmost  of  which  dries  7  feet  at  low  water.  La  Haule  house 
open  eastward  of  St.  Aubin  castle  breakwater  leads  eastward  of  these 
rocks ;  to  the  eastward  of  this  line  the  ground  is  all  fine  sand.  At  half 
flood  there  is  8  feet  water  inside  St.  Aubin  castle  pier,  at  which  period  the 
water  begins  to  flow  into  the  entrance  of  St.  Aubin  inner  harbour.  The 
passage  inside  St.  Aubin  castle  is  not  passable  for  boats  until  half  flood. 

Water  of  first  rate  quality  may  be  procured  at  the  inner  quay  of  St. 
Holier  old  harbour,  from  pumps  placed  there  for  the  purpose ;  it  may  be 
procured  also  in  the  same  way  at  St.  Aubin  harbour. 

LIGHTS.— The  following  /ixed  lights  are  exhibited  all  night  for  the 
guidance  of  vessels  bound  into  St.  Holier  harbour. 

A  white  hght,  from  the  lighthouse  on  the  Victoria,  or  new  south  pier- 
head, 31  feet  above  high  water,  and  visible  about  6  miles. 

*  The  new  harbour  works,  commenced  in  1872  to  enclose  the  two  present  harbours 
hav€  been  suspended  since  1878. 


O' 

» 

- 

^-lNN 

^ 

\ 

1 

-Tv* 

. 

.   A 

:--•: 

Z  '  ■ 

i 

.     T     -.  ■ 

.•«  . 

~ 

»  ■«  _ 

A  , 

-  .    ^ 

*  i:^" 

-  « 

• 

-    •  *►• 

^  » 

« 

- 

•      « 

• 

i»j.  1^" 

• 

•■ 

\\ 

. -N. 

^^ 

--A^ 

:  >.i.  "s 

4J--> 

I^LAXIM. — JERAET.  [chap.  vn. 

V  >..-:  .rNjr.2k  pkTy  jo^  within  the  head,  lofoet 


:rr^  tzjSrt  \d  Albeit  pier,  aud  a  red  li^t 
T^  beazins  from  each  other  N^.  |  N., 
w  Aci  i2«wbie  2  or3Bule«. 
I    L^   :•.    .^:.;^   ^  ^in   >r»i   tir:«^  the  middle  of  the  small  road, 
"i^ :•■-.• .:  .':..-  O. <ec  4.-.:  l'.«?  N-.^  rxi*w  a*!  between  the  Cloches  rocks, 
jl'«:  '  ^'  i. .  ..^^ :.     Tt'z  -^-'»s-  _  Lz.'t  a^j  be  used'  also  when  thej  cin 
•  ^   .   >   :\r  :.  :..  '.•&■:**.::    zzk  iiLL^.MCic  rock  and  Gmne  St.  Michel; 
..s  ^      V      : .    .  .»     :!:r. -  &  Li'^-r  coe  v«r  or  c?dbef  in  time  to  clear  a 

•.vs  X  .  .      ,:  .     .  r  ::i;  . .   r    :  ^  l.^.w^fcicr  Ijing  in  the  Airway,  2\  cables 
.  --  .      :  ^    :  •  ■'  .-.wic-I  .■:  :S.  >^i  i^jfci  c<  the  Uingnette. 
1..  A  .  1  .  .  c  :.      :  A.«. . ; .  ;^ .  r:  ,-  a  ---i  ^ri*  Hihi  in  the  upper  pier  road  ; 
i '.;  V  .:.■.-?:  ;x  c  A . •:  v  i  .  ^ :.  w  ^li  r.  a^  ■  1  '>.Ar*  fnxa  Vktoria  pier  light  £.N. E^ 

DANGERS  off  ST.  AUBIX  BAT —The  principal  dangento 
V  A-,..:t\;  '.:.  .  ■.vr.va. ;"-.•.•-•  i  >•:-  A^":.:.   .  it.  L- ftlJitioa  to  the  St  Brelade 
...  ".  '. .   :".-. :  *:*:^...K>,  ■.■.■>.7  >'".  .'.:   ;i:.jr:  iTSo*  Ar*  :be  Vnich^re;  the  Hnbant, 
^^  .     .  -  >..-■:.       ;    ^  :..  s-  .  ;, :  v»  :->.-:  :h.i  Gria«  Taodin ;  the  Silktte 
r-.VN?  .  U^r^.    ::.;    ^-r...  .>   aj.v    L>irvi5.   arJ   Dazes'  rock   on   the 

\^i-:i..-  -.,U  ;  :!..  K.  ....:.*.  ':-:  v.ir  "J:.,  s^.i^r :  Aai  ihe  Graces  St. Michd ; 
s*::o  H.:-i:v.;*;:t\  Ijh-*  l\*:.'.r:>*  iv  •  IV v.- ^  -.ii  Fas'  cci  ibe  easrem  side.  The 
l^iAiii.^t..:  Ax'K  l.t">  '.tAr'.v  ^■..  s  1— 4  r. :■:--;<: r.:Laff  thr  chord  of  the  bay.  near 
:ho  -.^..v "./..».  :  :'.  0  l^^:■.. '.■•;:.  l.t>  v»:v.". ?  v*.-:  Fcrs,  aiv.l  Le*  Jnnee  lie  along 
.:>  ^\v ?;.::;  >*..,  .\  ;  il.tf  IVs ".,:>.'  /.  v:  .:l.ir  sur.krQ  rocks  to  the  eastward,  off 
mi:slv:ik  v;i5:U-  :  a:k;  1.<<  C.^v:  :>  v5  :'::i  crtnirsee  to  the  little  road  of 
S:.  Hilltr. 

S\^i::i-  0:  tl:-j  (Vi<e^c>  £>::w«.v:;  iV.csc  rcvk-  atv  ex:r>e-a5e>  rdrrow,  and  aU 
:\io  iaiijtrvHis  :rv*'«;  :hc  ri:^xl;:%  c:*  :h-:  ;:.u>^  i-a  nv^m  the  «reneral  dis- 
c\;'Io*^i\\i  state  o:  thv  ^<^a  prvTtv.i::-^  :l;e  r\vi.>  beic^  seen  when  close  to 
:acx.  Sirau^rs  <::ouli  thiTtfort^  ::c\tr  a;:^'-.y:  :o  rivigate  these  chann^ 
vn::!:^:;:  a  oo3ii^:o:i:  pilot, 

Les  Vracheres  i>  s  rookv  bju^.k  c:'  <r:iAll  cxtoi::  tc-rning  the  oater  or 
south- western  diiiser  o^  S:.  AuMii  h&r.  1:<  hiirbes:  h^ad.  DAmed  FVon- 
quie,  with  onlv  o  ilx:  water,  lies  ai  xho  c&stcru  exireaio  of  the  bank,  with 
Princes  rower  touching:  the  western  comer  01"  tort  Kecen:  E.  bv  X.,  and 
the  western  tow^r  in  S:.  Breiade  bav  in  lino  wi;L  :ho  western  head  of 
Housie  Frouquie,  N.N.E.  1  E. 

Hubaut,  Grande  and  Petite  Gmne,  «v  s:i  groupoii  together 

Wt  ween  Lea  Vracheres  and  point  Le  Fro:.     Tho  narrow  channels  soparatiBg 
these   rocky   banks   should   never   be   atteiupted  In*  ve*?els.      From  the 


CEUP.vn.]  BANGEBS  OFF  ST.  AUB«I  BAY.  27l 

Hubaut,  which  dries  2  feet  at  low  water,  the  western  t9wer  of  St.  Brelade 
bay  is  in  line  with  the  west  side  of  Rousse  rock  N.N.E.  easterly,  and  the 
east  end  of  Almorah  terrace  is  touching  the  inside  part  of  Noirmont  tower 
E.  by  N.  ^  N. 

From  the  Grand  Grune  which  dries  6  feet  at  low  water  Princes  tower 
is  in  line  with  Elizabeth  castle  hospital,  a  small  red-tiled  building  standing 
between  the  highest  part  of  the  castle  and  its  north-eastern  angle  bearing 
E.  f  N.,  and  thp  western  tower  in  St.  Brelade  bay  is  a  little  open  of  the 
high-water  extreme  of  Le  Fret  point  N.  by  E.  j^  E. 

The  Petite  Grune  has  10  feet  on  its  shoalest  part,  from  which  St.  Mark 
church  spire  is  just  shut  in  with  Noirmont  point  E.  f  N.,  and  the  western 
tower  in  St.  Brelade  bay  is  midway  between  Bousse  rock  and  Le  Fret 
pomt  N.  by  E.  i  E. 

When  approaching  the  western  passage  from  the  south-west,  keep 
Seymour  tower  open  outside  La  Frouquie  rock  until  the  Corbiere  bears 
North,  or  the  eastern  tower  in  St.  Brelade  bay  comes  open  of  la  Cotte 
point.  The  Dog^  Nest  rock  in  line  with  the  [white  patch  on  the  sea  wall 
at  Gr^ve  d'Azette,  heretofore  used  as  the  leading  mark  for  the  western 
channel,  leads  very  close  inside  all  these  dangers,  and  their  eastern  boun- 
dary is  marked  by  Tabor  chapel  seen  in  line  with  the  high- water  extreme 
of  Le  Fret  point. 

Les  Grones  Vaudin  are  an  extensive  cluster  of  rocks  lying  off 
Noirmont  point  and  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  Yracheres.  The  two 
highest  rocks  dry  5  feet  at  low  water,  near  the  middle  of  the  bank,  about 
N.E.  ^  E.  and  S.W.  ^  W.  of  each  other,  and  nearly  2  cables  apai't.  The 
north-eastern  rock  is  known  as  the  Grande  Yaudin,  and  the  other  the 
S.W.  rock ;  from  the  latter  the  gateway  of  St.  Brelade  church  is  just  in 
sight  eastward  of  Rousse  rock  N.  ^  W.,  and  St.  Mark  church  spire  is  a 
little  open  eastward  of  the  south-east  pai*t  of  Elizabeth  castle  N.E.  by 
E.  J  E.  From  the  S.W.  rock  a  chain  of  dangerous  sunken  rocks  extend 
in  a  W.N.W.  direction  for  one  quarter  of  a  mile,  and  also  to  the  north-east- 
ward for  hidf  a  mile ;  the  eastern  part  of  the  latter  is  semi-detached  from 
the  Vaudin  bank,  and  sometimes  called  Les-Poches-asuie  ;  there  is  as  little 
as  4  feet  on  it  at  low  water. 

La  SillettO  lies  immediately  within  the  Grunes  Vaudin,  separated 
from  them  by  a  7-f athom  channel,  a  quarter  of  a  mile  brood.  La  Sillette 
is  a  small  reef,  less  than  2  cables  in  diameter,  but  the  rocks  generally  are 
higher  than  any  others  in  the  neighbourhood ;  its  highest  head,  which  lies 
close  to  the  eastern  side  of  the  reef,  dries  12  feet  at  low  water,  and  is 
marked  by  a  swinging  beacon  (polo)  23  feet  high  ;  from  which  the  spire  of 
St.  Mark  church  is  seen  touching  the  south-east  angle  of  Elizabeth  castle 


272  CBXS^fZL  ISULXDe 


NX.  br  >L   }  E^  ^A   Ich-:>  vower  u  ia 
FrcKfttjuir  ruck  YLjxIL, 

Ormnd  and  Petit  Four.— Tbe  Gmd  Fo«r  meorcn  3  feet  tf  bt 

water.     Frocn  it  the  NVw  mili  at  M Olbrook  is  ia  Kw  with  tke  mb  d 
Nctrmout  poiut  N.E.  ^  N..  and  NicoUe  tower  a  its  tiyigiil  bradlk  opi 
flOQibward  of  the  vkite  patch  un  the  Dop  Xcrt  rode, 
br  a  mall  iron  beacon,  bearing  E.  |  S.    The  ianer  hmmd  of  tlie  Gmi 
Foar  lies  about  N.  br   W.,  distant  a  cable  fitHB  the  highest  ro^  jat 
de^tcribed^  and  ha-  6  fe*t  or^  it  at  low  water. 

Tlkr  Pvtit  Four  con«L5t5  of  a  bank  of  itukeii  rocks  cxteDding  a  qonter 
ui  a  uiilc  t-a^t  an<l  Wf<*t,  ^'-"i:  ^^  ^  eastward  of  the  Grand  FoaryUd 
dis'Unt  from  it  oalr  1  \  cabkrf.  The  highest  roek  is  aear  the  adddle  of 
the  bank  to  the  5outh-w«-!^t«ani,  and  dries  onlj  one  foot  at  kiw  water. 
There  is  another  rock  close  to  thtr  ^ath-east  nde  of  this  one-foot  lOck, 
that  dries  onlj  6  inches  at  low  water :  and  a  third  Hing  E.  bj  X^  diOKant 
l\  cables  from  it,  that  is  ju^t  awash  at  that  period;  the  latter  is  dooe  to 
the  east  hide  of  the  reef :  and  from  it  fort  Regent  flagstaff  is  seen  oo  the 
north  side  of  Fals^  Hermitage  rock  bearing  E.  bj  X.,  and  Mont  Fkuar 
house  is  touching  Point  de  But  N.  by  £.  \  £. 

Or  lines  aux  Dards  i»  ^  rocky  bank  about  a  cable  in  diameter, 
l}'ing  about  one  (quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  Sillette.  From  its 
highest  head,  which  \\e»  near  the  north  part  of  the  bank  and  dries  5  ftet 
at  low  water,  St.  Mark  ehufi-h  is  seen  midwaj  between  the  Hermib^  and 
the  Close  rocks  N.E.  by  K.  ^  E.,  and  Janrrin  tower  is  in  line  with  die 
south-western  high- water  extreme  of  lie  Percee  N.K.W. 

There  is  another  rock  close  to  this,  on  a  N.N.E.  bearing*  which  dries 
4  feet ;  and  a  third  which  dries  3  feet,  half  a  cable  S.S.W.  from  it.  A  rock 
awash  at  low  water  bearing  S.S.E.,  distant  a  cable,  marks  the  limit  of  the 
bank  in  that  direction ;  and  to  the  eastward  of  the  highest  rock,  and 
1^  cables  from  it,  lies  the  Frooquie,  a  sunken  rock  entirely  detached,  on 
which  there  are  5  feet  at  low  water. 

Danger  rock  with  5  feet  over  it  at  low  water,  lies  on  the  east  side  of  a 
sunken  reef  lying  to  the  southward  of  the  G  rones  Aux  Dards,  and  from 
it  the  east  end  of  Almorah  terrace  appears  just  touching  the  north  side  of 
the  Hermitage  N.E.  ^  £.,  and  Janvrin  tower  is  jnst  open  of  the  south- 
west high-water  extreme  of  De  Percee  N.N.W. 

ROUaudiere  Bock  which  dries  4  feet  at  low  water,  is  small  and 
Bteep-to,  except  on  its  S.E.  side,  whence  a  ridge  of  sunken  reef  extends  half 
a  cable  off.  From  the  rock,  La  Hauls  house  is  seen  just  open  on  the  west 
side  of  St.  Aubin  castle  N.  J  W.,  St.  Saviour  church  is  in  line  the  north- 
west side  of  False  Hermitage,  N.  E.  by  E.  |  E.,  and  Icho  tower  is  touching  the 


OBAP.  Til.]  DANOBBS  IN  ST.  AUBTK  BAY.  278 

Bontb  Bide  of  Tas  de  Pois,  or  White  rook,  aE.  by  E.  }  E.  A  red  baoy 
with  aUff  and  black  ball  is  moored  id  5  fathoms  water,  50  yards  west- 
ward of  this  rock, 

GtruUGS  St.  SEicIlsl  conaste  of  two  small  banks  of  sunken  rocks  lying 
nearly  north  and  south  of  each  other,  little  more  than  half  a  cable  ^wrt ; 
the  longest  diameter  of  the  sonthem  group  is  about  a  cable,  in  an  eaat 
and  west  direction,  having  the  least  water,  3  feet  to  the  westward.  The 
highest  bead  of  the  northern  group  dries  5  feet  at  low  water,  and  from  it 
La  Moye  signal-post  is  seeu  over  and  about  half  way  down  the  slope  of 
Le  tVet  point  N.W.  }  W.  and  St.  Mark  church  spire  is  in  line  with  the 
northern  white  patch  on  Albert  pier  N.E.  ^  E. 

HingUfitte  ReeiV  lying  <3ne  quarter  of  a  mile  south-eastward  of  the 
Grunes  St.  Micbnl,  is  a  quarter  of  a  mile  long  N.E.  by  N.  and  S.W.  by  S., 
and  most  of  the  rocks  on  it  dry  at  low-water  springs ;  the  highest  lying  ■ 
near  the  north-weat  end,  dries  11  feet,  and  another,  lying  three-quarters 
of  a  cable  within  the  south-west  end,  5  feet  at  low  wat«r. 

The  highest  rock,  which  dries  11  feet,  lies  with  the  west  end  of 
Victoria  college  in  line  with  Dogs-nest  rock  N.E.  j  E^  and  La  Moye 
signal-post  just  open  south-westward  of  Noirmont  tower  K.W,  ^  W. 
From  this  rock  the  reef  extends  to  the  eastward  rather  more  than  half  a 
cable,  and  2  cables  to  the  S.S.W. 

ItOS  TdtardS  bas  only  2  feet  over  its  outer  head  at  low  water  ;  from 
which  Seymour  tower  is  seen  touching  the  inside  part  of  La  Fronquie 
E.  by  S.,  and  the  west  end  of  Almorab  terrace  is  a  little  open  eastward 
of  Dogs  Nest  rock  N.N.E.  J  B. 

Nine-FeOt  Hock  lies  nearly  midway  between  Les  Tetards  and  Tas 
de  Pois,  and  from  it  Icho  tower  appears  the  apparent  breadth  of  La  Frouquie 
c^n  inside  of  it  S.E.  by  E.  |  £■  i  fort  Regent  signal-post  is  in  line  with 
the  east  side  of  Crabi^re  rock  N.N.E.  ^  E. ;  and  No.  2  tower  in  St.  Aubin 
bay  is  seen  just  within  or  on  the  east  side  of  Gros  du  Ch&teau  rock 

DANGERS  in  St.  AUBTN  BAT.— The  Eouaudiere  rock, 
described  nbove,  lies  right  in  the  fairway  off  the  middle  of  St,  Aubyn  bay, 
S.  by  W.,  nearly  half  a  mile  from  the  Diamond  rock.  The  main  channel  to 
the  little  road  of  St.  Helier  from  the  westward  is  between  the  Rouaudifere 
and  Grunes  St.  Michel ;  it  is  half  a  mile  wide  at  this  part,  and  has  an 
even  bottom,  with  a  depth  of  6  fathoms  at  low  water. 

Diamond  Rock  lies  near  the  middle  of  St.  Aubin  bay,  and  has  8  feet 
over  it  at  low  water.  From  it  fort  Regent  flf^tafi  is  seen  touching  the 
north  side  of  Close  rock  E.  J  N.,  and  La  Haule  house  appears  midway 
between  St.  Aubin  castle  tower  and  the  end  of  the  breakwater  extending 
from  it,  N.  by  W.  \  W. 

Q  7019.  ■ 


271  CIIANNKL  ISLANDS. — JERSEY.  'aur.jn 

Pignonot,  Orunos  du  Port,  and  Lea  Jonee  are  the  most  im- 

porraiit  (laii;;*  r-  4*fT  th«.'  wc^iU-m  Dhoro  of  St.  Aubin  bsy. 

Th<-  ri;.'iiMii(t  \ii\r  •MT'*  10  ffct  }it  lf»w  Water  Oil  the  line  of  Lc  Fret  tad 
NniriiK'iit  |Miin(^  ili*>taiit  fnitii  tlif  latter  a  quarter  of  a  mile.  It  is  ftyarlw^ 
li\  n  I  Mill*  Aii«l  liall.  irniM  whifh  Jji  Ilaule  house  is  i«een  touching  St.  Aobin 
hiirbdiii  |>ii-r  hra<l  N.  by  K.,  nn  I  St.  Saviour  chnrch  is  jast  open  north-vest 
of  th«*  f»jiin'  of  Si.  Mark  rhurrh  K.  by  N.  \  N. 

Tlinr  nil*  iiiiiiiy  HN'k**  iN'twet'ii  the  Pi^onet  and  Xoinnont  point;  the 
iii<)p<t  <taii;r«'roii^  oin-  wliirh  \*i  outride  the  line  between  these  tiro  places,  is 
till'  ><aiiif  lHi;;lit  at  l'i;;iionct,  and  lies  with  the  outer  apex  of  Le  Fret  Uaff 
lit  line  with  Nniniiorit  tnwt-r,  1]  cables  from  the  latter. 

LOH  GrilllOS  du  Port  J>*  «  rocky  jrroup  nearly  a  cable  long,  north 
mihI  Mill  ill.  'rii4*  hoii(h«'i'ii  ro<k  liiiH  3  f<i*t  over  it  at  low  water,  and  the 
iinitlH-iii  lirad  lilies  n  ff<'t  at  that  period;  on  this  latter  rock  Upper 
lllaiir  ri>;n4)ii  1ioiih>  is  jii.st  touching  the  end  of  the  high  wall  extending 
IVniii  the  iinriti-\v4*st  hi<|(>  <if  St.  Aiibin  castle  N.  ^  £.,  and  fort  Begent 
flfifi^Hiafr  in  in  Ijnr  with  Kii/alN>th  castle  flagstaff,  East. 

ItOH  J 111160  "i«*  '^  ^*l)llkon  rocky  group  lying  2  cables  N.N.E.  fi-om  Les 
(iiiin«':>  till  |Mii(.  Froiu  the  soiitlieni  ruck,  which  is  covered  2  feet  at  low 
wfiij'i,  itir  Inwrr  liliiiir  Pi;;iion  is  just  shut  in  with  the  eeroi-ilctached 
liii'ilioii  iMi'lwanl  nC  St.  Aubiii  cnstle  N,  ^  E.,  and  fort  Regent  signal- 
jincil  IM  'iiMMi  t)\iT  and  Hiiut  ill  with  the  north-ea8tcrn  extreme  of  Elizabeth 
iii«lli»  I'"..  [  S. 

Ilnli^itio  Rook,  tii<*  nioi^t  important  danger  within  the  bay  on  its 
•  ii'iii  III  uiiti .  Ill'*  lirtwrcii  (iros  du  Cluitcau  and  the  Diamond  rock,  with 
Miit\  'Mill  M\ri  ii  ill  liiw  uatcr.  From  it  the  lighthouse  on  Victoria  pier 
l<t  .1 1 II  |iiai  iiiiii'liiii|'  llic  tiortli  side  of  Close  rock  E.  by  S.>  and  the  east 
Mill  III  Atiiiiiiidi  iriiiHM*  i.M  oil  tlu*  north  side  of  the  high  rock  next  to  the 
hiiilli  i-ii'ih^iMil  III  Iiiii4  ilii  (!liAtcan  N.K.  by  E.  f  E. 

Olllor  KfM^k,  «»tl  ll<*nniliip*  reef)  has  7  feet  on  it  at  low  water,  and 
hi-  mIiIi  iIii>  nuliM  <  xlM  in«'  of  \s{\  Motto  in  line  with  Oyster  rock  beacon 
''  !■  Im  I-  I  iHiil  llir  ruil  «ihI  of  Victoria  torrncc  nearly  touching  the  north 
i^hiiiii  III  III  kIm  III  ictatlt^  N.K.by  K.  \  E. 

liDH  iMtHihctrt  <oi>  iNMi  MiiiKiMi  rocks  innnediatcly  off  the  enti'ance  to  the 
l.iillii  inidt  hI  m.  Mi^Imm*.  Tin*  western  rock  has  8  feet  water,  and  lies 
mill  Nlinlli'  inuci  a  hitln  (t|)(in  Miulliward  of  Dogs  Nest  rock  beacon 
I'l.  \  S  ,  mi.j  ilii«  nyr.icr  rnck  lu'iicon  in  line  with  north-eastern  extreme 
III' i:ii/Mlii«lh  I'uMlc  N.N.M.  ]  K.  Tho  custorn  rock  of  Les  Cloches,  with 
iiiiU  I!  led.  >\iiler,  lies  K.S.K.  IJ  cables  from  the  western  rock;  another 
iiiil.  Willi  H  {W\  o\rr  it  lies  N.N.W.,  IJ  cables;  and  a  third  with  7  feet 
••^•=1  II  lli'«  N.M.  by  N..  1.J  cables.  This  last  rock  lies  with  Elizabeth 
«'in.ni.  rliiHuliiir  In  liiHMvith  the  Oyster  rock  beacon,  distant  from  the  latter 


CHAP.  VII.]  DANGEES  IN  ST.   AUBTN  BAY.  276 

• 

exactly  one  cable.  A  chain  of  sunken  i*ocks  connects  this  last  rock  with 
the  Oyster  rock  group,  but  close  outside  it  or  to  the  southward,  there  are 
3  fathoms  with  clean  ground. 

Oyster  Rockd  and  Orune  Moulet  occupy  positions  one  on 

either  side  of  the  entrance  to  the  Little  road  of  St.  Helier,  They  lie 
S.E  \  E.  and  N.W.  J  W.  of  each  other,  one  quarter  of  a  mile  apart,  and 
are  each  marked  with  a  swinging  beacon,  consisting  of  a  pole  bearing  a 
ball.  The  marks  for  the  Oyster  rock  are,  the  new  windmill  on  the  beach 
at  Milbrook  in  line  with  the  eastern  apex  of  Gros  du  Chftteau  bearing 
North,  and  the  north-western  angle  of  St.  Saviour  touching  the  south-east 
angle  of  St,  Helier  church. 

The  Oyster  rocks  uncover  13  feet  at  low  water.  The  beacon  pole  is 
marked  in  23  divisions  of  a  foot  each.  When  the  rocks  are  awash  there 
are  10  feet  water  between  Victoria  and  Albert  piers  ;  and  by  deducting 
the  number  of  divisions  seen  above  water  from  33  it  will  give  the  depth 
between  the  piers. 

The  Grune  Moulet  dries  11  feet  at  low  water,  its  beacon  is  marked  in 
10  divisions  of  2  feet  each. 

Platte  Rock  lies  within  the  entrance  to  the  Little  road  of  St.  Helier 
E.  f  N,,  exactly  a  cable  from  Oyster  rock  beacon.  It  dries  one  foot  at 
low  water,  and  from  it  the  S.E.  rock  off  the  Hermitage  is  seen  just  open 
clear  of  the  east  side  of  Elizabeth  castle.  There  is  no  safe  channel  between 
Oyster  rock  and  the  Platte. 

Sharp  Rock  dries  3  feet  at  low  water,  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  1\  cables 
from  the  Platte.  The  channel  into  the  Little  road  lies  between  Platte  and 
Sharp  rocks,  and  in  it  there  are  22  feet  water  at  the  lowest  equinoctial 
spring  tides.  In  passing  between  these  rocks,  constituting  the  narrowest 
part  of  the  channel,  the  Platte  will  be  cleared  on  its  east  side  by  keeping 
the  spire  of  St.  Mark  church  a  little  open  on  the  east  side  of  the  northern 
white  patch  on  Albert  pier  ;  and  Sharp  rock  will  be  cleared  on  its 
western  side  by  bringing  the  east  end  of  Almorah  terrace  a  little  open  on 
the  west  side  of  Albert  pier. 

Anchorage. — There  is  sufficient  room  for  several  vessels  to  lie  at 
single  anchor  in  St.  Aubin  bay,  but  in  mooring  the  hawse  should  be 
open  to  the  south-west  from  September  to  March ;  the  prevailing  winds 
during  this  period  being  from  that  quarter. 

The  best  position  is  within  Diamond  rock,  with  St.  Saviour  church 
tower  just  open  northward  of  St.  Mark  church-spire,  and  in  line  with  the 
high  rock  between  Gros  du  Chateau  and  La  Vrachdre  E.  by  N.  J  N. ;  or 
fort  Regent  signal-post  seen  over  Elizabeth  castle  and  in  line  with  Gros 
du  Chateau  bearing  E.  J  N.  and  La  Haule  house  in  line  with  the  outer  or 
north-east  extreme  of  St.  Aubin  castle  breakwater  N.  by  W.  ^  W.,  in 

s  2 


270  CHANNEL    I'iLAND*. — ^JEB«£T.  Zcoxt.vjl 

2f)  f*:-:!  at  ih*f  I'-w^-t  ^/rinj  tii^.     ThL*  ipoi  i*  N.NX.  nearir  2  cables 
within  tJ-»-  J'iar.'K/n-I  r«y-k. 

V<-^lf  wi-hireto  1>  m-  iy.<ir  &s  poMiM**  to  Su  Heller,  maj  anchor  in 
.i  fatS'/ri.J!  ftt  low  waur.  wich  I«a  Hauk-  boose  in  the  suae  line  of  bearios^ 
hut  St.  Mark  fhurch-^pire  tourbiner  the  soath-east  aJe  of  HenoitJige  rock 
N.E.  br  E. 

Tbu  la»t  prr-ition  i-bould  ooly  be  used  bj  resieU  under  the  above 
drctjm«-Uiricrr«  in  fir.**  or  m<>lf-nit*-  weather,  bnt  at  or  near  the  first  described 
anr-hom^ve  within  th^  I>i;ix2Jorjd  rock,  resseU  of  not  more  than  18  feet 
draft  might  ride  out  a  heavy  southerly  gale  in  fldetTy  as  thej  voidd  be 
•■h*-ltirr-d  from  the  ftreiijrth  nf  ih^  tiilal  stream;  also  below  half  tide  the 
oaran  «well  i<>  broken  f»y  outlyincr  rocks.  During  neap  tides,  vessels  of 
22  ft-et  drftft  rni^rbt  %'JLi'\\  anchi»r  izi?idi^  the  Diamond  rock,  but  for  larger 
draft  their  is  no  safe  anchomge  on  any  part  of  the  south  coast  in  very  bad 
weather. 

The  anchorage  in  the  f»e?t  part  of  the  Little  road  lies  to  the  northward 
of  Grande  Mangeu»e  rock,  in  10  f«.'et  water,  with  fort  Regent  signal-post 
ovrT  the  middle  of  thf  entrance  to  the  harbour  E.N  E^  and  Xoirmont 
Hi^oal-poyt  touching  the  south-west  side  of  Cloac  rock  X.W.  by  W. :  or 
farther  out  in  16  feet,  with  fort  Ref;pnt  .signal- post  a  saiFs  breadth  open 
to  the  8oiith-ea:rt  of  Victoiia  pier  lighthouse,  and  Elizabeth  castle  flagstaff 
in  line  with  a  remarkable  pointed  rock  eastvanl  of  the  Hermitage 
N.  ))y  W.  \  W.  Vessels  intending  to  remain  in  the  Little  road  should 
always  mofjr,  for  the  anchomge  sfmce  is  only  IJ  cables  wideN.TT.  and  SJEl, 
although  nearly  one  quarter  of  a  mile  long,  N.E.  and  S.W.,  and  it  is 
surrounde<l  by  dangerous  sunken  rocks. 

PASSAGES  into  ST.  AUBIN  BAT —There  are  nine 
passages  leading  into  St.  Aubin  bay,  viz. :  The  North-west,  the  Western, 
the  South-west,  the  Sillette,  the  Danger  rock,  the  Middle,  the  Hinguette, 
the  South,  and  the  Eastern. 

In  westerly  gales  the  best  time  to  pass  through  any  of  these  rocky 
channels  is  between  first-quarter  flood  and  high  water.  The  first  of  the 
ebb  throws  up  a  very  dangerous  overfall  off "  Noirmont  point,  and  when 
the  westerly  tide  has  fairly  made,  overfalls  extend  across  all  the  channels, 
which  continue  with  more  or  less  intensity,  according  to  the  height  of  the 
ocean  swell  and  strength  of  the  wind,  until  the  ebb  tide  slacks. 

NORTH-WEST  PASSAGE,  although  only  1|  cables  wide  at 
the  narrowest  part  between  point  Le  Fret  and  the  rocky  bank  of  that  name 
off  it,  is  safe,  and  has  not  less  than  7  fathoms  at  low  water  in  any  part. 
It  IS  indeed  more  frequently  used  than  the  other  channels,  being  the  steam- 
packet  route  between  Southampton,  Guernsey,  and  St.  Helier. 


CHAP.vn.]  PASSAGES  INTO  ST.  AUBIN  BAY.  277 

Directions. — ^Having  rounded  the  Corbi^re,  as  directed  at  page  267, 
and  passed  between  La  Moye  point  and  Banc  de  St  Brelade,  by  shutting 
in  La  Motte  with  Noirmont  point,  and  having  Noirmont  tower  on  the  line 
of  bearing  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E. ;  run  direct  for  the  tower  until  the  peak  of 
Corbi^re  rock  is  seen  touching  La  Moye  point,  bearing  N.W.  ^  W. ;  with 
this  mark  the  vessel  will  pass  through  the  middle  of  the  narrowest  part  of 
the  channel  off  Le  Fret  point,  in  8  fathoms.  Continue  on  the  same  line 
until  the  white  patch  on  the  sea-wall  at  Greve  d'Azette  comes  in  line  with 
Dogs  Nest  rock,  bearing  E.  by  S.;  this  mark  leads  through  near  the  middle 
of  the  channel  between  Noirmont  point  and  the  rocky  reefs  off  it,  called  the 
Fours ;  it  also  leads  nearly  1^  cables  inside  the  Houaudiere  rock,  and 
exactly  midway  between  Les  Cloches  and  the  7-feet  rock  lying  a  cable 
outside  Oyster  rock  beacon.  . 

After  passing  Oyster  rock  beacon,  St.  Mark  church  spire  will  soon 
come  in  line  with  the  white  patch  at  the  south  end  of  Albert  pier,  which 
is  the  mark  for  entering  the  Little  road ;  but  afler  passing  inside  the 
Platte  rock  bring  the  church  spire  in  line  with  the  northern  white  patch 
on  Albert  pier,  to  clear  the  Mangeuse  rocks. 

A  description  of  the  dangers  off  and  within  the  Little  Road,  as  well  as 
anchoring  marks,  will  be  found  at  pages  274  and  275,  and  a  description  of 
the  Little  Hoad,  together  with  directions  for  entering,  will  follow  at 
pages  281  and  283. 

WESTERN  PASSAGE  between  the  Hubaut  reefs  and  the  Banc 
de  St.  Brelade,  is  rather  more  than  one  quarter  of  a  mile  across  at  its  most 
contracted  part,  which  is  between  the  Petite  Grune  and  Banc  le  Fret ; 
and  there  is  here  9  fathoms  water  in  it.  It  is  the  most  direct  route  to  St. 
Aubin  bay  and  St.  Heller  harbour  from  the  westward,  one  leading  mark 
only  being  required,  viz.,  the  white  patch  on  the  sea  wall  at  Gr^ve  d'Azette 
in  line  with  the  white  patch  and  iron  beacon  on  the  Dogs  Nest  rock  ;  but 
as  these  marks  are  not  easily  made  out  in  misty  weather,  and  might  then 
be  mistaken,  the  North-west  passage  is  probably  the  best  for  a  stranger  to 
take. 

Directions. — The  line  of  the  white  patch  on  the  sea  wall  at  Greve 
d'Azette  and  the  Dogs  Nest  rock  bearing  E.  by  S.,  passes  very  little  more 
than  half  a  cable  northward  of  the  Petite  Grune,  and  almost  touches  the 
north  side  of  a  sunken  rock  with  only  14  feet  water  lying  half  a  mile 
outside  or  to  the  westward  of  the  Petite  Grune  ;  therefore  in  entering  the 
channel  from  the  westward,  keep  the  Corbiere  rock  well  open  outside 
Jument  (white),  until  the  white  patch  in  the  sea  wall  at  Greve  d'Azette  is 
seen  clearly  open  to  the  northward  of  Dogs  Nest  rock.  Run  in  on  this 
mark,  keeping  them  open,  until  Tabor  chapel  comes  in  line  with  Le  Fret 


27^  OI.VXNEL   ISLANDS. JERSEY.  [ciUF.m 

piMHJ,  lo  c.ear  iL*'  T.  c;to  i.trur..'.  a:':er  which  ther  mar  be  brought  in  liw 
aiml  nv^l  as  :a^  I-  i  *.  a;:  mark  up  t.^  the  entrance  of  the  Little  r(Md,» 
.iinvttnl  3il«i'vek  ^hi  ;us>m;;  il.ix^ucli  in»i«.U*  the  North-we«t  passa<*e. 

ShiHilu  thf  whiif  patch  at  «iKve  «i'A2vtte  be  oh^ured,  De  Fas  tower  m 
hue  with  Xoinuon:  tow^r  w..l  J.o  e«|iullT  well,  prorided  the  Hennita^ 
rwk  is  oi^rvtsl  ^i-.i  cU-.ir  ^.t  X.vnxi.MU  point  before  sbuttiDg  in  Tabor 
chaii^l  wi'h  I.,-  Fn't  p-i.-.:.  to  cl-ar  the  20-feet  rock  Iving  eastward  of 
Kam*  l.«-  Frtr :  ai  \  if  ;«!!  '•bjiv:'*  t.i  ih»*  i^astward  and  near  the  town  are 
in\i>-Mo  m:»1  rl.c  '.i:il  uN.:::  N- iriiont  arul  Le  Move  be  tolerably  dear, 
vk\\w^\  >  .r.v.  :!■.  i-:i*.  :".  wTv  dn«*  weather,  Noinuont  point  maybe 
:ippr»-.uh.xl  w  1 1.0  Ji*lA::.i  I  a  c;ib!«' :  Imt  in  passing  eastward  of  it  do  not 
«hiiC  m  I.f  Mo\.»  ^i::nal-{Hi-ii  i*iili  I^»  Fret  point  until  St.  Aubin  castle  is 
jk^iMi  oivu  of  tlic  Lull  or*  Noir-iiii  lit.  iu  order  to  clear  a  dAn«'crous  rock 
Ivinjr  iH'lwi^Mi  iiiil  wiihiMit  ilio  line  nt"  Noirmont  tower  and  Pignonet 
bt*a\HMi.  At\t»r  p;i»iii&;  Pi:;n.net  U^aooii  brin:;  Noinuont  tower  a  little 
o|H.*n  to  the  north-oa<l»:iril  or  in^iJo  ot'  it,  and  when  about  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  to  tho  oa*tw:inl  *  f  the  beuooii  anchor  until  the  weather  clears. 

SOUTH-WEST  PASSAGE  i>  between  the  Banc  I^es  Vrach^re 

:uul  the  iJruiii*  VaiultT) ;  to  tii»'  »:i>iwnr\l  nf  the  Grande  Gnine  and  west- 
ws^rd  ot*  the  iinind  Four.  T\w  nam»wcst  part  of  the  channel  is  betweeu 
the  t>-tivt  sunken  rvvk  at  the  iiorih-wt»st  side  of  the  Grand  Four,  and 
another  sunken  rook  with  -0  kvt  o\tr  it :  those  rocks  are  2  cables  from  each 
other  \V.N.W.  :ukI  K.S.K. 

Directions.  — i^'^piain  Siiunuiri'z's  house,  a  yellow  building  named  the 
Firs,  about  half  wav  up  the  slo^v  ot*  the  hill  a  little  eastward  of  St. 
Alatthew  church,  in  lino  with  Noirniont  tower  bearing  N .E.  ^  E.,  leads 
midway  between  tlie  Frouquie  of  tht»  Vrachere  and  the  westernmost  of 
the  G runes  Vaudin  ;  enter  the  channel  therefore  on  this  line  and  run  on 
it  until  the  white  patch  in  the  sea  wall  at  Greye  d'Azette  comes  in  line 
with  the  white  patch  on  Dogs  Nest  n.)ck  E.  by  S.  southerly,  with  which  as 
a  leading  mark  pnxviHl  to  the  eastward  as  l)efore. 

As  the  hwling  nuuk  through  this  channel  leads  dangerously  close  to  the 
west  side  of  the  Grand  Four,  it  is  i-eoommended  when  the  flood  tide  is 
runnhig,  that  vessels  should  only  run  in  on  it  so  far  as  to  bring  Tabor 
chapel  oi^n  and  shut  over  the  upi>er  part  of  the  slope  of  Le  Fret  blufi^  and 
run  on  this  line  until  the  eastern  leading  mark  comes  on  as  before. 

Tabor  chapel,  standing  on  the  hig  land  overlooking  St.  Brelade  bay,  is 
here  given  as  the  most  conspicuous  mark  for  a  stranger  to  recognize,  but 
this  leading  line  approaches  the  Grande  Grune  rather  nearer  than  is 
desirable ;  for  the  middle  of  the  channel,  Tabor  chapel  should  be  shut  in 
altogether,  and  the  Pic-nic  hotel  (white  gable),  situate  in  the  bay  on  the 


CHJLP.vii]       SOUTH-WEST  PASSAGE.— MEDDLE   PASSAGE.       279 

low  land  to  the  westward  of  it,  brought  in  line  with  the  extreme  of  point 
Le  Fret. 

As  there  are  overfalls  and  strong  eddies  from  the  rocks  in  this  channel 
on  both  ebb  and  flood,  it  should  never  be  taken  from  choice  except  in  very 
fine  weather. 

SILLETTE  PASSAGE  is  between  the  Sillette  rocks  and  the 
Grunes  aux  Dards,  which  is  the  narrowest  part  of  it,  the  channel  here  being 
2  cables  wide,  with  an  average  depth  of  6  fathoms ;  but  a  large  sunken 
rock  occupies  the  middle  of  the  fairway,  and  as  it  has  only  26  feet  oVer  it 
at  low  water,  not  more  than  this  can  be  counted  on. 

Directions. — The  Sillette  passage  [should  never  be  attempted  in  a 
sailing  vessel  without  a  fair  commanding  wind,  as  the  tidal  stream  both 
ebb  and  flood  sets  right  across  it.  The  leading  mark  is  the  westeiii 
martello  towers  (white)  in  St.  Aubin  bay  in  line  with  the  east  side  of 
Grosse  rock,  on  which  there  is  a  beacon,  bearing  N.  by  E.  |  E,  This  line 
leads  barely  1^  cables  eastward  of  the  sunken  rocks  at  the  entrance  of  the 
channel  called  Les  Poches  k  Suie,  on  which  there  are  only  4  feet  water ; 
midway  between  the  Sillette  and  Grunes  aux  Dards,  nearly  1^  cables 
eastward  of  the  Petit  Four ;  1  ^  cables  eastward  of  the  Pignonet ;  half  a 
cable  westward  or  inside  the  Grunes  du  Port,  and  very  close  inside  the 
western  head  of  Jun6e. 

MIDDLE  FASSAOE  is  between  Danger  rock  and  the  Grunes 
aux  Dards  to  the  westward,  and  Les  TStards,  the  Hinguette  reef  and  the 
Grunes  St.  Michel  to  the  eastward.  The  apparent  narrowest  part  of  the 
passage  is  more  than  half  a  mile  across,  this  being  the  distance  between 
Danger  rock  and  the  Grunes  St.  Michel ;  btit  there  are  two  sunken  rocks 
with  only  14  and  15  feet  over  them  at  low  water,  lying  outside  or  to  the 
southward  of  the  Grune  St.  Michel,  distant  from  it  nearly  half  a  mile, 
thus  breaking  up  the  channel  into  two  parts.  The  westernmost  rock  of 
the  two,  15  feet  on  it,  occupies  a  position  near  the  middle  of  the  channel 
at  its  entrance,  and  bears  from  Danger  rock  E.S.E.  nearly  half  a  mile. 
The  best  part  of  the  middle  passage  lies  between  Danger  rock  and  this 
15-feet  rock ;  the  ground  here  is  clean  and  the  soundings  regular  in 
7  fathoms ;  the  eastern  side  of  the  Middle  passage  is  I'ocky,  and  the  depths 
irregular. 

Directions. — Mount  Plasir  house  touching  the  western  side  of 
St.  Aubin  castle-tower  bearing  N.  J  W.,  is  the  leading  mark  through  the 
Middle  passage.  This  line  leads  nearly  1^  cables  westward  of  the  15-feet 
sunken  rock ;  a  quarter  of  a  mile  east  of  Danger  rock,  and  rather  less 
from  the  Frouquie  of  the  Grune  aux  Dards,  on  which  there  are  5  feet 
at  low  water;   nearly  2  cables  westward  of  the  Rouaudiere,  l^  cables 


t 

m 


S 


:-  T 


=.'      V  .L.  — 


'Tll^Zs   JT 


.  -     k 


•      -.- 


I 

4 


I 
I 


•     *«.««<•• 


•fc.     ? 


>  *     -  ♦ 


I- 


v 


.  t  •.  % 


!•:.-*::.---  V 


:   - ..  V 


V 


\- 


.     \ 


^  * 


fc. .   .     1    •...v-_ 


^a 


:  J..'  - 


.  x_ 


'.      T  i. 


.«  V 


E^-7^C 


■    •  "--t    T.-_i    .7*  •!    :■ 


-0.:  1 


.  .    •    ^   • 


..-i    > 


^**0H4P.  Til.]   HINGITBTTB,  SOUTH  AND  EASTERN  PASSAGES.      281 

^'mid-channel,  and,  as  before  stated,  between  Lea  Cloehea  and  up  to  the 
entrance  of  St.  Helier  Little  road ;  but  shonld  it  be  desired  to  proceed  to 

' '  tke  anchorage  in  St.  Aubin  bay — when  St.  Peter  church-spire  cornea  in 

"  line  with  the  lower  Blanc  Pignoii  N.  by  W,  ^  W.,  take  it  for  the  leading 

£   onrk  up  to  tho  anchon^ 

J  When  near  low-water  St.  Feter  ctiurch-Bpire  may  be  lost  sight  of  before 
arriving  at  the  anchorage  in  St.  Aubin  bay,  in  which  case  care  must  be 
taken  to  refer  the  line  of  its  direction  to  some  other  object. 

EASTERN  PASSAGE. — The  narrowest  part  of  the  passage  is 
between  Demie  de  Pas  <»i  which  there  is  a  beacon  pole,  and  a  sunken  rock 
with  1 1  feet  water.  The  latter  rock  lies  W.N.  W.  nearly  one  third  of  a  mile 
from  Demie  de  Pas,  and  from  it  the  9-feet  rock  (see  page  273)  bears  H.  \  W. 
nearly  a  cable.  The  ground  outside  Demie  de  Pas  Is  dean  up  to  the  foot 
of  the  rock,  which  is  not  more  than  40  yards  from  the  beacon. 

Directions,  —  The  new  mill  on  the  beaoli  at  Millbrook,  just  in 
sight  or  open  and  shut  of  the  liigh  rocks  on  west  »ide  of  tlie  Hermitage 
bearing  N.  |  W.,  leads  1 J  cables  westward  of  Demie  de  Pas,  and  barely  a 
cable  eastward  of  the  sunken  rocks  abijve  described.  A  vessel  may  there- 
fore enter  the  channel  on  this  line,  and  run  on  it  until  NicoUe  tower  comes 
in  line  with  Tas  de  Pqis  rock  (white)  after  which  St.  Matthew  church 
must  be  brought  in  line  with  Qros  de  Chateau  rock,  as  for  the  South 
channel,  to  run  up  to  the  entrance  of  the  Little  road  ;  or  St.  Peter  church 
spire  in  line  with  Lower  Blanc  Pignon  to  approach  the  anchorage  in  St. 
Aubin  bay. 

ST.  HELIER  LITTLE  ROAD  lies  eastward  of  the  Hermitage 
rocks,  and  is  frequented  only  by  vessels  intending  to  enter  the  harbour  at 
tide  time,  or  during  the  neaps,  in  fine  weather,  with  off-shore  winds. 
The  depth  in  it  is  from  16  to  6  feet,  at  low-water  springs,  but  the 
anchorage  is  so  much  coutracle<1  by  rocks  that  vessels  over  8  feet  draught 
would  be  compelled  to  moor.  At  low-water  springs  the  Little  road  is 
completely  sheltered  on  the  east  by  a  rocky  barrier  entirely  dry,  extending 
from  Point  de  Fas  to  the  Dogs  Nest  rock ;  there  is  also  a  chain  of  sunken 
rocks  on  the  west  side  of  the  Little  road,  extending  from  the  Hermitage  to 
the  Oyster  rocks  and  beyond  to  the  distance  of  one  cable  outside  the 
beacon  ;  there  are  narrow  gaps  of  deep  water  through  this  rocky  barrier, 
but  they  are  too  tortuous  to  bo  available  as  ship  channek,  therefore  no 
\'essel  of  greater  draught  than  5  feet  should  attempt  to  pass  this  barrier  at 
low  water. 

The  principal  dangers  in  the  Little  road  are  described  at  page  275. 
Directions. — When  bound  from  St,  Aubin  bay  into  the  Little  rood 
of  St.  Helier  liarbour,  it  is  best  to  weigh  and  proceed  about  half  flood  ; 


282  CHANNEL  ISLANDS. — ^JEKSEY.  [chap.  vn. 

at  which  period  there  will  be  16  feet  water  between  the  pier  heads  of 
Victoria  harbour  and  8  feet  between  the  pier  heads  of  the  Old  harbour ; 
at  the  highest  springs  there  are  36  feet  at  the  entrance  of  Victoria  harbour, 
and  27  feet  between  the  pier  heads  of  the  Old  harbour. 

From  the  anchorage  in  St.  Aubin  bay  into  the  Little  road,  inside  or  to 
the  northward  of  the  Oyster  rock — steer  towards  the  middle  of  the 
passage  between  the  Oyster  rock  and  the  hermitage ;  being  careful  not 
to  open  Almorah  terrace  to  the  eastward  of  the  latter  until  the  iron  pole 
beacon  on  the  Grande  Mangeuse  rock  is  in  line  with  the  outer  or  southern 
high  chimney  of  the  engineers'  barrack,  a  long  brick  building  on  point 
de^'Pas  adjoining  the  north  side  of  the  tower,  bearing  E.  J  S.  With  this 
mark  on  a  vessel  may  run  through  a  gap  in  the  barrier  reef,  in  not  less 
than  8  feet  at  low  water.  When  South-east  rock  off  the  east  side  of 
Hermitage  is  shut  in  with  Elizabeth  castle  she  will  be  within  the  limits  of 
the  anchorage  in  the  Little  road,  and  may  anchor  as  convenient  or  proceed 
into  the  harbour ;  in  the  latter  case  St.  Mark  church-spire  in  line  with  the 
northernmost  white  patch  on  the  Albert  breakwater  is  the  leading  mark  up 
to  the  entrance. 

The  width  of  this  gap  in  the  barrier  reef  is  only  60  yards ;  it  is 
bounded  to  the  northward  by  a  small  rock  that  dries  a  foot  at  low  water, 
and  to  the  southward  by  a  sunken  rock  with  2  feet  over  it  at  that  period. 

Outside  the  Oyster  Rocks  from  the  Westward.— The 

channel  between  the  westernmost  of  Les  Cloches  with  8  feet  water,  and  the 
outer  sunken  rock  off  the  Oyster  with  7  feet  over  it,  is  1^  cables  wide  and 
has  5  fathoms  in  at  the  lowest  spring  tides.  The  white  patch  on  the  sea  wall 
at  Greve  d'Azetta  and  the  Dogs  Nest  rock  beacon  in  line  leads  through 
the  middle  of  it ;  run  on  this  line  therefore  until  St.  Maik  church-spire 
comes  in  line  with  the  white  patch  at  the  end  of  Albert  pier  N.E.  ^  E., 
with  which  mark  enter  the  Little  road  ;  but  after  arriving  inside  Platte 
rock,  edge  away  to  the  northward  until  St.  Mark  church-spire  is  in  line 
with  the  northernmost  white  patch  on  the  same  pier ;  which,  as  already 
stated,  will  lead  to  the  anchorage  in  the  Little  road  or  up  to  the  entrance 
of  the  harbour. 

From  the  Southward. — Pass  between  Les  Cloches  with  St.  Mark 
church  spire  in  line  with  Victoria  pier-lighthouse  N.E.  J  E. ;  when  inside 
the  Oyster  rocks,  Sf.  Mark  church-spire  should  be  brought  in  line  with  the 
white  patch  at  the  end  of  Albert  pier ;  and  after  passing  the  Platte,  St.  Mark 
church-spire  should  be  brought  in  line  with  the  northern  white  patch  on 
Albert  pier  as  before. 

Prom  St.  Aubin  Bay  over  the  Bridge  to  the  Little  road  or 

St.  Helier  harbour — Steer  so  as  to  pass  half  a  cable  northward  of  La 


»  •■ 


CHAP.vii.]  ST.   HELIBR  LITTLE   ROAD.  283 

Yrach^re  rock,  with  a  small  beacon  pole  on  it,  or  bring  St.  Mark  church-spire 
on  with  the  north  side  of  the  hospital,  and  run  with  this  mark  on  until 
De  Paa  tower  opens  a  little  to  the  northward  of  the  northernmost  white 
patch  on  the  Albert  pier,  with  which  run  over  the  bridge  (this  part  has 
one  foot  water  at  half  tide)  and  enter  the  harbour,  or  haul  out  into  the  Little 
road. 

BY  NIGHT. — Bring  the  Victoria  pier  white  light  to  bear  N.E.,  and 
steer  for  it,  until  the  green  and  red  lights  on  Albert  pier  are  in  line  bearing 
N.E.  \  N. ;  which  mark  will  lead  between  the  Hinguette  rock  and  Grune 
St.  Michel,  up  to  the  anchorage  in  the  small  road,  or  to  enter  the  harbour, 
care  being  taken  to  observe  the  precautions  as  directed  in  page  270. 

CAUTION. — In  entering  the  harbour,  allowance  must  be  made  for 
the  tide,  which  at  or  near  springs  runs  in  and  out  with  considerable  strength. 
The  most  dangerous  period  for  vessels  entering  is  about  half  flood ;  at  such 
times  they  are  frequently  forced  over  against  the  sandbank  fronting  the 
south  pier  of  the  old  harbour  before  they  have  time  to  turn  their  heads  up 
the  harbour. 

GENERAL  DIRECTIONS.— Small  vessels  when  working  up 
towards  the  narrows  of  the  western  channels,  may  when  to  the  eastward  of 
the  Kaines  stand  into  St.  Brelade  bay  until  Jument  rock  (white)  is  open 
and  shut  of  La  Moye  point ;  and  to  the  southward  until  Elizabeth  castle  is 
just  seen  in  line  with  Noirmont  point  E.  \  S.  When  in  the  narrows  of  the 
western  channel,  backing  and  filling  is  recommended  with  a  beating  wind ;  if 
with  the  flood,  with  the  vessel's  head  off  shore,  and  if  with  the  ebb,  with  her 
head  in  shore  ;  unless  one  half  the  flood  at  least  has  run,  for  at  this  period 
half  tide  there  are  13  feet  over  all  the  rocks  in  the  offing  of  St.  Aubin  bay, 
with  the  exception  of  the  Pignonet,  Hinguette,  and  Sillette,  on  which  there 
are  only  9,  8,  and  7  feet  respectively. 

If  bound  into  the  Little  road  or  St.  H elier  harbour,  in  order  to  avoid 
the  Rouaudi^re,  it  may  be  useful  to  remember  that  St.  Mark  church-spire 
touching  the  south  side  of  Close  rock  leads  60  yards  to  the  northward  of 
it;  and  the  same  spire  in  line  with  the  False  Hermitage  leads  to  the 
southward. 

A  vessel  from  the  north-westward  running  for  shelter  in  St.  Aubin  bay 
during  a  gale  from  that  quarter,  should  keep  at  the  distance  of  1|  miles 
^rom  the  Corbiere  to  avoid  the  breaking  sea  near  it,  especially  necessary 
from  half  ebb  till  low  water,  and  when  the  land  of  Noirmont  is  well  open 
steer  for  its  point,  until  Grosnez  point  comes  in  line  with  the  Corbiere, 
after  which  haul  up  for  La  Moye  and  bring  the  mai-ks  on  for  the  north- 
west channel  (page  277),  where  much  less  sea  will  be  /ound  than  in  the 
others. 


284  CHANNEL  ISLANDS— JEB8EY.  [cb*p.  to. 

In  heavy  veateHy  gales  the  whole  space  included  hetween  the  oatljing 
rockii  olf  Ndnnont  point  ii  a  confu&ed  mass  of  Toaming  breakers  ;  clouds 
of  driving  spra^  create  an  impenetrable  mist  that  obscures  all  marks  near 
the  horizon,  and  beacons  marking  the  rocks  are  all  out  o£  sight  under 
water  ;  bnt  eveD  under  such  circumstances  the  North-west  passage  could 
be  safely  taken  by  a  person  well  acquainted  with  it,  as  both  Le  Fret  aod 
Noirmont  points  are  safe  of  approach  for  lai^  vessels  to  the  dbtance  o^ 
a  cable. 

On  arriving  abreast  of  Noirmont  point  attend  to  the  direcUons  given  at 
pages  277  and  315  or  do  not  shut  in  La  Moye  signal-post  with  I^  Fret  point, 
until  the  white  tower  in  St.  Anbin  bay  is  seen  open  eastward  of  St.  Anbiu 
castle  to  clear  the  Pignonet  rocks,  the  first  of  the  flood  sets  tight  on  these 
rocks  into  St.  Aubin  bay.  It  may  be  useful  to  remember  that  when  La 
Haule  house  comes  on  with  the  inside  part  of  the  wall  extending  to  the 
westward  of  St,  Anbin  cattle  the  vessel  will  be  midway  between  the 
Grunes  du  Port  and  the  Diamond  rock;  and  that  St.  Saviour  church 
tower  just  open  northward  of  St.  Mark  church-spire  and  in  line  with 
La  Yrachfere  rock  will  lead  up  to  the  anchorage  in  St.  Anbin  bay,  well  clear 
of  the  Diamond  rock. 

Tid6S. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  St.  Heller's  harbour  at 
6h,  29m.,  springs  rise  31 J  feet,  neaps  23  feet  The  flood  runs  3  knots  and 
the  ebb  about  2  knots  in  the  entrance  of  the  harbour. 

The  COAST  eastward  of  St.  Helier  is  all  low  and  sandy  to  La  Roque 
point,  also  to  the  northward  of  La  Roque  point  as  far,  as  Mount  Orgueil 
bluff;  the  whole  of  which  part  is  inaccessible  to  shipping,  from  the  ex- 
tensive rocky  reefs  with  which  it  is  fringed,  and  which  dry  at  tow-water 
spring  tides  to  the  distance  of  nearly  2  miles  from  the  shore. 

The  outer  edge  of  this  reef  to  the  southward  is  generally  ateep,  and 
fortunately  well  marked  by  a  number  of  large  rocks,  which  although  some- 
times nearly  awash  at  high  water,  are  never  entirely  covered.  There  are 
also  two  stone  towers  on  this  reef,  each  about  45  feet  above  high-water 
level;  one  lying  about  3  miles  S,£.  of  the  Little  I'oad  of  St.  Helier, 
called  Icho  tower ;  the  other  Seymour  tower,  situate  nearly  2  miles  further 
eastward,  near  the  middle  of  the  Yiolet  bank,  oil  La  Roque  point. 

Violet  BEnk,  above  referred  to,  is  the  name  applied  to  the  eastern 
part  of  the  great  reef  lying  eastward  of  St  Helier.  It  stretches  out  rather 
more  than  2  miles  from  La  Roque  point,  at  the  south-ea^t  extreme  of 
Jersey,  and  consists  of  gravel,  shingle  and  sand,  interspersed  with 
numerous  ledges  of  sharp  pointed  rocks ;  the  whole  of  which  dries  at 
low-water  spring  tides.  The  greater  part  of  this  bank  covers  at  half 
flood;   there  is  then   a  foot  water  on  the  ridge  of  sand  and  shingle  ex- 


OHAP.vn.]     DIRECTIOKS* — SOUTH  COAST. — ^VIOLET  BANK.    285 

tending  from  La  Roque  point  to  Seymour  tower;  this  spot  is  near. La 
Boque  point  where  the  Ridge  is  lowest,  and  most  favourable  for  the 
passage  of  boats.  At  high  water  the  bank  is  entirely  covered,  and  is  then 
only  marked  by  La  Conchiere  rock  at  its  south  extreme ;  Seymour  tower 
near  the  middle  ;  Karam6  rock,  at  this  time  awash,  on  the  south-east ;  and 
Little  Seymour  rock,  also  awash,  but  marked  by  a  pole  and  basket  beacon, 
near  its  eastern  side. 

From  half  flood  to  half  ebb  the  stream  runs  with  great  velocity  over 
the  Violet  bank,  attaining  the  rate  of  6  knots  at  springs,  in  a  N.£.  and 
S.W.  direction. 

As  before  remarked,  the  reef  eastward  of  St.  Helier,  as  well  as 
the  southern  edge  of  the  Violet  bank,  is  well  marked  by  conspicuous 
rocks ;  which,  together  with  the  dangers  along  this  line,  will  now  be 
described. 

Dogs  Nest  Rocks  ^  already  stated. at  page  281,  is  situate  near  the 
outer  extreme  of  a  rocky  ridge  stretching  out  from  Point  de  Pas,  and  forming 
the  eastern  boundary  of  the  Little  road  of  St.  Helier ;  it  is  nearly  awash 
at  high  water,  and  its  apex  is  marked  with  three  white  spots,  and  sur- 
mounted by  an  iron  pole  and  ball  beacon. 

TaS  de  FoiS,  or  White  rock,  lies  three  fourths  of  a  mile  S.  by  E.  ^  E. 
from  the  Dogs  Nest  rock.  Although  only  elevated  5  feet  above  high- 
water  springs,  it  is  very  remarkable,  from  its  upper  part  being  well 
whitewashed  all  round,  and  from  there  being  another  rock  rather  larger 
and  black,  2  cables  eastward  of  it. 

White  rock  is  fronted  to  the  westward  for  1^  cables  by  dangerous  rocks 
that  never  show  ;  and  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  N.W.,  lies  a  rocky  group 
that  uncovers  about  half  tide.  A  chain  of  rather  high  rocks  extend  from 
White  rock  to  the  shore. 

La  FrOUquie,  three-quarters  of  a  mile  S.E.  |  S.  from  White  rock,  is 
4  feet  lower  than  White  rock,  and  therefore  awash  at  high-water  springs. 
A  chain  of  high  rocks  extend  from  La  Frouquie  to  point  Le  Croc ;  the 
inner  and  highest  of  which  is  named  La  Motte.  This  line  of  rocks  marks 
the  limit  of  the  first  bay  eastward  of  St.  Helier,  known  as  La  Greve 
d'Azette.  The  coast  included  between  La  Motte  and  La  Roque  point  is 
called  St.  Clements  bay.  A  dangerous  reef  extends  one  quarter  of  a  mile 
S.W.  from  La  Frouquie. 

Demie  de  Fas,  the  westernmost  of  a  cluster  of  rocks  situated 
W.N.W.  half  a  mile  from  La  Frouquie,  and  nearly  the  same  distance  in  a 
southerly  direction  from  White  rock,  dries  20  feet  at  low  water,  is  steep-to 
outside,  and  marked  by  a  pole  beacon. 

La  Moye  signal-post  in  line  with  Le  Fret  point  bearing  N.W.  ^  W.  leadi 
1^  cables  outside  all  the  rocks  off  Demie  de  Fas  and  La  Frouquie. 


286  CHANNEL  ISULNDS. — ^JERSEY.  [chaf.td. 

Between  La  Froaquie  and  Icho  tower  there  are  no  rocks  visible  at  Ugli 
water  to  mark  the  outer  edge  of  the  reef»  bat  at  half  tide  and  nnder,  it  is 
well  marked  by  Rouget  rock,  which  stands  do«e  to  the  edge  of  deep 
water,  and  which  bears  S.E.  \  8.,  distant  five-eighths  of  a  mile  fix>m  La 
Frouqnie.  Also  by  Jinquet  rock,  which  dries  25  feet,  and  Kes  half  a  mile 
E.S.E.  from  Booget  rock.  A  third  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of 
Jinqoet  rock  lies  the  Grande  Frouquie,  which  is  always  7  or  8  feet  above 
water  at  the  highest  tides,  and  which  lies  about  3  cables  westward  of  Icho 
tower. 

ICHO  TOWER  i«  surrounded  by  high  rocks,  being  in  this  respect 
different  from  Seymour  tower,  which  at  and  above  high  tide  appears  to  be 
completely  isolated,  and  rises  at  once  from  the  sea. 

Ii'SScMquelez  Rock  i^  one  of  the  principal  sea  marks  near  Icho 
tower,  firom  which  it  bears  S.  by  E.,  distant  nearly  half  a  mile.  It  is 
elevated  5  feet  above  the  highest  spring  tides ;  is  steep-to  on  the  outside  to 
the  westward;  but  1^  cables  to  the  southward  there  is  a  half-tide  rock; 
whilst  to  the  N.W.  are  several  dangerous  rocks,  the  fiurthest  of  which  dries 
o  feet  at  low  water,  and  lies  2  cables  S.S.W.  from  the  Grande  Frouquie. 

Between  Echiquelez  rock  and  La  Conchiere  the  edge  of  the  reef  makes 
a  line  convex  outward  for  the  distance  of  nearly  a  quarter  of  a  mile. 

Icho  Bank 9  &  dangerous  bank  of  sunken  rocks  forming  an  irr^ular 
ridge  in  a  NJ^.W.  and  S.S.E.  direction,  about  4^  cables  long,  and  1^  cables 
broad,  lies  S.W.  2^  miles  from  Icho  tower. 

The  least  water,  2^  fathoms,  will  be  found  on  the  north  extreme  of  the 
bank,  and  from  this  shoal  spot  La  Platte  Roque  tower  is  just  seen  on  the 
west  side  of  Icho  tower  N.E.  ^  E. ;  and  St.  Peter's  church-spire  open  a 
little  to  the  eastward  of  Lower  Blanc  Pignon  house,  N.  by  W.  ^  W.  On 
other  parts  of  the  bank  there  are  fit)m  3  to  6  fathoms  at  low-water 
springs. 

The  channel  between  this  bank  and  the  rocks  fronting  Icho  tower  is 
2  miles  wide  and  clear  of  danger. 

La  Conchidre  Rock  lies  on  the  line  of  Orgueil  castle  and  Seymour 
tower,  distant  2  miles  from  La  Eoque  point  at  the  south  extreme  of  the 
Violet  bank ;  it  dries  41  feet  at  low-water  springs,  and  is  therefore  never 
covered,  although  sometimes  awash.  A  reef  extends  from  it  to  the  south- 
ward for  the  distance  of  about  a  cable ;  Conchiere  rock  should  not  there- 
fore be  approached  nearer  than  a  quarter  of  a  mile. 

Clearing  marks,  for  the  line  of  reef  just  described,  between  La  Frouquie 
and  La  Conchiere  rocks. — ^Keep  the  peak  of  Corbi^re  rock  just  in  sight 
touching  La  Moye  point,  until  the  Grand  Anquette  beacon  comes  open 
outside  of  La  Conchiere  rock. 


CHAP,  vn.]  lOHO  TOWEB. — ^VIOLET  "CHANNEL.  287 

VIOLET  CHANNEL. — A  sunken  reef  commences  at  La  Con- 
chiere  rock,  and  extends  to  the  eastward  on  the  line  of  L'Echiquelez  and 
Conchi^re  rocks  to  the  distance  of  H  miles.  Within  this  line,  and  north- 
ward  of  it  for  rather  more  than  a  mile,  the  entire  space  is  shoal  water>  and 
rocks  innumerable ;  so  that  at  low  water  it  would  be  difficult  for  a  stranger 
to  pick  his  way  through  them  even  in  a  boat.  From  La  Conchi^re  rock  to 
the  eastward  the  outer  or  southern  edge  of  this  reef  is  well  marked,  at  the 
last  quarter  ebb,  by  a  long  string  of  rocks  called  La  Route  en  Yille  ;  its 
eastern  extreme  is  bounded  by  a  sunken  rock  called  the  Petit  Four ;  and 
it  may  be  said  to  extend  to  the  northward  as  far  as  Le  Cochon,  La  Noire, 
and  the  Grand  Haisse  rocks. 

The  navigable  part  of  the  Violet  channel  lies  between  the  sunken 
part  of  the  Violet  reef  just  described,  and  the  rocky  banks  to  the  south- 
ward called  the  Plateau  de  la  Fourquie  (on  which  are  La  Goubiniere  and 
La  Rousse  Platte  rocks),  and  the  Anquette  rocks  to  the  eastward.  The 
narrowest  part  of  this  channel  lies  between  the  Petit  Four  and  the 
sunken  rocks  inside  the  Petite  Anquette  rock,  where  it  is  about  half  a 
mile  wide. 

AnquOttO  Channel  leads  from  the  middle  of  the  Violet  channel  out 
between  the  Grande  and  Petite  Anquette  rocks  to  the  eastward.  The 
water  is  deeper  here  than  in  the  Violet  channel,  but,  from  the  absence  of 
good  leading  marks,  the  passage  is  more  difficult.  The  general  depth  in  it 
is  6  to  7  fathoms,  and  there  are  6  to  6  fathoms  in  the  Violet  channel  at 
low  water ;  but  in  the  latter  on  the  line  of  Princes  tower  and  Little 
Seymour  beacon,  and  with  the  Grand  Anquette  beacon  bearing  E.  \  S., 
is  a  rock  with  23  feet  water,  and  another  near  it  with  2h  feet ;  both  these 
rocks  were  repeatedly  examined,  but  it  is  possible  nevertheless  that  there 
may  be  3  or  4  feet  less  water  than  is  here  given. 

Caution  is  therefore  necessary  in  passing  this  part  of  the  channel  at  low 
water,  in  large  ships.  In  vessels  above  15  feet  draught  it  will  be  prudent 
to  wait  until  the  flood  tide  has  fairly  made,  and  with  any  swell  on,  such 
vessels  should  not  pass  until  first-quarter  flood. 

DANGERS  in  VIOLET  CHANNEL.-La  Conchiere  rock, 
described  at  preceding  page,  is  the  principal  mark  at  the  western  entrance 
of  the  Violet  channel. 

Tax6  lies  to  the  eastward  of  La  Conchiere,  distant  from  it  rather  more 
than  half  a  mile,  and  exactly  on  the  line  of  La  Conchiere  and  Echiquelez 
rocks ;  it  dries  10  feet  at  low  water. 

A  quarter  of  a  mile  eastward  of  Taxe  rock;  with  Echiquelez  rock  a 
little  open  southward  of  La  Conchiere,  lies  the  highest  of  the  western  rocks 
of  the  Route  en  Ville,  which  dries  11  feet;  and  there  is  another  rock  a 
cable  eastward  of  it,  which  dries  10  feet  at  low  water. 


288  CHANNEL  ISLANDS. — JEBSEY.  [chap.  tu. 

From  these  rocks  to  the  eastward,  about  half  a  mile,  lying  close  to  the 
deep  water,  the  Roate  en  Ville  chain  extends  on  a  line  convex  outward. 
Most  of  the  rocks  are  nearly  awash  at  low  water. 

St.  Martin  church-spire  in  line  with  Gorey  tower  N.  by  W.  passes  over 
a  rock  with  only  2  feet  water,  lying  half  a  cable  within  or  westward  of  its 
eastern  end.  They  will  be  cleared  on  the  south-west  side  by  keeping  Icho 
tower  open  a  little  outside  of  Conchiere  rock,  until  Princes  tower  comes  in 
line  with  Seymour  tower ;  after  which  keep  Echiquelez  rock  open  South 
of  Conchiere  until  Princes  tower  comes  in  line  with  No.  5  tower. 

Petit  Four,  with  2  feet  water,  marks  the  eastern  extreme  of  the 
Violet  reef ;  it  lies  with  Karam6  rock  just  shut  in  with  the  outer  part 
of  the  high  table-land  above  Noirmont  point  N.W.  by  W.  ^  W.  The 
sentry  box  of  Cope  guard-house,  a  stone  turret  on  the  apex  of  Coupe 
bluff,  over  the  end  of  the  bluff  just  within  the  breakwater-house  at 
Yerclut  point,  N.  ^  W. ;  and  the  Grande  Anquette  beacon  on  the  north 
side  of  Petite  Anquette  rock  S.E.  by  E.  \  E. 

La  Goubini6re  Bock  dries  20  feet  at  low  water ;  it  lies  on  the 
western  end  of  the  Plateau  de  la  Frouquie,  a  very  little  to  the  eastward  of 
the  line  of  Orgueil  castle,  Seymour  tower,  and  Conchiere  rock ;  distant 
from  the  latter  nearly  1^  miles.  On  the  rock.  La  Moye  signal  post  is  seen 
over  the  outer  part  of  Le  Fret  point  N.W. 

There  are  several  rocks  to  the  northward  of  La  Goubini^re,  the  outer 
of  which,  named  Canger  rock,  dries  16  feet  at  low  water,  and  lies  a  cable 
from  it. 

Orgueil  castle  a  little  open  to  the  westward  of  Seymour  tower  and 
Conchiere  rock  clears  the  Goubiniere  and  all  dangers  on  the  west  side  of 
the  Plateau  de  Frouquie. 

Frouquie  Aubert  Bock  lies  on  the  south- western  edge  of  the 
Plateau  de  la  Frouquie,  1^  miles  south-eastward  of  the  Goubiniere;  it 
uncovers  26  feet  at  low  water,  and  does  not  cover  at  neaps.  From  it 
St.  Peter's  church  spire  is  in  line  with  the  white  patch  on  South  hill 
N.N.W.  \  W.,  and  St.  Martin  church  spire  is  a  good  sail's  breadth  open 
north-eastward  of  Seymour  tower  N.  |  W. 

La  Bousse  Platte  Bock  marks  the  east  side  of  the  Plateau  de  la 
Frouquie,  and  lies  E.  f  S.  rather  more  than  a  mile  from  La  Goubiniere;  it 
is  a  large  flat  rock  about  half  a  cable  in  diameter,  and  dries  14  feet  at  low 
water.  Between  this  rock  and  La  Goubiniere  are  several  rocks  one  of  which 
dries  15  feet  at  low  water ;  another  which  dries  only  4  feet,  is  however  the 
most  dangerous,  from  standing  more  prominently  out  in  the  channel. 

Pierre  des  Enf ants  Bock  lies  one  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  south- 
ward of  Bousse  Platte,  and  being  7  feet  higher  makes  a  very  useful  mark 
when  Bousse  Platte  is  covered  by  the  tide. 


CHAP.  Til.]  DAKGEES  IX  VIOLET  CHANNEL.  289 

ANQUETTE  ROCKS  He  2^  and  8  miles  eastward  of  Conchiere 
rock  and  form  the  eastern  boundary  of  the  Violet  channel.  The  Petite 
Anqnette  uncovers  20  feet  at  low  water.  From  it  La  Bergerie,  a 
remarkable  house  on  the  heights  above  Noirmont  point,  is  in  line  with 
the  north  side  of  La  Motte  rock  N.W.  by  W. ;  and  Archirondel  tower 
appears  its  apparent  breadth  open  north-eastward  of  Rozel  manor-house 
N.  by  W.  }  W. 

Seal  Rocks.'^An  extensive  reef  lies  off  the  Petite  Anqnette  to  the 
norihwardy  <me  of  the  most  dangerous  clumps  on  which  are  called  the  Seals. 
The  westernmost  Seal  dries  4  feet,  and  lies  about  N.N.  W.  a  third  of  a  mile 
finom  the  Petite  Anqnette.  There  is  a  sunken  rock  with  only  12  feet  water, 
Ijring  an  eighth  of  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  western  Seal.  Also  a 
dangerous  clump  called  La  Maraine  Beef,  which  lies  N.N.E.  nearly  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  from  Petite  Anquette,  having  only  3  feet  water  on  it. 
All  these  rocks  are  probably  connected  with,  the  Petite  Anquette. 

Grune  Le  Peuvre  lies  N.E.  |  N.  1|  miles  from  Petite  Anquette, 
and  has  only  6  feet  on  it  at  low  water. 

Grande  Anquette  Rock  lies  S.E.  j^  E.,  3|  miles  from  Seymour 
tower  ;  it  formerly  covered  about  8  feet  above  half  tide,  but  is  now  marked 
by  a  stone  pillar  beacon,  painted  in  horizontal  bands  of  red  and  white,  20 
feet  above  high  water,  and  surmounted  by  staff  and  ball.  From  the 
beacon  Petite  Anquette  ix)ck  bears  N.W.  by  W.  J  W.,  three-quarters  of  a 
mile ;  Bousse  Platte  rock  W.  |  S.  2^  miles  ;  Grande  Arconie,  which  dries 
9  feet,  S.S.E.  \  E.,  one  mile  ;  and  Porpoise  rock  S.W.  by  W.  \  W.,  seven- 
eighths  of  a  mile. 

Anquette  Patches,  a  small  rocky  bank  with  16  to  20  feet  on  its 
east  end  lying  N.E.  ^  N.  nearly  a  mile  from  the  Grande  Anquette. 
Seymour  tower  is  in  one  with  La  Motte  rock  W.N.W. ;  and  Rozel  mill 
twice  its  apparent  breadth  open  west  of  St.  Catharine  tower,  N.N.W.  |  W. 
Another  bank  of  rock  and  gravel  lies  E.  by  S.  ^  S.,  2  miles  from  the  Grande 
Anquette.  Its  shoalest  part  15  feet,  lies  with  Rozel  windmill  a  little  open 
eastward  of  St.  Catharine's  tower  N.W.  by  N.,  and  Grande  Anquette  and 
La  Conchiere  rocks  in  line  W.  by  N.  f  N. 

Sunken  Beef. — There  are  some  dangerous  sunken  rocks  lying  one 
quarter  of  a  mile  S.E.  of  the  Anquette  beacon ;  and  the  space  to  the  south- 
ward of  it  for  the  dbtimce  of  1 J  miles  is  occupied  by  a  vast  reef  called  by 
the  French  Plateau  de  TArconie  ;  some  of  the  rocks  on  which  begin  to 
uncover  soon  after  the  last  quarter  ebb  of  a  spring  tide,  others  are  only 
awash  at  low  water,  and  by  far  the  largest  part  of  them  never  appear  at  all. 

La  Grande  Arconie  Rock  which  dries  9  feet  at  low  water  stands 
on  the  east  side  of  this  plateau ;  the  Porpoise  rock  drying  4  feet  marks  its 
western  boundary ;  the  Grand  Four  rock,  drying  7  feef,  lies  just  within  its 
Q  7049.  T 


290  CUAXNEL  tSLA-KDS. — JEB8EY.  lemAr.m. 

Ronth-veMt  extreme  ;  and  La  H&ache  rock,  irjiag  6  feet,  and  a  mile  Mmth- 
eutward  of  the  latter. 

The  channel  between  Platean  de  U  Fronqnie  and  FUtean  de  rAreonie 
hai  5^  fathoms  at  low  water,  but  it«  free  navigation  u  impeded  by  a  >triiig 
of  rocks  extending  acrou,  between  Pierre  ties  Enfant*  and  the  Grtuid  Fonr, 
tbvnt  a  cable  apart ;  some  of  which  are  awash,  and  others  have  5  feet  orer 
them  at  low-water  springs. 

The  great  Ktrcngtli  of  the  stream  at  this  part  of  the  channel,  and  the 
absence  of  good  marks  render  its  navigation  extremely  periloos  near  low 
water;  no  vessel  nhould  attempt  to  pass  through,  therefore,  tintO  after 
first  quarter  flood. 

Conp<;  guard-bonse  turret  perceptibly  open  outsi<le  the  breakwater-hoose 
of  Verclat  point  (Kame  mark  as  for  northern  entrance  of  the  Violet  channd), 
will  lead  through  the  Itest  part  of  the  channel,  but  even  this  line  leads  over 
one  of  the  rocks,  which  must  be  avoided,  and  after  passing  it,  hanl  out 
gradually  ronnd  Fronqnie  Aabert. 

ANQUETTE  G-BAVEL  BANES  commence  near  the  south- 
west extreme  of  the  Plateau  des  Arconies  and  extend  to  the  south-eastward 
in  an  almost  continuous  line,  for  a  distance  of  5  miles.  They  consst  of  a 
number  of  narrow  ridgy  banks  of  fine  gravel,  having  generally  a  depth  of 
3  and  4  fathoms  at  low  water,  excepting  on  one  detached  bank  near  the 
end,  where  there  are  only  2  fathoms.  The  marks  for  this  spot  are,  La  Mpye 
signal-post  just  inside,  or  to  the  northward  of  Froaquie  Aubert  N.W.  J  W., 
and  Grande  Anquctte  a  little  within  Verclut  point  N.  by  W,  |  W. 

There  are  good  7-&thom  channels  on  either  side  of  this  bank. 

Dtreotions.'-If  bound  from  St.  Helier  to  the  eastward,  through  the 
Violet  channel,  after  having  cleared  the  dangers  outside  the  Little  road, 
according  to  directions  already  given  for  entering,  proceed  with  La  Moye 
signal-post  in  line  with  Le  Fret  point,  bearing  N.W.  ^  W.,  nntil  OifueiL 
casde  comes  on  with  Icho  tower;  at  which  positioD,  about  half  a  nule  frmn 
the  outer  edge  of  the  reef,  the  Grande  Anquetle  beacon  will  be  seen  a  little 
open  of  Conchi^re  rock  £.  by  S.  ^  S. 

From  hence  steer  B.£.  by  E.  ^  £.,  parallel  to  the  outer  edge  (^the  reef; 
the  deptb  along  this  line  will  be  5  to  7  fathoms  at  low  water.  Cwchi^ 
rock  will  be  passed  at  the  distance  of  about  one-third  of  a  mile  ;  and  when 
to  the  eastward  of  it,  bring  Echiqnelez  rock  in  line  with  Noirmont  tower, 
N.W.  f  W.,  for  a  leading  mark,  nntil  Princes  tower  comes  in  line  with 
Seymour  tower ;  near  the  intersection  of  these  lines  the  Platte  Ronase  will 
bear  8.W.,  one  third  of  a  mile,  and  the  Grande  Anquctte  beacon  East- 
Steer  now  N.G.  northerly  to  pass  through  the  deepest  part  of  the  channel, 
or  East  for  the  Grande  Anqnette  beacon  to  pass  through  the  middle  of  it, 


OHiP.  7n.]  ANQTIETTB  OBAYEL  BAXES. — 60RBT  HAEBOUE.    291 

until  La  Conpe  monnd  is  open  eastvard  of  Yerclnt  point,  N.  |  W.,  with 
which  mark  run  up  to  abreast  the  Petit  Four. 

As  the  narrowest  part  of  the  channel  lies  between  the  Petit  Four  and 
Petite  Anquette,  it  may  be  nsefnl  to  know  that  the  stone  turret  on  Conpe 
point,  and  the  breakwater  house  at  Verclut  point,  exactly  in  line  K.  §  W., 
leads  a  cable  outside  the  Petit  Four ;  at  this  position  Bozel  windmill  is 
seen  touching  the  north  side  of  mont  Orgueil  castle  N.  by  W.  ^  W,,  and 
St.  Catherine's  tower  (white)  is  in  line  with  Archirondel  tower  (red). 
When  abreast  Petit  Four,  Karam4  rock  will  be  seen  just  shut  in  with  the 
high  hmd  above  Noirmont  point,  N.W.  by  W.  4  W.,  and  the  Grande 
Anquette  beacon  on  the  north  side  of  Petite  Anquette,  S.E.  by  E. 

From  this  position,  the  same  leading  mark,  viz.,  La  Coupe  mound  open 
eastward  of  Verclut  point,  N.  |  W.,  will  lead  up  inside  the  Banc  du 
Chateau,  past  the  Giffu^i  rock,  to  the  anchorage  in  Gorey  road.  After 
passing  GliTard  rock  these  objects  should  be  brought  exactly  in  line  to  pass 
through  the  centre  of  the  channel. 

If  it  be  desired  to  haul  out  to  the  eastward  of  the  Chatenu  bank,  a  small 
vessel  may  do  so  when  £chiqueTez  rock  cornea  open  north  of  Karame  rock, 
but  a  large  vessel  should  not  attempt  it  until  Icho  and  Seymour  towers 
are  in  line,  to  avoid  some  stony  banks  lying  to  the  northwai-d  of  Grune  le 
Feuvre,  on  which  there  is  only  25  feet  at  low  water. 

GBOUVILLEi  BA7,  which  derives  its  name  fkim  a  ham  et  near 
St.  Clement  church,  is  situate  on  the  east  Bide  of  Jersey,  between  La  Koque 
point  and  mont  Oi^eil.  Its  outer  boundary  to  the  Routhward  commences 
on  the  north-east  side  of  the  Violet  bank,  and  is  very  rocky  ;  there  are 
numerous  clumps  of  rocks  scattered  along  the  low-water  line  of  the  bay  to 
the  northward,  which  dries  out  to  the  distance  of  a  mile  from  the  shore ; 
there  are  also  many  rocks  within  this  line  aa  well  as  without ;  nevertheless 
the  beach  of  Grouvitle  bay,  at  low  water,  presents  a  coast  scene  of  great 
beauty ;  oonsia^ng  of  a  vast  expanse  of  fine  white  sand,  risiug  with  a  gentle 
slope  towards  the  shore,  bounded  on  the  south  in  the  distance  by  the  rugged 
rocks  of  the  Violet  bank  and  Seymour  tower,  and  on  the  north  by  the 
stately  mont  Orgueil,  crowned  by  its  venerable  castle. 

G-ORET  HARBOUB  immediately  under  mont  Orgueil  castle  to 
the  south-west,  is  formed  by  a  stone  pier  built  out  from  the  south-west  part 
of  Orgueil  head.  The  accommodation  for  vessels  is  very  limited  ;  the  outer 
pier  berth  having  only  a  depth  of  9  feet  at  half  tide,  and  at  low-water  springs 
the  sand  dries  for  the  distance  of  a  cable  outside  the  pier-heads ;  nevertheless 
vessels  of  300  tons  may  occasionally  be  seen  here,  and  ns  it  is  the  head- 
qusMers  of  the  oyster  fishery,  there  are  a  large  number  of  sloops  from  30 
to  60  tons  burthen  belonging  to  the  place.    Immediately  oS  the  outer  end 

T  2 


202  CHAXNEL  ISLANDS. — JEBSET.  [isa^.tu. 

of  the  pier,  and  at  the  diatancc  of  400  feet  from  it,  there  is  a  space  of 
ground  paved  with  fl»t  (tones  for  depositing  the  OTsters.  This  place  is 
marked  hy  a  rough  pole  beacon  near  its  north-eastern  end,  at  the  distance 
of  60  feet  from  iu  outer  edge.  With  this  exception  the  bottom  of  G^re^ 
harbour  ia  good  for  grounding  vessels,  consisting  of  mod  and  sand. 

LIGHT. — From  Gorej  pier  head  a  Jixed  white  light  is  exhibited  at 
an  elevation  of  35  feet  above  high  water. 

CautiOIl. — At  spring  tides  and  alter  half  flood,  the  stream  sets  with 
great  force  round  the  [Her-head  to  the  northward,  for  which  due  allowance 
must  be  made.  Sharp  vessels  not  provided  with  legs  should  always  get  a 
pier  berth,  and  list  in,  assisted  hy  their  mast-head  tackles  on  shore,  to 
prevent  their  falling  over  at  low  water.  During  the  severe  gales  in  winter 
a  vessel  will  stnun  less  iu  taking  the  ground,  be  much  better  sheltered, 
and  will  experience  far  less  scend  in  this  harbonr  than  in  any  oth«  in  the 
Channel  islands. 

DANGERS. — The  EQUerridrO. — Among  the  most  prominent 
dangers  in  Grouville  bay  is  the  Equeiri^i-e,  the  largest  and  most  con- 
spicuous rock  off  Gorey  harbour,  frum  which  it  is  distant  one  third  of  a 
mile ;  it  dries  35  feet,  and  is  marked  by  a  pole  and  fish-tail  beacon. 

Dasher  Rock  with  2  feet  water  and  18  to  20  feet  close  to,  lies 
S.  by  W.  J  W.  about  one  cable  from  Equerriere  rock. 

The  Ecureuil,  lying  li  cables  S.W.  of  the  Eqnerriert^  dries  14  feet, 
ttnd  is  marked  by  a  pole  and  basket  beacon. 

Fisherman  Bock,  with  8  feet  water,  lies  S.  by  W.  2  cables  from 
Dasher  rock. 

The  Horn  Bock,  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  (he  Ecnreuil,  is  the 
outer  rock  of  Frouquies  de  la  Gr^ve,  dries  16  feet,  and  is  marked  by  a  staff 
and  horizontid  cross  beacon. 

Amongst  other  rocks  of  less  importance  are,  Little  Seymour  rock  awash 
at  high  water,  and  marked  by  a  pole  and  basket  beacon,  from  which  a 
long  string  of  rocks  extend  out  to  the  eastward,  and  which  may  be  said 
to  form  the  southern  boundary  of  Grouville  bay  at  low  water.  Along 
this  line  of  rocks  ore  the  Grand  Haisse,  which  dries  22  feet,  and  La 
Noire  dries  14  feet,  the  latter  lying  nearly  a  mile  outside  Little  Seymour 
beacon. 

The  QitEard,  the  outer  danger  of  the  long  strip  of  rocks  above  men- 
doned,  has  one  foot  on  it  at  low  water.  From  Little  Seymour  beac<ai  it 
Jies  E.  by  N.  J  N.  nearly  IJ  miles,  and  W.  by  S.  J  S.,  nearly  half  a  mile 
from  the  middle  of  the  South  Ridge  sand  at  the  south  end  of  the  Banc  du 
Chateau,  on  which  there  is  only  12  feet  water.    From  Giffard  rock  Bozel 


CBU*.  TU.]  DANGERS. — lEL^  OKXTNES.  293 

mill  Ib  a  little  open  west  of  Xa  CrSte  guard-house,  N.  hj  W.  }  W. ;  and 
Little  Seymour  beacon  a  litHe  open  northward  of  Gros  Etac,  W.  by  S.  ^  S. 

The  other  rocks  in  Grouville  bay,  ofE  Gorey  harbour,  of  inferior  tnagnt- 
tnde,  althoagh  probably  not  less  dangerous,  are  Azicot  rock,  which  lies 
neatly  one  quarter  of  a  mile  outside  the  end  of  Glorey  pier ;  it  dries  5  feet  at 
low  water,  and  is  marked  by  a  spar  baoy.  Les  Guillimots,  a  group  of 
rocks  lying  S.S.W.,  one  quarter  of  a  mile  from  Azicot ;  the  outer  rock  of 
the  group  dries  6  feet,  and  is  marked  with  a  spar  buoy,  Les  Burons,  a 
rocky  group  lying  S.S.E.  one  quarter  of  a  mile  from  Les  Guillimots,  the 
highest  rock  of  which  lies  to  the  K.E.  and  ia  marked  with  a  spar  buoy. 

Mooring  buoys. — The  Inner  road  buoy  is  moored  in  11  feet 
water,  with  Gorey  slip  just  open  of  the  pier  head,  and  Horn  beacon  in  line 
with  Ecureuial  beacon. 

The  Outer  road  buoy  is  moored  in  32  feet  water,  with  Seymonr  tower 
in  line  with  Little  Seymour,  and  fort  Henry  seen  midway  between 
Grouville  hill  and  church. 

La  Omne  Du  Fort,  haviug  5  feet  water,  lies  outside  the  Burons, 
on  a  line  with  the  end  of  Gorey  pier  and  Horn  rock  beacon ;  and  one  third 
of  a  mile  within  the  latter. 

Boaxl  Rock,  with  ^  feet  water,  lies  an  eighth  of  a  mile  outside  La 
Grune  du  Port,  on  a  line  of  direction  opposite  to  No.  2  tower.  St.  Catherine 
tower  (white),  is  just  shut  in  with  Le  Cr^te  point  N*.  by  W.,  and  No.  5- 
tower  is  in  line  with  the  extreme  end  of  the  high  table-land  southwEU^  of' 
Grouville  mill  W.  }  S. 

There  is  B  small  rock  with  26  feet  water,  lying  a  quarter  of  a  mile- 
from  Boad  rock,  in  the  direction  of  Yerclut  point ;  within  which  lies  the 
Inner  Road  rock,  having  16  feet  at  low  water.  On  this  rock  St.  Catherine 
tower  ia  just  shut  in  with  Le  Crete  point  K.  by  W.,  and  Gorey  pier  light- 
house open  north  of  the  Ecureuil  beacon,  the  latter  being  rather  less  than 
one  quarter  of  a  mile  distant. 

A  patch  of  1 4  feet  lies  S.  by  £.  |  E.  about  one  cable  from  Boad  rock. 

TR£!S  GBUNES  lie  outside,  nearly  one  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the 
eastward  of  Equerriere  rock,  Tliey  are  awash  at  low  water.  Little 
Seymour  beacon  in  line  with  Seymour  tower  clears  them  outside  to  the 
eastwio'd  by  three-quarters  of  a  cable,  but  passes  over  another  rock  with 
25  feet  at  low  water  ;  which  rock  may  be  considered  to  be  the  extreme  end  of 
the  ledge,  for  the  water  is  deep-to  close  outside  it.  Therefore  when  passing 
the  Tr^s  Grunes  in  a  large  vessel,  open  little  Seymour  beacon  perceptibly 
to  the  westward  of  Seymour  tower. 

North  of  the  Tr&s  Grunea,  and  about  1^  cables  from  them, 'lies  the 
Facquet  rock,  having  2  feet  on  it  at  low  water,  within  which  lo  the 


HxSrZl,  L^LiTS*. 


^.  rr 


;.  • 


mm    f -. 


BANC  da  CHATEAU  :>»  '*  G: 


:.  '4.'   •  'i.'i 


'J/*' 


■..-,'*  i.v^'  t  :■  T !*€.•*"■.'-  -^-f iti^iG. ««:ecocr  Sae. Is 

'   •  «  — 

• . .  >  -  ^'» .    : .  r*<f .  -^c-     ^-^ar 
••.  .•.  a  :.'.!>-.  ri*-^  «Aiiii  rfir?-*  te  m> 

North  Sand  Ridge  y-*^-  ra-L-r  nsore  than  one  qvarter  of  m  mfli 
V.  .•?...'.  •;.':  :,-.r:.  <-r.'l  of  th';  Iii:-r-  '!•;  Chat^ia,  and  Has  10  feef  ml  Icwr  wtter : 
j  .••  •'/  tr.'r   -'/  it..%*;ird  of  th:-,  ho-^^f-v.-r,  there  is  a  lanQer  ri^e  with  oolj 

South  Sand  Ridge  '-^i'J*  12  f':*i  wat^r,  lies  along  tile  soath-vcfsto:! 

fjfi!  -oufii'  f.  '1:."'  of  th*^-  f^ifik,  clo*^r  to  tli^-  (ieepnciter.  Theie  can  be  no 
fioubt.  thfit  th'r  l'»;iri'-  *U  ChaNAij  lia-  li^;n  formed  entirely  br  the  aedoa  d 
\\it:  ti'liil  fitnarri,  &r.d  that  tho  ii[»jK'r  ]jArtof  it  is  continoallr  shifimg,  within 
a  jMftirriiliir  ;ifi'l  ilriiit^r*!  «paco.  iJii ring  westerly  winds  the  ridgj  apexes 
of  tlio  *'Aut\'\tuuVr\  on  it  arc:  fso  4haq>  that, when  they  are  awash,  a  boat  may 
r.-}i-ily  knof'k  th<-rri  down  in  paii<iiri<r  over.  At  sach  times  the  banks  are 
about  4  f*-''t  lii''h'T  than  with  easterly  wind.<i. 

'\'\i\n  Imnk  U  of  courHf  a  ^eat  protection  to  the  anchorage  in  Gorey 
rr/aiJM. 

Clearing  Marks. — Grouville  mill  in  line  with  the  onttf  end  of 
ifOTi'.y  pier  W.  by  S.  |  S.  .southerly,  just  clears  theo-fathom  contour  line  at 
the  north  extn-rne  of  the  liaiik.  Icho  tower  and  Little  Seymoor  bcsoon  in 
line,  W.  I  S.,  leads  clear  close  to  its  southern  end.  Coupe  goard-hoose 
turret  in  line  with  the  breakwater-house  close  under  Yerclut  blnff,  bearing 
N.  H  W.,  clears  the  north-west  comer,  and  leads  down  its  west  side,  nearly 
in  mid-channel ;  and  the  same  Coupe  Guard-house  turret  in  line  with  St. 
CatlM?rine,  brciakwater-lighlhouse,  bearing  N.N.W.  \  W.,  will  lead  eastwaid 
of  the  biuik  as  well  as  a  rocky  5-fathom  patch  outside. 

Tongue  Bank  are  two  small  shoal  spots,  lying  East  from  South 
ridge  sand;  distant  from  it  nearly  one  and  2  miles  respectiyely,  but 
separated  from  Banc  du  Chateau,  and  from  each  other,  by  good  sound 
channels  of  d(^p  water.    They  are  of  the  same  character  as  Chateau  bank 


0EU.T1I.]  SISBOnONS  fOK  OSOITVILUB  BAT.  295 

having  ehiup  ridg;  apexes  of  finesand.  The  teast ,  water  on  the  eastern 
bank  is  36  feet,'and  cHi-,th,e  western  23  feet.. 

On  the  23-feet  ridge  Coupe  turret  appears  a  little  open  of  St  Catherine 
breakwater-lighthouse,  N.X.W.  ^  W.;  and  Icho  tower  is  open  a  little 
northward  of  LitUe  Seymonr  beacon  W.  by  S. 

AnOhoragO. — Between  the  west  side  of  Banc  du  Chateau  and  the 
£-fatbom  contour  line  fcontlag  GroavUle  bay  lies  the  Oater  road,  a  safe 
ancbonge  and  sofficiently  capacious  to  accommodate  seyeral  vesselB  of 
large  draught,  it  being  a  mQe  long  North  and  South,  by  nearly  half  a 
mile  broad.  The  eastern  limit  of  this  anchorage  is  marked  by  Coupe 
guard-house  turret  being  in  line  with  breakwater  house  at  Verclut  bluff, 
N.  I  W.  At  its  western  limit  St,  Catherine  tower  (white)  and  Archirondel 
tower  (red)  arein  line.  At  it«  north  extreme  the  end  of  the  pier  is  seen 
open  south  of  Equerri&re  rock  and  bearing  W.  by  N,  |  K. ;  and  to  the 
southward  No>  4  tower  aud  the  Horn  rock  beacon  in  line  marks  the  boun- 
dary. Within  the  space  included  by  these  lines  irill  be  found  6  to  8 
fathoms  at  the  lowest  spring  tides,  over  an  oven  bottom  of  gravel  and 
shells. 

The  Inner  road  lies  within  the  o-bthoro  contour  line,  between  tlie 
Outer  and  Inner  road  rocks,  and  between  the  Equerri^re  beacon  and  the 
Burons  rocks.  la  this  space  are  the  inner  Government  moorings, 
marked  by  a  large  buoy  in  1 1  feet  at  low- water.  The  ground  chain  of 
these  moorings  lies  north  and  south  ;  there  are  38  fethoms  of  chain  on 
each  arm,  and  anchors  of  24  and  30  cwt.  A  cable  within  this  buoy  there 
are  7  feet,  aud  3|  fathoms  at  the  some  distance  outside.  The  best  line 
to  anchor  on  in  the  enter  road  is  Grouville  church-spire  in  line  with  fort 
Henry,  and  in  the  Inner  road,  Princes  tower  open  to  the  northward  of  fort 
William  its  apparent  breadth. 

The  anchorage  in  Gorey  roads  deserves  to  be  better  known  than  it  is, 
for  without  any  doubt  it  Is  the  only  place  in  the  Channel  islands,  including 
also  the  entire  coast  of  the  gulf  in  which  they  are  situated,  to  which  a 
squadron  of  heavy  ships  might  run  for  shelter  in  a  westerly  gale  with  the 
certainty  of  finding  it;  and  the  approach  is  bo  easy  that,  with  a  proper 
chart  and  sailing  directions,  any  seaman  of  ordinary  ability  should  be  able 
to  take  his  ship  in  without  a  pilot. 

DIRECTIONS  for  OBOUYILLE  BAT.— When  running 
for  GrouvJUe  bay  from  the  northward,  and  having  cleared  the  Pierres  do 
Lecq  and  the  Dronilles,  as  well  as  the  dangers  lying  near  the  north  end  of 
Jersey  according  to  the  directions  hereafter  given,  be  careful  to  give  Nez 
du  Guet  and  La  Coupe  points  a  berth  of  at  least  a  quarter  of  a  mile  when 
rounding  them,  in  order  to  avoid  the  foul  ground  which  projects  from  each. 


296  CHAXXEL  ISLUnM.— JKXSET.  [ouf-m 


Br  Ic^pin:;  IMle  IIoa^«  bloff  ia  fine  wiik  Tour  de  Boad  poii^  toil^ 
N.W.  ^  \V^  it  wiU  l*-ati  to  the  liorthmd  of  the  POko  rack  mad  dagui 
o5  Co<:p«  point :  and  La  Ryjoe  tower  ia  one  with  Efacniere  roek  S.W.|& 
will  le^i  to  the  e&jtwmrd  of  then:. 

The  North  Channel  tat^  Gonj  nmd  hm  belween  Fvm  kdge  ni 
the  xx>rth  cs>d  of  Bft&«  dn  ChACcsc,  uid  is  onlj  one  ijiitti  of  a  nfle  wiiett 
it5  narrowest  part,  with  a  i2<»pch  of  6  fhthoois  at  the  kwieat  tides ;  hat  it  ■ 
half  A  Ei:*<e  wid^  with  4  fkihocns  and  therefore  perlsetlj  nfe  willi  otdmsy 
c&nr,  eT^en  f^r  the  Iatj***!  thlp*, 

Y.zLur  :hl^  chAaz^l  with  Grouville  mQl  tooehiag  the  oppcr  part  of  Orgool 
M^ff  Sarin^  W.  \.t  s.  j  S.  :  and  when  Little  Seyiaoiir  heaecMi  cones  ii 
litsr  with  S^jt^nour  tower  S.S.W.,  or  the  Eqoefriere  rock  beacop  in  fine 
with  N\\  3  toww  bearing  S.W.  the  vessel  will  be  inside  the  Bane  di 
i^hatt^u.  ami  muft  haul  rooxHi  to  the  soothward,  to  bring  the  stoae 
turn  I  aboTv  Cccjv  gnani-hoiue  a  min)  in  line  with  the  breakwater4ioaBe 
umWr  Vervlut  Muf,  at  the  Inner  part  oi  St.  Catherine  breakwater,  baKing 
N.  )  \V..  which  15  the  fiftimj  leading  mark  inside  Banc  da  Chateau;  it  is 
»*«5v^  the  t>A^tcrr.  limit  to  :ho  anch^vsge  in  the  Onter  road. 

Sb..v.li  is  Iv  disirwi  :o  aixhor  as  near  the  diore  as  possible,  Coope 
j:iMi>rhous<'  turrv^s  c:.sv  b^  ^ut  in  a  little  over  Verdat  point;  bat  Little 
S^iuour  IvAvNMi  5lio',:Id  Ix-  kept  perceptibly  open  westward  of  Scjmoor 
towvr  until  Oorx^r  tc«\T  ccuies  open  of  the  pier  eod,  or  tmtil  the  best 
auoh\^rto|;  Uiu'N  p^cn  aVove^  An?  approached.  Anchor  as  coopenient 
A\\\xulu^  to  dirvvtior.s  alrvAdv  given. 

Tho  South  Channel  lio$  between  the  sonth  end  of  the  Bane  da 
i'Uli^au  Aud  tho  nvtV  h  ing  north  of  Petite  Anqaette  without,  and  between 
tho  (\MMUor  Aud  Iho  Oitlarvl  nvk  within  ;  the  latter  of  which  is  its  narrowest 
)mrt«  lvu\|;  hoiv  Iv^rclv  h.*ilt\*i  nult\  The  water  is  deep  throoghont,  having 
1)01  lo'i'i  Umu  S  f^thom^  at  tUo  lowest  tides. 

Appk^MioUii)^  tlu>  ohsinttol  fix^m  tho  northward,  keep  Coupe  guard-hoase 
Cutrx^t  o\iUhW  St,  t\ithoriw^  brvakwator-lighthoase,  N.X.W.  westerlj,  until 
t^Uu^>|>  lowov  ^vuu\ii  in  liuo  with  Gorey  pier  end,  to  clear  a  rocky  bank 
outMdo  Iho  lUuo  d\(  ChAU>AU :  after  which  the  Coupe  may  be  bron^t 
\\\n\\\f^  \\w  \y\\>9iX\s^X\^v  U^hthouso  a$  fur  as  the  outer  arches;  and  when 
M\\\  Uwxw  i»  Mvu  a  little  o|vu  to  tho  ^southwaxd  of  Little  Seymour  beacon, 
Imul  \\\  x\^\\\\\\  llto  mmlU  oud  of  tho  l>ank, 

Ko#ol  wtuduuU  ovrr  1<a  Crx^ti^  bluff  clears  the  inside  part  of  Sooth 
tld|{t^  wii\s),  but  tho  Usidiug  mark  is  Gor^y  chtirch^ire  open  sooth 
W'  Iho  i^ior  hoadt  umrktnl  by  a  white  patch,  N.W.  }  N.,  until  Ooope 
\H\\\\\ytk  \\\  Uno  ^'ith  tho  breakwater  houso  under  Verclut  bluff,  N.  f  W., 
^Ith  wbloh  run  up  to  tho  anohorago  in  tho  outer  road;  anchoring  as  oon- 
venlwUi  aftor  |HM«ing  tho  Uuo  of  Horn  rock  and  No.  4  tower,  according  to 


cup.Tn.]  SIBEOnONS  POS  0B01TVXLLE  BAY.  207 

directions  already  given.  Working  a  large  vessel  into  the  Outer  road 
through  the  south  channel,  do  not  open  Icho  tower  to  the  southward  of 
Scytnonr  tower  until  the  Coupe  cornea  to  the  -westward  of  the  middle  of 
St.  Catherine  hreakwater,  to  clear  the  stony  banks,  north  of  Petite 
Anquette,  on  which  there  are  25  feet  at  low  water. 

To  enter  Qorey  HarbOOr. — Eleep  GrouviUe  church  spire  on  the 
north  aide  of  fort  Henry,  W.  |  N.,  until  0«rey  church  spire  comes  open  a 
little  southward  of  the  end  of  Gorey  pier  N,W.  J  N.  j  with  which  mark 
run  up  to  the  entrance  of  the  harbour. 

There  are  two  aimJl  varpbg  buoys  off  the  entrance  ;  one  situated  necu-ly 
on  tiie  line  of  the  inner  part  of  the  pier,  distant  about  a  cable  from  the 
end  i  the  other  within  this  line,  distant  only  one  third  of  a  cable  from  the 
pier  end.  Pass  between  this  inner  buoy  and  the  end  of  the  pier,  being 
cweful  not  to  approach  the  latter  too  close,  as  the  flood  tide  setfi  round 
it  to  the  eastward  with  great  strengtli.  When  the  Horn  rock,  of  the 
Fronquies  de  Gr^ve  is  awash  there  will  be  10  feet  water  just  off  the  end 
of  Gorey  pier,  and  S  feet  at  the  outer  bertli  within  it. 

Grouville  Bay  to  the  South-eastward.— Bring  Gorey  church 

spire  open  of  the  white  patch  at  the  end  of  Gorey  pier,  N.W,  J  K.,  as 
before,  and  run  out  until  Icho  tower  comes  midway  between  Seymour  tower 
and  Little  Seymour  beacon  W.  ^  S. ;  haul  out  to  the  eastward  on  this  mark 
until  the  Coupe  is  seen  a  little  open  eastward  of  St.  Catherine's  break- 
water lighthouse,  N.N.W.  ^  W. ;  which  marks  will  clear  all  danger  off  the 
Anquettes. 

Grouville  Bay  to  the  Southward  through  La  Benf 

Chaunel.-~-After  clearing  the  Anquette  north-east  patch,  as  abore,  steer 
to  the  southward,  and  bring  Coupe  turret  in  line  with  St.  Catherine's 
breakwater  lighthouse,  N.N.W, ;  with  which  mark  pass  westward  of  the 
east  Anquette  patch,  and  to  the  southward.  As  the  line  of  Icho  and 
IToirmont  towers  is  approached.  Coupe  turret  may  be  brought  a  little  inside 
the  lighthouse ;  and  when  t«  the  southward  of  this  line,  and  clear  of  the 
Grande  Areonie,  Coupe  turret  should  be  brought  within,  or  to  the  westward 
of  the  lighthouse  at  least  one  third  the  distance  to  Verclut  point,  to  clear 
the  west  side  of  the  Basso  Occid  des  Bo:ufs,  from  whence  a  S.S.W.  course 
will  lead  down  to  the  channels  through  the  Ajiquette  gravel  banks  described 
at  page  290,  which  may  always  be  seen  by  the  tide  rippling  over  them,  and 
easily  avoided.  When  La  Moye  signal  post  appears  open  of  Le  Fret  point, 
bearing  N.W.,  the  gravel  banks  will  be  cleared,  and  a  vessel  may  haul  out 
to  the  westward. 

In  passing  through  this  channel  it  will  be  useful  to  remember  that 
Coupe  turret  touching  the  outer  part  of  St.  Catherine's  lighthouse  N.N.W. 
westerly,  leads  over  the  Anquette  north-etst  patch,  and  also  over  the  Basse 


9k  Mr»  MtM  -rf  WOK  'jvrwu.  as£i£.  ana 


*M  U*  ME-^/  yinA  *4  hasix€^  linx  £.  I7  S.  {  & ;  «^  Ca— «■ 

'/w'>t,f_  V/  tMirir  jmaet  4i(Usiw.  eo  T«a«-!  of  Wstj  fright  doajd  aoea^ 
Ui  fAM  iiav^;^,  «z«^  lb  •^taa^.  'jt  an  expaiezind  [cVx.  ssd  ai  ^e  inv 
ainj^  '/  Ujt  ii4t^ ;  nut  tkiMiJd  iqum-ng^ol  t«sc^  ^cBcaal};^  aua^x  to 

Oroarille  Bay  tfarongb  the  Violet  ChaiuuL— wLea  knine 

fJw!  mfAniti^^.  in  'n/rvy  r*Mi,  ijm^  Gcnj  ckimii'CpiR  apm  of  ike 
wMtM  fmU4t  '/a  tb«:  pHr  ImwI  X.W.  J  X.^  and  ran  out  until  die  Grae  Etae 
"ymiM  <M  wiiJt  lb«  iKMlli  M^  of  Liule  Bermonr  beaom  W.  by  S.  }  S. 
TU»  I^Ahi'^O  will  U  atircMt  of  the  OiAafd  rock,  where  Coi^  gaari- 
(XMJiM  Utrm  wjlJ  li«  «««o  a  liule  open  c«Mward  of  the  breikwaler-lMNBe 
mnUr  Vtmlnl  Muff,  wbidi  it  the  leailing  watk  lo  enter  the  Vklet  dwuM 
wttb,  Vfiufa  BypriMuMafi  the  Violet  channel  be  particDlar  that  Co^e 
ICnnriMuium  Uirrist  in  only  jott  open  eaMwsrd  of  the  hoose  at  Todat 
fMfint.  At*  a  i-Auxk,  it  will  be  niefnl  to  remember  that  eo  long  as  joa  can 
imti  uojf  |i«rt  of  the  whitn  lower  in  SL  Catfaerioe  bay  open  to  the  eaatward 
of  ArttUinmiU4  Uiw^t,  yon  will  be  quite  far  enongh  to  the  eastward. 
Antftlwr  Kood  tiiark  fur  the  middle  of  the  cbannd  when  abreast  the 
I'otit  KMir  I*,  Ilojiel  mill  tonehing  the  north  ride  of  Mont  Oigneil  caatle 
N,  t.y  W,  4  W, 

Wlwrri  ain'csft  the  Petit  Four,  KaramS  rock  will  appear  jost  shut  in 
wtlli  tli<!  Iil^ti  IoikI  Kbore  Noirmont  point  N.W.  by  W.  \  W^  and  Gnnde 
Ani|unttii  Ixwion  In  linn  with  the  north  side  of  Petite  Anquette  rock 
U.Vi,  by  K.  From  tliis  petition  ateer  so  as  to  bring  Coupe  guardhouse 
lumt  In  lino  with  Vorclut  point   house,  and  use  it  for  a  leading  mack 


OHU.m.]  SISBCnONS  FOB  esOUTILLB  BAT.  299 

BtiU ;  or  l»iDg  Btnuae  Platte  rock  on  a  S.W.  bwring,  aud  Bteer  direct  for 
it  uotil  Clrsnde  AntiueUe  beacon  bean  East.  In  dther  case  proceed  due 
West  from  Anquette  beacon  until  Icho  tower  cornea  in  line  with  Concbi&re 
rock,  when  tke  Boota  en  Ville  will  be  cleared,  and  may  steer  so  as  to 
pass  about  a  third  of  a  mile  to  tlie  southward  of  Conchi&re  rock ;  or  using 
the  sailing  marks  given  at  page  290  in  an  inverse  order  to  proceed  to  the 
westward  with. 

Anne  Fort  Bay,  between  Grouville  and  St.  Catherine,  is  imall,  and 
the  approach  to  it  dungerons,  from  outljing  rocks ;  there  is,  however,  good 
anchon^e  off  it^  which  is  used  occasionaUy  by  fishing  boots  and  other 
small  craft,  in  fine  weather.     The  principal  dangers  off  it  are  : — 

The  Seven  GrtineS>  ^  long  straggling  reef,  extending  to  the  east- 
ward fivm  the  Gross  Moie  for  the  distance  of  about  one  third  of  a  mile. 
The  highest  of  these  rocks  near  the  middle  of  the  reef  uncovers  7  feet  at 
low  water,  and  the  outer  Gnme  has  5  feet  over  it  at  that  period. 

LeB  Cloches,  lying  at  the  distance  of  one  third  of  a  mile  from  la 
CrSte  point,  are  the  southern  rocks  of  the  Fara  or  St.  Catherine  bank. 
They  dry  5  feet  at  low  water.  Between  these  rocks  and  the  Seven  Gnines 
lies  the  anchorage  off  Anne  port  above  referred  to,  this  anchorage  although 
o&ly  one  quarter  of  a  mile  in  extent  north  and  south,  baa  an  even  depth  of 
5  fathoms  over  it,  and  ii  sheltered  from  the  tide. 

ST.  CATHERINE  BAT,  on  the  eastern  shore  of  Jersey  to  the 
northward  of  mont  Orgucil  castle,  though  much  contracted  by  rocks,  affords 
excellent  anchorage  for  small  craft  in  2  and  3  fathoms  water,  over  a 
bottom  of  muddy.sand,  with  very  long  gcaea  and  seaweed ;  it  cannot,  how- 
ever, be  entered  or  left  by  a  sailing  vessel  but  with  a  leading  wind.  The 
bay  is  completely  sheltered  horn  northerly,  westerly,  and  south-westerly 
winds.  South-easterly  and  easterly  winds,  however,  hlow  right  in,  and 
at  such  times,  near  high  water,  there  is  a  short,  turbulent,  chopping  sea  ; 
in  proportion  as  the  tide  &lls,  however,  the  sea  subsides, 

A  harbour  o£  refuge  was  begun  in  this  bay  in  the  year  1847.  The 
northern  breakwater  Las  been  carried  out  826  yards  in  a  south-easterly 
direction  from  Verclut  point,  the  northern  extremity  of  the  bay,  and  over 
the  rocky  bed  named  the  Pierre  Mouillce,  and  has  a  depth  of  5  fathoms 
at  its  outer  end  at  low  water.  It  was  completed  in  1855,  and  forms  an 
admirable  pier,  with  a  lofty  parapet,  alongside  of  which  a  steam  vessel 
might  coal,  water,  land  or  embark  troops  with  ease,  in  any  wind  from 
N-N-E.  round  westerly  to  S.W. 

The| southern  breakwater  was  designed  to  extend  in  an  £.  }  N.  direction 
{raai  the  point  near  Archirondel  tower,  and  to  be  carried  out  over  the 
Basse  de  Fara.     Of  this  about  200  yards  has  been  built. 


300  CUANNEL  UUUnM. — JXBSET.  [cBtf.m 

ThU  hubour  wLen  compleieil  aay  at  no  distant  period  be  very  asefnl  ia 
hriDging  Jeraej  into  cloMr  commercul  comnronicstum  with  France ;  but 
from  the  great  streugth  or  the  tules  acrosa  iia  entrance,  and  the  dangeroiu 
Tocka  Mar,  it  ia  difficnlt  of  access  to  aailiog  venela  in  bad  weather,  and 
therefore  fit  onlj  for  ordinary  Tue  of  ateam  reesels. 

ItlOHT.— ~A  light  tower,  an  octagonal  fltnictnre  of  iron,  painted  while, 
and  30  leet  high  from  bue  to  vane,  atanda  on  the  outer  extremity  of  the 
parapet  wall  of  Vcrclut  pier  or  breakwater.  It  exhibits  a  Jixed  white 
light,  of  the  fifth  order,  at  GO  feet  above  the  mean  lerel  c^  the  sea,  and  is 
viaible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  10  to  12  milea. 

DANGERS  off  and  in  ST.  CATHERINE  BAT.— The 

approach  to  St.  Catherine  bay  from  the  Bouth-east  is  completely  barred  by 
a  large  bank  of  rocks  about  half  a  mile  square,  called  St.  Catherine  bank, 
the  outer  part  of  which  extends  to  the  eastward  ol  Archirondel  towN 
thrcG-quarteri  of  a  mile.  These  rocks  begin  to  oneover  about  the  last 
quarter  ebb,  many  show  at  low  water,  but  by  far  the  greater  number  never 
appear  at  all. 

This  bank  ia  bounded  on  the  south  by  Les  Cloches,  already  described ; 
on  tlio  cul  by  the  Grande  Fare,  or  Le  Fara  with  a  pole  beacon  in  the  centre, 
and  the  Grune  du  Nurd,  and  within  to  the  north  west  and  north  by  the 
Basses  do  Fnra,  and  the  Etot.  Of  these  rocks  Le  Fara  is  the  largest  and 
most  conspicuous,  being  about  half  a  cable  in  diameter  and  dries  9  feet. 

Fara  Ledge  about  one  third  of  a  mile  south-eastward  of  the  Grande 
Fora  is  a  rocky  bank  about  a  cable  in  diameter,  and  about  the  same  distance 
dutochcd  from  the  outer  part  of  St.  Catherine  bank.  The  least  depth 
found  was  21  feet  at  low  water,  but  there  may  be  a  foot  or  two  less. 
Ko.  2  tower  and  Equerribrc  beacon  in  line,  S.W.,  jnst  dears  the  south- 
coBtern  side ;  and  Little  Seymour  beacon  in  line  with  Seymour  tower,  SS.W., 
jnst  touches  its  western  extreme.  This  latter  mark  also  touches  the  onter 
eastern  extreme  of  St.  Catlierine  bank  in  28  feet ;  which  same  part  will 
bo  cleared  to  the  north-eastwaril  by  bringing  Coape  guardhouse  in  line 
with,  or  n  little  Oi>en  to  the  eastward  of,  the  breakwater  ligfathouse, 
bearing  N.N.W.  i  W. 

Eureka  Rook,  having  12  feet  on  it  at  low  water,  lies  off  the  end  of 
the  breakwater,  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  lighthouse.  On  the  rock  the 
north  side  of  the  breakwater  is  a  very  little  open,  and  No.  4  tower  is  just 
shut  in  with  Orgueil  [wint. 

mi^g  Fillon  Rock  has  only  4  feet  at  low  water,  and  lies  due  north 
tVom  Kuroka  rock,  distant  fVom  it  a  cable  and  a  quarter,  and  exactly  2  cables 
fVom  the  end  of  the  breakwater.  On  the  rock,  St.  Martin  chtircb-qnre  is 
Just  shut  in  with  the  breakwater  lighthouse;  and  No.  3  tower  is  just  ahnt 
in  with  Orgueil  point. 


OBiP.  m.]  ST.  CATHEBINB  BAY  ;   SAKaEBS.  301 

Within  St.  Catltmne  bftj,  on  s  line  between  the  brealnnter  light- 
house and  Archirondel  tower,  and  nearly  2  cablea  from  the  Ughtbonse  a  a 
rock  with  onlj'  8  feet  water ,-  and  another  rock  with  onlj  7  Teet,  Ijing  a 
Httie  to  the  northward  of  a  line  drawn  through  the  breakwater  lighthooeo 
and  St.  Catherine  tower,  and  with  Coape  gnard-honao  jtut  showing  over 
Yerclut  point. 

Caution. — ^Daring  spiing  tides  the  stream  seta  over  St.  Catherine 
bank  into  the  baj,  alio  round  the  end  of  the  breakwater,  with  great  Telocity, 
due  allowance  for  which  must  be  made. 

Anchorage. — There  is  barely  room  for  one  large  vessel  to  anchor  in 
St  Catherine  bay.  The  best  position  is  ofi  the  middle  of  the  breakwater, 
distant  fWim  it  about  a  cable,  or  1^  cables,  in  fi  &thDms  at  low  water. 

Small  Tessels  may  la;  farther  in  towards  the  depth  of  the  bay,  with 
St,  Martin  church-spire  in  line  with  the  south  extreme  of  the  binff  north- 
ward of  St.  Catherine  tower,  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  and  Seymour  tower  in  line 
with  Grosee  Moie,  S,  by  W.  The  depth  here  is  2  futhoms  at  low  water 
springs ;  at  the  distance  of  a  cable  within  this  position  there  is  only  one 
&thom  and  at  the  same  distance  off  shore,  3^  fathoms.  The  bottom  is  a 
mixture  of  fine  sand  and  mud  throughout. 

Directions. — From  Grouville  to  St.  Catlierine  bay,  run  out  of  the 
Inner  road  off  Gorey  with  Princes  tower  in  line  with  the  north  side  o^  or 
a  little  open  of,  fort  William,  until  Little  Seymour  beacon  is  seen  just  open 
west  of  Seyraoor  tower,  S.S.W.  ^  W.,  to  clear  the  Tres  Gmnes  and  fonl 
round  ontaide  of  them;  to  the  northward  of  which,  bring  Little  Seymour 
beacon  and  Seymour  tower  exactly  in  line^  to  pass  inside  Fara  ledgr,  in 
23  feet  at  low  water;  or  Ko.  2  tower  a  little  open  sou th-east ward  of 
Equerri^  beacon,  S.W.,  to  pass  outside  Fara  ledge. 

With  Conpe  guard-honie  open  a  little  eastward  of  St.  Catherine  break- 
water lighthouse,  a  vessel  will  be  clear  of  all  the  rocks  of  St.  Catherine 
hank,  and  may  steer  for  the  lighthouse,  hauling  into  the  harbour  when  at 
the  distance  of  a  cable  from  it,  and  anchoring  as  convenient,  according  to 
the  marks  already  given. 

At  the  distance  of  a  cable  souih  of  the  breakwater  lighthouse,  St. 
Martin  church-spire  will  appear,  nearly  shut  in  over  the  bluff  to  the  narth- 
ward  of  St.  Catherine  tower,  which  is  the  best  mark  to  run  into  the  bay 
with. 

There  ia  another  passage  into  this  bay,  lying  to  the  southward,  and 
within  Les  Cloches,  between  them  and  Le  Crote  point  which,  although 
much  encumbered  with  rocks  nearly  awash  at  low  water,  may  occasionally 
be  useful  to  small  craft  with  pilots.  A  very  useful  mark  for  this  small 
channel  during  the  lower  part  of  the  tide  is,  to  bring  St,  Catherine  tower 
on  the  east  side  of  Petite  Fara  rock,  to  clear  the  outer  rock  of  the  Seven 


r--^  T.i-^:^     ^^K 


".  T-C  j-bi  :i-*-r^  -1-.  I.i»4-  lii  C.:;wro^-  ud 
:.:  :a.--«~u-;.  l.ca.  T^ii^-JI  :i  Lz«  Vii  f"I:i=e:  tower, 
t:i.i  -.•zTVitrL  -^  P-_i;i  iz:  lir  Cr^z-i  rctli.  Tie  best 
.::!;    -a^,  ti^  ••izz^.ir.j  ::  ?■: "--T-aser^T  wiaJs.  is  in 

■  — --^i.'  '-frr-i-rz  :1-T  ij'i-Ai-^*:*-  sr.-3  :be  Ccnpe  bank, 

"'   ^_"  "*  ■'■"-■'^  ■''-'^  ~   -^'  ^■^-  i  ^'■'  '^^  •''* 

■  '-^  — -  '■  — ■  -;ni»ir-  i-:'  M.:n:  Orgnril  castle  in  lino 
:':1t  ■:r»k'»i:ir.  S.W",  bv  S.  This  anchorage  is  onlj  & 
s  TiW^Tsrb  caMr.  iherertre  requires  care  in  taking  up. 
:Is  iiL^zzT  Lrar  La  C«ipe  pt'inr,  atom  the  centre  of  the 


CUP.Tii:]  FLXQtTET  BAT.— TELEaSAPH   CABLE.  303 

Tel^^raph  CablB)  between  Jersey  and  France,  lies  in  a  N.W.  by  W. 

\  W.  and  S-B.  by  E.  \  E.  direction  between  Fliqnet  bay,  Jersey,  and  Firon, 
France.  The  shore  and  landing  in  Jersey  is  marked  by  a  white  mart«Uo 
tower,  on  wliich  is  painted  In  black  letters  the  word  Tel^raph,  surmonnted 
by  a  greea  disc. 

To  prevent  damage  to  the  cable  by  anchors,  grapnels,  oyster  dredges,  &c. 
used  by  fishermen,  the  following  directiona  are  given : — The  course  of  the 
cable  is  distinctly  indicated  by  the  two  towers,  which,  during  the  day,  are 
a  safficient  guide  for  clearing  it.  Fishing  vessels  on  the  coast  of  Jersey 
having  no  compass  can  avoid  the  cable  to  the  south  by  keeping  Coape 
point  in  one  with  Tour  de  Bozel,  and  to  the  north  by  keeping  the  goaid- 
house  in  Bonley  bay  in  one  with  Tour  de  Bozel. 

BOZEL  BAY  lies  between  La  Coupe  and  Nez  du  Guet  points,  and 
being  exposed  to  all  winds  between  S.  by  E.,  round  easterly,  and  N.W  by  N., 
vessels  never  remain  at  anchor  in  it  longer  than  to  await  water  into 
the  harbour.  In  addition  to  the  foul  ground  off  the  points  of  the  bay, 
there  is  a  rocky  group  called  the  Hiaux,  which  uncovers  3  feet  at  the 
lowest  tides,  and  lies  a  cable  from  the  western  shore  and  I|  cables  &om 
the  pier  bead,  with  Bozel  hotel  in  line  with  the  white  patch  on  the  pier- 
head, W.S.W,  There  is  also  a  sunken  rock  with  5  feet  water  on  the 
eastern  aide  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbour,  a  cable  from  the  shore. 

HAVRE  du  BOZEL. — This  small  bat  useful  harbour,  situated  at 
the  bottom  of  Bozel  bay,  has  a  stone  pier  capable  of  affording  shelter  to 
20  small  cutters,  such  as  are  employed  in  the  oyster  fishery.  A  great  qnantity 
of  cider  is  shipped  here  during  the  summer  months,  and  the  harboar  will 
afibrd  berthing  places  to  six  vessels  of  from  40  to  50  tons  burthen. 
North-westerly  winds  cause  a  great  range,  so  much  so  that  vessels  carry 
away  the  Inrge  hawsers  they  use  to  moor  alongside  the  pier.  Gorey 
harbour  is  preferable  in  every  respect. 

The  navigation  of  this  harbour  is  much  obstructed  by  a  large  flat  half- 
tide  rock,  lying  on  the  south  side  cf  the  entrance,  not  leaving  a  greater 
space  between  it  and  the  pier-head  than  to  allow  two  small  vessels  to 
enter  abreast ;  vessels  arriving  or  leaving  with  a  foul  wind  are  obliged  to 
kedge  in  or  out. 

Diroctions. — Approaching  Bozel  bay  from  the  northward,  and 
intending  to  enter  the  harbour,  keep  St.  Catherine  breakwater  lighthouse 
in  sight  outside  Coupe  point,  nntil  the  Koyal  hotel  at  Bozel  comes  in  sight 
to  the  southward  of  the  white  patch  on  the  pier-head,  W.  by  S.  J  S., 
which  mark  will  lead  to  the  southward  of  the  Hianz,  and  to  the  entrance 
of  the  harbour.  Give  the  pier-head  a  close  shave,  to  aroid  the  half-tide 
rock.    If  the  tide  should  not  serve  to  enter  the  harbour,  the  best  anchorage 


304  CEA^yEL  ISIASIS. — JEBSET.  [cbai-.tii. 

TiQ  be  fooDii  ia  ih-i  nt>rtlfw»t  ±:^  of  the  bsf,  with  the  Bojal  botd  in 
line  with  the  whli«  psteh  od  the  pier-hcad,  W^W^  and  tfac  lower  »nd 
the  npper  pan  of  the  w«ll  of  Xes  da  Gaet  fivt  in  one,  or  the  two  chinmeTi 
of  the  gnvd-hoase  in  the  fort  in  one.  To  keep  ootside  the  HiftOK,  do  not 
^ui  the  Tonr  de  Rozel  in  wiih  Nex  Jn  Goec. 

Tideo. — It  i^  high  wuer,  faQ  and  change,  in  Basel  bn7  nt  6b,  lam.; 
fining!  ri^  30  feeu  nenps  21^  feet. 

Tonr  dn  ROMI  >>  *  coaical  mass  of  rock,  155  feet  high,  and  semi- 
(letaehed  fnMii  the  point  within  it,  Inng  nboot  a  thitd  <tf «  mile  to  the  west- 
wanl  of  Rozel  harboa?.  The  tc^  oftbianKk  bgeneralljkeptwhitewaahed, 
and  then  fomu  a  most  ii»fal  mark.  Tlm«  ii  a  half-tide  rock  Ijing 
immediately  oS  it,  at  the  distance  of  three-quarters  of  a  caUe :  with  this 
exceptioa  the  af^ivwch  is  qniie  »fe. 

BOULEY  BAY,  •»  the  nonhon  $tde  of  Jerser,  hetween  Tonr  de 
Bosel  and  Belle  Hogue  pmnt,  aftxds  good  thelier  from  any  wind  between 
W.  hj  N.,  round  aontherlj,  and  &&&  The  oolj  dangers  in  and  neaf  this 
bay  are  the  lockr  |iaiehea  called  the  Oysiec  rac^  the  l^vvpeors,  the 
Sambues,  and  a  small  rock  named  the  Gmne  de  Vicard. 

Oyster  rocks  lie  within  the  Tronpenrs,  distant  1^  cables  trom  Meolet 
point,  and  diy  13  f«et  at  low  water. 

TronpeOTS  rocks  ncnr  the  middle  of  the  bay,  oatsde  tbo  Oyster 
neks,  may  be  described  as  a  small  rocky  bank,  having  two  heads,  lying  from 
each  other  abont  N.£.  and  S.W^  distant  a  third  of  acable.  Theonter  head 
has  10  feet  over  it,  and  the  inner  only  7  feet,  at  low  water  Sjpiogs.  On 
the  oater  head  the  inner  high  rock  of  the  Pierre*  de  Lecq  appears  a  little 
open  of  Belle  Hoogne  prant  N.W.  ^  W.,  and  west  side  of  Uenlet  piunt  is  in 
line  with  west  side  o?  the  high  cliff  immediately  above  it,  S.  by  W.  J  W. 
These  rocks  mar  be  cleared  <hi  their  sooth  ude  by  keeping  the  whole  of 
the  Fierres  de  Lecq  well  open  of  Belle  Hongne  point ;  and  so  their  iu»11inil 
nde  by  shutting  the  lai^est  rock  of  the  group,  near  the  middle,  in  behind 
Belle  Hougne  point. 

The  Sambaes  lie  off  and  to  the  eastward  of  Belie  Ho«^ne  point, 
distant  nearly  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  ai^»esr  soon  after  half 
ebb.  Ia  Conpe  guard-house  turret  in  line  with  Tour  de  Rozel  point  S.E.  J  S., 
leads  clear  ontside  of  both  the  Sambaes  and  Troapeurs. 

GninO  de  Vicard  lies  nearly  a  cable  from  the  shore,  between  the 
two  guard-houses,  and  b&a  2  feet  over  it  at  low-water  springs. 

Anchorage. — Outside  the  Troupeurs,  keep  the  whole  of  the  Pierres 
de  Lecq  at  least  a  point  open  of  Belle  Hongne  point  to  the  westward,  or 
Coupe  open  of  Tour  de  Bozel  to  the  eastward  ;  and  the  white  tower  of  Castle 
house,  situated  on  the  high  land  overlooking  the  bay,  in  line  with  Bonl^ 


OHAP.vn.]  EOZEL  AND  BOTTLET  BATS.  305 

pier,  S.W.,  in  8  to  10  fftthome,  gravel.  Or  further  in,  with  the  white 
tower  of  Goatle  house  open  of  the  pier,  bearing  S.W.  hj  W. ;  and  Belle 
Hongne  point  a  little  open  of  Vicard  point,  N.W.  ^  £.,  in  5  fathoms,  floe 
sand. 

This  ia  a  safe  anchorage  in  southerly  windH,  but  open  to  those  fVom  the 
northward.  Vessels  anchored  in  this  ha,y  during  S.W.  gales  should  there- 
fore  be  prepared  to  weigh  directly  the  wind  begins  to  veer  to  the  N.W., 
and  proceed  either  to  St.  Catherine's  bay  or  Goi'ey  road. 

BELLE  HOUGUE  POINT,  lying  about  amile  to  the  westward 
of  Boulej  bay,  is  the  highest  and — excepting  Grosuez — most  remarkable 
blnS  on  the  north  coast  of  Jersey.  A  reef  of  sunken  rocks  extends  from  it 
to  the  distance  of  2  cables  off  shore.  This  reef  is  cleai-ed  on  its  north-east 
ade  by  keeping  Coupe  turret  a  little  open  of  Tour  de  Rozel,  and  on  its 
north  by  keeping  Pleraont  point  in  sight  outside  Ronez  point. 

Glflkrd  and  Bonne  Nuit  Bays  lie  close  to  the  westward  of 

Belle  Hougue  point,  between  it  and  Fremont  point,  the  latter  being  a  high 
bluff.  La  Crfite  point  divides  these  points  from  each  other.  Giffard  hay 
is  small,  but  the  ground  is  clean. 

Bonne  Nuit  bay,  lying  westward  of  Gifiard  bay,  may  be  easOy  recognized 
on  neariug  it  by  St.  John's  barracks,  a  long  range  of  low  buildings  near 
the  middle  of  it :  also  by  Mont  Mado  mill,  which  stands  on  the  high  land 
above  them.  Near  the  middle  of  the  bay,  about  2  cables  from  the  shore, 
there  is  a  lai^  black  rock,  which  only  covera  at  great  spring  tides,  named 
Cheval,  and  several  sunken  rocks  bidf  a  cable  outside  it  A  mass  of  partly 
snnken  reef  extend  from  Fremont  point  out  to  the  northward  for  one 
quarter  of  a  mile,  the  outer  extreme  of  which  is  marked  by  a  rock  drying 
16  feet  at  low  water,  named  Deniie. 

AnChoragO. — The  beat  berth  lies  about  one-quarter  of  a  mile  north- 
ward of  La  Crfite  point,  in  7  to  9  fathoms,  sand.  A  vessel  will  be  here 
very  well  sheltered  from  sonthei'ly  and  westerly  winds,  but  she  must  be 
prepared  to  slip  in  case  of  a  sudden  shift  to  the  northward. 

Shamrock  bank,  North  from  Fremont  point,  nearly  three-quarters 
of  a  mile,  ia  a  sunken  rock  400  yards  in  diameter.  The  least  water  found, 
9  feet,  lies  on  the  inner  part  of  the  bank,  and  with  7  and  8  fathoms  close 
around.  On  the  9-fi»t  rock  Plemont  hotel  is  seen  just  within  the  outer 
part  of  Roncz  point,  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  the  western  house  of  St,  John's 
barrack  is  a  little  open  of  Fremont  point,  S.  |  E.,  and  Tour  de  Eozel  over 
the  outer  extreme  of  Belle  Hougue  point ;  these  marks  may  be  used  for 
passing  either  side  of  the  bank. 

St.  John's  Bay,  situated  between  Fremont  and  Konez  point,  is  but  a 
slight  indentation  of  the  coast,  and  can  scarcely  be  called  a  bay ;  lis  shore 
is,  moreover,  so  fringed  vrith  reef  as  to  be  almost  inaccessible ;  there  are 
<J  7M9.  c 


',\0i\  CIIAXNEL  ISLANDS.— JEKSET.  [«»ap.  vu. 

:il iiilviii^    ri>.-k:<  vMi'ii<Iiii}r    ix-iirly  2  ca1>Ii>s  from  lUe  shore,  between 

Hliii'Ii  itiiil  ilii- SliiiiiiriN-k  luiiik,  liuwi-viT,  id  a  poiun^  nearly  half  ftmile 
«hl.-. 

Siiaii^iTii  nil-  iiilt  ivil  iiKt  tu  iiltvuiiH  |m!uii);E:  through  thU  chumel  with- 
«ii(  n  [lilot,  imr  to  ii]>|in<:u-h  iho  ctwsl  lioieabout  nearer  than  a  mile. 

Thin  jwri  ot'  rhc  tnti^t  is  rt'iiiurkiible  from  the  extensive  granite  qnanies 
yiliii'h  ii'I'l  t»  it-  nuiiinilly  iHirn-ti  niiil  nilit  opiioBrance. 

KOUOZ.  Sorol  aud  FlemOUt  Points,  unlike  BeU  Hougue  and 
(iio^iii/  iii.im>.inv  nil  U-w  !it  thvinnitiT  extremes,  but  rise  within  at  rather 
•■ti-i'ii  iiii-liiii",  iiiiiiiii;:  with  ilir  lii;;h  level  pkteaii.  which  distinguiahea  the 
tii'iilii'.>:i-(  of  I  Ik-  i>liitiil,iiiiliMiiii('csbut  little  more  than  aquarterof  a  mile. 

Itioir/  mill  S.'ivl  jikIiiI- iiM'  MiTii-m,  but  bctwrcn  them,  at  tlie  distance 
ol'  liiilt'  a  ciilili'  olll^it^'  the  clioixl  of  the  biiy,  there  is  a  sunken  rock  with 
..iili  .!  ff-t  Wilier.  liilU'il  tiriine  it.-  Vieij,  which  n«iy  be  cleared  on  its  north 
siili-  liv  kiqiiii^  l.iiH'iiili  |K<iiil  oiKii  of  Roncz  point,  until  La  FlMne  pmnt 
ix  *(Vii  i>iu'ii  iif  Sofi'l  |«'int. 

LA  PLAINE  POINT  hns  a  m-f  extending  from  it  to  the  distance 
iif  hiilf  II  .-iilili'  lit  I«w  waU'v  ;  ou(>iil<'  i>f  which,  however,  it  ia  steep-to. 

I-Voiii  I. II  I'Idiiii'  I'uiiil  In  (lt-(-\i>  do  l.i.v<i.  the  ecia^t  is  cliifj,  precipitous, 
iind  ihiii^oixii-'  of  ii|>|iri>:i<'li.  Ii.i\iu<;  outlying  reefs  and  sunken  rocks  ex- 
(<'iidiii>;  iiuuo  ihiiu  tmi-  <tuiirter  nf  n  niile  from  the  shoiT. 

OKfiVE  DE  LECQ  BAY  lies  in  the  depth  of  the  bight 
lirlwi'i'ii  Si'i>'l  iiml  rioimml  iioint,*!  its  [Kisilbii  mny  be  recognized  at  a 
ilbiiiiK-.'  U\  II  wliiiriMi-^linl  nuirit'lU'  lower,  standing  near  the  middle  of  a 
hiKl.  -.ini.i;  l.,n..|,. 

'I'll.-  iiiicli»r:i;<c  oil'  (Iivvi-  ilo  l.i'iii  is  good  and  siife  in  all  winds,  except- 
:  llie  lust  i>o$ilion  U'iug  in  9  to  6  fathoms 
■r  from  S.  by  W.  to  S.S.VV.  J  W.,  distant 

fr il.  Iiiilf  1"  u  tiiiifl  .if   II  mil.-;  at    ilie  latter  pofition  Piemont  point 

will  111'  II  liiili-  "i"'!!  of  the  tinuid  IWiinct.  Thf  Uimgcrs  in  and  near 
(iivv...loI.....i.ire- 

LOH  DomioSi  tliti  hifjliosl  of  wliiih  dries  16  feet,  lie  off  the  eastern 
liliiir  ..f  ihi'  liHv,  II  iiiuirfir  of  it  uiiU'  from  the  shore,  iind  N.E,  by  N.  4  cables 
fiuiii  llii>  wliit<>  imirl.'llo  lowir. 

Gruno  do  Bccquot,  hnving  21  feet  water,  lies  N.E.  \  R,  nearly 
thieo-qtiaiUTs  of  11  mil,,  fi-om  (Jnmd  llocquia  head.  On  the  rock  Gfrosnez 
bhiir  appniis  11  liiil,.  within  the  low  point  of  I'lemont  W.  by  N.,  and  Grfeve 
tie  Leci.|  toiuT  S.  by  W. 

Gruno  de  Douet,  with  12  fuet  over  it,  lies  a  thii-d  of  a  mile  within 
Grime  de  Beequet,  imd  E.  J  N.,  one  iinnrter  of  a  mile  fi-om  Becqnet  head. 

GRfiVE  AU  LANCON  between  riemont  and  Grosnca  points  is 
a  BDiftll  but  Hfraarkablo  bay,  from  its  fine  level  white  sandy  beach  i  which, 


'"K  1 

ihiiMo  froii 

1   Ihv  > 

i.<rthwin>l 

Klllld 

,  uithci; 

'M>    dl' 

I..V4   tow. 

aup.TO.]        GEiiVB  DE  LECQ   BAT. — ECREHOS  EOCKS.  307 

however,  unlike  Grfere  de  Lecq,  is  alt  ooTered  by  the  tide  long  before  high 
wuter;  at  which  period  the  sea  rolls  into  the  numerous  caverns  of  the 
cliffs  bounding  the  bay,  cutting  off  all  communication  vith  the  high  land 
above,  and  impartiag  a  wild  aspect  to  the  coast. 

The  dangers  here  are,  a  rock  that  dries  14  feat  at  low  water  on  tho  west 
side  of  the  bay,  lying  a  cable  from  the  shore ;  fuid  the  reef  which  dries  at 
low  water,  extending  a  cable  from  Plemont  point. 

The  best  position  for  anchorage  is  off  the  middle  of  the  bay,  with 
GroBnez  bluff  bearing  about  West,  in  9  to  6  fathoms,  sand. 

Small  vesseb  bound  round  Grosnez  point  to  the  southward,  between  the 
pet'iods  of  half  flood  and  half  ebb,  and  unable,  in  light  winds,  to  stem  the 
northern  tide,  may  advantageously  anchor  in  this  bay  till  half  ebb,  when 
the  southern  tide  will  have  made  and  favour  their  pi'oceedinp;B  through  the 
swatch-way  j  or,  if  they  are  bound  to  the  eastward,  between  the  Pierres 
de  Lecq  and  the  island,  and  having  anchored  on  the  ebb,  can  weigh  at 
low  water,  and  carry  a  fair  tide  as  far  as  La  Coupe.  ■ 

Caution. — The  holding  ground  ia  not  good,  and  a  sailing  vessel  ap- 
proaching or  leaving  the  bay  must  be  prepared  foi'  unsteady  flaws  of  wind 
from  the  high  land,  and  varying  eddies  of  tide. 

Of  course  no  sailing  vessel  would  anchor  in  any  of  the  bays  dong  the 
north  shore  of  Jersey  in  northerly  winds,  but  should  any  be  so  caught  at 
anchor  by  an  unexpected  shift  of  wind,  it  may  be  advisable  not  to  weigh 
before  the  weather  tide  makes  to  ensure  getting  out. 

ECREHOS  BOCKS  about  midway  between  the  north-eastern  const 
of  Jersey,  and  cape  Carteret,  are  separated  from  another  rocky  group  to  the 
westward,  called  the  Drouilles,  and  from  the  Ecrevifiro  banks  to  the  east- 
ward, by  very  narrow  and  shallow  channels. 

The  whole  of  these  reefs  and  banks  together  occupy  an  elevated  plateau 
of  shoal  wat«r,  9  miles  long  in  a  Jf.W.  by  W.  and  S.E,  by  E.  direction, 
and  2  miles  wide.  This  line  of  reefs  and  banks  afi^ords  considerable  pro- 
tection to  the  north  coast  of  Jersey,  as  well  as  to  the  fine  broad  and  deep, 
channel  lying  between,  named  Le  Ruau. 

The  main  group  of  the  Ecrehos  rocks  occupy  a  space  near  the  centre  of 
the  reef,  nbont  three-quarters  of  a  mile  North  and  South  and  half  a  mile 
wide,  the  whole  of  which  space  dries  before  low  water.  Maltre  isle,  the 
largest  of  the  group,  marks  the  southern  extreme  of  this  reef  to  the  east- 
ward i  and  along  ilB  steep  eastern  side  to  the  northward  lie  the  rocky 
islets  named  Marmotier,  Blanc  isles,  Tas  de  Pois,  and  La  Vielle ;  tho  two 
latter  being  conical  shaped  rooks  50  and  54  feet  high  respectively. 

The  western  side  of  the  reef  is  marked  to  the  southward  by  the  high 
rocks  called  I^s  Cdtes  and  Colombier ;  and  to  the  northward  by  GrosBe 

C  2 


Bigorne, 


Ecreviere  Rock,  :-■-' 

Maitre  1,1.;.      from  iJiis  ror:k  U,  the 


-■'.  :'^:  i'r'.ive  ti|:b  water, 
j.*.  Sab'.CLit-r*  a:id  Grand 
rLr.  art  leji  eleTWcd  than  it, 
:n;lira_v  betwetn  Sabloaiere 
:'  :b'?  western  cbaanel  into 


:i.-:^mr!!OTi  of  i;:^  Ecrehos  gronp  covers 

•i  E.  bv  S.  i!ire?-qu&rtrri  of  ■  mile  from 

yjiithwaivl  extends  the — 

Banc  de  I'Ecreviere,  t!''-  ^outh  'ixtreme  of  whicli,  taking  the 

.^-fatlioin  contour  ]in<:  us  a  Ujiinjiiry,  lies  S.  by  E.,  nearly  2  miks  from  the 

n>ck.     lis  grftat(;.it  brc-aililj,  uear  liie  ii',nh  tnd,  is  half  a  mile;  tapering  off 

[0  \i'jir.  than  II  i|iiMi't<;r  of  orn:  mile  at  its  south  extreme. 

The  bunk  is  very  stKi:\i  aloni:  its  western  siJe ;  its  apex  consists  of  a 
tiiimber  of  semi-iletached  fine  jiravel  and  sandy  ridges,  convex  to  the 
muth-weRtwanl,  lying  nearly  parallel  to  each  other,  drying  from  3  to  5  feet 


CHAP.  VII.]  ECRBHOa   HOCKS ;    ANCHOBAQB.  309 

at  low  watei-,  and  separated  only  by  small  narrow  channels  of  3  to  8  feet 
in  depth. 

The  stream  setting  over  this  bank  cuuae  a  confused  sea  in  bad  weather. 
Bigome  rock,  and  Taa  de  Pois  in  line  marks  the  direction  of  the  south 
extreme  of  the  bank,  and  by  opening  these  objects  of  each  other  a  point 
either  way  the  end  of  the  bank  may  be  rounded  as  neceasary. 

GrouviOe  mill,  in  line  with  Orgueil  bluff,  passes  over  the  bank,  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  within  its  south  extreme,  awnah  at  low  water.  Therefoi-e,  to 
clear  the  south  end  of  the  bank  open  Grouville  mill  a  little,  to  the  south- 
ward of  Orgueil  bluff,  bearing  W.  by  S.  j  or  bring  Eozel  mill  iu  line  with, 
or  a  little  open  southward  of  Coupe  turret  W.  |  N. 

Bonde  SoUiei^,  the  southernmost  of  the  Ecrehos  rocks,  uncovers 

7  feet  at  low  water ;  on  it  Marmotier  islet  appears  on  the  right  high  or 
eastern  extreme  of  Maltre  isle  j  and  St.  Martin's  church  spire  is  a  little  open 
north  of  Fliquet  tower  W.  by  S. 

There  is  another  rock  of  similar  chnracter  and  appearance,  but  drying 

8  feet  at  low  water,  lying  a  sixth  of  a  mile  to  the  N.W. of  this;  and  a 
third  named  Petite  Noire,  drying  12  feet  at  low  water,  which  lies  to  the 
northward  about  the  same  distance;  the  three  rocks  thus  forming  aui 
equilateral  triangle. 

There  is  also  a  reef,  awash  at  low  water,  lying  a  cable  to  the'  eastward" 
of  Bonde  Selhere. 

There  rocks  may  be  cleared  on  their  S.W,  side  by  just  shutting  Plemont 
point  in  behiud  Roncz  point.  St.  Martin's  church  spire  in  line  witb 
Fliquet  tower  W.  J  S.  leads  clear  to  the  southward.  Tas  de  Pois  on  *itb 
the  east  side  of  Marmotier  N.  by  W.,  leads  between  Ronde  Selhere  and 
Ecrevifere  bank.  To  keep  clear  outside  of  Grande  Noir  rocka,  the  whole 
of  Petite  Rousse  rocks  must  be  well  open  of  the  high  rocks  off  Maitre 
isle.  Bigome  rock,  midway  between  Sabloniere,  and  Grande  Galeroj 
N.E.  ^  N.,  clears  Ronde  Selhere  rocks  on  tlieir  west  side. 

ANCHORAGE  is  to  be  had  south  of  Mattre  isle  and  within  Ronde 
Selh&re  for  small  vessels  only.  The  best  position  is  with  Marmotier 
houses  just  open  on  the  east  side  of  Maitre  isle.  North ;  and  Bigome 
midway  between  Grand  Galere  and  Sublonitre  N.E.,  in  5  fathoms,  gravel. 

Large  vessels  wishing  to  anchor  here  should  keep  outside  the  line  of 
Eonde  Selhere  rocks  aud  Ecrevit-re  bank  ;  andioj'ing  on  the  leadiug  line 
already  given.  Tas  de  Pois  on  the  east  extreme  of  Marmotier  in  8  fathoms, 
gravel. 

Nipple  rock  may  be  said  to  form  the  outer  or  western  comer  of  the 
western  entrance  to  the  inner  anchorage  off  Maitre  isle,  the  rock  near  its 
centre  dries  16  feet  at  low  water ;  at  this  spot  the  Grande  Galere  is  open 
of  the  south  extreme  of  Maitre  isle,  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  and  Grosse  T6te  a 


310  CIIAXXEL  ISLANDS.— JERSEY.  [chap.  rii. 

ittlc  op^^n  West  of  Colombier  N.  |  E.  A  rock  named  the  VraiCy  which 
dries  5  feet,  lio.s  S.E.  by  E.  J  E.  3  cables  distant  from  the  Nipple  rock. 
Sablonierc  and  Bigome  rocks  in  line  K^ad  over  this  danger. 

Les  DemiOS  are  two  rocks  scnrcelj  a  cable  apart,  whose  apexes  are 
exactly  at  lialf-tidc  level ;  they  lie  half  a  mile  north  from  Nipple  rock,  and 
about  the  same  distance  wesward  of  the  Ecrehos  main  reef. 

On  the  outward  Demie,  Marmotier  appears  just  open  southward  of  Les 
Cotes  rocks  E.N.E. ;  La  Vielle  a  little  open  west  of  Colombier  N.E.  \  N., 
and  St.  Martin's  church  spire  over  the  Coupe  W.S.W. 

RoUQUOt  reef  consists  of  several  detached  clumps  of  sunken  rocks 
lying  on  the  north  side  of  the  Ecrehos,  but  se^Mirated  therefrom  by  naiTow 
channels  of  deep  water.  The  highest  rock  of  the  eastern  clump  is  awash 
at  low  water,  an  lies  with  St.  Catherine's  lighthouse  midway  between 
the  tower  noiih  of  Mont  Orgueil  and  the  end  of  the  Plateau  above  Gorey 
S.  W.  i  S.,  and  Maitre  isle  beacon  midway  between  Gross  Tete  and  La 
Vielle  S.S.E.  i  E. 

Petite  RoUSSe  rock  has  three  heads,  elevated  12  to  14  feet  above 
high  water,  and  lies  on  the  north-west  side  of  the  Ecrehos  reei^  distant 
from  it  three-fourths  of  a  mile  ;  the  whole  of  which  space,  excepting  a 
naiTow  and  tortuous  channel,  is  filled  up  with  rocks,  a  great  number  of 
which  uncover  every  tide.  There  is  also  a  clump  of  dangerous  rocks  awash 
at  low  water,  lying  S.S.W.  half  a  mile  from  Petite  Rousse. 

Grande  Rousse  rock  is  elevated  22  feet  above  high  water,  and  lies 
rather  more  than  half  a  mile  N.AA'.  from  Petite  Eousse.  Like  the  latter  it 
is  sunounded  by  dangerous  reefs. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  cha  nge,  at  the  Ecrehos  rocks  at 
6h.  32m.,  springs  rise  31  feet,  neaps  22  J  feet. 

The  DROUILLES- — This  rocky  group  lies  about  3  miles  west* 
ward  of  the  Ecrehos,  and  nearly  4  miles  to  the  northward  of  La  Coupe 
point.  It  is  about  1^  miles  in  diameter,  and  consists  of  broken  detached 
masses  of  re(»f,  the  whole  of  which  covers  with  tlie  tide,  excepting  only 
three  small  rocks  near  the  south-west  side,  the  two  largest  of  which, — 

The  Burons  are  of  conical  form,  about  the  same  height,  7  feet  above 
high  water,  lying  only  a  few  fathoms  apart.  Although  so  small,  they 
are  most  useful  mai'ks  to  vessels  navigating  Le  Kuau  channel,  and  should 
therefore  be  made  more  conspicuous  by  building  a  beacon  on  the  outer  or 
larger  rock  of  the  two.  Outside  the  Burons  there  is  another  large  rock 'called 
Frouquie,  which  is  8  feet  lower  than  them,  being  just  awash  at  high  water. 

Joli  is  a  small  pinnacle  rock,  drying  6  feet  at  low  water,  and  lying 
W.S.W. ,  distant  nearly  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  great  Buron. 
On  the  rock,  Maitre  isle  beacon  is  on  the  middle  of  Les  Cotes  rock 
S.E.  by  E.  f  E.,  and  Bozel  mill  is  open  eastward  of  La  Tour  de  Bozel  S.S.W, 


CHAP.  VII.]        THE   DROUILLES. — LE   RUAU   CHANNEL.  311 

La  Hau  is  a  sunken  rock  with  12  feet  water,  lying  outside  or  to  the 
southward  of  Joli,  from  which  it  bears  S.S.W.  J  W.  rather  more  than  one 
third  of  a  mile.  This  rock  forms  the  northern  boundary  of  Le  Buau 
channel  at  its  naiTOwest  part. 

Platte  rock  is  one  of  the  largest  of  the  Drouilles  group,  and  marks 
their  southern  boundary  to  the  eastward  as  well  as  the  western  side  of  the 
entrance  to  L'Etoc  channel,  to  the  southward.  It  dries  33  feet  at  low 
water  equinoctial  springs. 

On  the  rock  Rozel  mill  is  in  line  with  the  fort  on  Nez  da  Guet,  bearing 
S.W.  ^  S.,  and  the  Great  Buron  N.W.  J  W.  three-quarters  of  a  mile. 

Among  the  less  important  rocks  of  the  Drouilles  group  are  La  Grese, 
which  lies  North  nearly  half  a  mile  from  the  Platte,  and  uncovers  29  feet 
at  low  water ;  Noire  Roque  lies  N.E.  by  E.  one  quarter  of  a  mile  from  great 
Buron,  and  dries  35  feet;  Clump  rock,  marking  the  northern  visible 
extreme  of  the  group,  dries  15  feet.  The  Grunes  are  an  extensive  bed 
of  rocks,  visible  only  near  low  water,  lying  half  a  mile  westward  of  Clump 
rock. 

La  Kosem,  the  northernmost  sunken  rock  of  the  group,  has  12  feet  over 
it  at  low  water. 

Le  But,  with  only  8  feet  on  it  at  low  water,  is  the  western  head  of  a 
group  of  rocks,  several  of  which  uncover  4  to  6  feet  It  lies  W.  ^  N, 
a  little  more  than  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  Great  Buron.  There  is 
another  rock  with  21  feet  water  over  it  W.  by  N.  ^  N.  IJ  cables  from 
Le  But ;  this  forms  the  western  danger  of  the  Drouilles. 

Directions. — ^Verclut  point,  shut  in  by  La  Coupe,  leads  westward  of  the 
Drouilles ;  but  a  better  mark  is  Rozel  mill  well  open  westward  of  the  Tour 
de  Rozel,  S.  by  W.  Maiire  isle  beacon  open  a  little  to  the  N.E.  of  Grosse 
Tete  S.E.  \  S.  clears  their  north  extreme.  Seymour  house  and  Verclut 
point  in  line  S.S.W.  \  W.  clears  their  eastern  side,  and  leads  through  the 
Passe  de  L'Etoc.  La  Vielle  and  Grande  Rousse  rocks  in  line  E.  f  S.  will 
lead  to  the  southward. 

LE  RUAU  CHANNEL,  between  the  Drouilles  rocks  and  Jersey, 
is  at  its  narrowest  part  2^  miles  wide,  very  deep,  and  free  from  danger  at 
all  times  of  the  tide,  although  the  confused  sea  occasionally  thrown  up 
by  a  strong  weather  tide  running  over  the  rocky  uneven  bottom  is  so 
violent  as  to  resemble  breakers. 

The  northern  entrance  to  Le  Ruau,  between  the  Drouilles  and  Pierres  de 
Lecq,  is  5  miles  wide,  and  free  from  danger  ;  the  approach  to  Le  Ruau  from 
the  westward,  between  Pien^es  de  Lecq  and  Jersey,  is  also  roomy  and  safe ; 
and  any  seaman  of  ordinary  ability,  having  a  good  chart,  should  be  able  to 
sail  his  vessel  into  the  outer  road  off  Gorey  without  a  pilot* 


312  CHANNEL  ISLANDS. — JERSEY.  [ciiap.  vn. 

Pass  de  L'StOC  is  formed  between  the  east  side  of  the  Drouilles 
group  to  the  westward  and. the  Grand  Rousse,  L'Etoc,  and  Fierco  rocks, 
besides  Grune  du  N.W.,  Grune  du  S.W.,  and  many  others  to  the  eastward. 
The  narrowest  part  of  the  channel  lies  between  the  Platte  rock  and  Grune 
da  S.W.,  where  it  is  but  little  over  one  quarter  of  a  mile  wide. 

Grune  du  S.W.  lies  on  the  east  side  of  the  southern  entrance  of  the 
Passe  de  L'Etoc,  S.  by  E.  half  a  mile  from  the  Platte  rock,  and  has  5  feet 
over  it  at  low  water.  From  the  rock  Seymour  house  appeal's  a  little  open 
of  the  breakwater-house  under  Verclut  point  S.S.W.  ^  W.,  and  Maitre  isle 
beacon  in  line  with  the  south  side  of  Les  Cotes  rock  E.S.E.  southerly. 

L'Etoc. — This  rock,  in  the  form  of  a  saddle,  uncovers  16  feet  at  low 
water,  and  lies  on  the  eastern  side  of  Passe  de  L'Eioc ;  E.  ^  N.  nearly  a 
mile  from  the  Platte  rock,  and  N.E.  |  E.,  a  mile  from  Grune  du  S.W. 
The  marks  for  it  are,  the  highest  heads  of  Pierres  de  Lecq  in  line  with 
the  northern  head  of  the  Burons,  W.  by  N.  ^  N.,  and  the  martello  tower 
northward  of  Mont  Orgueil  on  with  the  middle  of  St.  Catherine's  break- 
water S.S.W.  I  W. 

Le  PierCO  stands  near  the  middle  of  a  reef  of  rocks,  most  of  which 
never  uncover,  one  quarter  of  a  mile  in  extent  North  and  South,  and  lies 
E.N.E.,  3  cables  from  L'Etoc,  and  uncovers  7  feet  at  low  water. 

Grune  du  N.W.,  having  7  feet  water,  is  the  shoalest  rock  of  the 
northernmost  reef  on  the  east  side  of  the  Passe  de  L'Etoc.  It  lies 
N.E.  ^  E.,  l\  miles  from  the  Platte  rock,  and  N.  by  E.,  nearly  three- 
fouiths  of  a  mile  from  L'Etoc,  with  Rozel  mill  its  length  open  eastward 
of  the  fort  on  Nez  du  Guet  point  S.W.,  and  Grosse  Tete  rock  touching 
the  south  end  of  Maitre  isle  S.C.  ^  S. 

Directions. — The  best  mark  to  run  through  the  Passe  de  L'Etoc  is 
Seymour  house  in  line  with  Verclut  point  S.S.W.  \  W. ;  but  when  passing 
abreast  of  Grune  du  S.W.  (marks  for  which  are  given  above)  should  the 
tide  be  low,  Seymour  house  may  be  brought  a  little  within  or  to  the  west- 
ward of  Verclut  point,  provided  the  leading  line  be  regained  immediately 
afterwards,  to  avoid  passing  too  near  the  Platte.  The  same  may  be  done 
also  to  give  a  good  berth  to  a  sunken  rock  with  7  feet  water,  which  lies  on 
a  line  with  Tas  de  Pois  and  L'Etoc  rock. 

The  Passe  de  L'Etoc  has  a  general  depth  of  8  fathoms  in  it,  and  the 
bottom,  although  very  rocky,  is  tolerably  regular;  the  tides,  however, 
both  ebb  and  flood,  set  across  it  for  a  considemble  period;  no  stranger 
should  therefore  attempt  to  pass  through  without  a  pilot. 

There  is  a  5-fathom  channel  between  the  Grande  and  Petite  Rousse 
rocks ;  it  is,  however,  in  some  places  but  little  more  than  a  cable  wide, 
besides  being  tortuous  and  studded  with  rocks. 


CHAp.vu.]  LE  RUAU   CHANNEL,  813 

Above  lialf  tide,  a  vessel  under  12  feet  draught  could,  with  a  leading 
wind,  safely  pass  through  by  bringing  the  martello  tower  on  the  hill 
northward  of  Orgueil  castle  in  line  with  the  lighthouse  at  the  end  of 
St.  Catherine's  breakwater,  S.W.  ^  S. ;  but  below  half  tide  the  channel  is 
dangerous  to  navigate,  even  for  boats. 

Bearings  and  Distances. 


Milei. 

Corbi^re  to  Roches  Douvres  lighthouse 

W.  f  N. 

22i 

w 

Hanois  lighthouse 

N.N.W.  f  W. 

28^ 

n 

St.  Martin's  Point 

N.  by  W.  i  W. 

18^ 

9> 

W  estern  rock  of  Rigdon  bank 

N.  1  W. 

3f 

w 

L'Etac  d'Serk 

North 

IH 

>J 

N.W.  Danger  rock,  Minquiers 
(Brisant  du  Nord  Ouest). 

S.S.W.  1  W. 

"i 

99 

Outer  Danger  south  of  Hubaut 
rock. 

O.o.iit. 

21 

9i 

Icho  Bank 

S.E.  \  S, 

n 

» 

Frouquie  Aubert 

S.E.  i  E. 

111 

GENERAL  DIRECTIONS. — It  cannot  be  too  deeply  impressed 
on  the  mind  of  the  mariner,  when  approaching  the  Channel  islands  at  night, 
in  thick  hazy  weather,  or  when  navigating  amongst  them  under  such  cir- 
cumstances, the  necessity  for  taking  regular  and  careful  soundings;  for 
although  the  islands  and  rocky  reefs  generally  are  steep -to,  so  that  the 
lead  may  give  little  or  no  warning  of  their  near  neighbourhood,  yet  it  is 
possible  for  a  vessel  to  be  set  inside  the  boundaries  of  the  sunken  part  of 
some  of  these  dangers  without  seeing  them  ;  where  a  knowledge  of  the 
depth  afforded  by  the  lead  might  enable  her  to  anchor,  and  thus  save  her 
from  wreck. 

Moreover,  there  are  extensive  banks  of  gravel  and  sand  amongst  the 
islands,  as  well  as  other  occasional  irregularities  in  the  bottom,  which  the 
careful  pilot  would  know  how  to  turn  to  account  in  estimating  his  position. 
Again,  there  is  the  French  coast  within  the  islands,  where  the  soundings 
are  generally  so  regular  that  the  leail  may  be  taken  as  a  safe  guide  in 
estimating  distances  from  the  shore. 

Whenever  the  lead  is  hove  it  may  be  assumed  there  is  some  degree  of 
uncertainty  about  the  position  of  the  vessel.  On  such  occasions,  therefore, 
the  lead  should  be  kept  on  the  ground  for  a  minute  or  two,  and  the  setting 
and  drift  of  the  stream  noted.  For  as  the  tidal  streams  varies  considerably 
in  strength  and  direction  according  to  position,  and  diagrams  containing 
precise  information  on  this  subject  are  engi-aved  on  the  chart,  a  comparison 
of  the  two  might  occasionally  be  found  very  useful. 


314  CHANNEL  ISLANDS. — ^JERSEY.  [cilvp.  vii. 

When  the  stream  runs  strong,  tide  ripples  and  overfalls  always  make 
their  appearance  over  sunken  rocks,  or  banks  lying  out  in  the  channels, 
or  other  exposed  places;  in  foggy  weather,  therefore,  they  may  be  turned 
to  good  account  by  the  pilot.  An  anchor  should  always  be  in  readiness, 
when  navigating  any  of  the  channels  between  the  islands,  in  thick  weather  ; 
but  before  letting  go  always  turn  the  vessel's  head  against  the  tide,  if 
possible ;  otherwise,  the  chances  would  be  very  much  in  favour  of  snapping 
the  cable. 

By  Night,  from  the  Northward.  —  Having  made  cape  La 
Hague  light,  enter  the  Race  of  Alderney  as  near  mid-channel  as  possible, 
and  thence  steer  S.  by  W.  or  S.W.  by  S.,  according  to  the  tide.  Should 
the  weather  be  clear,  the  position  of  the  ship  may  be  ascertained,  and  the 
course  regulated  by  the  coast  lights  with  accuracy.  If  the  lights  are 
obscured,  Serk  should  be  sighted,  or  the  ship  should  be  anchored,  as 
convenient,  remembering  that  a  moderate  depth  and  good  anchorage  may 
be  secured  by  hauling  in  a  little  towards  the  coast** 

Should  there  be  too  much  swell  to  anchor,  any  position  desired  may  be 
maintained  by  means  of  the  lights  ;  or  in  hazy  weather,  by  a  near  approach 
to  Serk,  which  is  very  steep-to  and  safe  of  approach,  excepting  on  a 
south-easterly  bearing,  the  direction  of  the  Blanchard  rock.  At  the 
upper  stage  of  the  tide  bring  the  middle  of  Serk  to  bear  S.W.,  and  on  its 
lower  stage  N.N.E. ;  in  calm  weather  the  drift  will  then  be  away  from  the 
island. 

From  the  middle  of  the  Eace  towards  the  east  coast  of  Jersey,  through 
the  Drouilles  channel,  steer  on  the  above-mentioned  courses  until  cape 
Carteret  light  bears  E.  by  S.  St.  Catherine's  light  will  now  be  seen,  and 
by  keeping  it  open  and  shut  with  Coupe  point  S.  by  E.  f  E.,  will  pass 
nearly  midway  between  the  Drouilles  and  Belle  Hougue  point.  When 
inside  the  Drouilles,  open  the  light  of  Coupe  point,  and  do  not  approach 
Jersey  nearer  than  a  mile;  after  passing  the  light  bring  ^it  to  bear 
N.N. W.  ^  W.,  from  one  to  1^  miles,  and  anchor  in  9  fathoms  until  daylight. 

Should  St.  Catherine  light  not  be  seen  when  cape  Carteret  light  bears 
E.  by  S.,  proceed  with  caution  ;  bearing  in  mind  that  from  the  northern- 
most of  the  Pierres  de  Lecq,  cape  Carteret  light  bears  E.  ^  S.,  and  that  a 
line  drawn  from  one  to  the  other  of  those  objects  clears  the  north  extreme 
of  the  Drouilles  reef  by  a  mile.  The  Drouilles  are  all  so  low  that  they 
would  hardly  be  seen  at  night  until  a  vessel  was  amongst  them ;  but  as 
they  are  faced  to  the  northward  by  a  fringe  of  sunken  reef  or  bank,  the 
lead  might  possibly  give  warning  of  their  neighbourhood. 

*  In  easterly  winds  there  is  good  anchorage  in  Vauville  bay,  to  the  southward  of  cape 
La  Hague,  and  along  the  coast  to  nearly  abreast  of  cape  Carteret,  3  to  4  miles  from  the 
land  in  12  to  14  fathoms. 


CHAP.  VII.]  APPROACH  BY  NIGHT.  315 

The  Pierres  de  Lecq  are  steep-to  on  the  east  side  and  some  part  of  the 
rocks  always  visible ;  they  are  therefore  much  safer  to  approach  at  night 
than  the  Drouilles.  Of  course  none  of  these  or  any  other  dangers  should 
be  approached  under  circumstances  of  difficulty  with  the  tide.  Grosnez 
bluff  bearing  W.  by  S.  just  clears  the  inner  or  south  extreme  of  the  Pierres 
de  Lecq  reef. 

If  bound  through  Deroute  channel,  round  the  west  coast  of  Jersey  for 
St.  Helier,  from  the  middle  of  the  Race  steer  S.  by  W.,  or  S.W.  by  S.  as 
before,  until  cape  Carteret  light  bears  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  or  E.S.E.,  to  clear 
Blanchard  rock  off  Serk  ;  after  which  haul  out  about  W.S.W.  into  the 
Deroute  channel  clear  of  Pierres  de  Lecq,  and  continue  on  the  same 
course  until  the  white  light  on  the  Corbiere  rock  comes  in  sight  S.  by  E.  ^  E., 
a  S.  by  W.  course  may  then  be  steered  until  abreast  the  Corbifere  rock, 
to  the  westward  of  which,  at  the  distance  of  2  or  3  miles,  a  vessel  may 
heave- to,  and  wait  for  daylight,  or  for  a  pilot. 

In  thick  weather  do  not  approach  the  Corbiere  nearer  than  17  or  18 
fathoms,  and  lay  the  vessel's  head  N.W.  by  N.,  during  the  whole  of  the 
flood,  as  the  stream  sets  very  strongly  down  towards  the  Minquiers  reef, 
and  many  vessels  have  been  wrecked  there  through  neglecting  this  pre- 
caution. 

Should  there  not  be  too  much  swell  a  vessel  could  anchor  for  a  time  on 
the  great  bank,  in  5  to  8  fathoms,  N.W.  by  W.  1^  miles  from  Corbiere 
rock,  or  between  this  position  and  No.  4  tower  in  St.  Ouen's  bay,  where 
the  water  would  be  smoother  and  the  tide  not  so  strong. 

From  the  North-west. — From  St.  Peter  Port,  Guernsey,  steer 
so  as  to  sight  the  white  light  on  the  Corbiiire  rock  on  a  S.  by  E.  -J  E. 
bearing,  which  on  a  clear  night  will  be  done  shortly  after  passing  St. 
Martin's  point,  take  care  not  to  lose  sight  of  the  light,  and  when  Grosnez 
point  bears  E.S.E.,  if  it  be  desired  to  pass  outside  West  rock,  on  which 
there  are  6  fathoms,  steer  S.W.  by  S.  until  past  that  danger,  after 
which  proceed  as  before  directed  until  daylight.  A  steam  vessel  of  light 
draught,  in  charge  of  an  experienced  pilot,  might  in  a  fine  clear  night, 
and  during  the  upper  stage  of  the  tide,  safely  proceed  on  into  St.  Heliers 
harbour ;  in  which  case  she  should  approach  the  Corbiere  on  the  above 
direct  course  until  within  2^  or  2  miles  of  it,  then  endeavour  to  make  good 
a  S.S.W.  course,  until  the  rock  bears  East,  after  which  steer  direct  for 
Noirmont  point,  which  should  be  approached  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile, 
and  thence  steer  out  a  little  to  ensure  clearing  Pignonet  rock;  then 
E.  by  S.  for  the  entrance  of  the  small  road ;  keeping  a  look  out  for  the 
two  lights  on  Albert  pier,  and  when  they  come  in  line  keep  them  so  up  to 
the  entrance  of  the  harbour. 


316  CHANNEL   ISLANDS* — JEKSEY.  [chap.  vii. 

Prom  tllO  Westward. — Endeavour  to  make  either  the  Hanois 
light  at  Guernsey  or  that  on  the  Roches  Douvres,  and  fix  the  position  of 
the  ship  accurately  by  bearings,  before  shaping  a  course  for  the  Corbiere 
rock  or  Grosnez  point ;  according  as  desired  to  proceed  to  the  southern  or 
northern  coasts  of  the  island.  Should  a  vessel  pass  inside  the  line  of  the 
above  lights  without  seeing  them  during  foggy  weather,  the  lead  ought  to 
be  frequently  hove  until  ihe  Corbiere  rock  light  is  seen  and  the  position 
ascertained  beyond  doubt.  On  the  meridian  of  the  Hanois,  34  fathoms  will 
be  obtained,  shoaling  to  32  and  30  fathoms  along  the  Deroute  channel  as 
far  as  Serk,  whilst  to  the  southward  of  a  line  drawn  from  Roches  Douvres 
to  Grosnez  point  the  depths  will  vary  between  26  and  23  fathoms. 

From  the  South-west,— Do  not  approach  the  reefs  fronting  St. 
Aubin  bay  into  a  less  depth  than  10  or  12  fathoms,  and  should  this  depth 
be  obtained,  anchor  if  practicable,  and  wait  for  daylight. 

LIGHT. — On  the  Plateau  des  Roches  Douvres  is  an  iron  lighthouse, 
painted  white,  which  exhibits  at  180  feet  above  the  sea  a  white  light, 
showing  a  fiash  every  Jive  seconds  and  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a 
distance  of  21  miles. 

Pog  Signal. — During  foggy  weather  a  bell  is  sounded  at  intervals  of 
three  seconds. 

TidOS. — ^Along  the  northern  and  southern  shores  of  the  island,  between 
Grosnez  point  and  Belle  Houge  point,  and  between  Seymour  tower  and 
Corbiere  rock,  the  whole  of  the  flood  runs  to  the  eastward  and  the  ebb  to 
the  westward,  each  6  hours,  and  according  to  the  trend  of  the  land ;  the 
velocity  of  the  springs  being  about  4  knots,  and  of  neaps  about  2  knots. 

In  Grouville,  St.  Catherine  and  St.  Ouen  bays,  the  stream,  between 
half  flood  and  half  ebb,  runs  to  the  northward,  and  in  a  contrary  direction 
between  half  ebb  and  half  flood,  with  a  velocity  in  each  of  4^  knots  at 
springs,  and  2^  knots  at  neaps  ;  the  streams  will  consequently  meet  at  the 
four  principal  extremes  of  the  island,  viz.,  La  Coupe  point,  Grosnez  point, 
la  Corbiere  point,  and  the  Conchiere  rock. 

The  rotary  motion  of  the  tidal  stieam  round  Jersey  being  the  govern- 
ing cause  of  the  various  sets  close  to  its  shores,  some  description  of  its 
action  is  necessary.  Commencing  therefore  at  the  period  of  high  water, 
and  in  a  position  about  4  miles  S.W.  of  St.  Helier,  the  stream  which  has 
been  setting  S.E.  and  East,  quickly  altei's  its  direction  to  N.E. ;  which  a 
glance  at  the  chart  will  show  is  full  on  to  the  south  coast  of  the  island, 
making  the  space  included  between  the  above  position  and  the  land  what 
pilots  call  the  crown  of  the  tide,  causing  slack  water  as  the  shore  is 
approached. 


CHAP.Yii.]  DIRECTIOKS;    TIDES.  317 

The  north  side  of  the  island  lying  in  the  lee  or  eddy,  there  is  slack  tide 
there  also,  but  along  the  east  and  west  coast  of  the  island  the  tide  is 
setting  to  the  northward  at  its  full  strength.  At  half  ebb  the  offing  stream 
has  veered  round  from  North  to  N.W.  and  S.W. ;  the  crown  of  the  tide  is 
now  on  the  east  side  of  Jersey,  and  the  west  side  is  on  the  lee  or  eddy, 
making  slack  water  therefore  at  this  period  in  Grouville  and  St.  Ouen 
bays ;  the  stream  running  at  its  full  strength  along  the  north  and  south 
coasts  of  the  island.  At  low  water  the  tidal  stream  is  setting  from  a 
northerly  direction  on  to  the  north  shore  of  Jersey,  making  the  crown 
of  the  tide  on  that  side,  and  the  lee  to  the  southward  of  the  island  ;  at 
half  flood  the  crown  of  the  tide  being  on  the  west  coast  of  the  island  with 
precisely  similar  results. 

A  careful  consideration  of  this  revolving  motion  of  the  tidal  stream  will 
serve  to  explain  all  the  peculiar  sets  of  the  tides  met  with  in  the  bays 
round  the  island.  Thus  at  Noirmont  point  near  half  flood,  when  the  east 
going  stream  attains  its  full  strength,  there  is  an  outset  from  St.  Aubin 
bay,  which  runs  with  considerable  strength  between  Point  de  But  and  the 
Pignomet  rocks,  and  which  is  sensibly  felt  within  the  bay  as  far  as  St. 
Aubin  castle  ;  this  is  at  first  a  mere  eddy  of  the  flood  stream,  originating 
under  Noirmont  point ;  but  as,  after  half  flood,  the  stream  shifts  from  east 
to  the  north-eastward,  and  sets  right  on  the  Hermitage  rocks  and  Elizabeth 
castle,  the  very  gentle  incline  of  the  sandy  shore  here  and  the  great  space 
to  be  covered  causes  the  level  of  the  sea  at  this  jmrt  of  the  bay  to  be 
considerably  elevated  above  that  of  the  western  side  of  the  bay,  and  the 
water  of  course  runs  oflt  in  the  direction  of  the  lower  level. 

On  referring  to  the  chart,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  peculiar  configuration 
of  the  bay  tends  materiaQy  to  turn  off  the  stream  from  the  north-east  to  a 
northerly  direction ;  it  will  not  therefore  be  di£5.cult  to  understand  that  the 
small  eddy  under  Noirmont  point  being  united  with  the  westerly  flow 
round  the  head  of  the  bay^  causes  the  continuous  outset  from  Noirmont 
point  above  mentioned  ;  this  outset  runs  for  9  hours,  viz.,  from  half  flood 
to  high  water  and  during  the  whole  of  the  ebb;  it  attains  its  greatest 
strength  about  an  hour  after  high  water,  and  at  this  period  during  a 
westerly  gale  and  spring  tides  throws  up  a  dangerous  breaking  sea  or  race 
ofE  Noirmont  point. 

From  causes  similar  to  those  explained  above,  viz.,  the  offing  stream 
shifting  and  impinging  on  the  land,  the  tide  sets  across  the  harbour's 
mouth  at  St.  Helier  to  the  northward  as  well  as  into  the  harbour,  during 
the  whole  of  the  flood,  and  out  or  to  the  southward  on  the  ebb ;  except 
near  the  bridge  inside  Elizabeth  castle,  where  the  tide  sets  north-westerly 
from  last  quarter  flood  until  the  bridge  is  awash  at  one  foot  under  half 
tide. 


318 


CHANNEL   ISLANDS. — JERSEY. 


[chap.  vn. 


Out  in  the  offing  to  the  south-westward,  clear  of  the  island,  the  strength 
of  the  tidal  stream,  both  ebb  and  flood,  is  found  to  run  in  a  N.W.  and  S.E. 
direction,  remaining  longer  near  those  points  than  anj  other  ;  and  it  has 
been  already  shown,  that  near  high  water  it  quickly  changes  its  course 
to  East  and  North-east,  at  this  latter  point  running  full  on  the  island  and 
making  high  water  there.  It  does  not  stay  any  time  on  this  point,  how- 
ever, but  it  continues  to  veer  round  by  the  north  until  it  attains  a  north- 
westerly direction,  where  its  shifting  movement  is  much  slower;  the 
strength  of  this  north-westerly  stream  is  felt  at  half  ebb  on  the  south  coast 
of  Jersey.  To  arrive  at  a  right  understanding  of  the  force  and  effect  of 
the  ocean  swell  along  the  south  coast  of  Jersey  in  westerly  gales  it  will  be 
necessary  to  follow  this  changing  direction  of  the  offing  stream. 

An  hour  before  high  water,  on  the  slacking  of  the  south-easterly  stream 
in  the  offing,  the  westerly  stream  sets  round  Noirmont  point,  and  to  the 
westward  of  it ;  checking  the  advancing  westerly  swell  during  gales  from 
that  quarter,  and  causing  it  to  break  heavily.  As  this  natural  break- 
water forms  at  Noirmont  point  and  its  outlying  ree&,  the  water  within  and 
to  leeward,  both  in  St.  Aubin  bay  and  the  road  of  St  Helier,  becomes 
smoother,  and  as  the  westerly,  or  ebb  stream  increases  in  strength  so 
does  the  swell  continue  te  decrease  within.  After  the  tide  has  fallen  below 
half  ebb,  the  outlying  ree£s  gradually  uncovering  with  the  tide,  assist 
materially  in  blocking  the  swell  out,  but  after  low  water  the  offing 
stream  changes ;  the  westerly  swell  rolls  in  again  with  the  southerly  stream 
increasing  in  force  with  the  rising  flood,  until  again  checked  as  before  by 
the  slacking  of  the  offing  stream  and  the  making  of  the  westerly  stream  in 
shore. 


319 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

CAPE   DE   LA  HAGUE  TO    GRANVILLE,   INCLUDING  ILES    CHAUSEY 

AND  PLATEAU  DES  MINQUIERS. 


VARIATION  IN  1882. 
Cape  de  la  Hague      -        -        -     18°  50' W. 
IlesChausey     -        ,        ,        .     18°  20' W. 


Cape  de  la  Hague,  the  Nez-de-Jobourg,  Goury  harbour,  the  dangers  in 
the  vicinity,  and  the  directions  for  avoiding  them,  have  been  given  in  pages 
5  to  7.  The  dangerous  rocks  off  the  cape,  both  to  the  westward  and 
to  the  northward,  and  the  breakers,  which  may  be  discerned  almost  a  mile 
from  the  shore,  render  it  prudent  for  a  stranger  never  to  shut  ill  Rosel  point 
with  cape  Flamanville,  unless  the  Ortach  rock,  or  the  Casquets,  are  open 
to  the  northward  of  Alderney,  particularly  during  the  north-eastern  stream 
and  a  westerly  wind.  The  best  plan  is  to  endeavour  to  keep  as  near  as 
possible  in  the  middle  of  the  Race  of  Alderney.  With  easterly  winds 
cape  Carteret  guard-house  may  be  substituted  for  Rosel  point,  if  clear  of 
the  Trepieds  or  Huquets  de  Jobourg.* 

From  Nez-de-Jobourg  a  precipitous  coast,  formed  by  cliffs  of  equal 
height,  extends  S.E.  4  miles  as  far  as  the  sandy  beach  bordering  Vauville 
bay.  These  cliffs  are  intersected  by  narrow  and  deep  valleys,  and  their 
bases  are  bordered  by  rocks,  which  in  some  places  extend  3  cables  into  the 
offing.  The  tops  of  the  hills  adjoining  the  coast  are  at  about  the  same 
elevation  as  the  Nez,  and  they  unite  by  a  gentle  rise  with  the  highest  land, 
upon  which,  at  If  miles  E.  by  S.  of  the  Nez,  stands  Jobourg  church. 

The  Nez-de-Jobourg  is  surrounded  by  a  sort  of  rocky  bamer,  which 
extends  out  a  mile  in  a  north-west  direction  from:  the  Nez,  and  terminates 
in  the  westernmost  of  two  rocky  flats,  named  Basses  de  la  Dossi^re,  upon 
which  there  are  only  9  feet  at  low  water.  The  Dossiere  rock  lies  4  cables 
to  the  northward  of  the  Nez,  and  uncovers  16  feet.  It  is  the  highest  rock 
of  the  barrier,  and  the  local  pilot  make  use  of  it  as  a  half-tide  rock,  as  it 
covers  about  the  time  of  half-flood  on  the  shore,  at  which  time  the  flood 
stream  begins  to  be  felt  in  Alderney  Race  and  around  the  Nez.     The 


♦  See  Admiralty  chart : — Channel  islands  and  coast  of  France,  No.  2,669  a  b ;  scale 
m  B  0*5  inch. 


.  I 


320  CAPE  DE  LA  HAGUE  TO   GRANVILLE.         [chap.  nn. 

Greniquet  rock  (page  6),  in  line  with  the  low  point  of  cape  de  la  Hague, 
leads  close  to  the  westward  of  the  foul  ground  off  the  Nez. 

HUQUETS  de  JOBOUBG  is  the  name  given  to  a  rocky  range 
lying  parallel  to  and  ahout  1  \  miles  £rom  the  shore,  between  the  bearings  of 
S.W.  and  S.S.E.  from  the  Nez-de-Jobourg.  It  extends  rather  more  than 
2  miles  in  a  S.E.  and  N.W.  direction,  and  the  highest  heads  on  it  are  named 
Basses  St.  Gilles,  and  Huquets  de  YauviUe. 

Basses  St.  Oilles  are  three  rocky  heads,  and  on  the  highest,  at  the 
north-east  point  of  the  above  range,  there  are  only  7  feet  at  low  water. 
The  western  head,  with  19  feet  on  it,  lies  at  the  western  extreme  of  the 
range ;  and  the  third  head,  a  small  isolated  rock  with  5  fathoms  on  it,  lies 
a  quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  7  feet.  Rosel  point  seen 
opening  of  cape  Flamanville,  S.  ^  £.,  leads  6  cables  to  the  westward  of 
the  western  head ;  and  the  lighthouse  at  cape  de  la  Hague  in  line  with  the 
summit  of  the  Greniquet  rock  N.N.E.  \  E.,  leads  a  quarter  of  a  mile  to 
the  eastward  of  the  7  feet  head,  and  midway  between  it  and  the  Huqnets 
de  Jobourg. 

It  will  be  prudent,  when  mnning  through  the  Race  of  Aldemey,  not  to 
shut  in  Rosel  point  until  well  clear  of  these  rocks,  nor  to  bring  cape  de  la 
Hague  light  during  the  night  more  northerly  than  N.E,  ^  N.,  unless  within 
an  hour  of  high  water. 

The  highest  rock  on  that  part  of  Huquets  de  Jobourg  range,  which  lies 
half  a  mile  south-east  of  the  St.  Gilles,  uncovers  13  feet  at  the  lowest  tides. 
Two  small  rocks,  named  the  Calenfriers,  lie  upon  the  north-west  part  of 
the  reef,  and  uncover  2  feet, 

Huquets  de  Vauville  lies  a  third  of  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Huquets  de  Jobourg,  and  forms  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  range.  This 
reefs  is  of  small  extent,  and  the  highest  head  on  it,  which  uncovens  15  feet 
at  the  lowest  tides,  is  considered  a  half-tide  reck  by  the  pilots,  who,  when 
they  are  waiting  in  Vauville  bay  for  the  most  favourable  moment  to  cross 
Aldemey  Race,  weigh  when  its  summit  is  about  2  feet  above  water,  and 
gain  an  offing  in  order  to  pass  to  the  westward  of  the  St.  Gilles. 

CAUTION. — ^The  flood  stream  begins  to  gain  strength  when  the 
Huquets  de  Vauville  and  the  Dossiere  rocks  are  covered,  and  runs  with 
great  rapidity  towards  the  dangers  just  described,  as  well  as  over  the  rocky 
barrier  surrounding  the  Nez-de-Jobourg;  a  sailing  vessel,  therefore, 
entering  the  channel  which  separates  the  Huquets  de  Jobourg  from  the 
coast  is  liable  to  be  drifted  upon  this  barrier,  unless  the  wind  is  favourable, 
and  sufficiently  strong  to  ensure  her  stemming  the  stream. 

ANCHORAGES. — The  coast  of  Normandy  affi^rds partial  anchorage 
and  shelter  against  easterly  winds,  but  a  stranger  must  carefully  attend  to 
the  different  leading  marks,  or  in  the  event  of  thick,  weather,  when  these 


CHAP,  vni.]  HXJQUETS  DE   JOBOURG.—  ANSE  DE  VAUVILLE.  321 

caiiDOt  be  discerned^  he  should  anchor  in  such  a  depth  as  to  allow  for  the 
falling  of  the  tide,  which  along  this  coast  may  be  estimated  from  30  to 
42  feet  daring  the  equinoxes,  and  from  14  to  20  feet  during  ordinary  neaps, 
increasing  in  sailing  southerly,  and  the  reverse  when  sailing  northerly. 

The  anchoitiges  most  free  from  the  irregularities  with  which  the  ground 
along  this  coast  abounds  are,  Yauville  bay,  Sciotot  bay,  port  Bail,  St. 
Germain  road,  and  Begneville  road ;  but  the  three  latter  can  be  used  by 
small  vessels  only,  as  there  are  not  more  than  2^  or  3  fathoms  in  either  at 
low  water.  The  harbours  along  the  coast  all  dry  out  at  2^  hours  ebb,  and 
TCflsels  begin  to  sue  at  about  one  hour  ebb. 

ANSE  de  VAUVILLE,  formed  between  the  Nez-de-Jobourg  and 
cape  Flamanville,  affords  good  shelter  against  all  winds  from  South,  round 
easterly,  to  N.E.,  in  4  to  12  fathoms  over  a  bottom  of  fine  hard  sand.  This 
bay  is  much  resorted  to  by  merchant  vessels  and  coasters  overtaken  by  a 
calm,  or  unable  to  save  their  tide  through  the  Race  of  Alderney,  or  for  want 
of  water  to  proceed  to  the  southward  over  the  flats  lying  to  the  southward 
of  cape  Carteret ;  but  they  should  be  prepared  to  weigh  and  gain  an  offing 
if  the  wind  veers  to  the  westward.     When  the  wind  blows  off  shore,  and  "j 

particularly  from  the  S.E.,  there  is  a  heavy  surf  on  the  beach,  which  renders  ^ 

landing  impossible;  but  at  the  distance  of  one  mile  from  the  shore  the  sea 
is  smooth,  and  there  is  but  little  swell.  At  the  head  of  the  bay,  between 
Yauville  and  Siouville,  which  are  distant  from  each  other  4^  miles,  the 
shore  at  the  foot  of  the  high  land  is  low  and  covered  with  sand-hills. 

The  coast  for  2^  miles  to  the  south-east  of  the  Nez-de-Jobourg  is 
bordered  by  rocks  as  far  as  3  cables  from  the  shore  ;  the  most  dangerous  ^ 

are  the  Huitriere,  the  Sidman,  the  Foraine,  the  Brequets,  and  the  Ronde.  "* 

The  three  fii-st  uncover  from  10  to  11  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  and  the 
Bonde  15  feet ;  the  Brequets  never  cover. 

Directions. — Having  passed  through  the  Race  of  Alderney,  and 
intending  to  anchor  in  Yauville  bay,  the  best  shelter,  with  the  wind 
between  N.E.  and  East,  will  be  found  on  the  north  side  of  the  bay  under 
the  high  land  of  the  Nez-de-Jobourg ;  but  to  avoid  the  dangers  off  the 
Nez,  do  not  bring  the  lighthouse  at  cape  de  la  Hague  to  the  northward  of 
N.E.  ^  N.,  nor  shut  in  Rosel  point  with  cape  Flamanville,  until  the  Nez 
bears  N.E.  ^  E.,  and  Vauville  church  E.  by  S.  ^  S.,  when  stand  in  for  the 
anchorage  on  the  latter  bearing.  With  the  wind  between  East  and  South 
the  best  shelter  will  be  found  under  the  high  land  of  cape  Flamanville  on 
the  south  side  of  the  bay  ;  in  rounding  that  cape,  however,  from  the  south. 
ward,  care  must  be  taken  at  night  to  avoid  the  foul  ground  off  it,  which  'A 

may  be  done  by  keeping  cape  de  la  Hague  light  in  sight  to  the  westward 
of  the  Nez,  or  not  to  stand  into  less  than  10  fathoms.  -^ 

Q  7049.  X 


1 


CHAP.vm.]      PORT  OF  DI]£lETTE. — ^ANSE  DE  SCIOTOT-  323 

as  the  bottom  is  hard,  every  precaution  must  be  taken  to  prevent  the  vessel 
from  falling  over. 

A  Life  Boat  is  stationed  at  this  port. 

LIGHTS. — Two  fixed  harbour  lights  are  exhibited  at  port  Di^lette, 
and  when  in  line  lead  through  the  channel  to  the  harbour.  The  outer  is  a 
fixed  light  exhibited  at  the  extremity  of  the  new  pier,  and  shows  white 
seaward  and  red  towards  the  land  from  the  bearing  of  S.S.E.,  this  bearing 
of  the  white  light  leads  clear  to  the  westward  of  Huquets  de  Jerbourg,  and 
the  Basses  St.  Gilles.  The  light  is  elevated  23  feet  above  high  water,  and 
in  clear  weather  the  white  light  should  be  seen  from  a  distance  of  9  miles. 
The  other  is  a  red  light  75  feet  above  high  water ;  it  stands  610  yards 
S.S.E.  I  £.  of  the  former,  and  may  be  seen  9  miles. 

A  small  green  light  indicates  the  position  of  the  old  pier. 

Directions. — The  direction  of  the  channel  leading  to  port  Di^lette 
is  pointed  out  by  the  tops  of  two  remarkable  little  conical  hills,  forming 
the  northern  boundary  of  the  valley  of  Di61ette.  When  within  a  mile  of 
the  port,  open  the  summit  of  the  hill  which  has  the  ruins  of  an  old 
semaphore  on  it,  a  little  to  the  northward  of  the  summit  of  the  other  hill, 
and  keep  a  good  look  out  for  the  beacon  and  lighthouse  on  new  pier.  As 
soon  as  the  lighthouse  is  made  out,  steer  to  pass  about  half  a  cable  to  the 
northward  of  it,  and  then  if  bound  into  the  old  harbour,  steer  direct  for  the 
pier-head,  which  round  as  close  as  possible  in  order  to  avoid  the  Pierre 
de  la  Eiviere. 

With  moderate  winds  between  West,  round  Northerly,  and  N.E.,  the 
above  directions  can  be  followed  by  vessels  drawing  not  more  than  10  feet 
water,  from  half  an  hour  before  to  half  an  hour  after  high  water ;  but 
when  the  wind  is  fresh  from  that  quarter  they  can  only  enter  it  at  high- 
water  spring. 

With  the  wind  between  West  and  South  a  position  should  be  gained  to 
the  south-west  of  the  harbour  before  bearing  up  for  the  lighthouse.  With 
a  head  wind  the  channel  should  not  be  attempted  without  a  pilot. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water.  Ml  and  change,  in  port  Dielette  at  6h.  40m, ; 
springs  rise  27  feet,  neaps  20|  feet,  and  the  tide  rises  above  the  bottom  at 
the  entrance  (which  dries  16  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides),  17  feet 
at  great  springs,  14  or  15  feet  at  ordinaiy  springs,  and  about  4  or  5  feet 
at  neaps. 

CAPE  de  FLAMANVILLE  is  a  high  bluff  point,  with  a  guard- 
house on  its  summit,  bearing  S.  ^  W.  about  9  miles  from  the  Nez-de- 
Jobourg.  It  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  three-quarters  of  a 
mile,  or  within  the  depth  of  10  fathoms  at  low  water,  as  it  is  skirted  with 
dangers  extending  half  a  mile  from  the  shore;  they,  however,  may  be 

X  2 


322  CAPE  DE  LA  HAGUE  TO   GEANVILLE.         [cheiap.  vm. 

When  leaving  this  anchorage  to  enter  the  Kace,  weigh  when  the  summit 
of  the  highest  rock  of  the  Huquets  de  Jobourg  is  about  2  feet  above 
water,  that  is,  at  half  or  three-quarters  of  an  hour  before  the  commence- 
ment of  the  flood  stream,  to  profit  by  the  last  of  the  ebb  and  the  slack 
water  to  pass  outside  that  reef  and  the  St.  Gilles ;  neglecting  this  pre- 
caution, there  is  danger  of  being  drifted  between  the  Huquets  and  the 
shore,  where  the  rapidity  of  the  stream  and  the  badness  of  the  bottom 
render  anchoring  impossible^  and  of  being  carried  upon  the  rocks  off  the 
Nez,  where  the  stream  runs  with  great  violence. 

PORT  de  DI^LETTE,  situated  in  the  southern  part  of  Vauville 
bay  at  2  miles  north-east  of  cape  Flamanville,  has  two  harbours  sheltered 
from  N.E.,  round  easterly,  to  S.W.  by  the  high  land,  and  from  S.W.  round 
westerly,  to  North  by  a  new  pier,  which  has  been  constructed  a  short 
distance  westward  of  the  old  pier,  and  forms  the  outer  harbour,  having  in 
its  entrance  a  depth  of  3  feet  at  low  water,  ordinary  springs  ;  the  bottom  of 
this  harbour  consists  of  soft  sand  with  a  few  ledges  of  rocks,  one  to  6  feet 
above  the  sand  (these  rocks  are  being  removed  May,  1881).* 

The  northern  side  of  the  channel  leading  to  these  harbours  is  marked  by 
a  beacon  placed  on  a  rock  which  uncovers  17  feet,  E.  by  N.  J  N.  197  yards 
from  the  end  of  the  new  pier,  and  N.  |  W.  344  yards  from  the  old  pier- 
head. This  rock  forms  the  southern  edge  of  a  rocky  bed  joining  the  shore 
north-eastward  of  the  harbour,  and  which  in  rough  weather  greatly  breaks 
the  force  of  the  sea.  This  channel  lies  in  a  north-westerly  direction,  and  is 
only  about  a  cable  broad,  being  narrowed  by  low  rocky  ledges,  which 
uncover  at  low  water  a  cable  outside  the  beacon  and  theend  of  the  new  pier. 
These  ledges  are  low,  and  cause  in  rough  weather  a  heavy  eea,  which  will 
be  avoided  by  keeping  in  the  direction  of  the  channel.  Near  the  entrance 
of  the  old  harbour  the  channel  is  suddenly  narrowed  by  a  rock,  named 
Pierre  de  la  Riviere,  dangerous  to  vessels  working  in  ;  it  lies  E.  by  N.  \  N, 
95  yards  from  the  old  pier  head. 

The  old  harbour  will  admit  vessels  of  about  10  or  12  feet  draught  at 
springs  ;  but  the  entrance  is  so  surrounded  by  rocks  that  access  to  it  is 
hazardous  to  strangers,  except  at  high  water  and  with  a  leading  wind. 

The  entrance  to  this  harbour,  which  is  72  yards  wide  and  open  to  the 
N.N.E.,  is  comprised  between  the  head  of  the  old  pier  and  the  extreme  of 
a  little  pile  of  loose  stones  on  the  steep  shore  of  the  eastern  part  of  the 
harbour.  The  sand  at  the  entrance  dries  16  feet  above  the  level  of  the 
lowest  tides,  and  thence  the  bottom,  which  is  composed  of  sand  and  gravel, 
takes  a  gentle  ascent  up  to  the  level  of  high-water  neaps.  The  best  position 
to  ground  is  about  two-thirds  the  length  of  the  pier  from  the  pier-head,  but 

*  Commander  C.  V.  Anson,  H.M.S.  Dasher, 


CHAP.vm.]      PORT  OF  DI]£lETTE. — ^ANSE  DE  SCIOTOT.  323 

as  the  bottom  is  hard,  everj  precaution  must  be  taken  to  prevent  the  vessel 
from  falling  over. 

A  Life  Boat  is  stationed  at  this  port. 

LIGHTS. — Two  fixed  harbour  lights  are  exhibited  at  port  Di^lette, 
and  when  in  line  lead  through  the  channel  to  the  harbour.  The  outer  is  a 
fixed  light  exhibited  at  the  extremity  of  the  new  pier,  and  shows  %johite 
seaward  and  red  towards  the  land  from  the  bearing  of  S.S.E.,  this  bearing 
of  the  white  light  leads  clear  to  the  westward  of  Huquets  de  Jerbourg,  and 
the  Basses  St.  Gilles.  The  light  is  elevated  23  feet  above  high  water,  and 
in  clear  weather  the  white  light  should  be  seen  from  a  distance  of  9  miles. 
The  other  is  a  red  light  75  feet  above  high  water ;  it  stands  610  jards 
S.S.E.  I  £.  of  the  former,  and  may  be  seen  9  miles. 

A  small  green  light  indicates  the  position  of  the  old  pier. 

Directions. — The  direction  of  the  channel  leading  to  port  Di^lette 
is  pointed  out  by  the  tops  of  two  remarkable  little  conical  hills,  forming 
the  northern  boundary  of  the  valley  of  Dielette.  When  within  a  mile  of 
the  port,  open  the  summit  of  the  hill  which  has  the  ruins  of  an  old 
semaphore  on  it,  a  little  to  the  northward  of  the  summit  of  the  other  hill, 
and  keep  a  good  look  out  for  the  beacon  and  lighthouse  on  new  pier.  As 
soon  as  the  lighthouse  is  made  out,  steer  to  pass  about  half  a  cable  to  the 
northward  of  it,  and  then  if  bound  into  the  old  harbour,  steer  direct  for  the 
pier-head,  which  round  as  close  as  possible  in  order  to  avoid  the  Pierre 
de  la  Eiviere. 

With  moderate  winds  between  West,  round  Northerly,  and  N.E.,  the 
above  directious  can  be  followed  by  vessels  drawing  not  more  than  10  feet 
water,  from  half  an  hour  before  to  half  an  hour  after  high  water ;  but 
when  the  wind  is  fresh  from  that  quarter  they  can  only  enter  it  at  high- 
water  spring. 

With  the  wind  between  West  and  South  a  position  should  be  gained  to 
the  south-west  of  the  harbour  before  bearing  up  for  the  lighthouse.  With 
a  head  wind  the  channel  should  not  be  attempted  without  a  pilot. 

Tides* — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  port  Dielette  at  6h.  40m, ; 
springs  rise  27  feet,  neaps  20|  feet,  and  the  tide  rises  above  the  bottom  at 
the  entrance  (which  dries  16  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides),  17  feet 
at  great  springs,  14  or  15  feet  at  ordinaiy  springs,  and  about  4  or  5  feet 
at  neaps. 

CAPE  de  FLAMANVILLE  is  a  high  bluff  point,  with  a  guard- 
house on  its  summit,  bearing  S.  \  W.  about  9  miles  from  the  Nez-de- 
Jobourg.  It  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than  three-quarters  of  a 
mile,  or  within  the  depth  of  10  fathoms  at  low  water,  as  it  is  skirted  with 
dangers  extending  half  a  mile  from  the  shore ;  they,  however,  may  be 

X  2 


324  CAPE  DB   LA  HAGUE  TO  GRANVILLE.         [chap.  vni. 

avoided  at  night  by  keeping  the  light  at  cape  de  la  Hague  in  sight  to  the 
westward  of  the  Nez, 

ANSE  du  SCIOTOT,  formed  between  cape  Flamanville  and  Rosel 
point,  affords  shelter  from  all  winds  between  E.N.E.,  round  easterly,  and 
S.E.,  in  from  7  to  10  fathoms  over  a  sandy  bottom. 

POINTE  du  BOSEL. — The  shore  is  low  and  sandy  from  the  head 
of  Sciotot  bay  to  Rosel  point,  which  bears  S.  ^  E.  about  3^  miles  from  cape 
Flamanville,  and  termmates  abruptly  in  a  bluff  rocky  promontory,  on  the 
summit  of  which  stands  a  guard-house.  The  point  is  skirted  by  a  rocky- 
ledge  running  off  nearly  3  cables  in  a  S.W.,  and  6^  cables  in  a  N.N.W. 
direction  from  the  foot  of  the  cliffs,  and  it  should  not  be  approached  nearer 
than  1^  miles,  or  within  the  depth  of  10  fathoms,  to  avoid  the  foul  ground 
extending  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  point.  At  night  the  light  at  cape 
de  la  Hague  kept  in  sight  to  the  westward  of  the  Nez-de- Jobourg  leads 
well  outside  of  the  foul  ground. 

CAPE  de  CARTERET  bears  S.  i  W.  6  miles  from  Rosel  point, 
and  forms  the  west  extreme  of  the  steep  hill  which  bounds  the  entrance  of 
Carteret  harbour  to  the  westward.  This  hill  is  the  first  high  land  on  the 
coast  to  the  northward  of  Granville,  and  is  separated  from  the  high  land 
of  the  interior  by  a  valley  neai'ly  600  yards  wide,  and  almost  entirely  filled 
up  by  sand  from  the  neighbouring  sand-hills.  The  cape  is  a  little  higher 
than  Rosel  point,  and  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  17  or  18  miles  off ;  it 
terminates  in  an  abrupt  declivity,  beneath  which  is  a  cliff  of  sloping  rocks. 
A  lighthouse  stands  about  100  yards  to  the  eastward  of  the  extremity  of 
the  cape. 

A  Life  Boat  is  stationed  at  cape  Carteret. 

LIGHT. — The  lighthouse  on  cape  Carteret  exhibits  a  revolving  white 
light,  the  eclipses  of  which  succeed  each  other  every  half  minute,  and  are 
not  total  in  ordinary  weather  within  the  distance  of  8  miles.  The  light, 
which  is  of  the  second  order  and  elevated  262  feet  above  high  water,  is 
seldom  hidden  by  fog,  and  is  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of 
18  miles. 

No  hiddeu  dangers  appear  to  lie  in  the  offing  between  cape  Flamanville 
and  cape  Carteret,  except  the  Plateau  des  Trois  Grunes ;  but  from  the 
broad  sandy  beach  between  those  capes  shallow  water  extends  from  1 J  to 
2^  miles,  and  it  must  be  avoided  at  low  tide.  The  most  prominent  parts 
of  these  shallows  are,  the  Roches  du  Rit,  the  Basse  Bihard,  Le  Caillou, 
and  the  Bancs  de  Surtainville ;  the  former  dries,  and  the  latter  break  at 
the  lowest  tides. 

Roches  du  Rit. — The  beach  between  cape  Carteret  and  Rosel  point 
is  from  one  quarter  to  three-quarters  of  a  mile  broad  at  low  water,  and  several 
rocky  ridges  dry  on  it,  the  highest  and  most  dangerous  of  which  are  the 


CHAP.  VIII.]  PLATEAU   DES   TROIS-GRUNES.  325 

Rit  rocks.  The  southern  extremity  of  this  ridge  lies  about  7  cables  .in  a 
N.W.  direction  from  cape  Carteret,  and  thence  the  ridge  extends  N.N.W. 
one  mile,  and  terminates  IJ  miles  N.W.  \  W.  from  the  lighthouse.  The 
slope  of  Ncz-de-Jobourg,  half  a  point  open  to  the  westward  of  cape 
Flamanville,  N.  J  E.,  leads  half  a  cable  to  the  westward ;  and  the  southern 
edge  of  the  ridge  is  avoided  by  not  going  to  the  northward  of  a  line  on  which 
the  steeple  of  Port  Bail  is  in  line  with  the  foot  of  the  escarpment  under 
the  battery  at  the  extremity  of  cape  Carteret,  S.E.  ^  S.,  but  this  mark  can 
only  be  seen  at  high  water,  on  account  of  sand-hills  intervening  between 
the  steeple  and  the  cape.  Care  must  be  taken  not  to  approach  too  close  to 
the  cape  at  low- water  springs,  as  rocky  heads,  with  only  4  and  5  feet 
water  on  them,  lie  half  a  mile  in  a  W.S.W.  direction  from  the  lighthouse. 

Basse  Bihard,  the  outermost  of  the  above  dangers,  is  a  small  rocky 
flat,  not  more  than  1^  cables  long,  in  a  S.E.  and  N.W.  direction,  and  three- 
quarters  of  a  cable  broad,  with  only  6  feet  on  its  highest  head  at  the 
lowest  tide*:.  This  shoal  head  lies  N,  by  W.  |  W.  5  miles  from  cape  Car- 
teret lighthouse,  and  W.S.W.  2|  miles  from  Hosel  point ;  at  low  water  it  is 
very  dangerous,  and  the  overfalls  cause' a  heavy  sea  over  it  at  all  times  of 
tide.  The  thwart  mark  for  it  is,  Les  Pieux  church  open  to  the  northward 
of  Rosel  point,  and  in  line  with  a  remarkable  red-tiled  house  near  the 
beach,  N.E.  J  E.  By  day,  Rosel  chapel  open  to  the  northward  of  the 
north  part  of  Rosel  point  leads  clear  to  the  northward  ;  and  by  night,  cape 
de  la  Hague  light  just  open  to  the  western  slope  of  the  Nez-de-Jobourg- 
leads  half  a  mile  to  the  westward. 

Buoy. — ^A  red  buoy  is  moored  in  11  fathoms  about  1^  miles  westward 
of  Basse  Bihard,  with  cape  Flamanville  bearing  N.E.  ^  N.,  and  cape 
Carteret  S.S.E.  |  E. 

L6  CaillOU,  an  isolated  rocky  head  with  only  12  feet  on  it,  lies 
E.  ^  S.  half  a  mile  from  the  Bihard,  from  which  it  is  separated  by  a  sandy 
bottom  with  8  to  9  fathoms  on  it.  This  rock  is  still  more  dangerous  than 
the  Bihard,  as  there  are  no  certain  marks  for  it ;  but  Jobourg  church  steeple 
in  line  with  the  extreme  of  cape  Flamanville,  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  will  lead 
half  a  cable  to  the  eastward. 

Bancs  de  SurtainviUo  are  four  long  narrow  ridges  of  sand  and 
broken  shells  lying  to  the  south-east  of  the  Bihard  and  the  Caillou,  occupy- 
ing a  space  of  1^  miles  in  a  S.E.  and  N.W.  direction,  and  in  some  measure 
unite  those  dangers  with  the  beach.  There  are  from  18  to  22  feet  on  the 
two  western  banks,  12  to  21  feet  on  the  middle,  and  19  feet  on  the  south- 
eastern bank,  at  the  lowest  tides.  As  these  little  banks  lie  athwart  the 
streams  they  occasion  a  heavy  sea  when  blowing  fresh.  Jobourg  church 
steeple  in  line  with  the  extremity  of  cape  Flamanville,  N.  by  E.  J  E.,  leads 
between  the  two  western  banks. 


326  CAPE  DE   LA  HAGUE   TO   GRANVILLE.        [chap.  viii. 

PLATEAU  des  TBOIS-GRUNES  — This  dangerous  rocky 
ledge,  lying  with  its  northern  extreme  bearing  W.  by  N.  f  N,  3|  miles  from 
cape  Caileret,  is  about  a  mile  long  in  a  N.W.  and  S.E.  direction,  from  one 
quarter  to  three-quarters  of  a  mile  broad,  and  has  from  6  to  9  fathoms 
around  it.  It  is  composed  of  a  dozen  rocky  heads,  two  of  which  uncover 
from  3  to  5  feet  above  the  lowest  tides  on  the  south-east  extremity  of  the 
ledge,  and  are  half  a  cable  apart. 

From  the  highest  head,  which  dries  5  feet,  cape  Carteret  bears  E.  by  S. 
3^  miles,  the  south  extreme  of  the  Rit  rocks  East  3  miles  ;  the  summit  of 
cape  Carteret  is  between  the  tower  of  the  lighthouse  and  the  little  battery 
at  the  foot  of  the  cape,  E.  by  S.,  and  Hozel  mill,  Jersey,  is  just  open  to  the 
south-east  of  Grande  Rousse  rock,  (Ecrehos  group)  S.W.  by  W  |  W. 

There  are  4  or  5  rocky  heads  on  the  north-west  part  of  this  ledge,  the 
highest  of  which  has  5,  feet  water  on  it,  and  lies  with  the  northernmost  of 
two  remarkable  mills  at  Vislet  or  Brenier,  a  little  open  to  the  southward 
of  the  southernmost  fort  on  cape  Carteret,  E.S.E.,  and  the  western  part  of 
Mont  Orgueil  'castle  (Jersey;  in  one  with  the  eastern  side  of  the  Petite 
Rousse  rock  (Ecr^hos)  S.W.  J.  S.  The  overfalls  in  the  vicinity  of  the 
ledge  are  very  violent. 

The  Vieille  rock  (Ecr^hos)  in  line  with  Mont  Orgueil  castle,  S.W.  ^  W., 
leads  3^  cables  to  the  eastward  of  the  highest  head  on  the  south-eastern 
part  of  the  ledge ;  the  square  tower  of  Barneville  church  in  sight  to  the 
southward  of  cape  Carteret,  E.  ^  S.,  leads  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the 
southward  ;  St.  George  church-steeple  in  line  with  the  foot  of  the  southern 
slope  of  the  hill  of  cape  Carteret,  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  leads  6  cables  to  the 
northward  of  the  northern  part  of  the  ledge  (this  steeple  may  be  easily 
recognized  by  the  parsonage,  a  long  white  house  which  appears  in  this 
direction) ;  the  south-eastern  fort  on  cape  Carteret  shut  in  with  the 
western  pitch  of  the  cape  (on  which  there  is  a  battery),  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E., 
or  Bonneliers  shut  in  to  the  northward  of  the  cape  will  also  lead  clear  to  the 
northward ;  and  Mont  Orgueil  castle  appearing  its  own  apparent  breadth 
open  to  the  westward  of  Grande  Rousse  rock,  S.W.  J  S.,  will  lead  to  the 
westward. 

A  bank  of  sand  and  broken  shells  lies  3^  miles  to  the  north-west  of 
the  Trois-Grunes,  and  5  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  Drouilles,  with 
9  fathoms,  and  11  to  14  fathoms  around,  at  low-water  springs.  It  is  about 
4  cables  long  in  a  N.E.  and  S.W.  direction,  and  a  cable  broad,  and  is  not 
of  itself  dangerous,  but  causes  a  strong  overfall,  which  small  vessels  should 
avoid,  when  blowing  fresh. 

Buoy. — ^  conical  buoy  marked  with  the  letter  K.  and  painted  in 
horizontal  bands  alternately  black  and  red,  is  moored  S.W.  by  W,  J  W., 
about  one-third  of  a  mile  from  the  eastern  head  of  Trois-Grunes. 


CHAp.vni.]      BASSES  DE  TAILLEPIED. — ^BANCS  FELlfiS*  327 

Les  BASSES  de  TAILLEPIED.— These  shoals  lie  nearly 
midway  hetween  the  £cr6hos  rocks  and  cape  Carteret,  and  with  the  ¥€L6a 
banks  form  one  bank,  occupying  a  space  4  miles  long  in  a  N.W.  and  S.E. 
direction,  and  about  2  miles  broad.  The  Taillepied  lie  on  the  west  side  of 
the  F616s,  and  extend  2|  miles  N.N.W.  and  S.S.E.,  and  are  3  cables  broad. 
They  are  composed  of  from  20  to  25  rocky  heads,  the  highest  of  which 
lies  on  the  northern  part  of  the  chain,  and  uncovers  2  feet  at  the  lowest 
tides ;  the  other  heads  have  from  one  to  14  feet  on  them  at  the  same  period. 

The  marks  for  the  rocky  head  of  8  feet  lying  on  the  north  extreme  of 
the  chain,  S.W.  ^  W.  4^  miles  from  cape  Carteret,  are,  Rozel  windmill, 
Jersey,  just  showing  to  the  northward  of  the  north  point  of  Mattre  ile 
(£cr^os),  W.  by  S.  \  S.,  and  Mabire  windmill  in  line  with  the  eastern 
slope  of  the  hill  of  cape  Carteret  N.E.  hj  E.  ^  E. ;  Mont  Orgueil  castle, 
Jersey,  in  line  with  Mattre  ile  S.W.  by  W.  leads  to  the  northward  of  it  in 
3  fathoms  at  low  water. 

The  marks  for  ^e  rocky  head  of  9  feet  on  the  southern  end  of  the  chain 
are  Pleinmont  point,  Jersey,  open  to  the  northward  of  Ronez  point,  W.  by 
N.  ^  N.,  and  St.  Pierre  steeple  well  open  to  the  eastward  of  cape  Carteret, 
N.E.  ^  N. ;  Bezel  windmill  in  line  with  La  Coupe  point,  W.  |  N.,  leads 
three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  south  end  dt  the  shoals. 

Les  BANCS  F£L£S,  lying  to  the  eastward  of  the  Taillepied  shoals, 
are  composed  of  coarse  sand  and  shingle,  and  form  about  20  small  narrow 
parallel  ridges,  averaging  about  3  cables  in  length.  The  ridges  lie  close 
together,  nearly  at  right  angles  to  the  flood  and  ebb  streams,  ai\d  occupy 
a  space  2  miles  long  in  a  N.W.  and  S.E.  direction,  and  half  a  mile  broad. 
Three  of  the  ridges  dry  at  the  lowest  tides,  and  there  are  from  2  to  4  feet 
over  the  remainder  at  the  same  period. 

The  north-west  extreme  of  the  Fel6s,  which  has  a  patch  of  13  feet  on  it, 
lies  S.W.  by  S.  4^  miles  from  cape  Carteret  lighthouse,  and  S.  by  E.  the 
same  distance  fi'om  the  Trois-Grunes  ;  the  south-east  extreme,  which  has 
an  S-feet  patch  on  it,  lies  S.  f  W.  5^  miles  from  the  lighthouse.  Cape 
Flamanville  just  open  and  shut  with  cape  Carteret,  N.  \  E.,  leads  very 
close  to  their  south-east  extreme,  and  the  steeple  of  port  Bail  between 
the  mills  of  Cartelet,  N.E.  by  E.  §  E.,  leads  3  cables  S.E.  of  it ;  these 
mills  stand  600  yards  to  the  eastward  of  the  mill  of  Bien  Aim^.  St. 
Martin  church  spire,  Jersey,  in  line  with  the  lighthouse  on  St.  Catherine 
breakwater,  W.  f  N.,  leads  to  the  south-east  of  Ecrevifere,  Taillepied,  and 
Ffl^s  banks. 

The  Taillepied  and  F61es  form  two  passages,  one  2;^  miles  wide  at  low 
water,  between  the  F6l^s  and  the  French  coast,  with  patches  of  from  6  to 
12  feet  in  it,  and  the  other  1^  miles  wide,  between  the  Taillepied  and  the 
£cr6hos  rocks,  with  a  patch  of   11  feet  at  low  water  in   its  southern 


328  CAPE  DE  LA  HAGUE  TO   GEANVILLE,  [chap.  Yin, 

entrance  ;  but  from  the  great  rapidity  of  the  streams  there  is  generally  a 
turbulent  sea  in  the  latter  passage,  even  in  the  finest  weather^  and  in 
rough  weather  it  would  be  exceedingly  dangerous  for  small  vessels  to 
attempt  it.  The  former  passage  is  invariably  used,  for  although  the  depth 
in  it  is  not  so  great  as  in  the  latter,  the  leading  mark  is  good,  which  the 
latter  is  entirely  destitute  of. 

ASPECT  of  COAST. — Between  cape  Flamanville  and  cape  Carteret 
the  land  near  the  shore  is  high  and  appears  double,  and  thence  to  R%ne- 
ville  it  is  altogether  as  low,  rising  again  towards  Granville.  The  coast  is 
woody,  and  skirted  all  along  with  a  white  sandy  beach,  and  prettily  diver- 
sified by  villages,  churches,  and  windmills,  for  the  most  part  within  a  mile 
of  each  other,  and  which,  being  built  of  stone,  assume  generally  a  whitish 
appearance.  The  land  in  the  interior  is  lofty,  though  somewhat  irregular, 
alternately  ascending  and  descending  until  the  neighbourhood  of  Cou- 
tances  is  approached,  where  it  assumes  more  regularity.  These  inequalities 
are  very  conspicuous  between,  and  in  the  rear  of  Bameville  and  St. 
Germain. 

The  low  sandy  shore  southward  of  cape  Carteret,  which  the  entrance  to 
Carteret  harbour  and  the  cape  interrupts  for  about  the  space  of  a  mile 
recommences  at  the  foot  of  the  cape,  and  extends  almost  in  a  direct  line  as 
far  as  Rosel  point.  Between  the  cape  and  the  point  the  coast  is  studded 
with  sand-hills,  and  those  named  Dunes  de  Hatainville  are,  on  account  of 
their  height,  very  remarkable,  some  of  them  exceeding  the  height  of  the 
summit  of  cape  Carteret.  Between  the  Dunes  and  Rosel  point  there  is 
a  small  low  plain,  bounded  to  the  eastward  by  the  last  line  of  hills  from 
the  interior. 

The  most  conspicuous  objects  on  the  land  between  cape  Carteret  and 
St.  Germain  are,  mont  Garden,  mont  Doville,  and  the  hills  of  Benneville  ; 
on  the  first  stands  the  village  of  mont  Garden  and  two  mills,  3^  miles 
from  the  sea,  and  N.E.  3  miles  from  St.  Germain  ;  the  second  2^  miles  to 
the  northward  of  mont  Garden,  and  6^  miles  to  the  eastward  of  port  Bail, 
has  a  windmill  on  its  summit ;  and  Benneville  hill,  the  third,  rises  E.N.E. 
4  miles  from  port  Bail,  and  has  three  windmills  on  it. 

The  coast  between  St.  Germain  and  Regneville  trends  nearly  in  a 
straight  line  N.N.E.  and  S.S.W.  for  13  miles,  and  the  shore  is  low  and 
sandy,  and  bordered  with  downs.  Among  the  most  remarkable  objects  is 
mont  Huchon,  situated  6  miles  in  the  interior,  to  the  eastward  of  the 
entrance  to  Regneville  harbour  and  of  the  western  part  of  the  line  of  hills 
which  is  immediately  to  the  northward  of  the  harbour  and  on  which 
stands  the  village  and  church  of  Agon.  This  part  ends  abruptly  with 
steep  slopes  towards  the  sea,  and  presents,  when  seen  from  a  distance  to 
the  south-east,  the  appearance  of  a  high  cape  facing  westward. 


OHJLP.Tin.]  HAVRE  DB   PORT  BAIL.  329 

Coutances  cathedral,  about  6  miles  inland,  is  lofty,  and  may  be  known 
by  its  two  spires  or  turrets,  which  occasionally  appear  like  the  Reculvers 
in  Kent.  .  The  church-steeple  of  Agon  is  a  large  square  tower  covered 
with  tiles,  and  the  little  church-steeple  of  Pirou  very  much  resembles  it. 
Prom  Coutances  towards  Granville  the  interior  of  the  country  presents 
nearly  a  regular  surface,  which  terminates  at  Champeaux  point,  a  bluff 
and  nearly  perpendicular  headland  about  6  miles  to  the  southward  of 
Granville. 

The  sandy  beach  bordering  the  coast  uncovers  in  some  places  1^  and 
2^  miles  to  seaward,  with  reefs  of  dangerous  rocks  scattered  on  it  in  all 
directions,  which  render  the  approach  dangerous.  There  are  several  small 
havres  or  harbours,  named  Carteret,  port  Bail,  Surville,  St.  Germain- 
sur-Ay,  GeiFosse,  and  R^gneville,  between  cape  Carteret  and  Granville 
capable  of  affording  shelter  to  small  vessels  of  40  to  60  tons. 

HAVRE  de  CARTERET,  situated  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of 
cape  Caiteret  and  N.N.W.  4  miles  from  port  Bail,  will  admit  vessels  of 
10^  to  1 1^  feet  at  springs,  from  half  an  hour  before  until  half  an  hour  after 
high  water.  The -entrance,  about  a  cable  wide,  is  at  the  foot  of  the  steep 
eastern  part  of  the  cape,  and  open  from  S.S.W.,  round  westerly  to  N.W, 
The  ebb  stream  runs  with  great  velocity  out  of  the  harbour. 

Directions. — ^The  channel  into  Carteret  harbour  is  between  two 
sand-banks,  and  the  mark  for  leading  in  is,  Caitaret  steeple  in  line  with 
the  eastern  steeple  of  St.  Pierre-les-Moutiers,  N.E.  J  N.,  which  mark 
would  suffice  for  following  the  channel  if  the  latter  steeple  were  not  lost 
bight  of  when  closing  in  with  the  land.  When  the  mark,  therefore,  is 
hidden,  steer  for  the  beacons,  which  must  be  left  on  the  port  hand  on 
entering.  The  north-west  beacon  marks  the  extreme  of  a  little  rocky 
point  near  the  foot  of  the  hill  of  the  cape ;  and  the  second,  which  stands 
on  rocky  ground  and  marks  the  side  of  the  channel,  must  be  left  from 
10  to  16  yards  to  the  westward. 

HAVRE  de  PORT  BAIL,  the  entrance  to  which  bears  S.S.E. 
4J  miles  from  cape  Carteret  lighthouse,  is  the  best  harbour  between  cape  de 
la  Hague  and  Granville,  but  it  is  only  accessible  at  spring  tides  between  one 
hour  before  and  one  hour  after  high  water.  The  bottom  of  the  harbour, 
like  that  of  Carteret,  is  composed  of  sand,  and  dries  between  the  periods 
of  half  ebb  and  half  flood  at  springs. 

The  entrance,  which  is  not  more  than  a  cable  wide,  is  open  to  the  S.W., 
and  lies  between  the  south  point  of  the  harbour  and  a  sandy  islet,  on 
which  there  is  a  custom-houso  station.  This  islet  is  from  25  to  30  feet 
above  the  level  of  the  bottom  of  the  harbour,  and  bears  W.S.W.  5^  cables 
from  the  village  of  port  Bail.  To  the  south-east  of  the  islet  there  is  a  bed, 
composed  of  pebbles  and  small  etooes,  about  a  cable  in  extent,  which  should 


330  CAPE  DE   LA   HAGUE  TO  GRANVILLE.  [chap.  vin. 

be  avoided ;  and  to  the  southward  of  the  islet,  a  rock  that  does  not  cover. 
The  little  river  Grise  discharges  itself  at  the  bottom  of  the  harbour. 

LIGHTS. — Two  fixed  harbour  lights  are  established  at  port  Bail,  the 
inner  red  light  being  shown  from  the  church  tower,  and  the  outer  white 
light  from  point  Dune  distant  from  the  inner  light  S.W.  by  W.  \  W.  953 
yards.     The  red  light  is  visible  in  clear  weather  9  miles,  and  the  white  light 

7  miles ;  and  when  in  line  lead  into  the  port. 

DirectioiLS. — The  leading  mark  into  this  harbour  is  the  steeple  of 
port  Bail,  between  the  two  mills  of  Carteret,  N.E.  by  E.  \  E.  The  berth 
where  the  tide  rises  the  highest  is  on  the  bed  of  the  fresh-water  stream, 
to  the  E.N.E.  and  East  of  the  south  point  of  the  harbour,  but  it  is  an 
uneasy  position  when  it  blows  strong  from  N.N.W.  ;  the  tide  rises  here 
from  16|  to  19f  feet  at  springs,  but  in  running  in,  the  lead  must  be  kept 
going  to  avoid  the  bank  of  the  stream. 

The  best  berth  is  about  2  cables  S.W.  of  the  guard-house,  which  stands 
near  the  shore  3  cables  S.S.E.  of  the  steeple  of  port  Bail,  where  a  vessel 
will  be  sheltered  from  all  sides  except  from  the  W.N.W. ;  but  the  tide 
rises  about  3^  feet  less  in  this  berth  than  in  the  preceding  one.  Coasters 
take  up  a  position  in  the  bed  of  the  stream  in  front  of  the  village. 

Basses  do  Port  Bail  are  three  small  rocky  ledges  and  a  small  sand- 
bank, lying  in  front  of  the  entrance  of  port  Bail.  The  first,  which  has 
two  rocky  heads  of  equal  height  with  6  feet  water,  lies  about  a  mile  from 
the  shore  with  Gouey  church-steeple  seen  between  port  Bail  church 
steeple  and  the  sandy  islet  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  E.  \  N.,  and 
cape  Carteret  lighthouse  N.  by  W.     The  second  is  a  very  small  head,  with 

8  feet  over  it,  lying  W.S.W.  4  cables  from  the  first,  and  S.  ^  E.  4  miles 
from  cape  Carteret.  The  third  ledge,  with  9  feet  over  it,  lies  North  6 
cables  from  the  second,  1^  miles  from  the  shore,  and  S.  \  E.  3^  miles  from 
the  cape,  with  Omonville  church-steeple  in  line  with  the  extreme  of  the 
south  point  of  the  harbour,  E.S.E.  The  bank  has  8  feet  on  it,  and  lies 
about  If  miles  from  the  shore,  with  Gouey  steeple  in  one  with  the  summit 
of  the  islet  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbour,  E.  by  N. 

Two  rocks,  named  the  Jument  and  the  Grande  Hocher,  lie  to  the  S.W. 
of  the  entrance  of  port  Bail.  The  first  is  distant  1^%  miles  from  the  south 
point  of  the  entrance,  and  uncovers  \\\  feet  at  the  lowest  tides;  and  the 
other  is  1 J  miles  from  the  same  point,  and  uncovers  14|  feet. 

HAVRE  do  SURVILLE,  situated  S.  by  E.  \  E.  1\  miles  from 
cape  Carteret,  is  small,  with  a  sandy  bottom,  and  will  not  admit  a  vessel 
drawing  more  than  7  feet  at  high-water  springs.  The  bottom  outside  the 
entrance,  as  far  as  3  miles  to  the  south-west  of  it,  is  very  uneven,  several 
little  ridges  rising  from  it,  with  from  8  to  18  feet  over  them  at  the  lowest 
tides.    A  small  rocky  ridge,  with  only  4  feet  over  the  highest  head,  and 


CHAP.  VIII.]  HAVRE   ST.   QERMAIN-SUR-AY.  331 

from  12  to  19  feet  close  to,  lies  S.S.W.  ^  W.  1 J  miles  from  the  semaphore 
on  the  sand-hills  at  the  south  point  of  the  entrance;  no  marks  can  be 
found  for  this  dangerous  reef. 

HAVRE  de  St.  GERMAIN-SUR-AY,  lying  S.  by  E.  12 

miles  from  cape  Carteret,  and  N.E.  by  N.  4  miles  from  the  Sac-de-Pirou 
rocks,  will  admit  a  vessel  drawing  7  or  8  feet  at  high- water  springs  ;  but  a 
vessel  of  that  draught  will  be  neaped  in  it  for  5  or  6  days.  The  sand-banks, 
both  inside  the  harbour  and  at  the  entrance,  are  so  shifting  that  it  would 
not  be  prudent  to  enter  without  the  aid  of  a  pilot.  It  is  well  sheltered  on 
all  sides  by  the  land  except  from  S.W.  to  South,  and  strong  winds  from 
these  quarters  send  in  a  heavy  sea. 

The  beach  uncovers  1^  miles  outside  the  entrance,  and  several  rocks 
rise  from  it,  exactly  in  the  fairway.  The  highest  and  nearest  the  entrance 
uncovers  25  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  and  is  named  the  Cabot;  it  lies 
S.  f  El  8  cables  from  the  guard-house  on  the  west  point  of  the  entrance, 
with  the  guard-house  just  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  old  semaphore.  The 
channel  leading  to  the  harbour  is  very  narrow,  and  is  formed  between 
the  Cabot  and  a  rock,  about  the  same  height,  lying  3  cables  N.N.W. 
of  it.  The  leading  mark  in  is,  St.  Germain  church-steeple  in  line  with  a 
remarkable  gap  in  the  sand-hills  on  the  long  and  narrow  eastern  point  of 
the  entrance  bearing,  N.E.  J  E.  When  the  Cabot  is  covered,  there  are 
4  or  5  feet  at  the  entrance. 

The  Cabot  forms  the  south-east  extreme  of  a  rocky  ridge  extending 
1^  miles  to  the  westward  from  the  west  point  of  the  entrance.  The 
southern  part  of  this  ridge  is  composed  of  rocks  which  do  not  cover 
during  the  neaps,  and  they  are  the  highest  between  St.  Germain  and  cape 
Carteret.  A  sand-bank,  with  only  7  feet  on  it  at  the  lowest  tides  and  18 
to  22  feet  around  it,  lies  1|  miles  outside  the  ridge,  and  W.  ^  N.  2^  miles 
from  the  old  semaphore.  This  little  bank  is  extremely  dangerous  to 
coasters  working  along  the  shore,  and  as  no  marks  can  be  given  for  it,  they 
should  keep  from  2^  to  3  miles  from  the  land. 

ROCHES  du  SAC-de-PIROU  He  H  miles  from  the  coast,  just 
outside  the  beach  which  dries  at  low  water,  S.W.  by  S.  4  miles  from  the 
entrance  of  St  Germain,  and  1^  miles  to  the  N.W.  of  the  little  harbour  of 
Geifosse.  They  form  the  western  part  of  a  long  ridge,  6  cables  wide, 
which  extends  to  the  north-east  as  far  as  the  shore;  the  highest  head 
uncovers  5  feet,  and  the  westernmost  head  4^  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  The 
marks  for  the  western  head  are,  mont  Survent  church-steeple,  which  stands 
upon  the  high  land  4  miles  in  the  interior,  just  open  to  the  northward  of 
Geffosse  church-steeple,  S.E.  J  E. ;  and  Bretteviile  church-steeple  open  to 
the  westward  of  the  hill,  which  rises  a  little  to  the  westward  of  the  old 
semaphore  on  the  west  point  of  the  entrance  of  St.  Germain,  N.N.E. 


332  CAPE  D£  LA  HAGUE  TO  6RAXVILLE.         [chat.  Tin. 

A  sand-bank,  one  mile  long  from  north  to  south,  and  half  a  mile  wide, 
lies  two-thirdii  of  a  mile  westward  of  the  above  rocks,  and  2  miles  from 
the  coast,  and  has  onlj  from  4  to  8  feet  water  on  it  at  the  lowest  tides. 
It  is  dangerous  to  TcsseU  working  close  in  shore,  and  may  be  avoided 
bj  keeping  to  the  westward  of  the  line  on  which  mont  Gardon  church- 
steeple  is  in  one  with  the  guard-house  of  the  battery  on  the  west  point 
of  the  entrance  of  St.  Germain,  bearing  N.E.  \  £.  There  are  also  two 
small  sand-banks,  with  7  and  8  feet  water  over  them  at  the  same  time 
of  tide,  between  the  Sac-de-Pirou  and  the  Seuequet  rock  ;  in  fact,  at 
2\  miles  from  the  shore,  between  the  Senequet  and  St.  Germain,  the  depth 
does  not  average  more  than  15  feet. 

HAVBE  de  GEFFOSSE,  situated  S.S.W.  4^  miles  from  St. 
Germain,  and  E.N.E.  3|  miles  from  the  Senequet  rock,  is  verj  small  and 
confined,  and  onlj  capable  of  affording  shelter  to  small  fishing  boats  of  about 
10  tons  burthen.  The  harbour  is  quite  open  to  the  W.N.W.,  and  when  it 
blows  strong  from  that  quarter,  there  is  a  nasty  tumble  of  a  sea  at  the 
entrance. 

CH  AUSSfiE-deS-BOSUFS  are  ledges  of  dangerous  rocks  2^  miles 
long  and  one  mile  broad  and  extend  in  an  east  and  west  direction.  They 
lie  4^  miles  south-eastward  of  the  Grande  Auquette,  nearly  6  miles  from 
the  French  shore  at  high  water,  and  appear  at  4  hours  ebb,  but  some  of  the 
heads  show  only  at  low  water,  besides  many  which  are  always  covered. 
In  the  vicinity  of  these  rocks  the  ground  is  very  foul,  and  dangers  are 
scattered  in  all  directions,  principally,  however,  to  the  northward,  westward, 
and  southward,  though  among  them  there  are  from  2  to  7  fathoms  at  the 
lowest  tides. 

Le  Boeuf. — The  marks  for  this  rock,  which  uncovers  18  feet  at  the 
lowest  tides,  are,  Seymom*  tower,  Jersey,  touching  the  south  side  of  the 
Grande  Anquette,  N.W.  ^  W. ;  Icho  tower  in  line  with  Noirmont  tower 
N.W.  by  W.,  and  Hatain\'ille  sand-hills  seen  between  capes  Carteret  and 
Flamanville.  The  Boeuf  is  surrounded  for  the  space  of  4  cables  by  small 
rocky  heads  which  uncover  4  and  5  feet. 

A  tower  is  in  course  of  construction  (1881)  on  this  rock. 

LeS  Boenftins  He  half  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  Boeuf  in  small 
detached  ridges,  the  highest  of  which  uncovers  9  feet. 

Basse  Occidental  des  Boeufs,  situated  near  the  west  side  of  the 
Chaussee  des  Boeufs,  is  a  very  small  detached  rock,  with  only  4  feet  water. 
It  lies  about  W.N.W.  one  mile  from  the  northern  Bceuflins  rock,  which 
dries  7  feet  at  low  water. 

From  the  rock,  Princes  tower  appears  a  little  open  eastward  of  Grande 
Anquette  N.W.  |  N. ;  La  Coupe  turret  in  line  with  St.  Catherine's  break- 


CHAP.vni.]  HAVRE  DE   GEFFOSSE. — ^DIRECTIONS.  833 

water  lighthouse  N.N. W.  westerly,  and  the  steeple  of  Coutances  cathedral 
just  open  north wai'd  of  Blainville  church-steeple  S.E.  by  E. 

Basse  Nord-Ouest  des  BoeufS  is  formed  by  a  small  ridge  of 
rocks  3  cables  long  from  east  to  west,  and  united  to  the  Boeuf  and  Boeuftins 
by  a  rocky  bed  on  which  there  are  fron  4  to  6  fathoms.  The  highest  head 
of  this  ridge  uncovers  2  feet,  and  lies  N.W.  ^  N.  1^  miles  from  the  Boeuf 
with  Seymour  tower  a  little  open  southward  of  the  South  hill,  N.W.  |  W., 
and  the  Boeuf  between  the  church  steeples  of  mont  Martin  and  Agon 
S.E.  ^  S. 

Basse  Jourdan. — This  small  rocky  ridge,  a  cable  long,,  east  and 
west,  with  only  2  feet  on  it,  lies  E.  by  S.  If  miles  from  the  Boeuf,  and  N.W. 
3^  miles  from  the  Senequet  rock.  The  marks  for  it  are,  Blainville  church 
in  line  with  the  northern  sandy  point  of  Blainville  harbour,  or  with  the 
south  side  of  the  Senequet;  Grouville  church  open  to  the  northward  of 
mont  Huchon  S.E.  by'E.  \  E.;  and  cape  Carteret  in  line  with  the  highest 
of  the  Hatainville  sand-hills,  which  are  seen  from  a  gi'eat  distance  on 
account  of  their  whiteness  and  the  contrast  between  them  and  the  dark 
land  of  capes  Carteret  and  Flamanville. 

This  danger  is  marked  on  its  eastern  side  by  a  red  and  black  bell  buoy 
with  staff  and  reflector. 

BCBTlf  Patch  lies  north  1^  miles  from  the  Basse  Jourdan,  and  is 
1^  miles  long  from  north  to  south,  and  nearly  half  a  mile  broad  in  its 
widest  part.  It  has  3  fathoms  on  the  southern  end  and  15  feet  on  the 
northern  extreme.  The  marks  for  the  15  feet  are,  Vesly  church  touching 
the  south  extreme  of  the  west  point  at  the  entrance  of  St.  Germain  E.  f  N. ; 
Coutances  cathedral  just  open  north  of  Liverville  church  S.E.  ^-  S. ;  and 
Agon  church  just  open  to  the  eastward  of  Senequet  lighthouse  S.S.E.  ^  E. 
Directions. — ^A  vessel  will  pass  eastward  of  Basse  Jonrdan  by  not 
opening  the  Hatainville  sand-hills  westward  of  cape  Carteret.  Coutances 
cathedral  twice  its  own  breadth  open  southward  of  Blainville  church 
steeple  S.E.  by  E.  \  E.  leads  2  cables  southward  of  the  south-west  extreme 
of  Chausse-des-Bceufs ;  Princes  tower  just  open  westward  of  Grande 
Anquette,  N.W.  by  N.  leads  westward  of  the  west  extreme ;  and  Grande 
Anquette  in  line  with  Icho  tower,  N.W.  by  W.  J  W.  will  lead  3  cables 
northward  of  the  2-feet  rock  on  the  Basse  Nord-Ouest  des  Boeufs. 

Hatainville  sand-hills  just  shut  in  by  cape  Carteret,  N.  |  E.  clears  the 
eastern  side  of  the  Bosuf  patch ;  Princes  tower  one  quarter  of  a  point  open 
to  the  southward  of  Mont  Org ueil  castle,  the  north  end;  Icho  tower  its 
breadth  open  to  the  northward  of  Grande  Anquette,  N.W.  by  W.  f  W.,  the 
south  end  ;  and  cape  Carteret  lighthouse  N.  by  E.  f  E.  clears  the  west  side. 
There  is  a  passage  a  little  more  than  one  mile  wide  .between  the 
Chauss^e-des-Boeufs  and  the  Boeuf  patch,  with  from  5  to  5^  fathoms  in  it 
at  low  water.    La  Bergerie  in  line  with  Seymour  tower,  N.W.  by  W.  ^ 


i^ 


334  CAPE  DE  LA  HAGUE  TO  GRANVILLE,      [chap.  Tin. 

or  Blainville  church  four  times  its  breadth  open  to  the  northward  of  the 
Senequet  rock,  will  lead  through  the  passage ;  but  it  is  difficult  to  make 
out  Blainville  church  at  all  times,  and  both  ebb  and  flood  will  act  upon 
the  vessel's  beam. 

Should  a  vessel  find  it  necessaiy  to  navigate  in  the  northern  vicinity  of 
the  Chaussee-des-Boeufs  after  half  ebb,  or  before  half-flood  (verj  dan- 
gerous periods),  La  Bergerie  must  be  kept  open  to  the  northward  of 
Seymour  tower,  and  Bouley  signal-station  must  be  kept  open  to  the  north- 
ward of  Rozel  mill  a  quarter  of  a  point;  it  will  then  also  be  just  open  of 
Bozel  manor-house. 

The  Chauss^e-des-BoBufs  and  the  Anquettes  being  on  all  sides  beset 
by  a  great  number  of  detached  dangers,  the  utmost  caution  is  necessary, 
when  in  a  large  vessel,  to  navigate  with  any  degree  of  safety  between 
them,  more  especially  as  there  exists  but  one  continuous  leading  mark 
for  the  passage,  viz.,  the  church  of  St.  Pierre-les-Moutiers,  which  has  a 
very  short  turret  and  is  situated  on  the  high  land  to  the  eastward  of  cape 
Carteret  (apparently  in  the  middle  of  the  village,  and  the  only  church  so 
situated),  kept  open  a  quarter  of  a  point  to  the  eastward  of  the  sjuth- 
eastern  pitch  of  that  cape,  N.N.E.  |  E. ;  and  even  this  is  not  quite  con- 
spicuous enough,  neither  do  the  objects  shift  with  sufficient  quickness  for 
so  narrow  and  intricate  a  passage  at  low  water.  It  will,  however,  serve 
when  coming  from  the  northward,  between  half-flood  and  high  water,  but 
is  too  far  distant  to  be  of  any  service  to  a  stranger,  when  entering  this 
passage  from  the  southward,  unless  the  weather  be  unusually  clear. 

The  above  mark,  when  coming  from  the  northward,  must  be  carefully 
preserved  until  La  Moye  signal  post  comes  open  of  Le  Fret  point  N.W., 
or  until  Coutances  cathedral  appears  within  its  own  apparent  breadth 
of  Agon  church  E.  by  S.  f  S.,  and  it  must  ever  be  remembered  that  the 
tide  obliquely  crosses  the  course. 

The  sea  to  the  southward  of  the  Anquettes  and  the  Boeufs,  for  a  great 
distance,  is  much  encumbered  with  sunken  rocks,  and  banks  of  sand  and 
gravel,  having  from  4  to  6  fathoms  on  them  at  low  water ;  indeed  between 
the  former  rocks  and  the  Chausey  islets  scarcely  a  spot  can  be  found 
quite  free  from  either,  and  in  boisterous  weather  the  whole  of  that  space 
exhibits  one  continued  sheet  of  broken  water.  The  proper  channels  will 
be  found  to  lie  eastward  and  westward  of  this  accumulation  of  dangers, 
and  are  pretty  clear. 

BASSE  le  MARIE,  a  rocky  ledge  nearly  4  cables  long,  east  and 
west,  and  2  cables  broad,  lies  3  miles  to  the  southward  of  the  Southern 
Anquettes,  its  highest  head  at  the  eastern  end  of  the  ledge  uncovering 
4^  feet  at  th»  lowest  tides.  Near  the  middle  of  the  ledge  there  is  another 
head  which  comes  awash,  and  one  on  the  western  extremity  with  15  feet 


CHAP.vni.]  PLATEAU  DBS  MINQUIEES.  335 

over  it  at  the  same  time  of  tide.  The  ledge  has  4  to  7  fathoms  around  it, 
oyer  a  Bandy  bottom  mixed  with  pieces  of  shell. 

The  highest  head  on  the  ledge  lies  W.  \  S.  4^  miles  from  the  western 
edge  of  the  Nattes  rocks,  S.S.W.  %  W.  4  J  miles  from  the  Boeuf  rock,  and 
N.  by  W.  I  W.  5^  miles  from  Catheue  reef,  with  Coutances  cathedral 
its  own  breadth  open  southward  of  Agon  church  £.  by  S.  ^  S.,  and 
Rozel  house  (Jersey),  in  line  with  Archirondel  tower,  N.  by  W.  J  W. 
Coutances  cathedral  its  own  breadth  open,  northward  of  Agon  church 
tower,  £.  by  S.  f  S.,  leads  northward  of  the  ledge,  though  close  to  it ; 
Mont  Martin  church  and  mill  in  line,  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  leads  to  the  south- 
ward ;  the  Etat  or  Petite  Canue  (Chausey)  midway  between  Huguenans 
islets,  S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  leads  between  it  and  the  Catheue  ;  and  the  Etat  in 
lino  with  the  Conch^e  leads  westward  of  it,  as  will  also  the  Hamqn  rock 
when  exactly  in  line  with  the  western  apex  of  Grande  Ancre  islet, 
S.  by  W.  i  W. 

Buoy. — ^A  red  and  white  horizontal  striped  buoy  is  moored  at  half  a 
mile  east  of  Besse  le  Marie. 

PLATEAU  des  MINQUIERS,  situated  9  miles  to  the  south- 
ward of  Jersey,  and  13  from  the  nearest  French  land,  is  a  tangled  mass  of 
rocky  reefs,  16  miles  long  east  and  west  by  8  broad.  The  most  dangerous 
part  occupies  a  space,  near  its  middle,  about  7  miles  long  east  and  west, 
and  4  broad.  The  masses  of  rock  at  this  part  lie  closer  together,  in 
ridges,  and  are  more  elevated ;  a  large  number  being  generally  awash  at 
high  water  ;  a  few  scattered  rocks  only  rising  above  that  level  to  the  height 
of  10  to  20  feet. 

These  rocky  groups  are  generally  connected  by  extensive  banks  of 
shingle,  gravel,  and  sand.  There  are,  however,  some  narrow  and  tortuous 
channel  through  this  part  of  the  reef,  but  from  the  strength  of  the  tides, 
and  absence  of  good  marks,  the  pilotage  is  too  difficult  for  any  but  the 
fishermen  by  whom  they  are  frequented. 

The  whole  of  the  sunken  part  of  this  reef  to  the  eastward  is  studded 
with  dangerous  rocks ;  some  of  which  dry  with  the  tide  to  the  height  of 
7  feet  at  low  water,  but  a  far  gi'eater  number  are  just  awash  or  have  not 
more  than  3  to  6  feet  over  them  at  that  period.  The  sunken  part  of  the 
west  end  of  the  reef  has  comparatively  few  dangers,  and  as  moreover  at 
that  part  of  the  plateau  there  is  some  good  clear  ground  for  anchorage, 
in  10  and  12  fathoms,  any  vessel  accidentally  set  within  the  danger  line 
could  anchor  and  remain  until  the  turning  of  the  stream  would  favour 
drifting  away  from  the  reef  again. 

The  north-western  rocky  chump  of  the  elevated  part  of  the  reef  is  called 
the  Pipette  group,  and  is  remarkable  from  having  several  flat-topped 
pillar«like  rocks  in  it.    It  is  a  spot  most  fatal  to  shipping  ;  more  wrecks 


iS  TX 


s 


I 


I 


f 

* 


r 


r 


7£ 


^    bul 


-a 


•^  .    -^BAa^X^ifc- -^ 


.»      - 


_ak_.         _     A. 


^k^i.^.  iT        •  • 


t 


r 


Z.  k. ;  ■    T*  ::-"    •'■ 


•-H      T   r..  ^.■— r    ..:     Us*   "^Yi:r     TvaviTt^ 


;-    ..:   1- ■    -  ;:u— »e^  ■?.  it-  ir 


■i"--  m- 


'»'" 


k«^ 


.1.   •'.-^r 


T      -   V 


'.   a-..t 


^'<  ^ 


-r 


-^     lOx^f    ^.J 


■ 


^ ■■ 


'in 


I 


<jHAP.  viii.J  PLATEAU  DBS   MINQUIERS.  337 

never  covers,  and  thereforo  serves  as  a  good  mark  for  the  other  dangers  in 
the  neighbourhood. 

A  reef  named  Grunes  de  Norman,  the  highest  head  of  which  uncovers 
14  feet,  lies  W.  by  S,  ^  S.,  5  cables  from  Haute  Grune. 

Los  FauclieurSf  is  the  name  given  to  a  large  extent  of  rocks,  three 
heads  of  which  never  cover ;  they  lie  W.  ^  N.,  3  miles  from  Maitresse 
lie,  and  S.E.  by  S.,  If  miles  from  the  Maisons ;  they  are  remarkable  from 
their  superior  magnitude  compared  with  other  rocks  in  the  neighbourhood 
■and  therefore  of  great  service  as  a  mark. 

Le  Figuier,  is  a  rock  always  above  water,  lying  N.W.  by  N.  If  miles 
from  Maitresse  ile. 

Red  FrOUQUiO  is  a  rock  of  nearly  the  same  size,  height,  and  character 
■as  Le  Figuier,  situated  about  midway  between  it  and  Maitresse  ile. 

Ca^lfdrteurS)  are  four  small  rocks  always  uncovered,  lying  a  cable  east- 
ward of  Maitresse  ile,  with  which  they  are  connected  at  low  water. 

Rocher  dU  Sud,  is  a  large  rock  always  uncovered,  lying  S.  by  W.  |  W, 
4  cables  from  Maitresse  ile. 

Grand  VaSCelin,  N.W.  by  N.  3  miles  from  Maitresse  ile,  uncovers 
43  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  This  is  a  largo  flat  rock,  with  two  heads  always 
above  water  ;  very  conspicuous  from  its  size,  and  from  its  position  makes 
a  very  useful  mark.  The  Petite  Vascelin  bears  N.E.  by  N.,  three-quarters 
of  a  mile  from  the  Grand  Vascelin,  and  lies  close  to  the  edge  of  the  reef 
near  deep  water,  but  being  13  feet  lower  than  the  former  rock  is  covered 
for  a  considerable  period  during  spring  tides. 

Le  Pipette  Rocks  are  a  group  of  considerable  size  situated  at  the 
north-western  extreme  of  the  elevated  part  of  the  Minquiers  reef.  The 
highest  point  of  it  (like  the  Grand  Vascelin)  uncovers  43  feet  at  the  lowest 
tides.  The  outer  rock  oi  the  group  is  called  the  Grand  Haguet ;  it  covers 
at  high  water,  and  bears  N.W.  nearly  half  a  mile  from  the  high  head  of 
Pipette;  N.W.,  5  miles  from  Maitre  ile ;  W.  J  N.,  2^  miles  from  the  outer 
part  of  Petit  Vascelin,  and  E.  f  S.  2^  miles  from  Grune  du  Nord  Quest. 

St.  Peter  church-spire  over  the  quarry  at  Le  Fret  point  leads  over  the  rock. 

The  above  described  rocks  are  all  situated  within  the  limits  of  the  middle 
or  elevated  portion  of  the  reef;  to  the  westward  of  this  part  the  most 
remarkable  are  Der^e  Anglaise,  Grune  du  Nord  Quest,  Brisants  du  Nord 
Quest,  Brisants  du  Sud  and  Der^e  Fran9aise.  To  the  southward  the 
danger  line  is  marked  by  Le  Four,  La  Souard  and  Les  Sauvages.  To  the 
eastward  are  numerous  sunken  rocks  extending  nearly  6  miles  from 
Maitresse  ile. 

Der6e  Anglaise,  a  small  cluster  of  rocks,  the  largest  and  highest 
whereof  dries  27  feet  at  low  water  and  lies  N.W.  by  W.  J  W.  2  miles  from 
the  Maisons,  Maitresse  ile  being  on  the  same  line  of  bearing, 

Q  7049.  Y 


.r 


338  CAPE  DE  LA   HAGUE  TO   GRANVILLE.  [chai  .  viii. 

There  is  a  passage,  having  3  fathoms  at  low  water,  between  this  rock 
and  the  Maisons  ;  but  it  lies  very  close  to  Deree,  and  is  only  half  a  mile 
wide ;  a  long  string  of  rocks  extend  from  the  Maisons  to  the  westward  for 
1^  miles. 

Grune  dU  Nord  Ouest  lies  on  the  extreme  northern  edge  of  the 
sunken  pan  of  the  plateau  of  the  Minquiers,  W.  |  N.  2^  miles  from  the 
outer  rock  of  Pipette  group,  and  N.N.W.  1^  miles  from  Deree  Anglaise. 
This  rock  dries  5  feet  at  low  water ;  it  is  steep  to  the  northward  and  east- 
ward, but  there  are  numerous  sunken  rocks  to  the  southward  and  westward, 

BrisantS  dU  Nord  Ouest  form  the  north-westem  extreme  of  the 
Minquiers  reef,  and  are  connected  with  the  Grunes  du  Nord  Ouest  by  a  rocky 
ledge  of  sunken  reef.  The  highest  head  of  the  Brisants  dries  3  feet  at 
low  water,  and  lies  with  the  Faucheur  and  Haute  Grune  in  line  S.E.  ^  £. 
Maitresse  ile  may  be  seen  (at  an  elevation  of  30  feet)  open  N.E.  of  the 
Maisons  the  apparent  breadth  of  the  latter  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.  Grune  du 
Nord  Ouest,  E.  3  J  S.  1^  miles ;  the  outer  part  of  Pipette  group,  and  outer 
part  of  Petit  Vascelin  being  on  the  same  line  of  bearing.  St.  Ouen  church 
spire  is  also  in  line  with  La  Moye  signal*house  N.E.  by  N.  From  this  rock 
the  sunken  reefe  extend  to  the  westward  for  nearly  a  mile,  having  depths 
of  one  to  2  fathoms  at  low  water. 

Directions. — St.  Ouen  church-spire  in  line  with  La  Moye  quarries 
(marked  by  a  white  streak  on  the  cliff  outside  of  them)  bearing  N.E.  ^  N. 
leads  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  all  these  dangers,  and  if 
the  above  line  be  preserved  until  the  Minquiers  light-ship  bears  S.S.E.,  a 
course  shaped  direct  for  her  will  clear  the  Brisants  du  Sud  (the  south- 
western salient  of  the  Minquiers  reef)  by  1 J  miles. 

Der^e  Fran^aise  consists  of  two  rocks  which  dry  6  feet  at  low  water 
and  lie  nearly  east  and  west,  distant  from  each  other  a  third  of  a  mile. 
On  the  eastern  rock  Princes  tower  (Jersey)  is  seen  touching  the  east 
side  of  Der^e  Anglaise  N.E.  \  E.,  and  Maitresse  ile  appears  open  south- 
ward of  Les  Faucheurs  E.  J  S. 

Brisants  du  Sud  lie  S.W.  ^  W.  distant  IJ  miles  from  Der^e 
Fran9aise.  They  consist  of  a  small  clump  of  rocks  with  one  and  2  £Eithoms 
over  them  at  low  water. 

There  is  also  another  small  patch  of  sunken  reef  situate  a  quarter  of  a 
mile  to  the  W.N.W.  of  this.  These  are  the  outer  dangers  to  the  S.W., 
and  from  them  the  Minquiers  light-ship  bears  S.S.W.  2J  miles. 

Le  Four  is  the  highest  head  of  a  small  group  lying  on  the  southern 
edge  of  the  Minquiers,  and  appears  at  half  ebb ;  it  dries  18  feet  at  low 
water  and  lies  with  La  Moye  signal  house  in  line  with  the  middle  Maison 
N.  by  E.  J  E.,  and  Chausey  lighthouse  in  lino  with  Corbiere  rock 
S.E.  by  E.  ^  E. 


ciiAP.viii.]  PLATEAU  DES  MINQUIERS.  339 

La  Souarde,  a  group  of  low  rocks  lies  on  the  southern  edge  of  the 
Minquiers,  E.S.E.  nearly  2f  miles  from  Le  Four ;  on  the  highest  head, 
which  dries  9  feet  at  low  water,  the  Corbi^re  rock  (Chausey)  is  in  line 
with  La  Tour  point  S.E.  f  S.,  and  the  Maisons  are  a  little  open  westward 
of  Les  Faucheurs,  N.  by  W.  f  W. 

L9S  Sauvages  are  a  cluster  of  dangerous  rocks,  detached  from  the 
southern  edge  of  the  Minquiers  reef  and  lying  nearly  3  miles  E.S.E. 
of  La  Souarde ;  they  are  three-quarter?  of  a  mile  long  E.S.E.  and 
W.S.W.  by  one  quarter  of  a  mile  broad,  with  2  to  15  feet  over  them  at 
low  water. 

From  the  2  feet  rock  near  the  middle  of  the  reef  Chausey  lighthouse  is 
a  little  open  northward  of  the  Corbi^re  S.E.  by  E.  J  E.  7^  miles,  and  La 
Moye  signal-post  (Jersey)  is  a  little  open  westward  of  Maitresse  ile  N.  ^  W. 
Tha  town  of  Granville  is  wholly  open  southward  of  Guernsey.  St.  Peter 
church-spire  in  line  with  Maitresse  ile  N.  J  E.  leads  close  to  the  westward 
of  Les  Sauvages.  Granville  church-spire  open  northward  of  Chausey 
castle  S.E.  by  E.  leads  to  the  northward.  Chausey  castle  open  south- 
ward of  Corbi^re  rock  E.S.E.  leads  to  the  southward,  and  Terqueti  mill 
wholly  in  sight  eastward  of  the  high  land  of  Meinga  point  S.  by  W.  ^  W. 
leads  to  the  eastward,  as  will  also  Cancale  church  in  line  with  Haut  Bout 
mill  S.  i  W. 

Lo  COCQ,  ^y^T^g  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  nearly  If  miles  from  Maitresse  ile, 
uncovers  1 6  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  On  the  rock  the  south  extreme  of 
Maitresse  ile  and  Les  Maisons  are  in  line  N.W.  by  W.  ^  W.  and  Cham- 
penax  is  just  in  sight  to  the  southward  of  Chausey  island  S.E.  by  S. 

This  rock  is  the  outer  and  most  important  danger  off  Maitresse  ile  to 
the  south-eastward  ;  the  one  next  in  importance  on  this  side,  called  La 
Ronde,  lies  from  Le  Cocq  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  rather  more  than  half  a  mile, 
and  is  awash  at  low  water. 

Le  FaUCheur  uncovers  29  feet,  and  lies  E.  by  N.  one  mile  from 
Maitresse  He. 

Le  Rat  uncovers  12  feet,  and  lies  N.E.  |  E.  If  miles  from  Maitresse 
ile. 

Les  Trois  Gnines  uncovers  35  feet,  and  lies  N.E.  by  E.,  4  cables 
from  Maitresse  ile. 

Grune  de  Turbot  uncovers  12  feet,  and  lies  N.  by  E.,  ^  E.  1 J  miles 
from  Maitresse  ile.  From  this  the  highest  rock  of  the  group,  a  number 
of  low  rocks  extend  in  a  northerly  and  also  in  a  westerly  direction,  for  a 
quarter  of  a  mile. 

Grune  Gauvill  uncovers  5  feet,  and  lies  in  the  middle  of  a  rocky 
clump  of  less  height,  and  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  in  diameter.  It  is  about 
a  mile  within  the  northern   edge  of  the  Minquiers  reef,   and  N.N.E. 

T  2 


4 


840  CAPE  DE   LA  UAGUE   TO   GRANVILLE.      [chap.  viii. 

2  miles  from  Maitresfie  ile.  On  the  Gmne  St.  Peter  cburcb-spire 
appe^irs  a  little  open  of  point  de  B6t,  and  in  line  with  the  eastern  part 
of  the  town  of  St.  Auhin  beyond  N.  \  E. 

Les  DemiOS  uncover  1 7  feet,  and  lie  W.  by  N.  \  N.,  nearly  I  ^  miles 
from  Grunc  Gauvin,  and  N.  by  W.  2J  miles  from  Maitresse  ile.  On  the 
ea.stern  rock  St.  Peter  church-spire  appears  open  eastward  of  Bergerie 
houHe;  and  Nonnant  signal-post  nearly  half  way  to  point  de  But, 
N.  by  E.  A  small  reef,  nearly  awash  at  low  water  springs,  lies  E.S.E., 
nearly  three -quarters  of  a  mile  from  Les  Demies. 

The  best  passage  into  Maitresse  ile  lies  between  this  rock  and  Grune 
Gauvin. 

Les  Caux  des  MinquierS,  extend  from  Le  Rat  rock  in  an 
easterly  diiection  for  4J  miles;  the  whole  of  this  line  is  so  thickly  studded 
wiih  rocks  as  to  render  the  navigation  amongst  them  at  low  water  perilous 
even  for  boats ;  but  as  none  of  the  rocks  dry  more  than  7  feet  at  that  period 
there  is  never  less  than  1 1  feet  over  them  at  half  tide  ;  during  the  upper 
stage  of  the  tide  therefore  it  is  not  at  all  uncommon  for  vessels  of  light 
draught  to  sail  over  them. 

Turnabout  Rock  dries  4  feet  at  low  water,  and  is  the  easternmost 
danger  visible  above  the  level  of  the  sea  at  that  period.  On  this  rock 
Seymour  tower  appears  within  mont  Orgueil,  midway  between  it  and 
Seymour  house  N.  ^  E.,  and  Les  Maisons  and  Le  Figuier  rocks  in  line 
W.  J  N.  A  sunken  reef  extends  from  Turnabout  rock  to  the  eastward  as 
far  af? — 

East  Danger,  which  may  be  considered  as  the  eastern  exti'eme  of  the 
Minquicrs  reef.  This  rock  has  only  3  feet  over  it  at  low  water,  and  lies 
E.  \  N.,  6  miles  from  Maitresse  ile.  On  it  Les  Maisons  are  seen  touching 
the  north  side  of  Le  Figuier  rock  W.  |  N.,  and  Seymour  tower  appears 
about  midway  between  the  inner  part  of  Mont  Orgueil  castle  and  St. 
Martin's  church  North,  and  Princes  tower  is  in  line  with  the  east  side  of 
Grouville  mill  N.  i  E. 

Directions. — To  clear  the  east  extreme  of  the  Minquiers  reef,  St. 
Martin  church-spire  and  Seymour  tower  in  line  N.  ^  W.,  leads  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  ea8t>\*ard  of  the  reef.  St.  Peter  church- spire  and 
Hermitage  rock  in  line  N.N.W.  J  W.  is  a  wider  mark,  clearing  the  reef 
by  1^  miles.  Chausey  lighthouse  in  line  with  the  beacon  on  Enseigne  islet 
8.  ^  £.)  also  leads  to  the  eastward  of  the  reef  by  2  cables.  Coutances 
cathedral  well  open  to  the  northward  of  Agon  church  E.  by  S.  f  S.,  leads 
three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Les  Caux  des  Minquiers  and  all 
the  foul  ground  extending  from  them.  Outside,  or  to  the  eastward  of  East 
Danger,  the  soundings  are  tolerably  regular,  from  8  to  10  fathoms  over 
gravelly  bottom. 


CHAi-.viii.]        PLATEAU  DES  MINQUIERS.  341 

As  stated  before,  St.  Ouen  church -spire  and  La  Moye  quarry  bluff 
(appearing  as  a  white  streak  just  to  the  westward  of  La  Moye  signal-house) 
in  line  N.E.  ^  N.,  leads  clear  of  the  west  extreme  of  the  Minquiers  reef  by 
three-quarters  of  a  mile.  St.  Ouen  church,  a  little  open  west  of  the  Corbiere, 
leads  4  miles  to  the  westward.  Amas  du  Cap,  midway  between  the  light- 
house on  cape  Frehel  and  Tertre  Morgan  mill  S.  by  W.  J  W.  leads  I  ^  miles 
westward  of  the  reef ;  and  the  Minquier  light-ship  bearing  S.S.E.,  clears 
the  south-west  extreme  by  IJ  miles.  The  south-west  extreme  of  the  reef 
may  be  cleared  also  at  the  distance  of  more  than  2  miles  by  bringing  Le 
Grand  Larron  semaphore  in  line  with  the  east  end  of  Cezembre .  island 
S.  by  E.  f  E. 

When  navigating  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  Minquiers  the  effect  of 
the  tidal  stream  on  the  vessel's  course  must  be  most  carefully  considered 
and  allowed  for. 

Prom  Jersey  to  the  Southward,  in  rounding  the  west  end  of 
the  Minquiers  reef  on  the  flood  tide,  in  foggy  weather  or  at  night,  a  berth 
should  be  given  to  it  of  at  least  3  or  4  miles,  and  should  a  depth  of  any- 
thing less  than  16  or  17  fathoms  be  obtained,  at  once  haul  out  to  ther 
westward. 

The  northern  edge  of  the  reef  is  steep,  and  as  the  first  part  of  the  flood 
sets  strongly  over  it,  no  vessel  should  risk  a  near  approach  until  after 
4  hours  flood;  from  which  period  the  stream  setting  along  and  off  the 
reef  is  no  longer  dangerous.  During  the  dangerous  period  of  the  tide, 
however,  Pipette  rock  is  always  visible,  as  well  as  other  rocks  to  the 
eastward  of  it ;  and  the  sunken  rocks  to  the  westward  throw  up  strong 
ripples. 

To  round  the  east  end  of  the  reef.  After  clearing  the  dangers  near 
St.  Holier,  bring  St.  Peter  church-spire  a  little  open  westward  of  the 
Hermitage  N.N.W.  and  pass  to  the  eastward  of  Icho  bank  ;  when  St. 
Mania's  church- spire  comes  in  line  with  Seymour  tower,  N.  J  W.,  run  on 
that  line  to  clear  the  east  extreme  of  the  Minquiers,  off  which  a  vessel 
will  be  when  Maitresso  ile  bears  West :  when  the  latter  bears  W.  ^  N.,  or 
W.  by  N.,  haul  to  the  westward,  and  pass  between  the  Minquiers  and 
Western  Ardentes,  or  to  the  eastward  to  clear  the  Ardentes.  In  the  latter 
case  bring  L'Etat  rock  (Chausey)  in  line  with  Pointe  de  Champeaux 
S.  by  E.  ^  E.,  or  by  a  bearing  of  Chausey,  if  these  latter  cannot  be  seen. 
In  the  former  case,  bring  the  beacon  on  L'Enselgne  rock  (Chausey)  a  little 
open  eastward  of  the  beacon  on  Grande  Ile,  and  pass  between  the  Ardentes. 
The  Maisons  and  Maitresse  ile  in  line  will  pass  midway  between  the 
Ardentes. 

The  northern  and  western  sides  of  the  Chausey  group  are  steep,  and 
may  bo  safely  approached  to  the   distance  of  half  a  mile.     There  is. 


342  CAPE  DE  LA   HAGUE   TO  GRAXTILLE.  [chaf. 

however,  a  d|«fathoai  bank  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  from  the  western 
shore,  having  a  5-fiithom  channel  inside  of  it.  When  the  Corbiere  ro^ 
(at  the  west  end  of  Chansej)  bears  Sooth  joa  will  be  on  the  line  of 
the  Western  Ardentes  rock,  after  whidi  round  the  west  end  of  Chaosej  at 
the  distance  of  2  miles,  and  proceed  as  necessary. 

At  half-tide  and  above,  nothing  less  than  11  feet  will  be  had  over  the 
Caax  des  Minqaiers.  At  such  times  and  in  moderate  weather  light 
draught  vessels  maj  safely  pass  over  them,  provided  they  do  not  ventnre 
to  the  westward  of  a  line  drawn  through  Icho  and  Princes  towers. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  the  Minqniers  at  6h.  6m. ; 
springs  rise  3o  feety  neaps  26  feet. 

LES  ARDENTES  lie  7^  miles  E.S.E.  from  Maitresse  ile,  and 
3^  miles  northward  of  the  Chaosej  group;  thej  consist  of  two  small  banks 
of  sand,  shells,  and  stones,  each  having  also  a  few  rockj  heads  which  diy 
6  feet  at  low  water.  The  banks  lie  half  a  mile  apart,  on  an  E.S.E.  and 
W.N.W.  bearing  from  each  other  and  are  steep-to  all  round.  The  marks 
for  the  southernmost  rocky  head  are  Granville  lighthouse  in  line  with  south 
side  of  Petite  Canue,  or  the  Etat  (Chausej) ;  or  Granville  church  three 
times  its  own  length  open  southward  of  the  Canue  S.E.  by  S.,  and  the  high 
land  of  La  Tour  point  (Chausey)  wholly  open  to  the  eastward  of  L'Enseigne 
beacon  South.  A  red  buoy  is  moored  off  the  south-east  extreme  of  the 
eastern  bank. 

WostOm  Ardentes,  situated  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the 
S.W.  of  Les  Ardentes,  is  a  bank  of  much  the  same  character  as  them, 
having  generally  15  to  18  feet  over  it,  excepting  on  a  rock  near  its  west 
extreme,  on  which  there  is  but  5  feet  at  low  water.  This  spot  bears 
North  nearly  3^  miles  from  the  Rondes  de  L'Ouest,  situated  at  the  north- 
western extreme  of  the  Chausey  group ;  and  from  the  same  rock  mont 
St.  Michel  is  in  sight  to  the  eastward  of  La  Tour  point  S.  by  E.  J  E.  The 
remarkable  trees  on  Mount  Huchon  are  nearly  in  line  with  Agon  church 
E.  \  N.,  and  Princes  tower  (Jersey)  appears  a  little  open  eastward  of 
Grouville  mill  North. 

Nearly  midway  between  the  Les  Ardentes  and  the  eastern  extreme  of 
the  Minquiers  there  is  another  rocky  ledge,  with  3^  fathoms  over  it. 
Between  the  Ardentes  and  the  Chausey  isles  there  is  a  good  sound  channel 
with  7  and  8  fathoms  through  it ;  great  care  is,  however,  required  in  the 
navigation,  from  the  great  strength  of  the  tidal  stream  in  it. 

AnollOrage  is  good  near  the  middle  of  the  channel ;  care  must  be 
takeU)  however,  to  anchor  out  of  the  line  of  tide  of  any  of  the  dangers, 
during  the  strength  of  the  stream,  in  case  of  drifting. 

iLES  CHAUSEy  &re  an  extensive  group  of  little  islets  and  rocks, 
of  different  heights  and  dimensions,  occupying  a  space  of  nearly  16  square 


CHAP.  VIII.]  LES  ABDENTES. — ISLES  CHAUSEY.  343 

miles.  The  principal  and  largest  islet,  named  Grande-Ile  Chausej,  is  on 
the  southern  side  of  the  group,  and  lies  S.  \  £.  about  19  miles  from  La 
Boque  point  (Jersey),  and  S.E.  f  S.  1 1  miles  from  Maitresse  ile  (Min- 
quiers).  It  is  about  a  mile  long  N.N.W.  and  S.S.E.,  and  one  third  of 
a  mile  broad,  the  projecting  points  being  topped  by  hills,  and  near  its 
centre,  which  is  rather  elevated,  is  some  cultivated  land.* 

The  buildings  on  the  islet  are,  the  lighthouse  on  La  Tour  point,  a 
church  erected  in  1853,  the  ruins  of  an  old  fort,  a  stone  beacon  33  feet 
high  on  Gros  Mont,  a  farm,  several  cottages,  in  which  about  200  stone- 
cutters reside,  and  two  or  three  small  blacksmiths'  shops.  There  are 
several  quarries  of  granite,  a  large  quantity  of  which  is  sent  to  France. 
Longue  islet,  lying  6  cables  to  the  eastward  of  the  lighthouse,  is  extremely 
useful  as  a  mark  in  rounding  the  south-west  part  of  the  group.  On  Meule 
islet,  lying  N.W.  1^  miles  from  the  lighthouse,  are  the  ruins  of  a  convent 
and  a  well  of  good  water. 

This  group,  although  dangerous  and  intricate  to  navigate,  is  bold-to  on 
the  north  and  west  sides,  but  the  south  side  should  be  approached  with 
caution  at  low  water,  at  which  time  of  tide  the  eastern  side  is  quite 
inaccessible  to  vessels  of  heavy  draught,  on  account  of  the  sand-banks 
which  nearly  bar  the  channel  between  it  and  Granville. 

The  anchorage  generally  resorted  to  by  vessels  of  war  is  in  Port  Marie 
road,  off  the  south  side  of  Grand  lie.  There  are  several  Havres  within, 
among  the  rocks,  completely  sheltered  from  all  winds  ;  the  principal  one, 
Chausey  Sound,  is  formed  between  Grande  lie  to  the  westward  and  the 
Puceau  rock  to  the  eastward ;  it  is,  however,  very  narrow,  as  well  as 
difficult  of  access,  and  only  frequented  by  fishermen,  vrachers,  and  stone 
boats  capable  of  taking  the  ground. 

LIGHT. — ^A  square  lighthouse,  56  feet  high,  stands  on  the  summit  of 
the  hill  which  crowns  La  Tour  point,  the  south-east  extreme  of  Grande 
lie,  and  exhibits  a  Jixed  white  light,  which  is  varied  everyfour  minutes  by 
a  red  flashy  the  eclipses  of  which  do  not  appear  total  in  ordinary  weather 
within  the  distance  of  6  miles.  This  light,  which  is  of  the  third  order 
and  eleviated  121  feet  above  high  water,  may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  15 
miles,  and  renders  the  approach  to  the  Chausey  islets  easy  at  night ;  the 
lighthouse,  when  in  line  with  the  Corbi^re  rock,  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  shows 
the  precise  limits  of  the  south-east  part  of  the  Minquiers  ledge. 

La  Corbidre  is  a  high  remarkable  rock  lying  at  the  south-west 
extreme  of  the  Chausey  group,  N.W.  by  W.  f  W.  \^  miles  from  the 
lighthouse,  about  half  a  mile  to  the  south-west  of  Meule  islet.  The  western 
part  of  the  group  contains  15  or  16  islets  and  numerous  rocks. 


*  See  Admiralty  plan  of  isles  Chausey,  No.  63 ;  scale,  fn=5  inches. 


^^       C       ZJ 


» 


1. , 


•jLZiy. 


**c^ 


':.:_  -:     '«•::_      r 


'■  r 


—         Tt       X 


»    -  ■-» 


t'j 


:^uA>krA    lit        >  '■^'T  ■-,   ^ 


V.- 


i  ■    - 


.     *    t*^. 


•  Z-  i^  1  -    :»-  "*".  lAiiL  icit  stvitH-  J 


•■Tl^"— 


*/        '•■  .^      / 


-.•♦   /^'t  -ist..'  •,  "^'^  -.-.-^T-i^:. 


iy,  ■  *^  fc/i  fw.  t  •..'.>;■  . '^  'jl\.-':'  y.-i'.  }»^.N'. '•'•'.  LZ.1  ^.:^-Z-•  iz.i  c&^  cable 
>/^ '/../:  'i ; '  ry/**?./ .•••."/**.  ;.iA,  ',;.  •..-.■=:  r^ii'r  -lO'.TrT*  16  f^:.  the  mSddie 
J,/  «/I  11  / ' '  ■ ,  fc .  'i  * ;. '  *>■•''': . ;;. ',  ^ •  .2  :r  ■::  t :  '  Lc  ] : ■a^e?^  ::-Ir*,  u  which 
^tti.*t*\  M#M'  'r,.i'  M  </M^  ^  u,  it  it-j',  ^-«;:  :'::e  •rOG:?i  et*i  of  ihe  ridge. 
'Hi'  ihuiV  i*ft  Hi'-  ^O'tiK'-f/iWi^/s-.t  h<:vl,  11^  fwr',  13  the  beacc-n  on  the 
l'<|H' M«  .r  $1*111  \/  n  Ku$\'n  Un'H*Uh  *t\f*iu  u,  thh  KiUthward  of  La  Toar  point. 

If    4  ?■ 

ItfM,  Tour  tUtUlhtiH  ffrt'.  Ihu'ti  MtitiW  HK^ky  heads  lying  about  2  cables 
)m  lh»'  iHHilhwiiMl  of  liii  'loiif  |fOJht.    TUa  two  westernmost  patches  have 


CHAP.  VIII.]  ISLES   CHAUSEY.  345 

only  7  fest  water  over  them  at  the  lowest  tides,  and  bear  N,  by  E.  and 
S.  by  W.  from  each  other,  distant  about  50  yards  apart.  The  easternmost 
head  has  11  feet  over  it,  and  lies  E.  by  S.  \  S.  half  a  cable  from  the 
westernmost  patch. 

Basse  des  EpietteS. — This  small  patch,  half  a  cable  long  N.N.W. 
and  S.S.E.,  has  two  small  rocky  heads  on  it  with  only  three  feet  water  over 
them.  The  beacon  on  the  Enseigne  in  line  with  the  eastern  slope  of 
Grand  He,  N.  ^  W.,  leads  between  the  Basse  des  Epiettes  and  the  Tour 
patches. 

Basse  de  I'lle  Longue  is  a  rocky  bead  with  only  3  feet  on  it  at  the 
lowest  tides,  lying  S.  by  W.,  4  cables  from  Longue  isle,  and  S.E. 
easterly,  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  La  Tour  point.  It  bounds 
the  south-eastern  limit  af  the  S.E.  anchorage  of  Chausey ;  and  the  marks 
for  it  are,  the  Conch6e  touching  the  south  end  of  the  easternmost 
Huguenan,  East,  and  the  north  and  south  heads  of  the  Epiettes  in  one, 
N.N.W.  J  W. 

PiS-CoUS  and  Basses  du  PiS-CoUS.— Midway  between  Longue 
isle  and  the  Huguenans  are  two  rocky  patches,  named  Eis-Cous  and  Basses 
du  Fis-Cous,  which  may  be  dangerous  to  a  vessel  when  working  along  this 
side  of  the  Chausey  group. 

The  Fis-Cous  is  about  50  yards  in  extent,  and  uncovers  9  feet  at  the 
lowest  tides,  and  is  marked  by  a  floating  beacon.  It  lies  S.E.  by  E.  6^  cables 
from  the  south  end  of  Longue  isle  ;  W.  ^  N.  7  cables  from  the  Chapelle 
rock ;  and  S.W.  f  W.  3  cables  from  the  Grand  Cheval  rock.  A  small  rock| 
awash  at  the  same  period,  lies  a  cable  to  the  eastward  of  the  Fis-Cous. 

The  Basses  du  Fis  Cous  are  about  a  cable  in  extent,  and  lie  W.N.W. 
a  cable  from  the  Fis-Cous.  One  head  of  this  danger  is  awash  at 
the  lowest  tides,  and  there  are  others  with  one  to  4  feet  over  them  at 
the  same  time.  The  stone  beacon  on  Gros  Mont  in  line  with  Tourette 
rock  (the  mark  for  the  South-East  Channel  into  Chausey  Sound), 
N.W.  J  W.  leads  south-wcht  of  the  Fis-Cous  and  the  Basses  du  Fis-Cous. 

lies  des  Huguenans  are  small  islets  lying  on  the  southern  edge 
of  the  Chausey  group,  2  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the  lighthouse,  and  form, 
with  a  few  rocks  which  join  them  at  low  water,  a  small  rocky  cluster,  4  cables 
long  E.N.E.  and  W.S.W.  They  may  be  easily  recognised,  and  on  the 
summit  of  the  largest  islet  is  a  stone  pillar,  which,  when  in  line  with  a 
similar  pillar  on  the  Etat  rock,  N.N.E.,  show  the  western  limit  of  the 
fishing  grounds.  The  summit  of  the  largest  islet  is  covered  with  grass, 
and  sheep  are  often  sent  there  from  Granville  to  graze. 

La  Conch6e. — This  rock  lies  half  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Huguenans,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  Conch^e  passage,  and  its  summit  is 
about  20  feet  above  high-water  great  springs. 


.    i.AMlL    T'J   GRANVILLt. 


«.::Ar.v:n. 


Ki-:-  F; 


.•  t.   J  N.  a  Ion::  miie  from  the  Conches,  i*  tie 

••  i  •■■'.h   th»- i'iiau^v  jn^up.      Its  aikanced 

r.-pii-uoa.-,  and   thv   Gran\ill»*   jdloTs 

:  t:..  lili'.     It  uncri%-ers  28h  feet  at  the 

•  :  •!.•.-.  :iTK'  from  lo  to  16  fci-t    water  at  the 


«    •  < 


•■  • 


Le  TOHiin       -  _*•  r    >  y-ck  WUvj  one  f{iiarter  of  n  mile  to  the 

H  .  .•     i    :.■.•.  :.  1:-:I  •  to  ihf  imrthwanl  of  tlu'  liue  on 

■■-■•*  i-'-'  !•  nil  |Kiiiit  of  ihf  lar«»f  Ilugiienan. 

"        '.       .  •• •  1  wi.I  ja**  II  >af»»  <li>tuiu'c  to  the  southward 

■I    .•    r    ::  •  -,  1  y   kifjiin;:  the  simmiit  of  the  Concbt-e 

Le  Pignoil,  •-•  i-'iii"I  -i.i::L"-i'Mi»i  rock  lying  X.E.  J  X.,  rathor  more 
t!..i .  i....:  ;■  ri'i.'i  iln-  -iiinini!  of  tin*  Haute  Foniino,  iincowi's  10  feet 

M  tl»»-  !•  A-  -•  till*-.  Mill  dif-i  iii»l  hliow  in  onliuary  neaps.  A  cable  south- 
I ..-:  ••:  li.'-  I-*  k  tl.'P-  1-  a  il.it,  with  only  2  f*vt  water.  A  sand-bank  also 
with  'J  :• '  t  i-ri  :!,  In-  .*>  ralili-  tn  ilic  north-east  of  the  Haute  Foraine. 

Lc  Pounct,  tl"'  •a^iiniiuo-i  riK-k  of  the  Chauiscy  ^roup,  uncovers 
7  I"  :  :.••  ii-  ;«A«-i  tiil'",  aiul  ilu-  marks  lor  it  are,  the  Cbduc  and  Etat  in 
<':..-,  ..I  I.,  -rly  -n,  N.W.  '  N.  ;  C'l'uiamMs  catlit'dral  its  own  breadth  open 
caMuaril  ft'  Mi^nl  .Martin  mill,  K.N.K.  ;  and  the  toj)  of  the  Conchee 
iMTD-jnilily  n]M  li  M lilt h wan!  of  tin*  little  liilloek  which  crowns  the  south 
IHrisii  ol'tiu-  l.ir;:«'  llni:ii»iiaii  1  rariiiLr  W.  j  S.  This  danger  is  marked  on 
il^  S.K.  h"h|i.  Iiv  a  rnl  Ih-II  himv. 

Basse  du  Fouuot,  .in  i^-lati-.l  nvky  patch,  on  which  there  are  only 
3i  lilt  at  tlif  l«»\M-ii  ti«lr^,  lit--  N.K.  .\  N.  Ij  uibles  from  the  Founet,  and 
hflwt'tn  ii  ami  thi*  Pijrnon  iluri'  aiv  |>;iielies  of  from  10  to  14  feet.  The 
summit  oftiif  Con<*lK'i'  in  oiw  \\iiii  tlio  >iono  pillar  on  the  large  Huo'uenan 
Ii'skU  to  tlu'  h^outhward  of  tiio  l\umot :  and  the  Etat  kept  twice  its 
aj»i>an'nt  bn-adth  lo  tin*  r.onh\vjii\l  ot'  ilio  M-.mmit  of  the  Canue  leads  to 
tin-  iiortliward  of  tlu'  Ba>M'  liu  l-\»u::vt. 

Tin-  C'liaiiM-y  pil«»t<  tako  \o.---o!s  i\o:i  at  low-\v:«or  springs,  between  the 
Fi'iiiii-:    ami  ilio  IMiiiioii.  but  >iViiVi:«^i'^  ^'ii-  »-"-•>  w:^*  th:<  lVk^^clge  at   low- 
\vat«r  mvips  «'r  a.  L*  lioii:^  '.K\.l  .:'  ;:iv*   svr'v.^N,  iir.d  should  i:ct  attempt  it 
\vl' :•  t::o  Hav.io  t'v'i-al::,.'  "n  ^•v^x-./vv- 
La    CaiUlO.— I'-    '^^^N.    V.   .^.   .  -o    V'-.r:\U    v'inue.  u:ver  wholly 


V"« 


.••  • 


L'Eiai, 

«  ■ 


>.  *-  % 


\  • 


'.    ■^'   V     '  •      ^"^  *      1    ^ 


«     • 


\\  .  .\ 


^'  ".i.:>*.y  l:i:c::Ii:u*e,  and  its 
■.■>« 

•V-. ...    r'.ci  -yl=*  CG  tLe 
> :    >  i  sc--::e  pillar. 


CHAP.  VIII.]  ISLES   CHAUSEY.  347 

show  the  western  limit  of  the  fishing  grounds,  and  are  likewise  of  great 
use  as  marks  to  lead  between  the  Marie  ledge  and  the  Catheue  reef. 

L'EiIIseiglie,  a  small  islet  about  8  feet  above  the  level  of  high  water 
great  springs,  lies  2  miles  to  the  northward  of  La  Tour  point,  and  ib  remark- 
able by  the  uniform  convexity  of  its  surface,  as  well  as  by  a  small  stone 
beacon  erected  on  its  sumimt. 

Les  Rondes  de  la  Decllir^O,  a  rocky  ridge  situated  on  the  north- 
west side  of  the  Chausey  group,  is  3  cables  long  in  a  N.E.  and  S.W.  direction, 
and  the  northernmost  head  .on  it  uncovers  39  feet,  and  the  highest  head, 
which  is  nearly  in  the  middle  of  the  ridge,  uncovers  45  feet  at  the  lowest 
tides.  There  are  several  other  low  heads  on  the  ridge  ;  the  one  which  lies 
at  its  south  extreme  uncovers  only  4  feet,  and  the  marks  for  it  are,  the  north- 
west point  of  the  Pointu  touching  the  south-east  extreme  of  the  D^chiree, 
E.  by  N. ;  and  the  lighthouse  in  line  with  the  Chapeau,  S.S.E.  ^  E. 

Basse  du  Chenal. — This  small  rocky  patch,  lying  exactly  in  the 
fairway  of  the  entrance  to  Les  Kondes  anchorage,  about  three-quarters  of  a 
cable  northward  of  the  north  extreme  of  the  Rondes  TOuest,  has  only  5  feet 
over  it.  The  marks  for  it  are,  the  Pointue  just  open  southward  of  the 
Dechir^e,  E.  by  N. ;  and  the  lighthouse  a  little  open  to  the  south-west  of 
Gros  Mont,  S.S.E.  f  E. 

Les  Rondes  de  I'Ouest  is  a  rocky  ridge,  6  cables  long  N.N.E.  and 
S.S.W.,  and  2  cables  broad,  forming  the  western  extreme  of  the  Chausey 
group.  Several  of  the  heads  on  the  ridge  never  cover,  and  serve  as  marks 
for  the  south-west  extreme  of  the  group. 

SOUND  de  CHAUSET,  so  called  from  the  secure  anchorage  it 
affords  to  vessels  of  L'ght  draught,  trends  nearly  N.N.  W.  and  S.S.E.  along  the 
eastern  side  of  the  Grande  lie,  and  occupies  a  space  6  cables  long  from 
abreast  La  Tour  point,  to  the  eastward  of  the  stone  beacon  erected  on  the 
summit  of  Gros  Mont.  At  low-water  springs  it  is  surrounded  by  rocks, 
and  Viy  banks  of  sand  and  mud,  which  form  a  natural  harbour,  where 
vessels  constructed  to  take  the  ground  will  find  capital  shelter.  If  in- 
tending, however,  to  remain  longer  than  one  tide,  or  at  the  springs,  they 
must  moor  head  and  stem,  to  prevent  tailing  on  the  banks.  The  Sound  is 
sheltered  on  all  sides  except  from  S.S.E.  to  E.S.E.,  and  strong  winds  from 
that  quarter  throw  in  a  heavy  sea  at  high  water.  Fresh  winds  from 
N.N.E.  to  N.W.  are  also  much  felt,  and  cause  a  heavy  swell  throughout 
the  whole  extent  of  the  Sound  from  one  hour  before  till  two  hours  after 
high  water. 

Although  the  deepest  parts  of  this  Sound  do  not  dry,  there  remains  but 
little  water  in  them,  and  the  soundings  are  very  irregular.  There  are, 
however,  two  narrow  gullies  in  which  three  or  four  short  vessels,  drawing 
from  10  to  11  feet,  may  remain  afloat  at  low  water.    The  largest,  at  the 


Tr::F, 


k>v«^3atf.   A 


iT^      .  ;i  . 


-     .  --     U 


•  •••  ■ 


>V    V  u'.- 


•    • 


r.»;*4-,   V  1.1 


:»••?  L 


•*". 


I- .  I  "   ZTKL  j\  i»   1*  iws.  j»  ft  Sciir  a»c«  :■>;;* 
:..--    a  :-  'IT  if  tte  in 

::•  -  » ■•.-.  V  xt^t  11k  mcmb.  it 
lit  -sn^ri.. 

:    J, i;:-  y  ,1*  t^bupbcTj.  is  d^vkiad  inxoxw) 

--.:-j^. .    :  t  ij^  }4u«S3ew  b«i  xtf:iiiKr  ci  thf^m  ire 

J'li-  >.:iL  riMUfl  l«l«eB  tfe  pfrinx  and  tlie 

i.    -  -r^  ..   LTx^JC  >>  ^««  •*  *««*  •*  *^  Toonemn 

:.  i:.s  w.LUr-rk?:  of  ilit  pcoii  and  dries  12  feet  ii 

-.ij-r*  v_  lilr:  I*  12  fort  in  mid-channel  it 


ftbd  tlic 
Tlie 


.•  i^ 


•  k  • .. 


•  .  I. 


■  k    •. 


U 


4  k 


•  «  -  ^  .Vi  V:Ju  ««i'ne  pilkr,  erected  on  the 

-  .: .  t !  s  vi^--  ;:  i^-  m::*  ci  iLe  osiern  side  of  Grande  De 

..-:    :    ^r:.:  .  N    ,-  W.  v.- d  '■-H  Irtd  brt«en  the  Epicttes 

.::    -..i.r  liTTti  ..:^  :>.c  -^t  loinT.     The  beacon  on  the  rock 

...<  ::     -  .  :...*  .>:  :.  ■  l:  :c  :i-  E:  >i:e*  may  then  be  approached 

:.:..    N    :.  .:     ::..:  >. -r  ::  I'm  L:nhw»ni  in  mid-channeU  paraUel 

.  .>.  .  :  :.  .    >■;,  J.:.:  .:  :L:-.r. li-r  lo  nin  to  the  northward  of  the 

Cr:.».  .■  :x.  :>*>>  :.    :':,,    ,s.>:^:^c.  . :  .:.  r>iv  n  ■  berth  of  at  least  30  or  40 

T1.0  ^a^ii-ii;  :.:irk  r'or  i':.o  S ----^r.-E^s^?  channel  is  the  beacon  on  Gros 
M.^:.:  :;:  lino  w::V.  ::.c  Tourrtiu  rvck  wbiob  is  the  came  given  to  a  short 
su\p  |Hv;;.i  or.  ii.o  Iv-ioh,  a  oiVio  r.onh-«*5iTrard  of  the  farm),  bearing 
N.W.  i  W.  >Y:.cn  ixas.-ii3^Lo:.sr-e  :>:t\  ojvn  the  beacon  ite  breadth  to  the 
wo>i\vHr.l  of  tho  rourt^:u\  lo  ou^r  :ht-  linigo  extending  off  the  south  end  of 
tliat  i>K\  rakiui:  oart\  howovor.  after  pas*i«s:  it,  to  bring  them  quickly  in 
ono.  wliioh  mark  \\iU  IoaJ  Ivswivn  the  Loup  and  the  Ebauche  ridge  (both 
of  whioh  hrt\o  Ivaooiiji  on  them,  tho  !ir#t  on  its  north-west  point,  to  be  left 
oil  tho  port  luxwxU  luul  tho  other  on  the  souih  ix>int  of  the  ridge,  to  be  left 
on  the  siarUvirtl  iuuul\  o\or  a  Umk  of  nuul  and  to  the  northward  of  the 
Epiettos,  when  either  anehor  or  priHHH\i  as  it'  iH:>miDg  through  the  South 
elmnuel.  This  nuul  Ivank,  whieh  oomplotely  bars  the  channel,  dries  at 
low- water  springs,  and  eannot  K*  erossed  bv  vessels  above  10  feet  draught 
till  at  least  2^  hours  tlooil  ;  when  tho  highest  head  of  the  Loup  covers  there 
are  16  feet  water  on  the  bank. 


CHAP.  VIII.]  ISLES    CHAUSEY.  34i9 

The  Northwest  Entrance  into  Sound  de  Chausey  is  northward 
of  the  Enseigne,  between  the  rocks  extending  2  cables  eastward  of  Pointue 
rock  and  the  Grande  Entree ;  this  latter  is  a  small  group  of  rocks,  the 
highest  head  of  which  uncovers  38  feet,  lying  3J  cables  to  the  eastward  of 
the  low  heads  extending  to  the  eastward  of  the  Pointue.  The  highest 
head  of  the  Pointue  uncovers  41^  feet.  The  greater  part  of  the  rocks 
bounding  this  channel  into  the  Sound  are  marked  with  beacons  which, 
with  strict  attention  to  the  following  directions,  will  render  it,  to  persons 
locally  acquainted  with  the  Chausey  group,  easy  of  access  between  the 
periods  of  half-flood  and  half-ebb  for  a  vessel  drawing  not  more  than 
10  feet ;  no  stranger  should,  however,  attempt  so  intricate  and  contracted 
a  navigation. 

The  channel  from  the  above  entrance  continues  in  a  southerly  direction 
between  the  western  edge  of  a  rocky  group  named  the  Longues,  and  a  flat 
rock,  which  uncovers  8  feet  and  lies  a  cable  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Etardiere,  to  which  it  is  joined  at  low  water  springs  by  a  sand- bank; 
these  rocks  are  only  2  cables  apart.  From  thence  the  channel  takes 
a  W.S.W.  direction  between  the  Etardiere,  which  never  covers,  and 
the  Enseigne ;  and  then  a  southerly  direction,  passing  to  the  westward 
of  the  low  rocks  extending  to  the  south-west  of  the  Petite  Enseigne,  the 
Sauni^rci  a  small  islet  57  feet  above  the  lowest  tides,  and  the  Petite 
Fourche,  and  to  the  eastward  of  the  Massue,  and  a  rocky  group  situated  to 
the  eastward  of  the  Vieux :  and  thence  to  the  Sound.  A  rock,  with  a 
beacon  on  it,  lies  off  the  north  end  of  the  Petite  Fourche,  exactly  in  the 
fairway,  and  a  vessel  can  pass  either  between  it  and  the  Petite  Fourche,  or 
to  the  i^outh-west  between  it  and  the  group  lying  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Vieux. 

In  entering  the  North-west  channel  into  Chausey  Sound  keep  the 
lighthouee  touching  the  north-east  slope  of  the  Enseigne  bearing  S.  ^  E. 
passing  to  the  eastward  of  the  low  rocks  extending  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Pointue.  When  to  the  southward  of  the  Pointue,  bring  the  lighthouse  in 
line  with  the  south-west  slope  of  the  Enseigne,  to  run  between  the 
Longues  and  the  above  8- feet  flat  rock.  When  the  two  white  patches  on  the 
Massue  and  the  Chapeau  rocks  are  in  one,  or  the  south  end  of  Meule 
islet  is  just  touching  the  north  end  cf  the  Massue,  S.W.  \  W.,  run  in  that 
direction  until  the  lighthouse  is  in  line  with  the  south-west  point  of  the 
Sauni^re  islet,  S.  by  E.  ^  E.,  which  will  lead  to  the  westward  of  the 
latter  rock,  and  after  passing  it  steer  in  mid-channel  between  the  beacons. 

L'Enseigne  Anchorage  is  a  contracted  space  where  small  vessels 
drawing  not  more  than  10  feet  water,  and  under  the  guidance  of  good 
pilots,  may  find  shelter  from  S.W.,  Southerly,  or  S.E.  winds.  With 
northerly  winds  no  vessel  should  anchor  there,  except  to  await  water 
through  the  North-west  channel  into  Chausey  Sound,  as  from  its  limited 


?jy)  CAPE    I#£    LfL    HAGUE    TO   GRAXTIJLLE-  1^2^- 

';x*  -'.:  t:*;r»:  1*  CO  r'/oct  v^  Trfi-r  -r  d.'lT>,  iriiLoa:  ;x^ir.g  oa  lite:  s&^i-liAaky 

Wi;*»5i  nuL.'rjz  f^^'  thi*  »rs«rfaonzrr  thryi^li  the  aorth-west  estrmn-se  io 

x\iiz  yy,,v^'jLu*z  h^rarin?  S.  I  E.  until  the  'e«9r:l  15  to  tL«  soathvani  of  tlie 
Fo'.fiia^  ;  tL^T*  bnijg  tb*-  li^btf^Mj-^e  in  ii::*^  with  the  soatii-west  slope, 
ar»'l  wi^^rj  ta«  v>ath  end  of  Meak  i-^Iv^  ton^he?  tLe  r.ortIi  end  of  tbe 
MA»-fj<^  r<x;k,  uK-hor,  »sd  the  ver?-?--!  will  brr  in  ih.?  ci:ii!e  of  the  anchorage 
a'j'l  in  tJi'r  il*^rp^i  vsgr^-r^  2'2  to  3o  f»:*^T,  sanlj  bo::om,  raid  war  l«Kireeii 
th';  flat  T'Mtk  ivifjg  to  the  cast  war*!  of  :L.-  Etardirnr  aal  the  Loognes. 
^/T'-ft*  C''ir*:  mu*'.  !i<'  takfrn  l^frtw^-n  thr  {i^ri«>ls  of  half -ebb  and  haif*floody 
Uf  fJiUrjlHtf;  tb':  height  of  thf:  ti'l^.  a.-?  thf-  Kvondings,  when  to  the  sooth- 
wanl  r>f  th<r  Pointue,  vary  from  7  to  22  feet  4:  low  water,  and  also  to  avud 
a  ftmali  r^ick  with  only  4  feet  on  it  Iving  nearlj  in  the  fairway  of  the 
entraoce, 

PORT  MARIE  ia  a  little  bav,  formed  between  La  Tour  aad 
i5r';ta^je  fK>ints,  in  front  of  which,  2  cables  off  shore,  there  is  a  small  space 
iiAlfSihU:  of  affording  shelter  from  winds  between  N.W.,  round  northerlj, 
to  N,E,,  to  two  or  three  vessels  of  not  more  than  10  feet  draught. 

Directions. — The  anchorage  off  port  Marie,  which  is  not  more  than 
.'5  cables  in  exUmi^  lies  between  the  Bretagne  rocks  ami  the  Tour  patches, 
and  to  enter  it  from  the  south-west  bring  the  beacon  on  the  £cat  rock  in 
lifi'5  with  I^  Tour  [x/int,  X.E.  by  E.  easterly  ;  or  to  the  northernmost  and 
highest  Uiiiid  of  the  Epiett^^s  quite  shut  in,  leads  to  the  south-east  of  the 
Jiretagrif;  rocks  and  to  the  north-west  of  the  Tour  patches,  over  the 
Cliateau  patch,  and  when  the  beacon  on  the  Huguenan  is  in  line  with 
the  Grand  Cheval,  E.  J  S.,  anchor  in  a  depth  varying  from  15  to  22  ieet 
lit  low  water  over  a  sandy  bottom. 

To  ent€;r  from  the  south-east,  bring  the  westernmost  point  of  Grand  He, 
forming  [lort  Ilomard,  to  touch  Bretagne  point  N.N.W.  ^  W.,  and  it  will 
lead  to  the  south-west  of  the  Tour  patches,  and  to  the  north  east  of  the 
Chateau  patch  and  Bretagne  rocks,  and  when  the  northernmost  head  of 
the  Epiettes  is  shut  in  with  La  Tour  point,  anchor. 

AncllOrEgOS. — ^Port  Marie  road  is  an  excellent  anchorage  for  large 
vessels  of  war,  and  is  in  reality  the  principal  roadstead  of  Granville ;  for 
the  greater  part  of  the  shipping  bound  there  remain  at  anchor  in  it  until 
the  water  on  the  banks  is  sufficiently  high  for  them  to  proceed. 

The  best  position  for  a  vessel  of  large  draught  to  anchor  in  this  road  is 
■with  the  lighthouse  bearing  N.  by  W.  J  W.  and  distant  from  the  shore  a 
mile,  or  half  a  mile,  in  7  or  8  fathoms  or  more  according  to  the  direction 
of  the  wind  and  the  vessels'  draught.  When  at  anchor,  Coutances  cathedral 
should  appear  in  sight  northward  of  the  largest  Huguenans,  E.  by  N.  ^  N.y 


CHAP.  VIII.]  ISLES   CHAUSEY.  351 

and  the  Easeigiie  should  be  seen  to  the  eastward  of  La  Tour  point.  She 
will  here  be  sheltered  from  the  wind,  if  to  the  northward  of  N.W.  by  N. 
by  the  rocks  forming  the  south-west  part  of  the  Chausey  group ;  and 
should  it  be  inclined  to  draw  more  westerly  with  an  appearance  of  bad 
weather,  the  first  opportunity  must  be  taken  of  weighing  and  getting  to 
windward  «with  the  ebb,  or  run  either  into  Cancale  road,  where  good 
shelter  will  be  found  under  the  Herpin  rock,  or  to  the  eastward  and  north- 
ward of  the  Chausey  group,  as  the  wind  may  make  it  necessary. 

La  Conch^e  Anchorage* — ^With  the  wind  from  N.W.  by  W.  to 
N.N.E,  the  Conch^e  anchorage  is  to  be  prefoiTed;  the  mark  for  which  is 
the  old  castle  in  ruins  on  Grande  lie  in  line  with  the  Huguenan  beacon 
W.N.W.,  and  the  Selliere  and  Culassi^re  rocks  in  line  N.N.W.  |  W.,  in 
5  fathoms  at  low  water. 

L'Etat  Anchorage. — With  the  wind  to  the  southward  of  West, 
the  anchorage  under  the  Etat  rock  should  be  resorted  to  ;  anchor  with  the 
lighthouse  in  line  with  the  Canue,  or  with  the  beacon  on  the  Etat,  according 
to  the  direction  of  the  wind,  at  half  or  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the 
rocks,  in  5  to  7  fathoms.  Indeed,  all  the  northern  shore  of  the  Chausey 
group  affords  shelter  against  southerly  and  south-westerly  winds  and  is 
bold  and  may  be  approached  without  fear. 

Les  RONDES  de  TOUEST  ANCHORAGE,  situated  on 

the  west  side  of  the  Chausey  group,  under  the  Rondes  de  TOuest  ridge,  is 
the  only  shelter  the  group  affords  to  large  vessels  during  easterly  winds. 
It  can  be  reached  at  any  time  of  tide,  either  from  port  Marie  road,  or  from 
the  Conchee  or  the  Etat  anchorages.  When  proceeding  towards  it  from 
port  Marie  road,  keep  the  Huguenan  beacon  in  one  with  the  highest  rock 
of  the  Fillers,  East,  to  pass  to  the  southward  of  the  Ch&teau  patch,  and 
when  Gros  Mont  bears  N.E.  ^  N,  haul  gradually  in,  but  not  farther  than 
to  have  the  middle  of  Longue  isle  in  line  with  La  Tour  point,  E.  J  S.  to 
avoid  the  Cancalais. 

When  the  Ronde  de  TOuest,  a  large  remarkable  round  rock,  is  in  sight 
westward  of  the  Corbiere,  N.  by  W.,  haul  in  to  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile 
of  the  rocks,  passing  between  Corbiere  bank  and  the  Chausey  group. 
When  the  lighthouse  is  midway  between  Gros  Mont  and  the  west  extreme 
of  Grande  lie,  or  touching  the  south  end  of  Meule  islet,  S.E.  J  E.,  and 
the  Etat  beacon  is  about  midway  between  the  Enseigne  and  the  Grande 
Entree,  E.  |  S.,  anchor  in  from  7  to  9  fathoms  over  sandy  bottom,  half  a 
mile  to  the  westward  of  the  Rondes  de  I'Ouest  and  the  same  distance  to 
the  north-east  of  the  Corbiere  bank. 

BEAUCHAMP  ANCHORAGE  lies  about  one  quarter  of  a 
mile  to  the  north-west  of  the  Huguenans,  and  in  case  of  need  might  be  used 


J 


«HAP.  vui.]  ISLES   CHAUSEY.  353 

dry  from  3  to  7  feet  above  the  lowest  tides.  The  entrance  is  between 
the  Gaillard  d'Avant  rock,  which  uncovers  30  feet,  and  some  small 
heads  which  lie  close  to  the  south-west  of  the  Conch^e  and  uncover 
17^  feet. 

The  leading  mark  through  is,  the  Selli^re  and  Petite  Mauvaise  rocks 
in  one  N.N.W.,  until  the  lighthouse  comes  in  line  with  the  middle  of 
the  Ango  rock ;  then  haul  to  the  westward  and  cross  the  mud-bank, 
which  extends  to  the  northward  from  the  Huguenans,  to  the  anchorage. 
When  the  small  heads  lying  close  to  the  south-west  of  the  Conchee  cover, 
or  the  Artimon  rock,  which  lies  a  little  to  the  north-east  of  the  Gaillard 
d'Avant  and  uncovers  19  feet,  there  will  not  be  less  than  10  or  11  feet  on 
any  part  of  the  mud-bank,  which  must  be  crossed  by  a  vessel  running  for 
the  anchorage. 

ANCHORAGE  between  Les  RONDES  de  L^OUEST 

and  La  DECHIR^E. — This  anchorage,  which  is  similar  to  that  of 
the  Enseigne,  is  situated  on  the  north-west  side  of  the  Chausey  group,  and 
affords  partial  shelter  from  South,  round  easterly,  to  N.E.  It  is  about 
3  cables  long  and  2  cables  wide,  and  has  a  depth  varying  from  22  to  40  feet, 
sandy  bottom.  The  entrance  is  1^  cables  wide,  E.  by  N.  |  N.  and  W.  by  S. 
f  S.,  between  a  small  rock  with  only  5  feet  over  it  at  the  lowest  tides,  named 
Basse  du  Chenal,  and  a  rock  which  uncovers  4  feet,  and  forms  the  south- 
west extreme  of  the  Rondes  de  la  D6chir^.  The  leading  mark  in,  is  the 
lighthouse  in  line  with  the  beacon  on  Gros  Mont,  S.S.E.  |  E.,  and  when 
the  Pointue  is  midway  between  the  Dechiree  and  the  Grande  Entree,  the 
vessel  will  be  as  near  as  possible  in  the  middle  of  the  anchorage. 

There  is  an  anchorage,  called  La  Dechiree,  to  the  eastward  of  the  above, 
entirely  surrounded  by  high  rocks  which  do  not  cover  until  the  last  quarter 
flood,  forming  between  the  periods  of  half-ebb  and  half-flood,  a  natural 
harbour,  accessible  at  all  tides,  but  no  vessel  should  use  it  in  changeable 
or  boisterous  weather,  or  without  a  good  local  pilot,  as  it  is  not  more  than 
half  a  mile  long  and  3  cables  wide,  the  broadest  part  being  between  the 
Dechiree  and  a  rock  to  the  southward  which  uncovers  24  feet. 

To  enter  this  anchorage,  proceed  as  before,  with  the  lighthouse  in  line 
with  the  beacon,  S.S.E.  |  E.,  and  when  the  Pointue  is  half  its  apparent 
breadth  open  to  the  southward  of  the  D6chir6e,  E.  by  N.,  the  vessel  will 
be  to  the  -southward  of  the  south-west  extreme  of  the  Rondes  de  la 
D^chir^e,  and  should  haul  to  the  eastward,  taking  care  to  steer  sufficiently 
to  the  northward  to  avoid  two  rocky  patches  which  lie  on  the  south  side 
of  the  anchorage,  and  are  awash  at  low-water  springs.  When  the  light- 
house is  in  one  with  Massue  rock,  S.  by  E.  |  E.,  anchor  in  from  4  to  5 
fathoms  water,  over  rather  coarse  ground.  The  Enseigne  anchorage  and 
the  north-west  channel  into  Chausey  sound  is  often  entered  by  this  route 
Q  7049.  £ 


352  CAPE   DE   LA   nAGUE   TO   GRANVILLE.         [chap.  vin. 

OS  a  shelter,  at  the  springs,  for  one  or  two  vessels  of  large  draught  when 
under  the  guidance  of  good  pilots.  It  consists  of  a  kind  of  basin  or  deep 
about  3  cubl(;s  long,  north  and  south,  2  cables  wido,  with  a  depth  of 
5  to  6  fathorjiH  in  it  at  low-water  springs,  over  excellent  holding  ground, 
extending  from  the  line  on  which  the  lighthouse  is  in  line  with  the  south 
extreme  of  the  Ango  rock,  to  that  on  which  the  beacon  onGros  Mont 
is  in  line  with  the  northern  hillock  on  the  islet  called  Grande  Ancre  or 
Saddle  island.  It  is  sheltered  at  low-water  springs  by  the  recks  and  the 
surrounding  sand  and  mud-banks,  and  it  is  also  tolerably  well  protected  at  the 
neaps  ;  but  at  high  water  daring  the  springs,  fresh  winds  from  N.W.,  round 
northerly,  to  N.E.,  cause  a  heavy  tumbling  sea,  which,  however,  soon 
subsides  .-is  the  tide  falls. 

The  usual  moorings  are  laid  down  N.N.E.  and  S.S.W.,  but  if  intending 
to  remain,  the  vessel  should  be  secured  with  anchors  on  each  bow  and 
quarter.  The  French  steam-vessels  employed  in  the  oyster  fishery  have 
moorings  laid  down  for  their  use.  Vessels  of  small  tonnage,  light  draught* 
a  fair  wind,  and  under  the  care  of  experienced  pilots,  may  enter  the 
Beauchamp  anchorage  from  the  southward  at  all  times  of  tide  by  passing 
between  the  Grand  Fillers  rock  and  the  Tournioure  rock  the  latter  having 
a  beacon  on  it,*  or  between  the  Tournioure  rock  and  the  Chapelle  rock ;  but 
these  narrow  passages  could  not  be  used  without  sufficient  wind  to  stem 
the  streams. 

Passe  Orientale  de  I'Etat. — The  Beauchamp  anchorage  can  also 
be  reached  by  running  through  this  passage,  which  is  a  clear  space  formed 
among  the  rocks  on  the  north-east  part  of  the  Chausey  group;  the.  tide 
must,  however,  be  sufficiently  high  for  a  vessel  to  cross  the  sand-bank, 
which  extends  over  the  greater  part  of  the  passage,  and  dries  from  2  to  5 
feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides. 

The  entrance  to  this  passage,  1^  cables  wide,  lies  between  the  Pouillou 
rock,  which  uncovers  32  feet,  and  some  small  rocky  heads  which  are 
connected  with  the  Petit  Etat,  and  uncover  from  5  to  10  feet.  From 
thence  the  passage  is  bounded  on  the  west  side  by  the  Caniard  du  Sud, 
which  uncovers  38  feet  and  by  the  Mauvaise,  which  is  always  above 
water ;  and  on  the  east  side  by  a  small  rocky  group  named  Flate  da 
Hibou,  the  highest  head  of  which  uncovers  26^  feet,  and  by  the  Culassi^re 
rock  which  is  never  covered.  The  leading  mark  through  is.  Petite  Ancre 
islet  in  line  with  the  Mauvaise,  S.W.  J  W.,  until  within  about  1^  cables 
of  the  latter,  then  steer  to  the  southward,  to  pass  between  it  and  the 
Culassiere,  and  thence  to  the  anchorage. 

Passe  de  la  C0IlCh6e  lies  between  the  Huguenans  and  the  Conch6e 
rocks,  and   thence   to   the   north-west   between    two    mud-banks,  which 

*  This  beacon  in  December  1876  had  disappeared. 


ijHAP.  vixi.]  ISLES   CHAUSEY.  353 

dry  from  3  to  7  feet  above  the  lowest  tides.  The  entrance  is  between 
the  Gaillard  d'Avant  rock,  which  uncovers  30  feet,  and  some  small 
heads  which  lie  close  to  the  south-west  of  the  Conch^e  and  uncover 
17^  feet. 

The  leading  mark  through  is,  the  Selli^re  and  Petite  Mauvaise  rocks 
in  one  N.N.W.,  until  the  lighthouse  comes  in  line  with  the  middle  of 
the  Ango  rock ;  then  haul  to  the  westward  and  cross  the  mud-bank, 
which  extends  to  the  northward  from  the  Huguenans,  to  the  anchorage. 
When  the  small  heads  lying  close  to  the  south-west  of  the  Conchee  cover, 
or  the  Artimon  rock,  which  lies  a  little  to  the  north-east  of  the  Gaillard 
d'Avant  and  uncovers  19  feet,  there  will  not  be  less  than  10  or  11  feet  on 
any  part  of  the  mud-bank,  which  must  be  crossed  by  a  vessel  running  for 
the  anchorage. 

ANCHORAGE  between  Les  RONDES  de  L'OUEST 

and  La  DECHIR^E. — This  anchorage,  which  is  similar  to  that  of 
the  Enseigne,  is  situated  on  the  north-west  side  of  the  Chausey  group,  and 
affords  partial  shelter  from  South,  round  easterly,  to  N.E.  It  is  about 
3  cables  long  and  2  cables  wide,  and  has  a  depth  varying  from  22  to  40  feet, 
sandy  bottom.  The  entrance  is  1^  cables  wide,  E.  by  N.  |  N.  and  W.  by  S. 
f  S.,  between  a  small  rock  with  only  5  feet  over  it  at  the  lowest  tides,  named 
Basse  du  Chenal,  and  a  rock  which  uncovers  4  feet,  and  forms  the  south- 
west extreme  of  the  Rondes  de  la  D^chir^e.  The  leading  mark  in,  is  the 
lighthouse  in  line  with  the  beacon  on  Gros  Mont,  S.S.E.  |  E.,  and  when 
the  Pointue  is  midway  between  the  D6chiree  and  the  Grande  Entree,  the 
vessel  will  be  as  near  as  possible  in  the  middle  of  the  anchorage. 

There  is  an  anchorage,  called  La  Dechir^e,  to  the  eastward  of  the  above, 
entirely  surrounded  by  high  rocks  which  do  not  cover  until  the  last  quarter 
flood,  forming  between  the  periods  of  half-ebb  and  half-flood,  a  natural 
harbour,  accessible  at  all  tides,  but  no  vessel  should  use  it  in  changeable 
or  boisterous  weather,  or  without  a  good  local  pilot,  as  it  is  not  more  than 
half  a  mile  long  and  3  cables  wide,  the  broadest  part  being  between  the 
D^chiree  and  a  rock  to  the  southward  which  uncovers  24  feet. 

To  enter  this  anchorage,  proceed  as  before,  with  the  lighthouse  in  line 
with  the  beacon,  S.S.E.  J  E.,  and  when  the  Pointue  is  half  its  apparent 
breadth  open  to  the  southward  of  the  D6chir6e,  E.  by  N.,  the  vessel  will 
be  to  the  -southward  of  the  south-west  extreme  of  the  Rondes  de  la 
D^chir^e,  and  should  haul  to  the  eastward,  taking  care  to  steer  sufficiently 
to  the  northward  to  avoid  two  rocky  patches  which  lie  on  the  south  side 
of  the  anchorage,  and  are  awash  at  low-water  springs.  When  the  light- 
house is  in  one  with  Massue  rock,  S.  by  E.  J  E.,  anchor  in  from  4  to  5 
fathoms  water,  over  rather  coarse  ground.  The  Enseigne  anchorage  and 
the  north-west  channel  into  Chausey  sound  is  often  entered  by  this  route 
Q  7049.  £ 


U*^0 


•J^^s, 


.    i»rri 


?   ii4*^ 


-.     il 


€ 


1.-.-     ■J' 


<<••»■ 


'         '  .• 


t^^  ',J!ri:irA;ff  :<Ji7 


•-•:-' 


Ar.l 


»   «•« 


^  * 


^  . 


■y- 


'/-.I 


a  ,f      •        I      .    • «'    i      t  ■  ■       ■ 

f'  ••  • 


.  .Vi-  ii»  *?*.»:■  .i*r  u-t  u*  v. 


fY 


•    I 


*>' 


"/"c  u*'  '*•-  J,  b'.iij'  HHaiWX?^  1* 


/ 


•  '//  •  -' 


•  •  #     *  • ', 

f 

*'/    * «  '     •  .  .  •  fit  I',       •,  I-. 


7v-;^C*   W*  tut   V.iVTj 


\tt\>t*»n  f^i.  /»« M^l  t/«i«l  fii«  tuiiu^^  ts;  i"^iistliy  titn'ff'fTffU^f  bfriijg"  one  oox:- 
hnit*.'i  ttittiu  tt\  t*ttV.,i\n  \,t'/\t*  .'i  *ii  y.liU'.U  uu€'jtj\i:r  frtjitk  H  to  h  feet^  and 
vfh»h  ii  IJ'/y/.'  /mimI  \i*tY/iii»  tiniUt,  $otiht\  wetiU:rly,  httd  South  there  u  a 
Im.i«/^  ..m*  «/h  UiMfi-  Ity  l««i'|i/n^  Mo„f,  r;ftHofi  t:hnr4ih^kUifiiAe  between 
Hf'  MHMM/»il  »fi  Mntd  Ihtyitl^^  hhit  ;»i.  (it'initi'tu  dim'clj.«ter-pk*,  a  vessel  will 
|.M"'  «  ..•<*.  <ll«-l«MM   to  iUi^  wiftlwutW  or  Uh-  Niitl#;M  a;j(J  the  rocky  heads  an 

Ill  U  irr.  I  h*.  /ii'/M  ijiu  I,  lork  Jh  iiiiii-kf-rf  hy  u  oj'miliir  lighthoiise  from 
¥tU\t  li  III  MM  iIi'iiIImii  iii  till  i'm'i  iiliovi'  lii^h  wiilvr,  ih  exhibited  a  fixed  red 
\\i*M^t  ilritMii  In  iImii  iviiiilhi<r  10  iiiilrrt. 


CHAP.vui.]  HAVRE  DE  BLAINVILLE,  355 

Les  Nattes  ^orm  a  small  rocky  group,  about  2  cables  long  N.W.  and 
S.E.,  at  the  south-west  extreme  of  the  ridge  extending  from  the  Senequet, 
and  are  the  most  western  rocks  which  uncover  in  the  vicinity  of  the  shore 
between  the  harbours  of  St.  Germain  and  R^gneville.  They  lie  W.  by  N. 
3 J  miles  from  the  entrance  of  Blainville  harbour,  S.W.  |  W.  2J  miles  from 
the  Senequet,  and  the  marks  for  the  highest  head,  which  uncovers  1^  feet 
at  the  lowest  tides,  are  Senequet  lighthouse  a  little  open  to  the  eastward 
of  Pirou  church-steeple,  N.E.  |  E.,  and  Coutances  steeples  in  line  with  the 
houses  of  Courtainville  village  (built  on  a  remarkable  mound),  S.E.  b.  E.  |  E. 
A  vessel  will  pass  to  the  westward  of  the  west  extreme  of  this  group,  when 
bound  to  the  southward,  by  keeping  Pirou  steeple  well  open  to  the  west- 
ward of  the  tower  on  the  Senequet.  This  extreme  bears  S.  f  W.  19j^  miles 
from  cape  Carteret  lighthouse,  but  it  is  only  in  very  clear  weather  that 
the  light  can  be  seen  so  far  to  the  southward. 

There  are  several  small  ridges  of  rock,  uncovering  from  3  to  5  feet  at 
low-water  springs,  and  forming  a  chain  a  mile  in  length,  which  extends 
from  the  Nattes  to  the  north-east  as  far  as  the  beach,  and  rejoins  the  outer 
sunken  rocks  of  the  Senequet  ridge.  A  heavy  sea  runs  on  all  these  rocks 
when  it  blows  hard  from  the  westward. 

A  bell  buoy  painted  red  with  staff  and  reflector,  is  moored  in  6  feet 
water,  on  the  west  side  of  Les  Nattes  rocks. 

At  if  miles  S.  W.  by  W.  from  Les  Nattes  rocks,  lies  the  International 
buoy  F.  painted  in  red  and  white  horizontal  bands. 

HAVRE  de  BLAINVILLE  is  situated  about  3}  mUes  S.W.  by  S. 
of  Greffosse  harbour  (page  332),  nearly  midway  between  that  harbour  and 
R^gneville.  It  is  a  kind  of  lagoon  almost  entirely  filled  with  sand,  and 
can  only  afford  shelter  to  fishing  boats  at  the  springs. 

A  buoy  with  alternate  red  and  black  bands,  lies  in  the  entrance  to  Havre 
de  Blainville  ;  there  is  also  a  beacon  near  the  entrance  consisting  of  a  mast 
surmounted  by  a  ball  and  painted  red. 

ROCHES  d'AGON  are  a  small  group  lying  3^  miles  from  the 
shore,  and  N.W.  |  N.  II  miles  from  the  highest  head  of  the  Ronquet,  with 
a  depth  of  8  to  10  feet  close  to  them.  They  form,  with  a  bed  of  rocks  on 
the  beach,  a  continuous  ridge,  extending  in  a  west  direction  from  Agon 
steeple,  and  parallel  to  the  Ronquet  and  the  Mouli^res  d'Agon  rocks.  The 
highest  head  of  the  Agon  rocks  uncovers  8  feet  at  the  lowest  tides  ;  W.S.W. 
4J  cables  from  it  there  is  another  head  which  uncovers  6  feet ;  and  at  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  latter  head  is  another,  which 
uncovers  2  feet  and  lies  N.W.  ^  N.  1^  miles  from  the  high  head  of  the 
Ronquet,  and  S.  ^  W.  3  miles  from  the  westernmost  head  of  the  Nattes. 

There  are  no  available  marks  on  the  shore  for  the  western  head  of  the 
Agon  rocks,  which  are  extremely  dangerous  to  approach  between  half  ebb 

z  2 


356  CAPE  DE  LA  HAGUE  TO  GBANVILLE.  [chap.  vru. 

and  half  f1oo<l,  and  a  lieavj  ssa  runs  on  them  when  it  blows  hard  from  the 
westward,  but  by  keeping  Uatainvillc  sand-hills  shut  in  with  cape  081161*61, 
N.  by  E.,  or  the  bluff  point,  6  miles  to  the  southward  of  Granville,  named 
Bee  de  Champeaux  or  Champeaux  point,  in  sight  to  the  westward  of  poiDte 
du  Roe,  S.  \  W.,  it  >rill  lead  to  the  westward. 

Le  RONQUET  lying  W.  by  N.  \  N.  2J  mtles  from  the  south  point 
of  the  entrance  of  Kegneville  Harbour,  is  the  highest  rock  of  a  group  a 
mile  long,  east  and  west,  and  half  a  mile  wide.  This  rock  uncovers  20  feet 
at  the  lowest  tides,  and  it  may  be  useful  to  the  mariner  to  know  that  when 
it  covers,  which  is  at  about  half  flood,  the  stream  in  the  ofiSng  turns  to  the 
north-east,  and  at  half  ebb,  when  it  is  awash,  the  stream  turns  and  sets  to 
the  south-west.  It  may  be  easily  recognized,  when  unco'vered,  by  its 
position,  and  by  its  being  the  first  rock  that  shows  itself  in  &  radius  of  3 
miles  from  the  entrance  of  R^gneville  harbour. 

The  next  highest  head,  forming  the  soutlieni  part  of  the  group,  uncovers 
12  feet,  and  lies  S.  by  W.  half  a  mile  from  the  Ronquet,  with  Grimoaville 
church -steeple  a  little  open  to  the  northward  of  Coutances  cathedral  bear- 
ing east,  a  little  northerly ;  and  Mont  Martin  windmill  in  line  with  a 
guard  house  on  tlie  shore,  S.E.  by  R.  f  E.  The  latter  mark  also  shows 
the  direction  of  the  western  point  of  the  group,  which  is  three  quarters  of 
a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  Ronquet,  and  is  terminated  by  a  rock  unco- 
vering 5  feet.  The  whole  of  this  group  is  very  dangerous  when  covered, 
as  there  arc  no  marks  that  can  be  understood,  except  by  the  local  pilots,  to 
point  out  the  position  of  its  western  edge,  which  is  2^  miles  off  shore,  and 
bears  S.E.  J  E.  6^  miles  from  the  Mari^  ledge,  and  E.  by  N.  |  N.  2J  miles 
from  the  highest  head  of  the  Catheue  reef ;  Champeaux  point  kept  in  sight 
to  the  westward  of  pointe  du  Roc  leads  well  to  the  westward. 

HAVRE  de  REGNEVILLE  is  situated  near  the  mouth  of 
two  little  rivers,  named  the  Sienne  and  the  Soulles,  the  waters  of  which 
unite  4  miles  in  the  interior,  but  being  so  entirely  filled  with  sand,  it  will 
only  admit  coasters  of  about  8  or  9  feet  draught  at  high-water  springs. 
The  bottom  of  the  harbour  being  chiefly  composed  of  sand  and  shells  is 
bad  for  holding  ;  the  anchors  should  therefore  be  buried  to  avoid  driving 
with  strong  winds  between  W.N.W.  and  S.W.,  to  which  the  entrance  is 
exposed. 

The  entrance  lies  between  the  Bee  d'Agon  or  Agon  point,  and  the  point 
on  which  the  guard-house  stands  (which  with  Mont  Martin  windmill  is  the 
mark  for  the  south-west  extreme  of  the  Ronquet  group),  and  several  sand- 
banks lie  in  the  fairway.  Two  channels  lead  to  the  entrance.  The  princi- 
pal channel  runs  along  the  south  side  of  the  Ronquet  group  and  the 
Mouli^res  d*Agon,  and  the  leading    mark  for  it  is  the    fort   (standing 


CHAP.  Till.]  HAVRE  DE  REGNEVILLE.  357 

3  cables  to  the  north-west  of  tho  extremity  of  Agoa  point)  seen  between 
the  steeples  of  Coutances  and  that  of  Grimouville,  E.  ^  N. 

The  other  channel,  named  the  Coliere,  is  not  quite  so  deep  as  the 
former,  but  it  has  the  advantage  of  leading  directly  into  the  harbour,  and 
avoiding  the  turn  to  the  south-east  of  Agon  point.  The  Caillou  rock, 
which  uncovers  17  feet,  lies  on  the  east  side  of  this  channel,  and  the  leading 
mark  in  is,  Grimouville  church-steeple  a  little  of'Cn  to  the  rij|!;ht  of  the 
custom-house  (the  last  large  house  on  the  shore  on  the  north  part  of 
Rdgneville  village),  E,N,E.  With  strong  winds  between  N.N.W.  and 
W.S.W.,  a  heavy  sea  breaks  with  great  violence  at  the  entrance,  and  during 
this  time  no  vessel  should  attempt  to  enter  witliout  a  pilot. 

LIGHT. — A  fixed  white  light,  dioptric  and  of  the  fourth  order,  is 
exhibited  on  Agon  point.  It  is  elevated  33  feet  above  high-water,  and 
visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  10  miles. 

TidOS. — It  is  high-water,  full  and  change,  at  R^gneville  at  6  h.  20  m.  ; 
springs  rise  35  feet,  neaps  2^  feet. 

BANCS  de  la  CATHEUE  are  composed  of  sand,  and  extend 
north  and  south  6  miles,  nearly  parallel  to  the  line  of  coast.  Two  patches 
near  their  middle  dry  at  low-water  great  springs,  at  which  period  there 
are  6  feet  on  their  south  end,  and  2  fathoms  on  their  north  end.  These 
banks  are  in  some  measure  connected  with  the  shore  as  far  south  as  the  Roc 
de  Granville,  and  to  the  north  as  far  as  the  Ronquet  reef  by  a  bed  of  ^aand 
which  has  only  from  2  to  12  feet  over  it  at  low  water,  at  which  time  there 
is  no  navigable  passage  between  the  banks  and  the  shore. 

La  CatlieUO  is  a  dangerous  reef,  about  a  mile  long  in  a  W.S.VV.  and 
E.N.E.  direction,  and  a  quarter  of  a  mile  broad,  lying  close  to  the  north  end 
of  the  Catheue  banks.  There  are  several  heads  on  it,  two  of  which  uncover 
at  low  water  great  springs,  and  the  rest  have  5  and  6  feet  over  them  at  tho 
same  period. 

The  highest  head,  which  uncovers  2\  feet,  lies  on  the  middle  of  the  reef, 
W,  by  S.  I  8.  2|  miles  from  the  westernmost  head  of  the  Ronquet  reef, 
N.  \  W.  8^  miles  from  Granville  lighthouse,  and  N.E.  by  E.  \  E.  7^  miles 
from  Chausey  lighthouse.  The  marks  for  it  are,  Mont  St.  Michael  just 
open  westward  of  Champeaux  point,  nearly  South  ;  Chausey  lighthouse  in 
line  with  the  south  side  of  the  Etat  (Chausey)  S.W.  by  W.  \  W.,  and 
Coutances  cathedral  in  line  with  Agon  point  E.  \  N.  Champeaux  point 
open  and  shut  with  pointe  du  Roc  (Granville)  S.  \  W.  leads  to  the  east- 
ward of  Catheue  banks  and  Catheue  reef ;  and  Agon  church- steeple  in  one 
wit  the  southern  slope  of  mont  Huchon,  E.  \  8.,  leads  a  safe  distance  to 
the  northward  of  that  reef  and  the  Shamrock  knoll. 


If  ^'i     ■*4»i'   cTl. ".     "  -  "^^-^  *.   *" 


.  *  ft.        J'    .^■'.  -.1.  ■--•^     ••a."- 


sir    m.     TS' 


3-*^ 


7'  Z-   -7  ^    121*^  ^-'^.  i_ 

••     •  -    ~     ■*    Z-  --■-  3lijfe*I   OnXEJSt? 


V.V.  V 


-i^= 

.!>'- 


Hi 


to 


»     •  I 


.   -    "^-  l-4*i*   ;.5    ^i«» 


-  ▼"—  *r*:l»l'll  IC*t^  -J 


^'cf 


DA VGEB8  off  POET  de  GRAmTTLLE  — T^e  Mxig^ioii 

b^,w«r<rr.  Or*:.7,M*-  4-1  t!v:  CLai-tt  iil-r*.  *:  di-r  per:>i  of  low-tnte-  springs, 
I*,  'i'.ffl^rji',  i'.'J  'iA-i?f:.'oi».  £::i  rLtir-rlv  cr-r-iviyablr  fcr  Te*5cl<  drawing 
f/i'yf';  tfjA/i  7  or  %  fe^.  bv  the  nozneroTi*  backs  lid  knolls  of  sand  which 
f/yrwj  n,  }fAr,  vriih  not  more  thari  from  14  to  17  feet  on  the  deepest  part«, 
ft^fv^ml  yH.U:\i<:%  hskVH  oiAy  2  to  6  feet  orer  them ;  small  coasters,  howeTer, 
\fy  following  the  direction  ^ren  for  tLis  pa.isage,  can  pass  between  these 
\Httikn  and  the  Admiraltj  bank  in  not  less  than  10  feet  at  low  water. 

Banc  de  Tombelaine. — The  flats  extending  from  1 J  miles  TT.  by  N. 
of  |K/ir<te  dii  lUx:  to  Champeaux  point,  and  on  which  there  are  from  one 
to  a  f**M  Hi  l';w- water  f'prings,  extend  3 J  miles  from  the  shore  westward  of 
HU  I 'ill  r  J  it  then  gradually  narrows  until  nearly  abreast  of  Champeaox 
|»oint,  where  it  again  projects  to  seaward  in  a  long  narrow  spit,  having  9 
i'mi  on  it«  outer  end  which  bears  N.W.  4J  miles  from  Champeaux  point. 
Tho  hlglKtHt  of  theMO  are  the  Tombelaine  bank,  the  top  of  which  is  awash, 
und  itnoLher  little  ridge  of  sand  which  uncovers  a  foot.  This  latter  lies 
M.W.  about  *JHi  uxWiiHf  and  the  summit  of  the  Tombelaine  S.W.  by  W.  J  W. 
li  niiln  from  (iranviilu  pier-head  light. 

DaHHO  Dorrldre  JH  a  small  isolated  rock  rising  from  a  sandy  bottom, 
with  -I  ffot  nvnr  it  at  the  lowest  tides.     It  lies  a  cable  N.N.E.of  the  north 


CHAP.vm.]  BANCS  DE  LA  CATHEUE.  359 

end  of  the  Tombelaine,  with  Granville  lighthouse  bearing  E.N.E.  northerly, 
one  mile,  and  the  pier-head  light  £.  ^  N.,  1^  miles. 

Banc  HagU6t  is  composed  of  a  number  of  shoal  heads  with  from 
2  to  6  feet  on  them  at  low-water  springs,  and  from  9  to  15  feet  between. 
It  extends  2|  miles  in  a  N.  by  W.  and  S.  by  E.  direction  and  the 
northern  head  with  6  feet  on  it  lies  N.W.  §  N.  3|  miles  from  Granville 
lighthouse.  Between  this  head  ahd  the  southern  end  of  the  Admiralty 
patch  there  is  a  passage  about  one  quarter  of  a  mile  broad  with  11  feet  at 
low  water.  Chausey  lighthouse  touching  La  Chapelle  rock  leads  through 
this  passage.  The  southern  end  is  nearly  joined  to  the  Banc  de  Tom-" 
belaine  by  a  narrow  ridge  of  sand  that  almost  dries  at  low-water  springs, 
thus  forming  a  complete  bar  at  low  water  between  Granville  and  the 
Chausey  isles^  as  mentioned  in  page  351. 

Banc  d6  Rondeliaie,  &  small  patch  of  sand,  gravel,  and  rock,  with 
10  feet  on  it  at  low  water  springs,  lies  W.  by  S.  4^  miles  from  Granville 
lighthouse.  The  spire  of  Granville  church  seen  open  northward  of  the 
lighthouse  leads  nearly  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  bank;  the  Culassiere 
rock  (Chausey)  in  line  with  the  Huguenans  beacon  N.  ^  E.  leads  to  the 
westward ;  and  Culassiere  rock  midway  between  the  Huguenans  and  the 
Conch^e  N.  ^  W.  leads  to  the  eastward. 

There  is  a  small  knoll  with  23  feet  on  it,  lying  N.N.W.  about  3  cables 
from  the  Rondehaie. 

La  Videcoq,  a  small  rock  which  uncovers  2^  feet  at  the  lowest  tides, 
has  from  18  to  20  feet  on  all  sides  of  it  over  a  sandy  botton^.  It  lies  west- 
ward of  the  Haguet  bank,  with  Granville  lighthouse  bearing  E.  by  S.  J  S. 
3^  miles  ;  Chausey  lighthouse  N.W.  J  N.  5^  miles ;  Granville  church  in 
line  with  the  second  southernmost  chimney  of  the  south-western  ban-ack, 
E.  by  S.  J  S. ;  and  the  Culassiere  rock  (Chausey)  nearly  in  one  with  he 
Conch^e,  N.  by  W.  ^  W,  Granville  church  in  line  with  the  northernmost 
chimney  of  the  south-western  barrack  leads  half  a  mile  northward  of  the 
rock ;  the  same  church  in  line  with  the  southern  chimney  leads  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  to  the  southward ;  the  Mauvaise  rock  in  one  with  the  Conch^e 
leads  half  a  mile  to  the  eastward ;  and  the  Mauvaise  in  line  with  the 
Huguenans  leads  to  the  westward. 

This  danger  is  marked  by  a  red  and  black  bell  buoy. 

A  small  sand  bank,  about  8  cables  long,  N.W.  and  S.E.,  and  one  quarter 
of  a  mile  wide,  with  only  6  feet  on  it,  lies  half  a  mile  to  the  northward  of 
the  Videcoq.  The  Mauvaise  kept  midway  between  the  Huguenans  and 
the  Conchee,  N.  by  W.  J  W.  leads  to  the  westward  of  it ;  and  the  three 
mills  of  Breville  kept  a  little  open  to  the  northward  of  the  foot  of  Menars 
point  leads  to  the  northward. 


-1      At 


-    V 


T     •• 


«r    • 


«■ 


•X 


«  «^ 


.  *>■& 


•a     »      •.»./..*:    •-   t '  .•  j-i   ;•• 


I<»fc7  -U  OJ:A3mLLE.-~^t  -.: 


<        <■ 


-^      .  t     a--'.   1/-.    i.>..    x'l.i'iL   -• 

»//r  •      ■*•       '.•  ••. •  .''  '  •   .'   5.:  ••- =    irirn-.'  -:■:  & 

'I/.':  '/-•>?  ;.Afv. -;  '•.  or.  •:.*:  •••/::.•.  -Id*- 1:  :Lr  lover  town  at  the  loot  of 
|y  l^/',  At.i'K,  w.r..  •;.*-  ;i/r5L';*;:.:  Li.-.i,  -Lrrltfrrs  it  from  X.W-,  roond 
/.'//•h'f)/,  »'/  ■•.'*.K.,  a:.'J  th':  pi-:.-  j/rov:ct5  :i  from  the  hearj  sea  e&aaed 
I//  s"/u»*j  //'-^'ilv  v/.'fjd»,  ^i?  !t  ;s  ofifrn  fror.i  South  to  S.S.E.  The  water 
I.-  ■i/i//'/i}i  in  tii<' lj:f/i/'/jr  'A-ti';rj  it  Mo-n-a  Lard  from  North  to  N.W^  hot 
•/<.■:•<]»  ;tt  ilifit  tir/M'  >}jorjM  U;  wf;li  rnoorc'I,  for  violent  squalls  rush  down 
frorn  I.-  Ho'*.  '1  Ij<-  j;i<'f  i*^  huilt  on  the  rocks  which  uncover  at  the  foot  of 
f}i«-  i''«  itii  v/ii'i  (ifirt  of  1/4;  itoc.  It  \jfyAnii  at  Co  vanls  westward  of  the  last 
fiO'».«'«  Ml  iIh'  Iowit  (owrr,  aii'l  th'-nw  f-xtCMirl.s  South  399  yards;  it  then 
liiin:'.  HI*.  \ty  K.  1^  K.  2Ifi  yjinl-,  jiij^l  is  t(;rininatod  by  a  broad  pier-head. 
A  \\tt\\\\\\]t,  l«i-.iii  hin  Im'^'H  'jorihinicteil  at  tho  eastern  part  of  the  harboar, 
fiM'l   itM  rti'I  in  H\   I'd'ct,  ami   its  bottom   13.^  feet  above  the  level  of  the 

'I'lii'  niifiT  liiirlioiir  ilri<'H  at  low  water,  but  is  accessible,  at  both  springs 
itiiij  iiiMi|ir<,  \t\  vi'NNi  Im  of  Iju'^n  (Iniu^^Iit.  TIic  inner  harbour  can  only  be 
I'liiiii'il  Ml  h|irin)rH  IVnni  one  hour  to  1 J  hours  before  or  after  high  woter^ 


CHAP.vin.]  DANGERS  OFF  POET  DE  GRANVILLE,  361 

according  to  the  range  of  the  tide.  The  outer  harbour  can  be  entered  at 
ordinary  neaps  from  1^  hours  before  to  1^  hours  after  high  water;  the 
bottom  is  composed  of  mud,  and  a  sharp  vessel  will  ground  upright  and 
lie  in  safety. 

A  beach  of  muddy  sand  and  gravel  extends  8  or  9  cables  off  shore 
between  pointe  du  Roc  and  Champeaux  point,  and  several  rocky  ridges 
rise  above  it,  and  uncover  at  low  water  springs.  These  rocks  begin  about 
2  miles  to  the  northward  of  Champeaux  point,  and  extend  almost  un- 
interruptedly along  the  outer  part  of  the  beach  as  far  as  Gautier  point. 
This  latter  point,  bearing  S.E.  by  B.  ^  B.  9  cables  from  the  south-west 
extreme  of  Le  Roc,  is  high,  and  on  its  summit  is  a  fort  which  commands 
the  entrance  of  the  harbour.  The  rocky  bed  forming  the  base  of  the 
western  part  of  Le  Roc  also  uncovers  at  low  water  as  far  out  as  2  cables 
North  and  !N,W.  from  the  north-west  part  of  the  peninsula,  and  3^  cables 
S.  by  W.  from  pointe  du  Roc,  which  has  on  it  a  beacon  surmounted  by  a 
globe,  the  upper  part  of  this  beacon  is  painted  white  and  the  lower  black. 

Le  Loup,  the  nearest  danger  to  the  harbour,  lies  S.  by  W.  f  W. 
2}  cables  from  the  extremity  of  the  pier,  and  uncovers  21  feet  at  the  lowest 
tides.  This  rock  forms  a  kind  of  natural  breakwater,  sheltering  the 
harbour  from  the  heavy  sea  during  south-westerly  gales.  The  pier-head 
lighthouse  in  line  with  the  gap  which  separates  Le  Roc  from  the  hills  to 
the  north-east  of  it  bearing  N.E.  ^  E.  leads  a  cable  westward  of  the  Loup ; 
and  the  same  lighthouse  in  line  with  Granville  church  steeple  N.  by  E.  ^  E. 
leads  half  a  cable  to  the  eastward.  This  rock  is  marked  by  a  stone  tower 
painted  with  red  and  white  horizontal  bands,  which  exhibits  a  green  light 
when  there  is  sufficient  water  to  enter  the  harbour,  and  covers  at  half  flood, 
at  which  period  there  are  10  feet  between  the  pier-heads,  6  feet  within 
them,  and  16^  feet  over  the  Tombelaine  bank. 

LIG-HTS. — Granville  lighthouse,  42  feet  high,  stands  on  pointe  du 
Roc  or  cape  Lihou  and  exhibits,  at  154  feet  above  high  water,  a  fixed 
white  light,  of  the  third  order,  visible  in  clear  weather  15  miles. 

A  fixed  red  light,  dioptric  and  of  the  fourth  order,  is  shown  from  a 
lighthouse  on  the  south-east  extremity  of  the  pier-head,  on  the  west  side 
of  the  entrance  to  the  outer  harbour.  It  is  elevated  40  feet  above  high 
water,  and  visible  4  miles. 

A  LifO  Boat  is  stationed  at  Granville. 

DIRECTIONS  from  CAPE  de  la  HAGUE  to 
GRANVILLE  through  COTENTIN  PASSAGE,-This 

passage  runs  along  the  western  coast  of  the  peninsula  of  Cotentin,  and  is 
situated  in  a  great  measure  on  the  sandy  flat  which  occupies  nearly  the 
whole  extent  of  the  shore  between  cape  Carteret  and  Granville.     Coasters 


i/i 


-».»•»       .»      Ij.     I 


UX'  .  Ji.       -'  . 


rt^ 


ry 


•« 


.:#-  •  ^--ti-r'u   '  "a-t^  —A  — •? 


.:  *  rv  'ju^  ».tii  i:'Ac^  -<.»ir.i  v.  r  •'''.  uiiC  iran.  ! 


bE 


-   •-     • 


4  /*/yv/«  t-'vr/  ;.  /:,  -mi^r:  4.:  <'^ri:L"<  JJ^  vr  Si.  31^v.  ir-i  isjjX  h  woold  be 
f^u',U:  tu,yM*.'^,^f  •:'.<??*  if  li^  \5At^  1*  <:r<«wii  c.znLg  th*  1*^  <rf  die  noirdi- 
s:;i*t  >.Ut^::,f  *j»  i*^u  Oj»r,'.^.l<;  \^A'AH  \'/w  w^z/sT  IB  the  pass^ie.     At  tins 

fi?/i/:  th«^«'  ;*,  f.'/i  »-  iffi':i«:f.t  'i«rj/*.r*-  for  A  T*r^**:l  of  Uf^  draQgbt,  orer  the  flat 
*/«'iw«''f.  ti.«:  f '';«-*!  '/Sirskt  %iA  Oj^  isJ*or*:,  tTii  *be  miMt  of  neoessiy  anchor  to 
virnit  |V/r  v.;iU'r,  i*hi':h  wiJl  rot  uke  pl&ce 'int:!  at  lea^t  one-quarter  flood, 
wli<';i  th<;r«-  vk  jjj  J/*:  aUytj*  2 1  f'r<4  ifi  th«r  fajrwav  with  the  leading  mark  cm 
/il  nifi'itiifK,  tiiu\  7  f'r'rt  ov<;r  th'r  fch'/^leH  pait  of  the  Y^\(:s,  Anchorage  will 
f/<!  foiiii'J  in  V/iiJvill<;  or  in  S'-A'A^ft  bay,  or  under  cajje  Carteret.  The  best 
IHfp.Ultfit  ni  iUt*  \tit.Utr  lAuf'ji  h.  in  4  fathornMy  with  the  lighthouse  just  open 
fo  i\ti'.  w^'Ktwanl  of  th<:  fort  on  th':;  wf:HU:ni  pitch  of  the  cape,  and  distant 

W\tt'ii  (iif'ou;/h  Mm*.  liiU't*^  und  having  given  the  Nez-de-Jobourg  a  berth 
of  iif  irfiiit.  a  niil'tH,  to  fivoi'l  thf5  lIuqiietM  de  Joubourg,  steer  for  cape 
|''lfiniiuivill<s  find  iUi'iivA'f  nn  ihtt  v';mhc1  udvanccB  to  the  southward,  keep 
lliM  )u't|Htiiilif;ii(ur  point  of  i\u*.  N/;/  w<;ll  open  to  the  westward  of  cape 
T'liiinunvilli',  no  ijh  to  hfiv<;  Um?  h'glithouHO  fit  cape  dc  la  Hague  open  also 
of  Ihn  N*'/,  l^  which  iiri'Cfinliori  hUv.  will  pass  to  the  westward  of  Bihard 
Ibit.  ihn  iiiiinr  pii-ti'h  of  ih»  Snrhiinviilo  haiikK,  and  to  the  westward  of  the 

Ull    lOI'llH 

WhiMi  iihrniint  iho  hittor,  whicdi  will  ho  known  whon  port  Bail  and  Gonej 
i<lniit*lii«M  iMiniit  hi  rtlKlit  to  tliu  Hoiithward  of  capo  Carteret,  haul  in  gradu- 
nil)'  inwanlN   llio    land   to  avoid    the  Trols-Grnnos  (page  326),  and  to 


CHAP.  VIII.]  PORT  DE   GRANVILLE. — ^DIRECTIONS.  363 

shut  in  the  north-west  peak  of  the  lofty  light-coloured  sand-hills  of 
Hatainville  (page  328)  with  the  dark  bluff  and  nearly  perpendicular  point 
of  cape  Carteret,  N.  |  E.,  which  is  the  fairway  mark  between  the  F616s 
banks  and  the  coast^  and  will  lead  over  the  tail  of  these  banks  in  15  feet  at 
the  lowest  tides. 

If  there  be  water  enough  for  the  vessel  to  proceed  to  the  southward, 
keep  the  latter  mark  on,  and  it  will  lead  between  the  Jourdan  ridge  and 
the  foul  ground  off  the  Senequet  rock  ;  but  the  sand-hills  must  again  be 
opened  out  when  passing  this  foul  ground.  Cape  Flamanville  just  in  sight 
to  the  westward  of  cape  Carteret  will  lead  over  the  south-east  tail  of  the 
F6I^s  banks ;  but  it  must  for  the  same  reason  be  gradually  opened  out  as 
the  vessel  proceeds  to  the  southward.  Rosel  point  in  sight  to  the  westward 
of  cape  Carteret  leads  nearly  midway  between  the  Jourdan  ridge  and  the 
foul  ground  off  the  Senequet ;  but  Rosel  point  is  not  always  well  defined, 
being  confused  with  the  land  behind  it. 

When  in  the  vicinity  of  Senequet  rock,  steer  so  as  to  get  Champeaux 
point  6  miles  southward  of  Granville,  just  in  sight,  westward  of  pointe  du 
Roc,  the  west  extreme  of  the  peninsula  on  which  the  town  of  Granville 
stands,  bearing  S.  \  W.,  which  (if  the  state  of  the  tide  and  the  vessel's 
draught  will  admit)  will  lead  up  to  pointe  du  Roc,  inshore  of  Catheue 
reef;  but  if  there  be  not  water  over  the  banks,  look  out,  as  the  vessel 
advances  to  the  southward,  for  the  remarkable  trees  on  mount  Hucon,  about 
2  miles  northward  of  Coutances,  and  do  not  bring  them  in  line  with  Agon 
church  until  the  Etat  (Chausey)  appears  in  one  with  the  Huguenans  about 
S.by  W.f  W. 

The  latter  will  be  the  leading  mark  to  the  westward  of  Catheue  reef 
until  Coutances  cathedral  comes  in  line  with  Bee  d'Agon  or  Agon  point, 
when  steer  towards  Granville,  keeping  the  Etat  well  open  northward  of  the 
Canue,  and  after  passing  them,  until  Mont  St.  Michael  appears  within 
twice  its  breadth  of  Champeaux  point  bearing  South,  or  until  Coutances 
cathedral  comes  in  line  with  Mont  Martin  church,  N.E.  by  E.  \  E.,  either 
of  which  will  lead  eastward  of  the  Admiralty  bank.  When  Chausey  light- 
house opens  to  the  southward  of  the  Huguenans,  W.  by  N.  |  N.,  haul  up 
for  it,  to  avoid  the  Haguet  bank,  or  anchor,  if  there  is  not  sufficient  water 
to  enter  Granville.  At  the  early  period  of  2  hours'  flood  there  will  be  11 
feet  over  the  Catheue,  the  Founet,  and  the  Cartheue  banks. 

The  French  pilots  generally  proceed  through  the  Cotentin  passage  as 
follows:— 

If  by  day,  run  through  Alderney  race  if  possible  during  the  last  of  the 
north-east  stream,  then,  if  the  vessel's  draught  be  not  too  great  to  pass 
without  risk  between  the  F^l^s  banks  and  the  land  at  low  water,  steer  to 
the  southward  to  bring  Jobourg  church-steeple  in  line  with  the  extreme  of 


set  CAPE   DE   LA   HAGUE   TO   GRANVILLE.  [chap.  txh. 

cape  FlamanvilUs  N.  by  E.  \  K.,  and  hy  keeping  thU  mark  veiy  carefully 
on,  it  will  k*ail  ea*«twiinl  of  the  Biliard  flat,  ami  the  Caillou  rock,  and  over 
the  Surtanvillc  banks,  in  3  fathoms  at  low  water.  When  the  steeples  of 
port  Bail  and  Gouoy  oi>on  of  cape  Carteret,  steer  S.S.E.,  so  as  to  be  about 
2\  miles  from  that  cApe  when  it  is  in  line  with  cape  Flamanville,  bearing 
N.  \  E.  From  thence,  by  keeping  the  latter  cape  open  and  shut  of  cape 
Carteret,  it  will  lernl  between  the  Feles  banks  and  the  main  as  ie^  as  the 
Senequet,  but  when  abreast  St.  Grcrmain  a  vesdd  may  sheer  in  a  little 
towards  the  coast  and  anchor  to  the  north-west  of  the  Sac-de-Piroa 
rocks  to  avoid  the  strength  of  the  northern  stream  ;  or  if  the  wind  is 
strong  enough  she  can  proceed  on,  steering  about  S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  to 
pass  midway  between  tlie  Jourdan  and  the  western  extreme  of  the  foul 
ground  of  the  Senequet.  By  keeping  the  Hatainville  sand-hills  shot  in  by 
cape  Carteret,  there  will  be  a  certainty  of  passing  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Jourdan. 

As  soon  as  Coutances  cathedral  is  in  line  with  Blainville  church,  steer 
S.W.  to  run  between  the  Marie  ledge  and  the  north  extreme  of  the 
Catheuc  reef,  continuing  on  this  course  until  Agon  church  tower  is  in  line 
with  mont  Huchon  bearing  E.  ]^  N.,  at  which  time  the  vessel  will  be  suffi« 
ciently  advanced  for  the  l)eacons  on  the  Hnguenans  and  the  Etat  (Chausey) 
to  be  made  out,  and  by  keeping  them  in  one,  it  will  lead  up  in  the  faii'way. 
If  bound  to  Granville,  run  on  with  these  beacons  in  line  until  the  Tom- 
belaine  rock  opens  a  sail's  breadth  to  the  westward  of  Chainpeaux  pointy 
S.  ^  E.,  when  keep  it  so,  and  after  passing  the  Founet  steer  for  the  harbour 
according  to  wind  and  tide.  This  latter  mark  is  generally  used  by  the 
pilots,  as  they  consider  it  leads  in  the  deepest  water  over  the  sandy  bed 
to  the  north-west  of  Granville  and  the  bar  which  unites  La  Boc  with  the 
Chausey  islets,  and  also  clear  of  the  dangers  to  the  eastward  o  f  these  islets 
and  of  those  that  surround  pointe  du  Boc. 

At  Night, when  through  Alderney  race,  and  having  given  the  Nez-de- 
Jobourg  a  berth  of  at  least  3  miles,  steer  towards  cape  Flamanville ;  as 
that  cape  is  approached  keep  the  light  at  cape  de  la  Hague  open  and 
shut  of  the  Nez,  N.  by  E.  ^  E.,  and  it  will  lead  to  the  westward  of  and  a 
safe  distance  from  the  Bihard  flat.  When  cape  Carteret  light  bears  S.S.E. 
steer  towards  it  on  that  bearing  for  2J  miles,  when  the  vessel  will  be  about 
3^  miles  from  the  light  and  2  miles  from  the  Hit  rocks.  From  thence  steer 
S.  by  W.  f  W.  until  the  light  bears  E.  i  N.,  then  S.S.E.  until  it  bears 
N.  i  E.,  when  keep  it  on  the  latter  bearing  and  steer  S.  J  W.  to  round  the 
south-east  pait  of  the  F61^s  banks. 

Having  run  6  or  7  miles  on  the  latter  course,  haul  out  a  little  from  the 
land  to  bring  the  light  on  a  N.  |  E.  bearing,  and  by  keeping  it  so  it  will 
lead  between  the   Jourdan  ridge  and  the  foul  ground  off  the  Senequet. 


CHAp.vin.]  PORT  DE   GRANVILLE. — ^DIRECTIONS.  865 

When  Chausey  light  is  sighted,  steer  for  it  on  a  S.W.  ^  S.  bearing,  and  it 
will  lead  between  the  Mari6  ledge  and  the  Catheue  reef,  until  Granville 
light  bears  S.  by  E.  \  E.,  in  which  position  a  vessel  can  anchor  until 
daylight ;  or  if  there  is  sufficient  water  to  enter  Granville  harbour,  by  still 
keeping  the  light  on  that  bearing  she  will  pass  midway  between  the  Founet 
and  Admiralty  bank  and  the  Catheue  banks,  until  within  1^  or  2  miles  of 
the  Roc  de  Granville,  when  keep  to  the  westward  and  open  the  light  on 
the  pier  head,  and  it  will  lead  up  to  the  entrance. 

ENTERING  GRANVILLE —Bring  the  lighthouse  on  the 
pier-head  open  of  the  fall  of  the  land  under  the  eastern  end  of  Garrison 
bluff;  or,  if  wishing  to  pass  to  the  eastward  of  the  Loup  rock^  open 
Granville  church  its  own  breadth  to  the  eastward  of  the  lighthouse,  to 
pass  between  the  tail  of  the  Loup  and  the  rocks  on  which  the  pier  is  built. 
Give  the  pier-head,  when  rounding  it,  a  berth  of  a  ship's  length  only, 
and  drop  the  anchor  when  convenient ;  shooting,  however,  as  far  to  the 
westward  as  possible  when  within  it.  A  vessel  drawing  10  feet  must  not 
attempt  to  round  the  pier*  head  until  4  hours  flood,  especially  if  there  be  any 
sea. 

All  possible  sail  should  be  carried  when  entering  the  harbour,  and  every- 
thing in  readiness  at  the  shortest  notice  for  anchoring  or  running  out 
a  hawser  to  the  warping  buoy  between  the  Loup  rock  and  the  pleateau 
Jean-le-Banche,  in  the  event  of  a  sudden  shift  of  wind.  The  great  in- 
equalities of  the  rocky  ridge  extending  S.W.  4  cables  from  Granville 
lighthouse,  occasion,  when  it  blows  hard  from  N.W.,  round  westerly,  to 
S.W.,  a  heavy  sea  outside  the  mouth  of  the  harbour,  and  the  outer  part  of 
this  ridge,  which  uncovers  9  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  is  then  very 
dangerous;  there  is  also  a  heavy  breaking  sea  in  the  passage  between 
the  pier  and  the  Loup  with  strong  winds  between  N.W.  and  West.  This 
dangerous  part  will  be  avoided  by  keeping  St.  Nicholas  church-steeple  in 
line  with  the  southern  slope  of  Gautier  point,  E.  }  S. 

Should  the  wind  be  light,  endeavour  to  maintain  a  position  off  the 
harbour,  so  aa  to  be  carried  towards  the  entrance  from  1^  hours  before 
to  half  an  hour  after  high  water,  while  the  stream  is  running  to  the  East 
and  E.N.E. ;  but  do  not  attempt  to  enter  before  high  water,  lest  the  vessel 
should  be  carried  to  the  westward  of  the  pier,  and  even  on  Pointe  du  Roc, 
by  the  eddy  of  flood,  which  leaves  the  harbour  after  traversing  the  quays 
from  East  to  West,  This  eddy,  the  strength  of  which  is  from  one  to  1^ 
knots  at  springs,  runs  from  half  flood  to  high  water,  and  it  is  to  stem  this 
that  all  sail  should  be  carried  when  entering  the  harbour. 

When  arriving  off  the  harbour  before  there  is  sufficient  water  to  enter, 
if  the  wind  be  strong  enough  to  stem  the  tide,  keep  to  the  southward  of 
the  line  on  which  St.  Nicholas  church-steeple  is  in  line  with  the  slope  o 


366  CAP£  ]jZ  la.  RAGVE  TO  GRA^HTILLE.  TcBL^.Tm. 


th<;  v>oth  p«n  rif  Gmoder  pocxkx,  £.  |  S.  With  the  wind  nrom  N.C,  roviiid 
uoni^trijf  U>  W.N.W^  ke«p  to  tbe  nArthwmrd  of  this  llae,  and  make  ahoit 
tadu  to  th^;  §oastwMid  €d  the  Chtusstj  i^ttSy  betveea  Ciamser  Hghthonur 
md  thh  Cobchee ;  and  with  the  wind  from  W^.W.,  roand  weaterij-, 
to  Sooth,  fthort  bciordfl  sfaoiild  be  made  between  Gronia  pniit  and  the 
PariakoDe  rklge  without  going  to  the  sooth  ward  of  the  paralleN  ol  the 
Viene  de  HerfHu  or  Champeacx  point.  As  sooo  aa  there  is  water  sofficient 
to  enter  thr>  harbour  steer  for  it,  htepiog  the  lighthoose  oa  the  pier-head  in. 
line  with  the  gap  which  separates  Le  Boc  peninsula  from  the  hUls  to  the 
north-east  of  tbe  town,  N.E.  \  E« ;  this  will  lead  a  cable  matwaid  of  the 
Loapy  and  to  the  entrance  of  the  harbour. 

Id  working  towards  the  harboor  from  the  S.W.,  make  a  long  board  to 
the  northward  of  the  line  on  which  St.  Nicholas  chorch-steeple  is  in  line 
with  the  slope  of  the  soath  part  of  Gantier  point,  £.  }  S.,  to  avoid  being 
carried  too  far  to  the  northward  bj  the  flood  stream.  The  last  board 
should  be  made  to  the  south-east  of  the  Loup,  but  not  nearer  than  !half  a 
mile,  to  aToid  a  ridge  of  rocks  named  the  'SoncheTy  parts  of  which  nncoyer 
from  10  to  12  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  From  thence  stand  to  the  eastward 
of  the  Loup,  on  which  side  it  can  be  approached  to  half  a  cable  without 
danger.  Should  the  beacon  on  this  rock  be  washed  away,  Granyille  church 
steeple  in  line  with  the  lighthouse  on  the  mole  head,  N.  by  £.  \  E.,  leads 
clear  to  the  eastward. 

Small  coasters  arriving  off  the  harbour  with  the  wind  off  shore  at  low 
water  during  the  neaps,  can  anchor  until  there  is  sufficient  water  to  enter, 
between  the  Loup  and  the  Tombelaine  bank,  over  a  bottom  of  sand  and 
broken  shells.  There  are  a  few  rocks  on  tbe  eastern  pait  of  this  anchorage, 
but  by  keeping  mont  St.  Michel  open  and  shut  of  Champeaux  point,  it  will 
be  2  cables  to  the  westward  of  them. 

LEAVING  GRANVILLE,  a  sailing  vessel  of  large  draught 
should  wait  for  a  leading  wind,  and,  if  bound  to  the  westward,  advantage 
should  1)0  taken  of  off-shore  winds,  particularly  those  between  East  and 
South.  If  the  wind  is  between  E.S.E.  and  S.S.E.,  and  strong  enough  to 
stem  the  tide,  leave  as  soon  as  the  vessel  floats,  and  steer  to  pass  2  or  3 
mil<3«  to  the  northward  of  Cozombre  island  and  cape  Frehel.  If  .between 
South  and  W.S.W.,  haul  out  to  the  warping  buoys  as  soon  as  she  is  afloat, 
aud  make  sail  from  the  farthest  out.  Short  boards  must  be  made  as  far  as 
Thar  point,  2^  miles  to  the  southward  of  the  harbour,  and  thence  they  may 
bo  longlhciiod,  coasting  at  a  safe  distance  from  the  dangers  as  far  as  cape 
Frohol,  to  avoid  being  carried  by  the  rapidity  of  the  stream  on  the 
Miniiuicrs  hxlgc.  In  fine  weather  the  lights  at  Chausey,  Granville,  the 
harbour  light  of  St.  Malo,  and  at  capo  Frehel,  render  this  navigation  as 
cosy  by  night  as  by  day. 


/ » 


CHAP.  Tin.]  PORT  DE   GRANVILLE. — DIRECTIONS.  367 

Prom    GRANVILLE    through    COTENTIN    PAS- 

SAG-E. — Vessels  bound  to  harbours  eastward  of  cape  de  la  Hague,  or  on 
the  north  side  of  the  English  channel,  if  their  draught  will  admit  and  they 
have  a  leading  wind,  generally  run  through  the  Cotentin  passage.  For  this 
purpose  Granville  harbour  should  be  left  directly  the  vessel  floats,  and  when 
clear  of  the  foul  ground  surrounding  pointe  du  Roc,  keep  Tombelaine  islet  a 
sail's  breadth  open  to  the  westward  of  Champeaux  point  S.  ^  E.,  and  it  will 
lead  to  the  westward  of  the  Catheue  reef,  and  to  the  eastward  of  the  Marie 
ledge.  By  keeping  point  Champeaux  in  line  with  pointe  du  Roc  bearing 
about  S.  J  W.,  the  vessel  will  pass  to  the  eastward  of  the  Catheue.  At  low 
water  springs  the  only  mark  that  can  be  used  with  safety  is,  the  Huguenans 
beacon  in  line  with  the  Etat  beacon,  S.  by  W.  f  W.,  which  leads  to  the 
westward  of  Shamrock  knoll,  midway  between  the  Catheue  and  the  Mari6, 
and  when  Coutances  cathedral  is  in  line  with  Agon  church  tower,  haul  up 
and  steer  N.  E.  J  E.  to  pass  between  the  Jourdan  ridge  and  the  foul  ground 
off  the  Senequet. 

A  good  look-out  should  now  be  kept  for  the  buoy  on  the  Jourdan,  and 
as  soon  as  it  is  seen  steer  so  as  to  pass  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  it. 
Hatainville  sand-hills  shut  in  with  cape  Carteret,  N.  |  E.,  will  clear  the 
Jourdan,  or  cape  Flamanville  in  sight  to  the  westward  of  cape  Carteret, 
N.  JE. 

If  the  weather  be  foggy,  and  cape  Flamanville  cannot  be  distinctly  seen* 
when  about  2  miles  westward  of  the  Senequet,  steer  N.  by  E.  ^  E., 
taking  care  not  to  open  the  above  sand-hills  to  the  westward  of  cape 
Carteret.  When  abreast  St.  Germain,  steer  North,  or  a  little  more  to  the 
westward  to  bring  capes  Carteret  and  Flamanville  in  line,  before  reaching 
the  parallel  of  the  entrance  to  Surville.  These  capes  in  line  will  lead  up 
to  cape  Carteret,  but  as  soon  as  the  steeple  of  St.  Pierre  les  Moutiers  is 
in  line  with  the  slope  of  the  eastern  part  of  the  hill  of  cape  Carteret, 
N.  E.  ^  N.,  or  when  within  about  2  miles  of  the  cape,  steer  N.W.  J  N. 
until  the  Nez-de-Jobourg  is  one  quarter  of  a  point  open  to  the  westward 
of  cape  Flamanville,  N.  |  E.  By  following  this  latter  mark  exactly  it  will 
lead  over  the  south-east  part  of  the  Surtainville  banks  in  2  fathoms  at  low 
water,  and  up  to  an  anchorage  in  Sciotot  bay  ;  but  should  Vauville  bay  be 
preferred,  steer  so  as  to  give  cape  Flamanville  a  berth  of  half  or  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  in  rounding  it,  to  avoid  the  overfalls  of  it. 

The  southern  stream  begins  to  be  felt  at  cape  Flamanville  about 
2^  hours  later  than  in  the  south-east  entrance  to  the  Cotentin  passage, 
whence  it  follows  that  a  vessel  in  running  through  this  passage  2  hours 
before  high  water  at  Granville,  and  sailing  at  the  rate  of  6^  or  7  knots, 
will,  at  the  springs,  reach  cape  Flamanville  or  the  anchorage  in  Sciotot 
bay  before  the  southern  tide  makes.    But  at  neaps,  this  passage  can  rarely 


368 


CJLtE  D£  LA  HAGUE   TO  GRANVILLE. 


[ 


l>e  traveried  through  its  whole  extent  bj  a  aailing  vessel  in  one  tide,  unless 
with  a  BtroDg  leading  wind.  The  anchorage  abreast  St.  Gennain  mast, 
therefore,  be  resorted  to  during  the  southern  stream,  and  as  soon  as  it  slacks 
proceed  under  all  sail,  so  as  to  reach  the  Race  of  Aldemej  before  the 
north-east  stream  has  acquired  its  full  strength,  as  it  will  be  of  great 
assistance  if  bound  to  the  eastward. 

At  Night  steer  with  Granville  Ught  on  a  S.bj  £.  |  £.  bearing,  and 
it  will  lead  midway  between  the  Admiralty  and  the  Catheue  banks.  When 
Chausey  light  bears  S.W.  ^  S.,  by  keeping  it  so  and  steering  N.E.  ^  N.,  it 
will  lead  in  the  fairway  between  the  Shamrock  knoll  and  the  Mari6  ledge» 
also  between  the  Jourdan  ridge  and  the  foul  ground  off  the  Senequet  rock. 

When  the  light  is  seen  on  cape  Carteret,  steer  for  it  on  a  N.  j^  £•  bearing 
until  about  1  ^  miles  off  the  cape,  which  round  at  this  distance ;  and  when 
the  light  opens  to  the  eastward  of  the  hill  haul  to  the  northward,  to  bring 
the  light  S.  by  E.  f  E.,  and  then  by  steering  N.  by  W.  }  W.  the  vessel  will 
pass  to  the  westward  of  the  Bihard  flat  As  soon  as  the  lig^t  at  cape  de  la 
Hague  is  seen,  keep  it  on  a  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  bearing,  open  and  shut  of  the 
Nez-de-Jobourg,  and  it  will  lead  1^  miles  to  the  westward  of  cape 
Flamanville.  The  vessel  can  now  either  anchor  in  Yauville  bay  until  the 
northern  stream  has  made,  or  stand  off  and  on. 

TidOS. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Granville,  at  6  h.  13  m., 
Brings  rise  37  feet,  neaps  27^  feet.  The  tide  rises  above  the  sill  of  the 
floating  basin  (which  is  8  feet  3  in.  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  springs), 
about  39  foet  at  equinoctial  springs,  32  feet  at  ordinary  springs,  and  20 
feet  at  neaps. 


369 
CHAPTER  IX. 

GRANVILLE  TO  CAPE  FREHEL. 

VARIATION  IN  1882. 

Baie  du  Mont  St.  Michel  -  -        18°  20'  W. 

Cape  Frehel      -  -  -  -        1&°  0'  W. 


The  COAST. — The  lighthouse  on  cape  Frehel  bears  W.  ^  N.  29^ 
miles  from  that  of  Gmnville,  and  the  coast  between  forms  a  deep  bight  to 
tiie  south-east  named  Baie  du  Mont  St.  Michael,  in  which  is  situated  the 
roadstead  of  Cancale,  affording  excellent  shelter  from  the  westward  for 
vessels  of  any  size.  The  harbours  of  St.  Malo  and  St.  Seivan  lie  to  the 
westward  of  this  bay,  and,  like  Granville,  can  be  entered  at  springs  by 
vessels  of  the  largest  draught.* 

The  most  remarkable  objects  on  this  part  of  the  coast  are  the  Bee  de 
Champeaux  or  Champeaux  point,  mont  St.  Michel  and  the  Tombelaine 
islet.  The  former  is  a  bold  high  bluff  formed  at  the  western  extreme  of 
green  hills,  which  suddenly  break  off  to  seaward  5|  miles  S.  ^  W.  of 
Granville  lighthouse.  Mont  St.  Michel  and  the  Tombelaine  are  two 
conspicuous  objects  rising  from  the  sands  in  the  eastern  part  of  Mont  St. 
Michael  bay.  The  former  is  a  remarkable  pyramidal  block  of  granite^ 
4  cables  in  diameter,  which  at  high  water  is  completely  surrounded,  but 
from  which  at  low  tide  the  sea  recedes  to  a  great  distance,  leaving  it  dry 
for  several  miles.  Its  summit  is  surmounted  by  large  buildings  and  ah 
ancient  abbey  church,  the  steeples  of  which  are  420  feet  above  the  level  of 
the  beach.  It  bears  South,  nearly  7  miles  from  Champeaux  point,  and 
its  exterior  resembles  mount  St.  Michael  in  Cornwall.  The  Tombelaine 
is  a  barren  islet  almost  as  large  as  mont  St.  Michel,  but  much  lower.  It 
lies  nearly  1|  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  Mont,  and  when  seen  from 
the  northward  or  southward,  has  the  appearance  of  a  crushed  pyramid 
inclining  to  the  eastward. 

Between  Granville  and  Champeaux  point  the  coast  curves  slightly  in  to 
the  eastward,  and  is  generally  of  middling  height ;  but  in  some  places  it  is 
low  and  sandy,  and  dangerous  to  approach  with  westerly  winds,  being 
bordered  by  a  sand-bank  with  flat  rocks  on  it,  which  in  some  places  extend 
a  mile  from  the  shore. 

BAIE  de  MONT  St.  MICHEL  is  formed  between  Champeaux 
and  Grouin  points,  which  bear  W.  by  N.  and  E.  by  S.  from  each  other 

♦  See  Admiralty  chart:  — Chanuel  islands  and  coast  of  France,  Nc.  2,669  6  ;  scale  m« 
0 '  5  incb. 

Q  7049.  A  A 


ZVf  OiiiVVILLl   70  CAP£   FKEHEL. 


4^' :.•.•.  ■ic*^>T.T  w::yl-.       Tbe  L*swi  fA  lite  b»T  falls  back  a  sreat 


to  'h'-  ^-o--':.-**-^*.,  tr.-i  z.'^r.f  tlr*r-:-/=r:L-s  of  h  i*  occupied  l-j 
;«•:;*-«::.  w.  -.^t.-.k  of  *Ar.d,  -rrr-IcL  «ir>r-  tt  Io»  -s^ttr.  O::  tLe  w€*t  s^  cc  tbe 
}Ar  t.vr  U.-.-J  >  ?.;:?>:  for  '.hr  *ps^:r;  cf  4  cJJ**  frc-Dt  Grc-ain  t5  CbaieAa 
J'>:,'--.z  K'-'.'i  *''^  *-•'-  '^A**  >  ^'-r.eralS-  'i-s^-p-  Carcakr  an-1  La  Hoole 
if:  -iv.iV-d  o:.  tL:»i  j^rt  «>f  t-V  oofe-t.  the  fonoer  oc  the  Ix^^u  at  J  the 
U*>f  o:j  th<i;  r?.',.-':,  A  r.:;rh  j/jniaiiiia]  rock,  nmn^l  xhe  CbateDier,  and  t2:e 
i':*\it'  for  i f:wj  ■  - ] &r. <j  of  Ji i r/.a i L s.  I : e  off  Cha I&fr  f loict.  the  first  2  and  the 
ot.'.'-r  4  f:M''>i  from  Xuh  yj)\z*u  Si.'^'I  it  i?  to  the  north  wan!  of  this  bland,  azid 
ti\9ft'i\,  thn-'-^iiinrUrni  of  a  mile  from  the  coa^t,  that  v-  fiitcated  the  Grande 
liii^\i'.  'h:  Cancale. 

'J'he  low  laudx,  calUriJ  the  marr-h  of  Dol,  Ijegin  at  Chateau  Richeux  point 
Hitd  ext/.'nd  l«j  mik-H  ea'»tward,  to  the  mouth  of  the  rirer  Cou^snon,  the 
(Utur^M  of  which  fteji&nites  the  df-partiaent  of  Ile-et-Vilaine  from  that  of 
La  Afan^'lie.  A  strong  fivke  protects  thi«<  marsh  from  the  inrasion  of  the 
Hea,  jj".  iti  fMifiif^i  III  several  ]ila^>:s  is  below  the  level  of  high  water  great 
Kprin;^". 

The  only  n'lii ark  able  rise  on  thi.s  jiart  of  the  coast  is  a  small  isolated 
hill  nuriie'l  luont  l^ol,  arul  a  chain  of  hilb;,  which  seen  from  a  north-west 
'Jin-rtiori  M'<-rii  to  form  h  long  promontory,  the  north-west  extreme  of 
wliif'li  is  r;nllff<I  by  the  Uk:uI  muriuerH  point  de  Gogre.  Mont  D(^  rises 
from  (lie  midst  of  iIk;  marsh  land  at  6  miles  to  the  south-east  of  Chateau 
Uirlieiix  pointy  and  on  its  flat  top  Htand;^  a  windmill,  a  telegraph,  and  a 
lew  coUaj^ifH.  J*oint  de  Gogre  is  the  nearest  point  to  the  sea  of  the  chain 
of  hillHwiii<:li  are  situaUid  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  beach 
b(dw(*en  mont  Dol  and  the  river  Couesanon. 

Small  vi^shc'Ih  can  <^o  up  the  Couesnon  at  springs  as  far  as  the  town  of 
Pontorson,  but  an  the  navigation  is  difficult  it  is  seldom  attemx^ted.  The 
liltJe  liarlMiiir  of  Vivi<'r  is  situated  on  the  shore  of  the  bay,  S.  \  E.  about 
7  mih^s  from  (ironin  point,  but  it  can  only  be  entered  by  the  smallest 
roasters  haviii;?  ^ood  pilots.  It  is  foimed  at  the  1x)ttom  of  a  cove  hollowed 
out  nl' thj»  mild  by  tilt'  waters  of  the  Guyoul,  having  a  floodgate  which 
prmenis  th<' Hi'a  from  entering  the  river,  and  will  contain  three  or  four 
<Miilers.     Thenj  is  a  small  <iuay  for  the  purpose  of  unloading. 

LIGHT.-- ^>n  <!»«*  western  side  of  mont  St.  Michel  a  fixed  red 
tidal  light  is  slujwn  from  a  nwist,  at  an  elevation  of  41  feet  above  high 
wnt<«r  (r)l  feet  abovc^  the  ground),  visildo  through  an  arc  of  180*^.  The 
light  is  (»nly  exhibited  frouj  2  himrs  before  high  water,  until  \\  hours  ebb, 
and  rduiuld  bo  wen  in  clear  weather  6.J  miles. 


cHi.p.ix.]  BADE  DE  MONT   ST.   MICHEL.  371 

BANC  de  CHATRT  bounds  Cancale  road  to  the  westward,  and 
has  onlj  6  to  9  feet  on  its  shoalest  parts  at  the  lowest  tides.  It  is  joined 
to  the  coast  at  Chaine  point  by  a  bed  of  sand,  on  which  there  arc  11  and 
12  feet ;  and  thence  it  trends  to  the  northward  as  far  as  a  small  creek 
named  port  Mer,  leaving  between  it  and  the  shallows  near  the  shore  a 
swatchway  3  cables  broad,  called  by  the  local  mariners  fosse  de  Chatry  or 
Chatry  deep,  in  which  the  depths  vary  from  26  to  32  feet. 

From  the  northern  part  of  this  bank,  Haut  Bout  windmill  is  in  line 
with  the  northern  declivity  of  Chatry  point ;  and  from  its  eastern  edge, 
the  Cormorandi^re  is  in  one  with  the  Hubert.  These  are  two  remarkable 
rocks  joining  Rimains  island ;  the  first  is  high  and  pointed,  and  lies  at  the 
north  extreme  of  the  island;  the  Hubert  is  in  shape  like  a  gunner's  quoin, 
and  lies  about  three-quarters  of  a  cable  to  the  eastward  of  the  fort. 

BANC  des  CORBl£lIlES,  bounding  Cancale  road  to  the  east- 
ward, is  about  1^  miles  long,  from  the  line  on  which  Haut  Bout  windmill 
is  in  one  with  the  northern  declivity  of  Chatry  point,  to  the  line  on  which 
the  same  windmill  is  in  one  with  the  Cormorandifere  rock,  and  about  half 
a  mile  broad.  It  is  joined  to  the  sandy  beach  at  the  head  of  Mont  St. 
Michael  bay  by  flats,  on  which  the  soundings  gradually  decrease  from  20 
to  8  feet  at  the  lowest  tides. 

The  general  depths  on  this  bank  vary  from  2  to  4  fathoms,  but  a  small 
patch  about  3  cables  long,  north  and  south,  and  with  only  10  feet  in  it, 
rises  from  its  southern  part,  about  half  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the  fort 
on  Rimains  island.  From  the  north  end  of  this  patch,  the  guard-house  on 
Chaine  point  is  in  one  with  Cancale  church-steeple  ;  and  from  the  south 
extreme  the  same  steeple  is  between  the  Ch&tellier  rock  and  Petit  Rimains 
islet,  which  joins  its  northern  end  at  low  water. 

Les  BANCHETS. — ^This  bank  of  sand  and  broken  shells  lies  in  the 
middle  of  the  entrance  to  Cancale  road,  3  cables  to  the  northward  of  the 
Corbi^res  bank,  and  S.E.  by  E.  \  E.  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  old 
fort  on  Landes  island,  and  with  a  small  knoll  of  23^  feet  at  2  cables 
N.N.W.  of  it,  is  dangerous  to  vessels  of  large  draught  at  low  water  springs. 
The  bank  is  5J  cables  long  N.  by  W.  and  S.  by  E.,  and  the  soundings 
on  it  vary  from  10  to  24  feet.  The  shoalest  parts  form  two  small  ridges 
lying  parallel  to  each  other,  and  athwart  the  direction  of  the  streams. 
On  the  north-west  ridge  there  are  17  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  and  only  10 
feet  on  the  highest  part  of  the  other,  which  rises  from  the  eastern  part  of 
the  bank.  The  marks  for  the  10  feet  are,  the  steep  point  of  Chateau 
Richeux  open  1°  eastward  of  Chaine  point ;  and  the  slope  of  Grouin  point 
open  the  same  distance  to  the  northward  of  the  guard-house  on  Landes 
island.     The  local  mariners  say  that  the  sand  foiining  this  bank  does  not 

A  A  2 


iT2  vLtjr:i-3  r-  C;«^i  rt.^gyr.. 


La  BBEHAUT  '><  ^  t^.^s^.^i  ±tz  A  i»i  »i  ntks,  Hiae  to  tke 
»//,•:.  «•<«.-:  o<  r.v;  J5*r>*r.^<».  *i^  L-uf  a  aijft  :o  Ae  «««v«ri  o£  the  nortbem 

Lhu^V  '.  ]'U  I'Jy  v:tr«  tr^  lifiTyltLf  Vifrrr^  «i«  Herpcn  and  FilSe  rocka^  and 
;i  f<:^  k.VaI  f^^^i^y  forxb  &  kirid  of  lorhrr  exteodlng  2  miles  to  the  north- 
*'h'*.  '*f  ^tt',Au  p^/ifit,  Mfcd  across  which  ves^Is  »hoiiIJ  pa^ s  when  seeking 
klfiluit  \u  (IsLUt'jiA*:  T(j^  or  in  the  aQchorag^  oJLa  Honk. 

tLE  deS  LABTDES. — ^TbU  higb,  narrow,  rockj  islet,  steep  on  all 
tcirf'  H  And  xufU'j'jhtt^WtV:  wh^ii  there  is  anj  swell  on,  lies  two  cables  eastward 
tf\  f'trouiit  point,  anil  at  high  water  it  is  about  4  cables  long,  X.E.  and 
HAV,,  tiwl  aU/ut  a  cable  wi^le,  but  at  low  tide  it  is  lengthened  oat  3  cables 
to  tUi'  N.NMO.  by  0^/me  high  rockn,  and  by  some  which  cover.  It  trends 
in  n  dii'wtion  n<4»rly  parallel  to  the  shore,  being  separated  from  it  bj  a 
('liiirin<'t  i'JiWtui  the  Vieille  Riviere,  where  is  only  164  yards  broad  at  its 
narrow(:iii  part,  and  tliroiigli  wliich  at  the  springs  the  streams  run  6  knots. 
'l\w  niiriN  of  n  ff/rt  and  guurd-houHc  stand  on  the  north-east  part  of  the 
Uliihd.  'Vlu'i  I'l^nonot  rock,  with  only  10^  feet  on  it,  lies  in  the  middle  of 
till'  piiNHii^f!  between  the  north-east  extreme  of  Landcs  island  and  the 
lliM'pIn  rork. 

Lo  IIERFIN  Ifl  H  high  pyramidal  rock  elevated  about  66  feet  above 
(hn  hi^tiPHt  tidcH,  and  iiH  base  ih  a  cable  in  diameter  at  low  water.  It  lies 
I'l.N.M.  tliriM-(|UfirtorM  of  a  mile  from  Grouin  point,  and  nearly  2  cables 
i\-()ni  i\w  norih-curit.  (^xtrtMuo  of  Landcs  island,  and  its  shape,  great  height, 
and  Uolntoii  puHition,  render  it  a  remarkable  object  fi-om  a  great  distance. 
VohmoIn  hound  to  (iranvillo,  run  for  shelter  under  this  rock  with  the  wind 
olVHlu»h\  and  gt^nornlly  when  it  blows  from  West,  round  southerly,  to  East. 
Tlu^rt^  {m  goml  anohoriigo  in  7  to  9  fathoms  water  with  the  rock  bearing 
N.W.  I  \V.  dint  nut  from  ono  to  1 J  miles;  the  ground,  however,  so  fai  out; 
in  TMthor  otmrMt'. 

LIUIIT.    'l.i>;hthouso  building. 

PioriH)  do  Horpin. — 'r^us  small  rocky  ridge,  the  higher  head  tt 
\\\\\\A\  \\\w\\\^^V1^  s\^  tW^t  nt  the  lowest  tides,  lies  N.E.  by  E.  J  E.  three- 
tiuavlv'r*  of  a  milo  (Vvm  th«  llorpin.     It  begins  to  show  itself  about  one* 


CHAP.  IX]  BANC  DE   CHATRY. — DE   HERPIN.  373 

third  ebb  during  springs,  and  does  not  cover  during  the  neaps.  It  is 
proposed  to  erect  a  light-house  on  this  danger. 

The  space  called  the  Grand-Ruet,  separating  this  ridge  from  the 
Herpin,  is  the  principal  entrance  to  Cancnle  road  from  the  north-west ; 
but  a  shoal,  named  Basse  due  Milieu,  with  only  4  feet  on  it,  lies  4^  cables 
to  the  north-east  of  the  Herpin,  and  narrows  this  passage,  which  is  other- 
wise deep  enough  to  be  used  by  vessels  of  any  draught  at  all  hours  of 
tide.  They  should,  however,  borrow  within  a  cable  of  the  Hei'pin  when 
passing  it  on  the  flood,  as  this  stream  sets  strongly  over  the  shoal  and  the 
Pierre  de  Herpin  ;  the  flood  begins  to  make  in  the  passage  about  5f  hours 
before  high  water  at  Sj.  Malo  or  Granville,  and  as  it  runs  to  the  S.E^ 
and  E.S.E.  there  is  no  reason  to  fear  of  being  drifted  by  it  towaids  the 
Blanch  ets. 

A  rocky  ridge,  with  from  22  to. 24  feet  on  it,  lies  S.  by  E.  a  quai'ter 
of  a  mile  from  the  Pierre  de  Herpin. 

La  FillO,  the  north-easternmost  rock  of  these  dangers,  uncovers  1 1  leet 
at  the  lowest  tides,  and  lies  E.N.E.  3  cables  from  the  Pierre  de  Herpin, 
and  2  miles  on  the  same  bearing  from  Grouin  point.  The  marks  for  it 
are,  the  summit  of  the  Herpin  in  one  with  the  northern  head  of  the  Pierre 
de  Herpin ;  and  the  Bigne  rock  seen  between  the  Grand  Chevreuil  and 
Cezembre  island. 

A  bell  buoy,  striped  red  and  white,  marks  this  danger  on  its  northern 
side. 

When  the  Pierre  is  covered,  there  will  be  19^  feet  water  on  the  Fille, 
and  a  vessel  will  be  to  the  northward  of  them  both  when  Grouin  point  is 
open  to  the  northward  of  the  Herpin,  and  to  the  southward  when  the 
point  is  open  to  the  southward  of  the  Herpin.  Cape  Frehel  in  one  with 
the  latter  rock  also  leads  to  the  southward. 

There  are  8f  fathoms  water  in  the  passage  between  the  Pierre  and  the 
Fille,  and  a  vessel  can  pass  through  it  in  safety  when  the  Pierre  is  un- 
covered, by  keeping  from  1^  to  2^  cables  from  it ;  but  it  would  have  ihe 
disadvantage  of  placing  her  too  much  to  leeward,  if  seeking  shelter  from 
strong  westerly  winds  in  Cancale  road. 

GRANDE  RADE  de  CANCALE  is  situated  to  the  northward 
of  Rimains  island,  at  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  shore  between  the 
Chatry  and  the  Corbi^res  bank,  and  aff'qrds  excellent  shelter  for  ships  of 
large  draught  during  westerly  winds.  A  vessel  should  moor  north  and 
south  with  open  hawse  to  the  westward,  and  the  best  holding  gi-ound  will 
be  found  with  the  Cormorandiere  rock  seen  between  Rimains  island  and  the 
Hubert  rock  ;  its  eastern  limit  being  the  Cormoi-andiere  touching  the 
eastern  side  of  the  fort  on  Rimains,  and  its  northern  limit,  Haut  Bout  mill 
in  line  with  the  middle  of  a  small  white  sandy  beach,  called  Portz  Picain, 


*• 


371  GRANVILLE   TO   CAPE   FBEHEL*  [chap.  ix. 

situnteil  close  to  the  souilnvard  of  Chatry  poiut.  North-easterly  winds 
sometimes  cause  n  swell,  but  vessel:)  are  seldom  obliged  to  weigh  suddenly 
from  a  shift  of  wind ;  it  will,  however,  be  prudent  before  furling  to  doable 
reef  the  topsails. 

There  is  also  goo<l  anchorage  in  the  southern  part  of  the  road  in 
7  fathoms,  clay  and  mud,  about  2  cables  eastward  of  Rimiuns  island,  with 
the  steeple  of  Cancale  church  in  line  'with  the  middle  of  the  fort  on  the 
island,  W.  |  N.,  and  Grouin  point  a  little  open  westward  of  Landes 
island,  N.  ^  W.  A  vessel  under  10  feet  draught  can  anchor  to  the  south- 
ward of  Himains  island,  with  that  island  bearing  North,  distant  half  a 
mile ;  but  in  running  for  this  anchorage  at  low  water,  keep  within  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  of  the  island,  to  avoid  the  shoal  patch  of  10  feet  on  the 
Corbi^res  bank.  If  unable  to  ride  here  in  heavy  weather  from  the  north- 
eastward, take  the  top  of  high  water  and  run  aground  with  good  sail  upon 
the  mud  to  the  southward  of  Cancale  church,  where  both  the  yessel  and 
the  crew  will  be  saved. 

Anchorage  East  of  Corbi6res  Bank.— Vessels  of  large 

draught  sometimes  anchor  to  the  eastward  of  Corbieres  bank,  but  they  will 
be  less  sheltered  there  than  in  Cancale  road,  and  more  exposed  to  North- 
east winds,  which,  when  they  blow  hard,  throw  in  a  heavy  sea,  and  they 
will  roll  heavily  on  a  weather  tide.  The  anchoring  ground  extends  north 
and  south,  from  the  line  on  which  Haut  Bout  mill  is  in  one  with  the  small 
white  sandy  beach  (portz  Picain),  situated  close  to  the  southward  of 
Chatry  point,  to  that  on  which  Cancale  church-steeple  is  in  one  with  the 
southern  side  of  the  Chatellicr  rock. 

The  best  berth  is  in  6  to  7  fathoms,  blue  tenacious  clay,  with  the  steeple 
of  Doll  church  in  line  with  the  foot  of  the  eastern  slope  of  mont  Dol ;  and 
the  steeple  of  Cancale  church  between  the  Chatellier  and  the  fort  on 
Rimains.  This  position  is  the  nearest  to  Rimains,  but  as  it  is  about 
IJ  miles  from  it,  that  island  will  aiford  but  little  shelter  from  the  west- 
ward. If  intending  to  remain  any  time,  the  anchors  should  be  sighted 
occasionally,  as  they  bury  themselves  deeply,  making  it  diflBcult  to  weigh. 

Merchant  vessels  generally  prefer  the  anchorage  to  the  southward  of  the 
Corbieres  bank,  where  the  holding  ground  is  good,  and  the  depths  firom 
19  to  22  feet  at  low  water.  The  best  berth  is  close  to  the  southward  of 
the  line  on  which  Haut  Bout  mill  is  in  one  with  Cormorandi^re  rock, 
N.W.  J  N.,  with  the  mill  between  the  northern  point  of  Rimains  i&land 
and  the  fort  on  that  island;  but  the  safest  position  for  them  is  in  the 
southern  part  of  Cancale  road. 

Anchorage  in  Posse  de  Chatry.  —  Vessels  of  moderate 

draught  anchor  in  the  deep  or  swatchway,  formed  between  the  western 
edge  of  the  Chatry  bank  and  the  shallows  near  the  shore,  and  the  best 


CHAP.  IX.]  GRANDE   RADE   DE   CANCALE.  375 

position  is  in  from  26  to  32  feet  at  low  water,  with  Haut  Bout  mill  in  line 
with  the  small  white  sandy  beach  close  to  the  southward  of  Chatry  point ; 
and  niont  Dol  opening  and  shutting  to  the  eastern  point  of  the  islet, 
called  Petit  Rimain,  lying  close  to  the  northward  of  the  Chatellier  rock. 
This  is  a  good  anchorage  during  the  neaps,  but  at  the  springs  the  streams 
run  from  4  to  5  knots.  Small  craft  can  anchor  a  little  farther  in  shore, 
but  not  westward  of  the  line  on  which  Mont  ]Dol  is  seen  touching  the 
western  side  of  the  Chatellier. 

A  vessel  that  can  take. the  ground  will  be  sheltered  from  N.E.,  round 
northerly,  to  S.S.W.,  on  the  deposit  of  soft  mud  which  borders  the  northern 
part  of  the  little  bay  of  port  Mer, 

LIGHT. — On  Fen^tre  rock,  port  of  Houle,  Cancale,  &fixedred  light  is 
shown  from  a  circular  tower  at  an  elevation  of  33  feet  above  high  water, 
and  is  visible  in  clear  weather  7  miles. 

Directions. — When  running  from  the  westward  for  shelter  in 
Cancale  road  from  a  position  about  N.N.E.  2  miles  from  Cfoembre  island, 
steer  to  the  E.N.E.,  keeping  the  semaphore  on  Garde  Gu^rin  point  open 
to  the  northwai'd  of  the  fort  on  Grande  Conch^e  islet,  until  mont  St. 
Michel  appears  in  sight  to  the  south-east,  when  haul  to  the  southward, 
and  by  keeping  the  mont  open  and  shut  with  the  Herpin  rock  bearing 
8.E.  ^  E.  it  will  lead  between  the  Grune  rock  and  Nid  patch.  When 
about  half  a  mile  to  the  N.N.W.  of  the  rock,  if  the  flood  is  running,  steer 
to  pass  about  a  cable  to  the  eastward  of  it,  as  that  stream  sets  strongly  over 
the  Milieu  shoal  and  the  Pierre  de  Herpin,  and  thence  haul  to  the 
southward  for  the  road. 

The  passage  between  Grouin  point  and  Landes  island  as  well  as  the 
passages  between  the  north-east  extreme  of  Landes  island  and  the  Herpin, 
and  between  the  Pierre  de  Harpin  and  the  Fille,  are  dangerous  to  attempt 
without  a  pilot. 

The  COAST.— Grouin  point,  the  west  extreme  of  Mont  St.  Michel 
bay,  is  bounded  by  rocky  precipices,  and  forms  a  considerable  narrow  slope 
to  the  north-east.  The  sudden  change  in  the  direction  of  the  coast  to  the 
southward  is  here  very  remarkable,  and  easily  recognized  from  a  distance. 

Varde  point  bears  W.  -J  N.  6  miles  from  Grouin  point,  and  the  rugged 
coast  between  is  formed  by  a  succession  of  valleys,  which  extend  to  the 
shore,  and  their  openings,  mostly  sandy,  are  nearly  on  the  level  of  high- 
water  springs.  The  valleys  are  separated  from  each  other  by  high  points, 
bordered  with  steep  rocks.  The  most  remarkable  of  these  points  is  that 
of  Meinga,  which  lies  3|  miles  to  the  westward  of  Grouin  point,  and  is 
nearly  as  high  as  cape  Frehel ;  it  is  narrow  and  steep  on  all  sides,  and 
extends  in  a  slope  more  than  half  a  mile  to  the  northward. 


376  GBANTILLE  TO  CAPE   FR£H£L.  [cbjlt.  ix 

Between  Groain  and  Meinga  points  there  is  nocking  worthy  of  notice 
except  a  small  baj  fonned  between  Nid  and  Nez  points,  in  the  inner  part 
of  which  is  a  Mndj  beach  defended  bj  fort  Doguesdin.  The  fort  is 
erected  3  cables  to  the  south-west  of  Nid  point,  on  a  rockj  islet  joined 
to  the  shore  at  low  water  bj  a  ridge  of  rocke.  Midway  between  Meinga 
and  Varde  points  is  the  little  harbour  of  Botenen^  which  is  greatly 
encumberefl  with  sand,  and  the  tide  only  beg*ns  to  enter  it  at  half  flood. 

Vessels  of  large  draught  should  keep  at  least  2  miles  from  the  coast 
between  Grouin  and  Varde  points  at  all  times  of  tide  ;  indeed,  great 
precaution  is  always  necessary  when  navigating  between  Gronin  point 
and  cape  Frehel,  to  avoid  the  numerous  dangers  lying  scattered  at  a 
greater  or  a  lew  du^tance  from  the  shore.  The  principal  <^  those  are 
named,  the  Kenardiere.'*,  Gruue,  JSid,  Rault,  Tiniiaux,  Rochefort,  Bigne, 
Grands  Pointus,  &c* 

Banc  des  Benardi^reS,  composed  of  sand  and  shelLs,  lies 
N.N.W.  ^  W.  J}  miles  from  the  Herpiii  rock,  and  the  soundings  on  it  vary 
from  36  to  45  feet  at  low  water.  The  bank  is  only  a  cable  broad,  and 
trends  half  a  mile  in  a  N.  by  W.  and  S.  by  £.  direction,  nearly  across  the 
streams,  which  cause  a  heavy  sea  on  it  duriog  a  weather  tide.  From  its 
shoalest  part  the  fort  near  Varde  point  appears  mi<Iway  between  Grand 
and  Petit  Chevreuil,  W,  by  S.  ^  S.,  and  the  Herpin  is  in  line  with  the 
north-east  extreme  of  the  hills,  named  Pointe  de  Gorge,  at  the  head  of 
Mont  St.  Michel  bay. 

Basso  Grune  is  a  dangerous  isolated  rock,  with  only  8  feet  on  it 
ond  10  to  12  fathoms  cIofc  around  at  low  water,  lying  N.E.  ^  E.  3^  miles 
from  Meinga  pointi)  and  N.W.  by  N.  rather  more  than  3  miles  from  the 
Ilorpin.  It  occasions  great  overfalls,  even  in  moderate  weather,  and  is 
much  ill  the  way  of  vessels  proceeding  to  Granville  or  Cancale  road.  The 
marks  for  it  are,  the  north  extreme  of  the  Rochefort  rock  in  line  with  the 
Komnphore  on  Garde  Gu^rin  point,  W.  by  S.  ^  S.  ;  Granville  church 
percoi>tibly  open  southward  of  Granville  lighthouse  ;  and  Cancale  church 
its  own  length  open  westward  of  Haut  Bout  mill,  South. 

Granville  church  in  sight  to  the  northward  of  Granville  lighthouse 
Kast,  leads  well  to  the  northward  of  the  Grune  ;  Garde  Guerin  semaphore 
in  lino  with  the  Petite  Concheo  loads  a  mile  to  the  north-west ;  Mont  St. 
Michel  in  lino  with  the  Herpin  S.E.  \  E.  will  lead  to  the  southward,  and 
bi^twocn  it  and  the  Nid  patch ;  and  a  vessel  will  be  to  the  eastward  of  it 
when  Cancale  church  opens  lo  the  eastward  of  Haut  Bout  mill.  When 
tho  Pierre  do  Herpin  is  covered  there  are  at  least  38  feet  of  water  over  the 
Grune,  and  46  foot  over  the  Rault  and  Nid. 

In  modoi'ate  weather  vessels  of  any  draught  may  pass  at  all  hours  of 
tho  tide  between  the  Grune  and    the  Nid,  by  keeping  mont  St.  Michel 


** 


CHAP.  IX.]  ANCHOHAGE. — DIllECTIONS.  377 

open  and  shut  with  the  Uerpin  beanng  S.£.  \  E.  The  lights  of  cape 
Frehely  Granville,  iftid  Chausey  are  visible  from  the  Grune;  the  first 
bears  W.  f  N.  17^  miles,  Granville  light  E.  ^  N.  12^  miles,  and  Chausey 
light  N.E.  J  N.  7|  miles. 

At  2  miles  N.W.  J  N.  from  Basse  Grube,  a  buoy  marked  Nationale,  with 
letter  A,  is  moored  in  10  fathoms. 

Basse  du  Nid^  &  small  rocky  patch  lying  about  1^  miles  to  the 
southward  of  the  Grune,  with  17  feet  water  over  it,  and  8  to  9  fathoms 
around  it.  Is  quite  as  dangerous  as  the  Grune,  and  from  it  Meinga  point 
bears  S.W.  by  W.  |  W.  2{  miles  ;  the  Herpin  rock  S.E.  by  E.  2|  miles  ; 
the  telegraph  of  the  church  of  St.  Malo  is  seen  over  Varde  point  touching 
the  Petit  Chevreuil ;  the  fort  which  stands  a  little  to  the  southward  of 
Varde  point,  is  in  line  with  the  north  declivity  of  the  Grand  Chevreuil 
W.  by  S.  f  S. ;  and  mont  St.  Michel  is  in  line  with  the  rocks  extending 
from  the  north  point  of  Landes  island.  The  Mont  kept  open  and  shut  with 
the  Herpin,  S.E.  \  E.,  leads  well  to  the  northward. 

Basse  Bault. — This  small  isolated  rocky  head  lies  1^  miles  to  the 
westward  of  the  Nid,  N.  by  E.  \  E.  1^  miles  from  the  Meinga  point,  and 
N.W.  by  W.  §  W.  4^  miles  from  the  Herpin  rock.  It  has  only  16  feet 
water  over  it,  9  to  10  fathoms  around  it,  and  like  the  two  former  dangers, 
it  should  be  carefully  avoided  at  low  tide  by  vessels  of  large  draught,  and 
by  small  craft  when  it  blows  hard,  as  it  causes  a  great  swell. 

The  marks  for  the  Eault  are,  the  semaphore  on  Garde  Gu^rin  point  a 
little  open  to  the  southward  of  the  Rochefort  rock,  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  and  the 
eastern  slope  of  Meinga  point  almost  shutting  in  Terquete  mill.  The 
above  semaphore  in  line  with  the  fort  on  the  Grande  Conch^e  beanng 
W.  by  S.  i  S.  leads  to  the  north-west ;  and  mont  St.  Michd  open  and  shut 
with  the  Herpin  S.E.  J  E.,  leads  well  to  the  northward. 

LeS  TINTIAUX  form  a  rocky  group  about  a  mile  long,  E.S.E. 
and  W.N.W.  ;  and  half  a  mile  broad,  lying  4  cables  north-east  of 
Meinga  point.  Most  of  the  rocks  appear  at  4  hours  ebb,  and  the  highest, 
near  the  centre,  of  the  group,  are  about  30  feet  above  the  lowest  tides, 
and  remain  uncovered  at  the  neaps.  Garde  Gu^rin  point  semaphore  open 
to  the  northward  of  the  Eigne  rock,  or  the  summit  of  the  Grands  Pointus 
(which  never  covers)  in  line  with  the  fort  on  the  Grande  Conchee,  lead  to 
the  northward;  and  Duguesclin  fort  not  brought  to  the  southward  of 
S.S.W.  or  Haut  Bout  mill  kept  in  line  with  the  guard-house  on  Verger 
point  (the  eastern  point  of  the  first  sandy  beach  to  the  westward  of  Grouin 
point),  lead  to  the  eastward. 

TINTIAUX  PASSAGE,  between  the  Tintiaux  and  the  land,  is 
generally  resorted  to  by  coasting  vesselswith  southerly  winds.  The  leading 
mark  through,  when  coming  from  the  eastward,  is  the  Bigne  rock  in  line 


378  GBANTILUB  TO  CAPE    FBBHEL.  Icb"*-  '^ 

nilh  the  south  side  of  Cezembrc  lEland,  W.  ^  N.  Give  Meinga  point  a 
berth  of  a  quai'ter  of  a  mile  when  passing  it,  and  th*ti  run  out  between 
the  Tintiaux  nnd  tlie  Basse  aux  Chieas,  witii  St.  Viaceut  milt  (on  the 
heights  nt  the  head  of  Roteneuf  harbour)  touching  the  eastern  part  of  the 
high  land  at  Binar. 

The  ROChefort  Hes  IJ  miles  to  the  north-wost  of  Meinga  point, 
and  with  a  small  ledge  named  the  Flatier,  forms  a  rocky  group  3  cables 
long  N.E.  and  S.W.,  aad  a  cable  wide.  The  highest  head  of  the  Kochefort 
shows  about  2J  hours'  ebb,  uncovers  34  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  and  does 
not  cover  at  neaps. 

Bochefort  rock  is  marked  by  a  tower  of  masonry,  the  top  of  which  is 
13  feet  above  high  water ;  it  is  painted  with  black  and  red  bands,  and  is 
surmounted  by  a  ball. 

The  marks  for  the  Bochefort  are,  the  guard-house  on  the  sommit  of 
Yarde  point  its  own  breadth  open  to  the  westward  of  the  Bigne,  S.W,  ^  S., 
and  St.  Vincent  mill  in  one  with  the  western  bluff  point  of  Binar,  S.  i  W. 
The  semaphore  on  Garde  Gur4in  point  its  own  length  open  to  Che  north- 
ward of  the  Grande  Conch^o  leads  a  quarter  of  a  mile  northward  of 
the  Bochefort ;  and  Farame  church  in  one  with  the  Bigne  leads  to  the 
westward. 

HAVRE  de  ROTE  NEUP.— This  little  harbour,  sitoatpd  mid- 
way between  Meinga  and  Varde  points,  is  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
wide  and  half  a  mile  deep,  but  it  is  greatly  encumbered  with  sand,  and  the 
tide  only  begins  to  enter  at  half  flood  ;  the  approach  also  is  endangered  by 
several  rocka  that  cover.  The  local  mariners  say,  that  in  case  of  need 
vessels  of  15  or  16  feet  draught  may  find  shelter  in  it  at  high-water 
springs,  but  they  must  keep  within  a  quarter  of  a  cable  of  the  eastern 
point  of  the  entrance,  named  Binar  point,  when  passing  it. 

A  remarkable  tree  in  the  town  of  Boteueuf  in  one  with  the  westerly 
rocky  bluff  point  of  Binar,  S,  by  W.  J  W.,  will  lead  between  the  Boche- 
fort and  the  Hautieux  rocks  to  the  entrance  of  the  harbour. 

Basse  TrOUV6e  is  »  dangerous  isolated  rock  lying  E.  by  N.  J  N.  1 1^ 
miles  from  cape  Frehel,  and  W.  ^  N.  tho  same  distance  from  the  Chausey 
lighthouse,  with  only  13  feet  over  it  and  from  14  to  15  fathoms  around  it 
at  low  water.  The  marks  for  it  are,  the  fort  on  the  Grande  Concha 
in  one  with  the  eastern  part  of  the  fortifications  of  La  Cite,  S.  f  W.j 
and  the  Amas-du-Cap  touching  the  southern  part  of  the  village  of 
Hopitaux  d'Erqui,  W,  by  S.  ^  S.  The  Amas-du-Cap  seen  between  the 
eminence  on  which  the  above  vilh^  stands  and  cape  Frehel,  but  a  little 
nearer  to  the  eminence  than  the  cape,  leads  to  the  northward ;  and  the 
same  eminence  kept  between  the  Amas-du-Cap  and  cape  Frehel  will  lead 


CHAP.  IX.]  TINTIATJX  PASSAGE.  379 

to  the  southward.      The  rock  occasions  great  overfalls  during  springs,  and 
the  sea  breaks  over  it  during  strong  winds. 

Basse  des  Sauvages  are  two  rocky  heads  lying  in  a  N.N.W.  and 
S.S.E.  direction,  and  distant  2  cables  apart.  There  are  39  feet  on  the 
N.N.W.  head,  27  feet  on  the  S.S.E.  head,  arid  14  to  16  fathoms  around 
them  at  low  water.  From  the  S.S.E.  head,  which  is  only  dangerous  to 
vessels  of  large  draught,  cape  Frehel  bears  W.  by  S.  |  S.  southerly,  6  miles 
the  pier-light  at  St.  Malo  S.S.E.  \  E.  9|  miles;  and  the  marks  for  it  are, 
Saudray  point,  a  little  open  eastward  of  Cierge  point  (the  next  point 
southward  of  Latte  point),  S.W.  |  W.  and  St.  Malo  church  (on  the  steeple 
of  which  there  is  a  telegraph)  in  line  between  the  two  hillocks  on  Cezembre 
island  S.S.E.  \  E. 

The  Amas-du-  Cap  touching  the  southern  part  of  the  village  of  H6pitaux 
d'Erqui,  W.  by  S.  \  S.,  leads  half  a  mile  to  the  south-east  of  Ihe  Sauvages; 
the  north-east  extreme  of  Cezembre  in  one  with  the  above  telegraph 
S.S.E.  leads  to  the  north-eastward ;  and  the  telegraph  in  one  with  a  rock 
named  Muriers,  lying  at  the  south-west  extreme  of  Cezembre,  leads  to  the 
southward. 

Le  CatiS. — This  isolated  rocky  head  is  dangerous  to  vessels  of  large 
draught  at  low  water  springs,  at  which  period  there  are  only  2b  feet  on  it, 
and  14  and  16  fathoms  around  it,  and  to  small  vessels  when  it  blows  hard 
on  a  weather  tide,  as  there  is  then  a  heavy  sea.  It  lies  with  the  lighthouse 
on  cape  Frehel  bearing  W.  \  S.  distant  3  miles ;  the  summit  of  Cezembre 
island  S.E.  f  E.  *l\  miles ;  and  the  telegraph  on  the  steeple  of  St.  Malo 
church  S.E.  \  E.  9^  miles. 

The  marks  for  the  Catis  are,  the  summit  of  cape  d'Erqui  exactly  in  the 
interval  which  separates  cape  Frehel  and  the  Amas-du -Cap  ;  the  tower  of 
Latte  fort  in  one  with  the  hillock  on  Cierge  point,  S.W.  f  W.  By  shutting 
in  cape  d'Erqui  with  cape  Frehel  a  vessel  will  pass  to  the  southward  of  it ; 
and  by  opening  cape  d'Erqui  half  a  point  to  the  northward  of  the  Amas- 
du-Cap,  she  will  pass  to  the  northward. 

Le  VIEUX  or  OLD  BANK  is  a  rocky  ledge  lying  nearly  4  miles 
to  the  north-west  of  Cezembre,  and  generally  betrays  itself  by  a  rippling. 
It  is  about  4  cables  long  in  an  E.S.E.  and  W.N.W.  direction,  and  2  cables 
broad,  and  has  several  heads  on  it,  with  but  little  water  on  them.  From 
the  highest  head,  which  is  situated  at  the  west  extreme  of  the  ridge  and 
uncovers  5  feet  at  low-water  equinoctial  springs,  with  a  black  and  red  bell 
buoy  moored  close  to  it,  cape  Frehel  lighthouse  bears  W.  by  N.  \  N. 
^^  miles,  and  the  pier  light  at  St.  Malo  S.E.  f  S.  6^^  miles ;  and  the 
marks  for  it  are,  Varde  point  just  open  to  the  northward  of  the  Haies  de 
la  Conch^e,  S.E.  by  E*  ^  E.,  the  highest  of  the  Pierres  des  Fortes  in  one 


V 


3S0  GKXSVILLZ  TO  CAPE    FREHEL.  [chjlf. 

with  the  MHfth-weftt  bft^tion,  cmlMi  St.  PfaDippe,  of  the  foitificmtions  at 
St,  MaU>y  S,K.  I  S^  and  the  mill  at  Chesne  io  lioe  with  the  soathem 
nUfp*i  of  St.  Cfti^  pointy  S.W.  bj  W.  }  W.  TLe  mark«  for  the  hank  are, 
St.  Hydnue  church  midway  betwec^n  the  Petite  Conchee  and  CesemLre, 
S.E.  J  K.,  and  St.  Guildo  windmill  just  open  to  the  weastward  of  Colom- 
fiierff  i»k-t,  S.W.  \  S. 

Parani^  charch  in  sight  nonhward  of  Petite  Conchee  &£•  \  S.,  or 
the  Ilcrpin  rock  twice  its  own  breadth  open  northward  of  the  Bochefbrt 
nxiky  K.  by  S.  |  S.,  leadit  northward  of  the  Vieax  bank ;  the  same  church 
in  Might  to  the  Houthward  of  Cezembre,  S.£.  by  £.,  leads  to  the  Foathward  ; 
St.  Guildo  mill  in  line  with  the  western  part  of  Ehbiens  islet,  S.W.,  leads 
to  the  eastward  ;  and  St.  Jacut  mill  in  line  with  the  eastern  part  of  the 
same  islet,  S.S.W.  ^  W.  will  lead  to  the  westward.  By  keeping  the 
summit  of  Varde  point  in  line  with  the  fort  on  the  Grande  Conchee 
S.E.  by  K.  (  Fj,f  a  vessel  will  pass  between  this  bank  and  the  Banchenou. 

Le  Banchenou,  &  small  rocky  ridge  2f  miles  to  the  northward  of 
Khbiens  isle,  and  nearly  two  miles  south-west  of  the  Yienx  bank^  is 
dangerous  to  vessels  of  heavy  dittugbt  at  low  water,  but  at  2  hours'  flood, 
at  the  Hprings,  there  are  from  25  to  28  feet  over  its  highest  head,  which 
lireaks  o<*.ciiHionally,  and  has  only  lo  feet  over  it  at  the  lowest  tides.  The 
marks  for  the  1 5  feet  arc  the  Bee  Rond  rock  a  little  to  the  eastward  of 
Cheino  mill,  W.S.W.  ;  the  Haies  de  la  Conchee  midway  between  the  fort 
on  Grande  Conchee  and  the  high  part  of  Meinga  point,  E.  by  S.  ;  and  St. 
Jiicnt  mill  in  line  with  the  tower  on  Khbiens  islet,  S.  by  W.  f  W.;  Cape 
Frchel  liglithoiisc  bears  N.W.  by  \V.  J  W.  5j\y  miles,  and  the  pierhead 
light  at  St.  Malo  S.E.  §  E.  6^  miles. 

This  little  danger  lies  directly  in  the  fairway  of  vessels  entering  the 
river  llanco  through  the  Decolle  passage,  but  St.  Malo  telegraph  in  line 
with  the  Huinmit  of  the  Cheminees  (these  are  high  rocks  which  do  not 
cover,  lying  midway  between  Decoll6  point  and  Cezembre  island), 
S.K.  I  E.,  will  load  well  to  the  northward;  the  same  telegraph  in  line 
with  the  fort,  on  Harbour  islet,  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  will  lead  half  a  mile  to  the" 
soulhwaril;  and  it  will  be  avoided  to  the  eastwai*d  or  the  westward  by 
oponiiig  St.  Jacut  mill  cast  or  west  of  Ehbiens  islet. 

Direotions. — when  steering  along  the  coast  between  Grouin  point 
and  capo  Fn^liol,  at  or  after  the  dangerous  period  of  half  ebb,  bear  in 
mind  that  ^o  long  as  the  lighthouse  on  that  cape  is  kept  open  to  the 
northw-anl  of  the  Rochefort  ix>ck,  there  will  be  nothing  to  fear  from  the 
Tiutiaux,  or  fnmi  the  shoals  in  the  immediate  vicinity  of  Grouin  point ; 
and  that  by  kot^ping  the  llerpin  twice  its  bi-eadih  open  to  the  northward 
of  tho  Hi>ohofort,  the  vessel  will  pass  to  the  northward  of  the  'Vieux  bank, 
and  of  uU  tlio  dangers  lying  l>etwecn  it  and  the  Rochefort.    A  patch  of 


CHAP.  IX.]  LB  VIEUX  OR  OLD   BANK.  381 

rocky  ground  lies  half  a  lulle  to  the  norlh\var(l  of  the  latter  rock,  but 
there  are  never  less  than  5  fathoms  upon  it,  though  it  occaslonallj 
ripples. 

ST.  MALO. — The  town  of  St.  Malo  is  built  on  the  small  rocky  island 
of  Aaron,  and  communicates  with  the  main  land  by  means  of  a  causeway, 
named  Le  Sillon,  three  quarters  of  a  mile  long  and  64  feet  broad,  which  is 
defended  from  the  violence  of  the  waves  by  strong  outworks.  The  whole 
area  of  the  island  is  occupied  by  houses,  and  the  walls  are  flanked  by 
towers  washed  by  the  sea.* 

The  manufactures  of  the  town  are  hosiery,  cordage,  soap,  fishing  nets, 
&c.,  &c.  Shipbuilding  is  carried  on,  and  there  is  a  large  tobacco  factory. 
Vessels  are  fitted  out  for  the  foreign  and  coasting  trade,  and  for  the 
whale  and  mackerel  fisheries.  The  imports  consist  of  colonial  produce, 
spices,  flax,  hemp,  &c. ;  there  is  also  a  considerable  trade  in  corn, 
fruit,  wine,  brandy,  salt,  linen,  cider,  butter,  honey,  fish,  salt  pro- 
visions, &c. 

The  population  of  the  commune  in  1871  was  10,693,  but  including  the 
town  of  St.  Servan,  which  is  situated  on  higher  ground,  and  is  sometimes 
reckoned  a  suburb  of  St.  Malo,  it  amounts  to  23,000. 

PORT  de  ST.  MALO,  situated  to  the  south-eastward  of  the 
town,  is  large  and  well  frequented,  but  difficult  of  approach,  and  the  flood 
rushes  in  with  great  strength,  equinoctial  tides  rising  to  the  height  of  43 
feet  above  the  level  of  low  water.  It  is  also  inconvenient  of  access  to 
vessels  of  large  draught  during  the  winter  months,  as  the  time  of  high 
water,  full  and  change,  occurs  at  6  h.  5  m.  in  the  evening. 

The  port  is  converted  into  a  Bassin  a  Flot,  or  floating  basin.  A  strong 
granite  wall  is  thrown  across  the  entrance,  having  two  openings,  which 
are  formed  into  locks  with  wide  flood-gates.  The  width  of  entrance  of 
the  largest  opening  is  60  feet,  and  the  tide  rises  above  the  bottom,  which 
is  12  feet  above  the  lowest  springs,  28^  feet  at  ordinary  springs,  31  feet  at 
great  springs,  and  about  15  feet  at  neaps. 

A  neat  substantial  stone  pier,  called  the  M61e  des  Noires,  is  built  on  the 
Noires  rocks  at  the  south-west  angle  of  the  town,  and  in  addition  to  its 
great  convenience  for  landing  passengers,  protects  the  port  from  the  heavy 
roll  of  the  sea,  which  it  otherwise  would  be  exposed  to  with  north-westerly 
winds.  The  pier  is  1,290  feet  long,  and  about  16  feet  wide,  and  at  its 
extremity  is  a  light-tower. 

Extensive  quays,  built  of  granite,  border  the  east  and  south  sides  of  the 
town  of  St.  Malo ;  that  on  the  east  side  is  about  70  feet  wide,  and  most 


♦  See  Admiralty  plan,  port  St.  Malo  and  environs,  No.  2,700  j  scale,  m  =  5  inches. 


Z^/1  ^,3l).S"LLI,   T'j  Cape   F2X2XL. 


•.f>>3hp-  ^-**-  • ..  f. •-'■.■.  *  ;  V.  i^*  :*«r-  i--i  thai  ali-.4ix??iiie  ^^t  •vai''^  «s  Sc  S 

ViTtu-t  f,  sXjA.  1.'. ;  '*j  f-=^t  ';.*  Lir.-.ft7.    V**^L*  Ijiz^  a:  sLe  Sc  Malo  qcajB 
*r^  ^tyf^r^r-A   f»\   i.i  -j^^.  *'I'':»^*  tI*:::  t'ce  wii"!  i*  sroeis  firoai   Soaxk 

•  ■*  *    *  •-  • 

A  Life  Boat  i^  sta-.ioL'ni  >:  .St.  M:klo. 

HOHT8. — Fivft  ii^fht-!  are  e-tAbli-hed  fti  and  In  the  TicinityofSt. 
MiJo  t/>  a^^itt  th^  intricaUi  nAvl'^AtloTi  arnon^r^t  tbe  nameroos dangers  wlucL 
mark  the  u\i\»T'mi'hfji  Uj  the  port. 

Roche  Bonne. — 'I^^  ':adternmcr«t  li^ht,  at  Roche  Bonne,  about  2^ 
XM\tiy,  trfrtti  St.  Malo,  "hown  from  a  lighthoa«e  white  at  base  and  black  st 
Humrnity  in  vk  fired  rerl  W^htj  128  ffrot  high,  and  risible  from  seairard  only 
TiCtwffen  the  lK«riiig»  of  E.  by  S.  \  S.,  and  S.E.  by  E.  J  E.  from  a  distance 
of  1/5  rnil*'". 

St.  MalO. — On  the  Molfj  dfj.s  Noirea  i3  a  circular  lighthouse,  whence. 
Hi  fill  «:I<;vfttion  of  ;i3  feet  above  hi;rh  water,  is  shown  &  fixed  white  light 
viHible  \OiniUiH. 

Protri  fi  wjiiiircr  white  1iouf»c  in  the  depth  of  Anse  des  Sablona  is  exhibited 
n /IftMfii/if/ f/rf'f'nVi}r]ii^r)()  ft^H  high,  showing  a  flash  at  intervals  of ^biir 
Mtvoiidn,  vi*<ibl«*.  H  iiiileH. 

BallUO. — Itilnnd  of  the  preceding  S.S.E.  \  E.  1,804  yards  on  the 
hillH  of  Hullue  from  a  Hqiiare  building,  the  upper  part  of  which  is  black  a 
fi.rvd  fjrrvn  light  in  nliown  from  an  elevation  of  221  feet,  and  is  visible 
ImtwiUMi  the  hniringH  of  S.S.E.  and  S.E.  \  S.  from  a  distance  of  9  miles.    . 

Lo  Grand  Jardin, — On  the  south  extreme  of  Le  Grand  Jardin 
iMrl  JM  11  rinMiliir  light  liouse  showing  i\  fixed  yfhiiQ  light,  varied  every 
tivnift/  snonds  by  iiltcrimto  flashes  of  red  and  green^  of  two  seconds' 
(luriidou.  Tlit^  light,  is  rli'vatod  65  feet  above  high  water,  and  is  visible  12 
niiloN. 

IIOADSTE ADS. — Tln'iv  are  throe  good  roadsteads  at  the  month 
tit'  tlu»  rivor  Kauco,  whoro  vi»»<si'ls  of  largo  draught  generally  anchor  to 
uiiltMiil,  or  awuil  higli  tidos  to  ontor  the  jiort.  They  are  named  Rade  de  St. 
Malo.  Mouillngo  do  UiuanU  and  Kadodo  Solidor. 

HADE  do  ST,  MALO  ^J*  situaUnl  on  the  eajstern  side  of  the 
outrauco  to  tho  Uauiv,  at  4  cablos  westward  of  the  town  of  St.  Malo,  and 
«H'ou(UOH  a  y^moo  about  I )  oablos  long,  north  and  south,  a  cable  wide,  with 
^7  to  C).^  foot  \vator  ovor  it  at  tho  lowest  tide.     It  is  bounded  on  the  north 


<^^'^^-1  POET  DE   ST.   MALO.  383 

by  the  Basse  Broutard ;  on  the  east  by  a  sand-bank  which  fronts  the  town 
and  dries  at  low-water ;  and  to  the  southward  by  the  Plateau  de  la  Ranee, 
the  northern  head  of  which  lies  S.  J  E.  a  quarter  of  a  mile  from  the 
Broutard. 

Basse  Broutard  a  small  rocky  patch,  about  130  yards  long,  east  and 
west,  and  60  yards  wide,  with  only  8  feet  on  it  at  the  lowest  tides,  lies  with 
the  sentry  box  on  Varde  point  between  Grand  and  Petit  Bey  islets,  and  St. 
Hydeuc  church  steeple  a  little  open  northward  of  the  northern  bastion  of 
the  ramparts  at  St.  Malo,  E.  ^  S. 

Plateau  de  la  Banoe. — This  rocky  ledge,  2  cables  long,  north  and 
south,  and  a  cable  wide,  has  six  dangerous  heads  on  it,  two  of  which  uncQver, 
one  2  feet,  the  other  3  feet,  at  the  lowest  tides ;  there  are  from  one  to  2 
feet  on  three  of  the  other  heads  at  the  same  time  of  tide;  and  16  feet  on 
the  sixth  head,  which  lies  on  the  northern  part  of  the  ledge.  Two  buoys, 
one  red  and  black  and  the  other  black,  mark  the  north  and  south  extremes 
of  this  danger. 

The  telegraph  on  Grarde  Gu6rin  point  in  sight  between  the  Grand  Vide 
rock  and  the  steep  point  of  Boche  Pel^e,  leads  half  a  cable  northward  of 
the  northern  hedge  of  this  ridge ;  and  the  western  head  of  the  Bizeux  rock 
in  one  with  the  high  rock  at  the  foot  of  Bechard  point  S.  |  E.,  leads  a 
third  of  a  cable  eastward  of  the  ridge.  A  vessel  will  pass  the  same  distance 
to  the  westward  by  keeping  the  beacon  on  the  Merci^re  in  line  with  the 
eastern  head  of  the  Bizeux  ;  and  half  a  cable  to  the  southward  of  the 
2-feet  head  on  the  southern  part  of  the  ridge,  by  keeping  the  pier  head  of 
St.  Malo  in  line  with  the  outer  angle  of  the  bastion  of  St.  Louis,  the  south- 
easternmost  of  the  ramparts  of  St.  Malo. 

AncllOrage. — The  holding  ground  in  St.  Malo  road  is  good,  and 
vessels  moor  nearly  North  and  South,  in  the  direction  of  the  tidal  streams. 
The  best  position  is  in  the  middle  of  the  road,  with  the  eastern  head  of  the 
Bizeux  in  one  with  the  high  rock  at  the  foot  of  Bechard  point,  S.  f  E. ; 
and  the  telegraph  on  Garde  Gu^rin  point  a  little  open  southward  of  the 
summit  of  the  Grand  Vid6,  W.  by  N.  |  N.  Vessels  of  lighter  draught 
anchor  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  this. 

The  road  is  sheltered  from  all  winds  but  those  between  North  and  West, 
which,  when  they  blow  with  any  strength,  send  in  a  heavy  sea  during  the 
time  the  dangers  outside  the  river  are  covered.  The  streams  in  it  are  not 
strong,  the  flood  never  exceeding  3  knots,  and  the  ebb,  which  Bechard 
point  turns  to  the  N.N.W.,  never  running  with  sufficient  strength  to  pre- 
vent communication  with  the  port.  Sailing  vessels  wishing  to  leave  the 
road  for  the  port  or  a  more  sheltered  anchorage  in  the  river,  when  it  blows 
hard  from  the  westward,  should  not  weigh  till  the  latter  stream  has  fairly 
made,  to  enable  them  to  work  to  windward. 


381  GRAXVILLE  TO  CAPE   F&EHEL.  [chip. 

Theie  U  nl^o  good  boMing  groaml,  with  a  depth  of  18  to  22  feet  over 
]fy  in  the  Petite  Bade  de  St.  Malo,  at  a  short  difftanee  to  the  soathward 
aod  south-eastward  of  the  PhUeao  de  la  Banee.  When  at  anchor  ut  tlie 
C3ntre  of  this  road,  the  extreme  of  Bechard  p3int  will  be  in  line  with  the 
middle  of  the  Bizeox,  and  the  outer  angle  of  the  bastion  of  St.  Louis  will 
Ije  open  about  half  a  point  to  the  southward  of  the  pier  head. 

• 

ANSE  de  DINABD.— This  bay  is  formed  abreast  St.  Male  on 
the  western  eidc  of  the  Bance,  between  points  Dinard  and  Yicomt^,  and 
the  grounding  places  in  it  extend  along  its  western  shore,  from  the  old  ship- 
yard below  tlic  village  to  the  new  one  beneath  the  mill  on  Dinard  point. 
Tho  bottom  dries  15  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides  in  the  north- 
east part  of  the  bay,  and  18  feet  in  the  south-west,  springs  rise  from 
18  to  24  feet,  neaps  9  or  10  feet ;  it  is  composed  of  stiff  mud  covered  with 
tid&weedf  and  when  it  blows  hard  from  the  X.E.  vessels  strike  heavily 
when  grounding ;  and  as  the  anchors  of  small  vessels  bite  with  difficulty 
core  should  be  taken  at  low  water  to  bury  them  in  the  mud  ;  avoid  also 
grounding  to  .the  eastward  of  the  direction  in  which  the  fort  on  the 
Grande  Concbee  begins  to  open  out  of  Dinard  point,  as  the  bottom  is 
deeply  furrowed. 

MOITILLAGE  de  DINARD —Vessels  of  large  draught,  that 
cannot  enter  port  St.  Malo  during  the  neaps,  often  remain  in  the  Mouillage 
de  Dinard  for  the  springs,  as  they  are  well  sheltered  there  from  all  but 
northerly  windg.  •  This  anchorage  is  just  outside  the  outer  edge  of  the  mud 
in  Dinard  bay,  and  is  half  a  mile  in  extent  from  the  Petit  Palais  rock  to 
the  Schcvr6  bank ;  its  outer  limit  does  not  extend  to  the  eastward  of  the 
lino  on  which  the  high  rock  named  the  Muriers  (lying  close  to  the  south- 
west point  of  Cezembre  island)  is  just  open  and  shut  with  the  eastern 
slope  of  Dinard  point. 

The  holding  ground  is  good  along  the  edge  of  the  mud,  out  of  the 
strength  of  the  stream,  with  Champ  Fleuri  mill  bearing  S.  by  E.  ^  E,  The 
best  anchorage,  where  the  depths  are  from  26  to  30  feet  at  low  water,  is 
limited  to  the  northward  by  the  line  on  which  Solidor  tower  is  seen 
between  the  extreme  of  Bechard  point  and  the  little  fort;  and  to  the 
southward  by  the  same  tower  open  its  own  breadth  to  the  northward  of  the 
high  steeple  of  St.  Servan  church. 

This  roadstead  is  the  general  rendezvous  for  vessels  of  war,  and  is  pre- 
ferable to  that  of  St.  Malo,  being  sheltered  against  the  prevailing  winds  ; 
but  it  will  be  prudent  at  nil  times  to  be  ready  to  weigh  or  slip,  if  forced  by 
bad  weather  to  take  shelter  fai'lher  up  the  Eance. 

ANSE  et  RADE  de  SOLIDOR  together  form  an  important 
maritime  position.     Frigates  have  been  built  in  the  bay,  but  the  water  not 


<3HAP.  IX.]  ST.   MAL0.7— ANSE  DE  DINABD.  385 

being  sufficiently  deep  for  them  in  the  road,  they  have  been  obliged  to 
•complete  their  armament  in  that  of  Dinard. 

Solidor  bay,  situated  on  the  west  side  of  the  town  of  St.  Servan,  is  a 
cable  wide  at  the  entrance,  and  its  shores  are  almost  entirely  occupied  by 
the  military  establishments  of  the  town.  Merchant  vessels  intending  to 
remain  some  titne  in  the  bay  are  usually  placed  at  the  entrance,  between 
the  quai  des  Corbieres  and  the  rocks  lying  at  the  foot  of  Solidor  tower, 
where  the  bottom  dries  12  or  13  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides; 
springs  rise  from  25  to  32  feet,  neaps  about  15  feet. 

A  small  grounding  place,  called  St.  Pere  is  formed  in  the  northern 
part  of  the  bay,  at  the  foot  of  the  peninsula  of  La  Cite.  It  is  about 
B4  yards  wide,  270  yards  deep,  and  will  contain  14  or  15  vessels  of  the 
tonnage  and  draught  of  those  employed  in  the  Newfoundland  trade.  The 
grounding  places  towards  the  middle  of  the  port  are  elevated  10  feet 
above  the  lowest  tides.  Vessels  of  about  13  feet  draught  can  enter  at 
high-water  neaps. 

Solidor  road  is  only  a  small  deep,  2  cables  long,  north  and  south,  and 
about  80  yards  wide,  formed  between  the  beach  which  dries  in  front  of 
Solidor  bay  and  the  Solidor  bank,  which  also  dries  and  extends  parallel 
to  the  shore ;  the  soundings  in  it,  however,  are  shallow,  and  long-heeled 
vessels  occasionally  take  the  ground,  the  greatest  depth  at  low  water 
being  18  feet.  The  road  is  sheltered  on  all  sides  at  this  time  of  tide, 
and  when  the  bank  is  uncovered;  but  when  it  blows  hard  from  the 
westward  and  the  bank  is  covered  there  is  a  considerable  swell. 

Banc  do  Solidor  bounds  Solidor  road  to  the  westward,  and  un- 
covers 8  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  Its  north  extreme  is  85  yards  south- 
ward of  B^chard  point,  and  thence  it  extends  3  cables  to  the  south- 
east and  terminates  173  yards  north-east  of  the  Bizieux  rock.  It  is 
about  a  cable  broad,  and  composed  of  fine  white  sand  mixed  with  broken 
shells. 

l^ides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  port  St.  Malo  at  6h.  5m., 
springs  rise  35  feet,  neaps  26  feet.  The  water  rises  above  the  bottom  of  the 
large  opening  into  the  port  (this  opening  has  been  converted  into  a  lock 
with  wide  floodgates,  its  bottom  being  12  feet  above  the  lowest  tides), 
about  32  feet  at  equinoctial  springs,  25  at  ordinary  springs,  and  14  at  neaps. 
The  streams  run  with  great  strength  during  springs  at  the  entrance  of  the 
Grande  and  Petite  Cbnch^e  channels ;  the  flood  to  the  north-east,  the  ebb 
to  the  south-west.  Their  rate  is  about  4  knots  at  half-tide,  across  the 
entrance  of  the  Grande  channel  of  the  Ranee,  between  the  beacon  on  the 
Savatte  and  that  on  the  Buron. 

Q  7049.  B  B 


388  GRANVILLE   TO  CAPE  FBEHEL.  [chap.  xx. 

will  pass  50  or  60  yards  to  the  northward  of  a  rock  lying  at  tho  extremitj 
of  Dinard  Point,  and  which  covers  a  little  before  half  flood. 

During  the  springs,  when  the  Mouill6  is  covered,  or  less  than  3  feet  out 
of  water,  vessels  of  large  draught  can  run  over  the  bank  between  that 
rock  and  the  Pierrcs  d*A  mourette  rocks,  there  being  at  that  time  at  least 
4  fathoms  over  it.  To  cross  the  bank,  bring  the  Grand  Vide  rock  (which 
does  not  cover)  in  one  with  Garde  Gudriu  telegraph,  W.  by  N.  then  by 
steering  E.  by  S.  with  these  two  objects  in  line,  it  will  lead  to  the  middle 
of  the  anchorage  in  St.  Malo  road,  where  vessels  generally  wait  antil  there 
is  sufficient  water  to  enter  the  port. 

During  the  springs  vessels  often  pass  to  the  northward  of  the  Nerpat, 
and  enter  the  Decolle  passage  either  by  running  between  the  beacon  on 
the  Mouillere  and  that  on  the  Petit  Pot  de  Beurre,  or  by  passing  close  to 
the  eastward  of  the  beacon  on  the  latter  rock.  When  to  the  northward  of 
the  Nerput,  and  intending  to  enter  the  passage  by  the  former  route,  bring 
St,  Enogat  church-steeple  in  line  with  the  middle  of  a  little  patch  of  white 
sand  situated  close  to  the  westward  of  Roche  Pel^e  point  S.E.  f  S.,  and  it 
will  lead  2  cables  northward  of  a  19  feet  patch,  named  Eat  du  Nord-Est ;  a 
cable  to  the  north-east  of  the  Basses  des  Mar^haux ;  the  same  distance  to 
the  south-west  of  the  Grande  Basse  and  of  the  beacon  on  the  Petit  Pot  de 
Beurre,  and  only  50  yards  to  the  southward  of  a  small  rock  which  comes 
awash  at  low  water  and  lies  170  yards  to  the  south-west  of  the  beacon. 

If  intending  to  pass  to  the  eastward  of  the  Petit  Pot  de  Beurre,  from  a 
-position  to  the  northward  of  the  Nerput,  steer  to  bring  the  mill  of  St. 
Enogat  in  line  with  the  north  extreme  of  the  above  little  patdh  of  white 
:  sand,  S.S.E.  f  E.,  and  these  mai^ks  exactly  in  one  will  lead  over  a  rocky 
patch  named  the  Sauts  aux  Chiens  (on  whi6h  there  are  10  feet  at  low 
water,  and  from  30  to  36  feet  at  half  flood),  and  half  a  cable  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  beacon  on  the  Petit  Pot  de  Beurre.  As  soon  as  this  beacon  is 
.passed,  haul  a  little  to  the  southward,  to  enter  the  passage  and  to  avoid  a 
:small  rock  which  lies  a  cable  to  the  southward  of  the  Grand  Pot  de 
£eurre,  and  uncovers  4  feet.  As  soon  as  the  Nerput  is  in  one  with 
Jjb,  Latte  fort,  run  to  eastward  with  this  western  mark  on,  and  proceed  as 
before. 

Prom  St.  Malo  Boad  to  Solictor  Road.— There  are  two 

dangers  to  be  avoided  when  approaching  Solidor  road  from  that  of  Dinard 
or  St.  Malo.  The  first  is  the  Eat  de  la  Merciere,  a  small  isolated  rock, 
with  only  4  feet  on  it,  lying  in  mid-channel  N.W.  |  N.  a  third  of  a  mile 
from  B^chard  point.  When  the  Pourceaux  rocks  are  covered,  there 
are  17  feet  on  this  danger,  and  22  feet  when  the  tide  reaches  the  foot  of 
the  Pierres  d' Amourette  beacon.     The  other  danger  is  the   Merciere 


OHJLP.  IX.]  ST.  MALO. — ^PASSAGE  DU  DjfiCOLLi.  389 

ridge,  lying  half  a  cable  to  the  westward  of  the  peninsula  of  La  Cit^.  The 
highest  head  on  this  ridge,  which  has  a  beacon  on  it,  uncovers  20  feet 
at  the  lowest  tides,  and  covers  a  quarter  of  an  hour  before  half  flood  at  the 
springs. 

Vessels  bound  to  Solidor  road,  and  having  entered  the  river  Ranee, 
may  at  neap  tides  pass  either  to  the  eastward  or  westward  of  the  Rat  de 
la  Merci^re ;  but  at  springs  they  should  keep  as  much  as  possible  over 
on  the  right  bank  of  the  river,  to  avoid  the  strong  tides,  and  pass  to 
the  eastward  of  the  Rat.  For  this  purpose,  when  abreast  St.  Malo, 
keep  the  eastern  head  of  the  Bizeux  rock  and  the  Merci^re  beacon 
in  one,  until  the  pier  head  lighthouse  at  St.  Malo  is  in  line  with  St.  Malo 
church ;  then  steer  to  pass  at  the  distance  of  three-quarters  of  a  cable  to 
the  westward  and  southward  of  the  Merci^re  beacon. 

In  case  of  necessity,  a  vessel  may  run  between  this  beacon  and  the 
peninsula  of  La  Cit^,  by  keeping  the  pier  head  lighthouse  in  line  with  the 
north-west  side  of  the  Calfats  rock ;  but  this  narrow  passage  had  better 
be  avoided  as  much  as  possible,  as  the  tides  run  strong,  and  there  are  only 
17  feet  in  it  at  low  water. 

The  most  &vourable  time  for  entering  the  road  is  at  the  time  of  high 
water  on  the  shore,  for  it  being  entirely  exposed  to  the  eddy  of  the  flood 
stream,  occasioned  by  the  extension  of  Bechard  point,  vessels  entering 
before  that  period  will  experience,  when  rounding  that  point,  and  for  the 
space  of  about  a  cable  east  and  west,  the  effects  of  the  flood  setting  with 
great  velocity  to  the  south-west,  and  of  the  eddy,  not  less  strong,  setting 
to  the  north-west.  The  eddy  begins  to  be  felt  near  the  shore  about  2 
hours  before  high  water,  and  its  breadth  and  strength  increase  as  the  tide 
rises. 

To  enter  the  road,  bring  the  tower  of  Grand  Larron  in  line  with  that 
of  Solidor,  and  it  will  lead  between  Bechard  point  and  the  Solidor  bank. 
When  within  the  latter,  anchor  as  convenient ;  the  services,  however,  of  a 
local  pilot  are  necessary  to  obtain  a  safe  position. 

CHENAL  de  la  GRANDE  PORTE.— The  Grande  and  Petite 
Porte  channels  are  the  only  navigable  passages  into  St.  Malo  road  or  into  the 
Ranee  at  low  water.  They  lie  to  the  south-west  of  Cezembre  island,  and 
are  divided  by  the  Pierres  des  Portes  rocks.  They  both  unite  between  the 
Grand  Jardin  and  the  Pierres  de  la  Savatte,  at  the  entrance  of  the  Grande 
channel  of  the  Ranee,  and  may  be  used  by  vessels  of  the  largest  draught 
at  all  times  of  tide ;  no  square-rigged  vessel  of  burthen,  however,  should 
attempt  either  of  them  but  with  a  free  wind  of  sufficient  strength  to  follow 
the  leading  marks,  and  to  stem  the  tide,  and  recollecting  that  the  course 
when  within  the  narrows,  is  about  S.S.E.  }  E. 


E» 


of  I'.zj^i  r 


d>i«>  cot  c-  -■ 


ii;jl>VILLE    TO  CAPB  lEEHEL. 


■i'  I*.--.  ;.  :L«  i:.«hw»rdrf»ioA  lying  it  »»«  • 

J ::.--.  *  :-:'^  t:.-  M.-^UIe  i*  «nwa,  «r  1«  thin  S  f«t  <* 
:.-_■  ,:.-»jght  «a  ma  oner  the  bmk  benree"  "l" 
:.rr...:.\:..  ._.-.:>  r^<ks  tbrW  bri^  •»»'«•'*"«  ""** 
;i.  T  ,r."iLM^i:-k.brin6'.h*  Giwd  Vide  rock  (whWi 
i=  <■:..■  -;:L  t.i»rde  GiuYin  irifgnph,  W.  bj-  N.  Um  by 
>.-::■.:■«  i^..a.j«:*  in  line.  iiwTl  !««>«»*■« '"'^ 
.  i.;  ^;.  M^:..  ro^.  whw  vMsels  genenUy  w«it  mtU  then 
tT  ii.'  ■:.!•.-  ih'-  pert. 

o  di«  northward  of  the  Nerpnt, 
running  bettreen  the  beacon  on 
iLo  >I..u:::i-r.  awl  that  oa  iln.-  IViii  ivi  tie  BeurTev  or  by  pusng  cloee  to 
the  ofc.f»ard  i.f  the  b-^an  on  tb<.-  latter  rock.  When  to  the  northward  of 
til.  Xtri«:i,  i.c,!  int.>n.Iin;i  lo  ont.-r  ili.>  pa*«»ge  by  the  former  ronte,  brin| 
Si.  Enogat  cli-jrcli-fi.vpl.*  in  line  w;ih  iLe  luidOle  ofa  little  patch  of  lAitt 
Mnd  Htuatt-.!  cl.*-  to  the  westward  of  Rjche  Pelee  pmnt  S.E.  J  &,  and  it 
will  k-a.1  2  w!!«  isorihwar^i  ofa  19  f.it  iwtch.  named  Bat  dn  Korf-Ert;  a 
i-al'Ie  to  tiio  north-oa»i  of  the  B**«*  ties  Marechaax  ;  the  Mme  dirtance  to 
t\w  wiith-woi  of  thf  Graniie  Uati^  and  of  the  beacon  on  the  Petit  Pot  de 
Beurre.  ami  only  at)  yard*  to  the  southward  of  a  small  rock  which  comes 
awash  at  low  water  ami  lies  170  yanli  to  the  sooth-west  of  the  beacon. 

irimendinglopns3  to  the  caMwar.l  of  the  Petit  Pot  de  Benrre,  from  a 
]>o!>iiion  to  the  northward  of  the  Xerpui,  sieer  to  bring  the  mill  of  St 
£nci«Bt  in  line  with  the  north  i>:(trcme  of  the  above  little  paUft  of  white 
ennd,  S.S.E.  )  E.,  and  thoi^e  marks  exactly  in  one  will  lead  over  a  rockj* 
patch  ikamed  the  Sauts  mix  Cbiens  (on  wbich  there  are  10  feet  at  low 
-n-ftter,  and  from  30  to  36  feet  a(  half  flood),  and  half  a  cable  to  the  eaat- 
wartl  of  the  beacon  on  the  Petit  Pot  de  Benrre.  As  soon  aa  this  beacon  is 
passed,  haul  a  little  to  the  southward,  to  enter  the  pa»iage  and  to  avoid  a 
^small  rock  which  lies  a  cable  to  tlie  southwanl  of  the  Grand  Pot  de 
Scurrc,  and  uncovers  4  feet.  As  soon  as  the  Nerpnt  is  in  one  with 
Im  Latte  fort,  run  to  eastward  with  this  western  mark  on,  and  proceed  as 


From  St.  Halo  Road  to  Solidor  Road.~There  are  two 

dangers  to  be  avoided  when  approachinji  Solidor  road  from  tliat  of  T 
or  St.  Malo.     The  first  is  the  Eat  dp  la  Merciere,  a  small  isolated  t 
with  only  4  feet  on  it,  Ijring  in  mid-cbaniicl^ 
from   B4cbard  point.      When   the    PourM 
are  17  feet  on  this  danger,  and  22  f 
the  Pierre*  d'Amourette  beacon. 


N 


CHAP.  IX.]  ST.  MALO. — ^PASSAGE  DU  DicOLLjS.  389 

ridge,  lying  half  a  cable  to  the  westward  of  the  peninsula  of  La  Cit^.  The 
highest  head  on  this  ridge,  which  has  a  beacon  on  it,  uncovers  20  feet 
at  the  lowest  tides,  and  covers  a  quarter  of  an  hour  before  half  flood  at  the 
springs. 

Vessels  bound  to  Solidor  road,  and  having  entered  the  river  Ranee, 
may  at  neap  tides  pass  either  to  the  eastward  or  westward  of  the  Rat  de 
la  Merci^re ;  but  at  springs  they  should  keep  as  much  as  possible  over 
on  the  right  bank  of  the  river,  to  avoid  the  strong  tides,  and  pass  to 
the  eastward  of  the  Rat.  For  this  purpose,  when  abreast  St.  Malo, 
keep  the  eastern  head  of  the  Bizeux  rock  and  the  Merci^re  beacon 
in  one,  until  the  pier  head  lighthouse  at  St.  Malo  is  in  line  with  St.  Malo 
church ;  then  steer  to  pass  at  the  distance  of  three-quarters  of  a  cable  to 
the  westward  and  southward  of  the  Merci^re  beacon. 

In  case  of  necessity,  a  vessel  may  run  between  this  beacon  and  the 
peninsula  of  La  Cit£,  by  keeping  the  pier  head  lighthouse  in  line  with  the 
north-west  side  of  the  Calfats  rock ;  but  this  narrow  passage  had  better 
be  avoided  as  much  as  possible,  as  the  tides  run  strong,  and  there  are  only 
17  feet  in  it  at  low  water. 

The  most  fevourable  time  for  entering  the  road  is  at  the  time  of  high 
water  on  the  shore,  for  it  being  entirely  exposed  to  the  eddy  of  the  flood 
stream,  occasioned  by  the  extension  of  Bechard  point,  vessels  entering 
before  that  period  will  experience,  when  rounding  that  point,  and  for  the 
space  of  about  a  cable  east  and  west,  the  efiects  of  the  flood  setting  with 
great  velocity  to  the  south-west,  and  of  the  eddy,  not  less  strong,  setting 
to  the  north-west.  The  eddy  begins  to  be  felt  near  the  shore  about  2 
hours  before  high  water,  and  its  breadth  and  strength  increase  as  the  tide 
rises. 

To  enter  the  road,  bring  the  tower  of  Grand  Larron  in  line  with  that 
of  Solidor,  and  it  will  lead  between  B6chard  point  and  the  Solidor  bank. 
When  within  the  latter,  anchor  as  convenient ;  the  services,  however,  of  a 
local  pilot  are  necessary  to  obtain  a  safe  position. 

CHENAL  de  la  GRANDE  PORTE.— The  Grande  and  Petite 
Porte  channels  are  the  only  navigable  passages  into  St.  Malo  road  or  into  the 
Ranee  at  low  water.  They  lie  to  the  south-west  of  Cezembre  island,  and 
are  divided  by  the  Pierres  des  Portes  rocks^  They  both  unite  between  the 
Grand  Jardin  and  the  Pierres  de  la  Savatte,  at  the  entrance  of  the  Grande 
channel  of  the  Ranee,  and  may  be  used  by  vessels  of  the  largest  draught 
at  all  times  of  tide ;  no  square-rigged  vessel  of  burthen,  however,  should 
attempt  either  of  them  but  with  a  firee  wind  of  sufficient  strength  to  follow 
the  leading  marks,  and  to  stem  the  tide,  and  recollecting  that  the  course 
when  within  the  narrows,  is  about  S.S.E.  f  E. 


300  GBANVILLE  TO  CAPE   FBJBHXX.  [gbjlt.iz. 

The  Petite  Porte  channel  can  onlj  be  entered  bj  pataing  through  a 
chain  of  Bcattercd  rocks  extending  from  W^N.W.  to  N.N.W.  across  the 
entrance,  and  the  streams  in  their  viciuitj  daring  the  springs  attaining 
a  Telocity  of  4  or  5  knots,  make  them  very  dangerous  at  low  water,  and 
at  all  times,  by  the  OTcrfidls  they  occasion,  when  the  wind  is  fresh  on  a 
weather  tide. 

The  westernmost  of  this  rocky  chain  are  the  Buharats,  the  highest 
head  of  which,  Mrith  only  7  feet  on  it,  lies  N.W.  by  W.  }  W.  1^  mOes  fitmi 
the  lighthouse  tower  of  the  Grand  Jardin,  with  the  Nerput  rock  in  one 
with  the  summit  of  the  mound  on  La  Haye  point,  S.W.  ^  W. ;  the 
telegraph  on  St.  Malo  church  in  line  with  Petit  Bey  fort,  S.E.  ^  E. ;  and 
the  fort  on  the  Grande  Conch^  midway  between  the  north  point  of 
Cezembre  and  Meinga  point,  E.  ^  S.  The  Pierres  des  Portes  are  three 
elevated  rocks,  the  middle  one  of  which  uncovers  37  feet  and  lies  N.W. 
by  W.  6}  cables  from  the  tower  on  the  Grand  Jardin ;  a  tower  with  a  ball 
on  its  summit  is  placed  on  the  westernmost  rock,  which  dries  25  feet  at 
low  water  springs,  and  scarcely  covers  at  high-water  neaps.  A  black, 
conical  buoy,  with  the  word  Rock  on  it  in  white  letters,  is  moored  on  the 
south  side  of  Pierres  des  Portes  rocks,  nearly  one  cable  S.W.  by  W. }  W. 
from  the  westernmost  rock.  The  Buharets  have  a  black  bell  buoy,  moored 
on  their  southern  extreme. 

The  Bunel,  the  north-eastern  danger  of  tlie  chain,  uncovers  12  feet,  and 
lies  N.  ^  E.  6  cables  from  the  Grand  Jardin  tower,  and  is  marked  by  a 
black  and  red  buoy  moored  on  the  north  side  of  it.  The  Hupions,  on 
which  there  are  27  feet  water,  and  the  Grande  Hupee,  with  only  4^  feet 
on  it,  lie,  the  first  f>,  and  the  other  4^  cables  to  the  northward  of  the 
beacon  on  the  Pierres  des  Portes.  The  Grande  Hup^e  is  very  dangerous; 
the  marks  for  it  are,  the  highest  head  of  the  Pierres  des  Ports  in  one  with 
the  summit  of  Belle&rd  point,  S.S.  W.,  and  the  southern  end  of  the  fort  on 
Vai'de  point,  touching  the  north  side  of  the  Petite  Conch^e,  E.  by  S.  f  S. 
southerly. 

The  Grande  Porte  channel  is  a  continuation  to  the  westward  of  the 
Grande  channel  of  the  Ranee,  and  eictends  1^  miles  in  that  direction 
from  the  Grand  Jardin  to  the  Buharats.  The  eastern  part  of  this  channel, 
at  the  entrance  of  the  Grande  channel,  is  about  2  cables  wide,  ai)d  its 
limits  are  shown  by  an  iron  beacon,  with  a  ball  on  its  summit,  placed  on 
the  rocks  lying  off  the  Grand  Jardin,  and  by  a  similar  beacon  on. the 
rocks  off  the  Pierres  de  la  Savatte. 

The  former  beacon,  .on  ihe  jiorth  side  of  this  channel,  stands  on  aroek 
which  uncovers  19  feet.at  tbelowest  tides»  and  lies  S.  {  Wi  70,yard8  firont 
the  Grand  Jardin  lighthouse.    The^  beacon  on  the  south  side  of  the  chaoaal 


x«AP.  IX.]      ST.  MALO. — OH£NAL  D£  LA  GBAKDE  POET.        391 

is  on  the  easternmost  rock  of  the  Pierres  de  la  Savatte,  named  Pierre  k  la 
Vachoy  which  imcovers  22  feet,  and  la  awash  at  about  half  flood ;  the 
beacon  bears  S.S.W.  ^  W.  8  cables  from  the  lighthouse.  A  rocky  bank, 
named  Trayersaine,  lies  in  mid-channel,  between  the  two  beaconsi  and  is 
dangerous  at  low  water  springs,  as  it  is  steep*tOy  and  is  only  4  or  5  feet 
on  it  at  that  time  of  tide.  A  red  buoy  is  moored  near  the  north-west  edge 
of  this  bank,  with  Petit  Pot  de  Beurre  in  line  with  the  guard-house  of  the 
Garde  Guerin,  and  the  Mole  light  of  the  Noires,  in  line  with  the  tower  of 
the  town-hall  of  St.  Servan*  A  red  buoy  also  marks  the  shoal  of  the 
Pierres  de  la  Savatte,  and  is  moored  northward  of  the  Sou  rock,  with  the 
house  Lemoine  (Bel-air)  in  line  with  the  tower  of  Buron,  and  Mouiil^re 
beacon,  in  line  with  the  guard-house  of  the  Garde  Guerin. 

Grand  Chenal  de  la  Bance  is  2^  miles  long,  and  extends  from 
the  Grand  Jardin  to  St.  Malo  road.  It  is  bounded  on  the  western  side  by 
the  Pierres  de  la  Savatte,  by  the  Pierre  Sal^e  flats,  which  have  only  11  and 
12  feet  on  them  at  the  lowest  tides,  by  an  isolated  conical  rock  named  the 
Buron,  which  uncovers  24  feet  and  has  an  iron  beacon  on  it  surmounted 
by  a  ball,  and  by  scattered  rocky  heads  as  far  up  as  the  Pourceaux  rocks ; 
and  on  the  eastern  side  by  the  off-lying  rocks  of  the  Grand  Jardin,  by  the 
Pierres  Gamier,  the  highest  head  of  which  uncovers  5  feet,  and  by  the 
rocky  heads  on  the  western  slope  of  the  Ouvras  ridge,  the  greater  part  of 
which  uncover  at  the  lowest  tides.  The  Pierres  Gamier  and  the  western 
edge  of  the  Ouvras,  are  well  marked  by  4  black  buoys. 

The  nan*owest  part  of  this  channel  is  between  a  small  rocky  head,  with 
only  8  feet  on  it,  named  Basse  du  Buron,  the  western  edge  of  which  is 
marked  by  a  black  buoy,  and  the  red  beacon  with  ball  on  the  Buron  rock  ; 
they  bear  E.  by  N.  and  W.  by  S.  from  each  other,  and  are  1 J  cables  apart. 
At  2  cables  to  the  eastward  of  the  eastern  limit  of  this  part  of  the  channel, 
there  is  a  beacon  placed  on  the  highest  head  of  the  Ouvras,  which  uncovers 
14  feet. 

Directions.  —  The  leading  mark  through  the  Grande  Porto 
channel  is  Grand  Jardin  and  Roche  Bonne  lighthouses  in  line  E.  by  S.  f  S. 
By  following  this  direction  a  vessel  will  pass  about  a  cable  southward  of 
the  bell  buoy  lying  off  the  south-east  head  of  the  Buharats,  close  on  the 
south  side  of  a  rocky  head  of  20  feet ;  a  cable  southward  of  the  black  buoy 
moored  on  the  south  side  of  the  rocky  heads  lying  to  the  south-west  of  the 
Pierres  des  Portes ;  and  50  or  60  yards  northward  of  an  18  feet  patch 
lying  nearly  a  cable  to  the  north-east  of  the  Basse  du  Boujaron,  which  is 
awash  at  the  same  period,  and  marked  on  its  north  side  by  a  red  buoy. 

When  nearing  thd  lighthodse  be  prepared  to  alter  course  a  little  before 
the  lighthouse  in  Anse  des  Sablons  comes  in  line  with  Ballue  Ifght^tower, 


392  GBANYILLE  TO  CAPE  FEEHEL.  [chap. 

and  proceed  with  theae  objects  in  line  S.S.E.  |  E.  This  course  will  lead 
o?er  the  3-fathom  spur  off  the  S.W.  end  of  Grand  Jardin,  nearly  half  ft 
cable  eastward  of  Traversaine  bank  ;  close  to  the  edge  of  Pierre  Sal^ 
Flats,  and  thence  in  mid-channel  between  the  red  beacon  on  Le  Bnroa 
rocky  and  the  black  buojs  on  the  edge  of  Les  Ouvras,  to  the  Rade  St.  Male* 
Bj  night  the  same  directions  will  applj  by  using  the  lights. 

Or  when  within  2  cables  of  Grand  Jardin  lighthouses  bring  the 
S^inaire  or  college  of  St.  Servan  open,  about  half  the  apparent  breadth 
of  its  front,  eastward  of  the  eastern  angle  of  the  citadel  of  la  Cit6 
S.S.E.  ^  E. ;  this  will  lead  half  a  cable  to  the  north-east  of  the  Traversaine 
bank,  the  same  distance  eastward  of  the  Pierre  Sal6e  flats,  and  three 
quarters  of  a  cable  eastward  of  the  Buron  rock  beacon. 

When  entering  this  channel  at  low  water  it  will  be  necessary  to  avoid 
an  18  feet  patch  lying  nearly  half  a  cable  south-west  of  Grand  JiuxIIb 
lighthouse,  and  to  do  so  keep  the  college  touching  the  citadel  until  the 
beacon  opens  north  of  the  mound,  then  edge  to  the  southward  for  the 
fairway  mark.  A  vessel  will  be  eastward  of  the  Traversaine  bank  whem 
the  mill  of  St.  Lunaire  comes  within  its  own  length  of  the  Haumet  rock.^ 
When  rounding  the  Grand  Jardin  a  good  mark  to  lead  to  St.  Malo  road  is^ 
a  large  chimney  in  St.  Servan  open  northward  of  St.  Servan  church,  so  as 
to  see  daylight  between  them  S.S.E.  ^  E. 

Another  mark  for  entering  the  channel  of  the  Grande  Porte,  between 
the  Buharats  and  the  Pieres  des  Ports,  and  with  leading  winds  this  route 
is  to  be  pi'eferred  to  all  others  at  low  water,  is  the  steeple  of  St.  Enogat 
church  in  line  with  the  eastern  side  of  Haumet  rock,  S.  by  E.  ^  E.,  until 
the  north-west  windmill  of  Petite  Parame  is  seen  between  the  south-east 
mill  of  the  same  place  and  the  south-east  angle  of  the  fortifications  upon 
fort  ISIational  S.E.  f  E. ;  this  will  lead  to  the  southward  of  the  black  buoy 
on  the  south  side  of  the  Couillons  de  la  Port,  and  mid-channel  between  the 
Pierres  de  la  Savatte  and  the  Traversaine  bank  up  to  the  leading  mark  for 
the  Grande  channel  of  the  Ranee.  The  face  of  the  mill  and  the  south-east 
angle  of  the  fortifications  are  whitewashed,  in  order  to  be  easily  recognised 
at  a  distance. 

If  entering  the  Grande  channel  of  the  Ranee  by  the  Petite  Porte 
channel,  bring  the  west  end  of  Cezembre  island  in  line  with  the  centre 
of  the  town  of  St.  Malo  S.S.E.  ^  E.,  and  having  arrived  within  2  miles 
of  the  island  steer  to  the  southward,  to  bring  the  Grand  Jardin  lighthouse 
in  line  with  the  principal  steeple  of  St.  Servan,  S.S.E.  f  E. ;  this  mark 
will  lead  between  the  Grande  Hup^e  and  the  Rat  des  Courtis,  and  to  the 
northward  of  the  Basse  Nord-Est  des  Portes  ;  but  when  within  2  cables  of 
the  lighthouse  steer  to  round  the  Grand  Jardin,  and  proceed  as  before. 


^^K* 


CHAP,  oc.]      ST.  MALO.— <IHEKAL  DE  LA  PETITE  CONCHiSe.     393 

Grand  Jardin  lighthouse  in  line  with  the  mill  on  Dinard  point,  S.  by  E.» 
easterly,  leads  midway  between  the  Bunel  rock  and  the  Hupions,  and  the 
same  tower  in  line  with  Jeannet  windmill,  S.S.W.,  will  lead  between  the 
Bunel  and  the  shoals  lying  a  cable  westward  of  the  south-west  end  of 
Cezembre ;  but  in  using  this  latter  channel,  a  vessel  must  edge  away  to 
the  south-west,  to  round  the  Grand  Jardin  as  soon  as  either  the  steeple  of 
Param6  church  or  that  of  St.  Hydeuc  opens  out  of  the  south-west  point  of 
Cezembre. 

CHENAL  de  la  PETITE  C0NCH£E  is  only  practicable  for 
vessels  of  large  draught  between  the  periods  of  half  flood  and  half  ebb.  Its 
entrance  lies  2  cables  eastward  of  the  Petite  Conch^e,  between  the  Rousse 
and  Ronfleresse,  rocks  which  are  only  a  cable  apart.  The  Petite  Conch^e 
is  the  only  rock  between  Cezembre  island  and  the  Grand  Conch^e  that 
does  not  cover  at  the  springs  ;  the  Koiisse  uncovers  33  feet,  and  the 
Ronfleresse  28^  feet  at  the  lowest  tides. 

Directions. — The  west  side  of  Petit  Bey  fort  seen  between 
the  citadel  of  La  Cit^  and  the  little  forte  on  Bechard  point  S.  J  W.  leads 
through  the  Petite  Conch^e  channel,  leaving  the  Rousse,  the  Rats,  and 
the  Queue  des  Rats  to  the  westward,  and  the  Ronfleresse,  the  Pierres  aux 
Normands,  and  the  Roches  aux  Anglais  to  the  eastward.  There  is  a  beacon 
on  the  middle  of  the  Norraands  ridge,  erected  on  a  rock  which  uncovers  12 
feet. 

The  above  mark  which  only  leads  50  yards  to  the  westward  of  a  sunken 
rock,  lying  off*  the  western  point  of  the  Ronfleresse,  with  3  feet  on  it  at  low 
water  springs^  must  be  kept  on  until  the  mill  of  St.  Lunaire,  or  the  mound 
on  Bellefard  point,  opens  out  to  the  southward  of  Harbour  isle,  when 
the  vessel  will  be  1^  cables  to  the  westward  of  the  beacon  on  the  Anglais, 
and  must  be  edged  more  to  the  southward  to  bring  the  western  head  of  the 
Bizeux  in  line  with  the  high  rock  at  the  fort  of  Bechard  point  bearing 
S.  ^  E.,  which  mark  will  lead  to  St.  Malo  road. 

CHENAL  de  la  GRANDE  CONCHfiE  derives  its  name 

from  the  Grande  Conch6e  rock,  and,  like  that  of  the  Petite  Conchee,  can 
only  be  entered  by  vessels  of  large  draught  between  half  flood  and  half  ebb. 
The  entrance  is  bounded  on  its  western  side  by  the  Haies  de  la  Conchee, 
the  Rimponiere,  and  the  Grande  Conchee,  and  on  its  eastern  by  the 
Rousses  and  the  Plate  ;  and  its  position  may  be  recognised  by  the  fort  on 
the  Grande  Conchee  which  may  be  seen  from  a  great  distance. 

The  Haies  de  la  Conchde  is  a  ridge  of  high  rocks  lying  3  cables  to  the 
northward  of  Grande  Conch6e  fort^  and  their  summits  do  not  cover.  The 
Rousses  is  an  isolated  head  of  rock,  with  only  6  feet  on  it  at  the  lowest 
tides  ;  the  marks  for  it  are,  the  Grand  Chevreuil  se^n  a  little  to  the  south- 


39^!  GRANVILLE  TO  CAPE  FREHEL.  [esAP.  cc 

ward  of  the  guard-houso  on  the  inner  part  of  Meinga  point,  £•  bj  8.  j-  S., 
and  the  mill  of  La  Roche  in  line  with  the  eastern  gable  of  the  barrackfl  of 
Petit  Bey,  S.S.W.  ^  W.  La  Phte,  at  half  a  mile  S.E.  from  the  fort,  unooTers 
18  feet ;  and  has  a  stone  tower  on  it,  elevated  10  feet  above  the  highest 
tides,  painted  in  red  and  black  horizontal  bands ;  although  the  sea  is 
nearly  always  breaking  on  La  Plate,  the  north  and  west  sides  may  be  safely 
approached,  bat  there  are  two  small  rocks  off  its  soath  side,  -tiie  most 
distant  of  which,  the  Boaton,  uncovers  12  feet,  three-qnarters  of  acaUe 
S.  by  W.  ^  W.  from  the  beacon,  and  is  marked  by  a  red  buoy.  . 

Several  other  {latchcs  are  scattered  about  the  entrance  to  this  channel ; 
the  most  dangerous  are  the  Becfer,  the  St.  Servantine,  and  the  Rat  de  St 
Servan.  The  Basse  de  Becfer  lies  North  2}  cables  from  the  two  north- 
westernmost  heads  of  the  Haies  de  la  Conch^e,  and  has  15  feet  on  it  at  the 
lowest  tides. 

St.  Sorvantine  is  a  dangerous  isolated  rock,  which  uncovers  2  feet 
at  the  lowest  tides ;  the  marks  for  it  are,  the  summit  of  the  Ronflerease  in 
one  with  the  foot  of  Garde  Gu^rin  point  and  St.  Hydeuc  steeple  in  line 
with  a  mill  which  stands  4  cables  S.  by  E.  ^  E.  of  the  steeple.  When 
the  Ronfieressc  is  covered  there  are  at  least  25  feet  over  the  St.  Servantine. 
A  red  bell  buoy  is  moored  on  the  north  side  of  St.  Servantine. 

Rat  de  St.  Servan  is  a  small  reef  lying  E.  f  N.  6^  cables  from 
the  fort  on  the  Grande  Concheo,  and  N.N.E.  §  E.  5^  cables  from  the 
beacon  on  the  Plate;  when  the  latter  rock  is  covered,  the  Rat  de  St. 
Servan  has  30  feet  over  it,  the  Rat  dn  Rocher  33  feet,  and  the  T^to 
34  feet. 

Basse  de  la  Conch^e,  another  isolated  head,  with  22  feet  on  it, 
lies  N.E.  8  cables  from  the  fort  on  the  Grande  Conch^e,  but  is  not 
dangerous  at  the  time  the  channel  is  navigable. 

LeS  Roches  aUX  Anglais  situated  a  quarter  of  a  mile  south  of 
Pierres  aux  Normands,  has  a  red  buoy  marked  with  the  name  moored  on 
its  south-east  corner.  This  buoy  is  liable  to  be  mistaken  by  a  stranger  for 
the  buoy  of  Les  Crapauds. 

Les  Crapauds  du  Bey,  at  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  sooth  of 
Les  Roches  aux  Anglais,  is  marked  by  a  black  buoy  moored  on  the  north 
side. 

Directions. — When  running  for  the  Grande  Conch^e  channel  fiwn 
the  eastward,  be  careful  to  keep  the  semaphore  on  Garde  Gu^rin  point  its 
own  breadth  open  northward  of  the  Petite  Conchfe,  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  bo  as 
to  pass  to  the  northward  of  the  Basse  des  Pointus,  which  has  18  feet  on  it 

1 

at  the  lowest  tides,  the  St.  Servantine,  and  the  Rousses. 

\u  In  entering  the  channel,  bring  the  mill  of  La  Roche,  situated  on  tbe 

high  land  three  quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  south-west  of  Vicomt£  pointy  a 


C2UP.ZX.]      ST.  MALO.-M)HBNAL  PES  PETIT&  POINTS.  S96 

little  weftward  of  the  fort  and  islet  of  Petit  Bey,  S.S.W,  westerlj  ;  this 
mark  irill  lead  3  cablea  eastward  of  the  fort  on  the  Grande  ConchSe,  and 
2  cables  to  the  '^estwsard  .of  the  beacon  on  the  Plate.  Continue  steering 
"with  this  mark  on,  until  nearly  abreast  the  beacon  on  the  Anglais,  when 
haul  a  little  to  the.,  eastward,  to  avoid  this  eastern  rock  of  that  ridgo  (as 
this  mark,  leads  only.  20  i>r  30  yards  to  the  eastward  of  the  eastern  rock), 
which  uncovers  6^  feet>  ... 

When  to  the  southward  of  this  danger,  bring  the  above  leading  mark 
on  again,  and  steer  with  it  until  Jeannet  mill  comes  a  little  open  northward 
of  St.  Enogat  steeple,  S.W.  by  W.  §  W. ;  then  keep  this  latter  mark  on, 
and  it  will  lead  to  the  northward  of  the  Crapauds  du  Bey,  (or  the  steeple 
of  St.  Enogat  in  line  with  Jeannet  mill,  S.W.  by  W.  J  W.  westerly,  will 
lead  southward  of  Crapauds  du  Bey),  until  the  westernmost  head  of  the 
Bizeux  is  in  one  with  the  high  rock  at  the  foot  of  B^chard  point,  and  these 
two  rocks  in  line  will  lead  into  St.  Malo  road. 

The  most  direct  leading  mark  to  enter  the  Grande  Conch^e  channel 
with,  and  the  one  most  easily  recognised,  is  the  south-west  corner  of 
La  Cit6  in  line  with  the  middle  of  Grand  Bey  islet,  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  Run 
with  .this  mark  on  until  St.  Enogat  steeple  is  in  one  with  Jeannet  mill, 
then  round  in  as  before. 

CHENAL  des  PETITS  POINTS  lies  eastward  of  the  latter 
channel  between  the  Plate  rock  and  a  rocky  group  named  the  Petits 
Pointus,  the  highest  head  of  which  has  a  beacon  on  it,  and  uncovers 
33  feet  at  the  lowest  tides. 

This  channel  is  used  by  vessels  approaching  St.  Malo  from  the  eastward, 
and  also  by  those  which,  when  coming  from  the  northward  and  westward, 
have  been  carried  by  the  flood  stream  to  the  eastward  of  the  Grande 
Conchee  channel ;  it  is,  however  only  practicable  for  vessels  of  large 
draught  between  the  periods  of  half  flood  and  half  ebb,  but  it  may  be  used 
by  coasters  at  all  hours  of  tide. 

Direction?.-— Vessels  bound  to  St.  Malo  from  the  eastward,  and 
intending  to  enter  by  the  Petits  Pointus  channel,  should  when  westward 
of  the  Basse  Grime,  steer  with  the  semaphore  on  Garde  Gu^rin  point  in 
line  with  the  fort  on  the  Grande  Conchee,  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  and  it  will  lead 
between  the  Grands  Pointus  and  the  Basse  des  Pointus,  about  3  cables 
S.E.  of  the  latter. 

The  highest  head  of  *the  Grands  Pointus  rises  about  8  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  highest  tides,  and  is  an  excellent  mark  for  the  entrance  of  this 
channel^  the  Basse  des  Pointus  is  an  isolated  rock,  with  18  feet  water 
xjrver  il^  Having  •arrived  within  half  a  mile  of  the  St.  Servantine  rock 
haul  to  the  southward  to  get  the  leading  mark  for  the  channel  on,  viz.. 


I 


distant  of  which,  the  Bouton,  uucovera  12  feet,  tliree 
S.  hy  W.  ^  W.  from  the  beacon,  and  is  marked  by  a  rei 

Several  other  patches  are  scattered  about  the  entn 
the  most  dangerous  are  the  Becter,  the  St.  Servantini 
Servan.  The  Basse  de  Becfer  lies  North  2J  cables 
westernmost  heads  of  the  Haiej^  de  la  Contlit'e,  and  ha 
lowest  tides. 

St.  Servantine  >s  n  tlangerous  iaolateil  rock,  wl 
at  the  lowest  tides  ;  the  marks  for  it  arc,  the  snmmit 
one  with  tto  foot  of  Garde  Gu4rin  point  and  St.  Hj 
with  a  mill  which  stands  4  cables  S.  hy  E.  \  E.  of 
the  Ronfleresse  is  covered  there  nro  at  leaat  25  feet  ovc 
A  red  bell  buoy  is  moored  on  the  north  side  of  St.  Sen 

Rat  de  St.  Servan  is  a  small  rewf  lying  E. 
the  fort  on  the  Grande  Conchee,  and  N.N.E.  |  E. 
beacon  on  the  Plate ;  when  the  latter  rock  ts  cov< 
Servan  has  30  feet  over  it,  the  Eat  du  Rocher  33 
34  feet. 

Basse  de  la  Concilde,  another  isolated  heat 
lies  N.E.  8  cables  from  the  fort  on  the  Grande  ) 
dangerous  at  the  time  t!ie  channel  is  navigable. 

Les  Roches  aux  Anglais  situated  a  quart? 

Piprres  aux  Normaiids,  has  a  red  buoy  marked  with 
its  south-cast  corner.  This  buoy  ia  liable  to  be  mleta 
the  buoy  of  Les  Crapauds. 

Les  Crapauds  du  Bey,  at  about  a  quarte 
Lea  Itoclxes  aux  Anelais.  is  marked  by  a  black  buoy  i 


cjBAPwxz^l     ST.  MAI^-4-OHBNAL  PES  PETIT&  POINTS.  S96 

little  weitward  of  the  fort  and  islet  of  Petit  Bey,  S.S.W.  westerly  ;  this 
mark  irill  lead  3  cables  eastward  of  the  fort  on  the  Grande  ConchSe,  and 
2  cafaJes  to  the  '^estvmrd  .of  the  beacon  on  the  Plate,  Continue  steering 
with  this  mark  on,  until  nearly  abreast  the  beacon  on  the  Anglais,  when 
haul «  little  to.  the.,  eastward,  to  avoid  this  eastern  rock  of  that  ridgo  (as 
this  mark,  leads  only.  20  pr  30  yardf  to  the  eastward  of  the  eastern  rock), 
which  uncovers  6|- feqt^   .        ... 

When  to  the  southward  of  this  danger,  bring  the  above  leading  mark 
on  again,  and  steer  with  it  until  Jeannet  mill  comes  a  little  open  northward 
of  St.  Enogat  steeple,  S.W,  by  W.  §  W. ;  then  keep  this  latter  mark  on, 
and  it  will  lead  to  the  northward  of  the  Crapauds  du  Bey,  (or  the  steeple 
of  St.  Enogat  in  line  with  Jeannet  mill,  S.W.  by  W.  J  W.  westerly,  will 
lead  southward  of  Crapauds  du  Bey),  until  the  westernmost  head  of  the 
Bizeux  is  in  one  with  the  high  rock  at  the  foot  of  B^chard  point,  and  these 
two  rocks  in  line  will  lead  into  St.  Malo  road. 

The  most  direct  leading  mark  to  enter  the  Grande  Conch^e  channel 
with,  and  the  one  most  easily  recognised,  is  the  south-west  comer  of 
La  Cit6  in  line  with  the  middle  of  Grand  Bey  islet,  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  Kun 
with  .this  mark  on  until  St.  Enogat  steeple  is  in  one  with  Jeannet  mill, 
then  round  in  as  before. 

CHENAL  des  PETITS  POINTS  lies  eastward  of  the  latter 
channel  between  the  Plate  rock  and  a  rocky  group  named  the  Petits 
Pointus,  the  highest  head  of  which  has  a  beacon  on  it,  and  uncovers 
33  feet  at  the  lowest  tides. 

This  channel  is  used  by  vessels  approaching  St.  Malo  from  the  eastward, 
and  also  by  those  which,  when  coming  from  the  northward  and  westward, 
have  been  carried  by  the  flood  stream  to  the  eastward  of  the  Grande 
Conchee  channel ;  it  is,  however  only  practicable  for  vessels  of  large 
draught  between  the  periods  of  half  flood  and  half  ebb,  but  it  may  be  used 
by  coasters  at  all  hours  of  tide. 

Direction?.-— Vessels  bound  to  St.  Malo  from  the  eastward,  and 
intending  to  enter  by  the  Petits  Pointus  channel,  should  when  westward 
of  the  Basse  Grune,  steer  with  the  semaphore  on  Garde  Guerin  point  in 
line  with  the  fort  on  the  Grande  Conchee,  W.  by  S.  ^  S.,  and  it  will  lead 
between  the  Grands  Pointus  and  the  Basse  des  Pointus,  about  3  cables 
S.E.  of  the  latter. 

The  highest  head  of  tthe  Grands  Pointus  rises  about  8  feet  above  the 
level  of  the  highest  tides,  and  is  an  excellent  mark  for  the  entrance  of  this 
channel  ^  the  Basse  des;  Pointus  is  an  isolated  rock,  with  18  feet  water 
^er  il^  Having  4urriYed  within  half  a  mile  of  the  St.  Servantine  rock 
haul  to  the  southward  to  get  the  leading  mark  for  the  channel  on,  viz.. 


396  GRANVILLE  TO  CAPE  F&EHSL.      [c»ap.  nt 

the  fort  c*Q  Pe:ii  Ber  a  littlr-  op^n  fit-:vanl  of  ibe  gnftrd-bonae  on  Dinard 
fiOiDC,  S.W.  ^  S^  antil  Jeannet  mill  r»p#-:»  s  litiie  northwmrd  of  St.  Enogaft 
r!e€'pk'9  rhe  mark  u«<-il  wb(n  »:licz  into  St.  Slalo  road  by  the  Grande 
Conch '-fr  cliannel. 

Bj  followicg  carefallj  tb«  leading  mark  for  this  channel,  the  reaeA  will 
pass  a  cable  Trestward  of  th«  Basse  Tan^ai,  an  isolated  rock,  with  only 
14  feet  on  it;  three-qnaner?  of  a  cable  westward  of  the  beacon  on  the 
Petit?  Pointus ;   and  2  cables  westward  of    the  L^trnn   d'Aval,   which 

nncovf-rs  o  feet. 

CHENAL  de  la  BI6NE  i^  named  after  the  Bigne  rock,  which 
lies  three-ijuarters  of  a  mile  to  the  north-east  of  Yarde  point,  and  is  the 
highest  rock  in  the  vicinitv  of  that  point,  its  summit  being  32  feet  above 
the  highest  tides.  This  channel  is  but  little  frequented  except  by  vessels 
of  moderate  draught,  with  leading  winds,  and  then  it  is  only  practicable 
for  them  at  springs,  between  the  periods  of  half-flood  and  half^bb ;  at 
neaps  it  may  be  used  by  vessels  drawing  not  more  than  10  feet  at  all  hoars 
of  tide. 

Directions. — in  steering  for  the  entrance  of  the  Bigne  channel, 
between  the  Tintiaux  group  and  the  Bochefort  rock,  bring  the  Crolante 
rock,  which  lies  at  the  foot  of  Varde  point  and  uncovers  38  feet  at  the 
lowest  tides,  in  line  with  the  western  side  of  the  Grand  Bey,  S.W.  by 
W.  ^  \V.  Bun  in  with  this  mark  on  until  the  Bigne  bears  N.K  by  N.,  or 
St.  Lunaire  mill  is  in  line  with  BeUefard  point  W.  by  S.  {  S.,  when  keep 
it  60,  until  St.  Jeannet  mill  comes  a  little  open  to  the  northward  of 
St.  Enogat  steeple  ;  then  proceed  as  before. 

The  first  of  these  marks  leads  a  cable  south-east  of  the  Basse  anx  Chiens, 
which  lies  half  a  mile  south-east  of  the  Rochefort,  and  uncovers  3  feet, 
about  the  same  distance  from  the  Basse  du  Durand,  lying  6  cables  south- 
east of  the  Rochefort,  with  only  a  foot  on  it  at  low  water ;  and  about  a 
cable  south-east  of  the  Petite  Bigne.  The  second  mark  leads  a  cable 
northward  of  the  Crolante,  and  of  a  little  rocky  ridge,  named  the  Canca- 
laisc,  which  uncovers  9  feet ;  and  1^  cables  southward  of  the  2-feet  patch 
on  the  south  part  of  the  L^truns,  which  is  marked  by  a  red  bell  buoy. 
The  latter  mark  will  lead  in  a  fair  way  northward  of  the  Crapauds  du 
Boy. 

Another  mark  for  entering  the  Bigne  channel  is  St.  Malo  church,  in  line 
with  the  Bigne  rock  S.W.  f  W.,  and  to  run  in  on  the  eastern  side  of  the 
Rochefort  till  within  a  quarter  of  a  mile  of  the  Bigne ;  then  edge  away  to 
the  south wanl,  so  as  to  round  the  latter  rock  at  the  above  distance  to  avoid 
the  Petite  Bigne ;  when  proceed  as  before. 


<a^- «-]  PORT  DE  ST.  HALO  ;  DIRECTIONS.  397 

The  tides  in  this  channel,  between  St.  Malo  and  Yarde  point,  never 
attain  much  strength  at  the  flings,  bat  they  mn  strong  to  the  north-east 
of  the  point. 

CAFE  do  la  HAGUE  to  ST.  MALO  through  la  DE- 
ROUTE  PASSAGE.— The  shortest  and  best  route  from  cape  de  la 
Hague  to  St  Malo,  with  fresh  leading  winds,  is  through  the  Race  of 
Alderney,  and  between  Jersey  and  Serk  through  La  Deroute  passage,  the 
distance  being  about  70  miles;  it  should,  however,  never  be  used  by 
strangers  at  night,  or  during  light  winds,  fog  or  snow. 

If  intending  to  take  this  route,  enter  the  Race,  if  possible,  on  the  slack 
or  last  of  the  north-east  stream,  which  will  be  about  4  hours  after  high 
water  at  St.  Malo,  for  at  this  period  it  presents  no  difficulty.  Having 
cleared  the  Race  steer  with  all  possible  sail  about  S.W.  \  W.  to  enter  La 
Deroute  passage  in  mid-channel,  and  to  ensure  passing  to  the  south-east 
of  the  Blanchard  rock.  This  distance  will  be  run  in  about  2\  or  3  hours, 
or  about  low  water  at  St.  Malo,  and  the  course  should  be  continued  to  the 
southward  so  as  to  be  in  a  good  position  to  the  westward  of  the  Minquiers 
at  the  first  of  the  flood.  As  this  stream  begins  to  be  felt  the  more  the 
vessel  advances  to  the  southward  it  will  be  necessary  to  determine  by 
correct  bearings  the  course  to  be  steered,  and  to  pay  strict  attention  to  the 
directions  already  given  in  page  338  for  avoiding  those  dangers.  When 
dear  of  the  Minquiers  steer  for  cape  Frehel,  where  pilots  are  always  on 
the  look  out. 

To  St.  Malo  through  Grand  Ruet  Passage.— The  space 

separating  the  islands  of  Guernsey  and  Jersey  and  the  Minquiers  ledge 
from  the  Roches  Douvres,  is  called  by  the  French  pilots  the  Grand  Ruet, 
and  from  its  great  breadth  it  would  seem  to  offer  a  safe  and  easy  route  to 
St.  Malo  or  Granville ;  the  streams,  however,  run  through  it  with  such 
velocity  at  the  springs,  that  should  the  stream  and  wind  be  in  the  same 
direction,  a  sailing  vessel  could  not  counteract  their  influence  and  avoid 
being  drifted  between  the  islands  and  the  dangers  in  their  vicinity.  If  sur- 
prised by  fog  or  night  the  danger  would  be  imminent,  as  from  the 
continued  changes  in  the  set  of  the  stream  the  reckoning  cannot  be 
depended  on.  It  may  be  used  at  the  neaps  with  a  fresh  northerly  wind, 
but  it  will  be  prudent  not  to  attempt  it  at  the  springs  except  under  the 
following  circumstances : — 

A  vessel  having  a  steady  westerly  wind  and  being  in  a  position  about 
8  miles  W.S.W.  of  the  south-west  extreme  of  Guernsey,  at  the  commence- 
ment of  the  ebb,  or  2^  hours  after  high  water  at  St.  Malo,  should  steer 
S.  i  E.  for  a  distance  of  38  miles,  or  to  about  6  miles  KW.  by  N.  from 
cape  Frehel. 


398  OBAKVIIiLE  TO  CAFE  FBEHEL.  [oHiLP.  ix. 

This  course  will  lead  about  6\  miles  eastward  of  Maitresse  isle  on  the 
Boches  Douyres  (which,  if  possible,  should  be  sighted  to  correct  the 
reckoning),  7  miles  eastward  of  the  Barnouic  ledge,  and  8  miles  westward 
of  the  Minquiergi.  During  the  whole  of  this  run  the  wind  will  be  on  the 
starboard  side,  counteracting  the  effect  of  the  stream,  which  for  the  first 
four  hours  will  be  on  the  port  beam,  the  fifth  hour  a  little  on  the  bow,  and 
lastly  on  the  starboard  beam,  as  the  flood  begins  sooner  as  the  coast  is 
neared. 

To  St.  Malo  through  Cotentin  Passage.— Directions  have 

already  been  given  in  page  361,  for  navigating  this  passage  when  proceed- 
ing to  Granville  ;  but  if  bound  to  St  Malo,  and  the  vessel  has  arrived 
within  4  or  6  miles  of  the  Etat  beacon  (called  also  Petite  Canue,)  a  re- 
markable rock  lying  on  the  northern  edge  of  the  Chauscy  group,  keep  away 
a  little  more  to  the  westward  in  order  to  round  the  north-west  part  of  the 
group  at  the  distance  of  about  1^  miles. 

When  abreast  the  Rondes  de  I'Ouest,  a  rocky  ridge  forming  the  west 
end  of  the  above  group,  steer  S.W.  or  more  southerly,  keeping  within 

3  miles  of  the  rocks  until  the  old  castle,  in  ruins,  on  Grande-Ue  opens  to 
the  southward  of  the  Corbiere  rock,  E.  by  S.  J  S.,  then  edge  away  about 
S.W.  ^  W.  for  the  entrance  of  one  of  the  channels  leading  into  the  river 
Ranee.  Great  attention  must  be  paid  to  make  a  proper  allowance  for  the 
set  of  the  stream,  which  in  clear  weather  can  easily  be  ascertained  by 
bearings  of  the  different  objects  on  Chausey. 

At  Night,  when  Chausey  light  is  sighted,  steer  for  it  on  a  S.W.  ^  S. 
bearing  until  within  2  miles  of  the  Chausey  group,  and  then  keep  to  the 
westward  in  order  to  round  the  rocks  at  that  distance.  When  abreast  the 
west  end  of  the  group,  haul  to  the  southward,  taking  care,  however,  not 
to  approach  the  rocks  within  2  miles,  and  when  the  light  bears  E.  |  N., 
keep  it  so,  and  it  will  lead  midway  between  the  Sauvages^  the  Minquiers, 
and  the  Fr^ich  coast  clear  of  all  danger,  until  the  light  on  cape  Frehel  i» 
seen,  which  ought  then  to  bear  about  W.  |  S.  With  these  two  lights  in 
sight,  a  position  may  be  maintained  off  St.  Malo  so  as  at  daylight  to  be  in 
a  feir  way  to  enter  the  Ranee* 

To  St.  Malo  from  the  Westward.— When  bound  to  St.  Malo 

from  the  westward,  with  southerly  winds,  the  island  of  Ouessant  and  the 
French  coast  may  be  kept  aboard ;  but  with  north^ly  winds  and  at  night, 
a  prudent  distance  should  be  maintained  off  shore  untQ  the  flashing  light 
on  the  Sept  isles,  and  the  fixed  light  on  the  H^ux  rocks  are  made  out. 
With  the  assistance  of  these  lights,  a  departure  may  be  taken  from  about 

4  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  H^aux,  and  a  S.E.  i  E.  course  steered 
for  33  miles,  to  pass  to  the  northward  of  the  Roc'h  ar   Bel  and  the 


CHAP.  IX.]  PORT  DE  ST.  MALO  J  DIRECTIONS.  399 

northern  reef  of  tho'  Hoc^cf  ledge,  and  to  cross  the  meridian  of  cape 
Frehel  about  6  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  cape.  The  vessel  will  then 
be  in  a  fair  position  to  run  for  the  entrance  of  the  Banco  either  through 
the  Decoll6  passage  or  Grande  Port&  chafiinel  according  to  the  state  of  the 
wind  and  tide. 

This  route  may  be  followed  either  on  the  ebb  or  flood  stream,  with  the 
wind  between  N.N.E.,  round  westerly,  and  South,  but  if  between  S.W. 
and  South,  it  will  be  better,  as  soon  ^as  c&pe  Frehel  light  bears  S.E.  by  S. 
to  steer  S.E.  f  S.,  to  give  the  cape  a  closer  berth.  With  a  fresh  fair  wind 
a  tolerably  fast  sailing  vessel  leaving  the  meridian  of  the  Heaux  lighthouse 
at  the  commencement  of  the  flood,  or  5  hours  before  high  water  at 
St.  Malo,  may,  at  the  springs,  enter  the  Ranee  at  high  water,  although 
the  distance  be  about  48  miles ;  but  with  a  foul  wind  it  will  take  two 
floods  to  make  the  passage. 

With  a  beating  wind  it  will  be  better  to  wait  for  the  commencement  of 
the  flood,  making  short  tacks  in  sight  of  the  H6aux  lighthouse,  and 
then  stretch  into  the  channel  between  the  Barnouic  ledge  and  the 
Roc*h  ar  Bel.  The  boards  in  this  channel  should  not  exceed  2  miles  in 
length,  but  when  to  the  eastward  of  the  Horaine  ledge,  they  may  be 
extended  without  fear  to  7  or  8  miles.  By  following  these  directions, 
cape  Frehel  will  be  made  towards  the  latter  part  of  the  flood,  and  the 
vessel  may  then  be  anchored  or  hove  to  under  shelter  of  the  cape  during 
the  ebb.  Weigh  as  soon  as  the  flood  makes,  and  continue  working  up  so 
as  to  reach,  at  about  half  flood,  the  entrance  of  one  of  the  channels 
leading  into  the  Banco. 

If  bound  to  Granville,  the  above  directions  should  be  followed,  giving 
cape  Frehel  a  berth  of  about  4  miles  to  avoid  the  Catis  and  the  Yieux 
bank.  Leaving  the  meridian  of  Heaux  lighthouse  at  the  beginning  of 
the  flood,  that  stream  will  take  a  vessel  a  little  to  the  northward  of 
Cezembre,  when,  if  the  wind  is  moderate,  she  can  anchor,  or  make  long 
boards  to  the  eastward  to  counteract  the  influence  of  the  ebb. 

Directions  from  St.  Malo  through  Cotentin  Passage. 

— ^Vessels  leaving  St.  Malo  intending  to  proceed  round  the  west  end  of 
Chausej  and  through  the  Cotentin  passage,  should  be  clear  of  the  island 
of  Cezembre  or  the  Grande  Conchee  in  time  to  enable  them  to  enter  the 
passage  with  the  first  of  the  north-east  stream,  which  will  bo  at  3^  hours 
before  high  water  at  St.  Malo. 

From  about  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  Grande  Conchee,  steer 
about  !N.E.  I  E.,  and  the  vessel  will  pass  about  2  miles  to  the  north- 
west of  the  Rochefort,  and  4  miles  to  the  south-east  of  the  Sauvages, 
if  a  proper  allowance  be  made  for  the  set  of  the  stream.    When  within 


400  GRANVILLE  TO  CAPE  FKEHEL.       [chi^p.  ix. 

3  or  4  miles  of  the  Corbiero  (the  high  remarkable  rock  lying  at  the  south- 
west  extreme  of  the  Chausey  group),  steer  to  pass  abont  1^  miles  to  the 
westward  of  the  Rondes  de  TOuest,  clear  of  Corbi^  bank.  Roand  the 
north-west  end  of  the  group  at  the  same  distance,  passing  about  2  miles 
south-east  of  tho  Ardcntes,  and  when  the  beacon  on  the  summit  of  Gros 
Mont  is  in  one  with  the  finseigne  beacon,  S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  steer  to  the 
eastward  to  bring  Etat  beacon  in  line  with  the  beacon  on  the  Haguenan, 
8.  by  W.  }  W. ;  this  liitter  mark  will  lead  between  the  Shamrock  knoU 
and  the  Marie  leilgc,  when  continue  to  the  northward  as  before  directed, 
endeavouring  to  run  through  the  Race  at  the  last  of  the  soath •western 
stream. 

If  after  the  first  quarter  fiood,  and  unable  to  weather  the  west  end  of 
Chauscy,  bear  up  and  pass  round  the  eastern  end.  Granville  churdh  in 
line  with  the  northernmost  chimney  of  the  south-western  barrack  will 
keep  the  vessel  half-a-mile  to  the  northward  of  the  Yideooq  rock;  and 
Coutances  cathedral  in  one  with  Mont  Martin  church  N.£.  by  E.  ^  E.  will 
lead  between  the  Haguet  and  Admiralty  banks. 

From  St.  Malo  through  La  Deroute  Passage.— Vessels 

of  large  draught  bound  to  any  of  the  eastern  ports  in  the  Channel  or  the 
North  Sea,  leave  St.  Malo  road  as  soon  as  the  fiood  begin  to  slack  ;  and 
with  a  fair  wind,  when  clear  of  the  channels  leading  out  of  the  Ranee,  they 
pass  to  the  westward  of  the  Minquiers  and  the  islands  of  Jersey,  Guernsey^ 
and  the  Casquets.  With  the  wind  between  South  and  West  this  distance 
might  be  shortened  by  those  acquainted  with  the  navigation,  by  ranning 
through  La  Deroute  passage  and  the  Race  of  Aldemey ;  for  a  vessel  aver- 
aging 7  knots  will,  in  6  hours  after  leaving  St.  Malo,  reach  the  middle  of 
the  passage,  and  thence  steeling  for  the  Race  may,  with  a  fresh  fair  wind, 
stem  the  remainder  of  the  south-west  stream.  The  Race  would  then  be 
entered  a  little  after  the  commencement  of  the  north-east  stream.  French 
sailing  vessels  generally  adopt  this  route,  but  to  ensure  entering  the  Race 
on  the  slack  or  last  of  the  south-west  stream,  they  wsut  at  anchor  for  a 
leading  wind  under  the  isle  of  Ehbiens. 

From  St.  Malo  to  the  Westward.— The  precautions  to  be 

taken  when  leaving  Granville  for  cape  Frehel  have  been  already  given  in 
page  366.  When  bound  round  Ouessant  from  St.  Malo,  from  a  position 
about  5  or  6  miles  to  the  northward  of  cape  Frehel,  a  N.W.  course  should 
be  shaped  to  enter  the  channel  between  the  Barnouic  ledge  and  the  light- 
house on  the  H6aux.  This  course  continued  17  miles  westward  of  the 
meridian  of  the  lighthouse  will  place  a  vessel  10  miles  to  the  northward  of 
the  Sept  isles  and  clear  of  all  danger. 


CHAP.  IX.]       ij^E  3)ES  EHBIENS. — POET  DE   ST.  BRIAC.  401 

ILE  des  EHBIENS,  about  a  mile  in  ciroumterence,  lies  at  the 
head  of  the  de^p  bight  formed  between  St.  Malo  and  cape  Frehel.  It  is  sur- 
rounded by  high  rocks,  and  near  its  centre  there  is  a  large  conspicuous 
tower  which  may  be  recognised  from  a  great  distance.  It  is  joined  to  the 
shore  at  low  water  bj  a  bank  of  sand  which  borders  the  coast  from  the 
entrance  to  St.  Briac  to  St.  Cast  point. 

Close  to  the  south  end  of  Ehbiens  there  is  a  well  sheltered  grounding 
place,  much  frequented  bj  coasting  vessels  of  about  10  feet  draught,  which 
await  here  for  favourable  winds  when  bound  from  Granville  or  St.  Malo 
to  the  eastern  ports  in  the  channel  and  intend  passing  to  the  westward  of 
the  Minquiers  and  Jersey.  It  is  formed  by  a  natural  causeway  of  shingle, 
which  is  always  uncovered  and  unites  the  south-west  extreme  of  the 
island  to  some  high  rocks  lying  2  cables  to  the  south-west.  The  bottom 
is  composed  of  muddy  sand  and  seaweed,  and  dries  7  or  8  feet  above  the 
lowest  tides,  which  rise  from  28  to  35  feet  above  it  at  the  springs,  and 
18  or  19  feet  at  the  neaps.  The  best  place  for  grounding  and  sheltered 
fi'om  all  winds,  is  about  half  a  cable  from  the  south  end  of  the  island 
with  A  got  island  entirely  shut  in  by  the  south-east  extreme  of  Ehbiens. 

Directions. — When  running  for  the  grounding  place  at  the  south 
end  of  Ehbiens,  as  soon  as  the  island  is  made  out  .steer  to  pass  about  1^ 
cables  eastward  of  the  Haches,  a  ridge  of  rocks,  some  of  which  are  always 
uncovered,  extending  half  a  mile  in  a  N.E.  direction  from  its  northern 
point.  When  the  tower  bears  N.W.  haul  close  round  the  south-east  point 
of  the  island  and  anchor,  or  if  necessary  run  the  vessel  on  the  beach.  If 
obliged  to  beat  in,  be  careful  to  avoid  a  half- tide  rock  lying  a  cable  east- 
ward of  the  high  rocks  at  the  south  end  of  the  causeway. 

PORT  de  St.  BRIAC— This  little  tidal  harbour  is  difficult  of 
access,  and  should  never  be  attempted  without  a  pilot.  It  is  situated  at  the 
entrance  of  a  narrow  valley  1 }  miles  eastward  of  Ehbiens  and  about  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  southward  of  the  high  projecting  point  of  Haye.  The 
entrance,  2  cables  wide,  is  formed  between  the  south  end  of  Perron  isle 
and  a  beacon  erected  on  the  extremity  of  a  rocky  ridge  extending  in  a 
northerly  direction  from  the  peninsula  of  Lancieux. 

The  rock  on  which  this  beacon  is  placed  dries  lo  feet  at  the  lowest 
tides,  and  in  entering  the  harbour  a  vessel  should*  steer  to  pass  about  half 
a  cable  northward  of  it  to  avoid  some  small  rocky  heads  lying  a  full  cable 
westward  of  the  south  end  of  Perron ;  the  highest  of  these  heads  which  is 
also  the  westernmost,  uncovers  12  feet  at  the  lowest  tides. 

The  channel  into  the  harbour  narrows  considerably  half  a  mile  within 
the  beacon  at  the  entrance,  and  a  vessel  will  have  to  pass  between  rocky 
heads,  marked  by  beacons,  the  highest  of  which  uncovers  19  feet.  The 
Q  7049.  0  0 


402  GR.VNVILLE  TO  CAPE  FKEHEL.  [chap.  ix. 

streams  run  with  great  strength^  both  in  the  harbour  and  in  this  channel^ 
which  is  exposed  to  a  heavy  sea  when  it  blows  hard  from  the  north-west- 
ward. The  pilots  place  vessels  in  the  middle  of  the  harbour,  with  their 
heads  in  the  direction  of  the  ebb  stream,  X.N.W.  of  the  town  of  St.  Briac, 
on  a  bottom  of  sand  and  mud,  on  which  the  tides  rise  from  20  to  26  feet  at 
springs  and  12  to  13  feet  at  neaps. 

There  is  a  little  bight  formed  in  the  northern  part  of  the  harbour,  in 
which  the  bottom  is  of  soft  mud,  and  where  vessels  lie  sheltered  from  the 
streams  and  all  winds;  but  if  of  more  than  13  or  14  feet  draught  thej 
will  be  neaped  two  or  three  days. 

RIVlfSBE  LARGUENON.— Vessels  capable  of  taking  the 
ground  will  find  shelter  from  strong  easterly  winds  on  the  eastern  shore  of 
the  bay  formed  at  the  mouth  of  the  Larguenon  river.  They  should  be 
placed  abreast  an  old  convent,  with  St.  Jacnt  windmill  bearing  S.E.,  and 
Ehbiens  islet  shut  in  by  Chcvet  point.  The  tides  rise  here  from  19  to  26 
feet  at  the  springs,  and  9^  feet  at  the  neaps. 

The  river  is  navigable  up  to  Plancoet  at  the  springs  for  vessels  of  about 
9  feet  draught. 

LeS  BOUBDINOTS  are  two  small  rocky  ridges,  one  lying  6  cables 
and  the  other  ly^^  miles,  E.  \  N.  from  St.  Cast  point.  The  easternmost 
ridge,  on  which  there  are  34  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  is  only  dangerous 
when  blowing  hard,  but  the  westernmost,  the  highest  rock  of  which  dries 
7  feet,  must  be  carefully  avoided.  A  red  buoy  is  moored  about  a  third  of  a 
cable  E.N.E.  of  the  westernmost  ridge. 

The  marks  for  the  latter  rock  are  the  ruins  of  Chesne  windmill  touching 
the  west  side  of  the  Bec-Rond  rock,  W.  by  S.  f  S.,  and  St.  Jacut  windmill 
in  line  with  the  summit  of  the  Columbi^re  islet,  lying  half  a  mile  to  the 
westward,  of  Ehbiens,  S.  J  E.  The  Grande  Concli^e  kept  well  open  to  the 
northward  of  Cezembre,  or  Tertre  Morgan  windmill  in  sight  to  the  north- 
ward of  St.  Cast  peninsula.  West,  will  lead  to  the  northward  of  both 
ridges. 

POINTE   de   ST.  CAST,  lying  4  miles  to  the  S.S.E.  of  cape 

Frehel,  is  high  and  nearly  perpendicular  on  all  sides.  The  approach  to  it 
is  made  dangerous  at  low  tide  by  the  Bourdinots,  and  also  by  low  water 
rocks,  which  extend  3  cables  from  the  foot  of  the  point,  and  by  a  small  sand 
bank,  named  Chelin,  with  only  10  feet  water,  lying  N.  by  E.  J  E.  nearly 
half  a  mile  from  the  point. 

ANSE  de  ST.  CAST.— To  the  southward  of  St.  Cast  point,  in 
front  of  the  village  of  Lille  St.  Cast,  the  coast  forms  a  small  bay,  which 
affords  to  vessels  capable  of  taking  the  ground  good  shelter  from  westerly 


CHAP.  IX.]    RIVIERE  LARGTJENON. — ^ANSE  DES  SEVIGNlSs.     403 

winds.  The  bottom  of  the  bay,  at  three-quarters  of  a  cable  from  the  land, 
is  composed  of  muddy  sand,  on  which  springs  rise  from  24  to  30  feet,  and 
neaps  about  15  feet. 

Directions. — ^  approaching  this  grounding  place  give  St.  Cast 
point  a  berth  of  4  cables  when  rounding  it,  and  when  the  village  bears 
west,  steer  for  it,  not  approaching  within  a  cable  of  the  Bec-Rond  rock. 

Teignouse  point,  the  first  to  the  southward  of  cape  Frehel,  in  line  with 
La  Latte  point  will  lead  a  little  northward  of  the  Chelin  bank,  and  between 
St.  Cast  point  and  the  Bourdinots.  A  vessel  will  be  eastward  of  this 
danger  as  long  as  the  ruins  of  Chesne  windmill  are  well  open  eastward  of 
the  Bec-Rond  rock  ;  and  to  the  westward  by  keeping  the  mill  open  west- 
ward of  the  rock. 

BAIE  de  la  FRENAY,  formed  between  St.  Cast  and  La  Latte 
points,  affords  good  shelter  with  off-shore  winds,  but  is  quite  exposed  to 
those  from  the  N.E.  The  entrance  is  2  miles  wide,  and  thence  the  bay 
trends  3^  miles  in  a  S.W.  by  W.  direction  to  its  head. 

The  surrounding  land  of  this  bay  is  high,  and  its  northern  shore  free 
from  danger.  The  holding  ground  is  good,  and  the  best  anchorage  is  in 
4J  to  5  fathoms,  about  half  a  mile  off  La  Cierge  point,  with  cape  Frehel 
lighthouse  seen  between  the  latter  point  and  La  Latte  fort.  The  only 
precaution  to  be  used  in  taking  up  a  berth  is  to  make  allowance  for  the  £gi11 
of  tide. 

Vessels  under  9^  feet  draught  can  cross  the  high  bank,  which  dries  out 
upwards  of  2  miles  from  the  head  of  the  bay,  and  reach  the  beaching 
places  of  Portmieux  and  Port-k-la-Duc.  Both  ar«  situated  on  the  western 
shore,  the  first  behind,  and  the  latter  about  a  mile  to  the  south-west  of 
Muret  point. 

ANSE  des  SEVIGN£S,  situated  between  La  Latte  point  and 
cape  Frehel,  has  many  dangers  in  it,  and  should  not  be  run  for  as  a  place 
of  shelter  in  heavy  weather  from  the  S.W.,  on  account  of  the  great  over- 
falls in  it,  caused  by  the  steepness  of  the  coast,  and  the  violent  squalls  off 
the  land. 

Banc  de  PEtendr^e  lies  in  the  northern  part  of  Sevignes  bay, 
and  some  parts  of  it  are  nearly  awash  at  the  lowest  tides.  It  is  about  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  long  in  an  E.S.E.  and  W.N,W.  direction,  and  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  broad,  and  its  western  end  is  joined  to  the  Etendr^e  rock,  which 
uncovers  14^  feet  at  the  same  period. 

Basses  de  la  Latte  and  Basse  Baimonde.— Besides  the 

above  rock  in  Sevignes  bay  there  are  two  others,  named  Basses  de  la 
Latte  and  Basse  Raimonde,  which  render  the  approach  to  within  a  mile  of 

CO  2 


4aii 


GRANVILLE  TO  CAPE  FBEHEL. 


[chap.  IX. 


this  rugged  and  precipitoas  coast  very  dangerous,  except  to  the  fishermeDy 
who  congregate  here  occasionally  in  great  numbers.  The  Latte  lies 
N.N.E.  ^  K  a  third  of  a  mile  from  the  fort  on  La  Latte  point^and  uncovers 
a  foot  at  the  lowest  tides ;  the  Baimonde  lies  N.N.  W.  ^  W.  4  cables  from 
the  same  fort,  and  uncovers  9  feet.  A  vessel  will  pass  to  the  north-east 
of  the  Latte  by  keeping  St.  Jacut  mill  well  open  of  St.  Cast  point. 


405 


CHAPTER  X 

CAPE  FREHEL  TO  LES  HfiAUX  LIGHTHOUSE. 


VARIATION  IN  1882.-19^  0'  W. 


CAFE  FREHEL. — ^This  promontory  is  the  northern  extreme  of 
au  elevated  narrow  neck  of  land,  a  mile  in  length,  lying  nearly  12  miles 
westward  of  St.  Malo ;  S.S.  W.  J  W.  30  miles  from  the  south-west  extreme 
of  Jersey;  and  S.E.  ^  E.  33^  miles  from  the  H^ux  lighthouse.  It  is 
bordered  on  all  sides  by  steep  perpendicular  cliffs,  about  150  feet  high,  and 
in  clear  weather  may  be  seen  from  a  distance  of  15  or  18  miles.  On  the 
summit  of  some  level  land  near  its  extremity  are  two  towers,  113  feet 
apart,  the  southern  of  which,  72  feet  high,  is  the  lighthouse,  550  yards 
S.S.W.  i  W.  from  the  extremity  of  the  cape.* 

LIGHT.— The  lighthouse  on  cape  Fi-ehel  exhibits  a  white  light  of 
the  first  order,  which  revolves  every  haff  minute.  The  light  is  elevated 
259  feet  above  the  level  of  high  wat^r,  and  is  visible  in  clear  weather  24 
miles ;  in  ordinary  weather  the  eclipses  will  not  appear  total  within  the 
distance  of  12  miles. 

AMAS-dU-CAF,  a  large  remarkable  rock  lying  W.  by  N.  |  N. 
4  cables  from  the  western  extreme  of  cape  Frehel,  never  covers,  and  when 
seen  from  the  eastward  or  westward  resembles  a  quoin  with  the  point 
turned  to  the  south. 

To  the  westward  of  Amas-du-Cap  are  several  rocky  clusters  lying  about 
three-quarters  of  a  mile  off  shore ;  the  principal  are,  the  Mouillee,  which 
uncovers  13  feet,  the  Truie,  nearly  awash,  and  the  Jars,  which  uncovers 
12  feet  at  the  lowest  tides. 

BAIE  do  ST.  BRIEUC. — From  cape  Frehel  the  north-east  end 
of  Br^hat  isle  bears  N.W.  J  W.  29  miles,  and  between  them  is  the  extensive 
bay  of  St.  Brieuc,  both  sides  of  which  are  much  encumbered  with  rocks  and 
shoals,  and  others  lie  in  the  offing.  The  land  about  the  bay  is  lofty,  and 
may  be  seen  in  clear  weather  at  a  distance  of  about  22  miles.    The  parts 

*  See  Admiralty  chart : — Channel  islands  and  coMt  of  France,  No.  2,669  b ;  scale, 
M(  =:  0  *  5  inch. 


406      CAPE   FREHEL  TO  LES   Hl^AIJX  LIGHTHOUSE.      [chap.  x. 

that  will  first  appear,  whea  bound  from  cape  Frebel  to  the  westward  are. 
cape  Ei'qui,  Bien-Assis  wood,  Plouha  point,  and  the  small  town  of  Plouzec. 
In  very  clear  weather  some  of  the  summits  of  the  central  chain  of  the 
Bretagne  hills  will  be  visible,  and  among  others  the  Mener-Bel-Air  and 
the  Mener-Bre ;  the  former  rises  to  the  southward,  and  the  latter  to  the 
south-west  of  the  bay. 

The  high  and  steep  point  of  Pleneuf  juts  out  boldly  from  the  land 
3|  miles  W.S.W.  of  cape  Erqui,  and  the  coast  between  is  generally  low 
and  exposed  to  the  north-west ;  but  the  hills  rise  suddenly  a  short  distance 
from  high  water  mark  and  unite  with  the  high  lands  in  the  interior  ; 
Bien-Assis  wood  is  on  their  sununit  and  may  be  recognised  at  a  great 
distance  off.  The  Yerdelet,  a  conical  shaped  islet,  lies  2  cables  to  the 
north-west  of  Pleneuf  point. 

The  western  coast  of  the  bay  is  indicated  at  night  by  ihe^xed  white 
light  on  the  H&ux  de  Br6hat  rocks,  and  in  the  day  by  the  Creach-ar- 
Maout  hill,  which  rises  about  3  miles  S.S.W.  of  the  light.  This  hill 
abruptly  terminates  to  the  northward  the  high  land  separating  the  river 
Pontrieux  from  that  of  the  Treguier  ;  on  its  summit  is  a  guard-house  and 
close  to  it  an  old  semaphore. 

CAUTION. — ^As  all  the  dangers  lying  between  cape  Frehel  and 
Brehat  isle,  with  the  exception  of  Maurice  patch,  the  Barnouic  and  Douvres 
ledges,  rise  from  soundings  of  less  than  18  fathoms  at  low  water,  the 
prudent  seaman  will  at  night  or  in  thick  weather  keep  without  that  depth 
at  this  time  of  tide. 

PLATEAU  des  ROCHES-DOUVRES.— This  dangerous 
rocky  ledge,  the  outermost  of  the  off-lying  dangers  fronting  St.  Brieuc  bay, 
occupies  a  space  3^  miles  long  N.W.  and  S.E.,  and  2^  miles  wide,  and  from 
it  rise  a  group  of  12  rocky  heads  which  never  cover.  The  north-west  edge 
of  the  ledge  lies  N.E.by  E,  J  E.  15  miles,  and  the  south  edge  E.  by  N.  |  N. 
16  miles,  from  H6aux  lighthouse. 

LIGHT. — ^The  highest  head  of  the  Plateau,  whose  summit  is  about  9 
feet  above  the  highest  tides,  is  situated  in  the  middle  of  the  group,  and 
marked  by  a  white  iron  lighthouse,  whence,  at  an  elevation  of  180  feet  above 
high  water,  is  exhibited  a  white  light  showing  a  bright  Jiash  every  ^ve 
seconds,  and  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  21  miles.  From 
the  lighthouse  Gautier  rock  on  Barnouic  ledge  lies  S.S.W.  5  miles. 

Pog  Signal. — ^During  foggy  weather  a  bell  is  sounded  at  intervals  of 
three  seconds. 

PLATEAU  de  BARNOUIC— About  13  miles  E.  by  N.  of  the 
Heaux  lighthouse,  and  N.E.  J  E.  9  miles  from  the  beacon  on  Hofaine  rock, 
are  the  Barnouic  and  Gautier  rocks,  situated  near  the  middle  of  a  dangerous 


CHAP.  X.]  PLATEAU  DE  LA  HOEAINE.  407 

rockj  ledge,  named  Plateau  de  Barnouic,  the  sonthern  edge  of  which  lies 
E.  ^  N.  from  the  lighthouse.  The  Barnouic  rock  of  conical  form,  uncovers 
23 J  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  covers  2 J  hours  before  high  water  springs,  and 
is  awash  at  high-water  neaps.  The  Grautier  bears  W.  J  N.  three-quarters 
of  a  mile  from  the  Barnouic,  uncovers  14  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  and  is 
awash  at  low- water  neaps. 

This  ledge  extends  about  1^  miles  to  the  eastward,  the  same  distance  to 
the  southward,  3  miles  to  the  westward,  and  2  miles  to  the  north-west  of 
the  Barnouic,  and  the  sea  occasionally  breaks  over  its  whole  extent.  The 
most  westerly  rocky  patches  on  it,  (one  of  which  has  only  3  feet  water)  lie 
E.  by  N.  f  N.  11^  miles  from  Heaux  lighthouse. 

The  Douvres  and  the  Barnouic  ledges  are  separated  by  a  channel 
2^  miles  wide,  carrying  a  depth  of  20  to  30  fathoms.  It  should  if  possible, 
however,  be  avoided  by  a  sailing  vessel,  as  the  streams  set  with  great 
strength  over  both  ledges.  If  forced  to  pass  through  it,  endeavour  to  keep 
.  -nearer  the  Douvres  than  the  Barnouic.  A  vessel  will  keep  to  the  westward 
of  both  these  ledges  by  not  bringing  H^aux  lighthouse  more  westerly  than 
S.W,  by  W. 

Basse  Maurice  is  a  small  rocky  patch  from  which  the  Hj^aux 
lighthouse  bears  W.  ^  S.  nearly  7  miles ;  the  signal  station  on  Brehat  isle 
S.W.  ^  S.  nearly  8  miles ;  the  guard-house  on  Creach-ar-Maout  hill  is  in 
line  with  the  Louet  rock,  W.  by  S.  -^  S. ;  and  Plouha  point  is  a  little  open 
to  the  westward  of  the  beacon  on  the  Horaine,  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  The  depth 
is  never  less  than  42  feet  on  this  shoal,  but  it  should  be  avoided  in  bad 
weather,  as  a  heavy  sea  runs  over  it  during  a  weather  tide. 

Roc']l*ar-Bel. — ^This  shoal  patch  of  20  feet  lies  at  the  north-east 
extreme  of  the  great  rocky  flat  which,  extending  5  miles  from  the  coast, 
separates  the  entrances  of  the  rivers  Pontrieux  and  Tr^guier,  and  of  which 
the  Heaux  rocks  form  a  part.  From  it  the  guard-house  on  Creach-ar- 
Maout  Hill  bears  W.  by  S.  J  S.  and  is  in  line  with  the  Sark  rocks ;  and 
Heaux  lighthouse  bears  W.  ^  N. 

The  lighthouse  kept  on  a  West  bearing  will  lead  to  the  south-east  of 
the  Maurice  patch,  to  the  north-east  of  the  Roc'h-ar-Bel,  and  also  of  the 
Carec-Mingui ;  this  latter  is  a  rocky  patch  of  11  feet,  lying  the  third  of  a 
mile  to  the  westward  of  the  Roc*h-ar-BeL 

PLATEAU  dela  HORAINE. — Extensive  rocky  ledges,  lying  in 
genei^  east  and  west  direction,  extend  4  or  5  miles  to  the  east  and  south- 
cast  of  Brehat  isle,  and  on  them  are  several  rocky  heads  which  dry  at  low 
water.  The  northernmost  ledges  are  named  the  Horaine  and  the  Schaud^s, 
and  the  southernmost  the  Men-Marc'h  and  the  Ringue-bras,  and  between 
them  are  navigable  channels  leading  to  Brehat  road.  Numerous  banks  of  sand, 
under  the  general  name  of  Bancs  de  Sable,  extend  4^  miles  in  a  S.  by  £. 


408        CAPE  FREHEL  TO  LBS  HtAITX  LIGHTHOUSE,    [ohap.  x. 

direction  from  their  eastern  end,  and  on  some  of  them  the  depth  is  as  little 
as  2^  fathoms  at  low  water. 

La  Horaine  is  a  rocky  head»  with  a  beacon  on  it,  lying  about  a  mile 
within  the  northern  extreme  of  the  Horaine  ledge,  and  bearing  S.E.  by  E.  |  E. 
6f  miles  from  Heaux  lighthouse,  and  E.N.E.  from  the  signal  station  on 
Br^hat.  It  uncovers  22  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  is  awash  about  2^  hours 
before  high  water,  and  from  it  the  pyramid  on  the  Ar-Morbic  rock  is 
seen  a  little  open  westward  of  St.  Michael  chapel  (Br^hat  isle)  ;  and  St. 
Barbe  windmill  is  midway  between  two  of  the  highest  summits  of  St. 
Biom  Isle. 

The  flood  stream  sets  strong  over  this  rock  during  the  springs. 

Basses  dU  Nord  u'e  the  most  northern  patches  on  the  Horaine 
ledge.  The  shoalest  spot,  10  feet,  lies  N.E.  |  E.  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
from  the  beacon  on  the  Horaine,  and  S.E.  by  E.  f  E.  7  miles  from  the 
H&iux  lighthouse. 

Basse  dU  Sud  Est  is  a  rocky  patch,  with  only  8  feet  over  it  lying 
1^  miles  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.  of  the  beacon  on  the  Horaine.  From  the  patch 
the  beacon  is  in  line  with  the  H6aux  lighthouse,  N.W.  by  W.  ^  W. 

PLATEAU  des  £CHAnD£S  is  the  rocky  ledge  lying  to  the 
south-west  of  the  Horaine,  and  the  highest  rock  on  it,  named  the  Schaudes, 
uncovers  8^  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  This  rock  lies  near  the  southern  part 
of  the  ledge,  and  fi*om  it  the  guard-house  on  Creach-ar-Maout  hill  is  in 
line  with  the  northern  extreme  of  Br^hat  isle  W.N.W. ;  the  pyramid  on 
the  Louet  rock  is  in  one  with  the  southern  fall  of  the  hillock  on  which 
St.  Michel  chapel  stands,  West  a  little  southerly  ;  and  St.  Barbe  mill  is  a 
little  open  eastward  of  the  summit  of  St.  Biom  isle,  S.W.  \  S. 

Another  rock,  the  Pain  de  Bray,  uncovers  only  2  feet.  It  lies  on  the 
north-west  part  of  the  ledge,  in  the  direction  of  the  Chandellier  (a  large 
rock  lying  off  the  north-west  point  of  Br^hat  isle),  seen  between  the  Grand 
and  Petit- Azen.  These  latter  rocks  lie  ofP  the  north  point  of  Brehat ; 
the  former  uncovers  27  feet,  and  the  Petit- Azen  15  feet  at  the  lowest 
springs.    The  Petit- Azen  has  a  stone  beacon  on  it. 

PLATEAU  de  MEN-MARCH  lies  to  the  south-east  of  the 
Horaine,  and  between  them  is  a  channel  leading  to  Brehat  road.  This 
ledge  is  about  3  miles  long  E.N.E.  and  W.S.W.,  and  1 J  miles  broad  in  its 
widest  part,  and  the  only  rocky  head  seen  on  it  at  the  lowest  tides  is 
named  the  Men-Marc'h,  which  then  uncovers  only  2  feet,  and  is  at  all  times 
dangerous,  even  at  high  water,  on  account  of  the  eddies  in  its  vicinity. 
Numerous  shoal  pa^^hes  lie  to  the  westward  of  this  rock. 

PLATEAU  du  RINGUE-BRAS,  the  next  ledge  to  the 
southward  of  the  Men-Marc*h,  is  3  miles  long,  East  and  West,  and  about 
a  mile  wide  at  its  broadest  part,  which  is  towards  its  eastern  end,  and 


9\ 


cHAP.x.]  ROCHES  DE  ST.  QUAY.  409 

between  them  is  another  channel  leading  to  Br6hat  road.  The  Cain  ou 
Ringue-bras,  the  highest  head  on  this  ledge,  lies  near  its  eastern  extreme, 
and  uncovers  6  feet  at  the  lowest  springs. 

Directions. — ^Vessels  bound  from  the  westward  to  any  of  the  ports 
in  St.  Brieuc  bay,  or  to  St.  Malo  or  Granville,  generally  pass  between 
Barnouic  and  Horaine  ledges.  This  channel  is  7  miles  wide,  the  streams 
follow  its  direction,  and  the  only  danger  in  it  is  the  Maurice  patch,  which, 
as  before  stated,  need  only  be  avoided  in  bad  weather. 

If  intending  to  use  this  channel,  steer  so  as  to  pass  within  4  miles  of 
H6aux  lighthouse,  but  do  not  bring  it  more  easterly  than  S.S.E.  to  avoid 
the  dangers  westward  of  it.  When  eastward  of  its  meridian  it  may  be 
brought  to  bear  W.  J  N.,  but  not  more  northerly,  until  the  guard-house  on 
Creach-ar-Maout  hill  is  in  line  with  the  Sark  rocks,  W.  by  S.  J  S.  The 
vessel  will  then  be  eastward  of  the  Roc'h-ar-Bel,  an4  the  lighthouse  may 
be  brought  on  a  W.  J  N.  bearing,  but  not  more  northerly,  and  it  will  lead 
between  the  Maurice  and  the  Horaine. 

When  bound  from  the  south-east,  a  vessel  will  be  in  the  middle  of  this 
channel  when  the  H^aux  lighthouse  bears  W.  f  N.,  and  it  will  be  necessary 
to  bring  it  on  this  bearing  before  she  is  abreast  the  shoals  on  the  northern 
part  of  the  Horaine  ;  these,  however,  will  be  avoided  by  not  crossiiig  the 
line  on  which  St.  Barbe  mill  is  in  one  with  the  highest  summit  of  St.  Riom 
isle,  S.W,  \  W.  before  the  old  mill  on  Br^hat  isle  (a  mill  without  sails) 
is  quite  open  to  the  westward  of  the  pyramid  on  the  Ar-Morbic  rock,  or 
the  H^aux  rocks  appear  quite  detached  from  the  Sark  rocks.  To  avoid 
the  Roc'h-ar-Bel,  the  lighthouse  must  not  be  brought  more  northerly  than 

m 

W.  J  N.  When  to  the  westward  of  the  meridian  of  the  H^aux,  and 
within  5  or  6  miles  of  the  lighthouse,  do  not  bring  it  more  easterly  than 
S.S.E.  to  avoid  the  dangers  to  the  westward. 

Tides. — Between  Barnouic  ledge  and  Maurice  patch,  the  flood  stream 
sets  to  the  S.E.  by  S.,  and  ceases  about  an  hour  after  high  water  on  the 
shore  at  Br6hat  isle ;  its  greatest  velocity,  about  4^  knots,  is  about  the 
time  of  half  flood.  The  ebb  runs  in  the  opposite  direction  and  ceases 
about  5  hours  before  high  water  on  the  shore ;  its  strength  is  nearly  equal 
to  that  of  the  flood.  At  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  H6aux  lighthouse, 
the  flood  sets  S.E.  by  E.,  the  ebb  N.W.  by  W.,  with  about  the  same 
strength.  The  whirls  or  eddies  occasionally  met  with  in  the  channel 
between  the  Horaine  and  the  Baraouic  are  strong,  but  not  dangerous;  the 
most  considerable  is  produced  by  the  Maurice. 

ROCHES  de  ST.  QUAY.— This  rocky  group,  fronting  the 
western  coast  of  St.  Brieuc  bay  abreast  St.  Quay  point,  covers  a  space  of 
nearly  5  miles  long,  in  a  S.E.  by  S.  and  N.W.  by  N.  direction,  and  2^  miles 
wide ;  its  south-cast  extreme  being  4  miles  from  the  shore  in  an  E.S.E. 


410        CAPE  FEEHEL  TO  LBS  KfeAUX  LIGHTHOUSE,    [chap,  x, 

direction  from  the  steeple  of  Stables  church,  and  its  north  extreme  lying 
with  the  steeple  of  Flouha  church  nearly  in  line  with  the  rocks  terminating 
Bec-de-Ver  point,  W.N.W, 

The  principal  rock,  named  Harbour  isle,  is  a  large,  round,  steep,  and 
isolated  islet,  with  a  lighthouse  erected  on  it,  lying  to  the  north-west  of 
the  other  rocks,  and  one  mile  E.  by  N.  f  N.  from  St.  Quay  point.  Only 
10  or  12  heads  cover  on  this  part  of  the  group ;  but  those  on  its  south- 
eastern part  all  cover,  with  the  exception  of  the  Houess6  rock  (the  summit 
of  which  is  35^  feet  above  the  lowest  tides  and  only  covers  at  high  water 
great  springs),  and  of  the  Bonde  and  the  Longue  rocks,  which  are  not 
covered  at  high- water  ordinary  neaps ;  the  former  dries  25  feet  and  the 
Longue  26  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  The  Rondeis  marked  by  a  black  beacon, 
and  the  Longue  by  a  stone  tower  with  its  north-east  face  painted  white. 

The  south-eastern  head  of  the  group,  named  the  Caffa,  lies  E.  ^  N. 
about  4^  miles  from  the  eastern  pier  head  of  Port  Binic,  and  uncovers 
only  2  feet.  The  highest  head  of  the  Comtesses  kept  in  line  with  cape 
Frehel,  or  E tables  and  Plourhan  church-steeples  in  one,  bearing  N.W. 
by  W.,  lead  to  the  southward.  The  southern  rocks  of  the  group,  the 
Eoseliere  and  the  Caffa,  are  marked  by  a  black  buoy  on  the  former,  and  a 
red  buoy  on  the  latter,  but  they  are  often  washed  away. 

Plateau  des  Hers. — This  ledge  lies  to  the  eastward  of  the  prin- 
cipal rocks  of  the  St.  Quay  group,  and  is  separated  from  them  by  a  channel 
3  cables  wide,  bounded  on  the  west  by  the  Petit  Aubert  (a  rock  which 
uncovers  12  feet),  and  on  the  east  by  a  patch  named  Grande  Place,  which 
is  nearly  awash  at  the  lowest  tides.  The  north-east  rock  of  the  ledge 
uncovers  4  feet,  and  the  marks  for  it  are,  the  Rohein  rock  seen  between 
Turquet  mill  and  the  high  lands  of  Erqui,  S.E.  by  E.  J  E.,  and  the 
eastern  peak  of  Mener-Bel-Air  mountain  in  line  withPature  point,  S.  ^  W. 
A  bell  buoy  marks  the  northern  end  of  this  plateau. 

LIQ-HT. — The  lighthouse  on  Harbour  isle,  the  principal  rock  of  the 
St.  Quay  group,  exhibits  a  ^fixed  white  light  at  an  elevation  of  49  feet 
above  high  water.  The  light  is  dioptric  and  of  the  fourth  order,  and  in 
clear  weather  is  visible  from  a  distance  of  10  miles. 

From  this  lighthouse  the  eastern  edge  of  the  Sable  banks,  bear  N.N.E, 
distant  9  miles ;  the  Grand  Lejon  rock  E.N.E.  7^  miles ;  and  the  Petit 
L6jon  E.  i  S.  7|  miles. 

Fog  Signal. — During  thick  or  foggy  weather,  a  trumpet  will  be 
sounded  in  the  following  order — fourteen  blasts  at  intervals  of  one  second, 
an  interval  of  six  seconds  a  double  blast,  another  interval  of  six  seconds 
followed  by  fourteen  blasts. 

GRAND  and  PETIT  L£J0N  are  two  rocky  ledges  lying  nearly 
midway  between  cape  Frehel  and  Br^hat  isle.  The  highest  head  of  Grand- 
Lejon,  uncovers  23  feet  at  low  water,  and  covers  about  2^  hours  before 


CHAP.x.]  GEAND  AND  PETIT  LlSjON.  411 

high-water  springs.  It  lies  N.W.  by  W.,  about  84  miles  from  cape  Frehel 
lighthouse ;  E.N.E.  7^  miles  from  that  on  Harbour  isle,  and  S.E.  \  S.  19^ 
miles  from  that  on  the  Heaux  ;  and  from  it  the  steeple  of  Flourhan  church 
is  in  line  with  St.  Quay  point,  and  also  in  line  with  the  lighthouse  on 
Harbour  isle,  W.S.W.  whilst  Turquet  mill  is  in  one  with  the  most  southern 
of  the  highlands  of  Erqui,  S.S.E.  \  E.  Some  shoal  patches  of  4  to  15 
feet,  named  the  Bouillons,  lie  nearly  half  a  mile  to  the  north-eastward  of 
this  ledge ;  and  others^  named  Basses  du  Sud-Est,  with  2^  fathoms  least 
water  on  them,  lie  three-quarters  of  a  mile  to  the  southward. 

The  highest  head  of  the  Petit-L6jon  bears  S.  ^  E.  3^  miles  from  the 
Grand  L^jon,  and  uncovers  only  9  feet.  From  it  the  northern  mill  of 
Plevenon  is  in  line  with  the  northern  face  of  the  Rohinet  rock,  S.E,  by  E., 
and  Turquet  mill  is  on  with  the  northern  part  of  Lahoussaye  point, 
S.E.  by  S.  A  black  bell  buoy  is  moored  on  the  west  side  of  Petit- 
Lejon. 

LIGHT. — IVom  the  tower  on  Grand  L^jon  rock  a  light  is  exhibited 
at  an  elevation  of  52  feet  above  high  water,  and  76  feet  above  the  rock. 

The  light  is  alternately  fixed  and  flashing  at  intervals  of  twenty-five 
seconds ;  it  shows  red  through  an  arc  of  43°,  between  the  bearings  of 
N.  34°  E.  and  77°  E.,  covering  the  dangers  included  between  Caffii  shoal 
and  St.  Quay  rocks ;  it  is  obscured  through  an  arc  of  67°,  between  the 
bearings  of  N.  9°  E.  and  N.  58**  W.,  covering  the  dangers  included  between 
Bohein  rocks  and  Grande  Liviere ;  in  all  other  directions,  northward  and 
southward,  it  shows  white. 

The  fixed  white  light  should  be  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance 
of  12  miles ;  the  fiashing  white  light  17  miles,  the  fixed  red  light  8  miles  ; 
and  the  flashing  red  light  12  miles. 

Fog  Signal. — -^  l>ell  is  sounded  in  foggy  weather. 

Directions. — ^At  night,  by  keeping  without  the  range  (10  miles)  of 
the  light  on  Harbour  isle,  a  vessel,  when  turning  to  windward,  will  not 
borrow  too  close  to  the  Grand-L6jon ;  it  will  be  prudent,  however,  to  sight 
the  light  once  when  coming  from  the  westward,  in  order  to  determine  her 
position,  so  as  not  to  borrow  too  close  to  the  Minquiers.  She  should  only 
stand  to  the  southward  when  it  bears  between  S.W.  by  S.  and  W.S.W. ; 
in  every  other  direction  she  should  keep  beyond  its  range. 

Tides. — The  tidal  streams  run  with  great  strength  in  the  vicinity  of 
the  Grand  and  Petit-L^jon,  and  the  sea  is  heavy  there  in  bad  weather. 

Le  Rohein  and  LeS  ComteSSeS  are  two  rocky  ledges,  the 
first  about  5  miles  and  the  former  3 J  miles  N.W.  by  W.  of  cape  Erqui ; 
a  vessel  should  on  no  account  pass  between  them  at  low-water  springs. 
The  two  westerly  heads  of  the  Comtesses  lie  close  together,  and  never 
cover. 


412        CAPB  FBEHEL  TO  LES  HJ^AUX  LIGHTHOUSE,    [chjlf.  z. 

Le  Rohein. — This  rock,  lying  at  the  sonth-west  extreme  of  the 
Rohein  ledge,  is  qoite  as  high  as  the  westerly  heads  of  the  Comtesses, 
and  from  its  isolated  position  is  easily  recognized  from  some  distance. 

Basso  dOS  DaOUOlinS  is  a  dangerous  patch  forming  the  north 
extreme  of  the  Bohein  ledge,  and  from  the  least  water  on  it,  3  feet^  the 
extreme  of  cape  Frehel  is  touching  the  south  side  of  the  Bohinet  rock, 
E.  by  S.  ^  S.  and  PjLture  point  is  a  little  open  to  the  westward  of  the 
Rohem,  S.W.  }  S- 

Basso  dOS  ComtOSSOS  is  a  small  ledge  about  a  cable  long,  and  its 
highest  head,  which  uncovers  8  feet,  bears  N.  ^  E.  distant  half  a  mile 
from  the  highest  rock  of  the  Comtesses ;  from  it  this  latter  rock  is  in  line 
with  the  eastern  face  of  the  Verdelt  rock,  S.  |  W. 

PLATEAU  des  JAUNES  lies  IJ  miles  northward  of  Pleneuf 
point,  and  S.S.W.  nearly  2  miles  from  the  Comtesses ;  the  highest  rocks  on 
it  never  cover.  There  is  but  little  water  between  this  ledge  and  the 
Verdelet  rock,  but  coasters  pass  between  by  keeping  Garenne  mill  exactly 
in  line  with  Lahoussaye  point,  E.  ^  S. 

Le  GuyOin6r6  and  LeS  ]6caretS.— The  soundings  are  shallow 
to  the  distance  of  a  mile  from  the  shore  between  Pleneuf  point  and  cape 
Erqui,  and  there  are  several  rocky  ledges  which  nearly  bar  its  approach 
at  low  water.  The  highest  of  these  are,  the  Guyom6r6,  the  highest  head 
of  which  uncovers  16  feet,  and  the  Scare ts,  which  uncover  2  feet  at  the 
lowest  tides.  The  latter  rock  bears  N.N.W.  f  W.  nearly  a  mile  from 
Carouel  point  (on  which  there  is  a  stone  windmill),  and  from  it  Turquet 
mill  is  in  line  with  the  south  extreme  of  the  steep  coast  near  Lahoussaye 
point,  E.  by  S.  ^  8.,  and  the  north  extreme  of  Bien-Assis  wood  is  in  one 
with  a  country  house  standing  on  the  brow  of  a  hill  a  little  to  the  west- 
ward of  a  remarkable  white  spot  in  the  steep  declivity  of  the  coast. 

Plateau  des  PorteS  d'Er qui.— This  ledge,  lying  about  1 J  miles 
to  the  westward  of  cape  Erqui,  has  four  rocky  heads  on  it  which  uncover 
from  26  to  29  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  The  two  eastern  heads  are  named 
the  Evette  and  the  Izard,  the  latter  being  marked  by  a  beacon. 

PierreS  du  Banc  are  two  rocky  patches  lying  3  J  miles  to  the  E.S.E. 
of  the  Petit  Ldjou.  There  are  never  less  than  about  3  fathoms  water  on 
them,  but  they  are  dangerous  when  it  blows  hard,  as  there  is  then  a  heavy 
sea  over  them  on  a  weather  tide.  They  lie  close  together,  with  the  Ver- 
delet rock  a  little  open  to  the  westward  of  Tournemine  mill,  S.S.W.  J  W., 
and  the  summit  of  the  Grand-Pourier  rock  between  the  Rohinet  rock  and 
the  chapel  on  St.  Michel  islet,  S.E.  J  S. 

Les  LandaS  aj^  two  rocks  rising  from  the  southern  part  of  a  ledge, 
4  cables  in  extent,  east  and  west,  and  on  which  there  are  only  5  to  8  feet 


CHAP.x.]  GEANDE  AND  PETITE -LIVI^Ri.  413 

at  the  lowest  tides ;  the  eastern  rock  is  then  awash,  ,and  the  western  is 
aocovered  2  feet. 

These  rocks  lie  midway  between  the  Pierres-du-Banc  and  the  Grand- 
Pourier,  and  from  them  the  lighthouse  on  cape  Frehel  is  seen  between  the 
Amas-du-Cap  and  the  Bonnetot  rock,  (which  lies  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
eastward  of  the  Landas  and  uncovers  20  feet),  E.S.E. ;  and  the  chapel 
and  mill  of  Fleherel  is  between  the  Rohinet  and  the  Grand-Fourier, 
S.E.  i  E. 

Grand-Pourier,  Rohinet,  and  Jnstidres,  are  names  given 

to  the  highest  ledges  of  a  rockj  plateau,  of  which  the  south-western  extreme 
bears  N.  by  E.  ^  E,  half  a  mile  from  cape  Erqui ;  it  extends  2^  miles  in  a 
N.E.  and  S.W.  direction,  and  is  1^  miles  broad  in  its  widest  part.  The 
Rohinet  never  covers,  and  the  eastern  summit  of  the  Grand-Pourier  only 
covers  at  the  highest  tides.  The  Justi^res  has  a  red  buoy  moored  on  its 
south-eastern  edge. 

Orande  and  Petite-Livi6re  and  two  rocky  patches  lying  to  the 
north-westward  of  cape  Frehel.  The  Grande  •  Liviere,  with  14  feet  water 
on  it,  lies  N.W.  ^  W.  3  miles  from  the  cape,  with  the  lighthouse  nearly 
touching  the  south  extreme  of  the  Amas-du-Cap.  A  vessel  will  pass  to  the 
northward  of  this  patch  by  keeping  the  summit  of  the  Amas-du-Cap  in  line 
with  the  lighthouse  ;  at  night  the  light  should  not  bear  more  easterly  than 
S.E.  ^  S«  Pleneuf  point,  in  one  with  the  low  extreme  of  cape  Erqui  will 
lead  half  a  mile  to  the  westward ;  and  the  new  spire  of  Plurien  church  in 
line  with  the  summit  of  the  Renard  rock,  S.W.  by  S.,  wDl  lead  about 
2  cables  to  the  eastward.  The  Renard  never  covers ;  it  stands  out  in  dark 
outline  on  the  Bouche  d'Erqui  beach. 

The  Petite  Liviere,  with  only  9  feet  on  it,  lies  S.S.W.  J  W,  three- 
quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  Grande-Livi^re.  When  on  this  patch  the 
lighthouse  on  cape  Frehel  bears  S.E.  by  E.  f  E.  3  miles,  the  summit  of  the 
Amas-du-Cap  is  in  one  with  the  most  southerly  of  the  two  houses  on  the 
summit  of  the  cape,  and  Gtirenne  mill  is  in  line  with  the  western  extreme 
of  the  islet  on  which  stands  the  chapel  of  St.  Michel,  S.W.  by  W.  A 
vessel  will  pass  1^  cables  eastward  of  a  13-feet  patch,  lying  a  cable  east- 
ward of  the  Petite  Liviere,  by  keeping  the  spire  of  Plurien  church  in  line 
with  the  Renard. 

Tll6  COAST  between  cape  Frehel  and  the  little  islet  about  5  miles 
to  the  westward,  called  Bouche  d'Erqui,  is  formed  of  high  steep  rocky  cliffs, 
with  the  exception  of  a  small  sandy  beach  under  tho  village  of  Fleherel. 
At  9;^  niiles  to  the  westward  of  cape  Frehel  is  cape  Erqui,  a  lofty  promon- 
toiy  jutting  out  and  terminating  in  a  steep  slope  to  the  westward  ;  the  shore 
between  it  and  the  Bouche  d'Erqui  is  bordered  by  a  belt  of  rocks  and 
shoals. 


4)14        CAFE   FBEHEL  TO  LES  H]^AUZ  LIGHTHOUSE,    [chxt.x. 

A  Life  Boat  >b  stationed  at  Pleherel. 

BOUCHE  D'EBQUI. — This  inlet  is  about  a  mile  in  extent,  dries 
at  low  water,  a&d  its  shore  ib  formed  of  white  saudj  downs.  About  half 
a  mile  to  the  N.N.W.  of  Champ  du  Port  point,  the  western  point  of  the 
inlet,  U  the  islet  of  St.  Michel,  which  is  joined  to  the  coast  at  low  water,  imd 
on  which  stands  a  chapel.  This  is  the  only  place  on  this  part  of  the  coast 
where  a  vessel  can  run  ashore  with  the  hope  of  saving  her  crew.  The 
vessel  might  even  be  saved  if  she  were  beached  to  the  southward  of  Champ 
dn  Port  point  about  an  hour  after  high  water, 

AucllOragO. — U  windbound  with  strong  northerly  gales,  some  shelter 
might  be  found  during  thene^sby  anchoring  South  of  the  Plate  St.  Michel 
rock,  with  the  Rohinet  rock  nearly  touching  the  eastern  shore  of  St.  Michel 
islet.  The  depths  will  here  be  from  19  to  S2  feet  over  good  holding  ground 
of  muddy  sand. 

BADE  CEBQUI. — Erqni  bay  is  a  small  beaching  place  situated 
at  the  foot  of  the  southern  shore  of  the  peninsula  terminated  by  cape  Erqui 
in  front  of  the  village  of  Erqui,  which  is  built  in  the  south-east  corner  of 
the  bay.  Vessels  ground  on  a  bottom  about  16  feet  above  the  lowest  tides, 
and  arc  sheltered  from  N.N.W.,  round  easterly,  to  south.  The  south  side 
of  the  bay  is  formed  by  the  loftj  point  of  Laboussaye,  which  is  prolonged 
to  seaward  by  an  islet  and  some  rocks. 

A  jetty  is  constructed  in  the  northern  angle  of  the  bay,  at  I^  cables 
westward  of  a  little  hamlet,  named  La  ChausB^e,  and  it  affords  safe  sheltei* 
against  westerly  winds  to  vessels  capable  of  taking  the  ground.  The 
bottom  at  the  foot  of  the  jetty  head,  which  should  be  left  to  port  on 
entering,  dries  13  feet  above  the  lowest  tides. 

AuclloragS. — £rqui  road,  lying  close  to  the  southward  of  cape 
Erqui,  in  front  of  Erqui  bay,  is  the  only  anchorage  on  the  eastern  shore  of 
St.  Brieuc  bay  that  will  afford  complete  shelter  from  easterly  wmds.  The 
holding  ground  b  good,  but  it  will  be  prudent  to  leave  it,  especially  in  the 
winter  season,  if  the  wind  is  likely  to  veer  to  the  westward,  or  the  weather 
threatens  an  approaching  change. 

CSENAL  d'EBQUI  is  formed  between  the  belt  of  rocks  border- 
ing the  coast  from  St.  Michel  islet  to  cape  Erqui,  and  the  Grand  Pourier, 
Bohinet,  and  Justieres  ledges.  The  depth  is  not  less  than  2^  fathoms  in 
the  fairway  of  this  channel  at  low-water  springs,  at  which  period  it  can 
only  be  navigated  by  small  coasters  in  charge  of  local  pilots;  with  a  free 
wind  vessels  of  lai^e  draught  can  pass  through  it  from  half  flood  to  half 
ebb. 

Directions. — Vessels  prevented  by  easterly  winds  and  the  ebb  stream 
from  rounding  cape  Frebel,  can  remain  under  the  lea  of  the  cape  tilt  the 


CHAP.x.]  CHENAL  d'eRQUI. — ^DIRECTIONS.  415 

tide  turns  bj  making  short  boards  between  the  following  limits  : — the 
Amas-du-Cap  seen  between  the  extreme  of  the  cape  and  the  lighthouse  ; 
the  Amas-du-Cap  between  two  and  three  times  its  apparent  breadth  to  the 
northward  of  the  cape  ;  and  Plurien  church-spire  between  the  Renard 
rock  and  the  eastern  point  of  Louche  d'Erqui.  This  latter  point  is  steep 
and  high,  whilst  the  Renard,  as  before  observed,  never  covers,  and  stands 
out  in  dark  outline  on  the  beach  of  Bouche  d'Erqui. 

Through  Erqui  Channel.— If  surprised  by  strong  easterly 
winds,  between  cape  Frehel  and  St.  Malo,  a  vessel  will  find  excellent  shelter 
in  Erqui  road  by  passing  through  the  Erqui  channel  between  half  flood  and 
half  ebb.  To  this  end,  having  rounded  the  cape,  steer  to  the  westward  with 
the  south  end  of  the  Amas-du-Cap  touching  the  extremity  of  the  cape, 
E.  f  S.,  and  it  will  lead  to  the  northward  of  the  Jars,  Truie,  Malicome, 
and  Mouillee  rocks  which  lie  off  the  coast  between  the  cape  and  St. 
Michel  islet ;  the  Mouillee,  the  highest  and  westernmost  of  these  rocks, 
uncovers  13  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  Keep  this  mark  on  until  the  lofty 
and  steep  point  of  Pleneuf  comes  in  sight  to  the  W.S.W,,  and  is  in  one 
with  the  rock  forming  the  exti'emity  of  cape  Erqui ;  then  steer  to  pass  a 
good  cable  from  this  rock,  and  round  into  the  road.  The  most  dangerous 
part  of  the  Erqui  channel  is  when  cape  Erqui  bears  between  S.S.W.  and 
S.  i  W. ;  the  vessel  will  then  be  abreast  and  to  the  southward  of  rocky 
patches  which  dry  5  feet  at  the  lowest  spiings. 

The  Erqui  channel  may  also  be  run  for  by  passing  between  the  patches 
lying  between  the  Petite  Livifere  and  the  Bignons  rocks,  which  lie  half  a 
mile  to  the  eastward  of  Justieres  ledge,  when  there  is  sufficient  water  over 
th^m  (the  depth  is  never  less  than  16  feet  over  any  of  them),  and  the  sea 
does  not  break  in  their  eddies.  The  leading  mark  through  is  the  guard- 
house on  Pleneuf  point  kept  in  line  with  the  rock  at  the  extremity  of 
cape  Eruui,  (the  new  telegraph,  which  stands  a  little  inland  of  Pleneuf 
point,  being  at  the  isame  time  clear  of  the  summit  of  the  cape)  S.W.  by 
W.  f  W.,  until  the  extreme  of  cape  Frehel  is  in  one  with  the  south  end  of 
the  Amas-du-Cap,  E.  |  S.,  when  proceed  as  before. 

If  running  through  the  Erqui  channel  for  any  of  the  ports  on  the 
western  coast  of  St.  Brieuc  bay,  proceed  as  if  bound  for  Erqui  road,  until 
the  highest  summit  of  the  Comtesses  rocks  is  in  line  with  that  of  the 
Rohein,  W.  by  N.  |  N.  By  steering  to  the  westward  in  this  direction,  or 
by  keeping  St.  Michel  islet  in  sight,  and  quite  detached  from  Marre-aux- 
Rets  point  (the  eastern  point  of  the  little  bay  immediately  to  the  eastward 
of  cape  Erqui),  it  will  lead  northward  of  the  Portes  d'Erqui  ledge ;  the 
extreme  of  cape  Frehel,  kept  in  line  with  the  large  pointed  rocket  the 
foot  of  cape  Erqui,  will  lead  southward  of  this  ledge,  and  northward  of 
the  Jaunes.    After  passing  southward  of  the  Comtesses,  which  are  clear 


4>16        CAPE  FREHEL   TO  LE8  Hl^ATJX  LIGHTHOUSE,    [chap.  x. 

of  danger  on  this  side,  keep  their  highest  summit  in  line  with  the  Rohinet, 
£.  ^  N.y  and  the  vessel  will  pass  southward  of  the  Bohein  and  of  the 
south-east  extreme  of  the  St.  Quay  rocks. 

Through  Les  LandaS  ChanneL— A  vessel  can  also  reach  Erqui 
road  bj  passing  between  the  several  rocky  ledges  in  the  offing.  The  first 
channel,  when  coming  from  the  eastward,  is  between  the  Petit  L^jon  and 
the  Pierres  du  Banc  (pape  412),  and  is  practicable  for  vessels  of  the  laigest 
draught  after  the  period  of  half  flood.  There  ai*e  three  sand-banks  lying 
in  it,  but  they  are  only  dangerous  from  the  heavy  sea  they  occasion  when 
it  blows  hard  on  a  weather  tide ;  the  largest,  on  which  there  are  4^  fathoms 
at  low  water,  lies  in  the  direction  of  Tournemine  mill  in  line  with  the 
Verdelet  rock,  S.S.W.  §  W. 

In  running  through  this  channel  keep  Touriiemine  mill  in  one  with  the 
highest  summit  of  the  Comtesses  bearing  S.  by  W.  |  W.,  until  Turquet 
mill  comes  in  line  with  Trois  Pierres  point,  S.S.E.  ^  E.  Follow  this  latter 
mark  until  within  half  a  mile  of  cape  Erqui,  when  steer  for  Erqui  road. 
A  vessel  will  keep  to  the  eastward  of  the  Petit  L^jon  by  having  the 
Verdelet  rock  open  eastward  of  the  summit  of  the  Comtesses ;  she  will 
also  pass  eastward  of  the  Comtesses  patch,  by  having  Toumemine  mill 
well  open  eastward  of  the  Comtesses  ;  and  so  long  as  Turquet  mill  is  in 
sight  eastward  of  Lahoussaye  point  she  will  not  be  too  close  to  the  eastern 
part  of  the  Portes  d'Erqui.  The  dangers  on  the  eastern  side  of  the 
channel  will  be  avoided  by  not  standing  to  the  eastward  of  the  line  on 
which  Turquet  mill  is  just  touching  the  high  land  of  cape  Erqui. 

The  Channel  between  Le  Bohein  and  Le  Petit  L^jon 

may  be  taken  when  seeking  shelter  in  Erqui  road,  either  on  the  flood  ^or 
the  ebb.  The  summit  of  the  Comtesses  kept  in  line  with  the  south  ex- 
treme of  Bien-Assis  wood,  S.  by  E.  ^  E.,  will  lead  half  a  mile  westward  of 
the  Grand,  and  2  cables  westward  of  the  Petit  L6jon.  Steer  with  this 
mark  on  until  Turquet  mill  is  in  one  with  Lahoussaye  point,  S.E.  f  *  S., 
which  will  lead  into  the  road. 

In  following  this  route  before  the  period  of  half  flood,  care  must  be 
taken  to  avoid  the  Daouelins  and  Comtesses  patches,  and  tlie  Izard  rock 
on  the  southern  side  of  the  channel,  and  the  Petit  L^jon  on  the  northern 
side ;  also,  at  low  water  and  in  bad  weather,  a  21-feet  patch  lying 
S.  by  E.  ^  E.  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  Petit  L^jon. 

The  Channel  between  Le  Bohen  and  Les  Jaunes  is 

sufficiently  deep  for  vessels  of  moderate  draught,  even  at  low  water,  when 
seeking  shelter  in  Erqui  road,  from  easterly  winds.  In  standing  to  the 
northward,  cape  Frehcl  lighthouse  kept  open  to  the  southward  of  the 
summit  of  the  Comtesses  will  clear  the  southern  part  of  the  Bohein  ledge ; 
and  the  lighthouse  in  line  with  the  large  pointed  rock  at  the  foot  of  cape 


CHAr.x]  PORT  DE  DAHOUET.  417 

Erqui  will  clear  the  southern  part  of  the  Fortes  d'Erqui.  In  making  the 
southern  board,  the  lighthouse  kept  open  of  the  northern  extreme  of  cape 
d*Erqui  will  keep  the  vessel  northward  of  the  Jaunes ;  and  Turquet  mill 
well  on  with  the  steep  coast  which  separates  the  beach  of  Erqui  bay  from 
the  beach  of  the  large  bay  to  the  southward  will  keep  her  northward  of  the 
!&carets  rocks,  which  uncover  2  feet  at  the  lowest  springs.  The  old 
telegraph  of  Dahouet  in  line  with  Pleneuf  point,  S.W.  by  W.,  will  lead 
northward  of  the  Guyomere  and  the  ^carets,  and  between  the  Fortes 
d'Erqui  and  the  cape. 

Tides. — ^It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Erqui  road  at  5  h.  59  m. ; 
equinoctial  springs  rise  43  feet ;  ordinary  springs  33^  feet,  and  ordinary 
neaps  about  24^  feet. 

The  COAST  between  PleneufandRoselier  points,  which  bear  E.  ^  N. 
and  W.  \  S.  of  each  other  distant  6|  miles,  falls  back  to  the  southward  and 
forms  the  head  of  St.  Brieuc  bay,  in  which  are  situated  port  de  Dahouet, 
Anse  d'Yffiniac,  and  port  du  Legue. 

Several  dangers  front  this,  part  of  the  shore,  of  which  the  ferthest  in 
the  offing  are  named  the  Daouet,  Trois  Tetes,  Basse  Herbaut,  and  the 
TrahillioDS.  The  Daouet  and  the  Herbaut  rocks  are  awash,  and  the  Trois 
Tetes  have  only  2  feet  over  them  at  the  lowest  tides.  The  Trahillions 
form  a  rocky  ledge,  about  three-quarters  of  a  mile  in  extent,  E.S.E.  and 
W.N.W.,  at  the  edge  of  the  bank,  which,  abreast  Guettes  point,  dries  more 
than  a  mile  from  the  shore  at  low-water  great  springs ;  the  ledge  is 
terminated  on  the  eastern  side  by  a  rock  which  uncovers  23  feet,  and  on 
the  western  by  another  which  uncovers  8^  feet. 

A  vessel  will  pass  in  tlie  offing  of  these  dangers  by  keeping  Rohinet 
rock  in  line  with  the  highest  head  of  the  Jaunes,  E.N.E. ;  and  to  the 
westward  of  the  Trahillions,  by  keeping  the  northern  tower  of  the  new 
church  of  St.  Michel  (to  the  town  of  St.  Brieuc),  between  the  southern 
tower  (on  which  there  is  a  telegraph)  of  the  same  church  and  the  most 
southern  houses  of  the  hamlet,  named  Sous  la  Tour.  This  hamlet  stands 
in  front  of  Cesson  tower,  at  the  foot  of  the  high  land  which  forms  the  left 
bank  of  the  entrance  to  the  river  Legu^. 

PORT  de  DAHOUET,— The  entrance  to  this  little  inlet,  situated 
1 J  miles  to  the  south-west  of  Fleneuf  point,  is  comprised  between  the  shore 
and  the  pier-head,  which  on  entering  must  he  kept  to  starboard.  The  port 
is  open  to  the  north-west,  but  it  affords  good  shelter  to  vessels  that  can 
take  the  ground.  The  bottom  dries  1 3  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest 
tides  abreast  the  pier-head ;  18  Ifeet  in  front  of  the  western  part  of  the 
quay ;  about  22  feet  at  the  angle  of  the  quay,  and  24  feet  near  the  mill 
sluice  at  the  head  of  the  port. 

Q  7049.  D  D 


418        CAPE  FEEIIEL  TO  LES  KltAJJX  LIGHTHOUSE,    [chap.  x. 

DireOtiollS. — ^When  bound  to  port  Dahouet  from  the  westward, 
follow  the  directions  given  in  (page  409)  for  passing  between  the  Barnouic 
and  Iloraine  ledges.  With  northerly  winds  the  most  direct  route  is 
through  Br6hat  channel,  which  should  be  taken  at  the  commencement  of 
the  flood  ;  this  stream  begins  an  hour  sooner  and  runs  with  greater  velocity 
in  this  channel  than  in  the  offing. 

In  running  through  Br^hat  channel,  when  Paon  point,  the  north 
extreme  of  Brehat  isle,  is  in  line  with  the  Heaux  lighthouse,  N.W.  f  N., 
haul  to  the  south-east,  and  steer  with  this  latter  mark  on  until  the  two 
mills  of  Lande  Blanche  are  in  line  with  Lemenez  isle.  West ;  the  vessel 
will  then  be  about  one  mile  westward  of  the  Sable  banks,  and  a  S.  by  £. 
course  will  lead  between  the  Rohein  and  the  St.  Quay  rocks. 

When  southward  of  the  Rohein,  which  bears  N.  |  W.  from  the  entrance 
of  the  port,  the  only  dangers  to  be  avoided  are  the  Bignons,  the  Basse 
Grodiche,  and  the  Daouet  rocks.  The  Bignons  lie  on  the  south-west  edge 
of  the  Jaunes  ridge,  and  uncover  24  feet ;  when  they  are  awash  there  is 
plenty  of  water  over  the  Godiche,  and  10^  feet  at  the  entrance  of  the  port. 
The  Godiche  is  a  small  patch  of  7  feet  lying  half  a  mile  westwards  of  the 
Bignons,  in  the  direction  of  the  Petit  Bigoon  a  little  to  the  southward  of 
the  summit  of  the  Jaunes.  The  small  steeple  of  Pleneuf  seen  over  the 
downs,  and  open  about  half  a  point  north  of  the  steep  coast  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  point,  will  lead  to  the  northward  of  the  Daouel,  which  lies 
three-quarters  of  a  mile  W.N.W.  of  the  entrance,  and  is  awash  at  low 
water. 

With  the  wind  between  S.W.  and  S.S.E.  the  vessel  must  pass  to  the 
eastward  of  the  Horaine,  after  rounding  which  (i>age  409),  take  care  she 
is  not  set  too  far  eastward  by  the  flood.  When  south  of  the  Grand  L^jon, 
in  standing  to  the  eastward,  do  not  open  the  summit  of  the  Comtesses  to 
the  westward  of  the  soirth  exti'eme  of  Bien-Assis  wood,  to  avoid  the  Petit- 
Lejon;  and  in  approaching  the  Rohein  ledge,  keep  Guettes  point  well 
open  westward  of  the  Rohein  rock,  until  the  vessel  is  southward  of  the 
rock.  In  standing  to  the  westward  be  careful  not  to  approach  too  near 
the  St.  Quay  rocks  ;  Pature  point  keep  open  westward  of  Mener-Bel-Air 
mountain  (at  least  doable  the  apparent  distance  between  its  eastern  and 
western  peak),  will  lead  a  safe  distance  eastward  of  them,  and  when  cape 
Frehel  lighthouse  is  well  open  to  the  southward  of  the  Comtesses,  or 
Etables  steeple  bears  W.N.W.,  she  will  be  to  the  southward  of  their  south- 
east extreme. 

At  Night,  after  rounding  the  Horaine,  in  order  riot  to  be  set  too  far 
eastward  by  the  flood,  endeavour  to  keep  ih  soundings  of  about  18  fathoms. 
The  Sable  banks  and  the  Grand  Lejon  will  be  avoided  by  keeping  the  light 
op  Harbour  isle  bearing  between  S.W.  by  S.  and  S.W.  by  W.  |  W. 


CHAP.x.]  ANSE  d'yFPINIAC.  419 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  port  Daljouet  at  6h.  6m.  ; 
springs  rise  32  feet,  neaps  23^  feet.  Springs  rise  at  the  foot  of  the  western 
part  of  the  quay,  from  16  to  20  feet,  neaps  5  to  6  feet. 

ANSE  D'YPPINIAC,  formed  between  Future  and  Cesson  points, 
being  filled  with  sand,  should  on  no  account  be  entered.  An  extensive 
bank  of  sand  dries  out  1^  miles  from  its  entrance,  but  a  vessel  will  keep 
well  outside  it  by  having  the  northern  part  of  Bien-Assis  wood  in  sight  to 
the  northward  of  the  old  telegraph  of  Dahouet. 

PORT  du  LEGUE  ou  de  St  BBIEUC  is  situate  at  the 
mouth  of  the  river  Gouet,  the  entrance  to  which  is  close  to  the  northward 
of  Cesson  point,  the  north-west  extreme  of  Yffiniac  bay.  The  port  can 
only  be  entered  at  springs,  and  is  at  all  times  difficult  of  access  although  well 
buoyed.  The  bottom  between  Cesson  point  and  Sous  la  Tour  hamlet  dries 
15  feet,  the  berths  at  the  foot  of  the  quay  20  feet,  and  those  near  the  bridge 
22  feet  above  the  lowest  tides.  On  the  summit  of  Cesson  point  are  the 
ruins  of  Cesson  tower,  which  Henry  IV.  attemi)ted  to  blow  up  after  the 
wars  of  the  League ;  it  now  serves  as  a  landmark,  and  can  be  seen  from  a 
distance  of  15  miles.  The  channel  of  port  du  Legu6  is  marked  by  beacons 
and  buoys,  red  on  north  and  black  on  south  shore. 

LIGHT. — k.  fixed  white  light  is  exhibited  from  Aigle  point,  port  de 
Legue ;  it  is  elevated  45  feet  above  high  water,  and  is  visible  in  clear 
weather  10  miles. 

Directions. — When  bound  to  port  Legue  follow  the  directions  given 
in  page  415  until  abreast  Eohein  rock,  then  steer  to  the  southward  with 
Koselier  and  Cesson  points  in  line  S.W.  by  S.  When  within  2  miles  of 
the  former  point  steer  towards  Pature  point  until  the  northern  tower  of  the 
new  church  of  St.  Michel,  in  the  town  of  St.  Brieuc,  is  seen  between  the 
southern  tower  (on  which  there  is  a  telegraph)  of  the  same  church  and 
the  most  southerly  houses  of  Sous  la  Tour  hamlet,  which  mark  will  lead 
to  the  entrance  of  the  port. 

Banc  de  Chatern  and  Les  Gallettes  rocks  are  the  only 

dangers  to  be  avoided  when  entering  port  Legue.  The  bank  trends  in  a 
S.  by  W.  direction  from  Roselieiv  point  and  rests  upon  Chatern  point,  the 
south  extreme  of  port  Aurelle ;  it  will  be  avoided  by  keeping  the  northern 
tower  of  the  new  church  of  St.  Michel,  in  the  town  of  St.  Brieuc,  between 
the  southern  tower  (on  which  there  is  a  telegraph)  of  the  same  church  and 
the  most  southerly  houses  of  Sous  la  Tour  hamlet ;  this  is  also  the  mark 
for  leading  to  the  westward  of  the  Trahillions.  The  Galettes  form  a  small 
ledge  which  lies  3  cables  to  the  eastward  of  Cesson  point,  and  uncovers 
10  feet. 

DB  2 


420        CAPE   7BEHEL  TO  LES  H^ATTX  LiaBTHOTTSE.     [o&^p-  ^■ 

POINTS  du  BOSELIEB,  l\  miles  N.N.E.  of  the  entrance  to 
port  L^u^,  and  5  miles  B.  by  S.  of  port  Binic,  is  high  and  steep  on  ita 
northern  and  southern  sides,  but  its  eastern  side  terminates  in  a  gentle 
declivity. 

If  a  vessel  can  take  the  ground,  excellent  shelter  will  be  found  close  to 
the  southward  of  this  point  on  the  northern  shore  of  a  little  bay  called 
port  Aurelle,  where  she  will  be  protected  from  all  winds  between  South 
round  westerly,  and  N.E.  The  bottom,  which  is  of  muddy  sand,  dries  only 
3  feet  above  the  lowest  tides,  so  that  if  about  14  feet  drau^t  she  can  run 
for  shelter  from  two  hours  before  to  two  hours  after  high  water. 

The  COAST  between  Roseljer  point  and  Binic  is  high  and  steep, 
-except  abreast  Boaaires  beach,  between  Koeelier  and  Pordic  points,  where 
the  shore  is  always  accessible  to  boats  with  off-shore  winds.  At  2^  miles 
to  the  northward  of  Roselier  point,  sjid  3^  miles  eastward  of  Binic,  the 
4lepth  b  26  feet  at  the  lowest  tides. 

From  Binic  the  height  of  the  coast  lowers  progressively,  and  trends  in 
a  K.  by  E.  ^  E.  direction  3^  miles  to  St.  Quay  point,  which  is  sleep,  but 
much  less  elevated  than  the  points  farther  nortli.  The  intermediate  sboi-e 
is  inaccessible,  except  in  the  httle  bay  of  Portrieux,  and  on  a  beach  lialf  a 
mile  southward  of  the  bay.  The  bank  bordering  the  coast  dries  out  one 
mile  abreast  of  Binic,  but  only  one  cable  in  front  of  Fortrienx,  and  on  it 
ore  several  rocla,  one  of  which,  named  the  Four,  never  covers  and  is  used 
as  a  leading  mark  for  running  between  the  St.  Quay  rocks  and  the  coast, 
Tbe  southernmost  of  these  is  a  rocky  ledge  with  two  heads  named  Ours- 
Seul,  lying  4  cables  from  the  shore  and  1^  miles  to  the  north-east  of  port 
Binic ;  the  southern  head  dries  8  feet,  and  the  northern  6  feet  above  the 
bank.  The  Four  lies  N*.  J  E,  nearly  1^  miles  from  the  Ours-Seul ;  and 
close  to  the  westward  of  it  is  Fille  rock,  which  dries  19  feet;  whilst  2 
cables  to  the  southward  is  Noyea  ledge,  which  dries  2  feet  above  the  bank. 

Le  Fetit-Oripet,  Le  Grand  Oripet,  and  Les  Equerrets, 

are  three  small  rocky  ledges  lying  abreast  Rosaires  beach,  and  dangerous 
to  vessels  borrowing  too  close  to  the  shore. 

The  highest  head  of  the  Petit-Gripet  uncovers  about  a  foot  at  the  lowest 
tides,  and  lies  about  half  a  mile  from  tbe  shore,  with  Martin  rock  in  line 
with  the  foot  of  Roselier  point,  S.  f  E. ;  there  are  more  than  14  feet  water 
on  this  danger  when  the  eastern  extreme  of  the  IVIartin  is  covered. 

The  Grand-Gripet,  with  2  feet  over  it,  lies  N.N.E.  nearly  IJ  miles  from 
Martin  rock,  with  the  summit  of  that  j'ock  a  tittle  to  the  eastward  of  the 
principal  bouse  of  a  large  farm  on  the  high  land. 

The  highest  head  of  the  Equerrets  bears  E.  by  S.  J  S.,  8  cables  from 
tbe  foot  of  Fordic  point,  and  uncovers  about  a  foot 


CHAP.x.]  PORT  DE  BINIC.  421 

PORT  de  BINIC  is  situated  about  5  miles  N.W.  by  N.  of  Roselier 
point  at  the  bead  of  a  little  bay  half  a  mile  wide  and  open  to  the  eastward. 
The  entrance  is  between  two  stone  jetties.  The  berths  at  the  foot  of  the 
eastern  jetty  dry  17  feet,  and  those  near  the  landing  creek  at  the  upper  end 
of  the  port  25  feet  above  the  lowest  tides  ;  those  named  rEstacade,  near 
the  southern  jetty,  are  the  highest,  and  only  used  by  vessels  of  small 
draught. 

A  mole  extends  from  the  shore  273  yards  eastward  of  the  eastern  jetty, 
and  forms  with  this  jetty  an  outward  port,  the  depth  in  which  at  high 
water  is  from  3  to  6  feet  greater  than  in  the  port. 

The  outer  port  can  be  entered  by  vessels  of  about  10  feet  draught  at 
high-water  ordinary  neaps,  and  those  of  14  feet  can  enter  it  from  1^  hours 
before  to  1^  hours  after  high  water  springs.  It  affords  shelter  to  vessels 
caught  in  St.  Brieuc  bay  by  strong  winds  from  N.N.W.  to  E.N.E,  ;  the 
sea,  however,  is  then  high  at  the  entrance,  and  it  will  be  necessary  to  enter 
at  the  moment  of  high  water. 

LIGHT. — ^  fixed  white  light  is  exhibited  from  the  mole  at  port 
Binic ;  it  is  elevated  36  feet  above  high  water,  and  is  visible  in  clear 
weather  10  miles. 

Directions. — ^When  bound  to  port  Binic,  follow  the  directions  given 
in  (page  418)  until  abreast  the  Grand  Lejon,  when  if  the  wind  is  between 
N.N.E.  and  W.S.W.  a  vessel,  at  springs,  can  pass  between  the  coast  and 
St.  Quay  rocks  ;  if  between  N.N.E.  and  E.S.E.  she  can  pass  on  either 
side  of  these  rocks ;  but  if  between  S.E.  and  S.W.  she  should  keep  east- 
ward of  them.  Witli  strong  winds  from  N.E.  to  East  a  vessel  should 
always  pass  to  the  eastward,  bat  before  venturing  so  far  into  the  bay  a 
calculation  should  be  made  that  the  tide  has  risen  sufficiently  high  in  front 
of  the  port  (making  a  deduction  for  the  'scend  of  the  sea),  to  prevent 
grounding. 

If  compelled  by  high  winds  from  N.W.  to  North  to  run  for  shelter  at 
springs  in  the  outer  port  of  Binic  by  passing  between  the  St.  Quay  rocks 
and  the  coast,  bring  the  Four  rock  in  line  with  Ville  Baout  tower 
S.  I  W.  This  mark  will  lead  between  the  northern  part  of  St.  Quay  rocks 
and  St.  Marc  bank,  and  should  be  kept  on  until  the  vessel  has  arrived  3^ 
cables  N.E.  by  E.  of  St.  Quay  point,  or  the  Mauve  rock  is  in  one  with  a 
large  conspicuous  wliite  house  in  the  middle  of  Plouzec  village,  N.W.  by  N. 
Steer  to  the  south-eastward  with  the  latter  mark  on  until  the  Four  is  in 
line  with  the  lofty  spire  of  Pordic  church,  S.S.W.  \  W.,  when  follow  this 
direction  until  the  leading  mark  for  the  southern  part  of  the  channel  comes 
on,  viz.,  the  Hergue  and  Pommier  rocks  in  one,  N.  by  W.  J  W. ;  the  latter 
is  a  remarkable  large  rock  Ipng  close  to  Plouha  point ;  the  Hergue  is  a 


422         CAPB  PEEHEL  TO  LES  HlfiATTX  LIGHTHOUSE,     [chw-  x. 

aitnikr  rock  bearing  N.  byW.  f  W.  6  cables  from  St.  Quay  point.  In 
steering  vith  the  Fonr  in  one  with  Pordic  epire,  if  the  vessel  is  above 
14  Feet  draught  do  sot  wait  until  the  Hei;gue  and  Pommier  rocks  are  in 
one,  bat  leave  that  direction  the  moment  the  Hergue  is  in  line  with  Plouha 
point. - 

The  vessel,  if  not  dra'A'ing  more  tlian  14  feet,  can  now  either  anchor  in 
Fortrieux  road  (page  423),  or  if  the  tide  suit,  she  can  continue  steering 
S.  by  E.  I  E.  with  Hergne  and  Pommier  rocka  in  one,  rememberiog  that 
this  mark  leads  over  a  shoal  of  6  feet,  named  Basse  Meridionale  de  la 
Bade;  close  to  another  of  8  feet,  lying  3  cables  N.W.  of  the  6  feet, 
and  over  a  sand'baok,  named  La  Traverse,  which  trends  upwards  of 
1^  miles  in  a  S.S.W.  direction  from  the  southern  part  of  St,  Quny  rocks, 
and  on  which  the  least  water  is  4  feet.  When  Etablee  steeple  comes  in 
one  with  that  of  Plourham,  N.W.  by  W.  ^  W.,  or  when  cape  Frehel  light- 
house is  a  little  open  to  the  southward  of  the  highest  summit  of  the  Com- 
tesses  rocks,  the  vessel  may  either  haul  to  the  eastward  with  the  latter 
mark  on,  or  steer  for  port  Binic,  avoiding  the  Oura-Seul  by  not  coming 
nearer  the  shore  than  to  have  the  Four  rock  in  one  with  Comtesee  isle. 

If  passing  eastward  of  St.  Quay  rocks,  which  it  will  always  be  prudent 
to  do  at  the  neaps,  it  is  found  after  rounding  their  south-east  extreme  that 
the  vessel  cannot  fetch  port  Binic,  shelter  should  bo  sought  under  Koselier 
point,  on  the  northern  shore  of  port  Aurelle  (pnge  420),  the  grounding 
places  in  which,  muddy  sand,  are  only  3  feet  above  the  lowest  tides,  and 
accessible  to  vessels  of  14  feet  draught  at  the  springs,  from  2  hours  before 
to  £  hours  after  high  water. 

Tides. — It  is  b'gh  water,  full  and  change,  in  port  Binic  at  6  h.  3  m. ; 
springs  rise  30  feet;  neaps  22|  feet.  The  former  rise  about  15  to  21  feet 
above  the  bertha  at  the  foot  of  the  eastern  jetty,  the  latter  about  6  feet. 

The  Longue  rock  (at  the  south  part  of  the  St.  Quay  group)  uncovers 
26  feet  at  low-water  great  springs,  and  never  covers  at  the  neaps.  When 
it  is  awash  at  the  springs  there  are  14f  feet  at  the  foot  of  the  pier-head  of 
the  outer  port  of  Binic ;  11  feet  at  the  entrance  of  port  Legu^  ;  12^  feet 
at  the  entrance  of  port  Dahouet  j  and  nearly  23  feet  on  the  grounding 
places  close  to  the  southward  of  Roselier  point.  When  the  highest  head 
of  the  Trahillions  ledge  or  the  grand  Lejon  rock  cover  (they  both  uncover 
23  feet  at  great  springs),  there  are  1I|  Springs  at  the  foot  of  the  pier-head 
of  the  outer  port  of  Binic ;  7|  feet  at  the  entrance  of  Legue,  and  9^  feet 
at  the  entrance  of  Dahouet. 

Anchorage. — ^Vessels  waiting  tide  to  enter  port  Legu^  or  port  Binic 
can  anchor  in  fine  weather  abreast  Binic  on  a  bottom  of  clayey  mud, 
with  the  Pommier  and  Hargue  rocks  in  line,  bearing  N.  by  W,  |  W, 


OHAP.x.]  PORT  DE  PORTEIEUX.  428 

Care  must,  however,  be  taken  not  to  anchor  with  the  Roseliere  rock 
bearing  to  the  eastward  of  E.  f  N.,  (when  it  will  be  in  line  with  the 
Longue),  nor  with  Binic  to  the  northward  of  W.N.W. 

PORT  de  PORTBIEUX,  in  the  northern  part  of  Portrieux 
bay  half  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  St.  Quay  point,  is  used  by  vessels 
capable  cf  taking  the  ground,  but  its  access  is  difficult  without  the  assist- 
ance of  a  pilot.  The  entrance  is  comprised  between  the  coast  and  a  jetty 
that  extends  from  the  north  point  of  the  bay,  and  which  is  now  being 
considerably  lengthened  (1874),  and  will  reach  when  finished  to  the  middle 
of  the  bay. 

A  Life  Boat  is  stationed  at  this  port. 

LIGHT. — On  the  new  pier-head  at  Portrieux  stands  a  white  light- 
house, from  which  at  an  elevation  of  34  feet  above  the  sea,  is  exhibited  a 
fixed  red  light,  visible  in  clear  weather  seven  miles. 

BADE  de  POBTBIEUX,  between  the  St.  Quay  rocks  and  the 
coast,  has  good  holding  ground  and  sufficient  depth  for  vessels  of  not  more 
than  14  feet  draught.  It  should  not  be  used,  however,  with  strong 
easterly  winds,  except  at  the  lowest  neaps,  and  then  only  when  there  is  an 
impossibility  of  reaching  a  place  of  shelter  on  the  eastern  shore  of  the  bay, 
either  in  Erqui  road  or  under  Pleneuf  point. 

AncllOrage^ — ^The  anchorage  in  this  road  is  comprised  between 
the  following  limits : — ^The  Hergue  and  Pommier  rocks  in  one  ;  the 
Hergue  in  line  with  the  foot  of  the  steep  declivity  of  Plouha  point; 
Caruhel  mill  in  line  with  the  summit  of  Four  rock,  and  Portrieux  church 
in  line  with  the  centre  of  the  jetty  of  port  Portrieux.  The  depths  are 
from  14  to  18  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  between  the  southern  limit  of  the 
anchorage  and  the  line  on  which  St.  Michel  mill  is  in  one  with  the  end  of 
the  jetty.  In  this  latter  direction  from  west  to  east,  there  are  from  10  to 
20  feet,  and  from  11  to  12  feet  between  this  direction  and  the  northern 
limit  of  the  anchorage.  The  best  berth  with  the  most  water  is,  with 
!&  tables  steeple  in  one  with  the  Four  rock,  and  St.  Michel  mill  and  the  end 
■  of  the  jetty  in  line. 

Tides. — ^It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Portrieux  at  6  h,  0  m. ; 
springs  rise  31  feet;  neaps  23^  feet.  The  tidal  streams  in  Portrieux  road 
follow  nearly  the  direction  of  the  Hergue  and  Pommier  rocks  in  line.  At 
the  springs  the  greatest  strength  of  the  flood  between  Harbour  isle  and  St. 
Quay  point,  as  well  as  among  the  rocks  to  the  northward  of  the  road  is  4^ 
knots ;  the  strength  of  the  ebb  is  rather  less. 

The  COAST  from  St.  Quay  point  trends  7  miles  in  a  N.  by  W. 
direction  to  Minar  point,  and  is  high,  steep,  and  inaccessible,  except  for 
boats  with  off-shore  winds,  on  the  beach  fronting  the  village  of  St.  Quay, 


424        CAPE   FREHEL  TO  LE8  HEAUX  LIGHTHOUSE,    [chap.  x. 

obout  3  cables  to  the  westward  of  St  Quay  point,  and  on  the  beach  of 
Brechech  bay  about  1 1  miles  to  the  southward  of  Minar  point.  This 
point  may  be  recognised  from  a  great  distance  by  a  white  pyramid,  a 
guard-house,  and  an  old  semaphore  on  its  summit ;  it  is  bordered  by 
numerous  rocks  which  bar  its  approach  to  within  3  cables  at  low  water. 
Plouzec  point,  1|  miles  to  the  northward,  is  nearly  as  high  as  Minar  point, 
and  near  it  are  three  remarkable  islets,  the  highest  of  which  is  named  Mets 
de  Goelo. 

Bee  de  Yir  point  is  1|  miles  from  St.  Quay  point  and  abreast  it,  and  a 
good  half  mile  from  the  shore,  is  the  north  extreme  of  St.  Marc  bank, 
which  thence  treads  about  a  mile  to  the  southward,  parallel  to  the  shore, 
and  carries  a  depth  of  about  3  fathoms  at  low  water.  Plouha  point,  1^ 
miles  N.N.W.  ^  W.  of  Bee  de  Vir,  is  the  highest  point  in  St.  Brieuc  bay  ; 
it  tei*minates  in  a  perpendicular  rocky  cliff,  visible  in  clear  weather  25 
miles. 

The  land  between  Minar  point  and  the  remarkable  hill  named  Creach- 
ar^Maout  is  high  and  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  22  miles  ; 
its  highest  parts  are,  the  hill  on  which  the  village  of  Plouzec  is  built ; 
La  Trinite  point,  3  miles  to  the  north-west  of  Plouzec  point;  and 
Arcouest  point  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  La  Trinite.  Arcouest  point,  with 
a  guard-house  on  its  summit,  is  as  high  and  steep  as  Minar  point,  and, 
when  coming  from  the  westward,  it  is  the  first  high  point  on  the  west 
coast  of  St.  Brieuc  bay  that  will  open  out  to  the  eastward  of  Creach-ar- 
Maout  hill. 

The  Place  de  Greve,  the  Traverse,  and  the  Oiseaux.  are  shoal  patches 
lying  nearly  on  the  parallel,  and  from  IJ  to  2J  miles  from  Plouha  point. 
The  former,  the  shoalest  and  nearest  the  shore,  carries  a  depth  of  3  fathoms, 
and  from  it  the  southern  mill  of  Plouzec  is  in  line  with  the  centre  of  the 
Mauve  rock ;  the  other  two  patches  have  from  5  to  7  fathoms  over  them. 
The  Mauve  is  a  large  rock  lying  4  cables  from  the  shore,  and  3  cables  to 
the  north-east  of  the  Pommier  ;  it  never  covers,  and  forms  with  other  rocks 
which  surround  it  a  ledge  4  cables  long,  east  and  west. 

« 

Anchorage. — The  shore  between  Plouha  and  Minar  points  is  clear 
of  danger,  and  with  off-shore  winds  can  be  approached  within  half  a 
mile  at  lew  water.  The  Taureau  rock,  which  uncovers  33  feet  at  the 
lowest  rides,  lies  in  the  bight  of  the  coast  between  the  Mauve  rock  and 
Minar  point,  and  is  marked  by  a  stone  tower  erectd  on  it.  By  keeping 
the  pyramid  on  the  Cormorandiere  rock  open  about  half  a  point  east  of 
Minar  point,  it  will  lead  to  the  eastward. 

With  the  wind  between  E.N.E.  and  South  a  vessel  should  avoid 
approaching  too  near  this  part  of  the  coast,  as  the  streams  set  into  the 
bight.      If  obliged  by  a  calm  to  anchor,  endeavour  to  do  so  when  the 


CHAP,  xj  ANSE  DB  PAIMPOL.  425 

steeple  of  Treveneuc  churcli  is  in  line  with  the  Comtesses  de  Gueredan,  a 
large  rock  lying  at  the  foot  of  Plouha  point,  bearing  S.  \  W. 

Tides, — At  half  flood  an  eddy  runs  to  the  N.N.W.  in   the    same 

direction  as  the  following  ebb  from  St.  Quay  to  Plouzec  point,  also  in 

Paimpol  bay,  as  far  as  Arcouest  point ;  its  strength  will  be  found  greater 
in  the  bights  than  off  the  straight  parts  of  the  coast. 

ANSE  de  FAIMPOL. — This  deep  bay,  formed  between  the  high 
points  of  Plouzec  and  La  Trinite,  is  entirely  dry  at  the  lowest  tides. 
Guilben  point  divides  the  bay  into  two  parts>  and  it  is  to  the  northward  of 
this  long  point  that  port  Paimpol  and  the  principal '  beaching  places  are 
situated.  The  port  is  inaccessible  at  neaps,  and  has  but  from  13  to  19  feet 
water  in  it  at  high-water  springs  ;  the  entrance  is  between  a  pier-head  and 
the  north  extreme  of  some  quays. 

There  is  anchorage  to  the  south-west  and  south-east  of  St.  Kiom  isle,  in 
the  narrow  channel  separating  the  mud-banks  which  dry  at  the  south  end 
of  this  isle  from  those  in  Paimpol  bay.  There  is  a  beacon  on  the 
Plateaux  des  Fillettes,  south  of  St.  Riom.  A  vessel  will  have  a  good  berth 
by  mooring  north  and  south,  to  the  south-west  of  the  isle  in  5  fathoms  at 
low  water,  muddy  bottom,  with  the  guard-house  on  Arcouest  point  in  line 
with  the  northern  extreme  of  La  Trinite  point,  and  the  pyramid  on  the 
Cormorandi^re  rock  between  the  D6nou  rock  and  the  north-west  rock  of 
the  Roho  ledge.  There  is  not  much  sea  here,  even  during  strong  easterly 
winds,  except  at  high  water. 

The  holding  ground  at  the  anchorage  to  the  south-east  of  St.  Riom 
isle  is  good  but  exposed  to  easterly  winds.  It  lies  in  the  direction  of 
the  beacon  on  the  Ar-Zel  rock  in  one  with  the  summit  of  Blanche  de 
Guilben  isle,  W.  f  S.  ;  its  north-east  limit  is  the  H^aux  lighthouse  just 
opening  out  behind  Arcouest  point ;  and  its  south-west  limit  is  the  guard- 
house on  Minar  point  a  little  open  to  the  eastward  of  Plouzec  point. 

Beacllillg  Places. — Port  Lazo,  situated  in  the  south-east  part  of 
Paimpol  bay  under  the  high  land  of  Plouzec  point,  is  a  good  position  to 
beach  a  vessel  of  moderate  draught  that  can  take  the  ground.  The  berths 
do  not  dry  more  than  9^  feet  below  the  lowest  tides,  and  are  well  sheltered 
from  East  to  South. 

The  other  grounding  places  in  this  bay  are  in  front  of  port  Paimpol,  to 
the  northward  of  Guilben  point,  and  the  most  frequented  are  situated  on 
the  flat  between  the  channel  and  the  rocks  which  border  the  shore  from 
the  port  to  the  point.  The  bottom  is  of  mud  and  sand,  and  dries  about 
16^  feet  above  the  lowest  tides.  The  sea  is  rough  here  at  high  water 
when  it  blows  hard  from  the  eastward,  but  the  bottom  is  soft,  and  the  sea 
falls  before  the  vessel  takes  the  ground. 


426        CAFE  FBEHEL  TO   LBS  H^AtlX  LIGHTHOUSE.    icoAf.  x. 

There  is  also  k  g;ood  beaching  place  between  the  extreme  of  Giuilben 
point  and  Blanch  de  GuUben  tste.  The  best  berth  is  about  1^  cables  to 
the  nortbvard  of  the  isle,  where  the  bottom  is  soft  mud,  and  elevated  about 
10  feet  above  the  lowest  tides.  Another  good  position,  where  TeHsels  lie  np 
daring  Uie  winter,  ia  in  the  northern  part  of  the  bay,  in  &ont  of  the  hollow 
formed  by  the  shore  onder  a  high  part  of  the  coast  called  Lande  de  Pwtz- 
don.     A  vessel  drawing  lOJ  feet  will  here  be  only  neaped  one  day. 

IiIO-HT. — From  the  gable  end  of  the  keeper's  dwelling  on  PortE-don 
point,  north  side  of  entrance  to  Faimpol  hsrhour,  a  Jlashing  light  is 
exhibited  at  an  elevation  of  35  feet  above  high  water  (17  feet  above  the 
ground),  showing  red  through  an  arc  of  7i°,  or  between  the  bearings  of 
Tf.  61^°  W.  and  N.  69°  W.  j  and  white  through  an  arc  of  3J°,  or  between 
the  bearmgs  of  N.  69'^  W.  and  N.  72^°  W. ;   in  all  other  directious  it  is 


The  white  light  should  be  visible  in  dear  weather  from  a  distance  of  II 
miles ;  the  red  light,  from  a  distance  of  7  miles. 
FA8SAGKS  LEADING  to  ANSE   de  FAIKFOL— 

There  are  five  chanuela  leading  to  the  above  anchorages  to  the  southward 
of  St.  Biom  ble,  but  they  lie  in  the  midst  of  the  dangers  fronting  Faimpol 
bay,  and  only  two  of  them,  the  Jument  and  the  D^nou,  are  practicable 
wilhout  a  pilot  after  half  flood  ;  the  others  are  called  the  St.  Riom,  the 
Lastel,  and  the  Trinity. 

PESSage  de  1e  Jument. — The  entrance  to  this  channel  is  about 
1^  miles  to  the  northward  of  Flouzec  point,  between  two  remarkable  large 
rocks  lying  one  mile  apart  in  a  N.  by  £.  ^  E.  and  S.  by  W.  ^  W.  direction, 
the  one  named  the  Ost-Pic,  lying  at  the  eastern  extreme  of  Mets  de  Goelo 
islet,  and  the  other  at  the  south-east  extreme  of  the  Boho  ledge.  The 
channel  is  shallow  at  low-water  springs,  but  at  half-flood  there  are  22  feet 
on  the  bank  extending  from  the  south  part  of  the  Roho  ledge  to  the 
Jument  rock. 

The  Jument,  Gueule,  and  Gouayan  rocks  divide  this  channel  into  two 
parts,  both  of  which  are  practicable  for  vessels  of  moderate  draught. 
The  former  rock  uncovers  7^  feet,  the  Gueule  3  feet,  and  the  Gouayan 
16  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  The  Jument  and  the  Gouayan  have  beac<mB 
on  them,  the  former  being  painted  red  and  black  horizontally  ;  the  Gueule 
lies  midway  between  the  beacons,  about  bftif  a  mile  to  the  E.S.B.  of  tJie 
Jument. 

Fassage  du  Deuou  is  dose  to  the  eastward  of  St.  Riom  isl^ 
between  Garap  and  Bohan-hier  ledges,  to  the  eastward  of  a  large  nx^ 
named  the  Valve,  and  westward  of  Guillaume  and  Denou  rocks;  the  latter 
rock  lies  about  a  quarter  of  a  mile  E.S.E.  of  the  eastern  point  of  St,  BtcoD. 


CHAP.x.]  ANSE  DB  PAIMPOL.  427 

This  channel  has  the  advantage  of  lying  in  the  direction  of  the  flood 
sU'eam,  hut  it  is  narrow,  and  with  the  space  which  separates  it  from 
£r6hat  isle  can  only  be  navigated  hj  local  pilots  with  a  fair  wind.  After 
half-floody  if  the  leading  mark  is  made  out,  a  vessel  can  run  through 
without  risk. 

Passage  de  St.  Biom  is  the  narrowest  of  all  the  channels  leading 
to  Paimpol  bay,  and  is  but  seldom  used.  It  lies  close  to  the  north-west  side 
of  St.  Eiom  isle,  between  that  isle  and  the  Yras  rock. 

Passage  de  Lastel,  is  a  narrow  channel  formed  to  the  southward 
of  the  Men-Gam  rock  and  of  the  rocky  ledge  extending  from  the  south  end 
of  Blanche  de  I'Arcouest  isle.  It  is  through  this  channel  that  pilots 
generally  take  vessels  bound  seaward  from  Paimpol. 

Passage  de  la  Trinity,  the  entrance  to  which  is  southwaixl  of 
Brehat  road  between  the  Fillers  rocks  and  those  off  the  north  end  of 
Blanche  de  TArcouest  isle,  is  generally  taken  by  vessels  bound  to  Paimpol 
under  charge  of  local  pilots,  who  have  conducted  them  through  either  the 
Moisie,  the  Men  du  Castrcc,  or  the  Kerpont  channels  (page  432).  It 
unites  with  the  Lastel  channel  half  a  mile  northward  of  La  Trinity  point. 

Directions. — When  bound  from  the  south-east  to  the  anchorages 
under  St.  Riom.  isle,  or  to  any  of  the  beaching  places  in  Paimpol  bay, 
a  vessel  will  pass  between  the  Ost-Pic  and  the  Calemarguiers  rocks,  and 
between  the  coast  and  the  off-lying  shoals  betvreen  Minar  and  Plouzec 
points,  by  keeping  the  summit  of  the  large  rock  lying  at  the  south-east 
part  of  the  Roho  ledge  in  one  with  the  eastern  point  of  Ar-Morbic  isle, 
bearing  N.  ^  E.  This  isle  is  on  the  eastern  side  of  Brehat,  and  on  the 
above  bearing  appears  part  of  it ;  its  eastern  point  is  high  and  well-deflned, 
and  is  the  extreme  of  land  seen  to  the  northward.  Give  the  Ost-Pic  a 
berth  of  about  2  cables  in  rounding  it,  and  thence  steer  for  the  anchorages 
or  grounding  places,  passing  to  the  southward  of  the  beacons  on  the  Gouayan 
and  Jument. 

If  bound  to  Paimpol  bay  from  the  northward,  and  intending  to  run 
through  the  D^nou  channel,  having  passed  through  Brehat  channel  (page 
431)  steer  S.W.  by  S.  with  Rundavi  mill  in  line  with  the  summit  of  Denou 
rock.  After  parsing  westward  of  this  rock,  the  beacon  on  the  Ar-zel  rock 
kept  in  one  with  the  summit  of  Blanche  de  Guilben  isle,  W.  |  S.,  will  lead 
to  the  anchorage  to  the  south-east  of  St.  Riom  isle,  or  the  vessel  may  be 
steered  for  one  of  the  beaching  places  in  the  bay. 

If  the  Jument  channel  be  preferred,  having  run  through  Brehat  channel 
bring  the  Ost-Pic  in  line  with  the  pyramid  on  the  Cormorandi^re  S.S.W., 
and  the  vessel  will  pass  eastward  of  Cain  ar-Monse,  a  rock  awash  at  the 
lowest  tides  j  when  to  the  southward  of  this  rock,  or  when  the  guard-house 
on  Arcoueet  point  bears  W.  ^  N.,  steer  to  the  south-east  to  bring  Plouzec 


428       CAPE  FBEHEL  TO  LBS  Hl^AUX  LIGHTHOUSE,    [chap.  x. 

mill  in  line  with  the  eastern  fall  of  Mets  de  Goelo  islet,  S.W.  by  S.  Do 
not  go  westward  of  this  line  and  it  will  lead  a  cable  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Cormorandi^re  bank.  Pioozec  mill  in  line  with  the  Ost-Pic,  S.W.,  will 
then  lead  to  the  eastward  of  the  Charpentiers  ledge,  which  is  marked  by  a 
red  beacon,  and  to  the  entrance  of  the  channel. 

At  nigllt.— 'Vessels  approaching  Paimpol  anchorage  at  night,  should 
carefully  keep  within  the  limits  of  Portz-don  point  white  light,  bearing  in 
mind  that  the  light  is  obscured  northward  of  this  sector,  and  that  it  shows 
red  southward  of  it.  Coming  from  the  northward  through  Br^hat  channel, 
vessels  should  enter  the  sector  of  white  light  shown  from  Paon  point,  and 
keep  within  its  limits  until  Portz-don  point  white  light  is  seen,  towards 
which  they  may  then  steer,  proceeding,  Paon  point  light  will  change  in 
colour,  and  become  obscured  at  the  entrance  to  Portz-don  anchorage. 

Tides. — ^t  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Paimpol  at  6  h.  0  m. ; 
springs  rise  31  feet,  neaps  23^  feet.  The  flood  stream  which  enters 
Paimpol  bay,  after  rounding  the  south-west  part  of  Br^hat  isle,  sets  to  the 
S.S.W.  and  S.S.E. ;  but  about  four  hours  flood  its  direction  is  S.S.W.  and 
S.W.,  and  an  eddy  begins  to  follow  the  windings  of  the  shore  from  Mets 
de  Goelo  isle  towards  Arcouest  point.  The  breadth  of  this  eddy  increases 
rapidly ;  at  one  hour  before  high  water  it  extends  to  the  anchorage  to  the 
south-east  of  St.  Kiom  isle,  and  at  this  period,  and  even  after  half  flood,  a 
vessel  running  from  Br^hat  road  to  Paimpol  with  a  light  wind,  had  better 
pass  to  the  eastward  of  St.  Kiom  isle,  an<l  even  of  the  Cormorandifere  rock, 
than  through  Trinite  channel,  which  can  only  be  done  when  the  wind  is 
sufficiently  strong  to  stem  the  eddy. 

The  ebb  stream  follows  the  same  direction  as  the  eddy  ou  the  flood,  and 
forms  an  eddy  behind  each  projecting  point  of  the  coast ;  but  in  proportion 
as  the  banks  uncover,  the  body  of  the  stream  trends  more  and  more  towards 
Br^hat,  to  the  southward  of  which  it  divides  into  two  parts,  one  part 
passing  eastward  of  the  isle,  and  the  other,  after  crossing  Brehat  road,  runs 
through  Kerpont  channel,  and  between  the  islets  and  rocks  to  the  westward 
of  it. 

The  velocity  of  both  streams  increases  in  the  narrow  channels,  but  about 
the  Cormorandi^re  bank,  as  well  as  to  the  eastward  of  Mets  de  Goelo  isle 
and  of  Minar  point,  it  does  not  exceed  4  knots  at  the  springs,  and  2  knots 
at  the  neaps. 

ILE!  BBr£HAT  lies  one  mile  northward  of  Arcouest  point,  and  the 
most  apparent  objects  on  it  are,  St.  Michel  chapel,  the  northern  mill,  and 
the  southern  mill  (named  Vieux-Mouliu,)  which  has  no  sails,  its  roof  painted 
red,  and  a  zone  9  feet  wide  whitewashed  below  the  roof.  The  most 
remarkable  irregularities  of  outline  are  Paon  point,  forming  the  north-east 
extreme  of  the  isle  ;    the  small  hill  on  which  the  above  chapel  stands ; 


CHAP.x.]  ILE  be]6hat.  429 

and  the  hillocks  crowning  the  eastern  and  western  points  of  entrance  to 
poii;  CIos.  The  isle  appears  distinct  from  the  coast  when  it  is  on  a  South, 
S.W.,  or  North  bearing,  bat  unless  very  near  it,  it  will  be  blended  with 
the  land  when  it  bears  W.S.W.  and  N.W.  The  white  pyramids  placed 
on  the  Ar-Morbic,  Louet,  and  Quistillic  rocks,  which  front  the  eastern 
part  of  the  isle,  are  also  conspicuous  objects  and  may  be  seen  at  some 
distance  off. 

The  dangers  surrounding  this  isle  are  comprised  between  the  line  on 
which  the  Heaux  lighthouse  bears  West  and  that  on  which  the  mill, 
situated  on  the  high  land  a  little  to  the  northward  of  Pomelin  bay,  is  in 
line  with  the  south-west  point  of  Br^hat,  N.W.  by  W.  The  streams, 
especially  at  the  springs,  rush  with  great  velocity  through*  this  chain  of 
dangers,  and  produce  a  Tiolentrace,  which  can  only  be  crossed  without 
risk  at  low  water  in  the  narrow  cut  called  Br^hat  channel.  This  channel, 
which  is  2  miles  long  in  a  S.  f  W.  and  N.  f  E.  direction  passes  about  a 
mile  to  the  eastward  of  Faon  point,  between  the  rocky  ledges  fronting  the 
eastern  side  of  the  isle  and  the  Echaudes  ledge. 

A  Life  BOftt  is  stationed  at  Br^hat  isle. 

Pilots. — The  Br^hat  and  Pontrieux  river  pilots  keep  out  at  sea  when 
the  weather  permits.  In  fine  weather  fishing  boats  are  often  found  in 
the  lociility  of  the  Heaux  lighthouse,  and  the  masters  of  tliem,  who  are 
generally  good  pilots,  will  be  found  very  useful  until  the  coast  pilots  are 
met  with. 

Hade  de  Breliat,  on  the  south  side  of  Br^hat  isle,  is  the  only  place 
between  the  Heaux  lighthouse  and  cape  Frehel  in  which  vessels  of  ' 
moderate  draught  can  find  shelter  during  strong  winds  from  N.N.E.  to 
N.N.W.  The  good  holding  ground  trends  east  and  west,  in  the  direction 
of  the  guard-house  on  Bois  isle  (a  high  ^eep  islet  lying  off  the-west  point 
of  entrance  to  Pontiieux  river)  in  line  with  the  southern  face  of  a  high 
rock  named  Men-ar-Vran,  W.  by  N.  ^  N.  ;  its  eastern  limit  is  the  eastern 
face  of  Mets  de  Goelo  islet  in  line  with  the  Men- Gam  rock,  S.  ^  E.  and 
its  western  limit,  St.  Barbe  mill  in  line  with  La  Trinite  point,  S.S.W. 

The  best  anchorage  is  with  the  above  guard-house  in  one  with  the  south 
face  of  the  Men-ar-Yran,  and  St.  Barbe  mill,  or  the  trees  of  St.  Barbe 
chapel  (this  chapel  is  on  the  high  land  at  the  head  of  Paimpol  bay, 
1^  cables  to  the  westward  of  the  mill)  in  line  with  the  summit  of  Blanche 
de  Arcouest  isle  SJS.W.  ^  W.  The  least  depth  in  the  road  is  3  fathoms  at 
low  water.    A  vessel  should  moor  E.S.E.  and  W.N.W. 

Port  la  CliaiXlbre. — if  surprised  in  Brehat  road  with  strong  easterly 
winds,  a  vessel  that  can  take  the  ground  will  find  good  shelter  in  port 
Chambre,  which  is  formed  between  the  south-east  part  of  Brehat  isle  and 
the  Logodec  and  Lavrec  rocks.    It  dries  out  at  low  tide,  and  its  principal 


430       CAPE  FREHEL  TO  LES   Hl^ATJX  LIGHTHOUSE,     [chap.  x. 

entrance  about  half  a  cable  wide,  is  between  the  rocks  at  the  south-east 
point  of  the  isle,  and  those  adjacent  to  the  western  side  of  Logodec. 

A  vessel  cannot  proceed  farther  into  this  port  than  the  large  islet 
lying  abreast  the  north  end  of  Logodec,  which  divides  the  channel  into 
two  branches.  The  best- berth  is  about  three-quarters  of  a  cable  to  the 
southward  of  the  islet,  where  the  bottom  dries  about  9  feet  above  the 
lowest  tides.  A  clump  of  trees  surrounding  St.  Barbc  chapel,  bearing 
S.S.YT.  ^  W.,  and  touching  the  eastern  side  of  a  large  rock  named  Chateau- 
de-rile-Blanche,  will  lead  to  the  entrance. 

Port  CIOS,  situated  on  the  southern  side  of  Br^hat  isle  between  the 
southern  entrances  of  Kerpont  passage  and  Brehat  road,  although  difficult 
of  access  can,  under  most  circumstances,  afford  refuge  to  vessels  capable  of 
taking  the  ground. 

Thiee  rocks,  lying  in  a  straight  line,  N.E.  and  S.W.,  divide  the  entrance 
of  this  port  into  two  parts.  The  most  southern,  named  Men  Allan,  lies 
near  low- water  mark,' and  uncovers  about  19  feet ;  the  second  is  about 
half  a  cable  further  in,  and  also  uncovers  19  feet ;  and  the  third  is  about 
a  cable  to  the  northward  of  the  second,  and  uncovers  2Q  feet.  This  latter 
rock  has  been  joined  to  the  western  shore  of  the  port  by  a  causeway,  which 
serves  as  a  landing  place,  and  which,  when  uncovered,  shelters  the  inner 
part  of  the  port.  The  bottom  at  the  foot  of  the  causeway  dries  1^  feet 
above  the  lowest  tides ;  the  best  berth  is  half  a  cable  N.N.E.  of  the  rock 
at  the  end  of  the  causeway,  where  the  bottom  dries  nearly  1 1  feet  above 
the  same  level.  The  greater  number  of  vessels  that  enter  the  port  do  not 
go  within  the  causeway,  but  lie  about  half  a  cable  S.S.E.  of  the  rock ;  the 
grounding  places  here  are  good,  but  the  anchors  have  but  little  hold,  and 
at  high  water  they  are  exposed  to  winds  between  W.S.W.  and  S.S.E. 

Port  de  la  Corderie,  on  the  north-west  side  of  Br6hat  isle,  is 
another  grounding  place  where  vessels  of  moderate  draught  will  find 
shelter  when  in  charge  of  local  pilots.  Its  entrance,  which  is  only  half  a 
cable  wide  and  open  to  the  westward,  is  close  to  the  southward  of  a  small 
rocky  ledge  lying  three-quarters  of  a  cable  to  the  south-east  of  a  large  rock, 
named  Kervarec. 

Vessels  lie  aground  from  the  entrance  to  the  head  of  the  port.  The  best 
berth  for  those  of  about  15  feet  draught  is  2  cables  inside  the  entrance; 
the  sea  is  rough  here  only  when  it  blows  hard  at  high-water  springs.  Small 
coasters  lie  to  the  eastward  of  this  position,  and  sometimes  in  the  middle  of 
the  little  cove  at  the  head  of  the  port,  where  the  tide  rises  from  5  to  6  feet 
less  than  in  the  channel. 

DIRECTIONS  for  approaching  BADE  de  BB£HAT 

from  the  WESTWARD.— if  obliged  to  seek  shelter  in  this  road 
from  strong  winds  between  N.N.W,  and  N.N.E.,  when  pilots  cannot  come 


OHAP.x.]  ILE  BE]£hAT.  431 

out  in  the  ofEng,  wait  if  possible  to  the  N.N.E.  of  the  H6aux  lighthouse 
till  half  flood,  when  the  tide  will  have  risen  in  the  vicinity  of  Brehat  isle, 
and  also  in  St.  Brieuc  bay,  18^  feet  at  great  springs  above  what  it  is 
marked  on  the  charts.  At  this  period  a  vessel  can  run  through  Brehat 
channel  into  Br6hat  road  without  risk,  for  the  channel  which  is  only 
2  cables  wide  at  low  water,  will  then  be  half  a  mile  broad. 

Through  Chenal  de  Brehat. — Havmg  rounded  the  Roc*h-ar-Bel 
ledge  (page  407),  the  leading  mark  between  Brehat  channel  &om  half 
flood  to  half  ebb  is,  the  pyramid  on  the  Cormorandi^re  rock  in  line  with 
the  pyramid  on  Minar  point  bearing  S.  by  W,  J  W. ;  but  if  before  half 
flood  the  former  pyramid  must  be  kept  between  fhe  second  and  third  group 
of  houses  seen  on  the  high  land  between  Plouha  and  Minar  points ;  this 
latter  mark  will  lead  to  the  westward  of  three  shoal  patches  on  the 
Echaud^s  ledge,  the  most  southerly  of  which,  named  Eoc'h-Couban,  has 
only  8  feet  over  it  at  the  lowest  tides.  By  following  either  of  these 
leading  marks,  according  to  the  time  of  tide,  a  vessel  will  pass  to  the 
westward  of  the  Pain- de-Bray  rock,  which  uncovers  2  feet,  the  Echaud6s 
rocks,  the  highest  head  of  which  uncovers  8^  feet,  and  a  little  ledge 
named  Lello-Bras,  the  highest  head  of  which  is  awash  at  the  lowest 
springs.  The  sea  is  always  high  in  the  eddies  of  these  rocks  when  it 
blows  hard. 

When  the  red  tower  on  the  Men-Garo  rock  comes  in  line  with  the 
pyramid  on  the  Quistillic  rock  haul  more  to  the  westward  and  bring  the 
beacon  on  Pilliers  rock  in  line  with  Lannevez  mill,  W.  J  S.  This  latter 
mark  will  lead  into  Br^bat  road,  passing  three-quarters  of  n  cable  to  the 
south-east  of  a  small  patch,  named  Basse  de  Men-Garo,  on  which  there  are 
about  26  feet,  and  a  long  cable  to  the  north-west  of  another  patch,  called 
Cain-ar-Bat,  on  which  there  are  23  feet  at  half  tide. 

The  flood  and  ebb  streams  follow  very  nearly  in  the  direction  of  Brehat 
channel,  and  their  velocity  during  springs  varies  from  3  to  5  knots, 
almost  the  whole  time  of  their  duration  ;  but  north  of  the  channel,  from 
its  entrance  to  abreast  Boc'h-ar-Bel,  the  direction  of  the  flood  is  more  to 
the  eastward  and  the  ebb  more  to  the  westward.  Abreast  the  Roc'h-ar- 
Bel  the  flood  sets  to  the  S.E.  from  4  to  5  knots,  and  the  ebb  N.W.  by  N. 
about  the  same  rate,  and  that  during  a  period  of  4  hours.  It  follows 
therefore  that  a  sailing  vessel  rounding  Eoc'h-ar-Bel  from  tlie  westward, 
with  the  wind  fi*om  that  direction,  would  not  be  able  to  fetch  the  entrance 
of  the  channel,  but  would  run  the  risk  of  being  carried  on  to  the  Horaine 
ledge  ;  and  that  leaving  the  channel  with  easterly  winds  during  the  ebb, 
she  would  not  be  able  to  weather  Roc'h-ai'-Bel. 

Under  these  circumstances  she  should,  in  the  former  case,  pass  inshore 
of  Roc'h-ar-Bel  through  the  Moisie  or  the  Men-du-Castrec  channels ;  and 


432        CAPE   FBEHEL  TO  LE8   HiAUX  LIGHTHOUSE,    [cbjh--  s- 

OD  leaving  Brehat  channel,  she  should,  when  abreast  the  beacon  on  the 
Fetit-Fen-Azen,  st«er  westward  with  Moisie  rock  (a  large  isolated  mass 
3^  cables  S.E.  by  £.  of  Sark  rock,  and  which  only  covere  at  the  highest 
spring)  in  line  with  the  H^aux  lighthouBe ;  this  mark  will  lead  between 
the  Sirlots  ledge  and  the  Men-du-Costrec  ledge,  into  the  Men-du-Gastrec 
channel. 

Through  Passage  du  Men-du-Gastrec-— The  entrance  to 

this  channel  is  about  2|  miles  S.E.  bjr  E.  of  the  H^ux  Ughthonse,  between 
the  Men-du-Castrec  ledgo  and  a  small  ledge  named  the  Ar-Mesclek.  The 
channel  leads  into  the  entrance  of  the  Fontrieux  river  close  to  the  eastward 
of  the  beacon  on  the  VieiHe,  the  most  noilh -easterly  of  the  rocks  which 
extend  in  that  direction  from  St.  Mod^  isle  (this  isle  ma;  be  seen  from  a 
distance  of  7  or  8  miles ;  it  has  a  large  white  watch  tower  on  it  and  is  steep 
on  all  sides).  The  tidal  streams  follow  its  direction,  and  t\mv  rate  during 
springs  is  from  4^  to  5  knots.  The  leading  mark  through  is  the  goard- 
honse  on  Arconest  point  kept  on  a  S.  b;  W.  ^  W.  bearing,  when  it  will  be 
seen  in  the  middle  of  the  space  which  separates  the  high  rocks  bordering 
both  sides  of  Kerpont  channel. 

The  Men-dn-Castrec  channel  at  low-water  springs  can  only  be  navi- 
gated with  the  aid  of  a  pilot,  as  the  leading  park  passes  close  to  an  8-feet 
patch  lying  at  the  north-east  extreme  of  Ar-Mesciek  ledge ;  but  from  half 
flood  to  half  ebb  vessels  of  14  feet  draught  can  run  through  it  without  any 
risk.  With  the  wind  between  N.N.W.  and  W.S.W.,  and  even  at  low  water, 
pilots  take  vessels  through  it  that  are  bound  to  the  ports  in  St.  Brieuc  bay, 
but  they  quit  its  direction  when  the  Moisie  rock  is  in  line  with  the  Heaux 
lighthouse ;  they  theu  steer  with  tbi«  latter  mark  on  until  they  pick  up  the 
mark  for  Brehat  channel. 

Through  Passage  de  la  Uoisie-— This  channel  is  veiy  narrow 
but  straight,  and  vessels  of  14)  feet  draught  can  navigate  It  from  half  flood 
to  half  ebb.  It  lies  between  Sark  rocks  and  the  Men-du-Castrec  channel, 
and  like  the  latter  channel  it  leads  to  the  entrance  of  Pontrieux  river,  and 
of  KerpoDt  and  Bi«hat  channels.  The  leading  mark  through  is,  the  old 
mill,  without  sails  and  with  a  red  roof,  of  Brehat  isle,  kept  exactly  between 
the  western  gable  of  St.  Michel  chapel  and  a  stone  cross  near  the  chapel ; 
but  these  objects  are  too  close  together  for  a  good  mark,  and  the  services 
of  a  pilot  are  indispensable. 

The  flood  stream  runs  4J  or  5  knots  in  this  channel  at  the  springs  and 
nearly  follows  its  direction  as  far  as  the  beacon*  on  a  flat  rock,  named 
the  K^oguej on- bian,  which  uncovers  12J  feet;  but  beyond  this  the  stream 
inclines  to  the  S.W.  towards  St.  Modi  isle.    The  strength  of  the  ebb  is 

■  This  beacon  had  dii^peued  in  I9T8. 


CHAP,  x]  HADE   DE   BR6hAL. — DIKECTIONS.  433 

rather  less  than  the  flood,  and  it  takes  more  the  direction  of  the  channel  as 
the  tide  falls. 

Through  Le  Kerpont* — This  channel  which  separates  Brehat 
from  B^niguet  isle,  also  leads  into  Brehat  road,  but  is  only  practicable  for 
vessels  of  moderate  draught  after  4  liours  flood,  at  the  period  the  rate  of 
that  stream  begins  to  slacken.  The  leading  mark  through  is  the  same  as 
that  for  the  Men-du-Castrec  channel,  viz.,  the  guard  house  on  Arconest 
point  bearing  S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  when  it  will  be  seen  in  the  middle  of  the 
space  which  separates  the  high  rocks  bordering  each  side  of  the  channel. 
Both  these  channels  are  practicable  for  vessels  drawing  14^  feet  as  long  as 
the  Vielle  rock  is  covered,  the  least  depth  in  the  Kerpont  at  that  time 
being  16^  feet.  This  rock,  which  has  a  beacon  on  it,  lies  N.  by  E.  j^  E. 
about  half  a  mile  from  the  entrance,  and  uncovers  24  feet  at  the  lowest 
tides. 

The  Kerpont  has  two  outlets  to  the  southward  ;  one  between  the  south- 
west point  of  Br^hjit  and  the  Noires  ledge  (the  south-east  rock  of  which, 
the  Vif  Argent,  has  a  beacon  on  it  and  uncovers  17  feet),  and  the  other 
between  this  ledge  and  the  large  rocks  off"  the  eastern  side  of  Raguenez- 
bras  isle. 

APPROACHING  RADE  de  BRfiHAT  from  EAST 

and  S.E« — Brehat  road  can  also  be  entered  by  passing  between  the 
dangers  lying  to  the  eastward  of  Brehat.  These  channels  are  not  much, 
frequented,  as  the  streams  cross  them  obliquely,  but  under  certain  circum- 
stances vessels  of  large  draught  can  run  through  them  even  at  low  water. 

The  first  channel  eastward  of  Brehat  channel  is  bounded  to  the  north- 
west by  Horaine  and  Echaudes  ledges,  and  to  the  south-east  by  Men-Marc'h 
ledge.  The  leading  mark  through  is,  the  summit  of  a  high  rocky  islet, 
named  Menou,  lying  half  a  mile  eastward  of  La  Tiinte  point,  in  line  with 
the  north-east  mill  of  Lande- Blanche  bearing  S.W.  by  W.  Follow  this 
direction  until  Arcouest  mill  is  in  one  with  a  great  forked  rock  lying  close 
to  the  north-west  of  Blanche  de  T Arcouest  isie,  W.  ^  S. ;  this  latter  mark 
will  lead  up  to  La  Bade  beacon,  whence  a  direct  course  can  be  steered  for 
the  road. 

To  pass  through  the  channel  between  the  Men  Marc'h  und  the  Ringue- 
bras  ledges,  keep  the  highest  summit  of  St.  Riom  isle  in  one  with  the 
north-east  mill  of  Lande  Blanche,  W.S.W.,  until  Arcouest  mill  is  in  line 
%vith  the  above  great  forked  rock,  W.  ^  S.,  which  will  lead  up  to  La  Bade 
beacon.  With  a  moderate  wind,  the  Ringue-bras  can  be  crossed  at  the 
neaps  from  half  flood  to  half  ebb,  by  keeping  the  north-east  mill  cf 
Lande-Blanche  in  line  with  the  higlie^t  summit  of  St.  Riom  isle.  The 
Sable  banks  can  also  be  crossed  under  the  saiiia  circumstances  of  wind  and 
Q  7049.  E  £ 


434        CAPE   FBEHEL  TO  I.ES  H^AUX  LIGHTHOUSE,    [cbap.  x. 

tide,  by  keeping  Arcouest  mill  in  line  with  the  great  forked  rock, 
W.  J  S. 

If  vishing  to  pass  to  the  Bonthward  of  the  Sable  banks,  which  it  will 
not  be  prudent  to  cross  at  low'water  Bpriogs,  bring  the  pj'ramid  on  the 
Qiiietillick  rock  between  the  old  mill  and  St.  Michel  chapel,  on  Br^hat, 
N.W.,  and  it  will  lead  close  to  the  soathward  of  their  south  extreme  ;  a 
Bhoiir  diBtance  southward  of  the  Basse  Pomorion,  on  which  there  are  only 
9  feet ;  tind  between  the  Cain-ar-Monse  rock,  which  is  awash,  and  a  Bmall 
patch  named  the  Carcc-Mingui,  on  which  there  are  only  8  feet  at  low  water. 
When  Arcouest  mill  comes  in  line  with  the  great  forked  rock,  W.  ^  S.j  steer 
for  La  Rode  beacon. 

To  approach  Brehat  road  from  the  Bouth-east,  bring  the  northern  mill  on 
Br^hat  in  line  with  the  pyramid  on  the  Quistillic  N.  bj  W.  ^  W.,  and  it  will 
lead  close  to  the  westward  of  the  highest  heada  of  the  Basse  St.  Briuuc, 
(marked  by  a  bnof )  which  are  awaah  at  the  lowest  tides ;  over  the  north- 
east extreme  of  the  Calemarguiers  ledge ;  a  short  distance  to  the  westward  of 
the  highest  part  of  a  sand-bank  lyingbetween  this  latter  ledge  andtheChar- 
pentiers  ledge ;  close  to  the  north-east  of  the  Charpentiers  rocks  and  the 
pyramidon  the  Cormorandi^rerock.  Continue  in  this  direction  untU  Arcouest 
mill  is  inline  with  the  forked  rock,  W.  J  S.,  when  proceed  as  before. 

Tides* — It  "  high  water,  full  and  change,  around  Grehat  isle  at 
5h.  51m. ;  equinoctial  springs  rise  about  39  feet,  ordinary  springs  31  feet, 
and  ordinary  neaps  23^  feet.  In  Brehat  road,  the  direction  of  the  flood 
stream  at  its  commencement,  or  at  5  hours  before  high  water,  is  S.W.  bj'  W. 
The  greatest  rate  of  this  stream,  2  knots,  is  at  2^  hours  before  high  water, 
-when  its  direction  is  E.S.E. 

The  ebb  b^na  to  nm  t«  the  M.W.  a  few  minutes  after  high  water.  Its 
greatest  rate,  1^  knots,  lasts  from  3  to  4  hours  after  high  wtaer,  when  its 
direction  varies  Irom  W.N.W,  to  W.  by  N.  Winds  from  E.S.E.  to  S.S.E. 
cause  a  nasty  sea  in  the  road  dm'iog  the  flood ;  the  holding  ground, 
however,  is  good. 

The  streams  are  not  strong  in  Ferlas  channel,  which  is  a  continuntiou 
of  this  road  to  the  westward.  The  flood  follows  its  direction  as  long  as  the 
banks  are  uncovered ;  it  then  sets  towards  Arcouest  point.  At  about  20 
minutes  before  high  water  an  eddy  comes  from  Paimpol  bay,  and,  after 
rounding  Arcouest  point,  sets  from  it  with  some  strength  towards  the 
south-east  point  of  Brehat,  and  also  crosses  the  eastern  part  of  Ferlas 
channel  towards  Kerpont  channel  Its  i-ate  decreases  about  the  time  of 
high  water,  but  it  resumes  its  strength  as  soon  as  the  ebb  stream  begins. 
The  latter  stream  takes  the  direction  of  this  eddy  until  the  banks  are 
uncovered,  when  it  runs  to  the  westward  in  the  direction  of  the  channel. 


CHAp.x.]  BIVIEBE    BE    PONTBIEUX.  435 

BIVlSlRE  de  PONTRIEUX.— The  northern  entrance  to  this 
river  is  between  the  north-east  part  of  the  Roc'h-ar-Bel  ledge  and  the 
northern  part  of  the  Horaine  ledge.  The  river  may  also  be  approached 
from  the  eastward  through  Ferlas  channel,  which  is  comprised  between  the 
southern  shore  of  Brehat  and  the  main-land,  and  is  practicable  for  vessels 
of  large  draught  when  in  charge  of  local  pilots  from  half  flood  to  half-ebb, 
but  only  coasters  can  use  it  at  low-water  springs. 

Various  anchorages  in  the  entrance  of  this  river  afford  refuge  to  vessels 
of  draught,  but  they  are  difficult  of  access  on  the  ebb,  when  they 
should  not  be  attempted  without  a  pilot.  As  the  holding  ground  is  bad 
and  the  streams  rapid  in  the  middle  of  the  river,  a  berth  should  be  taken 
as  near  as  possible  to  the  edge  of  the  mud-banks  on  either  side. 

Fomelian  road  lies  on  the  left  bank  of  the  river  about  6  miles  within 
the  entrance,  and  the  marks  for  the  best  anchorage  in  it  are  the  guard- 
house on  Arcouest  point  in  line  with  the  beacon  on  the  Moguedhier  rock, 
and  the  old  mill  on  Brehat  just  open  to  the  northward  of  the  enclosure  on 
Verte  isle;  a  vessel  should  moor  here  north  and  south.  There  is  also 
anchorage  to  the  north-east  of  this  road,  near  the  outer  edge  of  the  mud- 
banks  which  uncover  as  far  as  the  line  on  which  the  pyramid  on  the  Croix 
rock  is  in  one  with  Loguivi  mill ;  moor  here  W.N.W.  and  E.S.E. 

Another  good  and  well  sheltered  anchorage,  in  which  the  streams  have 
not  much  strength,  is  near  the  edge  of  the  mud-banks  to  the  south-east  of 
iois  isle.  The  anchoring  ground  extends  in  a  N.E.  and  S.W.  direction 
from  the  line  on  which  the  beacon  on  Vieille  de  Loguivi  rock  is  in  line 
with  Arcouest  mill,  to  that  on  which  the  northern  mill  of  Brehat  is  in 
line  with  the  beacon  on  the  Trou-blauc  rock  ;  moor  here  also  W.N.W.  and 
E.S.E. 

The  first  anchorage  within  the  river  for  a  vessel  of  large  draught  is  on 
the  right  bank,  to  the  north  and  N.W.  of  a  large  rock  named  Melus, 
which  lies  fronting  the  Douane  or  custom-house  office  on  the  Eoc'h-ar-On. 
There  is  room  for  two  moderate  sized  vessels  between  Bodic  tower  and  Sabot- 
du-Sud  rock  ;  also  excellent  holding  gi'ound  on  both  sides  the  river  out  of 
the  strength  of  the  streams  southward  of  Coat-Mer  cove,  and  to  the  south- 
west of  a  water-miU  abreast  the  cove.  The  above  tower  is  a  large  white 
pyramid  erected  half-way  up  the  left  bank  of  the  river  about  one  mile 
to  the  south-east  of  Bois  isle,  and  is  one  of  the  leading  marks  for  the 
entrance. 

The  port  of  L^zardrieux,  situated  on  the  left  bank  of  the  river,  nearly 
2^  miles  above  the  custom-house  office  on  the  Roc'h-ar-On,  is  full  of 
rocks  and  dries  out  at  aU  tides.  Vessels  of  the  smallest  draught  are 
neaped  in  it  for  4  or  5  days  ;  but  at  its  entrance,  among  the  rocks,  there 

E  B  2 


436        CAPE  PEEHEL   TO   LBS   H:^AUX  LIGHTHOUSE,      [chai-.  x. 

is  a  bottom  of  soft  mud,  on  which  two  or  three  coasters  cao  lie  without 
bein^  neaped. 

Vessels  can  generally  remain  afloat  io  a  small  channel  between  this 
port  and  a  i-ockj  ledge  la  the  middle  of  the  river.  Those  bound  up  to 
Pontrleux  also  anchor  here  when  they  arrive  at  tlie  neaps,  or  when  at  the 
springs  they  hare  to  cross  the  difficult  passages  io  the  river,  which  cannot 
be  done  without  the  aid  of  a  local  pilot.  The  first  of  these  passages, 
named  Ar-Toul-Tane,  is  at  a  sudden  turn  the  river  takes  4  cables  to  the 
southward  of  Lfzardrieux  suspension  bridge,  which  is  elevated  108  leet 
above  the  lowest  tides.  The  second  passage  is  in  the  turn  of  the  river 
nnder  the  high  land  and  the  ch&teau  de  la  Boche-Jugut. 

The  little  port  of  Pontrieux  is  on  the  right  bank  of  the  river,  abont 
half  a  mile  below  the  town  and  8  miles  above  Xiezardrieux  bridge.  The 
berths  at  the  foot  of  the  quay  dry  about  22^  feet  above  the  level  of  the 
lowest  tides. 

LIG-HTS. — On  Paon  point,  at  the  north-east  extremity  of  Br4hat 
isle,  is  eshibiled  at  an  elevation  of  67  feet  above  high  water,  ajixed  red 
light,  showing  a  duster  ofxohUe  rays  throug_h  an  arc  of  8°,  or  between  the 
bearings  of  N.  25°  J  W.,  and  N.  33°  \  W.,  and  in  clear  weather  should  be 
visible  from  a  distance  of  12  miles ;  the  red  light  should  be  visible  from  a 
distance  of  8  miles,  and  on  Roscdo  hillock  of  the  same  island,  at  a  distance 
of  1,768  yards  W.  by  S.  of  the  above  light,  is  another /a«rfrerf  light  90  feet 
high,  and  visible  9  miles. 

On  La  Croix  rock,  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel,  at  an  elevation  of 
45  feet,  is  exhibited  ^Jixed  white  light,  varied  by  a  bright  ^ash  every 
four  seconds,  and  visible  10  miles.  This  light  is  visible  12°  from  centre 
of  channel  each  way. 

On  Bodic  heights,  at  an  elevation  of  176  feet,  is  exhibited  a  /ixed  light 
varied  by  a  bright  fiash  every  four  seconds,  and  visible  12  miles.  Thfa 
light  is  visible  9°  from  centre  of  channel  each  way,  and  should  be  brought 
in  line  with  the  above  flashing  light  when  entering. 

Within  Bodic  lights,  on  the  same  side  of  the  river,  are  two  ^xed  red 
lights,  viz, :  the  outer  and  lower,  from  keeper's  bouse  on  the  extremity  of 
the  peninsula  of  Coat-Mcr,  39  feet  high,  and  visible  from  a  distance 
of  6  miles ;  whilst  the  inner  and  upper  light,  which  lies  722  yards 
S.W.  bj  W.  J  W.  from  the  lower,  is  150  feet  high,  and  visible  8  miles. 
This  latter  light  is  shown  from  a  square  wbite  building,  and  is  visible 
through  an  arc  of  12°  on  each  side  of  the  channel. 

A  life  boat  U  stationed  at  Paon  point, 

Directions. — The  leading  mark  for  the  entrance  of  Pontrieux  river 
is,  Bodic  lighthouse  in  line  with  Croin  lighthouse,  S.W.  by  W.  J  W. 


CHAp.x.]  KIVIERE   DE   PONTRIEUX. — ^DIRECTIONS.  437 

This  mark  will  lead  eastward  of  Eoc'h-ar-Bel,  Mer-du-Castrec,  and  Sirlots 
ledges,  the  latter  having  a  red  bell  buoy  moored  on  its  eastern  extreme, 
and  westward  of  Horaine  and  Echaudes;  on  entering  the  river  it  will 
also  lead  eastward  of  the  beacons  on  Vieille  de  St.  Mode,  Rodello,  Ker- 
rannets,  and  Moguedhier  rocks,  and  westward  of  the  beacons  on  Petit- 
Pen-Azen  Corderie,  and  Freres  rocks.  The  beacon  on  Petit-Pen-Azen 
bears  about  N.E.  ^  N.,  4^  cables  from  the  north  extreme  of  Brehat,  and  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  to  the  north-west  of  it  is  a  dangerous  patch  awash  at  low- 
water  springs.  The  Corderie  beacon  is  on  the  summit  of  a  dangerous  rock 
which  uncovers  about  13  feet,  and  lies  only  three-quarters  of  a  cable  east- 
ward of  the  fairway.  The  beacon  on  the  Moguedhier  is  about  1  ^  cables 
N.  by  W.  of  the  Croix  lighthouse. 

Having  arrived  at  a  position  3  or  4  cables  to  the  north-east  of  the  Croix 
lighthouse,  or  before  the  vessel  is  abreast  the  beacon  on  the  Moguedhier, 
haul  a  little  to  starboard,  to.  pass  a  safe  distance  westward  of  the  Croix 
lighthouse ;  after  which  bring  the  keeper's  house  on  Coat-Mer  peninsula 
in  line  with  the  square  white  tower  of  inner  light,  which  will  lead  to  the 
inner  anchorage  of  Coat-Mer. 

By  night  enter  the  river  with  La  Croix  and  Bodic  lights  in  line,  and 
when  the  Bodic  li^ht  is  hidden  by  La  Croix  Tower  to  an  eye  8  feet  above 
the  sea,  open  out  Bodic  light  to  the  westward,  and  pass  La  Croix  on  that 
side.  Afterwards  proceed  with  the  two  inner  fixed  red  lights  in  line  to 
the  anchorage  of  Coat-Mer. 

Through  Le  Perlas  Channel. — To  run  from  Brehat  road  into 
Pontrieux  river  through  this  channel,  weigh  when  the  rock  at  the  south- 
west point  of  Logodec  isle  has  just  covered  (it  uncovers  22  feet  at  the 
lowest  tides).  Steer  westward  to  pass  midway  between  the  beacon  on  the 
Piliers,  and  that  on  the  Vif- Argent  rocks,  and  half  a  cable  northward  of 
the  summits  of  Ilouray,  Conan,  and  Levret  rocks,  which  latter  border  the 
south  side  of  the  channel,  and  never  cover  ;  if  a  signal  is  made  for  a 
pilot  when  in  their  vicinity,  the  vessel  will  be  boarded  by  fishermen,  who 
will  pilot  her  into  the  river  to  the  southward  of  the  Tranquet  rock. 

There  is  a  passage  also  to  the  eastward  of  the  Tranquet  and  the 
beacon  on  the  Trou-blanc,  named  Trou-blanc  channel,  and  when  the  wind 
allows,  it  will  be  better  to  take  this  route  than  that  to  the  southward  of 
the  Tronguet,  which  it  is  sometimes  dangerous  and  even  difficult  to  do  at 
the  springs.  The  leading  mark  through  this,  the  new  mill  of  Loguivi, 
kept  astern,  between  the  Conan  rock  and  the  steep  declivity  of  tlie  northern 
point  of  Gouern  cove,  S.  f  W. 

Tidal  Streams. — The  tidal  streams  at  the  entrance  of  Pontrieux 
river  have  already  been  noticed  in  (page  409).  Within  the  entrance, 
between  St.  Mode  isle  and  the  Croix  lighthouse,  they  follow  the  direction 


438      CAPE   FREHEL   TO   LES   Hl^ATJX  LIGHTHOrSE.      [chap.  x. 

of  the  channel,  but  to  the  north-east  of  that  isle  they  cross  the  channel 
with  great  strength,  and  it  requires  a  fresh  fair  wind  to  keep  the  leading* 
mark  on. 

LIGHT, — Les  H^aUX  lighthouse  is  erected  on  the  north-east 
part  of  a  rocky  ledge,  named  Heaux  de  Br^hat,  bearing  N.W.  f  N.  nearly 
5  miles  from  the  north  extreme  of  Brehat  isle,  and  N.W.  by  W.  J  W.  6^ 
miles  from  the  beacon  on  the  Horaipe  rock. 

The  general  character  of  the  light  which  is  exhibited  at  an  elevation  of 
148  feet  above  high  water,  h&Jixed  white,  but  two  red  sectors  are  shown, 
one  to  the  north-east,  the  other  to  the  south-east. 

The  north-east  sector  of  light  is  Jiashing  red,  visible  through  an  arc  of 
19°,  or  between  the  bearings  of  S.  68°  W.  and  S.  87°  W.,  showing  over  the 
whole  extent  of  Barnouic  ledge. 

The  south-east  sector  \s  Jixed  red^  visible  through  an  arc  of  32^,  or 
between  the  bearings  of  N.  38°  W.  and  N.  70**  W.,  showing  over  the 
positions  of  la  Horaine,  des  Echaudes^  do  Men-March,  and  du  Ringue- 
Bras  ledges. 

The  intervening  space  of  23°  between  the  red  sectors,  through  which  the 
fixed  white  light  is  visible,  is  free  of  danger,  except  that  of  Eoch-ar-Bel 
shoal,  the  shoalest  part  of  which  has  only  11  feet  on  it  at  very  low 
water. 

The  light  is  dioptric  and  of  the  first  order,  and  should  be  visible  in  clear 
weather  from  a  distance  of  18  miles. 

Vessels  in  the  offing,  with  the  white  sector  of  H^aux  de  Brehat  light  in 
sight,  will  be  clear  of  danger  in  the  channel  between  Barnouic  and  la 
Horaine  ledges. 

Approaching  from  the  eastward,  having  passed  well  to  the  northward  of 
la  Horaine  ledge,  and  crossed  the  line  of  the  leading  lights  of  Bodic  heights 
and  la  Croix  rock  (Trieux  channel),  in  one,  a  north-west  course  may  be 
steered,  and  the  flashing  red  sector  of  light  entered. 


439 


CHAPTER  XL 

LES  HEAUX  LIGHTHOUSE  TO  L'lLE  D'OUESSANT. 


VARIATION  IN  1882. 

lie  de  Bas  -  -  -  -         19°  30'  W. 

He  d'Ouessent        -  -  -        20°  0'  W. 


The  COAST  to  the  westward  of  the  Heaux  lighthouse  is  low,  wind- 
ing, broken,  and  bordered  with  dangers,  which  between  the  lighthouse  and 
the  Sept-Isles  rise  from  soundings  of  about  18  fathoms  at  low  water ;  they 
will,  however,  be  avoided  by  not  bringing  the  lighthouse  to  bear  more 
easterly  than  S.S.E.  when  within  6  miles  westward  of  it,  or  the  lighthouse 
on  the  Sept-Isles  to  the  northward  of  West.* 

Les  SEFT-ILES>  or  Seven  isles,  are  high  and  barren,  and  in  clear 
weather  may  be  seen  21  miles  off.  They  bear  W.  by  N.  ^  N.  14  miles 
from  the  H6aux  lighthouse. 

LIGHT. — ^From  a  square  lighthouse,  52  feet  high,  on  the  east  end  of 
the  southernmost  isle,  named  lle-aux-Moines  (Monks  isle),  is  exhibited  at 
an  elevation  of  184  feet,  a  fixed  light,  varied  every  three  minutes  by  a 
bright  flash.  The  flashes  are  preceded  and  followed  by  short  eclipses 
which  do  not  appear  total  within  the  distance  of  6  miles.  The  light, 
dioptric  and  of  the  third  order,  should  be  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a 
distance  of  14  miles,  except  when  bearing  about  W,  by  S.,  when  it  is 
obscured  by  Rougic  isle  and  the  east  end  of  Bono  isle. 

A  Life  Boat  is  stationed  at  the  He-aux-Moines. 

PLATEAU  des  TRIAGOZ.— This  dangerous  ledge  is  about 
4^  miles  in  extent  W.  by  N.  \  N.  and  E.  by  S.  \  S.,  and  about  a  mile 
broad ;  its  eastern  end,  on  which  are  high  rocks  always  uncovered,  lies 
W.N.W.  nearly  5  miles  from  the  Sept-Iles.  There  are  numerous  rocky 
patches  on  the  body  of  the  ledge,  but  near  its  western  end  there  is  one, 
named  the  Fouillie,  with  only  14  feet  on  it,  from  which  the  Triagoz  light- 
house is  distant  3  miles  S.E.  \  E.;  He  de  Bas  lighthouse  15  miles 
W.  by  S.  ^  S. ;  and  the  highest  rock  at  the  east  end  of  the  ledge,  3  miles 
S.E.  by  E.    The  summit  of  this  latter  rock,  named  the  Fourchie,  is  34 

*  See  Admiralty  Charts : — ^North  coast  of  France,  sheet  Yin.,  He  d'Oaessaut  to  Leg 
Sept-Hes,  No.  2,644;  scale,  m  =«  0*5  inch,  and  Chai^^o  Islands  and  coast  of  £Vanc€v> 
No.  2,669  6. ;  scale,  m  =»  0*5  inch. 


440    LES  HEAUX  LIGHTHOUSE  TO  l'iLE  J)'oUESSANT.  [chap.  xi. 

feet  above  the  highest  tides.     The  channel  between  this  ledge  and  the 
Sept-Iles  is  4  miles  wide>  safe  and  clear  of  danger. 

LIGHT- — ^A  lighthouse  92  feet  high  stands  on  Guen  Bras  rock, 
Plateau  des  Triagoz,  and  from  it  at  an  elevation  of  98  feet  above  high 
water,  is  exhibited  a  fixed  Jight  varied  bjr  a  flash  of  alternate  red  and 
white  every  half  minute,  and  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of 
12  miles. 

Caution, — ^A  vessel  ininning  to  fhe  eastward  with  the  flood  stream 
at  night,  should  as  soon  as  the  light  on  Bas  isle  is  sighted,  steer  so  to  pass 
well  to  the  northward  of  it,  not  bringing  it  to  the  westward  of  W.  by 
S.  \  S.  until  the  light  on  the  Sept-Iles  bears  S.E.,  in  order  to  clear  the 
Triagoz  ledge  ;  for  this  stream  sets  strong  to  the  south-east,  and  does  not 
turn  in  the  offing  until  3^  hours  after  the  time  of  high  water  on  the  shore. 

RIVlSlRE  de  TREGXJIER,  the  entrance  to  which  is  3^  miles 
to  the  westward  of  the  H6aux  lighthouse,  affords  excellent  shelter,  but  is 
difficult  of  access  to  sailing  vessels,  and  with  gales  from  N.N.W.  to  E.N.E. 
a  heavy  sea  runs  at  the  entmnce  on  the  ebb.  The  three  channels  leading  to 
the  entrance  are  named  Pas  de  la  Gaine,  Grande  Passe,  and  Passe  du  N.E. 

Passe  de  la  Gaine^  the  most  easterly  of  these  channels,  is  practi- 
cable for  vessels  of  about  14  feet  draught  after  3J  hours  flood,  and  will  be 
found  useful  when  bound  into  the  river  from  the  eastward,  if  there  is 
sufficient  wind  to  stem  the  tide.  The  entrance  is  comprised  between 
the  H6aux  and  Sark  rocks,  and  the  leading  mark  through  is  a  large  house, 
standing  alone  to  the  northward  of  Plougrescan,  in  line  with  the  summit 
of  Men-Noblance,  bearing  W.  \  S.  By  following  this  direction  a  vessel 
will  pass  nearly  half  a  mile  southward  of  H^ux  lighthouse  and  over  Pont 
de  la  Gaine,  which  is  a  narrow  cut  in  the  ledge  extending  from  the  south 
end  of  the  .Ouono  rocks  with  only  a  foot  water  in  it  at  the  lowest  tides. 

Grande  Passe  leads  to  the  entrance  of  the  river  from  the  north- 
west, and  is  practicable  for  vessels  of  any  draught.  When  entering  by  this 
channel,  keep  St.  Antoine  mill  exactly  in  line  with  the  mill  of  Port-de 
la-Chaine,  S.S.E.,  and  the  vessel  will  pass  about  3  cables  eastward  of 
Renauds  rocks,  which  never  cover ;  over  a  patch  of  4  fathoms^  which  with 
the  leading  tnark  on,  is  the  least  depth  in  this  channel  at  the  lowest  tides  ; 
about  a  cable  to  the  eastward  of  Pierre  a  PAnglais  rock,  which  uncovers 
8  feet ;  and  2  cables  westward  of  the  beacon  on  the  Cor>)eau  rock,  which 
uncovers  19  feet. 

By  night  the  red  and  white  lights  in  line  S.S.E.  lead  through  the 
Grande  Passe. 

Passe  du  N.E. — The  large  spire  of  Treguier  cathedral  kept 
exactly  in  line  with  the  tower  on  the  Skeiviec  rock,  S.W.  \  W.  will,  with 
an  easterly  wind  on  the  flood,  lead  to  the  entrance  of  the  river  ;  but 


caAP.  XI.]         KIVIERE   DE   TREGUIF.R. — DIRECTIONS.  441 

as  this  line  of  direction  cresses  the  Jument  ledge,  the  western  extreme  of 
which  lies  N.W,  J  W.  nearly  2  miles  from  the  Heaux  lighthouse,  it  must 
be  left  (both  on  entering  and  leaving  the  river)  to  pass  to  the  westward  of 
the  ledge.  If  not  drawing  more  than  17  feet,  the  vessel  having  rounded 
the  western  extreme  of  the  Jument,  can,  by  steering  with  the  above  lead- 
ing mark  on,  cross  the  Basses  de  Roch  Hir  when  the  Petit  Roch  Hir  is 
covered.  This  rock  lies  on  the  north-east  part  of  this  ledge,  and  uncovers 
13  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  « 

LIGHTS. — Three  lights  are  established  at  the  entrance  of  Treguier 
river.  On  point  de  la  Chaine  Vi, fixed  white  light  is  exhibited  at  an  eleva- 
tion of  36  feet  above  high  water,  from  the  keeper's  house  at  Moulin,  visible 
6  miles  ;  near  St.  Antoine  mill,  is  Vi,  fixed  red  light  105  feet  above  high  water, 
and  visible  9  miles.  The  red  light  is  distant  three-quarters  of  a  mile 
S.S.E.  of  the  white  light,  and  when  in  line  lead  through  the  Grande  Passe. 

From  a  lighthouse  63  feet  high  erected  on  La  Corne  rock,  east  side  of 
the  entrance  of  Treguier  river,  a  fixed  light  elevated  38  feet  above  high 
water,  is  exhibited,  showing  sectors  of  green,  red,  and  white,  as  follows : — 
ffreen  on  a  W.S.  westerley  bearing,  embracing  an  angle  of  7^°  or  between  the 
Small  Pen-ar-Guezec  and  the  shoal  of  port  Beni :  red  eastward  of  the 
green  sector;  and  white  on  an  E.N.  easterley  bearing,  embracing  an- angle 

The  green  light  should  be  visible  4  to  6  miles. 

AncllOrageS. — There  are  three  well-sheltered  anchorages  from  wind 
and  tide  in  Trieguier  river,  which,  from  abreast  the  Skeiviec  rock,  lying 
1^  miles  within  the  entrance,  to  the  town  of  Treguier,  is  deep  enough  for 
coasters  always  to  remain  afloat.  The  best  and  most  convenient  of  these 
is  the  Palamos  anchorage,  lying  about  2  miles  within  the  Skeiviec,  in  which 
the  depths  are  from  2\  to  4  fathoms  at  the  lowest  tides. 

Directions. — ^^  steering  through  either  of  the  above  channels  for 
the  entrance  of  Treguier  river,  keep  the  leading  mark  on  until  the  large 
spire  of  Treguier  cathedral  is  in  line  with  the  Skeiviec  rock,  S.W.  \  W. 
This  latter  mark  will  lead  into  the  river,  but  before  running  in  a  calcu- 
lation must  be  made  that  the  vessel's  draught  will  admit  of  her  passing 
over  an  8  feet  patch,  lying  a  cable  outside  the  ledge  bordering  the  eastern  side 
of  Er  isle,  and  also  over  the  Pie  bank  on  which  there  are  only  6  feet  at  the 
lowest  tides.  After  passing  between  the  beacon  on  the  Taureau  and  Corne 
rock  (these  rocks  lie  about  1^  miles  within  the  entrance  and  between  them 
the  deep-water  channel  is  not  more  than  three-quarters  of  a  cable  wide) ; 
and  to  the  southward  of  the  Taureau  bank,  steer  up  the  river  keeping 
midway  between  the  rocks  bordering  its  banks. 

At  night  vessels  entering  Treguier  river  should  steer  with  the  light 
of  Point  de  la  Chaine  in  line  with  the  light  at  St.  Antoiiie  bearing  S.S.E., 


112    LES  H]£aUX  lighthouse  to  l'iLE  d'oUESSANT.  [chap.  XI. 

until  the  green  light  of  La  Corne  is  seen,  then  steer  for  La  Come  light, 
keeping  within  its  green  sector.  Pass  a  short  distance  westward  of  La 
Come  rock  and  anchor  within  the  white  sector  of  light,  which  marks  the 
inner  anchorage. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change  at  the  entrance  of  Tr^guier 
river  at  5  h.  22  m. ;  equinoctial  springs  rise  about  35  feet,  and  neaps  2 1 
feet.  Off  the  town  of  Tr^guier  it  is  high  water  at  ,5  h,  32  m.  ;  springs  rise 
2o  feet,  neaps  18^  feet. 

The  flood  stream  which  sets  into  this  river,  rounds  the  northern  shore 
of  £r  isle,  until  the  bank  connecting  this  isle  to  the  main  at  low  water 
is  covered,  which  takes  place  about  the  period  of  half  flood  ;  it  then 
slackens  at  the  entrance  of  the  river  and  runs  to  the  eastward.  The  rate 
of  the  flood  within  the  river  is  never  more  than  3  knots ;  that  of  the  ebb 
is  rather  less. 

PORT  BLANC. — ^From  the  western  point  of  the  entrance  to  the 
river  Tr^guier  the  coast  trends  West  9  miles  to  Perros  bay  and  is  fronted 
by  innumerable  rocks  both  above  and  under  water.  About  midway  is  a 
little  inlet,  named  port  Blanc,  with  Leverettes  and  St.  Gildas  isles  on  the 
east  side  of  its  entrance,  and  ChS-teau  Neuf  isle  and  the  Four  ledge  on 
the  west  side.  The  port  is  well  sheltered  and  affords  safe  refuge  during 
westerly  gales  ;  with  north-easterly  winds  the  anchorage  in  it  is  considered 
preferable  to  that  in  Perros  bay. 

The  leading  mark  into  this  port  is  Comtesse  mill  in  line  with  the 
centre  of  a  little  white  sandy  beach,  situated  close  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Voleur  rock,  at  the  head  of  the  port,  S.  |  E.  A  vessel  will  not  have  less 
than  22  feet  at  low  water  by  anchoring  north-west  of  a  large  rock, 
named  the  Louet,  lying  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  port.  If  she  can 
take  the  ground,  good  beaching  places  will  be  found  to  the  east  and 
E.S.E.  of  the  Voleur,  where  the  bottom  is  10^  feet  above  the  lowest 
tides. 

ANSE  de  FESRROS,  situated  4  miles  westward  of  port  Blanc,  affords 
good  shelter  from  westerly  winds  to  vessels  that  can  take  the  ground. 
Those  of  light  draught  can  lie  afloat  in  the  outer  part  of  the  bay, 
between  which  and  the  head  of  the  bay,  called  the  port,  the  beaching 
places  are  excellent,  on  a  bottom  of  muddy  sand  elevated  about  9^  feet 
above  the  lowest  tides.  Vessels  sometimes  run  into  the  port  for  shelter, 
but  they  risk  being  neaped.  Tom^,  a  narrow  islet  nearly  a  mile  in  length, 
lies  a  mile  to  the  north-west  of  the  western  point  of  the  bay,  and  its 
highest  part  is  about  a  third  of  the  length  of  the  isle  from  its  north 
extreme. 

A  Life  Boat  is  stationed  at  the  head  of  the  bay. 


CHAr.xi.]  ANSE   DE   PERROS. — DIRECTIONS.  143 

LIGHTS. — At  Nantouar,  in  Perros  bay,  iwo^xed  white  lights  are 
established,  the  one  near  the  shore  being  33  feet  high  and  visible  10  miles ; 
whilst  the  inner  light,  which  is  at  Kerjean  750  yards  from  the  former,  is 
253  feet  high,  and  visible  12  miles. 

In  addition  to  the  above,  two  ^xed  white  lights  are  established  at  the 
port  of  Perros  bay,  viz.,  a  light  near  Pigeon-house,  elevated  89  feet,  and 
visible  12  miles;  and  an  inner  light,  at  Kerprigent,  3,133  yards  from  the 
above,  elevated  259  feet,  and  visible  12  miles. 

Directions. — ^A  vessel  bound  into  Perros  bay  from  the  eastward, 
will  pass  to  the  north-west  of  the  outer  edge  of  the  Four  ledge  by  not 
going  to  the  southward  of  the  line  on  which  the  high  steeple  of  N6tre 
Dame  de  Clart^  church  is  in  one  with  the  highest  part  of  Tom6  isle, 
W.  ^  S.  As  this  mark  leads  close  to  the  southward  of  the  rocks  which 
extend  more  than  half  a  mile  E.S.E.  from  the  north  end  of  Tom6,  when 
near  them  haul  to  the  southward,  and  steer  nearly  parallel  to  the  eastern 
side  of  the  isle,  until  the  beacon  on  Pierre  du  Chenal  rock  bears 
W.  by  S.  J  S. ;  this  rock  lies  S.W.  ^  S.  about  half  a  mile  from  the  south 
extreme  of  Tome  and  uncovers  14  feet  at  the  lowest  tides.  Or,  having 
passed  the  western  point  of  the  Four  ledge,  haul  to  the  southward,  ta'king 
care  not  to  bring  the  beacon  to  the  westward  of  this  bearing  to  avoid  the 
Morville  rock,  which  uncovers  5  feet.  When  within  half  a  mile  of  the 
beacon,  keep  it  a  little  on  the  starboard  bow  to  pass  to  the  southward  of 
the  Pierre  Jean  Rouzic  rock,  which  lies  within  this  distance  to  the  north- 
east of  the  beacon,  and  uncovers  only  a  foot.  After  passing  close  to  the 
southward  of  the  beacon,  if  of  light  draught,  the  vessel  can  anchor  about 
1^  cables  to  the  south-west  of  it,  where  the  depths  are  11  to  14  feet  at  the 
lowest  tides,  or  if  capable  of  taking  the  ground  she  can  proceed  to  one  of 
the  beaching  places. 

When  approaching  the  bay  from  the  north-west,  steer  for  the  south 
extreme  of  Tome,  passing  to  the  westward  of  two  pointed  rocks  named 
the  Bilzic,  which  lie  nearly  a  mile  off  its  western  side  and  uncover  22  and 
32  feet.  Directly  the  beacon  on  Pierre  du  Chenal  is  seen,  steer  for  it 
on  a  S.S.E.  bearing,  and  it  will  lead  nearly  a  quarter  of  a  mile  east- 
ward of  the  beacon  on  Bernard  rock,  lying  nearly  that  distance  off  the 
west  point  of  the  bay.  Four  patches,  the  highest  of  which  is  awash  at 
low  water,  lie  between  this  latter  rock  and  the  Pierre  du  Chenal ;  there- 
fore, at  that  time  of  tide,  do  not  proceed  farther  to  the  southward  than  to 
have  Perros  church  opening  south  of  the  hill  on  the  western  point  of 
the  bay. 

By  Night. — The  Nantouar  and  Kerjean  lights  in  line  indicate  the 
direction  of  the  western  passage  into  Perros  bay ;  the  Pigeon-house  and 
Kerprigent  lights  in  line,  the  direction  of  the  eastern  passage.    Vessels 


411    LES  UI^ATJX  LIGHTHOUSE  TO  L'iLE  d'oUESSANT.  [cuxv.ilu 

intending  to  enter  the  port  of  Perros  by  the  western  passage  should 
leave  the  line  of  direction  of  the  two  formar  b'ghts  a  little  before  Pigeon- 
house  and  Kerprigent  lights  come  in  sight ;  the  two  latter  lights  in  line 
lead  in. 

PLOXTMANACH  LIGHT.— On  Mean  Ruz,  off  the  point  of 
the  small  port  of  Ploumanach,  at  an  elevation  of  69  feet  above  high  water, 
is  exhibited  Si, fixed  red  light,  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of 
7  miles. 

Tides. — l^t  is  high  water,  fuU  and  change,  at  Ploumanach  at  o  h.  15  ni. ; 
spings  rise  24 J  feet,  neaps  18^  feet. 

The  Coast. — At  6  miles  W.S.W.  of  the  Sept  isles  is  Grande  He 
surrounded  with  numerous  other  isles  and  rocks.  Between  this  isle  and 
Primel  point,  which  bears  W.  \  S.  10^  miles,  the  coast  falls  back  to  the 
south-east  and  forms  a  deep  bay,  the  shores  of  which  are  fringed  by 
numerous  rocks,  many  of  them  being  upwards  of  \\  miles  from  the 
land.  There  is  a  good  anchorage  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  bay,  off  the 
mouth  of  the  river  Lannion,  for  which  gee  directions  in  (page  446),  To 
the  i^estward  of  Primel  point  is  Morlaix  bay,  at  the  head  of  which  are 
the  entrances  to  the  rivers  Morlaix  and  St.  Pol-de-L^on.  Within  the 
entrance  of  the  former  river  is  Morlaix  road,  where  there  is  anchorage  for 
vessels  of  the  largest  draught. 

PLATEAU  de  la  M£L0INE  is  the  name  given  to  a 
group  of  rocky  heads  with  deep  water  between  them,  which  commences 
N.  by  E.  J  E.  IJ  miles  from  Primel  point,  and  extends  for  a  distance 
of  5  miles  in  an  E.  by  N.  direction,  forming  a  most  dangerous  obstacle 
to  vessels  entering  Morlaix  from  the  eastward.  The  western  extreme  of 
the  ledge  is  called  the  Tr^pieds,  the  highest  vovk  of  which  uncovers  9  feet, 
and  the  marks  for  it  are,  the  steeple  of  Plougaznon  church  in  line  with 
Carrec-au-Ti  rock  S.  \  E.,  and  the  two  spires  of  St.  Pol -de-Leon  church 
in  line  with  Bisayers  rock,  W.  by  S.  A  black  buoy  is  moored  on  the 
western  extreme  of  the  Trepieds. 

RIVIERE  de  MORLAIX.—The  entrance  to  Morlaix  river  is 
on  the  eastern  side  of  Morlaix  bay,  but  its  navigation  is  too  intricate  to 
be  attempted  without  a  pilot.  There  are  two  channels  leading  into  it,  the 
eastern  of  which  is  named  Chenal  de  Treguier,  and  the  western  Grand 
Chenal ;  the  former,  although  not  so  deep  as  the  latter,  is  generally  pre- 
ferred by  coasters  as  its  width  will  admit  of  tacking.  The  posiiion  of  the 
little  port  of  Penpoull,  on  the  western  shore  of  the  bay,  is  easily  known  by 
the  two  lofty  spires  of  St.  Pol-de-L6on  cathedral,  situated  about  half  a 
mile  to  the  westward  of  it.* 

--  —  

*  See  Admiralty  chart,  channels  and  road  of  Morlaix,  No.  2,744 ;  scale,  m=  5  inches. 


CHAP.  XI.]  EIVIERE  DE  MORLAIX. — DIRECTIONS.  446 

LIGHTS. — To  enter  Moriaix  river  at  night,  two  lights  of  the  third 
and  fourth  order  are  exhibited,  one  from  Noire  islet,  lying  just  within  the 
entrance  of  the  river,  4  cables  to  the  soulh-east  of  the  Chateau  du  Taureau 
isle,  and  the  other  from  Lande  tower  on  the  left  bank  of  the  river,  and 
when  in  line  S.S.W.  J  W.  they  lead  to  the  entrance.  That  on  Noire  isle 
is  a  fixed  white  light,  varied  eveiy  two  minutes  by  a  bright  flashy  pre- 
ceded and  followed  by  a  short  eclipse ;  it  is  elevated  46  feet  above  high 
water  level,  and  is  visible  from  a*  distance  of  10  miles.  Lande  tower 
exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  285  feet  above  the  same  level,  a  fixed  white 
light,  visible  in  clear  weather  13  miles. 

Besides  these  two  lights  there  is  a  small  fixed  red  li^ht  shown  from 
the  southern  side  of  Chateau  du  Taureau  isle,  to  light  the  northern  part  of 
Moriaix  road;  and  9k fixed  white  light  from  Louet  island,  visible  10 
miles. 

Fog  SignaL — In  foggy  weather  a  bell  is  sounded  from  Noire  isle 
every  quarter  of  an  hour,  for  a  space  of  two  minutes. 

DirOCtionS. — if  intending  to  enter  Moriaix  river  by  the  Treguier 
channel,  a  calculation  must  be  made  that  the  tide  has  risen  sufficiently  for 
the  vessel  to  pass  over  a  patch  nearly  awash  at  the  lowest  tides,  lying  in 
the  narrows  of  the  channel  with  the  leading  mark  on  abreast  the  beacon 
on  Blanche  isle.  Directly  Lande  Tower  is  made  out,  steer  to  the  south- 
ward with  it  in  line  with  the  summit  of  Noire  isle  bearing  S.S.W.  f  W., 
and  it  will  lead  westward  of  the  buoy  on  the  Tr^pieds  ledge  ;  to  the  east- 
ward of  Pierre-Noire  and  Grand  Areman  rocks,  both  of  which  are  marked 
by  beacons  ;  and  westward  of  the  beacons  on  the  Petit- Aremen,  and  the 
Manou  rocks  up  to  the  entrance  of  the  river.  When  abreast  the  beacon 
on  Blanche  isle,  steer  W.S.W.  until  the  western  partof  Ricard  isle  touches 
the  eastern  part  of  Chateau  du  Taureau  isle,  which  is  the  line  of  direction 
of  Moriaix  road,  and  also  of  the  channel  into  the  river. 

When  steering  for  the  entrance  of  the  channel  at  night,  endeavour 
to  bring  the  fixed  light  on  Lande  tower  in  line  with  the  flashing  light  on 
Noire  isle,  S.S.W.  f  W.,  as  soon  as  they  are  made  out,  in  order  to  pass 
to  the  westward  of  the  Trepieds.  Follow  this  direction  until  the  red 
light  on  the  southern  face  of  the  Chateau  du  Taureau  bears  West,  then  steer 
towards  it,  keeping  it  on  the  starboard  bow  until  it  bears  North,  when  the 
vessel  will  be  in  Moriaix  road  and  can  anchor  as  convenient. 

Entering  by  Grand  Chenal  into  Moriaix  river,  steer  towards 
the  eastern  end  of  Bas  isle  until  a  double  headed  rock,  named  Tisaoson 
isle,  lying  E.S.E.  three-quarters  of  a  mile  from  the  eastern  extreme  of  the 
isle  is  made  out ;  with  this  rock  bearing  W.  by  N.  about  3  miles,  and  the 
?mall  tower  on  the  Duon  rocks  W.  by  S.  }  S.  1 J  miles,  the  vessel  will  be 
at  the  entrance  of  the  channel  and  nearly  three-quarters  of  a  mile  N.E.  \  E. 


H8     LES  H^AUX  LIGHTHOUSE  TO  L ILB  d'OUESSANT.  [chjip.  xr. 

from  2  to  3  fathoms  at  io^r  water.  There  is  a  long  and  narrow  swatchway 
wich  11  to  15  feet  in  it,  between  the  northern  edge  of  the  shallow  shifting 
sand-bank  named  La  Traverse,  which  bounds  the  anchorage  to  the  east* 
ward,  and  the  sand-bank  which  borders  the  south  side  of  the  isle  ;  and 
although  the  streams  in  it  run  with  great  strength,  yet  coasters  prefer 
anchoring  there,  as  they  are  well  sheltered,  and,  if  necessary,  they  can  be 
beached  on  the  sands  in  Porz  Kernoch.  where  the  bottom  dries  only  6  or  7 
feet  above  the  lowest  tides. 

Directions. — When  bound  through  the  channel  between  Bas  i?le 
and  the  coast  from  the  westward,  St.  Barbe  chapel  in  line  with  the 
Loup  rock  S.E.  j  E.  easterlj-,  will  lead  northward  of  the  Lavandieres 
rocks,  which  never  cover,  and  in  not  less  than  5  fathoms  at  low  water,  until 
nearly  up  to  the  red  beacon  on  the  Oignon  rock,  which  uncovers  22  feet 
and  must  be  left  to  the  southward.  When  about  a  cable  westward  of  this 
rock,  or  as  soon  as  the  chapel  of  N6tre-dame-de-Bons-Secours,  on  the 
southern  side  of  Bas  isle,  appears  nearly  midway  between  the  mo^  eastern 
mill  and  the  next  mill  to  the  westward,  steer  E.S.E.  for  the  anchorage. 

The  services  of  a  pilot  are  indispensable  when  bound  through  this 
channel  from  the  eastward.  The  small  tower  on  Bas  isle  in  one  with  a 
white  painted  mill  will  lead  to  the  entrance  and  to  the  southward  of 
Pighet  isle,  after  passing  which  there  is  an  anchorage  of  small  extent 
over  a  bottom  of  gravel  and  broken  shells  where  a  vessel  can  wait  for 
favourable  moment  either  for  running  through  the  channel  or  for  entering 
port  Roscoff. 

PORT  de  ROSCOPP.— This  little  tidal  harbom-  is  situated  about 
a  mile  S.S.E.  of  the  south-east  extreme  of  Bas  isle,  and  the  grounding 
places  in  it  dry  from  12  to  19  feet  above  the  lowest  tides. 

Approaching  port  Roscoff  from  the  eastward,  keep  the  south  east 
exti'eme  of  Bas  isle  open  northward  of  Tisaoson  isle,  until  within  half  a 
mile  of  the  latter  isle,  when  steer  for  Bloscon  point,  on  the  summit  of  which 
stands  St.  Barbe  chapel.  Pass  about  half  a  cable  northward  of  the  fortified 
islet  at  the  foot  of  this  point,  and  run  through  the  channel  limited  by  this 
islet  on  the  eastern  side,  and  by  two  beacons  on  the  western  side ;  the 
outer  beacon  stands  only  164  yards  to  the  north-west  of  the  islet.  This 
channel  is  difficult  to  navigate  even  at  high  water,  and  impracticable  on 
the  ebb. 

LIGHT.— A>a:er/  white  light,  elevated  22  feet  above  high  water  (20 
feet  above  the  ground),  is  exhibited  from  an  iron  standard^  on  the  extreme 
end  of  the  mole,  Roscoff  harbour,  and  should  be  visible  in  clear  weather 
from  a-  distance  of  7  miles. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  port  Roscoff  at 
4  h.  49  m.     The  tide  rises  at  the  anchornge  in  the  eastern  part  of  the 


cflAP.xT.]  PORT  DE  KOSCOFF. — ILE  DE  SIEC.  449 

channel  between  this  port  and  Bas  isle,  30  feet  at  great  springs,  23  feet  at 
ordinary  springs,  and  17  feet  at  ordinary  neaps;  neaps  range  about 
11  feet. 

ThO  COAST  between  Bas  isle  and  the  isle  of  Ouessant,  which  is 
43  miles  to  the  westward,  is  moderately  high,  and  in  clear  weather  may  be 
seen  15  or  18  miles  off;  but  it  is  fronted  with  rocks,  some  of  which  lie 
nearly  3  miles  in  offing,  and  from  the  distance  have  the  appearance  of 
houses.  Unless  absolutely  necessary,  it  will  be  prudent  to  give  this  part 
of  the  coast  a  berth  of  5  or  6  miles,  especially  at  night,  when  it  should  not 
be  approached  within  36  fathoms  at  low  water,  with  a  bottom  of  gray  sand 
mixed  with  small  pebbles  of  various  colours  resembling  nuts. 

When  it  blows  hard  on  a  weather  tide,  a  berth  of  at  least  2  miles  should 
be  given  to  the  north  coast  of  Bas  isle,  to  avoid  crossing  a  sort  of  race 
produced  by  the  uneven  bottom  extending  from  the  northern  shore  of  that 
isle. 

TIDAL  STREAMS.— Between  Bas  isle  and  the  isle  of  Ouessant 
the  flood  stream  sets  east  and  the  ebb  west.  In  the  offing  the  flood  turns 
about  2f  hours  after  the  time  of  high  water  at  Forsal,  which,  at  full  and 
change,  is  about  4  h.  0  m. 

He  de  SieC— This  islet,  which  lies  S.W.  J  W.  2|  miles  from  the 
west  extreme  of  Bas  isle,  is  half  a  mile  long  E.S.E.  and  W.N.W.,  and 
as  it  is  connected  with  the  land  by  a  rocky  ledge,  which  uncovers  at  low 
water,  forms  an  excellent  anchorage  completely  out  of  the  tide ;  it  is  much 
frequented  by  coasting  vessels,  with  the  wind  from  N.E.  round  easterly  to 
S.SJS.  Approaching  the  anchorage  from  the  westward,  bring  the  spire  of 
St.  Pol  de  Jj&on  college  in  line  with  the  Querelevran  rock,  which  lies  one 
cable  south  of  the  west  point  of  the  isle,  and  when  Golc'hedec  rock,  lying 
2  cables  N.W.  of  the  isle,  bears  N.N.E.  about  4  cables  distant  anchor  in  5 
to  6  fathoms,  sand.  Coming  from  the  northward,  bring  the  tower  of  Cleder 
church  in  line  with  the  eastern  point  of  the  entrance  of  port  Nevez  S.W. 
by  S.,  this  line  will  pass  3  cables  west  of  Grolc'hedec  rock,  and  when  the 
former  leading  marks  come  on  steer  in  for  the  anchorage. 

Grdve  de  Goulven. — ^This  deep  sandy  bay,  lying  W..  \  S.  lOJ 
miles  from  the  lighthouse  on  Bas  isle,  affords  shelter  from  westerly  winds 
to  vessels  that  can  take  the  ground,  but  it  is  difficult  of  access,  its  entrance 
being  full  of  rocks. 

PORT  de  PONTUSVAL,  the  entrance  to  which  is  IJ  miles  to 
the  westward  of  the  Gr^ve  de  Goulven,  is  the  only  place  on  this  part  of 
the  coast  where  the  crew  of  a  vessel,  driven  on  lee  shore,  could  hope  to 
be  saved.  It  will  berth  a  large  number  of  coasters,  but  the  bottom  is  hard, 
and  in  strong  gales  from  the  northward  it  is  not  an  unfrequent  occurrence 
to  see  them  wrecked  at  their  anchors. 

Q  7049.  F  r 


m     •* 


150       LES  UE^UX  LIGUTUOUSE  TO  ILE  D*OUESSANT.     [chat.  zx. 

The  port  complcitf/lj  dries  out  as  far  as  abreast  the  western  entrance 
point,  aud  thence  the  bottom  graftluully  rises  to  the  head  of  the  port.  A 
veh.44*l  will  be  well  shcltfTcd  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  port  in  a  little  bay 
named  La  Chambro,  in  which  the  l>ottom  dries  13^  feet  above  the  lowest 
tides.  The  least  depth  at  low  water  in  the  entrance  channel,  until  abreast 
the  western  entrance  i>oint,  iy  13  feet,  but  as  the  channel  is  bordered  on 
both  sides  by  sunken  rocks  and  crossed  obliquely  by  the  tidal  streams,  it 
would  not  be  safe  to  enter  without  a  pilot,  and  then  only  with  a  fair  wind. 

A  LifS  Boat  is  stationed  at  this  port. 

LIGHT. — On  Pontusval  point,  about  a  mile  westward  of  the  por 
stand:!  a  square  lighthouse,  whence  from  an  elevation  of  59  feet  above  high 
water  is  exhibited  9^  fixed  wliite  light,  visible  from  a  distance  of  10  miles. 

Direotions. — To  enter  port  Pontusval,  when  about  half  a  mile 
from  the  entrance  steer  to  the  southward  with  the  beacon  erected  on  the 
eastern  shore  of  the  i)ort  (to  the  eastward  of  the  custom-house  office), 
exactly  in  line  with  the  steeple  of  Plouneour  church,  S.  by  W.  §  W.  This 
mark  will  lead  between  two  rocks,  named  Blanche  de  Tentrfe  and  An- 
Neuden,  only  one-third  of  a  cable  apart;  the  former  is  on  the  western  aide 
'Of  the  entrance,  and  its  summit  is  always  above  water ;  the  latter,  which 
has  a  beacon  on  it,  is  on  the  eastern  side,  and  uncovers  12^  feet  at  the 
lowest  tides.  When  abreast  the  Blanche  de  I'entr^e,  steer  a  little  more  to 
starboard,  to  pass  nearly  midway  between  the  Blanche  du  centre  and  Yran 
rocks  ;  the  former  lies  on  the  western  side  of  the  channel,  and  never  covers ; 
the  latter  on  the  eastern  side,  and  uncovers  27  feet.  Pass  rather  nearer 
the  Blanche  than  the  Vran,  and  when  near  the  Blanche  du  dedans^  a  rock 
lying  a  cable  to  the  south-west  of  Blanche  du  centre,  steer  for  the  above 
custom-house  office  on  a  S.  by  W.  f  W.  bearing,  and  it  will  lead  into  La 
Chambre,  on  the  easteiii  side  of  the  poit. 

TidOS.  —  It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  port  Pontusval  at 
4  h.  25  m.,  and  the  tide  rises  in  La  Chambre  (on  the  eastern  side  of  the 
port,  where  the  bottom  dries  13^  feet  above  the  level  of  the  lowest  tides), 
about  16^  feet  at  equinoctial  springs,  and  5  feet  at  neaps. 

ILE  VIERGE    LIGHT.— Vierge  isle,  lying  W.  by  S.  2\  mUes 

from  the  western  point  of  Corr6jou  bay,  and  2  miles  to  the  eastward  of  the 
entrance  to  the  river  Abervrac'h,  may  be  recognized  from  some  distance 
by  a  square  light-house  erected  109  yards  from  its  eastern  extreme. 

The  lighthouse  exhibits,  at  an  elevation  of  108  feet  above  high  water 
2i  fixed  white  light  varied  eYerjfour  minutes  by  a  redfiash,  preceded  and 
followed  by  a  short  eclipse.    The  light,  which  is  of  the  third  order,  is  an 
excellent  guide  for  the  entrance  of  Corr^jou  bay  and  for  the  entrance 


tJHAp.xi.]     ILE  VIERGE   LIGHT, — BAIC  DE  CORREJOU.  451 

of  the  rirer  Aberyrac'h,  and  is  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance 
of  14  miles;  the  eclipses  do  not  appear  total  within  the  distance  of 
6  miles. 

BAIE  de  COHHE  JOU. — From  port  Pontusval  the  coast  trends 
7J  miles  westward  to  Correjou  bay,  which  is  fronted  by  three  extensive 
ledges,  named  Plateau  d'Aman  ar  Ross,  Plateau  du  Guern,  and  Plateau  du 
Lizen  Yen,  the  outer  parts  of  which  are  2^  miles  from  the  shore.  Penen^s 
isle  lies  in  the  northern  part  of  the  bay,  and  close  to  the  north-east  of  the 
isle  is  Penvers  ledge,  which  covers  at  high  water,  with  the  exception  of 
three  heads,  one  at  its  south,  the  second  at  its  east,  and  the  other  at  its 
north  extreme.  A  short  distance^eastward  of  its  eastern  head  is  the  north- 
west extreme  of  the  Bazughen  ledge,  which  thence  trends  a  quarter  of  a 
mile  in  a  south-easterly  direction,  its  highest  head  imcovering  10  feet  at 
the  lowest  tides.  The  Garrec-Crom  ledge,  lying  to  the  northward  of  the 
Bazughen,  covers  at  high  water,  with  the  exception  of  one  head  at  its 
eastern  extreme. 

The  anchoring  ground  in  this  bay  is  to  the  south-east  of  Penvers  ledge, 
and  the  depth  on  it  is  from  13  to  19  feet  at  low  water.  The  beaching 
place  is  to  the  southward  of  Penenes  isle  ;  the  bottom  here  is  composed  of 
sand,  and  gradually  rises  towards  the  coast,  at  the  foot  of  which  it  dries 
16  feet  above  the  lowest  tides. 

Directions* — Corr6jou  bay  may  be  entered  by  two  channels,  named 
Chenal  Oriental  and  Chenal  {Occidental ;  the  former  or  eastern  channel 
lies  between  the  Guem  ledge  and  a  ledge  named  the  Chauss^e  de  Carrec- 
Hir ;  the  latter  or  western  channel  between  the  coast  and  the  southern 
part  of  the  lizen- Ven  ledge. 

To  enter  the  bay  by  the  western  channel,  steer  to  the  southward  with 
the  lighthouse  on  Vierge  ^isle  on  a  S.  by  W.  bearing  until  the  guard-house 
of  Kerisoc  is  in  line  with  the  southern  head  on  Penvers  ledge  S.E.  ^  E, 
Follow  this  latter  direction  until  the  little  steeple  of  Tremeneac'h  church 
opens  to  the  eastward  of  the  western  point  of  the  bay,  when  steer  more*  to 
the  eastward  and  pass  between  Penvers  ledge  and  that  of  Grarrec-Crom, 
keeping  nearer  the  former  than  the  latter  to  avoid  a  4-feet  patch  lying 
nearly  in  mid-channel,  and  also  keeping  the  northern  point  of  the  bay 
open  to  the  northward  of  Penvers  ledge  to  clear  the  Bazughen.  Do  not 
haul  to  the  southward  for  the  anchorage  in  the  bay  before  the  highest 
head  on  the  Garrec-Crom  is  to  the  northward  of  N.N.E.,  for  the  south- 
east head  of  the  Bazughen  bears  S.S.W.  from  this  head ;  and  in  steering 
to  the  southward  the  highest  head  of  the  Garrec-Crom  must  not  be  brought 
more  easterly  than  N.  by  E.  ^  E.  so  long  as  the  southern  head  on  the 
Penvers  ledge  is  shut  in  to  the  southward  of  the  north  point  of  the  bay. 

F  F  2 


452      LES  wkAXJX  LIGHTHOUSII  TO  ILE  b'OUESSANT.     [chap.  xi. 

The  leading  mark  through  the  eastern  channel  is  the  steeple  of 
Ploguemeau  church  kept  on  a  S.S.W.  J  W.  beai'ing,  when  it  will  be  in 
line  with  the  Mean-Tan  rock,  which  lies  on  the  south-east  ledge  of  the 
Guem  ledge,  and  uncovers  23  feet.  This  mark  will  lead  in  not  less  than 
7  fathoms  at  low  water  until  the  vessel  is  about  1^  cables  from  the  Mean- 
Yan,  when  steer  a  little  to  port  to  pass  eastward  of  it.  After  clearing  the 
south-east  edge  of  the  ledge,  get  the  leading  mark  on  again  and  it  will  lead 
close  to  the  westward  of  the  Gtarrec-Crom,  when  proceed  as  before. 

L'ABERVRAC'H. — The  entrance  to  this  river,  situated  4  miles 
westward  of  Con:6jou  bay,  affords  good  shelter  but  is  diflScult  of  access, 
being  much  encumbered  by  numerous  shoals,  islets  and  rocks.  The  outer 
anchorage  is  just  within  the  entrance,  and  about  1^  cables  south-east  of 
the  beacon  on  the  Petit-Pot-de  Beurre  rock,  and  carries  from  6  to  8  fathoms 
at  low  water  over  a  sandy  bottom.  The  inner  anchorage  trends  1^  miles  in 
a  S.S.E.  ^  E.  direction  from  the  outer  anchorage,  and  the  least  depth  in  it 
is  5  fathoms,  except  1 J  cables  to  the  north-east  of  Cezon  isle,  where  there 
are  only  2^  fathoms.  There  are  two  beaching  places  on  the  lefl  bank  of 
the  river,  one  in  Anges  bay,  southward  of  the  inner  anchorage,  and  the 
other  a  little  farther  eastward  in  a  small  inlet,  named  St.  Antoine  bay. 
The  bottom  in  both  bays  is  soft  mud,  and  dries  6^  feet  above  the  lowest 
tides. 

A  Life  Boat  is  stationed  at  Vracli  isle. 

LIGHTS. — ^The  entrance  to  Abervrac'h  river  is  facilitated  at  night 
by  the  following  lights : 

K  fixed  white  light  shown  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  from  a 
white  tower,  36  feet  high,  erected  on  the  southern  part  of  VracTi  isle. 
This  light,  of  the  fourth  order,  is  elevated  59  feet  above  high  water,  and  in 
dear  weather  is  visible  from  a  distance  of  7  miles. 

Affixed  white  light  from  a  white  rectangular  tower  on  Lanvaon  heights, 
which  bears  S.E.  by  E.  J  E.,  1|  miles  from  the  tower  on  Vrac'h  isle. 
This  light,  of  the  fourth  order,  and  elevated  170  feet  above  high  water,  is 
visible  through  an  arc  of  22°  and  from  a  distance  of  12  miles,  and  when  in 
line  with  the  above  light  leads  through  the  Grande  channel  to  the  entrance 
of  the  Abervac*h. 

Two  fixed  lights,  of  the  fourth  order,  are  exhibited  on  the  left  bank  of 
the  river,  one  whiter  at  the  head  of  St.  Antoine  creek,  and  the  other  greerij 
on  the  east  point  of  Palue  beach,  and  when  in  line  they  show  the  direction 
of  the  inner  anchorage.  These  lights  elevated  respectively  49  and  29  feet 
above  high  water,  are  visible  4  and  8  miles. 

Life  Boat.— A  life  boat  is  stationed  at  Vrac'h  isle. 

Directions* — ^The  Abervacli  river  can  be  entered  by  two  channels, 
one,  named  the  Gbenel  de  la  Malouine,  leading  in  from  the  northward 


OHAP.M.]  L'ABi;BVEA.C'H. — EOCHES  DB  POESAL.  453 

between  Malouine  land  Pendante  ledges,  and  the  other,  the  Grande  Chenal, 
leading  in  from  westward,  to  the  southward  of  Libenter  ledge.  There  is  a 
third  channel  between  this  latter  edge  and  the  Pendante,  bat  its  navigation 
is  difficult  and  should  not  be  attempted  without  a  pilot. 

Molouine  channel  is  very  narrow  and  can  only  be  used  hj  small  vessels 
with  a  leading  wind.  A  beacon  erected  on  the  shore  of  a  little  beach, 
named  GrSve  Blanche,  kept  exactly  in  line  with  Petite  lie  de  la  Croix, 
S.  by  W.  ^  W.,  will  lead  through,  in  not  less  than  20  feet  at  low  water, 
up  to  the  beacon  on  the  Petit-Pot-de-Beurre,  which  can  be  passed  on 
either  side. 

The  Grand  channel  is  practicable  for  vessels  of  large  draught  with  a  fair 
wind,  and  wide  enough  for  coasters  to  turn  through.  In  approaching  it 
from  the  westward,  bring  the  steeple  of  Plouguemeau  church  in  line  with 
the  white  light  tower  on  Vrac'h  isle  (or  at  night  the  white  and  red  lights 
in  line),  S.E.  by  E.  \  E.,  directly  they  are  seen ;  but  when  coming  from 
the  northward,  the  steeple  of  Ploudalmezeau  church  must  be  kept  well 
open  westward  of  the  steeple  of  Lampaul  church  S.S.W.,  until  the  above 
leading  mark  is  on,  in  order  to  pass  westward  of  the  western  patches  on 
Libenter  ledge ;  there  is  never  less  than  25  feet  on  these  patches  but  a 
heavy  sea  runs  over  them  in  bad  weather. 

In  running  through  this  channel,  the  above  leading  mark  must  be  kept 
exactly  on,  for  although  the  vessel  will  pass  IJ  cables  southward  of  the 
south  extreme  of  Libenter  ledge,  which  is  marked  by  a  black  buoy,  and 
about  the  same  distance  southward  of  the  Grand-Pot-de-Beurre  ledge,  yet 
it  will  only  lead  a  little  northward  of  a  9J  feet  patch,  named  Basse  du 
Chenal,  and  80  yards  southward  of  the  beacon  on  the  Petit-Pot-de-Buerre, 
which  at  night  may  not  be  seen.  Having  passed  this  beacon,  the  vessel 
can  come-to  in  the  outer  anchorage,  or  proceed  to  the  southward  with  the 
light  tower  in  St.  Antoine  bay  in  one  with  that  on  Palue  beach,  (or  at 
night  the  white  and  green  lights  in  line),  S.S.E.  §  E.  This  being  the  line 
of  direction  for  the  inner  anchorage  a  berth  may  be  taken  as  convenient, 
mooring  N.W.  and  S.E.,  or  if  capable  of  taking  the  ground,  the  vessel  can 
steer  for  one  of  the  beaching  places. 

Tides. — ^It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  the  entrance  of  the  river 
Abervrac'h,  at  4h.  14m. ;  equinoctial  springs  rise  29  feet,  ordinary  springs 
22  feet,  ordinary  neaps  16  feet,  and  neaps  range  10  feet. 

ROCHES  de  PORSAL.— The  body  of  this  extensive  ledge  lie 
5  miles  westward  of  the  entrance  to  the  Abvervrac'h  and  the  greater  part 
of  the  rocks  on  it  are  covered  at  high  water.  The  shoal  patches  on  the 
outer  part  of  the  ledge  extend  nearly  3  miles,  and  the  rocks  that  uncover 
If  miles  from  the  coast.  There  is  anchorage  amongst  them,  but  the  navi- 
gation is  too  intricate  without  a  pilot. 


454     LES  HjSaUX  lighthouse  to  ILE  D'OUESSANT.     [chap.  XI- 

Le  FOUR  is  a  remarkable  large  black  rock,  broad  at  tlie  top  and 
17  feet  high,  lying  N.W.  abont  a  mile  from  Melgorne  point,  the  north-west 
extreme  of  the  coast  of  France,  and  E.  ^  S.  10^  miles  from  Ushant  north- 
east lighthouse. 

LIGHT. — Fi-om  a  lighthouse  92  feet  high  on  the  Four  rock,  is  exhi- 
bited at  an  elevation  of  79  feet  above  high  water  z, fixed  9Sidi  flashing  light 
showing  a  fixed  white  light  during  thirty  seconds^  and  a  flashing  light  of 
eight  distinct  flashes,  followed  by  eclipses,  during  thirty  seconds  ;  thus  the 
light  will  be  alternately  fixed  and  flashing ;  and  should  be  visible  in  clear 
weather  from  a  distance  of  15  miles. 

Fog  Trumpet. — During  foggy  and  thick  weather,  a  steam  trumpet 
sounds  a  blast  oi  five  seconds  duration,  followed  by  an  interval  of  silence 
of  twenty  seconds, 

CAUTION. — The  coast  in  the  vicinity  of  the  Porsal  and  the  Four 
rocks  is  of  middling  height,  but  being  bordered  by  numerous  dangers  it 
should  not  be  approached  at  night  or  in  thick  weather  within  the  depth  of 
45  fathoms  at  low  water ;  the  bottom  will  generally  be  of  grey  sand  mixed 
with  flint  and  other  stones. 

LABERILDUT.— This  tidal  port  lies  S.  \  E.  3^  miles  from  the 
Four  rock,  and  is  the  only  place  between  Brest  and  the  river  Abervr^c'h, 
where  vessels  drawing  13  to  14<  feet  can  enter  at  high  water,  spring  tides, 
and  be  perfectly  sheltered  from  all  winds.  The  port  dries  completely  out  as 
far  as  2  cables  from  the  entrance,  but  the  bottom  being  composed  of  soft 
sand  vessels  lie  aground  with  great  safety.  This  place  is  much  frequented 
by  the  Brest  pilots  and  fishermen  from  the  adjoining  coast ;  a  considerable 
trade  is  ^o  carried  on,  the  principal  exports  being  stone  and  sand ;  a 
great  deal  of  the  stone  used  in  the  embankment  of  the  Thames  came  from 
here. 

Directions. — To  enter  Laberildut,  when  about  2  miles  off  the  en- 
trance, bring  the  tower  of  Brel^s  church  (situated  amongst  the  trees  about 
2  miles  inland)  in  line  with  the  tower  of  Lanildut  church ;  this  mark  will 
lead  up  to  the  entrance,  passing  about  one  cable  to  the  northward  of  the 
Pierre  de  Laber  rock,  which  uncovers  12  feet  at  low  water  and  is  marked 
by  a  beacon,  and  close  to  the  southward  of  the  Men-6aro  rock,  which  only 
covers  at  the  equinoxes.  On  arriving  at  the  entrance,  which  is  only  about 
150  yards  wide,  pass  about  50  yards  to  the  southward  of  a  black  rock  lying 
on  the  left  side  of  the  entrance,  run  on,  keeping  about  50  or  60  yards  from 
the  northern  shore,  and  on  rounding  the  point  which  forms  the  western 
side  of  the  port  of  Laber,  if  only  having  come  in  for  shelter,  anchor  when 
abreast  of  the  first  houses  in  that  village,  but  if  going  to  take  in  or  dis- 
charge cargo  proceed  on  up  to  the  quay,  where  the  grounding  places  are 


CHAP.  XI.]  LABEBILDUT. — ILE  d'oTJESSANT.  455 

excellent,  the  bottom  being  sand  and  mud.  The  tide  runs  very  strong  to 
the  S.W.  across  the  entrance  during  the  first  hour  of  the  ebb,  requiring  a 
fresh  breeze  to  stem  it.  It  would  be  advisable  for  a  stranger  to  take  a 
pilot,  and  although  there  are  no  pilots  specially  belonging  to  the  port,  the 
fishermen  do  equally  as  well. 

Tides. — ^It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Laberildut  at  dh.  68  m.,  . 
and  the  tide  rises  above  the  grounding  places  off  Laber  (where  the  bottom 
dries  about  9  feet  at  the  lowest  tides)  16  feet  at  ordinary  springs,  and 
9f  feet  at  neaps. 

USHANT,  or  ILE  D'OUESSANT  of  the  French,  Hes  10^ 
miles  westward  of  the  north-west  extreme  of  the  coast  of  France.  It  is 
about  4^  miles  long,  W.  by  JN.  and  E.  by  S.,  about  2  miles  wide,  and  its 
highest  part,  which  is  the  north-east,  195  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sea. 
In  fine  weather  the  island  is  visible  from  a  distance  of  from  15  to  20  miles, 
the  outline  appearing  rugged  and  uneven,  being  composed  of  high,  craggy, 
and  precipitous  rocky  cliffs  of  granite  formation.  There  are  two  light- 
houses on  the  island ;  one  on  the  north-east  extreme,  the  other  at  the 
north-west.* 

The  inhabitants,  about  2,500  in  number,  are  chiefly  employed  in  rearing 
cattle,  and  as  fishermen,  many  of  whom  are  well  acquainted  with  and  can 
act  as  pilots  for  the  passages  in  the  vicinity,  rendered  dangerous  by  the 
numerous  hidden  as  well  as  apparent  rocks  and  islets  lying  between  the 
island  and  the  main  land.     The  people,  generally,  speak  pure  Breton. 

The  only  village  is  called  Lampaul  or  Portspaul,  situated  at  the  bottom 
of  a  bay  on  the  south-west  side,  it  is  here  that  the  pilots  reside.  In  the 
other  parts  of  the  island  the  houses  are  scattered,  forming  only  small 
hamlets.  A  post-boat  sails  twice  a  week  for  Conquet  on  the  main  land,  at 
which  place  the  produce  of  the  island,  consisting  of  soda,  grain,  sheep,  and 
poultry  is  disposed  of. 

Supplies. — Wood  is  scarce,  but  water  and  other  supplies  can  be 
obtained  in  moderate  quantities  ;  for  fuel  the  natives  find  a  substitute  in 
dried  seaweed. 

LIGHTS.— North-east  Light.— A  conspicuous  lighthouse,  85 
feet  high,  stands  near  the  north-east  extreme  of  Ushant,  from  which  at  an 
elevation  of  272  feet  above  high  water,  is  exhibited  a  ^xed  white  light,  of 
the  first  order,  visible  in  clear  weather  from  a  distance  of  18  miles. 

North-west  Light. — On  Creac'h  point,  at  the  north-west  extremity 
of  the  island,  is  a  circular  tower,  with  black  and  white  horizontal  stripes, 
whence,  at  an  elevation  of  223  feet  above  high  water,  is  exhibited  a  re* 

*  See  Admiralty  chart : — Chaimels  between  lie  d'Ouessant  and  the  mainland,  No.  2,694 } 
scale,  m  =>  1  *  5  inches. 


1 


456      LES  H^AUX  LIGHTHOUSB  TO  ILE  D'OUESSAKT.     [chap.  xi. 

voLvwg  light,  the  eclipses  of  twenty  seconds  duration,  being  succeeded  by 
one  red  and  ttoo  white  faces,  each  lasting  twenty  seconds,  and  visible  in 
clear  weather  22  miles. 

Fog  Tmxnpet— At  the  west  point  of  the  island  of  Ushant,  during 
foggy  weather,  a  fog  trumpet  will  be  sounded  at  intervals  of  ten  seconds, 
the  duration  of  the  blast  being  two  seconds.  The  sound  will  generally  be 
heard  3  miles  in  calm  weather. 

A  LifO  Boat  is  stationed  at  Creac*h  point. 

Semaphores. — ^J  using  the  Commercial  Code  of  Signals,  passing 
vessels  can  communicate  with  either  the  semaphore  on  Creacli  point,  or 
that  on  the  N.E.  pointy  and  by  this  means  telegraphic  messages  may  be  sent 
to  all  the  countries  of  Europe. 

Bale  de  BeninOU. — Ouessant  is  surrounded  by  dangers  except 
between  its  north  extreme  and  Keller  isle,  where  there  is  good  shelter  in 
7  to  12  fathoms  water,  sand  and  rocky  bottom  in  B^ninou  bay,  during 
southerly  winds,  but  quite  exposed  to  the  northward. 

ChauSS^e  de  Keller.— At  2  miles  N.N.E.  |  E.  of  the  west 
extreme  of  Ouessant,  and  3  miles  N.W.  by  W.  J  W.  of  the  north-east 
lighthouse,  is  a  small  patch  of  II  fathoms,  (with  21  to  28  fathoms  close 
around)  named  Basse  Callet,  at  the  west  extreme  of  Chauss6e  de  Keller 
the  name  given  to  a  chain  or  causeway  of  rocks  extending  N.W.  by  W.  1^ 
miles  from  the  western  part  of  Keller  isle.  The  marks  for  the  1 1  fathoms 
are,  the  lighthouse  in  line  with  Keller,  S.E.  by  E.  ^  E.,  and  B^langer  mill 
(the  most  westerly  mill  of  Ouessant)  in  line  with  the  we&t  end  of  Callet 
rock,  S.  by  E.  |  E. 

Bale  du  Stiff,  on  the  north-east  side  of  Ouessant,  affords  temporary 
anchorage  for  small  vessels,  but  it  is  open  to  the  eastward.  The  dangers 
to  be  avoided  on  entering  are,  the  Men-Corn,  Douellan  rocks,  and  Ligounee 
bank,  lying  off  its  southern  point,  and  the  Grorl6-bian  rock  in  the  middle  of 
the  bay  ;  the  former  and  latter  uncover  at  half  tide..  The  Men-Corn''*'  and 
Gorld-bian  rocks  are  both  marked  by  stone  beacons. 

Bale  du  Lampaul  is  the  port  of  Ouessant,  but  being  situated  on 
the  south-west  side  of  the  island  it  is  exposed  to  the  whole  force  of  south- 
westerly winds.  The  bay  is  only  used  by  small  vessels,  although  the  water 
in  it  is  deep  over  a  sandy  bottom,  which  shoals  gradually  towards  its  head, 
thus  rendering  the  anchors  less  liable  to  drag  with  a  westerly  wind.  A 
high  rock,  named  the  Corce,  the  summit  of  which  never  covei-s,  lies  in  the 
middle  of  the  bay. 

The  dangers  to  be  avoided  in  entering  this  bay  are  the  Jument  rock ;  a 
ledge  named  the  Basse  Bridy,  and  the  Leurvas  rocks.  The  Jument  rock, 
which  uncovers  19  feet  at  the  lowest  tides,  lies  S.W.  |  W.  1^  miles  from  the 

*  Men-Corn  beacon  destroyed  during  a  gale,  18S1. 


OHAP.  M.]  ILE  D'ouiassANT.  457 

southern  horn  of  the  bay^  in  the  direction  of  B^langer  mill  open  a  quarter 
of  a  point  to  the  eastward  of  the  Corce  rock,  N.E.  ^  E. 

Ouessant  north-east  lighthouse  kept  a  little  open  to  the  northward  of 
the  Corce  wiU  lead  into  Lampaul  bay,  between  the  Bridy  ledge  and  the 
Leurvas  rock,  the  former  lying  West  1  ^  miles  from  the  beacon  on  Runion 
point  the  south  extreme  of  tlshant,  and  the  latter  W.S.W.  a  long  half  mile 
from  the  northern  horn  of  the  bay.  The  best  anchorage  is  in  12  to  7 
fathoms  over  a  sandy  bottom,  to  the  north-west  of  the  Corce,  trhich  may 
be  rounded  dose-to  on  all  sides,  but  it  will  be  better  to  pass  eastward  of  it. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  around  the  isle  of  Ouessant 
at  3  h.  32  m. ;  ordinary  springs  rise  19j^  feet,  neaps  13|  feet.  Off  the 
north-west  coast  of  the  island  the  flood  sets  to  the  N.E.,  the  ebb  to  the 
S.W. 

CHANNELS  between  the  OUESSANT  and  COAST. 

Nearly  the  whole  space  between  Ouessant  and  the  Four  rock  is  studded 
with  islets,  rocks,  and  shoals,  particularly  in  the  direction  of  St.  Mathieu 
point,  which  bears  S.S.E.  ^  E.,  nearly  15  miles  from  Ouessant  lighthouse. 
There  are  three  deep  channels,  named  Chenal  du  Four,  Chenal  de  la  Helle, 
and  Passage  du  Fromveur,  lying  between  these  dangers ;  but  only  the 
latter  should  be  taken  by  a  strauger  on  account  of  the  sunken  rocks,  lying 
nearly  in  the  fairway  of  the  two  former,  and  also  of  the  tidal  streams, 
which,  at  the  springs,  run  4^  knots,  the  flood  setting  to  the  northward.* 

Chenal  du  Four.— The  northern  entrance  to  this  channel  is  about 
3  miles  W.N.W.  of  the  Four  rock,  and  the  leading  mark  through  is  the 
lighthouse  on  Kermorvan  point  in  line  with  that  on  St.  Mathieu  point, 
bearing  South.  When  within  half  a  mile  of  the  former  point  the  vessel 
should  be  hauled  out  a  little,  to  pass  westward  of  the  point  between  the 
Petite  and  Grande  Yinoti^re  rocks;  but  thence  the  navigation  of  the 
southern  part  of  the  channel  becomes  more  difficult,  on  account  of  the 
Eenards  and  Chenal  patches,  and  the  Yieux  Moines  and  Bossemen  Or 
rocks. 

Chenal  de  la  Helle  lies  westward  of  the  Four  channel,  from  which 
it  is  separated  by  a  rocky  ledge,  three-quarters  of  a  mile  long  north  and 
south,  named  the  Platr^sses.  The  direction  of  this  channel  is  N.N.W.  and 
S.S.E.,  and  it  unites  with  the  Four  about  If  miles  to  the  northward  of 
Kermorvan  point. 

Passage  du  FromveUT)  formerly  called  the  TJshant  or  St.  Yincent 
channel,  runs  parallel  with  the  south  coast  of  Ouessant,  along  which  are 
several  rocks  and  rocky  patches,  but  none  extend  more  than  half  a  mile 
from  the  shore.    The  principal  danger  lies  on  the  southern  side  of  the 

*  See  Admiralty  chart  of  Brest  roadstead,  Ko.  2,690 ;  scale,  m  «>  1*5  inches. 


158      L£S  H^ArX  LIGHTHOrSE  TO  ILE  d'OTTESSAKT.     [cbat.  xi.] 

cliannoly  o£F  the  liroken  rocky  isle  oF  Lo^dec,  from  which  a  rockj  ledge 
cxtonds  nearly  half  a  mile  \V.  by  N.  J  N^  and  at  its  extremity  is  Men 
Tensel,  a  tWtachctl  rock,  which   uncovers   13  feet    at  the   lowest  tides. 
Most  of  the  rocks  on  this  ledge,  however,  aro  visible  at  half  ebb,  and 
tliorc  is  generally  broken  iii*ater  over  them  at  other  periods  of  the  tide; 
but  care  must  bo  taken  to  uvold  a  sunken  rock  with  only  12  feet  over  it, 
lying  about  1}  cables  to  the  north-west  of  the  Men  TenseL    The  streams 
take  the  direction  of  the  channel,  about  E.  by  N.  and  W.  by  H^  bat  they 
are  so  rapid  as  to  alarm  any  |>erson!4  unused  to  its  navigation,  particiilarly 
at  springs,  wlion  the  whole  surfiice  of  the  water  has  the  appeaiance  of 
brcakors. 

Directioil8.*-^^hen  bound  through  Fromveur  channel  from  the 
north-oantwanl,  round  the  east  <^nd  of  Ouessant,  when  about  a  mile  distant, 
and  this  end  is  in  line  with  the  north-oast  lighthouse,  N.N.W.  }  W.,  and 
the  Loodoc  rock  is  nearly  in  one  with  Banncc  isle  about  S.  by  W.  ^  W., 
steer  W.  by  S.  \  £.  for  6  miles,  or  until  the  south  end  of  Bannec  bears 
about  K.  I  N.,  and  the  west  end  of  Ouessant  N.  by  E.  }  E.  ;  when,  if 
l)ouiul  to  Brest  a  S.  by  £.  \  S.  course,  uninfluenced  by  the  tide,  for  11  miles, 
will  lead  westwanl  of  the  Fierres  Vertes,  the  highest  of  which  nneovers 
7  f(vt  at  the  lowest  tides,  and  also  of  the  westernmost  patch  of  the  Pierres 
Noiros,  on  which  there  aro  13  feet  at  the  same  period.  A  course  can  then 
be  st(H}red  towanls  the  Goulet  de  Brest  with  the  lighthouse  on  Petit  Minou 
l>oiut,  in  lino  with  the  lighthouse  on  Portzic  poiut,  bearing  East. 


459 


Table  showing  the  Rise,  at  full  and  change,  abore  the  Level  of  the 
lowest  Tides,  in  the  different  Harbours  on  the  Govt  of  Fbijice,  from 
the  Isle  of  OneseANT  to  Dumkeeqde,  and  amongst  the  Cuamnbl 
Islands.  Those  places  denoted  by  an  •  show  the  rise  above  the 
Groonding  plftoes. 


NHMOIPtaoe. 

e.w. 

SiSE 

ssa? 

Ordliury 

n.  V. 

Feet. 

Feet 

Feet. 

OueMant  or  Usbtut  idle 

3  82 

— 

IH 

18j 

8  58 

— 

16 

H 

AberTTooTi  river  (entrance)       .           .           - 

4  14 

S9 

23 

16 

Port  Pontu«val*              .            .            .            . 

4  25 

16t 

— 

6 

Bwble 

4  49 

90 

23 

17 

MorlwxBond 

4  53 

31 

S4 

18 

Tr^gaiet  river  (entrance) 

5  12 

35 

!5 

18i 

„      (town)*  .            -            -            - 

5  32 

— 

28 

1*1 

5  45 

89 

31 

28t 

Brfhatisle 

5  51 

89 

81 

83i 

PortPdmpol*    .           .           -           -           - 

6    0 

19 

18 

— 

„    Portricui*            .           -           -           - 

6    0 

!G 

19 

10 

„    Knie'       -           .           -           -           - 

6    3 

SI 

15 

6 

„    Dalianet*  (lT«rt«ni  p»rt  of  quay)  - 

6     5 

ao 

16 

6 

Brquiroad 

9  59 

43 

88J 

8*i 

EhbieMlsle 

6    0 

49 

85 

96 

Port  St.  Malo*  (1«^  opening  into  port,  coo- 

e    5 

3S 

S5 

14 

verted  into  a  lock). 

StMaloroftd 

e   5 

44i 

35 

96 

6    6 

47 

80 

S6 

Clause  ijle* 

e   9 

4B 

85 

26 

Port  GranviUe- (Bill  of  floating  twin)   - 

6  13 

89 

82 

80 

„          „          anchorage  of 

6  18 

48 

87 

srj 

Goernrej*  (entrance  to  St.  Pierre  iiarbctnr)      -■ 

6  37 

80 

251 

14 

CaBqnet.  islets 

e  45 

34 

16i 

10 

Aldemey  (Braje  bay)   -           -           -           - 

6  46 

80 

17i 

19} 

Jcraey  (St.  Anbjn  baj) 

S  9! 

43 

-  88 

\^ 

„      (St.  Helier  outer  harbour) 

6  29 

■^ 

-8H 

83 

„       „       „     ♦inner  harbonr) 

~"' 

~ 

81 

19 

-  460 

Tide  Table — eontitmed. 


KamtotPtaM. 

« 

BqDilMMy 

tidTidM. 

OrdinuT 

xs^ 

n.  M. 

Feet 

Feet. 

Feet. 

Chpe  do  b  Hagne         -           -           - 

7    * 

»H 

aii 

18 

CbarixHirg  rond            .           .           -           - 

;  49 

91 

19 

l*i 

T  4B 

30 

17 

It 

burin). 

Port  Baifleni*  (north  qn«y)      - 

8  M 

19 

:6i 

n 

Buflenrrotd 

8  5» 

34 

17 

131 

81.  V»rt  Hwboiir*      -           -           .           - 

843 

18i 

18i 

9* 

Port  deUHongue*(abreuttbe  fort)    - 

B  4S 

Ui 

I4i 

8 

..road            -            -            - 

S  49 

34 

181 

l*i 

8  57 

96 

20 

IS* 

Port  CoimeallM*           .            .            .            - 

9     7 

36 

80 

16* 

Siret  Ome*  (entrance) 

9  88 

18^ 

161 

n 

„       „      (oatside  the  bank*) 

— 

3« 

94 

15 

Kyer  Dives*  (entiwioe) 

9  89 

18* 

161 

n 

„       „       (onblUe  the  bank*) 

9  8» 

36 

31 

16 

PortHonfleur* 

9  39 

31 

19 

IS 

„       (oQtoide  entrance  chMnel) 

— 

37 

23 

18 

leHaTre* 

9  61 

S8i 

211 

15* 

'    „        (outside  entrance  channel)     - 

9  18 

26i 

29 

18 

P&wnp  harbonr*            .            .            -            - 

10  44 

35 

381 

18 

10  46 

IH 

171 

«* 

„            „          (onlside    entrance 

_ 

80 

37 

21* 

channel). 

Port  Dieppe- (bar)        .            -            -            - 

11     6 

28 

251 

19 

,.      „     Vqiar)  -        -        -        - 

11   e 

95 

sai 

16 

Tr^pCTt*  (bar)  -            -            -    .        - 

11     9 

21 

14 

8 

(outside  bar)   .            -            -            - 

11     3 

34 

97 

21 

Cayenx 

11     S 

aai 

971 

it 

Kiver  SoDime  (Hoordel  harbour*) 

11  36 

9ai- 

201 

10 

(St  Valery^ni-Sonune  harbour*). 

11  46 

aoi 

171 

3 

„        „       (PortCmtoy*)    - 

11  36 

17 

IS 

4 

BiTer  Canche*  (entrance  channel) 

11  30 

19i 

m 

10 

„        (Staples*) 

— 

— 

141 

9 

Port  Boulogne  (steam  veuel  qoaj*) 

11  35 

28 

21 

13 

„         „       (outside  entrance) 

11  85 

39i 

95 

19* 

C8peGri*-Ne« 

11  37 

27 

211 

16* 

PortCalaia 

It  49 

S3 

191 

15* 

13    0 

IS 

16 

10* 

PortDonkerqne             .            -            .            - 

18    8 

31 

16} 

18* 

INDEX. 


Aa  river      - 
Akron  bland 
Abbeville  port 
Abeirrac'h  river,  lights 
diracdous 


■  rocks 
Ango  lock  - 
Ajrne  porfbaj 
Aiweaiix  bank 
Anneaa  de  UvKneHt« 


Anous  bank 
An-Nenden  rock 
Anquette  channel     - 

gravel  banks 

patches    - 

AutiquuHce,  rocks    • 
Arches  rock 
ArthironiJel  tower    - 
Arconic  dc  'pliiteau 
Arcouest  point 
Aidentei  back 

,  wefitern,  bank 

Arenien  rock 
Ar-llesolek  ledge     - 

— M'lrbic  islo 

— Toul-Tane  faauge 

Arqaes  river  •   , 

AiTomanolieB  vUIag« 
AjtiinoQTMk 
Asnelles  church 
Astan  rook  - 
Anbert  rock 
AudcrviUe  village    - 
linghen  -church   - 
AudrecelleB  village  - 
Angnstine  monaeterr 
Aultioim    - 

Auqniere  rook 
Aare  riw    • 
Anrelle,  port         .  - 
Aorignj  iiland 
Aatel^ts  Tocki 
Anthic  river  - 

ditectioiu 

Avant  port  - 
AienrDcki  - 
Acicot  rock  - 


Bade  1>  bw»a 

-    433 

Battatbank 

B«il,port    - 

-     8S9 

Barequien  rocks      .           .           . 

lighti       . 

-     SSO 

Bawnierock 

ledge.       - 

•    3«U 

Bay«x       .... 

. .directions 

-    830 

Bailiwick 

-    189 

-  ai7 

Baiufihen  ledge 

-  ais 

Beachyhead 

^rook 

S16,9T4 

BsHwdeDiva 

.       63 

Bean  port    -           -           -           . 

BsUienerock 

•     199 

Bee  de  Champeanx  - 

BaUuehillt,  light     - 

-     382 

—  dn  Nei  - 

Balmee  tock 

-   ai7 

—  Bond  rock 

Bauchouou  liftnk 

-    880 

da  Ver  point      - 

BttncheU  bank 

-    371 

Becchnerock 

Banks  offKoTfli  Cofiri  of  France 

■     151 

Becfei"  rock  -           -           .           - 

BiDDec  isle 

■     458 

B&hatd  point 

Banqitette  bay 

-    319 

Becqnetclifi 

anchonge    - 

■    230 

-    318 

head 

BaDTille  ehnrcli 

-      58 

lifeboat      . 

Bart-^es  rock 

•    S06 

light! 

Baifleor  cape,  light  - 

-      88 

port 

-      37 

Beeahoal     .            .            -            . 

-      38 

Baangermill           . 

,  lighu      - 

-      87 
•      38 

Belginin      -           -           .           - 
Belrock      - 

..tidee 

-      39 

Belle  Hogue  point   . 

race 

•      34 

Bell  efaid  point         -            ■ 

Barnouio  ledg6 

-    406 

Belleyille,  EictenB  de 

—  rock- 

-    407 

Belri'der  rumpiirt     - 

BarnvQle  church      - 

-    S3S 

valley 

BwTitrebank 

-     14S 

Belvidere  house       . 

BarriMwef- 

-    241 

Beniport     -           -           .           - 

Bu  iale,  light 

-    447 

Beninoubay 

■     145 

BuBe  ^ax  Chiens    • 

-    898 

Benven  iste  - 

aucapLerf   - 

-      30 

Beny  church 

deaBpiettee  - 

-     345 

Berck           .... 

— —  de  Men  Garro  " 

-    431 

«nr  Mer  - 

N.E.  <lu"PQt  de  Fer    - 

~    446 

Bergene  aoiu6         -            *            . 

Sord-Oiieat  des  Bcbd& 

-     333 

Bergaes  bank  and  ohulch    - 

Occidentale  de83<Bnfe 

397,  332 

Bemardmek 

Orientate  du  Moulard 

.       40 

Bemcval  valley 

BaSBCB  de  la  Dossifere 

-     319 

BemiSrea  cburth      -  '          - 

de  FanT 

'     300 

Bessin"FoH-cn 

duSwd-Brt    - 

408,411 

light.,tidei- 

Baaimrede  Baas  bank 

.     124 

B^lhune  river 

-     133 

BeozevalhUl 

de  la  Sonuno  bank 

-     133 

point 

Baitinrook 

-       46 

Benzeville 

EbettthMd     .       - 

-    389 

Boone  Noit  bay       ■  - 

-    303 

Bien  AM6  mill        - 

-    887 

Bonnelfcra   ■ 

-    3S6 

AsBu  wood      ■ 

-    406 

Bonnetot  rock          -   . 

-    413 

Bieroo  rock  - 

■      80 

Bdnoiale      -            -   . 

-    439 

Bietwe  loak  - 

,    880 

Bordeaux  barbonr    - 

-    801 

Bigne  ebannel,  lock   . 

-    39G 

BoMrirer    - 

.    860 

Blgnourock* 

419,  418 

Bowemen  Or  reek  -  - 

-    4S7 

BJgomenKik 

-    SOB 

Boue 

-    865 

BibBTdflat   - 

-     325 

Agenor 

-     210 

Kljicrwjk   - 

-     443 

Anber  - 

-    203 

Biaar  point  - 

-     8T8 

de  Baie 

-     280 

Binic  harboor.  ligbt  - 

-    431 

Baker  - 

-     197 

-•421 

Bloodel 

-      197 

,  tidei  - 

-  802 

-  868 

Biee  bank    - 

-    205 

rock    - 

rock    -           - 

•     204 

de  Vazon 

-    203 

Biieux  rock 

-     888 

Bones  do  Btaca       - 

-     240 

Block  rock  ■ 

30,  205,  22S 

Kaines    - 

197,  285 

BUinTiUe  barbonr    •   . 

•     355 

liouees  Gennete  rocks  , 

-    ail 

■  I.I.  I.I .    rJTcr 

-    298 

Bovifresse  look 

-   aio 

TiUage      - 

-    S98 

Boiifrt'Ssi^s  reef 

-    248 

Blakenberg  - 

-     177 

"Bouillonnaiac  cocli    ■ 

-    238 

Blanc  isles   -   . 

-    307 

BooilloDi  rooka 

-     313 

Nez,oftpe      - 

-    144 

patches     - 

•    411 

Pignon. 

.     374 

Boailly  port 

-    S66 

port   - 

-     44a 

Bonjaron  shoal 

-    391 

Blanabard  bank        - 

-    243 

Bouleybay.         . 

-    804 

rock        -   . 

216,  S43.  254 

signal  station 

-    884 

Blanobe  de  I'AtcoueW  ble 

-    427 

Boulogne  harbour   - 

-     188 

rcntrfc  rack 

e           -     186 

-  185 

-  134 

Gmlben  isle 

du  .^eiitte  rock 

-  435 

-  450 

,  life  boatt 

iledaDB  rock 

.    450 

— ,]i(^to,pil 

Ota        -     184 

r  isle 

-    445 

, ,port 

-     1S2 

rock  , 

80,208 

-     tS4 

Blapcbets     -   . 

-    87S 

,  tide* 

-     136 

BlfiriUe        -  . 

-      84 

-    403 

BlighbwA  - 

-    181 

Bontonrook 

-    394 

BktBCon  point           •   - 

-    448 

Braeokbank 

■    158 

Bodie  tower 

-     485 

Branche&rm 

-      47 

Bouf  patch  -  - 

-     838 

Bratagne  Ktoki 

-    844 

rock  -  . 

•    383 

Bra;e  da  VaUe 

-     182 

B(eu&  bank  ■ 

-      67 

.bay 

-    340 

BcEuftina  rock .         -   . 

-     33S 

harbour 

.     288 

Boin  rock    -    . 

-     196 

lights 

-     289 

Boie  de  la  TiUe       - 

-       44 

old  barbonr  - 

-    840 

ide      - 

-    439 

rocks 

209,  848 

BoiteoM  rock- 

-    S64 

Brayes  rocki 

-    303 

Bon  Ami  rock 

-    242 

-    484 

Bonitiock   - 

.     245 

Br£cbe-du-Bai  de«p 

-      34 

Bonne  Qnme  tock   - 

-    S12 

.     814 

PNie 

Page 

Bi«edt  budu 

-    167 

Cabot  rock  -  ■        - 

-    331 

Brffort  thoal 

-      10 

Cabonrg  point 

-      62 

Br£hatehaniiel        - 

-    491 

Caeqoeran  honae      - 

-    805 

iele  - 

-  4ie 

Caen  port    - 

-      59 

—  road    - 

-  62 

-  410 

.pilot*    - 

-     4S9 

Cai&irock    - 

Cahote  point 
Caillonrock 

roftd 

-     4S9 

385, 357 

^.direclIoMtor  mi"^ 

CaiD-nr-Monse  rock 

-    427 

i^          .             .            . 

-    430 

lint 

-    481 

Bt^haotbank 

-    872 

-—  on  Ringne-brat  rock    - 

-    409 

Brehon  rock 

-    S19 
■     194 

CnlaiB  harbour 

-    147 

Brehonnetrock 
"Brtles  church 
BrcniermiUa 

i;r.  1.  .  ...    ..■•.. 

-     148 

-  454 

-  826 

road            -           -           -    146 

Brequeis  rocks 

.     821 

,  Paa  de        - 

-     141 

Bresle  rirer 

-     118 

Oalemarguien  rock 

-     497 

YaUej 

-     Ill 

Caleufrierroek 

6 

BTMt 

-      14 

CalenfrierE  locks 

-     820 

Bretogne  lulls 

-    408 

C'ulfatfurs  rocks 

-     337 

point 

-    350 

Calfata  rook 

-     389 

KMjkB 

228,850 

Calbic  rock  - 

■     446 

Brettevillechotch    - 

-     831 

Callet  patch,  rook    - 

-     456 

— — -  —  Gnuwade 

•       S9 

Callotisle    - 

-    446 

BiOTud      -     ,     - 

-      61 

CalyadoB  flat 

-       54 

BrerUlcnuU* 

-    &5S 

rock 

-      56 

Biidy  ledge- 

-    466 

CampdeC^aar 

-     110 

Brinehct^a  cockfl     - 

-    248 

Cancolaii  patch 

-    844 

Bri-jue  point 

-      28 

rock 

-    344 

Bmauii  du  Nord-Ooeit  rocks 

-    888 

Conaale  road 

-    378 

-  838 

-  179 

-  875 

-  127 

EritJBh  ielandt 

Canohe  riy« 

Broere-Dojn  lilJ     - 

-     168 

-    J30 

BiooMe  bank 

-  1S5 

-  887 

.lights. 

-  129 

-  128 

Brootard  thoal 

-    883 

,  tides  - 

-     139 

Bohatatorooka 

-    890 

Caniard  da  Snd  rock 

-    362 

Bonel  rock 

-     3B0 

Ganger  rook 

-     888 

Borhou  lEhud,  reef  - 

■     282 

Canne  rook  -           -          - 

-    346 

Bnron  rook,  "beacon. 

-    885 

Cannpj  rock 

-    210 

Bnroni  rocks            -              91S 

293,  810 

Ci4>elle  road 

.      60 

Bflt  point     . 

-    272 

Caqnorobert  rock     - 

•    313 

Buardroeki 

-    887 

Canlonnet  bank 

•      47 

-     194 

Carentan  lights,  tides 

-      51 

Bnojage  of  French  coart     - 

4 

Carec-Mingoi  patch 

407,434 

BAtrock     • 

-    811 

Camiere  .and  WUb.  lighU    - 

•     I8B 

CamriUe  heath        - 

-      SO 

Cbtomb  road 

-      73 

Caroael  p<nnt 

•     418 

Canee-an-Ti  rock   ■ 

■    444 

46e 


Clrnliel  mill 
Carteret,  t»pe,  llRht 

htirbaar  directions 
OiUHiuet  isleta 

1 ,  utchorsge 

,  landing 

: ,  lightt 

,  tides  - 


S.S.W. 

S.S.B. 

CMsel  UUi  - 
Cutel  monad 

.  Vendon  cliffs 
Cutle  breakwater    - 

OateUier  cliff 

Citel  b*y     • 

church 

Cathenc  banka 

Catia  rock    - 

Caaville 

Canx-deK-MInquien 

Cajeus,  light* 
Canlerock 
Central  fbrt  • 
Centre  patch  - 
Certain  beacon 
Ceeeon  point 
——tower 
Ceion  isle    - 
CcKmbre  itle 
Chalnepomt 

Chaiaes  de  Primel  rocks 
Chambre,  La,  bay     ■ 

Champ  Elenri  mill   - 

-■  du  Port  point 

Chninpeaux  polot  - 
ChauJellier  rotk  - 
Channel  islanda        -  . 

-,  approachea 
,  caution 


',  Boundinga  - 


Page 

Channel  iilaoda,  tidM 

186,  816-818 

Chspean  rocka 

'     849 

ChapeUe  rook  . 

818,  845 

Churpeutiers  ledge  -  . 

-     438 

-     434 

ghoal*     .. 

-      100 

Chfttean  bank 

-     294 

de-t'Ile-nUnehe  roe 

k            -     430 

Nenfiale    - 

•     442 

patch          - 

-     844 

point 

-     21? 

Richsnx  pdnt 

-  sro 

-    445 

Chtttpllierrock 

-    370 

Chatern  bank 

-    419 

ChllilW  battery      -   . 

-     134 

Chafry  bank,  deep   - 

-    871 

-   a74 

Chauaey  iilea 

-    842 

-    S53 

.tides  -  . 

•    854 

Lsht 

-    S43 

— ^—  sound        -  . 

-    347 

-    848 

N.W.  entran 

a          -    849 

ChaiiBst^c-iica-BuMifc  rocks 

.    sss 

deCarreo-Hirledg 

■e          -    491 

de  KeUet  -  ., 

-     4S6 

Chavagnac  rock        - 

-      16 

Chelln  Lank 

-    402 

Chen^nto  roelu      - 

•    380 

Chenal  ledge 

-       19 

Malonine      -   . 

•    439 

OrienUl       -  . 

-    4S1 

Occidental    - 

-    451 

,  patch 

847,  4S8 

Cherbourg  - 

-       14 

bay.         ... 

-      16 

-      14 

-  18 

-  IS 

lights      - 

-      IS 

"     14,22 

t.               21 

,  channel*  in 

to         -      22 
-      S4 

i.^ 


466 

INDEX. 

P»ge 

Page 

Cli^DC  windiTulJ      >■ 

Corbiire  point 

198,  864 

Cheval  rock  - 

-     305 

rock 

264,  348 

Chevet  point 
diQvivuU  rook         ■ 

-    893 

Corbiftres  bank 

-    871 

Chicart  point 

-      97 

-     874 

Chleni  ■ho>] 

.    896 

quai 

-     385 

Cierge  pdnt 

-    879 

Corbleta       - 

-     237 

Cinq  Tnaa  - 

.     103 

barracki     - 

-     242 

Cite  la 

-     878 

harbour      - 

-     248 

Cleder  church 

-     449 

Corce  rock   - 

-     456 

Clif-Jlilsndc 

-     155 

Corderie  port 

-     430 

Cloches  rocks 

■       274,  299 

r<.ck 

-    437 

Clonqne  fort 

-     299 

Corrtonnier  rock 

234,  445 

Clonquce  rocks 

-     240 

Cormornndil^re  bank 

-     428 

Clos  port      - 

-     430 

rock 

371,427 

Close  rock   - 

-    372 

Come  rock  -            .            . 

-     441 

Oiunp  rock  - 

-    811 

Comer  rock 

197,  205 

Coal  hole      - 

■    310 

Comet  ewtle 

-     189 

Cmt-Mer  cove 

-    485 

■brcakwBierUghtB      - 

-     191 

Cobo  bay     - 

-    202 

Corr^jou  bay,  direcaons 

-     451 

CochoD  rock 

-     S87 

Cotentin  passage 

-    361 

Cocked  H»t  rock     - 

-    246 

peninsula 

■    361 

Coeq  rock    - 

-    839 

Cotes  rocks  - 

-    807 

Colbart  bankj 

-      8S 

Conban  rock 

-    431 

Coliire  cJiannel       - 

<    957 

Couesnon  river 

-    370 

Colleville  cborth     - 

-      46 

Couillons  de  la  Fort 

-     892 

Colombelk  :- 

-     208 

Conpe  point  rock      - 

-     308 

Colombiire  islet 

807,  408 

Coup*  tock  -            -            - 

-    846 

Colctii- joint,  rock  - 

-    224 

Couple  cansewa;     - 

-    214 

-      17 

Couple  mout 

•     181 

■     151 

Couplets  hUl 

Comtesse  de  Gaeredan  rock 

-    425 

Coorgik  tock 

-     446 

-     442 

-       56 

Comtesscs  ledge,  rocks 

411,413 

-       58 

Comu.  rock 

-    487 

-       58 

Concb^  anchorage  • 

-    851 

,  light     - 

-       67 

ehranels     - 

852,398 

Coutauoen  cathedral 

•    829 

216,  845,  894 

CrabiiToToek,  Gnenuey      - 

-    200 

Conchiere  rock 

-    888 

-    273 

Gone  rock    - 

-    388 

'.Chausey       - 

-     848 

Canvache     - 

-    216 

CrabetiniU 

'       39 

Coquelles-windmills  - 

-     144 

Craby  liarbour 

-     240 

Coque  rock 

-        10 

Crapnuds  a  u  Bey  rocks 

-    394 

Coque-Lilion  rocks  - 

-     246 

Creac'h  point 

-    4SS 

Coqutlourg  point    - 

•       49 

Crcach-ar-Maoul  hiU 

•    406 

CoquclleBinill 

■      144 

Crfiche  point 

-     125 

Corhcau  rock 

440,  446 

Crebou  church 

-      54 

Corbie  da  Nei  rock 

-     216 

Crilsiker  church 

-    447 

Corbet  rock 

-     241 

Crepon  -church 

-      55 

Corbette  rock 

-    209 

Crete  guard  houses  - 

-    893 

Corbi^re  bank 

-     344 

Creui  harbour 

.     215 

m 


Criqueville  mills 
Croc  point 
Croi  tt 


Culassi^re  rock 
Cul  de  I'Antel 
CuDette  sluice 

Dahouet  haTbour 

i  directions 

Daoact  rock 
DaouetiDs  patch 
Dangei  rock 
passage 

ugnals 

Dasher  rock 
Deauville  cliurch 
Di5obir&  anchorage 

ridge 
D&olIlS  chiiDTiel 

directions  - 
Demi©  pnlmA*         •  • 

— —  -  Ferriiro 
—  —  ro<A 

da  Nord  rock 

'  de  Paa  rock  - 

Demiei  rocks 

— Orande 

Denmaik      -  .  . 

DenneTille,  Beoqaets  de 

JDenou  pnssngc,  rock 

Dent  rocks  -  -  - 

Dents  rocks 

D^r^  Anglaise  rocks 

Fran^se  rocks 

Dcroute  diannel 


Deroute  channel  tides 

Desormes  Lank 
Diamond  rock 
Dleletle  harbour 

,  directions  - 
—^^,  lights,  tides 


nieppB  harlKiiir 


— ,  basins 

— ',  directions    - 

-.  lights, 

-,  tides  and  tidal  signals  109 


Dlgulleville  church  ■ 
Dinard  anchorage     - 

Diotret  rook 
Dives  river  - 

,  anchorage  off 

,  directions 

lights      - 


Irivelte  river 
Dog9-iicst  rock 
Dtil  Marsh 
Dorriere  rock 
Dossiire  flats,  rock  - 
Doaetlan  rock 

Douvres  church 

iight  - 

Dover  chnonel 
Doville  iBouot 
Doyle  column 
fort    - 

Dnuiguet  rocks 
Dronilles  channel 

Due,  Port-a-lu 
Doguesclin  fort 
Dun  river  - 
Dune  point  - 
Dongoness  - 
Donkerqne  banks  - 
harbours 


—,  lights,  lulots  -     ITS 
-,  tides  and  tidal 


468 

INDEX. 

Page 

Vunkfrque  roftd,  velt  pau  to          -     167 

En»i  bar.  cape       - 

ehannel 

DuoQ  rock*  -  " 

-    445 

=™" :    : 

Doono  rocks 

-     440 

Durand  rock 

-    39B 

Durdent  rivet 

-      95 

Eisarti  de  Berniirea  roeks 

Dntch  qu«y  - 
Djckbanki- 

-     154 

point       - 

—  light-vwMl 

-     158 

Enexeatile            -    ' 

fort    - 

hill    - 

EmI  Brecdt  bonk 

-    157 

Cllfhank 

-     15S 

nunnery 

EKoina  rock 

Dyck   - 

-    16.1 

GMicadc,  port  ffinie 

—  DsDger  rock 

-    840 

Etac  rock    - 

Hinder  bank 

-     161 

-deSerk 

'pa*.     - 

•     1S9 

delaQnoire    - 

Eaxteragate 

-      97 

point,  reef 

pawsge 

-     281 

Etacsbtuik  - 

EbaucM  ridge. 

,.        -             .    348, 

rocks  • 

Ecamiaa  banks 

-     105 

Etaplea  bay  and  hMbour 

Ecarctsleilt'e 

■     41B 

Etucrt'  Grand 

TEchaudos  IcdRe,  roc 

k             -              -     408 

rock    - 

Xchiquilet  rock 

■     386 

Etardiire  rock 

BchoDage  port 

-      17 

Etatrock     - 

Sclatbank   ■ 

-      79 

•       40 

Gros    - 

Ecrt'hos  TOok 

-    307 

Petit    - 

Ecrevi^re  bank 

'     808 

channel 

Ecureuil  rock 

-     SRS 

Elendr^e  bank,  rock     " 

Ehbiens  isle 

-     401 

Etocpaes      -            -  ' 

,  directio 

Di  for  anchorage  401 

Eight  linh 01113  ledge 

-     336 

—  point    - 

Eliiabelh  castle 

-   a6B 

rock     - 

collie  to» 

n          -            .     198 

Elot  rock      - 

Biris  rock     - 

-     236 

Etretat          -            -    * 

Em  prone  leef 

-   as4 

needle           -    ■ 

England      -  - 

-     IftS 

Eutown       -  ' 

Enaeigoe  anchorage 

-     849 

Eureka  rock 

ialet 

-    847 

Erettc  rock  -   ' 

Epiettes  patch 

-    346 

Epine  trees  - 

-       56 

Epissnres      - 

-     919 

Fagnetpoint    •-        - 

EquerdreviUe  hill 

-     ts 

Fairy  bank   - 

EqueireU  ledge 

'     4S0 

False  Hermitage  rock 

EquerriSre  rock 

-    S9B 

Fane  island  -  - 

E^uSl  rock   - 

-    227 

Rm  ledge,  rock       - 

Equets-des  plateau 

-     as 

FatouTille,  light       - 

Er  i«le 

-    441 

Fsachear rock 

Er*e  tower  - 

~     182 

Faucheurs  rocks 

FMcomuftre  Tockg    - 

.    218 

Fonr  channel 

-    457 

inlet       . 

-    308 

ledge    - 

.    442 

Faux  null     -            .            . 

-     130 

-     175 

r»»i6ree  mareh 

-    117 

rook      - 

430,454 

Tteimp       - 

-      B7 

light    . 

-     454 

hoTbouc      - 

-       S8 

rooks    - 

-    338 

Foonreef    ■ 

-     277 

.tid«8 

-     100 

Fourcb^  rocks 

-     2«6 

Mlia  banks 

.    327 

Fottrchic  rock 

-    439 

FemmK-Grosse  point 

-     106 

Foamier  de  H&vre  rock 

-    268 

Feuitre  rock  light   - 

-    87S 

rocks 

216,  26G 

FerailloQ  liauk 

-       49 

I'ourquLp-Aulieit  rook 

-     288 

Perico  rock  ■- 

-     198 

Hant 

-     204 

FerlM  channel 

-     487 

.rooks        - 

303,  212,  227 

Fennun  ba; 

-    214 

rook 

-    205 

beacon        - 

-     213 

de  la  plateau 

-    288 

point 

-     191 

Frauc-Mariiug  bank  • 

-   in 

FeiTttre  loeki 

■     20G 

Franjois  Premier  tower 

-       7ft. 

Tetti  enburb 

-    117 

Frehel,  cape,  ligiit   - 

-     405. 

Keffenn      - 

-       17 

Fremont  point 

-     305 

Flenne  mill  • 

-     158 

Frenay  bay 

-     408 

Fiercoiock  - 

-    312 

Frirw  rock  - 

-    48r 

Kguier  rook 

-    337 

Fret  point    • 

-    263 

Fillerock     - 

378,420 

bluff     . 

-    274 

Pira  house    - 

-    278 

bank     - 

■    265 

Kb-Coub  patches      - 

-    345 

Prettas 

-      197 

Fisherman  rock 

-     292 

Frilandois    - 

-     lOi 

Flabet 

■     203 

Fromvenr  channel    - 

-     487 

Flamands,  rocks      - 

-      17 

-    823 

Fronquie  rook 

270,285,310 

Fliartrock   - 

9 

-     292 

-     803 

,  Grande     - 

-     286 

Floraios  fort 

-     243 

-    263 

Florida  quay 

-      78 

Pomes 

-     157 

Flushing       - 

-     161 

Pogs  in  English  channel      - 

2 

Foiieuse  rock 

-        11 

Folie,  Grande 

-     245 

Gabbard  bank 

-     US' 

Folkslone     - 

-     132 

Galirii'llu  rock. 

-    198 

Foods  cliff   - 

-       69 

Qmllardd'Amntrock 

-    363 

Foraine  rock 

6,321 

Gaillarde  rock 

-      3* 

Forein  rock  - 

•     199 

Galne  channel 

-    440- 

Fosse  de  la  Band  reef 

-     242 

Gatgre  rock  ■ 

105,  308 

deChatry       - 

-    871 

Galetrook    - 

6 

-      55 

Galeu  islet    - 

-    208 

de  la  Hague 

8 

Gallrtjea  rocks 

-    419 

-•   -  Malitres anchorage    - 

-    247 

Galloper  bank 

-     179 

deMaidiek    - 

•    187 

light  vessel  - 

-     160 

FouUle  rock 

-     43S 

Gnii/cvillerivor 

-      97 

Foma  patch,  rock  - 

-     846 

Garap  ledge- 

-    426 

Fonniws  took 

-     941 

Gardes  "^'^ 

-     145 

*70 


Garde  Onfriii  pobt  ■ 

-    37S 

Grande  Eotr^  rock  - 

OmrdoD  moot 

-   aae 

Fararocfc     - 

Gawnne  miU 

-    419 

Gamier  rocks 

-     391 

Foliepeak    - 

GarreC'Crom  le^  - 

-    451 

Frouqnie      - 

GBtteville  chnrch      - 

-       81 

Gautier  rock 

■     406 

,  direoliona 

point 

-    360 

GBTendMt  rocks       - 

41 

HaifM  rock  - 

Qeffijeae  harbour       - 

-     332 

. Hupee  rock  • 

GenUlet  rock 

-    387 

He  Chausey  - 

Germain  rock 

-      S7 

He   -    ■ 

Giflird  bay  - 

-     305 

LiTiire  patch 

rock 

-     292 

Mangense    - 

Givaode  rock 

-     213 

GodiDiBlet    - 

-     207 

Passe 

Goilicbe  patch 

-     418 

Go£re  point 

-    370 

Porte  channel 

Qoletedecrock        - 

-    449 

Rocher 

Gorge,  poiDte  de      - 

-    376 

Ronflse  rock 

rock  - 

-   sie 

Sj-nthe 

Goiey  harlwur 

-     291 

Vaudia  rock 

-•297 

Graud  Areman  rock 

,  light. 

-     292 

Aten  rock 

-    295 

Battue 

Gorl^-bian  rock 

-    456 

Bey  islet       • 

G«ia.vaurock           - 

-     426 

Bone 

Goubini^re  lock 

213,288 

Buzard  rock 

Gouey  church 

-     330 

Goulct  de  Brest 

-     45S 

village 

Goulet  pass 

-     216 

Chenal 

rock 

-     217 

Cheval  rock  - 

Gouliot  pais 

-     214 

CheTreoil  rock 

Gonlveu  l)ay 

-    449 

Gonry  harbour 

7,319 

Galere 

tides 

7 

Gripel  ledge 

GouvLUBchiueb       - 

-    897 

Haguet 

-     206 

HaUse  rock  - 

■  Ancreislet 

-     3S2 

Hanois 

-     2S9 

Harre 

-     2S9 

Jardin  islet,  light 

134,  135 

Larron 

Basse  rook  - 

-    388 

-  Btayerook    • 

-     209 

light 

Broasse  bank 

-     887 

Moierock     - 

Buzard 

-    387 

Piliers  rook  - 

-    846 

Port 

Conchee  channel      - 

-     393 

Pot  de  Beurre  rock 

rock 

-    8S6 

Demie  rock  - 

-    300 

— ; —  Roqae  point 

Btacre  i»ck  - 

-     197 

Raet  channel 

'471 


Onmd  Buet  pissage 
-— —  SaDt  Boqaler 

—  Vaiceliu  roofc 

Vay 

Vid£  rock     - 

Grands  BouillODS  ro«ka 

Ecamias  bank 

Foiatus  rock 

Grange  farm 
Granges  cocks 
Grauville  harbour    - 

,  dangers  off 

,  directions    - 

GrttTelmesliiirbour  - 

,  directioiiB 

.lighw     J 


Graville       ... 
Gravoie  irindmiU 
Great  AigniUon 

Cassel 

Coque  L!hoa  - 

Nannel 

Noire  pate 

fort  Philippe  - 

-         Rngwl  chaonel 

-'  ■,  directioi 

-SeA   - 

Green  rock  ... 
Greniqiiet  rock 
GreM  rock  -  -  . 

Grfre  an  Lancon  baj 
■    —  Blanche 

dfl  Alette 

de  Gonlvea    - 

— ^-  de  Lecq  baj 

,  La  Giande     • 

delaViUe      - 

■ — ,  anchoTage 

,  directiona 


GrimoaTilIe  church  - 
Orinval  vaUey 


Gripe  rock    - 

Gripet  ledges 

Gris-Nez,  cape  and  light 
Grois  ledge  - 

Groa  de  Cbtteau  rocks 

Etac  rock 


point 

S3S,  380 

Oroste 

-     241 

Ferrifire  rock 

-     SIS 

Moie  tock     - 

-    301 

rock 

204,  841,  269 

Tfite 

86S,  307 

Grouin  point 

-     375 

shore 

-       50 

Grouville  bay 

-     291 

,  directiona 

.     295 

io  St.  Catherine  ba;  -    aoi 

ohutch      - 

-     293 

hill 

-     293 

Grune  de  Becquet    - 

-     306 

de  Dooet       - 

.     806 

~ —  la  FoBse  rock  - 

-    S12 

Gau»in  rock  - 

-    389 

le  Fenvra 

-    98« 

de  Gonllot      - 

-    319 

de  Lecq  rock  - 

-     960 

Monlet 

-  ars 

da  Nord  rocks 

216,  300 

de  Nord.Onest  rocka 

-     SIB 

dn  N.W.  rock 

-     812 

dttS.W.roek. 

.   -     812 

—  dn  Port  rock  - 

874,  993 

an  Ronge  rock 

-    911 

rock  - 

218,  876 

duVieardwck 

-    304 

de  Vleq 

-    806 

am  Dards  rocks 

-    972 

de  Norman  reef 

-  as? 

. Pierre  rock    - 

-    913 

de  Tnrbota  rocks 

-    819 

Gnines 

S,  311 

aoxDaida    - 

-    873 

de  Jerbonrg  - 

•     199 

472 


Qronet  St.  Miebel  - 

r-  de  I'OBCHt     - 

— — -  da  Port 

Gronelte  rock 
Guen-Bras  rock 
Gnera  ledge 
Goemsey  isleuid 

ancboragM 
• eaUion 

,  daugera  off  the  coaat 

,  supplies    ' 

Gnet  da  Calel 

■ do  Tielle 

GaetiM  point 
Gueal«  rock 
Gnilben  pirint 
Guillaumc  lock 
Guillaumeziock       . 
(lui  lie  mot  rock 
Guillemots  roclis 
GuoliOt  pau 
GnyoinM  ledge 
Gajonl  met 


Hable  d'Aub 
Baches  rocks 
Hague,  eiipe  de  la 


-    874 

.    S71 

800,  SOS 


Hagael  bank 

Hai«ee  rocks,  Giaiide 

Haies  ie  la  Conch£e  rooks  - 

Hutanville  hills 

Hamon  rock 

Hanois  bank 

_ light 

Hnppt'tout  Tock 
Harbour  isle,  light 
Hardiers  eddy 
Harieur  harbour 
BataiavillesaDd  bills 
Haa  rock 
Hanoh  rock  - 


Haole  house 
Haomesiocki 
Haamet  rock 
Hant-Bano  li^t 


-BoatnuU 

-  fond  da  Bane  de  U  Bade 

de*  Eqoeti  patch 

de  GiaTeliaes 

de  la  Ghande  Hade 


Fonrqaie 

de  U  Fethe  Bade 

Haate  Foralne  rock  - 
Gruoe  rock     - 

Ilaulon  Boufes  rocks 
Haatieux  rocks 

Haats  de  hi  Bade  baak 

Havelet 

Havre,  Le    • 

-,  directiona,  appioaehlBg   I 

-—  ,  floating  basiiM     - 

,  Giande  Bade 


— ,  lights     ' 

—.pilots 

— ,  Fetite  Bade 


-^.,  tide  and  tidal  signals 

Haje  point  - 

UajeE  <^huu□tl 

Heaumc  rocks 
Heaux  de  Br^hat  rocks 
light 

H^Ue  clmrinel 
Henaeville  thurch    • 
Htoaecjueville 
Hecryfort    - 
Herhaut  rock 
Herbeosea  rocks 
Hergue  rock 
Herm  island 
Heniietierrock 
Hermitage  reef 


false  rock  - 


Herpin  mck 

Heu  point  - 
Heugoenar  toi 
Heure  bay   - 


473 


HeiiMfoit  ■ 
Henrt  fort  - 
Hive  de  U  c^e 


Hinder  banki,  light-TCMcls  - 
Hinguette  Te«f 

pusBge 

Hiatiu  roch  - 

Hir  rock      -  .  , 

Hoc  p<nnt,  light 

Hocqnet       .  -  . 

Hofiet*  rock 

Holland  quaj 

Homard  port 

Hoiueaox  Florams  Teef 

Hornet  fbrt  - 

■■  ■  ■    degPiM 

Hoofleur  harbour 

,  directions  - 


-,%htB 


B»gea  tc 


Honors  rock 

Uopitauid'KrquiviHage      - 

Horaine  ledge 

rock 

Horn  rock    • 

Honledge  • 

HonSet  rocks 

Hounue,  Port  dels 

'/T            IT 

des  Quirt 

en. 

rtdedeU 

Houlette  mill 

Houmet  de  CAlel 

^fort. 

. 

■■-  de  Loiig7 

HeAe 

Hoiudel  hulwur,  lights,  tides 

point 

Hobant  rock 

Hubert  rock 

HnehoDtDonnt 

Hngoenen*  iilea 

Huitribre  rook  - 

HnU 

Hap^  rock  - 

Hupiona  rock*  ' 

Happian  wood 

Hoqueta  de  Jobonrg  rocks   - 

Vanrille 

Hnrd  deep    -  .  . 

Horee  de  Ja  Ooqne  ]«dga     - 
Hattes  d'Oye 


JaDTtin  tower  *■ 

Jnrd  eheu  point 
Jars  rock  - 

Jaitnes  ledge 
Jeon-le-Blanobe  plMenn 
Jcine  de  la  Dune  rooki 
Jenonet  mill 
Jerbonrg  point 
Jerse; 

-  ■    -  ,  refraction    • 

-  ,  tidea-aronnd- 
Jet  d' AmoDt  rock    - 

Jethtra  island  <■ 

Jen  point     ' 
Jinqnct  rock  ' 


471 


Jii^jorg  cbordi       - 

»\'j 

LMKfwt     - 

y***     - 

s.ais 

t<iat  • 

JoUmck      - 

310 

roek    - 

92 

lAtiBdiiref  rocks    - 

Jolkotiock- 

318 

l»mc  rock  - 

JoIyr«k     - 

43 

LM«.pon    - 

Joanlui  R^ 

U3 

L<dgc 

Jojcms  mcks 

S4S 

LcfiiDckonckc  chareb 

J.m».tkd«e 

441 

L^.  port,  light      - 

I««V«      - 

49S 

I^oa  ncki  - 

reek            -      a«S,3I0,4S 

«,4M 

Ldlo-Bml^dge       . 

JumdlM  rodu 

S43 

LoBcneiuk 

Jnnee  rotks  ... 

ST4 

LoDotwindmill 

jMlit^res  lolge 

413 

I^tnin  d'Anl  rock  - 
ItBgueoMtiA  tower  - 

KftitlMTDClU                 .                -            1 

9,  «63 

Lcreretlei  iile 

d'Anont      - 

198 

KMnui  rock 
Keller  ilk    . 

»91 
456 

Leri.  b«T,  cape 

ledge,  light,  race 

451 
443 
433 

Keqean        - 

LeiarnneDx  bridge  •             - 

Kcrpoiit  cb>DDel      ■ 

IJBDe  rirer  .            -            . 

448 
487 

Xibenter  ]edge 

Jieitie*  rocks 

Kervaree  rock 

430 

King!  t)«leTy 
Klebi-t  Tocki 

247 
8S4 

Ligne  bank  . 
Ugonnde  bank 

Ijhou  ialnad                •             ■ 
I-iileSt.CaslliJhige 

KoBcin  rock 

311 

Lineur  rocks 

Lipendi  point 

iBberildut    - 

454 

LitUeBurhoa 

tide* 

4SS 

Caanl 

411 

fort  Phillip*    - 

r^nbert  moot 

185 

Nannel 

r^mpaol  bay 

456 

Buwel  chanoel 

ulmrcli 

453 

.ffiwotiom 

Lnnclcui  peninsiiU  - 

401 

Scrk  ialand      - 

Ltnda*  cbwmel         ■ 

416 

■          Si'ymour  lock 

rock. 

4ia 

J.ivcrvllle  church      . 

Lsnde  toircr 

44S 

IJvigTe  patchei 

LdO'lci  iBUnd 

871 

Liiatd 

LaDgruiie  chDrch      • 

S3 

IJMrdo  riner 

Lanildut  church      .- 

454 

Lizen  Ten  ledge 

J-Bunwrraill 

431 

loaeoisle   - 

T^nnion  ri<rer,  anchoregs     - 

444 

Lofwlec  isle 

458 

-     ..   ■    rock 

401 

LogucTi  miU 

LMfi  cULtenu 

71 

Lnilcl  pUHgfl 

4ar 

Longrook   . 

475 


Longue  Met 

-    MS 

Hare  de  TonriaviUe 

-  S45 

-  921 

Mar&.qn«y- 

Marguerile  ring        -            ,            . 

point 

roek 

-    410 

Marie  ledge  - 

LoDgybay  - 

■    3M 

Port,  road,  directiona  - 

road  - 

-     844 

'Marmotier  ialu         ... 

244,  S45 

Lornel  point 

-     127 

Mnrrc-aui-RetH  point 

Lonetide     - 

-     445 

Martiui.roorock       - 

rock  - 

407,443 

Martin  rook 

Lonprock     - 

361,  448 

Masse  point  ■ 

ridge  - 

-    848 

MasBoe  rock 

Lower  Bbno  Fignom  hoiue 

-    286 

Maupertuis  church 

Heads  ro.*a .- 

-     191 

iMaurice  patch 

Lae  church  - 

-      6S 

Muiivaiit-Pasbftiik 

Lyon  rocke  - 

53 

Mau^aiseroeks 
Manre  rock  • 
Mean  Buz    • 
Yan  rock 

204 

Mabire  mill  - 

.    827 

Meinga  point 

Mado  moot  oriU       - 

-    805 

llelgomij  point 

-       49 

Moloinc  ledge 

Mai£  river    - 

•     IIS 

Mans  rock  - 

Main  rock    . 

.     201 

'  Men  Allan  rock 

Mu«oi»  rocks 

-    336 

ar-Vran 

M»Byoh.irch 
prant  - 

-  47 

-  49 

du-Castrec  channel      . 

Hattielale  - 

-  mi 

ledge 

anchorage 

-    308 

Cora  rock         . 

M«ltre»c  iale 

-    336 

-^  Gam  rock        .           .           . 

Malicome  rock 

■    415 

Garorock       -           .        431 

■    452 

. Maro'h  ledge  - 

ledge         - 

-    453 

Noblanee 

-    870 

Tenselrock     . 

-    276 

ar-Vranrock    - 

Mannetto  bight        - 

-      46 

MSnar.  point 

Mannei        - 

-     287 

Mener-Bel-Air  mills 

Manor  tower 

-    230 

Bra  hills       .           .           . 

Manon  rock 

-    445 

MdnUclifi  -           .           .           . 

Manqoet  rock 

-      48 

M«noa  islet  - 

HanTieQi,opB        • 

•      52 

Merport      - 

-    233 

—  dn-Ca»treo 

Uaralnereef 

-    889 

ML'rcautile  harbour  - 

Mareadit     - 

-    112 

MerclSre  ridge 

Uarehant  fert 

•     301 

rock          . 

Marc,  St.,  bank 

-    484 

Mardiok  church        - 

-     156 

deep  ■         - 

-    187 

Mudyck  tight  veaiel 

-     158 

Mer«  cliff     -           -           -           . 

-    888 

Merville  point 

- 

.476 


Mnoa  TBilej 

•   no 

Mouillage  de  Dinard 

8M 

-    MS 

Mouillirock            ,            -         8 

7,405 

net,  de  Godo  islet 

■     4S6 

MouilH^re  rock         -            -         208,887 

Meule  islet 

-    US 

808 

MenleiteB  lock     .   , 

•    808 

Moalard  point,  rock 

40 

MivaiBnes  church    - 

-      95 

Mouliire  roek 

306 

Middle  bulk. 

-    994 

MoiiWret  d  Agon  mfila 

355 

djck. 

-     155 

Moulioport 

SIS 

head 

-       81 

Moulioet  Tock           •            '          IS 

8,218 

puwge 

-    S79 

Moulretta  rack 

802 

mk 

•    2S4 

Moyepdnt               .            •         19 

9,8fii 

Milieu  tboal 

-    873 

Motet  point.           -           -       - 

409 

MUitwe  fort 

-       18 

Mariersrock            -            -         87 

9,884 

Millbrook    , 

-    273 

UuroQ  rocks 

110 

Ui-Maree  rock 

-    9B7 

MoMirEwfcrt       - 

23 

HtBU  pobt 

•    438 

MinquierB  ledge       - 

-    885 

-    840 

ligbt-Tenel 

.    33S 

19 

^ tide* 

•    842 

18 

Minge 

3 

Nannela  tett 

388 

MogoPdhier-TOck     . 

-     43S 

448 

MoiedeBaiwdw    - 

-     816 

Napoleon  guud-hoiue 

119 

delaBreWgne 

-    316 

Kational  fbrt 

■  392 

de  1>  Fantaitie  . 

-    31S 

Nattea  rocks 

355 

,dn  Port  Gouiy 

•     316 

Kaoabaok  .           . 

58 

MoiMB  isle  , 

-    489 

N.E.  do  Pot-de-Fer  patch    ■ 

44G 

MotBle  obannel,  directioiis   - 

■     48S 

NeigM  point 

79 

rock- 

-     482 

Neipat  rock  ■ 

887 

M61e  di'B  Noirea       , 

-    881 

Nests  rock  -           -           -         , 

313 

^- light 

-    883 

NeaviUette,  Ridens  de 

Ul 

Mondr&l)ay 

■      SO 

valley. 

110 

-      84 

NeviUe  point 

31 

Houkiiile  - 

-    489 

NeTSzport  • 

449 

Mont  Ctevel  breakwater      - 

-    201 

NeTbavea    - 

106 

^DoTiUe 

-    S28 

Nez  da  Qoet 

302 

Gardon 

-    838 

de  Jobonrg       - 

5,319 

Hnchon 

-    3S8 

Nianaiae       - 

234 

Lambert 

■     185 

Nicolle  towei 

266 

St.  Frieui       - 

-    181 

Xid  pitch  nnd  point 

377 

Micliel      . 

-    369 

Ni(.l,l(lg-VPiDdD.ill        - 

.145 

Morlaix  bay. 

-     444 

NIeoport,  banka,  rotd 

158 

lights 

-     44S 

Bine  feet  ro<Jt 

378 

. : — riTBl 

-     444 

Nipple  rock               .            -         30 

B,309 

.toertions     - 

-     449 

Koguejou-bioo  rock  • 

43S 

. ^-road 

-    444 

Uoire  lelpt 

445 

^  tide. 

-    447 

Houinot 

835 

■       43 

Pnte  reck       - 

212 

MorvjUe  rock 

-    449 

Pierre. 

215 

Hotte  rock  - 

-    S8S 

rock   - 

287 

Monette  roek 

-    308 

Roqne.           -            -         23 

9,811 

477 


Boire  £oque  ledge 

239 

Orgueil  moant 

8B5 

NoiTM  ledge 

433 

Oriental  channel 

491 

Putesfcokfl  .  - 

846 

Orientale  du  Uonlard  patch 

89 

. — ■ — ^rociB- 

6,  SO 

3,881 

porta 

97 

Koirroont  tower 

asG 

Oi-ne  river    -            -  "         . 

a» 

S64 

.lights,  pilots        - 

59 

Nord-Eet  Sea  Fortes  ahoal 

303 

60 

OuBi     - 

I9H 

Orlac  channel 

226 

Oue»t  patch    - 

81 

287 

Nord  pat«be» 

40B 

— -ledge 

226 

Komunds  rocks 

893 

rock 

229 

Normanc  signal  post 

840 

Orteil  bank 

19S 

Norocher  rocks 

866 

Ost-Picrock 

426 

North  Falls  Head     -  - 

175 

Oetendc  light 

157 

Taa     - 

175 

Owssant,  lie  d' 

455 

Fowland       - 

ITS 

Ouest-Drii  flats 

42 

rock.  Swingle  ctt&nnel 

235 

Oors-Seol  rock 

420 

se«    -           ... 

141 

OnMing  bank 

152 

Hinder  lank 

160 

Outer  rock   - 

2T4 

Oaai  rock      - 

192 

—  Bu}tingai  bank 

153 

rock  . 

285 

^ light-yessd  . 

158 

. Sand  ridge     - 

894 

Ouvras  ridge 

891 

North- west  pansagc  - 

376 

Oje  windmill 

163 

UfltreDame-de-Bon  Secoars  ohnrcl 
Clarti 
Grtce 

447 
413 
69 
20 

church.  Tillage 

163 

tio 

61 

N-WpointoftheFlat 

OS    61 

Hoyea  ledge            -           -                «0 

_^— ^— .lights 

61 

6! 
256 

OcteviUe  chare])      ■           -            -      33 

Oyster  ground          -   ' 

17 

rocks             -  '           19B,  2 

4,304 

Occidental  channel 

451 

Oiardrock  -            -  "         ■ 

241 

(Won  river    -  , 

S9 

Oieg  point    - 

187 

Paoquet  rock 

293 

O^on  rock 

448 

Palmpolbay    _ 

435 

Oiaeanz  banks 

59 

barbonr 

426 

patch. 

Old  bank      - 

woman  rock 

OmoDviUe  church 

424 

330 

Pain-de-Bray  rock 

408 

harbour. 

[.rection 

8,t«les 

11 
IS 

246 

PfJaiarock  - 
Pallud  TftUey 

884 

Orbon&bank 

*95 

rock  . 

346 

Paloe  beach 

452 

OrcherhiU   - 

76 

Paou  point   - 

438 

OrfoTdness    -  , 

179 

Parami  church 

878 

Orgneil  castle  . 

591 

Parfond  deep 

67 

.head   . 

S91 

ParfoDdingue 

130 

478 


Pari- 

-     u 

Petit  Havre- 

-   >eo 

I^onrock       - 

PumeDtiiri!  rock     - 

9 

Minon  point    - 

Pas  do,  point 

~    383 

Palaiiwck      - 

tower 

-    SBS 

PtnAien 

PUK  du  II.B. 

-    440 

Portbanck      - 

P«t«-No.ter8  rocka 

-    859 

bay 

Ptare  pwnt 

-    410 

Pot-de-Beurra  rock      - 

PATlaiton  Mck 

-    318 

BimainiBlet     - 

-    318 

Hoch  Hir        - 

Pel.^  Ubnd 

-       19 

Petite  Amfroqne 

Anqnette 

'    Ancre  islet     - 

flat       - 

'       ffl 

rock     - 

-     S8S 

PcD-ar-Gueiec 

-     441 

Eigne  rock     . 

—  -Azcn  rocks 

-     408 

Brayerock     - 

Peodante  ledge 

-     441 

Canne 

rock 

-     804 

Conch^  channel       - 

PencD^B  isle 

-     4S1 

rock 

Penly  Talley- 

■      110 

Enaeigne 

Yillime 

-     109 

Fara  rock       .            -            . 

Peniie  Oe  Yie 

-      74 

Penpoull  port 

-    444 

Foorche  rock 

Pentbi^Tre  canal 

-   lis 

—-  Gruae  reef    -             -             6 

Penveib  ledge 

-     4S1 

Ltyitie  patdi 

Perceelle    - 

-     373 

Mole  -           -           -           . 

lock 

304,309 

Noire  rock      - 

point 

-     sa 

MaDvaise  rocks 

piuw 

.     307 

Paran.6 

.     208 

Porte  channel 

-     308 

ItODBserock   - 

Pwllebay  - 

-     308 

Synlhe 

PeraeUe  chareh 

-       47 

Petite  T6te  rock       - 

_ hni 

-      30 

Vascelin 

patch         - 

-      41 

Petite  Bancs 

Perron  iBle  - 

-    401 

Ecamiaa 

Perrosbay   .            .            . 

-    442 

Pointna  channel 

-    443 

Peierie  point            ... 

,  light-      - 

-    443 

Phillippefert 

Petit  Aremen  rock   - 

■     445 

"Picnic  hotel - 

. Aubert  rock     - 

-     410 

Pie  bank      - 

Aien  rock        - 

-     40S 

Pierre  i  I'AngWs    • 

Bey  islet 

•     383 

deBW 

Bniard 

-     387 

Carrte 

CheTTcna 

-     376 

de  las  Moue  rock      . 

Ecamiaa  bank - 

-     105 

■^—  Btat  rock 

303,  353 

daCbenal    • 

——~  Four  rock 

278,  888 

du  Cours      - 

Genillet  ruck   - 

-    387 

. desEnflins   . 

Gripetledgs     - 

-    420 

deHerpen    - 

Hanoi! 

-    304 

Jean  Komic 

INDBX. 

Pag* 

HeiwMoalKebank 

-    999 

Plemont  point 

Noire  rock    - 

au  Norman  - 

aox  Ka«      - 

de  U  RiTiftre 

80,  4« 
■     SSI 

Plunmont  guet 

-    82S 

■  Pltiieuf  point  ■ 

SalSeflats     - 

-    891 

PWenon  mill 

MaTaohe   - 

-     391 

Ploudnlmezeau  charch 

— auVnuo 

-     335 

Kama  d' Amourette 

'     S88 

Plougrescan 

du  Banc  patchcB       - 

-   4ia 

Gander 

-     891 

Plouha  point 

del«cq        - 

.    360 

Plonmanach  light  .  - 

Noires 

-     4SB 

PloonSour  chursh    - 

auxNonnanas 

-    398 

Flourbam  charch 

-    389 

Plouzec  village 

de  ta  Savatte 

-     389 

PluritQ  churtli 

—  Vertes 

-     458 

Pochc8-&-suie 

Kenx  church 

-     3SS 

Pointue  rock 

Pigeon  honse 

-    448 

Pointiu  cock 

Kghetiale   -           •           - 

-    44B 

Pollet  town  - 

PigDOD  rock 

317,846 

Pomehn  bay 

Pignonet  rock 

374,872 

Pomelian  road 

FlUieisrock' 

851,437 

Ponunier  banks 

Pillon  rock  -            -            . 

-    800 

rock 

Klotage,  Querawy  and  Jersey 

192, aar 

Pomoriou  shoal 

PUol's  mast . 

-     158 

Poi,tc  th  h^  OaSiie     - 

Finaacle  tock 

-     261 

Pontonoii  town 

Fipette  rocks 

-     8S7 

Pontrieni  river 

Kron 

.     808 

"    directions     - 

Bron  lover  - 

Place  de  Grive  patch 
Plaine  point 

■A 

-     806 

Fontusval  harbour    - 

Plaisir  Moot  honse  - 

" 

Plancoet       .            .            - 

'  J  - 

Plat  Saline  - 

-     303 

,  tides 

-     397 

Porceans  rocks        - 

Bone    ■ 

-    341 

Porchet  rock 

Plate  dn  Hibou  rocks 

-    858 

Fordie  point  - 

St.  Michel  rock 

-    414 

Porpoise  rock 

rock    - 

-    898 

Porsal  rocks 

PUtier  des  iMdiJres  rock 

-    987 

Fort-il-la-DDC 

ledge 

-    878 

de  la  Chaioe  null 

Platr^ees  ledge 

-    487 

Fortel  Tillage  and  windnuU  - 

Platte  Boui  rock     - 

-    307 

Portelet  bay,  ledge   - 

Fougjre  rocks 

-    309 

Fortes  d'Ecqui  ledge 

Houmet 

-  a«6 

Portland  bUl 

rock  -           -       69, 24! 

369,  811 

Portmienz    -            -            • 

Boque 

-  310 

-  386 

-  418 

Portrieoi  harbour,  light       - 
road 

PldMaelviltom       . 

479 


PorUpauI 
Portx-doQ  anchorage 

p<Hnt,  light 

Foiti  Picun  bMch 
Forliio  point 
Ten  Kenoch 
Pot  de  Beorre  rockt 

de-Ferntck 

PonrcmDx  bank 

f  ODTTllle  niUsj 
Frimel  point 
Prinoia  lower 
fuceau  rock 
PniW  vallej-  . 


Qnai-an-Coq 
QuaiNenf  - 
Qalmer  bank 
Qnenannilc  net 

Quenuci  flat 
Qucrelpiran  rock 
QneroaclleB  reefs 
-Querqaeville  point 
QoeiUngiie  rock 
Quetehou  church 
Queue  des  Bata  rocks 
Quinevitle  church 
Qulbejrille  valley 
QuillcbiEiif 
Quistillic  rock 


Itace  rock    - 
Hade  baak 

,  La,  beacon 

de  ^olidor 

llttimojiUe  reck 
Ranco  leilge 

river,  channels  leading  tc 

Bat  des  CoortJB 

—  de  la  Mercicre  rock 

du  Nord-Eat  patch 

dn  Rocher  -  - 

-  —  dcSt.  SemiD  rock 
Batcl  lunks 


RatcleU  bank 

Kalirr  bank 

Ilati  dea  Courtia  rock 

Rats  rock 

Raull  rock     • 

Bnvinc  Bank 

Rai  de  BHnQca 

Barflcnr 

du  Cap  Levi 

—  de  SI.  Michel 

fort 

Rciil  Dj-ck  - 
Red  Krouquie 
Regent  Son  - 
Rjgncville  harboar 


Kenunb  psichei 
Renauds  rockft 
Renier  rock 

Renonquet  reef 
Retoville  redoubt 
lU'iillo  church 
■  battery  light 

Ricard  ialc  ■ 
Richards  lock 
Richmiint  fort 
Ridea  ile  Calais 

dea  Dents 

de  Dieppe 

de  Qucnanville 

Ridena  bank 

deBclleville- 

Dieppe 

•  Neuvilletlc 

la  Rade 

Ridge  sboal  ■ 
Uigdon  bank 
Rimains  ikland 
RitnpoDi^re  rock 
Ringue-bras  ledge 
Risbon  fort  - 


Kit  TOckij  - 
Road  rock  - 
Robert  poiot 
Roo'h-ar-Bel 

Couljan 

Hir  pBtolii's 

ar-On  - 

Hoc  de  Gru.DvilJu 

—  Le  peninsula 
Rocco  fort  towur 
ftoclicforl  rcick 
JlociicrdiieSud 
Roche  Bonne  light   - 

Pel^e 

Roches  aux  Anglais 
Douvrea  ledge  and 

de  rOueet     - 

da  Kit 

Rocqnaine  bay 


directions 


BodeUorock 

BohaD-Mer  ledge 
Hohemledt'e 

Rohinet  ledge 
Roho  ledge  - 
Ronde  rock  - 

SelliJre  rock  - 

de  I'Ouesl  rock 

Rondeh^e  bank 

Rondes  de  la  Docfair^e  rocks 

Rondee  de  I'  Quest  anchoragi? 

—  ridg. 

EoneK  point 
Eon  Here  aae  rock 
Roniiiict  re^'f.Tock 
Roque,  La,  pendanti 

an  Nord 

Rognes  de  Braye 
Roquet  reef 
Roquctte  patch 
Rosaires  point 
RoBcoff  harbour,  direutio 
light 

Q  7049. 


Roscdo  hill  - 
Rosel  pobt  - 

Roselier  point 
RoBcli^re  rock 
Boselle  point 
Rosiere  anchorage 
Roleneufharboiiu 
Itonaiiditrc  rock 
Bouboril  baj 

Roage  Riden 
Honget  rock  ■ 
Hougio  isle 
Ronle  fort 

yalley- 

Roond  rock  Burhou 

Rouqnet  reef 

Ronrayrock- 

Bonsse  de  Mer  rock 

Frouquie 

Platte  rock 


BoDSBet  rock] 
RoDStelrock 
Route  en  Ville  rook 
RoathiauTille  point 
Royal  fort    . 
Royong  windmill 
Bozet  bay,  harbour 

,  directions 

mill- 

Ruan,  Le,  channel 
Hue  pond 

Rnet,  Grand,  passage 
RuSMi,  Grt■Jlt,^Jil!l^lllt 


-,  Litlle,  clianuel 


Sable  banks  - 
Sables  tower 
SaWooiere    - 
Sabloua  bay,  light    • 
Sabot-da-Sud  rock   ■ 


Sac-ib-l'in>ii  rockii  - 
boint  Andn-nvt^ 
clmrvh  ■ 

Antvlne  bsv,  cri 
Aubio-d'Arqiienaj  vi 


taj- 
,  dire<;ti< 

ligbt 

-  Clements  bay - 
~  Cfline-de-Freinechaiiel 

-  Euogat  chuTcb,iuill 

-  EtieDDe-Bu-mout 

-  Firmin  ■cliu.rob 
■-  Ploxel  shoal*  - 

-  Gcoi^  tower  - 

-  Gsrmtun  bny  - 

_ lie  VuHX 

anr-Ay  harbour 

-  GUdas  isle      - 

-  GUlcB  rocks    - 

-  Guildo  mill    • 

-  llelier  harbour 

,  diicutiona 


It  JU'liiT  harbuur,  lighi.f 

—  hiitli;  mail 

—  Ilouoiirie 

—  llydeiic  church 

—  .Tiicqacs  churcli 

—  Jntut  mill 
"  Jobn'ii  bay 
~  Joeacu  windmill 
~  Juliau's  bri-ukn'iiti 

—  lA'gi'r  church  ■ 
cliff      - 

—  Leonard  church 

—  Louis  basliiiD  - 


—  Lui 


-cmill    • 


-  Malo  barlHinr  - 


,  dirwtioiis 

—Marc  bank 

—  Marcouf  baiJc 

islts,  light 

—  Mark  church  - 

—  Martin  bay 

anx-Bunuux  cliuit:!!    ' 

—  Uichel  bay     - 
mount 

light 

—  Mode  iilo 

—  Nicholsa  churob 

■  chapel 

Ouon  buy 

,  anchorage  - 


raill    ■ 
"  P&rc  port 
"  Peter  port,  horbours   - 
itidesuudtidaist 

.lights 

—  Peter's  churcb 
--PhlLlipe  bastion 
-Pierre  bank 

—  du  UniB  church 

—  IcB  CftlMS 


Saint  del  Marina      - 
du  HonI 

Eglise  tower   - 


-  lei-Montien  ohurch 


"  Pol  de  Leon  river 
-  Quftjr  point     • 

,  light        - 

Quentin  point 
Hiom  isle,  paasage 
SaJnpson  harbour,  directions 
Saviour  church 

Servau  chtuch 


-  Vaasi 


~,  dircclioui 
— ,  lights  - 


"Vulerj-en-Cnui  Imrbour 


Valery-Bur-Somme 


Vincent  channel 
Saire  bridge - 

SaUe  fiatB    - 
Salerie  point 

Sauhaei  Toaka 
Sambute  rocks 
Sampson  hieak  water 
Saudetti^  book 

Sangatte  village 
Bardbiaa  rock 
Sardrette  rook 
Sardri6re  rock 
Sark  rock  - 
Saesctot  church 
Sttudray  point 
Saumarei  hoiiM 


Saunibre  iaiet 
Saaquet  rock 
Saut  Koquiers 
SautB  aux  Chl«nt  patch 
Sauvogei rocks 
Savattc  beacon 
Schole  bank  - 
Sciotot  buy  - 
Scotlanil 
Seals  rock    - 

S.E.  rock  - 
S.W.  rock    - 

Seint-  bank   - 

,  tidal  all 

Selack  river  - 
Selle  lioque  - 

d'Amfroqnu 

Sclliire  rock 

Sen  rock 

—  shoals     - 

beneqnec  rock,  light  - 

Scnncville  church 

Scicut 

S«p(  Bouee 

isles  and  light  - 

Serk  island  - 
,  anchorage 

Servi^t  point  - 
Senile  river  - 
Seven  Grunca 
Scvign^s  bay 
Scbelde  river 
Schevr6  bunk 
Schole  bank  • 
Sciotot  buy  - 
Sept  Douet  rock 

light 

Servet  point  - 
Seven  Grunes 


Sorel  point  - 
SnttevUle  clifF 

Souar'le  Tucka 

SonSeurcDte  lock 

Soullci  liFer 

Souudiut'B  <ChaiiDc1  Idaodj) 

Sous  la  Tour  village 

Southampton 

South  Foielaod 

pusage 

rock.  Swinge  cluuuiel 

BUid  ridge 

west  passage  - 

Speedy  rock 
Start  point   - 
Stiff  bay 
Stolveien  rock 
Sod  rock 
Snd-E St  patches 
SuBuueiDck 
Snuelte  valley 

SuTtainTille  banks  - 
Sarreat  mont  chureb 
Surrille  barboiir 


Tabor  ohapel 

Taitlepied  thoal 

TwUeville     - 

Tangui  rock 

Tnret 

Toi  de  Pois  - 

d'AvBl  - 


163,3 


Tatihou  ialaDd 
Taurcau  bank 

Taate  river  - 
Tautenay  anchorage 
I  beacon 

ledge 

Taxdrock    - 
Tchue  bay   - 
Tngnonsc  point 
Telegraph  cable 
Tenarde  shoal 
Terrible  bay- 

Tertie  Morgan  mill  - 

T&tordsrock 

TCie  da  Miliea  rock  - 

Nord-Onest  rock 

Petite 

Sriiteutrionale  rock 
Tfitea 

d'Aval  rocks  - 

CbatDpigDons  rocks 

de  la.  Cuncbde  rocke 

T£to  rock     - 

Thames  riTcr 

Thar  point   - 

Thornton  ridge 

l^dal  ranges  on  north  coast  of  France 

• streams  off  cape  de  la  Hagut 

,  Cbannel  islands         186- 

between   the  Casquets 

cod  cape  Barfluer 
I  between  <ap6  Barflenr 

and  Antifer 
-— -~^—  between   cape  Antifer 

and  cape  Grii-Nei  - 


486 


Hdal  stteanu  in  North  S«a  - 
I%le  table  for  Coaat  of  rranoe 
linker  rock  -  .  - 

Tiatiaux  yaoftgo      - 

TisaoaoQ  isle 
Tombelune  bank 

Met 

Toin£  isle     .  -  • 

Tomin  rock  ~  .  - 

Tongue  bmiks 

Touueau  rock 

Torque  til  rock 

Torteral  church 

Toulon 

Tooques  river 

directioils 

■ ■ lights  - 

Touquct  poiQt  lights 
Tour,  La,  point 
Tour  islet  . 
— —  patches 
-—  de  Boiel 
Tourctio  rook 
Tonrgia  beacon 

fort 

Toiirlavillu  -valley     - 
Tourmout  land 
Toiiriiomiue  mill 
Tounuonre  rock 
Tnwpegoer  bank 
TrahillioDi  locks 
Traiffc  I'ocks 
Tcanqaet  rock 
Traverae  bank 


TraTersaine  bank 

Triguier  rivor 

,  anchorages  - 
^  j^hMiTipln  Into 
directions 

^"- ,  lights 

,  tidei  - 


channel 
TriMneneac'b  chorch- 
Tremjos  rocks 
Trfpieds  ledgs 
Trfiport 
— — ,  direction),  lighU 


Trea  Glmnet 
Trercneua  chuioh 
nisgoiledg« 


->  light 


Trieux  channel 
IV1nit£  passage 

Trois-Orones  looki 

ledge 

Ffrtsbauk 

TAtes  rooki 

Tion-blauo  chumel 

Trouie 

Troupcurs  rocks 
TrooT^e  rook 
Trouvitle 

bank 

Tnuerock   - 
Truiturock  - 
Turnabout  rook 
Turquet  mill 


Urrille  chnreh 
Ushant  channel 
Ushant  isle  lights 
-II.   .  ■  -,  tidei 


mill      - 

Vulettc  rock 

Vttlmont  river 

Vnlvc  rock  ... 

Varde  point  -  •  - 

Varue  bank  -  .  . 

Vascehn  rocks 

Vasoui  ... 

VnudicD  rock 

Vandin  bank 

VauTille  bajr,  anehonge,  dliMtioiM 

Vay,  Grand  - 

Vaion  baf   .  -  • 

Ver  ohutch  .  .  - 


Tn  rock*    • 

—  point  ligbt 
Verclnt  point 
Verdelet  Ukt 
Vcrdelt  Kwk 
Verdiire*  reef 
Vcrgo  jer  bank 
VerhaaJe  stieam 
Vcnuerctte  rock 
Vertc  isle     - 

Tete  reef 

VerloD  mill 
VkzouI  islcl  - 
Vicomtc  point 
Victoria  college 

haiboui 

Vidi*  rock    - 
Videcoq  rock 
Vitille  dc  Lognivi  rock 
■■  KiviJte  channel 

I  de  St.  Mode  rack 

Viclle  rock  - 
Tiergc  isle,  ligbl 
Vieux  bank 

Moinrs  TOcka  - 

, Monlin 

y if- Argent  Toek 
ViUu,  L*      - 
Tillers  plain 

VilieJiaouttower     - 

Villerville  point  and  Tillage 

Vimercai  port 
Vinberge  rock 
Viugt  Cloa  tank,  rock 

Violet  Iwuk  - 

I  channel 

—■-I       '    ■',  direcEioDs 

Vire  riTer    - 


Vi>l«  mill*  . 
ViTJan  hcBcou 
Vi*wT  harbour 
Voleur  rock  - 
Vraa'h  islf,  lijcht 
VmchKn:  liank 

Vmic  ruck   - 

Vnin  rock     - 


Wnlde  light 

mills 

Wciilhcr  signuU 
West  bay      • 

Djok  - 

Iliuder  bank  • 

— —  light  vessel 

Kapelle  light  - 

mole  head  ligbt 

\Vvit«m  psBsnge 

White  rock  - 

Wielinggut- 

William  foil 

Wimille  river 

Winds,  English  channel 

■■■  ^     betn'cen  cape   do 

aod  Ault    - 
Wissant  village 


Zand-deti^  bank 
Zujdcoole  pass 


LONDON; 

Printed  by  George  E.  Eykb  and  William  Spotthwoods, 

Fiinters  to  the  Qneen's  most  Excellent  UajeEty. 

For  Her  Majesty's  Slstionery  Office. 

[6258,-1500. — i/sa.]